Rodeo (2003) PDF

HOME
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL INFORMATION General Information Maintenance and Lubrication HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING HVAC System STEERING Power-Assisted System SUSPENSION Front Suspension Rear Suspension Wheel and Tire System Intelligent Suspension Control DRIVELINE/AXLE Differential (Front) Differential (Rear) Driveline Control System Drive Shaft System Transfer Case BRAKE Brake Control System Anti-Lock Brake System Power-Assisted Brake System Parking Brake System (44 model) Parking Brake System (42 model) 6VD1 ENGINE 6A Engine Mechanical 6B Engine Cooling 6C Engine Fuel 6D1 Engine Electrical 6D2 Ignition System 6D3 Starting and Charging System 6E2 Driveability and Emissions 6F Engine Exhaust 6G Engine Lubrication 6H Engine Speed Control System 6J Induction TRANSMISSION Automatic Transmission Transmission Control System Manual Transmission Clutch BODY AND ACCESSORIES Lighting System Wiper/Washer System Entertainment Wiring System Meter and Gauge Body Structure Seats Security and Locks Sun Roof/Convertible Top Exterior/Interior Trim RESTRAINTS Seat Belt System Supplemental Restraint System (Air Bag System) Restraint Control System CONTROL SYSTEM Cruise Control System
0A 0B
WORKSHOP MANUAL RODEO (UE)
1A 2A 3C 3D 3E 3F 4A1 4A2 4B 4C 4D
FOREWORD
This manual includes special notes, important points, service data, precautions, etc. That are needed for the maintenance, adjustments, service, removal and installation of vehicle components. All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication. All rights are reserved to make changes at any time without notice. Arrangement of the material is shown in the table of contents on the right-hand side of this page. A black spot on the first page of each section can be seen on the edge of the book below each section title. These point to a more detailed table of contents preceding each section. 5A 5B 5C 5D1 5D2 HEC 6A 6B 6C 6D1 6D2 6D3 6E1 6F 6G 6H 6J 7A 7A1 7B 7C
This manual applies to 2002 models.

8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 8G 8H 8I 8J 9A 9J 9J1 10A
SECTION
GENERAL INFORMATION
RODEO
0A1
GENERAL INFORMATION
CONTENTS
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance and Lubrication. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0A 0B
General Information
CONTENTS
General Repair Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft Prevention Standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0A1 0A2 0A4 0A7 Lifting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Bolts Torque Specifications . . . Abbreviations Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Parts Identification Plate . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... 0A12 0A14 0A15 0A17
General Repair Instruction

1. If a floor jack is used, the following precautions are recommended. Park vehicle on level ground, block" front or rear wheels, set jack against the recommended lifting points (see Lifting Instructions" in this section), raise vehicle and support with chassis stands and then perform the service operations. 2. Before performing service operations, disconnect ground cable from the battery to reduce the chance of cable damage and burning due to short circuiting. 3. Use a cover on body, seats and floor to protect them against damage and contamination. 4. Brake fluid and antifreeze solution must be handled with reasonable care, as they can cause paint damage. 5. The use of proper tools and recommended essential and available tools, where specified, is important for efficient and reliable performance of service repairs. 6. Use genuine Isuzu parts. 7. Used cotter pins, plastic clips, gaskets, Orings, oil seals, lock washers and selflocking nuts should be discarded and new ones should be installed, as normal function of the parts cannot be maintained if these parts are reused. 8. To facilitate proper and smooth reassembly operation, keep disassembled parts neatly in groups. Keeping fixing bolts and nuts separate is very important, as they vary in hardness and design depending on position of installation. 9. Clean the parts before inspection or reassembly. Also clean oil ports, etc. using compressed air, and make certain they are free from restrictions. 10. Lubricate rotating and sliding faces of the parts with oil or grease before installation. 11. When necessary, use a sealer on gaskets to prevent leakage. 12. Carefully observe all specifications for bolt and nut torques. 13. When removing or replacing parts that require refrigerant to be discharged from the air conditioning system, be sure to use the Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling Equipment (VRRRE) to recover and recycle Refrigerant134a. 14. When a service operation is completed, make a final check to be sure the service has been done properly and the problem has been corrected. 15. SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM The vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Air Bags. This system is not to be serviced without consulting the appropriate service information. Consult Section 9J SRS System" if work is to be done on the front of the vehicle such as bumper, sheet metal, seats, wiring, steering wheel or column. Also review SRS system information if any arc welding is to be done on the vehicle. The SRS system equipped vehicle can be identified by: 1. AIR BAG" warning light on the instrument cluster. 2. A Code K" or M" for fifth digit of Vehicle Identification Number.
0A2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Illustration Arrows
Arrows are designed for specific purposes to aid your understanding of technical illustrations. Arrow Type Application Arrow Type Application
Front of vehicle
Sectioning (1:3)
Ambient/Clean air flow Up Side Cool air flow
Task Related
Gas other than ambient air Hot air flow
Ambient air mixed with another gas View Detail Can indicate temperature change
View Angle
Motion or direction
Dimension (1:2)
Lubrication point oil or fluid
GENERAL INFORMATION
Arrow Type Application
0A3
Lubrication point grease
Lubrication point jelly
0A4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identification of the vehicle. it is located on the left bottom of the windshield. It can be easily seen through the windshield from outside the vehicle.
710R100001
02SGM001-2
GENERAL INFORMATION Engine Serial Number

6VD1 Engine The gasoline engine serial number is stamped on the left rear lower area of the cylinder block above the starter.
0A5
Transmission Serial Number

Manual : Stamped on the left side of the transmission intermediate plate.
220RS025
F06R200001
Y22SE Engine The gasoline engine serial number is stamped on the rear end raised area of the cylinder block left side.
035RW022
0A6
GENERAL INFORMATION
Automatic : Stamped on the identification plate, located on the left side of the transmission above the mode switch.
240RY00040
GENERAL INFORMATION
0A7
Theft Prevention Standard

The 11 major components listed below will be marked with 17 digit VIN at the stage of production. In addition its service parts will be marked with manufacturer's trade mark, R" mark and DOT" mark. Reference Figure No. 0A-10 ENGINE INDICATION PRODUCTION VIN plate SERVICE PARTS
COMPONENT 1 6VD1 Y22SE 2 Manual transmission Automatic transmission 3 Engine hood 4 Front door 5 Rear door 6 Fender 7 Rear Quarter panel 8 Front bumper 9 Back door left side 10 Back door right side 11 Rear bumper
0A-11
TRANSMISSION
VIN plate
0A-11
BODY
VIN label
Anti Theft Stamping/Plate/Label

STAMPING/PLATE LABEL
PRODUCTION
SERVICE PARTS
0A8
GENERAL INFORMATION
Anti Theft Stamping/Label/Plate Location

The stamping, label and plate locations are indicated by arrows in the illustration below. NOTE: 1. VIN plate locations for production. 2. Stamping locations for service parts. Engine (6VD1)
901RW080
Engine (Y22SE)
035RW025
GENERAL INFORMATION
Manual Transmission (MUA)
0A9
901RW081
Automatic Transmission (THM)
901RW082-1
0A10
Body
GENERAL INFORMATION
604RW023
GENERAL INFORMATION Body Label Instructions

Do not peel off the masking tape until completion of paint work when replacing these parts, as the tape is affixed on the label attached to service parts for body of the antitheft component. NOTE: Be sure to pull off the masking tape after paint work has been completed. Do not attempt to remove this label for any reason.
0A11
901RW083
Precautions in pulling off the masking tape 1. Use only your finger nail or a similar blunt instrument to peel off the masking tape. Use of a sharp object will damage the underlying anti theft label. 2. Be careful not to damage the paint around the label.
901RW084
0A12
GENERAL INFORMATION
Lifting Instructions
CAUTION: If a lifting device other than the original jack is used, it is most important that the device be applied only to the correct lifting points. Raising the vehicle from any other point may result in serious damage. When jacking or lifting a vehicle at the frame side rail or other prescribed lift points, be certain that lift pads do not contact the catalytic converter, brake pipes or cables, or fuel lines. Such contact may result in damage or unsatisfactory vehicle performance.
Lifting Points and Supportable Point Locations
C00RX002
Lifting Point: Front When using a floor jack, lift on the Convex portion of the skid plate.
545RS001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Supportable Point: Front Position the chassis stands at the bottom of the frame sidemember, behind the front wheel. Supportable Point: Rear
0A13
Position the chassis stands at the bottom of the frame sidemember, just behind the trailing link bracket.
501RS003
501RW002
Lifting Point: Rear Position the floor jack at the center of the rear axle case when lifting the vehicle.
Legend (1) Trailing Link Bracket EndOFCallout Supportable Point: Rear Position the chassis stands at the bottom of the rear axle case.
420RS002
420RS001
0A14
GENERAL INFORMATION
Standard Bolts Torque Specifications

The torque values given in the following table should be applied where a particular torque is not specified. 4.8 Refined 8.8 Non-Refined 9.8
Strength Class
Bolt Identification
Bolt Diameter Pitch (mm)

M 6X1.0 M 8X1.25 M 10X1.25 * M10X1.5 M12X1.25 * M12X1.75 M14X1.5 * M14X2.0 M16X1.5 * M16X2.0 M18X1.5 M20X1.5 M22X1.5 M24X2.0 4 8 Nm (3 6 lb ft) 8 18 Nm (6 13 lb ft) 21 34 Nm (15 25 lb ft) 20 33 Nm (14 25 lb ft) 49 74 Nm (36 54 lb ft) 45 69 Nm (33 51 lb ft) 77 115 Nm (56 85 lb ft) 72 107 Nm (53 79 lb ft) 104 157 Nm (77 116 lb ft) 100 149 Nm (74 110 lb ft) 151 226 Nm (111 166 lb ft) 206 310 Nm (152 229 lb ft) 251 414 Nm (185 305 lb ft) 359 539 Nm (265 398 lb ft) 5 10 Nm (4 7 lb ft) 12 23 Nm (9 17 lb ft) 28 46 Nm (20 34 lb ft) 28 45 Nm (20 33 lb ft) 61 91 Nm (45 67 lb ft) 57 84 Nm (42 62 lb ft) 93 139 Nm (69 103 lb ft) 88 131 Nm (65 97 lb ft) 135 204 Nm (100 150 lb ft) 130 194 Nm (95 143 lb ft) 195 293 Nm (144 216 lb ft) 270 405 Nm (199 299 lb ft) 363 544 Nm (268 401 lb ft) 431 711 Nm (318 524 lb ft) 17 30 Nm (12 22 lb ft) 37 63 Nm (27 46 lb ft) 36 60 Nm (27 44 lb ft) 76 114 Nm (56 84 lb ft) 72 107 Nm (53 79 lb ft) 114 171 Nm (84 126 lb ft) 107 160 Nm (79 118 lb ft) 160 240 Nm (118 177 lb ft) 153 230 Nm (113 169 lb ft) 230 345 Nm (169 255 lb ft) 317 476 Nm (234 351 lb ft) 425 637 Nm (313 469 lb ft) 554 831 Nm (409 613 lb ft)
The asterisk * indicates that the bolts are used for femalethreaded parts that are made of soft materials such as casting, etc.
GENERAL INFORMATION
0A15
Abbreviations Charts
List of automotive abbreviations which may be used in this manual A Ampere(s) ABS Antilock Brake System AC Alternating Current A/C Air Conditioning ACCEL Accelerator ACC Accessory ACL Air Cleaner Adj Adjust A/F Air Fuel Ratio AIR Secondary Air Injection System Alt Altitude AMP Ampere(s) ANT Antenna ASM Assembly A/T Automatic Transmission/Transaxle ATDC After Top Dead Center ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid Auth Authority Auto Automatic BARO Barometric Pressure Bat Battery B+ Battery Positive Voltage Bbl Barrel BHP Brake Horsepower BJ Birfield Universal Joint BOJ Double Offset Universal Joint BPT Backpressure Transducer BTDC Before Top Dead Center C Degrees Celsius CAC Charge Air Cooler Calif California cc Cubic Centimeter CID Cubic Inch Displacement CKP Crankshaft Position CL Closed Loop CLCC Closed Loop Carburetor Control CMP Camshaft Position CO Carbon Monoxide Coax Coaxial Conn Connector Conv Converter Crank Crankshaft Cu. In. Cubic Inch CV Constant Velocity Cyl Cylinder(s) DI Distributor Ignition Diff Differential Dist Distributor DLC Data Link Connector DOHC Double Overhead Camshaft DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code DTM Diagnostic Test Mode DTT Diagnostic Test Terminal DVM Digital Voltmeter (10 meg.) DVOM Digital Volt Ohmmeter EBCM Electronic Brake Control Module
ECM Engine Control Module ECT Engine Coolant Temperature EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EGR Exhaust Gas Recirculation EI Electronic Ignition ETC Electronic Throttle Control ETR Electronically Tuned Receiver EVAP Evaporation Emission Exh Exhaust F Degrees Fahrenheit Fed Federal (All States Except Calif.) FF Front Drive Front Engine FL Fusible Link FLW Fusible Link Wire FP Fuel Pump FRT Front ft Foot FWD Front Wheel Drive 4WD Four Wheel Drive 4 x 4 Four Wheel Drive 4 A/T Four Speed Automatic Transmission/Transaxle Gal Gallon GEN Generator GND Ground Gov Governor g Gram Harn Harness HC Hydrocarbons HD Heavy Duty Hg Hydrargyrum (Mercury) HiAlt High Altitude HO2S Heated Oxygen Sensor HVAC HeaterVentAirConditioning IAC Idle Air Control IAT Intake Air Temperature IC Integrated Circuit / Ignition Control ID Identification / Inside Diameter IGN Ignition INJ Injection IP Instrument Panel IPC Instrument Panel Cluster Int Intake ISC Idle Speed Control J/B Junction Block kg Kilograms km Kilometers km/h Kilometer per Hour kPa Kilopascals kV Kilovolts (thousands of volts) kW Kilowatts KS Knock Sensor L Liter lb ft Foot Pounds lb in Inch Pounds LF Left Front LH Left Hand LR Left Rear LS Left Side LWB Long Wheel Base
0A16
GENERAL INFORMATION
Sol Solenoid SPEC Specification Speedo Speedometer SRS Supplemental Restraint System ST Start / Scan Tool Sw Switch SWB Short Wheel Base SYN Synchronize Tach Tachometer TB Throttle Body TBI Throttle Body Fuel Injection TCC Torque Converter Clutch TCM Transmission Control Module TDC Top Dead Center Term Terminal TEMP Temperature TFT Transmission Fluid Temprature TOD Torque On Demand TP Throttle Position TRANS Transmission/Transaxle TURBO Turbocharger TVRS Television & Radio Suppression TVV Thermal Vacuum Valve TWC Three Way Catalytic Converter 3 A/T Three Speed Automatic Transmission/ Transaxle 2WD Two Wheel Drive 4 x 2 Two Wheel Drive Ujoint Universal Joint V Volt(s) VAC Vacuum VIN Vehicle Identification Number VRRRE Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling Equipment Vref ECM Reference Voltage VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor VSV Vacuum Switch Valve V6 Six Cylinder V" Engine V8 Eight Cylinder "V" Engine W Watt(s) w/ With w/b Wheel Base w/o Without WOT Wide Open Throttle
L4 InLine Four Cylinder Engine MAF Mass Air Flow MAN Manual MAP Manifold Absolute Pressure Max Maximum MC Mixture Control MFI Multiport Fuel Injection MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp Min Minimum mm Millimeter MPG Miles Per Gallon MPH Miles Per Hour M/T Manual Transmission/Transaxle MV Millivolt N Newtons NA Natural Aspirated NC Normally Closed NM Newton Meters NO Normally Open NOX Nitrogen, Oxides of OBD On-Board Diagnostic OD Outside Diameter O/D Over Drive OHC Overhead Camshaft OL Open Loop O2 Oxygen O2S Oxygen Sensor PAIR Pulsed Secondary Air Injection System P/B Power Brakes PCM Powertrain Control Module PCV Positive Crankcase Ventilation PRESS Pressure PROM Programmable Read Only Memory PNP Park/Neutral Position P/S Power Steering PSI Pounds per Square Inch PSP Power Steering Pressure Pt. Pint Pri Primary PWM Pulse Width Modulate Qt. Quart REF Reference RF Right Front RFI Radio Frequency Interference RH Right Hand RPL Reduced Power Lamp RPM Revolutions Per Minute RPM Sensor Engine Speed Sensor RPO Regular Production Option RR Right Rear RS Right Side RTV Room Temperature Vulcanizing RWAL Rear Wheel Antilock Brake RWD Rear Wheel Drive SAE Society of Automotive Engineers Sec Secondary SFI Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection SI System International SIR Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System SOHC Single Overhead Camshaft
GENERAL INFORMATION
0A17
Service Parts Identification Plate

The Vehicle Information Plate (Service Parts ID plate) is provided on all vehicle models. It is located on the center dash wall inside the engine compartment. The plate lists the VIN (Vehicle Identification Number), paint information and all production options and special equipment on the vehicle when it was shipped from the factory.
905RY00010
SECTION
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION
RODEO
0B1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Maintenance and Lubrication
CONTENTS
Maintenance Schedule List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Complete Vehicle Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . 0B1 0B5 0B8 Lubricant Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Liquid Gasket . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Thread Locking Agents . . . Maintenance Service Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0B9 0B11 0B11 0B12
Maintenance Schedule List

Normal Vehicle Use
The maintenance instructions in this Maintenance Schedule are based on the assumption that the vehicle will be used as designed: to carry passengers and cargo within the limitations specified on the tire placard located on the inside of the glove compartment door; to be driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal operating limits; to be driven on a daily basis, as a general rule, for at least several miles/kilometers; to be driven on unleaded fuel Unusual or severe operating conditions will require more frequent vehicle maintenance, as specified in the following sections. ITEMS REPLACE AIR CLEANER FILTER CHANGE ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER CHANGE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHANGE REAR AXLE OIL REPLACE TIMING BELT (V63.2L engine) REPLACE TIMING BELT (L42.2L engine) REPLACE AIR CLEANER FILTER CHANGE POWER STEERING FLUID
Severe Driving Conditions

If the vehicle is usually operated under any of the severe driving conditions listed below, it is recommended that the applicable maintenance services be performed at the specified interval shown in the chart below. Severe driving conditions: Towing a trailer, using a camper or car top carrier. Repeated short trips of less than 8 Km (5 miles) with outside temperature remaining below freezing. Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or doortodoor delivery use. Operating on dusty, rough, muddy or salt spread roads. INTERVAL See explanation of service, page 0B5 Every 3,000 miles (4,800 km) or 3 months Every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) Every 100,000 miles (160,000 km) Every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) See explanation of service, page 0B5 Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
0B2
Mileage Only Items
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION Mileage/Months
0B3
0B4
0B5
Explanation of Complete Maintenance Schedule
Vehicle
Brief explanations of the services listed in the preceding Maintenance Schedule are presented below. Replace all questionable parts and note any necessary repairs as you perform these maintenance procedures.
Replacement of the timing belt is recommended at every 75,000 miles (120,000 km). Failure to replace the timing belt may result in serious damage to the engine.
Valve Clearance Adjustment (V6, 3.2L ENG)

Incorrect valve clearance will result in increased engine noise and reduced engine output. Retorque the camshaft bracket bolts before checking and adjusting the valve clearance. Check and adjust the valve clearance whenever excessive engine noise occurs.
Front and Rear Axle Lubricant Replacement

Check the lubricant level after every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) of operation and add lubricant to level of filler hole if necessary. Replace the front and rear axle lubricant at 15,000 miles (24,000 km) and 30,000 miles (48,000 km) and after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) of operation thereafter.
Tire Rotation
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Manual Transmission Lubricant Replacement

Check the lubricant level after every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) of operation and add lubricant to level of filler hole if necessary. Replace the transmission lubricant at 15,000 miles (24,000 km) and 30,000 miles (48,000 km) and after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) of operation thereafter.
Spark Plug Wire Inspection

Check the spark plug wires at 60,000 mile (96,000 km) intervals.
Front Wheel Bearings Lubricant Replacement

Clean and repack the front wheel bearings axial rattle at 60,000 miles (100,000 km) intervals. Refer to DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM (SEC. 4C).
Transfer Case Lubricant Replacement

Check the lubricant level after every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) of operation and add lubricant to level of filler hole if necessary. Replace the transfer case lubricant at 15,000 miles (24,000 km) and 30,000 miles (48,000 km) and after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) of operation thereafter.
Radiator Core and Condenser Cleaning
Air
Conditioning
Clean the front of the radiator core and air conditioning condenser, at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) intervals.
Fluid Level Check

A fluid loss in any system (except windshield washer) may indicate a problem. Repair the system at once. Engine oil level Check level and add if necessary. The best time to check the engine oil level is when the oil is warm. After stopping the engine with the vehicle on a level surface, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back to the oil pan. Pull out the oil level indicator (dipstick). Wipe it clean and push the oil level indicator back down all the way. Pull out the oil level indicator, keeping the tip down, and look at the oil level on it. Add oil, if needed, to keep the oil level above the ADD mark and between the ADD and FULL marks in the operating range area. Avoid overfilling the engine since this may cause engine damage. Push the oil level indicator back down all the way after taking the reading. If you check the oil level when the oil is cold, do not run the engine first. The cold oil will not drain back to the pan fast enough to give a true oil level. Engine coolant level and condition Check engine coolant level in the coolant reservoir and add engine coolant if necessary. Inspect the engine coolant and replace it if dirty or rusty.
Air Cleaner Element Replacement

Replace the air cleaner under normal operating conditions every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). Operation of the vehicle in dusty areas will necessitate more frequent replacement.
Spark Plug Replacement

Replace the plugs at 100,000 miles (160,000 km) intervals with the type specified at the end of this section.
Cooling System Service

Drain, flush and refill system with new engine coolant. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section, or ENGINE COOLING (SEC.6B).
Timing Belt Replacement

V63.2L engine: Replace the timing belt at every 100,000 miles (160,000 km). L42.2L engine:
0B6
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION Fuel Cap, Fuel Lines, and Fuel Tank Inspection
Inspect the fuel tank, the fuel cap and the fuel lines every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) for damage which could cause leakage. Inspect the fuel cap and the gasket for correct sealing and physical damage. Replace any damaged parts.
Windshield washer fluid level Check washer fluid level in the reservoir and add if necessary. Power steering system reservoir level Check and keep at the proper level. Brake master cylinder reservoir level Check fluid. Keep fluid at proper level. A low fluid level can indicate worn disc brake pads which may need to be serviced. Hydraulic clutch system Check fluid level in the reservoir. Add fluid as required. Battery fluid level Check fluid level in the battery.
Drive Belt Inspection

Check the serpentine belt driving for cracks, fraying, wear, and correct tension every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). Replace as necessary.
Fluid Leak Check

Check for fuel, water, oil or other fluid leaks by looking at the surface beneath the vehicle after it has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioning system after use is normal. If you notice gasoline fumes or fluid at any time, locate the source and correct it at once.
Wheel Alignment, Operation
Balance
and
Tires
Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement

Always use API SE, SF, SG, SH or ILSAC GF-1, GF-2 quality oils of the proper viscosity. When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperatures the car will be operated in before the next oil change. Then, select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart. Always change the oil and the oil filter as soon as possible after driving in a dust storm.
Uneven or abnormal tire wear, or a pull right or left on a straight and level road may show the need for a wheel alignment. A vibration of the steering wheel or seat at normal highway speeds means a wheel balancing is needed. Check tire pressure when the tires are cold (include the spare). Maintain pressure as shown in the tire placard, which is located on the driver's door lock pillar.
Steering System Operation

Be alert for any changes in steering action. An inspection or service is needed when the steering wheel is harder to turn or has too much free play, or if there are unusual sounds when turning or parking.
Engine Cooling System Inspection

Inspect the coolant/anti-freeze. If the coolant is dirty or rusty, drain, flush and refill with new coolant. Keep coolant at the proper mixture for proper freeze protection, corrosion inhibitor level and best engine operating temperature. Inspect hoses and replace if cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Tighten the hose clamps if equipped with screw-type clamps. Clean outside of radiator and air conditioning condenser. Wash filler cap and neck. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of both the cooling system and the cap is also recommended.
Brake Systems Operation

Watch for the BRAKE light coming on. Other signs of possible brake trouble are such things as repeated pulling to one side when braking, unusual sounds when braking or between brake applications, or increased brake pedal travel. If you note one of these conditions, repair the system at once. For convenience, the following should be done when wheels are removed for rotation: Inspect lines and hoses for proper hookup, bindings, leaks, crack, chafing etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts, including parking brake drums, linings etc., at the same time. Check parking brake adjustment. Inspect the brakes more often if habit or conditions result in frequent braking.
Exhaust System Inspection

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler, heat shields and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Be alert to any changes in the sound of the exhaust system or any smell of fumes. These are signs the system may be leaking or overheating. Repair the system at once, if these conditions exist. (See also Engine Exhaust Gas Safety and Three Way Catalytic Converter in the Owner's manual.)
Parking Brake and Transmission Park Mechanism Operation

Park on a fairly steep hill and hold the vehicle with the parking brake only. This checks holding ability. On automatic transmission vehicles, shifting from P position to the other positions cannot be made unless the brake pedal is depressed when the key switch is in the ON position or the engine is running.

WARNING: Before checking the starter safety switch operation below, be sure to have enough room around the vehicle. Then firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. Do not use the accelerator pedal. If the engine starts, be ready to turn off the key promptly. Take these precautions because the vehicle could move without warning and possibly cause personal injury or property damage.
0B7
heat history. When it is close to 0%, ATF replacement is recommended.
Auto Cruise Control Inspection

Check to see if the clearance between cruise link and accelerator link is normal. Also, check that their properly connected.
Brake Pedal Free Play Inspection

Note the brake pedal free play. It should be 610 mm (0.230.39 in). Adjust brake control when there is little or no free play.
Starter Safety Switch Operation (Automatic Transmission)

Check by trying to start the engine in each gear while setting the parking brake and the foot brake. The starter should crank only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
Clutch Lines and Hoses Inspection

Check lines and hoses for proper attachment, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, deterioration, etc. Any questionable parts should be replaced or repaired at once. When abrasion or wear is evident on lines or hoses, the cause must be corrected.
Starter Safety Switch Operation (Manual Transmission)

To check, place the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedal halfway and try to start. The starter should not crank. The starter should crank only when the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
Clutch Control Lubrication

Lubricate the clutch pedal bushing, the clevis pin, and pedal spring every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 6 months. If a squeaking noise arises from around the bushing or the clevis pin at the clutch pedal arm when the clutch pedal is depressed, lubricate them.
Accelerator Linkage Lubrication

Lubricate the accelerator pedal fulcrum pin with chassis grease.
Steering and Suspension Inspection

Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hookup, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Clutch Pedal Free Play Inspection

Note the clutch pedal free play. It should be 5 15 mm (0.2 0.6 in). Adjust clutch control when there is little or no free play.
Body and Chassis Lubrication

Lubricate the key lock cylinders, the hood latch, the hood and door hinges, the door check link, the parking cable guides, the underbody contact points, and the linkage.
Accelerator Linkage Inspection

Inspect for interference, binding, and damaged or missing parts. Check accelerator pedal for smooth operation and even pedal effort. Replace parts as needed.
Propeller Shaft Inspection and Lubrication

Check the propeller shaft flange-to-pinion bolts for proper torque to 63 Nm (46 lb ft) for front and rear propeller shaft.
Automatic Transmission Fluid Replacement

Under harsh operating conditions, such as constant driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather, or in hilly or mountainous terrain, change the transmission fluid and service the sump filter after every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) of operation. More over, the remaining life percentage of ATF can be estimated by using TECH-II as an auxiliary tool to judge the right time for ATF replacement. The remaining life percentage is calculated from ATF'S
0B8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

USAGE Engine FLUID/LUBRICANT API SE, SF, SG, SH or ILSAC GF-1, GF-2 Engine oil (See oil chart on the following page for proper viscosity) Mixture of water and good quality ethylene glycol base type antifreeze. DOT-3 hydraulic brake fluid. DEXRON -III Automatic transmission fluid. DEXRON -III Automatic transmission fluid. Engine oil (See oil chart on following page for proper viscosity) GL-5 gear lubricant (Standard differential) GL-5 Limited slip differential gear lubricant together with limited slip differential lubricant additive (Part No. 8-01052-358-0) or equivalent (If equipped with optional limited slip differential) (See oil chart in this section for proper viscosity) Chassis grease Chassis grease DOT-3 hydraulic brake fluid Engine oil Chassis grease Engine oil Chassis grease Chassis grease Multipurpose grease GL-5 gear lubricant (SAE 75W-90) Engine oil Washer fluid Synthetic light weight engine oil (SAE 5W-30) Chassis grease
Engine coolant Brake system Power steering system Automatic transmission MUA Type Manual transmission & Transfer case Rear axle and front axle
Clutch system a. Pivot points b. Clutch fork joint c. Master cylinder Hood latch assembly a. Pivots and spring anchor b. Release pawl Hood and door hinges Chassis lubrication Parking brake cables Front wheel bearings Shift on the fly system Body door hinge pins and linkage, fuel door hinge, rear compartment lid hinges Windshield washer solvent Key lock cylinder Accelerator linkage
0B9
Lubricant Viscosity Chart

Lubricants should be carefully selected according to the lubrication chart. It is also important to select viscosity of lubricants according to the ambient temperature by referring to the following table.
Oil Viscosity Chart for Gasoline Engine
905RT011
Oil Viscosity Chart for Manual Transmission and Transfer Case
B00RW002
0B10
Oil Viscosity Chart for Front Axle
B00RW003
Oil Viscosty Chart for Rear Axle
B00RW004
0B11
Recommended Liquid Gasket

Type Brand Name Three Bond 1207B Three Bond 1207C Three Bond 1215 Three Bond 1280 Three Bond 1281 Three Bond 1141E Three Bond 1104 Belco Bond 4 Belco Bond 401 Belco Bond 402 LOCTITE 515 LOCTITE 518 LOCTITE 17430 Manufacturer Three Bond Three Bond Three Bond Three Bond Three Bond Three Bond Three Bond Isuzu Isuzu Isuzu Loctite Loctite Loctite Application Steps 1. Completely remove all lubricant and moisture from the bolts and the female-threaded surfaces of the parts to be joined. The surfaces must be perfectly dry. 2. Apply LOCTITE to the bolts. Remarks For Engine Repairs For Axle Case Repairs T/M Repairs T/M For Engine Repairs
RTV* Silicon Base
Water Base
Solvent
For Engine Repairs
Anaerobic
All
* RTV: Room Temperature Vulcanizer NOTE: 1. It is very important that the liquid gaskets listed above or their exact equivalent be used on the vehicle. 2. Be careful to use the specified amount of liquid gasket. Follow the manufacturer's instructions at all times. 3. Be absolutely sure to remove all lubricants and moisture from the connecting surfaces before applying the liquid gasket. The connecting surfaces must be perfectly dry. 4. Do not apply LOCTITE 17430, LOCTITE 515 and LOCTITE 518 between two metal surfaces having a clearance of greater than 0.25 mm (0.01 in). Poor adhesion will result.
Recommended Thread Locking Agents

LOCTITE Type LOCTITE 242 LOCTITE 262 LOCTITE 271 LOCTITE Color Blue Red Red
F00RW014
3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. After tightening, be sure to keep the bolts free from vibration and torque for at least an hour until LOCTITE hardens. NOTE: When the application procedures are specified in this manual, follow them.
0B12
Maintenance Service Data

Service Data and Specifications
ENGINE Valve clearance (cold): only V6-3.2L ENG Spark plug type Spark plug gap CLUTCH BRAKE WHEEL ALIGNMENT Clutch pedal free play Brake pedal free play Parking brake travel Toe-in (Front) Toe-in (Rear) Camber (Front) Camber (Rear) Caster (Front) ToeAxis (Rear) PROPELLER SHAFT WHEEL AND TIRES Flange torque Size Wheel nut torque Tire inflation pressure (Front) * Tire inflation pressure (Rear) * Unless otherwise specified on tire information label on the vehicle. 200 kPa (29 psi) 200 kPa (29 psi) Intake 0.28 0.05 mm (0.011 0.002 in) Exhaust 0.3 0.05 mm (0.012 0.002 in) K16PR-P11/PK16PR11/RC10PYP4 1.05 mm (0.04 in) 515 mm (0.200.59 in) 610 mm (0.240.39 in) 67 notches 0 to +2 mm (0 to +0.08 in) 0 5 mm (0 0.2 in) 0 30' 0 1 2 30' 1.00' 1 63 Nm (46 lbft) P225/75R16 P245/70R16 118 Nm (87 lbft) 180 kPa (26 psi) 180 kPa (26 psi) P245/60R18
Approximate Capacities
Items Fuel tank * Crankcase (V6-3.2L ENGINE) * Crankcase (L4-2.2L ENGINE) Coolant Oil Change with Filter Oil Change without Filter Oil Change with Filter Oil Change without Filter M/T (V6-3.2L ENG) M/T (L4-2.2L ENG) A/T Transmission Transfer Axle Rear Front Shift on the fly system Power steering Air conditioning (R-134a) V6-3.2L ENG L4-2.2L ENG Manual Automatic Metric Measure 74 L 4.7 L 4.0 L 4.5 L 4.2 L 11.0 L 6.9 L 11.1 L 2.95 L 8.6 L 1.45 L 1.77 L 1.25 L 1.05 L 0.12 L 1.0 L 0.79 L U.S. Measure 19.5 Gal. 5.0 Qt 4.2 Qt 4.8 Qt 4.4 Qt 11.6 Qt 7.3 Qt 11.7 Qt 3.1 Qt 9.1 Qt 1.5 Qt 1.87 Qt 1.33 Qt 1.10 Qt 0.13 Qt 1.1 Qt 1.54 lb
*Crankcase capacities shown are approximate refill capacities. After refill, recheck oil level.
SECTION
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
RODEO
1A1

HVAC SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating and Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater Unit and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater Core and / or Mode Door . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater Mode Control Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater Temperature Control Link Unit . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Assembly and Associated Parts . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Link Unit and / or Mode door . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Motor and Associated Parts . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Heater Duct, Defroster Nozzle and Ventilation Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Heater Duct, Defroster Nozzle, Ventilation Duct and Associated Parts . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A2 1A2 1A2 1A6 1A7 1A11 1A13 1A13 1A13 1A14 1A14 1A14 1A15 1A15 1A15 1A16 1A16 1A16 1A17 1A17 1A17 1A17 1A18 1A18 1A18 1A19 1A19 1A19 1A19 1A19 1A20 1A21 1A21 1A21 1A21 1A22 1A22 1A22 1A23 Control Lever Assembly and / or Control Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Lever Assembly, Control Cable and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Panel Illumination Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Panel Illumination Bulb and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resistor and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Source Select Lever Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Repair Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leak Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Assembly and Associated Parts (6VD1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Compressor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Assembly and Associated Parts (X22SE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Compressor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . Condenser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condenser Assembly and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condenser Fan Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condenser Fan Motor and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A23 1A23 1A24 1A25 1A26 1A26 1A26 1A26 1A26 1A26 1A26 1A26 1A27 1A27 1A37 1A47 1A50 1A50 1A51 1A53 1A58 1A58 1A58 1A59 1A59 1A60 1A60 1A60 1A61 1A61 1A62 1A62 1A62 1A62 1A63 1A63 1A63 1A63
1A2

1A64 1A64 1A64 1A64 1A65 1A65 1A65 1A65 1A66 1A66 1A66 1A67 1A68 1A68 1A68 1A69 1A70 1A70 1A70 1A71 1A72 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic Clutch Assembly (DKV-14G Type) Parts Location View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Oil Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and Adjusting Oil Quantity for Used Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and Adjusting for Compressor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contamination of Compressor Oil . . . . . . . . Oil Return Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement of Component Parts . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A75 1A75 1A75 1A76 1A77 1A77 1A77 1A79 1A79 1A81 1A81 1A81 1A81 1A81 1A82 1A82 1A82 1A82 1A83 1A85
Receiver / Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver / Drier and Associated Parts . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Switch and Associated Parts . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporator Assembly and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Thermostat, Evaporator Core and/or Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refrigerant Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refrigerant Line and Associated Parts . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data And Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Precaution
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE HAS A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS). REFER TO THE SRS COMPONENT AND WIRING LOCATION VIEW IN ORDER TO DETERMINE WHETHER YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING. WHEN YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING, REFER TO THE SRS SERVICE INFORMATION. FAILURE TO FOLLOW WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN POSSIBLE AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, PERSONAL INJURY, OR OTHERWISE UNNEEDED SRS SYSTEM REPAIRS.
CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. ISUZU will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. ISUZU will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fastener joint interfaces. Generally, such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fastener. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specifications. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems.
Heating and Ventilation System

General Description
Heater
When the engine is warming up, the warmed engine coolant is sent into the heater core. The heater system supplies warm air into the passenger compartment to warm it up. Outside air is circulated through the heater core of the heater unit and then into the passenger compartment. By controlling the mixture of outside air and heater core air, the most comfortable passenger compartment temperature can be selected and maintained. The temperature of warm air sent to the passenger compartment is controlled by the temperature control knob. This knob acts to open and close the air mix door, thus controlling the amount of air passed through the heater core. The air selector knob, with its different modes, also allows you to select and maintain the most comfortable passenger compartment temperature. The air source select lever is used to select either FRESH for the introduction of the outside air, or CIRC for the circulation of the inside air. When the lever is set to FRESH, the outside air is always taken into the passenger compartment. When setting the lever to CIRC position, the circulation of air is restricted only to the inside air with no introduction of the outside air and the air in the passenger compartment gets warm quickly.

However, the lever is normally set to FRESH to prevent the windshield from clouding.
1A3
840R100002
Legend (1) Defroster Nozzle (2) Ventilation Duct (3) Blower Assembly (4) Evaporator Assembly (With A/C)
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Duct (W/O A/C) Knee Protector Bracket (W/O A/C) Heater Unit Ventilation Lower Duct Rear Heater Duct
1A4

The fan control is used to control the amount of air sent out by the resistor at four levels from LOW to HIGH.
Control Lever Assembly

The control lever assembly has some cables to control the mode and temperature of the heater unit and the mode door for the air source of the blower assembly.
865RW006
Legend (1) Air Source Select Lever (2) Air Select Knob (3) Fan Control Lever (Fan Switch)
(4) Air Conditioning (A/C) Switch (W/ A/C) (5) Temperature Control Knob (6) Middle Position
Ventilation
Setting the air source select lever to FRESH position allows the heating system to work with sending the fresh air from outside. The blower fan also serves to deliver fresh outside air to the passenger compartment to assure adequate ventilation.
Air Select Knob

The air select knob allows you to direct heated air into the passenger compartment through different outlets. 1. Vent In this position, air is discharged from the upper air outlet. Air quantity is controlled by the fan control lever. 2. Bi-Level In this position, air flow is divided between the upper air outlets and the floor air outlets, with warmer air delivered to the floor outlets than the air delivered to the upper air outlets when the temp lever is in middle position. 3. Foot In this position, air flow is delivered to the foot, while sending a small amount of air to the windshield.
4. Def/Foot In this position, air flow is delivered to the foot, while sending approx. 40% of total amount of air to the windshield. Selecting this mode allows air conditioning system to work while the fan switch is turned to on position, even if the A/C switch is off. Also the fresh air can be delivered even when the circ position is selected. 5. Defrost In this position, most of the air is delivered to the windshield and a small amount is delivered to the side windows. Selecting this mode allows air conditioning system to work while the fan switch is turned to on position, even if the A/C switch is off. Also the fresh air can be delivered even when the circ position is selected. Moving the air source select lever to the CIRC position provides quickest heat delivery by closing the blower assembly mode door. In this position, outside air is not delivered to the passenger compartment.
1A5
C01RW001
Air Source Select Lever

The intake of outside air and the circulation of inside air are controlled by sliding this lever left or right. And even though the circ position is selected, the fresh air can be delivered while the DEF or DEF/FOOT position is selected.
Temperature Control Knob

When the temperature control knob is in the COLD position, the air mix door closes to block the flow air to the heater core. When the temperature control knob is in the HOT position, the air mix door opens to allow air to pass through the heater core and heat the passenger compartment. Placing the knob in a intermediate position will cause a lesser or greater amount air to reach the heater core. In this mode the passenger compartment temperature can be regulated.
Fan Control Lever

This lever controls the blower motor speed to regulate the amount of air delivered to the defrost, foot, and ventilation ducts: 1. Low 2. Medium Low 3. Medium High 4. High
1A6
Wiring Diagram
D08RY00545
1A7
Diagnosis
Heating Cycle diagnosis
Condition No heating or insufficient heating. Possible cause Blower motor does not run or runs improperly. Engine coolant temperature is low. Correction Refer to FAN CONTROL LEVER (FAN SWITCH) DIAGNOSIS. Check the engine coolant temperature after warming up the engine and check the thermostat. Replace as necessary. Add engine coolant as required. Check if the water hose to the heater core is clogged, collapsed or twisted. Repair or replace as necessary. Clean or replace as necessary. Repair the temperature control link unit or mode doors. Repair or replace as necessary. Repair Repair Refer to AIR SOURCE SELECT LEVER DIAGNOSIS Repair. Adjust.
Insufficient engine coolant. Circulation volume of engine coolant is insufficient. Heater core clogged or collapsed. The heater cores is not provided with air sent from the blower motor. Duct connections unsealing. Control lever moves but mode door does not operate. operate defective or
Cable attaching clip is not correct. Link unit of heater assembly defective. or blower
The intake actuator is inoperative. The mode door cannot be set to the mode selected. selected Link unit of heater unit. Control cable is not adjusted.
1A8

For the inspection of the relays, switches and units in each table, refer to INDIVIDUAL INSPECTION in this section.
Fan Control Lever (Fan Switch) Diagnosis

Current flows to the blower motor through the heater relay (X-1) to activate the rotation of the blower motor by turning ON the fan control knob (fan switch). Blower motor speed is controlled in stages by the resistor, by operating the switch from LOW to HIGH.
D08RY00546
Condition Blower motor does not run. Blower motor does not run in certain position (s). Blower motor does not stop at OFF position.
Possible cause
Correction Refer to Chart A Refer to Chart B, C, D and E Refer to Chart F
1A9
Chart A Blower Motor Does Not Run

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Is relay (X-1) OK? Is fuse EB-5 (15A) OK? Is fuse EB-6 (15A) OK? Is resistor OK? Is fan control lever OK? Go to Step 6 Is blower motor OK? 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. 2. Turn fan control lever ON. 3. Check to see if battery voltage is present at chassis side connector terminal No. C38-1 Is there a battery voltage? Go to Step 7 Poor ground or open circuit either between chassis side connector terminal No. C38-2 and No. C41-2 or No. I23-1 and body ground (No. B-7). Action Yes Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5 No Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace control lever assembly. Replace
Open circuit between No. EB-5 (15A) / EB-6 (15A) fuse and No. C38-1.
Chart B Blower Motor Does Not Run At Low Position

Step 1 2 Is resistor OK? Is fan control lever (Fan Switch) OK? Action Yes Go to Step 2 Open circuit between chassis side connector terminal No. C41-1 and No.I23-2. No Replace
Replace control lever assembly.
Chart C Blower Motor Does Not Run At Medium Low Position

Step 1 2 Is resistor OK? Is fan control lever (Fan Switch) OK? Action Yes Go to Step 2 Open circuit between the chassis side connector terminal No. C41-4 and No. I23-3. No Replace
Chart D Blower Motor Does Not Run At Medium High Position

Step 1 2 Is resistor OK? Is fan control lever (Fan Switch) OK? Action Yes Go to Step 2 Open circuit between chassis side connector terminal No. C41-6 and No. I23-4. No Replace
1A10 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
Chart E Blower Motor Does Not Run At High Position

Step 1 2 Is resistor OK? Is fan control lever (Fan Switch) OK? Action Yes Go to Step 2 Open circuit between Chassis side connector terminal No. C41-3 and No. I23-5. No Replace
Chart F Blower Motor Does Not Stop In The OFF Position

Step 1 Action Is the fan control lever (Fan Switch) OK? Yes Short circuit between chassis side connector terminal No. C38-2 and No. C41-2,No. C4 1-3 and No. I23-5, No. C41-6 and No. I23-4, No. C41-4 and No. I23-3 or No. C41-1 and No. I23-2 No
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 1A11
Individual Inspection
Blower Motor
1. Disconnect the blower motor (C-38) connector from the blower motor. 2. Connect the battery positive terminal to the No. 1 terminal of the blower motor and the negative to the No. 2. 3. Be sure to check to see if the blower motor operates correctly.
Fan Control Lever (Fan Switch)

1. Check for continuity between the terminals of the fan switch.
D08RW058
Heater Relay
1. Disconnect the heater relay (X-1). D When removing the connector for relay, unfasten the tank lock of the connector by using a screwdriver, then pull the relay (1) out.
873RS005
Resistor
1. Disconnect the resistor (C-41) connector. 2. Check for continuity and resistance between the terminals of the resistor.
825RS001
840RS001

2. Check for continuity between the heater relay (X-1) terminals.
825RS179
Heater Unit
Heater Unit and Associated Parts
840R100001
Legend (1) Instrument Panel Assembly (2) Cross Beam Assembly (3) Instrument Panel Bracket (4) Ventilation Lower Duct (5) Rear Heater Duct (6) Evaporator Assembly (A/C only)
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Edge Protector Knee Bolster Knee Bolster Bracket Duct Heater Unit Assembly Heater Hose Resistor Connector
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. Discharge and recover refrigerant (with air conditioning). D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 4. Remove the Instrument panel assembly. D Refer to Instrument Panel Assembly in Body and Accessories section. 5. Remove instrument panel bracket. D Refer to Cross Beam Assembly in Body and Accessories section.
6. Cross Beam Assembly. D Refer to Cross Beam Assembly in Body and Accessories section. 7. Disconnect resistor connector. 8. Remove knee bolster bracket. 9. Remove duct. 10. Remove evaporator assembly (A/C only). D Refer to Evaporator Assembly in this section. 11. Remove ventilation lower duct. 12. Remove rear heater duct. D Remove foot rest, carpet and 3 clips. 13. Remove heater unit assembly. D Disconnect heater hoses at heater unit.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. When handling the PCM and the control unit, be careful not to make any improper connection of the connectors.
2. Adjust the control cables. D Refer to Control Lever Assembly in this section. 3. When installing the heater unit, defroster nozzle and center vent duct, be sure that the proper seal is made, without any gap between them.
Heater Core and / or Mode Door

Disassembled View
860RW001
Legend (1) Heater Core (2) Case (Temperature Control) (3) Heater Unit
(4) Mode Door (5) Duct (6) Case (Mode Control)
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. Discharge and recover refrigerant (with air conditioning). D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 4. Remove heater unit. D Refer to Heater Unit in this section. 5. Remove duct. 6. Remove case (Mode control) and do not remove link unit at this step. 7. Remove case (Temperature control) separate two halves of core case.
9. Pull out the mode door while raising up the catch of the door lever.
860RS004
Inspection
Check for foreign matter in the heater core, stain or the core fin defacement.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point: 1. Check that each mode door operates properly.
860RS002
8. Remove heater core (1).
860RS003
Heater Mode Control Link Unit

Disassembled View
860RW002
Legend (1) Case (Mode Control) (2) Heater Unit (3) Mode Sub-lever
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Clip Door Lever Rod Washer and Mode Main Lever
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Drain engine coolant. 3. Discharge and recover refrigerant (with air conditioning) D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 4. Remove heater unit. D Refer to Heater Unit in this section. 5. Remove the case (Mode control) from heater unit. 6. Remove washer and the mode main lever. 7. Remove rod. 8. Press the tab of the sub-lever inward, and take out the sub-lever.
860RS006

9. Pull out the door lever while raising up the catch of the door lever. 10. Remove clip. 2. After installing the link unit, check to see if the link unit operates correctly.
Installation
To install, follow the remove steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Apply grease to the mode sub-lever and to the abrasive surface of the heater unit.
Heater Temperature Control Link Unit

Disassembled View
860RS007
Legend (1) Case (Temperature control) (2) Clip (3) Door Lever
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Clip Heater Unit Rod Sub-lever
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Drain engine coolant. 3. Discharge and recover refrigerant (with conditioning). D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 4. Remove heater unit. D Refer to Heater Unit in this section.
air
5. Remove the case (Temperature control) from the heater unit. 6. Remove rod. 7. Remove sub-lever. 8. Pull out the door lever while raising up the catch of the door lever. 9. Remove clip.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Apply grease to the sub-lever and to the abrasive surface of the heater unit. 2. After installing the link unit, check to see if the link unit operates correctly.
Blower Assembly
Blower Assembly and Associated Parts
873R100001
Legend (1) Instrument Panel Assembly (2) Blower Assembly (2) Blower Assembly
(3) (4) (5) (6)
Evaporator Assembly (A/C only) Knee Bolster Bracket Duct Heater Unit
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Discharge and recover refrigerant (with air conditioning). D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 3. Remove instrument panel assembly. D Refer to Instrument Panel Assembly in Body and Accessories section. 4. Disconnect resistor connector.
5. Remove knee bolster bracket. 6. Remove duct. 7. Remove evaporator assembly (A/C only). D Refer to Evaporator Assembly in this section. 8. Disconnect blower motor connector. 9. Remove blower assembly.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order.
Blower Link Unit and / or Mode door

Disassembled View
873RY00007
Legend (1) Blower Assembly (2) Upper Case (3) Mode Door
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Lower Case Intake Actuator Sub Lever Door Lever
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Discharge and recover refrigerant (with conditioning). D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 3. Remove blower assembly. D Refer to Blower Assembly in this section. 4. Remove intake actuator. air
5. Remove lower case.

6. Separate the upper case and slit the lining parting face with a knife.
873RS002
7. Pull out the mode door while raising up the catch of door lever. 8. Remove sub-lever. 9. Remove door lever.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Apply grease to the door lever and to the abrasive surface of the upper case. 2. Apply an adhesive to the parting face of the lining when assembling the upper case.
Blower Motor
Blower Motor and Associated Parts
873RS004
Legend (1) Blower Motor Connector (2) Blower Motor Assembly (3) Clip
(4) Fan (5) Blower Motor (6) Attaching Screw
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove blower motor connector. 3. Remove attaching screw. 4. Remove blower motor assembly. 5. Remove clip. 6. Remove fan. 7. Remove blower motor.
Installation
Rear Heater Duct, Defroster Nozzle and Ventilation Duct

Rear Heater Duct, Defroster Nozzle, Ventilation Duct and Associated Parts
840RY00031
Legend (1) Defroster Nozzle (2) Cross Beam Assembly (3) Center Ventilation Duct and Side Defroster Duct
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Instrument Panel Bracket Instrument Panel Assembly Rear Heater Duct Ventilation Lower Duct
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove instrument panel assembly. D Refer to Instrument Panel Assembly in Body and Accessories section. 3. Remove center ventilation duct and side defroster duct. D Remove 5 screws.
4. Remove instrument panel brackets. D Refer to Cross Beam Assembly in Body and Accessories section. 5. Remove cross beam assembly. D Refer to Cross Beam Assembly in Body and Accessories section. 6. Remove ventilation lower duct. 7. Remove rear heater duct. D Remove foot rest carpet and 3 clips.

8. Remove defroster nozzle.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point: 1. Connect each duct and nozzle securely leaving no clearance between them and making no improper matching.
Control Lever Assembly and / or Control Cable

Control Lever Assembly, Control Cable and Associated Parts
865RY00014
Legend (1) Control Cable (2) Control Lever Assembly (3) Meter Cluster Assembly
(4) Glove Box (5) Instrument Panel Driver Lower Cover Assembly (6) Fan Switch Air Conditioning Switch Connector
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove instrument panel driver lower cover assembly. 3. Remove meter cluster assembly. D Refer to Instrument Panel Assembly in Body and Accessories section. 4. Remove glove box. 5. Remove the control lever attaching screws. 6. Pull the control lever assembly out and disconnect the fan switch and air conditioning switch connectors.
865RY00015
7. Remove control level assembly. 8. Disconnect control cables at each unit side.
865RY00016
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Adjust the control cable.
865RY00017
D Temperature control cable. 1. Turn the control knob to the left (MAX COLD position). 2. Connect the control cable at the COLD position of the temperature control link of the heater unit and secure it with the clip. D Air select control cable 1. Turn the control knob to the right (DEFROST position). 2. Connect the control cable at the DEFROST position of the mode control link of the heater unit and secure it with the clip. 2. Check the control cable operation.
Control Panel Illumination Bulb

Control Panel Illumination Bulb and Associated Parts Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove control lever assembly. D Refer to Control Lever Assembly in this section. 3. Pull out the bulb socket from the panel by turning it counterclockwise. 4. Pull the illumination bulb from the socket.
Installation
865RY00018
Legend (1) Control Lever Assembly (2) Bulb Socket (3) Illumination Bulb
Resistor
Resistor and Associated Parts Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove glove box. 3. Remove resistor connector. 4. Remove duct (heater only). 5. Remove resistor.
Installation
840RW001
Legend (1) Duct (Heater only) (2) Resistor (3) Resistor Connector (4) Glove Box
Air Conditioning System

General Description
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Cycle Construction
C01RY00013
Legend (1) Electronic Thermostat (2) Evaporator Core (3) Evaporator Assembly (4) Temperature Sensor (5) Blower Motor (6) Expansion Valve (7) Pressure Switch or Pressure Sensor (8) Receiver/Drier
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
Condenser Compressor Magnetic Clutch Mode (HEAT) Control Door Temp. Control Door (Air Mix Door) Heater Core Mode (VENT) Control Door Heater Unit Mode (DEF) Control Door
The refrigeration cycle includes the following four processes as the refrigerant changes repeatedly from liquid to gas and back to liquid while circulating.
Evaporation
The refrigerant is changed from a liquid to a gas inside the evaporator. The refrigerant mist that enters the evaporator vaporizes readily. The liquid refrigerant removes the required quantity of heat (latent heat of vaporization) from the air around the evaporator core cooling fins and rapidly vaporizes. Removing the heat cools the air, which is then radiated from the fins and lowers the temperature of the air inside the vehicle. The refrigerant liquid sent from the expansion valve and the vaporized refrigerant gas are both present inside the evaporator as the liquid is converted to gas. With this change from liquid to gas, the pressure inside the evaporator must be kept low enough for vaporization to occur at a lower temperature. Because of that, the vaporized refrigerant is sucked into the compressor.
It compresses low-pressure and low-temperature refrigerant vapor from the evaporator into high-pressure and high-temperature refrigerant vapor to the condenser. It pumps refrigerant and refrigerant oil through the air conditioning system. This vehicle is equipped with a five-vane rotary compressor. The specified amount of the compressor oil is 150cc (5.0 fl. oz.). The oil used in the HFC-134a system compressor differs from that used in R-12 systems. Also, compressor oil to be used varies according to the compressor model. Be sure to avoid mixing two or more different types of oil. If the wrong oil is used, lubrication will be poor and the compressor will seize or malfunction. The magnetic clutch connector is a waterproof type.
Compression
The refrigerant is compressed by the compressor until it is easily liquefied at normal temperature. The vaporized refrigerant in the evaporator is sucked into the compressor. This action maintains the refrigerant inside the evaporator at a low pressure so that it can easily vaporize, even at low temperatures close to 0C (32F). Also, the refrigerant sucked into the compressor is compressed inside the cylinder to increase the pressure and temperature to values such that the refrigerant can easily liquefy at normal ambient temperatures.
Magnetic Clutch
The compressor is driven by the drive belt from the crank pulley of the engine. If the compressor is activated each time the engine is started, this causes too much load to the engine. The magnetic clutch transmits the power from the engine to the compressor and activates it when the air conditioning is ON. Also, it cuts off the power from the engine to the compressor when the air conditioning is OFF. Refer to Compressor in this section for magnetic clutch repair procedure.
Condensation
The refrigerant inside the condenser is cooled by the outside air and changes from gas to liquid. The high temperature, high pressure gas coming from the compressor is cooled and liquefied by the condenser with outside air and accumulated in the receiver/drier. The heat radiated to the outside air by the high temperature, high pressure gas in the compressor is called heat of condensation. This is the total quantity of heat (heat of vaporization) the refrigerant removes from the vehicle interior via the evaporator and the work (calculated as the quantity of heat) performed for compression.
Expansion
The expansion valve lowers the pressure of the refrigerant liquid so that it can easily vaporize. The process of lowering the pressure to encourage vaporization before the liquefied refrigerant is sent to the evaporator is called expansion. In addition, the expansion valve controls the flow rate of the refrigerant liquid while decreasing the pressure. That is, the quantity of refrigerant liquid vaporized inside the evaporator is determined by the quantity of heat which must be removed at a prescribed vaporization temperature. It is important that the quantity of refrigerant be controlled to exactly the right value.
871RX026
Legend (1) Magnetic Clutch (2) Magnetic Clutch Connector (3) Compressor
Condenser
The condenser assembly is located in front of the radiator. It provides rapid heat transfer from the refrigerant to the cooling fins. Also, it functions to cool and liquefy the high-pressure and high-temperature vapor sent from the compressor by the radiator fan or outside air.
Compressor
The compressor performs two main functions:

A condenser may malfunction in two ways: it may leak, or it may be restricted. A condenser restriction will result in excessive compressor discharge pressure. If a partial restriction is present, the refrigerant expands after passing through the restriction. Thus, ice or frost may form immediately after the restriction. If air flow through the condenser or radiator is blocked, high discharge pressures will result. During normal condenser operation, the refrigerant outlet line will be slightly cooler than the inlet line. The vehicle is equipped with the parallel flow type condenser. A larger thermal transmission area on the inner surface of the tube allows the radiant heat to increase and the ventilation resistance to decrease. The refrigerant line connection has a bolt at the block joint, for easy servicing. A receiver/drier may fail due to a restriction inside the body of the unit. A restriction at the inlet to the receiver/drier will cause high pressure. Outlet restrictions will be indicated by low pressure and little or no cooling. An excessively cold receiver/drier outlet may indicate a restriction. The receiver/drier of this vehicle is made of aluminum with a smaller tank. It has a 300cc refrigerant capacity. The refrigerant line connection has a bolt at the block joint, for easy servicing.
Dual Pressure Switch (V6,M/T)

The pressure switch (Dual pressure switch) is installed on the upper part of the receiver/drier, to detect excessively high pressure (high pressure switch) and prevent compressor seizure due to the refrigerant leaking (low pressure switch), so that the compressor is able to be turned ON or OFF. Compressor Low-pressure control High-pressure control ON (kPa/psi) 205.929.4 (29.94.3) 2059.4196.1 (341.328.4) OFF (kPa/psi) 176.519.6 (25.62.8) 2942.0196.1 (426.628.4)
Triple Pressure Switch (V6, A/T)

Triple pressure switch is installed on the upper part of the receiver/drier. This switch is constructed with a unitized type of two switches. One of them is a low and high pressure switch (Dual pressure switch) to switch ON or OFF the magnetic clutch as a result of irregularly highpressure or low pressure of the refrigerant. The other one is a medium pressure switch (Cycling switch) to switch ON or OFF the condenser fan sensing the condenser high side pressure. Compressor Low-pressure control High-pressure control ON (kPa/psi) 186.329.4 (27.04.3) 2353.6196.1 (341.328.4) ON (kPa/psi) 1471.098.1 (213.314.2) OFF (kPa/psi) 176.524.5 (25.63.6) 2942.0196.1 (426.628.4) OFF (kPa/psi) 1078.7117.7 (156.417.1)
875R100001
Legend (1) Pressure Switch (2) Receiver Drier (3) Condenser & Receiver Tank Assembly (4) Condenser Fan (6VD1 A/T)
Receiver / Drier
The receiver/drier performs four functions: D As the quantity of refrigerant circulated varies depending on the refrigeration cycle conditions, sufficient refrigerant is stored for the refrigeration cycle to operate smoothly in accordance with fluctuations in the quantity circulated. D The liquefied refrigerant from the condenser is mixed with refrigerant gas containing air bubbles. If refrigerant containing air bubbles. If refrigerant containing air bubbles is sent to the expansion valve, the cooling capacity will decrease considerably. Therefore, the liquid and air bubbles are separated and only the liquid is sent to the expansion valve. D The receiver/drier utilizes a filter and drier to remove the dirt and water mixed in the cycling refrigerant.
Condenser fan Medium-pressure control
Pressure Sensor (L4, X22SE)

The pressure sensor is installed on the upper part of the receiver/drier. This sensor converts high pressure detection of refrigerant to an electrical voltage signal and supplies it to the ECM. The ECM controls switching compressor idle speed and cooling fan operation by the electrical voltage signal.
The calibration has been changed to match the characteristics of HFC-134a.
874RY00019
Legend (1) Expansion Valve (2) Evaporator Assembly

875R100002
Legend (1) Pressure Switch (2) Receiver Drier
Evaporator
The evaporator cools and dehumidifies the air before the air enters the passenger compartment. High-pressure liquid refrigerant flows through the expansion valve into the low-pressure area of the evaporator. The heat in the air passing through the evaporator core is lost to the cooler surface of the core, thereby cooling the air. As heat is lost between the air and the evaporator core surface, moisture in the vehicle condenses on the outside surface of the evaporator core and is drained off as water. When the evaporator malfunctions, the trouble will show up as an inadequate supply of cool air. The cause is typically a partially plugged core due to dirt, or a malfunctioning blower motor.
Expansion Valve
This expansion valve is an external pressure type and it is installed at the evaporator intake port. The expansion valve converts the high pressure liquid refrigerant sent from the receiver/drier to a low pressure liquid refrigerant by forcing it through a tiny port before sending it to the evaporator. This type of expansion valve consists of a temperature sensor, diaphragm, ball valve, ball seat, spring adjustment screw, etc. The temperature sensor contacts the evaporator outlet pipe, and converts changes in temperature to pressure. It then transmits these to the top chamber of the diaphragm. The refrigerant pressure is transmitted to the diaphragms bottom chamber through the external equalizing pressure tube. The ball valve is connected to the diaphragm. The opening angle of the expansion valve is determined by the force acting on the diaphragm and the spring pressure. The expansion valve regulates the flow rate of the refrigerant. Accordingly, when a malfunction occurs to this expansion valve, both discharge and suction pressure decreases, resulting in insufficient cooling capacity of the evaporator.

The evaporator core with a laminate louver fin is a single-sided tank type where only one tank is provided under the core. A characteristic of the sensor is that the resistance decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases.
874RY00015
Legend (1) Evaporator Core (2) Expansion Valve
Electronic Thermostat
The thermostat consists of the duct sensor and thermostat assembly which functions electrically to reduce the noises being generated while the system is in operation. The electronic duct sensor is mounted at the evaporator core outlet and senses the surface temperature of the evaporator core. Temperature signals are input to the thermostat unit. This information is compared by the thermo assembly and results in the output to operate the A/C thermostat relay and turn the magnetic clutch ON or OFF to prevent evaporator freeze-up.
874RY00018
Legend (1) Duct Sensor (2) Evaporator Core (3) Thermostat Assembly
Refrigerant Line
Restriction in the refrigerant line will be indicated by: 1. Suction line A restricted suction line will cause low suction pressure at the compressor, low discharge pressure and little or no cooling. 2. Discharge line A restriction in the discharge line generally will cause the discharge line to leak. 3. Liquid line A liquid line restriction will be evidenced by low discharge and suction pressure and insufficient cooling.

Refrigerant flexible hoses that have a low permeability to refrigerant and moisture are used. These low permeability hoses have a special nylon layer on the inside.
852RS001
Legend (1) Reinforcement Layer (Polyester) (2) External Rubber Layer (3) Internal Rubber Layer (4) Resin Layer (Nylon)
Air Conditioning Parts
852R100004
Legend (1) Liquid Line (High-Pressure Pipe) (2) Clip (3) Discharge Line (High-Pressure Hose) (4) Pressure Switch
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Receiver/Drier Condenser Assembly Compressor Suction Line (Low-Pressure Hose) Evaporator Assembly
Wiring Diagram
D08RY00540
D08RY00542
D08RY00541
Diagnosis
Air Conditioning Cycle Diagnosis
Condition No cooling or insufficient cooling. Possible cause Magnetic clutch does not run. Compressor is not rotating properly. Drive belt is loose or broken. Compressor is not rotating properly. Magnetic clutch face is not clean and slips. Compressor is not rotating properly. Incorrect clearance between magnetic drive plate and pulley. Compressor is not rotating properly. Compressor oil leaks from the shaft seal or shell. Compressor is not rotating properly. Compressor is seized. Insufficient or excessive charge of refrigerant. Leaks in the refrigerant system. Correction Refer to Magnetic Clutch Diagnosis in this section. Adjust the drive belt to the specified tension or replace the drive belt. Clean the magnetic clutch face or replace. Adjust the clearance. Refer to Compressor in this section. Replace the compressor
Replace the compressor Discharge and recover the refrigerant. Recharge to the specified amount. Check the refrigerant system for leaks and repair as necessary. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. Recharge to the specified amount. Clean the condenser or replace as necessary. Repair the link unit. Replace the expansion valve. Check the electronic thermostat and replace as necessary. Check the evaporator core and replace or clean the core. Check the evaporator and duct connection, then repair as necessary. Refer to Fan Control Lever (Fan Switch) Diagnosis in this section.
Condenser is clogged or insufficient radiation. Temperature control link unit of the heat unit is defective. Unsteady operation due to a foreign substance in the expansion valve. Poor operation of the electronic thermostat. Insufficient velocity of cooling air. Evaporator clogged or frosted. Air leaking from the cooling unit or air duct. Blower motor properly. *For the execution of the charging and discharging operation in the table above, refer to Recovery, Recycling, Evacuating and Charging in this section. does not rotate
Checking The Refrigerant System With Manifold Gauge

Since Refrigerant-134a (HFC-134a) is used in the air conditioning system in this vehicle, be sure to use manifold gauges, charging hoses and other air conditioning service tools for HFC-134a when checking the refrigerant system. Conditions: D D D D D D D Run the engine at idle Air conditioning switch is ON Run the blower motor at HIGH position Temperature control lever set to MAX COLD Air source selector lever at CIRC Open the engine hood Close all the doors
Normal Pressure: D At ambient temperature: approx. 2530C (7786F). D At low-pressure side: approx. 147.1294.2 kPa (21.342.7 psi). D At high-pressure side: approx. 1372.91863.3 kPa (199.1270.2 psi). Refer to the table on the refrigerant pressure-temperature relationship. HFC-134a Pressure-Temperature Relationship Pressure (kPa) 36 67 104 147 196 255 314 392 471 569 677 785 912 1059 1216 (psi) 5.3 9.7 15 21 28 37 45 57 68 82 98 114 132 154 176 Temperature (C) 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 (F) 4.4 5 14 23 32 41 50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122

Connect The Manifold Gauge Low-pressure hose (LOW) Suction side High pressure hose (HI) Discharge side
901R100020
Legend (1) Low Side (2) High Side

Condition Discharge (High Gauge) Pressure Abnormally High Discharge (High Gauge) Pressure Abnormally High. Insufficient cooling. Discharge (High Gauge) Pressure Abnormally High. High pressure gauge drop. (After stopping A/C, the pressure drops approx. 196 kPa (28 psi) quickly) Discharge (High Gauge) Pressure Abnormally Low. Insufficient cooling Discharge (High Gauge) Pressure Abnormally Low. Low pressure gauge indicates vacuum. Discharge (High Gauge) Pressure Abnormally Low. Frost or dew on refrigerant line before and after the receiver/drier or expansion valve, and low pressure gauge indicates vacuum. Discharge (High Gauge) Pressure Abnormally Low. High and low pressure gauge balanced quickly. (After turned off A/C) Suction (Low Gauge) Pressure Abnormally High. Low pressure gauge (Low pressure gauge is lowered after condenser is cooled by water.) Suction (Low Gauge) Pressure Abnormally High. Low pressure hose temperature. (Low pressure hose temperature compressor around the com ressor refrigerant line connector is lower than around evaporator.) Suction (Low Gauge) Pressure Abnormally High. High and low pressure gauge balanced quickly. (After turned off A/C) Suction (Low Gauge) Abnormally Low. Insufficient cooling. Pressure Possible cause Condenser clogged or dirty. Cooling fan properly. does not operate Correction Clean the condenser fins Check the cooling fan operation. Discharge and recover refrigerant. Recharge to specified amount. Evacuate and charge refrigerant system.
Excessive refrigerant in system.
Air in system.
Insufficient refrigerant in system.
Check for leaks. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. Recharge to the specified amount. Replace the expansion valve.
Clogged or defective expansion valve.
Restriction caused by debris or moisture in the receiver/drier.
Check system for restriction and replace the receiver/drier.
Compressor seal defective Poor compression due to a defective compressor gasket. Excessive refrigerant in system.
Repair or replace the compressor. Repair or replace the compressor.
Discharge and recover refrigerant Recharge to specified amount.
Unsatisfactory valve operation due to defective temperature sensor of expansion valve. Expansion valve opens too long. Compressor gasket is defective.
Replace the expansion valve.
Replace the expansion valve. Repair or replace the compressor.
Check for leaks. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. Recharge to specified amount. Replace the expansion valve.
Suction (Low Gauge) Pressure Abnormally Low. Frost on the expansion valve inlet line
Expansion valve clogged.

Condition Suction (Low Gauge) Pressure Abnormally Low Receiver/drier inlet and outlet refrigerant line temperature. (A distinct difference in temperature develops.) Suction (Low Gauge) Pressure Abnormally Low. Expansion valve outlet refrigerant line. (Not cold and low pressure gauge indicates vacuum.) Suction (Low Gauge) Pressure Abnormally Low. When the refrigerant line is clogged or blocked, the low pressure gauge reading will decrease, or a vacuum reading may be shown. Suction (Low Gauge) Pressure Abnormally Low. Evaporator core is frozen. Suction (Low Gauge) and Discharge (High Gauge) Pressure Abnormally High. Insufficient cooling. Suction (Low Gauge) and Discharge (High Gauge) Pressure Abnormally High. Suction (Low) pressure hose (Not cold). Suction (Low Gauge) and Discharge (High Gauge) Pressure Abnormally Low. Insufficient cooling A/C Air Conditioning Possible cause Receiver/Drier clogged. Correction Replace the receiver/drier.
Expansion valve temperature sensor is defective.
Replace the expansion valve.
Clogged or blocked refrigerant line.
Replace refrigerant line.
Thermo switch defective.
Replace thermo switch.
Excessive refrigerant in system.
Discharge and recover the refrigerant, the Recharge to the specified amount. Clean the condenser fin. Evacuate and charge refrigerant.
Condenser clogged or dirty. Air in system.
Check for leaks. Discharge and recover refrigerant. Recharge to specified amount.
Magnetic Clutch Diagnosis
D08RY00547

When the air conditioning switch and the fan control knob (fan switch) are turned on with the engine running, current flows through the thermostat and the compressor relay to activate the magnetic clutch. The air conditioning can be stopped by turning of the air conditioning switch or the fan control knob (fan switch). However, even when the air conditioning is in operation, the electronic thermostat, the pressure switch or the Powertrain Control Module (PCM;V6-3.2L)/ Engine Control Module (ECM;L4-2.2L) is used to stop the air conditioning temporarily by turning off the magnetic clutch in the prearranged conditions to reduce the engine load which is being caused by the rise in the engine coolant temperature, and the acceleration of the vehicle, etc. For the inspection of the relays, switches and units in the table, refer to Individual Inspection in this section.
Magnetic Clutch Does Not Run

Step 1 2 3 Action Are No. EB-7 (10A) fuse and No. EB-5 (15A) / EB-6 (15A) fuse OK? Are heater (X-1), thermostat (X-8), and compressor (X-2) relays OK? Is pressure switch OK? Go to Step 4 4 5 Are air conditioning switch and fan control lever (Fan Switch) OK? 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (Engine is running). 2. Air conditioning switch and fan control lever (Fan Switch) ON. 3. Check to see if battery voltage is present at chassis side connector terminal No. E3-1. Is there a battery voltage? 6 Check to see if continuity between compressor side connector terminal No. E3-1 and the magnetic clutch side connector terminal. Is there a continuity? 7 Check to see it battery voltage is present at chassis side connector terminal No.I24-2. Is there a battery voltage? 8 Check to see if battery voltage is present at chassis side connector terminal No. C11-1 Is there a battery voltage? 9 1. Disconnect thermostat relay (X-8). 2. Check to see if battery voltage is present at the chassis side relay terminal NO. X8-2 Is there a battery voltage? 10 Check to see if voltage (approx. 10V) is present between chassis side relay terminal No. X8-5 and No. X8-3. Is there a battery voltage? 11 1. Reconnect thermostat relay and disconnect compressor relay (X-2). 2. Check to see if battery voltage is present at the chassis side relay terminal No. X2-5. Is there a battery voltage? 12 Check to see if continuity between chassis side relay terminal No. X2-1 and the chassis side connector terminal No. E3-1. Is there a continuity? Go to Step 13 Open circuit. Go to Step 12 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 17 Open circuit between No. EB-7 (10A) fuse and No. X2-5. Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 5 Yes Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 No Replace Replace Switch defective or insufficient refrigerant. Replace
Magnetic clutch defective.
Compressor defective. Open circuit between No.EB-7 (10A) fuse and No. I24-2. Open circuit between No.I24-1 and No. C11-1. Open circuit between No. EB-7 and C11-2 (10A) fuse and No.X8-2.
Magnetic Clutch Does Not Run (Contd)

Step 13 Action Check to see if battery voltage is present between chassis side relay terminal No. X2-2 and No. X2-4. Is there a battery voltage? 14 Check to see if battery voltage is present at chassis side relay terminal No. X2-2. Is there a battery voltage? 15 Check to see if battery voltage is present at chassis side connector terminal No. E21-F4 / C1-B14. Is there a battery voltage? Go to Step 16 Power train control module (PCM) defective. Refer to Driveability and Emissions in Engine section. Power train control module (PCM) defective. Refer to Driveability and Emissions in Engine section. Go to Step 14 Go to Step 15 Open circuit between No. EB-7 (10A) fuse and No. X2-2. Yes No
Open circuit between No. X2-4 and No. E21-F4 / C1-B14.
16
Check to see if continuity between chassis side relay terminal No. X8-1 and chassis side connector terminal No. E21-F45 / C3-E15. Is there a continuity?
Open circuit Open circuit between No.X8-5 and C11-2. Open circuit between No.I24-1 and No.C40-3. Open circuit between No. X8-3 and No. C40-1. Open circuit between No. C40-2 and No.I23-6 or poor ground (Fan Switch Ground Circuit).
17
Check to see if battery voltage is present at chassis side relay terminal No.X8-5. Is there a battery voltage? Go to Step 18 1. Reconnect thermostat relay. 2. Check to see if battery voltage is present at chassis side connector terminal No.C40-3. Is there a battery voltage? Go to Step 19 Check to see if battery voltage (appox 10V) is present at chassis side connector terminal No. C40-1. Is there a battery voltage? Go to Step 20
18
19
20
Check to see if continuity between chassis side connector terminal No. C40-2 and No.I23-6. Is there a continuity? Electronic thermostat defective.
Condenser Fan Diagnosis

While the air conditioning is ON, the cycling switch in the triple pressure switch senses the refrigerant pressure, and activates the condenser fan to improve the cooling capacity of the condenser when the refrigerant pressure exceeds a set pressure value. The condenser fan stops when the air conditioning is turned OFF or when the pressure goes down below the set pressure value.
D08RY00548
Condition Condenser fan does not run.
Possible cause
Correction Refer to Chart A. Refer to Chart B.
Chart A Condenser Fan Does Not Run

Step 1 2 3 Are 30A fuse OK? Is relay (X-11) OK? Is pressure switch OK? Go to Step 4 4 5 6 Is air conditioning switch OK? Is fan motor OK? 1. Disconnect condenser fan relay (X-11). 2. Check to see if battery voltage is present at the chassis side relay terminal NO. X11-2 Is there a battery voltage? 7 1. Reconnect condenser fan relay (X-11). 2. Air conditioning switch ON. 3. Check to see if battery voltage is present at chassis side connector terminal No.C9-3. Is there a battery voltage? 8 1. Air conditioning switch OFF. 2. Check to see if continuity between chassis side relay terminal No.X11-5 and the chassis side connector terminal No.C9-4. Is there a continuity? 9 Check to see if continuity between chassis side connector terminal No. C24-1 and chassis side relay terminal No.X11-1. Is there a continuity? Go to Step 9 Poor ground or open circuit between chassis side connector terminal No.X11-3 (or No.C24-2) and body ground (No.C16). Open circuit. Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Action Yes Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 No Replace Replace Switch defective or insufficient refrigerant. Replace Replace Open circuit between Condenser Fan fuse (30A) and No.X11-2.
Open circuit between I-24-1 and C9-3.
Open circuit.
Chart B Condenser Fan Does Not Stop

Step 1 Does condenser fan stop? Action 1. Air conditioning switch OFF. Triple pressure switch defective. Yes No Condenser fan relay (X11) defective.
Air Source Select Lever Diagnosis
D08RY00549
Condition FRESH mode inoperative RECIRC mode inoperative
Possible cause
Correction Refer to Chart A Refer to Chart B
Chart A: FRESH Mode Inoperative

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
1 2 3 4
Is the fuse EB-7 normal? Is C-16 grounded securely? Remove the intake actuator relay. Is the relay normal? Is there continuity between the intake actuator relay harness side connector C-42 terminal 4/5 and the ground C-16? 1. Set the HVAC control bezel to DEF/FOOT or DEF position. 2. Turn the starter switch on and keep the engine running. Is the battery voltage applied between the intake actuator harness side connector C-42 terminal 2 and the ground? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Go to Step 2
Replace the fuse Ground it securely Replace the relay Repair an open circuit
Go to Step 5
Approx. 12V
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 6
Disconnect the HVAC control bezel. Is the battery voltage applied between the bezel harness side connector I-33 terminal 6 and the ground? Approx. 12V Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7
Repair an open circuit between the fuse EB-7 and the connector I-33 terminal 6. Is the action complete? Go to Step 6 Repair or replace the bezel Repair an open circuit Repair an open circuit Repair an open circuit Repair an open circuit Is there continuity between the HVAC control bezel side connector terminal 5 and 6? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Is there continuity between the harness side connector I-33 terminal 5 and C-42 terminal 2? Disconnect the intake actuator connector C-39. Is the battery voltage applied between the harness side connector C-39 terminal 3 and the ground? Approx. 12V Approx. 12V Go to Step 11 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 13 Verify repair
9 10
11 12 13
Is there continuity between the harness side connector C-39 terminal 2 and C-42 terminal 1 Is there continuity between the harness side connector C39 terminal 4 and 5? Replace the intake actuator. Is the action complete?
Chart B: RECIRC Mode Inoperative

1 2 3 4
Is the fuse EB-7 normal? Is C-16 grounded securely? Is the Intake actuator relay normal? 1. Disconnect the Intake actuator connector C-39 2. Connect the battery positive terminal to the Intake actuator side connector terminal No.3 and the battery negative terminal to terminal No.6. 3. Connect the switch side connector terminal No.4 and No.5. Does the actuator work normally? Go to Step 5 Turn the Starter switch on. Is the battery voltage applied to the harness side connector C-39 terminal 3? Approx.12V Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Go to Step 2
Replace the fuse Ground it securely Replace the relay
Replace the actuator Repair an open circuit Repair an open circuit Repair or replace the control bezel Repair an open circuit
6 7
Is there continuity between harness side connector C42 terminal No.5 and the ground? 1. Remove the HVAC control bezel. 2. Move the air source select lever to REC position. Is there continuity between the control bezel side terminal No.3 and 8?
Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
8 9
Is there continuity between harness side connector C-39 terminal 6 and connector I-33 terminal 3? Repair an open circuit between connector I-33 terminal 8 and connector C-42 terminal 3. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
Air Conditioning System

Individual Inspection
Fan Control Knob (Fan Switch) And Air Conditioning (A/C) Switch
1. Check for continuity between the fan switch and the A/C switch side connector terminals.
Pressure Switch
1. Disconnect pressure switch connector and check for continuity between pressure switch side connector terminals (1) and (2).
875RY00009
D08RW061
Triple Pressure Switch (V6, A/T)

1. Disconnect the connector and check for continuity between pressure switch side connector terminals (1) and (2). 2. Reconnect the connector to activate the A/C switch, and check to see if there is continuity between the chassis side connector terminals (3) and (4) and the fan operates.
Heater (X-1), Thermostat (X-8), Condenser Fan (X-11) And Compressor (X-2) Relay
1. Disconnect relays and check for continuity and resistance between relay terminals. D For handling of these relays, refer to Heater Relay in this section.
875RY00010 825RS179
Condenser Fan
1. Disconnect the condenser fan connector. 2. Connect the battery positive terminal to the condenser fan side connector terminal No.C-24-1 and negative to the No.C-24-2. 3. Check that condenser fan is rotating correctly.
D When disconnecting or reconnecting the lines, use two wrenches to support the line fitting, to prevent from twisting or other damage. D Always install new O-rings whenever a connection is disassembled. D Before connecting any hoses or lines, apply new specified compressor oil to the O-rings. D When removing and replacing any parts which require discharging the refrigerant circuit, the operations described in this section must be performed in the following sequence: 1. Use the J-39500 (ACR4: HFC-134a Refrigerant Recovery / Recycling / Recharging / System) or equivalent to thoroughly discharge and recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove and replace the defective part. 3. After evacuation, charge the air conditioning system and check for leaks.
Repair Of Refrigerant Leaks

Refrigerant Line Connections Install new O-rings, if required. When disconnecting or connecting lines, use two wrenches to prevent the connecting portion from twisting or becoming damaged.
875RW010
General Repair Procedure

Precautions For Replacement or Repair of Air Conditioning Parts
There are certain procedures, practices and precautions that should be followed when servicing air conditioning systems: D Keep your work area clean. D Always wear safety goggles and protective gloves when working on refrigerant systems. D Beware of the danger of carbon monoxide fumes caused by running the engine. D Beware of discharged refrigerant in enclosed or improperly ventilated garages. D Always disconnect the negative battery cable and discharge and recover the refrigerant whenever repairing the air conditioning system. D When discharging and recovering the refrigerant, do not allow refrigerant to discharge too fast; it will draw compressor oil out of the system. D Keep moisture and contaminants out of the system. When disconnecting or removing any lines or parts, use plugs or caps to close the fittings immediately. Never remove the caps or plugs until the lines or parts are reconnected or installed.
852RS003
When connecting the refrigerant line at a block joint, securely insert the projecting portion of the joint portion into the connecting hole on the unit side and secure with a bolt. Apply the specified compressor oil to the O-rings prior to connecting.

CAUTION: Compressor (PAG) oil to be used varies according to the compressor model. Be sure to apply oil specified for the model of compressor. Insert the nut into the union. First, tighten the nut by hand as much as possible, then tighten the nut to the specified torque.
850RW002
850RW004
O-rings (2) must be fitted in the groove (1) of refrigerant line.
850RW003
Leak Check
Inspection of refrigerant leak
Refrigerant leak may cause an adverse effect not only on the performance and durability of each component of the airconditioner, but also on the global atmosphere. Therefore, it is most important to repair refrigerant leak when there is any leak found.
Inspection flow of refrigerant leak

Step 1 Action 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 2. Charge the refrigerant. Is there any refrigerant leak? 2 1. Operate the compressor for more than 5 minutes to raise the pressure on the high pressure side. Is there any refrigerant leak at high pressure components? Yes Repair refrigerant system. Repair refrigerant system. No
Go to Step 2. Compressor operation to be confirmed.
Inspection Steps
Check the components of airconditioner to see if there occurs any refrigerant leak along the flow of refrigerant. NOTE: D To avoid refrigerant leak detection error, avoid refrigerant vapor and cigarette smoke presence when performing the inspection. Also, select a location that is not susceptible to wind, in case refrigerant vapor is found it will not be blown off. D Inspection should be conducted chiefly on the pipe connections and sections where a marked oil contamination is found. When refrigerant is leaking, oil inside is also leaking at the same time. D It is possible to visually check the leak from inside the cooling unit. Follow the method below when performing the inspection. Remove the drain hose or resistor of the cooling unit, and insert a leak detector to see if there are signs of leakage. High Pressure Side 1. Discharger section of compressor. 2. Inlet/outlet section of condenser. 3. Inlet/outlet section of receiver driver. 4. Inlet section of cooling unit. Low Pressure Side 1. Outlet section of cooling unit. 2. Intake section of compressor.
Receiver driver D Pipe connection D Attaching section of pressure switch D Section around the sight glass Evaporator unit (cooling unit) D Pipe connections D Connections of expansion valve D Brazed sections of evaporator NOTE: D The evaporator and expansion valve are contained in the case. Remove the drain hose or the resistor of the cooling unit and insert a leak detector when checking for any leak. Flexible hose D Pipe connection D Caulking section of the hose D Hose (cracks, pinholes, flaws) Pipe D Pipe connection D Pipe (cracks, flaws) Charge valve NOTE: D The charge valve, which is used to connect the gauge manifold, is normally provided with a resin cap. When the valve inside gets deteriorated, refrigerant will leak out.
Major Checking Points of Refrigerant Leak

Compressor D Pipe connection D Sealing section of shaft D Mating section or cylinder Condenser D Pipe connection D Welds of condenser body
Leak at Refrigerant Line Connections

1. Check the torque on the refrigerant line fitting and, if too loose, tighten to the specified torque. D Use two wrenches to prevent twisting and damage to the line. D Do not over tighten. 2. Perform a leak test on the refrigerant line fitting.

3. If the leak is still present, discharge and recover the refrigerant from the system. 4. Replace the O-rings. D O-rings cannot be reused. Always replace with new ones. D Be sure to apply the specified compressor oil to the new O-rings. 5. Retighten the refrigerant line fitting to the specified torque. D Use two wrenches to prevent twisting and damage to the line. 6. Evacuate, charge and retest the system. WARNING: D SHOULD HFC-134A CONTACT YOUR EYE(S), CONSULT A DOCTOR IMMEDIATELY. D DO NOT RUB THE AFFECTED EYE(S). INSTEAD, SPLASH QUANTITIES OF FRESH COLD WATER OVER THE AFFECTED AREA TO GRADUALLY RAISE THE TEMPERATURE OF THE REFRIGERANT ABOVE THE FREEZING POINT. D OBTAIN PROPER MEDICAL TREATMENT AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. SHOULD THE HFC-134A TOUCH THE SKIN, THE INJURY MUST BE TREATED THE SAME AS SKIN WHICH HAS BEEN FROSTBITTEN OR FROZEN.
Leaks In The Hose

If the compressor inlet or outlet hose is leaking, the entire hose must be replaced. The refrigerant hose must not be cut or spliced for repair. 1. Locate the leak. 2. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the hose assembly. D Cap the open connections at once. 4. Connect the new hose assembly. D Use two wrenches to prevent twisting or damage to the hose fitting. D Tighten the hose fitting to the specified torque. 5. Evacuate, charge and test the system.
Refrigerant Recovery
The refrigerant must be discharged and recovered by using the J-39500 (ACR4:HFC-134a Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Recharging/System) or equivalent before removing or mounting air conditioning parts. 1. Connect the high and low charging hoses of the ACR4(or equivalent) as shown below.
Compressor Leaks
If leaks are located around the compressor shaft seal or shell, replace or repair the compressor.
Recovery, Recycling, Evacuation and Charging of HFC-134a

Air conditioning systems contain HFC-134a. This is a chemical mixture which requires special handling procedures to avoid personal injury. D Always wear safety goggles and protective gloves. D Always work in a well-ventilated area. Do not weld or steam clean on or near any vehicle-installed air conditioning lines or components. D If HFC-134a should come in contact with any part of the body, flush the exposed area with cold water and immediately seek medical help. D If it is necessary to transport or carry any container of HFC-134a in a vehicle, do not carry it in the passenger compartment. D If it is necessary to fill a small HFC-134a container from a large one, never fill the container completely. Space should always be allowed above the liquid for expansion. D HFC-134a and R-12 should never be mixed as their compositions are not the same. D HFC-134a PAG oil tends to absorb moisture more quickly than R-12 mineral oil and, therefore, should be handled more carefully. D Keep HFC-134a containers stored below 40C (104F).
901R100022
Legend (1) Low Side (2) High Side 2. Recover the refrigerant by following the Manufacturers Instructions. 3. When a part is removed, put a cap or a plug on the connecting portion so that dust, dirt or moisture cannot get into it.
Refrigerant Recycling
Recycle the refrigerant recovered by J-39500 (ACR4:HFC-134a Refrigerant Recovery / Recycling / Recharging / System) or equivalent. For the details of the actual operation, follow the steps in the ACR4(or equivalent) Manufacturers Instructions.
8. If no leaks are found, again operate the vacuum pump for 20 minutes or more. After confirming that the gauge manifold pressure is at 750 mmHg (30 inHg), close both hand valves. 9. Close positive shutoff valve. Stop the vacuum pump and disconnect the center hose from the vacuum pump.
Evacuation of The Refrigerant System
Charging The Refrigerant System

There are various methods of charging refrigerant into the air conditioning system. These include using J-39500 (ACR4:HFC-134a Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Recharging/System) or equivalent and direct charging with a weight scale charging station. Charging Procedure D ACR4(or equivalent) Method For the charging of refrigerant recovered by ACR4(or equivalent), follow the manufacturers instruction.
901R100023
Legend (1) Low Side (2) High Side NOTE: Explained below is a method using a vacuum pump. Refer to the ACR4(or equivalent) manufacturers instructions when evacuating the system with a ACR4(or equivalent). Air and moisture in the refrigerant will cause problems in the air conditioning system. Therefore, before charging the refrigerant, be sure to evacuate air and moisture thoroughly from the system. 1. Connect the gauge manifold. D High-pressure valve (HI) Discharge-side. D Low-pressure valve (LOW) Suction-side. 2. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. 3. Connect the center hose of the gauge manifold set to the vacuum pump inlet. 4. Operate the vacuum pump, open shutoff valve and then open both hand valves. 5. When the low-pressure gauge indicates approximately 750 mmHg (30 inHg), continue the evacuation for 5 minutes or more. 6. Close both hand valves and stop the vacuum pump. 7. Check to ensure that the pressure does not change after 10 minutes or more. D If the pressure changes, check the system for leaks. D If leaks occur, retighten the refrigerant line connections and repeat the evacuation steps.
901R100022
Legend (1) Low Side (2) High Side D Direct charging with a weight scale charging station method 1. Make sure the evacuation process is correctly completed. 2. Connect the center hose of the manifold gauge to the weight scale.

3. Connect the low pressure charging hose of the manifold gauge to the low pressure side service valve of the vehicle. 4. Connect the high pressure charging hose of the manifold gauge to the high pressure side service valve of the vehicle.
901RS144
6. Perform a system leak test: D Charge the system with approximately 200 g (0.44 lbs) of HFC-134a. D Make sure the high pressure valve of the manifold gauge is closed. D Check to ensure that the degree of pressure does not change. D Check for refrigerant leaks by using a HFC-134a leak detector. D If a leak occurs, recover the refrigerant. Repair the leak and start all over again from the first step of evacuation. 7. If no leaks are found, continue charging refrigerant to the air conditioning system. D Charge the refrigerant until the scale reading decreases by the amount of the charge specified. Specified amount: 650 g (1.43 lbs) D If charging the system becomes difficult: 1. Run the engine at idle and close all the vehicle doors. 2. Turn A/C switch ON. 3. Set the fan switch to its highest position. 4. Set the air source selector lever to CIRC. 5. Slowly open the low side valve on the manifold gauge set. WARNING: BE ABSOLUTELY SURE NOT TO OPEN THE HIGH PRESSURE VALVE OF THE MANIFOLD GAUGE. SHOULD THE HIGH PRESSURE VALVE BE OPENED, THE HIGH PRESSURE REFRIGERANT WOULD FLOW BACKWARD, AND THIS MAY CAUSE THE REFRIGERANT CONTAINER TO BURST.
901R100021
Legend (1) Low Side (2) High Side (3) Refrigerant Container (4) Weight Scale 5. Place the refrigerant container(3) up right on a weight scale(4). Note the total weight before charging the refrigerant. a. Open the refrigerant container valve. b. Open the low side vale on the manifold gauge set. Refer to the manufacturers instructions for a weight scale charging station.

8. When finished with the refrigerant charging, close the low pressure valve of the manifold gauge and container valve. 9. Check for refrigerant leaks.
Checking The A/C System

1. Run the engine and close all the vehicle doors. 2. Turn A/C switch ON, set the fan switch to its highest position. 3. Set the air source lever to CIRC, set the temperature lever to the full cool position. 4. Check the high and low pressure of the manifold gauge. D Immediately after charging refrigerant, both high and low pressures might be slightly high, but they settle down to the pressure guidelines shown below: D The ambient temperature should be between 2530C (7786F). D The pressure guideline for the high-pressure side is approximately 1372.91863.3 kPa (199.1270.2 psi). D The pressure guideline for the low-pressure side is approximately 147.1294.2 kPa (21.342.7 psi). D If an abnormal pressure is found, refer to Checking The Refrigerant System With Manifold Gauge in this section. 5. Put your hand in front of the air outlet and move the temperature control lever of the control panel to different positions. Check if the outlet temperature changes as selected by the control knob.
Compressor Assembly
Compressor Assembly and Associated Parts (6VD1)
852R100002
Legend (1) Compressor Bracket (2) Magnetic Clutch Harness Connector (3) Compressor (4) O-ring
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
To Evaporator Suction Line (Low-Pressure Hose) Discharge Line (High-Pressure Hose) To Condenser Serpentine Belt
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Discharge and recover refrigerant D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 3. Disconnect magnetic clutch harness connector.

4. Remove serpentine belt. D Move serpentine belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then remove serpentine belt. 4. Connect magnetic clutch harness connector.
New Compressor Installation

The new compressor is filled with 150cc (5.0fl.oz.)of compressor oil and nitrogen gas. When mounting the compressor on the vehicle, perform the following steps; 1. Gently release nitrogen gas from the new compressor. D Take care not to let the compressor oil flow out. D Inspect O-rings and replace if necessary.
850RY00005
Legend (1) Auto Tensioner (2) Idle Pulley (3) Cooling Fan Pulley (4) Serpentine Belt (5) Power Steering Oil Pump (6) Air Conditioner Compressor (7) Crankshaft Pulley (8) Generator 5. Disconnect refrigerant line connector. D When removing the line connector, the connecting part should immediately be plugged or capped to prevent foreign matter from being mixed into the line. 6. Remove compressor.
871RX033
2. Turn the compressor several times by hand and release the compressor oil in the rotor. 3. When installing on a new system, the compressor should installed as it is. When installing on a used system, the compressor should be installed after adjusting the amount of compressor oil. (Refer to Compressor in this section)
Installation
1. Install compressor. D Tighten the compressor fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 19 Nm (14 lbft) 2. Connect refrigerant line connector. D Tighten the refrigerant line connector fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 15 Nm (11 lbft) D O-rings cannot be reused. Always replace with new ones. D Be sure to apply new compressor oil to the O-rings when connecting refrigerant lines. 3. Install serpentine belt. D Move serpentine belt tensioner to loose side using wrench, then install serpentine belt to normal position.
871RX035
Compressor Assembly
Compressor Assembly and Associated Parts (X22SE)
852R100001
Legend (1) Compressor Bracket (2) Magnetic Clutch Harness Connector (3) Compressor (4) O-ring
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
To Evaporator Suction Line (Low-Pressure Hose) Discharge Line (High-Pressure Hose) To Condenser Serpentine Belt
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Discharge and recover refrigerant D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 3. Disconnect magnetic clutch harness connector.

4. Remove serpentine belt. D Move serpentine belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then remove serpentine belt.
New Compressor Installation

The new compressor is filled with 150cc (5.0fl.oz.)of compressor oil and nitrogen gas. When mounting the compressor on the vehicle, perform the following steps; 1. Gently release nitrogen gas from the new compressor. D Take care not to let the compressor oil flow out. D Inspect O-rings and replace if necessary.
850R100001
Legend (1) Power Steering Oil Pump (2) Air Conditioner Compressor (3) Tensioner (4) Crankshaft Pulley
871RX033
5. Disconnect refrigerant line connector. D When removing the line connector, the connecting part should immediately be plugged or capped to prevent foreign matter from being mixed into the line. 6. Remove compressor.
2. Turn the compressor several times by hand and release the compressor oil in the rotor. 3. When installing on a new system, the compressor should installed as it is. When installing on a used system, the compressor should be installed after adjusting the amount of compressor oil. (Refer to Compressor in this section)
Installation
1. Install compressor. D Tighten the compressor fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 19 Nm (14 lbft) 2. Connect refrigerant line connector. D Tighten the refrigerant line connector fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 15 Nm (11 lbft) D O-rings cannot be reused. Always replace with new ones. D Be sure to apply new compressor oil to the O-rings when connecting refrigerant lines. 3. Install serpentine belt. D Move serpentine belt tensioner to loose side using wrench, then install serpentine belt to normal position. 4. Connect magnetic clutch harness connector.
871RX035
Condenser Assembly
Condenser Assembly and Associated Parts
875RY00008
Legend (1) Engine Hood Lock (2) Pressure Switch Connector (3) Refrigerant Line
(4) Radiator Grille (5) Engine Hood Front End Stay (6) Condenser Assembly
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Discharge and recover refrigerant. D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 3. Remove radiator grille. 4. Remove engine hood front end stay. 5. Remove engine hood lock. D Apply setting mark to the engine hood lock fixing position before removing it. 6. Disconnect pressure switch connector. 7. Disconnect refrigerant line. D When removing the line connector, the connecting part should immediately be plugged or capped to prevent foreign matter from being mixed into the line. 8. Remove condenser assembly. D Handle with care to prevent damaging the condenser or radiator fin.
Installation
1. Install condenser assembly. D If installing a new condenser, be sure to add 30cc (1.0 fl. oz.) of new compressor oil to a new one. D Tighten the condenser fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) 2. Connect refrigerant line. D Tighten the inlet line connector fixing bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 15 Nm (11 lb ft) D Tighten the outlet line connector fixing bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) D O-rings cannot be reused. Always replace with new ones.

D Be sure to apply new compressor oil to the O-rings when connecting the refrigerant line. 3. Connect pressure switch connector. 4. Install engine hood lock. 5. Install engine hood front end stay. 6. Install radiator grille.
Condenser Fan Motor

Condenser Fan Motor and Associated Parts
875RY00007
Legend (1) Condenser Fan Assembly (2) Condenser Fan Motor
(3) Radiator Grille (4) Shroud (5) Fan
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Discharge and recover refrigerant. D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 3. Remove radiator grille. 4. Remove condenser fan assembly. D Disconnect the fan motor connector and remove the 4 fixing bolts. 5. Remove shroud. D Remove the 3 fixing nuts. D Loosen the condenser fixing nut and disconnect the fan motor connector from bracket. 6. Remove fan. D Remove the fan fixing C-ring and plate. 7. Remove condenser fan motor.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point. 1. Route the fan motor harness in its previous position, and fix it securely with clip and bracket.
Receiver / Drier
Receiver / Drier and Associated Parts Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. If installing a new receiver/drier, be sure to add 30cc (1.0 fl. oz.) of new compressor oil to a new one. 2. Put the receiver/drier in the bracket and connect with the refrigerant line. Check that no excessive force is imposed on the line. Fasten the bracket bolt to the receiver/drier. 3. Tighten the refrigerant line to the specified torque. Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) 4. O-rings cannot be reused. Always replace with new ones. 5. Be sure to apply new compressor oil to the O-rings when connecting the refrigerant line.
875R100004
Legend (1) Pressure Switch Connector (2) Refrigerant Line (3) Radiator Grille (4) Receiver / Drier (5) Bracket Bolt
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Discharge and recover refrigerant. D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 3. Remove radiator grille. 4. Disconnect pressure switch connector. 5. Disconnect refrigerant line. D When removing the line connected part, the connecting part should immediately be plugged or capped to prevent foreign matter from being mixed into the line. 6. Remove bracket bolt. 7. Remove receiver/drier. D Loosen the bolt, then, using care not to touch or bend the refrigerant line, carefully pull out the receiver/drier.
Pressure Switch
Pressure Switch and Associated Parts Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point: 1. O-ring cannot be reused. Always replace with a new one. 2. Be sure to apply new compressor oil to the O-ring when connecting pressure switch. 3. Tighten the pressure switch to the specified torque. Torque: 13 Nm (113 lb in)
875R100003
Legend (1) Pressure Switch Connector (2) Pressure Switch (3) Radiator Grille
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Discharge and recover refrigerant. D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 3. Remove radiator grille. 4. Disconnect pressure switch connector. 5. Disconnect pressure switch. D When removing the switch connected part, the connecting part should immediately be plugged or capped to prevent foreign matter from being mixed into the line.
Evaporator Assembly
Evaporator Assembly and Associated Parts
874RY00017
Legend (1) Resistor and Electronic Thermostat Connector (2) Drain Hose
(3) Refrigerant Line (4) Glove Box (5) Evaporator Assembly
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Discharge and recover refrigerant. D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 3. Remove glove box. 4. Disconnect resistor (2) and electronic thermostat connector (1).
874RY00021

5. Disconnect drain hose. 6. Disconnect refrigerant line. D Use a back-up wrench when disconnecting and reconnecting the refrigerant lines. D When removing the refrigerant line connected part, the connecting part should immediately be plugged or capped to prevent foreign matter from being mixed into the line. 7. Remove evaporator assembly.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. To install a new evaporator assembly, add 50cc (1.7 fl. oz.) of new compressor oil to the new core. 2. Tighten the refrigerant outlet line to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 3. Tighten the refrigerant inlet line to the specified torque. Torque: 15 Nm (11 lb ft) 4. O-rings cannot be reused. Always replace with new ones. 5. Be sure to apply new compressor oil to the O-rings when connecting lines.
Electronic Thermostat, Evaporator Core and/or Expansion Valve

Disassembled View
874RX001
Legend (1) Lining (2) Expansion Valve (3) O-ring (4) Evaporator Assembly (5) Lower Case
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Clip Attaching Screw Evaporator Core Electronic Thermostat Upper Case
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Discharge and recover refrigerant. D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 3. Remove evaporator assembly. D Refer to Evaporator Assembly in this section. 4. Remove the electronic thermostat sensor fixing clip. Pull the sensor from the evaporator assembly. 5. Remove clip. 6. Remove attaching screw. 7. Remove upper case. 8. Remove lower case. D Slit the case parting face with a knife since the lining is separated when removing the evaporator.
874RS006

D Lift to remove the upper case.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. The sensor is installed on the core with the clip. 2. The sensor must not interfere with the evaporator core. 3. When installing the new evaporator core, install the duct sensor (2) to the evaporator core (1) specified position with the clip in the illustration.
874R100002
9. Remove evaporator core.
874RY00016
874R100001
10. Remove expansion valve. D Tear off the insulator carefully. D Remove the sensor fixing clip. D Use a back-up wrench when disconnecting all refrigerant pipes.
4. O-rings cannot be reused. Always replace with new ones. 5. Be sure to apply new compressor oil to the O-rings when connecting lines. 6. Be sure to install the sensor and the insulator on the place where they were before. 7. To install a new evaporator core, add 50cc (1.7 fl. oz.) of new compressor oil to the new core. 8. Tighten the refrigerant lines to the specified torque. Refer to Main Data and Specifications for Torque Specifications in this section. 9. Apply an adhesive to the parting face of the lining when assembling the evaporator assembly.
Refrigerant Line
Refrigerant Line and Associated Parts
852R100003
Legend (1) Clip and Clamp (2) Liquid Line (High-Pressure Pipe)
(3) Discharge Line (High-Pressure Hose) (4) Radiator Grille (5) Suction Line (Low-Pressure Pipe)
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Discharge and recover refrigerant. D Refer to Refrigerant Recovery in this section. 3. Remove radiator grille. 4. Remove clip and clamp. 5. Disconnect liquid line (High-pressure pipe). 6. Disconnect suction line (Low-pressure pipe) using a back-up wrench.
7. Disconnect suction line (Low-pressure hose) using a back-up wrench. 8. Disconnect discharge line (High-pressure hose) using a back-up wrench. D Use a backup wrench when disconnecting and reconnecting the refrigerant lines. D When removing the refrigerant line connecting part, the connecting part should immediately be plugged or capped to prevent foreign matter from being mixed into the line.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point: 1. O-rings cannot be reused. Always replace with new ones. 2. Be sure to apply new compressor oil to the O-rings when connecting lines. 3. Tighten the refrigerant line to the specified torque. Refer to Main Data and Specifications for Torque Specifications in this section.
1A72
Main Data And Specifications

General Specifications
Heater Unit Temperature control Capacity Air flow HEATER CORE Type Element dimension Radiating area EVAPORATOR ASSEMBLY Capacity Air flow EVAPORATOR CORE Type Element dimension EXPANSION VALVE Type THERMOSTAT SWITCH Type Electronic thermostat OFF: Below 1.0 0.5 C (33.8 0.9 F) ON: Above 2.0 0.3 C (3.6 0.5 F) Parallel flow type 14.8 kw (12,700 Kcal./hr.) Assembly includes sight glass with dual (triple) pressure switch (V6) or pressure sensor (L4) 300 cc (10 fl.oz.) External pressure equalizer type Al-laminate louver fin type 235 mm (9.3 in.) 224 mm (8.8 in.) 60 mm (2.4 in.) 4.8 kw (4100 Kcal./hr.) 430 m!/hr Fin and tube type 167 mm (6.6 in.) Approx. 2.4 m 151 mm (5.9 in.) 35 mm (1.4 in.) Reheat air mix system 4.3 kw (3700 Kcal./hr.) 280 m!/h
CONDENSER Type Radiation performance RECEIVER/DRIER Type Internal volume PRESSURE SWITCH

Type Dual pressure switch Low pressure control ON: 205.9 29.4 kPa (29.9 4.3 psi) OFF: 176.5 24.5 kPa (25.6 3.6 psi) High pressure control ON: 2353.6 196.1 kPa (341.3 28.4 psi) OFF: 2942.0 196.1 kPa (426.6 28.4 psi) Triple pressure switch (V6, A/T) Low pressure control ON: 196.3 29.4 kPa (27.0 4.3 psi) OFF: 176.5 19.6 kPa (25.6 2.8 psi) Medium pressure control ON: 1471.0 98.1 kPa (213.3 14.2 psi) OFF: 1078.7 117.7 kPa (156.4 17.7 psi) High pressure control ON: 2353.6 196.1 kPa (341.3 28.4 psi) OFF: 2942.0 196.1 kPa (426.6 28.4 psi) REFRIGERANT Type Specified amount HFC-134a 700 g (1.54 lbs.)
1A73
Torque Specifications
852R100005
874RX006
Compressor
Service Precaution
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE HAS A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS). REFER TO THE SRS COMPONENT LOCATION VIEW IN ORDER TO DETERMINE WHETHER YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING. WHEN YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING, REFER TO THE SRS ON-VEHICLE SERVICE INFORMATION. FAILURE TO FOLLOW CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN POSSIBLE AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, PERSONAL INJURY, OR OTHERWISE UNNEEDED SRS SYSTEM REPAIRS. CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. ISUZU will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. ISUZU will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, do not use supplemental coatings (paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fastener joint interfaces. Generally, such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fastener. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specifications. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems. see if the drive plate can be rotated. If rotation is impossible, the compressor is seized. Low discharge pressure may be due to a faulty internal seal of the compressor, or a restriction in the compressor. Low discharge pressure may also be due to an insufficient refrigerant charge or a restriction elsewhere in the system. These possibilities should be checked prior to servicing the compressor. If the compressor is inoperative, but is not seized, check to see if current is being supplied to the magnetic clutch coil terminals. The compressor oil used in the HFC134a system compressor differs from that used in R12 systems. Also, compressor oil to be used varies according to the compressor model. Be sure to avoid mixing two or more different types of oil. If the wrong oil is used, lubrication will be poor and the compressor will seize or malfunction.
DKV-14G Type Compressor

DKV14G is equipped with fivevane rotary compressor. These vanes are built into a rotor which is mounted on a shaft. When the shaft rotates, the vanes built into the cylinder block assembly are operated by centrifugal force. This changes the volume of the spare formed by the rotor and cylinder, resulting in the intake and compression of the refrigerant gas. The discharge valve and the valve stopper, which protects the discharge valve, are built into the cylinder block assembly. There is no suction valve but a shaft seal is installed between the shaft and head; a trigger valve, which applies back pressure to the vanes, is installed in the cylinder block and a refrigerant gas temperature sensor is installed in the front head. The specified quantity of compressor oil is contained in the compressor to lubricate the various parts using the refrigerant gas discharge pressure.
General Description
When servicing the compressor, keep dirt or foreign material from getting on or into the compressor parts and system. Clean tools and a clean work area are important for proper service. The compressor connections and the outside of the compressor should be cleaned before any OnVehicle repair, or before removal of the compressor. The parts must be kept clean at all times and any parts to be reassembled should be cleaned with Trichloroethane, naphtha, kerosene, or equivalent solvent, and dried with dry air. Use only lint free cloths to wipe parts. The operations described below are based on bench overhaul with compressor removed from the vehicle, except as noted. They have been prepared in order of accessibility of the components. When the compressor is removed from the vehicle for servicing, the oil remaining in the compressor should be discarded and new compressor oil added to the compressor. Compressor malfunction will appear in one of four ways: noise, seizure, leakage or low discharge pressure. Resonant compressor noises are not cause for alarm; however, irregular noise or rattles may indicate broken parts or excessive clearances due to wear. To check seizure, deenergize the magnetic clutch and check to
871RX002
Diagnosis
Condition Noise from compression Possible cause Defective rotor/piston Defective shaft Noise from magnetic clutch Defective bearing Defective clutch Clearance between drive plate and pulley not standard Insufficient cooling Defective gasket Defective rotor/reed valve Defective trigger valve/suction valve Not rotating Defective rotor/piston Defective shaft Rotating parts insufficient oil Oil and/or gas leakage Defective seal Defective O-ring seized due to Correction Replace compressor/cylinder and shaft assembly Replace compressor/cylinder and shaft assembly Replace magnetic clutch Replace magnetic clutch Adjust the clearance or replace magnetic clutch Replace compressor/gasket Replace compressor/valve plate Replace compressor/suction valve Replace compressor/cylinder and shaft assembly Replace compressor/cylinder and shaft assembly Replace compressor Replace compressor/shaft seal Replace
Magnetic Clutch Assembly (DKV-14G Type)

Parts Location View
871RX025
Legend (1) Drive Plate bolt (2) Drive Plate (3) Snap Ring
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Pulley Assembly Field Coil Shim (s) Lead Wire
Removal
1. Using drive plate holder J-33939 (1) to prevent the drive plate from rotating, then remove the drive plate bolt.
2. Remove drive plate by using drive plate puller J-33944-A (2) and forcing screw J-33944-4 (1).
871RX023
3. Remove shim (s).

871RX029

4. Remove snap ring (1) by using snap ring pliers. 6. Loosen screw and disconnect the field coil wire connector.
871RY00029
5. Remove pulley assembly by using pulley puller pilot J-38424 (2), pulley puller J-8433 (1) and pulley puller leg J-24092-2 (3).
871RY00030
7. Loosen three screws and remove the field coil.
871RY00034 871RY00033
Inspection and Repair

Drive Plate
If the frictional surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, the drive plate and pulley should be replaced.
3. Install pulley assembly by using pulley installer J-33940-A (2) and drive handle J-8092 (1).
Pulley Assembly
Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If the frictional surface of the pulley shows signs of excessive grooving due to slippage, both the pulley and drive plate should be replaced. The frictional surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation.
Coil
Check coil for loose connector or cracked insulation.
Installation
1. Install field coil. D Align the located portion (1) of the field coil and compressor.
871RY00032
4. Install snap ring. 5. Install shim (s). 6. Install the drive plate to the compressor drive shaft together with the original shim(s)(1). Press the drive plate by hand.
871RY00035
D Tighten the mounting screw to the specified torque. Torque: 5Nm (44 lb in) 2. Connect the lead wire connector with the rubber hold and tighten the screw.
871RY00031

7. Install drive plate bolt by using drive plate holder J-33939 (1) to prevent the drive plate from rotating. D Check to be sure that the clutch clearance is between 0.3-0.6 mm (0.01-0.02 in.)
871RX029
D Tighten the drive plate bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 13 Nm (113 lb in) D After tightening the drive plate bolt, check to be sure the pulley rotates smoothly.
871RY00028
Legend (1) Dial Gauge (2) Pulley Assembly (3) Field Coil Wire Connector D If necessary, install adjusting shim(s). D Adjusting shims are available in the following thickness. Thickness D 0.1 mm (0.0039 in.) D 0.3 mm (0.0118 in.) D 0.5 mm (0.0197 in.)
Compressor Oil
Oil Specification
D The HFC-134a system requires a synthetic (PAG) compressor oil whereas the R-12 system requires a mineral compressor oil. The two oils must never be mixed. D Compressor (PAG) oil varies according to compressor model. Be sure to use oil specified for the model of compressor. D Always use HFC-134a Vane Rotary Type Compressor Oil (AIPDN Part No.2-90188-301-0) (Charging Amount) more than 90cc (3.0 fl.oz) less than 90 cc (3.0 fl.oz) (Collected Amount) same as collected amount 90cc (3.0 fl.oz)
7. Install the compressor, then evacuate, charge and perform the oil return operation. 8. Check system operation. When it is impossible to preform oil return operation, the compressor oil should be checked in the following order: 1. Discharge and recover refrigerant and remove the compressor. 2. Drain the compressor oil and measure the extracted oil with a measuring cylinder. 3. Check the oil for contamination. 4. If more than 90 cc (3.0 fl. oz.) of oil is extracted from the compressor, supply the same amount of oil to the compressor to be installed. 5. If the amount of oil extracted is less than 90 cc (3.0 fl. oz.), recheck the compressor oil in the following order. 6. Supply 90 cc (3.0 fl. oz.) of oil to the compressor and install it onto the vehicle. 7. Evacuate and recharge with the proper amount of refrigerant. 8. Perform the oil return operation. 9. Remove the compressor and recheck the amount of oil. 10. Adjust the compressor oil, if necessary. (Collected Amount) (Charging Amount) same as collected amount 90 cc (3.0 fl.oz)
Handling of Oil
D The oil should be free from moisture, dust, metal powder, etc. D Do not mix with other oil. D The water content in the oil increases when exposed to the air. After use, seal oil from air immediately. (HFC-134a Vane Rotary Compressor Oil absorbs moisture very easily.) D The compressor oil must be stored in steel containers, not in plastic containers.
Compressor Oil Check

The oil used to lubricate the compressor is circulating with the refrigerant. Whenever replacing any component of the system or a large amount of gas leakage occurs, add oil to maintain the original amount of oil. Oil Capacity Capacity total in system: 150cc (5.0 fl.oz) Compressor (Service parts) charging amount: 150 cc (5.0 fl.oz)
Checking and Adjusting Oil Quantity for Used Compressor

1. Perform oil return operation. Refer to Oil Return Operation in this section. 2. Discharge and recover refrigerant and remove the compressor. 3. Drain the compressor oil and measure the extracted oil with a measuring cylinder. 4. If the amount of oil drained is much less than 90 cc (3.0 fl. oz.), some refrigerant may have leaked out. Conduct a leak tests on the connections of each system, and if necessary, repair or replace faulty parts. 5. Check the compressor oil contamination. (Refer to Contamination of Compressor Oil in this section.) 6. Adjust the oil level following the next procedure below.
more than 90 cc (3.0 fl.oz) less than 90 cc (3.0 fl.oz)
Checking and Adjusting for Compressor Replacement

150 cc (5.0 fl.oz.) of oil is charged in compressor (service parts). So it is necessary to drain the proper amount of oil from the new compressor. 1. Perform oil return operation. 2. Discharge and recover the refrigerant and remove the compressor. 3. Drain the compressor oil and measure the extracted oil. 4. Check the compressor oil for contamination. 5. Adjust the oil level as required. (Amount of oil drained from used compressor) less than 90 cc (3.0 fl.oz) more than 90 cc (3.0 fl.oz) (Draining amount of oil from new compressor) Same as drained amount 90 cc (3.0 fl.oz)
Replacement of Component Parts

When replacing the system component parts, supply the following amount of oil to the component parts to be installed. (Component parts to be installed) Evaporator Condenser Receiver/dryer Refrigerant line (one piece) (Amount of Oil) 50 cc (1.7 fl. oz.) 30 cc (1.0 fl. oz.) 30 cc (1.0 fl. oz.) 10 cc (0.3 fl. oz.)
6. Evacuate, charge and perform the oil return operation. 7. Check the system operation.
Contamination of Compressor Oil

Unlike engine oil, no cleaning agent is added to the compressor oil. Even if the compressor runs for a long period of time (approximately one season), the oil never becomes contaminated as long as there is nothing wrong with the compressor or its method of use. Inspect the extracted oil for any of the following conditions: D The capacity of the oil has increased. D The oil has changed to red. D Foreign substances, metal powder, etc., are present in the oil. If any of these conditions exists, the compressor oil is contaminated. Whenever contaminated compressor oil is discovered, the receiver/drier must be replaced.
Oil Return Operation

There is close affinity between the oil and the refrigerant. During normal operation, part of the oil recirculates with the refrigerant in the system. When checking the amount of oil in the system, or replacing any component of the system, the compressor must be run in advance for oil return operation. The procedure is as follows: 1. Open all the doors and the engine hood. 2. Start the engine and air conditioning switch to ON and set the fan control knob at its highest position. 3. Run the compressor for more than 20 minutes between 800 and 1,000 rpm in order to operate the system. 4. Stop the engine.
Main Data and Specifications

COMPRESSOR Model Type Number of vanes Rotor diameter Stroke Displacement Maximum speed Direction of rotation Lubrication system Lubricant DKV-14G Vane rotary type 5 64 mm (2.52 in.) 8.75 mm (0.34 in.) 140 cc (47.3 fl.oz.) 7,000 rpm (up to 8,400 rpm) Clockwise (Front-side view) Pressure differential type R-134a Vane Rotary Type Compressor Oil (AIPDN Part No.2-90188-301-0) 150 cc (5.0 fl.oz.) Refrigerant Shaft seal Weight MAGNETIC CLUTCH Type Rated voltage Current consumption Starting torque Direction of rotation Weight Electromagnetic single-plate dry clutch 12 Volts D.C. 3.7 A 49 Nm (36 lbft) Clockwise (Front-side view) 3.0 kg (6.6 lbs.) Refrigerant-134a (R-134a), 700 g (1.54 lbs.) Lip type 3.5 kg
871RX028
Special Tools
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NO. TOOL NAME ILLUSTRATION TOOL NO. TOOL NAME
J-33939 Drive plate holder
J-33940-A Pulley installer
J-33944-A Drive plate puller
J-8092 Drive handle
J-33944-4 Forcing screw
J-38424 Pulley puller pilot
J-8433 Pulley puller
J-24092-2 Pulley puller leg
SECTION
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING SYSTEM
RODEO
2A1
STEERING
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Steering System Test . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bleeding The Power Steering System . . . . Bleeding Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flushing The Power Steering System . . . . Steering Wheel Free Play Inspection . . . . . Front End Alignment Inspection and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Steering Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Steering Unit and Associated Parts. Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation (4 2 Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation (4 4 Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Steering Unit Disassembled View . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Steering Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Steering Pump and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Steering Pump Disassembled View Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Gear Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Gear Assembly and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2A2 2A2 2A8 2A10 2A11 2A11 2A11 2A11 2A11 2A12 2A12 2A16 2A17 2A18 2A18 2A18 2A19 2A19 2A20 2A21 2A21 2A21 2A21 2A22 2A23 2A23 2A23 2A23 2A24 2A24 2A25 2A25 2A27 2A28 2A28
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplemental Restraint System Steering Wheel & Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inflator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inflator Module and Associated Parts . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering Wheel and Associated Parts . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combination Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combination Switch and Associated Parts . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lock Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lock Cylinder and Associated Parts . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering Column and Associated Parts . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insepction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplemental Restraint System Steering Wheel & Column and Associated Parts . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2A28 2A28 2A28 2A29 2A29 2A29 2A31 2A31 2A31 2A32 2A32 2A33 2A33 2A33 2A35 2A36 2A36 2A36 2A38 2A40 2A40 2A40 2A42 2A43 2A44 2A44 2A44 2A46 2A48 2A49 2A50 2A50 2A50
2A2
Service Precaution
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE HAS A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS). REFER TO THE SRS COMPONENT AND WIRING LOCATION VIEW IN ORDER TO DETERMINE WHETHER YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING. WHEN YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING, REFER TO THE SRS SERVICE INFORMATION. FAILURE TO FOLLOW WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN POSSIBLE AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, PERSONAL INJURY, OR OTHERWISE UNNEEDED SRS SYSTEM REPAIRS. CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. ISUZU will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. ISUZU will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fastener joint interfaces. Generally, such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fastener. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specifications. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems.
Diagnosis
Since the problems in steering, suspension, wheels and tires involve several systems, they must all be considered when diagnosing a complaint. To identify the symptom, always road test the vehicle first. Proceed with the following preliminary inspections and correct any defects which are found. 1. Inspect tires for proper pressure and uneven wear. 2. Raise vehicle on a hoist, then inspect front and rear suspension and steering linkage for loose or damaged parts. 3. Spin the front wheels. Inspect for out-of-round tires, out-of-balance tires, loose and/or rough hub unit bearings.
General Diagnosis
Condition Vehicle Pulls Possible Cause Mismatched or uneven tires. Tires not adequately inflated. Broken or sagging springs. Radial tire lateral force. Improper wheel alignment. Brake dragging in one wheel. Loose, bent or broken front or rear suspension parts. Faulty shock absorbers. Parts in power steering valve defective. Abnormal or Excessive Tire Wear Sagging or broken spring. Tire out of balance. Improper wheel alignment. Faulty shock absorber. Hard driving. Overloaded vehicle. Tires not rotated periodically. Worn Hub unit bearings. Wobbly wheel or tires. Tires not adequately inflated. Replace tire. Adjust tire pressure. Replace spring. Replace tire. Adjust wheel alignment. Repair brake. Tighten or replace the appropriate suspension part(s). Replace shock absorber. Replace power steering unit. Replace spring. Balance or replace tire. Check front end alignment. Replace shock absorber. Replace tire. Replace tire and reduce load. Replace or rotate tire. Replace Hub unit bearing. Replace wheel or tire. Adjust the pressure. Correction

Condition Wheel Hop Possible Cause Blister or bump on tire. Improper shock absorber operation. Shimmy, Shake or Vibration Tire or wheel out of balance. Worn steering linkage ball joints. Worn upper or lower end ball joints. Excessive wheel runout. Blister or bump on tire. Excessive loaded radial runout of tire/wheel assembly. Improper wheel alignment. Loose or worn steering linkage. Loose steering unit. Tires not adequately inflated. Loose, bent or broken front or rear suspension parts. Faulty shock absorber. Hub bearing preload misadjustment. Parts in power steering valve defective. Hard Steering Bind in steering linkage ball studs, upper or lower end ball joint. Improper wheel alignment. Tire not adequately inflated. Bind in steering column or shaft. Improper power steering system operation. Too Much Play In Steering Wheel bearings worn. Loose steering unit or linkage. Worn or loose steering shaft universal joint. Worn steering linkage ball joints. Worn upper or lower end ball joints. Poor Steering Wheel Returnability Bind in steering linkage ball joints. Replace tire. Replace shock absorber. Correction
2A3
Balance wheels or replace tire/or wheel. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Repair or replace wheel and/or tire. Replace tire. Replace tire or wheel. Check wheel alignment. Tighten or replace steering linkage. Tighten steering unit. Adjust tire pressure. Tighten or replace the appropriate suspension parts. Replace shock absorber. Adjust preload. Replace power steering unit. Replace ball joint. Check wheel alignment. Inflate tires to proper pressure. Repair or replace. Repair or replace. Refer to Power steering system diagnosis Replace wheel bearings. Retighten or repair. Retighten or replace steering shaft. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints.
Bind in upper or lower end ball joints. Replace ball joints. Bind in steering column and shaft. Bind in steering gear. Improper wheel alignment. Tires not adequately inflated. Loose steering wheel nut. Worn wheel bearing. Repair or replace. Check and repair steering gear. Adjust wheel alignment. Adjust tire pressure. Retighten. Replace.
2A4

Condition Possible Cause Worn, sticky or loose upper or lower ball joint, steering linkage ball joints or drive axle joints. Faulty shock absorbers. Worn upper or lower control arm bushing. Loose stabilizer bar. Loose wheel nuts. Replace. Correction
Abnormal Noise
Replace. Replace. Retighten bolts or replace bushings. Tighten nuts. Check for elongated wheel nut holes. Replace wheel if required. Retighten suspension bolts or nuts. Replace wheel bearing. Replace spring. Retighten mounting bolt. Replace steering unit. Replace tire or inflate tires to proper pressure. Replace ball joints. Replace shock absorber. Tighten or replace stabilizer bar or bushings. Replace spring (pairs). Adjust wheel alignment. Replace wheel bearings. Replace spring (pairs). Repair or replace caliper. Replace brake disc. Replace brake pads. Inflate tires to proper pressure.
Loose suspension bolts or nuts. Broken or otherwise damaged wheel bearings. Broken suspension springs. Loose steering unit. Faulty steering unit. Wandering or Poor Steering Stability Mismatched or unevenly worn tires. Loose steering linkage ball joints. Faulty shock absorbers. Loose stabilizer bar. Broken or sagging springs. Improper wheel alignment. Erratic Steering When Braking Worn wheel bearings. Broken or sagging springs. Leaking caliper. Warped discs. Badly worn brake pads. Tires are inflated unequally.
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING SYSTEM Power Steering System

There is some noise in all power steering systems. One of the most common is a hissing sound when the steering wheel is fully turned and the car is not moving. This noise will be most evident when the steering wheel is operated while the brakes are applied. There is no relationship between this noise and steering Condition Rattle or Chucking Noise
2A5
performance. Do not replace the valve unless the hissing" noise is extremely objectionable. A replacement valve will also have a slight noise, and is not always a cure for the condition.
Possible Cause Pressure hose touching other parts of vehicle. Tie rod ends loose. Loose steering unit mounting.
Correction Adjust hose position. Do not bend tubing by hand. Tighten or replace tie rod end. Tighten steering unit mounting. Adjust front wheel alignment. Replace front wheel bearing. Replace tie rod end. Replace ball joint.
Poor Return of Steering Wheel to Center
Improper front wheel alignment. Wheel bearing worn. Tie rod end binding. Ball joint binding.
Tight or frozen steering shaft bearing. Replace steering assembly. Sticky or plugged steering unit valve. Entry of air in the power steering system. Momentary Increase In Effort When Turning Wheel Fast To Right or Left Steering Wheel Surges or Jerks When Turning Especially During Parking Excessive Wheel Kick Back or Loose Steering High internal leakage. Power steering fluid level low. Insufficient pump pressure. Sticky steering unit valve. Power steering fluid level low. Air in system. Tie rod end loose. Wheel bearing worn. Hard Steering or Lack or Power Assist Sticky steering unit valve. Insufficient pump pressure. Excessive internal pump leakage. Excessive internal steering gear leakage. Power steering fluid level low. Unstable Engine Idling or Stalling When Turning Flush or replace steering unit. Bleed the system. Repair steering gear. Replenish fluid. Repair pump assembly. Flush or replace steering unit. Replenish fluid. Bleed hydraulic system. Tighten tie rod end. Replace wheel bearing. Flush or replace steering unit. Repair pump assembly. Repair pump assembly. Repair steering gear. Replenish fluid.
Pressure switch of the power Repair or replace. steering pump or its harness is faulty.
2A6

fluid level is low. If the fluid level is correct and the pump still foams, remove the pump from the vehicle and check housing for cracks. If the housing is cracked, replace the pump housing. Correction Replace relief valve. Replace side plate. Replace cam ring. Replace side plate or rotor. Repair or replace vanes and rotor. Replace side plate. Repair internal leakage. Replace housing. Repair steering unit or pump. Replace side plate or rotor. Replace cam ring. Bleed hydraulic system. Replenish fluid. Tighten mounting bolt. Repair or replace vanes and rotor. Repair rotor and vane. Replace relief valve. Replace side plate and vanes.
Power Steering Pump

Foaming milky power steering fluid, low fluid level, and possible low pressure can be caused by air in the fluid, or loss of fluid due to internal pump leakage. Check for leak and correct. Bleed the system. Extremely cold temperatures will cause air bubbles in the system if the Condition Low Pressure Due to Steering Pump
Possible Cause Relief valve sticking or inoperative. Side plate not flat against cam ring. Extreme wear of cam ring. Scored side plate or rotor. Vanes sticking in rotor slots. Cracked or broken side plate. High internal leakage.
Low Pressure Due to Steering Gear Growling Noise In Steering Pump
Scored housing bore. Excessive back pressure in hoses or steering unit caused by restriction. Scored side plate or rotor. Worn cam ring.
Groaning Noise In Steering Pump
Air in the fluid. Low fluid level. Pump mounting loose.
Rattling Noise In Steering Pump
Vanes sticking in rotor slots. Vane improperly installed.
Swishing Noise In Steering Pump Whining Noise In Steering Pump
Damaged relief valve. Scored side plate and vanes.
Steering Column Lock System

Condition Will Not Unlock Possible Cause Damaged lock cylinder. Damaged park lock cable. Will Not Lock Lock spring broken or worn. Damaged lock cylinder. Ignition switch stuck. Park lock cable damaged. Key Cannot be Removed in OFF-LOCK" Ignition switch is not set correctly. Damaged lock cylinder. Faulty shift lock mechanism. Correction Replace lock cylinder. Replace park lock cable. Replace lock cylinder. Replace lock cylinder. Repair or replace ignition switch. Replace park lock cable. Correct ignition switch. Replace lock cylinder. Repair or replace the shift lock mechanism.
Column
Condition Noise in Column Possible Cause Universal joint loose. Shaft lock snap ring not seated. Tighten joint. Place snap ring in proper position. Correction
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING SYSTEM Turn Signal Switch

This diagnosis covers mechanical problems only. Refer to Turn Signal Switch in Electrical section for electrical diagnosis. Condition Turn Signal Will Not Stay In Turn Position Possible Cause Foreign material or loose parts preventing movement of yoke. Broken or missing detent or canceling spring. Turn Signal Will Not Cancel Loose switch mounting screws. Switch or anchor bosses broken. Broken, missing or out of position detent, return or canceling spring. Worn canceling cam. Turn Signal Difficult To Operate Turn signal switch arm loose. Broken or distorted yoke. Loose or misplaced springs. Foreign parts and/or material. Loose turn signal switch mounting screws. Turn Signal Will Not Indicate Lane Change Broken lane change pressure pad or spring hanger. Broken, missing or misplaced lane change spring. Base of wire damaged. Hazard Switch Cannot Be Turned Off Foreign material between hazard switch to turn signal switch body. No Turn Signal Lights Electrical failure in chassis harness. Inoperative turn signal flasher unit. Loose chassis harness connector. Front or Rear Turn Signal Lights Not Flashing Burned-out or damaged turn signal bulb. High resistance connection to ground at bulb socket. Loose chassis harness connector. Correction Repair or replace signal switch. Replace signal switch. Tighten mounting screws. Replace turn signal switch. Replace turn signal switch. Replace turn signal switch. Tighten arm screw. Replace turn signal switch. Replace turn signal switch. Repair turn signal switch. Tighten mounting screws. Replace turn signal switch. Replace turn signal switch. Replace turn signal switch.
2A7
Repair or replace hazard switch. Refer to Electrical section. Replace flasher unit. Repair loose connector. Replace bulb. Repair bulb socket. Repair loose connector.
2A8
General Description
The hydraulic power steering system consists of a pump, an oil reservoir, a steering unit, a pressure hose and a return hose.
Power Steering Unit
A02RW001
The power steering unit is rack and pinion type. The toein angle can be adjusted by turning the rod on each side. The steering housing cannot be disassembled.
Hydraulic Pump
A02RX002

The hydraulic pump is vane-type design. The submerged pump has housing and internal parts that are inside the reservoir and operate submerged in oil. There are two bore openings at the rear of the pump housing. The larger opening contains the cam ring, pressure plate, thrust plate, rotor and vane assembly, and end plate. The smaller opening contains the pressure line union, flow control valve and spring. The flow control orifice is part of the pressure line union. The pressure relief valve inside the flow control valve limits the pump pressure.
2A9
Pressure Switch
When hydraulic pressure reaches 3430 kPa (500 psi), the pressure switch of the power steering pump closes causing the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to actuate the throttle valve, which increases the engine rpm to prevent the overload-induced engine speed slow down. The switch opens when hydraulic pressure drops to 2940 kPa (430 psi).
Steering Column
431RY00004
WARNING: TO AVOID DEPLOYMENT WHEN TROUBLE-SHOOTING THE SRS SYSTEM, DO NOT USE ELECTRICAL TEST EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS BATTERY-POWERED OR A/C-POWERED VOLT-METER, OHMMETER, ETC., OR ANY TYPE OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN SPECIFIED IN THIS MANUAL. DO NOT USE A NON-POWERED PROBE-TYPE TESTER.
INSTRUCTION IN THIS MANUAL MUST BE FOLLOWED CAREFULLY, OTHERWISE PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT. When servicing a vehicle equipped with Supplemental Restraint System, pay close attention to all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS. For detailed explanation about SRS, refer to Restraints section.
2A10

The column can be disassembled and reassembled. However, to insure the energy absorbing action, use only the specified screws, bolts and nuts as designated, and tighten them to the specified torque. Handle the column with care when it is removed from the vehicle. A sharp blow on the end of steering shaft or shift lever, or dropping the assembly could shear or loosen the fasteners that maintain column rigidity.
The steering column has three important features in addition to the steering function: 1. The column is energy absorbing, designed to compress in a front-end collision to minimize the possibility of injury to the driver of the vehicle. 2. The ignition switch and lock are mounted conveniently on the column. 3. With the column mounted lock, the ignition and steering operation can be locked to prevent theft of the vehicle.
Power Steering System Test

Test Procedure
C02RW001
Legend (1) Fluid Reservoir

E nd O FCallo ut
(2) (3)
Power Steering Unit Power Steering Pump
Test of fluid pressure in the power steering system is performed to determine whether or not the oil pump and power steering unit are functioning normally. The power steering system test is used to identify and isolate hydraulic circuit difficulties. Prior to performing this test, the following inspections and corrections, if necessary, must be made. Inspect pump reservoir for proper fluid level. Inspect pump belt for proper tension. Inspect pump driver pulley condition.
1. Place a container under the pump to catch the fluid when disconnecting or connecting the hoses. 2. With the engine NOT running, disconnect the pressure hose at the power steering pump and install power steering tester J-29877-A. The gage must be between the shutoff valve and pump. Open the shutoff valve. 3. Check the fluid level. Fill the reservoir with power steering fluid, to the Full" mark. Start the engine, then turn the steering wheel and momentarily hold it against a stop (right or left). Turn the engine off and check the connections at tester for leakage.

4. Bleed the system. Refer to Bleeding the Power Steering System in this section. 5. Start the engine and check the fluid level. Add power steering fluid if required. When the engine is at normal operating temperature, increase engine speed to 1500 rpm. CAUTION: Do not leave shutoff valve fully closed for more than 5 seconds, as the pump could become damaged internally. 6. Fully close the shutoff valve. Record the highest pressures. If the pressure recorded is within 93009800 kPa (13501420 psi), the pump is functioning within its specifications. If the pressure recorded is higher than 9800 kPa (1420 psi), the valve in the pump is defective. If the pressure recorded is lower than 9300 kPa (1350 psi), the valve or the rotating group in the pump is defective. 7. If the pump pressures are within specifications, leave the valve open and turn (or have someone else turn) the steering wheel fully in both directions. Record the highest pressures and compare with the maximum pump pressure recorded in step 6. If this pressure cannot be built in either side of the power steering unit, the power steering unit is leaking internally and must be replaced. 8. Shut the engine off, remove the testing gauge. 9. Reconnect the pressure hose, check the fluid level and make the needed repairs. 10. If the problem still exists, the steering and front suspension must be thoroughly examined.
2A11
Fluid Level
1. Run the engine until the power steering fluid reaches normal operating temperature, about 55 C (130 F), then shut the engine off. 2. Check the level of fluid in the reservoir. 3. If the fluid level is low, add power steering fluid as specified in General Information to the proper level and install the receiver cap. 4. When checking the fluid level after the steering system has been serviced, air must be bled from the system. Refer to Bleeding the Power Steering System in this section.
Bleeding The Power Steering System

When a power steering pump or unit has been installed, or an oil line has been disconnected, the air that has entered the system must be bled out before the vehicle is operated. If air is allowed to remain in the power steering fluid system, noisy and unsatisfactory operation of the system may result.
Bleeding Procedure
When bleeding the system, and any time fluid is added to the power steering system, be sure to use only power steering fluid as specified in General Information. 1. Fill the pump fluid reservoir to the proper level and let the fluid settle for at least two minutes. 2. Start the engine and let it run for a few seconds. Do not turn the steering wheel. Then turn the engine off. 3. Add fluid if necessary. 4. Repeat the above procedure until the fluid level remains constant after running the engine. 5. Raise and support the front end of the vehicle so that the wheels are off the ground. 6. Start the engine. Slowly turn the steering wheel right and left, lightly contacting the wheel stops. 7. Add power steering fluid if necessary. 8. Lower the vehicle, set the steering wheel at the straight forward position after turning it to its full steer positions 2 or 3 times, and stop the engine. 9. Check the fluid level and refill as required. 10. If the fluid is extremely foamy, allow the vehicle to set a few minutes, then repeat the above procedure.
Maintenance
The hydraulic system should be kept clean and fluid level in the reservoir should be checked at regular intervals and fluid added when required. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in General Information section for the type of fluid to be used and the intervals for filling. If the system contains some dirt, flush it as described in this section. If it is exceptionally dirty, the pump must be completely disassembled before further usage. (The steering unit cannot be disassembled.) All tubes, hoses, and fittings should be inspected for leakage at regular intervals. Fittings must be tight. Make sure the clips, clamps and supporting tubes and hoses are in place and properly secured. Power steering hoses and lines must not be twisted, kinked or tightly bent. Air in the system will cause spongy action and noisy operation. When a hose is disconnected or when fluid is lost, for any reason, the system must be bled after refilling. Refer to Bleeding the Power Steering System in this section. Inspect belt for tightness. Inspect pulley for looseness or damage. The pulley should not wobble with the engine running. Inspect hoses so they are not touching any other parts of the vehicle. Inspect fluid level and fill to the proper level.
Flushing The Power Steering System

1. Raise and support the front end of the vehicle off the ground until the wheels are free to turn. 2. Remove the fluid return line at the pump inlet connector and plug the connector port on the pump. Position the line toward a large container to catch the draining fluid. 3. While running the engine at idle, fill the reservoir with new power steering fluid. Turn the steering wheel in both directions. Do not contact or hold the steering wheel to the wheel stops. This will cause the pump to go to pressure relief mode, which may cause a sudden fluid overflow at the reservoir.
2A12

Camber: This illustration shows view from the front of the vehicle.
4. Install all the lines and hoses. Fill the system with new power steering fluid and bleed the system as described in Bleeding The Power Steering System. Operate the engine for about 15 minutes. Remove the pump return line at the pump inlet and plug the connection on the pump. While refilling the reservoir, check the draining fluid for contamination. If foreign material is still evident, replace all lines, disassemble and clean or replace the power steering system components. Do not re-use any drained power steering fluid.
Steering Wheel Free Play Inspection
480RS004
Camber is the vertical tilting inward or outward of the front wheels. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheels tilt inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt measured in degrees from the vertical is called the camber angle (1). If camber is extreme or unequal between the wheels, improper steering and excessive tire wear will result. Negative camber causes wear on the inside of the tire, while positive camber causes wear to the outside.
430RX003
1. With the tires in the straight-ahead position, check the amount of steering wheel play by turning the wheel in both directions until the tires begin to move. NOTE: The wheel free play should be checked with the engine running. Free play: 0 30mm (0 1.18in) 2. Also check the steering wheel for play and looseness in the mount by moving it back and forth and sideways. When test driving, check for hard steering, steering shimmy and tendency to pull to one side.
Caster: This illustration shows view from the side of the vehicle.
Front End Alignment Inspection and Adjustment

General Description
Front End Alignment" refers to the angular relationship between the front wheels, the front suspension attaching parts and the ground. Proper front end alignment must be maintained in order to insure efficient steering, good directional stability and to prevent abnormal tire wear. The most important factors of front end alignment are wheel toe-in, wheel camber and axle caster.
480RS005

Caster (1) is the vertical tilting of the wheel axis either forward or backward (when viewed from the side of the vehicle). A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). On the short and long arm type suspension you cannot see a caster angle without a special instrument, but if you look straight down from the top of the upper control arm to the ground, the ball joints do not line up (fore and aft) when a caster angle other than 0 degree is present. With a positive angle, the lower ball joint would be slightly ahead (toward the front of the vehicle) of the upper ball joint center line. Toe-in: This illustration shows view from the top of the vehicle.
2A13
6. Inspect the wheel and tires for run-out. Refer to Wheel Replacement in Wheel and Tire System section. 7. Inspect the trim height. If not within specifications, the correction must be made before adjusting caster. 8. Inspect the steering unit for looseness at the frame. 9. Inspect shock absorbers for leaks or any noticeable noise. Refer to Shock Absorber in Suspension section. 10. Inspect the control arms or stabilizer bar attachment for looseness. Refer to Suspension section . 11. Inspect the front end alignment using alignment equipment. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 12. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Trim Height Adjustment

Adjust the trim height (1) by means of the adjusting bolt on the height control arms. CAUTION: When adjusting front end alignment, be sure to begin with trim height first, as it may change other adjusted alignments.
480RS003
Toe-in is the measured amount the front wheels are turned in. The actual amount of toe-in is normally a fraction of a degree. Toe-in is measured from the center of the tire treads or from the inside of the tires. The purpose of toe-in is to insure parallel rolling of the front wheels and to offset any small deflections of the wheel support system which occurs when the vehicle is rolling forward. Incorrect toe-in results in excessive toe-in and unstable steering. Toe-in is the last alignment to be set in the front end alignment procedure.
450RS003
Inspection
Before making any adjustments affecting caster, camber or toe-in, the following front end inspection should be made. 1. Inspect the tires for proper inflation pressure. Refer to Main Data and Specifications in Wheel and Tire System section. 2. Make sure that the vehicle is unladen condition (With no passenger or loading). 3. Make sure that the spare tire is installed at the normal position. 4. Inspect the front wheel bearings for proper adjustment. Refer to Front Hub and Disc Overhaul in Suspension section. 5. Inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends. If excessive looseness is noted, correct before adjusting. Refer to Steering Linkage in this section.
410RS001
2A14

NOTE: Difference of the caster shim front/rear thickness should be 3.6mm (0.142in) or less. Overall thickness of caster shim and camber shim should be 10.8mm (0.425in) or less. Tighten the fulcrum pin bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 152Nm 112 (lbft)
1. Check and adjust the tire inflation pressures. 2. Park the vehicle on a level ground and move the front of the vehicle up and down several times to settle the suspension. 3. Make necessary adjustment with the adjusting bolt on the height control arms. Trim height: 119 5mm (4.69 0.2in)
Camber Adjustment
The camber angle can be adjusted by means of the camber shims (2) installed in position between the chassis frame (1) and fulcrum pins. Camber angle: 0 30' 30'
Caster Adjustment
The caster angle can be adjusted by means of the caster shims (1) installed between the chassis frame (2) and fulcrum pins. Caster angle: 2 30' 1
King pin inclination: 12 30'
CAUTION: Left and right side must be equal within 30'.
CAUTION: Left and right side must be equal within 30'.
450RW006
450RW007
450RS002
450RS005

NOTE: Overall thickness of caster shim and camber3 shim should be 10.8mm (0.425in) or less. Tighten the fulcrum pin bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 152Nm (112lbft) Position of shims Front side When added Caster shim When removed Camber shim Rear side When removed When added When removed When added When added When removed Camber angle Decreases Increases Unchanged Unchanged Decreases Increases
2A15
Caster angle Decreases Increases Decreases Increases Unchanged Unchanged
Toe-in Adjustment
1. To adjust the toe-in angle, loosen the lock nuts (2) on the tie rod (1) and turn the tie rod. Turn both rods the same amount, to keep the steering wheel centered . Toe-in: 0 to +2mm (0 to +0.08in)
433RW003
2. Tighten the lock nut to the specified torque. Torque: 98Nm (72lbft)
2A16

General Specification
Caster Camber King pin inclination Toe-in Max. steering angle inside outside 2 30' 0 12 30' 1 30' 30'
0 to +2mm (0 to +0.08in) 32.6 (+0 30' to 2 30' ) 31.8
Torque Specification
E02RX001
2A17
Special Tools
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NO. TOOL NAME
J29877A Tester; Power steering
J39213 Adapter; Power steering tester
2A18
Power Steering Unit

Power Steering Unit and Associated Parts
440R100001
Legend (1) Bracket (2) Transfer Gear Assembly

E nd O FCallo ut
(3) (4) (5)
Joint Assembly Power Steering Unit Assembly Crossmember
Removal
1. Remove the stone guard. 2. Remove the transfer gear assembly and universal joint assembly. Make a setting mark across the coupling flange and steering unit to ensure reassembly of the parts in the original position. 3. Drain power steering fluid. 4. Remove the tie rod end assembly from knuckle. Use tie rod end remover J29107.
433RW002

5. Disconnect the feed line and return line from steering unit. Remove the clips on the crossmember and frame. Wire the power steering line to frame. NOTE: Take care to prevent foreign matter from entry when disconnect the power steering line. 6. Remove the power steering unit. 4 2 model: 1. Remove the power steering unit from the crossmember.
2A19
Installation (4 2 Model)
1. Install power steering unit to crossmember. Tighten fixing bolt to specified torque. Torque: 116Nm (85lbft) 2. Connect the feed line and return line. Torque: 25Nm (18lbft) 3. Install tie-rod end assembly to knuckle. Torque: 118Nm (87lbft) 4. a Align the setting marks made at removal. Install the universal joint assembly to the transfer gear assembly. Temporary tighten the universal joint bolt. Install the universal joint assembly to the power steering unit assembly. Temporary tighten the universal joint bolt. Install the transfer gear assembly with the shim to frame.
435RW001
4 4 model: 1. Remove the torsion bar. Refer to Front Suspension in Suspension section. 2. Remove the lower control arm bolt (Frame side). Refer to Front Suspension in Suspension section. 3. Apply a setting mark across the crossmember and frame so parts can be reassembled in their original position.
Torque: 54Nm (40lbft) d Tighten the universal joint bolt to the specified torque.
Torque: 31Nm (23lbft) 5. Install the stone guard. 6. Bleed the system. Refer to Bleeding the Power Steering System in this section.
Installation (4 4 Model)
1. Install power steering unit to crossmember. Tighten fixing bolt to specified torque. Torque: 116Nm (85lbft) 2. Install power steering unit with crossmember to frame by aligning the setting marks made when removing. Tighten crossmember mounting bolt to specified torque. Torque: 173Nm (128lbft) 3. Install lower control arm bolt. Refer to Front Suspension in Suspension section.
431RX013
4. Remove the crossmember fixing bolt. 5. Remove the power steering unit with the crossmember.
4. Install torsion bar. Refer to Front Suspension in Suspension section. 5. Connect the feed line and return line. Torque: 25Nm (18lbft) 6. Install tie-rod end assembly to knuckle. Torque: 118Nm (87lbft)
2A20
7. a

8. Install the stone guard. 9. Bleed the system. Refer to Bleeding the Power Steering System in this section.
Align the setting marks made at removal. Install the universal joint assembly to the transfer gear assembly. Temporary tighten the universal joint bolt. Install the universal joint assembly to the power steering unit assembly. Temporary tighten the universal joint bolt. Install the transfer gear assembly with the shim to frame.
Torque: 54Nm (40lbft) d Tighten the universal joint bolt to the specified torque.
Torque: 31Nm (23lbft)
Power Steering Unit Disassembled View
440R100002
Legend (1) Tie-rod End (2) Lock Nut (3) Clip (4) Bellows (5) Band
E nd O FCallo ut
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
Tie-rod Assembly Tab Washer Oil Line Valve Housing Assembly Mounting Rubber Dust Cover
2A21
Disassembly
NOTE: The valve housing is made of aluminum and care should be exercised when clamping in a vise, etc. to prevent distortion or damage. 1. Loosen lock nut and remove tierod end. 2. Remove clip (3) and band (5), then remove bellows (4). 3. Remove tie-rod assembly. To remove, move the boot toward the tie-rod end, then remove tab washer. 4. Remove oil line, mounting rubber and dust cover.
Reassembly
1. Install mounting rubber and dust cover (If removed). 2. Install oil line. Torque: 13N m (113lbin) 3. Install tie-rod assembly with tab washer. Apply grease to ball joint, install tie-rod and tab washer, then tighten to specified torque. Torque: 83Nm (61lbft) After tightening, bend tab washer against width across flat of inner ball joint. 4. Apply a thin coat of grease to the shaft for smooth installation. Then install bellows. 5. Install band and clip. 6. Install tie-rod end and tighten lock nut. Torque: 98Nm (72lbft)

Inspect the following parts for wear, damage or any abnormal conditions.
Tie-rod End
If looseness or play is found when checked by moving the end of ball joint at tie-rod end, replace tie-rod end.
Tie-rod Assembly
If the resistance is insufficient or play is felt when checked by moving the ball on the tie-rod, replace the tie-rod assembly.
Rubber Parts
If wear or damage is found through inspection, replace with new ones.

Power Steering unit Type Rack stroke Lock to lock Rack and pinion 152mm (5.98in) 3.64
2A22
440R100003
Special Tools
J29107 Tie rod end remover
2A23
Power Steering Pump

Power Steering Pump and Associated Parts
436RX001
Legend (1) Pump Assembly (2) Hose, Suction

E nd O FCallo ut
(3) (4)
Hose, Flexible Bolt
Removal
1. Remove the drive belt. 2. Place a drain pan below the pump. 3. Disconnect the suction hose. 4. Disconnect the flexible hose. 5. Remove the power steering fixing bolt and remove the pump assembly.
Installation
1. Install the pump assembly to the pump braket, tighten the fixing bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 46Nm (34lbft) 2. Install the flexible hose. Tighten the eye bolt to specified torque. Torque: 54Nm (40lbft) 3. Install the drive belt. 4. Connect the suction hose, then fill and bleed system. Refer to Bleeding the Power Steering System in this section.
2A24
Power Steering Pump Disassembled View
442RX001
Legend (1) Bolt (2) Suction Pipe (3) O-ring (4) Shaft Assembly (5) Oil Seal (6) Front Housing (7) O-ring (8) O-ring (9) Side Plate (10) Rotor and Vane (11) Pin
E nd O FCallo ut
(12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22)
Cam Pump Cartridge Assembly O-ring Snap Ring Rear Housing Bolt Spring Relief Valve O-ring Connector Pressure Switch Assembly
Disassembly
1. Clean the oil pump with solvent (plug the discharge and suction ports to prevent the entry of solvent). Be careful not to expose the oil seal of shaft assembly to solvent. 2. Remove the bolt, suction pipe and O-ring. 3. Remove the connector, O-ring, relief valve and spring. 4. Remove the pressure switch assembly.
5. Remove the bolt, rear housing and O-ring. 6. Remove the snap ring. 7. Remove the shaft assembly. 8. Remove the oil seal. CAUTION: When removing the oil seal, be careful not to damage the housing. 9. Remove the pump cartridge assembly from the front housing. 10. Remove two O-rings.
2A25

Make all necessary adjustments, repairs, and part replacements if wear, damage, or other problems are discovered during inspection.
Sliding faces of the vane should be free from wear. (Particularly the curved face at the tip that contact with the cam should be free from wear and distortion). When part replacement becomes necessary, the pump cartridge should be replaced as a subassembly.
Rotor
Cam
The inner face of the arm should have a uniform contact pattern without a sign of step wear. When part replacement becomes necessary, the pump cartridge should be replaced as a subassembly.
Side Plate
The sliding faces of parts must be free from step wear (more than 0.01 mm), which can be felt by the finger nail. The parts with minor scores may be reused after lapping the face.
Relief Valve
The sliding face of the valve must be free from burrs and damage. The parts with minor scores may be reused after smoothing with emery cloth (#800 or finer).
Shaft
442RS002
Check that the groove in the vane is free from excessive wear and that the vane slides smoothly. When part replacement becomes necessary, the pump cartridge should be replaced as a subassembly.
Oil seal sliding faces must be free from a step wear which can be felt by the finger nail. Bushing fitting face must be free from damage and wear.
O-ring, Oil Seal, Snap Ring

Be sure to discard used parts, and always use new parts for installation. Prior to installation, lubricate all seals and rings with power steering fluid.
Vane
Pressure Switch
Check the switch operation as follows: With engine idling and A/C on, turn the steering wheel fully to the left; compressor should interrupt and engine idle speed will increase. Shut off A/C and again turn steering fully to the left; engine idle will increase. If system fails to function properly, disconnect connector at the pressure switch and repeat system check while testing continuity across disconnected SW connector.
Reassembly
1. Install oil seal to front housing. Be sure to discard used oil seal, and always use new parts for installation.
442RS003
CAUTION: When installing the oil seal, be careful not to damage the oil seal contacting surface of the housing. 2. Install shaft assembly.
2A26
3. Install the vanes to roter with curved face in contact with the inner wall of cam.
442RS005
4. Install rotor and vanes to cam. 5. Install pin to front housing. 6. Install two new O-rings to front housing. Be sure to discard used O-ring. 7. Install side plate. CAUTION: When installing side plate, be careful not to damage its inner surface. Damaged side plate may cause poor pump performance, pump seizure or oil leakage. 8. Install pump cartridge assembly to front housing. 9. Install snap ring to shaft end. 10. Install rear housing with a new O-ring. Be sure to discard used O-ring. Then install bolt and tighten it to specified torque. Torque: 24Nm (17lbft) 11. Install suction pipe with a new O-ring. Be sure to discard used O-ring. Then install bolt and tighten it to specified torque. Torque: 10Nm (87lbin) 12. Install relief valve and spring. 13. Install connector with a new O-ring. Be sure to discard used O-ring. Tighten the connector to specified torque. Torque: 59Nm (43lbft) 14. Install pressure switch assembly and tighten it to specified torque. Torque: 18Nm (13lbft)
2A27

Oil pump Type Operating fluid Vane ATF DEXRONIII
E02RX004
2A28
Transfer Gear Assembly

Transfer Gear Assembly and Associated Parts
441R200001
Legend (1) Transfer Gear Assembly (2) Bolt, Universal Joint (Steering Shaft Side) (3) Fixing Bolt Nut
E nd O FCallo ut
(4) (5) (6)
Shim Universal Joint Assembly Bolt, Universal Joint (Steering Unit Side)
Removal
1. Apply a setting mark across the universal joint (steering shaft side) and transfer gear assembly to reassemble the parts in their original position. 2. Remove universal joint bolt (steering shaft side). 3. Apply a setting mark across the universal joint assembly and the transfer gear assembly to reassemble the parts in their original position. 4. Remove universal joint bolts (both of transfer gear assembly side and power steering unit assembly side). 5. Loosen fixing bolts and nut and remove transfer gear assembly with shim.
Installation
1. Install the transfer gear assembly to the universal joint (steering shaft side) align the setting marks made at removal. Then tighten the universal joint bolt. 2. Install the universal joint assembly to the power steering unit assembly align the setting marks made at removal. Then temporary tighten the universal joint bolt (both of transfer gear assembly side and power steering unit assembly side). 3. Install the transfer gear assembly with the shim to frame. Torque: 54Nm (40lbft)

The transfer gear assembly cannot be disassembled. If damage or abnormal condition are found, replace the entire transfer gear assembly.
4. Tighten the universal joint bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 31Nm (23lbft)
2A29
Supplemental Restraint System Steering Wheel & Column

Service Precaution
This steering wheel and column repair section covers the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) steering column. The following repair procedures are specific to SRS components. When servicing a vehicle equipped with Supplemental Restraint System, pay close attention to all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS. For detailed explanation about SRS, refer to Restraints section. WARNING: THIS VEHICLE HAS A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS). REFER TO THE SRS COMPONENT AND WIRING LOCATION VIEW IN ORDER TO DETERMINE WHETHER YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING. WHEN YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING, REFER TO THE SRS SERVICE INFORMATION. FAILURE TO FOLLOW WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN POSSIBLE AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, PERSONAL INJURY, OR OTHERWISE UNNEEDED SRS SYSTEM REPAIRS. SAFE HANDLING OF INFLATOR MODULES REQUIRES FOLLOWING THE PROCEDURES DESCRIBED BELOW FOR BOTH LIVE AND DEPLOYED MODULES. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED WHEN HANDLING A DEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY (AIR BAG). AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY (AIR BAG) SURFACE MAY CONTAIN A SMALL AMOUNT OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A BY-PRODUCT OF THE DEPLOYMENT REACTION, THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN AND EYES. MOST OF THE POWDER ON THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY (AIR BAG) IS HARMLESS. AS A PRECAUTION, WEAR GLOVES AND SAFETY GLASSES WHEN HANDLING A DEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY, AND WASH YOUR HANDS WITH MILD SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOU. NEVER CARRY AN AIR BAG ASSEMBLY BY THE WIRES OR CONNECTOR ON THE UNDERSIDE OF MODULE. IN THE CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. WHEN PLACING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY ON A BENCH OR OTHER SURFACE, ALWAYS FACE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER UP, AWAY FROM THE SURFACE. NEVER REST A STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY ON THE STEERING WHEEL WITH THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY FACE DOWN AND COLUMN VERTICAL. THIS IS NECESSARY SO THAT A FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. OTHERWISE, PERSONAL INJURY COULD RESULT. TO AVOID DEPLOYMENT WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING THE SRS SYSTEM, DO NOT USE ELECTRICAL TEST EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS BATTERY-POWERED OR A/C-POWERED VOLT-METER, OHMMETER, ETC., OR ANY TYPE OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN SPECIFIED IN THIS MANUAL. DO NOT USE A NON-POWERED PROBE-TYPE TESTER. INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL MUST BE FOLLOWED CAREFULLY, OTHERWISE PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT.
SRS Connectors
CAUTION: The special yellow color connectors are used for supplemental restraint system-air bag circuit. When removing the cable harness disconnect the connector by unlocking at two places, outside (1) and inside (2). Do not pull the wires or disconnection may occur. When connecting the double lock type SRS connector, insert the connector completely then lock the connector. Imperfect locking may cause the SRS circuit to malfunction.
2A30 Removal
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING SYSTEM Installation

To install the connector, hold the soket insulator(1) and insert it. The cover insulator slides and connector will be locked. Do not hold the cover insulator(2).
To remove the connector, hold the cover insulator(1) and pull it. The cover insulator slides and lock will be released. Do not hold the socket insulator(2).
827RW028
827RW027
2A31
Inflator Module
Inflator Module and Associated Parts
827RW071
Legend (1) Horn Lead (2) SRS Connector

E nd O FCallo ut
(3) (4)
Fixing Bolt Inflator Module
Removal
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK". 3. Disconnect the battery " terminal cable, and wait at least 5 minutes. 4. Disconnect the yellow 2-way SRS connector located under the steering column. 5. Loosen the inflator module fixing bolt from behind the steering wheel assembly using a TORX driver or equivalent until the inflator module can be released from steering assembly .
827RW070
2A32

The inflator module consists of a cover, air bag, inflator, and retainer. Inspect the inflator module mainly for the following: Check for holes, cracks, severe blemishes and deformation on the cover. Check that the retainer is not deformed. Check for defects such as damage and breakage in the lead wire for the igniter. Replace the inflator module if a defect is found during inspection.
6. Disconnect the yellow 2-way SRS connector and horn lead located behind the inflator module.
Installation
1. Install inflator module. 2. Support the module and carefully connect the module connector and horn lead. NOTE: Pass the lead wire through the tabs on the plastic cover (wire protector) of inflator to prevent lead wire from being pinched.
827RW073
7. Remove inflator module.
3. Tighten bolts to specified torque. Torque: 9Nm (78lbin)

WARNING: THE INFLATOR MODULE SHOULD ALWAYS BE CARRIED WITH THE TRIM COVER AWAY FROM YOUR BODY AND SHOULD ALWAYS BE LAID ON A FLAT SURFACE WITH THE URETHANE SIDE UP. THIS IS NECESSARY BECAUSE FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR CUSHION TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. OTHERWISE, PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT .
4. Connect the yellow 2-way SRS connector located under the steering column. 5. Connect the battery " terminal cable. 6. Set ignition to ON" while watching warning light. Light should flash 7 times and then go off. If lamp does not operate correctly, refer to Restraints section.
827RW072
2A33
Steering Wheel
Steering Wheel and Associated Parts
827RW069
Legend (1) Horn Lead (2) SRS Connector

E nd O FCallo ut
(3) (4) (5)
Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Fixing Nut Inflator Module
CAUTION: Once the steering column is removed from the vehicle, the column is extremely susceptible to damage. Dropping the column assembly on its end could collapse the steering shaft or loosen the slide block which maintains column rigidity. Leaning on the column assembly could cause the jacket to bend or deform. Any of the above damage could impair the column's collapsible design. If it is necessary to remove the steering wheel, use only the specified steering wheel puller. Under no conditions should the end of the shaft be hammered upon, as hammering could loosen the slide block which maintains column rigidity.
Removal
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK". 3. Disconnect the battery ground cable, and wait at least 5 minutes. 4. Disconnect the yellow 2-way SRS connector located under the steering column.
2A34

8. Remove steering wheel fixing nut. 9. Apply a setting mark (1) across the steering wheel and shaft so parts can be reassembled in their original position, then remove steering wheel.
5. Loosen the inflator module fixing bolt from behind the steering wheel assembly using a TORX driver or equivalent until the inflator module can be released from steering assembly.
827RW070
430RW021
6. Disconnect the yellow 2-way SRS connector located behind the inflator module. WARNING: THE INFLATOR MODULE SHOULD ALWAYS BE CARRIED WITH THE TRIM COVER AWAY FROM YOUR BODY AND SHOULD ALWAYS BE LAID ON A FLAT SURFACE WITH THE URETHANE SIDE UP. THIS IS NECESSARY BECAUSE FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR CUSHION TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. OTHERWISE, PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT.
10. Move the front wheels to the straight ahead position, then use steering wheel remover J29752 to remove the steering wheel. CAUTION: Never apply force to the steering wheel shaft using a hammer or other impact tools in an attempt to remove the steering wheel. The steering shaft is designed as an energy absorbing unit.
430RX005
827RW073
7. Disconnect horn lead.
2A35
Installation
1. Install steering wheel by aligning the setting marks made when removing. CAUTION: Never apply force to the steering wheel shaft using a hammer or other impact tools in an attempt to remove the steering wheel. The steering shaft is designed as an energy absorbing unit. 2. Tighten the steering wheel fixing nut to the specified torque. Torque: 34Nm (25lbft) 3. Connect horn lead. 4. Support the module and carefully connect the SRS connector. NOTE: Pass the lead wire through the tabs on the plastic cover (wire protector) of inflator to prevent lead wire from being pinches. 5. Tighten bolts to specified torque. Torque: 9Nm (78lbin) 6. Connect the yellow 2-way SRS connector located under the steering column. 7. Connect the battery " terminal cable. 8. Turn the ignition switch to the ON" position and observe the warning lamp. The lamp should flash 7 times. If the lamp does not operate correctly, refer to Restraints section.
2A36
Combination Switch
Combination Switch and Associated Parts
431RX006
Legend (1) Steering Column Cover (2) Steering Wheel (3) Inflator Module
E nd O FCallo ut
(4) (5) (6)
Combination Switch and SRS Coil Assembly Instrument Panel Lower Cover Driver Knee Bolster (reinforcement)
Removal
CAUTION: The wheels of the vehicle must be straight ahead and the steering column in the LOCK" position before disconnecting the steering wheel. Failure to do so will cause the coil assembly to become uncentered which will cause damage to the coil assembly. 5. Remove the engine hood opening lever, then remove instrument panel lower cover. 6. Remove the driver knee bolster (reinforcement).

7. Loosen the inflator module fixing bolt from behind the steering wheel assembly using a TORX driver or equivalent until the inflator module can be released from steering assembly. Disconnect the yellow 2-way SRS connector and horn lead located behind the inflator module, then remove inflator module.
2A37
WARNING: The INFLATOR MODULE SHOULD ALWAYS BE CARRIED WITH THE TRIM COVER AWAY FROM YOUR BODY AND SHOULD ALWAYS BE LAID ON A FLAT SURFACE WITH THE URETHANE SIDE UP. THIS IS NECESSARY BECAUSE FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR CUSHION TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. OTHERWISE, PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT.
827RW070
827RW072
8. Apply a setting mark (1) across the steering wheel and shaft so parts can be reassembled in their original position. Move the front wheels to the straight ahead position, then use steering wheel remover J29752 to remove the steering wheel.
827RW073
430RW021
2A38
CAUTION: Never apply force to the steering wheel shaft using a hammer or other impact tools in an attempt to remove the steering wheel. The steering shaft is designed as an energy absorbing unit.
Installation
1. Install combination switch and SRS coil assembly. After installation of combination switch assembly, connect the combination switch wiring harness connector and the SRS 2-way connector located under the steering column. Then turn the SRS coil counter clockwise to full, return about 3 turns and align the neutral mark. CAUTION: Turn the SRS coil counter clockwise until some resistance is felt, or damage may occur to the SRS coil.
430RX005
9. Remove steering column cover. 10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors located under the steering column then remove combination switch and SRS coil assembly.
825RW016
825RW288

2. When installing the steering column cover, be sure to route each wire harness as illustrated so that the harnesses do not catch on any moving parts.
2A39
825RW017
Legend (1) Steering Column Cover (2) Starter Switch Harness (3) Combination Switch Harness (4) Inflator Module Harness
E nd OFCa llou t
3. Align the setting marks made when removing then install steering wheel. CAUTION: Never apply force to the steering wheel shaft using a hammer or other impact tools in an attempt to remove the steering wheel. The steering shaft is designed as an energy absorbing unit. 4. Tighten the steering wheel fixing nut to the specified torque. Torque: 34Nm (25lbft) 5. Support the inflator module and carefully connect the SRS connector and horn lead. NOTE: Pass the lead wire through the tabs on the plastic cover (wire protector) of inflator to prevent lead wire from being pinched. 6. Tighten bolts to specified torque. Torque: 9Nm (78lbin) 7. Install driver knee bolster (reinforcement). 8. Install instrument panel lower cover then Install the engine hood opening lever. 9. Connect the SRS connector. 10. Connect the battery -" terminal cable. 11. Turn the ignition switch to the ON" position and observe the warning lamp. The lamp should flash 7 times. If the lamp does not operate correctly, refer to Restraints section.
2A40
Lock Cylinder
Lock Cylinder and Associated Parts
431RX005
Legend (1) Inflator Module (2) Steering Wheel (3) Steering Column Cover (4) Combination Switch and SRS Coil Assembly (5) Snap Ring
E nd O FCallo ut
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Cushion Rubber Lock Cylinder Assembly Instrument Panel Lower Cover Driver Knee Bolster (reinforcement) Shift Lock Cable (for A/T)
Removal
CAUTION: The wheels of the vehicle must be straight ahead and the steering column in the "LOCK" position before disconnecting the steering wheel. Failure to do so will cause the coil assembly to become uncentered which will cause damage to the coil assembly. 5. Remove the engine hood opening lever and steering lower cover. 6. Remove driver knee bolster (reinforcement).

7. Loosen the inflator module fixing bolt from behind the steering wheel assembly using a TORX driver or equivalent until the inflator module can be released from steering assembly.
2A41
9. Apply a setting mark (1) across the steering wheel and shaft so parts can be reassembled in their original position.
430RW021 827RW070
8. Disconnect the yellow 2-way SRS connector and horn lead located behind the inflator module.
10. Move the front wheels to the straight ahead position, then use steering wheel remover J29752 to remove the steering wheel. CAUTION: Never apply force to the steering wheel shaft using a hammer or other impact tools in an attempt to remove the steering wheel. The steering shaft is designed as an energy absorbing unit.
827RW073
430RX005
2A42

14. Remove snap ring. 15. Remove cushion rubber. 16. Remove shift lock cable (for A/T). 17. Disconnect the starter switch harness connector located under the steering column then remove lock cylinder assembly.
WARNING: THE INFLATOR MODULE SHOULD ALWAYS BE CARRIED WITH THE TRIM COVER AWAY FROM YOUR BODY AND SHOULD ALWAYS BE LAID ON A FLAT SURFACE WITH THE URETHANE SIDE UP. THIS IS NECESSARY BECAUSE FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR CUSHION TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. OTHERWISE, PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT.
Installation
1. Install lock cylinder assembly. 2. Install shift lock cable (for A/T). 3. Install cushion rubber. 4. Install snap ring. 5. Install Combination switch and SRS coil assembly. After installation of combination switch assembly, connect the combination switch wiring harness connector and the SRS 2-way connector located under the steering column. 6. Turn the SRS coil counter clockwise to full, return about 3 turns and align the neutral mark. CAUTION: Turn the SRS coil counter clockwise until some resistance is felt, or damage may occur to the SRS coil.
827RW072
11. Remove steering column cover. 12. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors located under the steering column. 13. Remove the combination switch assembly with SRS coil.
825RW016
825RW288

7. When installing the steering column cover, be sure to wire (through each harness) as illustrated so that the harnesses starter switch, combination switch and SRS coil may not catch wiring.
2A43
System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch to the ON" position and observe the warning lamp. The lamp should flash 7 times. If the lamp does not operate correctly, refer to Restraints section.
825RW017
E nd OFCa llou t
8. Install steering wheel by aligning the setting marks made during removal. CAUTION: Never apply force to the steering wheel shaft using a hammer or other impact tools in an attempt to remove the steering wheel. The steering shaft is designed as an energy absorbing unit. 9. Tighten the steering wheel fixing nut to the specified torque. Torque: 34Nm (25lbft) 10. Support inflator module and carefully connect the SRS connector and horn lead, then install inflator module. NOTE: Pass the lead wire through the tabs on the plastic cover (wire protector) of inflator to prevent lead wire from being pinched. 11. Tighten fixing bolts to specified torque. Torque: 9Nm (78lbin) 12. Install driver knee bolster (reinforcement). 13. Install instrument panel lower cover, then install the engine hood opening lever. 14. Connect the yellow 2-way SRS connector located under the steering column. 15. Connect the battery ground cable.
2A44
Steering Column
Steering Column and Associated Parts
431RX004
Legend (1) Inflator Module (2) Steering Wheel (3) Steering Column Cover (4) Combination Switch and SRS Coil Assembly (5) Snap Ring (6) Cushion Rubber
E nd O FCallo ut
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Lock Cylinder Assembly Shift Lock Cable (For A/T) Steering Column Assembly Second Steering Shaft Instrument Panel Lower Cover Driver Knee Bolster (reinforcement)
Removal
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK". 3. Disconnect the battery ground cable, and wait at least 5 minutes.
4. Disconnect the yellow 2-way SRS connector located under the steering column. CAUTION: The wheel of the vehicle must be straight ahead and the steering column in the LOCK" position before disconnecting the steering column from the steering gear. Failure to do so will cause the SRS coil assembly to become uncentered which will cause damage to the SRS coil assembly.

5. Remove the engine hood opening lever, then remove instrument panel lower cover. 6. Remove driver knee bolster (reinforcement). 7. Loosen the inflator module fixing bolt from behind the steering wheel assembly using a TORX driver or equivalent until the inflator module can be released from steering assembly.
2A45
10. Apply a setting mark (1) across the steering wheel and shaft so parts can be reassembled in their original position. Move the front wheels to the straight ahead position, then use steering wheel remover J29752 to remove the steering wheel.
430RW021
827RW070
8. Disconnect the yellow 2-way SRS connector and horn lead located behind the inflator module. 9. Remove inflator module. WARNING: THE INFLATOR MODULE SHOULD ALWAYS BE CARRIED WITH THE TRIM COVER AWAY FROM YOUR BODY AND SHOULD ALWAYS BE LAID ON A FLAT SURFACE WITH THE URETHANE SIDE UP. THIS IS NECESSARY BECAUSE FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR CUSHION TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. OTHERWISE, PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT.
430RX005
11. Remove steering column cover. 12. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors located under the steering column.
827RW072
2A46
13. Remove the combination switch assembly with SRS coil.
Insepction
If the abnormal conditions are found through inspection, replace the steering column assembly.
Column Capsule
Check capsules on steering column bracket assembly; all must be securely seated in bracket slots and checked for any loose conditions when pushed or pulled by hand.
825RW288
14. Remove snap ring. 15. Remove cushion rubber. 16. Remove shift lock cable (For A/T). 17. Disconnect the starter switch harness connector located under the steering column, then remove lock cylinder assembly. 18. Apply a setting mark (1) across the universal joint and second steering shaft to reassemble the parts in their original position, then remove steering column assembly and second shaft. NOTE: A setting mark can be easily made if the shaft is withdrawn a little by loosening the steering shaft universal joint.
431RW030
Check clearance between capsule and bracket. If must be within 1mm (0.039 in).
431RW031
431RW009
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING SYSTEM Column Tube

Check for collapes by measuring the distance as shown in the figure. Standard distance: 162.2-165.8 mm (6.386-6.528 in)
2A47
Sheared Injected Plastic Pin

Check the sheared injected plastic pins for any loose conditions or damage.
431RY00006
431RY00005
Legend (1) NON TILT TYPE (2) TILT TYPE

E nd OFC allou t

E nd O FCallo ut
Shaft Length
Check the shaft length from the upper end of the slide joint to the end of the shaft. If column length is not in specifications, steering column should be replaced. Standard length: NON TILT TYPE: 540.9 542.9mm (21.295 21.374in) TILT TYPE: 291.7 295.7mm (11.484 11.642in)
Column Universal Joint for Tilt Mechanism

Check steering column assembly for any resistance by rotating the universal joint. If resistance is felt then replace the steering column assembly.
431R200007

E nd OFC allou t
2A48

10. Install combination switch and SRS coil assembly. After installation of combination switch assembly, connect the combination switch wiring harness connector and the SRS 2-way connector located under the steering column. 11. Turn the SRS coil counter clockwise to full, return about 3 turns and align the neutral mark. CAUTION: Turn the SRS coil counter clockwise until a resistance is felt or damage to the SRS coil may occur from over turning.
Shaft Universal Joint (Lower End)

If the resistance is felt when checked by rotate the joint, replace the steering column assembly.
Shaft Bellows Pipe

Use a straightedge to inspect the shaft bellows pipe for straightness. Replace if the clearance is more than the specifications. Standard: Less than 1mm (0.039 in)
431RW035
825RW016
Tilt Mechanism
Tilt mechanism should moves smoothly. While locked the tilt mechanism, be sure the steering column latch securely by pushing the steering wheel upward and downward.
12. When installing the steering column cover, be sure to route each wire harness as illustrated so that the harnesses do not catch any moving parts.
Installation
1. Install steering column assembly and second steering shaft. 2. Align the setting marks on the universal joint and second steering shaft made during removal. 3. Tighten the steering column fixing bolt (dash panel) to the specified torque. Torque: 20Nm (14lbft) 4. Tighten the steering column fixing nuts (cross beam) to the specified torque. Torque: 17Nm (12lbft) 5. Tighten the universal joint to the specified torque. Torque: 31Nm (23lbft) 6. Install lock cylinder assembly. 7. Install shift lock cable (For A/T). 8. Install cushion rubber. 9. Install snap ring.
825RW017
E nd OFCa llou t

13. Install steering wheel and align the setting marks made when removing. CAUTION: Never apply force to the steering wheel shaft using a hammer or other impact tools in an attempt to remove the steering wheel. The steering shaft is designed as an energy absorbing unit. 14. Tighten the steering wheel fixing nut to the specified torque. Torque: 34Nm (25lbft) 15. Support the module and carefully connect the module connector and horn lead, then install inflator module. NOTE: Pass the lead wire through the tabs on the plastic cover (wire protector) of inflator to prevent lead wire from being pinched. 16. Tighten bolts to specified torque. Torque: 9Nm (78lbin) 17. Install driver knee bolster (reinforcement). 18. Install instrument panel lower cover. 19. Install the engine hood opening lever. 20. Connect the yellow 2-way SRS connector and horn lead located under the steering column. 21. Connect the battery ground cable.
2A49
System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON" and observe if the warning lamp flashes 7 times. If the warning lamp does not operate correctly, refer to the Restraints section.
2A50
Supplemental Restraint System Steering Wheel & Column and Associated Parts
430RY00002
Special Tools
J29752 Steering wheel remover
SECTION
FRONT SUSPENSION
RODEO
3C1
SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
Front Suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Whell and Tire System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intelligent Suspension Control. . . . . . . . . . . . 3C 3D 3E 3F
FRONT SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shock Absorber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shock Absorber and Associated Parts . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stabilizer Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stabilizer Bar and Associated Parts . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torsion Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torsion Bar and Associated Parts . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knuckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knuckle and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C1 3C2 3C2 3C6 3C6 3C6 3C6 3C6 3C7 3C7 3C7 3C7 3C7 3C8 3C8 3C8 3C9 3C9 3C11 3C11 3C11 3C12 3C12 Upper Control Arm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upper Control Arm and Associated Parts. . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower Control Arm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower Control Arm and Associated Parts. . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upper Ball Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upper Ball Joint and Associated Parts . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower Ball Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower Ball Joint and Associated Parts . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C13 3C13 3C13 3C14 3C14 3C16 3C16 3C16 3C17 3C18 3C19 3C19 3C19 3C20 3C20 3C21 3C21 3C21 3C22 3C22 3C23 3C25
Service Precaution
3C2
FRONT SUSPENSION
the frame and the lower control arms. The lower portion of each shock absorber is attached to the lower control arm. The upper portion of each shock absorber extends through a frame bracket and is secured with two rubber bushings, two retainers and a nut. Ball joint assemblies are bolted to the outer end of the upper and lower control arm and are attached to the steering knuckle. The inner ends of the upper control arm have pressed in bushings. Bolts, passing through the bushing, attach the control arm to the frame. The inner ends of the lower control arm are attached to the frame by bolts passing through the bushings. Side roll of the front suspension is controlled by a spring steel stabilizer bar. It is mounted in rubber bushings, which are held to the frame by brackets. The ends of the stabilizer bar are connected to the lower control arms by links.
General Description
The front suspension is designed to allow each wheel to compensate for changes in the road surface level without greatly affecting the opposite wheel. Each wheel is independently connected to the frame by a steering knuckle, ball joint assemblies, and upper and lower control arms. The front wheels are held in proper relationship to each other by two tie-rods which are connected to steering arms on the knuckles, and to a steering unit. All models have a front suspension system consisting of control arms, stabilizer bar, shock absorber and a torsion bar. The front end of the torsion bar is attached to the lower control arm. The rear of the torsion bar is mounted into a height control arm at the crossmember. Vehicle trim height is controlled by adjusting this arm. Shock absorbers are mounted between the brackets on
Diagnosis
Condition Vehicle Pulls Possible cause Mismatched or uneven tires. Tires not adequately inflated. Broken or sagging springs. Radial tire lateral force. Improper wheel alignment. Brake dragging in one wheel. Loose, bent or broken front or rear suspension parts. Faulty shock absorbers. Parts in defective. Abnormal or Excessive Tire Wear power steering valve Correction Replace tire. Adjust tire pressure. Replace spring. Replace tire. Adjust wheel alignment. Repair brake. Tighten or replace the appropriate suspension part(s). Replace shock absorber. Replace power steering unit. Replace spring. Balance or replace tire. Check front end alignment. Replace shock absorber. Replace tire. Replace tire and reduce load. Replace or rotate tire. Replace hub unit bearing. Replace wheel or tire. Adjust the pressure. Replace tire. Replace shock absorber.
Sagging or broken spring. Tire out of balance. Improper wheel alignment. Faulty shock absorber. Hard driving. Overloaded vehicle. Tires not rotated periodically. Worn hub unit bearings. Wobbly wheel or tires. Tires not adequately inflated.
Wheel Hop
Blister or bump on tire. Improper shock absorber operation.
FRONT SUSPENSION
Condition Shimmy, Shake or Vibration Possible cause Tire or wheel out of balance. Loose hub unit bearings. Worn steering linkage ball joints. Worn upper or lower end ball joints. Excessive wheel runout. Blister or bump on tire. Excessive loaded radial runout of tire/wheel assembly. Improper wheel alignment. Loose or worn steering linkage. Loose steering unit. Tires not adequately inflated. Loose, bent or broken front or rear suspension parts. Faulty shock absorber. Parts in defective. Hard Steering power steering valve Correction
3C3
Balance wheels or replace tire/or wheel. Replace hub unit bearing. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Repair or replace wheel and/or tire. Replace tire. Replace tire or wheel. Check wheel alignment. Tighten or replace steering linkage. Tighten steering unit. Adjust tire pressure. Tighten or replace the appropriate suspension parts. Replace shock absorber. Replace power steering unit. Replace ball joint. Check wheel alignment. Inflate tires to proper pressure. Repair or replace. Repair or replace. Refer to Steering section. Replace hub unit bearings. Retighten or repair. shaft Retighten or replace steering shaft. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Repair or replace. Check and repair steering gear. Adjust wheel alignment. Adjust pressure. Retighten. Replace. Reassemble Transfer proper portion Gear to
Bind in steering linkage ball studs, upper or lower ball joint. Improper wheel alignment. Tire not adequately inflated. Bind in steering column or shaft. Improper power steering system operation.
Too Much Play In Steering
Hub unit bearings worn. Loose steering unit or linkage. Worn or loose universal joint. steering
Worn steering linkage ball joints. Worn upper or lower end ball joints. Poor Steering Wheel Returnability Bind in steering linkage ball joints. Bind in upper or lower ball joints. Bind in steering column and shaft. Bind in steering gear. Improper wheel alignment. Tires not adequately inflated. Loose steering wheel nut. Worn hub unit bearing. Misassemble Transfer Gear ASM
3C4
FRONT SUSPENSION
Condition Possible cause Worn, sticky or loose upper or lower ball joint, steering linkage ball joi nts or drive axle joints. Faulty shock absorbers. Worn upper or lower control arm bushing. Loose stabilizer bar. Loose wheel nuts. Replace. Correction
Abnormal Noise
Replace. Replace. Retighten bolts or replace bushings. Tighten nuts. Check for elongated wheel nut holes. Replace wheel if required. Retighten suspension bolts or nuts. Replace hub unit bearing. Replace spring. Retighten mounting bolt. Replace steering unit. Replace tire or inflate tires to proper pressure. Replace ball joints. Replace shock absorber. Tighten or replace stabilizer bar or bushings. Replace spring (pairs). Adjust wheel alignment. Replace hub unit bearings. Replace spring (pairs). Repair or replace caliper. Replace brake disc. Replace brake pads. Inflate tires to proper pressure. Replace springs (In pairs). Reduce load. Adjust or replace torsion bar. Adjust trim Height Reduce load. Replace shock absorber.
Loose suspension bolts or nuts. Broken or otherwise damaged hub unit bearings. Broken suspension springs. Loose steering unit. Faulty steering unit. Wandering or Poor Steering Stability Mismatched or unevenly worn tires. Loose steering linkage ball joints. Faulty shock absorbers. Loose stabilizer bar. Broken or sagging springs. Improper wheel alignment. Erratic Steering When Braking Worn hub unit bearings. Broken or sagging springs. Leaking caliper. Warped discs. Badly worn brake pads. Tires are inflated unequally. Low or Uneven Trim Height Broken or sagging springs. Vehicle overloaded. Incorrect springs. Trim Height out of spec Suspension Bottoms Vehicle overloaded. Faulty shock absorber. Incorrect, springs. Body Leans broken or sagging
Replace springs. Adjust trim Height Tighten stabilizer replace bushings. bar bolts or
Trim Height out of spec Loose stabilizer bar. Faulty shock absorber, struts or mounting. Broken or sagging springs. Vehicle overloaded.
Replace shock absorber. Replace springs (In pairs). Reduce load.
FRONT SUSPENSION
Condition Cupped Tires Possible cause Worn hub unit bearings. Excessive tire or wheel run out. Worn ball joints. Tire out of balance. Correction Replace hub unit bearing. Replace tire or wheel. Replace ball joints. Adjust tire balance.
3C5
3C6
FRONT SUSPENSION
Shock Absorber
Shock Absorber and Associated Parts
450RW009
Legend (1) Nut (2) Rubber Bushing and Washer EndOFCallout
(3) Bolt and Nut (4) Shock Absorber (5) Rubber Bushing and Washer
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support it with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Wheel Replacement in this section. 3. Remove bolt and nut. 4. Remove nut. 5. Remove rubber bushing and washer. 6. Remove shock absorber. 7. Remove rubber bushing and washer.
Installation
1. Install rubber bushing and washer. 2. Install shock absorber. 3. Install rubber bushing and washer. 4. Install nut, then tighten it to the specified torque. Torque: 20Nm (14lbft) 5. Install bolt and nut, then tighten to the specified torque. Torque: 93Nm (69lbft)

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts : Shock absorber Rubber bushing
FRONT SUSPENSION
3C7
Stabilizer Bar
Stabilizer Bar and Associated Parts
410R100001
Legend (1) Rubber Bushing (2) Bracket and Bolt (3) Link EndOFCallout
(4) Nut (5) Stabilizer Bar (6) Nut and Washer
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support the frame with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove the stone guard. 3. Remove wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Wheel Replacement in this section. 4. Remove nut (4) and (6). CAUTION: Be careful not to break the ball joint boot. 5. Remove link. 6. Remove bracket. 7. Remove stabilizer bar. 8. Remove rubber bushing.
found through inspection. Check the following parts : Stabilizer bar Rubber bushing Link ball joint
Installation
1. Install rubber bushing. 2. Install stabilizer bar. 3. Install bracket and bolt, then tighten it to the specified torque. Torque: 25Nm (18lbft) 4. Install link. 5. Install nut (4),(6) and washer, then tighten it to the specified torque. Torque: 50Nm (37lbft)

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are
3C8
FRONT SUSPENSION
Torsion Bar
Torsion Bar and Associated Parts
410RS003
Legend (1) Adjust Bolt, End Piece and Seat EndOFCallout
(2) Height Control Arm (3) Torsion Bar
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support the frame with suitable safety stands. 2. Apply the setting marks(1) to the adjust bolt and end piece, then remove adjust bolt, end piece and seat.
410RS004
FRONT SUSPENSION
3. Apply the setting marks(2) to the height control arm and torsion bar, then remove height control arm.
3C9
Installation
1. Apply grease to the serrated portions, then install torsion bar. Make sure the bars are on their correct respective sides and align the setting marks(3).
410RS005
4. Apply the setting marks(3) to the torsion bar and lower control arm, then remove torsion bar.
410RS007
410RS006 410RS006

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts: Torsion bar Height control arm Adjust bolt Rubber seat
3C10
FRONT SUSPENSION
4. Apply grease to the serrated portions. 5. Install adjust bolt and seat, then turn the adjust bolt to the setting mark(1) applied during disassembly. NOTE: Adjust the trim height. Refer to Front End Alignment Inspection and Adjustment in Steering section.
2. Apply grease to the portion that fits into the bracket then install height control arm and align the setting marks(2).
410RS005
3. Apply grease to the bolt portion of the end piece(4). Apply grease to the portion of the seat(5) that fits into the bracket.
410RS004
410RS008
FRONT SUSPENSION
3C11
Knuckle
Knuckle and Associated Parts
410R200002
Legend (1) Torsion Bar (2) Lower Ball Joint, Nut and Cotter Pin (3) Back Plate (4) Knuckle Assembly EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Knuckle Oil Seal Upper Ball Joint, Nut and Cotter Pin Wheel Speed Sensor (4x4 model)
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support the frame with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Wheel in this section. 3. Remove the brake caliper. Refer to Disc Brakes in Brake section. 4. Remove the disk rotor. Refer to Disk Brakes in Brake section.
5. Remove the hub assembly. Refer to Front Hub and Disk in this section. 6. Remove tierod end from the knuckle. Refer to Power Steering Unit in Steering section. 7. Remove the speed sensor from the knuckle. 8. Loosen torsion bar by height control arm adjust bolt, then remove torsion bar. Refer to Torsion Bar in this section. 9. Remove wheel speed sensor. (4x4 model)
3C12
FRONT SUSPENSION
10. Remove back plate. 11. Remove lower ball joint by using remover J29107. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot.
Installation
1. Use a new oil seal, and apply multipurpose type grease to the area surrounded by the lip (approx. 2 g). Then use installer J45647 and J8092 to install oil seal. After fitting the oil seal to the installer, drive it to the knuckle using a hammer or bench press (Except 2WD model).
901RW163
12. Remove upper ball joint by using remover J36831. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot.
901R200023
2. Install knuckle assembly. 3. Install upper ball joint and tighten the nut to the specified torque, with just enough additional torque to align cotter pin holes. Install new cotter pin. Torque: 98Nm (72lbft) 4. Install lower ball joint and tighten the nut to the specified torque, with just enough additional torque to align cotter pin holes. Install new cotter pin. Torque: 147Nm (108lbft) 5. Install back plate. 6. Install wheel speed sensor. 7. Install torsion bar, refer to Torsion Bar in this section. NOTE: Adjust the trim height. Refer to Front End Alignment Inspection and Adjustment in Steering.
901R200022
13. Remove knuckle assembly. 14. Remove oil seal (Except 2WD model).

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts: Knuckle Knuckle arm
FRONT SUSPENSION
3C13
Upper Control Arm

Upper Control Arm and Associated Parts
450R200005
Legend (1) Bolt and Plate (2) Camber Shims (3) Caster Shims (4) Nut Assembly (5) Upper Control Arm Assembly (6) Fulcrum Pin EndOFCallout
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Bushing Plate Nut Speed Sensor Cable Nut and Cotter Pin Upper Ball Joint, Bolt and Nut
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support the frame with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Wheel in this section. 3. Remove the brake caliper and disconnect brake
pipe. Refer to Disc Brakes in Brake section. 4. Support lower control arm with a jack. 5. Remove speed sensor cable. 6. Remove nut and cotter pin then use remover J 36831.
3C14
FRONT SUSPENSION
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot.
901RW160
16. Remove fulcrum pin (6).

901R200022
7. Remove upper ball joint. 8. Remove bolt and plate. 9. Remove nut assembly. 10. Remove camber shims and note the positions and number of shims. 11. Remove caster shims and note the positions and number of shims. 12. Remove upper control arm assembly. 13. Remove nut (9). 14. Remove plate (8). 15. Remove bushing (7) by using remover J29755.

Make necessary parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal conditions are found through inspection. Check the following parts: Upper control arm Bushing Fulcrum pin
Installation
1. Install fulcrum pin. 2. Install bushing by using installer J29755 and J 39376.
901RW161
901RW164
FRONT SUSPENSION
3C15
901RW159
450RS013
3. Install plate (8). 4. Install nut (9) and tighten fulcrum pin nut finger tight. NOTE: Torque fulcrum pin nut after adjusting buffer clearance. Buffer clearance: 22mm (0.87in) Torque: 108Nm (80lbft)
Legend (1) Projection (2) Outward EndOFCallout 6. Install the caster shims(2) between the chassis frame and fulcrum pin. 7. Install the camber shims(1) between the chassis frame and fulcrum pin.
450RS014 450R200009
5. Install upper control arm assembly with the fulcrum pin projections turned inward.
8. Install nut assembly. 9. Install bolt and plate, then tighten the bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 152Nm (112lbft) 10. Install upper ball joint and tighten it to the specified torque. Torque: 57Nm (42lbft) 11. Install nut and cotter pin then tighten the nut to the specified torque, with just enough additional torque to align cotter pin holes. Install new cotter pin. Torque: 98Nm (72lbft) 12. Install speed sensor cable.
3C16
FRONT SUSPENSION
Lower Control Arm

Lower Control Arm and Associated Parts
450R200006
Legend (1) Nut, Front (2) Bush, Front (3) Bolt, Front (4) Nut, Rear (5) Bush, Rear (6) Bolt, Rear (7) Bolt, Lower Ball Joint EndOFCallout
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
Bolt, Torsion Bar Arm Torsion Bar Arm Bracket and Nut Torsion Bar Lower Control Arm Lower Ball Joint and Nut Shock Absorber Bolt and Nut Stabilizer Link, Washer and Nut
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support the frame with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Wheel in this section.
3. Remove the tie-rod end from the knuckle. Refer to Power Steering Unit in Steering section. 4. Remove the retaining ring from the front axle driving shaft to release the shaft from hub(Except 2WD model). Refer to Front Hub and Disc in Driveline/ Axle section.
FRONT SUSPENSION
Support lower control arm with a jack. Remove front nut. Remove rear nut. Remove torsion bar, refer to Torsion Bar in this section. 9. Remove torsion bar arm bracket. 10. Disconnect the stabilizer link at the lower control arm. 11. Remove the shock absorber lower end from the lower control arm. 12. Remove the lower ball joint from the lower control arm. 13. Remove front bolt. 14. Remove rear bolt. 15. Remove lower control arm. 16. Remove torsion bar arm bolt. 17. Remove lower ball joint bolt. 18. Remove front bushing by using remover J36833. 5. 6. 7. 8.
3C17
19. Remove rear bushing by using remover J36834.
901RW051
901RW154 901RW052

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts: Lower control arm Bushing
901RW155
3C18
FRONT SUSPENSION
11. Install torsion bar arm bracket and tighten it to the specified torque. Torque: 116Nm (85lbft) 12. Install Torsion bar, refer to Torsion Bar in this section. 13. Install rear nut and tighten lower link nut fingertight. NOTE: Torque lower control arm nut after adjusting buffer clearance. Buffer clearance: 22mm (0.87in) Torque: 235Nm (174lbft)
Installation
1. Install rear bushing by using installer J36834.
901RW053
2. Install front bushing by using installer J36833.
450R200009
14. Install front finger-tight.
nut
then tighten lower link nut
NOTE: Torque lower control arm nut after adjusting buffer clearance . Buffer clearance: 22mm (0.87in) Torque: 186Nm (137lbft) NOTE: Adjust the trim height. Refer to Front End Alignment Inspection and Adjustment in Steering section.
901RW156
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Install lower ball joint bolt. Install torsion bar arm bolt. Install lower control arm. Install rear bolt. Install front bolt. Install lower ball joint and tighten it to the specified torque.
Torque: 116Nm (85lbft) 9. Install shock absorber and tighten it to the specified torque. Torque: 93Nm (69lbft) 10. Install stabilizer link and tighten it to the specified torque. Torque: 50Nm (37lbft)
450R200009
FRONT SUSPENSION
3C19
Upper Ball Joint

Upper Ball Joint and Associated Parts
450R200007
Legend (1) Bolt and Nut EndOFCallout
(2) Upper Ball Joint (3) Nut and Cotter Pin
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support the frame with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove the speed sensor from the knuckle.
3C20
FRONT SUSPENSION
After moving the ball joint 4 or 5 times, attach nut then measure the preload. Starting torque: 0.5 3.2Nm (0.42.4lbft)
3. Remove upper ball joint nut and cotter pin, then use remover J36831 to remove the upper ball joint from the knuckle. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot.
450RS024
901R200022
If the above limits specified are exceeded, replace the ball joint assembly.
4. Remove bolt and nut. 5. Remove upper ball joint.
Installation
1. Install upper ball joint. 2. Install bolt and nut, then tighten them to the specified torque. Torque: 57Nm (42lbft) 3. Install nut and cotter pin, then tighten the nut to the specified torque with just enough additional torque to align cotter pin holes. Install new cotter pin. Torque: 98Nm (72lbft)

Make necessary parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal conditions are found through inspection. Inspect the lower end boot for damage or grease leak. Move the ball joint as shown in the figure to confirm its normal movement. Inspect screw/taper area of ball for damage. If any defects are found by the above inspections, replace the ball joint assembly with a new one.
450RS023
FRONT SUSPENSION
3C21
Lower Ball Joint

Lower Ball Joint and Associated Parts
450R200008
Legend (1) Bolt (2) Lower Ball Joint EndOFCallout
(3) Nut (4) Nut and Cotter Pin
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support the frame with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Wheel in this section. 3. Remove the tie-rod end from the knuckle. Refer to Power Steering Unit in Steering section. 4. Remove the retaining ring from the front axle driving shaft to release the shaft from hub(Except 2WD model). Refer to Front Hub and Disc in Driveline/ Axle section. 5. Support lower control arm with a jack. 6. Remove lower ball joint nut and cotter pin, then use remover J29107 to remove the lower ball joint from the knuckle. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot.
901RW163
3C22
FRONT SUSPENSION
7. Remove nut. 8. Remove bolt. 9. Remove lower ball joint.
Installation
1. Install lower ball joint. 2. Install bolt. 3. Install nut and tighten it to the specified torque. Torque: 116Nm (85lbft) 4. Install ball joint nut, then tighten it to the specified torque with just enough additional torque to align cotter pin holes. Install new cotter pin. Torque: 147Nm (108lbft)

Make necessary parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Inspect the lower end boot for damage or grease leak. Move the ball joint as shown in the figure to confirm its normal movement . Inspect screw/taper area of ball for damage. If any defects are found by the above inspections, replace the ball joint assembly with a new one.
450RS026
After moving the ball joint 4 or 5 times, attach nut then measure the preload. Starting torque: 0.56.4Nm (0.44.7lbft)
450RS024
If the above limits specified are exceeded, replace the ball joint assembly.
FRONT SUSPENSION
3C23

Front suspension Torsion bar spring Front shock absorber Type Length Diameter Type Piston diameter Stroke Compressed length Extended length Stabilizer bar Diameter Without ISC shock absorber Independent wishbone arms, torsion bar spring with stabilizer bar. 1142mm (45.0in) 27.0mm (1.06in) Hydraulic, double acting, telescopic 30.0mm (1.18in) 125.0mm (4.92in) 255.0mm (10.04in) 380.0mm (14.96in) 25.0mm (0.98in) With ISC shock absorber 120.0mm (4.72in) 261.0mm (10.28in) 381.0mm (15.0in)
3C24
FRONT SUSPENSION
E03R200005
FRONT SUSPENSION
3C25
Special Tools
J8092 Grip
J36831 Ball joint remover
J45647 Installer; Oil seal
J29107 Tie-rod end remover
J39376 Installer; Upper arm bushing
J29775 Remover and Installer Upper arm bushing
J36833 Remover and Installer kit; Lower arm front bushing
J36834 Remover and Installer kit; Lower arm rear bushing
SECTION
REAR SUSPENSION
RODEO
3D1
SUSPENSION
REAR SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coil Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coil Spring and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shock Absorber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shock Absorber and Associated Parts . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailing Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailing Link and Associated Parts . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D1 3D1 3D2 3D5 3D5 3D5 3D6 3D6 3D7 3D7 3D7 3D7 3D7 3D8 3D8 3D8 3D8 3D9 Upper Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upper Link and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lateral Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lateral Rod and Associated Parts . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stabilizer Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stabilizer Bar and Associated Parts . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D10 3D10 3D10 3D10 3D11 3D12 3D12 3D12 3D12 3D13 3D14 3D14 3D14 3D14 3D15 3D16 3D18
Service Precaution
General Description
The rear suspension is a 5-link, coil spring type suspension with a stabilizer bar, consisting of two trailing links, two upper links, lateral rod, shock absorber, and stabilizer. In this suspension, the links are specially arranged to enable the rear axle to move freely, thereby expanding suspension stroke, reducing friction, and improving lateral rigidity and roll control. All these result in improved stability, riding comfort, and rough road maneuverability. Each link connects the axle housing with the frame through a runner bushing. The axle housing is supported by the trailing links and upper links longitudinally and by the lateral rod latitudinally.
3D2
REAR SUSPENSION
Diagnosis
Condition Vehicle Pulls Possible cause Mismatched or uneven tires. Tires not adequately inflated. Broken or sagging springs. Radial tire lateral force. Improper wheel alignment. Brake dragging in one wheel. Loose, bent or broken front or rear suspension parts. Faulty shock absorbers. Parts in defective. Abnormal or Excessive Tire Wear power steering valve Correction Replace tire. Adjust tire pressure. Replace spring. Replace tire. Adjust wheel alignment. Repair brake. Tighten or replace the appropriate suspension part(s). Replace shock absorber. Replace power steering unit. Replace spring. Balance or replace tire. Check front end alignment. Replace shock absorber. Replace tire. Replace tire and reduce load. Replace or rotate tire. Replace wheel bearing. Replace wheel or tire. Adjust the pressure. Replace tire. Replace shock absorber. Balance wheels or replace tire/or wheel. Replace wheel bearing. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Repair or replace wheel and/or tire. Replace tire. Replace tire or wheel. Check wheel alignment. Tighten or replace steering linkage. Tighten steering unit. Adjust tire pressure. Tighten or replace the appropriate suspension parts. Replace shock absorber. Adjust preload. Replace power steering unit. valve
Sagging or broken spring. Tire out of balance. Improper wheel alignment. Faulty shock absorber. Hard driving. Overloaded vehicle. Tires not rotated periodically. Worn or loose road wheel bearings. Wobbly wheel or tires. Tires not adequately inflated.
Wheel Hop Shimmy, Shake or Vibration
Blister or bump on tire. Improper shock absorber operation. Tire or wheel out of balance. Loose wheel bearings. Worn steering linkage ball joints. Worn upper or lower end ball joints. Excessive wheel runout. Blister or bump on tire. Excessive loaded radial runout of tire/wheel assembly. Improper wheel alignment. Loose or worn steering linkage. Loose steering unit. Tires not adequately inflated. Loose, bent or broken front or rear suspension parts. Faulty shock absorber. Hub bearing preload misadjustment. Parts in defective. power steering
REAR SUSPENSION
Condition Hard Steering Possible cause Bind in steering linkage ball studs, upper or lower ball joint. Improper wheel alignment. Tire not adequately inflated. Bind in steering column or shaft. Improper power steering system operation. Too Much Play In Steering Wheel bearings worn. Loose steering unit or linkage. Worn or loose universal joint. steering shaft Correction Replace ball joint. Check wheel alignment. Inflate tires to proper pressure. Repair or replace.
3D3
Repair or replace. Refer to Steering section. Replace wheel bearings. Retighten or repair. Retighten or replace steering shaft. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Repair or replace. Check and repair steering gear. Adjust wheel alignment. Adjust pressure. Retighten. Replace. Reassemble Transfer proper portion Replace. Gear to
Worn steering linkage ball joints. Worn upper or lower end ball joints. Poor Steering Wheel Returnability Bind in steering linkage ball joints. Bind in upper or lower ball joints. Bind in steering column and shaft. Bind in steering gear. Improper wheel alignment. Tires not adequately inflated. Loose steering wheel nut. Worn wheel bearing. Misassemble Transfer Gear ASM Abnormal Noise Worn, sticky or loose upper or lower ball joint, steering linkage ball joints or drive axle joints. Faulty shock absorbers. Worn upper or lower control arm bushing. Loose stabilizer bar. Loose wheel nuts.
Replace. Replace. Retighten bolts or replace bushings. Tighten nuts. Check for elongated wheel nut holes. Replace wheel if required. Retighten suspension bolts or nuts. Replace wheel bearing. Replace spring. Retighten mounting bolt. Replace steering unit. damaged
Loose suspension bolts or nuts. Broken or otherwise wheel bearings. Loose steering unit. Faulty steering unit.
Broken suspension springs.
3D4
REAR SUSPENSION
Condition Possible cause Mismatched or unevenly worn tires. Loose steering linkage ball joints. Faulty shock absorbers. Loose stabilizer bar. Broken or sagging springs. Improper wheel alignment. Correction Replace tire or inflate tires to proper pressure. Replace ball joints. Replace shock absorber. Tighten or replace stabilizer bar or bushings. Replace spring (pairs). Adjust wheel alignment. Replace wheel bearings. Replace spring (pairs). Repair or replace caliper. Replace brake disc. Replace brake pads. Inflate tires to proper pressure. Replace springs (In pairs). Reduce load. Adjust or replace torsion bar. Adjust Trim height Reduce load. Replace shock absorber. or sagging Replace springs. Adjust Trim height Tighten stabilizer replace bushings. bar bolts or
Wandering or Poor Steering Stability
Erratic Steering When Braking
Worn wheel bearings. Broken or sagging springs. Leaking caliper. Warped discs. Badly worn brake pads. Tires are inflated unequally.
Low or Uneven Trim Height
Broken or sagging springs. Vehicle overloaded. Incorrect springs. Trim Height out of spec
Suspension Bottoms
Vehicle overloaded. Faulty shock absorber. Incorrect, springs. broken
Body Leans
Trim Height out of spec Loose stabilizer bar. Faulty shock absorber, struts or mounting. Broken or sagging springs. Vehicle overloaded.
Replace shock absorber. Replace springs (In pairs). Reduce load. Replace wheel bearing. Replace tire or wheel. Replace ball joints. Adjust tire balance.
Cupped Tires
Worn wheel bearings. Excessive tire or wheel run out. Worn ball joints. Tire out of balance.
REAR SUSPENSION
3D5
Coil Spring
Coil Spring and Associated Parts
460R200004
Legend (1) Stabilizer Bar (2) Upper Link Fixing Bolt and Nut (3) Rubber Plate EndOFCallout
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Coil Spring Insulator Shock Absorbar Breather Hose
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support the frame with suitable safety stands. 2. Support the rear axle case with a jack. 3. Disconnect brake hose at the crossmember. 4. Remove breather hose. 5. Remove upper link fixing bolt, nut and rubber plate on the rear axle case (left-side only).
6. Disconnect the stabilizer bar at the stabilizer link. 7. Remove the shock absorber from the axle case. 8. Remove spring insulator. 9. Remove the insulator and coil spring while lowering the rear axle case. CAUTION: Be sure not to let the brake hose, parking brake cable, and breather hose extend to their full length.
3D6
REAR SUSPENSION
3. Install the insulator on the coil spring. Jack up the axle case gently with the top of the coil spring set to the spring seat on the frame side.

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts: Coil spring Insulator
Installation
1. Install coil spring and make sure that the coil spring is installed in the proper position. Paint mark(1) should be downward.
460RW013
4. Install shock absorber and tighten the nut lightly, then retighten it to the specified torque after the vehicle is at curb height. NOTE: When mounting shock absorber, be sure not to use grease on bushings or any other nearby part. Torque: 78Nm (58lbft) 5. Install stabilizer bar at the stabilizer link. Torque: 31Nm (23lbft)
460RW001
2. Fit the end of the coil spring to the coil spring seat and mount the coil spring on the rear axle case.
6. Install upper link with rubber plate and tighten fixing bolt. Torque: 137Nm (101lbft) 7. Install breather hose. 8. Connect brake hose and bleed the brake system. Refer to Bleeding the Brake Hydraulic System in Brake section.
460RW004
REAR SUSPENSION
3D7
Shock Absorber
Shock Absorber and Associated Parts
461RW001
Legend (1) Nut, Bush and Washer EndOFCallout
(2) Shock Absorber (3) Nut and Washer
Removal
1. Remove shock absorber fixing nut, bush and washer (upper side). 2. Remove shock absorber fixing nut and washer (lower side). 3. Remove shock absorber.
Installation
1. Install shock absorber. When mounting shock absorber, be sure not to use grease on bushings or any other nearby part. 2. Install nut and washer (lower side), then tighten the nut lightly. Retighten to the bolt and nut specified torque after the vehicle is at curb height. Torque: 78Nm (58lbft) 3. Install nut, bush and washer (upper side), then tighten the nut lightly. Retighten to the nut specified torque after the vehicle is at curb height. Torque: 20Nm (14lbft)

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts: Shock absorber Rubber bushing NOTE: When mounting rubber bushings, be sure not to use grease on bushings or any other nearby part.
3D8
REAR SUSPENSION
Trailing Link
Trailing Link and Associated Parts
460RW005
Legend (1) Bolt and Nut (Axle side) EndOFCallout
(2) Protector (Left side only) (3) Bolt (Frame side)
Removal
1. Remove the parking brake cable from the trailing link. 2. Remove the trailing link fixing bolt, nut and protector. 3. Remove trailing link.

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. 1. Trailing link 2. Rubber bushing Remove the rubber bushing by using remover J 39214.
901RW058
REAR SUSPENSION
Install the rubber bushing by using installer J 39214. NOTE: When mounting rubber bushings, be sure not to use grease on bushings or any other nearby part.
3D9
901RW059
Installation
1. Install trailing link. Make sure that the trailing link is in its correct position. NOTE: When mounting trailing link, be sure not to use grease on bushings or any other nearby part.
460RW011
2. Install bolt, nut and protector. Tighten the bolts and nuts lightly, then retighten them to the specified torque after the vehicle is at curb height. Torque: 137Nm (101lbft) 3. Install parking brake cable. CAUTION: The parking brake cable should not be overstrained or slackened.
3D10
REAR SUSPENSION
Upper Link
Upper Link and Associated Parts
460RW006
Legend (1) Bolt and Nut (Axle side) (2) Rubber Plate EndOFCallout
(3) Upper Link (4) Protector (Left side only) (5) Bolt (Frame side)
Removal
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to Engine Fuel in Engine section. 2. Remove the speed sensor cable from the upper link. 3. Remove bolt, nut, rubber plate and protector. 4. Remove upper link.

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. 1. Upper link 2. Rubber bushing Remove the rubber bushing by using remover J 43008.
460RY00006
REAR SUSPENSION
Install the rubber bushing by using to installer J 43008. NOTE: When mounting rubber bushings, be sure not to use grease on bushings or any other nearby part.
3D11
460RY00007
Installation
1. Install upper link. Make sure that the upper link is in its correct position. NOTE: When mounting upper link, be sure not to use grease bushings or any other nearby part.
460RW012
2. Install bolt, nut, rubber plate and protector. Tighten the bolts and nuts lightly, then retighten them to the specified torque after the vehicle is at curb height. Torque: 137Nm (101lbft) 3. Install speed sensor cable. 4. Install fuel tank.
3D12
REAR SUSPENSION
Lateral Rod
Lateral Rod and Associated Parts
460RW007
Legend (1) Bolt and Nut (Frame side) EndOFCallout
(2) Lateral Rod (3) Nut and Washer (Axle side)
Removal
1. Remove nut and washer. 2. Remove bolt and nut. 3. Remove lateral rod.

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. 1. Lateral rod 2. Rubber bushing (Frame side) Remove the rubber bushing (Frame side) by using remover J39215.
901RW060
REAR SUSPENSION
Install the rubber bushing (Frame side) by using Installer J39215. NOTE: When mounting rubber bushings, do not use grease on bushings or any other nearby parts.
3D13
901RW063
Installation
1. Install lateral rod and make sure that the lateral rod is in its correct position.
901RW061
3. Rubber bushing (Axle side) Remove the rubber bushing (Axle side) by using remover J39792.
NOTE: When mounting lateral rod, be sure not to use grease on bushings or any other nearby part.
460RW008
901RW062
Install the rubber bushing (Axle side) by using installer J39792.
Legend (1) Frame Side (2) Axle Side EndOFCallout 2. Install bolt and nut (Frame side). Tighten the bolt and nut lightly, then retighten them to the specified torque after the vehicle is at curb height. Torque: 137Nm (101lbft) 3. Install nut and washer (Axle side). Tighten the nut lightly, then retighten the nut to the specified torque after the vehicle is at curb height. Torque: 78Nm (58lbft)
3D14
REAR SUSPENSION
Stabilizer Bar
Stabilizer Bar and Associated Parts
460R200003
Legend (1) Bracket and Bolt (2) Link EndOFCallout
(3) Bolt and Nut (4) Stabilizer Bar (5) Rubber Bushing
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support the frame with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Wheel in this section. 3. Remove bolt and nut. 4. Remove link. 5. Remove bracket. 6. Remove rubber bushing.

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts: Stabilizer bar Rubber bushing Link
REAR SUSPENSION
3D15
Installation
1. Install rubber bushing. 2. Install bracket to axle housing and tighten to the specified torque. Torque: 25Nm (18lbft) 3. Install link. 4. Install bolt and nut, then tighten the nut to the specified torque. Torque: 31Nm (23lbft)
460R200002
3D16
REAR SUSPENSION

Rear suspension Coil spring Type Free length Spring diameter Coil diameter (inner) Effective No. of turns Total No. of turns Shock absorber Type Piston diameter Stroke Extended length Compressed length Stabilizer bar Diameter Without ISC shock absorber 5Link, coil spring type with stabilizer bar. 378.0mm (14.88in) 12.9mm (0.51in) 105mm (4.13in) 6.03 7.53 Hydraulic, double acting, telescopic 30mm (1.18in) 175.0mm (6.89in) 473.5mm (18.64in) 298.5mm (11.75in) 18mm (0.71in) With ISC shock absorber 159mm (6.26in) 518mm (20.39in) 359mm (14.13in)
REAR SUSPENSION Torque Specifications
3D17
E03R200006
3D18
REAR SUSPENSION
Special Tools
TOOL NO. TOOL NAME
ILLUSTRATION
J39214 Remover and Installer; Trailing link bushing
J43008 Remover and Installer; Upper link bushing
J39792 Remover and Installer; Lateral rod bushing (Axle side)
J39215 Remover and Installer; Lateral rod bushing (Frame side)
SECTION
WHEEL AND TIRE SYSTEM
RODEO
3E1
SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3E1 3E2 3E3 3E11 3E11 3E11 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Balance Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wheel and Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 3E11 3E12 3E12 3E12 3E13 3E14
Service Precaution
3E2
General Description
480RS008
Replacement wheels or tires must be equivalent to the original equipment in load capacity, specified dimension and mounting configuration. Improper size or type may affect bearing life, brake performance, speedometer/ odometer calibration, vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the body and chassis. All models are equipped with metric sized tubeless steel belted radial tires. Correct tire pressures and driving habits have an important influence on tire life. Heavy cornering, excessively rapid acceleration and unnecessary sharp braking increase premature and uneven wear.
3E3
Diagnosis
Condition Vehicle Pulls Possible cause Mismatched or uneven tires. Tires not adequately inflated. Broken or sagging springs. Radial tire lateral force. Improper wheel alignment. Brake dragging in one wheel. Loose, bent or broken front or rear suspension parts. Faulty shock absorbers. Parts in defective. Abnormal or Excessive Tire Wear power steering valve Correction Replace tire. Adjust tire pressure. Replace spring. Replace tire. Adjust wheel alignment. Repair brake. Tighten or replace the appropriate suspension part(s). Replace shock absorber. Replace power steering unit. Replace spring. Balance or replace tire. Check front end alignment. Replace shock absorber. Replace tire. Replace tire and reduce load. Replace or rotate tire. Replace hub unit bearing. Replace wheel or tire. Adjust the pressure. Replace tire. Replace shock absorber. Balance wheels or replace tire/or wheel. Replace hub unit bearing. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Repair or replace wheel and/or tire. Replace tire. Replace tire or wheel. Check wheel alignment. Tighten or replace steering linkage. Tighten steering unit. Adjust tire pressure. Tighten or replace the appropriate suspension parts. Replace shock absorber. valve Replace power steering unit.
Sagging or broken spring. Tire out of balance. Improper wheel alignment. Faulty shock absorber. Hard driving. Overloaded vehicle. Tires not rotated periodically. Worn hub unit bearings. Wobbly wheel or tires. Tires not adequately inflated.
Wheel Hop Shimmy, Shake or Vibration
Blister or bump on tire. Improper shock absorber operation. Tire or wheel out of balance. Loose hub unit bearings. Worn steering linkage ball joints. Worn upper or lower end ball joints. Excessive wheel runout. Blister or bump on tire. Excessive loaded radial runout of tire/wheel assembly. Improper wheel alignment. Loose or worn steering linkage. Loose steering unit. Tires not adequately inflated. Loose, bent or broken front or rear suspension parts. Faulty shock absorber. Parts in defective. power steering
3E4

Condition Possible cause Bind in steering linkage ball studs, upper or lower ball joint. Improper wheel alignment. Tire not adequately inflated. Bind in steering column or shaft. Improper power steering system operation. Correction Replace ball joint. Check wheel alignment. Inflate tires to proper pressure. Repair or replace. Repair or replace. Refer to Steering section. Replace hub unit bearings. Retighten or repair. shaft Retighten or replace steering shaft. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Replace ball joints. Repair or replace. Check and repair steering gear. Adjust wheel alignment. Adjust pressure. Retighten. Replace. Replace.
Hard Steering
Too Much Play In Steering
Hub unit bearings worn. Loose steering unit or linkage. Worn or loose universal joint. steering
Worn steering linkage ball joints. Worn upper or lower end ball joints. Poor Steering Wheel Returnability Bind in steering linkage ball joints. Bind in upper or lower ball joints. Bind in steering column and shaft. Bind in steering gear. Improper wheel alignment. Tires not adequately inflated. Loose steering wheel nut. Worn hub unit bearing. Abnormal Noise Worn, sticky or loose upper or lower ball joint, steering linkage ball joints or drive axle joints. Faulty shock absorbers. Worn upper or lower control arm bushing. Loose stabilizer bar. Loose wheel nuts.
Replace. Replace. Retighten bolts or replace bushings. Tighten nuts. Check for elongated wheel nut holes. Replace wheel if required. Retighten suspension bolts or nuts. Replace hub unit bearing. Replace spring. Retighten mounting bolt. Replace steering unit. Replace tire or inflate tires to proper pressure. Replace ball joints. Replace shock absorber. Tighten or replace stabilizer bar or bushings. Replace spring (pairs). Adjust wheel alignment.
Loose suspension bolts or nuts. Broken or otherwise damaged hub unit bearing. Broken suspension springs. Loose steering unit. Faulty steering unit. Wandering or Poor Steering Stability Mismatched or unevenly worn tires. Loose steering linkage ball joints. Faulty shock absorbers. Loose stabilizer bar. Broken or sagging springs. Improper wheel alignment.

Condition Erratic Steering When Braking Possible cause Worn hub unit bearings. Broken or sagging springs. Leaking caliper. Warped discs. Badly worn brake pads. Tires are inflated unequally. Low or Uneven Trim Height Broken or sagging springs. Vehicle overloaded. Incorrect springs. Suspension Bottoms Vehicle overloaded. Faulty shock absorber. Incorrect, springs. Body Leans broken or sagging Correction Replace hub unit bearings. Replace spring (pairs). Repair or replace caliper. Replace brake disc. Replace brake pads. Inflate tires to proper pressure. Replace springs (In pairs). Reduce load. Adjust or replace torsion bar. Reduce load. Replace shock absorber. Replace springs. Tighten stabilizer replace bushings. bar
3E5
Loose stabilizer bar. Faulty shock absorber, struts or mounting. Broken or sagging springs. Vehicle overloaded.
bolts
or
Replace shock absorber. Replace springs (In pairs). Reduce load. Replace wheel bearing. Replace tire or wheel. Replace ball joints. Adjust tire balance.
Cupped Tires
Worn wheel bearings. Excessive tire or wheel run out. Worn ball joints. Tire out of balance.
Irregular and Premature Wear
480RS001
Irregular and/or premature wear has many causes. Some of them are incorrect inflation pressures, lack of tire rotation, poor driving habits or improper wheel alignment. Incorrect inflation is common cause of tire premature wear.
NOTE: Due to their design, radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly on the front tires. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. After rotation, be sure to check wheel nut torque, and set tire pressures.
3E6

The original equipment tires have built-in tread wear indicators(1) to show when tires need replacement. These indicators may appear as wide bands. When the indicators appear in two or more grooves at three locations, tire replacement is recommended.
Tire Rotation
Tire rotation is recommended to balance wear for longer tire life.
Inflation of Tires
480RS002
Legend (1) Spare Tire EndOFCallout If the following conditions are noted, rotate the tires: Front tire wear is different from rear. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. Check wheel alignment if the following conditions are noted: Left and right front tire wear is unequal. Wear is uneven across the tread of any front tire. Front tire treads have a scuffed appearance with feather" edges on one side of the tread ribs or blocks.
710RW002
Tire pressure, in cold condition (after vehicle has set for three hours or more, and driven less than one mile), should be checked monthly or before any extended trip. Tire pressure increases approximately 15% when the tires become hot during driving. Tire pressure specification is shown on the label located on the left door lock pillar. NOTE: Check the tire pressure whenever irregular wear is found. Tire inflation greatly affects tire wear. If the alignment check does not reveal any alignment problems, check the condition of the shock absorbers and wheel/tire balance.
Tread Wear Indicators
Diagnosis List
If the following conditions are noted, rotation is required. 1. Front tire wear is different from rear. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 4. Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. If the following conditions are noted, check the wheel alignment. 1. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Front tire treads have scuffed appearance with feather" edges on one side of tread ribs or blocks. 4. There is cupping, flat spotting etc. Higher than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Hard ride. 2. Poor steering stability.
480RS006

3. Rapid and uneven wear at center of the tread. Lower than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Tire squeal on turns. 2. Hard steering. 3. Rapid and uneven wear on the edges of the tread. 4. Tire rim bruises and rupture. 5. Tire cord breakage. 6. High tire temperatures. 7. Reduced handling. 8. Reduced fuel economy. Unequal pressure on same axle can cause: 1. Uneven braking. 2. Steering lead. 3. Reduced handling. 4. Swerve on acceleration. from the front or rear.
3E7
2. Install tire and wheel assemblies known to be good (from a similar car) in place of those on the end of the car which is waddling. If the waddle cannot be isolated to front or rear, start with the rear tires. 3. Road test again. If improvement is noted, install the original tire and wheel assemblies one at a time until the faulty tire is found. If no improvement is noted, install tires known to be good in place of all four. Then, install the original tire assembly one at a time until the faulty tire is found.
Radial Tire Lead/Pull

Lead/Pull" is vehicle deviation from a straight path, on a level road with no pressure on the steering wheel. Lead is usually caused by: 1. Poorly manufactured radial tires. 2. Uneven brake adjustment. 3. Wheel alignment. The way in which a tire is built can produce lead in a car. An example of this is placement of the belt. Off-center belts on radial tires can cause the tire to develop a side force while rolling straight down the road and the tire will tend to roll like a cone. The Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction" chart should be used to make sure that front wheel alignment is not mistaken for tire lead. Rear tires will not cause lead/pull.
Radial Tire Waddle
480RW011
Waddle is side-to-side movement at the front and/or rear of the car. It can be caused by the steel belt not being straight within the tire, or by excessive lateral runout of the tire or wheel. It is most noticeable at low speed, about 8 to 48 km/h (5 to 30 mph). It may also cause rough ride at 80 to 113 km/h (50 to 70 mph). The car can be road tested to see which end of the car has the faulty tire. If the tire causing the waddle is on the rear, the rear end of the car will waddle". From the driver's seat, it feels as if someone is pushing on the side of the car. If the faulty tire is on the front, the waddle is more easily seen. The front sheet metal appears to be moving back and forth. It feels as if the driver's seat is the pivot point in the car. Another more thorough method of determining the faulty tire is substituting tire and wheel assemblies that are known to be good. Follow these steps: 1. Drive the car to determine if the waddle is coming
3E8
Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction Chart

Step 1 Action 1. Inflate tires to recommended pressure. 2. Road test vehicle on level uncrowned road. Was a problem corrected? 2 Switch front tires side to side and road test again. Was a problem corrected? Did the vehicle lead in same direction? Put tires back in original position and check alignment. Was a problem corrected? Install known good tire on one front side. Was a problem corrected? End. If roughness results,replace tires. Go to Step 4 End. Go to Step 2 Yes No
Go to Step 3 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 5 Install a known good tire in place of other front tire. If lead corrected, replace tire.
3 4 5
Replace tire. Typical examples of abnormal tire ahead wear and major causes: CAUTION: Similar wear patterns can be caused by worn suspension parts, misalignment of wheels and tires, and other suspension related problems. Spotty wear wear localized on shoulder sections, and in an extreme cases, the tire becomes polygonal in shape. Tread wear one-sided.
480RW003
1. Rotating parts out of balance. 2. Tire or wheel out of round. 3. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted.
480RW002
1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. 3. Play in hub bearings or ball joint. 4. Rotating parts out of balance.

Localized tread wear.
3E9
Wear in shoulders at points opposed to each other.
480RW004
480RW006
1. Once spotty wear develops in tread due to hard braking or abrupt starting, localized wear tends to be promoted. Shoulder wear (generally wear develops in outer shoulder):
1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Play in bearings or ball joint. Premature wear in shoulders.
480RW007
1. Flexing of tire excessive due to under-inflation.

480RW005
1. Camber or toe-in incorrect. 2. Shoulder wear caused by repeated hard-cornering.
3E10
One sided feather edging.
480RW008
1. Wear caused by repeated hard cornering. 2. Camber or toe-in incorrect.
3E11
Wheel
Wheel and Associated Parts
480R200009
Legend (1) Wheel Lug Nut EndOFCallout
(2) Alumi Wheel and Tire (3) Steel Wheel and Tire
Removal
1. Loosen wheel lug nuts by half a turn, then raise the vehicle and remove the nuts. 2. Remove wheel and tire. NOTE: Never use heat to loosen a tight wheel lug nut. The application of heat to the hub can shorten the life of the wheel and may cause damage to wheel bearings.
NOTE: Valve caps should be on the valve stems to keep dust and water out.
Installation
1. Install wheel and tire. 2. Install wheel lug nut, and lower the vehicle. Tighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified torque in the sequence described in the figure. Torque: 118Nm (87lbft) CAUTION: Before installing wheels, remove any build-up of corrosion on the wheel mounting surface and brake disc mounting surface by scraping and wire brushing. Installing wheels without good metal-to-metal contact at mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen, which can later allow a wheel to come off while the vehicle is moving.
480RS020
3E12
Tire
Tire Replacement
When replacement is necessary, the original metric tire size should be used. Most metric tire sizes do not have exact corresponding alphanumeric tire sizes. It is recommended that new tires be installed in pairs on the same axle. If necessary to replace only one tire, it should be paired with tire having the most tread, to balance braking traction. CAUTION: Do not mix different types of tires such as radial, bias and bias-belted tires except in emergencies, because vehicle handling may be seriously affected and may result in loss of control.
Wheel Inspection
Damaged wheels and wheels with excessive run-out must be replaced. Wheel run out at rim (Base on hub Bore): Steel 1 Vertical play (AVERAGE OF EACH SIDE): Less than 1.5mm (0.059in) Aluminum 1 Vertical play (AVERAGE OF EACH SIDE): Less than 0.40mm (0.016in) 1 Vertical play (INDIVIDUAL): Less than 0.55mm (0.022in) 2 Horizontal play (INDIVIDUAL): Less than 0.55mm (0.022in)
Tire Dismounting
Remove valve cap on valve stem and deflate the tire. Then use a tire changing machine to mount or dismount tires. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instruction. Do not use hand tools or tire lever alone to change tires as they may damage the tire beads or wheel rim. 2 Horizontal play (INDIVIDUAL): Less than 1.5mm (0.059in)
Tire Mounting
Rim bead seats should be cleaned with a wire brush or coarse steel wool to remove lubricants, and light rust. Before mounting a tire, the bead area should be well lubricated with an approved tire lubricant. After mounting, inflate the tire to 196kPa (28 psi) so that beads are completely seated. Inflate the air to specified pressure and install valve cap to the stem. WARNING: NEVER STAND OVER TIRE WHEN INFLATING. BEAD MAY BREAK WHEN BEAD SNAPS OVER RIM'S SAFETY HUMP WHICHCAN CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY. NEVER EXCEED 240 KPA (35 PSI) PRESSURE WHEN INFLATING. IF 240 KPA (35 PSI) PRESSURE WILL NOT SEAT BEADS, DEFLATE, RE-LUBRICATE AND RE-INFLATE. OVER INFLATION MAY CAUSE THE BEAD TO BREAK AND CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY.
480RS012
Tire Repair
There are many different materials on the market used to repair tires. Manufacturers have published detailed instructions on how and when to repair tires. These instructions can be obtained from the tire manufacturer if they are not included with the repair kit.
General Balance Procedure

Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear.
3E13
Balancing Wheel and Tire

On-vehicle Balancing
On-Vehicle balancing methods vary with equipment and tool manufacturers. Be sure to follow each manufacturer's instructions during balancing operation.
Off-vehicle Balancing
Most electronic off-vehicle balancers are more accurate than the on-vehicle spin balancers. They are easy to use and give a dynamic balance. Although they do not correct for drum or disc unbalance (as onvehicle spin balancing does), they are very accurate.
480RS013
Legend (1) Heavy Spot Wheel Shimmy (2) Add Balance Weights Here EndOFCallout Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy.
480RS015
480RS014
Legend (1) Heavy Spot Wheel Hop (2) Add Balance Weights Here EndOFCallout WARNING: STONES SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM THE TREAD TO AVOID OPERATOR INJURY DURING SPIN BALANCING AND TO OBTAIN A GOOD BALANCE.
3E14

Wheels Size Offset P.C.D., wheel studs Standard tire Size Pressure(Front) Pressure(Rear) 16 x 7JJ 38.0mm (1.50in) 139.7mm (5.50in) P225/75R16 200kPa (29psi) 200kPa (29psi) 16 x 7JJ 38.0mm (1.50in) 139.7mm (5.50in) P245/70R16 180kPa (26psi) 180kPa (26psi) 18 x 7JJ 38.0mm (1.50in) 139.7mm (5.50in) P245/60R18 180kPa (26psi) 180kPa (26psi)
480R200010
SECTION
INTELLIGENT SUSPENSION
RODEO
3F1
SUSPENSION
INTELLIGENT SUSPENSION CONTROL
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC2 Actuator Coil Over Current . . . . . . . . DTC3 Actuator Coil/Position Sensor Open Circuit or Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC4 G-Sensor Open Circuit or Short . . . . DTC5 Vehicle Speed Sensor Open Circuit or Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC6 Stop Lamp Switch Open Circuit or Short. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC7 Engine Speed Signal Open Circuit or Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3F1 3F1 3F4 3F16 3F18 3F21 3F22 3F24 3F26 Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Shock Absorber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3F31 3F31 3F32 3F33 3F34 3F34 3F34 3F35 3F36 3F36 3F36
Service Precaution
General Description
Intellignet suspension control uses a microcomputer as a control unit to judge running conditions including engine revolution from Powertrain Control Module, vehicle speed from vehicle speed sensor, a brake switch signal, and vertical and lateral G-sensor signal, then sets optimum damping force so that best running stability can be achieved. In addition two ride modes (i.e. COMFORT" and SPOPT") can be selected according to the driver's preference.
3F2
826R100004
INTELLIGENT SUSPENSION PIN ASSIGNMENT TABLE

PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NAME GND NC Vdd KI-FR A KI-FR C KI-FL A KI-FL C KI-RR A KI-RR C KI-RL A KI-RL C Vbat GND GND NC Vdd PIN No. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 NAME KI-FR B KI-FR D KI-FL B KI-FL D KI-RR B KI-RR D KI-RL B KI-RL D Vig GND KI-FR Vcc KI-FR Vout KI-FR PSW KI-FL Vout KI-FL Vcc KI-RR Vcc PIN No. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 NAME KI-RR PSW KI-RL Vcc KI-FR GND KI-FR Vs KI-FL PSW KI-FL Vs KI-FL GND KI-RR GND KI-RL PSW KI-RL GND M.L G3 Vcc G3 Vout NC NC VSP PIN No. 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 NAME STOP T-SW M-SW NC NC NC
3F3
G3 GND G3 Vs NC NC E/G W.L NC GND NC NC
NC: NO CONNECTION
System Components
Control Unit, 3 Vertical G-sensors, Lateral G-sensor, 4 Actuators, 4 Adjustable Damping Force Shock Absorbers, and Warning Lamp.
Warning Lamp and Mode Lamp
Control Unit
The Control Unit consists of Adjustable Damping Force Shock Absorber control circuits, fault detector, and a fail-safe. It drives the actuator according to the signal from each sensor. The Control Unit has a self-diagnosing function which can indicate faulty circuits during diagnosis. The Control Unit is mounted in the center of the instrument panel.
Actuator
Front actuators installed on front shock absorbers and rear actuator installed inside rear shock absorbers control damping force of the shock absorber by the Control Unit signal.
821R100008
Adjustable Damping Force Shock Absorber

This type of shock absorber is found in vehicles equipped with Intelligent Suspention Control System. The damping force is adjusted accordingly by the Control Unit.
Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Suspension have an amber warning lamp in the instrument panel. The warning lamp will illuminate if a malfunction in the Intelligent Suspension System is detected by the Control Unit. In case of an important electronic malfunction, the Control Unit will turnON" the warning lamp. The comfort mode or the sports mode can be selected. If the comfort mode is selected, the mode lamp turns off and if the sport mode is selected, the mode lamp turns on.
3F4
Vertical G-Sensor
Front G-sensors installed inside front actuators and the rear G-sensor installed on the rear left frame side detect the vehicle vertical gravity and send a signal to the Control Unit.
General Diagnosis
General Information
Intelligent Suspension Control troubles can be classified into two types, those which can be detected by the warning lamp and those which can be detected as a vehicle abnormality by the driver. In either case, locate the fault in accordance with theBASIC DIAGNOSTIC FLOWCHART" and repair. Please refer to Section 3 for the diagnosis of abnormal noise, vehicle pulls, excessive tire wear, wheel hop and shimmy, shake or vibration.
Lateral G-Sensor
The G-sensor installed inside the Control Unit detects the vehicle turning speed and sends a signal to the Control Unit.
Acronyms and Abbreviations

Several acronyms and abbreviations are commonly used throughout this section: BATT Battery DLC Data Link Connector DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code FL Front Left FR Front Right GND Ground HARN Harness IG Ignition PCM Powertrain Control Module RL Rear Left RR Rear Right SW Switch W/L Warning Lamp
Service Precautions
Required Tools and Items: Box Wrench Special Tool Some diagnosis procedures in this section require the installation of a special tool. J-39200 High Impedance Multimeter When circuit measurements are requested, use a circuit tester with high impedance.
Computer System Service Precautions

The Intelligent Suspension Control interfaces directly with the Control Unit which is similar to the Powertrain Control Module. These modules are designed to withstand normal current draws associated with vehicle operation. However care must be taken to avoid overloading any of the Control Unit circuits. In testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the circuits unless instructed to do so by the appropriate diagnostic procedure. These circuits should only be tested with a high impedance multimeter (J-39200) or special tools as described in this section. Power should never be removed or applied to any control module with the ignition in the ON" position.Before removing or connecting battery cables, fuses or connectors, always turn the ignition switch to theOFF" position.
General Service Precautions

The following are general precautions which should be observed when servicing and diagnosing the Intelligent Suspension Control and/or other vehicle systems. Failure to observe these precautions may result in Intelligent Suspension Control damage. If welding work is to be performed on the vehicle using an electric arc welder, the Control Unit connectors should be disconnected before the welding operation begins. The Control Unit connectors should never be connected or disconnected with the ignitionON".
Parts Handling
Be careful when handling the actuator, control unit, or G-sensor. They should not be dropped or thrown, because the semi-conductor G-sensor tip damage may result.
INTELLIGENT SUSPENSION FLASHING CODES

1. ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS (SELF-DIAGNOSIS) 1. The Control Unit conducts a self-test of most of the wiring and components in the system each time the key is turned ON. If a fault is detected the Control Unit will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in memory.
3F5
2. The warning lamp turns on until the fault is repaired and the Control Unit memory is cleared. 2. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 1 The DTC can be flashed by connecting terminals 3 and 4 or 3 and 5 of the Data Link Connector (C-34).
350R100002
Normal
Abnormal
F03RY00001
F03RY00002
Legend (1) Diagnostic Trouble Code 2 (2) Diagnostic Trouble Code 3 EndOFCallout
3F6
2 After this, the warning lamp will be OFF for 3.5 seconds and then will flash each DTC. 1 When there are more than 9 flashes this means that the indicator is constantly flashing, OFF for 4 seconds ON for 0.5 seconds. In this case there is no DTC stored in memory. 2 When there are less than 9 flashes you will see DTC codes in ascending order.
CLEAR DTC
Any deleted DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Code) can no longer be accessed. However, the DTC can be reproduced (which may involve a test drive or simply turning on the ignintion depending on the fault) if the fault needs to be studied or was deleted by mistake. 1. Short the Data Link Connector C-34 terminal 3 to terminal 4 or 5 (ground).
F03RY00004
Legend (1) Diagnostic Trouble Code 2 (2) Diagnostic Trouble Code 3 + Position Code 2 Position Code 1: Actuator Front RH, G-sensor Front RH 2: Actuator Front LH, G-sensor Front LH 3: Actuator Rear RH, G-sensor Rear 4: Actuator Rear LH, Lateral G-sensor EndOFCallout
If it is flashing and the flash is 0.5 seconds ON and 4 seconds OFF without interruption, this means that there is no DTC. The DTCs are already cleared.
350R100002
2. Wait until the lamp is flashing. 3. Press on the brake pedal every two seconds six or more times.
INTELLIGENT SUSPENSION INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS

If the Warning Lamp flashes a diagnostic trouble code as intermittent, or if after a test drive a DTC does not reappear though the detection conditions for this DTC are present: the problem is most likely a faulty electrical connection or loose wiring. Terminals and grounds should always be the prime suspect. Intermittents rarely occur inside sophisticated electronic components such as the Control Unit. Use the DTC information to understand which wires and sensors are involved. When an intermittent problem is encountered, check suspect circuits for: 1. Poor terminal to wire connection. 2. Terminals not fully seated in the connector body (backed out). 3. Improperly formed or damaged terminals. 4. Loose, dirty, or corroded ground connections: HINT: Any time you have an intermittent in more than one circuit, check whether the circuits share a common ground connection. 5. Pinched or damaged wires. 6. Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI): HINT: Check that all wires are properly routed away from spark plug wires, distributor wires, coil, and generator. Also check for improperly installed electrical options, such as lights, 2-way radios, etc.
3F7
DTC CHECK
1. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) identified by FLASHING CODES. have been
2. List the DTCs. Normally one or two DTCs may appear for every fault. 3. The DTCs appear in ascending order. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES.
BULB CHECK
When the starter switch is turned on in the normal state, the Control Unit turns on the Warning Lamp to check the bulb. After the engine starts, the Warning Lamp turns off.
F03RY00003
3F8
Basic Diagnosis Flow
C07RY00022
INTELLIGENT SUSPENSION Circuit Diagram
3F9
826R200026
3F10
826R200027
3F11
826R200030
3F12
Parts Location
810R100003
Legend (1) C44 (2) C43 (3) H11, H12, H14, H18 (4) I 1, I 2, I 9 (5) B25 (6) I 18 (7) F6 (8) C34 (9) F7 (10) F5 EndOFCallout
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
H25 H15, H16, H17 C46 C45 H5, H6, H7 C16 E21, E22 C50, C51, C52 E30 C36
INTELLIGENT SUSPENSION Connector List

No. B-25 Connector face No. C-50 Connector face
3F13
C-16
C-51
C-34
C-52
C-36
E-21
C-43
E-22
C-44
E-30
C-45
F-5
C-46
F-6
3F14
No. F-7
Connector face No. H-18 Connector face
H-5
H-25
H-6
I-1
H-11
I-2
H-12
I-9
H-14
I-18
H-15
H-16
INTELLIGENT SUSPENSION Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Identification

DTC No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 DTC NAME Actuator Coil Over Current Actuator Coil/Position Sensor Open Circuit or Short G-Sensor Open Circuit or Short Vehicle Speed Sensor Open Circuit or Short Stop Lamp Switch Open Circuit, Short or Contact Point Trouble Engine Speed Signal Open Circuit or Short Control Unit Abnormality CODE MEMORY Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3F15
WARNING LAMP OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
3F16
DTC2 Actuator Coil Over Current

Circuit Description
The A, B, C, and D are the actuator motor coil terminals. DC 12V driving voltage is applied between terminals A and C and terminals B and D so that the shock absorber oil valves are rotated at every 7.5 step feed.
Diagnostic Aids
Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections between the control unit 24 way connector and the actuator connectors. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed, or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change.
DTC2 Actuator Coil Over Current

Step 1 Action 1. Turn off the starter switch. 2. Disconnect the actuator connectors C45, C44, F7, and F6. 3. Measure the resistance between the actuator side connector C44 terminals 1 and 2. Is the resistance within the specified value? 2 1. Measure the resistance between the actuator side connector C44 terminals 3 and 4. Is the resistance within the specified value? Replace the actuator FR. 4 1. Measure the resistance between the actuator side connector C45 terminals 1 and 2. Is the resistance within the specified value? 1. Measure the resistance between the actuator side connector C45 terminals 3 and 4. Is the resistance within the specified value? Replace the actuator FL. 7 1. Measure the resistance between the shock absorber side connector F6 terminals 3 and 4. Is the resistance within the specified value? 1. Measure the resistance between the shock absorber side connector F6 terminals 7 and 8. Is the resistance within the specified value? Replace the rear shock absorber RR. 10 1. Measure the resistance between the shock absorber side connector F7 terminals 3 and 4. Is the resistance within the specified value? 1. Measure the resistance between the shock absorber side connector F7 terminals 7 and 8. Is the resistance within the specified value? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 4 Value(s) Yes No
6.4 7.29
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
6.4 7.29
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
6.47.29
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
6.47.29
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 6
6.47.29
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9
6.47.29
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 9
6.47.29
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 12
11
6.47.29
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 12
Step 12 13 Action Replace the rear shock absorber RL. If all steps are correct, check the continuity between the control unit connector C50 terminal 1 and connector terminal C504, C5017, C505, C5018, C506, C5019, C507, C5020, C508, C5021, C509, C5022, C5010, C5023, C5011, and C50 24. Is there continuity? Repair the circuit. 15 16 Replace the control unit. 1. Reconnect all components, ensure components are properly mounted. 2. Clear the DTC. Was this step finished? all Go to Basic Diagnosis Flow". Go to Step 16 Go to Step 16 Go to Step 16 Value(s) Yes
3F17
No
Go to Step 15
Go to Step 14
14
Go to Step 16
3F18
DTC3 Actuator Coil/Position Sensor Open Circuit or Short

Circuit Description
The A, B, C, and D are the actuator motor coil terminals. DC 12V driving voltage is applied between terminals A and C and terminals B and D so that the shock absorber oil valves are rotated at every 7.5 step feed. The PSW is actuator position signal and detects relative angles between the piston-rod and the control-rod. The actuator outputs the PSW to the control unit.
Diagnostic Aids
Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections between the control unit 16 way connector and the actuator connectors. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed, or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change.
DTC3 Actuator Coil/Position Sensor Open Circuit or Short

Step 1 Action 1. Turn off the starter switch. 2. Disconnect the actuator connectors C50, C45, C44, F7, and F6. Is there continuity between the connector C44 terminals 1 and 2? Is there continuity between the connector C44 terminals 3 and 4? Replace the actuator FR. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Is there continuity between the connector C45 terminals 1 and 2? Is there continuity between the connector C45 terminals 3 and 4? Replace the actuator FL. Is there continuity between the connector F6 terminals 3 and 4? Is there continuity between the connector F6 terminals 7 and 8? Replace the rear shock absorber RR. Is there continuity between the connector F7 terminals 3 and 4? Is there continuity between the connector F7 terminals 7 and 8? Replace the rear shock absorber RL. Is there continuity between the connector C44 terminal 1 and connector C50 terminal 4? Is there continuity between the connector C44 terminal 3 and connector C50 terminal 17? Repair the circuit. Is there continuity between the connector C44 terminal 2 and connector C50 terminal 5? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 18 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14 Go to Step 16 Go to Step 15 Go to Step 15 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 6 Value(s) Yes No
2 3
Step 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Action Is there continuity between the connector C44 terminals 4 and connector C50 terminal 18? Repair the circuit. Is there continuity between the connector C45 terminal 1 and connector C50 terminal 6? Is there continuity between the connector C45 terminal 3 and connector C50 terminal 19? Repair the circuit. Is there continuity between the connector C45 terminal 2 and connector C50 terminal 7? Is there continuity between the connector C45 terminal 4 and connector C50 terminal 20? Repair the circuit. Is there continuity between the connector F6 terminal 4 and connector C50 terminal 8? Is there continuity between the connector F6 terminal 8 and connector C50 terminal 21? Repair the circuit. Is there continuity between the connector F6 terminal 3 and connector C50 terminal 9? Is there continuity between the connector F6 terminal 7 and connector C50 terminal 22? Repair the circuit. Is there continuity between the connector F7 terminal 4 and connector C50 terminal 10? Is there continuity between the connector F7 terminal 8 and connector C50 terminal 23? Repair the circuit. Is there continuity between the connector F7 terminal 3 and connector C50 terminal 11? Is there continuity between the connector F7 terminal 7 and connector C50 terminal 24? Repair the circuit. 1. Disconnect the terminals C51, C43, C46, F6, and F7. Is there continuity between the connectorterminal C5129 and C436, C5137 and C466, C5133 and F62, C5141 and F72? Is there continuity between the connector C50 terminal 1 (GND) and the connector C51 terminals 29, 33, 37, and 41? Is there the continuity between connector-terminal C5127 and C5135, C5131 and C5139, C5132 and C5140, and C5134 and C5142? Go to Step 37 Go to Step 34 Go to Step 35 Go to Step 37 Go to Step 31 Go to Step 32 Go to Step 34 Go to Step 28 Go to Step 29 Go to Step 31 Go to Step 25 Go to Step 26 Go to Step 28 Go to Step 22 Go to Step 23 Go to Step 25 Go to Step 19 Go to Step 20 Go to Step 22 Value(s) Yes Go to Step 19
3F19
No
Go to Step 18
Go to Step 38
Go to Step 41
38
Go to Step 41
Go to Step 39
39
Go to Step 41
Go to Step 40
3F20
Step 40
Action Is there the continuity between connector C50 terminal 1 and connector C51 terminals 27, 31, 32, and 34? Repair the circuit. Go to Step 44 1. If all steps are correct, replace following units one by one in the following order. Give a test drive and if normal, reinstall it. 1) actuator FR, 2) actuator FL, 3) rear shock absorber, RR and 4) rear shock absorber RL. Does the DTC3 remain? Replace the control unit. Go to Step 44 Go to Basic Diagnosis Flow". 1. Reconnect all components, ensure components are properly mounted. 2. Clear the DTC. Was this step finished? all Value(s) Yes No
Go to Step 41
Go to Step 42
41 42
Go to Step 43
Go to Step 44
43 44
Go to Step 44
3F21
DTC4 G-Sensor Open Circuit or Short

Circuit Description
The G-sensor sends the voltage (Vout) corresponding to the vehicle vertical gravity to the control unit. The control unit supplies DC 5V power (Vcc) to each G-sensor. The control unit watches the G-sensor operation through Vcc signal.
Diagnostic Aids
Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections between the control unit connectors and the actuator connectors. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed, or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change.
DTC4 G-Sensor Open Circuit or Short

Step 1 Action 1. Turn off the starter switch. 2. Disconnect the connectors C51, C52, C43, C 46, and F5. Is there the continuity between the connector-terminal C5128 and C435, C5130 and C465, and C5245 and F51? 2 Is there continuity between the connector-terminal C5127 and C433, C5131 and C463, and C5244 and F52? Is there the continuity between the connector-terminal C5136 and C432, C5138 and C462, and C5256 and F53? 1. Disconnect the connectors C50, C51, and C 52. Is there the continuity between the connector-terminal C5128 and C5135, C5130 and C5139, C5245 and C5255, C5127 and C5135, C5131 and C51 39, C5244 and C5255, C5136 and C5135, C51 38 and C5139, and C5256 and C5255? Repair the circuit. 6 Replace following units one by one in the following order. Give a test drive and if normal, reinstall it. 1) G3-sensor 2) Actuator FL 3) Actuator FR 4) Control Unit 7 1. Reconnect all components, ensure components are properly mounted. 2. Clear the DTC. Was this step finished? all Go to Basic Diagnosis Flow." Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6 Value(s) Yes No
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 7
3F22
DTC5 Vehicle Speed Sensor Open Circuit or Short

Circuit Description
Output speed information is provided to the control unit by the vehicle speed sensor. The vehicle speed sensor produces a pulsing AC voltage. The AC voltage level and number of pulses increases as the speed of the vehicle increases. The control unit then converts the pulsing voltage to vehicle speed.
Diagnostic Aids
Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections between the control unit 22 way connector and the speed sensor connectors. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed, or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change.
DTC5 Vehicle Speed Sensor Open Circuit or Short

Step 1 Action 1. Jack up and support the rear axle on the stand. 2. Change the transfer mode to 2WD, using the 4WD push button switch on instrument panel. 3. Shift the transmission lever in a forward position and rotate the rear wheels. Does the speedo-meter operate? 2 1. Open the throttle and rev up engine speed. 2. Using a volt meter, measure the voltage between the meter B connector I 2 terminals 7 and 16 (GND). Does the voltage change alternately at the specified values? 3 1. Turn off the starter switch and disconnect the control connectors C50 and C52. 2. Check the continuity between the vehicle speed sensor connector terminal 3 and meter B connector I 2 terminal 7. Is there continuity? 4 1. Check the continuity between the control unit connector C50 terminal 1 and control unit connector C52 terminal 48. Is there continuity? Repair or replace the vehicle speed sensor. 6 Repair the circuit between the vehicle speed sensor connector terminal 3 and the meter B connector I 2 terminal 7 or the circuit between the control unit connector C52 terminal 48 and the speed sensor connector terminal 3. 7 Repair the circuit between the connector H6 terminal 16 and the control unit connector C52 terminal 48 or replace the control unit. Go to Step 8 Go to Step 8 Go to Step 8 Value(s) Yes No
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
0V and 12V
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
Step 8 Action 1. Reconnect all components, ensure components are properly mounted. 2. Clear the DTC. Was this step finished? About the vehicle speed sensor connector terminal 3. Refer to 8D WIRING SYSTEM in BODY and ACCESORIES all Go to Basic Diagnosis Flow." Value(s) Yes
3F23
No
Go to Step 8
3F24
DTC6 Stop Lamp Switch Open Circuit or Short

Circuit Description
The brake switch is used to indicate brake pedal status. The normally opened brake switch signal voltage circuit is opened. Brake switch supplies a B+ signal on circuit RED to the control unit when the brakes are applied. The control unit uses this signal to work dive control when the brakes are applied.
Diagnostic Aids
Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections at the control unit and brake switch. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change. Check customer driving habits and/or unusual driving conditions (i.e. stop and go, highway). Check brake switch for proper mounting and adjustment.
DTC6 Stop Lamp Switch Open Circuit or Short

Step 1 Action 1. With the engine off", turn the ignition switch on". If ABS code is set, check applicable fuse. 2. Apply then release the brake pedal. Does the brake lamp come on when the brake pedal is applied and does it come off when the brake pedal is released? 1. Connect the test light to ground. 2. Back probe ignition feed circuit terminal I 18 terminal 1 at the brake switch. Is the test light on"? 3 1. Connect the test light to ground. 2. Back probe circuit terminal I 18 terminal 4 at the brake switch. Is the test light off"? Repair the open in battery feed circuit terminal I 18 terminal 1 to the brake switch. If fuse is open, check circuit terminal I18 terminal 4 for a short to ground. Is the replacement complete? Disconnect brake switch connector I 18 and ignition switch on". Is the test light on"? Check the brake switch short (I18 terminal 1 and I 18 terminal 4). Was a problem found? Check circuit terminal I18 terminal 4 for a short to voltage. Ignition switch on". Is the test light on"? 1. Disconnect the control unit connector C52. 2. Check circuit terminal I 18 terminal 4 for a short to voltage. Was a problem found? Value(s) Yes No
Go to Diagnostic Aids
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 10
Step 9 10 Action Replace the brake switch. Is the replacement complete? 1. Turn the ignition off". 2. Reconnect the control unit connector C52 Turn the ignition on". Does the brake lamp come on when the brake pedal is applied and does it come off when the brake pedal is released? 11 Check the control unit for faulty or intermittent connections. Was a problem found and corrected? Replace the control unit. Is the replacement complete? 1. After the repair is complete, clear the DTC. 2. Conduct a test drive. 3. Review the DTC. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 1 Value(s) Yes Go to Step 13
3F25
No
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 12
12 13
Go to Repair verified
3F26
DTC7 Engine Speed Signal Open Circuit or Short

Circuit Description
PCM (Powertrain Control Module) converts signals from the crankshaft position sensor into the engine speed signals (pulse) and sends these to the control unit and tachometer.
Diagnostic Aids
Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections at the control unit connector. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed, or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change. Check harness routing for a potential short to ground in circuit BLK/RED.
DTC7 Engine Speed Signal Open Circuit or Short

Step 1 Action NOTE: Confirm that DTC P0336 or P0337 does not exist. If either exists, warning lamps, CHECK ENGINE" and CHECK TRANS" are turned on. Repair the engine, referring to Section 6E Driveability and Emission". 1. Turn on the starter switch. 2. Start the engine. 3. Open the throttle and rev up engine speed. Does the tachometer operate according to engine speed? 2 Repair the tachometer, referring to Section 8D Wiring System in Body and Accessories. 3 1. Turn off the starter switch. 2. Check continuity between the control unit connector C52 terminal 59 and PCM connector E21 terminal F7. Is there continuity ? Replace the control unit. 5 6 Repair the circuit. 1. Reconnect all components, ensure components are properly mounted. 2. Clear the DTC. 3. Conduct a test drive. Has the last test failed or does the current DTC exist? all Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 1 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 6 Value(s) Yes No
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5
Repair verified
INTELLIGENT SUSPENSION DTC9 Control Unit Abnormality

Replace the control unit.
3F27
DTC91 Control Unit Blown Fuse for FR Actuator

Step 1 Action 1. Turn off the starter switch. 2. Disconnect the actuator connector C44. 3. Measure the resistance between the actuator side connector C44 terminals 1 and 2. Is the resistance within the specified value? 2 1. Measure the resistance between the actuator side connector C44 terminals 3 and 4. Is the resistance within the specified value? Replace the actuator FR. 4 1. If all steps are correct, check the continuity between the control unit connector C50 terminal 1 and connector-terminal C504, C5017, C505, C5018. Is there continuity? Repair the circuit. 6 7 Replace the control unit. 1. Reconnect all components, ensure components are properly mounted. 2. Clear the DTC. Was this step finished? all Go to Basic Diagnosis FLow". Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 Value(s) Yes No
6.4 7.29
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
6.4 7.29
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 7
3F28
DTC92 Control Unit Blown Fuse for FL Actuator

Step 1 Action 1. Turn off the starter switch. 2. Disconnect the actuator connector C45. 3. Measure the resistance between the actuator side connector C45 terminals 1 and 2. Is the resistance within the specified value? 2 1. Measure the resistance between the actuator side connector C45 terminals 3 and 4. Is the resistance within the specified value? Replace the actuator FL. 4 1. If all steps are correct, check the continuity between the control unit connector C50 terminal 1 and connector-terminal C506, C5019, C507, C5020. Is there continuity? Repair the circuit. 6 7 Replace the control unit. 1. Reconnect all components, ensure components are properly mounted. 2. Clear the DTC. Was this step finished? all Go to Basic Diagnosis FLow". Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 5 Value(s) Yes No
6.4 7.29
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
6.4 7.29
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 7
3F29
DTC93 Control Unit Blown Fuse for RR Shock Absorber

Step 1 Action 1. Turn off the starter switch. 2. Disconnect the shock absorber connector F6. 3. Measure the resistance between the shock absorber side connector F6 terminals 3 and 4. Is the resistance within the specified value? 2 1. Measure the resistance between the shock absorber side connector F6 terminals 7 and 8. Is the resistance within the specified value? Replace the shock absorber RR. 4 1. If all steps are correct, check the continuity between the control unit connector C50 terminal 1 and connector-terminal C508, C5021, C509, C5022. Is there continuity? Repair the circuit. 6 7 Replace the control unit. 1. Reconnect all components, ensure components are properly mounted. 2. Clear the DTC. Was this step finished? all Go to Basic Diagnosis FLow". Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 5 Value(s) Yes No
6.4 7.29
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
6.4 7.29
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 7
3F30
DTC94 Control Unit Blown Fuse for RL Shock Absorber

Step 1 Action 1. Turn off the starter switch. 2. Disconnect the shock absorber connector F7. 3. Measure the resistance between the shock absorber side connector F7 terminals 3 and 4. Is the resistance within the specified value? 2 1. Measure the resistance between the shock absorber side connector F7 terminals 7 and 8. Is the resistance within the specified value? Replace the shock absorber RL. 4 1. If all steps are correct, check the continuity between the control unit connector C50 terminal 1 and connector-terminal C5010, C5023, C50 11, C5024. Is there continuity? Repair the circuit. 6 7 Replace the control unit. 1. Reconnect all components, ensure components are properly mounted. 2. Clear the DTC. Was this step finished? all Go to Basic Diagnosis FLow". Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 5 Value(s) Yes No
6.4 7.29
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
6.4 7.29
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 7
3F31
Control Unit
Control Unit and Associated Parts
828RY00001
Legend (1) Front Console (2) Connector EndOFCallout
(3) Control Unit (4) Front
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the front console assembly. Refer to Consoles in Body and Accessories section. 3. Disconnect the connector from the control unit.
3F32
View A
828RY00002
Legend (1) Nut (2) Screw EndOFCallout 4. Remove 4 nuts. 5. Disconnect the control unit with brackets. 6. Remove 4 screws. 7. Disconnect the control unit from brackets.
(3) Control Unit (4) Bracket
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. Torque: Nut (1) 8Nm (69lbin)
3F33
Front Actuator
Front Actuator and Associated Parts
RH LH
450RY00004
450RY00003
Legend (1) Connector (2) Clip (3) Actuator (4) Shock Absorber (5) Front (6) Bracket EndOFCallout
Legend (1) Connector (2) Clip (3) Actuator (4) Shock Absorber (5) Front (6) Bracket EndOFCallout
3F34
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the connector from the harness and remove the connector from the bracket. 3. Remove the clip.

Refer to shock Abosorber in this section.
Installation
1. Install the shock absorber. Refer to Shock Absorber in this section. 2. Install the washer and nut (5), then tighten it to the specified torque. Torque: 15Nm (11lbft) 3. Install the bracket and nut (3), then tighten it to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29lbft) NOTE: Fix the lower nut with wrench not to turn and tighten upper nut. 4. Fit the top of the shock absorber rod in the connection part of the actuator. NOTE: The mating section is width fitting across flats. If these normally fit, the distance between the actuator lower face and the bracket upper face is about 1 mm. 5. Install 2 screws then tighten it to the specified torque. 3 Nm (26 lbin)
View B
450RY00005
Legend (1) Screw (2) Actuator (3) Nut (4) Bracket (5) Nut (6) Washer (7) Shock Absorber EndOFCallout 1. Remove 2 screws. 2. Disconnect the actuator. 3. Remove the nut (3). 4. Disconnect bracket. 5. Remove the nut (5). 6. Disconnect the washer. 7. Remove the shock absorber. Refer to Shock Absorber in this section.
6. Connect the connector to the harness and insert the connector to the bracket. 7. Connect the actuator harness with the clip. 8. Connect the battery ground cable.
3F35
Rear Shock Absorber

Rear Shock Absorber and Associated Parts
LH
461R100003
Legend (1) Connector (2) Clip (3) Rear Shock Absorber (4) Bracket (5) Bolt EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
G-Sensor Front Upper Right Connector Gusset
3F36
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) from the harness and remove the connector (1) from the bracket (4). 3. Remove the clip (2). 4. Remove the rear shock absorber (3). Refer to Shock Absorber in this section. 5. Disconnect the connector (10) from the harness and remove the connector (10) from the gusset (11). 6. Remove the 2 Bolts (5). 7. Disconnect the G-sensor (6).

Refer to Shock Absorber in this section.
Installation
1. Set the G-sensor on the gusset (11). 2. Install 2 bolts (5) then tighten it to the specified torque. Torque: 7 Nm (61lbin) 3. Connect the connector (10) to the harness and insert the connector (10) to the gusset (11). 4. Install the rear shock absorber (3). Refer to Shock Absorber in this section. 5. Connect the connector (1) to the harness and insert the connector (1) to the bracket (4). 6. Insert the clip (2) to the bracket (4). 7. Connect the battery ground cable.
SECTION
DIFFERENTIAL (FRONT)
RODEO
4A11
DRIVELINE/AXLE
CONTENTS
Differential (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differential (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driveline Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A1 4A2 4B Drive Shaft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C 4D
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Drive Axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinion Shaft Oil Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinion Shaft Oil Seal and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Drive Axle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Drive Axle Assembly and Associated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A11 4A12 4A12 4A13 4A13 4A13 4A14 4A14 4A15 4A15 4A16 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differential Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differential Cage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A16 4A18 4A18 4A19 4A111 4A119 4A119 4A119 4A120 4A120 4A122 4A125
Service Precaution
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE HAS A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM(SRS). REFER TO THE SRS COMPONENT AND WIRING LOCATION VIEW IN ORDER TO DETERMINE WHETHER YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING. WHEN YOU ARE REFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING, REFER TO THE SRS SERVICE INFOMATION. FAILURE TO FOLLOW WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN POSSIBLE AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, PERSONAL INJURY, OR OTHERWISE UNNEEDED SRS SYSTEM REPAIRS. CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. ISUZU will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. ISUZU will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED , do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fastener joint interfaces. Generally,such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fastener. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specification. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems.
4A12
Front Drive Axle

Diagnosis
Condition Oil Leak At Front Axle Oil Leak At Pinion Shaft Possible cause Worn or defective oil seal. Front axle housing cracked. Too much gear oil. Oil seal worn or defective. Pinion flange loose or damaged. Noises In Front Axle Drive Shaft Joint Clank" When Accelerating From Coast" Shudder or Acceleration Vibration During Broken or worn drive shaft joints and bellows (BJ and DOJ). Loose drive shaft joint to output shaft bolts. Damaged inner drive shaft joint. Excessive drive shaft joint angle. Worn or damaged drive shaft joints. Sticking spider assembly drive shaft joint). (inner Correction Replace the oil seal. Repair or replace. Correct the oil level. Replace the oil seal. Tighten or replace. Replace the drive shaft joints and bellows. Tighten. Replace. Repair. Replace. Lubricate or replace. Lubricate or replace. Balance or replace. Align. Replenish the gear oil. Replace the gear oil. Adjust the backlash. Replace the ring gear, pinion gear or side gear. Replace the pinion shaft bearing. Replace the hub unit bearing. Tighten or replace. Adjust the front alignment. Tighten or replace. Adjust the inflation or replace. Tighten or replace. Replace. Adjust the front alignment. Replace the ball joint or bush. Tighten or replace. Replace or adjust the inflation. Replace the shock absorber.
Sticking joint assembly (outer drive shaft joint). Vibration At Highway Speeds Noises in Front Axle Out of balance or out of round tires. Front end out of alignment. Insufficient gear oil. Wrong or poor grade gear oil. Drive pinion to ring gear backlash incorrect. Worn or chipped ring gear, pinion gear or side gear. Pinion shaft bearing worn. Hub unit bearing worn. Differential bearing loose or worn. Wanders and Pulls Incorrect front alignment. Steering unit loose or worn. Tire worn or improperly inflated. Front or rear suspension parts loose or broken. Front Wheel Shimmy Hub unit bearing worn. Incorrect front alignment. Worn ball joint or bush. Steering unit loose or worn. Tire worn or improperly inflated. Shock absorber worn.
4A13
Pinion Shaft Oil Seal

Pinion Shaft Oil Seal and Associated Parts
415RW012
Legend (1) Flange Nut (2) Flange (3) Oil Seal EndOFCallout
(4) Oil Seal Slinger (5) Outer Bearing (6) Collapsible Spacer
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support it at the frame. The hoist must remain under the front axle housing. 2. Drain the front axle oil by loosening the drain plug(1).
412RS001
4A14
3. Remove the front propeller shaft. Refer to Front Propeller Shaft in this section. 4. Remove flange nut by using pinion flange holder J 861401.

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts. 1. Seal surface of the pinion. 2. Cage bore for burns.
Installation
1. Install collapsible spacer. Discard the collapsible spacer and install a new one. 2. Install outer bearing. NOTE: Do not drive in, but just temporarily set in the outer bearing by hand, which should be indirectly pressed in finally by tightening the flange nut. 3. Install oil seal, use oil seal installer J24250 to install a new oil seal that has grease on seal lip. used
415RS018
5. Remove flange. 6. Remove oil seal. 7. Remove outer bearing by using remover J39602.
415RS002
4. Install flange. 5. Install flange nut, refer to Differential Assembly Overhaul for flange nut reassembly in this section. NOTE: Discard the used nut and install a new one.
415RS001
8. Remove collapsible spacer.
4A15
Front Drive Axle Assembly

Front Drive Axle Assembly and Associated Parts
412R200010
Legend (1) Propeller Shaft (2) Mounting Nut (3) Front Axle Case Assembly and Front Drive Shaft Assembly (4) Washer EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Mounting Bolt Tierod End; Power Steering Unit Knuckle and Back Plate Hub and Disc Assembly Suspension Crossmember
4A16
Removal
1. Jack up the vehicle and support it using jack stand. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Remove the stone guard. 4. Remove the brake caliper fixing bolt and hang the caliper. Refer to Disc Brakes in Brake section. 5. Remove the antilock brake system speed sensor. Refer to Front Wheel Speed Sensor in Brake section. 6. Remove the hub and disc assembly. Refer to Front Hub and Disc in this section. 7. Remove the propeller shaft, refer to Front Propeller Shaft in this section. 8. Loosen the height control arm of the torsion bar, then remove the torsion bar from lower control arm. refer to Torsion Bar in Suspension section. 9. Remove the suspension crossmember. 10. Remove the lower nut (1) of the stabilizer link. 11. Remove the lower bolt and nut (2) of the shock absorber.
410R200003
17. Support the differential case by the jack. 18. Remove the front axle mounting bolts and nuts, lower the jack slowly. Remove the left side drive shaft end from the knuckle, then lower the axle assembly from the vehicle. CAUTION: 1. Make sure the axle assembly is supported securely when performing repairs. 2. Do not damage the power steering unit when performing the repairs. 3. Do not damage the shift-on-the fly hose bracket when performing the repairs.
Installation
1. Support the differential case with a jack. 2. Jack up the front drive axle assembly, install the left side drive shaft to the knuckle, then install the mount bolts and nuts. CAUTION:
412RW057
12. Remove the tie-rod end from the knuckle. Refer to Power Steering Unit in Steering Section. 13. Disconnect the hose of the shift on the fly. 14. Disconnect the actuator connector. 15. Remove the bolts and nuts of the lower control arm (Frame side), then disconnect the lower control arm from frame. 16. Disconnect between the right side upper control arm and the knuckle, then remove the knuckle with lower control arm. CAUTION: When removing the knuckle, be careful not to damage the oil seal inside of the knuckle.
1. Do not damage the power steering unit when performing the repairs. 2. Do not damage the shift-on-the fly hose bracket when performing the repairs. 3. When installing the drive shaft to the knuckle, be careful not to damage the oil seal inside of the knuckle.
3. Tighten the mounting bolts and nuts to the specified torque. Torque:168Nm (124 lbft) Torque:50Nm (37 lbft) 17. Install the stone guard. 18. Install the tire and wheel.
4A17
19. Lower the vehicle, adjust the trim height. Refer to Trim Height Adjustment in Steering section. 20. Tighten the bolts and nuts of the lower control arm to the specified torque. Refer to Lower Control Arm in Suspension section.
412RW064
4. Install the right side knuckle with lower control arm to the upper control arm. Refer to Knuckle in Suspension section. CAUTION: Carefully insert the drive shaft into the knuckle, to avoid damaging the oil seal. 5. Align the bolt hole of the lower control arm, then install the bolts and nuts. NOTE: Adjust the buffer clearance before tightening the bolts and nuts of the lower control arm. 6. Install the hose of the shift on the fly. 7. Install the actuator connector of the shift on the fly. 8. Install the tie-rod end of the power steering unit to the knuckle, tighten the nut to the specified torque. Torque:118Nm (87 lbft) 9. Install lower bolts and nuts of the shock absorber, tighten it to the specified torque. Torque:93Nm (69 lbft) 10. Install lower nuts of the stabilizer link, tighten it to the specified torque. 11. Install the suspension crossmember. 12. Install the torsion bar. Refer to Torsion Bar in Suspension section. 13. Install the front propeller shaft. Refer to Front Propeller Shaft in this section. 14. Install the hub and disc assembly and adjust the bearing preload. Refer to Front Hub and Disc in this section. 15. Install the wheel speed sensor of the antilock brake system. 16. Install the brake caliper. Tighten the bolt of the caliper bracket to the specified torque.
4A18
Differential Assembly
Disassembled View
415RY00008
Legend (1) Differential Assembly (2) Flange Nut (3) Flange (4) Oil Seal (5) Oil Seal Slinger (6) Outer Bearing (7) Outer Bearing Outer Race (8) Differential Carrier (9) Bearing Cap (10) Bolt EndOFCallout
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21)
Collapsible Spacer Inner Bearing Outer Race Inner Bearing Adjust Shim Pinion Gear Diff Cage Assembly Side Bearing Outer Race Side Bearing Adjust Shim Bolt Axle Case
4A19
Disassembly
1. Remove differential carrier fixing bolt. 2. Remove differential assembly. 3. Using holding fixture J37264 and holding fixture base J328920, fix the differential assembly to the bench.
6. Remove differential cage assembly. 7. Remove side bearing outer race, after removal, keep the right and left hand side bearing assemblies separate to maintain inner and outer race combinations. 8. Remove side bearing, using remover J42379 and adapter J81072. Select insert; 303173 and collet halves; 44801 in remover kit J42379.
425RS008
4. Remove bearing cap bolt. 5. Apply a setting mark to the side bearing cap and the differential carrier then remove bearing cap.
415RW003
9. Remove adjust shim, note the thickness and position of the shims removed. 10. Remove the flange nut using holding wrench J 861401.
425RS009
415RS018
4A110
15. Remove adjust shim. 16. Remove oil seal. 17. Remove oil seal slinger. 18. Remove outer bearing. 19. Remove the inner bearing outer race (1) and the outer bearing outer race (2) by using a brass bar and a hammer.
11. Remove flange using a universal puller. 12. Remove the drive pinion assembly using a soft metal rod and a hammer.
425RS012
13. Remove collapsible spacer. 14. Remove the inner bearing using remover J42379. Select insert; 303173 and collet halves; 44801 in remover kit J42379.
425RS014
415RW004
425RS015
4A111
Reassembly
1. Using installer J7817 and grip J8092, install outer bearing outer race.
425RW030
415RW013
2. Using installer J7818 and grip J8092, install Inner bearing outer race.
Legend (1) Pilot : J2177742 (2) Pilot : J424792 (3) Gauge Plate : J424791 (4) Nut and Stud : J2177743 EndOFCallout 3. Clean the side bearing bores. Install the dial indicator with the discs and arbor. Install and tighten the bearing caps to the specified torque. Torque:97Nm (72lbft)
415RW014
3. Install adjust shim and adjust drive pinion mounting distance: 1. Apply gear oil to the inner and outer drive pinion bearing. Clean the pinion setting gauge set. Then install the gauge set together with the inner and outer bearings. 2. Tighten the nut to the specified torque. Torque:2.3Nm (20lbin)
425RW031
Legend (1) Dial Indicator: J8001 (2) Gauge Plate: J424791 (3) Disc (2 pcs.): J235978 (4) Arbor: J235971 EndOFCallout
4A112
6. After the ZERO setting is obtained, rotate the gauging arbor until the dial indicator rod does not touch the gauging plate. Record the number the dial indicator needle points to.
4. Set the dial indicator to 0". Place it on the mounting post of the gauging arbor with the contact button touching the indicator pad. Force the dial indicator downward until the needle has made a half turn clockwise. Tighten down the dial indicator in this position.
425RS022 425RS020
Legend (1) Dial Indicator (2) Ganging Arbor (3) Plunger (4) Gauge Plate EndOFCallout 5. Position the plunger on the gauge plate. Move the gauging arbor slowly back and forth and locate the position at which the dial indicator shows the greatest defection. At this point, once again set the dial indicator to 0". Repeat the procedure to verify the 0" setting.
Legend (1) Example=Dial indicator reading of 0.085 EndOFCallout 7. Record the pinion depth code on the head of the drive pinion. The number indicates a necessary change in the pinion mounting distance. A plus number indicates the need for a greater mounting distance (which can be achieved by decreasing the shim thickness). A minus number indicates the need for a smaller mounting distance (which can be achieved by increasing the shim thickness). If examination reveals pinion depth code 0", the pinion is nominal".
425RS021 425RS023
8. Select the shim using chart; Pinion marking Dial indicator reading (Inches) 0.023 0.024 0.025 0.026 0.027 0.028 0.029 0.030 0.031 0.032 0.033 0.034 0.035 0.036 0.037 0.038 0.039 0.040 0.041 0.042 0.043 0.044 0.045 0.046 0.047 0.048 0.049 0.050 0.051 0.052 0.053 0.054 0.055 0.056 0.057 0.058 0.059 0.060 +7 +6 +5 +4 +3 +2 +1 0 1 2 3 4 5
4A113
0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.030 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.030 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.032 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.032 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.034 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.034 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.036 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.038 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.040 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.040 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.042 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.042 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.044 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.044 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.046 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.046 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.048 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.048 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.050 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.050 0.052 0.052 0.052 0.052 0.052
4A114
2. Tighten the nut to the specified torque using the pinion flange holder J861401. Torque:217Nm(160lbft) NOTE: Discard used flange nut and install new one and do not over tighten the flange nut.
4. Place the shim on the drive pinion. Install the inner bearing onto the pinion using an installer J613301 and a press. NOTE: Do not apply pressure to the roller cage and apply pressure only to the inner race.
425RW036
5. Discard the used collapsible spacer and install a new one. 6. Install pinion gear. 7. Install outer bearing. 8. Install oil seal slinger. 9. Use oil seal installer J24250 to install a new oil seal that has been soaked in front axle lubricant. NOTE: Take care to use a front differential oil seal, NOT the rear differential oil seal.
415RW006
3. Adjust pinion bearing preload. a Measure the bearing preload by using a torque meter. Note the scale reading required to rotate the flange. Continue tightening flange nut until the specified starting torque is obtained.
Starting torque:0.61.1Nm(5.610.0lbin) NOTE: Do not tighten the flange nut more than 678Nm(500lbft).
415RS011
10. Install flange. 11. Install flange nut. 1. Apply lubricant to the pinion threads.
425RW018
12. Install adjust shim. 1. Attach the side bearing to the differential assembly without shims. Support the opposite side using a pilot to prevent bearing damage.
4A115
3. Using two sets of feeler gauges, insert a feeler stock of sufficient thickness between each bearing outer race and the carrier to remove all end play. Make certain the feeler stock is pushed to the bottom of the bearing bores. Mount the dial indicator J8001 on the carrier so that the indicator stem is at right angles to a tooth on the ring gear.
425RS029
Legend (1) Drive handle:J8092 (2) Installer:J24244 (3) Pilot:J81072 EndOFCallout 2. Insert the differential cage assembly with bearing outer races into the side bearing bores of the carrier.
425RS031
4. Adjust feeler gauge thickness from side to side until ring gear backlash is in the specified range. Backlash:0.130.20mm(0.005 0.008in)
425RS032
425RS030
With zero end play and correct backlash established, remove the feeler gauge packs, determine the thickness of the shims required and add 0.025 mm (0.001 in) to each shim pack to provide side bearing preload. Always use new shims.
4A116
14. Install side bearing outer race. 15. Install differential cage assembly. 16. Install bearing cap then align the setting marks(1) applied at disassembly.
5. Use bearing remover J42379 and pilot J 81072 to remove side bearing. Select insert; 303173 and collet halves;44801 in remover kit J42379.
415RW003
425RS035
13. Install the side bearings together with the selected shims.
17. Tighten the cap bolt to the specified torque. Torque:97Nm (72lbft)
425RS029
Legend (1) Drive Handle:J8092 (2) Installer: J24244 (3) Pilot: J81072 EndOFCallout
425RS036
Gear Tooth Contact Pattern Check and Adjustment 1. Apply a thin coat of prussian blue or equivalent to at least 7-8 ring gear teeth. Rotate the ring gear and inspect the contact point of the impressions and make the necessary adjustments as described in the next page.
4A117
425RS038
Legend (1) Heel (2) Toe (3) Concave Side(Coast) (4) Convex Side(Drive) EndOFCallout
425RS039
4A118
18. Install differential assembly. 1. Clean the faces of the front axle case and differential carrier. Apply Three Bond TB1215 or equivalent to the sealing side of the axle case and the carrier. 2. Attach the differential case and the carrier assembly to the front axle case and tighten the nuts and bolts. Torque:25Nm (19lbft)
415RS014
3. Fill the axle case with hypoid gear lubricant, up to the base of the filler hole. Lubricant capacity:1.4liter(1.48USqt)
4A119
Differential Cage Assembly

Disassembled View
415RW010
Legend (1) Thrust Washer (2) Pinion Gear (3) Thrust Washer (4) Side Gear EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Cross Pin Ring Gear Bolt Differential Cage Lock Pin
Disassembly
1. Remove bolt. 2. Remove ring gear. 3. Remove lock pin.
425RS042
4A120
3. Tighten the fixing bolts in a diagonal sequence as illustrated.
4. Remove the cross pin, using a soft metal rod and a hammer.
425RS043
415RS016
5. Remove pinion gear and thrust washer. 6. Remove side gear. 7. Remove thrust washer.
Reassembly
1. Install thrust washer. 2. Install side gear. 3. Install the pinion gear with thrust washer by engaging it with the side gears while turning both pinion gears simultaneously in the same direction.

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts. 1. Ring gear, pinion gear 2. Bearing 3. Side gear, pinion gear, cross pin 4. Differential cage, carrier 5. Thrust washer 6. Oil seal Ring gear replacement: 1. The ring gear should always be replaced with the drive pinion as a set. 2. Discard used bolts and install new ones. Torque:108Nm (80lbft)
425RS048
4. Install cross pin. Be sure to install the cross pin so that it is in alignment with the lock pin hole in the differential cage.
4A121
425RS049
5. Install lock pin. After lock pin installation, stake the cage to secure the lock pin. 6. Install ring gear and tighten the bolts in diagonal sequence as illustrated. Torque:108Nm (80lbft) NOTE: Discard used bolts and install new ones.
415RS016
4A122

Axle tube Type Gear type Gear ratio Differential type Oil capacity Type of lubricant Axle shaft type Hub locking Type liter (US qt) (to 1) It consists of a duct, a cast iron housing and an axle tube. Hypoid 4.100 (6VD1 with A/T) 4.300 (6VD1 with M/T) Two pinion 1.25 (1.32) (Differential) 0.12 (0.13) (Actuator Housing: Shift on the fly) GL5 (75W90) Constant velocity joint (Birfield joint type and double offset joint) Rigid
DIFFERENTIAL (FRONT) Torque Specifications
4A123
412RY00032
4A124
415RY00009
4A125
Special Tools
J861401 Holder; Pinion flange
J7817 Installer; Outer bearing outer race
J7818 Installer; Inner bearing outer race
J37264 Differential holding fixture (Use with J328920 base)
J8092 Driver handle
J328920 Holding fixture base
J2177742 Pilot
J42379 Remover; Side/Pinion bearing
J2177743 Nut and stud
J81072 Adapter; Side bearing plug
J424791 Gauge plate
4A126
TOOL NO. TOOL NAME ILLUSTRATION TOOL NO. TOOL NAME
ILLUSTRATION
J8001 Dial indicator
J424792 Pilot
J235978 Disc
J235971 Arbor
J613301 Installer; Pinion bearing
J24244 Installer; Side bearing
J39602 Remover; Outer bearing
SECTION
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
RODEO
4A21
DRIVELINE/AXLE
Differential (Rear)
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axle Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axle Housing and Associated Parts . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axle Shaft, Oil Seal and Bearing . . . . . . . . . . Axle Shaft and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinion Oil Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinion Oil Seal and Associated Parts . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differential Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the Axle Before Disassembly . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A21 4A22 4A23 4A25 4A25 4A25 4A27 4A27 4A27 4A28 4A28 4A28 4A210 4A210 4A210 4A211 4A211 4A213 4A213 4A214 4A214 Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Bearing Preload Adjustment. . . . . . . . Pinion Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determination of Backlash & Preload Shims Backlash Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Tooth Pattern Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustments Affecting Tooth Contact . . . . . Differential Case Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limited Slip Differential Assembly . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data And Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A216 4A217 4A221 4A222 4A223 4A224 4A225 4A226 4A226 4A226 4A227 4A227 4A227 4A228 4A228 4A228 4A230 4A230 4A232 4A234
Service Precaution
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE HAS A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM(SRS). REFER TO THE SRS COMPONENT AND WIRING LOCATION VIEW IN ORDER TO DETERMINE WHETHER YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING. WHEN YOU ARE REFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING, REFER TO THE SRS SERVICE INFOMATION. FAILURE TO FOLLOW WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN POSSIBLE AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, PERSONAL INJURY, OR OTHERWISE UNNEEDED SRS SYSTEM REPAIRS. CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. ISUZU will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. ISUZU will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED , do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fastener joint interfaces. Generally,such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fastener. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specification. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems.
4A22
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR) Limited Slip Differential (LSD)

The axle assembly may be equipped with an limited slip differential (LSD). It is similar to the standard differential except that part of the torque from the ring gear is transmitted through clutch packs between the side gears and differential case. The LSD construction permits differential action when required for turning corners and transmits equal torque to both wheels when driving straight ahead. However, when one wheel tries to spin due to a patch of ice, etc., the clutch packs automatically provide more torque to the wheel which is not trying to spin. In diagnosing customer complaints, it is important to recognize two things: 1. If, both wheels slip, with unequal traction, the LSD has done all it can possibly do. 2. In extreame cases of differences in traction, the wheel with the least traction may spin after the LSD has transferred as much torque as possible to the non-slipping wheel. Limited Slip Differntials impose additional requirements on lubricants, and require a special lubricant or lubricant additive. Use 80W90 GL5 LSD lubricant.
General Description
The rear axle assembly is of the semifloating type in which the vehicle weight is carried on the axle housing . The center line of the pinion gear is below the center line of the ring gear (hypoid drive). All parts necessary to transmit power from the propeller shaft to the rear wheels are enclosed in a salisbury type axle housing (a carrier casting with tubes pressed and welded into the carrier). A removable aluminum cover at the rear of the axle housing permits rear axle service without removal of the entire assembly from the vehicle. The 8.9 inch ring gear rear axle uses a conventional ring and pinion gear set to transmit the driving force of the engine to the rear wheels. This gear set transfers this driving force at a 90 degree angle from the propeller shaft to the drive shafts. The axle shafts are supported at the wheel end of the shaft by a roller bearing. The pinion gear is supported by two tapered roller bearings. The pinion depth is set by a shim pack located between the gear end of the pinion and the roller bearing that is pressed onto the pinion. The pinion bearing preload is set by crushing a collapsible spacer between the bearings in the axle housing. The ring gear is bolted onto the differential case with 10 bolts. The differential case is supported in the axle housing by two tapered roller bearings. The differential and ring gear are located in relationship to the pinion by using selective shims and spacers between the bearing and the differential case. To move the ring gear, shims are deleted from one side and an equal amount are added to the other side. These shims are also used to preload the bearings which are pressed onto the differential case. Two bearing caps are used to hold the differential into the rear axle housing. The differential is used to allow the wheels to turn at different rates of speed while the rear axle continues to transmit the driving force. This prevents tire scuffing when going around corners and prevents premature wear on internal axle parts. The rear axle is sealed with a pinion seal, a seal at each axle shaft end, and by a liquid gasket between the rear cover and the axle housing.
Rear Axle Identification

The Bill of Material and build date information(1) is stamped on the right axle tube on the rearward side. The axle ratio is identified by a tag(3) which is secured by a cover bolt. If the axle has limited-slip differntial, it also will be identified with a tag(2) secured by a cover bolt.
425RX001
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
4A23
Diagnosis
Many noises that seem to come from the rear axle actually originate from other sources such as tires, road surface, wheel bearings, engine, transmission, muffler, or body drumming. Investigate to find the source of the noise before disassembling the rear axle. Rear axles, like any other mechanical device, are not absolutely quiet but should be considered quiet unless some abnormal noise is present. To make a systematic check for axle noise, observe the following: 1. Select a level asphalt road to reduce tire noise and body drumming. 2. Check rear axle lubricant level to assure correct level, and then drive the vehicle far enough to thoroughly warm up the rear axle lubricant. 3. Note the speed at which noise occurs. Stop the vehicle and put the transmission in neutral. Run the engine speed slowly up and down to determine if the noise is caused by exhaust, muffler noise, or other engine conditions. 4. Tire noise changes with different road surfaces; axle noises do not. Temporarily inflate all tires to 344 kPa (50 psi) (for test purposes only). This will change noise caused by tires but will not affect noise caused by the rear axle. Rear axle nose usually stops when coasting at speeds under 48 km/h (30 mph); however, tire noise continues with a lower tone. Rear axle noise usually changes when comparing pull and coast, but tire noise stays about the same. Distinguish between tire noise and rear axle noise by noting if the noise changes with various speeds or sudden acceleration and deceleration. Exhaust and axle noise vary under these conditions, while tire noise remains constant and is more pronounced at speeds of 32 to 48 km/h (20 to 30 mph). Further check for tire noise by driving the vehicle over smooth pavements or dirt roads (not gravel) with the tires at normal pressure. If the noise is caused by tires, it will change noticeably with changes in road surface. 5. Loose or rough front wheel bearings will cause noise which may be confused with rear axle noise; however, front wheel bearing noise does not change when comparing drive and coast. Light application of the brake while holding vehicle speed steady will often cause wheel bearing noise to diminish. Front wheel bearings may be checked for noise by jacking up the wheels and spinning them or by shaking the wheels to determine if bearings are loose. 6. Rear suspension rubber bushings and spring insulators dampen out rear axle noise when correctly installed. Check to see that there is no link or rod loosened or metaltometal contact. 7. Make sure that there is no metaltometal contact between the floor and the frame.
After the noise has been determined to be in the axle, the type of axle noise should be determined, in order to make any necessary repairs.
Gear Noise
Gear noise (whine) is audible from 32 to 89 km/h (20 to 55 mph) under four driving conditions. 1. In drive under acceleration or heavy pull. 2. Driving under load or under constant speed. 3. When using enough throttle to keep the vehicle from driving the engine while the vehicle slows down gradually (engine still pulls slightly). 4. When coasting with the vehicle in gear and the throttle closed. The gear noise is usually more noticeable between 48 and 64 km/h (30 and 40 mph) and 80 and 89 km/h (50 and 55 mph).
Bearing Noise
Bad bearings generally produce a rough growl or grating sound, rather than the whine typical of gear noise. Bearing noise frequently wowwows at bearing rpm, indicating a bad pinion or rear axle side bearing. This noise can be confused with rear wheel bearing noise.
Rear Wheel Bearing Noise

Rear wheel bearing noise continues to be heard while coasting at low speed with transmission in the neutral. Noise may diminish by gentle braking. Jack up the rear wheels, spin them by hand and listen for noise at the hubs. Replace any faulty wheel bearings.
Knock At Low Speeds

Low speed knock can be caused by worn universal joints or a side gear hub counter bore in the cage that is worn oversize. Inspect and replace universal joints or cage and side gears as required.
Backlash Clunk
Excessive clunk on acceleration and deceleration can be caused by a worn rear axle pinion shaft, a worn cage, excessive clearance between the axle and the side gear splines, excessive clearance between the side gear hub and the counterbore in the cage, worn pinion and side gear teeth, worn thrust washers, or excessive drive pinion and ring gear backlash. Remove worn parts and replace as required. Select closefitting parts when possible. Adjust pinion and ring gear backlash.
4A24
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
Rear Axle Noise

Condition Noise in Drive Possible cause Excessive backlash. pinion to ring gear Adjust. Replace Replace. Adjust. Adjust. Replace. Adjust. Replace. Replenish. Replace. Replace. Adjust or replace. Correction
Worn pinion and ring gear. Worn pinion .bearings. Loose pinion bearings. Excessive pinion end play. Worn side bearings. Loose side bearings. Excessive ring gear run-out. Low oil level. Wrong or poor grade oil. Bent axle housing. Noisy when coasting Axle noise heard when driving will usually be heard also on coasting, although not as loud. Pinion and ring gear too tight (audible when slowing down and disappears when driving). Intermittent noise Constant noise Warped bevel ring. Loose differential case bolts. Flat spot on pinion or ring gear teeth. Flat spot on bearing. Worn pinion splines. Worn axle shaft dowel holes. Worn hub studs. Bent axle shaft. Noisy on turns Worn differential side gears and pinions. Worn differential shaft. Worn axle shaft splines.
Adjust.
Replace. Tighten. Replace. Replace. Replace. Replace. Replace. Replace. Replace. Replace. Replace.
Limited Slip Differential

Condition Does not lock Chatters in turns Possible cause Broken clutch plates. Lubricant contaminated. Correction Replace the clutch plates. Drain lube when hot. Wipe carrier clean. Refill with lube specified in Main Data and Specifications at the end of this section. Replace clutch plates. Replace clutch plates. Replace unit. Replace gears.
Clutch plates dateriorated. Noise (in addition to normal clutch engagement) Broken clutch plates. Damaged case. Broken differential gears.
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
4A25
Axle Housing
Axle Housing and Associated Parts
420RW030
Legend (1) Lower Link (2) Stabilizer (3) Upper Link (4) Rear Propeller shaft (5) Shock Absorber EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Lateral Rod Brake Hose Coil Spring Parking Cable Axle Assembly
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support it with suitable safety stands. The hoist must remain under the rear axle housing. 2. Take out brake fluid. Refer to Hydraulic Brakes in Brake section. 3. Remove rear wheels and tires. Refer to Wheel Replacement in Suspension section. 4. Remove propeller shaft. Shaft in this section. Refer to Rear Propeller
5. Drain the rear axle oil into a proper container. 6. Remove parking brake cable, release the connection between the cable fixing clip equalizer. Refer to Parking Brakes in Brake section. 7. Move the clip aside and pull out the breather hose. 8. Disconnect the ABS connectors (1) and remove the brackets attached to the frame and center link.
350R200005
4A26
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
12. Remove the lateral rod fixing bolt and nut from the frame. 13. Remove the upper link mounting bolt and nut (3) from the axle housing.
9. Loosen the brake tube flare nut, remove the clip and take out the brake tube.
350RW020
10. Remove the shock absorber. 11. Remove the stabilizer linkage mounting bolts and nuts (2) from the frame side.
460RW015
14. Remove the lower link fixing bolt and nut (4) from the axle housing.
350R200006 460RW016
15. Jack down and remove the coil spring and insulator. 16. Axle housing assembly can be separated from the vehicle on completion of steps 1 15. 17. Remove the brake caliper fixing bolt, loosen the flare nut, release the clip and take out the brake caliper together with the flexible hose. 18. Remove brake disc. 19. Remove antilock brake system speed sensor fixing bolt and the clip and bracket on the axle housing. 20. Remove the brake pipe clip and fixing bolt on the axle housing and take out the brake pipe.
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
4A27
Installation
1. Install brake pipe. 2. Connect Antilock brake system (ABS) speed sensor and harness, refer to 4Wheel AntiLock Brake System (ABS) in Brake section. 3. Install brake disc. 4. Install brake caliper. Refer to Disk Brakes in Brake section. 5. Install axle housing assembly. 6. Install coil spring and insulator. 7. Install the lower link fixing bolt and nut to the axle housing. For the procedures in items 711, refer to Suspension section. 8. Install the upper link bolt and nut to the axle
housing. 9. Install the lateral rod fixing nut and bolt to the frame side. 10. Install the stabilizer linkage mounting nut and bolt to the frame side. 11. Install the shock absorber. 12. Install brake tube flare nut, Refer to Disk Brakes in Brake section. 13. Install ABS connector and bracket. 14. Connect breather hose. 15. Install parking brake cable, Refer to Parking Brakes in Brake section. 16. Bleed brakes. Refer to Hydraulic Brakes in Brake section.
Axle Shaft, Oil Seal and Bearing

Axle Shaft and Associated Parts
Disc Brake Model Drum Brake Model
420RX001
420RW008
Legend (1) Axle Shaft (2) Backing Plate (3) Oil Seal (4) Bearing (5) Axle Housing (6) Lock Washer (7) Nut EndOFCallout
Legend (1) Axle Shaft (2) Backing Plate (3) Oil Seal (4) Bearing (5) Axle Housing (6) Lock Washer (7) Nut EndOFCallout
4A28
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
8. Remove oil seal, retainer, and emergency brake assembly. 9. Remove inner race from shaft with OTC1126 bearing splitter and press.
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle. 2. Remove rear wheels and brake calipers or drums. Do not let calipers hang from the vehicle by the brake line or hose. Use a wire to hang the caliper to the frame to prevent damage to the caliper. 3. Remove four nuts and lockwashers. 4. Remove shaft assembly from the axle housing. 5. Remove snap ring and bearing cup. 6. Break retainer ring with hammer and chisel.
420RS028
Inspection
Shaft for spalling or grooves from seal wear. Retainer bent or damaged. Replace items if required.
420RS026
7. Break bearing cage with hammer and chisel.
Installation
1. Emergency brake assembly. 2. Install retainer. Note direction do not install backwards.
420RS027
420RS029
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
3. Install oil seal. Note direction. 4. Install bearing assembly, using installer and press.
4A29
420RS033
420RS030
6. Install snap ring. 7. Install axle shaft assembly into housing. 8. Install bolts, lockwashers, and nuts. Tighten the retainer nuts to the specified torque. Torque : 75Nm (55lbft)
NOTE: Install bearing with cup towards inboard side.
420RS031
5. Install retainer ring, using installer and press.
4A210
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
Pinion Oil Seal

Pinion Oil Seal and Associated Parts
420RW013
Legend (1) Flange Nut and Washer (2) Flange EndOFCallout
(3) (4) (5)
Oil Seal Outer Oil Seal Slinger Outer Pinion Bearing (Cup and Cone)
Removal
1. Remove the rear propeller shaft. Propeller Shaft in this section. 2. Drain the rear axle oil. 3. Check and record preload with an inch pound torque wrench. This will give combined pinion bearing, seal, carrier bearing, axle bearing and seal preload. Refer to Rear
425RW018
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
4. Remove flange nut and washer by using pinion flange holder J861401 after raising up its staked parts completely. 6. Remove oil seal. 7. Remove pinion oil seal slinger.
4A211
8. Remove outer bearing by using remover J39602.
425RW037
5. Remove flange by using SST J86141 3. Have a suitable container in place to catch lubricant.
425RS090
9. Remove collapsible spacer.

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts. 1. Seal surface of the flange. 2. Cage bore for burns.
Installation
1. Install collapsible spacer, discard the collapsible spacer and install a new one. 2. Install outer bearing. NOTE: Do not drive in, but just temporarily set in the outer bearing by hand, which should be indirectly pressed in finally by tightening the flange nut.
425RW038
used
4A212
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
3. By using the seal installer J37263, install a new oil seal (1) that has grease on seal lip.
425RS004
4. Install flange. 5. The pinion washer and a new nut while holding the pinion flange with J861401. Tighten the nut until the pinion end play is just taken up. Rotate the pinion while tightening the nut to seat the bearings. Once there is not end play in the pinion, the preload torque should be checked. Remove J861401. Using an inch-pound torque wrench, check to make sure the pinion preload is equal to or slightly over the reading recorded during removal.
425RW018
6. Install propeller shaft to the frange. 7. Install bolt and nut. Tighten the bolt and nut to the specified torque. Torque: 63Nm (46lbft)
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
4A213
Differential Assembly
Disassembled View
420RW018
Legend (1) ABS Speed Sensor (2) Housing (3) Outer Pinion Bearing (Cup and Cone) (4) Outer Oil Slinger (5) Oil Seal (6) Companion Flange Assembly (7) Pinion Nut Washer (8) Pinion Nut (9) Collapsible Spacer (10) Baffle Plate (11) Inner Pinion Bearing (Cup and Cone) (12) Inner Oil Slinger (13) Pinion gear adj. Shim-Selective (Position) (14) Ring gear and Pinion Gear Assembly (15) Exciter Ring (16) Differential Case EndOFCallout
(17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) (32)
Lock Pin Axle Vent Gasket Cover and Clip Assembly Fill Plug (with Magnet) Mounting Bracket Side Bearing Cap Bolt Side Bearing Cap Drive Gear Bolts Differential Adjustment Shims (Side Bearing Preload and Ring Gear/Pinion Backlash) Side Bearing (Cup and Cone) Differential Shaft Differential Side Gears Side Gear Thrust Washer Pinion Mate Gears Thrustwasher-Differential Pinion Mate Gear
4A214
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
Inspecting the Disassembly
Axle
Before
4. Remove Differential case. Pry the case from the axle housing at the differentialwindow.
1. Remove the axle cover from the rear axle and drain the axle lubricant into a suitable container. 2. Check ring gear backlash. Refer to BACKLASH ADJUSTMENT in this section. This information can be used to determine the cause of the axle problem. It will also help when setting up the shim packs for locating and preloading the differential cage. 3. Check case for metal chips and shavings. Determine where these chips and shavings come from, such as a broken gear or bearing cage. If possible, determine the cause of the axle problem before disassembly.
Disassembly
1. Remove axle shafts. Refer to axle shaft replacement in this section. 2. Remove ABS sensor. 3. Remove bearing caps and bolts. Mark the caps and the housing as left and right. CAUTION: Bearing caps are machined with the housing and must be assembled in the same position as removed. Note the matched letter stamped on the caps and carrier. When assembled, the letters on the caps must agree in both the hosizontal and vertical position with the letters on the carrier.
420RW010
5. Remove side bearing outer races and shims. Mark the races and shims as left and right, and place them with the bearing cups. 6. Remove differential side bearings using remover J 42379 and plug J39830. Select insert ; 303174 and collet halves ; 44801 in remover kit J42379.
415RW003
7. Remove ring gear bolts.

420RW003
Ring gear bolts use right handed threads. CAUTION: DO not pry the ring gear from the case. This will damage the ring and the differential case.
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
8. Remove ring gear from the differential. Drive the ring gear off with a brass drift if necessary. Check drive pinion bearing preload. 12. Remove collapsible spacer(1).
4A215
415RW011
425RW018
Check the pinion assembly for looseness by moving it back and forth. (Looseness indicates excessive bearing wear.) 9. Remove pinion flange nut and washer. Use flange holder J861401 to hold the pinion flange.
13. Remove outer seal, outer oil slinger and outer pinion bearing. 14. Remove inner bearing, inner oil slinger and shim from the pinion. Press the bearing off the pinion using remover J 42379.
10. Remove pinion flange. Use flange holder J861401 to remove the pinion flange.
415RW004
Select insert ; 303174 and collet halves ; 44801 in remover kit J42379. Remove the shim. 15. Remove bearing cups and baffle plate from the axle housing using a hammer and a punch.
415RS018
11. Remove pinion from the axle housing. Thread the pinion nut halfway onto the pinion. Drive the pinion out of the housing with a hammer and a soft drift. Remove the nut and then remove the pinion.
Work the cups out of the housing evenly, moving the punch back and forth between one side of the cup and the other. The baffle plate will be destroyed and should be replaced with a new one.
4A216
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
scoring, or excessive wear. Pinion splines for wear. Pinion flange splines for wear. The sealing surface of the pinion flange for nicks, burrs, or rough tool marks which would cause damage to the seal's inside diameter and result in an oil leak. Replace all worn or broken parts. Ring and pinion gears are matched sets and are both replaced anytime a replacement of either is necessary.
16. Remove exciter ring. Remove the exciter ring from the differential using a mallet or a brass hammer if it is required. NOTE: Discard the exciter ring after removal.
Bearings
Bearings visually and by feel. The bearings should feel smooth when oiled and rotated while applying as much hand pressure as possible. The large end of the bearing rollers for wear. This is where tapered roller bearing wear is most evident. Bearing cups for wear, cracks, brinelling and scoring.
425RS097
Bearing and cups are only replaced as sets. If the rear axle was operated for an extended period of time with very loose bearings, the ring gear and drive pinion will also require replacement. Low mileage bearings may have minute scratches and pits on the rollers and the bearing cups from the initial pre-load. Do not replace a bearing for this reason. Bearing cups for cracks or chips.
Cleaning
Do not steam clean drive parts which have ground and polished surfaces such as gears, bearings, and shafts. These parts should be cleaned in a suitable solvent. All parts should be disassembled before cleaning. Parts should be thoroughly dried immediately after cleaning. Use soft, clean, lintless rags. Parts may be dried with cimpressed air. Do not allow the bearings to spin while drying them with compressed air.
Shims
Shims for cracks and chips. Damaged shims should be replaced with an equally sized service shim.

It is very important to carefully and thoroughly inspect all drive unit parts before reassembly. Thorough inspection of the drive parts for wear or stress and subsequent replacement of worn parts will eliminate costly drive component repair after reassembly.
Axle Housing
The carrier bore for nicks or burrs that would prevent the outer diameter of the pinion seal from sealing, Remove any burrs that are found. The bearing cap bores for nicks or burrs. Remove any burrs that are found. The housing for cracks. Replace the housing if any cracks are found. The housing for foreign material such as metal chips, dirt, or rust.
Pinion and Ring Gear

Pinion and ring gear teeth for cracking, chipping,
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
4A217
Reassembly
1. Install pinion bearing races and baffle plate using outer bearing race installer J861101 / inner bearing race installer J42836 and drive handle J 8592. NOTE: Baffle plate must be installed, when install the inner pinion bearing race.
6. Install gauge plate J398372, inner J42827 stud and nut J2177743 and outer pilot J42824 to the pinion bore.
420RW005
7. Hold the stud stationary at the flats of the stud (and). Tighten the stud nut Torque: 2.2Nm (1.6lbft)
425RW019
8. Rotate the gauge plate and bearings several complete revolutions to seat the bearings. 9. Tighten the stud nut until a torque of 1.6 to 2.2 Nm (1.2 to 1.6lbft.) is required to keep the gauge plate in rotation. 10. Assemble discs J398371, arbor J235971 and dial indicator J8001 to the side bearing bores. NOTE: The bearing bores must be clean and burr-free.
425RW020
2. Clean all the gauge parts. 3. Lubricate the outer and inner bearings with axle lubricant. 4. Place the bearings into the pinion bearing races. 5. Place the inner oil slinger onto the inner pinion bearing. NOTE: The inner oil slinger must be placed between gauge plate and inner pinion bearing when measuring the pinion depth.
420RW005
4A218
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
15. Position the plunger on the gauge plate. Move the gauging arbor slowly back and forth and locate the position at which the dial indicator shows the greatest defection. At this point, once again set the dial indicator to0. Repeat the procedure to verify the 0 setting.
11. Install the side bearing caps and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 108Nm (80lbft) 12. Rotate the gauge plate until the gauging area is parallel with the discs. 13. Position the arbor assembly in the carrier so that the plunger is centered on the gauge area of the gauge plate. 14. Set the dial indicator to0. Place it on the mounting post of the gauging arbor with the contact button touching the indicator pad. Force the dial indicator downward until the needle has made a half turn clockwise. Tighten down the dial indicator in this position.
425RS021
16. After the ZERO setting is obtained, rotate the gauging arbor until the dial indicator rod does not touch the gauging plate. Record the number the dial indicator needle points to.
425RS020
Legend (1) Dial Indicator (2) Ganging Arbor (3) Plunger (4) Gaug Plate EndOFCallout
425RS022
Legend (1) Example=Dial indicator reading of 0.085 EndOFCallout
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
17. Record the pinion depth code on the head of the drive pinion. The number indicates a necessary change in the pinion mounting distance. A plus number indicates the need for a greater mounting distance (which can be achieved by decreasing the shim thickness). A minus number indicates the need for a smaller mounting distance (which can be achieved by increasing the shim thickness). If examination reveals pinion depth code0, the pinion isnominal.
4A219
425RS023
4A220
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
18. Select the shim using the chart;
Dial Indicator Reading (inches) 0.027 0.028 0.029 0.030 0.031 0.032 0.033 0.034 0.035 0.036 0.037 0.038 0.039 0.040 0.041 0.042 0.043 0.044 0.045 0.046 0.047 0.048 0.049 0.050 0.051 0.052 0.053 0.054 0.055 0.056
Marking (inches) +3 +2 +1 0 -1 -2 -3 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.031 0.032 0.033 0.034 0.035 0.036 0.037 0.038 0.039 0.040 0.041 0.042 0.043 0.044 0.045 0.046 0.047 0.048 0.049 0.050 0.051 0.052 0.053 0.031 0.032 0.033 0.034 0.035 0.036 0.037 0.038 0.039 0.040 0.041 0.042 0.043 0.044 0.045 0.046 0.047 0.048 0.049 0.050 0.051 0.052 0.053 0.031 0.032 0.033 0.034 0.035 0.036 0.037 0.038 0.039 0.040 0.041 0.042 0.043 0.044 0.045 0.046 0.047 0.048 0.049 0.050 0.051 0.052 0.053 0.031 0.032 0.033 0.034 0.035 0.036 0.037 0.038 0.039 0.040 0.041 0.042 0.043 0.044 0.045 0.046 0.047 0.048 0.049 0.050 0.051 0.052 0.053 0.031 0.032 0.033 0.034 0.035 0.036 0.037 0.038 0.039 0.040 0.041 0.042 0.043 0.044 0.045 0.046 0.047 0.048 0.049 0.050 0.051 0.052 0.053 0.031 0.032 0.033 0.034 0.035 0.036 0.037 0.038 0.039 0.040 0.041 0.042 0.043 0.044 0.045 0.046 0.047 0.048 0.049 0.050 0.051 0.052 0.053 0.031 0.032 0.033 0.034 0.035 0.036 0.037 0.038 0.039 0.040 0.041 0.042 0.043 0.044 0.045 0.046 0.047 0.048 0.049 0.050 0.051 0.052 0.053
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
19. Remove bearing caps and depth gauging tools. 20. Install the correct pinion shim and inner oil slinger onto pinion. NOTE: Do not install pinion gear into housing at this time. 21. If the exciter ring was removed, install the new exciter ring onto the differential case by pressing using the ring gear as a pilot. 23. Install new ring gear bolts.
4A221
Tighten the ring gear bolts alternately in stages, gradually pulling the ring gear onto the differential case. Tighten the ring gear bolts in sequence Torque: 108Nm (80lbft) NOTE: Discard used bolts and install new ones.
425RS047
415RS016
22. Install ring gear(1) to the differential case(2)
Side Bearing Preload Adjustment

1. The side bearing preload adjustment must be made before installing the pinion. 2. The side bearing preload is adjusted by changing the thickness of both the left and right shims equally. This maintain the original backlash. 3. Install master side bearings J39836 onto the case. Remove all nicks, burrs, dirt etc., from the hubs to allow the master bearings to rotate freely.
425RW021
425RW026
4A222
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
4. Assemble the differential case into the housing (less pinion). Install bearing caps and finger tight bolts. Mount a dial indicator with a magnetic base to the housing and indicate on the flange or head of screw. Force the differential assembly as far as possible in the dirction towards the indicator. With force still applied, set indicator at zero(0). NOTE: Dial indicator set should be capable of a minimum travel of 5.08mm (0.2in).
Pinion Installation
The bearing cups should have been installed in Pinion Depth Adjustment in this section. 1. Place the shim(1) and inner oil slinger(2) on the pinion gear, then install the pinion inner bearing(3) using installer J42828.
425RW023
425RS107
Drive the bearing until the bearing cone seats on the pinion shims. 2. Install a new collapsible spacer. Lubracate the pinion bearings with axle lublicant. 3. Install pinion to the axle housing. 4. Install outer pinion bearing onto the pinion. Hold the pinion forward from inside the case while driving the bearing onto the pinion. 5. Install oil seal slinger. 6. Install pinion oil seal using installer J37263. 7. Install the pinion flange to the pinion by tapping it with a rawhide hammer until a few threads show through the pinion flange. 8. Install pinion washer and a new nut while holding the pinion flange with flange holder J861401. Tighten the nut until the pinion end play is just taken up. Rotate the pinion while tightening the nut to seat the bearings. Torque:217-678Nm (160-500lbft) Once there is no end play in the pinion, the preload torque should be checked.
5. Force the differetial assembly as far as it will go in the opposite direction. Repeat these steps until the same reading is obtained. 6. RECORD THE READING OF THE INDICATOR. This amount, in shims, will be included in the final assembly shim stack to establish side bearing preload and ring gear and pinion backlash. 7. After marking sure the readings are correct, remove the indicator and differetial assembly from the housing.
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
Remove flange holder J861401. Using an inch-pound torque wrench, check the pinion preload by rotating the pinion with the wrench.
4A223
ring gear is forced back into contact with the cross bore face. This reading will be the necessary amount of shims to be placed between the differential case and side bearing cone on the ring gear side. 8. The remaining amount of shims, which is the difference between the overall found in step 6 of Side Bearing Pre-load Adjustment and step(7) above, should be placed on the other side of the differential case, plus additional 0.38mm (0.015in) for obtaining preload and backlash. 9. Place the required amount of shims on each hub as determined in the previous steps and assemble side bearing cone by using installer J21784 and handle J8592.
425RW018
Preload should be at 1.0 to 1.6Nm (8 to 14inlbs.) on new bearings, or 0.46 to 0.69Nm (4 to 6inlbs.) for used bearings. If the preload torque is below the preloads given above, continue torquing the nut in small increments. Check the preload after each tightening. Each tightening increases the bearing preload by several pounds. If the bearing preload is exceeded, the pinion will have to be removed, and a new collapsible spacer installed. Once a preload of 1.0 to 1.4Nm (8 to 12inlbs.) has been obtained, rotate the pinion several times to assure that the bearings have seated. Recheck the preload, and adjust if necessary.
425RW022
10. Total torque to rotate Increase of pinion torque to rotate due to differential case assembly shall not exceed 3.4Nm (30inlbs.) divided by the gear ratio.
Determination of Backlash & Preload Shims

1. Install master side bearings onto the case. 2. Install differential assembly into the carrier. 3. Install the bearing cap and finger tight bolts. 4. Set up the dial indicator. 5. Force the differential assembly away from the pinion gear until it is completely seated against the cross bore face of the carrier. 6. With force still applied to the differential case, place the tip of dial indicator on a machined surface of the differential case, if available, or on the head of a ring gear screw, and set the indicator at zero(0). 7. Force the ring gear to mesh with the pinion gear. Rock the ring gear slightly to make sure the gear teeth are meshed. Repeat this procedure several times until the same reading is obtained each time. Be sure the indicator reads zero(0) each time the
4A224
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
6. Place the indicator stem at the heel end of a tooth. Set the dial indicator so that the stem is in line with the gear rotation and perpendicular to the tooth angle.
11. Assembly the spreader J24385B and indicator to the carrier as shown in figure. Spread the carrier 0.5mm (0.02in) for differential installation.
420RW004
CAUTION: Do not spread the carrier over 0.5mm (0.02in). 12. Remove the indicator.
425RS087
7. Check and record the backlash at three points around the ring gear. The pinion must be held stationary when checking backlash. The backlash should be the same at each point within 0.07mm (0.003in). If the backlash varies more than 0.07mm (0.003in), check for burrs, a distorted case flange, or uneven bolting conditions. 8. Backlash at the minimum lash point measured should be between 0.13 and 0.20mm (0.005 and 0.008in) for all new gear sets. 9. If the backlash is not within specifications, move the ring gear in or out from the pinion by increasing the thickness of one shims, and decreasing the thickness of the other shim by the same amount. This will maintain the correct rear axls side bearing preload. Moving 0.05mm (0.002in) worth of shim from one side of the differential to the other will change the backlash adjustment by 0.03mm (0.001in). 10. After obtaining correct tooth contact described in later, install ABS speed sensor. 11. Install the cover with sealant. Torque: 40Nm (30lbft) 12. Fill the axle lubricant.
Backlash Adjustment
1. Install the differential case assembly and bearing caps. 2. Rotate the case several times to seat the bearings. 3. Remove the spreader. 4. Install the side bearing cap bolts. Tighten side bearing cap bolts Torque: 108Nm (80lbft) 5. Install a dial indicator to the case using a magnetic base.
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
4A225
Gear Tooth Pattern Check

Checking the ring gear to pinion tooth pattern is to be done only after setting up the axle according to the methods in this section. The pattern check is NEVER to be used as an initial check, or instead of checking pinion depth and backlash adjustments. This check is only to be verify the correct adjustment of the gear set after set up.
Legend (1) Heel (2) Toe (3) Concave Side (Coast) (4) Convex Side (Drive) EndOFCallout 1. Wipe all oil out of the carrier, and carefully clean each tooth of the ring gear. 2. Use gear marking compound 1052351 or equivalent and apply this mixture sparingly to all ring gear teeth, using a medium-stiff brush. When properly used, the area of pinion tooth contact will be visible when hand load is applied. 3. Tighten the bearing cap bolts to the specified torque. 4. Expand the brake shoes until a torque of 54 to 68Nm (40 to 50 lbft.) is required to turn the pinion. A test made without loading the gears will not give a satisfactory pattern. Turn the pinion flange with a wrench so that the ring gear rotates one full revolution, then reverse the rotation so that the ring gear rotates one revolution in the opposite direction. 5. Observe the pattern on the ring gear teeth and compare this with figure.
425RS038
425RS039
4A226
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
will move the pinion farther away from the centerline of the ring gear. Backlash is adjusted by means of the side bearing adjusting shims which move the entire case and ring gear assembly closer to, or farther from, the drive pinion. (The adjusting shims are also used to set side bearing preload.) If the thickness of the right shim is increased (along with decreasing the left shim thickness), backlash will increase. The backlash will decrease if the left shim thickness is increased (along with a decrease in right shim thickness).
Adjustments Affecting Tooth Contact

Two adjustments can be made which will affect tooth contact pattern: backlash, and the position of the drive pinion in the case. The effects of bearing preloads are not readily apparent on head loaded tooth contact pattern tests; however, these adjustments should be within specifications before proceeding with backlash and drive pinion adjustments. The position of the drive pinion is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the distance between the pinion head and the centerline of the ring gear. Decreasing the distance will move the pinion closer to the centerline of the ring gear. Increasing the distance
Differential Case Assembly

Disassembled View
425RW014
Legend (1) Thrust Washer (for Pinion Gear) (2) Pinion Mate Gear (3) Thrust Washer(for Side Gear) (4) Side Gear EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Differential Shaft Lock Pin Bolt Differential Case
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
4A227
Disassembly
1. Remove lock pin using a small drift.
Oil seal
Reassembly
1. Install side gear with thrust washer. 2. Install the pinion mate gear with thrust washer by engaging it with the side gears while turning both pinion mate gears simultaneously in the same direction.
425RS098
2. Remove the differential shaft by using a soft metal rod and a hammer.
425RS048
3. Install differential shaft. 1. Be sure to install the differential shaft so that it is in alignment with the lock pin hole in the differential case.
425RS043
3. Remove pinion mate gear and thrust washer. 4. Remove side gear and thrust washer.

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts. Ring gear, pinion gear Bearing Side gear, pinion mate gear, differential shaft Differential case, carrier Thrust washer
425RS049
4. Install lock pin. After lock pin installation, stake the case to secure the lock pin.
4A228
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
Limited Slip Differential Assembly

Disassembled View
425RW004
Legend (1) Thrust WasherDifferential Pinion Mate Gear (2) Pinion Mate Gear (3) Dished Spacer (4) Disc (5) Plate EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
Differential Plate Retainer Lock Pin Differential Case Ring Gear Bolts Differential Shaft Differential Side Gear
Disassembly
1. Place the holder J39824 into a vise. Position the differential on the holder with the ring gear side down. 2. Remove Lock pin (1) from differential shaft using a punch. 3. Remove Differential shaft (2) using hammer and punch. Place shop towel behind case to prevent differential shaft from dropping out of case.
425RW005
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
4. Assemble clutch pack unloading tool . a. Install cap J341741 to the bottom differential side gear. b. Install threaded screw cap J341742 to top differential side gear. Thread forcing screws J 2234215 into threaded screw cap until it becomes centered into the bottom cap.
4A229
7. Assemble LSD service adapter J39834 onto long drive handle J-8592. Insert it into differential shaft hole of case. Pull on handle and rotate case until pinion mate gears can be removed.
901RW068
901RW153
8. Remove pinion mate gears. 9. Hold side gear top clutch pack (1) with one hand and remove positraction unloading tools.
c. Tighten forcing screw until tight enough to collapse dished spacers and allow looseness between side and pinion mate gears. 5. Both pinion mate gear thrust washers using a shim stock (1) of 0.51 mm (0.020 in.) or equivalent tool to push out washers.
425RW008
10. Remove top side gear and clutch pack. NOTE: Keep the stack of plates and discs intact and in exactly the same position while they are being removed.
425RW007
6. Relieve tension of dished spacers by loosening forcing screw. NOTE: You may have to adjust the forcing screw slightly to allow the case to rotate.
11. Remove case from holder. Turn case with flange or ring gear side up to allow side gear and clutch pack to be removed from case. 12. Remove differential plate retainer from both clutch packs to allow separation of the plates and discs.
4A230
NOTE:
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
Reassembly
1. Lubricate thrust face of side gears, plates and discs with the proper limited slip rear axle lubricant. 2. Assemble plates and discs in exactly in the same position as they were removed, regardless of whether they are new or original. 3. Install differential plate retainer to ears of plates. NOTE: Make sure both retainers are Completely seated on ears of plates. 4. Install clutch pack and side gear into bottom side gear bore. Make sure clutch pack stays assembled to side gear splines, and that retainers are completely seated into pockets of case. NOTE: To prevent clutch pack from falling out of case, hold clutch pack in place by hand while repositioning case on bench.
425RW009
Keep the discs and plates in the same order as they were removed.
Legend (1) Differential Plate (2) Differential Disc (3) Dished Spacer (4) Side Gear EndOFCallout
5. Install other side gear and clutch pack. Make sure clutch pack stays assembled to side gear splines, and retainers are completely seated into pockets of case. 6. Hold clutch pack in position and assemble screw cap J341742, cap J341741 and forcing screw J2234215. Tighten forcing screw into bottom cap to hold both clutch packs in position. 7. With tools assembled to case, position case on holder J39824 by aligning splines of side gear with those of shaft. Tighten forcing screw to compress clutch packs in order to provide clearance for pinion mate gears.

Cleaning
All parts with solvent.
Visual Inspection
Clean all parts with solvent. Plates and Discs. If any one disc or plate in either stack shows evidence of excessive wear or scoring, the complete stack is to be replaced on both sides. Side Gears and Pinion Mate Gears. The gear teeth of these parts should be checked for extreme wear and possible cracks. The external teeth of the side gear, which retain the concentric groove discs, should also be checked for wear or cracks. If replacement of one gear is required due to wear, etc., then both side gears, pinion mate gears, and thrust washers are to be replaced. Differential Shaft. If excessive wear is evident, the differential shaft should be replaced. Differential Plate Retainers. If wear is evident on any one of the differential plate retainers, all four retainers must be replaced. Differential Case. If scoring, wear or metal pickup is evident on the machined surfaces, replacement of the case is necessary.
901RW069
8. Install pinion mate gears. Place the pinion mate gears into the differential 180 degrees apart.
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
9. While holding gears in place, insert LSD service adapter J39834 with long drive handle J8592 in differential shaft hole of case. Pull on long drive handle J8592 and rotate case, allowing gears to turn. Make sure that holes in pinion mate gears align with holes in case.
4A231
Stake metal of case over pin in two places, 180 degrees apart.
425RW013
901RW070
It may be necessary to adjust tension on forcing screw to rotate case. 10. Tighten forcing screw to compress the clutch packs, to allow installation of spherical thrust washers. 11. Lubricate spherical thrust washers (2), and assemble into case (1). Use a small screw driver to push washers into place. Remove tools.
425RW012
12. Position differential shaft in case and drive in with hammer. Be sure lock pin hole of differential shaft (5) is properly aligned to allow installation of lock pin (3). Be sure that thrust washers and differential pinion mate gears are aligned with the differential case (4). Install new lock pin to proper depth using a punch.
4A232
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
Main Data And Specifications

Rear axle Type Rear axle Size Gear type Gear ratio (to 1) Salisbury, Semi floating 226mm (8.9in) Hypoid 4.100 (6VD1 with A/T) 4.300 (6VD1 with M/T) 4.777 (Y22SE) Two pinion GL5: (Standard differential) GL5, LSD: (Limited slip differential) Locking Differential Lubricant 80W90 GL5 (USE Limited Slip Differential Gear Lubricant or Friction Modifier Organic Additive) 1.77 liter (1.87 US qt)
Differential type Lubricant Grade
Capacity
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR) Torque Specifications
4A233
E04RX002
4A234
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
Special Tools
J861401 Pinion flange holder
J42836 Installer; Inner bearing outer race
J37263 Installer; Pinion oil seal
J42824 Pilot;Outer
J42379 Remover; Bearing
J2177743 Nut & Stud
J39830 Adapter; Side bearing plug
J42827 Pilot;Inner
J861101 Installer; Outer bearing outer race
J398372 Gauge plate
J8592 Grip
J8001 Dial indicator
DIFFERENTIAL (REAR)
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NO. TOOL NAME ILLUSTRATION
4A235
TOOL NO. TOOL NAME J39858 Clutch pack unloading tool kit Includes J341741/J341742 Screw cap and Cap J2234215 Forcing screw
J398371 Disc (2 required)
J235971 Arbor
J39834 Limitedslip differential (LSD) service adapter
J42828 Installer; Pinion bearing
J39824 Holder
J21784 Installer; Side bearing
J39836 Side bearing preload master bearings
J39602 Remover; Outer bearing
J24385B Spreader
SECTION
DRIVELINE CONTROL SYSTEM
RODEO
4B1
DRIVELINE/AXLE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift On The Fly System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outline of Shift on The Fly System . . . . . . . Functions of Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift On The Fly Electrical Equipment . . . . . . Axle Shaft Connection and Disconnection . Actuator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4WD Control Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B1 4B2 4B2 4B6 4B7 4B17 4B17 4B17 4B20 4WD Control Unit Associated Parts . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift On The Fly Controller . . . . . . . . . . . Shift On The Fly Controller and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4B20 4B20 4B21 4B21 4B21 4B21 4B21
Service Precaution
4B2
Shift On The Fly System

Outline of Shift on The Fly System
The shift on the fly system switches between 2 wheel drive (2WD) and 4 wheel drive (4WD) electrically by driver's pressing the 4WD switch (push button type) on instrument panel. This system controls below operations. (Shifting between 4H and 4L must be performed by transfer control lever on the floor.) 1. Shifting the transfer front output gear (Connecting to, and disconnecting from, front propeller shaft by motor actuator). 2. Retrial of shifting the transfer front output gear. 3. Connecting front wheels to, and disconnecting them from, the front axles by axle motor actuator. 4. Indicator on instrument panel. 5. 4WD out signal to other Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit.
System Diagrams
412RY00005
DRIVELINE CONTROL SYSTEM Normal Operation

The motor actuator mounted on the transfer rear case is driven by a signal from the 4WD switch (when activated) mounted on the instrument panel. Then the transfer position switch changes when the front output gear is connected (or disconnected when the 4WD Time Chart of Shifting Under Normal Condition
4B3
switch is deactivated) to the front propeller shaft. The axle disconnect controller is driven by the signal from the transfer position switch and the axle motor actuator connects (or disconnects when the 4WD switch is deactivated) the front wheels to the front axles.
F04R100004
4B4 Retrial

rotation for 1.2 seconds and automatically repeats the operation again for a maximum of 3 times (with the 4WD indicator lamp blinking-2Hz). If after 3 times the transfer position switch does not come on, the gear shifting will stop and the 4WD indicator lamp will blink faster (4Hz) to alert the driver that the gear shifting has stopped. The lamp will continue to blink until the driver deactivates the 4WD switch (to 2WD mode).
The transfer motor actuator starts the transfer gear shifting after a signal from the 4WD switch mounted on the instrument panel has been received. However, shifting may not occur in severe cold weather or under high speed conditions. When 2 seconds have passed since the transfer gear shifting has commenced and the transfer position switch does not activate (the gear engagement is not completed), the motor reverses its Time Chart of Shifting Under Severe Condition (retrial)
F04R100002

Warning at 4L position : Shifting from 4WD to 2WD while at 4L operation is not possible. While at 4WD in the 4Loperation, the transfer position switch cannot be deactivated. If the 4WD switch was pressed to
4B5
deactivate the 4WD operation while in "4L", then the 4WD indicator lamp will blink faster (from 2Hz to 4Hz) to alert the driver of the wrong operation and the 4WD to 2WD mode will cancel.
Time Chart of Shifting from 4WD to 2WD at 4L Condition
F04R100003
4WD out signal to other Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit : ECU of shift on the fly sends 4WD out signal to other Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit as below. 4WD out signal (Period) 120 ms 240 ms Vehicle Condition 2WD 4WD Transfer position switch 2WD (Open) 4WD (Close) Front axle switch 2WD (Open) 4WD (Close)
4B6
Functions of Indicator Lamp

Indication of vehicle condition : Indicator lamp is controlled by transfer ECU of shift on the fly and shows vehicle conditions as below. Indicator Off On Blink (2Hz) Blink (4Hz) Vehicle condition 2WD 4WD Operating Stop operating 4WD switch Off (Close) On (Open) On (Open) Off (Close) On (Open) Off (Close) Bulb check :The bulb of indicator lamp is checked for 2 seconds when ignition key is turned on. Time Chart of Bulb Checking Transfer position switch 2WD (Open) 4WD (Close) 4WD (Close) 2WD (Open) 2WD (Open) 4WD (Close) Front axle switch 2WD (Open) 4WD (Close) 2WD (Open) 4WD (Close) 2WD (Open) 4WD (Close)
F04RW004
Retrials from 2WD to 4WD :Sometimes shifting from 2WD to 4WD may not occur when in severe cold weather conditions or under high speed conditions. Should this occur, the 4WD indicator lamp will flash continously until the driver disengages the 4WD operation (see Retrial for more information).
4B7
Diagnosis
Before Judging (Unfaulty mode) That Troubles Occur
When Switching from 4WD to 2WD 1. When the 4WD indicator lamp continues to blink (at 2Hz). The 4WD indicator lamp continues to blink (at 2Hz) until both shifting the transfer gear and disconnecting the front wheels are completed when switching 4WD to 2WD. When drive line is loaded with torsional torque, the shifting transfer gear and disconnecting front wheels are impossible. In this case, removal of torsional torque on drive line makes the shifting transfer gear and disconnecting front wheels possible. Solution 3: If the vehicle is moving, drive the vehicle straight while accelerating and decelerating, and if the vehicle is at a stop, move the vehicle forward and backward for 2 to 3 meters. 2. When the 4WD indicator lamp blinking pattern changes (from 2Hz to 4Hz). Check the position of the transfer lever. Is it in the 4L position? Shifting from 4WD to 2WD while at 4L will not occur. Solution 4: Push the 4WD switch ON (to 4WD), then shift the transfer lever to the High position and push the 4WD switch Off (to engage to 2WD).
When Switching from 2WD to 4WD 1. In case that blinking frequency of the 4WD indicator changes from 2Hz to 4Hz. When heavy synchronization load is needed, the motor actuator repeats the transfer gear shifting up to 3 times. The 4WD indicator lamp will blink (2Hz) while the motor actuator attempts shifting. If after the 3rd attempt the shifting fails, the 4WD indicator lamp will blink faster (4Hz) and the motor actuator will return to 2WD mode. Heavy synchronization load occurs when: At severe low temperatures. Higher rotational difference in speed between the front wheels and axles during cornering. Solution 1: Attempt the 4WD mode again at a lower speed or when the vehicle is at a stop. 2. In case that the 4WD indicator continues blinking at 2Hz for more than 11.5 seconds. When there is rotational difference in speed between the front wheels and axles, the front wheels and the front axles may have difficulty engaging. The blinking 4WD indicator lamp (at 2Hz) will indicate that the transfer case is shifting into the 4WD mode, however it will blink faster (4Hz) if shifting into 4WD mode is impossible, unless rotational difference and phase difference does not exist. Solution 2: If the vehicle is moving, drive the vehicle straight while accelerating and decelerating, and if the vehicle is at a stop, move the vehicle forward and backward for 2 to 3 meters.
4B8
Parts Location
828RY00008
Legend (1) H18 (2) E56, E57 (3) E60 (4) I 1 (5) B19 (6) B8 (7) I 19 EndOFCallout
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
H15, H17 C47 C16 H6 C49 (ADC CONTROL UNIT) E30 C36
DRIVELINE CONTROL SYSTEM Wiring Diagram
4B9
D04R200028
4B10
D04R200027
DRIVELINE CONTROL SYSTEM Connector List

No. B-8 Connector face No. E-60 Connector face
4B11
B-19
H-6
C-16
H-15
C-36
H-17
C-47
H-18
C-49
I-1
E-30
I-19
E-56
E-57
4B12
Diagnosis of The Faults Based on the Status of 4WD Indicator Lamp, 4WD Switch and T/F Change Lever
A diagnostic flow chart is shown below. If after performing the diagnosis and a condition still exists, then there may be a fault in the ECU. The ECU will need to be replaced and perform the diagnostic flow chart again. Fault on Switching from 2WD to 4WD 1. When the 4WD indicator lamp blinking pattern changes (from 2Hz to 4Hz) after performing Solution 1. The motor actuator or the transfer case assembly may be inoperative. Remove the motor actuator and perform bench test. Make any needed repairs and perform Solution 1 again. Then disassemble and inspect the transfer case assembly. Repair or replace as needed. If after the repairs, the condition still exists, then replace the ECU. 2. When the 4WD indicator lamp do not blink or light up when switching from 2WD to 4WD. Step 1 Is ignition turned on? Go to Step 2 2 Does the 4WD indicator lamp light up during the two second initialization after the ignition is turned on? Action Yes No Turn on the ignition and trace this chart from start. Burned out indicator lamp or disconnected harness wire. Perform the diagnostic chart from step 1 after repair or replacement.
Go to Step 3 3 Is the 4WD switch activated from 2WD to 4WD mode? Short-circuit (body short) on harness of the 4WD switch. Inoperative 4WD switch (stuck closed condition). Trace this chart from the step 1 after repair or replace.
Push the 4WD switch to 4WD.

3. When the 4WD Indicator lamp continues to blink after performing Solution 2. Step 1 Action Check the air pressure and wear on all tires. Were problems found? Yes Correct the tire pressure and replace worn tires then perform Solution 2. No
4B13
Go to Step 2 If the motor actuator harness was disconnected, then repair and repeat step 1. If the motor actuator is inoperative, then replace the motor actuator and repeat step 1. If the transfer case was not working properly, then repair as needed and repeat step 1.
2 Can the transfer lever be operated from High to 4L or vice versa?
Go to Step 3 3 Confirm that the transfer switch is operating normally. Replace if needed. Go to Step 4 4 1. Disconnect the connector C47. 2. Turn on the starter switch 3. Measure voltage between the connector C47 terminals 4 and 3, when 4WD switch on instrument panel is switched on 2WD and 4WD position. Is the motor actuator voltage on the axle as Time Chart of Shifting Under Normal Condition aforementioned? Refer to the page (4B3). 5 1. Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections, open or short to ground between the connector-terminal E561 and B197, E571 and ground, C471 and B196, C472 and ground, H181 and B1912, B198 and C493, H1719 and C493, C491 and C474, C492 and C473, and C496 and ground. 2. Repair the circuit. Is the motor actuator voltage on the axle as Time Chart of Shifting Under Normal Condition aforementioned? Refer to the page (4B3). 6 Check the axle switch continuity between the connector C47 terminals 1 and 2. Is the axle switch open or close as Time Chart of Shifting Under Normal Condition aforementioned? Refer to the page (4B3). Replace the axle motor actuator. Go to Step 8 8 Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished Trace this chart from the start.
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 8
4B14
Fault on Switching from 4WD to 2WD 1. Case that indicator dose not blink nor turn out. Step 1 Does the indicator lamp turn off at ignition off? 2 Is the 4WD switch on 2WD position? Go to Step 2 Disconnection on the 4WD switch harness or breakdown of the 4WD switch in open state. Trace this chart from the start after repair or replace. Action Yes No Short circuit of the indicator harness.
Turn the 4WD switch to 2WD position. Trace this chart from the start.

2. When the indicator lamp continues to blink (at 2Hz) after performing Solution 3. Step 1 Action Check the air pressure and wear on all tires. Were problems found? Yes Perform Solution 3 after correcting the tire air pressure and replacing worn tires. If the motor actuator harness was disconnected, then repair as needed and repeat step 1. If the transfer case was not working properly, then repair as needed and repeat step 1. If the motor actuator is inoperative, then replace the motor actuator and repeat step 1. No
4B15
Go to Step 2
2 Can the transfer lever be operated from High to 4L or vice versa?
Go to Step 3
1. Disconnect the connector C47. 2. Turn on the starter switch 3. Measure voltage between the connector C47 terminals 4 and 3, when 4WD switch on instrument panel is switched on 2WD and 4WD position. Is the motor actuator voltage on the axle as Time Chart of Shifting Under Normal Condition aforementioned? Refer to the page (4B3).
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 4
1. Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections, open or short to ground between the connector-terminal C471 and B196, C472 and ground, H181 and B1912, B198 and C493, H1719 and C493, C491 and C474, C492 and C473, and C496 and ground. 2. Repair the circuit. Is the motor actuator voltage on the axle as Time Chart of Shifting Under Normal Condition aforementioned? Refer to the page (4B3). Check the axle switch continuity between the connector C47 terminals 1 and 2. Is the axle switch open or close as Time Chart of Shifting Under Normal Condition aforementioned? Refer to the page (4B3). Replace the axle motor actuator.
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
6 7
Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished
Trace this chart from the start.
Go to Step 7
4B16
Step 1

Action Can the transfer lever be operated from High to 4L or vice versa? Yes If the motor actuator harness was disconnected, then repair as needed and repeat step 1. If the motor actuator is inoperative, then replace the motor actuator and repeat step 1. If the transfer case was not working properly, then repair as needed and repeat step 1. No
3. Case that indicator's blinking changes to 4Hz after aforementioned Solution 4 is carried out.
Faults on the ECU. Trace this chart from the start after replace.
4B17
Shift On The Fly Electrical Equipment

Axle Shaft Connection and Disconnection
412RY00035
Actuator Assembly
Axle Disconnect Controller
412RY00004
828RY00009
4B18
828RY00010
412RW037
Legend (1) Output Signal (2) Output Signal (3) 12V (4) Input Signal (5) GND EndOFCallout 1. Connect 12V with terminal (3) and the ground with the terminal (6). 2. Send the signal to the terminal (4) 2WD 4WD less than 2.4V 4WD 2WD more than 9.0V 3. Confirm the output signal from the terminals (1) & (2) (2 seconds output) INPUT SIGNAL 4 2WD 4WD 4WD 2WD Less than 2.4V More than 9.0V OUTPUT SIGNAL (2 seconds) 1 0V 12V 2 12V 0V
Legend (3) Shift Rod (4) Connector EndOFCallout 2. Connect the terminals as shown in figure. Shift rod of the motor actuator moves and stops at 4WD position.
4. If the trouble occurs afther above test, charge the Axle Disconnect Controller to the new one.
412RW038
Motor Actuator Assembly (Transfer)

Inspect the function of the motor actuator assembly as follows: 1. Disassemble the motor actuator from transfer rear case.
Legend (1) 2WD (2) 4WD (3) Shift Rod (4) Connector EndOFCallout

3. Connect the terminals as shown in figure. Shift rod of the motor actuator moves and stops at 2WD position. 1. With ball being free. A B : There is continuity. 2. With ball forced into the switch. A B : No continuity. 3. If 1) and 2) fail, replace with a new switch.
4B19
412RW039
Legend (1) 2WD (2) 4WD (3) Shift Rod (4) Connector EndOFCallout 4. If 2) and 3) fail, replace with a new motor actuator.
Transfer Position Switch
412RW040
Legend (1) Ball EndOFCallout
4B20
4WD Control Unit

4WD Control Unit Associated Parts
412RW042
Legend (1) Center Console Assembly EndOFCallout
(2) 4WD Control Unit
Removal
1. Remove center console assembly. Refer to Interior Trim in Body and Accessories section. 2. Remove two screws and harness connector (1) from 4WD control unit.
412RW041
Legend (1) Harness Connector EndOFCallout
4B21
Installation
1. Connect harness connector, then install 4WD control unit. 2. Install center console assembly.
Shift On The Fly Controller

Shift On The Fly Controller and Associated Parts
828RY00003
Legend (1) Nut EndOFCallout
(2) SOF Controller (3) Connector
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the front console assembly. Refer to Consoles in Body and Accessories section. 3. Disconnect the connector from the controller. 4. Remove the nut. 5. Remove the controller.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. Torque: Nut (1) 8 Nm (69 Ib in)
SECTION
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
RODEO
4C1
DRIVELINE/AXLE
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Hub and Disc (2WD Model) . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Hub and Disc (4WD Model) . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Drive Shaft Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Drive Shaft Joints Replacement . . . . Front Axle Drive Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Axle Drive Shaft and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection And Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bushing Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift On The Fly System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift On The Fly System and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection And Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C1 4C2 4C2 4C3 4C3 4C3 4C4 4C5 4C6 4C6 4C6 4C7 4C8 4C9 4C9 4C10 4C10 4C11 4C12 4C12 4C13 4C16 4C16 4C17 4C18 4C20 Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of Propeller Shaft and Universal Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Propeller Shaft and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Joint Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Joint Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Propeller Shaft and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slip Joint Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Joint Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Joint Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . Slip Joint Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C23 4C25 4C26 4C26 4C27 4C28 4C29 4C29 4C29 4C29 4C30 4C31 4C32 4C33 4C34 4C35 4C36 4C36 4C36 4C36 4C37 4C38 4C40 4C41 4C42 4C43
Service Precaution
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE HAS A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM(SRS). REFER TO THE SRS COMPONENT AND WIRING LOCATION VIEW IN ORDER TO DETERMINE WHETHER YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING. WHEN YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING, REFER TO THE SRS SERVICE INFORMATION. FAILURE TO FOLLOW WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN POSSIBLE AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, PERSONAL INJURY, OR OTHERWISE UNNEEDED SRS SYSTEM REPAIRS. CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. ISUZU will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. ISUZU will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED , do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fastener joint interfaces. Generally, such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fastener. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specifications. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems.
4C2
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM

The drive axles are completely flexible assemblies, consisting of inner and outer constant velocity (CV) drive shaft joints connected by an axle shaft. For description of front propeller shaft and universal joint, refer to Front Propeller Shaft in this section.
General Description
This publication contains essential removal, installation, adjustment and maintenance procedures. The front axle utilizes a central disconnect type front axle/transfer case system.
Diagnosis
Condition Oil Leak At Front Axle Oil Leak At Pinion Shaft Possible cause Worn or defective oil seal. Front axle housing cracked. Too much gear oil. Oil seal worn or defective. Pinion flange loose or damaged. Noises In Front Axle Drive Shaft Joint Clank" When Accelerating From Coast" Shudder or Acceleration Vibration During Broken or worn drive shaft joints and bellows (BJ and DOJ). Loose drive shaft joint to output shaft bolts. Damaged inner drive shaft joint. Excessive drive shaft joint angle. Worn or damaged drive shaft joints. Sticking spider assembly drive shaft joint). (inner Correction Replace the oil seal. Repair or replace. Correct the oil level. Replace the oil seal. Tighten or replace. Replace the drive shaft joints and bellows. Tighten. Replace. Repair. Replace. Lubricate or replace. Lubricate or replace. Balance or replace. Align. Replenish the gear oil. Replace the gear oil. Adjust the backlash. Replace the ring gear, pinion gear or side gear. Replace the pinion shaft bearing. Replace the hub unit bearing. Tighten or replace. Adjust the front alignment. Tighten or replace. Adjust the inflation or replace. Tighten or replace. Replace. Adjust the front alignment. Replace the ball joint or bush. Tighten or replace. Replace or adjust the inflation. Replace the shock absorber.
Sticking joint assembly (outer drive shaft joint). Vibration At Highway Speeds Noises in Front Axle Out of balance or out of round tires. Front end out of alignment. Insufficient gear oil. Wrong or poor grade gear oil. Drive pinion to ring gear backlash incorrect. Worn or chipped ring gear, pinion gear or side gear. Pinion shaft bearing worn. Hub unit bearing worn. Differential bearing loose or worn. Wanders and Pulls Incorrect front alignment. Steering unit loose or worn. Tire worn or improperly inflated. Front or rear suspension parts loose or broken. Front Wheel Shimmy Hub unit bearing worn. Incorrect front alignment. Worn ball joint or bush. Steering unit loose or worn. Tire worn or improperly inflated. Shock absorber worn.
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C3
Front Hub and Disc (2WD Model)

Disassembled View
411R200011
Legend (1) Disc Rotor (2) Hub unit, Bearing EndOFCallout
(3) Wheel Pin (4) Bolt
Disassembly
1. Raise the vehicle with a jack. Support the frame with chassis stands. 2. Remove the brake caliper from the bracket. Secure the caliper with a wire so that it does not interfere with the work process. Refer to Front disc caliper assembly in Section 5C of this Manual. 3. Remove the disk rotor Apply penetrating oil to the bearing and disc rotor contact surfaces if the surfaces are stuck together because of rust. 4. Inspect the hub unit bearing. Refer to Inspection below. 5. Use a dial gauge to measure the bearing axial rattle. Bearing axial rattle: 0.05 mm max
411R200002
4C4
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM

10. If necessary, replace the wheel pin in the following manner. Place hub on a suitable work surface and remove wheel studs, as required, using a hammer.
If abnormal conditions are discovered during inspection, go to Step 6. If there are no abnormal conditions, reassemble the front disc rotor and caliper. NOTE: Hub, wheel bearing and spindle is integrated to the hub unit bearing so it must not be disassembled. If it has abnormal rattle or noize, replace the hub unit bearing. 6. Remove the ABS sensor connector.
411RS004
Inspection
411R200004
Legend (1) ABS Sensor Connector (2) Bolt EndOFCallout 7. Remove the 4 bolts fixing the hub unit bearing to the knuckle. Apply penetrating oil to the bearing and knuckle contact surfaces if the surfaces are stuck together because of rust. 8. Temporarily install long bolts to 2 of the fixing bolt holes (the bolts must have the same diameter and thread width). 9. Strike the long bolts with a hammer to loosen and remove the hub unit bearing from the knuckle. Take care not to drop the bearing.
Inspect the parts listed below for abrasion, breakage, and other abnormal conditions. Repair, or replace the parts as required. Disc Caliper Wheel pin Hub unit bearing
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C5
Reassembly
1. Install wheel pin.
411RS005
Place hub on a wood workbench or a block of wood approx. 6" by 6" to protect the wheel stud ends and threads. Install wheel stud, using a hammer. NOTE: Be sure wheel stud is started squarely and seats completely. 2. Install the hub unit bearing to the knuckle. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Hub unit bearing bolt Torque: 103 10 Nm (10.5 1 kgm)
If there is rust on the bearing and knuckle contact surfaces, use sandpaper to remove it before installation. 3. Install the ABS sensor connector. 4. Install the disc rotor. 5. Install the brake caliper to the bracket. Refer to Front disc caliper assembly in Section 5C of this Manual.
4C6
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
Front Hub and Disc (4WD Model)

Disassembled View
411R200010
Legend (1) Disc Rotor (2) Hub Unit, Bearing EndOFCallout
(3) Wheel Pin (4) ABS Sensor Ring (5) Bolt Apply penetrating oil to the bearing and disc rotor contact surfaces if the surfaces are stuck together because of rust. 5. Inspect the hub unit bearing. Refer to inspection below. 6. Use a dial gauge to measure the bearing axial rattle. Bearing axial rattle: 0.05 mm max
Disassembly
1. Move the transfer case lever to the 2WD position. 2. Raise the vehicle with a jack. Support the frame with chassis stands. 3. Remove the brake caliper from the bracket. Secure the caliper with a wire that it does not interfare with the work process. Refer to Front disc caliper assembly in Section 5C of this Manual. 4. Remove the disk rotor.
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C7
11. Strike the long bolts with a hammer to loosen and remove the hub unit bearing from the knuckle. Take care not to strike the front drive shaft. Take care not to drop the bearing. 12. Remove the ABS rotor sensor from the bearing. 13. Remove the wheel pin.
411R200002
If abnormal conditins are discovered during inspection, go to Step 7. If there are no abnormal conditions, reassemble the front discrotor and caliper. 7. Loosen the caulking around the front drive shaft nuts. 8. Remove the nuts and discard them (they cannot be reused). 9. Remove the 4 bolts fixing the hub unit bearing to the knuckle. Apply penetrating oil to the bearing and knuckle contact surfaces if the surfaces are stuck together because of rust. 10. Temporarily install long bolts to 2 of the fixing bolt holes (the bolts must have the same diameter and thread width).
411RS004
Inspection
Inspect the parts listed below for abrasion, breakage, and other abnormal conditions. Repair or replace the parts as required. Disc Caliper Drive shaft oil seal ABS sensor rotor Wheel pin Hub unit bearing
411R200012
Legend (1) Bolt EndOFCallout
4C8
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM

7. Tighten the front drive shaft nuts to the specified torque. Front drive shaft nut Torque: 245 19.6 Nm (25 2 kgm)
Reassembly
1. Install the wheel pin. Place hub on a wood workbench or a block of wood approx. 6" by 6" to protect the wheel stud ends and thresds. Install wheel stud, using a hammer. NOTE: Be sure wheel stud is started squarely and seats completely.
411R200005
8. Caulk the front drive shaft nuts. The caulking must be free of cracks.
411RS005
2. Install the ABS rotor sensor to the hub unit bearing. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. ABS rotor sensor bolt Torque: 18.7 5 Nm (1.9 0.8 kgm) 3. Install the hub unit bearing to the knuckle. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Hub unit bearing bolt Torque: 103 10 Nm (10.5 1 kgm) If there is rust on the bearing and knuckle contact surfaces, use sandpaper to remove it before installation. Take care not to push the front drive shaft and oil seal out of position. 4. Hand tighten the front drive shaft nuts. Use new nuts. 5. Install the disc rotor. 6. Install the brake caliper to the bracket. Refer to Front disc caliper assembly in Section 5C of this Manual.
411R200006
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C9
Front Drive Shaft Joint

Front Drive Replacement Shaft Joints
Refer to Front Drive Axle Assembly Replacement in this section, and refer to Front Hub and Disc Overhaul in Suspension section.
Front Hub Bearing Preload Check

Check the hub bearing preload at the wheel pin. New bearing and New oil seal: 24.5N (4.4 5.5lb) Used bearing and New oil seal: 11.8 17.7 N(2.6 4.0lb)
Inspection Of Shift On The Fly System Gear Oil
412RY00008
1. Open filler plug and make sure that the oil is up to the plug port. If the oil is short, replenish with gear oil GL5 grade. 2. Tighten the filler plug to specified torque. Torque:78Nm (58lbin)
4C10
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
Front Axle Drive Shaft

Front Axle Drive Shaft and Associated Parts
412R200009
Legend (1) Axle Case and Differential (2) Snap Ring (3) Bearing (4) Snap Ring (5) Oil Seal (6) Bracket (7) DOJ Case (8) Circlip (9) Bolt (10) Drive Shaft Joint Assembly (11) Ball EndOFCallout
(12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22)
Snap Ring Ball Retainer Ball Guide Band Bellows Band Band Bellows Band BJ Shaft Dust Seal
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C11
Disassembly
NOTE: For the left side, follow the same steps as right side. 1. Raise the hooked end of the band with a screwdriver or equivalent.
4. Remove drive shaft joint assembly. 5. Remove the six balls (1) with a screwdriver or equivalent.
412RS012
6. Using snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring (1) fastening the ball retainer to the center shaft.
412RS009
2. Remove band(1). 3. Pry off circlip (1) with a screwdriver or equivalent.
412RS013
412RS010
4C12
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
7. Remove ball retainer, ball guide and bellows. 8. Use a hammer and chisel to remove the 3 pawls (above the large and small boot bands on the BJ side). CAUTION: Take care not to damage the bellows during band removal.
412RS015
By using installer J393782 and base J393783, press fit the bushings into the bracket.
412R100009
9. Remove band(1). 10. Remove bellows. 11. Remove dust seal from BJ. 12. Remove BJ shaft assembly. 13. Remove the mounting bracket fixing bolts, and then remove DOJ case assembly from the axle case. 14. Remove snap ring and bearing. 15. Remove snap ring and oil seal. 16. Remove bracket.
Inspection And Repair

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts. 1. Drive shaft joint assembly 2. DOJ case, ball, ball guide, ball retainer 3. Bellows 4. Bearing 5. Dust seal, oil seal
412RS016
Bushing Replacement
Remove the bushings using a remover J393781 and hammer.
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C13
Reassembly
1. Install DOJ case to bracket. 2. Install oil seal and fix snap ring. 3. Install bearing and fix snap ring. 4. Install bracket to axle case. Tighten the bracket bolt to the specified torque. Torque:116Nm (85lbft) 5. Apply 150g of the specified grease in BJ. 6. Install dust seal for BJ. 7. Apply a thin coat of grease to the shaft for smooth installation then install bellows. CAUTION: During bellows assembly, be sure to insert both ends of the bellows into the BJ ASM and shaft grooves.
412R100013
Legend (1) BJ ASM (2) Bellows EndOFCallout 8. Install band. Note the setting direction. After installation, check Standard Caulk Measure. Use the special tool pliers J-35910 to caulk the bands to the specified value.
412R100007
Legend (1) Bellows (2) Shaft EndOFCallout
412R100012
Standard Caulk Measure 1.2mm (0.05in) <= (1) and (2) <= 4.0mm (0.16in) (1) (2) or (2) (1) <= 0.4mm (0.016in) 9. Install another bellows and fix band. 10. Install band. Note the setting direction. After installation, check that the bellows is free from distortion. (DOJ SIDE ONLY)
4C14
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
412RS017
412RS018
11. Install another bellows and fix band. 12. Install the ball guide with the smaller diameter side ahead onto the shaft. 13. Install ball retainer. 14. Using snap ring pliers, install the snap ring (1) securing the ball retainer to the shaft.
16. Pack 150g of the specified grease in DOJ case, then install drive shaft joint assembly. After reassembly, move the DOJ longitudinally several times to get to fit. 17. Install the circlip (1) so that open ends are positioned away from the ball groove.
412RS019 412RS013
15. Align the track on the ball (1) retainer with the window in the cage, and install the six balls into position.
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C15
412RS020
Legend (1) Outer Case (2) Circlip (3) Open Ends EndOFCallout 18. Install bellows. Adjust the air pressure within the bellows by inserting a screwdriver or equivalent, so that it equals atmospheric pressure.
412RS021
19. Install band. After installation, check that the bellows is free from distortion.
4C16
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
Shift On The Fly System

Shift On The Fly System and Associated Parts
412RY00007
Legend (1) Filler Plug (2) Bolt (3) Oil Seal (4) Snap Ring(External) (5) Inner Shaft Bearing (6) Snap Ring(Internal) (7) Inner Shaft EndOFCallout
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Needle Bearing Clutch Gear Sleeve Housing Front Axle Drive Shaft(LH side) with Bracket Bolt Actuator Assembly Bolt
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C17
Disassembly
1. Remove filler plug and gasket, drain oil. 2. Loosen mounting bracket fitting bolts and remove front axle drive shaft from front axle case. 3. Remove actuator assembly and draw out actuator ASM. 4. Remove housing. 5. Remove sleeve. 6. Remove clutch gear. 7. Remove snap ring from front axle case by using snap ring pliers.
10. Remove inner shaft bearing. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the shaft.
412RW015
11. Remove needle bearing from inner shaft by using a remover J26941 and sliding hammer J261901.
412RW017
8. Take out inner shaft from front axle case. 9. Remove snap ring from inner shaft by using snap ring pliers.
412RS045
12. Remove oil seal from front axle case. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the front axle case.
412RW016
4C18
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM Inner Shaft RunOut

With both end centers supported, rotate the shaft slowly and measure deflection with a dial gauge. Limit:0.5mm (0.02in) NOTE: Do not heat the shaft to correct its bend.
Inspection And Repair

Inspect the removed parts. If there are abnormalities such as wear and damage, take corrective action or replace.
Visual Check
1. Check and see if the inner shaft has such abnormalities as wear and damage.
412RS026
Inner Shaft Bearing

412RW014
2. Replace the shaft if any signs of deterioration in the gear is present.
412RW006
420RS008
Legend (1) Inner Shaft Bearing (2) Inner Shaft (3) Clutch Gear EndOFCallout 1. Inspect the inner shaft bearing for any signs of deterioration, replace if uneven. 2. Insert the clutch gear and inspect the needle bearing. 3. Replace the needle bearing if found to be uneven.
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM Sleeve Condition

Check and see that there is not wear damage, or cracking in the sleeve. NOTE: Close inspection of the groove and inner gear are required because those are important parts.
4C19
Clutch Gear Condition

Check for wear, damage, crack deterioration in the clutch gear. or any other
Clutch Gear Function
Sleeve Function
412RY00038
412RY00039
Test the sleeve for smoothness by sliding it between the inner shaft and the clutch gear, replace the sleeve if its difficult to slide. NOTE: Gear oil should be applied to the contact surface of gear. Check the width of sleeve center groove. Limit:7.1mm (0.28in)
Test the sleeve for smoothness by sliding it across the clutch gear, replace the clutch gear if its difficult to slide. NOTE: When inspecting, gear oil should be applied to the contact surface of gear.
Clutch Gear Journal Diameter

Make sure of the size illustrated. Limit:36.98mm (1.456in)
412RW022
412RY00037
4C20 Actuator
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM

NOTE: Be careful not to permit the entry of water or dust into of the actuator. Dimentional Check Measure illustrated sizes 1, 2, and 3.
Check and see that there is no damage, cracking, or other abnormality. Functional Check
412RY00041
412RY00010
Limit 1=64.3mm (2.53in) 2=6.7mm (0.26in) 3=6.7mm (0.26in)
Reassembly
1. Install the new oil seal which has been immersed in differential gear oil, by using an oil seal installer J 41693 and grip J8092.
412RY00009
Wake sure of function with boltage (12V) applied to terminal 3, 4 and set the tester to terminal 1, 2 in accordance with the table below.
State
Trminal 3
Trminal 4
Electric circuit between terminal 1 & 2 OK NONE
Functio n
A B
+12V Ground
Ground +12V
2WD 4WD
412RW034
If there is an abnormality, replace the actuator as an assembly.
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM

2. Force a new needle bearing into inner shaft by using a Installer J41694 and grip J8092.
4C21
NOTE: Be sure to install the snap ring properly.
412RW017 412RS051
3. Place a new snap ring(internal) in inner shaft. Force a new inner shaft bearing into the inner shaft.
7. Apply differential gear oil to clutch gear, then install clutch gear. 8. Apply differential gear oil to sleeve, then install sleeve. 9. Clean contact surface with the front axle and actuator mounting surface. Apply liquid gasket to the contact surface on the front axle case, then install in the housing.
412RS044
4. Install snap ring(external). NOTE: Be careful not to damage the inner shaft. 5. Clean the housing contact surface of the front axle case and insert inner shaft assembly into the front axle case. NOTE: Be careful not to damage seal. 6. Install snap ring internal in the groove of front axle case. 10. Tighten bolts to specified torque. Torque:75Nm(55lbft) 11. Clean the actuator contact surface with the housing then Install and tighten shift position switch to the specified torque. Torque:39Nm (29lbft)
412RW023
4C22
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
12. Apply liquid gasket to the contact surface on the actuator side.
412RW012
13. Align shift arm with the groove of sleeve and install the actuator. 14. Tighten bolts to specified torque. Torque:9Nm(78lbin) 15. Install front axle drive shaft and mounting bracket. Tighten fitting bolts to specified torque. Torque:116Nm (85lbft) 16. Pour specified amount of differential gear oil to filler plug. Front Differential Oil Capacity:1.25lit (1.32USqt) Actuator Housing Oil Capacity:0.12lit(0.13US qt) 17. Install filler plug through gasket and tighten to specified torque. Torque:78Nm (58lbft)
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C23

Front drive axle oil capacity Type of lubricant Axle shaft type 1.25 liter (1.32 US qt)(Differential) 0.12 liter (0.13 US qt)(Actuator Housing:Shift on the fly) GL5 (75W90) Refer to chart in General Information Constant velocity joint(Birfield joint type and double offset joint)
412RY00040
4C24
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
E04R200004
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C25
Special Tools
J39378 Remover and Installer; Front Axle mount bushing
J 26941 Remover; Bearing needle
J35910 Pliers; Band bellows, drive shaft
J261901 Hammer; Sliding
J41694 Installer; Bearing needle
J8092 Grip
4C26
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
Propeller Shaft
General Description
401RX002
Legend (1) Front Propeller Shaft (2) Rear Propeller Shaft; Aluminum Tube with Spline Yoke Type EndOFCallout Torque is transmitted from the transmission to the axle through propeller shaft and universal joint assembles. All propeller shafts are the balanced tubular type. A splined slip joint is provided in some drivelines. Since the propeller shaft is balanced carefully, welding or any other modification is not permitted.
(3) Rear Propeller Shaft; Aluminum Tube with Flange Yoke Type (4) Rear Propeller Shaft; Steel Tube Type (for 4 4, 6VD1, A/T model)
Alignment marks should be applied to each propeller shaft before removal. Park, turn the engine off and apply the parking brake to secure the vehicle. Carefully attach the propeller shaft to the vise, do not overtighten the vise when securing the propeller shaft, this may cause deformation.
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM

Phasing The propeller shaft is designed and built with the yoke lugs (ears) in line with each other. This design produces the smoothest running shaft possible, called phasing. Vibration can be caused by an out-of-phase propeller shaft. The propeller shaft will absorb vibrations from speeding up and slowing down each time the universal joint spins. This vibration would be the same as a person snapping rope and watching the "wave" reaction flow to the end. A propeller shaft working in phase would be similar to two persons snapping a rope at the same time, and watching the "waves" meet and cancel each other out. In comparison, this would be the same as the universal joints on a propeller shaft. A total cancellation of vibration produces a smooth flow of power in the driveline. It is very important to apply a reference mark to the propeller shaft before removal, to assure installation alignment.
4C27
Universal Joint
401RW015
Legend (1) Spider (2) Yoke EndOFCallout A universal joint consists of two Y-shaped yokes connected by a crossmember called a spider. The spider is shaped like a cross. Universal joints are designed to handle the effects of various loadings and front or rear axle windup during acceleration. Within the designed angle variations, the universal joint will operate efficiently and safely. When the design angle is changed or exceeded the operational life of the joint may decrease. The bearings used in universal joints are of the needle roller type. The needle rollers are held in place on the trunnions by round bearing cups. The bearing cups are held in the yokes by snap rings.
4C28
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
Diagnosis of Propeller Shaft and Universal Joint

Condition Universal Joint Noise. Possible cause Worn universal joint bearings. Improper lubrication. Loose flange bolts. Ping, Snap, or Click in Drive Line (Usually Heard on Initial Load after the Transmission is in Forward or Reverse Gear) Loose bushing bolts on the rear springs or upper and lower control arms. Loose or out-of-phase end yoke. Replace. Lubricate as directed. Tighten to specifications. Tighten the bolts to specified torque. Correction
Remove end yoke, turn 180 degrees from its original position, lubricate the splines and reinstall. Tighten the bolts and pinion nut to specified torque. Replace the universal joint.
Knocking or Clanking Noise in the Driveline when in High or Neutral Gear at 16km/h(10mph) Squeak Shudder Speed) on Acceleration (Low
Worn or damaged universal joint
Lack of lubricant. Loose or missing bolts at flanges. Incorrectly set front joint angle. the
Lubricate joints and splines. Also check for worn or brinelled parts. Replace or tighten bolts to specified torque. Install shim under the transmission support mount to change the front joint angle. Replace. Replace. Adjust. Replace. Replace. Replace the seal. Minor burrs can be Smoothed by careful use of crocus cloth or fine stone honing. Replace the yoke if badly burred. Replace the transmission rear oil seal and replenish the transmission oil.
Worn universal joint. Vibration Incorrect shaft runout. Shaft out of balance. Transmission rear housing bushing, transfer case housing bushing worn. Yoke spline jammed. Excessive Leak at the Front Spline Yoke of Rear Propeller Shaft Rough surface on splined yoke; burred nicked or worn.
Defective transmission rear oil seal.
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C29
Front Propeller Shaft

Front Propeller Shaft and Associated Parts
401RW093
Legend (1) Bolt, Nut and Washer (Front Axle Side) EndOFCallout
(2) Front Propeller Shaft (3) Bolt, Nut and Washer (Transfer Side)
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. NOTE: Apply alignment marks on the flange at the front propeller shaft both front and rear side.
2. Remove bolt, nut and washer (Front axle side). 3. Remove bolt, nut and washer (Transfer side). 4. Remove front propeller shaft.
Installation
NOTE: Never install the shaft assembly backwards. Never insert bar between yoke lugs when tightening or removing bolts. Completely remove the black paint from the connecting surface of flange coupling on each end of propeller shaft. Clean so that no foreign matter will be caught in between. 1. Align the mark which is applied at removal. Install front propeller shaft and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Torque:63Nm (46lbft)
401RS020
4C30
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
Disassembly
401RW032
Legend (1) Sleeve Yoke (2) Clamp EndOFCallout 1. Lay the shaft horizontally on a bench and secure. 2. Indicate the original assembled position (1) by marking the phasing of the shaft prior to disassembly.
(3) Boot (4) Clamp (5) Tube Assembly 3. Using the flat blade of a screwdriver, pry the loose end of the boot clamp upwards and away from the propeller shaft boot. Be careful not to damage the boot. 4. When boot clamps becomes loose, remove by hand. 5. Repeat for the other boot clamp. 6. Remove the slip yoke assembly from the driveshaft, by securing the boot with one hand and pulling on the slip yoke. 7. Remove the boot from the shaft assembly.
401RW037
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C31
Universal Joint Disassembly
401RW031
Legend (1) Flange Yoke (2) Snap Ring EndOFCallout 1. Using a soft drift, tap the outside of the bearing cup assembly to loosen snap ring. Tap bearing only hard enough to break assembly away from snap ring. Remove snap ring from yoke. Turn joint over, tap bearing away from snap ring, then remove opposite snap ring. Apply alignment marks (1) on the yokes of the universal joint, then remove snap ring.
(3) Spider (4) Needle Roller Bearing
401RW018
4C32
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
2. Set the yoke in the arbor press with a piece of tube stock beneath it. Place a solid plug on the upper bearing assembly and press it through to release the lower bearing assembly.
401RW038
Propeller shaft runout

Support the propeller shaft on V-blocks (2) and check for run-out by holding the probe of a dial indicator (1) in contact with the shaft. Static run-out limit: 0.13mm (0.005in) TIR on the neck of the slip tube shaft (with a boot). 0.25mm (0.010in) TIR on the ends of the tubing 3 inch from the welds. 0.38mm (0.015in) TIR at the linear center of the tube. 0.38mm (0.015in) TIR for the full length of tube with 30" or less of tubing. (TIR : Total Indicator Reading)
401RW020
3. If the bearing assembly will not pull out by hand after pressing, tap the base of the lug near the bearing assembly to dislodge it. 4. To remove the opposite bearing, turn the yoke over and straighten the spider in the open hole. Then carefully press on the end of the spider so the remaining bearing moves straight out of the bearing spider hole. If the spider or bearing are cocked, the bearing will score the walls of the spider hole and ruin the yoke. 5. Repeat this procedure on the remaining bearing to remove the spider from the yoke. 6. Make sure of proper position for reinstallation by applying setting marks, then remove spider .

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition is found through inspection. NOTE: When any part of the journal assembly (spider, needle roller bearing) requires replacement, be sure to replace the entire assembly. Check the following parts for wear, damage, noise or any other abnormal conditions. 1. Spider 2. Needle roller bearing 3. Yoke 4. Flange 5. Boot
Spider pin for wear

Spider pin should be smooth and free from fretting or galling. Visible signs of needle presence is normal, but wear should not be felt.
401RS027
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM Spline

The nylon-coated spline should be free from nicks and dings and the underlying steel spline should not be visible. After cleaning the nylon coating spline, the coating should exhibit only slight indicator of wear. Grease volume is approximately 10 grams of grease in total. Grease should be evenly applied to both the female and the male slip splines using a small brush. After assembly of the slip joint, the sliding joint should be fully worked from the full collapsed to the full extended position.
4C33
Universal Joint Reassembly

1. Install spider to flange yoke. Be sure to install the spider by aligning the setting marks made during disassembly. 2. Pack the four grease cavities of the spider with a high quality, extreme pressure N.L.G.I. Grade 2 grease. Do not add additional grease to the bearing cup assembly. 3. Move one end of the spider to cause a trunnion to project through the spider hole beyond the outer machined face of the yoke lug. Place a bearing over the trunnion diameter and align it to the spider hole. Using an arbor press, hold the trunnion in alignment with the spider hole and place a solid plug on the upper bearing. Press the bearing into the spider hole enough to install a snap ring.
Play in the universal joint

Limit:Less than0.15mm (0.006in)
401RW023
Preload of the universal joint

Preload should be 0 to 49 N(0 to11.0 lb). Joints should rotate smoothly and freely and should exhibit no rough or ratchety movement.
401RW020
4. Install a snap ring. Be sure the snap rings are properly seated in the grooves. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install the opposite bearing. If the joint is stiff, strike the yoke ears with a soft hammer to seat needle bearings.
401RW019
4C34
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
6. Align setting marks (1) and join the yokes.
401RW018
7. Install snap ring.
Reassembly
401RW032
Legend (1) Sleeve Yoke (2) Clamp EndOFCallout
(3) Boot (4) Clamp (5) Tube Assembly
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM

1. Apply grease evenly to both the female and male splines. 2. Apply a small amount of grease by finger to the outer lips of the boot. 3. Slide the boot onto the yoke shaft being careful not to damage the spline coating or boot. 4. Insert the yoke shaft spline into the sleeve being careful to maintain proper phasing. The spider holes should be in line and as per originally marked prior to disassembly.
4C35
5. Position boot onto sleeve and yoke shaft in final position over boot grooves. 6. Attach boot clamps and secure using pliers. 7. Be sure clamp is properly seated and secure.

Transmission Length (between two spiders center) M/T 367.2 mm (14.81 in) A/T 542.2 mm (21.35 in)
401RX001
4C36
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
Rear Propeller Shaft

Rear Propeller Shaft and Associated Parts
401RX003
Legend (1) Bolt, Nut and Washer (Transfer Side) EndOFCallout
(2) Rear Propeller Shaft (3) Bolt, Nut and Washer (Rear Axle Side)
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. NOTE: Apply alignment marks on the flange at the rear propeller shaft both front and rear side. 2. Remove transfer side bolt, nut and washer (except spline yoke type). 3. Remove rear axle side bolt, nut and washer. 4. Remove rear propeller shaft. NOTE: Plug the hole of the transmission rear end to prevent oil leakage (spline yoke type only).
Installation
NOTE: Never install the shaft assembly backwards. Never insert bar between yoke lugs when tightening or removing bolts. Completely remove the dust or foreign matter from the connecting surface of flange coupling on each end of the propeller shaft. 1. Align the mark which is applied at removal. 2. Install rear propeller shaft and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Torque:63Nm(46lbft)
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C37
Slip Joint Disassembly
401RX00001
Legend (1) Spline Yoke and Universal Joint Assembly (2) Clamp EndOFCallout 1. Lay the shaft horizontally on a bench and secure. 2. Indicate the original assembled position by marking the phasing of the shaft prior to disassembly. 3. Using the flat blade of a screwdriver, pry the loose end of the boot clamp upwards and away from the propeller shaft boot. Be careful not to damage the boot.
(3) Boot (4) Clamp (5) Tube and Universal Joint Assembly 4. When boot clamps becomes loose, remove by hand. 5. Repeat for the other boot clamp. 6. Remove the slip yoke assembly from the driveshaft, by securing the boot with one hand and pulling on the slip yoke. 7. Remove the boot from the shaft assembly.
4C38
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
Universal Joint Disassembly
401RX00007
Legend (1) Spline Yoke (2) Spider (3) Propeller Shaft Assembly (4) Spider EndOFCallout NOTE: Aluminum is softer than steel. Care must be taken not to remove excessive material or damage bearing holes. If the vehicle has aluminum tube type propeller shaft, flange yoke, boot kit, journal kit can be replaced. If other parts are damaged, replace propeller shaft as assembly.
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Flange Yoke Bearing Snap Ring Flange Yoke
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM

1. Apply alignment marks on the yokes of the universal joint, then remove the snap ring.
4C39
2. Set the yoke in the arbor press with a piece of tube stock beneath it. Place a solid plug on the upper bearing and press it through to release the lower bearing.
401RW024
If the snap ring is stuck in position, remove paint from the hole in the yoke or tap around the edge of the bearing lightly with a soft drift.
401RW027
3. If the bearing will not pull out by hand after pressing, tap the base of the lug near the bearing to dislodge it. 4. To remove the opposite bearing, turn the yoke over and straighten the spider in the open spider hole. Then carefully press on the end of the spider so the remaining bearing moves straight out of the bearing spider hole. If the spider or bearing are cocked, the bearing will score the walls of the spider hole and ruin it.
401RW025
401RW026
4C40
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
5. Repeat this procedure on the remaining bearing to remove the spider from the yoke.
Inspection
Propeller shaft for run-out Aluminum tube type. Static run-out limit :1.0mm(0.04in) TIR full length of tubing maximum. (TIR : Total Indicator Reading) Propeller shaft for runout (Steel tube type). Static runout limit :0.13mm(0.005in) TIR on the neck of the slip tube shaft (with a boot). 0.25mm(0.010in) TIR on the ends of the tubing 3 inch from the welds. 0.38mm(0.015in) TIR at the linear center of the tube. 0.38mm(0.015in) TIR for the full length of tube with 30" or less of tubing. (TIR: Total Indicator Reading)
401RW028
Preload of the universal joint. Preload should be 0 to 49 N (0 to 11.0 lb). Joints should rotate smoothly and freely and should exhibit no rough or ratchety movement.
401RW019
401RW017
Play in universal joint. Limit: Less than0.15mm(0.006in) Spider pin should be smooth and free from fretting or galling. Visible signs of needle presence is normal, but wear should not be felt.
Inspect splines of slip joint for wear. The nylon-coated spline should be free from nicks and dings and the underlying steel spline should not be visible. After cleaning the nylon coating spline, the coating should exhibit only slight indication of wear. Grease volume is approximately 10 grams of grease in total. Grease should be evenly applied to both the female and the male slip splines using a small brush. After assembly of the slip joint, the sliding joint should be fully worked from the full collapsed to the full extended position.
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM

Aluminum tube type only: Inspect the aluminum tubing for surface scratches and dents. These scratches may not exceed 0.2 mm (0.008 in) in depth.
4C41
Universal Joint Reassembly

1. Pack the four grease cavities of the spider with a high quality, extreme pressure N.L.G.I. Grade 2 grease. Do not add additional grease to bearing cup assembly. 2. Move one end of the spider to cause a trunnion to project through the spider hole beyond the outer machined face of the yoke lug. Place a bearing over the trunnion diameter and align it to the spider hole. Using an arbor press, hold the trunnion in alignment with the spider hole and place a solid plug on the upper bearing. Press the bearing into the spider hole enough to install snap ring.
401RW022
Aluminum tube type only: Visually inspect the circle welds and fittings for any signs of cracks or signs of deterioration. If there are any cracks that exceed 0.2 mm (0.008 in) in depth, the assembly must be replaced. Aluminum tube type only: Check to be sure there are no missing balance weights. If balance weights are missing and void has occurred in the aluminum tubing greater than 0.2 mm (0.008 in), the assembly must be replaced.
401RW026
3. Install a snap ring. NOTE: Be sure the snap rings are properly seated in the grooves. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to install the opposite bearing. If the joint is stiff, strike the yoke ears with a soft hammer to seat the bearing. 5. Align the setting marks and join the yokes.
4C42
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
Slip Joint Reassembly
401RX00001
Legend (1) Spline Yoke and Universal Joint Assembly (2) Clamp EndOFCallout 1. Apply grease evenly to both the female and male splines. 2. Apply a small amount of grease by finger to the outer lips of the boot. 3. Slide the boot (smaller diameter side) onto the spline yoke shaft being careful not to damage the spline coating or boot. 4. Insert the spline yoke shaft spline into the tube assembly being careful to maintain proper phasing. The spider holes should be in line as originally marked prior to disassembly. 5. Position boot onto tube and yoke shaft in its assembled position. 6. Attach boot clamps and secure using pliers.
(3) Boot (4) Clamp (5) Tube and Universal Joint Assembly 7. Be sure clamp is properly seated and secure. CAUTION: Only use a similar type or same as the original type clamp. Using any other clamp may create an imbalanced shaft or lead to grease leakage.
DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM
4C43

2WD Model Engine Transmission Type (See illustration) Length between two spiders center) Universal joint type M/T 1 1314.4mm (51.75in) Y22SE A/T 2 1334.7mm (52.55in) M/T 1 1298.4mm (51.12in) 6VD1 A/T 2 1323.0mm (52.09in) M/T 2 1191.2mm (46.9in) 4WD Model 6VD1 A/T 3 1021.2mm (40.21in)
Cardan type
401R100001
SECTION
TRANSFER CASE
RODEO
4D1
DRIVELINE/AXLE
TRANSFER CASE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rear Oil Seal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rear Oil Seal and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Case Assembly (A/T) . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Case Assembly (A/T) and Associated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rear Case Assembly (A/T) . . . . . . . Transfer Rear Case Assembly (A/T) and Associated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D1 4D2 4D4 4D4 4D4 4D4 4D6 4D6 4D6 4D8 4D11 4D11 4D11 4D13 Transfer Rear Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detent, Shift Arm, and Interlock Pin (Transfer Case Assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Case Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D16 4D16 4D17 4D17 4D19 4D19 4D20 4D21 4D21 4D23 4D23 4D24 4D27 4D30 4D37 4D40
Service Precaution
4D2
TRANSFER CASE
General Description
Transfer Case (for M/T)
A07RW002
TRANSFER CASE
Transfer Case (for A/T)
4D3
A07RW001
The transfer case is used to provide a means of providing power flow to the front axle. The transfer case also provides a means of disconnecting the front axle, providing better fuel economy and quieter operation when the vehicle is driven on improved roads where four wheel drive is not required. In addition, the transfer case provides an additional gear reduction when placed in low range, which is useful when difficult off road conditions are encountered. A floor mounted shift lever is used to select the high low range. When four wheel drive switch has been turned on, the four wheel drive indicator light is designed to come on and the front axle has been engaged.
4D4
TRANSFER CASE
Transfer Rear Oil Seal

Transfer Rear Oil Seal and Associated Parts
220RS015
Legend (1) Rear Propeller Shaft EndOFCallout
(2) End Nut and Rear Companion Flange (3) Oil Seal
Removal
1. Disconnect the rear propeller shaft (1) from the transfer case side. 2. Remove end nut and rear companion flange (2), using the companion flange holder J861411.
Installation
1. Install oil seal and apply engine oil to the oil seal outer surfaces. 2. Apply the recommended grease (BESCO L2) or equivalent to the oil seal lip. 3. Use the oil seal installer J39208 to install the rear seal (3) to the transfer rear case.
266RW001
3. Use the universal puller to remove the rear companion flange and Oring. 4. Remove the oil seal from the transfer case.
220RS016
TRANSFER CASE
4. Install the rear companion flange (2) and Oring (2). 5. Use the companion flange holder J861411 to install a new end nut (2) and tighten to the specified torque. Torque: 167 Nm (123 lbft) 6. Use the punch J39209 to stake the end nut at two spots. NOTE: Be sure to confirm that there is no crack at the staked portion of the end nut (2) after staking.
4D5
7. Connect the rear propeller shaft to the transfer case and tighten to the specified torque. Torque: 63 Nm 46 (lbft)
266RS001
266RW002
4D6
TRANSFER CASE
Transfer Case Assembly (A/T)

Transfer Case Assembly (A/T) and Associated Parts
260RW008
Legend (1) Transfer Control Lever Knob (2) Lower Cluster Assembly (3) Rear Console (4) Center Console (5) Grommet Assembly and Transfer Control Lever EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Transfer Protector Fairing Plate Rear Propeller Shaft Front Propeller Shaft Transfer Case Assembly
Removal
NOTE: Before removing transmission and transfer assembly from vehicle, change the transfer mode to 2WD using the 4WD push button switch on dash panel. 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove transfer control lever knob (1).
TRANSFER CASE
3. Remove lower cluster assembly (2). 5. Remove center console (4).
4D7
740RW021
256RW006
4. Remove rear console (3).
6. Remove grommet assembly and transfer control lever (5).
256RW005 256RW007
4D8
TRANSFER CASE
7. Raise and support vehicle with suitable stands. Drain transfer case fluid. 8. Remove transfer protector (6) and fairing plate (7).
Installation
1. Apply a thin coat of molybdenum disulfide grease to the input shaft spline as shown in the figure.
150RW006
9. Remove rear propeller shaft (8) and front propeller shaft (9). NOTE: Apply alignment marks on the flange at both front and rear sides. 10. Disconnect harness connectors and clip. Connector: transfer switch, 2WD4WD actuator, speed sensor. 11. Support transmission case with a transmission jack. 12. Remove the top position bolt from transfer control lever hole and others under the floor. Remove transfer case (10) from the vehicle.
260RW001
TRANSFER CASE
2. Install transfer case (10) to the transmission. Tighten transfer bolts as shown in the figure.
4D9
261RX00001
3. Remove the transmission jack from transmission side. 4. Connect harness connectors and clip. Connector: transfer switch, 2WD4WD actuator, speed sensor. 5. Install rear propeller shaft (8) and front propeller shaft (9). Torque: 63 Nm (46 lbft) 6. Install transfer protector (6) and fairing plate (7).
150RW006
4D10
TRANSFER CASE
7. Fill transfer case fluid. 8. Lower the vehicle. Install grommet assembly and transfer control lever (5).
256RW007
9. Install center console (4), rear console (3) and lower cluster assembly (2). 10. Install transfer control lever knob (1).
TRANSFER CASE
4D11
Transfer Rear Case Assembly (A/T)

Transfer Rear Case Assembly (A/T) and Associated Parts
220RW133
Legend (1) Speedometer Sensor, Speedometer Driven Gear and Plate (2) Front Companion Flange (3) Rear Companion Flange EndOFCallout
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Control Box Assembly 2WD4WD Actuator Heat Protector 2WD4WD Actuator Assembly Transfer Rear Cover Assembly Transfer Case Assembly
Removal
1. Remove the speedometer sensor (1). 2. Remove the plate (1).
3. Remove the speedometer driven gear bushing and driven gear (1). NOTE: Apply a reference mark to the driven gear bushing before removal.
4D12
TRANSFER CASE
9. Remove the 2WD4WD actuator assembly bolts. 10. Pull the 2WD4WD actuator assembly (6) with 2WD4WD shift rod.
4. Remove front companion flange (2) and rear companion flange (3), using the flange companion holder J861411 to remove the end nut..
262RW009
5. Remove the front and rear companion flange. NOTE: Use the universal puller to remove the rear companion flange. 6. Disconnect the actuator breather hose and transfer breather hose from control box (4). 7. Remove control box assembly (4). 8. Disconnect the actuator breather hose and 2WD 4WD actuator heat protector (5) from the 2WD 4WD actuator assembly (6). Legend (6) 2WD4WD Actuator Assembly (7) Rear Cover Assembly (9) Shift Rod: 2WD4WD (Position: 2WD) (10) Pull (11) Position: 4WD (12) Mode: 2WD EndOFCallout
220RW065
220RW002
TRANSFER CASE
11. Off set the actuator assembly.
4D13
Installation
1. Apply the recommended liquid gasket (LOCTITE 17430) or its equivalent to the transfer rear cover fitting faces.
220RW028
12. Remove the actuator assembly (6).
220RS017
2. Install transfer rear cover assembly (7) to transfer case assembly (8). 3. Perform the following steps before fitting the transfer rear case. 1. Shift the highlow shift rod to the 4H side. 2. The cutaway portion of the select rod head (15) should align with that of the rear case hole's stopper (16).
220RW066
Legend (13) Position: 4WD (14) Mode: 2WD EndOFCallout 13. Remove transfer rear cover assembly (7) from transfer case assembly.
230RW009
4D14
TRANSFER CASE
8. Tighten the 2WD4WD actuator bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 19 Nm (14 lbft) 9. Connect the actuator breather hose to actuator. 10. Install actuator heat protector (5). 11. Install control box assembly (4). Torque: 19 Nm (14 lbft) 12. Connect breather hoses to control box (4). 13. Install rear companion flange (3) and front companion flange (2), using the companion flange holder J861411 to tighten the flange nuts to the transfer case.
4. Tighten the transfer rear case bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 37 Nm (27 lbft) 5. Shift the 2WD4WD shift rod (17) to the 4WD side. 6. Join the rod grooves of 2WD4WD actuator assembly (6) and shift rod (17).
220RW067
Legend (6) 2WD4WD Actuator Assembly (Mode: 2WD) (7) Rear Cover Assembly (17) Shift Rod: 2WD4WD (Position: 4WD) EndOFCallout 7. Push the 2WD4WD actuator assembly (6) with 2WD4WD shift rod (17) till the shift rod (17) reaches the 2WD position.
262RW009
14. Tighten the new transfer flange nuts to the specified torque. Torque Rear companion flange: 167 Nm (123 lbft) Front companion flange: 137 Nm (101 lbft)
220RW068
Legend (18) Position: 2WD (19) Mode: 2WD EndOFCallout
TRANSFER CASE
15. Use the punch J39209 to stake the rear companion flange nut (3) at two spots.
4D15
16. Stake the front companion flange nut (2) at one spot. NOTE: Be sure to confirm that there is no crack at the staked portion of the flange nut after staking. 17. Install the Oring (23) to the speedometer driven gear bushing (22). 18. Install the driven gear to the speedometer driven gear bushing (22). 19. Install the speedometer driven gear assembly to the transfer rear cover. 20. Install the plate (21) to the transfer rear case and tighten to the specified torque. Torque: 15 Nm (11 lbft) 21. Install the speedometer sensor and tighten to the specified torque. Torque: 27 Nm (20 lbft)
266RS001
225RW004
266RW002
Legend (20) Bolt (21) Plate (22) Bushing (23) Oring EndOFCallout
4D16
TRANSFER CASE
Transfer Rear Cover Assembly
226RW154
Legend (1) Rear Output Shaft Assembly (2) Rear Output Shaft (3) Bearing Snap Ring (4) Ball Bearing EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Bearing Snap Ring Ball Speedometer Drive Gear Ball Bearing Transfer Rear Cover (with oil seal)
Disassembly
1. Remove bearing snap ring, use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the snap ring (3).
226RS060
TRANSFER CASE
2. Remove the rear output shaft assembly (1) from the transfer rear cover (with oil seal) (9). 3. Remove ball bearing (8), using a bench press and the bearing remover J2291201.
4D17
Reassembly
Transfer rear cover (with oil seal) (9). Oil seal replacement. Remove the oil seal from the transfer rear cover. Apply engine oil to the oil seal outer surfaces. Fill in recommended grease (BESCO L2) equivalent in the oil seal lip. or
Use the oil seal installer J39208 to install the rear oil seal to the transfer rear cover.
226RS061
4. Remove speedometer drive gear (7). 5. Remove ball (6). 6. Remove bearing snap ring (5), using a pair of snap ring pliers. 7. Remove rear output shaft (2) from the ball bearing (4), using a bench press and the bearing remover J2291201.
220RS019
1. Install ball bearing (4) to the rear output shaft (2), using the ball bearing installer J37223 and the adapter J37486A.
226RS062

Refer to Transfer Case Assembly in this section for inspection and repair.
262RW021
2. Install bearing snap ring (5), using a pair of snap ring pliers. 3. Install ball (6).
4D18
TRANSFER CASE
4. Install speedometer drive gear (7).
226RS064
5. Use the ball bearing installer J37223 to install the ball bearing (8).
226RS065
6. Install the rear output shaft assembly (1) to the transfer rear cover (9). 7. Install bearing snap ring (3). NOTE: The snap ring must be fully inserted into the transfer rear cover snap ring groove.
TRANSFER CASE
4D19
Detent, Shift Arm, and Interlock Pin (Transfer Case Assembly)

Disassembled View
262R100001
Legend (1) Detent Ball, Spring, Gasket and Plug (2) Spring Pin and Bridge (3) Spring Pin (4) Spring (5) 2WD4WD Shift Rod (6) Shift Arm (7) Shift Block (8) 4WD Indicator Switch EndOFCallout
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
Interlock Pin Spring Select Rod Assembly Spring Pin HighLow Shift Rod Shift Arm Shift Block Transfer Case
4D20
TRANSFER CASE
5. Remove shift arm (6). 6. Remove shift block (7). 7. Remove 4WD indicator switch (8). 8. Use a magnetic tool to remove the interlock pin (9) and spring (10) from the transfer case (16).
Disassembly
1. Remove detent ball, spring, gasket and plug (1). 2. Use a spring pin remover to remove the spring pin (2) from the bridge (6).
262RW011
3. Remove spring (4). 4. Engage the 2WD4WD sleeve with front output gear. Remove the spring pin (3) from the block (7). Remove the shift rod (5).
262RS005
9. Remove select rod assembly (11). 10. Use a spring pin remover to remove the shift arm spring pin (12) from the shift arm (14) and shift block (15). Remove the highlow shift rod (13) from transfer case (16).
262RW022
262RS006
11. Remove shift arm (14). 12. Remove shift block (15) from transfer case (16).
TRANSFER CASE
4D21

Refer to Transfer Case Assembly in this section for inspection and repair.
Reassembly
1. Place shift block (15) in transfer case (16). 2. Set shift arm (14) on the HighLow sleeve. 3. Push HighLow shift rod (13) through shift arm (14) and block (14). 4. Engage the HighLow sleeve with the 4H (1) side. 5. Install the spring pin (12) to the shift block (15) and shift arm (14).
262RW035
262RW034
6. Install select rod assembly (11), joining its lever to shift block groove. 7. Engage the HighLow sleeve with the 4H side and install the interlock pin and spring (10) in the proper direction. 8. Place 2WD4WD shift block in the transfer case (16). 9. Set 2WD4WD shift arm on the 2WD4WD sleeve. 10. Puh 2WD4WD shift rod through 2WD4WD shift arm and 2WD4WD shift block. 11. Install the shift rod: 2WD4WD (5) with interlock pin pushed in.
Legend (18) 2WD4WD (19) 4H Side (20) Interlock pin (21) 2WD (22) 4WD (23) Rod: 24 (24) Rod: HL (25) 4H (26) 4L (27) 4 2 (28) 4 4 EndOFCallout 12. Install 4WD indicator switch and gasket (8). Tighten to the specified torque. Torque: 39 Nm (29 lbft) 13. Install spring (4).
4D22
TRANSFER CASE
14. Engage the 2WD4WD sleeve with the 4WD side and install the spring pin (3).
262RW022
15. Install spring pin (2) and bridge (2). 16. Install detent ball, spring, gasket and plug and tighten the plug to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lbft)
TRANSFER CASE
4D23
Transfer Case Assembly

Disassembled View
226RW209
Legend (1) Bearing Snap Ring (2) Ball Bearing (3) Lock Nut (4) Snap Ring (A/T) (5) Input Shaft Assembly (A/T) (6) HighLow Clutch Hub and Sleeve (7) Transfer Input Gear (8) Needle Bearing (9) Bearing Collar (10) Ball (11) Plate (12) Ball Bearing (A/T) (13) Input Shaft (A/T) (14) Bearing Snap Ring (15) Front Output Gear Assembly
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31)
Bearing Snap Ring Ball Bearing Bearing Collar SubGear Snap Ring (M/T) Spacer (M/T) Belleville Spring (M/T) SubGear (antilash plate) (M/T) Front Output Gear Needle Bearing Inside Ring Outside Ring Block Ring 2WD4WD Clutch Hub and Sleeve Assembly Stopper Plate Ball Bearing Front Output Shaft
4D24
(32) (33) (34) (35) (36) (37)
TRANSFER CASE
(38) (39) (40) (41) (42) Spacer Belleville Spring SubGear (antilash plate) Counter Gear Transfer Case (with oil seal)
Bearing Snap Ring Counter Gear Assembly Snap Ring Ball Bearing Snap Ring Ball Bearing
EndOFCallout
Disassembly
1. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the snap ring (1). 2. Use a bearing remover J37217 and puller J37487 to remove the ball bearing (2).
5. Remove the front companion flange. 6. Remove snap ring (4). (A/T) 7. Remove the input shaft assembly (5) from the transfer case (42). (A/T)
265RW001
262RW016
3. Install the front companion flange temporarily. 4. Use the Companion flange holder J861411 and lock nut wrench J37219 to remove the lock nut (3).
8. Use the universal puller to remove the highlow clutch hub and sleeve (6), and transfer input gear (7).
226RS070
226RX001
TRANSFER CASE
9. Remove needle bearing (8). 10. Remove bearing collar (9).
4D25
14. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the bearing snap ring (14). 15. Use a plastic hammer to tap the front output gear assembly (15) free.
226RS071
11. Remove ball (10). 12. Remove plate (11). 13. Use a bench press and the ball bearing remover J 2291201 to remove the ball bearing (12) from the input shaft (13). (A/T) 16. Remove bearing snap ring (16). 17. Use a bench press and the bearing remover J 2291201 to remove the following parts. 18. Remove ball bearing (17), and bearing collar (18). Remove subgear snap ring (19), spacer (20), belleville spring (21), and subgear (antilash plate) (22). (M/T) Remove front output gear (23) and needle bearing (24).
262RS009
265RS002
262RS010
19. Remove inside ring (25). 20. Remove outside ring (26). 21. Remove block ring (27).
4D26
TRANSFER CASE
28. Use a bench press and the bearing remover J 2291201 to remove the ball bearing (35). 29. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the snap ring (36). 30. Use a bench press and the bearing remover J 2291201 to remove the ball bearing (37).
22. Use a bench press and bearing remover J22912 01 to remove 2WD4WD clutch hub and sleeve assembly (28) and stopper plate (29). NOTE: Do not reuse the stopper plate. 23. Disassemble the 2WD4WD clutch hub and sleeve assembly (28). Springs (1) Inserts (2) Clutch Hub (3) Sleeve (4)
226RS073
31. Remove spacer (38). 32. Remove belleville spring (39). 33. Remove subgear (antilash plate) (40). 34. Remove counter gear (41).
226RW133
24. Use a bench press and the ball bearing remover J 2291201 to remove the ball bearing (30) from front output shaft (31).
35. Remove transfer case (with oil seal) (42), performing the following steps (M/T) Cover the shaft splines with adhesive tape (43).
A07RW022 262RS011
25. Remove bearing snap ring (32). 26. Remove the counter gear assembly (33) from the transfer case (42). 27. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the snap ring (34).
Legend (43) Adhesive Tape (44) Oil Seal Lip (45) Oil Seal Collar (46) Bearing EndOFCallout
TRANSFER CASE
Remove the transfer case together with intermediate plate with gear assembly from the transmission case (M/T). Remove the transfer case from the intermediate plate with gear assembly (M/T).
4D27
3. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the clutch hub must be replaced. Clutch hub spline play Standard : 00.1 mm (00.004 in) Limit : 0.2 mm (0.008 in)

1. Make the necessary repair or parts replacement if wear, damage or any other abnormal conditions are found during inspection. 2. Wash all parts thoroughly in clean solvent. Be sure all old lubricant, metallic particles, dirt, or foreign material are removed from the surfaces of every part. Apply compressed air to each oil feed port and channel in each case half to remove any obstructions or cleaning solvent residue.
Gears
1. Inspect all the gear teeth for signs of excessive wear or damage and check all the gear splines for burrs, nicks, wear or damage. Remove the minor nicks or scratches on an oil stone. Replace any part exhibiting excessive wear or damage. Front Output Gear Inside Diameter 1. Use an inside dial indicator to measure the gear inside diameter. 2. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the gear must be replaced. Gear inside diameter Standard : 48.00048.013 mm (1.88981.8903 in) Limit : 48.10 mm (1.894 in)
226RS042
Bearings
1. Inspect the condition of all the needles and ball bearings. Wash bearings thoroughly in a cleaning solvent. Apply compressed air to the bearings. NOTE: Do not allow the bearings to spin. Turn them slowly by hand. Spinning bearings may damage the rollers. 2. Lubricate the bearings with a light oil and check them for roughness by slowly turning the race by hand. Ball Bearing Play 1. Use a dial indicator to measure the ball bearing play. 2. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the ball bearing must be replaced. Limit : 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
226RS040
Clutch Hub Spline Play

1. Set a dial indicator to the clutch hub to be measured. 2. Move the clutch hub as far as possible to both the right and the left. Note the dial indicator reading.
226RS043
4D28
TRANSFER CASE
Block ring and insert clearance Standard : 1.5 mm (0.059 in) Limit : 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
Synchronizers
The synchronizer hubs and sliding sleeves are a selected assembly and should be kept together as originally assembled. Clean synchronizer components with clean solvent and air dry. Inspect the components for the following: Teeth for wear, scuffs, nicks, burrs or breaks. Keys and springs for wear, cracks or distortion, replace if these conditions are present. If scuffed, nicked or burred conditions cannot be corrected with a soft stone or crocus cloth, replace the component.
Block Ring and Insert Clearance

1. Use a vernier caliper to measure the clearance between the block ring and the insert. 2. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the block ring and the insert must be replaced. Block ring and insert clearance Standard : 2.462.74 mm (0.0970.108 in) Limit : 3.0 mm (0.118 in)
226RW142
Clutch Hub and Insert Clearance

1. Use a thickness gauge to measure the clearance between the clutch hub and the insert. 2. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the clutch hub and the insert must be replaced. Clutch hub and insert clearance Standard : 0.010.19 mm (0.00040.0075 in) Limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
226RS037
2WD4WD Synchronizer (3Cone)

1. Use a thickness gauge to measure the clearance between the block ring and the dog teeth. 2. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the 2WD4WD synchronizer assembly must be replaced.
226RS038
TRANSFER CASE Detent Springs

1. Inspect the springs for distortion, cracks or wear. Replace if these conditions are present. Detent Spring Free Length 1. Use a vernier caliper to measure the detent spring free length. 2. If the measured value is less than the specified limit, the detent spring must be replaced. Detent spring free length Detent ball Standard : Inner 23.2 mm (0.91 in) Outer 26.8 mm (1.06 in) Limit : Inner 22.6 mm (0.84 in) Outer 26.2 mm (1.03 in) Interlock pin Standard : 15.9 mm (0.626 in) Limit : 15.3 mm (0.602 in)
4D29
220RS013
Shift Arm
1. Inspect the shift arms for wear, distortion or scoring. Replace if these conditions are present. Shift Arm Thickness 1. Use a micrometer to measure the shift arm thickness. 2. If the measured value is less than the specified limit, the shift arm must be replaced. Shift arm thickness Standard : 9.609.85 mm (0.3780.388 in) Limit : 9.0 mm (0.354 in)
220RW035
Detent Spring Tension 1. Use a spring tester to measure the detent spring tension. 2. If the measured value is less than the specified limit, the detent spring must be replaced. Detent ball Compressed height : 19.7 mm (0.776 in) Standard : Inner 22.632.4 N (5.17.3 lb) Outer 91.2101.0 N (20.522.7 lb) Interlock pin Compressed height : 11.5 mm (0.453 in) Standard : 9.8 N (2.2 lb)
230RS006
4D30
TRANSFER CASE
M/T
Reassembly
Input Shaft Oil Seal Replacement
1. Remove the oil seal from the transfer case. 2. Apply the engine oil to the oil seal outer surfaces. 3. Apply recommended grease (BESCO L2) or equivalent to the oil seal lip. 4. Use the oil seal installer J38592 (A/T) J37488 (M/ T) and driver handle J8092 to install the oil seal to the transfer case. A/T
220RW052
Legend (48) Transmission Side Oil Seal (49) Transfer Side Oil Seal EndOFCallout
220RX002
Legend (47) Oil Seal EndOFCallout
TRANSFER CASE Front Output Shaft Oil Seal Replacement

1. Remove the oil seal from the transfer case. 2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal outer surfaces. 3. Apply recommended grease (BESCO equivalent to the oil seal lip. L2) or
4D31
1. Install the transfer case (with oil seal) (42), performing the following steps. (M/T) Cover the shaft splines with adhesive tape (43). This will prevent damage to the oil seal lip (44).
4. Use the oil seal installer J38594 to install the oil seal to the transfer case.
A07RW022
Legend (43) Adhesive Tape (44) Oil Seal Lip (45) Oil Seal Collar (46) Bearing EndOFCallout Apply recommended liquid gasket (LOCTITE FMD 127) or its equivalent to the transmission, intermediate plate and transfer case fitting surfaces (M/T).
220RW070
Legend (50) Front Output Shaft Oil Seal EndOFCallout
220RS026
4D32
TRANSFER CASE
Install the transfer case together with intermediate plate with gear assembly to transmission case (M/ T). Tighten the transfer case bolts to the specified torque a little at a time (M/T). Torque : 37 Nm (27 lbft) 2. Apply chassis grease (51) to the subgear (40) and the counter gear (41) thrust surfaces.
226RS170
226RW155
3. Install subgear (40) to counter gear (41). 4. Install belleville spring (39). 5. Install spacer. 6. Install ball bearing, using a bench press. 7. Select a snap ring that will allow the minimum axial play. Clearance : 00.1 mm (00.004 in) Snap ring availability: Thickness 1.50 mm (0.059 in) 1.55 mm (0.061 in) 1.60 mm (0.063 in) Colorcoding White Yellow Blue
226RS021
8. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the snap ring (36) to the counter gear (41). SubGear (antilash plate) Preload 1. Hook a length of piano wire (52) over one of the subgear (53) teeth. 2. Attach the other end of the piano wire (52) to a spring balancer.
TRANSFER CASE
3. Measure the subgear preload. Preload : 5998 N (1322 lb)
4D33
14. Assemble the 2WD4WD clutch hub and sleeve assembly (28).
226RW140 226RW156
9. Install ball bearing (35), using a bench press. 10. Install snap ring (34). 11. Install the counter gear assembly (33) to the transfer case (42). 12. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the snap ring (32) to the transfer case (42). NOTE: The snap ring must be fully inserted into the transfer case snap ring groove. 13. Use a bench press to install the ball bearing (30) to the front output shaft (31).
15. Engage the springs in the same insert with the open ends away from each other.
226RW141
262RS012
4D34
TRANSFER CASE
21. Apply engine oil to the thrust surfaces of the sub gear, the belleville spring, and the spacer.
16. Install a new stopper plate (29) and the clutch hub and sleeve assembly (28) to the front output shaft (31).
226RW157
262RW014
Legend (54) Front Output Gear EndOFCallout 17. The clutch hub face (with the heavy boss) must be facing the front output gear side. 18. Use a bench press to slowly force the clutch hub and sleeve assembly (28) together with the stopper plate (29) into place. 19. Align the inserts with the block ring insert grooves. Install the block ring (27) to the clutch sleeve and hub assembly (28). 20. Install the outside ring (26), inside ring (25) and needle bearing (24) to the front output gear (23) and bearing collar (18). NOTE: Coat all parts with transmission oil before installing them.
22. Install subgear (antilash plate) (22), belleville spring (21) and spacer (20). (M/T) 23. Install subgear snap ring (19). (M/T) 24. Use a bench press to install the needle bearing collar together with the front output gear assembly, aligning inside ring claw with block ring groove.
262RS014
226RW139
TRANSFER CASE
25. Install ball bearing (17), using a bench press. 26. Select a snap ring (16) that will allow the minimum axial play. Clearance : 00.1 mm (00.004 in) Snap ring availability: Snap ring thickness 1.55 mm (0.061 in) 1.60 mm (0.063 in) 1.65 mm (0.065 in) 1.70 mm (0.067 in) 1.75 mm (0.069 in) 1.80 mm (0.071 in) 1.85 mm (0.073 in) 1.90 mm (0.075 in) Color coding White Yellow Blue Pink Green Brown Red Orange
4D35
27. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the snap ring (16) to the output shaft (31). Sub-gear (anti-lash plate) preload 1. Hook a length of piano wire (52) over one of the subgear (53) teeth. 2. Attach the other end of the piano wire to (52) a spring balancer. 3. Measure the subgear preload. Preload: 5998 N (1322 lb)
226RW156
28. Install front output gear assembly (15) to transfer case (42). 29. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the snap ring (14) to the transfer case (42). NOTE: The snap ring must be fully inserted into the transfer case snap ring groove. 30. Use a bench press to install the ball bearing (12) to the input shaft (13). (A/T)
262RS015
226RS021
265RS003
4D36
TRANSFER CASE
38. Use the punch to stake the lock nut (3) at one spot. 39. Use a suitable drift and hammer to install the ball bearing (2).
31. Install plate (11), ball (10) and bearing collar (9). 32. Install needle bearing (8) and input gear (7). 33. The clutch hub face (with the heavy boss) must be facing the transfer input gear side (55).
226RS079
226RW158
40. Install bearing snap ring (1).
34. Install highlow clutch hub and sleeve (6), using a bench press. 35. Install input shaft assembly (5) to transfer case (42). (A/T) 36. Install the snap ring (4) to the transfer case (42). (A/ T) NOTE: The snap ring must be fully inserted into the transfer case snap ring groove. 37. Install the front companion flange temporarily and use the flange holder J861411 and lock nut wrench J37219 to install the lock nut (3). Torque: 137 Nm (101 lbft)
226RW137
TRANSFER CASE
4D37

Type Control method Synchronized type gears shifting between the 2 and 4 wheel drive mode. Constant mesh type gears shifting between low" and high". Remote (A/T) and direct (M/T) control with the gear shift lever on the floor for gears shifting between low" and high". Electric control with the button switch on the instrument panel for gears shifting between the 2 and 4 wheel driver mode. High; 1.000 Low; 2.050 1.45 lit. (1.53 U.S. quart) Engine oil Refer to chart in Section 0
Gear ratio Oil capacity Type of lubricant
E07RW022
4D38
TRANSFER CASE
E07RX006
TRANSFER CASE
4D39
262R100002
4D40
TRANSFER CASE
Special Tools
ILLUSTRATION PART NO. PART NAME ILLUSTRATION PART NO. PART NAME
J2291201 Bearing remover/installer
J39208 Rear oil seal installer
J38592 Transfer case oil seal installer
J37486A Bearing installer adapter
J37219 Mainshaft nut wrench
J861411 Flange holder
J37223 Rear output shaft and bearing installer
J37217 Mainshaft end bearing remover
J39209 Punch; end nut
J37487 Puller
J38594 Front output shaft oil seal installer
J8092 Driver handle
SECTION
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
RODEO
5A1
BRAKES
CONTENTS
Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-assisted Brake System. . . . . . . . . . . . 5A 5B 5C Parking Brakes (4x4 Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking Brakes (4x2 Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D1 5D2
Brake Control System

CONTENTS
Service Precaution......................................... General Description ....................................... Functional Description ................................ System Components .................................. Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit (EHCU) .. ABS Warning Light ..................................... Wheel Speed Sensor.................................. G-Sensor .................................................... Normal and Anti-lock Braking ..................... Brake Pedal Travel ..................................... Acronyms and Abbreviations ...................... General Diagnosis ......................................... General Information .................................... ABS Service Precautions ........................... Computer System Service Precautions ...... General Service Precautions ...................... Note on Intermittents .................................. Test Driving ABS Complaint Vehicles ........ ABS Warning Light ................................... Normal Operation ....................................... Tech 2 Scan Tool ....................................... DATA LIST ................................................. ACTUATOR TEST...................................... Tech 2 Service Bleed ................................. Basic Diagnostic Flow Chart....................... Basic Inspection Procedure ........................ EHCU Connector Pin-out Checks.................. Circuit Diagram........................................... Connector List ............................................ Part Location .............................................. Symptom Diagnosis....................................... Chart A-1 ABS Works Frequently But Vehicle Does Not Decelerate ..................... Chart TA-1 ABS Works Frequently But Vehicle Does Not Decelerate (Use TECH 2)............................................. Chart A-2 Uneven Braking Occurs While ABS Works................................................. Chart TA-2 Uneven Braking Occurs While ABS Works (Use TECH 2) ......................... Chart A-3, TA-3 The Wheels Are Locked ... 5A2 5A3 5A4 5A10 5A10 5A10 5A10 5A10 5A10 5A11 5A11 5A11 5A11 5A11 5A11 5A12 5A12 5A12 5A12 5A12 5A13 5A16 5A17 5A21 5A22 5A23 5A24 5A25 5A28 5A30 5A31 5A31 Chart A-4 Brake Pedal Feed Is Abnormal .. Chart A-5, TA-5 Braking Sound (From EHCU) Is Heard While Not Braking. Diagnostic Trouble Codes .......................... Diagnosis By ABS Warning Light Illumination Pattern .................................... Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).............. Chart B-1 With the key in the ON position (Before starting the engine). Warning light (W/L) is not activated. ......................... Chart B-2 CPU Error (DTC 14 (Flash out) / C0271, C0272, C0273, C0284 (Serial communications))....................................... Chart B-3 Low or High Ignition Voltage (DTC 15 (Flash out) / C0277, 0278 (Serial communications))....................................... Chart B-4 Excessive Dump Time (DTC 17 (Flash out) / C0269 (Serial communications)) Chart B-5 Excessive Isolation Time (DTC 18 (Flash out) / C0274 (Serial communications)) Chart B-6 G-Sensor Output Failure (DTC 21 (Flash out) / C0276 (Serial communications)) Chart B-7 Brake Switch Failure (DTC 22 (Flash out) / C0281 (Serial communications)) Chart B-8 2WD Controller in 4WD Vehicle Controller (DTC 13 (Flash out) / C0285 (Serial communications)), 4WD State Input Signal Failure (DTC 24 (Flash out) / C0282 (Serial communications)).......................... Chart B-9 Pump Motor Failure (DTC 32 (Flash out) / C0267, C0268 (Serial communications)) ..................................... Chart B-10 EHCU Valve Relay Failure (DTC 35 (Flash out) / C0265, C0266 (Serial communications)) ........................... Chart B-11 FL Isolation Solenoid Coil Failure (DTC 41 (Flash out) / C0245, C0247 (Serial communications))....................................... Chart B-12 FL Dump Solenoid Coil Failure (DTC 42 (Flash out) / C0246, C0248 (Serial communications))....................................... 5A33 5A34 5A35 5A37 5A38
5A40
5A40
5A41 5A41 5A41 5A42 5A42
5A43
5A43
5A44
5A32 5A32 5A32 5A33
5A44
5A44
5A2

communications))....................................... Chart B-21 FR Speed Sensor Missing Signal (DTC 62 (Flash out) / C0222, C0223 (Serial communications))....................................... Chart B-22 Rear Speed Sensor Missing Signal (DTC 63 (Flash out) / C0236, C0237 (Serial communications)) ........................... Chart B-23 Simultaneous Drop-out of Front Speed Sensor Signal (DTC 64 (Flash out) / C0229 (Serial communications))................ Chart B-24 Wheel Speed Input Abnormality (DTC 65 (Flash out) / C0238 (Serial communications))....................................... Unit Inspection Procedure .......................... Chart C-1-1 FL Sensor Output Inspection Procedure................................................... Chart C-1-2 FR Sensor Output Inspection Procedure................................................... Chart C-1-3 Rear Sensor Output Inspection Procedure................................................... Chart TC-1 Sensor Output Inspection Procedure................................................... Special Tools ................................................. 5A49
Chart B-13 FR Isolation Solenoid Coil Failure (DTC 43 (Flash out) / C0241, C0243 (Serial communications)) ...................................... Chart B-14 FR Dump Solenoid Coil Failure (DTC 44(Flash out) / C0242, C0244 (Serial communications))....................................... Chart B-15 Rear Isolation Solenoid Coil Failure (DTC 45 (Flash out) / C0251, C0253 (Serial communications)) ........................... Chart B-16 Rear Dump Solenoid Coil Failure (DTC 46 (Flash out) / C0252, C0254 (Serial communications))....................................... Chart B-17 FL Speed Sensor Open or Shorted (DTC 51 (Flash out) / C0225 (Serial communications))....................................... Chart B-18 FR Speed Sensor Open or Shorted (DTC 52 (Flash out) / C0221 (Serial communications))....................................... Chart B-19 Rear Speed Sensor Open or Shorted (DTC 53 (Flash out) / C0235 (Serial communications))....................................... Chart B-20 FL Speed Sensor Missing Signal (DTC 61 (Flash out) / C0226, C0227 (Serial
5A45
5A50
5A45
5A51
5A45
5A52
5A46
5A53 5A54 5A54 5A55 5A55 5A56 5A57
5A46
5A47
5A48
Service Precaution
5A3
General Description
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) works on all four wheels. A combination of wheel speed sensor and Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit (EHCU) can determine when a wheel is about to stop turning and adjust brake pressure to maintain best braking. This system helps the driver maintain greater control of the vehicle under heavy braking conditions. NOTE: The Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit (EHCU) comprises the Hydraulic Unit (H/U) and the coil Integrated Module.
C05RW004
Legend (1) Electronic Line (2) Hydraulic Line (3) Hydraulic Unit (H/U) EndOFCallout
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Coil Integrated Module Front Wheel Speed Sensor Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Proportioning and Bypass (P&B) Valve
5A4
Functional Description
Hydraulic Unit (H/U) Solenoid Valve
C05RW012
Legend (1) Isolation Valve (2) Dump valve EndOFCallout

Normal Braking During normal (non anti-lock) braking, the solenoid valves has current flow. The dump valve is closed and the isolation valve is opened due to spring force.
5A5
Brake fluid travels through the centre of the isolation valve (normally open) around the dump valve (normally closed) then to the brake pistons.
C05RW010
Legend (1) Brake (2) Master Cylinder EndOFCallout
5A6

The microprocessor in the coil integrated module sends a voltage to the coil to energize and close the isolation valve. This prevents any additional fluid pressure applied by the brake pedal from reaching the wheel. With the isolation valves closed, unnecessary increase in the brake pressure is prevented.
Pressure Isolation (Pressure Maintain) The electro-hydraulic control unit is activated when the brakes are applied. If the information from the wheel speed sensors indicates excessive wheel deceleration (imminent lockup), the first step in the anti-lock sequence is to isolate the brake pressure being applied by the brake pedal.
C05RW011

Pressure Reduction Once the brake pressure is isolated, it must be reduced to allow the wheels to unlock. This is accomplished by dumping a portion of the brake fluid pressure into a low pressure accumulator. The microprocessor activates the normally closed dump valve to open, allowing fluid from the wheels to be dumped into the accumulator. This is done with very short activation pulses opening and closing the dump
5A7
valve passageway. Brake pressure is reduced at the wheel and allows the wheel to begin rotating again. The fluid from the brake piston is stored in the accumulator against spring pressure and a portion of this fluid also primes the pump. The dump valves are operated independently to control the deceleration of the wheel.
C05RW009
5A8

driver may feel slight pedal pulsations, or pedal drop, this is normal and expected. As fluid is re-applied to the brakes, the wheel speed will reduce. If the wheels approach imminent lockup again, the module will isolate, dump and re-apply again. This cycle occurs in millisecond intervals, allowing several cycles to occur each second. It is a much faster and more controlled way ofpumping the pedal.
Pressure Increase (Re-apply) The re-apply sequence is initiated to achieve optimum braking. The isolation valve is momentarily opened to allow master cylinder and pump pressure to reach the brakes. This controlled pressure rise continues until the wheel is at optimum brake output or until the brake pressure is brought up to the master cylinder output pressure. If more pressure is required, more fluid is drawn from the master cylinder and applied to the brakes. The
C05RW014

Brake Release At the end of the anti-lock stop, when the brake pedal is released, the pump will remain running for a short time to help drain any fluid from the accumulators. As this fluid returns into the system, the spring forces the piston
5A9
back to its original position. The isolation valve opens and fluid may return to the master cylinder. Conventional braking is then resumed.
C05RW013
5A10

seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. If the ABS light stays ON after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or comes ONand stays ON while driving, the Anti-lock Brake System should be inspected for a malfunction according to the diagnosis procedure.
System Components
Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit (EHCU), three Wheel Speed Sensors, Warning Light, and G-sensor.
Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit (EHCU)

The EHCU consists of ABS control circuits, fault detector, and a fail-safe. The signal received from each sensor activates the hydraulic unit accordingly and cancels the ABS to return to normal braking if a malfunction occurs in the ABS system. The EHCU has a self-diagnosing function which can indicate faulty circuits during diagnosis. The EHCU is mounted on the engine compartment rear right side. It consists of a Motor, Plunger Pump, Solenoid Valves. Solenoid Valves: Reduces or holds the caliper fluid pressure for each front disc brake or both rear disc brakes according to the signal sent from the EHCU. Reservoir: Temporarily holds the brake fluid that returns from the front and rear disc brake caliper so that pressure of front disc brake caliper can be reduced smoothly. Plunger Pump: Feeds the brake fluid held in the reservoir to the master cylinder. Motor: Drives the pump according to the signal from EHCU. Check Valve: Controls the brake fluid flow.
Wheel Speed Sensor

It consists of a sensor and a rotor. The sensor is attached to the knuckle on the front wheels and to the rear axle case on the rear differential. The front sensor rotor is attached to the each brake rotor by bolts. The rear rotor is press-fit in the differential case. The magnetic flux generated from electrodes magnetized by a magnet in the sensor varies due to rotation of the rotor, and the electromagnetic induction generates alternating voltage in the coil. This voltage draws a sine curve with the frequency proportional to rotor speed and it allows detection of wheel speed.
G-Sensor
The G-sensor installed inside the EHCU detects the vehicle deceleration speed and sends a signal to the EHCU. In 4WD operation, all four wheels may be decelerated in almost the same phase, since all wheels are connected mechanically. This tendency is noticeable particularly on roads with low friction coefficient, and the ABS control is adversely affected. The G-sensor judges whether the friction coefficient of road surface is low or high, and changes the EHCU's operating system to ensure ABS control.
ABS Warning Light
Normal and Anti-lock Braking

Under normal driving conditions, the Anti-lock Brake System functions the same as a standard power assisted brake system. However, with the detection of wheel lock-up, a slight bump or kick-back will be felt in the brake pedal. This pedal bump will be followed by a series of short pedal pulsations which occurs in rapid succession. The brake pedal pulsation will continue until there is no longer a need for the anti-lock function or until the vehicle is stopped. A slight ticking or popping noise may be heard during brake applications when the Anti-lock features is being used. When the Anti-lock feature is being used, the brake pedal may rise even as the brakes are being applied. This is also normal. Maintaining a constant force on the pedal will provide the shortest stopping distance.
821RW093
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-lock Brake System have an amber ABS warning light in the instrument panel. The ABS warning light will illuminate if a malfunction in the Anti-lock Brake System is detected by the Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit (EHCU). In case of an electronic malfunction, the EHCU will turn ON the ABS warning light and disable the Anti-lock braking function. The ABS light will turn ON for approximately three
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Brake Pedal Travel

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-lock Brake System may be stopped by applying normal force to the brake pedal. Although there is no need to push the pedal beyond the point where it stops or holds the vehicle, by applying more force the pedal will continue to travel toward the floor. This extra brake pedal travel is normal.
5A11
General Diagnosis
General Information
ABS troubles can be classified into two types, those which can be detected by the ABS warning light and those which can be detected as a vehicle abnormality by the driver. In either case, locate the fault in accordance with the Basic Diagnostic Flowchart and repair. Please refer to Section 5C for the diagnosis of mechanical troubles such as brake noise, brake judder (brake pedal or vehicle vibration felt when braking), uneven braking, and parking brake trouble.
Acronyms and Abbreviations

Several acronyms and abbreviations are commonly used throughout this section: ABS Anti-lock Brake System CIM Coil Integrated Module CKT Circuit DLC Data Link Connector EHCU Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit FL Front Left FR Front Right GEN Generator H/U Hydraulic Unit MV Millivolts RR Rear RPS Revolution per Second VDC DC Volts VAC AC Volts W/L Warning Light WSS Wheel Speed Sensor
ABS Service Precautions

Required Tools and Items: Box Wrench Brake Fluid Special Tool Some diagnosis procedures in this section require the installation of a special tool. J-39200 High Impedance Multimeter When circuit measurements are requested, use a circuit tester with high impedance.
Computer System Service Precautions

The Anti-lock Brake System interfaces directly with the Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit (EHCU) which is a control computer that is similar in some regards to the Powertrain Control Module. These modules are designed to withstand normal current draws associated with vehicle operation. However, care must be taken to avoid overloading any of the EHCU circuits. In testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the circuits unless instructed to do so by the appropriate diagnostic procedure. These circuits should only be tested with a high impedance multimeter (J-39200) or special tools as described in this section. Power should never be removed or applied to any control module with the ignition in the ON position. Before removing or connecting battery cables, fuses or connectors, always turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5A12

NOTE: The DTC cannot be cleared if the vehicle speed does not exceed 12 km/h (8 mph) at DTC, even though the repair operation is completed. 2. Start the vehicle and accelerate to about 30 km/h (19 mph) or more. 3. Slowly brake and stop the vehicle completely. 4. Then restart the vehicle and accelerate to about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more. 5. Brake at a time so as to actuate the ABS and stop the vehicle. 6. Be cautious of abnormality during the test. If the W/ L is actuated while driving, read the DTC and locate the fault. 7. If the abnormality is not reproduced by the test, make best efforts to reproduce the situation reported by the customer. 8. If the abnormality has been detected, repair in accordance with the Symptom Diagnostic . NOTE: Be sure to give a test drive on a wide, even road with a small traffic. If an abnormality is detected, be sure to suspend the test and start trouble diagnosis at once.
General Service Precautions

The following are general precautions which should be observed when servicing and diagnosing the Anti-lock Brake System and/or other vehicle systems. Failure to observe these precautions may result in Anti-lock Brake System damage. If welding work is to be performed on the vehicle using an electric arc welder, the EHCU and valve block connectors should be disconnected before the welding operation begins. The EHCU and valve block connectors should never be connected or disconnected with the ignition ON . If only the rear wheels are rotated using jacks or drum tester, the system will diagnose a speed sensor malfunction and the ABS warning light will illuminate. But actually no trouble exists. After inspection stop the engine once and re-start it, then make sure that the ABS warning light does not illuminate. If the battery has been discharged The engine may stall if the battery has been completely discharged and the engine is started via jumper cables. This is because the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) requires a large quantity of electricity. In this case, wait until the battery is recharged, or set the ABS to a non-operative state by removing the fuse for the ABS (50A). After the battery has been recharged, stop the engine and install the ABS fuse. Start the engine again, and confirm that the ABS warning light does not light.
ABS Warning Light

When ABS trouble occurs to actuate ABS warning light, the trouble code corresponding to the trouble is stored in the EHCU. Only ordinary brake is available with ABS being unactuated. Even when ABS warning light is actuated, if the starter switch is set ON after setting it OFF once, the EHCU checks up on the entire system and, if there is no abnormality, judges ABS to work currently and the warning light is lit normally even though the trouble code is stored. NOTE: Illumination of the ABS warning light indicates that anti-lock braking is no longer available. Power assisted braking without anti-lock control is still available.
Note on Intermittents
As with virtually any electronic system, it is difficult to identify an intermittent failure. In such a case duplicating the system malfunction during a test drive or a good description of vehicle behavior from the customer may be helpful in locating a most likely failed component or circuit. The symptom diagnosis chart may also be useful in isolating the failure. Most intermittent problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. When an intermittent failure is encountered, check suspected circuits for damage: Suspected harness damage. Poor mating of connector halves or terminals not fully seated in the connector body (backed out). Improperly formed or damaged terminals.
Normal Operation
ABS Warning Light When the ignition is first moved from OFF to RUN , the amber ABS warning light will turn ON . The ABS warning light will turn ON during engine starting and will usually stay ON for approximately three seconds after the ignition switch is returned to the ON position. The warning light should remain OFF at all other times.
Test Driving ABS Complaint Vehicles

In case of an intermittent ABS lamp illumination, see Diagnosis by ABS Warning Light illumination Pattern or go to 5A-37. In some cases, the vehicle may need to be test driven by following the test procedure below. 1. Start the engine and make sure that the ABS W/L goes OFF. If the W/L remains ON, it means that the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is stored. Therefore, read the code and locate the fault.
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Tech 2 Scan Tool

From 98 MY, Isuzu dealer service departments are recommended to use Tech 2. Please refer to Tech 2 scan tool user guide.
5A13
901RW257
Legend (1) PCMCIA Card (2) SAE 16/19 Adaptor EndOFCallout
(3) DLC Cable (4) Tech2
5A14

Operating Procedure The power up screen is displayed when you power up the tester with the Isuzu systems PCMCIA card. Follow the operating procedure below.
Getting Started Before operating the Isuzu PCMCIA card with the Tech 2, the following steps must be performed: 1. The Isuzu 98 System PCMCIA card (1) inserts into the Tech 2 (4). 2. Connect the SAE 16/19 adapter (2) to the DLC cable (3). 3. Connect the DLC cable to the Tech 2 (4). 4. Make sure the vehicle ignition is off. 5. Connect the Tech 2 SAE 16/19 adapter to the vehicle DLC.
740RW060
6. The vehicle ignition turns on. 7. Power up the Tech 2. 8. Verify the Tech 2 power up display.
060R200191
060RW009
5A15
060R200192
5A16
DATA LIST
The data displayed by DATA LIST are as follows: Display Front Left Wheel Speed Front Right Wheel Speed Rear Wheel Speeds Warning Lamp ABS State ABS Relay 4 Wheel Drive Brake Switch Brake Fluid Level Return Pump DRP (Dynamic Rear Proportioning) Rear Dump Valve Commanded Rear Dump Valve Feedback Rear Isolation Valve Commanded Rear Isolation Valve Feedback FL Dump Valve Commanded FL Dump Valve Feedback FL Isolation Valve Commanded FL Isolation Valve Feedback FR Dump Valve Commanded FR Dump Valve Feedback FR Isolation Valve Commanded FR Isolation Valve Feedback GSensor Battery Voltage Voltage Voltage 0.00V when vehicle is stopped Between 1016.9V Active/Inactive To be Inactive usually Active/Inactive To be Inactive usually Content km/h (MPH) OK/NG Criteria for Data Start the vehicle and make sure of linear change in each wheel speed. Turn each wheel by hand and make sure that each speed data change. ON/OFF ON/OFF Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Normal or not Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Active/Inactive To be OFF usually To be OFF usually To be Active usually 2WD: Inactive 4WD: Active Inactive (Released) Active (Pressed) To be Normal usually To be Inactive usually To be Inactive usually To be Inactive usually
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM ACTUATOR TEST

This mode is used to exercise the ABS actuators and make sure they operate normally. Prior to the test, pay attention to the cautions below. (When checking the solenoid valve system, be sure to jack up the vehicle.) CAUTION: Before testing, be sure that the brakes work normally. Make sure that the battery is fully charged. Conduct the test by two persons (A TECH 2 operator and a vehicle checker).
5A17
Be sure to start ACTUATOR TEST with the engine stopped. Before testing, make sure that electrical trouble, if any, has been completely repaired. Conducting tests of ABS solenoid with electrical circuit problem remaining uncorrected could damage the control unit.
F05R200007
5A18
F05R200008
5A19
F05R200009
5A20
F05R200010
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Tech 2 Service Bleed
5A21
F05R200011
5A22
F05R200012
Basic Diagnostic Flow Chart

Step 1 2. Questioning to customer. 3. Basic inspection (Refer to Basic inspection procedure) Using TECH 2? 2 Verify DTC through: F0: Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Is the DTC stored in the EHCU? Go to Step 2 Clear code and check for repeatability. Go to Step 3 3 1. Repair of faulty part. 2. Clear DTC. 3. Inspection of ABS W/L Illumination pattern with ignition SW ON. 4. Test drive. Does trouble repeat? 4 Verify DTC through: F0: Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Is the DTC stored in the EHCU? Repeat the diagnosis it the symptom or DTC appears again Go to Step 1 Clear code and check for repeatability Go to Step 3 5 1. Reconnect all components. Ensure that all component are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble code. Was this step finished? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Action 1. Verify complaint with the customer. Yes No
Go to Step 5 Trouble diagnosis based on symptom (Refer to Symptom Diagnosis) Go to Step 3
Finished
Go to Step 5
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Basic Inspection Procedure

1. Basic Inspection of Service Brake Step 1 Is the fluid level normal? Go to Step 2 2 3 4 5 Does fluid leak? Is the booster functioning properly? Go to Step 4 Is the pad and rotor within specs? Go to Step 5 Reconnect all components. Ensure all component are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Repair Go to Step 3 Action Yes No
5A23
Replenish with fluid Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 Repair Go to Step 4 Repair Go to Step 5
Finished
Go to Step 5
2. Ground Inspection Step 1 2 Action Is there good contact with the ABS ground points? Go to Step 2 Reconnect all components. Ensure that all component are properly mounted. Finished Go to Step 2 Yes No Repair Go to Step 2
5A24
EHCU Connector Pin-out Checks

Disconnect Electronic Hydraulic Control Module. Perform checks with high impedance multimeter J-39200 or equivalent. No. Circuit to be Tested Ignition Switch Position OFF OFF ON 3 4 Stoplight switch Ground connection OFF OFF OFF 5 FL speed sensor OFF digital
Multimeter Scale/Range 20DCV 20DCV 20DCV 20DCV 2009 19 2k9
Measure between Pin Number 1 (C5) 2 (C5) 1 (C4) 7 (C4) 1 (C4) 7 (C4) 13 (C4) 7 (C4) 7 (C4) Ground 2 (C5) Ground 2 (C4) 10 (C4)
Nominal Value
Note
1 2
Power supply Ignition enable
11.5V to 14.5V 0V to 0.1V 11.5V to 14.5V 10.5V to 14.5V Less than 29 Less than 0.29 2.0k9 to 2.8k9 (2WD model) 0.7k9 to 1.5k9 (4WD model) more than 100k9 more than 200mV 2.0k9 to 2.8k9 (2WD model) 0.7k9 to 1.5k9 (4WD model) more than 100k9 more than 200mV 1.0k9 to 1.7k9 more than 100k9 more than 200mV Internal Resistance Press brake pedal
OFF OFF 6 FR speed sensor OFF
200k9 200mACV 2k9
2 (C4) 7 (C4) 2 (C4) 10 (C4) 3 (C4) 11 (C4)
Insulation Resistance Turn wheel at 1RPS Internal Resistance
OFF OFF 7 RR speed sensor OFF OFF OFF
200k9 200mACV 2k9 200k9 200mACV
3 (C4) 7 (C4) 3 (C4) 11 (C4) 4 (C4) 12 (C4) 4 (C4) 7 (C4) 4 (C4) 12 (C4)
Insulation Resistance Turn wheel at 1RPS Internal Resistance Insulation Resistance Turn wheel at 1RPS
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Circuit Diagram
5A25
D05R200005
5A26
D05R100002
5A27
D05R200006
5A28
Connector List
No. B-19 Connector face No. H-5 Connector face
B-23
H-12 H-15 H-25
C-4
H-14
C-5
H-25 (Intelli gent Sus)
C-6
H-25
C-13 C-33
H-26
C-16 C-36 E-28 E-30
H-32
C-34
I-1
F-4
I-2

No. I-18 Connector face
5A29
X-15
5A30
Part Location
D08RX107
Legend (1) Battery (2) Fuse & Relay Box (3) C36 (4) C5 (5) C4 (6) H12, 14 (7) I 18 (8) Starter Switch (9) I 1 (10) C34 (11) F4 EndOFCallout
(12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21)
H26 H25 H15 C16 C13 H5 B19 E30 (6VD1) E28 (Y22SE) C33
5A31
Symptom Diagnosis
The symptoms that cannot be indicated by warning light can be divided in the following five categories: 1. ABS works decelerate. frequently but vehicle does not
4. Brake pedal feel is abnormal. 5. Braking sound (from EHCU) is heard while not braking. These are all attributed to problems which cannot be detected by EHCU self-diagnosis. Use the customer complaint and test to determine which symptom is present. Then follow the appropriate flow chart listed below. Diagnostic Flow Charts Without TECH 2 Chart A-1 Chart A-2 Chart A-3 Chart A-4 Chart A-5 With TECH 2 Chart TA-1 Chart TA-2 Chart TA-3 Chart TA-5
2. Uneven braking occurs while ABS works. 3. The wheels lock during braking.
No. 1 2 3 4 5
Symptom ABS works frequently but vehicle does not decelerate. Uneven braking occurs while ABS works. The wheels are locked. Brake pedal feel is abnormal. Braking sound (from EHCU) is heard while not braking.
Chart A-1 ABS Works Frequently But Vehicle Does Not Decelerate
Step 1 Action Is braking force distribution normal between front and rear of vehicle? Go to Step 2 2 Are axle parts installed normally? Go to Step 3 3 Is there play in each or any wheel speed sensor? Repair wheel speed sensor. Go to Step 7 Replace or repair sensor or sensor ring. Go to Step 7 Yes No Repair brake parts. Go to Step 7 Repair axle parts. Go to Step 7
Go to Step 4
Is there damage, or powdered iron sticking to each or any wheel speed sensor/sensor ring?
Go to Step 5 Replace wheel speed sensor or repair harness. Go to Step 7 Replace controller or repair harness. Go to Step 7
Is the output of each wheel speed sensor normal? (Refer to chart C-1 or TC-1) Go to Step 6
Is the input of 4WD controller normal?
Go to Step 7 7 Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart
Go to Step 7
5A32
Chart TA-1 ABS Works Frequently But Vehicle Does Not Decelerate (Use TECH 2)
Step 1 1. Connect TECH 2. 2. Make sure of the output conditions of each sensor. Is the output of each sensor normal? 2 3 Return to Chart A-1. Was the Chart A-1 finished? Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Action Yes No Replace wheel speed sensor. Go to Step 3 Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
Chart A-2 Uneven Braking Occurs While ABS Works

Step 1 2 3 Action Is there play in each or any sensor? Damage or powdered iron sticking to each or any sensor/sensor ring? Is the output of each sensor normal? (Refer to chart C-1 or TC-1) Yes Repair. Go to Step 5 Repair. Go to Step 5 No Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 Replace sensor or repair harness. Go to Step 5 Reconnect brake pipe correctly. Go to Step 5
Go to Step 4 4 Is brake pipe connecting order correct? Replace H/U. Go to Step 5 5 Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart
Go to Step 5
Chart TA-2 Uneven Braking Occurs While ABS Works (Use TECH 2)
Step 1 1. Connect TECH 2. 2. Make sure of the output conditions of each sensor. Is the output of each sensor normal? 2 3 Check piping by TECH 2 ACTUATOR TEST Is the piping normal? Repair and check the wheel speed sensor (Refer to chart B-20 to B-23 , C-1 or TC-1). Was the each chart finished? Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Go to Step 2 Replace EHCU. Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Repair the pipe. Go to Step 4 Action Yes No
Go to Step 4 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Chart A-3, TA-3 The Wheels Are Locked
Step 1 2 3 Is ABS working? Is vehicle speed under 10 km/h (6mph)? Is sensor output normal? (Chart C-1 or TC-1) Action Yes Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 No
5A33
Go to Step 4 Normal. Replace sensor or repair harness. Go to Step 6 Replace 4WD controller or repair harness. Go to Step 6 Repair. Go to Step 6
Go to Step 4 4 Is front 4WD controller normal?
Go to Step 5 5 6 Is hydraulic unit grounded properly? Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Replace EHCU. Go to Step 6 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart
Go to Step 6
Chart A-4 Brake Pedal Feed Is Abnormal

Step 1 2 Action Is the stop light actuated when the brake pedal is depressed? 1. Turn the ignition switch off. 2. Disconnected EHCU connector. Is the check voltage EHCU connector terminals 13 to 7 when brake pedal is depressed than battery voltage? 3 Is stop light fuse normal? Go to Step 5 4 Is the check continuity between EHCU connector terminals, 7 to body grounded? Go to Step 6 5 Is brake SW normal? Repair stop light harness. Go to Step 6 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Yes Go to Step 2 No Go to Step 3 Harness NG between brake SW and EHCU. Go to Step 6 Replace stop light fuse. Go to Step 6 Repair body grounded harness. Go to Step 6 Replace brake SW. Go to Step 6
Go to Step 4
Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished?
Go to Step 6
5A34
Chart A-5, TA-5 Braking Sound (From EHCU) Is Heard While Not Braking
Step 1 Action Is this the first vehicle start after engine start? Yes Normal. (It is self checking sound.) Normal. (It is self checking sound.) No
Go to Step 2
Is vehicle speed under 10 km/h (6 mph)?
Go to Step 3
Check for the following condition: At the time of shift down or clutch operation. At the time of low road friction drive (ice or snow road) or rough road drive. At the time of high-speed turn. At the time of passing curb. At the time of operating electrical equipment switches. At the time of racing the engine (over 5000 rpm). Did it occur under any one condition above? ABS may sometimes be actuated even when brake pedal is not applied. Repair. Go to Step 7 Repair. Go to Step 7 Check harness/ connector for suspected disconnection If no disconnection is found, replace Coil integrated module. Go to Step 7 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart
Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
4 5 6
Is there play in each or any sensor/wheel speed sensor rings? Damage or powdered iron sticking to each or any sensor/wheel speed sensor ring? Is each sensor output normal? (Refer to chart C-1 or TC-1).
Repair. Go to Step 7
Go to Step 7
5A35
Diagnostic Trouble Codes

Choose and trace an appropriate flowchart by the numbers listed below to find fault and repair. Code Flash out 12 13 14 Serial Communications C0285 C0271 C0272 C0270 C0273 C0284 15 17 18 21 22 24 32 35 41 42 43 44 45 46 C0277 C0278 C0269 C0274 C0276 C0281 C0282 C0267 C0268 C0265 C0266 C0245 C0247 C0246 C0248 C0241 C0243 C0242 C0244 C0251 C0253 C0252 C0254 RAM read/write error ROM checksum error ALU function error Inoperative isolation item Loop time overrun Low ignition voltage High ignition voltage Excessive dump time Excessive isolation time G-Sensor Failure Brake switch Failure Open or shorted 4 4 input signal (4WD only) Open motor circuit or shorted ECU output Stalled motor or open ECU output Open relay circuit Shorted relay circuit FL Open isolation solenoid or shorted ECU output FL Shorted isolation solenoid or open ECU output FL Open dump solenoid or shorted ECU output FL Shorted dump solenoid or open ECU output FR Open isolation solenoid or shorted ECU output FR Shorted isolation solenoid or open ECU output FR Open dump solenoid or shorted ECU output FR Shorted dump solenoid or open ECU output Rear Open isolation solenoid or shorted ECU output Rear Shorted isolation solenoid or open ECU output Rear Open dump solenoid or shorted ECU output Rear Shorted dump solenoid or open ECU output Solenoid B-14 B-15 B-16 Wiring Motor Relay Coil Integrated Module Wiring B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-10 B-11 B-12 B-13 Coil Integrated Module B-2 Diagnosis 2 WD Controller in 4WD Vehicle Controller Item Wiring
Chart No. B-8
5A36

Code Diagnosis FL Open or shorted sensor FR Open or shorted sensor Rear Open or shorted sensor FL Missing sensor signal FL Sensor signal dropout FR Missing sensor signal FR Sensor signal dropout Rear Missing sensor signal Rear Sensor signal dropout Simultaneous dropout of front sensor signal Wheel speed error Shorted indicator lamp Vehicle or Sensor Wiring Sensor or Wiring B-21 B-22 B-23 B-24 Item Chart No. B-17 B-18 B-19 B-20
Flash out 51 52 53 61 62 63 64 65
Serial Communications C0225 C0221 C0235 C0226 C0227 C0222 C0223 C0236 C0237 C0229 C0238 C0286
5A37
Diagnosis By ABS Warning Light Illumination Pattern

In the event that there is abnormality in the ABS warning light illumination pattern while the key is in the ON position or if the warning light is actuated while driving, refer to the flow chart below for the correct diagnostic procedure. No. 1 Condition Warning light actuated normally is ABS Warning Light Illumination Pattern Normal Diagnostic
Warning light is not lit
Warning light lighting circuit trouble Go to Chart B-1
Warning light remains ON
Diagnostic trouble codes are stored. Display diagnostic trouble codes and diagnose on a code basis according to the flow charts.
Warning light is actuated while driving
Diagnostic trouble codes are stored. Display diagnostic trouble codes and diagnose on a code basis according to the flow charts.
Warning light goes at 12 km/h (8 mph) or higher (After repairing the faulty part)
Even after repairing the faulty part the warning light (W/L) dose not go out if vehicle is at a stop. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and drive the vehicle at 12 km/h (8 mph) or higher to make sure that the warning light goes out.
5A38

1. How to start DTC display: Confirm that the vehicle has come to a complete stop (with the wheels standing still) and that the brake pedal is not depressed. (Unless these two condition are satisfied, DTC display cannot be started.) With IGN OFF, connect #12 terminal with #4 terminal or # 5 terminal (GND) . Then turn IGN ON.
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

When the warning light in the meter remains ON, the EHCU stores the fault identification and disables the ABS. How to display and erase DTCs: NOTE: DTCs can be displayed also by TECH 2. Use Diagnostic Trouble Codes mode. The DLC is located behind the driver side kick panel
350R100001
Keep #12 terminal connected with #4 terminal or # 5 terminal (GND) during DTC display. (If #12 terminal is separated from #4 terminal or # 5 terminal (GND) during display, display will stop.) 2. DTC display: DTC is displayed by blinking warning light. Double-digit display. First, normal DTC 12 is displayed three times and then any other DTCs are displayed three times. (If no other DTCs have been stored, the display
of DTC 12 will be repeated.) 3. How to erase code: Conduct brake switch ON/OFF operation 6 or more times within 3 seconds of self-diagnosis startup. The code cannot be erased if more than 3 seconds have passed since self-diagnosis startup, or if self-diagnosis has started with brake switched on (brake pedaled).
B05RW005

4. Notes If the following should occur during Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) display, the display will be discontinued. After initial check, the status that is under the control of ABS will be returned : The vehicle starts (The wheels turn) or the brake pedal is depressed. Up to 3 different codes can be stored.
5A39
If the ABS should turn OFF due to an intermittent defect, the system will be restored at the next key cycle, if the initial check finds no abnormality (when IGN is switched from OFF to ON). 5. An example of DTC display
B05R100001
After displaying DTC 12 three times, one DTC after another is displayed, starting with the most recent one. (However, display is discontinued after about 5 minutes.)
B05R100002
The DTC 12 is displayed repeatedly. (display is discontinued after about 5 minutes after)
5A40
Chart B-1 With the key in the ON position (Before starting the engine). Warning light (W/L) is not activated.
Step 1 2 Is W/L fuse disconnected? Is W/L burnt out? Action Yes Replace fuse. Go to Step 5 Replace W/L bulb. Go to Step 5 No Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector (C-4). 3. Turn the key ON. Is the check voltage between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 6 and 7 the battery voltage? Repair harness and connector. Go to Step 5
Go to Step 4 Check harness for suspected disconnection No fault found: Replace EHCU. Go to Step 5 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart
Is there the continuity between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals, 1 and 7 and body ground.
Repair harness and connector. Go to Step 5
Go to Step 5
Chart B-2 CPU Error (DTC 14 (Flash out) / C0271, C0272, C0273, C0284 (Serial communications))
Step 1 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnected coil integrated module connector. 3. Inspect coil integrated module ground. Is there the continuity between the coil integrated module connector terminals, 2 (C-5) and 7 (C-4) and body ground? 2 1. Turn the key off, connect the coil integrated module connector. 2. Erase the trouble code. 3. Turn Ignition off, then on, to perform system self-check. 4. If warning light remains on, display trouble codes once again. Is the trouble code the DTC 14 (Flash out) / C0271, C0272, C0273, C0284 (Serial communications)? 3 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble code. Was this step finished? Inspect in Replace EHCU. accordance with Go to Step 3 the DTC displayed. Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Repair the body ground harness. Go to Step 3 Action Yes No
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
5A41
Chart B-3 Low or High Ignition Voltage (DTC 15 (Flash out) / C0277, 0278 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action Is the battery voltage normal? (Battery capacity check) Go to Step 2 2 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Turn the key on. Is the voltage between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 1 and 7, higher than 10V? Check harness connector for suspected disconnection Fault found: Repair, and perform system self-check No fault found: replace EHCU. Go to Step 3 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Yes No Charge or replace battery. Go to Step 2
Repair harness or connector. Go to Step 3
1. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble code. Was this step finished?
Go to Step 3
Chart B-4 Excessive Dump Time (DTC 17 (Flash out) / C0269 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action Check for anything causing extended ABS activation, such as locked brakes or an erratic speed sensor signal. Was a problem found? 1. The key turned off. 2. Replace EHCU. 3. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Yes No
Repair or Replace
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 2
Chart B-5 Excessive Isolation Time (DTC 18 (Flash out) / C0274 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action Check for anything causing extended ABS activation, such as locked brakes or an erratic speed sensor signal. Was a problem found? 1. The key turned off. 2. Replace EHCU. 3. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Yes No
Repair or Replace
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 2
5A42
Chart B-6 G-Sensor Output Failure (DTC 21 (Flash out) / C0276 (Serial communications))
Step 1 1. Turn the key off. 2. Replace EHCU. 3. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Action Yes No
Go to Step 1
Chart B-7 Brake Switch Failure (DTC 22 (Flash out) / C0281 (Serial communications))
Step 1 2 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnected coil integrated module connector. Is the check voltage between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 13 to 7 when brake pedal is depressed the battery voltage? Go to Step 3 3 Is the check that pins C-5 connector 2, and C-4 connector 7 have good ground? Check harness / connector for disconnection Fault found: Repair, and perform system self-check. No fault found: replace EHCU. Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 5 Is brake SW normal? Abnormal harness in stop light circuit. Repair the harness. Go to Step 6 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Action Is the stop light actuated when the brake pedal is depressed? Yes Go to Step 2 No Go to Step 4 Harness between brake SW and coil integrated module is faulty. Go to Step 6
Repair. Go to Step 6 Replace. Go to Step 6
Is stop light fuse normal?
Replace. Go to Step 6
Go to Step 6
5A43
Chart B-8 2WD Controller in 4WD Vehicle Controller (DTC 13 (Flash out) / C0285 (Serial communications)), 4WD State Input Signal Failure (DTC 24 (Flash out) / C0282 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action Remove coil integrated module connector. Is the coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminal 8 line normally? Is the 4WD controller normally? Replace EHCU. Go to Step 3 3 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble code. Was this step finished? Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Yes No Repair. Go to Step 3 Replace 4WD controller. Go to Step 3
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
Chart B-9 Pump Motor Failure (DTC 32 (Flash out) / C0267, C0268 (Serial communications))
Step 1 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Measure the voltage between terminal 1 of the coil integrated module connector (C-5) and body ground. Is the voltage equal to the battery voltage? Action Yes No Repair fuse/ harness between battery and coil integrated module connector (C-5) terminal 1. Go to Step 5 Connect to the connector. Go to Step 3 Replace EHCU. Go to Step 5 Replace EHCU. Go to Step 5
Go to Step 2 2 Is the harness from the hydraulic unit connected to the coil integrated module connector? Go to Step 3 3 4 5 Is the hydraulic unit harness in good condition? Go to Step 4 Is the resistance of hydraulic unit connector terminals 1 and 2 between 0.2 and 1.0 ohms? 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble code. Was this step finished? Replace EHCU. Go to Step 5 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart
Go to Step 5
5A44
Chart B-10 EHCU Valve Relay Failure (DTC 35 (Flash out) / C0265, C0266 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Measure the voltage between terminal 1 of the coil integrated module connector (C-5) and body ground. Is the voltage equal to the battery voltage? Replace EHCU. Go to Step 2 2 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble code. Was this step finished? Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Yes No Repair fuse and harness between coil integrated module connector (C-5) terminal 1 and battery. Go to Step 2
Go to Step 2
Chart B-11 FL Isolation Solenoid Coil Failure (DTC 41 (Flash out) / C0245, C0247 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action Was the EHCU Connector Pinout Checks performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. Turn the key switch to off. 2. Disconnect the 2way EHCU connector (C5) from the EHCU. 3. Inspect the connector for damage or corrosion. Is the connector free from damage or corrosion? 3 1. Replace the Coil Integrated Module. 2. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Go to Step 3 Yes No Go to EHCU Connector Pinout Checks. Repair the connector. Repeat the Basic Diagnostic Flow Chart.
Go to Step 3
Chart B-12 FL Dump Solenoid Coil Failure (DTC 42 (Flash out) / C0246, C0248 (Serial communications))
Go to Step 3
5A45
Chart B-13 FR Isolation Solenoid Coil Failure (DTC 43 (Flash out) / C0241, C0243 (Serial communications))
Go to Step 3
Chart B-14 FR Dump Solenoid Coil Failure (DTC 44(Flash out) / C0242, C0244 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action Was the EHCU Connector Pinout Checks performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. Turn the key switch to off. 2. Disconnect the 2way EHCU connector (C5) from the EHCU. 3. Inspect the connector for damage or corrosion. Is the connector free from damage or corrosion? 3 1. Replace the Coil Integrated Module. 2. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Go to Step 3 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Yes No Go to EHCU Connector Pinout Checks. Repair the connector. Repeat the Basic Diagnostic Flow Chart.
Go to Step 3
Chart B-15 Rear Isolation Solenoid Coil Failure (DTC 45 (Flash out) / C0251, C0253 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action Was the EHCU Connector Pinout Checks performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. Turn the key switch to off. 2. Disconnect the 2way EHCU connector (C5) from the EHCU. 3. Inspect the connector for damage or corrosion. Is the connector free from damage or corrosion? 3 1. Replace the Coil Integrated Module. 2. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Go to Step 3 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart Yes No Go to EHCU Connector Pinout Checks. Repair the connector. Repeat the Basic Diagnostic Flow Chart.
Go to Step 3
5A46
Chart B-16 Rear Dump Solenoid Coil Failure (DTC 46 (Flash out) / C0252, C0254 (Serial communications))
Go to Step 3
Chart B-17 FL Speed Sensor Open or Shorted (DTC 51 (Flash out) / C0225 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Measure the resistance between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 2 and 10. Is the resistance between 2.0k and 2.8k ohms?(2WD model) Is the resistance between 0.7k and 1.5k ohms?(4WD model) Yes Check for faults in harness between speed sensor and coil integrated module. Fault found: Repair, and perform system self-check. No fault found: Replace coil integrated module. Go to Step 3 Repair harness abnormality between sensors and coil integrated module. Go to Step 3 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart No
Go to Step 2
Measure the FL speed sensor resistance at the sensor connector. Is the resistance between 2.0k and 2.8k ohms?(2WD model) Is the resistance between 0.7k and 1.5k ohms?(4WD model)
Replace sensor. Go to Step 3
Go to Step 3
5A47
Chart B-18 FR Speed Sensor Open or Shorted (DTC 52 (Flash out) / C0221 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Measure the resistance between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 3 and 11. Is the resistance between 2.0k and 2.8k ohms?(2WD model) Is the resistance between 0.7k and 1.5k ohms?(4WD model) Yes Check for faults in harness between speed sensor and coil integrated module. Fault found: Repair, and perform system self-check. No fault found: Replace coil integrated module. Go to Step 3 Repair harness abnormality between sensors and coil integrated module. Go to Step 3 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart No
Go to Step 2
Measure the FR speed sensor resistance at the sensor connector. Is the resistance between 2.0k and 2.8k ohms?(2WD model) Is the resistance between 0.7k and 1.5k ohms?(4WD model)
Go to Step 3
5A48
Chart B-19 Rear Speed Sensor Open or Shorted (DTC 53 (Flash out) / C0235 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Measure the resistance between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 4 and 12. Is the resistance between 1.0k and 1.7k ohms? Yes Check for faults in harness between speed sensor and coil integrated module. Fault found: Repair, and perform system self-check. No fault found: Replace EHCU. Go to Step 3 Repair harness abnormality between sensors and coil integrated module. Go to Step 3 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart No
Go to Step 2
Measure the Rear speed sensor resistance at the sensor connector. Is the resistance between 1.0k and 1.7k ohms?
Go to Step 3
5A49
Chart B-20 FL Speed Sensor Missing Signal (DTC 61 (Flash out) / C0226, C0227 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Measure the FL speed sensor resistance between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 2 and 10. Is the resistance between 2.0k and 2.8k ohms? (2WD model) Is the resistance between 0.7k and 1.5k ohms? (4WD model) 2 3 Is there play sensor/sensor rotor? Measure the FL speed sensor resistance at the sensor connector. Is the resistance between 2.0k and 2.8k ohms? (2WD model) Is the resistance between 0.7k and 1.5k ohms? (4WD model) Yes No
Go to Step 2 Repair. Go to Step 6 Repair harness abnormality between sensors and coil integrated module. Go to Step 6 Repair. Go to Step 6 Check for faults in harness between speed sensor and coil integrated module. Fault found: repair, and perform system self-check. No fault found: replace EHCU. Go to Step 6 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart
Replace sensor. Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
4 5
Damage and powdered iron sticking to sensor/sensor ring? Is sensor output normal? (Chart C-1-1 or TC-1)
Go to Step 6
NOTE: Even after repairing the faulty part the warning light (W/L) does not go out if the vehicle is at a stop. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and drive the vehicle at 12 km/h (8 mph) or higher to make sure that the warning light goes out.
5A50
Chart B-21 FR Speed Sensor Missing Signal (DTC 62 (Flash out) / C0222, C0223 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Measure the FR speed sensor resistance between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 3 and 11. Is the resistance between 2.0k and 2.8k ohms? (2WD model) Is the resistance between 0.7k and 1.5k ohms? (4WD model) 2 3 Is there play sensor/sensor rotor? Measure the FR speed sensor resistance at the sensor connector. Is the resistance between 2.0k and 2.8k ohms? (2WD model) Is the resistance between 0.7k and 1.5k ohms? (4WD model) Yes No
4 5
Damage and powered iron sticking to sensor/sensor ring? Is sensor output normal? (Chart C-1-2 or TC-1)
Go to Step 6
5A51
Chart B-22 Rear Speed Sensor Missing Signal (DTC 63 (Flash out) / C0236, C0237 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Measure the Rear speed sensor resistance between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 4 and 12. Is the resistance between 1.0k and 1.7k ohms? 2 3 Is there play sensor/sensor rotor? Measure the rear speed sensor resistance at the sensor connector. Is the resistance between 1.0k and 1.7k ohms? Yes No
4 5
Damage and powered iron sticking to sensor/sensor ring? Is sensor output normal? (Chart C-1-3 or TC-1)
Go to Step 6
5A52
Chart B-23 Simultaneous Drop-out of Front Speed Sensor Signal (DTC 64 (Flash out) / C0229 (Serial communications))
Step 1 Action 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Measure the FL speed sensor resistance between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 2 and 10. Is the resistance between 2.0k and 2.8k ohms? (2WD model) Is the resistance between 0.7k and 1.5k ohms? (4WD model) 2 Measure the FR speed sensor resistance between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 3 and 11. Is the resistance between 2.0k and 2.8k ohms? (2WD model) Is the resistance between 0.7k and 1.5k ohms? (4WD model) Measure the FL speed sensor resistance at the sensor connector. Is the resistance between 2.0k and 2.8k ohms? (2WD model) Is the resistance between 0.7k and 1.5k ohms? (4WD model) Yes No
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5 Repair harness abnormality between sensors and coil integrated module. Go to Step 2 Repair harness abnormality between sensors and coil integrated module. Go to Step 5 Repair. Go to Step 6 Repair. Go to Step 7 Check for faults in harness between speed sensor and coil integrated module. Fault found: repair, and perform system self-check. No fault found: replace EHCU. Go to Step 8 Repeat Basic diagnostic flow chart
Go to Step 4
Measure the FR speed sensor resistance at the sensor connector. Is the resistance between 2.0k and 2.8k ohms? (2WD model) Is the resistance between 0.7k and 1.5k ohms? (4WD model)
Replace sensor. Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7
5 6 7
Damage and powered iron sticking to sensor/sensor ring? Is there play sensor/sensor rotor? Is sensor output normal? (Chart C-1-1&C-1-2 or TC-1)
Go to Step 8
5A53
Chart B-24 Wheel Speed Input Abnormality (DTC 65 (Flash out) / C0238 (Serial communications))
Step 1 2 Using TECH 2? 1. Connect TECH 2. 2. Select Snap shot manual trigger. 3. With wheel speed data displayed, run the vehicle when speed has arrived at 30 km/h (18 mph). 4. Check speed data on each wheel (refer to the criterion given below). * 1 Is the abnormal sensor condition found? 3 4 5 Is there play in sensor/sensor ring? Is there powdered iron sticking to sensor/sensor ring? Is there a broken tooth or indentation in sensor ring? Replace. Go to Step 8 Repair. Go to Step 8 Repair. Go to Step 8 Replace sensor ring. Go to Step 8 Adjust or repair. Go to Step 8 Action Yes Go to Step 2 No Go to Step 3 Go to Step 3 All the sensors should follow the following flowchart (without using TECH 2). Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Repair, and perform system self-check. Go to Step 8
6 7
Is there play in wheel bearing? Is the check wiring between sensor and coil integrated module normal?
Replace EHCU. Go to Step 8 8 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble code. Was this step finished? Repeat Basic diagnostic flow chart"
Go to Step 8
Sensor Signal Abnormality Criteria using TECH 2 1. While driving, the speed of one or two wheels is 25% or more higher or lower than that of the other wheels. 2. The speed of one or two wheels is 10 km/h (6 mph) or more higher or lower than that of the other wheels. 3. During steady driving, wheel speed changes abruptly. *1 The vehicle must run on a level paved road. NOTE: Even after repairing the faulty part the warning light (W/L) does not go out if the vehicle is at a stop. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and drive the vehicle at 12 km/h (8 mph) or higher to make sure that the warning light goes out. It is important to verify that the correct tires are installed on vehicle.
5A54
Unit Inspection Procedure

This section describes the following inspection procedures referred to during Symptom Diagnosis and Diagnosis by 'ABS' Warnig Light Illumination Pattern : without TECH 2 Sensor Output Inspection Chart C-1-1 to C-1-3 with TECH 2 Chart TC-1
Chart C-1-1 FL Sensor Output Inspection Procedure

Step 1 Action 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Jack up the vehicle with all four wheels off the ground. Measure the AC voltage between coil integrated module connector terminals while turning FL wheel at a speed of 1 RPS: Is the voltage between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 2 and 10 less than 200 mV? 2 1. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor. 2. Measure resistance between the wheel speed sensor connector terminals 1 and 2. Is the check between connector (C-13) terminals 1 and 2 within 2.0k - 2.8k ohms? (2WD model) or 0.7k - 1.5k ohms? (4WD model) Yes No
Go to Step 2 Connector is faulty, or open or short circuit of harness between wheel speed sensor connector and coil integrated module. Inspect and correct the connector or harness. Go to Step 3 Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart
OK. Go to Step 3
Wheel speed sensor is faulty. Replace the wheel speed sensor. Go to Step 3
Go to Step 3
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Chart C-1-2 FR Sensor Output Inspection Procedure

Step 1 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Jack up the vehicle with all four wheels off the ground. Measure the AC voltage between coil integrated module connector terminals while turning FR wheel at a speed of 1 RPS: Is the voltage between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 3 and 11 less than 200 mV? 2 1. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor. 2. Measure resistance between the wheel speed sensor connector terminals 1 and 2. Is the check between connector (C-33) terminals 1 and 2 within 2.0k - 2.8k ohms? (2WD model) or 0.7k - 1.5k ohms? Action Yes No
5A55
OK. Go to Step 3
Go to Step 3
Chart C-1-3 Rear Sensor Output Inspection Procedure

Step 1 Action 1. Turn the key off. 2. Disconnect coil integrated module connector. 3. Jack up the vehicle with all four wheels off the ground measure the AC voltage between coil integrated module connector terminals while turning Rear wheel at a speed of 1 RPS: Is the check between coil integrated module connector (C-4) terminals 4 and 12 than under 200 mV? 2 1. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor. 2. Measure resistance between the wheel speed sensor connector terminals 1 and 2. Is the check between connector (F-4) terminals 1 and 2 within 1.0k - 1.7k ohms? Yes No
OK. Go to Step 3
Go to Step 3
5A56
Chart TC-1 Sensor Output Inspection Procedure

Step 1 1. Connect TECH 2. 2. Check the wheel speed of each sensor by Data List. Is the vehicle speed normal? 2 Check the sensor harness for suspected disconnection (check while shaking harness/connector). Is the sensor harness connection normal? Check the wheel speed of each sensor by Data List. Is the vehicle speed normal? Check the sensor rotor. Is the sensor rotor normal? Check the harness between coil integrated module and speed sensor. Is the harness connection normal? Go to Step 6 Replace speed sensor. Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6 Replace speed sensor. Go to Step 5 Go to Step 2 Repair. Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4 Replace sensor rotor. Go to Step 5 Repair harness or connector between coil integrated module and speed sensor. Go to Step 6 Action Yes No
3 4
Go to Step 6 6 Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Repeat the Basic diagnostic flow chart
Go to Step 6
5A57
Special Tools
J35616 Connector test adapter kit
J39200 High impedance multimeter
7000086ISU Tech 2 Set (1) PCMCIA Card (2) SAE 16/19 Adapter (3) DLC Cable (4) Tech 2
SECTION
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
RODEO
5B1
BRAKES
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Wheel Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B1 5B2 5B2 5B2 5B3 5B3 5B3 5B3 5B4 Front Wheel Speed Sensor and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Wheel Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 5B4 5B4 5B4 5B5 5B5 5B5 5B5 5B5
Service Precaution
5B2
Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit

Electronic Hydraulic Control Unit and Associated Parts
350R100003
Legend (1) EHCU (2) Bolt EndOFCallout
(3) Bracket (4) Bolt and Nut
Removal
1. Remove brake pipes. After disconnecting brake pipe, cap or tape the openings of the brake pipe to prevent the entry of foreign matter. 2. Remove three bracket fixing bolts. 3. Disconnect red clip from harness connector.
350RW018

4. Remove harness connector. 5. Remove EHCU ASM. 6. Remove EHCU.
5B3
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: Torque Hydraulic unit fixing nuts : 22 Nm (16 lbft) Ground cable : 14 Nm (10 lbft) Brake pipe (joint bolts) : 16 Nm (12 lbft) After installing the hydraulic unit, bleed brakes completely. See Section 5A Hydraulic Brakes.
Disassembled View
350RW025
Legend (1) Fixing Bolts (2) Coil Integrated Module (3) Hydraulic Unit (H/U) EndOFCallout
Disassembly
1. Remove fixing bolts from EHCU. 2. Remove coil integrated module from hydraulic unit.
Reassembly
To reassembly, follow the disassemble steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: Torque Fixing bolts: 4.4 Nm (39 lb in)
5B4
Front Wheel Speed Sensor

Front Wheel Speed Sensor and Associated Parts
350R200004
Legend (1) Speed Sensor Connector (2) Sensor Cable Fixing Bolt (Frame side) (3) Sensor Cable Fixing Bolt (Upper Arm side) EndOFCallout
(4) Sensor Cable Fixing Bolt (Knuckle side) (5) Sensor Fixing Bolt (6) Speed Sensor
Removal
1. Remove speed sensor connector. 2. Remove sensor cable fixing bolt (Upper side). 3. Remove sensor cable fixing bolt (Lower side). 4. Remove the speed sensor cable fixing bolt. 5. Remove speed sensor.

1. Check the speed sensor pole piece for presence of foreign materials; remove any dirt, etc. 2. Check the pole piece for damage; replace speed sensor if necessary. 3. Check the speed sensor cable for short or open circuit, and replace with a new one if necessary. To check for cable short or open, bend or stretch the cable while checking for continuity.
4. Check the sensor ring for damage including tooth chipping, and if damaged, replace the sensor ring assembly. Refer to removal of the sensor ring in Section 4C Front hub and disc. 5. On 2WD vehicles, the hub unit bearing and front wheel speed sensor are a single unit. Check the outside of the unit for damage. If there is damage, refer to Front hub and disc in Section 4C of this Manual. The hub unit bearing and front wheel speed sensor cannot be disassembled. They must be replaced as a complete unit.
5B5
Installation
1. Install speed sensor and take care not to hit the speed sensor pole during installation. 2. Install speed sensor fixing bolt and tighten the fixing bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 11 Nm (95 lbin) 3. Install speed sensor cable fixing bolt (Lower side) and tighten the fixing bolt to the specified torque. Torque : 24 Nm (17 lbft)
4. Install speed sensor cable fixing bolt (Upper side) and tighten the fixing bolt to the specified torque. Torque : 6 Nm (52 lbin) NOTE: Confirm that a white line marked on the cable is not twisted when connecting the speed sensor cable. 5. Install speed sensor connector.
Rear Wheel Speed Sensor

Removal
1. Disconnect harness connector (1). 2. Remove sensor fixing bolt (2) . 3. Remove speed sensor (3).
Installation
1. Install speed sensor (3). 2. Tighten the sensor fixing bolt (2) to the specified torque. Torque : 24 Nm (17 lbft) 3. Connect harness connector (1).
350R100004

1. Check speed sensor pole for presence of foreign materials; remove any dirt, etc. 2. Check the pole for damage, and replace speed sensor if necessary. 3. Check speed sensor cable for short or open, and replace with a new one if necessary. To check for cable short or open, bend or stretch the cable while checking for continuity. 4. Check the sensor ring for damage including tooth chipping, and if damaged, replace the axle shaft assembly. Refer to removal of the sensor ring in Section 4A2 Differential (Rear).
350R100004
SECTION
POWER-ASSISTED BRAKE SYSTEM
RODEO
5C1
BRAKES
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filling Master Cylinder Reservoir . . . . . . . . Deterioration of Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . Leakage of Brake Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bleeding Brake Hydraulic System . . . . . . . Flushing Brake Hydraulic System. . . . . . . . Brake Pipes and Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Hose Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Caliper Brake Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Caliper Brake Hose and Associated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Axle Brake Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Axle Brake Hose and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P & B (Proportioning and Bypass) Valve . . . . P & B (Proportioning and Bypass) Valve Sectional View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Pedal Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Pedal Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Pedal and Associated Parts . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stoplight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Master Cylinder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Cylinder Assembly and Associated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Cylinder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Cylinder Assembly Desassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C2 5C2 5C6 5C7 5C10 5C10 5C10 5C10 5C10 5C11 5C11 5C12 5C12 5C12 5C12 5C12 5C13 5C13 5C13 5C13 5C14 5C14 5C14 5C15 5C15 5C15 5C15 5C16 5C17 5C17 5C17 5C18 5C18 5C18 5C19 5C19 5C19 5C19 5C20 5C21 5C21 5C21 5C21 5C22 5C22 Desassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Booster Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Booster Assembly and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior Components and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Booster Overhaul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Front Disc Brake Pads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Disc Brake Pads Inspection . . . . . . . Front Disc Brake Pads and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Disc Brake Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Brake Rotors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refinishing Brake Rotors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Disc Brake Caliper Assembly . . . . . . . . Front Disc Brake Caliper Assembly and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Disc Brake Caliper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Disc Brake Caliper Disassembled View Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Disc Brake Pads (4 4 Model) . . . . . . . . Brake Pads Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Pads and Associated Parts . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Disc Brake Rotor (4 4 Model). . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Brake Rotors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refinishing Brake Rotors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Drum (In Disc) Inside Diameter Check Rear Disc Brake Caliper Assembly 5C22 5C22 5C23 5C23 5C24 5C25 5C25 5C25 5C26 5C27 5C27 5C27 5C28 5C28 5C28 5C28 5C29 5C30 5C30 5C30 5C31 5C31 5C33 5C33 5C33 5C33 5C35 5C35 5C35 5C36 5C38 5C38 5C38 5C39 5C39 5C40 5C41 5C41 5C41 5C42 5C42 5C44 5C44 5C44 5C44 5C45
5C2

5C46 5C46 5C46 5C47 5C48 5C48 5C49 5C49 5C49 5C51 5C52 5C52 5C52 Brake Lining Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drum Brake Adjustment (4 2 Model) . . . . . Servicing The Brake Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Cylinder Assembly (4 2 Model) . . . . . Wheel Cylinder Assembly and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C53 5C53 5C54 5C54 5C55 5C55 5C55 5C55 5C56 5C56 5C56 5C56 5C58
(4 4 Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Disc Brake Caliper Assembly and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Disc Brake Caliper (4 4 Model) . . . . . . Rear Disc Brake Caliper Disassembled View Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications (4 4 Model). Brake Lining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Lining and Associated Parts. . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Precaution
General Description
Master Cylinder Assembly
330R200002

The master cylinder contains two pistons that supply the hydraulic pressure for a dualcircuit braking system. The primary piston provides the fluid pressure to the front brakes, while the secondary piston provides the fluid pressure to the rear brakes. If the pressure is lost from either system, the remaining system will function to stop the vehicle. CAUTION:
5C3
1. If any hydraulic component is removed or disconnected, it may be necessary to bleed all or part of the brake system. (Refer to Bleeding Brake Hydraulic System in this section.) 2. The torque values specified unlubricated fasteners. are for dry,
3. Perform service operations on a clean bench free from all mineral oil materials.
Brake Booster
331R200001
This booster is a tandem vacuum unit with a diaphragm effective diameter 205mm + 230mm (8.07in + 9.06in). In normal operating mode, with the service brakes in the released position, the tandem vacuum booster operates with vacuum on both sides of its diaphragms. When the brakes are applied, air at atmospheric pressure is admitted to both sides of the diaphragm to provide the power assist. When the service brake is released, the atmospheric air is shut off from both sides of the diaphram. The air is then drawn from the booster through the vacuum check valve to the vacuum source.
CAUTION: 1. If any hydraulic component is removed or disconnected, it may be necessary to bleed all or part of the brake system. 2. The torque values specified unlubricated fasteners. are for dry,
3. The vacuum booster is not repairable and must be replaced as complete assembly.
5C4
Disc Brake
Front Disc Brake
A05R200001
Rear Disc Brake (4 4 Model)
A05RW002
The disc brake assembly consists of a caliper, piston, rotor, pad assembly and support bracket. The caliper assembly has a fornt dual bore, rear single bore and is mounted to the support bracket with two mounting bolts. The support bracket allows the caliper to move laterally against the rotor. The caliper is a onepiece casting with the inboard side containing the piston bore. A square cut rubber seal is located in a groove in the piston bore which provides the hydraulic seal between the piston and the cylinder wall. NOTE: 1. Replace all components included in repair kits used to service this caliper. 2. Lubricate rubber parts with clean brake fluid to ease assembly. 3. If any hydraulic component is removed or disconnected, it may be necessary to bleed all or
part of the brake system. 4. Replace pads in axle sets only. 5. The torque values specified are for dry, unlubricated fasteners. 6. Perform the service operation on a clean bench free from all mineral oil materials. Operation Hydraulic pressure, created by applying the brake pedal, is converted by the caliper to a stopping force. This force creates a clamping action of the piston pressing towards the rotors (outward) and the caliper slides inward toward the vehicle. This clamping action forces the linings against the rotor, creating friction to stop the vehicle.
POWER-ASSISTED BRAKE SYSTEM Leading/Trailing Drum Brakes (4 2 Model)
5C5
A05RS003
This drum brake assembly is a leading/trailing shoe design. Both brake shoes are held against the wheel cylinder pistons by the upper return spring and to the fixed anchor plate by the lower return spring. When the brakes are applied, the wheel cylinder pistons expand pushing both shoes out contacting the drum. With forward wheel rotation, the forward brake shoe will wrap into the drum and becomes self-energized. With reverse wheel rotation, the rear brake shoe is self-energized. Force from the brake shoes is transferred to the anchor plate through the braking plate to the axle flange. Adjustment is automatic and occurs on any service brake application. Also, with leading/ trailing brakes, it is normal for the front shoe to wear at a faster rate than the rear shoe.
5C6

level may be lower than the MAX mark if the front and rear linings are worn. This is normal.
Diagnosis
Road Testing The Brakes
Brake Test Brakes should be tested on a dry, clean, reasonably smooth and level roadway. A true test of brake performance cannot be made if the roadway is wet, greasy or covered with loose dirt where all tires do not grip the road equally. Testing will also be adversely affected if the roadway is crowned so as to throw the weight of the vehicle toward wheels on one side or if the roadway is so rough that wheels tend to bounce. Test the brakes at different vehicle speeds with both light and heavy pedal pressure; however, avoid locking the wheels and sliding the tires. Braking without locking the tires will stop the vehicle in less distance than braking to a skid (which has no brake efficiency). More tire to road friction is present while braking without locking the tires than braking to a skid. The standard brake system is designed and balanced to avoid locking the wheels except at very high deceleration levels. It is designed this way because the shortest stopping distance and best control is achieved without brake lockup. Because of high deceleration capability, a firmer pedal may be felt at higher deceleration levels. External Conditions That Affect Brake Performance 1. Tires: Tires having unequal contact and grip on the road will cause unequal braking. Tires must be equally inflated, identical in size, and the thread pattern of right and left tires must be approximately equal. 2. Vehicle Loading: A heavily loaded vehicle requires more braking effort. 3. Wheel Alignment: Misalignment of the wheels, particularly in regard to excessive camber and caster, will cause the brakes to pull to one side.
Warning Light Operation

When the ignition switch is in the START position, the BRAKE warning light should turn on and go off when the ignition switch returns to the ON position. The following conditions will activate the BRAKE light: 1. Parking brake applied. The light should be on whenever the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is on. 2. Low fluid level. A low fluid level in the master cylinder will turn the BRAKE light on. 3. During engine cranking the BRAKE light should remain on. This notifies the driver that the warning circuit is operating properly.
Brake Fluid Leaks

With engine running at idle and the transmission inNeutral, depress the brake pedal and hold a constant foot pressure on the pedal. If pedal gradually falls away with the constant pressure, the hydraulic system may be leaking. Check the master cylinder fluid level. While a slight drop in the reservoir level will result from normal lining wear, an abnormally low level in reservoir indicates a leak in the system. The hydraulic system may be leaking internally as well as externally. Refer to Master Cylinder Inspection. Also, the system may appear to pass this test but still have slight leakage. If fluid level is normal, check the vacuum booster push rod length. If an incorrect length push rod is found, adjust or replace the push rod. Check the brake pedal travel and the parking brake adjustment. When checking the fluid level, the master cylinder fluid
5C7
General Diagnosis
Condition Brake Pull Possible cause Tire inflation pressure is unequal. Front wheel alignment is incorrect. Unmatched tires on same axle. Adjust Adjust Tires with approx. the same amount of tread should be used on the same axle. Check for soft hoses and damaged lines. Replace with new hoses and new double walled steel brake piping. Clean or replace. Replace Replace Grind or replace. Clean or replace. Adjust or replace. Check all suspension mountings. Check and tighten the bolts to specifications. Check per instructions. If not within specifications, replace or machine the rotor. Check per instructions. If not within specifications, replace or machine the rotor. Replace the brake pad and machine rotor to within specifications. Check the vacuum booster operation and repair, if necessary. Check the front and rear brake system for failure and repair. Also, check the brake warning light. If a failed system is found, the light should indicate failure. Check and replace pads in sets. Remove caliper and rebuild. Remove and replace with original equipment pad or equivalent. Check for ruptured or loose hose. Correct vacuum hose direction. Replace or clean. Correction
Restricted brake pipes or hoses.
Water or oil on the brake pads. Brake pads hardened. Brake pads worn excessively. Brake rotor worn or scored. Disc brake caliper malfunctioning. Front hub bearing preload incorrect. Loose suspension parts. Loose calipers. Brake Roughness (Pulsates) or Chatter Excessive lateral runout.
Parallelism not within specifications.
Pad reversed (steel against iron). Excessive Pedal Effort Malfunctioning vacuum booster. Partial system failure.
Excessively worn pad. Piston in caliper stuck or sluggish. Fading brakes due to incorrect pad. Vacuum leak to vacuum booster. Check the direction of check valve within vacuum hose. Grease on the brake pads.
5C8

Condition Possible cause Air in hydraulic circuit. Level of brake fluid in the reservoir too low. Master cylinder push rod clearance excessive. Leakage in hydraulic system. Correction Bleed the hydraulic circuit. Replenish brake fluid reservoir to specified level and bleed hydraulic circuit as necessary. Adjust Correct or replace defective parts. Adjust the stop light switch and vacuum booster push rod. If necessary, rebuild. Check for soft hoses or damaged pipes, and replace with new hoses and new doublewalled steel brake piping. Adjust Adjust Adjust the brake pedal height or power cylinder operating rod. Replace Replace piston seals. Clean Replace Overhaul the parking brakes and correct. Adjust or replace. Correct or replace the brake back plate and brake shoe as necessary. Clean Grind or replace. Grind or replace. Grind or replace. Check operation and correct as necessary. Check and lubricate, if necessary. Clean and lubricate.
Excessive Brake Pedal Travel
Brake Drag
Master cylinder pistons not returning correctly. Restricted brake pipes or hoses.
Parking brake maladjusted. Parking brake insufficient. lining clearance
Brake pedal free play insufficient. Piston in sticking. the master cylinder
Piston in the disc brake caliper sticking. Brake pads sticking in caliper. Return spring weakened. Parking brake binding. Front hub bearing preload incorrect. Parking brake shoes not returning. Obstructions in hydraulic circuit. Rotor warped excessively. Rear brake drum distorted. Parking cable sticking. Grabbing or Uneven Braking Action (All conditions listed under Pulls) Malfunctioning vacuum booster. Binding brake pedal mechanism. Corroded caliper assembly.

Condition Brake Noisy Possible cause Brake pads are worn. Brake pads are hardened. Brake pads are in poor contact with rotor. Brake disc(s) warped, worn damaged. Disc brake fatigued. anti squeak or Replace Replace Correct Grind or replace. Replace Adjust or replace. Grind or replace. Correct or replace. Correct or replace. Replenish and bleed. Bleed Clean or replace. Clean or replace. Correct Replace Grind or replace. Correct or replace. Correction
5C9
shims
Front hub bearings are loose or preload is incorrect. Brake disc is rusted. Poor Brake Action Master cylinder faulty. Vacuum booster faulty. Level of brake fluid in reservoir too low. Air in hydraulic circuit. Disc brake caliper faulty. Water or oil on brake pads. Brake pads in poor contact with the rotor. Brake pads worn. Brake disc rusted. Check valve in vacuum hose faulty.
5C10
Hydraulic Brakes
Filling Master Cylinder Reservoir
CAUTION: Use only specified brake fluid. Do not use any fluid which contains a petroleum base. Do not use a container which has been used for petroleum based fluids or a container which is wet with water. Petroleum based fluid will cause swelling and distortion of rubber parts in the hydraulic brake system. Water mixed with brake fluid lowers the fluid boiling point. Keep all fluid containers capped to prevent contamination. Always fill the master cylinder reservoir when the engine is cold. Never allow the brake fluid to come in contact with the painted surfaces. The master cylinder reservoir must be kept properly filled to ensure adequate reserve and to prevent air and moisture from entering the hydraulic system. However, because of expansion due to heat absorbed from the brakes and the engine, the reservoir must not be overfilled. The brake fluid reservoir is on the master cylinder, which is located under the hood on the left side of the cowl. Thoroughly clean reservoir cap before removal to avoid getting dirt into reservoir. Remove the diaphragm. Add fluid as required to bring level to the MAX mark on the reservoir tank. Use DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid. If the fluid cap diaphragm is stretched, return it to the original position before installing.
Bleeding Brake Hydraulic System

A bleeding operation is necessary to remove air from the hydraulic brake system whenever air is introduced into the hydraulic system. It may be necessary to bleed the hydraulic system at all four brakes if air has been introduced through a low fluid level or by disconnecting brake pipes at the master cylinder. If a brake pipe is disconnected at one wheel, only that wheel cylinder/ caliper needs to be bled. If the pipes are disconnected at any fitting located between the master cylinder and brakes, then the brake system served by the disconnected pipe must be bled. 1. For 4Wheel Antilock Brake System (ABS) equipped vehicle, be sure to remove the ABS main fuse 60A located at the relay and fuse box before bleeding air. If you attempt to bleed air without removing the main fuse, air cannot be let out thoroughly, and this may cause damage to the hydraulic unit. After bleeding air, be sure to replace the ABS main fuse back to its original position. 2. Set the parking brake completely, then start the engine. NOTE: The vacuum booster will be damaged if the bleeding operation is performed with the engine off. 3. Remove the master cylinder reservoir cap. 4. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid. Keep the reservoir at least half full during the air bleeding operation 5. Always use new brake fluid for replenishment. 6. When replenishing the brake fluid reservoir, carefully pour in the brake fluid to prevent air bubbles from entering the brake system. When the master cylinder is replaced or overhauled, first bleed the air from the master cylinder, then from each wheel cylinder and caliper following the procedures described below. Bleeding the Master Cylinder 7. Disconnect the rear wheel brake pipe (1) from the master cylinder. Check the fluid level and replenish as necessary. If replenished, leave the system for at least one minute. 8. Depress the brake pedal slowly once and hold it depressed. 9. Completely seal the delivery port of the master cylinder with your finger, where the pipe was disconnected then release the brake pedal slowly. 10. Release your finger from the delivery port when the brake pedal returns completely. 11. Repeat steps 8 through 10 until the brake fluid comes out of the delivery port during step 8.
Deterioration of Brake Fluid

Using any other brake fluid than specified or brake fluid with mineral oil or water mixed in will drop the boiling point of brake fluid. It may, in turn, result in vapor lock or deteriorated rubber parts of the hydraulic system. Be sure to change the brake fluid at specified intervals. If the rubber parts are deteriorated, remove all the system parts and clean them with alcohol. Prior to reassembly, dry the cleaned parts with air to remove the alcohol. Replace all the hoses and rubber parts of the system.
Leakage of Brake Fluid

With engine idling, set shift lever in the neutral position and continue to depress brake pedal at a constant pedal application force. Should the pedal stroke become deeper gradually, leakage from the hydraulic pressure system is possible. Perform visual inspection for any signs of leakage.

NOTE: Do not allow the fluid level in the reservoir to go below the halfway mark. 12. Reconnect the brake pipe (1) to the master cylinder and tighten the pipe. 13. Depress the brake pedal slowly once and hold it depressed. 14. Loosen the rear wheel brake pipe (1) at the master cylinder. 15. Retighten the brake pipe, then release the brake pedal slowly. 16. Repeat steps 13 through 15 until no air comes out of the port when the brake pipe is loosened NOTE: Be very careful not to allow the brake fluid to come in contact with painted surfaces.
5C11
21. Pump the brake pedal slowly three (3) times (once/ sec), then hold it depressed. 22. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flows through the tube. 23. Retighten the bleeder screw. 24. Release the brake pedal slowly. 25. Repeat steps 21 through 24 until the air is completely removed. It may be necessary to repeat the bleeding procedure 10 or more times for front wheels and 15 or more times for rear wheels. 26. Go to the next wheel in the sequence after each wheel is bled. Be sure to monitor reservoir fluid level. 27. Depress the brake pedal to check if you feel sponginess after the air has been removed from all wheel cylinders and calipers. If the pedal feelsspongy, the entire bleeding procedure must be repeated. 28. After the bleeding operation is completed on the each individual wheel, check the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir and replenish up to the MAX level as necessary. 29. Attach the reservoir cap. If the diaphragm inside the cap is deformed, reform it and install. 30. Stop the engine.
Flushing Brake Hydraulic System

It is recommended that the entire hydraulic system be thoroughly flushed with clean brake fluid whenever new parts are installed in the hydraulic system. Approximately one quart of fluid is required to flush the hydraulic system. The system must be flushed if there is any doubt as to the grade of fluid in the system or if fluid has been used which contains the slightest trace of mineral oil. All rubber parts that have been subjected to a contaminated fluid must be replaced.
330R200004
17. Bleed the air from the front wheel brake pipe connection (2) by repeating steps 7 through 16. Bleeding the Caliper 18. Bleed the air from each wheel in the order listed below: Right rear caliper or wheel cylinder Left rear caliper or wheel cylinder Right front caliper Left front caliper Conduct air bleeding from the wheels in the above order. If no brake fluid comes out, it suggests that air is mixed in the master cylinder. In this case, bleed air from the master cylinder. In this case, bleed air from the master cylinder in accordance with steps 7 through 17, and then bleed air from the caliper or wheel cylinder. 19. Place the proper size box end wrench over the bleeder screw. 20. Cover the bleeder screw with a transparent tube, and submerge the free end of the transparent tube in a transparent container containing brake fluid.
Brake Pipes and Hoses

The hydraulic brake system components are interconnected by special steel piping and flexible hoses. Flexible hoses are used between the frame and the front calipers, the frame and rear axle case and the rear axle and the rear calipers. When the hydraulic pipes have been disconnected for any reason, the brake system must be bled after reconnecting the pipe. Refer to Bleeding the Brake Hydraulic System in this section.
5C12

light and mirror may be needed for an adequate inspection. If any of the above conditions are observed on the brake hose, adjust or replace the hose as necessary. CAUTION: Never allow brake components such as calipers to hang from the brake hoses, as damage to the hoses may occur.
Brake Hose Inspection

The brake hose should be inspected at least twice a year. The brake hose assembly should be checked for road hazard, cracks and chafing of the outer cover, and for leaks and blisters. Inspect for proper routing and mounting of the hose. A brake hose that rubs on suspension components will wear and eventually fail. A
Front Caliper Brake Hose

Front Caliper Brake Associated Parts Hose and Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support it with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Clean dirt, grease, and other foreign material off the hose fittings at both ends. 4. Disconnect brake pipe. 5. Remove clip. 6. Remove bolt and gasket. 7. Remove hose.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Tighten the brake pipes to the specified torque Torque: 16 Nm (12 lbft) 2. Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
352RW001
Torque: 35 Nm (26 lbft) NOTE: Always use new gaskets and be sure to put the hooked edge of the flexible hose end into the anti rotation cavity. After installing the brake hoses, bleed the brakes as described in this section.
Legend (1) Bolt and Gasket (2) Clip (3) Hose (4) Brake Pipe EndOFCallout
5C13
Rear Axle Brake Hose

Rear Axle Brake Associated Parts Hose and Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support it with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Clean dirt, grease, and other foreign material off the hose fittings at both ends. 4. Disconnect brake pipe. 5. Remove clip. 6. Remove brake pipe. 7. Remove bolt. 8. Remove hose.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Tighten the brake pipes to the specified torque Torque: 16 Nm (12 lbft)
352RW002
2. Tighten the bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 15 Nm (11 lbft) After installing the brake hoses, bleed the brakes as described in this section.
Legend (1) Brake Pipe (2) Clip (3) Bolt (4) Brake Pipe (5) Hose EndOFCallout
5C14
Brake Pipe
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support it with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly as necessary. 3. Clean dirt, grease, and other foreign material off the pipe fittings at both ends. 4. Remove brake pipe (1).
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Tighten the brake pipes to the specified torque. Master cylinder and P&B valve sides Torque: 12 Nm (104 lbin) Others Torque: 16 Nm (12 lbft) After installing the brake pipes, bleed the brakes as described in this section.
330R200003
5. Remove plastic clip (2).
330RW002
5C15
P & B (Proportioning and Bypass) Valve

P & B (Proportioning and Bypass) Valve Sectional View Removal
1. The P&B valve is not repairable and must be replaced as a complete assembly. Care must be taken to prevent brake fluid from contacting any painted surface. 2. Remove hydraulic pipes (1) and plug the pipes (1) to prevent the loss of fluid or the entrance of dirt. 3. Remove bolt (3). 4. Remove P&B valve (2).
350RW014
Legend (1) Master Cylinder (Secondary) (2) Master Cylinder (Primary) (3) Rear Brake (4) Front Brake EndOFCallout The P&B valve contains two sections, each serving a different function. The proportioning section of the P&B valve proportions outlet pressure to the rear brakes after a predetermined rear input pressure has been reached. This is done to prevent rear wheel lock up on the vehicles with light rear wheel loads. The valve has a by pass feature which assures full system pressure to the rear brakes in the event of front brake system malfunction. Also full front pressure is retained in the event of rear brake malfunction. The P&B valve is not repairable and must be replaced as complete assembly.
350R200003
Installation
1. Install P&B valve (2). 2. Install bolt (3) and tighten the bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 22 Nm (16 lbft) 3. Install hydraulic pipes (1) and tighten the bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 12 Nm (104 lbin) 4. After installing the brake pipes, bleed the brakes as described in Bleeding Brake Hydraulic System in this section.
5C16

E05R200007
5C17
Brake Pedal
Checking Pedal Height
The push rod serves as the brake pedal stopper when the pedal is fully released. Brake pedal height adjustment should be performed as follows:
Adjust Brake Pedal
310RY00005
NOTE: While adjusting the stoplight switch, make sure that the threaded part of the stoplight switch does not push the brake pedal. h. Tighten the stoplight switch lock nut. i.
310R200002
Connect the stoplight switch connector.
1. Measure the brake pedal height after making sure the pedal is fully returned by the pedal return spring. Pedal height must be measured after starting the engine and stepping on it several times. Pedal Free Play: 6-10 mm (0.23-0.39 in) Pedal Height: 173-185 mm (6.81-7.28 in) NOTE: Pedal free play must be measured after turning off the engine and stepping on the brake pedal firmly five times or more. 2. If the measured value is not within the above range, adjust the brake pedal as follows: a. Disconnect the stoplight switch connector. b. Loosen the stoplight switch lock nut. c. Rotate the stoplight switch so that it moves away from the brake pedal. d. Loosen the lock nut (1) on the push rod. e. Adjust the brake pedal to the specified height by rotating the push rod in the appropriate direction. f. Tighten the lock nut to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (15 lbft) g. Adjust the stoplight switch (2) to the specified clearance (between the switch housing and the brake pedal) by rotating the switch housing. Clearance: 0.51.0 mm (0.020.04 in)
Checking Pedal Travel
310R200002
1. Pedal height must be measured after starting the engine and revving it several times to apply vacuum to the vacuum booster fully. NOTE: Pedal height must be 95 mm (3.7 in) or more when about 50 kg (110.25 lb) of stepping force is applied. 2. If the measured value is lower than the above range, air may still be present in the hydraulic system Perform the bleeding procedure.
5C18
Brake Pedal and Associated Parts
310RY00006
Legend (1) Brake Pedal Bracket Assembly (2) Fulcrum Pin and Nut (3) Connector (4) Snap Pin (5) Return Spring EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Peadl Assembly Push Rod Pin Lower Cover Bolts and Nut Driver Knee Bolster
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery terminal cable, and wait at least 5 minutes. 2. Disconnect the yellow 3 way SRS connector located under the steering column. 3. Remove the engine hood opening lever. 4. Remove lower cover (8). 5. Remove driver knee bolster (10). 6. Disconnect the stop light switch connector (3). Disconnect the anti-theft control module connector. Refer to Body and Accessories section. 7. Remove snap pin (4) and push rod pin (7). 8. Remove the steering column shaft fixing bolt and nut (9) on the steering wheel side, and lower the steering column shaft. 9. Remove the brake pedal bracket assembly (1). 10. Remove return spring (5). 11. Remove fulcrum pin and nut (2).
12. Remove pedal assembly (6).
Installation
1. Apply grease to the entire circumference of the fulcrum pin. 2. Install pedal assembly (6) and fulcrum pin and nut (2). Tighten the nut (2) to the specified torque. Torque: 35 Nm (26 lbft) 3. Install the brake pedal bracket assembly (1). Tighten the bolts and nuts soecified torque. Torque: 15 Nm (11 lbft) 4. Install return spring (5). 5. Adjust pedal free travel. Refer to Brake Pedal Adjustment in this section.

6. Tighten the steering column fixing bolt (9) (dash panel) to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (14 lbft) 7. Tighten the steering column fixing nut (9) (Cross Beam) to the specified torque. Torque: 17 Nm (12 lbft) 8. Apply grease to the entire circumference of the Push rod pin (7). 9. Install push rod pin (7). 10. Install snap pin (4).
5C19
11. Connect the anti-theft control module connector. Refer to Body and Accessories section. 12. Connect the stop light switch connector (3). 13. Install driver knee bolster (10) and lower cover (8). 14. Install the engine hood opening lever. 15. Connect the yellow 3 way SRS connector located under the steering column. 16. Connect the battery terminal cable.
Stoplight Switch
Parts Location Installation
1. Adjust the stop light switch to the specified clearance (between switch housing and brake pedal) by rotating the switch housing. Clearance : 0-0.2 mm (0-0.08 in) NOTE: Do not attempt to force the push rod into position during the stop light switch installation and adjustment procedure.
310RW008
Legend (1) Connector (2) Switch (3) Lock Nut EndOFCallout
Removal
1. Disconnect connector (1) 2. Remove lock nut (3). 3. Remove switch (2).
310RY00005
2. Connect connector (1). 3. Install lock nut (3).
5C20

Pedal free play Pedal Height 610 mm (0.23 0.39 in) 173185 mm (6.817.28 in)
310RY00007
5C21

Master Cylinder Associated Parts Assembly and
330R200006
Legend (1) Electrical Connector (2) Master Cylinder EndOFCallout
(3) 2 attaching Nuts (4) P&B Valve and Bracket (5) Brake Pipes 4. Remove P&B valve and bracket. 5. Remove master cylinder.
Removal
CAUTION: When removing the master cylinder from the vacuum booster, be sure to get rid of the internal negative pressure of the vacuum booster (by, disconnecting the vacuum hose) in advance. If any negative pressure remains in the vacuum booster, the piston may possibly come out when the master cylinder is being removed, letting the brake fluid run out. While removing the master cylinder, do not hold the piston as it can be easily pulled out. Outside surface of the piston is the surface on which seals are to slide. Care should be taken to keep the surface free of cuts and dents. 1. Disconnect electrical connector. 2. Remove brake pipes and after disconnecting the brake pipe, cap or tape the openings of the brake pipe to prevent the entry of foreign matter. 3. Remove 2 attaching nuts.
Inspection
Excessive brake pedal travel, malfunction or dragging brake suggests that the master cylinder is defective. In such cases perform the following visual check:
Visual Check
Make parts replacement as required if wear, distortion, nicks, cuts, corrosion, or other abnormal conditions are found through the following parts inspection: Master cylinder body Fluid reservoir Oring
5C22

Master Cylinder Assembly Desassembled View
330R200005
Legend (1) Spring Pin (2) Reserve Tank and Reserve Tank Cap (3) Oring EndOFCallout
(4) Primary Piston Assembly (5) Secondary Piston Assembly (6) Cylindr Body
Desassembly
1. Remove the spring pin. 2. Remove the reserve tank and the reserve tank cap. The brake fulid level switch is builtin to the reserve tank and cannot be removed. 3. Remove the Oring. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Remove the primary piston assembly. 6. Invert the cylinder body and push on the secondary
piston until the pin falls free. 7. Remove the secondary piston assembly. 8. Remove the cylinder body.
Inspection
Excessive brake pedal travel, malfunction or dragging brake suggests that the master cylinder is defective. In such cases perform the following visual check:
POWER-ASSISTED BRAKE SYSTEM Visual Check

Make parts replacement as required if wear, distortion, nicks, cuts, corrosion, or other abnormal conditions are found through the following parts inspection: Master cylinder body Fluid reservoir Oring Wash each part in brake fluid before beginning the inspection procedure. Check the inside surfaces of the master cylinder for abrasion, corrosion, and other damage. Replace the cylinder if necessary. Check the return port for clogging. Clean the port with a wire and compressed air if nesessay. Check the piston and piston cup for abrasion, damage, and wear. Replace the piston assembly if any of these conditions exist. Check the return spring. Replace the spring if it is weak. Check the snap ring. Replace the snap ring if it is stretched or weak.
5C23
Installation
1. Install master cylinder. When replacing the master cylinder or vacuum booster or both, always measure the vacuum booster push rod protrusion and adjust it as necessary (Refer to Vacuum Booster in section). 2. Install P&B valve and bracket. 3. Install 2 attaching nuts and tighten the attaching nuts to the specified torque. Torque: 13 Nm (113 lbin) 4. Install brake pipes and tighten the brake pipe to the specified torque. Master cylinder and P&B valve sides Torque: 12 Nm (104 lbin) Others Torque: 16 Nm (12 lbin) 5. Connect electrical connector.
Reassembly
1. Wash each master cylinder internal part in brake fluid before beginning installation. 2. Install the cylinder body. 3. Press the secondary piston assembly into the cylinder body and hold it. Thread the pin through the long hole of the piston to secure the piston assembly. 4. Install the primary piston assembly. 5. Install the snap ring. 6. Install the Oring 7. Install the reserve tank and the reserve tank cap. 8. Install the spring pin.
5C24

Type Piston bore diameter Dualcircuit 25.4 mm (1.000 in)
E05R200005
5C25
Vacuum Booster Assembly

Vacuum Booster Associated Parts Assembly and
331R200004
Legend (1) Pin (2) Vacuum Booster Fixing Nut (3) Vacuum Hose EndOFCallout
(4) Master Cylinder (5) Vacuum Booster (6) Snap Pin
Removal
1. Before removing the vacuum booster assembly, disconnect and remove the brake pipes. 2. Remove master cylinder, refer to Master Cylinder Removal in this section. CAUTION: When removing the master cylinder from the vacuum booster, be sure to get rid of the internal negative pressure of the vacuum booster (by, disconnecting the vacuum hose) in advance. If any negative pressure remains in the vacuum booster, the piston may possibly come out when the master cylinder is being removed, letting the brake fluid run out. Do not hold the piston while removing the master cyliner, the piston can be easily pulled out. Outside surface of the piston is the surface on which seals are to slide. Care should be taken to keep the surface free of cuts and dents.
3. Remove vacuum hose. 4. Disconnect the yoke clevis from the brake pedal. 5. Remove vacuum booster fixing nut. 6. Remove vacuum booster.
5C26

Vacuum Hose (The built in check valve)
1. Inspect the check valve (2), which is installed inside the vacuum hose. 2. Air should pass freely from the vacuum booster (3) to the engine (1). 3. Air should not pass from the engine (1) to the vacuum booster (3). If it does, the check valve is inoperative and the vacuum hose built in the check valve must be replaced. HEC ENGINE
360RW001
6VD1 ENGINE
360RY00004
5C27
Exterior Components
Exterior Components and Associated Parts
331R200006
Legend (1) 2 Gaskets and Spacer (2) Vacuum Booster EndOFCallout
(3) Retainer (4) Plate and Seal Assembly (5) Master Cylinder
Removal
1. Remove master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder in this section. 2. Remove vacuum booster. Refer to Vacuum Booster in this section. 3. Remove 2 gaskets and spacer. 4. Remove retainer, plate and seal assembly.
331RS003
5C28

Visual Check
Make necessary parts replacement if cuts, nicks, excessive wear, or other abnormal conditions are found through inspection. NOTE: The parts listed below must be replaced with new ones whenever the master cylinder is removed. 1. Plate and seal assembly 2. Retainer
Installation
1. Install plate and seal assembly. 2. Install retainer. 3. Install vacuum booster, refer to Vacuum Booster in this section. 4. Install master cylinder, refer to Master Cylinder in this section and after installation, perform brake pedal check and adjustment. Refer to Brake Pedal in this section.
Vacuum Booster Overhaul

Vacuum Booster
The vacuum booster cannot be disassembled for repair. Replace a defective vacuum booster with a new one.
5C29

Vacuum booster diaphragm diameter (Front) Vacuum booster diaphragm diameter (Rear) Push rod stroke Plunger diameter Push rod diameter 205 mm (8.07 in) 230 mm (9.06 in) More than 32.0 mm (1.26 in) 10.25 mm (0.40 in) 27.4 mm (1.08 in)
E05R200004
5C30
Front Disc Brake Pads

Front Disc Brake Pads Inspection
Check the outer pad by looking at each caliper from above. Check the thickness on the inner pad by looking down through the inspection hole in the top of the caliper. Whenever the pad is worn to about the thickness of the pad base, the pad should be removed for further measurements. The pad should be replaced anytime the pad thickness (1) is worn to within 1.00 mm (0.039 in) of the pad itself. Wear indicators are installed on disc brake pads, disc brake pads need replacement when the wear indicator is heard. Minimum limit (1): 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
302RS002
Front Disc Brake Pads and Associated Parts
302R200026
Legend (1) Pin Bolt (2) Caliper Assembly EndOFCallout
(3) Pad Assembly (4) Clip (5) Outer Side
5C31
Removal
NOTE: If a squealing noise occurs from the front brake while driving, check the pad wear indicator plate. If the indicator plate contacts the rotor, the disc pad assembly should be replaced. Draw out twothirds of the brake fluid from the reservoir. Raise the vehicle and support it with suitable safety stands. 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly, refer to Wheels and Tires System in Section 3E. 2. Remove pin bolt (1).
Installation
1. Install clip.
302R200023
2. Apply special grease (approximately 0.2g) to both contacting surfaces of the inner shims (2). Wipe off extruded grease after installing. Install pad assembly with shim.
302R200028
3. Rotate caliper assembly and support the caliper assembly so that the brake hose is not stretched or damaged. 4. Remove pad assembly with shim. 5. Remove Clip.
302R200024
Legend (2) Inner Shim (3) Wear Indicator (4) Inner Side EndOFCallout
5C32
3. Carefyully use adjustable pliers to bottom the piston into the caliper bore. Do not pull or twist the flexible hose or damage will occur. Install caliper assembly. Set caliper assembly in place. 4. Install lock bolt (5) and tighten the bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 45 Nm (33 lbft)
302R200008
5. Install wheel and tire assembly, refer to Wheels and Tires System in Section 3E. 6. Pump the brake pedal several times to make sure that the pedal is firm. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir after pumping the brakes.
5C33
Front Disc Brake Rotor

Inspection
In the manufacturing of the brake rotor, all the tolerances regarding surface finish, parallelism and lateral runout are held very closely. Maintaining these tolerances provides the surface necessary to assure smooth brake operation.
Parallelism
Parallelism is the measurement of thickness of the rotor at four or more points around the circumference of the rotor. All measurement must be made at 29 mm (1.14 in) from the edge of the rotor. The rotor thickness must not vary more than 0.010 mm (0.0004 in) from point to point. Maximum runout: 0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
Lateral Runout
Lateral runout is the movement of the rotor from side to side as it rotates on the spindle. This could also be referred to as rotor wobble. This movement causes the piston to be knocked back into its bore. This results in additional pedal travel and a vibration during braking.
Checking Lateral Runout

1. Adjust the wheel bearing correctly, refer to Differential in Section 4A. 2. Attach the dial indicator accordingly so that the stem contacts the rotor surface to approximately 29mm (1.14 in) from the rotor edge. 3. Rotate the rotor one complete turn and inspect for signs of lateral runout. Lateral runout should not exceed 0.13 mm (0.005 in). Maximum runout: 0.13 mm (0.005 in)
411R200007
Replacing Brake Rotors

When installing new brake rotors, do not refinish the surfaces. These parts are at the correct level of surface finish.
Refinishing Brake Rotors

Accurate control of the rotor tolerances is necessary for proper performance of the disc brakes. Machining of the rotor should be done only with precision equipment. All brake rotors have a minimum thickness dimension cast into them. This dimension is the minimum wear dimension and not a refinish dimension. The minimum wear dimension is 24.60 mm (0.969 in). The minimum refinish dimension is 26.00 mm (1.024 in). When refinishing rotors, always use sharp cutting tools or bits. Dull or worn tools leave a poor surface finish which will affect initial braking performance. Vibration dampening attachments should always be used when refinishing braking surfaces. These attachments eliminate tool chatter and will result in better surface finish. After refinishing, replace any rotor that does not meet the minimum thickness of 26.00 mm (1.024 in). Do not use a brake rotor that exceeds the manufacturers specifications.
411R200008
5C34
Minimum wear dimension: 24.60 mm (1.024 in) Refinish dimension: 26.00 mm (1.024 in)
411R200009
5C35
Front Disc Brake Caliper Assembly

Front Disc Brake Caliper Assembly and Associated Parts
302R200027
Legend (1) Brake Flexible Hose (2) Pin Bolt (3) Caliper Assembly EndOFCallout
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Pad Assembly Clip Support Bracket with Pad Assembly Outer Side
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly, refer to Wheels and Tires System in Section 3E. 3. Remove the bolt and gaskets, then disconnect the flexible hose from the caliper and after disconnecting the flexible hose (1), cap or tape the openings to prevent entry of foreign material.
302R200007
5C36

2. Apply special grease (approximately 0.2 g) to both contacting surfaces of the inner shims (4). Wipe off extruded grease after installing. Install pad assembly with shim.
4. Since the brake fluid flows out from the connecting coupler, place a drain pan under the vehicle. 5. Remove pin bolt (2).
302R200020
6. Remove caliper assembly. 7. Remove support bracket with pad assembly and take care not to damage the flexible brake hose when removing the support bracket. 8. Remove pad assembly with shim and mark the lining locations if they are to be reinstalled. 9. Remove clip. Legend (4) Inner Shim (5) Wear Indicator (6) Inner Side
302R200025
EndOFCallout 3. Install support bracket and tighten the bolt (7) to the specified torque. Torque: 155 Nm (115 lbft)
Installation
1. Install clip.
302R200009
302R200023

4. Install caliper assembly. 5. Install pin bolt (8) and tighten the bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 45 Nm (33 lbft)
5C37
302R200010
6. Install brake flexible hose, always use new gaskets and be sure to put the hooked edge of the flexible hose end into the antirotation cavity then tighten the Ibolt (9) to the specified torque. Torque: 35 Nm (26 lbft)
302R200021
7. Install wheel and tire assembly, referring to Wheels and Tires System in Section 3E. 8. Bleed brakes. Refer to Hydraulic Brakes in this section.
5C38
Front Disc Brake Caliper

Front Disc Brake Caliper Disassembled View
302R200018
Legend (1) Bleeder with Cap (2) Caliper Body EndOFCallout
(3) Piston (4) Piston Seal (5) Dust Boot: Piston
Disassembly
1. Insert a block of wood into the caliper and force out the piston by blowing compressed air into the caliper at the flexible hose attachment. This procedure must be done prior to removal of the dust boot. Remove piston. WARNING: Do not place your fingers in front of the piston in an attempt to catch or protect it when applying compressed air. This could result in personal injury. CAUTION: Use just enough air to ease the piston out of the bore. If the piston is blown out, it may be damaged.
302R200012

2. Remove dust boot: piston. 3. Remove piston seal. 4. Remove bleeder with cap. 5. Remove caliper body. Install piston.
5C39

Make necessary parts replacement, if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal conditions are found through inspection. Check the following parts: Rotor Cylinder body Cylinder bore Piston Guide pin, lock pin Support bracket NOTE: The piston seal, boot ring and dust boot are to be replaced each time the caliper is overhauled. Discard these used rubber parts and replace them with new ones.
302R200015
5. Apply special grease (approximately 1g) to the piston and attach the dust boot to the piston and caliper. Insert the dust boot ring into the dust boot. 6. Install guide bolt and lock bolt dust boot. 7. Install the dust boot on the support bracket after applying special grease (approximately 1 g) onto the dust boot inner surface. Apply special grease onto the lock pin and guide pin setting hole of the support bracket.
Reassembly
1. Install caliper body. 2. Install bleeder with cap and tighten the cap to the specified torque. Torque: 8 Nm (69 lbin) 3. Apply special rubber grease to the piston seal and cylinder wall, then insert the piston seal into the cylinder. The special rubber grease is included in the repair kit.
302R200022
Legend (1) Guide Pin (2) Lock Pin (3) Pin Boot
302R200013
EndOFCallout 8. Install pin bolt and tighten the bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 45 Nm (33 lbft)
4. When inserting the piston into the cylinder, use finger pressure only and do not use a mallet or other impact tool, since damage to the cylinder wall or piston seal can result.
5C40

Type Pad dimension Adjusting method Piston diameter Disc type Disc thickness Disc effective diameter Floating, pin slide 48.7 cm (7.55 in ) Selfadjusting 45.4 mm (1.79 in) 2 Ventilated 26 mm (1.02 in) 242 mm (9.53 in)
E05R200008
5C41
Rear Disc Brake Pads (4 4 Model)

Brake Pads Inspection
Check the outer pads by looking at each caliper from above. Check the thickness on the inner pad by looking down through the inspection hole in the top of the caliper. Whenever the pad is worn to about the thickness of the pad base, the pad should be removed for further measurements. The pad should be replaced anytime the pad thickness (1) is worn to within 1.0 mm (0.039 in) of the pad itself. Wear indicators are installed on disc brake pads, disc brake pads need replacement when the wear indicator is heard. Minimum limit (1): 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
302RW016
Brake Pads and Associated Parts
306RW001
Legend (1) Caliper Assembly (2) Clip EndOFCallout
(3) Lock Bolt (4) Pad Assembly
5C42
Removal
NOTE: If a squealing noise occurs from the rear brake while driving, check the pad wear indicator plate. If the indicator plate contacts the rotor, the disc pad assembly should be replaced. Draw out twothirds of the brake fluid from the reservoir. Raise the vehicle and support it with suitable safety stands. 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly, referring to Wheels and Tires System in Section 3E. 2. Remove lock bolt (1)
Installation
1. Install clip (2).
306RW003
2. Apply special grease (approximately 0.2g) to both contacting surfaces of the inner shims. Wipe off extruded grease after installing. Install pad assembly with shim.
306RW002
3. Rotate caliper assembly and support the caliper assembly so that the brake hose is not stretched or damaged. 4. Remove pad assembly with shim. 5. Remove clip.
306RW004
Legend (3) Inner Shim (4) Wear Indicator EndOFCallout
5C43
306RW005
306RW006
3. Carefyully use adjustable pliers to bottom the piston into the caliper bore. Do not pull or twist the flex hose or damage will occur.
302RS008
4. Install lock bolt (5) and tighten the bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 44 Nm (32 lbft) 5. Install wheel and tire assembly, referring to Wheels and Tires System in Section 3E. 6. Pump the brake pedal several times to make sure that the pedal is firm. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir after pumping the brakes.
5C44
Rear Disc Brake Rotor (4 4 Model)

Inspection
In the manufacturing of the brake rotor, all the tolerances regarding surface finish, parallelism and lateral runout are held very closely. Maintaining these tolerances provides the surface necessary to assure smooth brake operation.
Parallelism
Parallelism is the measurement of thickness of the rotor at four or more points around the circumference of the rotor. All measurement must be made at 22 mm (0.87 in) from the edge of the rotor. The rotor thickness must not vary more than 0.010 mm (0.0004 in) from point to point. Maximum parallelism: 0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
Lateral Runout
Lateral runout is the movement of the rotor from side to side as it rotates on the spindle. This could also be referred to as rotor wobble. This movement causes the piston to be knocked back into its bore. This results in additional pedal travel and a vibration during braking.
Checking Lateral Runout

1. Adjust the wheel bearing correctly, referring to Differential in Section 4A. 2. Attach the dial indicator accordingly so that the stem contacts the rotor surface to approximately 29mm (1.14 in) from the rotor edge. 3. Rotate the rotor one complete turn and inspect for signs of lateral runout. Lateral runout should not exceed 0.13 mm (0.005 in). The lateral runout should not exceed 0.13 mm (0.005 in) Maximum runout: 0.13 mm (0.005 in)
420RS013
Replacing Brake Rotors

When installing new brake rotors, do not refinish the surfaces. These parts are at the correct level of surface finish.
Refinishing Brake Rotors

Accurate control of the rotor tolerances is necessary for proper performance of the disc brakes. Machining of the rotor should be done only with precision equipment. All brake rotors have a minimum thickness dimension cast into them. This dimension is the minimum wear dimension and not a refinish dimension. The minimum wear dimension is 16.6 mm (0.654 in). The minimum refinish dimension is 16.97 mm (0.668 in). When refinishing rotors, always use sharp cutting tools or bits. Dull or worn tools leave a poor surface finish which will affect initial braking performance. Vibration dampening attachments should always be used when refinishing braking surfaces. These attachments eliminate tool chatter and will result in better surface finish.
306RY00013

After refinishing, replace any rotor that does not meet the minimum thickness of 16.97 mm (0.668 in). Do not use a brake rotor that exceeds the manufacturers specifications. Minimum wear dimension: 16.6 mm (0.654 in) Refinish dimension: 16.97 mm (0.668 in)
5C45
420RW002
Rear Drum (In Disc) Inside Diameter Check

Check the rear drum inside diameter by measuring at more than two portions as shown in the illustration. If the inside diameter is greater than the limit, replace the rear rotor. Standard: 210.0 mm (8.27 in) Limit: 211.4 mm (8.32 in)
420RS035
5C46
Rear Disc Brake Caliper Assembly (4 4 Model)

Rear Disc Brake Caliper Assembly and Associated Parts
306RW007
Legend (1) Brake Flexible Hose (2) Clip (3) Lock Bolt EndOFCallout
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Support Bracket Guide Bolt Pad Assembly with Shim Caliper Assembly
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly, referring to Wheels and Tires System in Section 3E. 3. Remove the bolt and gaskets, then disconnect the flexible hose from the caliper and after disconnecting the flexible hose (1), cap or tape the openings to prevent entry of foreign material.
4. Since the brake fluid flows out from the connecting coupler, place a drain pan under the vehicle. 5. Remove lock bolt (3). 6. Remove guide bolt (2).
306RW009
7. Remove caliper assembly. 8. Remove support bracket with pad assembly and take care not to damage the flexible brake hose when removing the support bracket.
306RW008
9. Remove pad assembly with shim and mark the lining locations if they are to be reinstalled.

10. Remove clip.
5C47
3. Install support bracket and tighten the bolt (7) to the specified torque. Torque: 103 Nm (76 lbft)
Installation
1. Install clip (4).
306RW012
4. Install caliper assembly.

306RW010
2. Apply special grease (approximately 0.2g) to both contacting surfaces of the inner shims (5). Wipe off extruded grease after installing. Install pad assembly with shim.
5. Install lock bolt and guide bolt (8) and tighten the bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 44 Nm (32 lbft)
306RW013 306RW011
Legend (5) Inner Shim (6) Wear indicator EndOFCallout
6. Install brake flexible hose, always use new gaskets and be sure to put the hooked edge of the flexible hose end into the antirotation cavity then tighten the eyebolt (9) to the specified torque. Torque: 35 Nm (26 lbft)
5C48

7. Install the wheel and tire assembly, referring to Wheels and Tires System in Section 3E. 8. Bleed brakes. Refer to Hydraulic Brakes in this section.
302RW017
Rear Disc Brake Caliper (4 4 Model)

Rear Disc Brake Caliper Disassembled View
306RW014
Legend (1) Guide Bolt (2) Lock Bolt (3) Bleeder with Cap (4) Caliper Body EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Piston Seal Piston Dust Boot: Piston Dust Boot Ring Dust Boot: Guide Bolt and Lock Bolt
5C49
Disassembly
1. Remove guide bolt. 2. Remove lock bolt. 3. Remove dust boot; guide bolt and lock bolt. 4. Remove dust boot ring, using a small screwdriver.
6. Remove dust boot: piston. 7. Remove piston seal. 8. Remove bleeder with cap. 9. Remove caliper body.

Make necessary parts replacement, if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal conditions are found through inspection. Check the following parts: Rotor Cylinder body Cylinder bore Piston Guide bolt, lock bolt Support bracket NOTE: The piston dust seal and dust boot are to be replaced each time the caliper is overhauled. Discard these used rubber parts and replace with new ones.
Reassembly
302RS016
5. Insert a block of wood into the caliper and force out the piston by blowing compressed air into the caliper at the flexible hose attachment. This procedure must be done prior to removal of the dust boot. Remove piston. WARNING: Do not place your fingers in front of the piston in an attempt to catch or protect it when applying compressed air. This could result in personal injury. CAUTION: Use just enough air to ease the piston out of the bore. If the piston is blown out, it may be damaged.
1. Install caliper body. 2. Install bleeder with cap and tighten the cap to the specified torque. Torque: 8 Nm (69 lbft) 3. Install piston seal and apply special rubber grease to the piston seal and cylinder wall, then insert the piston seal into the cylinder. The special rubber grease is included in the repair kit.
302RS018
4. When inserting the piston into the cylinder, use finger pressure only and do not use a mallet or other impact tool, since damage to the cylinder wall or piston seal can result. Install piston.
302RS017
5C50
302RS019
302RS021
5. Apply special grease (approximately 1g) to the piston and attach the dust boot to the piston and caliper. Insert the dust boot ring into the dust boot.
8. Install lock bolt and guide bolt and tighten the bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 44 Nm (32 lbft)
302RS020
6. Install guide bolt and lock bolt dust boot. 7. Install the dust boot on the support bracket after applying special grease (Approx. 1g) onto the dust boot inner surface. Also apply special grease onto the lock bolt and guide bolt setting hole of the support bracket.
5C51
Main Data and Specifications (4 4 Model)

Type Pad dimension Adjusting method Piston diameter Disc type Disc thickness Disc effective diameter Floating, pin slide 33 cm (5.11 in ) Selfadjusting 41.3 mm (1.63 in) Ventilated 18 mm (0.71 in) 269.2 mm (10.60 in)
E05RW005
5C52
Brake Lining
Brake Lining and Associated Parts
305RW001
Legend (1) Wheel and Tire Assembly (2) Drum (3) Hold-down Spring and Cup (4) Hold-down Spring and Cups (5) Lower Return Spring (6) Upper (other) Return Spring (7) Trailing Shoe Assembly with Parking Brake Lever (8) Leading Shoe Assembly with Upper (inner) Return Spring EndOFCallout
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
Upper (inner) Return Spring Auto Adjuster Lever Parking Brake Lever Adjuster Assembly Wave Washer Retainer Hold-down Pin Hold-down Pin
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support with suitable safety stands. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly (1). Refer to Wheel and Tires in Wheel and Tire System section. 3. Remove Drum (2). If difficulty is encountered in removing the drum: Mark the position of the drum to the axle. Make sure the parking brake is released. Use a rubber mallet to tap gently on the outer
rim of the drum and/or around the inner drum. Be careful to avoid damaging the drum. 4. Remove upper (other) return spring (6) and auto adjuster lever. 5. Remove lower return spring (5). 6. Remove hold-down spring and cups (4) and hold-down pin (15). 7. Remove adjuster assembly (12) 8. Remove leading shoe assembly (8) with upper (inner) return spring (9).

NOTE: Do not over stretch the return spring.
5C53
Installation
1. Apply grease lightly to back place A.
305RS003
9. Remove upper (inner) return spring (9). 10. Remove hold-down spring and cup (3) and hold-down pin (16). 11. Remove Trailing shoe assembly (7) with parking brake lever (16). 12. Remove parking brake cable from parking brake lever (11). 13. Remove retainer (14), wave washer (13), and parking brake lever (11).
305RW002
Legend (1) Place A (3 portions for each side) EndOFCallout 2. Install parking brake lever (11), wave washer (13), and retainer (14). 3. Install trailing shoe assembly (7) with parking brake lever (16). 4. Install the parking brake cable to parking brake lever (11). 5. Install hold-down pin (16) and hold-down spring and cup (3). 6. Install upper (inner) return spring (9). 7. Install leading shoe assembly (8) with upper (inner) return spring (9). NOTE: Do not over stretch the return spring.
Brake Lining Inspection

Check the shoe assemblies for wear by removing brake drum. Replace the shoe assemblies, if lining thickness is less than 1.0 mm (0.039 in). The shoe assemblies have a wear indicator that makes a noise when the linings wear to a degree where replacement is required. Minimum limit: 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
305RS001
305RS003
5C54
8. Install adjuster assembly (12). 9. Install hold-down pin (15) and hold-down spring and cups (4). 10. Install lower return spring (5). Use brake spring tool. 11. Install auto adjuster lever (10). 12. Install upper (outer) return spring (6). Use brake spring tool. 13. Install brake drum (2). Adjust the brakes, refer to the Drum Brake Adjustment in this section. 14. Install wheel and tire assembly (1). Refer to Wheels and Tires in wheel and Tire System section.
Servicing The Brake Drum

Whenever the brake drums are removed, they should be thoroughly cleaned and inspected for cracks, scores, deep grooves and out-of-round.
Cracked, Scored or Grooved Drum

A cracked drum is unsafe and must be replaced. Do not attempt to weld a cracked drum. Smooth any slight scores. Heavy or extensive scoring will cause excessive brake lining wear, and it will probably be necessary to machine the drum braking surface. If the brake linings are slightly worn and the drum is grooved, the drum should be polished with fine emery cloth but should not be machined. At this stage, eliminating all the grooves in the drum and smoothing the ridges on the lining would require the removal of too much metal and lining. If left alone, the grooves and ridges match and satisfactory service can be obtained. If brake linings are to be replaced, a grooved drum should be machined. Using a grooved drum with new linings will create inefficient braking performance and cause the linings to wear quicker.
Drum Brake Adjustment (4 2 Model)

NOTE: All brakes are self-adjusting. Brakes are adjusted by repeated stepping on the brake pedal. (After stepping on the pedal and releasing it, the rear auto adjuster, in the rear brake, produces a clicking sound. The same operation should be repeated until the sound disappears.) Take the following steps after overhauling the rear brake assembly. 1. Move the parking brake handle to its fully released position. 2. Parking cable must be loosened sufficiently. (Loosen the adjust nut and the lock nut.) 3. Repeat stepping on the brake pedal firmly, and releasing it until the clicking sound can no longer be heard. If the difference between the brake drum inside diameter and diameter of the brake shoes is adjusted to be 0,5 mm, the number of times for depressing the brake pedal can be reduced. 4. Remove the drum. Measure the brake drum inside diameter and diameter of the brake shoes. Shoe clearance: 0.25-0.4 mm (0.0098-0.0157 in) If incorrect, check the brake auto-adjusting system. 5. Rotate the adjust nut until all slack disappears from the cable. Set the adjust nut. 6. Applying about 30 kg (66 lb) of force, pull the parking brake handle to its fully set position three or four times. 7. If the parking brake is properly adjusted, the travel between the fully disengaged position and the fully engaged position will be between 9 and 11 notches. If the traveling range is not within these limits, again repeat steps 1 through 5. After adjusting has been done, check to see if the rear wheel rotates smoothly without drag when turned by hand.
Out-Of-Round Drum
An out-of-round drum makes accurate brake shoe adjustment impossible and is likely to cause excessive wear to other parts of the brake mechanism due to its eccentric action. An out-of-round drum can also cause severe and irregular tire tread wear as well as a pulsing brake pedal. When the braking surface of a brake drum exceeds the specification limit of 0.15 mm (0.006 in) in out-of-round, the drum should be machined to true up the braking surface. Out-of-round can be accurately measured with an inside micrometer fitted with proper extension rods. When measuring a drum for out-of-round and wear, take measurements at the open and closed edges of machines surfaces and at right angles to each other. Maximum out-of-round: 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
420RS034
POWER-ASSISTED BRAKE SYSTEM Machining The Drum

If a drum is to be machined, only enough metal should be removed to obtain a true, smooth braking surface. If a drum does not clean-up when machined to a maximum diameter, it must be replaced. Removal of more metal will affect dissipation of heat and may cause
5C55
distortion of the drum. After refinishing, replace any drum that exceeds a maximum inside diameter of 296.5 mm (11.673 in). Do not use a brake drum that is not within the specification. Maximum inside diameter: 296.5 mm (11.673 in)
Wheel Cylinder Assembly (4 2 Model)

Wheel Cylinder Assembly and Associated Parts
305RW003
Legend (1) Brake Linings (2) Wheel Cylinder EndOFCallout
(3) Bolts (4) Brake Pipe
Removal
1. Remove brake linings (1). Refer to Brake Lining and Associated Parts in this section. 2. Remove brake pipe (4). Plug the opening in the line to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 3. Remove bolts (3) and wheel cylinder (2).
specified torque. Torque: 10 Nm (8 lbft) 2. Install brake pipe (4) and tighten the nut to the specified torque. Torque: 16 Nm (12 lbft) 3. Install brake linings (1). Refer to Brake Lining Replacement in this section. Bleed brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake in this section.
Installation
1. Install wheel cylinder (2) and tighten bolts (3) to the
5C56
Disassembled View
Reassembly
1. Lubricate the cylinder bore with clean rubber grease.
305RS006
Legend (1) Boot (2) Piston Assembly (3) Piston Cup (4) Return Spring (5) Bleeder (6) Wheel Cylinder EndOFCallout
305RS007
2. Install bleeder (5) to wheel cylinder (6). Torque: 10 Nm (8 lbft)
Disassembly
1. Remove boot (1) and piston assembly (2). 2. Remove piston cup (3) from piston assembly (2). 3. Remove return spring (4) and bleeder (5) from wheel cylinder (6).

1. Make necessary parts replacement if wear, damage, corrosion or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection. Check the following parts; Wheel cylinder body Cylinder bore Piston Return spring Bleeder NOTE: Replace the piston cups and boots each time the wheel cylinder is overhauled. Discard these used rubber parts and replace with new ones.
305RS008

3. Install new piston cups (3) on each piston so that the flared end of the cups are turned to the inboard side of the pistons. Attach the return spring (4) and the boot (1) to the piston.
5C57
305RS009
4. Apply DELCO silicone lube No. 5459912 (or equivalent) to the piston and the inner face of the boots. 5. Install piston assembly (2) to wheel cylinder (6).
5C58

Rear drum brake Type Drum inside diameter Wheel cylinder diameter Leading-trailing, non-servo 295 mm (11.6 in) 22.22 mm (7/8 in)
E05RW010
SECTION
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM (4x4 Model)
RODEO
5D11
BRAKES
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM (4 4 Model)
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking Brake Lever and Front Cable . . . . . . Parking Brake Lever Assembly and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D11 5D11 5D12 5D13 5D13 5D13 5D13 Parking Brake Rear Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking Brake Rear Cable and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking Brake Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D14 5D14 5D15 5D15 5D16 5D16 5D17
Service Precaution
WARNING: THIS VEHICLE HAS A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS). REFER TO THE SRS COMPONENT AND WIRING LOCATION VIEW IN ORDER TO DETERMINE WHETHER YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING. WHEN YOU ARE PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR NEAR THE SRS COMPONENTS OR THE SRS WIRING, REFER TO THE SRS SERVICE INFORMATION. FAILURE TO FOLLOW WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN POSSIBLE AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, PERSONAL INJURY, OR OTHERWISE UNNEEDED SRS SYSTEM REPAIRS. CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. ISUZU will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. ISUZU will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fasteners joint interfaces. Generally, such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fasteners. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specifications. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems.
General Description
Pulling up the parking brake lever by hand will set the parking brake. By means of a ratchet type lock, the lever can be held in that position until it is released. The position of the lever is transmitted through cable/lever systems to the rear wheels. These parts are designed to obtain sufficient braking force even when parking on slopes. When the parking brake is set, or when the ignition SW is in theON position, the brake warning light illuminates. The rear wheel parking brake is a duo servo brake (mechanical inside expansion type) built in the rear disc brake. Parking brake adjustment is made through the adjusting hole (bored through back plate). Parking brake lever stroke should be adjusted to 68 notches. Refer to Parking Brake Adjustment in this section.
5D12

the secondary shoe through the fulcrumB. The secondary shoe contacts the drum thereby producing braking effect. Clearance which may result from worn parking brake shoe lining can be adjusted by turning the adjusting screw. Refer to Parking Brake Adjustment in this Section.
Operation
When pulled in the directionA, the parking lever presses the secondary shoe against the brake drum using the lever/shoe joint B as a fulcrum and pushes the strut in the directionC. The strut ,in turn, presses the primary shoe against the brake drum. Counter force D to the primary shoe is transmitted again to
A05RS002
Legend (1) Direction A (2) Lever/Shoe Joint B as a fulcrum (3) Direction C (4) Counter Force D (5) Parking Lever (6) Secondary Shoe (7) Adjusting Screw Notch EndOFCallout
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
Parking Cable Guide Primary Shoe Strut Shoe Expanding Direction Parking Brake Cable Guide Adjusting Hole Plug Adjusting Screw Notch
5D13
Parking Brake Lever and Front Cable

Parking Brake Lever Assembly and Associated Parts
311RW008
Legend (1) Rear Console (2) Switch Connector (3) Bolt (4) Adjust Nut and Lock Nut EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Trunnion Pin Equalizer Parking Brake Rear Cable Parking Brake Lever
Removal
1. Remove rear console (1). Refer to Body and Accessories section. 2. Disconnect switch connector (2). 3. Remove bolt (3). 4. Remove adjust nut and lock nut (4). 5. Pull out equalizer (6) from trunnion pin (5). 6. Disconnect trunnion pin (5) from Parking brake lever (8). 7. Disconnect parking brake rear cable (7).
Installation
1. Apply grease (BESCO L2 or equivalent) to the connecting portion of the rear cable (7) and equalizer (6). 2. Connect parking brake rear cable (7) to equalizer 3. Install trunnion pin (5) to parking brake lever (8). 4. Insert equalizer (6) into trunnion pin (5) and tighten adjust nut and lock nut (4). To adjust the parking brake lever, see Parking Brake Adjustment in this section. Lock Nut Torque: 13 Nm (113 lbin) 5. Tighten the parking brake lever fixing bolt (3) to the specified torque. Torque: 15 Nm (11 lbft) 6. Connect switch connector (2). 7. Install rear console (1). Refer to Body and Accessories section.
5D14
Parking Brake Rear Cable

Parking Brake Rear Cable and Associated Parts
311RY00004
Legend (1) Rear Wheels (2) Caliper Assembly (3) Rotor (Drum) (4) Holding Spring (5) Upper Return Spring (6) Lower Return Spring (7) Shoe Assembly EndOFCallout
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Cable Fixing Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt (Only Long Wheel Base Model) Nut Nut Retainer Rear Cable
5D15
Removal
1. Remove rear wheels (1). 2. Remove 2 bolts to remove the caliper assembly (2) from the support bracket. Refer to Rear Disc Brakes in Power Assisted Brake System section. Temporarily hang the caliper with wire etc. 3. Remove rotor (drum) (3). 4. Remove holding spring (4), upper return spring (5) and lower return spring (6). 5. Previously remove the rear cable from the parking brake lever, then remove the brake shoe assembly (7).
Brake Adjustment in this section. 5. Tighten the cable fixing bolt (8) to the specified Torque: 6.5Nm (57lbin) 6. Install shoe assembly (7). After installation of the shoe and cable assembly, apply special grease (included in the repair kit) to the following portions indicated in the figure.
308RS005
7. Install lower return spring (6) and upper return spring (5). The parking brake lever side (secondary side) return spring must be installed on the outer side of the primary side return spring.
308RW004
Legend (1) Parking Brake Lever EndOFCallout 6. Remove cable fixing bolt (8) and bolt (9) (10) (11). 7. Remove nut (12). 8. Remove nut (13) and retainer (14). 9. Remove rear cable (15).
Installation
1. Apply grease (BESCO L2 or equivalent) to the connecting portion of the rear cable and equalizer. Install rear cable (15). 2. Install retainer (14). Tighten nut (13) to the specified torque. Torque: 41Nm (30lbft)
308RS003
3. Tighten nut (12) to the specified torque. Torque: 15Nm (11lbft) 4. Tighten bolt (11) (10) (9) to the specified torque. Torque: 6.5Nm (57lbin) To adjust the parking brake, refer to Parking
Legend (1) Outer Side (2) Parking Lever EndOFCallout 8. Install holding spring (4). 9. Install rotor (drum) (3).
5D16

force of 30 kg (66 lb). 6. Make sure there is no brake dragging. Then tighten the cable lock nut Torque : 13 Nm (113 lbin) 7. When poor braking effect possibly resulting from insufficient breakin is felt, or just after replacement of parking brake shoe, be sure to conduct breakin as follows: 8. Forward 50 km/h (30 mph) 400 m (About 30 seconds) with a lever pull force of 15 kg (33 lb). 9. Backward 10 km/h (6 mph) 50 m (About 18 seconds) with a lever pull force of 15 kg (33 lb). NOTE: Breakin procedures must be performed under safe conditions and traffic rules. If braking effect still remains poor after the above breakin, wait for some time until parking brake shoe cools down and repeat the procedures 8. and 9. noted above. On completion of breakin, inspect parking brake lever stroke, and if the lever does not come within the specified number of notches when pulled up, readjust. Excessive breakin may cause premature wear of the parking brake lining.
10. Install caliper assembly (2). 11. Install rear wheels (1).

Parking Brake Lining Inspection
Check the shoe assemblies for wear by removing the brake drum. Replace the shoe assemblies if the lining thickness is less than 1.0 mm (0.039 in). Minimum limit: 1.0m (0.039in)
308RS004
Parking Brake Rotor (Drum) Inspection

Refer to Rear Disc Brakes in Power-Assisted Brake System section for inspection procedure of the rotor (drum).
Parking Brake Adjustment

1. Prior to lever stroke adjustment, adjust rear brake shoe/rotor (drum) gap. Perform this procedure with loosening the adjust nut of the hand brake lever. 2. Remove the adjusting hole plug (rubber) and turn the shoe adjusting screw downward with a small screwdriver so that shoes will expand until they get into close touch with the rotor. (Turn down the adjusting screw notch by notch until the rotor does not turn.) 3. Turn the adjusting screw in the opposite direction (upward) until the rotor can be turned lightly. Standard number of notches to turn upward: 7 or 8 Turn the rotor and make sure that there is no brake dragging. 4. After the rear brake shoe/rotor (drum) gap has been adjusted, perform parking brake cable adjustment. 5. Turn the adjusting nut so that the parking brake lever travels 68 notches when pulled up with a
5D17

Model Type Drum inside diameter Parking brake lever stroke Duoservo 210 mm(8.27 in) 68 notches When pulled with a force of 30 kg (66 lb)
311RY00005
SECTION
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM (4X2 Model)
RODEO
5D21
BRAKES
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM (4 2 Model)
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking Brake Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking Brake Lever Assembly and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D21 5D21 5D22 5D22 5D22 5D22 Parking Brake Rear Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking Brake Rear Cable and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking Brake Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D23 5D23 5D24 5D24 5D24 5D25
Service Precaution
General Description
Pulling up the parking brake lever by hand will set the parking brake. By means of a ratchet type lock, the lever can be held in that position until it is released. The position of the lever is transmitted through cable/lever systems to the rear wheels. These parts are designed to obtain sufficient braking force even when parking on slopes. When the parking brake is set, or when the ignition SW is in theON position, the brake warning light illuminates. The rear wheel parking brake is a leading/trailing brake (mechanical inside expansion type). Parking brake adjustment is made through the adjusting hole (bored through back plate). Parking brake lever stroke should be adjusted to 6 notches. Refer to Parking Brake Adjustment in this section.
5D22
Parking Brake Lever

Parking Brake Lever Assembly and Associated Parts
311RW008
Legend (1) Rear Console (2) Switch Connector (3) Bolt (4) Adjust Nut and Lock Nut EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Trunnion Pin Equalizer Parking Brake Rear Cable Parking Brake Lever
Removal
1. Remove rear console (1). Refer to Body and Accessories section. 2. Disconnect switch connector (2). 3. Remove bolt (3). 4. Remove adjust nut and lock nut (4). 5. Pull out equalizer (6) from trunnion pin (5). 6. Disconnect trunnion pin (5) from parking brake lever (8). 7. Disconnect parking brake rear cable (7).
Installation
1. Apply grease (BESCO L2 or equivalent) to the connecting portion of the rear cable (7) and equalizer (8). 2. Connect parking brake rear cable (7) to equalizer (6). 3. Install trunnion pin (5) to parking brake lever (8). 4. Insert equalizer (6) into trunnion pin (5) and tighten adjust nut and lock nut (4). To adjust the parking brake lever, see Parking Brake Adjustment in this section. Lock Nut Torque: 13 Nm (113 lbin) 5. Tighten parking lever fixing bolt (3) to the specified torque. Torque: 15 Nm (11 lbft) 6. Connect switch connector (2). 7. Install rear console (1). Refer to Body and Accessories section.
5D23
Parking Brake Rear Cable

Parking Brake Rear Cable and Associated Parts
311RY00006
Legend (1) Rear Wheels (2) Drums (3) Clip and Bolt (4) Clip and Bolt EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Clip and Bolt (Only Long Wheel Base Model) Nut Nut Retainer Rear Cable
5D24
Removal
1. Remove rear wheels (1) and drums (2). 2. Remove bolt (3) (4) (5). 3. Remove nut (6). 4. Remove nut (7) and retainer (8). 5. Remove rear brake shoe assemblies. Refer to Brake Lining Assembly and Associated Parts in Power Assisted Brake System section. 6. Use offset box wrench (13 mm hex.) to compress the locking lugs on the cable, then remove the rear cable (9) from the Backing plate.
Parking Brake Adjustment

NOTE: All brakes are self adjusting. Brakes are adjusted by repeated stepping on the brake pedal. (After stepping on the pedal and releasing it, the rear autoadjuster, in the rear brake, produces a clicking sound. The same operation should be repeated until the sound disappears.) Take the following steps after overhauling the rear brake assembly. 1. Move the parking brake lever to its fully released position. 2. Parking cable must be loosened sufficiently. (Loosen the adjust nut and the lock nut.). 3. Repeat stepping on the brake pedal firmly, and releasing it until the clicking sound can no longer be heard. If the difference between the brake drum inside diameter and diameter of the brake shoes is adjusted to be 0.5 mm, the number of times for depressing the brake pedal can be reduced. 4. Remove the drum. Measure the brake drum inside diameter and diameter of the brake shoes. Shoe clearance: 0.25 mm to 0.40 mm (0.0098 in to 0.0157 in) If incorrect, check the brake autoadjusting system. 5. Rotate the adjust nut of hand brake lever until all slack disappears from the cable. Set the adjust nut.
311RS012
Legend (1) Offset Box Wrench EndOFCallout
6. Applying about 30 kg (66 lb) of force, pull the parking brake lever to its fully set position three or four times. 7. If the parking brake is properly adjusted, the travel between the fully disengaged position and the fully engaged position will be 6 notches. If the traveling range is not within these limits, repeat steps 1 through 5 again . After adjusting has been done, check to see if the rear wheel rotates smoothly without drag when turned by hand.
Installation
1. Install rear cable (9). 2. Install retainer (8). 3. Tighten nut (7) to the specified torque. Torque : 41 Nm (30 lbft) To adjust the parking brake, refer to Parking Brake Adjustment in this section. 4. Tighten nut (6) to the specified torque. Torque : 15 Nm (11 lbft) 5. Tighten bolt (5) (4) (3) to the specified torque. Torque : 6.5 Nm (57 lbin) 6. Install rear drums (2) and wheels (1).
5D25

Model Type LeadingTrailing Drum inside diameter Parking brake lever stroke 295mm (11.6 in) 68notches When pulled with a force of 30 kg (66 lb)
311RY00007
SECTION
ENGINE MECHANICAL (Y22SE 2.2L)
RODEO
6A1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Engine Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting and Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A 6B 6C 6D1 6D2 6D3 Driveability and Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Speed Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . Induction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1 6F 6G 6H 6J
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Head Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Head Cover and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankshaft Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intake Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Head Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camshaft and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Head and Associated Parts . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A2 6A2 6A3 6A16 6A16 6A16 6A17 6A19 6A19 6A19 6A20 6A20 6A20 6A21 6A21 6A22 6A24 6A24 6A26 6A29 6A29 6A29 6A35 6A35 6A35 6A36 6A39 6A39 6A41 6A43 6A43 6A43 Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve Spring, Valve, Valve Guide . . . . . . . . . . Valve Spring, Valve, Valve Guide and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankshaft and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair for Bearing . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair for Crankshaft . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piston and Connecting Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piston, Connecting Rod and Associate Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Block and Associated Parts . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balance Unit Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balance Unit Assembly and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A44 6A45 6A46 6A46 6A47 6A47 6A48 6A49 6A49 6A49 6A50 6A51 6A52 6A55 6A55 6A55 6A56 6A58 6A60 6A60 6A60 6A61 6A61 6A63 6A63 6A63 6A64 6A66 6A67 6A73
6A2
Service Precaution
General Information on Engine Service

The following information on engine service should be noted carefully, as it is important in preventing damage and contributing to reliable engine performance: D When raising or supporting the engine for any reason, do not use a jack under the oil pan. Due to the small clearance between the oil pan and the oil pump strainer, jacking against the oil pan may cause damage to the oil pick up unit. D The 12volt electrical system is capable of damaging circuits. When performing any work where electrical terminals could possibly be grounded, the ground cable of the battery should be disconnected at the battery. D Any time the intake air duct or air cleaner is removed, the intake opening should be covered. This will protect against accidental entrance of foreign material into the cylinder which could cause extensive damage when the engine is started.
Cylinder Block
The cylinder block is made of cast iron. The crankshaft is supported by five bearings. The bearing cap is made of modular cast iron.
Cylinder Head
The cylinder head is made of aluminum alloy casting with a spark plug in the center.
General Description
Engine Cleanliness And Care
An automobile engine is a combination of many machined, honed, polished and lapped surfaces with tolerances that are measured in the thousandths of a millimeter (ten thousandths of an inch). Accordingly, when any internal engine parts are serviced, care and cleanliness are important. Throughout this section, it should be understood that proper cleaning and protection of machined surfaces and friction areas is part of the repair procedure. This is considered standard shop practice even if not specifically stated. D A liberal coating of engine oil should be applied to all friction areas during assembly to protect and lubricate the surfaces on initial operation. D Whenever valve train components, pistons, piston rings, connecting rods, rod bearings, and crankshaft journal bearings are removed for service, they should be retained in order. D At the time of installation, they should be installed in the same locations and with the same mating surfaces as when removed. D Battery cables should be disconnected before any major work is performed on the engine. Failure to disconnect cables may result in damage to wire harness or other electrical parts. D The four cylinders of this engine are identified by numbers; cylinders 1, 2, 3 and 4, as counted from crankshaft pulley.
Valve Train
Valve system is directacting invertered bucket tappet. The valves clearance adjustment are hydraulic. Hydraulic valve lash adjustment, no adjustment necessary.
Intake Manifold
The intake manifold is made of aluminum alloy.
Exhaust Manifold
The exhaust manifold is made of high SiMo modular iron.
Pistons and Connecting Rods

Aluminum pistons are used after selecting the grade that meets the cylinder bore diameter. Each piston has two compression rings and one oil ring. The piston pin is made of casehardened steel. The connecting rods are made of cast iron. The connecting rod bearings are made of steel backed with babbitt metal.
Crankshaft and Bearings

The crankshaft is made of modular cast iron. Pins and journals are graded for correct size selection for their bearing.
Balance Shaft
Type is lanchester (twin counterrotating shafts). The balance shafts are made of cast iron and gears are hard faced. The housing is made of cast iron. Backlash adjustment method is shimbalancer housing to block (selective fit).
6A3
Engine Diagnosis
First of all the engine diagnose to check fuel quantity, engine oil level and engine coolant level.
Hard Starting
1. Starting Motor Does Not Turn Over Trouble Shooting Procedure Turn on headlights and starter switch. Condition Headlights go considerably out or dim Possible cause Battery run down or under charged Terminals poorly connected Starting motor coil circuit shorted Starting motor defective Correction Recharge or replace battery Clean battery posts and terminals and connect properly Overhaul or replace Overhaul or replace
2. Ignition Trouble Starting Motor Turns Over But Engine Does Not Start Spark Test Disconnect a high tension cable from any spark plug. Connect the spark plug tester (for example J26792), crank the engine, and check if a spark is generated in the spark plug tester. Before cranking the engine, make sure that the spark plug tester is properly grounded. To avoid electrical shock, do not touch the high tension cable while the engine is running. Condition Spark jumps across gap Possible cause Spark plug defective Ignition timing incorrect Fuel not reaching fuel injector(s) or engine Valve timing incorrect Engine lacks compression No sparking takes place Ignition coil disconnected or broken Electronic module Ignition System with Correction Clean, adjust spark gap or replace Refer to Ignition System Refer to item 3 (Trouble in fuel system) Adjust Refer to item 4 (Engine lacks compression) Connect properly or replace Replace Correct Correct or replace
Poor connections in engine harness Powertrain Control Module cable disconnected or defective
6A4
3. Trouble In Fuel System Condition Starting motor turns over and spark occurs but engine does not start start. Possible cause Fuel tank empty Water in fuel system Fuel filter clogged Fuel pipe clogged Fuel pump defective Fuel pump circuit open Evaporative Emission System circuit clogged Control Fill Clean Replace filter Clean or replace Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Refer to Electronic Fuel Injection section Correction
Multiport Fuel Injection System faulty 4. Engine Lacks Compression Condition Engine lacks compression Possible cause Spark plug loosely fitted or spark plug gasket defective Valve timing incorrect Cylinder head gasket defective Valve incorrectly seated Valve stem seized Valve spring weakened Cylinder or piston rings worn Piston ring seized
Correction Tighten to specified torque or replace gasket Adjust Replace gasket Lap valve Replace valve and valve guide Replace Overhaul engine Overhaul engine.
Engine Compression Test Procedure

1. Start and run the engine until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Remove all the spark plugs. 4. Remove ignition coil fuse (15A) and disable the ignition system. 5. Remove the fuel pump relay from the relay and fuse box.
6. Engage the starter and check that the cranking speed is approximately 300 rpm. 7. Install cylinder compression gauge into spark plug hole. 8. With the throttle valve opened fully, keep the starter engaged until the compression gage needle reaches the maximum level. Note the reading. 9. Repeat the test with each cylinder. The pressure difference between the individual cylinders should not exceed 100 kPa (14.5 psi).
6A5
Rough Engine Idling or Engine Stalling

Condition Trouble in fuel injection system Possible cause Idle air control valve defective Throttle shutting off incomplete Throttle position sensor circuit open or shorted Fuel injector circuits open or shorted Fuel injectors damaged Fuel pump relay defective Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor cable disconnected or broken Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor defective Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor cable disconnected or broken Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor defective Intake Air Temperature sensor cable disconnected or broken Intake Air defective Temperature sensor Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Replace Replace Correct Replace Replace Refer to Hard Start Troubleshooting Guide Refer to Hard Start Troubleshooting Guide Lap valve Replace filter element Readjust Replace Correction
Knock Sensor (KS) circuits open or shorted KS defective KS Module circuits open or ground KS Module defective Vehicle Speed Sensor circuit open or shorted Vehicle Speed Sensor defective Trouble in emission control system Powertrain Control Module defective Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve faulty Canister purge solenoid circuit open Canister purge solenoid defective Evaporative Emission Canister Purge control valve defective Trouble in ignition system Others Engine lacks compression Valve incorrectly seated Air Cleaner Filter clogged Valve timing incorrect Idle air control valve broken
6A6
Rough Engine Running

Condition Engine misfires regularly Possible cause Ignition coil layer shorted Spark plugs fouling Spark plug(s) insulator nose leaking Fuel injector(s) defective Engine control module faulty Engine knocks regularly Engine lacks power Spark plugs running too hot Powertrain control module faulty Spark plugs fouled Fuel injectors defective Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor or Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor circuit defective Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor circuit defective Engine Control Module faulty Intake Air Temperature Sensor or Intake Air Temperature Sensor circuit defective Throttle Position Sensor or Throttle Position Sensor circuit defective Knock Sensor or Knock Sensor circuits defective Knock Sensor Module or Knock Sensor Module circuits defective Replace Clean or install hotter type plug Replace Replace Replace Install colder type spark plugs Replace Clean Replace Correct or replace Correction
Correct or replace
Replace Correct or replace
Correct or replace Correct or replace Correct or replace
6A7
Hesitation
Condition Hesitation on acceleration Possible cause Throttle Position Sensor adjustment incorrect Throttle Position Sensor circuit open or shorted Excessive play in accelerator linkage Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor circuit open or shorted MAP Sensor defective Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor circuit open or shorted Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit open or shorted KS defective KS Module circuits open or shorted KS Module defective IAT Sensor defective Hesitation at high speeds (Fuel pressure too low) Fuel tank strainer clogged Fuel pipe clogged Fuel filter clogged Defective fuel pump system Fuel Pressure Control Valve leaking Hesitation at high speeds (Fuel injector not working normally) Power supply or ground circuit for Multiport Fuel Injection System shorted or open Cable of Multiport Fuel Injection System disconnected or defective Hesitation at high speeds Engine Control Module defective Throttle Position Sensor circuit open or shorted Throttle Position Sensor defective Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor circuit open or shorted Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor defective MAP Sensor cable open or shorted MAP Sensor defective IAT Sensor circuit open or shorted IAT Sensor defective KS Circuit open or shorted KS defective KS Module circuit open or shorted KS Module defective Throttle valve not wide opened Air Cleaner Filter clogged Power supply voltage too low Correction Replace throttle valve assembly Correct or replace Adjust or replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Replace Check and replace Replace Check and correct or replace
Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Check and correct or replace Replace filter element Check and correct or replace
6A8
Engine Lacks Power

Condition Trouble in fuel system Possible cause Fuel Pressure Control Valve not working normally Fuel injector clogged Fuel pipe clogged Fuel filter clogged or fouled Fuel pump drive circuit not working normally Fuel tank not sufficiently breathing due to clogged Evaporative Emission Control System circuit Water in fuel system Inferior quality fuel in fuel system Engine Control Module supplied poor voltage Throttle Position Sensor disconnected or broken cable Replace Clean or replace Clean Replace Correct or replace Clean or replace Correction
Clean Use fuel of specified octane rating Correct circuit Correct or replace Replace Replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Replace Replace filter element Correct or replace Refer to Hard Start Troubleshooting Guide Install spark plugs of adequate heat range Replace
Throttle Position Sensor defective Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor not working normally Intake Air Temperature Sensor not working normally Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor circuit open or shorted Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor defective Engine Control Module defective Trouble in intake or exhaust system Ignition failure Air Cleaner Filter clogged Air duct kinked or flattened Heat range of spark plug inadequate Electronic module Ignition System with

Condition Engine overheating Possible cause Level of Engine Coolant too low Thermo switch or fan motor defective Thermostat defective Engine Coolant pump defective Radiator clogged Radiator filler cap defective Level of oil in engine crankcase too low or wrong oil in engine Resistance increased in exhaust system Replenish Replace Replace Correct or replace Clean or replace Replace Change or replenish Correction
6A9
Clean exhaust system or replace defective parts Adjust Wide Open Throttle switch setting Correct or replace Replace Replace (Use a thermostat set to open at 92C (197.6F)) Refer to Hard Start Adjust to recommend pressures Adjust Adjust or replace Correct level of engine oil Replace
Throttle Position Sensor adjustment incorrect Throttle Position Sensor circuit open or shorted Cylinder head gasket damaged Engine overcooling Engine lacks compression Others Thermostat defective Tire inflation pressure abnormal Brake drag Clutch slipping Level of oil in engine crankcase too high Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve defective
6A10
Engine Noisy
Abnormal engine noise often consists of various noises originating in rotating parts, sliding parts and other moving parts of the engine. It is, therefore, advisable to locate the source of noise systematically. Condition Noise from crank journals or from crank bearings (Faulty and crank y crank journals j bearings usually make dull noise that becomes more evident when accelerating) Possible cause Oil clearance increased due to worn crank journals or crank bearings Crankshaft out of round Correction Replace crank bearings and crankshaft or regrind crankshaft and install the under size bearing Replace crank bearings and crankshaft or regrind crankshaft and install the under size bearing Crank bearing seized, replace crank bearings and crankshaft or regrind crankshaft and install the under size bearing
Crank bearing seized
Troubleshooting Procedure Short out each spark plug in sequence using insulated spark plug wire removers. Locate cylinder with defective bearing by listening for abnormal noise that stops when spark plug is shorted out. Condition Noise from connecting rods or from connecting rod bearings (Faulty connecting rods or y g connecting rod bearings usually make an abnormal noise slightly higher than the crank bearing noise, which becomes more evident when engine is accelerated) g ) Possible cause Bearing or crankshaft pin worn Correction Replace connecting rod bearings and crankshaft or regrind crankshaft and install the under size bearing Replace connecting rod bearings and crankshaft or regrind crankshaft and install the under size bearing Correct or replace Replace connecting rod bearings and crankshaft or regrind crankshaft and install the under size bearing
Crankpin out of round
Connecting rod bent Connecting rod bearing seized
Troubleshooting Procedure Abnormal noise stops when the spark plug on the cylinder with defective part is shorted out. Condition Piston and cylinder (Faulty piston or cylinder usually makes k a combined bi d mechanical h i l thumping g noise which increases when engine is suddenly accelerated but diminishes gradually as the engine warms up) Possible cause Piston clearance increased due to cylinder wear Piston seized Piston ring broken Piston defective Correction Replace piston and cylinder body Replace piston and cylinder body Replace piston and cylinder body Replace pistons and others
Troubleshooting Procedure Short out each spark plug and listen for change in engine noise. Condition Piston pin noise (Piston makes noise each time it goes up and down) Possible cause Piston pin or piston pin hole worn Correction Replace piston, piston pin and connecting rod assembly

Troubleshooting Procedure The slapping sound stops when spark plug on bad cylinder is shorted out. Condition Timing belt noise Possible cause Timing belt tension is incorrect Tensioner bearing defective Timing belt defective Timing wheels defective Timing belt comes in contact with timing cover Valve noise Valve and valve guide seized Valve spring broken Valve seat offpositioned Crankshaft noise Crankshaft end play excessive (noise occurs when clutch is engaged) Preignition due to use of spark plugs of inadequate heat range Fuel too low in octane rating Wide Open Throttle enrichment system failure Selection incorrect Others of transmission gear Correction
6A11
Replace pusher or adjust the tension pulley or replace timing belt Replace Replace Replace Replace timing belt and timing cover Replace valve and valve guide Replace Correct Replace thrust bearing
Engine knocking
Install Spark Plugs of adequate heat range Replace fuel Refer to Section 6E Caution operator of incorrect gear selection Refer to Engine Lacks Power Replace Adjust tension of drive belt or replace drive belt
Engine overheating Water pump defective Drive belt slipping
6A12
Abnormal Combustion
Condition Trouble in fuel injection system Possible cause Fuel pressure control valve defective Fuel filter clogged Fuel pump clogged Fuel tank or fuel pipe clogged Fuel injector clogged Fuel pump relay defective Power supply cable for fuel pump loosely connected or defective Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor circuit open or shorted Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor defective Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor circuit open or shorted ECT Sensor defective Throttle Position Sensor adjustment incorrect Throttle Position Sensor defective Throttle Position Sensor connector loosely connected Vehicle Speed Sensor cable loosely connected or defective Vehicle Speed Sensor loosely fixed Vehicle Speed Sensor in wrong contact or defective Engine Control Module cable loosely connected or defective Trouble in emission control system Heated Oxygen Sensor circuit open Heated Oxygen Sensor defective Signal vacuum hose loosely fitted or defective Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve defective ECT Sensor circuit open or shorted ECT Sensor defective Evaporator system Trouble in ignition system Trouble in cylinder head parts Carbon deposits chamber in combustion Replace Replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Replace Reconnect, correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Reconnect Replace Reconnect Correct or replace Fix tightly Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Refer to Section 6E Refer to Engine Lacks Power Remove carbon Remove carbon Correction
Carbon deposit on valve, valve seat and valve guide
6A13
Engine Oil Consumption Excessive

Condition Oil leaking Possible cause Oil pan drain plug loose Oil pan setting bolts loosened Oil pan gasket broken Front cover retaining bolts loose or gasket broken Head cover retaining bolts loose or gasket broken Oil filter adapter cracked Oil filter attachings bolt loose or rubber gasket broken Crankshaft front or rear oil seal defective Oil pressure unit loose or broken Blowby gas hose broken Engine/Transmission coupling area Oil leaking into combustion chambers due to poor oor seal in valve system Oil leaking into combustion chambers due to poor seal in cylinder t parts Valve stem oil seal defective Valve stem or valve guide worn Cylinders and excessively Piston ring positioned pistons gaps worn Retighten Replace gasket Retighten or replace gasket Retighten or replace gasket Replace Retighten or replace oil filter Replace oil seal Retighten or replace Replace hose Replace oil seal Replace Replace valve and valve guide Rebore cylinder and replace pistons and others Correct Correct Rebore cylinder and replace pistons and others Replace pistons and others Clean piston and replace rings Clean Correction Retighten or replace gasket
incorrectly
Piston rings set with wrong side up Piston ring sticking Piston ring and ring groove worn Return ports in oil rings clogged Crank case ventilation, Positive Crankcase Ventilation System malfunctioning Others Positive Crankcase Ventilation Hose clogged Improper oil viscosity Continuous high speed driving and/or severe usage such as trailer towing
Use oil of recommended S.A.E. viscosity Continuous high speed operation and/or severe usage will normally cause increased oil consumption
6A14
Fuel Consumption Excessive

Condition Trouble in fuel system Possible cause Mixture too rich or too lean due to trouble in fuel injection system Fuel cut function does not act Trouble in ignition system Others Misfiring or abnormal combustion due to trouble in ignition system Engine idle speed too high Returning of accelerator control sluggish Fuel system leakage Clutch slipping Brake drag Selection incorrect of transmission gear Correction Refer to Abnormal Combustion Refer to Abnormal Combustion Refer to Hard Start or Abnormal Combustion Troubleshooting Guide Reset Idle Air Control Valve Correct Correct or replace Correct Correct Caution operator of incorrect gear selection Refer to Abnormal Combustion
Excessive Exhaust Gas Recirculation flow due to trouble in Exhaust Gas Recirculation system
Oil Problems
Condition Oil pressure too low Possible cause Wrong oil in use Relief valve sticking Oil pump not operating properly Oil pump strainer clogged Oil pump worn Oil pressure gauge defective Crankshaft bearing or connecting rod bearing worn Oil contamination Wrong oil in use Oil filter clogged Cylinder head gasket damage Burned gases leaking Oil not reaching valve system Oil passage in cylinder head or cylinder body clogged Replace Correct or replace Clean or replace strainer Replace Correct or replace Replace Replace with new engine oil Replace oil filter Replace gasket Replace piston and piston rings or rebore cylinders Clean or correct Correction Replace with correct engine oil
Engine Oil Pressure Check

1. Check for dirt, gasoline or water in the engine oil. a. Check the viscosity of the oil. b. Change the oil if the viscosity is outside the specified standard. c. Refer to the Maintenance and Lubrication section of this manual. 2. Check the engine oil level. The level should fall somewhere between the ADD and the FULL marks on the oil level dipstick. If the oil level does not reach the ADD mark on the oil level dipstick, engine oil must be added.
3. Remove the oil pressure unit. 4. Install an oil pressure gauge. 5. Start the engine and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature (About 80C). 6. Measure the oil pressure. Oil pressure should be: 150 kPa (21.8 psi) at idle speed. 7. Stop the engine. 8. Remove the oil pressure gauge. 9. Install the oil pressure unit. 10. Start the engine and check for leaks.
6A15
Malfunction Indicator Lamp

The instrument panel CHECK ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminates by self diagnostic system when the system checks the starting of engine, or senses malfunctions. Condition CHECK ENGINE MIL does not illuminate at the starting of engine Possible cause Bulb defective MIL circuit open Command signal circuit to operate self diagnostic system shorted Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cable loosely connected, disconnected or defective PCM defective CHECK ENGINE MIL illuminates, and stays on Deterioration heated oxygen sensor of internal element Heated oxygen sensor connector terminal improper contact Heated oxygen sensor lead wire shorted Heated oxygen sensor circuit open Deterioration engine temperature sensor of element coolant internal Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Correction
Replace Replace Reconnect properly Correct Correct or replace Replace
Engine coolant temperature sensor connector terminal improper contact Engine coolant temperature sensor lead wire shorted Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit open Throttle position sensor open or shorted circuits Deterioration of crankshaft position sensor Crankshaft position sensor circuit open or shorted Vehicle speed sensor circuit open Manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit open or shorted Intake air temperature sensor circuit open or shorted Fuel injector circuit open or shorted PCM driver transistor defective Malfunctioning of PCM RAM (Random Access Memory) or ROM (Read Only Memory)
Reconnect properly Correct Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace PCM Replace PCM
6A16
Cylinder Head Cover

Cylinder Head Cover and Associated Parts
010R100006
Legend (1) Ignition Cable Cover
(2) Spark Plug (3) Cylinder Head Cover
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect PCV hose from cylinder head cover. 3. Remove intake duct. 4. Remove left side ground cable from cylinder head cover and disconnect ground cable connector on the left side wheel arch. Remove right side ground cable from generator stay and disconnect ground cable connector on the right side wheel arch. 5. Disconnect three(black, green and blue colors) engine wire harness connectors from chassis harness of left rear side of compartment. 6. Disconnect cooling fan wire harness connector from cooling fan on left side top of fan shroud. 7. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then remove drive belt.
033RW001
8. Remove PCV hose from cylinder block. 9. Remove intake duct stay from cylinder head. 10. Remove two bolts for remove ignition cable cover from cylinder head cover.

11. Disconnect ignition cable from ignition plug. 12. Disconnect camshaft position sensor harness and crankshaft angle sensor harness from behind generator. 13. Remove four bolts and remove the crankshaft pulley
6A17
3. Install the cylinder head cover and tighten bolts to the specified torque. (use thread sealant) Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) 4. Install the timing belt front cover then tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) 5. Install the crankshaft pulley, tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (14 lb ft)
020RW014
14. Remove timing belt front cover. 15. Loose fixing bolt then remove the camshaft angle sensor. 16. Remove ten cylinder head cover fixing bolts and remove the cylinder head cover.
020RW014
Installation
1. Install the camshaft position sensor and tighten the bolt. Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) 2. Clean sealing surfaces and apply the liquid gasket.
6. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then install the drive belt to normal position.
033RW001
7. Connect ignition cable to ignition plug. 8. Install ignition cable cover to cylinder head cover and tighten two bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 3 Nm (17 lb in)
014R100004
9. Install intake duct bracket to cylinder block.
6A18
10. Install PCV hose flange to cylinder block to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
020RW015
11. Connect cooling fan wire harness connector to cooling fan on left side top of fan shroud. 12. Connect left side ground cable to cylinder head cover and connect other side connector to left side wheel arch terminal. Connect right side ground cable to generator stay and connect other side connector to right side wheel arch terminal. 13. Connect three(black, green and blue colors) engine wire harness connector to chassis harness of left rear side of engine compartment. 14. Install intake duct. 15. Connect PCV hose to cylinder head cover. 16. Connect battery ground cable.
6A19
Exhaust Manifold
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect PCV hose from air intake duct. 3. Remove a nut from air intake duct bracket and loosen hose clamp on throttle body. Remove air intake duct assembly with air cleaner cover. 4. Remove air intake duct bracket with ground cable. 5. Remove four fixing bolts on exhaust manifold heat protector. 6. Remove fixing four nuts from flange of front exhaust pipe and remove fixing bolts from silencer side.
011R100007
2. Install front exhaust pipe to exhaust manifold and tighten fixing nut to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
150R100004
7. Remove ten exhaust manifold fixing nuts then remove exhaust manifold.
Installation
1. Install exhaust manifold and tighten fixing nuts and bolts to be tightened in three steps. D Tightening sequence: D Step1: J G H B D C J G B D D Step2: A B C D E F G H J K D Step3: A B C D E F G H J K D Tightening torque: D Step1: 19 Nm (14 Ib ft) D Step2: 15 Nm (11 Ib ft) D Step3: 15 Nm (11 Ib ft) NOTE: Do not re-use the nuts and bolts.
150R100004
3. Tighten silencer side bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 59 Nm (43 lb ft) 4. Install exhaust manifold heat protector and tighten bolt. Torque: 8 Nm (69 lb in) 5. Install intake duct bracket with ground cable. 6. Install intake duct assembly to throttle body and air cleaner then tighten nut to the intake duct bracket and clamp on the throttle body side, also clamp air cleaner cover. 7. Connect PCV hose to air intake duct. 8. Connect battery ground cable.
6A20
Crankshaft Pulley
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side by using wrench then remove drive belt.
Installation
1. Install the crankshaft pulley to crankshaft flange. 2. Tighten four bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (14 lb ft)
033RW001
3. Remove four crankshaft pulley fixing bolts, remove crankshaft pulley.
020RW014
3. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side by using wrench, then install drive belt to normal position.
020RW014 033RW001
4. Connect battery ground cable.
6A21
Intake Manifold
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove PCV hose from air intake duct. 3. Remove a nut from air intake duct bracket and loosen hose clamp on throttle body. Remove air intake duct assembly with air cleaner cover. 4. Drain engine coolant. 5. Remove water hoses from throttle body. 6. Disconnect the connector for throttle position sensor, idle air control valve sensor from throttle body. 7. Remove fuel pipe joint eye bolts from fuel rail and disconnect wire harness from fuel injector. 11. Remove water pipe fixing bolt then remove water pipe. 12. Remove fixing bolt from bracket (Between cylinder block and intake manifold) of intake manifold side.
025RW002
13. Remove ignition coil bracket fixing bolt. 14. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose. 15. Remove the four throttle body nuts. 16. Remove bolt and seven nuts, and remove intake manifold.
042RW001
8. Disconnect hose from fuel pressure regulator then remove fuel rail assembly. 9. Remove throttle valve control cable from throttle body. 10. Remove fixing bolts for generator bracket.
027RW002
065RW025
6A22

6. Install generator bracket and tighten generator bracket bolts. Torque Long bolts: 35 Nm (25 lb ft) Short bolts: 20 Nm (14 lb ft)
Installation
1. Install intake manifold with gasket to cylinder head, tighten bolt and nuts to the specified torque. Torque: 22 Nm (16 lb ft) NOTE: Do not re-use the bolts and nuts.
065RW025 027RW002
2. Install ignition coil bracket fixing bolt. Torque: 20 Nm (14 lb ft) 3. Install intake manifold bracket, tighten bolt. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
7. Install fuel rail assembly to intake manifold and connect hose between fuel pressure regulator and throttle body. 8. Install fuel pipe and tighten joint eye bolt and connect fuel injector harness. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
025RW002
4. Install water pipe to intake manifold. 5. Install the throttle body with paper gasket to the intake manifold, tighten the four nuts. Torque: 9 Nm (78 lb in)
042RW001

9. Connect the connector for throttle position sensor and idle air control valve sensor to throttle body. 10. Install water hoses to throttle body. 11. Install intake duct assembly to throttle body and air cleaner then tighten nut to the intake duct bracket and clamp on the throttle body side and air cleaner side. Torque: 7 Nm (61 lb in) 12. Install PCV hose to air intake duct. 13. Install throttle valve control cable to throttle body. 14. Confirm the free play of throttle valve control cable. Free play: 5.7 to 6.3 mm 15. Fill engine coolant to full level from radiator filler neck. 16. Connect battery ground cable.
6A23
6A24
Cylinder Head Assembly

Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect connector of intake air temperature sensor from intake air duct. 3. Remove PCV hose from air intake duct. 4. Remove nut from air intake duct bracket and loosen hose clamp on throttle body. Remove air intake duct assembly with air cleaner cover. 5. Remove intake air duct bracket from cylinder head. 6. Drain engine coolant. 7. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then remove drive belt. 13. Remove heater hose from adapter side. 14. Remove heater hose from water pipe side. 15. Remove water hose between water pipe and throttle body. 16. Remove fuel pipe joint eye bolts from fuel rail assembly and remove fuel pipe bracket with electric ground cable.
042RW001
17. Disconnect connector for evaporation valve. 18. Remove canister hose. 19. Remove fixing nut of intake manifold stay from cylinder block side.
033RW001
8. Remove radiator upper hose from engine side. 9. Remove four nuts of exhaust front pipe. 10. Remove three bolts from generator bracket then remove the generator with brackets.
025RW002
065RW025
11. Disconnect crankshaft angle sensor connector. 12. Disconnect knock sensor connector.
20. Remove two bolts from intake manifold for water pipe support and remove cylinder head assembly. 21. Remove engine harness cover and disconnect three connectors from chassis harness on left rear side engine compartment. 22. Disconnect connector for power steering pump pressure switch.

23. Remove four bolts and remove crankshaft pulley.
6A25
D Do not allow oil or other chemical substances to come in contact with the belt. They will shorten the life. D Do not attempt to pry or stretch the belt with a screw driver or any other tool during installation. D Store timing belt in cool and dark place. Never expose the belt direct sunlight or heat. 31. Use adjustable wrench to hexagonal portion of camshaft and remove fixing bolts from front end of camshaft. 32. Remove camshaft drive pulley from intake and exhaust camshaft. 33. Remove two idle pulleys, the left side with idle pulley bracket. 34. Remove two bolts and stud bolt and remove timing belt rear cover. 35. Remove camshaft angle sensor 36. Disconnect engine oil pressure switch connector.
020RW014
24. Remove two bolts and nut then remove timing belt front cover. 25. Remove ventilation hose from cylinder block side and from cylinder head side. 26. Remove two bolts, ignition cable cover and remove ignition cables from spark plug. 27. Disconnect camshaft angle sensor connector. 28. Remove ten bolts and remove cylinder head cover. 29. Remove fixing bolt of timing belt tensioner then remove timing belt tensioner.
050RW005
37. Remove camshaft assembly exhaust side. 38. Use J42623 to remove ten cylinder head fixing bolts
020RW010
30. Remove timing belt. CAUTION: D Do not bend or twist belt, otherwise its core could be damaged. The belt should not be bent at a radius less than 30 mm. D Timing belt drive pulley counterhold with J42620.
012RW007
6A26
Installation
1. Clean sealing surface. Put new cylinder head gasket on the cylinder block.
015RW014
012R100002
4. Install the camshaft drive pulley, align a guide hole on the camshaft drive pulley maked IN for in take and EX for exhaust to guide pin on the camshaft. Tighten drive pulley fixing bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 50 Nm (37 lb ft) + 60 New bolts must be used. 5. Connect engine oil pressure switch connector. 6. Install camshaft angle sensor and bolt. Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) 7. Install the timing belt rear cover and tighten three bolts with apply thread sealant to the specified torque. Torque M6 bolt: 6 Nm (52 lb in)
2. Install the cylinder head assembly, tighten cylinder head bolts by four steps tightening method in the following sequence to the specified torque.(use J42623). New bolts must be used. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft) + 90 + 90 + 90
012RW006
3. Install camshaft assembly exhaust side and tighten camshaft bracket bolts in the sequence to the specified torque. Torque: 8 Nm (69 lb in)
020RW012

8. Install left side idle pulley with idle pulley bracket, tighten to the specified torque and install right side idle pulley and tighten to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
6A27
020RW014
020RW016
9. Install timing belt tensioner then tighten it temporarily until make alignment timing belt. 10. Install the cylinder head cover and tighten fixing bolt temporally. 11. Install the timing belt and perform timing belt setting refer to the timing belt in this manual. NOTE: The tensioner setting is critical to reliable engine running, refer to Timing belt tensioner setting. 12. Tighten cylinder head cover to the specified torque. Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) 13. Connect camshaft angle sensor connector. 14. Install the ignition cable to spark plug. 15. Install ignition cable cover and tighten two bolts. Torque: 3 Nm (26 lb in) 16. Install ventilation hoses to cylinder block side and cylinder head side. 17. Install timing belt front cover and tighten two bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) 18. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten four bolts. Torque: 20 Nm (14 lb ft)
19. Connect connector for power steering pump pressure switch. 20. Connect engine harness connector to chassis harness of the left rear of engine compartment and install engine harness cover. 21. Install two bolts to intake manifold for water pipe support. 22. Install fixing nut of intake manifold stay (1) to cylinder block.
025RW002
23. Install canister hose. 24. Connect connector for evaporation valve.
6A28
25. Install fuel pipe joint eye bolts to fuel rail assembly and install fuel pipe bracket with electric ground cable. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
150R100004
33. Install radiator upper hose to engine. 34. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then install the drive belt to normal position.
042RW001
26. Install water hose between water pipe and throttle body. 27. Install heater hose to water pipe side. 28. Install heater hose to adapter side. 29. Connect knock sensor connector. 30. Connect crankshaft angle sensor connector. 31. Install generator with bracket and tighten three bolts. Torque: 20 Nm (14 lb ft)
033RW001
35. Install intake air duct bracket to cylinder head. 36. Install air intake duct assembly with air cleaner cover to throttle body and tighten nut to the air intake duct bracket then tighten hose clamp. Torque 7 Nm (61 lb in) for nut 3 Nm (26 lb in) for hose clamp bolt 37. Install PCV hose to air intake duct. 38. Connect connector of intake air temperature sensor on intake air duct. 39. Connect battery ground cable. 40. Fill engine coolant to full level in the engine coolant reservoir tank.
065RW025
32. Install exhaust front pipe to exhaust manifold and tighten four nuts to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
6A29
Timing Belt
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then remove drive belt.
020RW010
9. Remove timing belt. CAUTION: D Do not bend or twist belt, otherwise its core could be damaged. The belt should not be bent at a radius less than 30 mm. D Timing belt drive pulley counterhold with J42620. D Do not allow oil or other chemical substances to come in contact with the belt. They will shorten the life. D Do not attempt to pry or stretch the belt with a screw driver or any other tool during installation. D Store timing belt in cool and dark place. Never expose the belt direct sunlight or heat.
033RW001
3. Remove engine harness cover and disconnect three connectors from left rear side of engine compartment. 4. Remove four bolts and remove crankshaft pulley.
Installation
1. Install timing belt tensioner then tighten it temporarily until make alignment timing belt.
020RW014
5. Disconnect three connectors of engine harness from chassis harness of left rear side of engine compartment. 6. Remove nut and remove engine harness cover from front of engine. 7. Remove two bolts then remove timing belt front cover. 8. Remove fixing bolt of timing belt tensioner then remove timing belt tensioner (1).
020RW010
6A30

b. Place J43037 between intake and exhaust of camshaft drive gear for prevent to camshaft drive gear movement during timing belt setting. c. Set the timing belt shown in the illustration, ensure that tension side of the timing belt is taut and move the timing belt tension adjustment lever clockwise, until the pointer of the tensioner is flowing.
2. Install the timing belt and perform timing belt setting procedure as follows: a. Bring the engine top dead center No.1 cylinder compression stroke by rotating the engine in the direction of normal operation. If rotated too far, do not turn backwards, always rotate crank in a clockwise direction otherwise tensioner setting will not be corret. The engine is in this position when the notches on the camshaft pulleys align with the marks on the cylinder head cover(1), Check the crankshaft pulley timing mark is aligned (2).
014RW067
014R100005
014RW066

3. Adjust the timing belt tension. Must be done with engine cold at least 8hr cool down. Setting tensioner hot will result in incorrect tensioner setting. The timing belt tension adjusting procedure as follows. Per Setting a. In the state that the tensioner bolt and timing belt are loose, pointer (1) is anywhere to the left of center V notch (Note: The tensioner adjuster (2) is at the 7 oclock position); Viewed from in front of the engine or vehicle.
6A31
014R100033
014R100034
b. Turn the tensioner adjuster (2) with wrench to anticlockwise direction so that the pointer moves to the right edge of the plate, the pointer (1) should not pass the right hand edge of the plate during installation.
CAUTION: Check engine timing. All engine timing marks (two camshaft pulley and crankshaft pulley) must be aligned. If all three timing marks are not aligned the timing belt must be removed and reinstalled. d. Remove the fixing tool J43037. e. Manual rotate the crankshaft two turns (720) clockwise so that marks in timing gear will align again with the mark on cylinder head cover and all three timing marks are aligned. Remainder: If accidentally turn too far, do not turn backward. Continue turn in the same direction. Turning backwards will cause incorrect setting. New Belt Adjustment of the new timing belt. a. Slightly loosen the fastening bolt of the timing belt tension roller, depending on the version, rotate the adjustment cam in direction of arrow (clockwise) until: Version 1: Pointer (1) of the timing belt tension roller aligns with the notch (2).
014R100035
c. Tighten the tensioner bolt to 15 Nm (11 lb ft)(with left hand) whilst keeping the adjuster in control (with right hand).
014R100006
6A32

Used Belt NOTE: Used belt which has been used for more than 2 hours. Adjustment of the used timing belt. Make the adjustment with engine cold. Must be done with engine cold at least 8hr cool down. a. A prerequisite of this operation is that the timing belt timing has been checked. This means that the crankshaft is at 1st cylinder TDC (2) and the camshaft pulleys are fixed with special tool J43037.
b. Version 2: Pointer (1) of the timing belt tension roller aligns with the NEW notch (2).
014R100007
c. Tighten the fastening bolt (1) of the timing tension roller. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
014RW066
Rotate crankshaft clockwise only, if rotated too far, do not turn back this will result in incorrect tensioner setting. b. Loosen fastening bolt (1) of the timing belt tension roller. Apply counterclockwise tension to the timing belt tension roller until the pointer is right at the right edge of the mark (see diagram below). Tighten the fastening bolt (1) of the timing belt tension roller.
020RW010
d. Turn the crankshaft another two turns (720) in engine rotational direction to mark 1st cylinder TDC and check adjustment of the timing belt tension roller. Do not turn crankshaft anti clockwise, this will result in incorrect tensioner setting. If the marks do not align, so repeat the adjustment procedure.
014R100033

Rotate camshaft 720 clockwise only until timing marks align. If accidentally rotated too far, not turn anti clockwise, this will result in incorrect tensioner setting c. Slightly loosen the fastening bolt of the timing belt tension roller, depending on the version, rotate the adjustment cam in direction of arrow (clockwise) until: Version 1: Pointer (1) of the timing belt tension roller is approx. 4 mm to the left of the notch (2).
6A33
e. Tighten the fastening bolt (1) of the timing tension roller. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
020RW010
014R100008
d. Version 2: Pointer (1) of the timing belt tension roller aligns with the USED notch (2).
f. Remove the fixing tool J43037. g. Turn the crankshaft another two turns (720) in engine rotational direction to mark 1st cylinder TDC and check adjustment of the timing belt tension roller. Ensure crankshaft is only turned clockwise, do not turn back, this will result in incorrect tensioner setting. If the pointer (1) of the timing belt tension roller does not align with the corresponding mark (2), the adjustment procedure must be repeated.
014R100009
014R100008
6A34

7. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then install drive belt to normal position.
014R100009
4. Install timing belt front cover and tighten two bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) 5. Install engine harness cover to front top of engine and tighten nut to the specified torque. Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) 6. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten four bolts. Torque: 20 Nm (14 lb ft)
033RW001
8. Connect engine harness three connector to chassis harness of left rear side of engine compartment. 9. Connect battery ground cable.
020RW014
6A35
Camshaft
Camshaft and Associated Parts
011R100005
Legend (1) Camshaft Pulley Fixing Bolt (2) Camshaft Pulley (3) Oil Seal
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Camshaft Bracket Camshaft Bracket Fixing Bolt Camshaft Assembly Exhaust Camshaft Assembly Intake
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove cylinder head cover. Refer to removal procedure for Cylinder Head Cover in this manual. 3. Remove timing belt tensioner and remove timing belt.
020RW010
6A36
4. Use adjustable wrench to hexagonal portion of camshaft, and remove fixing bolt for camshaft pulley from front end of camshaft.
Installation
1. Clean surface of camshaft bracket and HLA. 2. Apply engine oil to journal surface of camshaft bracket and HLA. 3. Install camshaft to cylinder head. 4. Install camshaft bracket according to numerical as shown in the illustration. The bracket number is: D Exhaust: 1 to 5 from front D Intake: 6 to 10 from front.
014RW074
5. Remove camshaft drive pulley from intake and exhaust camshaft. 6. Remove twenty fixing bolts from intake and exhaust camshaft bracket on the cylinder head, then remove camshafts.
014RW052
Camshaft oil seal installation area on the cylinder head of No.1, No.6 and camshaft bracket rear side plug portion must be applied HN1023 or equivalent as in the illustration.
011RW015
CAUTION: D Do not damage camshaft lobe and journal. D Do not damage hydraulic lash adjuster(HLA) and do not allow into foreign materials into cylinder head. 7. Remove oil seal from camshaft.
014R100004

5. Tighten ten camshaft bracket bolts to the specified torque by sequence in the illustration. Torque: 8 Nm (69 lb in)
6A37
6. Use J42609 for installation camshaft oil seal.
014RW075
015RW014
NOTE: Camshaft bearing brackets can be identified by number 1 through 10. Camshaft can be identified by stamping. M: Exhaust camshaft K: Intake camshaft
014RW071
011R100011
6A38

Optional pulley: Must be used on intake camshaft only.
7. Install the camshaft drive pulley. Align the timing mark between notch on the camshaft drive pulley(1) and lug on the camshaft bracket(2).
014R100013 014RW076
Also align a guide hole on the camshaft drive pulley marked IN for intake and EX for exhaust to guide pin on the camshaft when instaling the camshaft drive pulley.
8. Tighten camshaft drive pulley fixing bolt to the specified torque. New bolts must be used. Torque: 50 Nm (37 lb ft) + 60
014RW072
014RW036
9. Install timing belt. Refer to installation procedure for Timing Belt in this manual. 10. Install cylinder head cover. Refer to installation procedure for Cylinder Head Cover in this manual. 11. Connect battery ground cable.
6A39
Engine Assembly
515RX002
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground and positive cable. 2. Remove battery. 3. Make alignment mark on the engine hood and hinges before removal in order to return the hood to original position exactly. 4. Remove engine hood. 5. Drain engine coolant from radiator. 6. Disconnect throttle valve control cable from throttle valve on intake manifold. 7. Remove air duct with air cleaner cover. 8. Remove air cleaner assembly. 9. Disconnect three engine harness connectors from chassis harness of left rear side engine compartment. 10. Disconnect vacuum hose on the brake booster. 11. Disconnect cooling fan harness connector on the left of fan shroud. 12. Disconnect ground cable connector from left and right of front wheel arch upper side. 13. Remove clutch piping bracket from right side of clutch housing.
14. Remove fuel piping bracket from transmission. 15. Remove four nuts from exhaust front pipe exhaust manifold side and remove two bolts from rear side of exhaust front pipe. Remove exhaust front pipe.
150R100004
6A40

29. Remove engine mounting bolt from chassis frame side.
16. Remove transmission mounting fixing bolts and nut from cross member.
022R100006
022RW005
17. Remove transmission front under cover from front portion of clutch housing. 18. Disconnect two fuel pipes at right side of transmission by quick type fuel hose connector. CAUTION: Plug fuel pipe on engine side and fuel hose from fuel tank. 19. Disconnect canister hose next to fuel piping connector. 20. Remove propeller shaft fixing bolt from rear side transmission. 21. Remove fixing bolts between clutch housing and transmission, then move transmission. 22. Remove power steering pump assembly then place the power steering pump along with piping. 23. Disconnect two chassis harness connectors from right rear side engine compartment (under fuse box) and remove two harness clips. 24. Remove engine ground cable from chassis frame. 25. Remove radiator lower hose from engine side. 26. Remove two heater hoses from right side panel. 27. Remove radiator grille. 28. Remove harness clip from behind right horn.
022RW006
30. Lift up the engine assembly.
6A41
Installation
CAUTION: When assembling the engine and transmission, confirm that dowels have been mounted in the specified positions at the engine side. If assembled in the condition that dowels have not been mounted in the specified position, transmission damage can result. 1. Position the engine assembly in the engine compartment. 2. Tighten engine mounting bolt to frame side to the specified torque. Torque: 41 Nm (30 lb ft)
8. Connect two chassis harness connectors to right rear side engine room(under fuse box) and install two harness clips. 9. Install power steering pump assembly and tighten fixing bolts. 10. Install transmission assembly, refer to installation procedure for Transmission section in this manual. 11. Install propeller shaft, refer to installation procedure for Propeller section in this manual. 12. Connect canister hose next to fuel piping connector. 13. Connect two fuel pipes at right side transmission by quick type connector. 14. Install transmission front under cover to front portion of clutch housing. 15. Install transmission mounting fixing bolts and nuts to cross member. Torque: 50 Nm (37 lb ft)
022RW005
022R100006
16. Install exhaust front pipe with three way catalytic convertor to exhaust manifold, then tighten fixing nuts to the specified torque. Torque: 28 Nm (21 lb ft)
022RW006
3. Install harness clip behind right horn. 4. Install the radiator grille and install flasher lamp assembly. 5. Install two heater hoses to right side panel. 6. Install radiator lower hose to engine. 7. Install engine ground cable to chassis frame.
150R100004
6A42
17. Install fuel piping bracket to transmission. 18. Install clutch piping bracket to right side of clutch housing. 19. Connect ground cable connector to left and right of front wheel arch upper side. 20. Connect cooling fan harness connector on the fan shroud. 21. Connect vacuum hose to the brake booster. 22. Connect three engine harness connectors to chassis harness of left rear side of engine compartment. 23. Install air cleaner assembly. 24. Install air duct with air cleaner cover to specified torque. Torque 7 Nm (61 lb in) for air duct fixing 3 Nm (36 lb in) for air duct clamp bolt 25. Connect throttle valve control cable to throttle valve on the intake manifold. Confirm the free play of throttle valve control cable. Free play: 5.7 to 6.3 mm 26. Install engine hood to original position. Refer to installation procedure for Body section in this manual. 27. Install battery, connect positive cable and ground cable. 28. Fill engine coolant to full level in the coolant reservoir tank.
6A43
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head and Associated Parts
011R100006
Legend (1) Cylinder Head Bolt (2) Camshaft Pulley Fixing Bolt (3) Camshaft Pulley (4) Camshaft Oil Seal (5) Camshaft Bracket Bolt
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
Camshaft Exhaust Camshaft Intake Tappet (HLA = Hydraulic Lash Adjuster) Split Collar Valve Spring and Spring Upper Seat Valve
Disassembly
NOTE: D During disassembly, be sure that the valve train components are kept together and identified so that they can be reinstalled in their original locations. D Before removing the cylinder head from the engine and before disassembling the valve mechanism, perform a compression test and note the results.
1. Remove camshaft pulley fixing bolt (2), then pulley (3). 2. Remove camshaft bracket fixing bolt (5), camshaft bracket, then camshaft exhaust (6), and intake side (7).
6A44
3. Remove cylinder head. Use J42623. 4. Remove tappets (HLA). 5. Valve spring, valve spring seat, compress valve spring use J8062 (1) and Adapter J42619 (2). Valve keepers.

1. Check length and width of cylinder head sealing surfaces for deformation and diagonals for warpage use straight edge and feeler gauge. Maximum limit is 0.025 mm (0.001 mm)
011RW011 011RW014
6. Valves, valve stem seals use commercially available remover pliers. Valve spring seats from cylinder head.
2. Height of cylinder head (sealing surface to sealing surface). Dimension (I) 134 mm (5.2756 in)
011RW012 011RW013
6A45
Reassembly
1. Valves, valve stem seals. Refer to Valve Spring, Valve, Valve Guide in this section. 2. Valve seat, valve spring. Refer to Valve Spring, Valve, Valve Guide in this section. 3. Install tappet (HLA). 4. Cylinder head with new cylinder head bolts to cylinder block. Tighten the bolts in 4 steps. 1st step: 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 2nd step: 90 3rd step: 90 4th step: 90
011RW014
5. Camshaft in cylinder head. Refer to Camshaft in this section. 6. Camshaft pulley. Refer to Camshaft in this section.
6A46
Valve Spring, Valve, Valve Guide

Valve Spring, Valve, Valve Guide and Associated Parts
011R100013
Legend (1) Camshaft Pulley Fixing Bolts (2) Camshaft Pulley (3) Camshaft Bracket Fixing Bolt (4) Camshaft Assembly Intake (5) Camshaft Assembly Exhaust (6) Cylinder Head Bolt (7) Cylinder Head
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Tappet (HLA = Hydraulic Lash Adjuster) Split Collar Spring Upper Seat Valve Spring Oil Seal Spring Lower Seat Valve Guide Valve
6A47
Disassembly
1. Remove camshaft pulley (1), (2). 2. Remove camshaft assembly (Intake) (3), (4). 3. Remove camshaft assembly (Exhaust side) (5). 4. Remove cylinder head (6), (7). 5. Remove tappet (8). 6. Use J8062 valve spring compressor and J42619 adapter to remove split collar (9).

1. Use a internal micrometer to measure the diameter valve guide. Valve stem play Intake : 0.03 to 0.057 mm (0.0012 to 0.0022 in) Exhaust : 0.04 to 0.067 mm (0.0016 to 0.0026 in)
011RW020
Valve Guide
011RW014
7. Remove spring upper seat and valve spring (10), (11). 8. Valve, valve guide use commercially available remover pliers. Valve spring lower seat from cylinder head.
CAUTION: Taking care not to damage the valve seat contact surface, when removing carbon adhering to the valve head. Carefully inspect the valve stem for scratching or abnormal wear. If these conditions are present, the valve and the valve guide must be replaced as a set.
Valve Seat
Valve seat width in cylinder head Intake: 1.0 to 1.5 mm (0.039 to 0.0585 in) Exhaust: 1.7 to 2.2 mm (0.0663 to 0.0858 in)
Valve Seat Insert Correction

Remove the carbon from the valve seat insert surface.
011RW013
6A48

2. Install valve to valve guide. Before install valve apply engine oil to the outside of the valve stem. 3. Install lower valve spring seat, valve spring and upper valve spring seat then put split collars on the upper spring seat, using J8062 valve spring compressor for install the split collars.
Valve Seat Insert Replacement

1. Arc weld the rod at several points. Be careful not to damage the aluminum section. 2. Allow the rod to cool for a few minutes. This will cause the valve seat to shrink. 3. Strike the rod and pull it out.
011RW014 014RS015
4. Carefully clean the valve seat pressfit section on the cylinder head side. 5. Heat the pressfit section with steam or some other means to cause expansion. Cool the valve seat with dry ice or some other means. 6. Insert the pressfit section into the valve seat horizontally. 7. Lap the valve and the seat.
4. Install tappet. (HLA) Apply engine oil around the outside of tappets. (HLA = Hydraulic Lash Adjuster) 5. Install camshaft assembly. D Refer to installation procedure for Camshaft in this manual.
Reassembly
1. Install oil seal (3) and spring lower seat (2). Using oil seal replacer J42622, drive in a new oil seal.
014RS019
6A49
Crankshaft
Crankshaft and Associated Parts
015R100024
Legend (1) Cylinder Head Assembly (2) Oil Pump Assembly (3) Pan (4) Pan Support (5) Oil Strainer
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Balance Unit Assembly Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly Main Bearing Cap Crankshaft Cylinder Block Assembly
Disassembly
1. Remove cylinder head assembly (1). Refer to Cylinder head in this manual. 2. Remove oil pan (3). CAUTION: Take care not to damage or deform the sealing flange surface of crankcase. 3. Remove oil pan support (4).
4. Remove oil strainer (5). 5. Remove oil pump assembly (2). 6. Balance unit assembly (6). 7. Remove piston and connecting rod assembly (7). Refer to Piston, Piston Ring and Connecting Rod in this manual. 8. Remove flywheel. 9. Remove rear oil seal and oil baffle plate.
6A50

8. Apply plastigage to the crankshaft journal unit as shown in the illustration.
10. Remove main bearing cap (8). 11. Remove crankshaft (9). 12. Remove crankshaft pulse pickup sensor disc.
Inspection and Repair for Bearing

1. Crankshaft Set the dial indicator as shown in the illustration and measure the crankshaft thrust clearance. If the thrust clearance exceeds the specified limit, replace the thrust bearings as a set. Thrust Clearance Standard : 0.01 mm0.02 mm (0.0004 in0.0008 in) Limit : 0.21 mm (0.0083 in)
014RW055
9. Install main bearing caps, and tighten each bolt to the specified torque. Main bearing caps bolts. Torque: 1st step: 50 Nm (37 lb ft) 2nd step: 45 10. Measure the plastigage width and determine the oil clearance. If the oil clearance exceeds the specified limit, replace the main bearings as a set and/or replace the crankshaft. Standard : 0.015 mm0.04 mm (0.0006 in0.0016 in)
014RW079
Limit : 0.12 mm (0.0047 in)
Main Bearing Clearance

1. Remove the bearing caps and measure the oil clearance. 2. Remove the main bearing cap fixing bolts. Arrange the removed main bearing caps in the cylinder number order. Remove the main bearings. 3. Remove the crankshaft. Remove the main bearings. 4. Clean the upper and lower bearings as well as the crankshaft main journal. 5. Check the bearings for damage or excessive wear. The bearings must be replaced as a set if damage or excessive wear is discovered during inspection. 6. Set the upper bearings and the thrust washers to their original positions. Carefully install the crankshaft.
014RW077
7. Set the lower bearings to the bearing cap original position.
11. Clean the plastigage from the bearings and the crankshaft. Remove the crankshaft and the bearings.
6A51
Crankshaft Inspection
Inspect the surface of the crankshaft journal and crank pins for excessive wear and damage. Inspect the oil seal fitting surfaces for excessive wear and damage. Inspect the oil ports for obstructions.
2. Measure the diameter and the uneven wear of main journal and crank pin. If the crankshaft wear exceeds the specified limit, crankshaft must be replaced. Main journal diameter White color 57.974 to 57.981 mm (2.2824 to 2.2871 in) Green color 57.981 to 57.988 mm (2.2871 to 2.2830 in) Brown color 57.988 to 57.995 mm (2.2830 to 2.2833 in) Crank pin diameter Standard (No color) 48.970 to 48.988 mm (1.9279 to 1.9287 in) Blue (U/S 0.25) 48.720 to 48.738 mm (1.9181 to 1.9188 in) White (U/S 0.5) 48.470 to 48.488 mm (1.9083 to 1.9090 in)
Inspection and Repair for Crankshaft

1. Carefully set the crankshaft. Slowly rotate the crankshaft and measure the runout. If the crankshaft runout exceeds the specified limit, the crankshaft must be replaced. Runout : 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
014RW078
015RS009
NOTE: Take average of several measurements at different points.
6A52
Crankshaft Bearing Selection

When installing new crankshaft bearings or replacing bearings, refer to the selection table below. Select and install the new crankshaft bearings. Crankshaft grinding dimensions Production and Service Crankshaft bearing journal dia. Standard size white green brown Undersize 0.25 (0.0098) green/blue brown/blue Undersize 0.5 (0.0197) green/white brown/white Guide bearing width Standard size Oversize 0.25 (0.0098) Oversize 0.5 (0.0197) NOTE: Take care to ensure the bearings are positioned correctly. Crankshaft pulse pickup sensor disc inspection and repair. Inspect the crankshaft pulse pickup sensor disc for excessive wear and damage. Replace the crankshaft pulse pickup sensor disc if the inspection exceeds wear and damage. 25.950 to 26.002 (1.02171.0237) 26.200 to 26.252 (1.03151.0335) 26.450 to 26.502 (1.04131.0434) 57.481 to 57.488 (2.26302.2633) 57.488 to 57.495 (2.26332.2636) 57.731 to 57.738 (2.27292.2731) 57.738 to 57.745 (2.27312.2734) 57.974 to 57.981 (2.28242.2871) 57.981 to 57.988 (2.28712.2830) 57.988 to 57.995 (2.28302.2833) mm (in)
Reassembly
1. Crankshaft (12). D Install the crankshaft pulse pickup sensor disc. Torque: 13 Nm (113 lb in) D Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and the main bearing caps. D Be sure that they are positioned correctly. D Apply new engine oil to the upper and lower main bearing faces. NOTE: Do not apply engine oil to the main bearing back faces. D Carefully mount the crankshaft. D Apply engine oil to the thrust washer. D Assemble the thrust washer to the No.3 bearing journal. The oil grooves must face the crankshaft. Apply the liquid gasket to rear bearing cap (In grooves provided). D Tighten the crankshaft baring cap bolts in 2 steps: 1st step: 50 Nm (37 lb ft) 2nd step: 45 The new bolts must be used.
015RW039

2. Rear oil seal (10). D Coat lip of seal rings thinly with protective grease. D Install seal ring into cylinder block, use J42616 (1) and J42613 (2). 6. Piston and connecting rod assembly.
6A53
D Apply engine oil to the cylinder bores, the connecting rod bearings and the crankshaft pins. Check to see that the piston ring end gaps are correctly positioned. D Piston rings position (A) every 180. Oil scraper rings (B) offset 25 to 50 mm (1 to 2 in). to left and right from gap of intermediate ring.
015RW009
3. Flywheel (9). 1. Thoroughly clean and remove the oil from the threads of crankshaft. 2. Remove the oil from the crankshaft and flywheel mounting faces. 3. Mount the flywheel on the crankshaft and then install the washer. 4. Use stopper (J42618) to hold the flywheel for prevent from rotating.
015R100025
D Insert the piston/connecting rod assemblies into each cylinder with the piston ring compressor. The front marks (1) must be facing the front of the engine. D Match the numbered caps with the numbers on the connecting rods. Align the punched marks on the connecting rods and caps. D Dot (1) on piston head points to engine timing side, bead on connecting rod points to flywheel side.
015RW010
5. Tighten the flywheel bolts in 2 steps: 1st step: 65 Nm (48 lb ft) 2nd step: 30 45 NOTE: Do not reuse the bolt.
015R100026
6A54
D Tighten the connecting bearing cap bolts in 2 steps: 1st step: 35 Nm (26 lb ft) 2nd step: 45 New bolts must be used. 7. Install the balance unit assembly and tighten the bolts in 2 steps: 1st step: 20 Nm (14 lb ft) 2nd step: 45 Refer to the Balance Unit Assembly section of this manual. 8. Install oil pump assembly, refer to Oil Pump in this manual. 9. Install oil strainer. Torque: 8 Nm (69 lb in) Ensure thread locking compound (Locktite) is used. 10. Install oil pan support and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Clean sealing surface before assembly, and apply four beads of sealant as shown. Torque: 20 Nm (14 lb ft)
013R100003
11. Install oil pan. Tighten the oil pan bolts. Torque: 8 Nm (69 lb in) 12. Install cylinder head assembly, refer to Cylinder Head in this manual.
6A55
Piston and Connecting Rod

Piston, Connecting Rod and Associate Parts
015R100032
Legend (1) Cylinder Head Assembly (2) Cylinder Head Gasket (3) Oil Pan Assembly (4) Pan Support (5) Oil Strainer (6) Balance Unit Assembly
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Connecting Rod Assembly Piston Ring Piston Pin Piston Connecting Rod Connecting Rod Cap
Disassembly
1. Remove cylinder head assembly (1), refer to Cylinder Head Assembly in this manual. 2. Remove cylinder head gasket (2). 3. Remove oil pan assembly (3) and oil pan support (4). 4. Remove oil strainer. 5. Remove balance unit assembly.
6A56
6. Remove connecting rod cap with connecting rod lower bearing. 7. Remove piston and connecting rod assembly. NOTE: Before removing piston and connecting rod assembly, measure thrust clearance. D Remove any ridge or carbon build up from the top end of the cylinder. 8. Remove the piston rings with a piston ring expander (1). Arrange the removed piston rings in the cylinder number order.
Piston Rings
Any worn or damaged part discovered during engine overhaul must be replaced with a new one. 1. Ring end gap measurement D Insert the piston ring into the bore. D Push the ring by the piston, at a right angle to the wall, into the point at which the cylinder bore diameter is the smallest. D Measure the ring end gap. Compression Ring 1st ring Standard: 2nd ring Standard: Oil ring Standard: 0.25 mm0.76 mm (0.0098 in0.0299 in) 2. Measure the clearance between the piston ring groove and the piston ring with a feeler gauge. If the piston ring groove / piston ring clearance exceeds the specified limit, the piston must be replaced. 0.30 mm0.50 mm (0.0118 in0.0197 in) 0.20 mm0.35 mm (0.0079 in0.0138 in)
015R100031
NOTE: Keep the parts removed from each cylinder separate. All parts must be reinstalled in their original positions.
Compression Ring Clearance (1st and 2nd): 0.02 mm0.04 mm (0.0008 in.0.0016 in) Oil Ring Clearance: 0.01 mm0.03 mm (0.0004 in.0.0012 in)

Pistons
Carefully clean away all the carbon adhering to the piston head and the piston ring grooves. NOTE: Never use a wire brush to clean the pistons. Damage will result. Visually check each piston for cracking, scoring, and other signs of excessive wear. If any of the above conditions are found, the piston must be replaced. Grade number 99 00 O/S 0.5 Piston out side diameter 85.970 85.980 mm (3.3846 3.3850 in) 85.990 86.470 mm (3.3854 3.4043 in) 86.470 86.490 mm (3.4043 3.4051 in)
015R100028
6A57
Piston Pin
NOTE: Do not reuse the old piston pin. 1. Use a micrometer to measure the new piston pin outside diameter in both directions at three different positions. Standard diameter: 21 mm (0.8268 in) 2. Install the new piston pin. Coat connecting rod boss and upper part of connecting rod stem with thermo-color pencil. When the required assembly temperature is attained, green color turns black. The colored line (arrow) must not change colors over the entire length, but only up to the start of the connecting rod stem. Heart upper connecting rod boss of new connecting. Assembly temperature: 280 to maximum 320C (536 to maximum 608F).
6. Measure the width of the plastigage and determine the oil clearance. If the oil clearance exceeds the limit, replace the rod bearing as a set. Standard : 0.006 mm0.031 mm (0.0002 in0.0012 in) Limit : 0.12 mm (0.0047 in) 7. Clean the plastigage from the bearings and the crankshaft pins.
015R100029
Connecting Rod Bearings Clearance

1. Measure the oil clearance between the connecting rod and the crankshaft. 1. Remove the connecting rod cap bolts and the rod caps. Arrange the removed rod caps in the cylinder number order. 2. Clean the rod bearings and the crankshaft pins. 3. Carefully check the rod bearings. If even one bearing is found to be damaged or badly worn, the entire bearing assembly must be replaced as a set. Reinstall the bearings in their original positions. Apply plastigage to the crank pin. 4. Reinstall the rod caps to their original positions. Tighten the rod cap bolts. 1st step: 35 Nm (26 lb ft) 2nd step: 45 NOTE: Do not allow the crankshaft to rotate. 5. Remove the rod caps.
6A58

Crankshaft grinding dimensions (continued) Production and Service Conrod bearing journal dia. Standard size (no color code) Undersize 0.25 (0.0098) blue Undersize 0.5 (0.0197) white Conrod bearing journal width Standard size (no color code) Undersize 0.25 (0.0098) blue Undersize 0.5 (0.0197) white Conrod width 25.960 to 26.080 (1.02201.0268) 26.338 to 26.390 (1.03691.0390) 26.210 to 26.330 (1.03191.0366) 26.460 to 26.580 (1.04171.0465) 48.470 to 48.488 (1.90831.9090) 48.720 to 48.738 (1.91811.9188) 48.970 to 48.988 (1.92791.9287) mm (in)
Reassembly
1. Install connecting rod 2. Install piston 3. Install piston pin, refer to piston pin. NOTE: When changing piston / connecting rod combinations, do not change the piston / piston pin combination and do not reuse the old piston pin. 4. Install piston ring with the piston ring expander. D New piston rings with Top uppermost use commercially available pliers. D Position ring gaps: 1 Compression rings 180to each other as illustrated (A). 2 Offset oil control rings (B) or (B) 25 to 50 mm (1 to 2 in). from gap of second compression ring.
015R100025
D After installation, apply engine oil to the entire circumference of the piston rings. Check to see that all the rings rotate smoothly.

5. Install piston and connecting rod assembly. D Insert the bearings into the connecting rods and caps. Apply new engine oil to the bearing faces and bolts. D Tighten the connecting rod cap bolts in 2 steps: 1st step : 35 Nm (26 lb ft) 2nd step: 45 NOTE: Do not apply engine oil to the bearing back faces. 6. Install balance unit assembly, refer to Balance Unit Assembly in this manual. 7. Install balance unit assembly, refer to Balance Unit Assembly in this manual. 8. Oil strainer and O-ring. 9. Install oil pan support assembly, refer to Reassembly of Crankshaft in this manual. 10. Install cylinder head gasket. 11. Install cylinder head assembly. D Refer to Cylinder Head Assembly in this manual.
6A59
6A60
Cylinder Block
Cylinder Block and Associated Parts
015R100024
Legend (1) Cylinder Head Assembly (2) Oil Pump Assembly (3) Oil Pan (4) Oil Pan Support (5) Oil Strainer
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Balance Unit Assembly Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly Main Bearing Cap Crankshaft Cylinder Block
Disassembly
1. Remove cylinder head assembly. 2. Remove cylinder head gasket. 3. Remove oil pan assembly. 4. Remove oil pan support. 5. Remove oil strainer. 6. Remove oil pump assembly.
7. Remove balance unit assembly. 8. Remove piston and connecting rod assembly. 9. Remove flywheel. 10. Remove rear oil seal retainer assembly. 11. Remove main bearing cap. 12. Remove crankshaft. 13. Cylinder block.
6A61

1. Inspect the cylinder head gasket and any other material adhering to the upper surface of the cylinder block. CAUTION: Be very careful not to allow any material to accidentally drop into the cylinder block. Be very careful not to scratch the cylinder block. 2. Carefully inspect the oil pump, rear oil seal retainer, and crankcase assembly installation surface seal. 3. Wipe the cylinder block clean. 4. Visually inspect the cylinder block. If necessary, use a flaw detector to perform a dye penetrate and hydraulic (or air pressure) test. If cracking or other damage is discovered, the cylinder block must either be repaired or replaced.
Grade number 99 00 O/S 0.5
Cylinder bore 85.985 85.995 mm (3.3852 3.3856 in) 85.995 86.005 mm (3.3856 3.3860 in) 86.495 86.505 mm (3.4053 3.4057 in)
NOTE: For information on piston diameter, please refer to the section Inspection and repair of the Piston and Connecting Rod in this manual.
Reassembly
1. Cylinder block. 2. Install crankshaft. D Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and the main bearing caps. Apply liquid gasket to rear bearing cap in slots provided. D Be sure that they are positioned correctly. D Apply new engine oil to the upper and lower main bearing faces. NOTE: Do not apply engine oil to the bearing back faces. D Carefully mount the crankshaft. D Apply engine oil to the thrust washer. 3. Install rear oil seal. D Coat lip of seal rings thinly with protective grease. D Install seal ring into cylinder block, use J42616 (1) and J42613 (2).
Flatness
1. Using a straight edge and feeler gauge, check that the upper surface of the cylinder block is not warped. CAUTION: Be very careful not to allow any material to accidentally drop into the upper surface of the cylinder block. Be very careful not to scratch the upper surface of the cylinder block. 2. After re-grinding cylinder block maximum piston protrusion 0.4 mm (0.0157 in).
012RW013
Cylinder Bore
Use a cylinder gauge to measure the cylinder bore diameter in both the axial and thrust directions. Each measurement should be made at six points. CAUTION: Be very careful not to allow any material to accidentally drop into the upper surface of the cylinder block. Be very careful not to scratch the upper surface of the cylinder block. If the measurement exceeds the specified limit, the cylinder block must be replaced.
015RW009
Refer to Crankshaft in this manual.
6A62
4. Install flywheel 1. Thoroughly clean and remove the oil from the threads of crankshaft. 2. Remove the oil from the crankshaft and flywheel mounting faces. 3. Mount the flywheel on the crankshaft then install the washer and temporally hand tighten bolts. 4. Use stopper (J42618) to prevent the crankshaft from rotating. Tighten the flywheel bolts in 2 steps: 1st step: 65 Nm (48 lb ft) 2nd step: 30 45 NOTE: Do not reuse the bolt.
015R100025
Refer to Piston and Connecting Rod in this manual. 6. Install balance unit assembly and tighten the bolts. Torque : 30 Nm (22 lb ft) 7. Install oil pump assembly, refer to section 6G Oil Pump in this manual. 8. Install oil strainer. 9. Install oil pan support. 10. Install oil pan assembly. Refer to Crankshaft in this manual.
015RW010
5. Install piston and connecting rod assembly. D Apply engine oil to the cylinder bores, the connecting rod bearings and the crankshaft pins. NOTE: Do not apply engine oil to the bearing back faces. D Position ring gaps: 1 Compression rings 180 to each other as illustrated (A). 2 Offset oil control rings 25 to 50 mm (1 to 2 in) from gap of second compression ring (B).
6A63
Balance Unit Assembly

Balance Unit Assembly and Associated Parts
051R100007
Legend (1) Oil Pan (2) Oil Pan Support
(3) Oil Strainer (4) Balance Unit Assembly (5) Shim
Disassembly
1. Remove the oil pan. 2. Remove the oil pan support.
6A64

2. In this crankshaft position, the flattened side (arrows) of both balancer shafts must face downward and must be on a horizontal line.
3. Remove the oil strainer (1) from oil pump and the oil baffle plate (2).
051RW009 051RW010
Adjustment
1. Turn crankshaft in engine rotational direction to align the alignment mark (2) at 1st cylinder TDC.
3. Screw measuring device J43038 (3) with long knurled bolt (1) into 1st balancer shaft (intake side) and tighter handtight measuring arm (5) must point in 9 oclock direction shown in this illustration. Install dial gauge holder with dial gauge (4) on cylinder block.
014RW066
051RW007

4. Place pre tensioned probe (6) of gauge on measuring arm of measuring device J43038. The probe must be set precisely between the notch marks, square to the plane surface (7).
6A65
6. The tooth backlash must be measured in 4 different positions turn the crankshaft further at the fastening bolt of the timing belt drive gear by 45 in the engine rotational direction until the measuring arm (2) is at 6 oclock.
051RW006
5. Determine the left and right stops by turning the knurled bolt (2). Set the dial of the gauge to zero. Use the knurled bolt (2) to move the 2nd balancer shaft (exhaust side) back and forth. Again simultaneously read off the tooth backlash from the gauge. The permissible tooth backlash is: 0.02 mm to 0.06 mm (0.0008 to 0.0024 in).
051RW008
7. Then loosen the knurled bolt (1) fix the measuring arm at 9 oclock again and repeat the measurement.
051RW007
8. If the value determined in one of the 4 measurements lies outside the tolerance 0.02 mm to 0.06 mm (0.0008 to 0.0024 in), the tooth backlash must be adjusted.
051RW007
6A66
9. Remove balance unit from cylinder block/crankshaft bearing caps and remove with balancer piece. The balancer piece has a number (code), for easy assignment. The tooth backlash can be adjusted by using a balancer piece with a different thickness. Code 55 58 61 64 67 70 73 76 79 82 85 Thickness of balancer piece in mm 0.535 to 0.565 0.565 to 0.595 0.595 to 0.625 0.625 to 0.655 0.655 to 0.685 0.685 to 0.715 0.715 to 0.745 0.745 to 0.775
051RW010
0.775 to 0.805 0.805 to 0.835 0.835 to 0.865
3. Install selected balancer piece (2) with balancer shaft unit to cylinder block/crankshaft bearing cap tighten all fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 30 Nm (22 lb ft) CAUTION: Take great care not to chip or dent teeth when meshing gear sets on assembly. 4. After installing the balancer shaft unit, recheck the tooth backlash and readjust if necessary. NOTE: If the balancer shaft unit has to be replaced, use the thickest balancer piece with the code 85 for the initial assembly this guarantees tooth backlash in all conditions. 5. Install oil strainer to oil pump with new seal ring and insert fixing bolts with locking agent to the specified torque. Torque: 8 Nm (69 lb in) 6. Install oil pan support. Torque: 20 Nm (14 lb ft) D Adjust surfaces of the cylinder block and the oil pan support.
NOTE: The next larger or smaller balancer alters the tooth backlash by 0.02 mm (0.0008 in). Example for selection of balancer piece: The installed balancer piece with the code 70 gave a tooth backlash of 0.08 mm (0.0031 in). If a balancer piece with the code 67 is now installed, the tooth backlash will be approx. 0.06 mm (0.0024 in). CAUTION: Only one balancer piece may be installed.
Reassembly
1. Turn crankshaft in engine rotational direction to align the alignment mark (2) at 1st cylinder TDC.
014RW066
2. Turn balancer shafts until the flattened sides (arrows) of both balancer shafts face downward and are on a horizontal line.
035RW026
7. Install oil pan. Torque: 8 Nm (69 lb in)
6A67

Engine Main Specifications
MODEL TYPE BORE STROKE DISPLACEMENT COMPRESSION RATIO MAIN BEARINGS VALVE LIFTERS AND GAP SPARK PLUGS AND GAP ENGINE OIL CAPACITY Factory fill or Rebuilt engine With Filter Replacement Without Filter Replacement IDLING SPEED RADIATOR TYPE COOLANT CAPACITY THERMOSTAT FUEL CAPACITY 5.0 liters (5.3 US quarts) 4.5 liters (4.8 US quarts) 4.2 liters (4.4 US quarts) 800 rpm Tube and Corrugated Fin Pressure Type 6.9 liters (7.3 US quarts) for MT 7.0 liters (7.4 US quarts) for AT Wax Pellet Type 74 liters (19.5 US gallons) for Rodeo 67 liters (17.7 US gallons) for Rodeo Sport Y22SE Four cycle, Overhead Camshaft, Water cooled 86 94.6 mm (3.39 3.72 in) 2198 cc (134.1 in3) 10 : 1 5 Hydraulic, No adjustment necessary Platinum Tipped, 1.05 mm (0.04 in)
6A68
Camshaft bracket, Timing gear camshaft side, Cylinder head
011R100004
6A69
Timing gear crankshaft (center bolt), Timing belt cover front, Timing belt cover rear, Timing belt tensioner, Camshaft angle sensor
020R100009
6A70
Crankshaft main bearing, Oil pan support, Oil pan, Balance unit assembly, Connrod Cap, Oil pump, Oil strainer
015R100035
6A71
Spark plug, Throttle body, EGR valve adaptor assembly, Bypass housing assembly, Thermostat assembly, inlet manifold assembly, Exhaust manifold assembly, heat shield, Ignition cable cover
011R100008
6A72
Engine mount
022R100005
6A73
Special Tools
J42613 Installer; Rear crankshaft seal ring
J42619 Adapter; Valve spring
J42609 Remover/Installer; Crankshaft carrier seal
J42622 Installer sleeve; Valve stem seal
J8062 Compressor; Valve spring (Use with J328920 base)
J42623 Socket wrench; Cylinder head bolt
J43037 Locking tool camshaft gear
J42620 Holding wrench; Driven gear fix
J42616 Installer; Rear crankshaft seal
J42618 Locking device; Flywheel
SECTION
ENGINE COOLING (Y22SE 2.2L)
RODEO
6B1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draining and Refilling Cooling System . . . . . Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Water Pump and Associated Parts . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B1 6B2 6B4 6B4 6B5 6B5 6B5 6B5 6B5 6B6 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B6 6B6 6B6 6B7 6B7 6B8 6B9 6B10 6B11 6B12
Service Precaution
6B2
General Description
111RW001
Legend (1) Water Pump (2) Thermostat (3) Radiator (4) Reservoir Tank
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Coolant Distributor Cylinder Block and Head Throttle Body Heater
The Cooling System is a pressurized type, where the water pump, which is cambelt driven, forces the circulation of the coolant through the cylinder block and head. The thermostat regulates the flow of coolant between the radiator and the bypass circuit. The heater is part of the bypass circuit. The throttle body preheat is a separate circuit which is not regulated by the thermostat. An oil cooler may be fitted as part of this circuit.
Water Pump
The water pump is centrifugal type and is driven by timing belt.
030RW003
6B3
Thermostat
The thermostat is a bypass type and is a wax pellet type with a air hole (1).
D Calculating mixing ratio
F06RW005
031RW003
NOTE: Antifreeze solution + Water = Total cooling system capacity. D Total Cooling System Capacity 6.9 Lit (7.3 US quarts) for M/T 7.0 Lit (7.4 US quarts) for A/T
Radiator
The radiator is a flow type with corrugated fins.
110RX005
Antifreeze Solution
D Relation between Mixing ratio and Freezing temperature of the engine coolant varies with the ratio of antifreeze solution in water. Proper mixing ratio can be determined by referring to the chart. Supplemental inhibitors or additives claiming to increase cooling capability that have not been specifically approved by Isuzu are not recommended for addition to the cooling system.
111RW002
D Mixing ratio Check the specific gravity of engine coolant in the cooling system temperature ranges from 0C to 50C using a suction type hydrometer, then determine the density of the engine coolant by referring to the table.
6B4
Diagnosis
Engine Cooling Trouble
Condition Engine overheating Possible cause Low Engine Coolant level Thermo mater unit faulty Faulty thermostat Faulty Engine Coolant temperature sensor Clogged radiator Faulty radiator cap Low engine oil level or use of improper engine oil Clogged exhaust system Faulty Throttle Position sensor Open or shorted Throttle Position sensor circuit Damaged cylinder head gasket Engine overcooling Engine slow to warmup Faulty thermostat Faulty thermostat Thermo unit faulty Replenish Replace Replace Repair or replace Clean or replace Replace Replenish or change oil Clean exhaust system or replace faulty parts Replace throttle valve assembly Repair or replace Replace Replace Replace Replace 4. Refill the cooling system with the EC using a solution that is at least 50 percent antifreeze but no more than 70 percent antifreeze. 5. Fill the radiator to the base of the filler neck. Fill the EC reserve tank to MAX line when the engine is cold. 6. Block the drive wheels and firmly apply the parking brake. Shift an automatic transmission to P (Park) or a manual transmission to neutral. 7. Remove the radiator cap. Start the engine and warm it up at 2,500 3,000 rpm for about 30 minutes. 8. When the air comes out from the radiator filler neck and the EC level has gone down, replenish with the EC. Repeat this procedure until the EC level does not go down. Then stop the engine and install the radiator cap. Let the engine cool down. 9. After the engine has cooled, replenish with EC up to the MAX line of the reserve tank. 10. Start the engine. With the engine running at 3,000 rpm, make sure there is no running water sound from the heater core (behind the center console). 11. If the running water sound is heard, repeat steps 8 to 10. Correction
Draining and Refilling Cooling System

Before draining the cooling system, inspect the system and perform any necessary service to ensure that it is clean, does not leak and is in proper working order. The engine coolant (EC) level should be between the MIN and MAX lines of reserve tank when the engine is cold. If low, check for leakage and add EC up to the MAX line. There should not be any excessive deposit of rust or scales around the radiator cap or radiator filler hole, and the EC should also be free from oil. Replace the EC if excessively dirty. 1. Completely drain the cooling system by opening the drain plug at the bottom of the radiator. 2. Remove the radiator cap. WARNING: TO AVOID THE DANGER OF BEING BURNED, DO NOT REMOVE THE CAP WHILE THE ENGINE AND RADIATOR ARE STILL HOT. SCALDING FLUID AND STEAM CAN BE BLOWN OUT UNDER PRESSURE. 3. Disconnect all hoses from the EC reserve tank. Scrub and clean the inside of the reserve tank with soap and water. Flush it well with clean water, then drain it. Install the reserve tank and hoses.
6B5
Water Pump
Water Pump and Associated Parts
030RW004
Legend (1) Water Pump Assembly
(2) O Ring (3) Bolt
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Drain coolant. 3. Radiator hose (on inlet pipe side). 4. Remove timing belt, refer to Timing Belt in this manual. 5. Remove the bolts (3) and water pump assembly.
Installation
1. Before installing water pump, coat sealing surface with silicon grease. 2. Install water pump assembly and tighten bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 3. Timing belt D Install timing belt, refer to timing belt installation step in Timing Belt in this manual. 4. Connect radiator hose and replenish EC. 5. Connect battery ground cable.
Inspection
Make necessary repair and parts replacement if extreme wear or damage is found during inspection. Should any of the following problems occur, the entire water pump assembly must be replaced: D Crack in the water pump body D EC leakage from the seal unit D Play or abnormal noise in the bearing D Cracks or corrosion in the impeller
6B6
Thermostat
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Drain engine coolant from the radiator and engine. 3. Disconnect radiator hose from the inlet pipe. 4. Remove thermostat housing.
Installation
1. Before installing thermostat, coat sealing surface with silicon grease. 2. Install gasket. 3. Install thermostat housing and tighten bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 15 Nm (11 lb ft) 4. Installation rubber hose. 5. Replenish engine coolant (EC). 6. Start engine and check for EC leakage.
031RW012
Inspection
Suspend the thermostat in a waterfilled container using thin wire. Place a thermometer next to the thermostat. Do not directly heat the thermostat. Gradually increase the water temperature. Stir the water so that the entire water is same temperature. Confirm the temperature when the valve first begins to open. Valve opening temperature 92C (197.6F) Confirm the temperature when the valve is fully opened. Valve full open temperature 107C (224.6F) Make necessary repair and parts replacement if extreme wear or damage is found during inspection.
6B7
Radiator
Radiator and Associated Parts
110RX004
Legend for Manual Transmission (M/T) (1) Radiator (2) Bracket
(3) Cooling Fan Assembly (4) Radiator Cap (5) Radiator Hose
6B8
110R100004
Legend for Automatic Transmission (A/T) (1) Radiator (2) Bracket
(3) Cooling Fan Assembly (4) Radiator Cap (5) Radiator Hose
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor connector. (For M/T one connector, for A/T two connectors) 3. Loosen a drain plug to drain EC. (Engine coolant) 4. Disconnect radiator inlet hose and outlet hose from the engine. 5. Remove fan assembly, bolts on upper sides and the bottom. 6. Disconnect the reservoir tank hose from radiator. 7. Remove bracket(2).
110RX003
6B9
110R100005
110RS006
8. Lift out the radiator assembly with hose. 9. Remove rubber cushions on both upper sides and the bottom.
Radiator Core
1. A bent fin may result in reduced ventilation and overheating may occur. All bent fins must be straightened. Pay close attention to the base of the fin when it is being straightened. 2. Remove all dust, bugs and other foreign material.
Inspection
Radiator Cap
Measure the valve opening pressure of the pressurizing valve with a radiator filler cap tester. Replace the cap if the valve opening pressure is outside the standard range. Valve opening pressure kPa (psi) 93.3 122.7 (13.5 17.8) Cap tester: J2446001 Adapter: J33984A Check the condition of the vacuum valve in the center of the valve seat side of the cap. If considerable rust or dirt is found, or if the valve seat cannot be moved by hand, clean or replace the cap. Valve opening vacuum kPa (psi) 1.96 4.91 (0.28 0.71)
Flushing the Radiator

Thoroughly wash the inside of the radiator and the engine coolant passages with cold water and mild detergent. Remove all sign of scale and rust.
Cooling System Leakage Check

Use a radiator cap tester to force air into the radiator through the filler neck at the specified pressure of 147 kPa (21.3 psi) with a cap tester: D Leakage from the radiator D Leakage from the coolant pump D Leakage from the water hoses D Check the rubber hoses for swelling. Cap tester: J2446001 Adapter: J33984A
6B10
110RX002
110R100005
Installation
1. Install rubber cushions on both sides of radiator bottom. 2. Install radiator assembly with hose, taking care not to damage the radiator core. 3. Install bracket and support the radiator upper tank with the bracket and secure the radiator. 4. Connect reserve tank hose. 5. Install fan assembly (3). 6. Connect radiator inlet hose and outlet hose to the engine.
7. Connect battery ground cable. 8. Pour engine coolant up to filler neck of radiator, and up to MAX mark of reservoir tank. Important operation (in case of 100% engine coolant change) procedure for filling with engine coolant. D Remove radiator cap. D Fill with engine coolant (EC) to the radiator filler neck. D Fill with EC to the MAX line on the reservoir. D Start the engine with the radiator cap removed and bring to operating temperature by running engine at 2,500 3,000 rpm for 30 minutes. D By EC temperature gauge reading make sure that the thermostat is open. D If air bubbles come up to the radiator filler neck, replenish with EC. Repeat until the EC level does not drop any further. Install the radiator cap and stop the engine. D Replenish EC to the MAX line on the reservoir and leave as it is until the engine gets cool. D After the engine gets cool, start the engine and make sure there is no water running noise heard from the heater core while the engine runs at 3000 rpm. D Should water running noise be heard, repeat the same procedure from the beginning.
110RX003
6B11

Transmission Type Cooling system Radiator Heat radiation capacity Heat radiation area Radiator front area Radiator dry weight (with fan) Radiator cap valve opening pressure Engine coolant capacity Engine coolant pump Thermostat Engine coolant total capacity Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Engine Coolant forced circulation (1 tube in row) Tube type corrugated 62.8 kw (54000 Kcal/h) 7.6773m@ (11900 in@) 0.2639m@ (409 in@) 55.4 N (5.65 kg) 1.8 Lit (1.9 US quarts) 73.8 kw (63500 Kcal/h) 9.9817m@ (15472 in@) 0.2639m@ (409 in@) 88.3 N (9.0 kg) 1.9 Lit (2.0 US quarts)
108 kpa (15.7 psi) Centrifugal type Bypass type 6.9 Lit (7.3 US quarts) 7.0 Lit (7.4 US quarts)
6B12
Special Tool
J2446001 Tester; radiator cap
J33984A Adapter; radiator cap
SECTION
ENGINE FUEL (Y22SE 2.2L)
RODEO
6C1
ENGINE
ENGINE FUEL (Y22SE 2.2L) For Long Wheel Base
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . InTank Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tube / Quick Connector Fittings . . . . . Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cautions During Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C1 6C2 6C3 6C4 6C4 6C4 6C5 6C5 6C5 6C5 6C6 6C6 6C6 6C7 6C7 6C7 6C7 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reuse of QuickConnector. . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembling Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tank and Associated Parts. . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Gauge Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C7 6C8 6C8 6C9 6C9 6C9 6C9 6C9 6C10 6C10 6C10 6C10 6C10 6C10 6C11 6C11
Service Precaution
6C2
General Description
140R200026
Legend (1) Fuel Filler Cap (2) Fuel Tank (3) Rollover Valve (4) Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly (5) Fuel Filter (6) Fuel Rail (7) Intake Manifold EndOFCallout
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
Fuel Pressure Control Valve Duty Solenoid Valve Throttle Valve Canister Vent Hose Evapo Shut Off Valve Separator

When working on the fuel system, there are several things to keep in mind: Any time the fuel system is being worked on, disconnect the negative battery cable except for those tests where battery voltage is required. Always keep a dry chemical extinguisher near the work area. (Class B) fire
6C3
Fuel Metering
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is in complete control of this fuel delivery system during normal driving conditions. The intake manifold function, like that of a diesel, is used only to let air into the engine. The fuel is injected by separate injectors that are mounted over the intake manifold. The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor measures the changes in the intake manifold pressure which result from engine load and speed changes, which the MAP sensor converts to a voltage output. This sensor generates the voltage to change corresponding to the flow of the air drawn into the engine. The changing voltage is transformed into an electric signal and provided to the PCM. With receipt of the signals sent from the MAP sensor, Intake Air Temperature sensor and others, the PCM determines an appropriate fuel injection pulse width feeding such information to the fuel injector valves to affect an appropriate air/fuel ratio. The Multiport Fuel Injection system utilizes an injection system where the injectors turn on at every crankshaft revolution. The PCM controls the injector spray so that the correct amount of fuel is metered depending on driving conditions. Two interchangeable O rings are used on the injector that must be replaced when the injectors are removed. The fuel rail is attached to the top of the intake manifold and supplies fuel to all the injectors. Fuel is recirculated through the rail continually while the engine is running. This removes air and vapors from the fuel as well as keeping the fuel cool during hot weather operation. The fuel pressure control valve that is mounted on the fuel rail maintains a pressure differential across the injectors under all operating conditions. It is accomplished by controlling the amount of fuel that is recirculated back to the fuel tank based on engine demand. See Section Driveability and Emission for more information and diagnosis.
Replace all pipes with the same pipe and fittings that were removed. Clean and inspect O rings. Replace if required. Always relieve the line pressure before servicing any fuel system components. Do not attempt repairs on the fuel system until you have read the instructions and checked the pictures relating to that repair. Adhere to all Notices and Cautions. All gasoline engines are designed to use only unleaded gasoline. Unleaded gasoline must be used for proper emission control system operation. Its use will also minimize spark plug fouling and extend engine oil life. Using leaded gasoline can damage the emission control system and could result in loss of emission warranty coverage. All cars are equipped with an Evaporative Emission Control System. The purpose of the system is to minimize the escape of fuel vapors to the atmosphere.
6C4
Fuel Filter
Fuel Filter and Associated Parts
140R100007
Legend (1) Fuel Hose (2) Fuel Filter EndOFCallout
(3) Fuel Filter Holder (4) Fuel Hose
Removal
CAUTION: When repair to the fuel system has been completed, start engine and check the fuel system for loose connections or leakage. For the fuel system diagnosis, see Section Driveability and Emission. 1. Disconnect battery ground cable.

2. Remove fuel filler cap.
6C5
InTank Fuel Filter

The fuel filter is located on the lower end of the fuel pickup tube in the fuel tank. The fuel filter prevents dirt and water from entering the fuel system not unless the fuel filter is completely submerged in water. The fuel filter is maintenance free, requiring no maintenance. Excess water and sediment restricts fuel supply to the engine resulting in engine stall. If this happens, the fuel tank would need to be cleaned thoroughly.
Fuel Pump Flow Test

If reduction of fuel supply is suspected, perform the following checks. 1. Make sure that there is fuel in the tank. 2. With the engine running, check the fuel feed pipe and hose from the fuel tank to injector for signs of leakage. Retighten pipe and hose connection if found loose. Also inspect for bent or kinked pipes and hoses. 3. Insert the hose from the fuel feed pipe into a clean container and check for fuel pump flow rate. 4. Connect the pump relay terminals with a jumper wire(1) as shown and start the fuel pump to measure delivery.
140R100023
Legend (1) Fuel Filler Cap (2) Receive Rubber Drain EndOFCallout 3. Disconnect fuel hoses(1) from fuel filter on both engine side and fuel tank side. 4. Fuel filter fixing bolt. Remove the fuel filter fixing bolt on fuel filter holder(3). 5. Remove fuel filter(2).
Inspection
1. Replace the fuel filter if the fuel leaks from fuel filter body or if the fuel filter body itself is damaged. 2. Replace the filter if it is clogged with dirt or sediment. 3. Check the drain and if it is clogged with dust, clean it out with air.
Installation
1. Install the fuel filter in the proper direction. 2. Install fuel filter holder fixing bolt. 3. Connect fuel hoses on engine side and fuel tank side. 4. Install fuel filler cap 5. Connect the battery ground cable.
140R100012
CAUTION: Avoid creating sparks when connecting jumper wires. Delivery Time 15 seconds Delivery 0.38 liters minimum
Inspection
1. After installation, start engine and check for fuel leak age. 2. Check clogged drain port of the receive rubber by the foreign material, repair or clear if clogged it.
If the measured value is out of specifications, conduct the pressure test.
Pressure test
For the pressure test to the fuel system, see Section 6E Fuel Control System.
6C6
Fuel Pump
Fuel Pump and Associated Parts
140R200009
Legend (1) Fuel Feed Port (2) Fuel Tube/Quick Connector (3) Fuel Return Port (4) Fuel Pump and Sender (FPS) Assembly EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Connector; Fuel Feed Pump Connector; Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Retainer (Fuel pump lock) Fuel Tank Assembly Seal; Fuel Pump
Removal
CAUTION: When repair to the fuel system has been completed, start engine and check the fuel system for loose connection or leakage. For the fuel system diagnosis, see section Driveability and Emission. 1. Remove fuel tank assembly(8). Refer to Fuel Tank Removal in this section. 2. Remove Fuel Tube/Quick Connector (2). NOTE: Refer to Fuel Tube/Quick Connector Fittings in this section when performing fuel tube repairs. 3. Remove the retainer (7) with tool J39765 and remove the fuel pump and sender (FPS) assembly (4). NOTE: After removing pump assembly (4), cover fuel tank to prevent any dust entering.
140R100035
6C7
Installation
1. Install FPS assembly(4) with the retainer (7) and new seal; fuel pump (9) by J39765. 2. Install Fuel Tube/Quick Connector (2).
NOTE: Refer to Fuel Tube/Quick Connector Fittings in this section when performing fuel tube repairs. 3. Install fuel tank assembly(8). Refer to Fuel Tank Installation.
Fuel Tube / Quick Connector Fittings

Precautions
Lighting match, cigarette and/or lighter is prohibitted. Keep flammable materials safely stored to prevent accidental fires. Disconnect the battery ground cable to prevent electrical shorts. Pretreat piping system to prevent thermal damage or spattering when welding or conducting other heat generating repairs.
Removal
1. Open the fuel cap to relieve the fuel pressure in the tank. Use compressed air to blow off any dirt when disconnecting the fuel quick connect fittings.
Cautions During Work
141R100002
Cover the connectors with a cloth when disconnecting the piping to prevent fuel spray, in case of any existing fuel pressure in the system. 2. For removal of the quick connector, hold the quick connector in one hand, and pull out the connentor with the other hand while pressing the square relieve button of the connector, as illustrated.
140R100032
Legend (1) O-ring (2) Port (3) Connector (4) Plastic Tube EndOFCallout Prevent battery electrolyte or wiping cloth soaked with battery electrolyte on the fuel piping. Do not use fuel piping that has been exposed to battery electrolyte. Be careful not to bend or twist the fuel pipe while performing repairs. Replace fuel piping if the existing fuel piping is damaged in any way.
140R100037
6C8

After cleaning the pipe, insert it straight into the connector until it clicks. After it clicks, try pulling it out to make sure that it is not drawn and is securely locked.
NOTE: Do not use tools of any kind. Only use bare hands when disconnecting the connector. Use a lubricant (light oil) and/or push and pull the connector until the pipe is disconnected. Cover the connectors with a plastic bag after disassembly to prevent dirt and water from entering.
140R100036
141R100028
Assembling Advice
Immediateld install the pipe after applying light engine oil onto pipe for easier assembly. The pipe must be clean of dirt when installing pipe or poor sealing may occur. Test/Inspection After Assembling 1. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position and listen for pump startup. Fuel pressure will increase as soon as the fuel pump is actuated. Inspect for fuel leak. 3. Perform step 2 a few times to make sure there are no fuel leakage. 4. Start the engine and observe engine idle speed. The fuel injection system may run poorly if dirt had entered the system during the repair.
Reuse of QuickConnector
Replace the port and connector if a scratch, dent or crack is found. Clean the fuel pipe of any dirt particles before installing. The Pipe end must be free of defects (i.e., scratch, rust and dent) before fuel pipe installation or poor sealing may occur. Replace the fuel pipe if damaged.
Fuel Pump Relay

General Description
In order to control the FPS assembly operation, the FPS relay is provided. When the starter switch is turned to ON position, the FPS relay operates the FPS for 2 seconds. When it is turned to START position, the Engine Control Module receives the reference pulse from the Ignition Control Module and it operates the relay, again causing the FPS assembly to feed fuel.
6C9
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank and Associated Parts
140R200025
Legend (1) Fuel Tank Assembly (2) Fuel Tank Fixing Bolt (QTY: 5) (3) Fuel Tank Fixing Nut (QTY: 1) (4) Fuel Filler Hose (5) Fuel Breather Hose EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Fuel Evapo Hose Fuel Feed Hose Fuel Return Hose Tank Pressure Sensor Connector Fuel Feed Pump Connector
Removal
CAUTION: When repair to the fuel system has been completed, start engine and check the fuel system for loose connection or leakage. For the fuel system diagnosis, see Section Driveability and Emission. 1. Drain the fuel from the fuel tank, refer to the Fuel Pump Flow Test in this section. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Loosen fuel filler cap for reduce the pressure in fuel tank. 4. Support underneath of the fuel tank assembly (1) with a lifter. 5. Disconnect fuel feed hose (7) and fuel return hose (8) near the fuel filter. NOTE: Plug both ends of the fuel hoses to prevent fuel leakage.
6. Disconnect fuel filler hose (4) and fuel breather hose (5) and fuel evapo hose (6) at the fuel filler neck. NOTE: Cover fuel hoses to prevent any dust entering. 7. Remove the five fuel tank assembly fixing bolts (2) and one nut (3). 8. Lower the tank connectors (9,10). and disconnect the wiring
Installation
1. Raise the fuel tank assembly and connect the wiring connectors (9,10). 2. Install fuel tank assembly along with protectors and tighten the five fixing bolts (2) and a nut (3) to the specified torque. Torque: 68 Nm (50 lb ft)
6C10
3. Connect fuel filler hose (4), fuel breather hose (5), evapo hose (6), and clip them firmly. 4. Connect fuel feed hose (7), fuel return hose (8), and clip them firmly. 5. Tighten fuel filler cap until at least three clicks are heard. 6. Connect battery ground cable.
Fuel Gage Unit

Removal and Installation
Refer to Fuel Pump in this section for removal and installation of the fuel gauge unit since the fuel gauge unit is linked to the fuel pump and sender.
Fuel Filler Cap

General Description
A vacuum valve and pressure valve are built into the fuel filler cap which adjusts the fuel pressure in the fuel tank to prevent fuel tank damage.
Inspection
The fuel filler cap must be inspected for seal condition. The fuel filler cap must be replaced if found defective. CAUTION: A replacement fuel filler cap must be the same as the original. The fuel filler cap valve was designed primarily for this application and must be replaced with the same type or decreased engine performance may occur.
140R100029
Legend (1) Vacuum Valve (2) Pressure Valve (3) Seal Ring EndOFCallout
6C11

140R200022
Special Tool
J39765 Remover; fuel pump retainer
SECTION
ENGINE ELECTRICAL (Y22SE 2.2L)
RODEO
6D11
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6D11 6D12 6D12 6D12 6D13 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 6D13 6D14 6D14 6D15
Service Precaution
6D12
Battery
General Description
There are six battery fluid caps on top of the battery. These are covered by a paper label. The battery is completely sealed except for the six small vent holes on the side. These vent holes permit the escape of small amounts of gas generated by the battery. This type of battery has the following advantages over conventional batteries: 1. There is no need to add water during the entire service life of the battery. 2. The battery protects itself against overcharging. The battery will refuse to accept an extensive charge. (A conventional battery will accept an excessive charge, resulting in gassing and loss of battery fluid.) 3. The battery is much less vulnerable to self discharge than a conventional type battery.
3. Fluid Level Check

The fluid level should be between the upper level line(2) and lower level line(3) on side of battery. a. CORRECT FLUID LEVEL Charge the battery. b. BELOW LOWER LEVEL Replace battery.
Diagnosis
1. Visual Inspection
Inspect the battery for obvious physical damage, such as a cracked or broken case, which would permit electrolyte loss. Replace the battery if obvious physical damage is discovered during inspection. Check for any other physical damage and correct it as necessary.
061RX001
4. Voltage Check
1. Put voltmeter test leads to battery terminals. a. VOLTAGE IS 12.4V OR ABOVE Go to Step 5. b. VOLTAGE IS UNDER 12.4V Go to procedure (2) below. 2. Determine fast charge amperage from specification. (See Main Data and Specifications in this section). Fast charge battery for 30 minutes at amperage rate no higher than specified value. Take voltage and amperage readings after charge. a. VOLTAGE IS ABOVE 16V AT BELOW 1/3 OF AMPERAGE RATE Replace battery. b. VOLTAGE IS ABOVE 16V AT ABOVE 1/3 OF AMPERAGE RATE Drop charging voltage to 15V and charge for 10 15 hours. Then go to Step 5. c. VOLTAGE IS BETWEEN 12V AND 16V Continue charging at the same rate for an additional 31/2 hours. Then go to Step 5. d. VOLTAGE BELOW 12V Replace Battery.
2. Hydrometer Check
There is a builtin hydrometer (Charge test indicator(1)) at the top of the battery. It is designed to be used during diagnostic procedures. Before trying to read the hydrometer, carefully clean the upper battery surface. If your work area is poorly lit, additional light may be necessary to read the hydrometer. a. BLUE RING OR DOT VISIBLE(5) Go to Step 4. b. BLUE RING OR DOT NOT VISIBLE(4) Go to Step 3.
061RX001
6D13
5. Load Test
1. Connect a voltmeter and a battery load tester across the battery terminals. 2. Apply 300 ampere load for 15 seconds to remove surface charge from the battery. Remove load. 3. Wait 15 seconds to let battery recover. Then apply specified load from specifications (See Main Data and Specifications in this section). Read voltage after 15 seconds, then remove load. a. VOLTAGE DOES NOT DROP BELOW THE MINIMUM LISTED IN THE TABLE The battery is good and should be returned to service. b. VOLTAGE IS LESS THAN MINIMUM LISTED Replace battery. ESTIMATED TEMPERATURE F 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 C 21 16 10 4 1 7 12 18 MINIMUM VOLTAGE V 9.6 9.5 9.4 9.3 9.1 8.9 8.7 8.5
5. The sealed battery used on this vehicle may be either quick charged or slow charged in the same manner as other batteries. Whichever method you decide to use, be sure that you completely charge the battery. Never partially charge the battery.
Jump Starting
Jump Starting with an Auxiliary (Booster) Battery
CAUTION: Never push or tow the vehicle in an attempt to start it. Serious damage to the emission system as well as other vehicle parts will result. Treat both the discharged battery and the booster battery with great care when using jumper cables. Carefully follow the jump starting procedure, being careful at all times to avoid sparking. WARNING: FAILURE TO CAREFULLY FOLLOW THE JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE COULD RESULT IN THE FOLLOWING: 1. Serious personal injury, particularly to your eyes. 2. Property damage from a battery explosion, battery acid, or an electrical fire. 3. Damage to the electronic components of one or both vehicles particularly. Never expose the battery to an open flame or electrical spark. Gas generated by the battery may catch fire or explode. Remove any rings, watches, or other jewelry before working around the battery. Protect your eyes by wearing an approved set of goggles. Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with your eyes or skin. Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with fabrics or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a highly corrosive acid. Should battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin, fabric, or a painted surface, immediately and thoroughly rinse the affected area with clean tap water. Never allow metal tools or jumper cables to come in contact with the positive battery terminal, or any other metal surface of the vehicle. This will protect against a short circuit. Always keep batteries out of reach of young children.
The battery temperature must be estimated by feel and by the temperature the battery has been exposed to for the preceding few hours.
Battery Charging
Observe the following safety precautions when charging the battery: 1. Never attempt to charge the battery when the fluid level is below the lower level line on the side of the battery. In this case, the battery must be replaced. 2. Pay close attention to the battery during charging procedure. Battery charging should be discontinued or the rate of charge reduced if the battery feels hot to the touch. battery charging should be discontinued or the rate of charge reduced if the battery begins to gas or spew electrolyte from the vent holes. 3. In order to easily view the hydrometer blue dot or ring, it may be necessary to jiggle or tilt the battery. 4. Battery temperature can have a great effect on battery charging capacity.
Jump Starting Procedure

1. Set the vehicle parking brake. If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, place the selector level in the PARK position. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission place the shift lever in the NEUTRAL position. Turn OFF the ignition. Turn OFF all lights and any other accessory requiring electrical power.
6D14
2. Look at the builtin hydrometer. If the indication area of the builtin hydrometer is completely clear, do not try to jump start. 3. Attach the end of one jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery. Attach the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery. Do not allow the vehicles to touch each other. This will cause a ground connection, effectively neutralizing the charging procedure. Be sure that the booster battery has a 12 volt rating. 4. Attach one end of the remaining cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery. Attach the other end of the same cable to a solid engine ground (such as the air conditioning compressor bracket or the generator mounting bracket) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. The ground connection must be at least 450 mm (18 in.) from the battery of the vehicle whose battery is being charged. WARNING: NEVER ATTACH THE END OF THE JUMPER CABLE DIRECTLY TO THE NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF THE DEAD BATTERY. 5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the good battery. Make sure that all unnecessary electrical accessories have been turned OFF. 6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery. 7. To remove the jumper cables, follow the above directions in reverse order. Be sure to first disconnect the negative cable from the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Battery Installation
1. Install battery (5). 2. Install retainer (4). 3. Instal retainer screw and rods (3). NOTE: Make sure that the rod is hooked on the body side. 4. Install positive cable (2). 5. Install negative cable (1).
Battery Removal
1. Remove negative cable (1). 2. Remove positive cable (2). 3. Remove retainer screw and rods (3). 4. Remove retainer (4). 5. Remove battery (5).
061RX002
6D15

Model Voltage (V) Cold Cranking Performance (Amp) Reserve Capacity (Min) Load Test (Amp) BCI Group No. 24600 12 600 118 300 24
SECTION
IGNITION SYSTEM (Y22SE 2.2L)
RODEO
6D21
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spark Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6D21 6D22 6D22 6D23 6D23 6D23 6D24 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankshaft Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6D24 6D24 6D24 6D25 6D25 6D25 6D26
Service Precaution
6D22
General Description
Ignition is done by the Ignition Module that fires. Since the cylinder on exhaust stroke requires less energy to fire its spark plug, energy from the ignition coils can be utilized to fire the mating cylinder on compression stroke. A notch in the timing disc on the crankshaft activates the crank position sensor which then sends information such as firing order and starting timing of ignition coil to the PCM. By receiving signals such as crank position,engine speed,water temperature and Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP),the PCM controls the ignition timing.
Diagnosis
Refer to Section Drivability and Emissions for the diagnosis to electronic ignition system (El system).
6D23
Ignition Module
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Ignition module connector. 3. Removal ignition module (1).
Installation
1. Install the ignition module (1). Connect ignition module connector and ignition coil,then tighten bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 10 Nm (87 lb in)
080RW001
080RW001
2. Connect ignition module connector. 3. Connect battery ground cable.
6D24
Spark Plug
Removal
1. Remove spark plugs.
Measuring Insulation Resistance

D Measure insulation resistance using a 500 volt megaohm meter. D Replace spark plugs if measured value is out of standard. Insulation resistance: 50 MW or more

The spark plug affects entire engine performance and therefore its inspection is very important. D Check electrode and insulator for presence of cracks,and replace if any. D Check electrode for wear,and replace if necessary. D Check gasket for damage,and replace if necessary. D Measure insulation resistance with an ohmmeter,and replace if faulty. D Adjust spark plug gap to 1.05 mm (0.04 in). NOTE: Do not adjust the spark plugs gap without new spark plugs. Do not damage to tip of spark plugs. Do not cleaning the spark plugs. If require the cleaning it due to heavy dirt, it is allowed only 20 seconds to be used spark plug cleaner. D Check fuel and electrical systems if spark plug is extremely dirty. D Use spark plugs having low heat value (hot type plug) if fuel and electrical systems are normal. D Use spark plugs having high heat value (cold type plug) if insulator and electrode are extremely burned.
011RS010
Installation
1. Spark plugs D Tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
Sooty Spark Plugs

Much deposit of carbon or oil on the electrode and insulator of spark plug reduces the engine performance. Possible causes: D Too rich mixture D Presence of oil in combustion chamber D Incorrectly adjusted spark plug gap
Burning Electrodes
This fault is characterized by scorched or heavily oxidized electrode or blistered insulator nose. Possible causes: D Too lean mixture D Improper heat value
6D25
Crankshaft Position Sensor

Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable 2. Wiring connector from crankshaft position sensor. 3. Remove crankshaft position sensor from cylinder block.
Installation
1. Install crankshaft position sensor into the cylinder block. Before installation,apply small amount of engine oil to the Oring. Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) 2. Reconnect wiring connector to crankshaft position sensor.
015RW021
6D26

Ignition System Ignition Form Spark Plug Type No. of Coils and Type Coil Location Torque Electronic Spark Control 2 Solid State Enginemounted 25 Nm (18 lb ft) Electronic Ignition System (El system) with Crankshaft position Sensor
SECTION
STARTING AND CHARGING SYSTEM (Y22SE 2.2L)
RODEO
6D31
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6D31 6D32 6D32 6D32 6D33 6D33 6D33 6D34 6D35 6D36 6D37 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General OnVehicle Inspection . . . . . . . . . . Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 6D37 6D37 6D38 6D38 6D38 6D39 6D310 6D311 6D312 6D313 6D314
Service Precaution
6D32
Starting System
General Description
Cranking Circuit
The cranking system consists of a battery, starter, starter switch, starter relay, etc. These main components are connected.
Starter
The cranking system employs a magnetic type reduction starter in which the motor shaft is also used as a pinion shaft. When the starter switch is turned on, the contacts of magnetic switch are closed, and the armature rotates. At the same time, the plunger is attracted, and the pinion is pushed forward by the shift lever to mesh with the ring gear. Then, the ring gear runs to start the engine. When the engine starts and the starter switch is turned off, the plunger returns, the pinion is disengaged from the ring gear, and the armature stops rotation. When the engine speed is higher than the pinion, the pinion idles, so that the armature is not driven.
Diagnosis
Condition Starter does not run Possible cause Charging failure Battery Failure Terminal connection failure Starter switch failure Starter relay failure Starter failure Correction Repair charging system Replace Battery Repair or replace terminal connector and/or wiring harness Repair or replace starter switch Replace starter relay Repair or replace starter
6D33
Starter
Removal
1. Battery ground cable. 2. Remove harness connectors (1) and (2).
Installation
1. Install starter assembly(6). 2. Install mounting bolts and tighten bolts to specified torque (1), (2). Starter to transmission Torque: 60 Nm (44 lb ft) Starter to flywheel housing Torque: 35 Nm (26 lb ft)
065RW022
3. Remove bolts from starter (1), (2).
065RW024
3. Connect harness. 4. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
065RW024
6D34
Disassembled View
065R100009
Legend (1) Yoke Assembly (2) Armature (3) Washer (4) Through Bolt (5) Rear Cover (6) Brush and Brush Holder
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
Magnetic Switch Engage Lever Center Bracket Shaft Engage Gear Gear Case Bolt
6D35

Repair or replace necessary parts if extreme wear or damage is found during inspection.
Brush
Measure the length of brush. Replace with a new one, if it is below the limit.
Armature
Check for continuity between commutator and segment. Replace commutator if there is no continuity (i.e., disconnected).
Brush Holder
Check for continuity between brush holder (+) (4) and base (). Replace, if there is continuity (i.e., insulation is broken).
065RS015
Check for continuity between commutator and shaft. Also, check for continuity between commutator and armature core,armature core and shaft. Replace commutator if there is continuity (i.e., internally grounded).
065RW015
Magnetic Switch
Check for continuity of shunt coil between terminals S and M. Replace, if there is no continuity (i.e., coil is disconnected).
065RS016
065RW016
6D36
Continuity of Series Coil

Check for continuity between terminals S and M. Replace, if there is no continuity (i.e., coil is disconnected).
065RS025
Characteristic Test
065RW017
Continuity of Contacts
With the plunger faced downward, push down the magnetic switch. In this state, check for continuity between terminals B and M. Replace, if there is no continuity (i.e., contacts are faulty).
For easily confirming the characteristics, conduct the noload test as follows: Rating as short as 30 seconds requires rapid testing. Fix the starter on the test bench, and wire as shown in illustration. When the switch is closed, the current flows and the starter runs under no load. At this time, measure current, voltage and speed to check if they satisfy the standard.
065RW018
065R100010
Pinion
Check if the pinion rotates smoothly in drive direction by hand, or if it is locked when it is rotated in reverse. If not, replace the pinion.
Legend (1) Volt Meter (2) Revolution Indicator (3) Battery (4) Ammeter (5) Switch
6D37
Charging System
General Description
The charging system is an IC integral regulator charging system and its main components are connected as shown in illustration. The regulator is a solid state type and it is mounted along with the brush holder assembly inside the generator installed on the rear end cover. The generator does not require particular maintenance such as voltage adjustment. The rectifier connected to the stator coil has eight diodes to transform AC voltage into DC voltage. This DC voltage is connected to the output terminal of generator.
General OnVehicle Inspection

The operating condition of charging system is indicated by the charge warning lamp. The warning lamp comes on when the starter switch is turned to ON position. The charging system operates normally if the lamp goes off when the engine starts. If the warning lamp shows abnormality or if undercharged or overcharged battery condition is suspected, perform diagnosis by checking the charging system as follows: 1. Check visually the belt and wiring connector. 2. With the engine stopped, turn the stator switch to ON position and observe the warning lamp. If lamp does not come on: Disconnect wiring connector from generator, and ground the terminal L on connector side. If lamp comes on: Repair or replace the generator.
066RW021
Legend (1) Regulator
(2) Indicator Lamp (3) Generator Assembly
6D38
Generator
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then remove drive belt. 3. Disconnect terminal B wiring connector and connector. 4. Remove generator bracket (1), (2) and remove generator assembly.
Inspection
Generator Power and Circuit Diagram
066RW020
065RW025
Legend (1) Load resistor, set parallel to battery (2) Battery (3) Voltmeter (4) Ammeter (5) Ignition Lock (6) Charge Telltale (7) Generator 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Close off connecting cable from alternator terminal B+. 3. Set ammeter (measuring range 100A) in disconnected line. 4. Connect controllable load resistor to battery terminal. 5. Set resistor in front of connection to 0; connect first to battery, then to resistor. 6. Connect tachometer. 7. Connect oscilloscope according to manufacturers instructions. 8. Connect battery. 9. Start engine and read off resulting current at various engine speeds.
6D39
Generator Power
1. Adjust load resistor, if the required load currents are not attained. 2. The shape of the voltage curves on oscilloscope curve should be regular. 3. Test value: 5 to 7A. 4. If the required minimum current intensity is not attained, or if the oscilloscope picture shows variations, the alternator should be overhauled.
Installation
1. Install generator assembly and bring generator assembly to the position to be installed. 2. Install generator bracket (1), (2) and tighten to the specified torque. Torque: Long bolt: 35 Nm (26 lb ft) Short bolt: 20 Nm (15 lb ft)
065RW025 066RW018
Regulated Voltage Circuit Diagram
3. Connect wiring harness connector. 4. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench, then install drive belt to normal position. 5. Reconnect battery ground cable.
066R100009
Legend (1) Battery (2) Ignition Lock (3) Charge Telltale (4) Resistor, for attainment of load current with the battery set in series (5) Voltmeter (6) Generator
6D310 STARTING AND CHARGING SYSTEM (Y22SE 2.2L)
Disassembled View
066R100003
Legend (1) Pulley Nut (2) Pulley (3) Through Bolt (4) Front Cover Assembly (5) Rotor Assembly
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Cover Regulator Assembly Brush Holder Assembly Rectifire Rear Cover Assembly
STARTING AND CHARGING SYSTEM (Y22SE 2.2L) 6D311
Disassembly
1. Belt pulley nut.
8. Remove the four brush holder fixing bolts and brush holder assembly.
066R100006 066R100004
2. Remove the four through bolts (1). 3. Remove the front cover (2). 4. Remove the three cover fixing bolts (5), regulator terminal nut and battery terminal nut. 5. Remove the cover (4). 6. Remove the rotor assembly. 7. Remove the rear cover assembly (3).
9. Remove the two regulator fixing bolts and regulator assembly.
066R100007
066R100005

3. Check continuity between slip rings, and replace if there is no continuity.
Rotor Assembly
1. Check the rotor slip ring surfaces for contamination and roughness. If rough, polish with #500600 sandpaper.
066RS016
4. Check for continuity between slip ring and rotor core. In case of continuity, replace the generator assembly.
066RS014
2. Measure the slip ring diameter, and replace if it exceeds the limit.
066RS017
066RS015
STARTING AND CHARGING SYSTEM (Y22SE 2.2L) 6D313
Stator Coil
1. Measure resistance between respective phases. 2. Measure insulation resistance between stator coil and core with a megaohmmeter. If less than standard, replace the generator assembly.
Rectifier Assembly
Check for continuity across 1 and 2 in the 100W range of multimeter.
066RW011
066RS018
Change polarity, and make sure that there is continuity in one direction, and not in the reverse direction. In case of continuity in both directions, replace the rectifier assembly.
Brush
Measure the brush length. If more than limit, replace the brush. Standard: 5 mm (0.20 in)
Reassembly
To reassemble, follow the disassembly steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Install pulley on the rotor shaft. Clamp pulley to the vise, and tighten nut to the specified torque. Torque: 40 Nm (30 lb ft)
066RW009
066R100004

Battery voltage Rated output Direction of rotation (as viewed from pulley side) Maximum speed rpm Clockwise 8000 V A 12 100
SECTION
RODEO Y22SE 2.2L ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSION
RODEO
6E11
CONTROL SYSTEM
RODEO 2.2L ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSIONS
CONTENTS
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . PCM PINOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPONENT LOCATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undercarriage Component Locator Table . Fuse And Relay Panel (Underhood Electrical Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAGNOSIS StrategyBased Diagnostics . . StrategyBased Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC Stored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No DTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Matching Symptom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Trouble Found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying Vehicle Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . OBD II Serviceability Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Control Information Label . . . . . Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual/Physical Engine Compartment Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Knowledge Of Tools Required . . . . . SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . Class II Serial Data Communications . . . . ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD II) . . . . . . . OnBoard Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comprehensive Component Monitor Diagnostic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Status And Drive Cycle For Satisfying Federal Inspection/Maintenance (I/M 240) Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common OBD II Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Diagnostic Executive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decimal/Binary/Hexadecimal Conversions Verifying Vehicle Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Diagnostic Trouble Codes Using A Tech 2 Scan Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech 2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Procedure (Example) . . . . . . . . . DTC Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC Information Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamps Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relays Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVAP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E16 6E17 6E120 6E126 6E128 6E129 6E130 6E130 6E130 6E130 6E130 6E130 6E130 6E130 6E131 6E131 6E131 6E132 6E132 6E132 6E132 6E132 6E132 6E132 6E132 Idle Air Control System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E145 Fuel System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E147 EGR Control Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E148 Injector Balance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E149 Plotting Snapshot Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E150 System Check at Tech 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E151 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E151 Plotting Graph Flow Chart (Plotting graph after obtaining vehicle information) . . . . . . 6E155 Flow Chart for Snapshot Replay (Plotting Graph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E156 PRIMARY SYSTEMBASED DIAGNOSTICS 6E157 Primary SystemBased Diagnostics . . . . . 6E157 Fuel Control Heated Oxygen Sensors . . . 6E157 HO2S Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E157 Catalyst Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensors And Diagnostic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E157 MISFIRE MONITOR DIAGNOSTIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E158 Misfire Monitor Diagnostic Operation . . . . . 6E158 Misfire Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E158 FUEL TRIM SYSTEM MONITOR DIAGNOSTIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E159 Fuel Trim System Monitor Diagnostic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E159 Fuel Trim Cell Diagnostic Weights . . . . . . . 6E159 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD II) SYSTEM CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E160 A/C CLUTCH CONTROL CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E163 ELECTRONIC IGNITION SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E166 EVAP CANISTER PURGE SOLENOID . . . . . 6E166 VISUAL CHECK OF THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E166 IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE . . . . . . . . 6E166 FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST . . . . . . . . 6E166 FUEL METERING SYSTEM CHECK . . . . . . 6E167 FUEL INJECTOR COIL TEST PROCEDURE AND FUEL INJECTOR BALANCE TEST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E167 POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E172 MULTIPLE PCM INFORMATION SENSOR DTCs SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E173 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E176
6E133 6E133 6E134 6E135 6E136 6E136 6E136 6E138 6E138 6E139 6E140 6E140 6E141 6E141 6E142 6E144
6E12

DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1) . . . . . . . . DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0135 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1 SENSOR 1) . . . . . DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2) . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2) . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1 SENSOR 2) . . . . . DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0201 INJECTOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CYLINDER 1 . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0202 INJECTOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CYLINDER 2 . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0203 INJECTOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CYLINDER 3 . . . . . . . . . DTC P0204 INJECTOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CYLINDER 4 . . . . . . . . . DTC P0300 RANDOM/MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED . . . . . . . . DTC P0301 RANDOM/MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED . . . . . . . . DTC P0302 RANDOM/MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED . . . . . . . . DTC P0303 RANDOM/MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED . . . . . . . . DTC P0304 RANDOM/MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) CIRCUIT LOW INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0337 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0342 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0351 IGNITION COIL A PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1159
ENGINE Tech 2 DATA DEFINITIONS AND RANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E176 TYPICAL SCAN DATA VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . 6E179 NO MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E183 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON STEADY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E186 ENGINE CRANKS BUT WILL NOT RUN . . . 6E188 FUEL SYSTEM ELECTRICAL TEST . . . . . . . 6E194 FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E197 IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) SYSTEM CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1102 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1105 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) OUTPUT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1107 EVAPORATIVE (EVAP) EMISSIONS CANISTER PURGE VALVE SOLENOID CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1109 Upshift Lamp System Check (Manual Transmission Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1112 PCM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES . . . . 6E1115 DTC P0106 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) CIRCUIT/RANGE PERFORMANCE PROBLEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1118 DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1121 DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT 6E1124 DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT . . . . 6E1127 DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT . . . . 6E1130 DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1133 DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1136 DTC P0121 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1139 DTC P0122 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR CIRCUITLOW INPUT . . . . . . . . . . 6E1142 DTC P0123 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT . . . . . . . . . 6E1145 DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1148 DTC P0128 Thermostat Insufficient temperrature for Stable Opreation . . . . . . . . 6E1151 DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1) . . . . . . . . . . 6E1153 DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1) . . . . . . . . . . 6E1156
6E1162 6E1165 6E1168 6E1171
6E1174 6E1177 6E1180 6E1184 6E1188 6E1191 6E1194 6E1197 6E1200 6E1204 6E1208 6E1212 6E1216 6E1220 6E1223
6E1226 6E1228
6E1231 6E1234
6E1237

DTC P0352 IGNITION COIL B PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1239 DTC P0401 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED . 6E1241 DTC P0402 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) EXCESSIVE FLOW DETECTED . . . 6E1244 DTC P0404 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE 6E1246 DTC P0405 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . 6E1250 DTC P0406 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . 6E1253 DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD . . . . . . 6E1257 DTC P0440 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1260 DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM SMALL LEAK DETECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1265 DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM VERY SMALL LEAK DETECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1269 DTC P0443 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . 6E1273 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1276 DTC P0449 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM VENT VALVE/SOLENOID CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1280 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . 6E1283 DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1285 DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1287 DTC P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Noisy Signal 6E1289 DTC P0480 COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1291 DTC P0481 COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1294 DTC P0502 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) CIRCUIT LOW INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1297 DTC P0506 IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1299 DTC P0507 IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1302 DTC P0532 A/C REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT . . . . . . . . . . 6E1305 DTC P0533 A/C REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT . . . . . . . . . . 6E1308 DTC P0562 SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . 6E1311 DTC P0563 SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . 6E1313
6E13
DTC P0601 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE MEMORY CHECK SUM ERROR . . . . . . . . . . 6E1315 DTC P1106 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT HIGH VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . 6E1317 DTC P1107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT LOW VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . 6E1319 DTC P1111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT HIGH VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1321 DTC P1112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT LOW VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1324 DTC P1114 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT LOW VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . 6E1326 DTC P1115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT HIGH VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . 6E1328 DTC P1121 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT HIGH VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1331 DTC P1122 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT LOW VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1333 DTC P1133 O2 SENSOR INSUFFICIENT SWITCHING (BANK 1 SENSOR 1) . . . . . . . 6E1335 DTC P1134 O2 SENSOR TRANSITION TIME RATIO (BANK 1 SENSOR 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1338 DTC P1171 FUEL SYSTEM LEAN DURING ACCELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1341 DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKP) SYSTEM VARIATION NOT LEARNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1344 DTC P1380 ABS ROUGH ROAD SYSTEM FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1347 DTC P1381 ABS ROUGH ROAD CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1349 DTC P1404 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) CLOSED VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1352 DTC P1441 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM FLOW DURING NONPURGE . . . 6E1355 DTC P1546 A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1358 DTC P1618 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) PCM Interprocessor Communication Error . 6E1361 DTC P1625 PCM Unexpected Reset . . . . . . . 6E1362 DTC P1627 PCM A/D CONVERSION MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1364 DTC P1635 5 VOLT REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1366 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1368 DEFAULT MATRIX TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1391 Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . 6E1394 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1394 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1394
6E14

6E1395 6E1395 6E1396 6E1397 6E1397 6E1397 6E1397 6E1397 6E1398 6E1398 6E1398 6E1398 6E1399 6E1399 6E1399 6E1400 6E1400 6E1400 6E1400 6E1401 6E1401 6E1401 6E1401 6E1401 6E1403 6E1404 6E1404 6E1404 6E1404 6E1405 6E1405 6E1405 6E1405 6E1406 6E1406 6E1406 6E1407 6E1407 6E1407 6E1408 6E1408 6E1408 6E1408 6E1409 6E1410 6E1410 6E1410 6E1411 6E1411 6E1411 6E1411 6E1411 6E1412 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accelerator Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . Accelerator Pedal Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Rail Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Throttle body (TB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELECTRONIC IGNITION SYSTEM Ignition Control Module (ICM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spark Plug Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spark Plug Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMISSIONS Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1412 6E1413 6E1413 6E1413 6E1413 6E1414 6E1414 6E1414 6E1414 6E1414 6E1415 6E1415 6E1416 6E1416 6E1416 6E1416 6E1417 6E1417 6E1418 6E1418 6E1419 6E1419 6E1420 6E1420 6E1421 6E1421 6E1421 6E1421 6E1421 6E1422 6E1423 6E1423 6E1423 6E1424 6E1424 6E1424 6E1425 6E1426 6E1426 6E1426 6E1426 6E1426 6E1426 6E1427 6E1427 6E1427 6E1428 6E1428 6E1428 6E1428 6E1429 6E1429 6E1429
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EEPROM Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) . . . . . . . . Powertrain Control Module (PCM) . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Throttle Position (TP) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning and Inspection Procedure . . . . . . Measurement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intake Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knock Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUEL METERING SYSTEM Accelerator Cable Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Timing Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Timing Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVAP Canister Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVAP Canister Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVAP Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVAP Canister Purge Valve Solenoid . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Harness Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Connectors And Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors And Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors And Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Harness Repair: Twisted Shielded Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1429 6E1429 6E1429 6E1429 6E1429 6E1429 6E1429 6E1429 6E1429 6E1429 6E1430 6E1430 6E1430 6E1430 6E1430 6E1431 6E1431 6E1431 6E1431 6E1432 6E1433 6E1433 6E1433 6E1433 6E1433 6E1433 6E1433 6E1433 6E1433
6E15
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1434 Twisted Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1434 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1434 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1434 WeatherPack Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1435 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1435 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1435 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1436 ComPack III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1436 ComPack III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1436 MetriPack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1437 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1437 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1437 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1437 GENERAL DESCRIPTION PCM AND SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1437 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AIR INDUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1445 GENERAL DESCRIPTION FUEL METERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1445 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ELECTRONIC IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1448 A/C CLUTCH DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1452 GENERAL DESCRIPTION EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1452 GENERAL DESCRIPTION EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM . . . . . . . 6E1454 GENERAL DESCRIPTION POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1455 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E1456
6E16
SPECIFICATIONS
TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Application Crankshaft Position Sensor Mounting Bolt EGR Nut Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Fuel Drain Plug Fuel Pressure Regulator Attaching Screw Fuel Rail Bolts Fuel Tank Undercover Retaining Bolts Heated Oxygen Sensor Spark Plugs Throttle Body Mounting Bolts VSS Retaining Bolt Crankshaft Pulse Pickup Sensor Disc to Crankshaft Spark Plug to Cylinder Head Nm 9 14 30 20 6.5 7 36 5 25 13 13 13 25 Lb Ft 22 14 27 40 18 18 Lb In 78 130 60 75 120 120 115
6E17
DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS

PCM WIRING DIAGRAM (1 of 13)
060R100090
6E18
060R100004
6E19
060R100005
6E110
060R100006
6E111
060R100007
6E112
060R100008
6E113
060R100009
6E114
060R100010
6E115
060R100011
6E116
060R100089
6E117
060R100013
6E118
060R100014
6E119
060R100015
6E120
PCM PINOUTS
PCM Pinout Table, 32Pin Red Connector Row A
TS23344
PIN A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15
PIN Function 5 Volt Reference Signal Knock Sensor Input Not Used Battery Feed Idle Air Control (IAC) A High IAC A Low IAC B Low IAC B High Not Used Not Used Temperature Gage Low Fuel Warning Lamp Control Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Control Rear Defogger Relay EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid Control Not Used
IGN ON 5.0 V
ENG RUN 5.0 V 3.0 V (MAX)
Refer To Appropriate Sensor General Description and Operation, Knock Sensor Chassis Electrical General Description and Operation, IAC General Description and Operation, IAC General Description and Operation, IAC General Description and Operation, IAC General Description and Operation Chassis Electrical Chassis Electrical Classis Electrical General Description and Operation, EVAP Emission Control System
B+ B+/0.8 V B+/0.8 V B+/0.8 V B+/0.8 V Varies with Temperature 0.40.9 V 0.40.9 V B+ B+
B+ B+/0.8 V B+/0.8 V B+/0.8 V B+/0.8 V Varies with Temperature B+ B+ B+ 05 V (varies)
A16
6E121
PCM Pinout Table, 32Pin Red Connector Row B
TS23344
PIN B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
PIN Function 5 Volt Reference Signal Not Used Not Used Not Used Fuel Tank Level Sensor Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Input Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Position Feedback Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor A/C Pressure Sensor Signal Not Used Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Input Not Used Class 2 Data A/C Compressor Clutch Relay Control Compressor Not Used EVAP Canister Purge Valve Solenoid
IGN ON 5.0 V 0.2 to 4.9 V (0.5V = +5in H2O) 0.6 V ~3V (0V = 151C {304F}) ~1 V B+ B+ 0.0 V 0 (A/C OFF)
ENG RUN 5.0 V 0.2 to 4.9 V (4.5V = 15 in H2O) 0.6 V ~3 V (5V = 40C {40F}) ~1 V B+ B+ 0.0 V B+ (A/C ON)
Refer To Fuel Tank Pressure General Description and Operation, Fuel Pump General Description and Operation, Fuel Pump General Description and Operation, Linear EGR Control General Description and Operation, IAT A/C System General Description and Operation, PSP Chassis Electrical Diagnosis, Class 2 Serial Data General Description and Operation, A/C Clutch Circuit Operation General Description and Operation, EVAP
B7 B8
B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14
B15 B16
6E122
PCM Pinout Table, 32Pin White Connector Row C
TS23345
PIN C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
PIN Function Injector Cylinder #2 Shift Solenoid B (A/T) Not Used Ignition Control Module (ICM) Input Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Low Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKP) High PCM Ground PCM Ground PCM Ground Tachometer Signal Fuel Gauge PWM Output High Fan Relay Control Low Fan Relay Control Bank 1 HO2S 1 High Bank 1 HO2S 1 Low Bank 1 HO2S 2 High
IGN ON B+ Varies 0.0 V 4.98 V
ENG RUN B+ Varies 0.1 V 0.76 V (at idle)
Refer To General Description and Operation, Fuel Injector General Description and Operation, Fuel Injector General Description and Operation, Crankshaft Position Sensor General Description and Operation, Crankshaft Position Sensor Chassis Electrical Chassis Electrical Chassis Electrical General Description and Operation General Description and Operation Chassis Electrical Chassis Electrical General Description and Operation, Fuel HO2S 1 General Description and Operation, Fuel HO2S 1 General Description and Operation, Catalyst HO2S 2
C6
5V
5V
C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16
0.0 V 0.0 V 0.0 V Varies with Fuel Level 10.5 V 0.3 V 0.0 V 0.3 V
0.0 V 0.0 V 0.0 V Varies with Fuel Level B+ 0.1 to 1.1 V 0.1 V 0.1 to 1.1 V
6E123
PCM Pinout Table, 32Pin White Connector Row D
TS23345
PIN D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
PIN Function Injector Cylinder #3 Torque Converter Solenoid (A/T) Injector Cylinder #1 SDATA Ignition Control Module (ICM) Input Not Used VSS Input Sensor Ground 5 V Reference A Return Sensor Ground 5 V Reference B Return Not Used Camshaft Position Sensor Input Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Bank 1 HO2S 2 Low
IGN ON B+ B+ 0.0 V 0.0 V 5.0 V
ENG RUN B+ B+ 0.0 V 0.0 V 4.6 V
Refer To General Description and Operation, Fuel Injector General Description and Operation, Fuel Injector Air Bag Control Module Data General Description and Operation Chassis Electrical Vapor Pressure, TPS MAT, MAP, A/C Pressure Fuel Level General Description and Operation, Camshaft Position Sensor General Description and Operation, Catalyst HO2S 2
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
0.0 V
0.1 V
6E124
PCM Pinout Table, 32Pin White Connector Row E
TS23346
PIN E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8
PIN Function Transmission Speed Sensor Input (A/T) Fan Control Force Moter (A/T) High Force Moter (A/T) Low Ignition Feed Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Low Shift Mode Switch (A/T) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Input and Temperature Retrn Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Input Not Used Not Used Rear Defogger Switch Fuel Pump (FP) Relay Control Shift Solenoid High (A/T) A/C Request (Thermo Relay) Ignition Feed
IGN ON 0.0V B+ B+ Varies 0.25 V (0% = 0.25 V) 2.3 V (O V = 151C {304F}) B+ 0.0 V 0.0 V B+
ENG RUN B+ B+ B+ Varies 0.25 V (at idle) (100% = 4.75 V) 2.1 V (5 V = 40C {40F}) B+ B+ 0.0 V B+
Refer To
Chassis Electrical General Description and Operation General Description and Operation, EGR Control General Description and Operation, Throttle Position Sensor General Description and Operation, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chassis Electrical OnVehicle Service, Fuel Pump Relay Electric Cooling Fans General Description and Operation
E9
E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 E16
6E125
PCM Pinout Table, 32Pin White Connector Row F
TS23346
PIN F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
PIN Function Not Used Transmission Speed Sensor High (A/T) Shift Mode Switch (A/T) Stop Lamp Switch (A/T) Power Switch (A/T) Ivineer Switch (A/T) T/M Oil Temperature Sensor Input (A/T) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Input Shift Mode Switch (A/T) Not Used Kick Down Switch (A/T) Not Used Injector C Cylinder #4 Shift Solenoid (A/T) Shift Mode Switch (A/T) Ignition Feed
IGN ON ~4.7 V (0 V = 10kPa) B+ B+
ENG RUN ~1.1 V (5 V = 104kPa) B+ B+
Refer To
General Description and Operation, Manifold Absolute Pressure Class 2 Serial Data General Description and Operation, Fuel Injector General Description and Operation
F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16
6E126
COMPONENT LOCATOR
060R100020
6E127
010RX001
028RX001
6E128
Engine Component Locator Table

Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Name Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 1, Sensor 1 Air Cleaner Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Port Fuel Pressure Regulator Throttle Body Fuse/Relay Box Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid Ignition Control Module (ICM) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Knock Sensor Location Rear of engine, near ignition coils On the left rear of the engine at the bulkhead On the exhaust pipe, left side of engine, immediately behind the exhaust manifold Left front of the engine bay On the intake air duct near the air cleaner Inside the front cover assembly On the right front corner of the valve cover On the forward end of the fuel rail, to the right of the PVC port Between the intake air duct and the intake manifold Along the inside of the right fender On the front of the throttle body On the rear of the throttle body At the right rear of the engine, behind the Throttle body Mounted on a heat sink on the lower right side of the engine block, above the starter motor Bolted to the front edge of the intake manifold, under the fuel rail Left side engine block.
Undercarriage Component Locator Table

Name Fuel Pump Assembly EVAP Canister EVAP Canister Purge Valve Solenoid Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Bank 1, Sensor 2 Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Location Installed in the top of the fuel tank Behind rear axle, near fuel tank filler nozzle Behind rear axle, near fuel tank filler nozzle Threaded into the exhaust pipe behind the catalytic converter Protrudes from the right side of the transmission housing, near the output shaft Lower left hand front of engine, behind power steering pump bracket
6E129
Fuse And Relay Panel (Underhood Electrical Center)

Underhood (U/H) Fuse and Relay Panel
060R100016
6E130

3. Use a check sheet or other method to identify the circuit or electrical system component. 4. Follow the suggestions for intermittent diagnosis found in the service documentation. Most Scan Tools, such as the Tech 2, have datacapturing capabilities that can assist in detecting intermittents.
DIAGNOSIS StrategyBased Diagnostics

StrategyBased Diagnostics
The strategybased diagnostic is a uniform approach to repair all Electrical/Electronic (E/E) systems. The diagnostic flow can always be used to resolve an E/E system problem and is a starting point when repairs are necessary. The following steps will instruct the technician how to proceed with a diagnosis: 1. Verify the customer complaint. D To verify the customer complaint, the technician should know the normal operation of the system. 2. Perform preliminary checks. D Conduct a thorough visual inspection. D Review the service history. D Detect unusual sounds or odors. D Gather diagnostic trouble code information to achieve an effective repair. 3. Check bulletins and other service information. D This includes videos, newsletters, etc. 4. Refer to service information (manual) system check(s). D System checks contain information on a system that may not be supported by one or more DTCs. System checks verify proper operation of the system. This will lead the technician in an organized approach to diagnostics. 5. Refer to service diagnostics.
No Trouble Found
This condition exists when the vehicle is found to operate normally. The condition described by the customer may be normal. Verify the customer complaint against another vehicle that is operating normally. The condition may be intermittent. Verify the complaint under the conditions described by the customer before releasing the vehicle. 1. Reexamine the complaint. When the complaint cannot be successfully found or isolated, a reevaluation is necessary. The complaint should be reverified and could be intermittent as defined in Intermittents, or could be normal. 2. Repair and verify. After isolating the cause, the repairs should be made. Validate for proper operation and verify that the symptom has been corrected. This may involve road testing or other methods to verify that the complaint has been resolved under the following conditions: D Conditions noted by the customer. D If a DTC was diagnosed, verify a repair by duplicating conditions present when the DTC was set as noted in the Failure Records or Freeze Frame data.
DTC Stored
Follow the designated DTC chart exactly to make an effective repair.
Verifying Vehicle Repair

Verification of the vehicle repair will be more comprehensive for vehicles with OBD II system diagnostics. Following a repair, the technician should perform the following steps: IMPORTANT: Follow the steps below when you verify repairs on OBD II systems. Failure to follow these steps could result in unnecessary repairs. 1. Review and record the Failure Records and the Freeze Frame data for the DTC which has been diagnosed (Freeze Fame data will only be stored for an A or B type diagnostic and only if the MIL (Check Engine lamp) has been requested). 2. Clear the DTC(s). 3. Operate the vehicle within conditions noted in the Failure Records and Freeze Frame data. 4. Monitor the DTC status information for the DTC which has been diagnosed until the diagnostic test associated with that DTC runs.
No DTC
Select the symptom from the symptom tables. Follow the diagnostic paths or suggestions to complete the repair. You may refer to the applicable component/system check in the system checks.
No Matching Symptom
1. Analyze the complaint. 2. Develop a plan for diagnostics. 3. Utilize the wiring diagrams and the theory of operation. Combine technician knowledge with efficient use of the available service information.
Intermittents
Conditions that are not always present are called intermittents. To resolve intermittents, perform the following steps: 1. Observe history DTCs, DTC modes, and freezeframe data. 2. Evaluate the symptoms and the conditions described by the customer.
6E131
GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION

OBD II Serviceability Issues
With the introduction of OBD II diagnostics across the entire passenger car and lightduty truck market in 1996, illumination of the MIL (Check Engine lamp) due to a nonvehicle fault could lead to misdiagnosis of the vehicle, increased warranty expense and customer dissatisfaction. The following list of nonvehicle faults does not include every possible fault and may not apply equally to all product lines. Fuel Quality Fuel quality is not a new issue for the automotive industry, but its potential for turning on the MIL (Check Engine lamp) with OBD II systems is new. Fuel additives such as dry gas and octane enhancers may affect the performance of the fuel. If this results in an incomplete combustion or a partial burn, it will show up as a Misfire DTC P0300. The Reid Vapor Pressure of the fuel can also create problems in the fuel system, especially during the spring and fall months when severe ambient temperature swings occur. A high Reid Vapor Pressure could show up as a Fuel Trim DTC due to excessive canister loading. High vapor pressures generated in the fuel tank can also affect the Evaporative Emission diagnostic as well. Using fuel with the wrong octane rating for vehicle may cause driveability problems. Many of the major fuel companies advertise that using premium gasoline will improve the performance of vehicle. Most premium fuels use alcohol to increase the octane rating of the fuel. Although alcoholenhanced fuels may raise the octane rating, the fuels ability to turn into vapor in cold temperatures deteriorates. This may affect the starting ability and cold driveability of the engine. Low fuel levels can lead to fuel starvation, lean engine operation, and eventually engine misfire. NonOEM Parts All of the OBD II diagnostics have been calibrated to run with OEM parts. Something as simple as a highperformance exhaust system that affects exhaust system back pressure could potentially interfere with the operation of the EGR valve and thereby turn on the MIL (Check Engine lamp). Small leaks in the exhaust system near the post catalyst oxygen sensor can also cause the MIL (Check Engine lamp) to turn on. Aftermarket electronics, such as transceiver, stereos, and antitheft devices, may radiate EMI into the control system if they are improperly installed. This may cause a false sensor reading and turn on the MIL (Check Engine lamp). Environment Temporary environmental conditions, such as localized flooding, will have an effect on the vehicle ignition system. If the ignition system is rainsoaked, it can temporarily cause engine misfire and turn on the MIL (Check Engine lamp).
Refueling A new OBD II diagnostic was introduced in 1996 on some vehicles. This diagnostic checks the integrity of the entire evaporative emission system. If the vehicle is restarted after refueling and the fuel cap is not secured correctly, the onboard diagnostic system will sense this as a system faultand turn on the MIL (Check Engine lamp) with a DTC P0440. Vehicle Marshaling The transportation of new vehicles from the assembly plant to the dealership can involve as many as 60 key cycles within 2 to 3 miles of driving. This type of operation contributes to the fuel fouling of the spark plugs and will turn on the MIL (Check Engine lamp) with a P0300 Misfire DTC. Poor Vehicle Maintenance The sensitivity of OBD II diagnostics will cause the MIL (Check Engine lamp) to turn ON if the vehicle is not maintained properly. Restricted air filters, fuel filters, and crankcase deposits due to lack of oil changes or improper oil viscosity can trigger actual vehicle faults that were not previously monitored prior to OBD II. Poor vehicle maintenance cant be classified as a nonvehicle fault, but with the sensitivity of OBD II diagnostics, vehicle maintenance schedules must be more closely followed. Severe Vibration The Misfire diagnostic measures small changes in the rotational speed of the crankshaft. Severe driveline vibrations in the vehicle, such as caused by an excessive amount of mud on the wheels, can have the same effect on crankshaft speed as misfire and therefore may set a Misfire DTC P0300. Related System Faults Many of the OBD II system diagnostics will not run if the PCM detects a fault on a related system or component. One example would be that if the PCM detected a Misfire fault, the diagnostics on the catalytic converter would be suspended until the Misfire fault was repaired. If the Misfire fault was severe enough, the catalytic converter could be damaged due to overheating and would never set a Catalyst DTC until the Misfire fault was repaired and the Catalyst diagnostic was allowed to run to completion. If this happens, the customer may have to make two trips to the dealership in order to repair the vehicle.
Emissions Control Information Label

The engine compartment Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper left corner is exhaust emission information. This identifies the emission standard (Federal, California, or Canada) of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and the type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every vehicle. If the label has been removed it should be replaced, it can be ordered from Isuzu Dealer ship.
6E132
Maintenance Schedule
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD II)

OnBoard Diagnostic Tests
A diagnostic test is a series of steps, the result of which is a pass or fail reported to the diagnostic executive. When a diagnostic test reports a pass result, the diagnostic executive records the following data: D The diagnostic test has been completed since the last ignition cycle. D The diagnostic test has passed during the current ignition cycle. D The fault identified by the diagnostic test is not currently active. When a diagnostic test reports a fail result, the diagnostic executive records the following data: D The diagnostic test has been completed since the last ignition cycle. D The fault identified by the diagnostic test is currently active. D The fault has been active during this ignition cycle. D The operating conditions at the time of the failure. Remember, a fuel trim DTC may be triggered by a list of vehicle faults. Make use of all information available (other DTCs stored, rich or lean condition, etc.) when diagnosing a fuel trim fault.
Visual/Physical Engine Compartment Inspection

Perform a careful visual and physical engine compartment inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a problem without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing a visual/physical inspection: D Inspect all vacuum hoses for pinches, cuts, disconnection, and Droper routing. D Inspect hoses that are difficult to see behind other components. D Inspect all wires in the engine compartment for proper connections, burned or chafed spots, pinched wires, contact with sharp edges or contact with hot exhaust manifolds or pipes.
Basic Knowledge Of Tools Required

NOTE: Lack of basic knowledge of this powertrain when performing diagnostic procedures could result in an incorrect diagnosis or damage to powertrain components. Do not attempt to diagnose a powertrain problem without this basic knowledge. A basic understanding of hand tools is necessary to effectively use this section of the Service Manual.
SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATIONS

Class II Serial Data Communications
Government regulations require that all vehicle manufacturers establish a common communication system. This vehicle utilizes the Class II communication system. Each bit of information can have one of two lengths: long or short. This allows vehicle wiring to be reduced by transmitting and receiving multiple signals over a single wire. The messages carried on Class II data streams are also prioritized. If two messages attempt to establish communications on the data line at the same time, only the message with higher priority will continue. The device with the lower priority message must wait. The most significant result of this regulation is that it provides Tech 2 manufacturers with the capability to access data from any make or model vehicle that is sold. The data displayed on the other Tech 2 will appear the same, with some exceptions. Some Scan Tools will only be able to display certain vehicle parameters as values that are a coded representation of the true or actual value. For more information on this system of coding, refer to Decimal/Binary/Hexadecimal Conversions. On this vehicle the Tech 2 displays the actual values for vehicle parameters. It will not be necessary to perform any conversions from coded values to actual values.
Comprehensive Component Monitor Diagnostic Operation

Comprehensive component monitoring diagnostics are required to monitor emissionsrelated input and output CARB OBD II powertrain components. The Comprehensive Component Monitoring List Of Components Intended To illuminate The MIL is a list of components, features or functions that could fall under this requirement. Input Components: Input components are monitored for circuit continuity and outofrange values. This includes rationality checking. Rationality checking refers to indicating a fault when the signal from a sensor does not seem reasonable, i.e. Throttle Position (TP) sensor that indicates high throttle position at low engine loads or MAP voltage). Input components may include, but are not limited to the following sensors: D Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) D Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor D Throttle Position (TP) sensor D Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor D Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor D Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor In addition to the circuit continuity and rationality check the ECT sensor is monitored for its ability to achieve a steady state temperature to enable Closed Loop fuel control.

Output Components: Output components are diagnosed for proper response to control module commands. Components where functional monitoring is not feasible will be monitored for circuit continuity and outofrange values if applicable. Output components to be monitored include, but are not limited to the following circuit: D Idle Air Control (IAC) Motor D EVAP Canister Purge Valve Solenoid D A/C relays D Cooling fan relay(s) D VSS output D MIL control D Cruise control inhibit Refer to PCM and Sensors in General Descriptions. Passive and Active Diagnostic Tests A passive test is a diagnostic test which simply monitors a vehicle system or component. Conversely, an active test, actually takes some sort of action when performing diagnostic functions, often in response to a failed passive test. For example, the EGR diagnostic active test will force the EGR valve open during closed throttle decel and/or force the EGR valve closed during a steady state. Either action should result in a change in manifold pressure. Intrusive Diagnostic Tests This is any onboard test run by the Diagnostic Management System which may have an effect on vehicle performance or emission levels. WarmUp Cycle A warmup cycle means that engine at temperature must reach a minimum of 70C (160F) and rise at least 22C (40F) over the course of a trip. Freeze Frame Freeze Frame is an element of the Diagnostic Management System which stores various vehicle information at the moment an emissionsrelated fault is stored in memory and when the MIL is commanded on. These data can help to identify the cause of a fault. Refer to Storing And Erasing Freeze Fame Data for more detailed information. Failure Records Failure Records data is an enhancement of the OBD II Freeze Frame feature. Failure Records store the same vehicle information as does Freeze Frame, but it will store that information for any fault which is stored in onboard memory, while Freeze Frame stores information only for emissionrelated faults that command the MIL ON.
6E133
System Status And Drive Cycle For Satisfying Federal Inspection/Maintenance (I/M 240) Regulations
I/M Ready Status means a signal or flag for each emission system test that had been set in the PCM. I/M Ready Status indicates that the vehicle onboard emissions diagnostics have been run. I/M Ready Status is not concerned whether the emission system passed or failed the test, only that onboard diagnosis is complete. Not all vehicles use all possible I/M flags.
Common OBD II Terms

Diagnostic When used as a noun, the word diagnostic refers to any onboard test run by the vehicles Diagnostic Management System. A diagnostic is simply a test run on a system or component to determine if the system or component is operating according to specification. There are many diagnostics, shown in the following list: D Misfire D Oxygen sensors D Oxygen sensor heaters D EGR D Catalyst monitoring Enable Criteria The term enable criteria is engineering language for the conditions necessary for a given diagnostic test to run. Each diagnostic has a specific list of conditions which must be met before the diagnostic will run. Enable criteria is another way of saying conditions required. The enable criteria for each diagnostic is listed on the first page of the DTC description in Section 6E1 under the heading Conditions for Setting the DTC. Enable criteria varies with each diagnostic, and typically includes, but is not limited to the following items: D engine speed D vehicle speed D ECT D MAP D barometric pressure D IAT D TP D high canister purge D fuel trim D A/C ON
6E134

There is a continuous selfdiagnosis on certain control functions. This diagnostic capability is complimented by the diagnostic procedures contained in this manual. The language of communicating the source of the malfunction is a system of diagnostic trouble codes. When a malfunction is detected by the control module, a diagnostic trouble code is set and the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Check Engine lamp) is illuminated. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) looks the same as the MIL you are already familiar with (Check Engine lamp). However, OBD II requires that it illuminate under a strict set of guide lines. Basically, the MIL is turned ON when the PCM detects a DTC that will impact the vehicle emissions. The MIL is under the control of the Diagnostic Executive. The MIL will be turned ON if an emissionsrelated diagnostic test indicates a malfunction has occurred. It will stay ON until the system or component passes the same test, for three consecutive trips, with no emissionsrelated faults. If the vehicle is experiencing a misfire malfunction which may cause damage to the ThreeWay Catalytic Converter (TWC), the MIL will flash once per second. This will continue until the vehicle is outside of speed and load conditions which could cause possible catalyst damage, and the MIL will stop flashing and remain ON steady. Extinguishing the MIL When the MIL is ON, the Diagnostic Executive will turn OFF the MIL after three (3) consecutive trips that a test passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. Although the MIL has been turned OFF, the DTC will remain in the PCM memory (both Freeze Frame and Failure Records) until forty(40) warmup cycles after no faults have been completed. If the MIL was set by either a fuel trim or misfirerelated DTC, additional requirements must be met. In addition to the requirements stated in the previous paragraph, these requirements are as follows: D The diagnostic tests that are passed must occur with 375 RPM of the RPM data stored at the time the last test failed. D Plus or minus ten (10) percent of the engine load that was stored at the time the last test failed. D Similar engine temperature conditions (warmed up or warming up) as those stored at the time the last test failed. Meeting these requirements ensures that the fault which turned on the MIL has been corrected. The MIL (Check Engine lamp) is on the instrument panel and has the following functions: D It informs the driver that a fault that affects vehicle emission levels has occurred and that the vehicle should be taken for service as soon as possible. D As a bulb and system check, the MIL will come ON with the key ON and the engine not running. When the engine is started, the MIL will turn OFF.
Trip Technically, a trip is a key onrunkey off cycle in which all the enable criteria for a given diagnostic are met, allowing the diagnostic to run. Unfortunately, this concept is not quite that simple. A trip is official when all the enable criteria for a given diagnostic are met. But because the enable criteria vary from one diagnostic to another, the definition of trip varies as well. Some diagnostics are run when the vehicle is at operating temperature, some when the vehicle first starts up; some require that the vehicle be cruising at a steady highway speed, some run only when the vehicle is at idle; some diagnostics function with the TCC disabled. Some run only immediately following a cold engine startup. A trip then, is defined as a key onrunkey off cycle in which the vehicle was operated in such a way as to satisfy the enabling criteria for a given diagnostic, and this diagnostic will consider this cycle to be one trip. However, another diagnostic with a different set of enable criteria (which were not met) during this driving event, would not consider it a trip. No trip will occur for that particular diagnostic until the vehicle is driven in such a way as to meet all the enable criteria.
The Diagnostic Executive

The Diagnostic Executive is a unique segment of software which is designed to coordinate and prioritize the diagnostic procedures as well as define the protocol for recording and displaying their results. The main responsibilities of the Diagnostic Executive are listed as follows: D Commanding the MIL (Check Engine lamp) ON and OFF D DTC logging and clearing D Freeze Frame data for the first emission related DTC recorded D Nonemission related Service Lamp (future) D Operating conditions Failure Records buffer, (the number of records will vary) D Current status information on each diagnostic D System Status (I/M ready) The Diagnostic Executive records DTCs and turns ON the MIL when emissionrelated faults occur. It can also turn OFF the MIL if the conditions cease which caused the DTC to set. Diagnostic Information The diagnostic charts and functional checks are designed to locate a faulty circuit or component through a process of logical decisions. The charts are prepared with the requirement that the vehicle functioned correctly at the time of assembly and that there are no multiple faults present.

D When the MIL remains ON while the engine is running, or when a malfunction is suspected due to a driveability or emissions problem, a Powertrain OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check must be performed. The procedures for these checks are given in OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD II) System Check. These checks will expose faults which may not be detected if other diagnostics are performed first.
6E135
D Does not store a Freeze Frame D Stores Fail Record when test fails D Updates the Fail Record each time the diagnostic test fails IMPORTANT: Only four Fail Records can be stored. Each Fail Record is for a different DTC. It is possible that there will not be Fail Records for every DTC if multiple DTCs are set. Special Cases of Type B Diagnostic Tests Unique to the misfire diagnostic, the Diagnostic Executive has the capability of alerting the vehicle operator to potentially damaging levels of misfire. If a misfire condition exists that could potentially damage the catalytic converter as a result of high misfire levels, the Diagnostic Executive will command the MIL to flash at a rate of once per second during those the time that the catalyst damaging misfire condition is present. Fuel trim and misfire are special cases of Type B diagnostics. Each time a fuel trim or misfire malfunction is detected, engine load, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature are recorded. When the ignition is turned OFF, the last reported set of conditions remain stored. During subsequent ignition cycles, the stored conditions are used as a reference for similar conditions. If a malfunction occurs during two consecutive trips, the Diagnostic Executive treats the failure as a normal Type B diagnostic, and does not use the stored conditions. However, if a malfunction occurs on two nonconsecutive trips, the stored conditions are compared with the current conditions. The MIL will then illuminate under the following conditions: D When the engine load conditions are within 10% of the previous test that failed. D Engine speed is within 375 rpm, of the previous test that failed. D Engine coolant temperature is in the same range as the previous test that failed. Storing and Erasing Freeze Frame Data and Failure Records Government regulations require that engine operating conditions be captured whenever the MIL is illuminated. The data captured is called Freeze Frame data. The Freeze Frame data is very similar to a single record of operating conditions. Whenever the MIL is illuminated, the corresponding record of operating conditions is recorded to the Freeze Frame buffer. Freeze Frame data can only be overwritten with data associated with a misfire or fuel trim malfunction. Data from these faults take precedence over data associated with any other fault. The Freeze Frame data will not be erased unless the associated history DTC is cleared. Each time a diagnostic test reports a failure, the current engine operating conditions are recorded in the Failure Records buffer. A subsequent failure will update the recorded operating conditions. The following operating conditions for the diagnostic test which failed typically include the following parameters: D Air Fuel Ratio D Air Flow Rate
DTC Types
Each DTC is directly related to a diagnostic test. The Diagnostic Management System sets DTC based on the failure of the tests during a trip or trips. Certain tests must fail two (2) consecutive trips before the DTC is set. The following are the four (4) types of DTCs and the characteristics of those codes: D Type A D Emissions related D Requests illumination of the MIL of the first trip with a fail D Stores a History DTC on the first trip with a fail D Stores a Freeze Frame (if empty) D Stores a Fail Record D Updates the Fail Record each time the diagnostic test fails D Type B D Emissions related D Armed after one (1) trip with a fail D Disarmed after one (1) trip with a pass D Requests illumination of the MIL on the second consecutive trip with a fail D Stores a History DTC on the second consecutive trip with a fail (The DTC will be armed after the first fail) D Stores a Freeze Frame on the second consecutive trip with a fail (if empty) D Stores a Fail Record when the first test fails (not dependent on consecutive trip fails) D Updates the Fail Record each time the diagnostic test fails (Some special conditions apply to misfire and fuel trim DTCs) D Type C (if the vehicle is so equipped) D NonEmissions related D Requests illumination of the Service Lamp or the service message on the Drive Information Center (DIC) on the first trip with a fail D Stores a History DTC on the first trip with a fail D Does not store a Freeze Frame D Stores Fail Record when test fails D Updates the Fail Record each time the diagnostic test fails D Type D. (Type D nonemissions related are not utilized on certain vehicle applications). D NonEmissions related D Does not request illumination of any lamp D Stores a History DTC on the first trip with a fail
6E136
D D D D D D D D D

information which will aid in repairing the vehicle. Some Scan Tools will display encoded messages which will aid in determining the nature of the concern. The method of encoding involves the use of a two additional numbering systems: Binary and Hexadecimal. The binary number system has a base of two numbers. Each digit is either a 0 or a 1. A binary number is an eight digit number and is read from right to left. Each digit has a position number with the farthest right being the 0 position and the farthest left being the 7 position. The 0 position, when displayed by a 1, indicates 1 in decimal. Each position to the left is double the previous position and added to any other position values marked as a 1. A hexadecimal system is composed of 16 different alpha numeric characters. The alpha numeric characters used are numbers 0 through 9 and letters A through F. The hexadecimal system is the most natural and common approach for Scan Tool manufacturers to display data represented by binary numbers and digital code.
Fuel Trim Engine Speed Engine Load Engine Coolant Temperature Vehicle Speed TP Angle MAP/BARO Injector Base Pulse Width Loop Status
Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp In the case of an intermittent fault, the MIL (Check Engine lamp) may illuminate and then (after three trips) go OFF. However, the corresponding diagnostic trouble code will be stored in the memory. When unexpected diagnostic trouble codes appear, check for an intermittent malfunction. A diagnostic trouble code may reset. Consult the Diagnostic Aids associated with the diagnostic trouble code. A physical inspection of the applicable subsystem most often will resolve the problem. Data Link Connector (DLC) The provision for communicating with the control module is the Data Link Connector (DLC). It is located at the lower left of the instrument panel. The DLC is used to connect to the Tech 2 Scan tool. Some common uses of the Tech 2 are listed below: D Identifying stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) D Clearing DTCs D Performing output control tests D Reading serial data

Verification of vehicle repair will be more comprehensive for vehicles with OBD II system diagnostics. Following a repair, the technician should perform the following steps: 1. Review and record the Fail Records and/or Freeze Frame data for the DTC which has been diagnosed (Freeze Frame data will only be stored for an A or B type diagnostic and only if the MIL has been requested). 2. Clear DTC(s). 3. Operate the vehicle within conditions noted in the Fail Records and/or Freeze Frame data. 4. Monitor the DTC status information for the DTC which has been diagnosed until the diagnostic test associated with that DTC runs. Following these steps are very important in verifying repairs on OBD II systems. Failure to follow these steps could result in unnecessary repairs.
Reading Diagnostic Trouble Codes Using A Tech 2 Scan Tool

The procedure for reading diagnostic trouble code(s) is to use a diagnostic Scan tool. When reading DTC(s), follow instructions supplied by tool manufacturer. Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes IMPORTANT: Do not clear DTCs unless directed to do so by the service information provided for each diagnostic procedure. When DTCs are cleared, the Freeze Frame and Failure Record data which may help diagnose an intermittent fault will also be erased from memory. If the fault that caused the DTC to be stored into memory has been corrected, the Diagnostic Executive will begin to count the warmup cycles with no further faults detected, the DTC will automatically be cleared from the PCM memory. To clear Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), use the diagnostic Scan tool clear DTCs or clear information function. When clearing DTCs follow instructions supplied by the tool manufacturer.
TS24064
Decimal/Binary/Hexadecimal Conversions
Beginning in 1996, Federal Regulations require that all auto manufacturers selling vehicles in the United States provide Scan tool manufacturers with software information to display vehicle operating parameters. All Scan tool manufacturers will display a variety of vehicle

When a Tech 2 is not available, DTCs can also be cleared by disconnecting one of the following sources for at least thirty (30) seconds. NOTE: To prevent system damage, the ignition key must be OFF when disconnecting or reconnecting battery power. D The power source to the control module. Examples: fuse, pigtail at battery PCM connectors etc.
6E137
D The negative battery cable. (Disconnecting the negative battery cable will result in the loss of other onboard memory data, such as preset radio tuning). Tech 2 From 98 MY, Isuzu dealer service departments are recommended to use the Tech 2 scan tool. Please refer to the Tech 2 user guide.
901RW180
Legend (1) PCMCIA Card (2) R232 Loop Back Connector
(3) SAE 16/19 Adaptor (4) DLC Cable (5) Tech 2
6E138

6. Turn on the vehicle ignition. 7. Power the Tech 2 ON and Verify the Tech 2 power up display.
Tech 2 Features
1. Tech 2 is a 12 volt system. Do not apply 24 volt. 2. After connecting and/or installing, the Vehicle Communications Interface (VCI) module, PCMCIA card and DLC connector to the Tech 2, connect the tool to the vehicle DLC. 3. Make sure the Tech 2 is powered OFF when removing or installing the PCMCIA card. 4. The PCMCIA card has a capacity of 10 Megabytes which is 10 times greater than the memory of the Tech 1 Mass Storage Cartridge. 5. The Tech 2 has the capability of two snapshots. 6. The PCMCIA card is sensitive to magnetism and static electricity, so care should be taken in the handling of the card. 7. The Tech 2 can plot a graph when replaying a snapshot. 8. Always return to the Main Menu by pressing the EXIT key several times before shutting down. 9. To clear Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), open Application Menu and press F1: Clear DTC Info.
060RW009
Getting Started
D Before operating the Isuzu PCMCIA card with the Tech 2, the following steps must be performed: 1. The Isuzu 98 System PCMCIA card (1) inserts into the Tech 2 (5). 2. Connect the SAE 16/19 adapter (3) to the DLC cable (4). 3. Connect the DLC cable to the Tech 2 (5) 4. Make sure the vehicle ignition is off. 5. Connect the Tech 2 SAE 16/19 adapter to the vehicle DLC.
NOTE: The RS232 Loop back connector is only to use for diagnosis of Tech 2 and refer to user guide of the Tech 2.
740RW060
6E139
Operating Procedure (Example)

The power up screen is displayed when you power up the tester with the Isuzu system PCMCIA card. Follow the operating procedure below.
060R100087
060R100088
6E140
Menu
D The following table shows which functions are used for the available equipment versions.
060RW223
060R100018
The following is a brief description of each of the sub menus in DTC Info and DTC. The order in which they appear here is alphabetical and not necessarily the way they will appear on the Tech 2.
DTC Modes
DTC Information Mode

Use the DTC info mode to search for a specific type of stored DTC information. There are six choices. The service manual may instruct the technician to test for DTCs in a certain manner. Always follow published service procedures.
060R100077
On OBD II vehicles there are five options available in Tech 2 DTC mode to display the enhanced information available. After selecting DTC, the following menu appears: D DTC Info D Freeze Frame D Fail Records (not all applications) D Clear Info
060RW221
DTC Status This selection will display any DTCs that have not run during the current ignition cycle or have reported a test failure during this ignition up to a maximum of 33 DTCs. DTC tests which run and pass will cause that DTC number to be removed from Tech 2 screen. Fail This Ignition This selection will display all DTCs that have failed during the present ignition cycle.

History This selection will display only DTCs that are stored in the PCMs history memory. It will display all type A and B DTCs that have requested the MIL and have failed within the last 40 warm-up cycles. In addition, it will display all type C and type D DTCs that have failed within the last 40 warm-up cycles. Last Test Failed This selection will display only DTCs that have failed the last time the test run. The last test may have run during a previous ignition cycle if a type A or type B DTC is displayed. For type C and type D DTCs, the last failure must have occurred during the current ignition cycle to appear as Last Test Fail. MILSVC or Message Request This selection will display only DTCs that are requesting the MIL. Type C and type D DTCs cannot be displayed using this option. This selection will report type B DTCs only after the MIL has been requested. Not Run Since Code Cleared This option will display up to 33 DTCs that have not run since the DTCs were last cleared. Since any displayed DTCs have not run, their condition (passing or failing) is unknown. Test Failed Since Code Cleared This selection will display all active and history DTCs that have reported a test failure since the last time DTCs were cleared. DTCs that last failed more than 40 warm-up cycles before this option is selected will not be displayed.
6E141
060R100078
4. Select F0:Lamps Test in the Miscellaneous Test.
Miscellaneous Test
This test consists of eight menus-Lights, Relays, EVAP, IAC System, Fuel System, EGR Control, Variable Intake Manifold Solenoid, and Injector Balance Tests. In these tests, Tech 2 sends operating signals to the systems to confirm their operations thereby to judge the normality of electric circuits. To judge intermittent trouble, 1. Confirm DTC freeze frame data, and match the freeze frame data as test conditions with the data list displayed by Miscellaneous Test. 2. Confirm DTC setting conditions, and match the setting conditions as test conditions with the data list displayed by Miscellaneous Test. 3. Refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM.
060RX043
Lamps Test
This test is conducted check MIL and Low Fuel Lamp for its working. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Run the Engine at idle. 3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
060RX044
6E142

Select F2:Low Fuel Lamp
5. Select F0:Malfunction Indicator Lamp.
060RX019
060RX020
6. Push On soft key. 7. Make sure Lamp illuminates. 8. If lamp illuminates, the Lamp is operating correctly. 9. Select F1:Up Shift Lamp
10. Push On soft key. 11. Make sure Lamp illuminates. 12. If Lamp illuminates, the Lamp is operaing correctly.
Relays Test
This test is conducted to check Fuel Pump Relay, A/C Clutch Low Fan and High Fan for prepor operation. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Ignition SW is On. 3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
060RX045
060R100078

4. Select F1:Relay Test in the Miscellaneous Test. 6. Push On soft key.
6E143
060R100078
060RX022
5. Select F0:Fuel Pump Relay.
7. Control Fuel Pump Relay and check a data list. 8. If the data list chenges, the Fuel Pump Relay is normal. 9. Select F1:A/C Clutch Relay. 10. *Run the Engine at idle. 11. Turn on Air Condtioning.
060RX047
060RX023
12. Push On and Off of soft key. 13. Control A/C Clutch Relay and check a data list. 14. If the data list changes, the A/C Clutch Relay is normal.
6E144
15. Select F2: Low Fan Relay.
EVAP Test
This test is conducted check EVAP system for its working. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Run the Engine at idle. 3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
060RX048
16. Push On and Off of soft key. 17. Control Low Fan Relay and check a data list. 18. If the data list changes, the Low Fan Relay is normal. 19. Run the Fan Motor. 20. Select F3: High Fan Relay.
060R100078
4. Select F2:EVAP Test in the Miscellaneous Test.
060RX049
21. Push On and Off of soft key. 22. Control High Fan Relay and check a data list. If the data list changes, the High Fan Relay is normal. 23. Run the Fan Motor.
060RX050

5. Select F0: Purge Solenoid. 10. Select F1:EVAP Vent Solenoid.
6E145
060RX025
060RX025
6. Push Decrease or Increase soft key.
11. Push On or Off of soft key.
060RX026
060R100019
7. Control EVAP Purge Solenoid and check a data list. 8. If the data list changes, the purge Solenoid is normal. Ignition SW is On. 9. Turn engine off, turn ignition SW On.
12. Control EVAP Vent Solenoid and check a data list. 13. If the data list changes, the EVAP Vent Solenoid is normal.
Idle Air Control System Test

This test is conducted check to IAC system for proper operation. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Run the Engine at idle.
6E146

5. Select F1: IAC Control Test.
3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
060RX052 060R100078
4. Select F3: IAC System Test in the Miscellaneous Test.
6. Push Increase or Decrease soft key. 7. Control IAC system and check a data list. D F0: IAC Control
060RX051 060RX015
8. Select F1: IAC Reset. 9. Push Reset IAC soft key. 10. Control IAC Reset and check data list.

11. If data list changes, the IAC has been Reset.
6E147
4. Select F4: Fuel System in the Miscellaneous Menu.
060RW2311
060RX053
Fuel System Test

This test is conducted check Fuel Level Gauge for proper operation. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Ignition SW is On. 3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
5. Select F1: Fuel Gauge Level
060RX028
060R100078
6E148

10. Push Reset of soft key.
6. Push Decrease or Increase of soft key.
060RX030
060RX029
7. Control Fuel Level and check data list. 8. If data list changes, the Fuel Gauge Level is normal. 9. Select F0: Fuel Trim Reset.
EGR Control Test

This test is conducted check EGR valve for proper operation. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Run the Engine at idle. 3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
060RX028
060R100078

4. Select F5: EGR Control Test in the Miscellaneous Test.
6E149
060RX054
060R100078
5. Control EGR Valve and check data list.
4. Select F6: Injector Balance Test in the Miscellaneous Test.
060RX017
6. If the change, the EGR Control is normal.
060RX055
Injector Balance Test

This test is conducted to make sure the appropriate electric signals are being sent to injectors Nos. 16. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Run the Engine at idle.
6E150
5. Select injector number and push injector off of soft key.
060RW2301
6. Make sure of engine speed change. 7. If engine speed changes, the injector electric circuit is normal. If engine speed does not change, the injector electric circuit or the injector itself is not normal.
Plotting Snapshot Graph

This test selects several necessary items from the data list to plot graphs and makes data comparison on a long term basis. It is an effective test particularly in emission related evaluations.
060RX037
For trouble diagnosis, you can collect graphic data (snap shot) directly from the vehicle. You can replay the snapshot data as needed. There fore, accurate diagnosis is possible, even though the vehicle is not available.
6E151
System Check at Tech 2
060R100086
General Description
1. Turn on the ignition and check the check engine lamp. If it is not turned on, execute Miscellaneous Test at Tech 2. (Refer to Miscellaneous Test) And if problems are found, repair a blown bulb or a short circuit. 2. Ignition on, engine on. Check flashing check engine lamp. If it keep flashing, Check Diagnosis trouble code (DTC) at Tech 2 CHECK POINT: D Kind of DTC D Which is current DTC or history. D Recording freeze frame data in Tech 2. D DTC history D F1: MIL SVS or Message Request at Tech 2 D DTC at Current ignition cycle
3. When the lamp dont turn on, Check a DTC at Tech 2 too. CHECK POINT: D Kind of DTC D Which is current DTC or history. D Recording freeze frame data in Tech 2. D DTC history D F3: Test Failed Since Code Cleared at Tech 2. D DTC at Current ignition cycle
6E152

D Snapshot the engine data at the Tech 2. And observe variation of the any data, faulty data, fixed data and etc. CHECK POINT: 1. A systematic error is caused by a low accuracy of electric items. 2. A random error is caused by electric trouble. It is disturbance and mechanical trouble. 3. A fixed error is caused by broken electric item, open circuit, short circuit.
4. Case DTC stored at PCM Record the DTC and the freeze frame data and flash it. After reappear the trouble from the freeze frame data. Check power supply circuits, ground circuits, and signal circuit. CHECK POINT: D Which is mechanical trouble or electrical trouble. D Snapshot the engine data at the Tech 2. And observe variation of the any data, faulty data, fixed data and etc. 5. Case DTC did not store at PCM CHECK POINT: D Which is mechanical trouble or electrical trouble.
System Check at the Tech 2

1. Ignition On, engine Off. 2. Check the check engine lamp. Did it turm on? Go to Step 2
Go to No Malfunction Indicator Lamp
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition Off. Install Tech 2 Ignition On, engine Off. Indicate the engine data at Tech 2 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
The engine data is illuminate on Tech 2 3 1. Ignition Off. 2. Discconnect the PCM. 3. Check the class2 data circuit for a open, a short to ground or short to voltage. 4. Checke the power supply cirucit at the DLC for a open, a short to ground or short to voltage. If the problelm is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? 4 1. Ignition On, engine On. Did it run and keep running? 5 1. Turn on Tech 2 and select Model year and this engine after selected Powertrain. 2. Select menu item F0:Diagnostic Trouble Code on Tech 2. 3. Select menu item F0:Read DTC info Priority on Thch 2. Is Tech2 illuminated any DTCs? 6 1. Check DTC type which is current, history or intermittent. Is the DTC current?
Verify Repair
Go to Step 4 Go to Engine Cranke But Will Not Run
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 7
6E153
System Check at the Tech 2 (Cont'd)

1. Record the DTC and the freeze frame data. 2. Flash the DTC. 3. Check trouble setteing condition at the freeze frame data. 4. Reappear the trouble from the freeze frame data. 5. Select menu item F2:DTC Info. On the DTC. 6. Select menu item F4:Not Run Since Code Cleared on the DTC. 7. Check DTC id not illuminated on the svreen.( When the action is completed, the PCM checked relevant failure.) 8. Select menu item F0:Read DTC info by Priority and check DTC. Was the DTC illuminated on the Tech 2? Go to Step 8 1. Turn on Tech 2 and select Model year and this engine after selcted Powertrain. 2. Select menu item F0:Diagnostic Trouble Code on Tech 2. 3. Select menu itme F2:DTC Information. 4. Select menu itme F2:Last Test Failed. 5. As obderve the Tech2 screen, vibrate relevant sensor body, connector, harness and actuator. If the screen is shaded, the vibrated point is breaking. Was a problem found? Verify Repair
Go to General decription 5. Case DTC did not store at PCM in this chapter
Go to Step 9
1. Turn on Tech 2 and select Model year and this engine after selected Powertrain. 2. Select menu item F3:Miscellaneous Tests on Tech 2. 3. Select menu itme relevant sensor, actuator and parts. 4. If a relevant part is not fined on the screen, go to step 10. 5. After a test executed, If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was problem found? Verify Repair Go to Step 10 1. Turn on Tech 2 and selct Model year and this engine after selected Powertrain. 2. Select menu item F1:Data Display on Tech 2. 3. Select menu item F0:Engine Data or F1:O2 sensor Data. 4. Ignition On, engine On. And keep idling speed. 5. As observe the Tech 2 screen, Vibrate relevant sensor body. connector, harness and actuator. If the screen is shaded, the vibrated point is braking. Was a problem found? Verify Repair Go to step 11
10
6E154
System Check at the Tech 2 (Cont'd)

11
1. Turn on Tech 2 and select Model year and this engine agter selected Powertrain. 2. Select menu item F1:Date Display on Tech2. 3. Select menu itne F0:Engine Data or F1:O2 sensor Data. 4. Ignition On, engine On. And keep idling speed. (Warm it enough temprature.) 5. Using Tech 2, Start snapshot data. 6. Few minutes later, run up engine unitl 2500rpm for engine data recording. 7. Terminat snapshot, and reappear the engine data. 8. Compare specified value with it, and reappear the engine data. 9. If a problem was found, check the error which is systematic error, random error fixed error. D A systematic error is caused by a low accuracy of electric items. So a lot of cases will be replaced it. D A randonm error id caused by electric trouble, it is disturbance and mechanical trouble. In this case, check out applied voltage to electric itme exitence of EMI(electromagnetic interference) parts, elctrical interference, fitting of non genuine parts and mechanical parts. D A fixed error is caused by broken electric item, open circuit, short circuit. For example when ECT sensor circuit was open ciruit, it is illuminated -40C on Tech 2. 10.If a problem was found, repair as neceesaary. Was a problem found? Verify Repair Go to Step 12 1. Countercheck mechanical of the engine. Refer to engine work shop manual. 2. If a problem was found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify Repair Go to Step 13 1. Countercheck this check table. 2. When this table is not found a trouble, check following point. D Physical/Visual check D Theh 2 data D Freeze fram data D Conceivable circuit 3. If a problem was found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify Repair
12
13
6E155
Plotting Graph Flow Chart (Plotting graph after obtaining vehicle information)
060RX041
6E156
Flow Chart for Snapshot Replay (Plotting Graph)
060RX040
6E157
PRIMARY SYSTEMBASED DIAGNOSTICS

Primary SystemBased Diagnostics
There are primary systembased diagnostics which evaluate system operation and its effect on vehicle emissions. The primary systembased diagnostics are listed below with a brief description of the diagnostic function: Oxygen Sensor Diagnosis The fuel control heated oxygen sensor (HO2S 1) is diagnosed for the following conditions: D Heater performance (time to activity on cold start) D Slow response D Response time (time to switch R/L or L/R) D Inactive signal (output steady at bias voltage approx. 450 mV) D Signal fixed high D Signal fixed low The catalyst monitor heated oxygen sensor (HO2S 2) is diagnosed for the following conditions: D Heater performance (time to activity on cold start). D Signal fixed low during steady state conditions or power enrichment (hard acceleration when a rich mixture should be indicated). D Signal fixed high during steady state conditions or deceleration mode (deceleration when a lean mixture should be indicated). D Inactive sensor (output steady at approx. 438 mV). If the oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector or terminal are damaged, the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. DO NOT attempt to repair the wiring, connector or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly, it must have clean reference air provided to it. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor wire(s). Any attempt to repair the wires, connector or terminals could result in the obstruction of the reference air and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Refer to OnVehicle Service, Heated Oxygen Sensors.
HO2S Heater
Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for Closed Loop fuel control to begin operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensor (HO2S 1) to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by the catalyst monitor sensor (HO2S 2) to maintain a sufficiently high temperature which allows accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further away from the engine.
Catalyst Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensors And Diagnostic Operation
TS24067
Fuel Control Heated Oxygen Sensors

The main function of the fuel control heated oxygen sensors is to provide the control module with exhaust stream oxygen content information to allow proper fueling and maintain emissions within mandated levels. After it reaches operating temperature, the sensor will generate a voltage, inversely proportional to the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gases. The control module uses the signal voltage from the fuel control heated oxygen sensors while in Closed Loop to adjust fuel injector pulse width. While in Closed Loop, the PCM can adjust fuel delivery to maintain an air/fuel ratio which allows the best combination of emission control and driveability. The fuel control heated oxygen sensors are also used to determine catalyst efficiency.
To control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a threeway catalytic converter is used. The catalyst within the converter promotes a chemical reaction which oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas, converting them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx, converting it to nitrogen. The PCM has the ability to monitor this process using the precatalyst and postcatalyst heated oxygen sensors. The precatalyst sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the threeway catalytic converter. The postcatalyst sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst; this in turn indicates the catalysts ability to convert exhaust gases efficiently. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the precatalyst signal will be far more active than that produced by the postcatalyst sensor. In addition to catalyst monitoring, the heated oxygen sensors have a limited role in controlling fuel delivery. If the sensor signal indicates a high or low oxygen content for an extended period of time while in Closed Loop, the PCM will adjust the fuel delivery slightly to compensate. D For the 2.2L engine, the precatalyst monitor sensor is designated Bank 1 HO2S 1. The postcatalyst sensor is Bank 1 HO2S 2.
6E158
Catalyst Monitor Outputs The catalyst monitor diagnostic is sensitive to the following conditions: D Exhaust leaks D HO2S contamination D Alternate fuels Exhaust system leaks may cause the following: D Preventing a degraded catalyst from failing the diagnostic. D Causing a false failure for a normally functioning catalyst. D Preventing the diagnostic from running. Some of the contaminants that may be encountered are phosphorus, lead, silica, and sulfur. The presence of these contaminants will prevent the TWC diagnostic from functioning properly. ThreeWay Catalyst Oxygen Storage Capacity The ThreeWay catalyst (TWC) must be monitored for efficiency. To accomplish this, the control module monitors the precatalyst HO2S and postcatalyst HO2S oxygen sensors. When the TWC is operating properly, the postcatalyst oxygen sensor will have significantly less activity than the precatalyst oxygen sensor. The TWC stores and releases oxygen as needed during its normal reduction and oxidation process. The control module will calculate the oxygen storage capacity using the difference between the precatalyst and post catalyst oxygen sensors voltage levels. If the activity of the postcatalyst oxygen sensor approaches that of the precatalyst oxygen sensor, the catalysts efficiency is degraded. Stepped or staged testing level allow the control module to statistically filter test information. This prevents falsely passing or falsely failing the oxygen storage capacity test. The calculations performed by the onboard diagnostic system are very complex. For this reason, post catalyst oxygen sensor activity should not be used to determine oxygen storage capacity unless directed by the service manual. Two stages are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. Failure of the first stage will indicate that the catalyst requires further testing to determine catalyst efficiency. The second stage then looks at the inputs from the pre and post catalyst HO2S sensors more closely before determining if the catalyst is indeed degraded. This further statistical processing is done to increase the accuracy of oxygen storage capacity type monitoring. Failing the first (stage 1) test DOES NOT indicate a failed catalyst. The catalyst may be marginal or the fuel sulfur content could be very high. Aftermarket HO2S characteristics may be different from the original equipment manufacturer sensor. This may lead to a false pass or a false fail of the catalyst monitor diagnostic. Similarly, if an aftermarket catalyst does not contain the same amount of cerium as the original part, the correlation between oxygen storage and conversion efficiency may be altered enough to set a false DTC.
MISFIRE MONITOR DIAGNOSTIC OPERATION

Misfire Monitor Diagnostic Operation
The misfire monitor diagnostic is based on crankshaft rotational velocity (reference period) variations. The PCM determines crankshaft rotational velocity using the crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor. When a cylinder misfires, the crankshaft slows down momentarily. By monitoring the crankshaft and camrhaft position sensor signals, the PCM can calculate when a misfire occurs. For a noncatalyst damaging misfire, the diagnostic will be required to monitor a misfire present for between 10003200 engine revolutions. For catalystdamaging misfire, the diagnostic will respond to misfire within 200 engine revolutions. Rough roads may cause false misfire detection. A rough road will cause torque to be applied to the drive wheels and drive train. This torque can intermittently decrease the crankshaft rotational velocity. This may be falsely detected as a misfire.
Misfire Counters
Whenever a cylinder misfires, the misfire diagnostic counts the misfire and notes the crankshaft position at the time the misfire occurred. These misfire counters are basically a file on each engine cylinder. A current and a history misfire counter are maintained for each cylinder. The misfire current counters (Misfire Cur #14) indicate the number of firing events out of the last 200 cylinder firing events which were misfires. The misfire current counter will display real time data without a misfire DTC stored. The misfire history counters (Misfire Hist#14) indicate the total number of cylinder firing events which were misfires. The misfire history counters will display 0 until the misfire diagnostic has failed and a DTC P0300 is set. Once the misfire DTC P0300 is set, the misfire history counters will be updated every 200 cylinder firing events. A misfire counter is maintained for each cylinder. If the misfire diagnostic reports a failure, the diagnostic executive reviews all of the misfire counters before reporting a DTC. This way, the diagnostic executive reports the most current information. When crankshaft rotation is erratic, a misfire condition will be detected. Because of this erratic condition, the data that is collected by the diagnostic can sometimes incorrectly identify which cylinder is misfiring. Use diagnostic equipment to monitor misfire counter data on OBD IIcompliant vehicles. Knowing which specific cylinder(s) misfired can lead to the root cause, even when dealing with a multiple cylinder misfire. Using the information in the misfire counters, identify which cylinders are misfiring. If the counters indicate cylinders numbers 1 and 4 misfired, look for a circuit or component common to both cylinders number 1 and 4. Misfire counter information is located in the Specific Eng. menu, Misfire Data submenu of the data list. The misfire diagnostic may indicate a fault due to a temporary fault not necessarily caused by a vehicle

emission system malfunction. Examples include the following items: D Contaminated fuel D Low fuel D Fuelfouled spark plugs D Basic engine fault
6E159
FUEL TRIM SYSTEM MONITOR DIAGNOSTIC OPERATION

Fuel Trim System Monitor Diagnostic Operation
This system monitors the averages of shortterm and longterm fuel trim values. If these fuel trim values stay at their limits for a calibrated period of time, a malfunction is indicated. The fuel trim diagnostic compares the averages of shortterm fuel trim values and longterm fuel trim values to rich and lean thresholds. If either value is within the thresholds, a pass is recorded. If both values are outside their thresholds, a rich or lean DTC will be recorded. The fuel trim system diagnostic also conducts an intrusive test. This test determines if a rich condition is being caused by excessive fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. In order to meet OBD II requirements, the control module uses weighted fuel trim cells to determine the need to set a fuel trim DTC. A fuel trim DTC can only be set if fuel trim counts in the weighted fuel trim cells exceed specifications. This means that the vehicle could have a fuel trim problem which is causing a problem under certain conditions (i.e., engine idle high due to a small vacuum leak or rough idle due to a large vacuum leak) while it operates fine at other times. No fuel trim DTC would set (although an engine idle speed DTC or HO2S DTC may set). Use the Tech 2 to observe fuel trim counts while the problem is occurring. A fuel trim DTC may be triggered by a number of vehicle faults. Make use of all information available (other DTCs stored, rich or lean condition, etc.) when diagnosing a fuel trim fault.
Fuel Trim Cell Diagnostic Weights

No fuel trim DTC will set regardless of the fuel trim counts in cell 0 unless the fuel trim counts in the weighted cells are also outside specifications. This means that the vehicle could have a fuel trim problem which is causing a problem under certain conditions (i.e. engine idle high due to a small vacuum leak or rough due to a large vacuum leak) while it operates fine at other times. No fuel trim DTC would set (although an engine idle speed DTC or HO2S DTC may set). Use the Tech 2 to observe fuel trim counts while the problem is occurring.
6E160
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD II) SYSTEM CHECK
060R100085
Circuit Description
The onboard diagnostic system check is the starting point for any driveability complaint diagnosis. Before using this procedure, perform a careful visual/physical check of the PCM and engine grounds for cleanliness and tightness. The onboard diagnostic system check is an organized approach to identifying a problem created by an electronic engine control system malfunction.
damaged terminals, poor terminaltowire connection, and damaged harness.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1. The MIL (Check Engine lamp) should be ON steady with the ignition ON/engine OFF. If not, isolate the malfunction in the MIL circuit. 2. Checks the Class 2 data circuit and ensures that the PCM is able to transmit serial data. 3. This test ensures that the PCM is capable of controlling the MIL and the MIL driver circuit is not shorted to ground. 4. If the engine will not start, the Cranks But Will Not Run chart should be used to diagnose the condition.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbedthrough wire insulation or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for poor connections or a damaged harness. Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or

7. A Tech 2 parameter which is not within the typical range may help to isolate the area which is causing the problem.
6E161
10. This vehicle is equipped with a PCM which utilizes an electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM). When the PCM is replaced, the new PCM must be programmed. Refer to PCM Replacement and Programming Procedures in Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Sensors.
OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD II) System Check

1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Observe the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL or Check Engine lamp). Is the MIL (Check Engine lamp) ON? Go to Step 2 Go to No MIL 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Install a Tech 2. Ignition ON. Attempt to display PCM engine data with the Tech 2. Go to Step 3 Go to Step 8 Go to MIL (Check Engine Lamp) On Steady Go to Cranks But Will Not Run Go to Step 7
Does the Tech 2 display PCM data? 3 1. Using the Tech 2 output tests function, select MIL dash lamp control and command the MIL OFF. 2. Observe the MIL. Did the MIL turn OFF? 4 Attempt to start the engine. Did the engine start and continue to run? 5 6 Select Display DTCs with the Tech 2. Are any DTCs stored? Are two or more of the following DTCs stored? P0107, P0113, P0118, P0122, P0123.
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Go to Multiple PCM Information Sensor DTCs Set
7 Compare PCM data values displayed on the Tech 2 to the typical engine scan data values. Are the displayed values normal or close to the typical values? 8 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the PCM. 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 3. Check the Class 2 data circuit for an open, short to ground, or short to voltage. Also, check the DLC ignition feed circuit for an open or short to ground and the DLC ground circuits for an open. 4. If a problem found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?
Go to applicable DTC table Go to indicated Component System Checks
Go to Typial Scan Data Value
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 9
6E162
OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD II) System Check (Cont'd)

1. Attempt to reprogram the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in OnVehicle Service. 2. Attempt to display PCM data with the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 display PCM engine data? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 10 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in OnVehicle Service. And also refer to latest service bulletin Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10
6E163
A/C CLUTCH CONTROL CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
060R100022
Circuit Description
When air conditioning and blower fan are selected, and if the system has a sufficient refrigerent charge, a 12volt signal is supplied to the A/C request input of the powertrain control module (PCM). The A/C request signal may be temporarily cancelled during system operation by the electronic thermostat in the evaporator case. The electronic thermostat may intermittently remove the control circuit ground for the A/C thermostat relay to prevent the evaporator from forming ice. When the A/C request signal is received by the PCM, the PCM supplies a ground from the compressor clutch relay if the engine operating conditions are within acceptable ranges. With the A/C compressor relay energized, battery voltage is supplied to the compressor clutch coil. The PCM will enable the compressor clutch to engage whenever A/C has been selected with the engine running, unless any of the following conditions are present:
D The throttle is greater than 90%. D The ignition voltage is below 10.5 volts. D The engine speed is greater than 4500 RPM for 5 seconds or 5400 RPM. D The engine coolant temperature (ECT) is greater than 125C (257F) D The intake air temperature (IAT) is less than 5C (41F). D The power steering pressure switch signals a high pressure condition position.
Diagnostic Aids
To diagnose an intermittent fault, check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at the PCM Inspect harness connections for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection.
6E164

be used in diagnosing the system. The Tech 2 has the ability to read the A/C request input to the PCM. The Tech 2 can display when the PCM has commended the A/C clutch ON. The Tech 2 should have the ability to override the A/C request signal and energize the A/C compressor relay.
D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery voltage, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the A/C clutch while moving connnectors and wiring harnesses related to the A/C. A sudden clutch malfunction will indicate the source of the intermittent.
A/C Clutch Diagnosis

This chart should be used for diagnosing the electrical portion of the A/C compressor clutch circuit. A Tech 2 will
A/C Clutch Control Circuit Diagnosis

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data, then clear the DTCs. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using the Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P1546. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P1546 Ran and Passed?
Go to OBD System Check
Refer to Diagnostic Aids
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Remove the A/C Compressor Relay from the Underhood Electrical Center. 3. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 4. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check for voltage on the Fused pins of the A/C Compressor Clutch Relat connector. Does the DVM read the following value? 12 Volts Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Check the suspect circuit(s) between the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay connector and the Fuse for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Powertrain Controlm Module (PCM) connectors from the PCM. 3. Check the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay control circuit between the PCM and Underhood Electrical Center for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6
6E165
A/C Clutch Control Circuit Diagnosis (Cont'd)

1. Reinstall the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay. 2. Using a fused jumper, ground the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay control circuit at the PCM connector. 3. Ignition ON, engine OFF. Does the A/C Compressor turn ON? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 7 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Check the A/C Compressor Clutch circuit between the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay and A/C Compressor Clutch for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 8 Replace the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed.Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest service bulletin Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair.
8 9
6E166
ELECTRONIC IGNITION SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

If the engine cranks but will not run or immediately stalls, the Engine Cranks But Will Not Start chart must be used to determine if the failure is in the ignition system or the fuel system. If DTC P0300, P0341, P0342, or P0336 is set, the appropriate diagnostic trouble code chart must be used for diagnosis. If a misfire is being experienced with no DTC set, for diagnosis, refer to the Symptoms section.
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE
EVAP CANISTER PURGE SOLENOID

A continuous purge condition with no purge commanded by the PCM will set a DTC P1441. A fault (small leak) in the EVAP purge vacuum system will set a DTC P0442. Refer to the DTC charts for further information.
VISUAL CHECK OF THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER

0006
The Tech 2 displays the IAC pintle position in counts. A count of 0 indicates the PCM is commanding the IAC pintle to be driven all the way into a fullyseated position. This is usually caused by a vacuum leak. The higher the number of counts, the more air is being commanded to bypass the throttle blade. In order to diagnose the IAC system, refer to IAC System Check. For other possible causes of idle problems, refer to Rough, Unstable, or Incorrect Idle, Stalling in Symptoms.
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST

A fuel system pressure test is part of several of the diagnostic charts and symptom checks. To perform this test, refer to Fuel System Diagnosis.
014RX001
D If the canister is cracked or damaged, replace the canister. D If fuel is leaking from the canister, replace the canister and check hoses and hose routing.
6E167
FUEL METERING SYSTEM CHECK

Some failures of the fuel metering system will result in an Engine Cranks But Will Not Run symptom. If this condition exists, refer to the Cranks But Will Not Run chart. This chart will determine if the problem is caused by the ignition system, the PCM, or the fuel pump electrical circuit. For the fuel system wiring schematic, refer to Fuel System Electrical Test. If there is a fuel delivery problem, to diagnose the fuel injectors, the fuel pressure regulator, and the fuel pump,refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. If a malfunction occurs in the fuel metering system, it usually results in either a rich HO2S signal or a lean HO2S signal. This condition is indicated by the HO2S voltage, which causes the PCM to change the fuel calculation (fuel injector pulse width) based on the HO2S reading. Changes made to the fuel calculation will be indicated by a change in the long term fuel trim values which can be monitored with a Tech 2. Ideal long term fuel trim values are around 0%; for a lean HO2S signal, the PCM will add fuel, resulting in a fuel trim value above 0%. Some variations in fuel trim values are normal because all engines are not exactly the same. If the evaporative emission canister purge is ON, the long term fuel trim may be as low as 38%. If the long term fuel trim values are greater than +23%, for items which can cause a lean HO2S signal, refer to DTC P0131, DTC P0171, and DTC 1171.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. Relieve the fuel pressure by connecting the J 347301 Fuel Pressure Gauge to the fuel pressure connection on the fuel rail. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gauge is complete. Place the fuel pressure gauge bleed hose in an approved gasoline container. With the ignition switch OFF open the valve on the fuel pressure gauge. 3.Record the lowest voltage displayed by the DVM after the first second of the test. (During the first second, voltage displayed by the DVM may be inaccurate due to the initial current surge.) Injector Specifications: Resistance Ohms 11.8 12.6 Voltage Specification at 10C35C (50F95F) 5.7 6.6
FUEL INJECTOR COIL TEST PROCEDURE AND FUEL INJECTOR BALANCE TEST PROCEDURE
D The voltage displayed by the DVM should be within the specified range. D The voltage displayed by the DVM may increase throughout the test as the fuel injector windings warm and the resistance of the fuel injector windings changes. D An erratic voltage reading (large fluctuations in voltage that do not stabilize) indicates an intermittent connection within the fuel injector. 5. Injector Specifications: Highest Acceptable Voltage Reading Above/Below 35C/10C (95F/50F) 9.5 Volts Acceptable Subtracted Value 0.6 Volt
7. The Fuel Injector Balance Test portion of this chart (Step 7 through Step 11) checks the mechanical (fuel delivery) portion of the fuel injector. An engine cooldown period of 10 minutes is necessary in order to avoid irregular fuel pressure readings due to Hot Soak fuel boiling.
T32003
6E168
Injector Coil Test Procedure (Steps 16) And Injector Balance Test Procedure (Steps 711)
R262001
CYLINDER 1 1st Reading 2nd Reading Amount of Drop (1st Reading2nd Reading Av. drop = 166 kPa/24 psi +/10 kPa/1.5 psi = 156 176 kPa or 22.5 25.5 psi NOTE: These figures are examples only. 296 kPa (43psi) 131 kPa (19 psi) 165 kPa (24 psi) OK 2 296 kPa (43psi) 117 kPa (17 psi) 179 kPa (26 psi) Faulty, Rich (Too Much Fuel Drop) 3 296 kPa (43psi) 124 kPa (18 psi) 172 kPa (25 psi) OK 4 296 kPa (43psi) 145 kPa (21 psi) 151 kPa (22 psi) Faulty, Lean (Too Little Fuel Drop)
6E169
Injector Coil Test Procedure (Steps 16) And Injector Balance Test Procedure (Steps 711)
Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Turn the engine OFF. NOTE: In order to prevent flooding of a single cylinder and possible engine damage, relieve the fuel pressure before performing the fuel injector coil test procedure. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Test Description Number 2. 3. Connect the J 390215V Fuel Injector Tester to B+ and ground, and to the J3902190 Injector Switch Box. 4. Connect the injector switch box to the grey fuel injector harness connector located at the front of the EVAP canister bracket. 5. Set the amperage supply selector switch on the fuel injector tester to the Coil Test 0.5 amp position. 6. Connect the leads from the J 39200 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to the fuel injector tester. Refer to the illustrations associated with the test description. 7. Set the DVM to the tenths scale (0.0). 8. Observe the engine coolant temperature. Is the engine coolant temperature within the specified values?
10C (50F) to 35C (95F)
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
1. Set the injector switch box to injector #1. 2. Press the Push to Start Test button on the fuel injector tester. 3. Observe the voltage reading on the DVM. IMPORTANT: The voltage reading may rise during the test. 4. Record the lowest voltage observed after the first second of the test. 5. Set the injector switch box to the next injector and repeat steps 2, 3, and 4. Did any fuel injector have an erratic voltage reading (large fluctuations in voltage that did not stabilize) or a voltage reading outside of the specified values?
5.76.6 V
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 7
Replace the faulty fuel injector(s). Refer to Fuel Injector. Is the action complete? Go to Step 7
6E170
Injector Coil Test Procedure (Steps 16) And Injector Balance Test Procedure (Steps 711) (Cont'd)
1. Set the injector switch box to injector #1. 2. Press the Push to Start Test button on the fuel injector tester. 3. Observe the voltage reading on the DVM. IMPORTANT: The voltage reading may rise during the test. 4. Record the lowest voltage observed after the first second of the test. 5. Set the injector switch box to the next injector and repeat steps 2, 3, and 4. Did any fuel injector have an erratic voltage reading (large fluctuations in voltage that did not stabilize) or a voltage reading above the specified value?
9.5 V
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 6
1. Identify the highest voltage reading recorded (other than those above 9.5 V). 2. Subtract the voltage reading of each injector from the highest voltage selected in step 1. Repeat until you have a subtracted value for each injector. For any injector, is the subtracted value in step 2 greater than the specified value? 0.6 V Go to Step 4 Go to Step 7
CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gauge is complete. 1. Connect the J 347301 Fuel Pressure Gauge to the fuel pressure test port. 2. Energize the fuel pump using the Tech 2. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gauge into an approved gasoline container. 4. Bleed the air out of the fuel pressure gauge. 5. With the fuel pump running, observe the reading on 296 kPa 376 the fuel pressure gauge. kPa (4355 Is the fuel pressure within the specified values? psi)
Go to Step 8
Go to Fuel System Diagnosis Go to Fuel System Diagnosis
Turn the fuel pump OFF. Does the fuel pressure remain constant? Go to Step 9
6E171
Injector Coil Test Procedure (Steps 16) And Injector Balance Test Procedure (Steps 711) (Cont'd)
1. Connect the J 390215V Fuel Injector Tester and J3902190 Injector Switch Box to the fuel injector harness connector. 2. Set the amperage supply selector switch on the fuel injector tester to the Balance Test 0.52.5 amp position. 3. Using the Tech 2 turn the fuel pump ON then OFF in order to pressurize the fuel system. 4. Record the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge after the fuel pressure stabilizes. This is the first pressure reading. 5. Energize the fuel injector by depressing the Push to Start Test button on the fuel injector tester. 6. Record the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge after the fuel pressure gauge needle has stopped moving. This is the second pressure reading. 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each fuel injector. 8. Subtract the second pressure reading from the first pressure reading for one fuel injector. The result is the pressure drop value. 9. Obtain a pressure drop value for each fuel injector. 10.Add all of the individual pressure drop values. This is the total pressure drop. 11. Divide the total pressure drop by the number of fuel injectors. This is the average pressure drop. Does any fuel injector have a pressure drop value that is either higher than the average pressure drop or lower than the average pressure drop by the specified value? 10 kPa (1.5 psi) Go to Step 10 Go to OBD System Check
10
Retest any fuel injector that does not meet the specification. Refer to the procedure in step 11. NOTE: Do not repeat any portion of this test before running the engine in order to prevent the engine from flooding. Does any fuel injector still have a pressure drop value that is either higher than the average pressure drop or lower than the average pressure drop by the specified value?
10 kPa (1.5 psi)
Go to Step 11
Go to Symptoms
11
Replace the faulty fuel injector(s). Refer to Fuel Injector. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E172

D There is a problem with the PCM terminal connections. The terminals may have to be removed from the connector in order to check them properly. D EEPROM program is not correct for the application. Incorrect components or reprogramming the PCM with the wrong EEPROM program may cause a malfunction and may or may not set a DTC. D The problem is intermittent. This means that the problem is not present at the time the system is being checked. In this case, make a careful physical inspection of all components and wiring associated with the affected system and refer to the Symptoms portion of the manual. D There is a shorted solenoid, relay coil, or harness. Solenoids and relays are turned ON and OFF by the PCM using internal electronic switches called drivers. A shorted solenoid, relay coil, or harness will not damage the PCM but will cause the solenoid or relay to be inoperative.
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DIAGNOSIS
014RX002
To read and clear diagnostic trouble codes, use a Tech 2.
901RX031
IMPORTANT: Use of a Tech 2 is recommended to clear diagnostic trouble codes from the PCM memory. Diagnostic trouble codes can also be cleared by turning the ignition OFF and disconnecting the battery power from the PCM for 30 seconds. Turning off the ignition and disconnecting the battery power from the PCM will cause all diagnostic information in the PCM memory to be cleared. Therefore, all the diagnostic tests will have to be rerun. Since the PCM can have a failure which may affect only one circuit, following the diagnostic procedures in this section will determine which circuit has a problem and where it is. If a diagnostic chart indicates that the PCM connections or the PCM is the cause of a problem, and the PCM is replaced, but this does not correct the problem, one of the following may be the reason:
6E173
MULTIPLE PCM INFORMATION SENSOR DTCs SET

Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors various sensors to determine the engine operating conditions. The PCM controls fuel delivery, spark advance, and emission control device operation based on the sensor inputs. The PCM provides a sensor ground to all of the sensors. The PCM applies 5 volts through a pullup resistor, and determines the status of the following sensors by monitoring the voltage present between the 5volt supply and the resistor: D The Fuel Tank Vapor Pressure Sensor D The throttle position (TP) sensor D The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor The PCM provides the following sensors with a 5volt reference and a sensor ground signal: D The Linear exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve D The A/C Pressure Sensor The PCM monitors the separate feedback signals from these sensors in order to determine their operating status.
D P0405 D P0532 Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM. Inspect the harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and a poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness. Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness is not damaged, observe an affected sensors displayed value on the Tech 2 with the ignition ON and the engine OFF while you move the connectors and the wiring harnesses related to the following sensors: D IAT D ECT D TP D MAP D EGR D Fuel Tank Vapor Pressure Sensor D A/C Pressure Sensor
Diagnostic Aids
Be sure to inspect PCM and engine grounds for being secure and clean. A short to voltage in one of the sensor input circuits may cause one or more of the following DTCs to be set: D P0108/P1106 D P0113/P1111 D P0118/P1115 D P0123/P1121 D P0463 If a sensor input circuit has been shorted to voltage, ensure that the sensor is not damaged. A damaged sensor will continue to indicate a high or low voltage after the affected circuit has been repaired. If the sensor has been damaged, replace it. An open in the sensor ground circuit between the PCM and the splice will cause one or more of the following DTCs to be set: D P0108/P1106 D P0113/P1111 D P0118/P1115 D P0123/P01121 D P0453/P0463 A short to ground in the 5volt reference A circuit will cause one or more of the following DTCs to be set: D P0107/P1107 D P0122/P1122 D P0112/P1112 D P0117/P1114 D P0454/P0462
6E174
Multiple PCM Information Sensor DTCs Set

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Turn the ignition OFF, disconnect the PCM. 2. Turn the ignition ON, check the 5 volt reference circuits for the following conditions: D A poor connection at the PCM. D An open between the PCM connector and the splice. D A short to ground. D A short to voltage. Is there an open or short? Go to Step 3 Verify repair
Go to Step 4
3 4
Repair the open or short. Is the action complete? Check the sensor ground circuit for the following conditions: D A poor connection at the PCM or the affected sensors. D An open between the PCM connector and the affected sensors. Is there an open or a poor connection? Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 6 Repair the open or the poor connection. Is the action complete? Measure the voltage between the EGR pintle position sensor signal circuit at the PCM harness connector and ground. Does the voltage measure near the specified value? 0V Go to Step 7 Go to Step 14 0V Go to Step 8 Go to Step 15 0V Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 0V Go to Step 20 0V Go to Step 17 Go to Step 16 Measure the voltage between the MAP sensor signal circuit at the PCM harness connector and ground. Does the voltage measure near the specified value? Measure the voltage between the TP sensor signal circuit at the PCM harness connector and ground. Does the voltage measure near the specified value? Measure the voltage between the IAT sensor signal circuit at the PCM harness connector and ground. Does the voltage measure near the specified value? Measure the voltage between the ECT sensor signal circuit at the PCM harness connector and ground. Does the voltage measure near the specified value? Measure the voltage between the A/C Pressure Sensor circut at the PCM harness connector and ground. Does the voltage measure near the specified value? 0V
5 6
Go to Step 13
10
11
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 19
6E175
Multiple PCM Information Sensor DTCs Set (Cont'd)

12
1. Disconnect the EGR valve. 2. Measure the voltage between the EGR pintle position sensor signal circuit at the PCM harness connector and ground. Does the voltage measure near the specified value? 0V Go to Step 12 Verify repair Go to Step 17 Replace the EGR valve. Is the action complete? Locate and repair the short to voltage in the MAP sensor signal circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the short to voltage in the TP sensor signal circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the short to voltage in the IAT sensor signal circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the short to voltage in the ECT sensor signal circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the short to voltage in the A/C Pressure Sensor circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the short to voltage in the EGR pintle position sensor signal circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest service bulletin Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
13 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
6E176

DECEL FUEL MODE Tech 2 Displays ACTIVE or INACTIVE ACTIVE displayed indicates that the PCM has detected conditions appropriate to operate in deceleration fuel mode. The PCM will command the deceleration fuel mode when it detects a closed throttle position while the vehicle is traveling over 20 mph. While in the deceleration fuel mode, the PCM will decrease the amount of fuel delivered by entering Open Loop and decreasing the injector pulse width. DESIRED EGR POS. Tech 2 Range 0%100% Represents the EGR pintle position that the PCM is commanding. DESIRED IDLE Tech 2 Range 03187 RPM The idle speed that the PCM is commanding. The PCM will compensate for various engine loads based on engine coolant temperature, to keep the engine at the desired speed. ECT (Engine Coolant Temperature) Tech 2 Range 40C to 151C (40F to 304F) The engine coolant temperature (ECT) is mounted in the coolant stream and sends engine temperature information to the PCM. The PCM applies 5 volts to the ECT sensor circuit. The sensor is a thermistor which changes internal resistance as the temperature changes. When the sensor is cold (high resistance), the PCM monitors a high signal voltage and interprets that as a cold engine. As the sensor warms (decreasing resistance), the voltage signal will decrease and the PCM will interpret the lower voltage as a warm engine. EGR DUTY CYCLE Tech 2 Range 0%100% Represents the EGR valve driver PWM signal from the PCM. A duty cycle of 0% indicates that no EGR flow is being commanded; a 100% duty cycle indicates maximum EGR flow commanded. EGR FEEDBACK Tech 2 Range 0.005.00 Volts Indicates the EGR pintle position sensor signal voltage being monitored by the PCM. A low voltage indicates a fully extended pintle (closed valve); a voltage near 5 volts indicates a retracted pintle (open valve). EGR TEST COUNT Tech 2 Range 0255 Indicates the number of EGR flow test samples collected during the current ignition cycle. Under normal operation, only one sample is allowed during an ignition cycle. If the PCM battery feed has been disconnected or a DTC P0401 has been cleared, 10 EGR flow test samples will be allowed during the ignition cycle. This is to allow repair verification during a single ignition cycle. ENGINE LOAD Tech 2 Range 0%100% Engine load is calculated by the PCM from engine speed and MAP sensor readings. Engine load should increase with an increase in RPM or air flow. ENGINE RUN TIME Tech 2 Range 00:00:00 99:99:99 Hrs:Min:Sec Indicates the time elapsed since the engine was started. If the engine is stopped, engine run time will be reset to 00:00:00. ENGINE SPEED Range 09999 RPM Engine speed is computed by the PCM from the 58X reference input. It should remain close to desired idle under various engine loads with engine idling.
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) DIAGNOSIS
057RX001
An EGR flow check diagnosis of the linear EGR system is covered by DTC P0401, P0404, and P0405. If EGR diagnostic trouble code P0401 is encountered, refer to the DTC charts.
ENGINE Tech 2 DATA DEFINITIONS AND RANGES

A/C CLUTCH Tech 2 Displays ON or OFF Indicates whether the PCM has commanded the A/C clutch ON. Used in A/C system diagnostics. A/C REQUEST Tech 2 Displays YES or NO Indicates the state of the A/C request input circuit from the HVAC controls. The PCM uses the A/C request signal to determine whether A/C compressor operation is being requested. AIR/FUEL RATIO Tech 2 Range 0.025.5 Air/fuel ratio indicates the PCM commanded value. In Closed Loop, the air/fuel ratio should normally be displayed around 14.214.7. A lower air/fuel ratio indicates a richer commanded mixture, which may be seen during power enrichment or TWC protection modes. A higher air/fuel ratio indicates a leaner commanded mixture. This can be seen during deceleration fuel mode. BARO kPa Tech 2 Range 10105 kPa/0.005.00 Volts The barometric pressure reading is determined from the MAP sensor signal monitored during key up and wide open throttle (WOT) conditions. The barometric pressure is used to compensate for altitude differences and is normally displayed around 61104 depending on altitude and barometric pressure. CMP ACT. COUNTER Cam Position Activity

EVAP PURGE PWM Tech 2 Range 0%100% Represents the PCM commanded PWM duty cycle of the EVAP purge solenoid valve. 0% displayed indicates no purge; 100% displayed indicates full purge. EVAP VACUUM SWITCH Tech 2 Displays PURGE or NO PURGE The EVAP purge vacuum switch is a normally closed switch positioned in the purge line between the canister and the EVAP purge solenoid. The EVAP purge vacuum switch will open when vacuum increases to greater than 5 inches of water in the purge line. The EVAP purge vacuum switch is used by the PCM to monitor EVAP canister purge solenoid operation and purge system integrity. The EVAP purge vacuum switch should be closed to ground with no vacuum present (0% EVAP purge PWM). With EVAP purge PWM at 25% or greater, the EVAP purge vacuum switch should be open and PURGE should be indicated. FUEL PUMP Tech 2 Displays ON or OFF Indicates the PCM commanded state of the fuel pump relay driver circuit. FUEL TRIM CELL Tech 2 Range 021 The fuel trim cell is dependent upon engine speed and MAF sensor readings. A plot of RPM vs. MAF is divided into 22 cells. Fuel trim cell indicates which cell is currently active. FUEL TRIM LEARN Tech 2 Displays NO or YES When conditions are appropriate for enabling long term fuel trim corrections, fuel trim learn will display YES. This indicates that the long term fuel trim is responding to the short term fuel trim. If the fuel trim learn displays NO, then long term fuel trim will not respond to changes in short term fuel trim. GENERATOR CONTROL Tech 2 Displays ACTIVE or INACTIVE. HO2S BANK 1, SEN. 1 Tech 2 Range 01000 mV Represents the fuel control exhaust oxygen sensor output voltage. Should fluctuate constantly within a range between 10 mV (lean exhaust) and 1000 mV (rich exhaust) while operating in Closed Loop. HO2S BANK 1, SEN. 2 Tech 2 Range 01000 mV Represents the exhaust oxygen sensor output voltage. Should fluctuate constantly within a range between 10 mV (lean exhaust) and 1000 mV (rich exhaust) while operating in Closed Loop. This is used along with HO2S Bank 1, Sensor 3 to determine the catalytic converter efficiency in the manual transmission models. HO2S BANK 1, SEN. 1 Tech 2 Displays NOT READY or READY Indicates the status of the exhaust oxygen sensor. The Tech 2 will indicate that the exhaust oxygen sensor is ready when the PCM detects a fluctuating HO2S voltage sufficient to allow Closed Loop operation. This will not occur unless the exhaust sensor is warmed up.
6E177
HO2S WARM UP TIME BANK 1, SEN. 1 Tech 2 Range 00:00:0099:99:99 HRS:MIN:SEC Indicates warmup time for each HO2S. The HO2S warmup time is used for the HO2S heater test. The PCM will run the heater test only after a cold start (determined by engine coolant and intake air temperature at the time of startup) and only once during an ignition cycle. When the engine is started the PCM will monitor the HO2S voltage. When the HO2S voltage indicates a sufficiently active sensor, the PCM looks at how much time has elapsed since startup. If the PCM determines that too much time was required for the HO2S to become active, a DTC will set. If the engine was warm when started, HO2S warmup will display 00:00:00. IAC POSITION Tech 2 Range 0255 Counts Displays the commanded position of the idle air control pintle in counts. A larger number of counts means that more air is being commanded through the idle air passage. Idle air control should respond fairly quickly to changes in engine load to maintain desired idle RPM. IAT (INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE) Tech 2 Range 40C to 151C (40F to 304F) The PCM converts the resistance of the intake air temperature sensor to degrees. Intake air temperature (IAT) is used by the PCM to adjust fuel delivery and spark timing according to incoming air density. IGNITION 1 Tech 2 Range 025.5 Volts This represents the system voltage measured by the PCM at its ignition feed. INJ. PULSE BANK 1 Tech 2 Range 01000 msec. Indicates the amount of time the PCM is commanding each injector ON during each engine cycle. A longer injector pulse width will cause more fuel to be delivered. Injector pulse width should increase with increased engine load. LONG TERM FUEL TRIM BANK 1 The long term fuel trim is derived from the short term fuel trim values and represents a long term correction of fuel delivery for the bank in question. A value of 0% indicates that the fuel delivery requires no compensation to maintain the PCM commanded air/fuel ratio. A negative value significantly below 0% indicates that the fuel system is rich and fuel delivery is being reduced (decreased injector pulse width). A positive value significantly greater than 0% indicates that a lean condition exists and the PCM is compensating by adding fuel (increased injector pulse width). Because long term fuel trim tends to follow short term fuel trim, a value in the negative range due to canister purge at idle should not be considered unusual. Fuel trim values at maximum authority may indicate an excessively rich or lean system. LOOP STATUS Tech 2 Displays OPEN or CLOSED CLOSED indicates that the PCM is controlling fuel delivery according to oxygen sensor voltage. In OPEN the PCM ignores the oxygen sensor voltage and bases the amount of fuel to be delivered on TP sensor, engine coolant, and MAF sensor inputs only.
6E178

SHORT TERM FT BANK 1 Short term fuel trim to a bank represents a short term correction to the bank fuel delivery by the PCM in response to the amount of time the bank fuel control oxygen sensor voltage spends above or below the 450 mV threshold. If the oxygen sensor voltage has mainly remained less than 450 mV, indicating a lean air/fuel mixture, short term fuel trim will increase into the positive range above 0% and the PCM will pass fuel. If the oxygen sensor voltage stays mainly above the threshold, short term fuel trim will decrease below 0% into the negative range while the PCM reduces fuel delivery to compensate for the indicated rich condition. Under certain conditions such as extended idle and high ambient temperatures, canister purge may cause short term fuel trim to read in the negative range during normal operation. Fuel trim values at maximum authority may indicate an excessively rich or lean system. SPARK Tech 2 Range 64 to 64 Displays the amount of spark advance being commanded by the PCM on the IC circuit. STARTUP ECT Tech 2 Range 40C to 151C (40F to 304F) Indicates the engine coolant temperature at the time that the vehicle was started. Used by the HO2S diagnostic to determine if the last startup was a cold start. STARTUP ECT Tech 2 Range 40C to 151C (40F to 304F) Indicates the intake air temperature at the time that the vehicle was started. Used by the HO2S diagnostic to determine if the last startup was a cold start. TOTAL MISFIRE CURRENT COUNT Tech 2 Range 0255 Indicates the total number of cylinder firing events that were detected as being misfires during the last 200 crankshaft revolution sample period. TP ANGLE Tech 2 Range 0%100% TP (throttle position) angle is computed by the PCM from the TP sensor voltage. TP angle should display 0% at idle and 100% at wide open throttle. TP SENSOR Tech 2 Range 0.005.00 Volts The voltage being monitored by the PCM on the TP sensor signal circuit. UPSHIFT LAMP (MANUAL TRANSMISSION) VEHICLE SPEED Tech 2 Range 0255 km/h (0155 mph) The vehicle speed sensor signal is converted into km/h and mph for display. WEAK CYLINDER Tech 2 Displays Cylinder Number This indicates that the PCM has detected crankshaft speed variations that indicate 2% or more cylinder firing events are misfires.
MAP Tech 2 Range 10105 kPa (0.004.97 Volts) The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor measures the change in the intake manifold pressure from engine load, EGR flow, and speed changes. As intake manifold pressure increases, intake vacuum decreases, resulting in a higher MAP sensor voltage and kPa reading. The MAP sensor signal is used to monitor intake manifold pressure changes during the EGR flow test, to update the BARO reading, and as an enabling factor for several of the diagnostics. MIL Tech 2 Displays ON or OFF Indicates the PCM commanded state of the malfunction indicator lamp (Check Engine Lamp). MISFIRE CUR. CYL. #1/#2/#3/#4 Tech 2 Range 0255 Counts The misfire current counters increase at a rate according to the number of possible misfires being detected on each cylinder. The counters may normally display some activity, but the activity should be nearly equal for all the cylinders. MISFIRE CUR. CYL. #1/#2/#3/#4 Tech 2 Range 065535 Counts The misfire history counters display the relative level of misfire that has been detected on each cylinder. The misfire history counters will not update or show any activity until a misfire DTC (P0300) has become active. MISFIRE FAILURES SINCE FIRST FAIL Tech 2 Range 065535 Counts Indicates the number of 200 crankshaft revolution sample periods during which the level of misfire was sufficiently high to report a fail. MISFIRE PASSES SINCE FIRST FAIL Tech 2 Range 065535 Counts Indicates the number of 200 crankshaft revolution sample periods during which the level of misfire was sufficiently low to report a pass. POWER ENRICHMENT Tech 2 Displays ACTIVE or INACTIVE ACTIVE displayed indicates that the PCM has detected conditions appropriate to operate in power enrichment mode. The PCM will command power enrichment mode when a large increase in throttle position and load is detected. While in the power enrichment mode, the PCM will increase the amount of fuel delivered by entering Open Loop and increasing the injector pulse width. This is done to prevent a possible sag or hesitation from occurring during acceleration. RICH/LEAN BANK 1 Tech 2 Displays RICH or LEAN Indicates whether oxygen sensor voltage is above a 600 mV threshold voltage (RICH) or below a 3000 mV threshold voltage (LEAN). Should change constantly while in Closed Loop, indicating that the PCM is controlling the air/fuel mixture properly.
6E179
TYPICAL SCAN DATA VALUES

Use the Typical Scan Data Values Table only after the OnBoard Diagnostic System Check has been completed, no DTC(s) were noted, and you have determined that the onboard diagnostics are functioning properly. Tech 2 values from a properlyrunning engine may be used for comparison with the engine you are diagnosing. The typical scan data values represent values that would be seen on a normallyrunning engine. NOTE: A Tech 2 that displays faulty data should not be used, and the problem should be reported to the Tech 2 manufacturer. Use of a faulty Tech 2 can result in misdiagnosis and unnecessary replacement of parts. 2.2L L4 Engine Tech 2 Parameter Engine Speed Desired Idle Speed Engine Coolant Temperature Start Up ECT Data List Units Displayed RPM RPM C
Only the parameters listed below are referred to in this service manual for use in diagnosis. For further information on using the Tech 2 to diagnose the PCM and related sensors, refer to the applicable reference section listed below. If all values are within the typical range described below, for diagnosis, refer to the Symptoms section.
Test Conditions
Engine running, lower radiator hose hot, transmission in park or neutral, Closed Loop, accessories OFF, brake not applied and air conditioning OFF.
Typical Data Values (IDLE) 804 800 88 (190F)
Typical Data Values (2500 RPM) 2511 800 86 (187F)
Refer To
Engine Engine Engine
General Discription and Operation General Discription and and Operation, Idle Air Control General Discription and and Operation, Engin coolant tempereture sensor General Discription and and Operation, Engin coolant tempereture sensor General Discription and and Operation, Intake Air tempereture sensor General Discription and and Operation, Intake Air tempereture sensor General Discription and Operation, Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor. DTC P0106,P0107,P0108,P1106, P1107 General Discription and Operation, Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor. DTC P0106,P0107,P0108,P1106, P1107 General Discription and Opreration General Discription and Opreration, Throttle Position Sensor. DTC P0121,P0122,P0123,P1121, P1122
Engine
87
87
Intake Air Temperature Start Up IAT
Engine
23
22
Engine
23
23
Manifold Absolute Pressure
Engine
kPa
35
32
Manifold Absolute Pressure
Engine
1.31
1.15
Barometric Pressure Throttle Position
Engine
kPa
101
101 (depends on altitude and barometric) 5
Engine
6E180

Data List Units Displayed V Typical Data Values (IDLE) 0.33 Typical Data Values (2500 RPM) 0.53 Refer To
Tech 2 Parameter Throttle Position Sensor
Engine
General Discription and Opreration, Throttle Position Sensor. DTC P0121,P0122,P0123,P1121, P1122 General Discription and and Operation, Manifold Air Flow sensor General Discription and Operation, Fuel System Metering Purpose, Fuel Trim General Discription and and Operation, Electronic Ignition System EVAP System General Discription and and Operation, Liner EGR Operation and Results of Incorrect Operation General Discription and and Operation, EGR Pintle Position Sensor General Discription and and Operation, EGR Pintle P iti Sensor S Position DTC P0325,P0327 DTC P0325,P0327 DTC P0532,P0533 General Discription and and Operation, A/C Culutch Circuit Operation General Discription and and Operation, A/C Request Signal General Discription and and Operation, Cooling Fan Control. DTC P0480,P0481 General Discription and and Operation, Cooling Fan Control. DTC P0480,P0481 DTC P0341,P0342
Calculated Air Flow Air Fuel Ratio
Engine
g/s
4.03
12.38
Engine
Ratio:_to1
13.6
14.6:1
Spark Advance
Engine
CA
32
Engine Load Fuel system Status EGR Duty Cycle
% Closed Loop %
3 Open loop 0
12 Closed loop 0
Desired EGR Position EGR Normalized EGR Feed Back EGR Closed Pintle Position Knock Present Knock Counter Knock Retard A/C Pressure Sensor A/C Clutch Relay A/C Request
Engine
% V Steps Yes/No
0 0.7 35 No 6 0.0 1 Off
0 0.7 35 No 6 0.0 1 Off
Engine Engine Engine Engine
Counts CA mV On/Off
Engine
Yes/No
No
No
Low Fan Comanded High Fan Comanded Camshaft Activity
Engine
On/Off
Off
Off
Engine
On/Off
Off
Off
Engine
Counts
16
231

Tech 2 Parameter EVAP Vent Valve Data List Units Displayed On/Off Typical Data Values (IDLE) Off Typical Data Values (2500 RPM) Off Refer To
6E181
Engine
Diagnosis, EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid And EVAP Vacuum Switch and Visual Check. DTC P1441 Diagnosis, EVAP Emission Canister Purge Valve Check Engine Fuel. DTC P0461,P0462,P0463 Engine Fuel. DTC P0461,P0462,P0463 Engine Fuel. DTC P0461,P0462,P0463 Engine Fuel System Diagnosis, EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid And EVAP System General Discription and and Operation General Discription and and Operation, Intake Air tempereture sensor Manual Transmission General Discription and and Operation, Electronic Ignition System OnBoard Diagnostic System Check UpShift Lamp system Check DTC P0300,P0301 DTC P0300,P0302 DTC P0300,P0303 DTC P0300,P0304 DTC P0300,P0301 DTC P0300,P0302 DTC P0300,P0303 DTC P0300,P0304 DTC P0300
EVAP Purge Solenoid Low Fuel Lamp Fuel Level Sensor Fuel Level Fuel Pump Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Deceleration Fuel Cutoff Idle Air Control
Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine
% On/Off V % On/Off V
0 On 2.73 9 On 1.43
6 On 2.73 9 On 1.43
Engine Engine
Inactive/Ac tive Steps
Inactive 31
Inactive 77
Vehicle Speed Ignition Voltage
Engine Engine
MPH or km/h V
0 14.2
0 14.3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp Up Shift Lamp Time From Start Misfire Current Cyl.#1 Misfire Current Cyl.#2 Misfire Current Cyl.#3 Misfire Current Cyl.#4 Misfire History Cyl.#1 Misfire History Cyl.#2 Misfire History Cyl.#3 Misfire History Cyl.#4 Misfire Failure Since First Fail
Engine Engine Engine Engine Misfire Engine Misfire Engine Misfire Engine Misfire Engine Misfire Engine Misfire Engine Misfire Engine Misfire Engine Misfire
On/Off On/Off Hrs:Min:Se c Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts
Off On 00:00:12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Off On 00:00:26 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6E182

Data List Units Displayed Counts Counts Cylinder # 0 0 Typical Data Values (IDLE) 0 0 Typical Data Values (2500 RPM) Refer To
Tech 2 Parameter Misfire Presses Since First Fail Total Misfire Weak Cylinder
Engine Misfire Engine Misfire Engine Misfire Engine Misfire Engine Misfire Engine Misfire Engine HO2S Engine HO2S Engine HO2S
DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300,P0301,P0302,P0303, P0304 DTC P0300,P0301,P0302,P0303, P0304 DTC P1380,P1381 DTC P1380,P1381 General Discription and and Operation, Fuel Control HO2S. DTC P0135 General Discription and and Operation, Fuel Control HO2S General Discription and and Operation, Fuel Control HO2S General Discription and and Operation, Fuel Metering System General Discription and and Operation, Catalyst Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensor Diagnosis, Fuel Trim Monitor Diagnosis, Fuel Trim Cell Diagnostic Weights DTC P0171,P0172 DTC P0171,P0172 General Discription and and Operation, Acceleration Mode
Misfire Delay Counter ABS Rough Road ABS Rough Road Counts B1 O2 Sensor Ready B1S1 Status (Bank1,Sensor1 ) B1S1 O2 Sensor (Bank1,Sensor1 ) B1S2 O2 Sensor (Bank1,Sensor2 ) B1S2 O2S Warm Up Time Fuel Trim Learned Fuel Trim Cell B1 Long Fuel Trim B2 Short Fuel Trim Power Enrichment Braodcast Code
Counts
Value Counts Yes/No
Okey 0 Yes
Okey 0 Yes
Rich/Lean
mV
50 950 changing quickly
50 950 changing quickly
Engine HO2S
mV
100 700 changing slowly
100 700 changing slowly
Engine HO2S Engine HO2S Engine HO2S Engine HO2S Engine HO2S Engine HO2S
sec
Yes/No Cell No. % % Yes/No
Yes 18 No
Yes 2 or 6 No
2.2 letter
6E183
NO MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
060R100023
Circuit Description
The Check Engine lamp (MIL) should always be illuminated and steady with the ignition ON and the engine stopped. Ignition feed voltage is supplied to the MIL bulb through the meter fuse. The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL driver circuit.
D If the engine cranks but will not run, check for an open PCM ignition or battery feed, or a poor PCM to engine ground.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. A No MIL condition accompanied by a nostart condition suggests a faulty PCM ignition feed or battery feed circuit. 9. Using a test light connected to B+, probe each of the PCM ground terminals to ensure that a good ground is present. Refer to PCM Terminal End View for terminal locations of the PCM ground circuits. 12. In this step, temporarily substitute a known good relay for the PCM relay. The horn relay is nearby, and it can be verified as good simply by honking the horn. Replace the horn relay after completing this step.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent MIL may be caused by a poor connection, rubbedthrough wire insulation, or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for the following items: D Inspect the PCM harness and connections for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminaltowire connection, and damaged harness. D If the engine runs OK, check for a faulty light bulb, an open in the MIL driver circuit, or an open in the instrument cluster ignition feed.
6E184
17. This vehicle is equipped with a PCM which utilizes an electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM). When the PCM is replaced, the new PCM must be programmed. Refer to PCM Replacement and Programming Procedures in Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Sensors.
No Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 Attempt to start the engine. Does the engine start?
Go to OBD System Check Go to Step 6 Go to Step 16
2 3
Check the meter fuse for the instrument cluster ignition feed circuit. Is the fuse OK? Go to Step 4 1. Ignition ON. 2. Engine OFF. 3. Probe the ignition feed circuit at the cluster connector with a test light to ground. Is the test light ON? Go to Step 5 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Jumper the MIL driver circuit at the PCM connector to ground. 4. Ignition ON. Is the MIL ON? Check the PCM ignition feed and battery feed fuses (15A Engine fuse and 15A ECM fuse). Are both fuses OK? Go to Step 7 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Disconnect the PCM. Ignition ON. Probe the ignition feed circuit at the PCM harness connector with a test light to ground. Go to Step 8
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 15
Go to Step 12
Is the test light ON? 8 Probe the battery feed circuit at the PCM harness connector with a test light to ground. Is the test light ON? 9 10 11 Check for a faulty PCM ground connection. Was a problem found? Check for damaged terminals at the PCM. Was a problem found? Check for an open MIL driver circuit between the PCM and the MIL. Was a problem found? 12 Substitute a known good relay for the PCM main relay. Was the malfunction fixed?
Go to Step 14 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 17 Verify repair Go to Step 18 Verify repair Go to Step 13 Verify repair
6E185
No Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont'd)

13 14 15
Repair the open in the ignition feed circuit. Is the action complete? Locate and repair the open PCM battery feed circuit. Is the action complete? Locate and repair the short to ground in the PCM ignition feed circuit or PCM battery feed circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the short to ground in the ignition feed circuit to the instrument cluster, and replace the fuse. Is the action complete? Verify repair Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to PCM in OnVehicle Service for procedures. and also refer to latest service bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair Go to Instrument Panel in Electrical Diagnosis Verify repair Verify repair
16
17
18
Check the MIL driver circuit for a poor connection at the instrument panel connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair
6E186
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON STEADY
060R100048
Circuit Description
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) should always be illuminated and steady with the ignition ON and the engine stopped. Ignition feed voltage is supplied directly to the MIL indicator. The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL driver circuit. The MIL should not remain ON with the engine running and no DTC(s) set. A steady MIL with the engine running and no DTC(s) suggests a short to ground in the MIL driver circuit.
D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminaltowire connection, and damaged harness.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. If the MIL does not remain ON when the PCM is disconnected, the MIL driver wiring is not faulty. 3. If the MIL driver circuit is OK, the instrument panel cluster is faulty. 6. This vehicle is equipped with a PCM which utilizes an electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM). When the PCM is replaced, the new PCM must be programmed. Refer to PCM Replacement and Programming Procedures in Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Sensors.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbedthrough wire insulation, or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for the following items:
6E187
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON Steady

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the PCM. 2. Ignition ON, observe the MIL (Service Engine Soon lamp). Is the MIL ON? Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the instrument panel cluster. 2. Check the MIL driver circuit between the PCM and the instrument panel cluster for a short to ground. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was the MIL driver circuit shorted to ground? Replace the instrument panel cluster. Is the action complete?
Go to OBD System Check Go to OBD System Check
Go to Step 4
1. Ignition OFF, reconnect the PCM. 2. Ignition ON, reprogram the PCM. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. 3. Using the Tech 2 output controls function, select MIL dash lamp control and command the MIL OFF. Did the MIL turn OFF? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. and also refer to latest service bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 6
6E188
ENGINE CRANKS BUT WILL NOT RUN
060R100005
6E189
060R100004
6E190

present at startup, the PCM will begin sequential fuel delivery with a 1in4 chance that fuel delivery is correct. The engine will run without a CMP signal, but will set a DTC code.
Circuit Description
The electronic ignition system uses a dual coil method of spark distribution. In this type of ignition system, the powertrain control module (PCM) triggers the correct driver inside the ignition control module (ICM), which then triggers the correct ignition coil based on the 58X signal received from the crankshaft position sensor (CKP). The spark plug connected to the coil fires when the ICM opens the ground circuit for the coils primary circuit. During crank, the PCM monitors the CKP 58X signal. The CKP signal is used to determine which cylinder will fire first. After the CKP 58X signal has been processed by the PCM, it will command all four injectors to allow a priming shot of fuel for all the cylinders. After the priming, the injectors are left OFF during the next four 58X reference pulses from the CKP. This allows each cylinder a chance to use the fuel from the priming shot. During this waiting period, a camshaft position (CMP) signal pulse will have been received by the PCM. The CMP signal allows the PCM to operate the injectors sequentially based on camshaft position. If the camshaft position signal is not
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent problem may be caused by a poor connection, rubbedthrough wire insulation or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for the following items: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminaltowire connection, and damaged harness. D Faulty engine coolant temperature sensor Using a Tech 2, compare engine coolant temperature with intake air temperature on a completely cool engine. Engine coolant temperature should be within 10C of intake air temperature. If not, replace the ECT sensor.
Engine Cranks But Will Not Run

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to Applicable DTC Table Use the Tech 2 and check for any DTCs. Are any DTCs stored?
Go to Step 3
Check the 15A ignition coil fuse, the 15A engine device fuse, and the 15A ECM fuse. Was a fuse blown? Go to Step 4 Verify repair Go to Step 5 Check for a short to ground and replace the fuse. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition ON. 2. Use a grounded test lamp to verify that B+ is available at the ignition coil fuse, the engine device fuse, and the ECM fuse. Was B+ available at the fuses? Go to Step 7 Go to Fuel System Electrical Test Go to Step 6 Go to Fuel System Diagnosis Repair the open ignition feed circuit.
4 5
1. Disconnect the ignition secondary wire at the No.1. 2. Install a spark tester J 26792 at the end of the disconnected ignition coil. 3. Clip the spark tester J 26792 to a good ground (not near the battery). 4. Observe the spark tester while the engine is cranking. Was a crisp blue spark observed? (Only one or two sparks followed by no result is considered the same as No Spark.) Go to Step 16 Go to Step 8
6E191
Engine Cranks But Will Not Run (Cont'd)

1. Disconnect the ignition module harness connector. 2. Check for an open or short circuit between the ignition control module and the PCM? Was a problem found? Go to Step 9 Verify repair Repair the faulty circuit.
Go to Step 10
9 10
1. Ignition ON. 2. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) check the ignition wire coil at the ignition module harness connector? Was the voltage equal to the specified value? B+ Repair the open circuit.
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 11
11 12
Verify repair
1. Ignition OFF. 2. With DVM, check for an open in the ground wire at the ignition module harness connector. Was the ground wire OK? Repair the faulty wire.
Go to Step 14
Go to Step 13
13 14
Verify repair
Replace the ignition module, verify the repair. Attempt to start the engine. Is there still a problem? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. and also refer to latest service bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 15 Verify repair
15
Verify repair
16
Use an ohmmeter to check the ignition coil primary winding resistance. Was the primary winding resistance approximately equal to the specified value? 0.818 W Go to Step 17 Go to Step 18
17
Use an ohmmeter to check the ignition coil secondary winding resistance. Was the secondary winding resistance equal to the 9,00012,000 W specified value? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 18
18 19
Replace the ignition coil. Test the resistance of the coiltospark plug secondary ignition wire. Was the resistance greater than the specified value? 10,000 W per foot Verify repair Go to Step 20 Go to Step 21
6E192

20
Replace the coiltospark plug secondary ignition wire and any other secondary wires which exceed the specified value. 10,000 W per foot Is there still a problem? 1. Remove the spark plugs from all cylinders. 2. Visually inspect the spark plug electrodes. 3. Replace any spark plugs with loose or missing electrodes or cracked insulators. Did your inspection reveal any spark plugs exhibiting excessing fouling? Verfiy repair. Attempt to start the engine. Is there still a problem? 1. Ignition OFF, install a fuel pressure gauge at the test fitting on the fuel supply line in the engine compartment. CAUTION: Use a shop cloth to absorb any fuel leakage while making the connection. 2. Check the engine and observe the fuel pressure. Is the fuel pressure within the specified values, and 285375 kPa (4355 psi) does it hold steady for 2 seconds?
21
Correct the fouling condition
Go to Step 33
22
Go to Step 23
Go to Step 22
23
Go to Step 25 Go to Fuel System Electrical Test
Go to Step 24
24
Is any fuel pressure indicated?
Go to Fuel System Diagnosis
25
1. Install switch box J 390212 and J 3902190 at the injector test connector. 2. Activate an injector. Did the fuel pressure drop when the injector was activated? Go to Step 26
26
Pressurize the fuel system using the ignition ON and use the injector switch box to test pressure drop for each injector. Was there a pressure drop when each injector was activated? Go to Step 27
27
1. Remove the switch box and install an injector test light J 3902145 at the injector test harness connector. 2. Crank the engine. Are any of the lights blinking when the engine is cranked? Go to Step 33 Go to Step 28
28
1. Raise the vehicle and disconnect the CKP sensor harness. 2. Ignition ON. 3. With a test light to ground, probe the CKP ignition feed harness terminal. Did the light illuminate?
Go to Step 29
Go to Step 30
6E193

29
1. Ignition ON. 2. At the CKP harness connector, connect a test lamp between the ignition and ground terminals. Did the lamp illuminate? Check the CKP High circuit between the sensor and the PCM for a short to ground or open circuit. Was a problem found?
Go to Step 31
Go to Step 32
30
Go to Step 33 Verify repair Go to Step 34
31 32
Replace the CKP position sensor. Is there still a problem? Check the CKP Low circuit between the sensor and the PCM for: an open circuit, a short to ground, or short to voltage. Was the problem found?
33
Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. and also refer to latest service bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair
34
1. Test the fuel for contamination. 2. If a problem is found, clean the fuel system and correct the contaminated fuel condition as necessary. Replace the fuel filter and replace any injectors that are not delivering fuel (see Injector Balance Test). Was a problem found? Verify repair To diagnose the following conditions, refer to Engine Mechanical: D Slipped camshaft drive belt. D Leaking or sticky valves or rings. D Excessive valve deposits. D Loose or worn rocker arms. D Weak valve springs D Leaking head gasket. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Go to Step 35
35
6E194
FUEL SYSTEM ELECTRICAL TEST
060R100024
Circuit Description
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, the powertrain control module (PCM) energizes the fuel pump relay which applies power to the intank fuel pump. The fuel pump relay will remain ON as long as the engine is running or cranking and the PCM is receiving 58X crankshaft position pulses. If no 58X crankshaft position pulses are present, the PCM deenergizes the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds after the ignition is turned ON or the engine is stopped. The fuel pump delivers fuel to the fuel rail and injectors, then to the fuel pressure regulator. The fuel pressure regulator controls fuel pressure by allowing excess fuel to be returned to the fuel tank. With the engine stopped and ignition ON, the fuel pump can be turned ON by using a command by the Tech 2.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbedthrough wire insulation, or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for the following items: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminaltowire connection, and damaged harness.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. If the fuel pump is operating but incorrect pressure is noted, the fuel pump wiring is OK and the Fuel System Pressure Test chart should be used for diagnosis.

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: D It is necessary to relieve fuel system pressure before connecting a fuel pressure gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure, below. D A small amount of fuel may be released when disconnecting the fuel lines. Cover fuel line fittings with a shop towel before disconnecting, to catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the procedure is completed.
6E195
2. Remove the fuel pump relay from the underhood relay center. 3. Start the engine and allow it to stall. 4. Crank the engine for an additional 3 seconds.
Fuel Gauge Installation

1. Remove the shoulder fitting cap. 2. Install fuel gauge J 347301 to the fuel feed line located in front of and above the right side valve cover. 3. Reinstall the fuel pump relay.
Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure

1. Remove the fuel cap.
Fuel System Electrical Test

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Read the Caution above. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure and install the fuel pump pressure gauge to the test fitting. 3. Use a Tech 2 to command the fuel pump ON. Is there an immediate pressure buildup which indicates the pump is running? Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1. Verify that the pump is not running by removing the fuel filler cap and listening. 2. Command the pump ON with the Tech 2. Did the pump turn OFF after 2 seconds? 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Remove the fuel pump relay. Ignition SW On, Engin Off. Using a test light connected to ground, probe the battery feed to the relay.
Test completed
Go to Step 12
Did the light illuminate? 5 6 Repair short or open battery feed to fuel pump relay. Is the action complete? 1. Connect a test light between the two wires that connect to the fuel pump relay pullin coil. 2. Ignition ON. Did the test light illuminate for 2 seconds and then turn off? 7 1. With a test light connected to battery (), probe the fuel pump relay connector at the wire which runs from the relay pullin coil to the PCM. 2. Ignition ON. Did the test light illuminate for 2 seconds and then turn off? 8 Locate and repair open in the fuel pump relay ground circuit. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9
Verify repair
6E196
Fuel System Electrical Test (Cont'd)

Check for short or open between the PCM and the fuel pump relay. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Check the fuel pump relay circuit for a poor terminal connection at the PCM. 2. If a problem is found, replace terminal as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. and also refer to latest service bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Go to Step 10
10
Go to Step 11
11
12
1. Reconnect the fuel pump relay. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump electrical connector at the fuel tank. 3. Using a test light connected to ground, probe the fuel pump feed wire (harness side). 4. Command the fuel pump ON with a Tech 2. Did the light illuminate for 2 seconds? 1. Honk the horn to verify that the horn relay is functioning. 2. Substitute the horn relay for the fuel pump relay. 3. Leave the test light connected as in step 12. 4. Command the fuel pump ON with the Tech 2. Did the test light illuminate for 2 seconds when the fuel pump was commanded ON?
Go to Step 15
Go to Step 13
13
Go to Step 17
Go to Step 14
14
1. Reconnect the horn relay in its proper location. 2. Check for a short circuit, blown fuse or open circuit between the relay and the fuel tank. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. With the fuel pump electrical connector at the fuel tank disconnected, connect a test light between the feed wire and the ground wire (harness side). 2. Command the fuel pump ON with a Tech 2. Did the test light illuminate for 2 seconds? Verify repair Repair the open circuit in the fuel pump ground wire. Is the action complete? 1. Reconnect the horn relay in its proper location. 2. Replace the fuel pump relay. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the fuel pump. Is the action complete?
15
Go to Step 18
Go to Step 16
16 17
18
6E197
FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
060R100024
Circuit Description
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the powertrain control module (PCM) will turn ON the intank fuel pump. The intank fuel pump will remain ON as long as the engine is cranking or running and the PCM is receiving 58X crankshaft position pulses. If there are no 58X crankshaft position pulses, the PCM will turn the intank fuel pump OFF 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON or 2 seconds after the engine stops running. The intank fuel pump is an electric pump within an integral reservoir. The intank fuel pump supplies fuel through an inline fuel filter to the fuel rail assembly. The fuel pump is designed to provide fuel at a pressure above the pressure needed by the fuel injectors. A fuel pressure regulator, attached to the fuel rail, keeps the fuel available to the fuel injectors at a regulated pressure. Unused fuel is returned to the fuel tank by a separate fuel return line.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. Connect the fuel pressure gauge to the fuel feed line as shown in the fuel system illustration. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to absorb any fuel leakage that may occur when installing the fuel pressure gauge. With the ignition switch ON and the fuel pump running, the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge should be 283376 kPa (4155 psi). This pressure is controlled by the amount of pressure the spring inside the fuel pressure regulator can provide. 3. A fuel system that cannot maintain a constant fuel pressure has a leak in one or more of the following areas: D The fuel pump check valve. D The fuel pump flex line.
6E198

20. This test determines if the high fuel pressure is due to a restricted fuel return line or if the high fuel pressure is due to a faulty fuel pressure regulator. 21. A lean condition may result from fuel pressure below 333 kPa (48 psi). A lean condition may cause a DTC P0131 or a DTC P0171 to set. Driveability conditions associated with lean conditions can include hard starting (when the engine is cold), hesitation, poor driveability, lack of power, surging, and misfiring. 22. Restricting the fuel return line causes the fuel pressure to rise above the regulated fuel pressure. Command the fuel pump ON with the Tech 2. The fuel pressure should rise above 376 kPa (55 psi) as the fuel return line becomes partially closed. NOTE: Do not allow the fuel pressure to exceed 414 kPa (60 psi). Fuel pressure in excess of 414 kPa (60 psi) may damage the fuel pressure regulator. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: D It is necessary to relieve fuel system pressure before connecting a fuel pressure gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure, below. D A small amount of fuel may be released when disconnecting the fuel lines. Cover fuel line fittings with a shop towel before disconnecting, to catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the procedure is completed.
D The valve or valve seat within the fuel pressure regulator. D The fuel injector(s) 4. Fuel pressure that drops off during acceleration, cruise, or hard cornering may case a lean condition. A lean condition can cause a loss of power, surging, or misfire. A lean condition can be diagnosed using a Tech 2. If an extremely lean condition occurs, the oxygen sensor(s) will stop toggling. The oxygen sensor output voltage(s) will drop below 500 mV. Also, the fuel injector pulse width will increase. IMPORTANT: Make sure the fuel system is not operating in the Fuel CutOff Mode. When the engine is at idle, the manifold pressure is low (high vacuum). This low pressure (high vacuum) is applied to the fuel pressure regulator diaphragm. The low pressure (high vacuum) will offset the pressure being applied to the fuel pressure regulator diaphragm by the spring inside the fuel pressure regulator. When this happens, the result is lower fuel pressure. The fuel pressure at idle will vary slightly as the barometric pressure changes, but the fuel pressure at idle should always be less than the fuel pressure noted in step 2 with the engine OFF. 16. Check the spark plug associated with a particular fuel injector for fouling or saturation in order to determine if that particular fuel injector is leaking. If checking the spark plug associated with a particular fuel injector for fouling or saturation does not determine that a particular fuel injector is leaking, use the following procedure: D Remove the fuel rail, but leave the fuel lines and injectors connected to the fuel rail. Refer to Fuel Rail Assembly in OnVehicle Service. D Lift the fuel rail just enough to leave the fuel injector nozzles in the fuel injector ports. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from fuel spraying on the engine, verify that the fuel rail is positioned over the fuel injector ports and verify that the fuel injector retaining clips are intact. D Pressurize the fuel system by connecting a 10 amp fused jumper between B+ and the fuel pump relay connector. D Visually and physically inspect the fuel injector nozzles for leaks. 17. A rich condition may result from the fuel pressure being above 376 kPa (55 psi). A rich condition may cause a DTC P0132 or a DTC P0172 to set. Driveability conditions associated with rich conditions can include hard starting (followed by black smoke) and a strong sulfur smell in the exhaust.

1. Remove the fuel cap. 2. Remove the fuel pump relay from the underhood relay center. 3. Start the engine and allow it to stall. 4. Crank the engine for an additional 3 seconds.

1. Remove the shoulder fitting cap. 2. Install fuel gauge J 347301 to the fuel feed line located on the upper right side of the engine near the EGR valve. 3. Reinstall the fuel pump relay.
6E199
Fuel System Diagnosis

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Turn the air conditioning system OFF. 3. Relieve fuel system pressure and install the fuel pressure gauge. 4. Turn the ignition ON. NOTE: The fuel pump will run for approximately 2 seconds. Use the Tech 2 to command the fuel pump ON. 5. Observe the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge with the fuel pump running. 283376 kPa (4155 psi) Is the fuel pressure within the specified limits?
NOTE: The fuel pressure will drop when the fuel pump stops running, then it should stabilize and remain constant. Does the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge remain constant? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 4
1. When the vehicle is at normal operating temperature, turn the ignition ON to build fuel pressure and observe the measurement on the gauge. 2. Start the engine and observe the fuel pressure gauge. Did the reading drop by the amount specified after the engine was started? 21105 kPa (315 psi) Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 9 Check for improper fuel
5 6
Is fuel pressure dropping off during acceleration, cruise, or hard cornering? Visually and physically inspect the following items for a restriction: D The inpipe fuel filter. D The fuel feed line. Was a restrication found?
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
Remove the fuel tank and visually and physically inspect the following items: D The fuel pump strainer for a restriction. D The fuel line for a leak. D Verify that the correct fuel pump is in the vehicle. Was a problem found in any of these areas? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 8 Replace the fuel pump. Is the action complete? 1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the fuel pressure regulator. 2. With the engine idling, apply 1214 inches of vacuum to the fuel pressure regulator. Does the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge drop by the amount specified? 21105 kPa (315 psi) Go to Step 10 Go to Step 11
8 9
6E1100 RODEO Y22SE 2.2L ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSION
Fuel System Diagnosis (Cont'd)

10
Locate and repair the loss of vacuum to the fuel pressure regulator. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the fuel pressure regulator. Is the action complete? 1. Run the fuel pump with the Tech 2. 2. After pressure has built up, turn off the pump and clamp the supply hose shut with suitable locking pliers which will not damage the hose. Does the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge remain constant? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14 Verify repair Go to Step 15
11 12
13
Visually inspect the fuel supply line and repair any leaks. Was a problem found? Remove the fuel tank and inspect for leaky hose or intank fuel line. Was a problem found? Verify repair
14
Go to Step 8
15
1. If the pliers are still clamped to the fuel supply hose, remove the locking pliers. 2. With suitable locking pliers which will not damage the hose, clamp the fuel return line to prevent fuel from returning to the fuel tank. 3. Run the fuel pump with the Tech 2. 4. After pressure has built up, remove power to the pump. Does the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge remain constant? Go to Step 11 376 kPa (55 psi) Verify repair Go to Step 18 Go to Step 21 Go to Step 16
16 17 18
Locate and replace any leaking fuel injector(s). Is the action complete? Is the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge above the specified limit?
1. Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to the Fuel Pressure Relief. 2. Disconnect the fuel return line from the fuel rail. 3. Attach a length of flexible hose to the fuel rail return outlet passage. 4. Place the open end of the flexible hose into an approved gasoline container. 5. Run the fuel pump with the Tech 2. 6. Observe the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge with the fuel pump running. 290376 kPa (4255 psi) Is the fuel pressure within the specified limits? Locate and correct the restriction in the fuel return line. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 19
Go to Step 20
19 20
Verify repair
Go to Step 11
Visually and physically inspect the fuel rail outlet passages for a restriction. Was a restriction found? Verify repair
6E1101

21 22
Is the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge above the specified value? 1. Command the fuel pump ON with the Tech 2. 2. Using suitable pliers which will not damage the fuel hose, gradually apply pressure with the pliers to pinch the flexible fuel return hose closed. CAUTION: Do not let the fuel pressure exceed the second specified value. Does the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge rise above the first specified value?
Go to Step 22 0 kPa (0 psi)
Go to Step 23
414 kPa (60 psi)
23
1. Command the fuel pump ON with the Tech 2. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap and listen for the sound of the fuel pump running. 3. Turn the pump off. Was the fuel pump running? Go to Step 7
Go to Fuel System Electrical Test Chart
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) SYSTEM CHECK
060R100025
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) controls engine idle speed with the idle air control (IAC) valve. To increase idle speed, the PCM retracts the IAC valve pintle away from its seat, allowing more air to bypass the throttle bore. To decrease idle speed, it extends the IAC valve pintle towards its seat, reducing bypass air flow. A Tech 2 will read the PCM commands to the IAC valve in counts. Higher counts indicate more air bypass (higher idle). Lower counts indicate less air is allowed to bypass (lower idle).
Diagnostic Aids
A slow, unstable, or fast idle may be caused by a nonIAC system problem that cannot be overcome by the IAC valve. Out of control range IAC Tech 2 counts will be above 60 if idle is too low, and zero counts if idle is too
high. The following checks should be made to repair a nonIAC system problem: D Vacuum leak (high idle) If idle is too high, stop the engine. Fully extend (low) IAC with the IAC motor analyzer J 39027A. Start the engine. If idle speed is above 800 RPM, locate and correct the vacuum leak, including the PCV system. Check for binding of the throttle blade or linkage. D Lean heated oxygen sensor signal (high air/fuel ratio) The idle speed may be too high or too low. Engine speed may vary up and down, and disconnecting the IAC valve does not help. Diagnostic trouble codes P0131, P0151, P0171, or P0174 may be set. Tech 2 oxygen (O2) voltage will be less than 100 mV (0.1 V). Check for low regulated fuel pressure, water in fuel, or a restricted injector.

D Rich heated oxygen sensor signal (low air/fuel ratio) The idle speed will be too low. Tech 2 IAC counts will usually be above 80. The system is obviously rich and may exhibit black smoke in the exhaust. D Tech 2 O2 voltage will be fixed at about 750 mV (0.75 V). Check for high fuel pressure, or a leaking or sticking injector. A siliconcontaminated heated oxygen sensor will show an O2 voltage slow to respond on the Tech 2. D Throttle body Remove the IAC valve and inspect the bore for foreign material. D IAC valve electrical connections IAC valve connections should be carefully checked for proper contact. D PCV valve An incorrect or faulty PCV valve may result in an incorrect idle speed. Refer to Diagnosis, Rough Idle, Stalling. If intermittent poor driveability or idle symptoms are resolved by disconnecting the IAC, carefully recheck the connections and valve terminal resistance, or replace the IAC.
6E1103
1. The IAC motor analyzer J 39027A is used to extend and retract the IAC valve. Valve movement is verified by an engine speed change. If no change in engine speed occurs, the valve can be resettled when removed from the throttle body. 2. This step checks the quality of the IAC movement in step 1. Between 700 revolutions per minute (RPM) and about 1500 RPM, the engine speed should change smoothly with each flash of the tester light in both extend and retract. If the IAC valve is retracted beyond the control range (about 1500 RPM), it may take many flashes to extend the IAC valve before engine speed will begin to drop. This is normal on certain engines. Fully extending the IAC may cause engine stall. This may be normal. 6. Steps 1 and 2 verified the proper IAC valve operation. This step checks the IAC circuits. Each lamp on the noid light should flash red and green while the IAC valve is cycled. While the sequence of color is not important, if either light is OFF or does not flash red and green, check the circuits for faults, beginning with poor terminal contacts.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart:
Idle Air Control (IAC) System Check

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Connect the IAC motor analyzer J 39027A to the IAC valve. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Block the wheels. 5. Turn the air conditioning OFF. 6. Idle the engine in Park (A/T) or Neutral (M/T). 7. Install the Tech 2. Display the RPM. 8. Use the IAC motor analyzer J 39027A to extend and retract the IAC valve. 9. The engine speed should decrease and increase as the IAC is cycled. Does the RPM change? 7001500 RPM Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 RPM should change smoothly with each flash of the IAC motor analyzer J 39027A light. Does the RPM change within the range specified? Check the IAC passages. Are the IAC passages blocked? Go to Step 4 Verify repair Go to Step 5 Clear any obstruction from the IAC passages. Is the action complete? Replace the IAC. Refer to OnVehicle Service, Idle Air Control Valve. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 3
3 4 5
Idle Air Control (IAC) System Check (Cont'd)

1. Install the appropriate IAC noid light from J 39027A into the powertrain control module harness. 2. Cycle the IAC motor analyzer J 39027A and observe the noid lights. 3. Both the lights should cycle red and green, but never OFF, as the RPM is changed over its range. Do the noid lights cycle red and green? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8 1. Use the other connector on the IAC motor analyzer J 39027A pigtail. 2. Check the resistance across the IAC coils. Measure the resistance between terminal A and terminal B. 3. Measure the resistance between terminal C and terminal D. Is the resistance within the specified range? 4080 W Go to Step 9 If the circuits did not test green and red, check the following: D Faulty connector terminal contacts D Open circuits, including connections D Circuits shorted to ground or voltage D Faulty powertrain control module connector(s) or powertrain controlmodule. Are repairs necessary? 1. Check the resistance between the IAC terminal B and terminal C. 2. Check the resistance between the IAC terminal A and terminal D. Is the resistance infinite? Replace the IAC. Refer to OnVehicle Service, Idle Air Control Valve. Is the action complete? Go to Step 7 Refer to Diagnostic Aids Go to Step 12 Check the IAC valve and circuit. Are the IAC valve and circuit OK?
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 12
10
11
12
Replace the IAC. Refer to OnVehicle Service, Idle Air Control Valve. Is the action complete? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 6 Repair or replace the faulty component(s). Is the action complete?
13
6E1105
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM CHECK
060R100039
Circuit Description
A properly operating exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system will directly affect the air/fuel requirements of the engine. Since the exhaust gas introduced into the air/fuel mixture is an inert gas (contains very little or no oxygen), less fuel is required to maintain a correct air/fuel ratio. Introducing exhaust gas into the combustion chamber lowers combustion temperatures and reduces the formation of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas. Lower combustion temperatures also prevent detonation. If the EGR pintle were to stay closed, the inert exhaust gas would be replaced with air and the air/fuel mixture would be leaner. The powertrain control module (PCM) would compensate for the lean condition by adding fuel, resulting in higher long term fuel trim values.
Diagnostic Aids
The EGR valve chart is a check of the EGR system. An EGR pintle constantly in the closed position could cause detonation and high emissions of NOx. It could also result in high long term fuel trim values in the open throttle cell, but not in the closed throttle cell. An EGR pintle constantly in the open position would cause rough idle. Also, an EGR valve mounted incorrectly (rotated 180) could cause a rough idle without setting an EGR DTC. Check for the following items: D EGR passages Check for restricted or blocked EGR passages. D Manifold absolute pressure sensor A manifold absolute pressure sensor may shift in calibration enough to affect fuel delivery. Refer to Manifold Absolute Pressure Output Check.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Check

1 2 3
Check the EGR valve for looseness. Is the EGR valve loose? Tighten the EGR valve. Is the action complete? 1. Place the transmission selector in Park or Neutral. 2. Start the engine and idle until warm (Closed Loop). 3. Using a Tech 2, command EGR 50% ON. Does the engine idle rough and lose RPMs? 1. Engine OFF. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a test light to ground, check the EGR harness between the ignition feed and ground. Does the test light illuminate? Go to Step 6 Verify repair Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Repair the EGR harness ignition feed. Was the problem corrected? 1. Remove the EGR valve. 2. Visually and physically inspect the EGR valve pintle, valve passages and adapter for excessive deposits, obstructions or any restrictions. Does the EGR valve have excessive deposits, obstructions or any restrictions? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8 Clean or replace EGR system components as necessary. Was the problem corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Ground the EGR valve metal case to battery (). 2. Using a Tech 2, command EGR ON and observe the EGR valve pintle for movement. Does the EGR valve pintle move according to command? Go to Step 9 Go to DTC P0404 chart Verify repair EGR system working properly. No problem found. Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
5 6
1. Remove the EGR inlet and outlet pipes from the intake and exhaust manifolds. 2. Visually and physically inspect manifold EGR ports and EGR inlet and outlet pipes for blockage or restriction caused by excessive deposits or other damage. Do the manifold EGR ports or inlet and outlet pipes have excessive deposits, obstructions, or any restrictions? Go to Step 10
EGR system working properly. No problem found.
10
Clean or replace EGR system components as necessary. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E1107
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) OUTPUT CHECK
060R100026
Circuit Description
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor measures the changes in the intake MAP which result from engine load (intake manifold vacuum) and engine speed changes; and converts these into a voltage output. The powertrain control module (PCM) sends a 5volt reference voltage to the MAP sensor. As the MAP changes, the output voltage of the sensor also changes. By monitoring the sensor output voltage, the PCM knows the MAP. A lower pressure (low voltage) output voltage will be about 12 volts at idle. Higher pressure (high voltage) output voltage will be about 44.8 volts at wide open throttle. The MAP sensor is also used, under certain conditions, to measure barometric pressure, allowing the PCM to make adjustments for different altitudes. The PCM uses the MAP sensor to diagnose proper operation of the EGR system, in addition to other functions.
1. When you compare the Tech 2 readings to a known good vehicle, it is important to compare vehicles that use MAP sensors that have the same part number. 2. Applying 34 kPa (10 inch Hg) vacuum to the MAP sensor should cause the voltage to be 1.52.1 volts less than the voltage at step 1. Upon applying vacuum to the sensor, the change in voltage should be instantaneous. A slow voltage change indicates a faulty sensor. 3. Check the vacuum hose to the sensor for leaking or restriction. Be sure that no other vacuum devices are connected to the MAP hose. IMPORTANT: Make sure the electrical connector remains securely fastened. 4. Disconnect the sensor from the bracket. Twist the sensor with your hand to check for an intermittent connection. Output changes greater than 0.10 volt indicate a bad sensor.
Test Description
IMPORTANT: Be sure to use the same diagnostic test equipment for all measurements. The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart:
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Output Check

1. Turn the ignition OFF and leave it OFF for 15 seconds. 2. Ignition ON. Do not crank engine. 3. The Tech 2 should indicate a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor voltage. 4. Compare this scan reading to the scan reading of a known good vehicle obtained using the exact same procedure as in Steps 14. Is the voltage reading the same +/ 0.40 volt? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 5 1. Disconnect the vacuum hose at the MAP sensor and plug the hose. 2. Connect a hand vacuum pump to the MAP sensor. 3. Start the engine. 4. Apply 34 kPa (10 inch Hg) of vacuum and note the voltage change. Is the voltage change 1.52.1 volts less than step 1? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 4 Check the sensor hose for leakage or restriction. Does the hose supply vacuum to the MAP sensor only? Repair the hose to ensure the hose supplies vacuum to the MAP sensor only. Is the action complete? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 7 Check the sensor connection. Is the sensor connection good? Refer to OnVehicle Service, MAP Sensor. Is the action complete? Repair the poor connection. Is the action complete?
3 4
5 6 7
6E1109
EVAPORATIVE (EVAP) EMISSIONS CANISTER PURGE VALVE SOLENOID CHECK
060R100040
Circuit Description
Canister purge is controlled by a solenoid valve that allows manifold vacuum to purge the canister. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a ground to energize the solenoid valve (purge ON). The EVAP purge solenoid control is turned ON time is determined by engine operating conditions including load, throttle position, coolant temperature and ambient temperature. The duty cycle is calculated by the PCM and the purge solenoid is enabled when the appropriate conditions have been met: D The engine run time after start is more than 60 seconds. D The engine coolant temperature is above 30C (86F). D The fuel control system is operating in the ClosedLoop mode.
Diagnostic Aids
D Make a visual check of vacuum hoses. D Check the throttle body for possible cracked. D Check the malfunction indicator lamp for a possible mechanical problem.
Test Description
The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1. Check to see if the solenoid is open or closed. The solenoid is normally deenergized in this step, so it should be closed. 2. This step checks to determine if the solenoid was open due to an electrical circuit problem or a defective solenoid. 3. This should normally energize the solenoid, opening the valve and allowing the vacuum to drop (purge ON).
6E1110
Evaporative (EVAP) Emissions Canister Purge Valve Solenoid Check

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 3. At the throttle body, disconnect the hose that goes to the pump solenoid. 4. Using a hand vacuum pump with an attached vacuum gauge J 23738A, apply vacuum (10 inch Hg or 34 kPa) to the solenoid. Does the solenoid hold vacuum? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 2 1. Disconnect the solenoid electrical connector. 2. As in Step 1, apply vacuum (10 Hg or 34 kPa) to the solenoid. Does the solenoid hold vacuum? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 7 1. At the throttle body, put a cap over the vacuum port where the hose was disconnected for testing. This is to prevent a vacuum leak when the engine is started. 2. Ignition OFF. 3. Install the Tech 2. 4. Apply vacuum to the purge solenoid with the hand vacuum pump. 5. Start the engine, run at 2500 RPM. 6. Using the Tech 2 command the purge solenoid ON. Did the vacuum drop when the purge was turned on? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9 Check for a short to ground or open in the wire between the solenoid and the PCM. Is there a problem? Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 6 Repair the faulty wire. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. and also refer to latest service bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
5 6
Replace the faulty purge solenoid. Refer to OnVehicle Service, EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E1111
Evaporative (EVAP) Emissions Canister Purge Valve Solenoid Check (Cont'd)

1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. At the throttle body, install a vacuum gauge where the hose from the purge solenoid was disconnected for testing. 3. Start the engine. 4. Stabilize the engine speed at about 2500 RPM. 5. Momentarily snap the throttle open and let it return to idle. Is there approximately 10 inch Hg (34 kPa) of vacuum available at the EVAP emission canister purge solenoid?
No problem found in the EVAP emission canister purge valve check.
1. Turn the Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the solenoids electrical connector. 3. Connect a test lamp between the harness terminals. 4. Turn the Ignition ON. Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 11 Probe each terminal of the solenoid valve electrical connector with a test lamp to ground. Does the test lamp light on both terminals? Repair the short to voltage in the wire between the solenoid and the PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Go to Step 13
Go to Step 10
10
Go to Step 12
11
Go to Step 14
12 13
Does the ignition feed terminals light the test lamp? Check for an open in the wire between the purge solenoid and the PCM. Was there an open circuit? Repair the open in the ignition feed wire. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 15 Go to Step 6 Verify repair Verify repair
14 15
Repair the open wire. Is the action complete?
6E1112
Upshift Lamp System Check (Manual Transmission Only)
060R100084
Circuit Description
The shift lamp indicates the best transmission shift point for maximum fuel economy. The lamp is controlled by the Power Train Control Module (PCM) and the Multiplex Controller, it is turned ON by grounding in the Multiplex Controller. The PCM is used information from the following inputs to control the upshift lamp. D Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor D Throttle Position Sensor D Vehicle Speed Sensor D Engine Speed
The PCM uses the measured RPM and the vehicle speed to calculate what gear the vehicle is in. Its this calculation that determines when the upshift lamp should be turned ON.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed-through wire insulation. Check for poor connections or a damaged harness. Inspect the PCM harness and connector for proper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal-to-wire connection and damaged harness.
6E1113
Up-Shift Lamp System Check

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Verify the customer complaints in accordance with mentioned below: Go to the adequate Step Chart first. D At the 1st gear position, the lamp doesnt illuminate: Go to Step Chart D At the 3rd gear position, the lamp doesnt illuminate: Go to Step Chart D Upshift Lamp doesnt illuminate always. 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 3. Using the Tech 2, check to see if the upshift lamp turn ON or OFF. Does the upshift lamp stay OFF? Go to Step 2
Go to Step 10
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect the cluster meter connector. Disconnect the Multiplex Control Unit connector. Check the circuit (Voltage feed circuit and Lamp driver circuit) between cluster meter connector and Multiplex Control Unit. Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Was a problem found? 4 Locate and repair the between cluster meter and Multiplex Control Unit open circuit. Is the action complete? 5 1. Reconnect the cluster meter connector. 2. Check the circuit resistance between voltage feed circuit and lamp driver circuit at Multiplex Control Unit connector. Was a problem found? 6 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Alarmer Control Unit. 3. Ignition ON, Probe the ignition feed circuit at the Alarmer Control Unit connector with a test light to ground. Is the test light ON? 7 Locator and repair the Alarmer Control Unit battery feed open circuit. Is the action complete ? 8 Check the Alarmer Control Unit ground connection and circuit. Was a problem found? 9 Locator and repair the ground connector for Alarmer Control Unit Circuit. Is the action complete?
Verify repair Go to Instrument Panel in Electrical Diagnosis
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 7
Verify repair
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 10
Verify repair
6E1114
Up-Shift Lamp System Check (Cont'd)

10
1. Disconnect the Multiplex Control Unlit. 2. Check the circuit between Alarmer control Unlit and Multiplex Control Unit. Was a problem found? Go to Step 11 Go to Step 12 Locate and repair the between Multiplex Control Unit and PCM open circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Check for damaged terminals at the Multiplex Control Unit. Was a problem found? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 16 Go to Step 14 Replace the Multiplex Control Unit. Is the action complete? 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ignition OFF. Reconnect the all connector. Install the Tech 2. Ignition ON. Using the Tech 2 output control function, select Upshift lamp control and command the Upshift lamp ON and OFF. ( Refer to the Miscellaneous test) Verify repair Go to Step 16 Go to Step 15
11
12
13 14
Is the action complete? 15 16 Replace the Multiplex Control Unit. Is the action complete? 1. Verify the customer complaints in accordance with mentioned below: Go to the adequate Step Chart first. D At the 1st gear position, the lamp does not illuminate: Go to Step Chart D At the 3rd gear position, the lamp does not illuminate: Go to Step Chart D Upshift Lamp does not illuminate always. 2. Ignition ON, or OFF. 3. Using the Tech 2, check to see if the upshift lamp turn ON or OFF. Is the action complete? 17 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed refer to ON-Vehicle Service in PowerTrain Control Module and Sensor for procedure. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
Go to Step 17
Verify repair
6E1115
PCM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

The following table lists the diagnostic trouble codes supported by this vehicle application. If any DTCs not listed here are displayed by a Scan Tool, the Tech 2 data PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC P0106 P0107 P0108 P0112 P0113 P0117 P0118 P0121 P0122 P0123 P0125 P0128 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0134 P0135 P0137 P0138 P0140 P0141 P0171 P0172 P0201 P0202 P0203 P0204 P0300 P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304 P0325 P0327 P0336 P0337 P0341 P0342 MAP Sensor Circuit Low Input MAP Sensor Circuit High Input IAT Sensor Circuit Low Input IAT Sensor Circuit High Input ECT Sensor Circuit Low Input ECT Sensor Circuit High Input TP Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem TP Sensor Circuit Low Input TP Sensor Circuit High Input Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control Thermostat In Sufficient Temperature for Stable Operation O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1) Fuel Trim System Too Rich (Bank 1) Injector Circuit Malfunction Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit Malfunction Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit Malfunction Cylinder 3 Injector Circuit Malfunction Cylinder 4 Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected Cylinder Misfire Detected (#1) Cylinder Misfire Detected (#2) Cylinder Misfire Detected (#3) Cylinder Misfire Detected (#4) Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction Knock Sensor Circuit Low Input CKP Sensor Circuit Range/Performance CKP Sensor Circuit Low Input CMP Sensor Circuit Range/Performance CMP Sensor Circuit Low Input Description MAP Circuit/Range Performance Problem may be faulty; notify the Tech 2 manufacturer of any DTCs displayed that are not included in the following table.
Type B A A A A A A B A A B B A A B A B A A A B B B A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B
Illuminate MIL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
6E1116
DTC P0351 P0352 P0401 P0402 P0404 P0405 P0406 P0420 P0440 P0442 P0443 P0446 P0449 P0456 P0461 P0462 P0463 P0464 P0480 P0481 P0502 P0506 P0507 P0532 P0533 P0562 P0563 P0601 P1106 P1107 P1111 P1112 P1114 P1115 P1121 P1122 P1133 P1134 P1171 P1336 P1380 P1381 P1404

Description Ignition Coil A Primary/Secondary Ignition Coil B Primary/Secondary EGR Flow Insufficient Detected EGR Excessive Flow Detected EGR Circuit Range/Performance EGR Sensor Circuit Low EGR Sensor Circuit High Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold EVAP Control System Malfunction EVAP Control System Small Leak Detected EVAP Control System Purge Control Valve Circuit Malfunction EVAP Control System Vent Control Circuit Malfunction EVAP Control System Vent Valve/Solenoid Circuit Malfunction EVAP Control System Very Small Leak Detected Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Low Input Fuel Level Sensor Circuit High Input Fuel Level Sensor Noisy Signal Cooling Fan 1 Control Circuit Malfunction Cooling Fan 2 Control Circuit Malfunction VSS Circuit Low Input Idle Control System RPM Lower than expected Idle Control System RPM Higher than expected A/C Refrigerent Pressure Sensor Circuit Low A/C Refrigerent Pressure Sensor Circuit High System Voltage Low System Voltage High Internal Control Module Memory Check Sum Error MAP Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage MAP Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage IAT Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage IAT Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage ECT Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage ECT Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage TP Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage TP Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage O2 Sensor Insufficient Switching (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Transition Time Ratio (Bank 1 Sensor1) Fuel System Lean During Acceleration CKP System Variation Not Learned ABS Rough Road System Fault ABS Rough Road Class 2 Serial Data Fault EGR Closed Valve Type A A A B B A A A A A A B A A B B B D D D B B B D D D A A D D D D D D D D B B A A D D B Illuminate MIL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes

DTC P1441 P1546 P1618 P1625 P1627 P1635 Description EVAP System Flow During NonPurge A/C Compressor Clutch Output Circuit Malfunction SPI PCM Interprocessor Communication Error PCM Unexpected Reset PCM A/D Conversion Malfunction 5 Volt Reference Voltage Circuit Malfunction Type B D A D A A
6E1117
Illuminate MIL Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes
6E1118
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0106 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) CIRCUIT/RANGE PERFORMANCE PROBLEM
060R100026
Circuit Description
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure. The MAP sensor signal voltage to the powertrain control module (PCM) varies from below 2 volts at idle (low manifold pressure) to above 4 volts with the ignition ON engine not running or at wideopen throttle (high manifold pressure). A speed density method of determining engine load is used on the 2.2L engine. This is calculated using inputs from the MAP sensor, RPM, CKP Sensor, and the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAP sensor is the main sensor used in this calculation, and measuring engine load is its main function. The MAP sensor is also used to determine manifold pressure changes while the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) flow test diagnostic is being run, to determine engine vacuum level for some other diagnostics and to determine barometric pressure (BARO). Refer to DTC P0401. The PCM monitors the MAP signals for voltages outside the normal range (10104 kpa) of the MAP sensor. If the PCM detects a MAP signal voltage that is excessively low, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0106 will be set. Diagnostic Trouble Code P0106 is a Type B Code.
D Throttle position is steady, throttle angle changes less than 5%. D EGR flow rate is steady, changing less than 2%. D IAC valve counts are steady, changing less than 3 counts. D Engine speed is between 1000 RPM and 4000 RPM. D ECT is above 10C (14F). D No change in brake switch, A/C clutch, power steering pressure switch status. The above conditions are met for 80 test failures within a 160 test sample (125 msec/test)
Action Taken When the DTC Sets

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will default to a BARO value of 79.3 kPa. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.
Conditions for Clearing the MIL/DTC

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code P0106 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault.
Conditions for Setting the DTC

D No ECT, CKP, EGR, EVAP, MAP, Injector, Misfire, A/D Multiplexer or TP sensor DTCs present. D Engine speed is steady, changing less than 20 RPM.

D Diagnostic Trouble Code P0106 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.
6E1119
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D The MAP sensor shares a 5 Volt Reference with the TP sensor and Fuel Pressure sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit. D The MAP sensor shares a ground with the TP sensor and Fuel Pressure sensor.
D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; an open circuit, a short to ground, or a short to voltage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the MAP display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0106 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the Diagnostic Trouble Code was last set. If it is determined that the Diagnostic Trouble Code occurs intermittently, performing the Diagnostic Trouble Code P1106 or P1107 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P0106 MAP Circuit/Range Performance Problem

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data, then clear the DTCs. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0106. Does the Tech 2 indicate that DTC P0106 ran and passed? Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1. Check for the following condition: D Vacuum hoses disconnected, damaged, or incorrectly routed? D Intake manifold vacuum leaks; D Vacuum leaks at throttle body; D Vacuum leaks at EGR valve flange and pipes; 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2. Is the MAP value near the specified value? 0 V 10.3 kPa Go to Step 6
Check the MAP sensor signal circuit; between the MAP sensor and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), for a short to voltage? Check the MAP sensor circuit, between the MAP sensor and the PCM, the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit Was the problem found?
Verify repair
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
DTC P0106 MAP Circuit/Range Performance Problem (Cont'd)

Check the 5 volt signal circuit, between the MAP sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a fused jumper between the MAP sensor circuit and the 5 volt signal circuit, both at the wiring harness MAP sensor connector. 3. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 4. Observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2? Does the Tech 2 read the following value? (if no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.) 5 volts 104 kPa Go to Step 12 Go to Step 9
Check the MAP sensor ground circuit, between the MAP sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a Digital Multimeter (DVM), set to measure voltage, between the ground circuit and the 5 volt signal circuit, both at the wiring harness MAP sensor connector. 3. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 5 volts Does the DVM read the following value? Replace the MAP sensor. Verify repair.
Go to Step 10
10
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 12
11
12
Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair.
6E1121
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
060R100026
Circuit Description
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure. The MAP sensor signal voltage to the powertrain control module (PCM) varies from below 2 volts at idle (low manifold pressure) to above 4 volts with the ignition ON, engine not running or at wideopen throttle (high manifold pressure). A speed density method of determining engine load is used on the 2.2L engine. This is calculated using inputs from the MAP sensor, the CKP Sensor, and the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAP sensor is the main sensor used in this calculation, and measuring engine load is its main function. The MAP sensor is also used to determine manifold pressure changes while the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) flow test diagnostic is being run, to determine engine vacuum level for some other diagnostics and to determine barometric pressure (BARO). Refer to DTC P0401. The PCM monitors the MAP signals for voltages outside the normal range (10104 kpa) of the MAP sensor. If the PCM detects a MAP signal voltage that is excessively low, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0107 will be set. DTC P0107 is a Type A Code.
D Throttle angle is above 0% if engine speed is less than or equal to 1300 RPM. D Throttle angle is above 5% if engine speed is above 1300 RPM. D The MAP sensor indicates manifold absolute pressure below 11 kPa. The above conditions are met for 128 test failures within a 256 test sample (7.81 msec/test).

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will default to a BARO value of 79.3 kPa. D The PCM will use a MAP value based on speed density calculation. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0107 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code P0107 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.

D No TP sensor Diagnostic Trouble Codes present. D Engine is running.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D The MAP sensor shares a 5 Volt Reference with the TP sensor and Fuel Pressure sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit. D The MAP sensor shares a ground with the TP sensor and Fuel Pressure sensor. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage, shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK,
observe the MAP display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. D A faulty 5 volt reference circuit could also set a TP Sensor Diagnostic Trouble Code because the two sensors share the same 5 volt reference pin at the PCM. If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0107 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the Diagnostic Trouble Code was last set. If it is determined that the Diagnostic Trouble Code occurs intermittently, performing the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0107 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P0107 MAP Sensor Circuit Low Input

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. With the throttle closed, observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2. Is the MAP value near the specified value? 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0107. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0107 failed? Go to Step 4
0V 10.3 kPa at sea level
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the MAP sensor electrical connector. 3. Jumper the 5 volt reference circuit and the MAP signal together at the MAP sensor harness connector. 4. Ignition ON. 5. Observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2. Is the MAP value near the specified value? (if no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.) Go to Step 10 5 V 104 kPa Go to Step 5
1. Disconnect the jumper. 2. Connect a fused jumper between the 5 Volt signal circuit and the MAP sensor signal circuit at the MAP sensor harness connector. 3. Observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2. Is the MAP value near the specified value? 5 V 104 kPa Go to Step 6 Go to Step 8
6E1123
DTC P0107 MAP Sensor Circuit Low Input (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the 5 volt reference circuit for an open or short to ground. 3. If the 5 volt reference circuit is open or shorted to ground, repair it as necessary. Was the 5 volt reference circuit open or shorted to ground? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Go to Step 11 Verify repair
Check the 5 volt reference circuit for a poor connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check the MAP signal circuit for an open, short to ground, or short to the sensor ground circuit. 3. If the MAP sensor signal circuit is open or shorted to ground, repair it as necessary. Was the MAP signal circuit open or shorted to ground? Verify repair
Go to Step 9
Check the MAP sensor signal circuit for a poor connection at the PCM and the MAP sensor; replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the MAP sensor. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 11
10 11
Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
060R100026
Circuit Description
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure. The MAP sensor signal voltage to the powertrain control module (PCM) varies from below 2 volts at idle (low manifold pressure) to above 4 volts with the ignition ON, engine not running or at wideopen throttle (high manifold pressure). A speed density method of determining engine load is used on the 2.2L engine. This is calculated using inputs from the MAP sensor, RPM, CKP Sensor, and the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAP sensor is the main sensor used in this calculation, and measuring engine load is its main function. The MAP sensor is also used to determine manifold pressure changes while the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) flow test diagnostic is being run, to determine engine vacuum level for some other diagnostics and to determine barometric pressure (BARO). Refer to DTC P0401. The PCM monitors the MAP signals for voltages outside the normal range (10104 kpa) of the MAP sensor. If the PCM detects a MAP signal voltage that is excessively low, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0108 will be set. DTC P0108 is a Type A Code.
D Throttle position is below 2.7% if engine speed is below 1000 RPM. D Throttle position is below 10% if engine speed is above 1000 RPM. D The MAP sensor indicates manifold absolute pressure above 90 kPa. The above conditions are met for 128 test failures within a 256 test sample (7.81 msec/test).

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will default to a BARO value of 79.3 kPa. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code P0108 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code P0108 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.

D No TP sensor Diagnostic Trouble Codes present. D Engine is running.
6E1125
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D The MAP sensor shares a 5 Volt Reference with the TP sensor and Fuel Pressure sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit. D The MAP sensor share a ground with the TP sensor and Fuel Pressure sensor.
D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; an open circuit, a short to ground, or a short to voltage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the MAP display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0108 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the Diagnostic Trouble Code was last set.
DTC P0108 MAP Sensor Circuit High Input

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. If the engine idle is rough, unstable or incorrect, repair the idle problem before using this chart. Refer to Symptoms section. 2. With the engine idling, note the MAP value on the Tech 2. Is the MAP reading above the specified value? 1. Ignition ON engine OFF 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data, then clear the DTCs. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using the Tech 2, monitor DTC info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0108. Does the Tech 2 indicate that DTC P0108 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
About 4V 90 kPa
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect the MAP sensor electrical connector. Ignition ON. Observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2.
Is the MAP value near the specified value? (if no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.) 5 Check the MAP sensor signal circuit; between the MAP sensor and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), for a short to voltage. Was the problem found? 6 Check the MAP sensor circuit, between the MAP sensor and the PCM, the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit Was the problem found?
0 V 10.3 kPa
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
DTC P0108 MAP Sensor Circuit High Input (Cont'd)

Check the 5 volt signal circuit, between the MAP sensor and the PCM for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a fused jumper between the MAP sensor circuit and the 5 volt signal circuit, both at the wiring harness MAP sensor connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2? Does the Tech 2 read the following value? Check the MAP sensor ground circuit, between the MAP sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a Digital Multimeter (DVM), set to measure voltage, between the ground circuit and the 5 volt signal circuit, both at the wiring harness MAP sensor connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. Does the DVM read the following value? 5 Volts Replace the MAP sensor. Verify repair. Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair.
5 volts 104 kPa
Go to Step 10
10
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 12
11
12
6E1127
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
060R100027
Circuit Description
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor which measures the temperature of the air entering the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies 5 volts through a pullup resistor to the IAT sensor. When the intake air is cold, the sensor resistance is high and the PCM will monitor a high signal voltage on the IAT signal circuit. If the intake air is warm, the sensor resistance is lower, causing the PCM to monitor a lower voltage. Diagnostic Trouble Code P0112 will set when the PCM detects an excessively low signal voltage (short to ground) on the intake air temperature sensor signal circuit. DTC P0112 is a Type A Code.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0112 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P0112 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage, shorts to ground, shorts to battery and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the IAT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the IAT sensor. A change in the IAT display will indicate the location of the fault. If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0112 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can

D Vehicle speed is greater than 48 km/h (30 mph). D The engine has been running for over 120 seconds. D IAT signal voltage less than 0.10 volts for a total of 12.5 seconds over a 25second period of time. The above conditions are met for 100 test failures within a 200 test sample (125 msec/test).

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will use a default IAT valve based on PCM inputs and engine run time.

be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the Diagnostic Trouble Code was last set.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. Verifies that the fault is present. 3. If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0112 can be repeated only by duplicating the Failure Records condition, refer to the Temperature vs. Resistance Value table. The table may be used to test the IAT sensor at various temperatures to evaluate the possibility of a shifted sensor that may be stored above or below a certain temperature. If this is the case, replace the IAT sensor. If the IAT sensor appears to be OK, the fault is intermittent; refer to Diagnostic Aids.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor

C 100 80 60 45 35 25 15 5 5 15 30 40 F 212 176 140 113 95 77 59 41 23 5 22 40 OHMS 177 332 667 1188 1802 2796 4450 7280 12300 21450 52700 100700 Temperature vs. Resistance Values (approximate)
6E1129
DTC P0112 Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Low Input
Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Using a Tech 2, monitor the intake air temperature (IAT). Is the intake air temperature greater than the specified value? 148C (283F) Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor the DTC info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0112. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0112 failed this ignition? Refer to Test Description
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect the IAT sensor electrical connector. Ignition ON. Observe the intake air temperature on the Tech 2.
Is the intake air temperature below the specified value? 5 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM electrical connectors. 3. Check the IAT sensor signal circuit for a short to ground. Is the IAT sensor signal circuit shorted to ground? 6 7 Replace the IAT sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
38C (36F)
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 5
Verify Repair Verify Repair
Go to Step 7
Verify Repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
060R100027
Circuit Description
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor which measures the temperature of the air entering the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies 5 volts through a pullup resistor to the IAT sensor. When the intake air is cold, the sensor resistance is high and the PCM will monitor a high signal voltage on the IAT signal circuit. If the intake air is warm, the sensor resistance is lower causing the PCM to monitor a lower voltage. Diagnostic Trouble Code P0113 will set when the PCM detects an excessively high signal voltage on the intake air temperature sensor signal circuit. DTC P0113 is a Type A Code.
D The PCM will use a default IAT valve based on PCM inputs and engine run time. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D D D D D The engine has been running for over 240 seconds. Vehicle speed is less than 32 km/h (20 mph). ECT signal temperature is above 60C (140F). Mass air flow is less than 20g/second. IAT signal voltage almost 5 volts which indicates an intake air temperature less than 39C (38F) for a total of 12.5 seconds over a 25second period. The above condition are met for 100 test failures within a 200 test sample (125 msec/test)
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage, shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the IAT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the IAT sensor. A change in the IAT display will indicate the location of the fault.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected.

If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0113 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the Diagnostic Trouble Code was last set. 100 80 60 45 35 25 15 5 5 15 30 40 212 176 140 113 95 77 59 41 23 5 22 40
6E1131
177 332 667 1188 1802 2796 4450 7280 12300 21450 52700 100700
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2.Verifies that the fault is present. 3.If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0113 can be repeated only by duplicating the Failure Records conditions, refer to the Temperature vs. Resistance Values table. The table may be used to test the IAT sensor at various temperatures to evaluate the possibility of a shifted sensor that may be open above or below a certain temperature. If this is the case, replace the IAT sensor. If the IAT sensor appears to be OK, the fault is intermittent; refer to Diagnostic Aids.

C F OHMS Temperature vs. Resistance Values (approximate)
DTC P0113 Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit High Input
Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Ignition ON, engine OFF. Observe the Intake Air Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Intake Air Temp below the specified value? 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data parameters. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0113. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0113 failed? Refer to Test Description
5V 38C (36F)
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the IAT sensor electrical connector. 3. Jumper the IAT signal circuit and the sensor ground circuit together at the IAT sensor harness connector. 4. Ignition ON. 5. Observe the Intake Air Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Intake Air Temp at the specified value?
0V 140C (284F)
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 5
DTC P0113 Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit High Input (Cont'd)
1. Jumper the IAT signal circuit at the IAT sensor harness connector to chassis ground. 2. Observe the Intake Air Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Intake Air Temp at the specified value? Check for poor connections at the IAT sensor and replace terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement?
0V 140C (284F)
Go to Step 7
Verify Repair
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check the IAT sensor ground circuit for an open. 3. If the IAT sensor ground circuit is open, repair it as necessary. Was the IAT sensor ground circuit open? Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check the IAT signal circuit for an open. 3. If the IAT sensor signal circuit is open, repair it as necessary. Was the IAT signal circuit open? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Check for a poor sensor ground or IAT signal circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any of the terminals need to be replaced? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the IAT sensor Is the action complete? Replace the PCM IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Go to Step 11
10 11
6E1133
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
060R100028
Circuit Description
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a thermistor mounted in the engine coolant stream. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies a voltage (about 5 volts) through a pullup resistor to the ECT signal circuit. When the engine coolant is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high, therefore the PCM will measure a high signal voltage. As the engine coolant warms, the sensor resistance becomes lower, and the ECT signal voltage measured at the PCM drops. With a fully warmedup engine, the ECT signal voltage should measure about 1.5 to 2.0 volts. DTC P0117 is a Type A Code.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D Engine running time is longer than 120 seconds. D The ECT sensor signal indicates an engine coolant temperature greaterthan 150C (302F) (about 0.14 V) for a total of 12.5 seconds overa 25second period. The above condition are met for 100 test failures within a 200 test sample (125 msec/test)
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage, shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the ECT sensor. A change in the ECT display will indicate the location of the fault. If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0117 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will substitute the ECT reading with a default engine coolant temperature value. The default value is based on startup intake air temperature and running time.

Diagnostic Trouble Code was last set. If it is determined that the Diagnostic Trouble Code occurs intermittently, performing the Diagnostic Trouble Code P1114 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2.Verifies that the fault is present. 3.If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0117 can be repeated only by duplicating the Failure Records conditions, refer to the Temperature vs. Resistance Values table. The table may be used to test the ECT sensor at various temperatures to evaluate the possibility of a shifted sensor that may be shorted above or below a certain temperature. If this is the case, replace the ECT sensor. If the ECT sensor appears to be OK, the fault is intermittent; refer to Diagnostic Aids.

6E1135
DTC P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit Low Input
Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON engine OFF. 2. Observe the Eng Cool Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Eng Cool Temp below the specified value? 1. Ignition ON engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0117. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0117 failed this ignition? 39C (38F) Go to Step 4
139C (282F)
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Disconnect the ECT sensor electrical connector. 2. Observe the Eng Cool Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Eng Cool Temp at or below the specified value? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the ECT signal circuit for a short to ground or a short to the sensor ground circuit. 3. If the ECT signal circuit is shorted, repair it as necessary. Was the ECT signal circuit shorted to ground?
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 5
Verify repair Verify repair
Go to Step 7
6 7
Replace the ECT sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
060R100028
Circuit Description
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a thermistor mounted in the engine coolant stream. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies a voltage (about 5 volts) through a pullup resistor to the ECT signal circuit. When the engine coolant is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high, therefore the PCM will measure a high signal voltage. As the engine coolant warms, the sensor resistance becomes less, and the ECT signal voltage measured at the PCM drops. With a fully warmed up engine, the ECT signal voltage should measure about 1.5 to 2.0 volts. If the PCM detect a continuous open in the ECT sensor or circuit, then a code P0118 will set. DTC P0118 is a type A code.
based on startup intake air temperature and running time. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D Engine running time is longer than 180 seconds. D The ECT sensor signal indicates an engine coolant temperature of 39C (38F) or less (about 5 volts) for a total of 12.5 seconds over a 25second period. The above conditions are met for 100 test failures within a 200 test sample(125 msec/test)
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage, shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuit. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the ECT sensor. A change in the ECT display will indicate the location of the fault.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will substitute the ECT reading with a default engine coolant temperature value. The default value is

If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0118 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the Diagnostic Trouble Code was last set. If it is determined that the Diagnostic Trouble Code occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1115 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
6E1137

Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2.Verifies that the fault is present. 3.If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0118 can be repeated only by duplicating the Failure Records condition, refer to the Temperature vs. Resistance Value table. The table may be used to test the ECT sensor at various temperatures to evaluate the possibility of a shifted sensor that may be shorted above or below a certain temperature. If this is the case, replace the ECT sensor. If the ECT sensor appears to be OK, the fault is intermittent; refer to Diagnostic Aids.
DTC P0118 ECT Sensor Circuit High Input

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON engine OFF. 2. Observe the Eng Cool Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Eng Cool Temp below the specified value? 1. Ignition ON engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor the DTC info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0118. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0118 failed? Refer to Test Description
39C (38F)
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Disconnect the ECT sensor electrical connector. 2. Jumper the ECT signal circuit and the sensor ground circuit together at the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Observe the Eng Cool Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Eng Cool Temp at or above the specified value? 1. Jumper the ECT signal circuit at the ECT sensor harness connector to chassis ground. 2. Observe the Eng Cool Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Eng Cool Temp at or above the specified value? Check for poor connections at the ECT sensor and replace terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement?
140C (284F)
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 5
140C (284F)
Go to Step 7
Verify repair
DTC P0118 ECT Sensor Circuit High Input (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check the ECT sensor ground circuit for an open. 3. If the ECT sensor ground circuit is open, repair it as necessary. Was the ECT sensor ground circuit open? Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check the ECT signal circuit for an open. 3. If the ECT sensor signal circuit is open, repair it as necessary. Was the ECT signal circuit open? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Check for a poor sensor ground or ECT signal circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any of the terminals need to be replaced? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the ECT sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Go to Step 11
10 11
6E1139
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0121 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM
060R100029
Circuit Description
The throttle position (Throttle Position) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal that changes relative to throttle blade angle. The signal voltage will vary from about 0.25 volts at closed throttle to about 4.75 volts at wide open throttle (WOT). The Throttle Position (TP) signal is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) for fuel control and most of the PCMcontrolled outputs. The PCM monitors throttle position and compares actual throttle positions from the TP sensor to a predicted TP value calculated from engine speed. If the PCM detects an outofrange condition, then a DTC code P0121 will set. DTC P0121 is type A code.
D Actual TP value is greater than the PCMs estimated TP value (Estimated TP value is based on MAP and RPM). Stuck Low D MAP value is below 50 kPa. D Actual TP value is less than the PCMs estimated TP value (Estimated TP value is based on MAP and RPM).

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D The PCM will use a default throttle position based on MAP and RPM.

D The Engine is running. D No MAP, ECT, TP, CKP, EGR, EVAP, No Injector, No Misfire or DTCs are set. D IAC is between 10 and 160 counts. D ECT is above 10C (14F). D The MAP value changes by less than 2 kPa. The above conditions are met for 100 test failures within a 200 test sample (125 msec/test) Stuck High D MAP value is below 55 kPa.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code P0121 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P0121 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Skewed MAP signal or faulty MAP sensor An incorrect MAP signal may cause the PCM to incorrectly calculate the predicted TP sensor value during high engine load situations. Check for an unusually low MAP reading. This condition can cause DTC P0121 to be set. D The TP sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the MAP sensor and Fuel Pressure sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit. D The TP sensor shares a ground with the MAP sensor and the Fuel Pressure sensor. D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken
locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; an open circuit, a short to ground, or a short to voltage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the MAP display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0121 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1122 or P1121 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P0121 TP Sensor/Range Performance Problem

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON engine OFF 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data, then clear the DTCs. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0121. Does the Tech 2 indicate that DTC P0121 Ran and Passed?
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Monitor the TP value on the Tech 2 while moving the throttle between 0% and 100%. Does the TP value on the Tech 2 move smoothly from 0% (0.25 volts) to 100% (4.75 volts)? (if no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.)
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Throttle Position (TP) Sensor electrical connector, located on the RH side of the Throttle body. 3. Start the vehicle, and monitor the TP value with the Tech 2. Does the TP value on the Tech 2 hold steadily within the given range? 00.25 volts 0% Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
Check the TP sensor signal circuit; between the TP sensor and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), for a short to voltage. Was the problem found? Verify repair Check the TP sensor circuit, between the TP sensor and the PCM, the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit Was the problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 7
6E1141
DTC P0121 TP Sensor/Range Performance Problem (Cont'd)

Check the 5 volt signal circuit, between the TP sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a fused jumper between the TP sensor circuit and the 5 volt signal circuit both at the wiring harness TP sensor connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Observe the TP value displayed on the Tech 2? Does the Tech 2 read the following value? Check the TP sensor ground circuit, between the TP sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a Digital Multimeter (DVM), set to measure voltage, between the ground circuit and the 5 volt signal circuit, both at the wiring harness TP sensor connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. Does the DVM read the following value? about 5 volts Replace the TP sensor. Verify repair. Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair.
about 5 volts 100%
Go to Step 10
10
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 12
11
12
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0122 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR CIRCUITLOW INPUT
060R100029
Circuit Description
The throttle position (TP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal that changes relative to throttle blade angle. The signal voltage will vary from below 1 volt at closed throttle to about 4 volts at wide open throttle(WOT). The TP signal is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) for fuel control and most of the PCMcontrolled outputs. If the PCM detect a continuous short to ground in the TP sensor or circuit, then a code P0122 will set. Diagnostic Trouble Code P0122 is type A code.

Diagnostic Aids
D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D The TP sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the MAP sensor and Fuel Pressure sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit or components itself. D The TP sensor share a ground with the MAP and the Fuel Pressure sensor. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage, shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the throttle position display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the TP sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.

D The ignition is ON. D Throttle Position sensor signal voltage is less than 0.235 volt for a total of 0.78 second over a 1.5second period. The above conditions are met for 100 test failures within a 200 test samples (7.81 msec/test).

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D The PCM will use a default throttle position based on MAP and RPM.

If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0122 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the Diagnostic Trouble Code was last set. If it is determined
6E1143
that the Diagnostic Trouble Code occurs intermittently, performing the Diagnostic Trouble Code P1122 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P0122 TP Sensor Circuit Low Input

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON engine OFF. 2. With the throttle closed, observe the Throttle Position Sensor display on the Tech 2. Is the Throttle Position Sensor below the specified value? 0.235 V Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor the Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0122. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0122 failed? Go to Step 4 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the TP sensor electrical connector. 3. Jumper the 5 volt reference circuit and the Throttle Position signal together at the Throttle Position sensor harness connector. 4. Ignition ON. Observe the Throtle Position Sensor display on the Tech 2. Is the Throttle Position Sensor at the specified value? 5V 1. Disconnect jumper. 2. Connect a test light between B+ and the Throttle Position sensor signal circuit at the Throttle Position sensor harness connector. Observe the Throttle Position Sensor display on the Tech 2. Is the Throttle Position Sensor at the specified value? (if no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.)
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 5
5V
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the 5 volt reference circuit for an open or short to ground. 3. If the 5 volt reference circuit is open or shorted to ground, repair it as necessary. Was the 5 volt reference circuit open or shorted to ground? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Go to Step 12
Check the 5 volt reference circuit for a poor connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair
DTC P0122 TP Sensor Circuit Low Input (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check the TP signal circuit for an open, short to ground, or short to the sensor ground circuit. 3. If the TP sensor signal circuit is open or shorted to ground, repair it as necessary. Was the TP signal circuit open or shorted to ground? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Check the TP sensor signal circuit for a poor connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Check the TP sensor signal circuit for a poor connection at the TP sensor and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the TP sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Go to Step 12
10
Go to Step 11
11 12
6E1145
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0123 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
060R100029
Circuit Description
The throttle position (TP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal that changes relative to throttle blade angle. The signal voltage will vary from below 1 volt at closed throttle to about 4 volts at wide open throttle (WOT). The TP signal is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) for fuel control and most of the PCMcontrolled outputs. If the PCM detect a continuous open in the TP sensor or circuit, then a code P0123 will set. DTC P0123 is a type A code.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D The TP sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the MAP sensor and Fuel Pressure sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit or components itself. D The TP sensor share a ground with the MAP and the Fuel Pressure sensor. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage, shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Throttle Position sensor display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses

D The ignition is ON. D Throttle Position sensor signal voltage is greater than 4.78 volts for a total of 0.78 second over a 1.5second period. The above conditions met for 100 test failures within a 200 test samples (7.81 msec/test).

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D The PCM will use a default throttle position based on MAP and RPM.

related to the TP sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. D Faulty Throttle Position sensor With the ignition key ON engine OFF observe the TP sensor display on the Tech 2 while slowly depressing the accelerator to wide open throttle. If a voltage over 4.88 volts is seen at any point in normal accelerator travel, replace the TP sensor. If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0123 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the Diagnostic Trouble Code was last set. If it is determined that the Diagnostic Trouble Code occurs intermittently, performing theDiagnostic Trouble Code P1121 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 7. Components that share the TP sensor 5 volt reference circuit include the following devices: D EGR valve D Fuel Tank Pressure sensor D MAP sensor Disconnect the component while observing the Throttle Position sensor display on the Tech 2. If the reading changes drastically when this component is disconnected, replace the component that affected the reading.
DTC P0123 TP Sensor Circuit High Input

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. With the throttle closed, observe the Throttle Position Sensor display on the Tech 2. Is the Throttle Position Sensor above the specified value? 4.78 V Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0123. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0123 failed. Go to Step 4
1. Disconnect the Throttle Position sensor electrical connector. 2. Observe the Throttle Position Sensor display on the Tech 2. Is the Throttle Position Sensor near the specified value? (if no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.)
0V
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
Probe the sensor ground circuit at the Throttle Position sensor harness connector with a test light connected to B+. Is the test light ON? Go to Step 7 1. Ignition OFF disconnect the PCM. 2. Ignition ON engine OFF. 3. Check for a short to voltage on the TP sensor signal circuit. 4. If the TP sensor signal circuit is shorted, repair it as necessary. Was the TP sensor signal circuit shorted? Verify repair
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 12
6E1147
DTC P0123 TP Sensor Circuit High Input (Cont'd)

1. Ignition ON. 2. Monitor the Throttle Position Sensor Tech 2 display while disconnecting each of the components that share the 5 volt reference circuit (one at a time). 3. If the Throttle Position Sensor Tech 2 display changes, service the component(s) that caused the display to change when disconnected. Does disconnecting any of these components cause the Throttle Position Sensor display to change? Verify repair Go to Step 8
1. Ignition OFF disconnect the PCM. 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 3. Check for a short to B+ on the 5 volt reference circuit. 4. If the 5 volt reference circuit is shorted, repair it as necessary. Was the 5 volt reference circuit shorted? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Go to Step 11 Check for poor electrical connections at the Throttle Position sensor and replace terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check for an open sensor ground circuit to the Throttle Position sensor. 3. If a problem is found, repair it as necessary. Was the sensor ground circuit to the Throttle Position sensor open? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 12
10
11 12
Replace the Throttle Position sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL
060R100028
Circuit Description
To provide the best possible combination of driveability, fuel economy, and emission control, a Closed Loop air/fuel metering system is used. When the vehicle is first started, the powertrain control module (PCM) controls fuel delivery in Open Loop ignoring the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) signals and calculating air/fuel ratio based on inputs from the engine coolant temperature, throttle position sensors. If the PCM detects that the ECT sensor has not reached a sufficient reading to achieve Closed Loop within a specified amount of time, DTC P0125 will set. DTC P0125 is a type B code.
D Time for coolant to reach stabilized Closed Loop value is less than 120 seconds. Cold Case Test D D D D IAT is between 7C (20F) and 10C (50F) Accumulated airflow is greater than 2000 grams. Engine run time is less than 225 seconds. Time for coolant to reach stabilized Closed Loop value is less than 300 seconds. Other Case Test D D D D IAT is between 30C (22F) and 7C (20F). Accumulated airflow is greater than 3600 grams. Engine run time is less than 450 seconds. Time for coolant to reach stabilized Closed Loop value is less than 600 seconds.

D No MAP, IAT, ECT, TP, Misfire, Injector, or VSS DTC codes set. Test failed if 3 consective failures detected (500 msec/test). Warm Case Test D D D D Startup ECT value is less than 29C (84F). IAT is greater than 10C (50F). Accumulated airflow is greater than 1500 grams. Engine run time is greater than 90 seconds.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present.

D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code P0125 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code P0125 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.
6E1149
Diagnostic Aids
DTC P0125 set indicates a faulty ECT sensor. Comparing the engine coolant temperature displayed on a Tech 2 with actual coolant temperature measured with a thermometer may isolate this condition. If the displayed engine coolant temperature is not close to the actual coolant temperature, replace the ECT sensor. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged Harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; open circuits, shorts to ground, or shorts to voltage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0125 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set.
2. Comparing the engine coolant temperature displayed on a Tech 2 with actual coolant temperature measured with a thermometer may isolate this condition. If the displayed engine coolant temperature is not close to the actual coolant temperature, replace the ECT sensor. If the temperatures are closed, the fault is intermittent; refer to Diagnostic Aids. 7. Engine Coolant Temperature C 100 80 60 45 35 25 15 5 5 15 30 40 F 212 176 140 113 95 77 59 41 23 5 22 40 OHMS 177 332 667 1188 1802 2796 4450 7280 12300 21450 52700 100700
Temperature vs. Resistance Values (approximate)
Test Description
DTC P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control
Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to applicable ECT sensor DTC chart Are any ECT sensor DTCs set?
Go to Step 3
1. Allow the engine to cool completely. 2. Check the cooling system coolant level (refer to Cooling and Radiator). Is the coolant level OK? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 9 1. Start the engine. 2. With the engine idling, monitor ENG COOL TEMP display on the Tech 2. Does ENG COOL TEMP increase to above the specified value within 2 minutes? 21C (70F)
Refer to Diagnsotic Aids
Go to Step 5
Check for proper operation of the thermostat (refer to Cooling and Radiator). Is the thermostat operating correctly? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 9
DTC P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control (Cont'd)
Compare engine coolant temperature displayed on the Tech 2 to the actual coolant temperature measured with a thermometer. (Observe normal precautions when opening the cooling system.) Is the Tech 2 engine coolant temperature indication close to the measured temperature? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 7
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Using a DVM, measure the resistance of the ECT at the PCM connector. 4. Compare the DVM reading with the chart in Test Description. Is the chart value approximately equal to the thermometer reading? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 8
Check for the following conditions in the wiring between the ECT and the PCM: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Refer to Cooling and Radiator for cooling system diagnosis and repair condition as necessary. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 11
Verify Repair
10
Replace the faulty terminal(s) or repair faulty wiring as necessary. Is the action complete? Verify Repair Verify Repair Replace the ECT sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify Repair
11 12
6E1151
Diagnostic Trouble Code(DTC) P0128 Thermostat Insufficient temperrature for Stable Opreation
060R100028
Circuit Description
To provide the best possible combination of driveability, fuel economy, and emission control, a closed loop air/fuel metering system used. When the vehicle is first started, the power train control module (PCM) controls fuel delivery in open loop ignoring the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) signals and caculating air/fuel ratio based on inputs from the engine coolant temperature and throttle position sensors. This DTC will detect an open thermostat that causes the engine coolant temperature not reaching the warm-up temperature within the specified value. It is Type B code.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp(MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will store condition which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condtion is no longer present. D A history DTC P0128 will clear after 40 cosecutive trip cycle during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P0128 can be cleared using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed. Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Conditions for setting the DTC

Cold Case: D Engine starting temperature more than 7C (20F) and less than 10C (50F). D The accumulated airflow more than 10000 g. D The accumulated idle time less than 450 seconds. D Time for coolant temperature must be 74C after 800 seconds. Warm Case: D The accumulated idle time is less than 255 seconds. D The starting temperature is between 7C (19F) and 37C (99F).
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions:

D Poor connection at PCMInspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harnessInspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the Tech2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0128 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P0128 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0128 Thermostat Insufficient temperrature for stable opreation
Was the On-Board(OBD)System Checkperformed? Go to Step 2
1. Visually/physically check water pipe for splits, kinks,and proper conections and routing. 2. If a problem is found,repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 3 1. Remove and check the Thermostat for stable opreation. Refer to 6B section. 2. Replace the thermostat if necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 4 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records. 3. Opreate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0128. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0128 failed this ignition? 139C (282F) Go to Step 5
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Observe the Eng Cool Temp display on the Tech2. Is the Eng Cool Temp below the specified value? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the ECT signal circuit for a short to ground or a short to the sensor ground circuit. 3. If the ECT signal circuit is shorted, repair it as necessary. Was a problem found?
Verify repair
Go to Step 6
Verify repair
Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E1153
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
060R100030
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a bias voltage of about 450 mV between the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) signal and low circuits. When measured with a 10 megaW digital voltmeter, this may display as low as 350 mV. The oxygen sensor varies the voltage within a range of about 1000 mV when the exhaust is rich, down through about 10 mV when exhaust is lean. The PCM constantly monitors the HO2S signal during Closed Loop operation and compensates for a rich or lean condition by decreasing or increasing injector pulse width as necessary. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage remains excessively low for an extended period of time, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0131 will be set. DTC P0131 is a type A code.
D Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal voltage remains below 22 mV during normal Closed Loop operation.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D Open Loop fuel control will be in effect.


D D D D No related Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Vehicle is operating in Closed Loop. Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F) Closed Loop commanded air/fuel ratio is between 14.5 and 14.8. D Throttle angle is between 5.9% and 50%. All above conditions met for 0.3 seconds and the following condition is met for 190 test failures in 220 test samples (125 msec/test).
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Heated oxygen sensor wiring The sensor pigtail may be routed incorrectly and/or contacting the exhaust system. Also, check for shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. D Poor PCM to engine block grounds.

D Fuel pressure The system will go lean if pressure is too low. The PCM can compensate for some decrease. However, if fuel pressure is too low, a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0131 may be set. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Lean injector(s) Perform Injector Balance Test. D Vacuum leaks Check for disconnected or damaged vacuum hoses and for vacuum leaks at the intake manifold, throttle body, EGR system, and PCV system. D Exhaust leaks An exhaust leak may cause outside air to be pulled into the exhaust gas stream past the HO2S, causing the system to appear lean. Check for exhaust leaks that may cause a false lean condition to be indicated. D Fuel contamination Water, even in small amounts, can be delivered to the fuel injectors. The water can cause a lean exhaust to be indicated. Excessive alcohol in the fuel can also cause this condition. For the procedure to check for fuel contamination, Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. If none of the above conditions are present, replace the affected HO2S.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 3. Diagnostic Trouble Code P0131 failing during operation may indicate a condition described in the Diagnostic Aids above. If the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0131 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within the parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the Diagnostic Trouble Code criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage remain below the specified value? 300 mV Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON engine OFF review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data and note parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0131 until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0131 test runs. Note test result. Does Tech 2 indicate DTC P0131 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check the Bank 1 HO2S 1 high and low circuits for a short to ground or a short to the heater ground circuit. Are the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal circuits shorted to ground? Go to Step 5 Verify repair
Go to Step 6
Repair the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal circuit. Is the action complete?
6E1155
DTC P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) (Cont'd)

1. Turn the ignition OFF HO2S 1 and PCM disconnected. 2. Check for continuity between the high and low signal circuits. Was there continuity between the high and low circuits? PCM, leave the sensor Refer to Diagnostic Aids Go to Step 7 Verify repair Go to Step 8 Repair the short between the high and low circuits. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Reconnect the disconnected. 3. Ignition ON.
7 8
Does the Tech 2 indicate Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage near the specified value? 9 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
430450 mV
Go to Step 9
Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
060R100030
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a bias voltage of about 450 mV between the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) signal and low circuits. When measured with a 10 megaW digital voltmeter, this may display as low as 320 mV. The oxygen sensor varies the voltage within a range of about 1000 mV when the exhaust is rich, down through about 10 mV when exhaust is lean. The PCM constantly monitors the HO2S signal during Closed Loop operation and compensates for a rich or lean condition by decreasing or increasing injector pulse width as necessary. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage remains excessively high for an extended period of time, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0132 will be set. DTC P0132 is a type A code.
D Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal voltage remains above 952 mV during normal Closed Loop operation for a total of 76.5 seconds over a 90second period. OR D Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal voltage remains above 500 mV during deceleration fuel cutoff mode (DFCO) operation for 5 seconds.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D Open Loop fuel control will be in effect.

D No related Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). D Closed Loop commanded air/fuel ratio is between 14.5 and 14.8. D Throttle angle is between 5.9% and 50%. All above conditions met for 0.3 seconds or vehicle in Decelleration Fuel CutOff (DFCO) mode for 3 seconds, and one of the following two conditions met for 190 test failures in 220 test samples or 40 failures in 40 samples in DFCO mode (125 msec/test).

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code P0132 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code P0132 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Diagnostic Aids
Check the following items:

D Fuel pressure The system will go rich if pressure is too high. The PCM can compensate for some increase. However, if fuel pressure is too high, a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0132 may be set. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Perform Injector Balance Test Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Check the EVAP canister for fuel saturation If full of fuel, check canister control and hoses. Refer to Evaporative (EVAP) Emission Control System. D Check for a leak in the fuel pressure regulator diaphragm by checking the vacuum line to the regulator for the presence of fuel. D An intermittent TP sensor output will cause the system to go rich due to a false indication of the engine accelerating. D Silicon contamination of the HO2S can also cause a high HO2S voltage to be indicated. This condition is indicated by a powdery white deposit on the portion of the HO2S exposed to the exhaust stream. If contamination is noticed, replace the affected HO2S.
6E1157
D Operate the vehicle while monitoring the HO2S voltage with a Tech 2. If the HO2S voltage is limited within a range between 300 mV to 600 mV, check the HO2S high and low circuit wiring and associated terminal connections. If the wiring and connections are OK, replace the HO2S.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 3. Diagnostic Trouble Code P0132 failing during deceleration fuel cutoff mode operation may indicate a condition described in the Diagnostic Aids above. If the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0132 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage remain above the specified value?
952 mV (500 mV in deceleration fuel cutoff mode)
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0132 until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0132 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0132 failed this ignition?
Go to Step 4
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 1. Ignition ON. At HO2S 1 connector (PCM side) use a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to measure voltages at the high and low signal terminals. 514 V Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 6
Are the voltages in the specified range? 5 Repair short to voltage in signal circuit.
DTC P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM connector. 3. Check for damage to the PCM pins and terminals. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 1 and jumper the HO2S high and low circuits (PCM side) to ground. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Is Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage below the specified value? 10 mV Go to Step 8 Verify repair Go to Step 9 Replace Bank 1 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
8 9
6E1159
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
060R100030
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) continuously monitors the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) activity for 90 seconds after Closed Loop has been enabled. During the monitoring period the PCM counts the number of times that a richtolean and leantorich response is indicated and adds the amount of time it took to complete all transitions. With this information, an average time for each transition can be determined. If the average response time is too slow, a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0133 will be set. A DTC P0133 is a type B code. A leantorich transition is indicated when the HO2S voltage changes from less than 300 mV to greater than 600 mV. A richtolean transition is indicated when the HO2S voltage changes from more than 600 mV to less than 300 mV. An HO2S that responds too slowly is likely to be faulty and should be replaced.
All above conditions are met for 1 second and the following condition is met for 90 seconds after closed loop and operation enabled once per key cycle. D 90 seconds after Closed Loop has been enabled, Bank 1 HO2S 1 average transition time between 300 mV and 600 mV is too slow. The leantorich average transition response time was longer than 100 milliseconds or richtolean average transition response time was longer than 105 milliseconds.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator Lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D Open Loop fuel control will be in effect.

D No related Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D Engine coolant temperature is greater than 60C (140F). D Engine is operating in Closed Loop. D Engine speed is between 1500 RPM and 3500 RPM. D Canister purge solenoid duty cycle is greater than 2%. D Calculated air flow is between 17 and 32 g/second.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Bank 1 HO2S 1 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0133 cannot be duplicated, reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often
the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. Verifies that the fault is currently present. 3. HO2S transition time, ratio mean volts and switching Diagnostic Trouble Codes set for multiple sensors indicate probable contamination. Before replacing the sensors, isolate and correct the source of the contamination to avoid damaging the replacement sensors.
DTC P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 NOTE: If any DTCs are set (except P1133 and/or P1134), refer to those DTCs before proceeding with this diagnostic chart. 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Idle the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the Diagnostic Trouble Code included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0133 until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0133 test runs. 5. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0133 failed this ignition? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 8
Refer to Diagnostic Aids Go to Step 4
3 4
Did the Tech 2 also indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P1133 and/or P1134 failed this ignition? 1. Perform Exhaust System Leak Test (refer to Exhaust System). After Exhaust System Leak Test has been performed, return to this diagnostic 2. If an exhaust leak is found, repair as necessary. Was an exhaust leak isolated?
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 5
Visually/physically inspect the following items: D Ensure that the Bank 1 HO2S 1 is securely installed. D Check for corrosion on terminals. D Check terminal tension (at Bank 1 HO2S 1 and at the PCM). D Check for damaged wiring. Was a problem found in any of the above areas? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 6
6E1161
DTC P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response (Bank 1 Sensor 1) (Cont'd)

1. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 1. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) at the PCM side of the HO2S 1 connector, measure the voltage between the high signal circuit and ground. Also measure the voltage between the low signal circuit and ground. Are both voltages in the specified range? 34 V Go to Step 7 1. With Bank 1 HO2S 1 disconnected, jumper the high and low (PCM side) signal circuits to ground. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Tech 2 indicate less than 10 mV and immediately return to about 450 mV when the jumper is removed? Go to Step 12
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 13
Replace the affected heated oxygen sensors. NOTE: Before replacing sensors, the cause of the contamination must be determined and corrected. D D D Fuel contamination. Use of improper RTV sealant. Engine oil/coolant consumption. Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 11
Is the action complete? 9 10 11 12 13 Repair condition as necessary. Is the action complete? Check for faulty PCM connections or terminal damage. Is the action complete? Repair open, short or grounded signal circuit. Is the action complete? Replace Bank 1 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
060R100030
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a bias voltage of about 450 mV between the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) high and low circuits. When measured with a 10 MW digital voltmeter, this may display as low as 320 mV. The oxygen sensor varies the voltage within a range of about 1000 mV when the exhaust is rich, down through about 10 mV when exhaust is lean. The PCM constantly monitors the HO2S signal during Closed Loop operation and compensates for a rich or lean condition by decreasing or increasing injector pulse width as necessary. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage remains at or near the 450 mV bias for an extended period of time, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0134 will be set, indicating an open sensor signal or sensor low circuit. DTC P0134 is a type B code.
D Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal voltage remains between 400 mV and 500 mV.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the second time the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D Open Loop fuel control will be in effect.


D No related Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D Engine run time is longer than 120 seconds. D Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is above 60C (140F). D Oxygen sensor heater has been determined to be functioning properly, and the oxygen sensor has warmed to operating temperature. All the above conditions are met and the following condition is met for 612 test failures in 720 test samples (125 msec/test).
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminaltowire connection, and damaged harness. D Faulty HO2S heater or heater circuit With the ignition ON engine OFF after a cooldown period, the HO2S 1

voltage displayed on the Tech 2 is normally 455460 mV. A reading over 1000 mV indicates a signal line shorted to voltage. A reading under 5 mV indicates a signal line shorted to ground or signal lines shorted together. Disconnect the HO2S and connect a test light between the HO2S ignition feed and heater ground circuits. If the test light does not light for 2 seconds when the ignition is turned on, repair the open ignition feed or sensor ground circuit as necessary. If the test light lights and the HO2S signal and low circuits are OK, replace the HO2S.
6E1163
D Intermittent test With the ignition ON monitor the HO2S signal voltage while moving the wiring harness and related connectors. If the fault is induced, the HO2S signal voltage will change. This may help isolate the location of the malfunction. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the engine above 1200 RPM for three minutes. Does the Tech 2 indicate Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage varying outside the specified values? 400500 mV Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data and note parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0134 until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0134 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0134 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4 Verify repair
4 5
Check for a damaged harness. Was a problem found? Check for poor Bank 1 HO2S 1 high and low circuit terminal connections at the Bank 1 HO2S 1 harness connector and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Check for poor Bank 1 HO2S 1 high and low circuit terminal connections at the PCM and replace terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Ignition OFF. 2. With the PCM disconnected, check continuity of the Bank 1 HO2S 1 high circuit. 3. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 high circuit measures over 0.5 W, repair open or poor connection as necessary. Was a Bank 1 HO2S 1 high circuit problem found and corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 8
DTC P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. With the PCM disconnected, check continuity of the Bank 1 HO2S 1 low circuit. 3. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 low circuit measures over 5 W, repair open or poor connection as necessary. Was a Bank 1 HO2S 1 low circuit problem found and corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 9
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 1 and jumper the HO2S high and low circuits (PCM side) to ground. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Is Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage approximately equal to the specified value? 10 mV Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 11
10 11
Replace Bank 1 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E1165
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0135 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
060R100030
Circuit Description
Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for Closed Loop fuel control operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by catalyst monitor sensors Bank 1 HO2S 2 and Bank 2 HO2S 2 to maintain a sufficiently high temperature which allows accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further from the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) will run the heater test only after a cold start (determined by engine coolant and intake air temperature at the time of startup) and only once during an ignition cycle. When the engine is started the PCM will monitor the HO2S voltage. When the HO2S voltage indicates a sufficiently active sensor, the PCM looks at how much time has elapsed since startup. If the PCM determines that too much time was required for the Bank 1 HO2S 1 to become active, a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0135 will set. DTC P0135 is a type B code.
D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) is less than 32C (90F) at startup. D IAT and ECT are within 6.75C (44F) of each other at startup. D Ignition voltage is between 11 and 16.6 V. D Average calculated air flow is less than 25 g/second during sample period. D Throttle angle is less than 40%. D Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage does not change more than 148 mV from the bias voltage (between 400 mV and 500 mV) for a longer amount of time than it should. The maximum amount of time to come up to operating range is 240 seconds. This warmup time depends on the engine coolant temperature at startup and intake air temperature at startup. From cold start to a maximum time of 176 seconds determined by table value. It is once per key cycle.


D No related Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D Intake air temperature (IAT) is less than 32C (90F) at startup.

the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. The HO2S should be allowed to cool before performing this test. If the HO2S heater is functioning, the signal voltage will gradually increase or decrease as the sensor element warms. If the heater is not functioning, the HO2S signal will remain near the 450 mV bias voltage. 4. Ensures that the ignition feed circuit to the HO2S is not open or shorted. The test light should be connected to a good chassis ground, in case the HO2S low or HO2s heater ground circuit is faulty. 5. Checks the HO2S heater ground circuit. 6. Checks for an open or shorted HO2S heater element. 10.An open HO2S signal or low circuit can cause the HO2S heater to appear faulty. Check these circuits before replacing the sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often
DTC P0135 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 NOTE: If the engine has just been operating, allow engine to cool for about one half hour before proceeding. 1. Ignition OFF, engine OFF. 2. Install a Tech 2. 3. Ignition ON engine OFF monitor the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the HO2S voltage go from bias voltage to above and below the specified values?
Above 650 mV or below 250 mV
3 4
Inspect the fuse for the Bank 1 HO2S 1 ignition feed. Is the fuse open? 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Raise the vehicle. Disconnect the Bank 1 HO2S 1 electrical connector. Using a test light connected to a good ground (do not use Bank 1 HO2S 1 heater ground or Bank 1 HO2S 1 low), probe the ignition feed circuit at the Bank 1 HO2S 1 electrical connector (PCM harness side). Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7
Does the test light illuminate? 5 Connect the test light between the Bank 1 HO2S 1 ignition feed and the Bank 1 HO2S 1 heater ground. Does the test light illuminate?
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
6E1167
DTC P0135 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 1) (Cont'd)

1. Allow the HO2S to cool for at least 10 minutes. 2. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), measure the resistance between the Bank 1 HO2S 1 ignition feed and the Bank 1 HO2S 1 heater ground at the Bank 1 HO2S 1 pigtail. Is the HO2S heater resistance within the specified values? 36 ohms Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
Repair the open Bank 1 HO2S 1 ignition feed circuit to Bank 1 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Verify repair Repair the open Bank 1 HO2S 1 heater ground circuit to Bank 1 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Check for a poor connection at the Bank 1 HO2S 1 harness terminals. 2. If a poor connection is found, replace terminals. Was a poor connection found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 Check for a poor Bank 1 HO2S 1 high or low circuit terminal connection at the Bank 1 HO2S 1 harness connector and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 11 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the continuity of the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal circuit and the Bank 1 HO2S 1 low circuit. 3. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 high circuit or HO2S low circuit measures over 5 W, repair open or poor connection as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 12 Check for a poor Bank 1 HO2S 1 low circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 13 Check for a poor Bank 1 HO2S 1 high circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 14 Replace the Bank 1 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Locate and repair the short to ground in Bank 1 HO2S 1 ignition feed circuit and replace the fault fuse. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10
11
12
13
14 15
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
060R100031
Circuit Description
To control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a threeway catalytic converter is used. The catalyst within the converter promotes a chemical reaction which oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas, converting them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx, converting it to nitrogen. The powertrain control module (PCM) has the ability to monitor this process using the Bank 1 HO2S 1 and the Bank 1 HO2S 2 heated oxygen sensors. The Bank 1 HO2S 1 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the threeway catalytic converter. The Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst; this in turn indicates the catalysts ability to convert exhaust gases efficiently. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal will be far more active than that produced by the Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor. If the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains excessively low for an extended period of time, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0137 will be set. DTC P0137 is a type A code.
D Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). D Closed Loop commanded air/fuel ratio is between 14.5 and 14.8. D Throttle angle is between 5.9% and 50%. All above conditions met for 0.3 seconds or for 3.0 seconds, if in Decelleration Fuel CutOff (DFCO) mode, and the following two conditions are met: D Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains below 22 mV during normal Closed Loop operation for a total of 106.25 seconds over a 125second period of time. OR D Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains below 426 mV during power enrichment (P.E.) mode fuel control operation for 5 seconds. The above conditions are met for 190 test failures in 220 test samples or 40 failures in 40 samples in P.E. mode (125 msec/test).

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D No related Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D Engine is operating in Closed Loop.
6E1169

D Exhaust leaks An exhaust leak may cause outside air to be pulled into the exhaust gas stream past the HO2S, causing the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0137 to set. Check for exhaust leaks near the Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor. D Fuel contamination Water, even in small amounts, can be delivered to the fuel injectors. The water can cause a lean exhaust to be indicated. Excessive alcohol in the fuel can also cause this condition. For procedure to check for fuel contamination, refer to Fuel System Diagnosis.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Heated oxygen sensor wiring The sensor pigtail may be mispositioned and/or contacting the exhaust system. D Poor PCM to engine grounds. D Fuel pressure A condition which causes a lean exhaust can cause Diagnostic Trouble Code P0137 to set. The system will go lean if pressure is too low. The PCM can compensate for some decrease. However, if fuel pressure is too low, a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0137 may be set. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Lean injector(s) Perform Injector Balance Test. D Vacuum leaks Check for disconnected or damaged vacuum hoses and for vacuum leaks at the intake manifold, throttle body, EGR system, and PCV system.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 3. Diagnostic Trouble Code P0137 being set in power enrichment mode conditions may indicate a condition described in the Diagnostic Aids above. If the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0137 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within the parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the Diagnostic Trouble Code criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage. Does the Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage remain below the specified value? 26 mV Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data and note parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0137 until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0137 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0137 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
1. Turn ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check the Bank 1 HO2S 2 high and low signal circuits for a short to ground or a short to the heater ground circuit. Were Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuits shorted? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
DTC P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2) (Cont'd)

5 6
Repair the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Leave the PCM and HO2S 2 disconnected. 3. Check for continuity between the high and low signal circuits. Was there continuity between the high and low circuits? Go to Step 7 Verify repair Go to Step 8 Repair the short between the high and low circuits. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Reconnect the PCM, leave HO2S 2 disconnected. 3. Ignition ON. Does the Tech 2 indicate Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage near the specified value? 430450 mV Verify repair
7 8
Go to Step 9
6E1171
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
060R100031
Circuit Description
To control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a threeway catalytic converter is used. The catalyst within the converter promotes a chemical reaction which oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas, converting them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx, converting it to nitrogen. The powertrain control module (PCM) has the ability to monitor this process using the Bank 1 HO2S 1 and the Bank 1 HO2S 2 heated oxygen sensors. The Bank 1 HO2S 1 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the threeway catalytic converter. The Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst; this in turn indicates the catalysts ability to convert exhaust gases efficiently. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal will be far more active than that produced by the Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor. If the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains excessively high for an extended period of time, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0138 will be set. DTC P0138 is a type A code.
D Closed Loop commanded air/fuel ratio is between 14.5 and 14.8. D Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). D Throttle angle is between 5.9% and 50%. All above conditions met for 3.0 seconds or in Deceleration Fuel Cutoff DFCO mode, and one of the following two conditions are met: D Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains above 952 mV during normal Closed Loop operation. OR D Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains above 474 mV during deceleration fuel cutoff mode operation. The above conditions are met for 190 test failures in 220 test samples or 40 fails in 40 samples in DFCO mode (125 msec/test).

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D No related Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D Engine is operating in Closed Loop.

D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code P0138 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code P0138 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function. stream. If contamination is evident, replace the affected HO2S. D Open HO2S Signal, Low Circuit or Faulty HO2S A poor connection or open in the HO2S signal or low circuit can cause the DTC to set during deceleration fuel mode. An HO2S which is faulty and not allowing a full voltage swing between the rich and lean thresholds can also cause this condition. Operate the vehicle while monitoring the HO2S voltage with a Tech 2. If the HO2S voltage is limited within a range between 300 mV to 600 mV, check the HO2S signal and low circuit wiring and associated terminal connections. If the wiring and connections are OK, replace the HO2S.
Diagnostic Aids
Check the following items: D Fuel pressure An excessively rich fuel mixture can cause a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0138 to be set. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Rich injector(s) Perform Injector Balance Test. D Leaking injector Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Evaporative emissions (EVAP) canister purge Check for fuel saturation. If full of fuel, check the canister control and hoses. Refer to Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System. D Check for a leaking fuel pressure regulator diaphragm by checking the vacuum line to the regulator for the presence of fuel. D TP sensor An intermittent TP sensor output will cause the system to go rich, due to a false indication of the engine accelerating. D Shorted Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) If the HO2S is internally shorted the HO2S voltage displayed on the Tech 2 will be over 1 volt. Silicon contamination of the HO2S can also cause a high HO2S voltage. This condition is indicated by a powdery white deposit on the portion of the HO2S exposed to the exhaust
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 3.Diagnostic Trouble Code P0138 being set during deceleration fuel mode operation may indicate a condition described in the Diagnostic Aids above. If the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0138 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the Diagnostic Trouble Code included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage remain above the specified value? 952 mV Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0138 until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0138 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0138 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
6E1173
DTC P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2) (Cont'd)

1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 2. Ignition ON. At HO2S 2 connector (PCM side) use a DVM to measure voltages at the high and low signal terminals. 514 V Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 6
Are the voltages in the specified range? 5 6 Repair short to voltage in signal circuit. 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM connector. 3. Check for damage to the PCM pins and terminals. Was a problem found? 7 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 2 and jumper the HO2S high and low circuits (PCM side) to ground. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Is Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage below the specified value? 8 9 Replace Bank 1 HO2S 2. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
10 mV
Go to Step 9
Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
060R100031
Circuit Description
To control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a threeway catalytic converter is used. The catalyst within the converter promotes a chemical reaction which oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas, converting them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx, converting it to nitrogen. The powertrain control module (PCM) has the ability to monitor this process using the Bank 1 HO2S 1 and the Bank 1 HO2S 2 heated oxygen sensors. The Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the threeway catalytic converter. The Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst; this in turn indicates the catalysts ability to convert exhaust gases efficiently. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal will be far more active than that produced by the Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor. If the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains between 400 mV and 500 mV for an extended period of time, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0140 will be set. DTC P0140 is a type A code.
D Oxygen sensor heater is functioning properly, and the oxygen sensor has reached operating temperature. D Engine is operating in Closed Loop. D Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains between 426 mV and 474 mV. The above conditions are met for 850 test failures in 1000 test samples (125 msec/test).

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D No related Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D Engine run time is longer than 120 seconds.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for backedout terminals,

improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminaltowire connection, shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. D Faulty HO2S heater or heater circuit With the ignition ON engine OFF the HO2S voltage displayed on a Tech 2 should gradually drop to below 250 mV. If not, disconnect the HO2S and connect a test light between the HO2S ignition feed and heater ground circuits. If the test light does not light, repair the open ignition feed or sensor ground circuit as necessary. If the test light lights and the HO2S signal and low circuits are OK, replace the HO2S. D Intermittent test With the ignition ON monitor the HO2S signal voltage while moving the wiring harness and related connectors. If the fault is induced, the
6E1175
HO2S signal voltage will change. This may help isolate the location of the malfunction.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 3.If the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0140 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 2)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the engine above 1200 RPM for two minutes. Does the Tech 2 indicate Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage vary outside the specified value? 425475 mV Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1. Ignition ON engine OFF review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data and note parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0140 until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0140 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0140 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
Check for a poor Bank 1 HO2S 2 high or low signal circuit terminal connection at the Bank 1 HO2S 2 harness connector and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check for poor Bank 1 HO2S 2 high or low signal circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did either terminal require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Check continuity of the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuits. If either Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuit measures over 5 W, repair open or poor connection as necessary. Was a Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuit problem found and corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 7
DTC P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 2) (Cont'd)

1. Reconnect the PCM harness. 2. Ignition ON. 3. With the Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor harness disconnected, use a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to measure the voltage between the HO2S heater ground wire and each signal circuit wire. Does each signal circuit measure in the specified range? 34 V Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8
Check for a short to ground or voltage in both signal circuits. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11 1. Jumper the high and low signal wires to the heater ground wire. 2. Ignition ON. Using a Tech 2, is the Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage in the specified range? 010 mV Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 11
10 11
Replace Bank 1 HO2S 2. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E1177
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
060R100031
Circuit Description
Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for Closed Loop fuel control operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by catalyst monitor sensors Bank 1 HO2S 2 and Bank 2 HO2S 2 to maintain a sufficiently high temperature which allows accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further from the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) will run the heater test only after a cold start (determined by engine coolant and intake air temperature at the time of startup) and only once during an ignition cycle. When the engine is started the PCM will monitor the HO2S voltage. When the Bank HO2S voltage indicates a sufficiently active sensor, the PCM looks at how much time has elapsed since startup. If the PCM determines that too much time was required for the Bank 1 HO2S 2 to become active, a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0141 will set. DTC P0141 is a type B code.
D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) is less than 32C (90F) at startup. D IAT and ECT are within 6.75C (44F) of each other at startup. D Ignition voltage is between 11 volts and 16.6 volts. D Throttle angle is less than 40%. D Average calculated airflow is less than 26 g/second during the sample period. D Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage does not change more than 148 mV from the bias voltage (between 400 mV500 mV) for a longer amount of time than it should. The maximum amount of time to come up to operating range is 375 seconds. This warmup time depends on the engine coolant temperature at startup and intake air temperature at startup.


D No related Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D Intake air temperature (IAT) is less than 32C (90F) at startup.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle duringwhich the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present.

Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2.The HO2S should be allowed to cool before performing this test. If the HO2S heater is functioning, the signal voltage will gradually increase or decrease as the sensor element warms. If the heater is not functioning, the HO2S signal will remain near the 450 mV bias voltage. 4.This ensures that the ignition feed circuit to the HO2S is not open or shorted. The test light should be connected to a good chassis ground, in case the HO2S low or HO2S heater ground circuit is faulty. 5.This checks the HO2S heater ground circuit. 6.This checks for an open or shorted HO2S heater element. 11. An open HO2S signal or low circuit can cause the HO2S heater to appear faulty. Check these circuits before replacing the sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 2)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 NOTE: If the engine has just been operating, allow the engine to cool for about one half hour before proceeding. 1. Ignition OFF, engine OFF. 2. Install the Tech 2. 3. Ignition ON, engine OFF monitor the Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage. Does the HO2S voltage go from bias voltage to above or below the specified values?
3 4
Inspect the fuse for Bank 1 HO2S 2 ignition feed. Is the fuse open? 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Raise the vehicle. Disconnect the Bank 1 HO2S 2 electrical connector. Using a test light connected to a good ground (do not use Bank 1 HO2S 2 heater ground or Bank 1 HO2S 2 low), probe the ignition feed circuit at the Bank 1 HO2S 2 electrical connector (PCM harness side).
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
6E1179
DTC P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) (Cont'd)

1. Allow the HO2S to cool for at least 10 minutes. 2. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), measure the resistance between the Bank 1 HO2S 2 ignition feed and the Bank 1 HO2S 2 heater ground at the Bank 1 HO2S 2 pigtail. Is the HO2S resistance within the specified values? 36 W Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Repair the open Bank 1 HO2S 2 ignition feed circuit to Bank 1 HO2S 2. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Repair the open Bank 1 HO2S 2 heater ground circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Check for a poor connection at the Bank 1 HO2S 2 harness terminals. 2. If a poor connection is found, replace the terminals. Was a poor connection found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the continuity of the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuit and the Bank 1 HO2S 2 low circuit. 3. If the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuit or the HO2S low circuit measures over 5 W, repair the open or poor connection as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11 Check for a poor Bank 1 HO2S 2 high or low circuit terminal connection at the Bank 1 HO2S 2 harness connector and replace the terminal(s) if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 12 Check for a poor Bank 1 HO2S 2 low circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 13 Check for a poor Bank 1 HO2S 2 high circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 14 Replace Bank 1 HO2S 2. Is the action complete? Locate and repair the short to ground in Bank 1 HO2S 2 ignition feed circuit and replace the faulty fuse. Is the action complete? Verify repair
8 9
10
11
12
13
14 15
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
060R100032
Circuit Description
To provide the best possible combination of driveability, fuel economy, and emission control, a Closed Loop air/fuel metering system is used. While in Closed Loop, the powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal and adjusts fuel delivery based upon the HO2S signal voltage. A change made to fuel delivery will be indicated by the long and short term fuel trim values which can be monitored with a Tech 2. Ideal fuel trim values are around 0%; if the HO2S signal indicates a lean condition the PCM will add fuel, resulting in fuel trim values above 0%. If a rich condition is detected, the fuel trim values will be below 0%, indicating that the PCM is reducing the amount of fuel delivered. If an excessively lean condition is detected on Bank 1, the PCM will set Diagnostic Trouble Code P0171. DTC P0171 is a type B code. The PCMs maximum authority to control long term fuel trim allows a range between 14% and +20%. The PCM monitors fuel trim under various engine speed/load fuel trim cells before determining the status of the fuel trim diagnostic. D D D D D D D D
Codes, IAT Diagnostic Trouble Codes, canister purge Diagnostic Trouble Codes, EVAP Diagnostic Trouble Codes, injector circuit Diagnostic Trouble Codes, or misfire Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Engine coolant temperature is between 65C (149F) and 104C (219F). Intake air temperature is between 40C (40F) and 120C (248F). Manifold absolute pressure is between 23.75 kPa and 99 kPa. Engine speed is between 400 and 6000 RPM. Barometric pressure is greater than 72.3 kPa. System voltage is greater than 9.5v. Engine is operating in Closed Loop. The average of the short term fuel trim samples is greater than 1.012 and the average of adaptive index multiplier samples is greater than 1.266.


D No Tech 2 test is being run. D None of the following: EGR Diagnostic Trouble Codes, HO2S Diagnostic Trouble Codes, (response, transition, open, low volts, no activity), TP sensor Diagnostic Trouble Codes, MAP Diagnostic Trouble
6E1181

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code P0171 will clear after 40 consecutivewarmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code P0171 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Bank 1 HO2S 1 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the engine harness. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2.Diagnostic Trouble Codes other than P0171 may indicate a condition present which may cause a lean condition. If this is the case, repairing the condition which caused the other Diagnostic Trouble Code will most likely correct the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0171. 4.If the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0171 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, the lean condition is intermittent. Refer to Diagnostic Aids or Symptoms for additional information on diagnosing intermittent problems.
DTC P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to the applicable DTC charts and repair the other DTCs before proceeding with this chart. Are any DTCs set other than P0171?
3 1. Start the engine and operate the vehicle in Closed Loop. 2. Observe the BANK 1 L.T. FUEL TRIM and display on the Tech 2. Are the displayed values greater than the specified values? 4 1. Review and record the Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Clear the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0171 and operate the vehicle to duplicate the Failure Records conditions. 3. Monitor the Tech 2 Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0171 while operating the vehicle to duplicate the Failure Records conditions. 4. Continue operating the vehicle until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0171 test runs and note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0171 failed this ignition? 5 Visually and physically inspect the vacuum hoses for disconnects, splits, kinks, improper routing and improper connections and repair any problem found. Did your inspection reveal a problem requiring repair? 6 Visually and physically inspect the crankcase ventilation valve for proper installation and repair any problem found (refer to Crankcase Ventilation System). Did your inspection reveal a problem requiring repair? 7 8 Start the engine and note the idle quality. Is a high or unsteady idle being experienced? With the engine idling, observe the IDLE AIR CONTROL display on the Tech 2. Is the displayed value above the specified value? 9 1. Visually and physically inspect the throttle body, intake manifold, EGR valve and the EGR feed pipe for vacuum leaks. 2. Repair any vacuum leaks as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a vacuum leak? Above 5 counts L.T. Fuel Trim: 20%
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5
The lean condition is not present. If a driveability symptom still exists, refer to Symptoms section.
Verify repair
Go to Step 6
Verify repair Go to Step 8 Go to Step 10
Go to Step 9
Verify repair
Go to Step 10
6E1183
DTC P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) (Cont'd)

10
Perform the Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Check and correct any IAC problem as necessary. Did this test isolate a problem requiring repair? Verify repair Check the fuel for excessive water, alcohol, or other contaminants (see Diagnosis in Engine Fuel for the procedure) and correct the contaminated fuel condition if present (see Engine Fuel). Was the fuel contaminated? Verify repair 1. Visually and physically inspect the PCM injector grounds, power grounds and sensor grounds to ensure that they are clean, tight, and in their proper locations. 2. If a faulty ground condition is present, correct it as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a condition requiring repair? Verify repair Perform the procedure in Fuel System Pressure Test and repair fuel system problem if necessary. Did the test isolate a condition requiring repair? Verify repair Perform the Evaporative Emissions Control (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve Check and repair EVAP system problem if necessary. Did the test isolate a problem? Verify repair 1. Visually and physically inspect the intake manifold, injector Orings, EGR adapter, EGR valve and the EGR feed pipes for vacuum leaks. 2. Repair any problem that is found. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Visually and physically inspect the Bank 1 exhaust manifold for leaks and loose or missing hardware and correct any problem found. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Perform the Injector Balance Test, and correct any problem found (refer to Fuel Metering System). Did the test isolate a problem? Verify repair 1. Visually and physically inspect the Bank 1 HO2S 1 to ensure that it is installed securely and that the Bank 1 HO2S 1 pigtail and wiring harness are not contacting the exhaust or otherwise damaged. 2. If a problem is found, correct it as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair
Go to Step 11
11
Go to Step 12
12
13
14
Go to Step 15
15
Go to Step 16
16
17
18
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)
060R100032
Circuit Description
To provide the best possible combination of driveability, fuel economy, and emission control, a Closed Loop air/fuel metering system is used. While in Closed Loop, the powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the Bank 1 heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) 1 and adjusts fuel delivery based upon the HO2S signal voltages. A change made to fuel delivery will be indicated by the long and short term fuel trim values which can be monitored with a Tech 2. Ideal fuel trim values are around 0%; if the HO2S signals are indicating a lean condition the PCM will add fuel, resulting in fuel trim values above 0%. If a rich condition is detected, the fuel trim values will be below 0%, indicating that the PCM is reducing the amount of fuel delivered. If an excessively rich condition is detected on Bank 1, the PCM will set Diagnostic Trouble Code P0172. DTC P0172 is a type B code. The PCMs maximum authority to control long term fuel trim allows a range between 14% and +20%. The PCMs maximum authority to control short term fuel trim allows a range between 11% and +20%. The PCM monitors fuel trim under various engine speed/load fuel trim cells before determining the status of the fuel trim diagnostic.

D No Tech 2 test is being run. D Engine run time more than 500 sec. D None of the following was set: EGR Diagnostic Trouble Codes, HO2S Diagnostic Trouble Codes, (response, transition, open, low volts, no activity), TPS Diagnostic Trouble Codes, MAP Diagnostic Trouble Codes, IAT Diagnostic Trouble Codes, canister purge Diagnostic Trouble Codes, EVAP Diagnostic Trouble Codes, injector circuit Diagnostic Trouble Codes, CKP Diagnostic Trouble Code, ECT Diagnostic Trouble Code, VSS Diagnostic Trouble Code, Idle Diagnostic Trouble Code or misfire Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D Engine coolant temperature is between 65C (149F) and 104C (219F). D Intake air temperature is between 40C (40F) and 120C(248F). D Manifold absolute pressure is between 23.75 kPa and 99 kPa. D System voltage is greater than 9.5 volts. D Engine speed is between 400 and 6000 RPM. D Barometric pressure is greater than 72.3 kPa. D Engine is operating in Closed Loop. D The average of the short term full trim samples is less than 0.988 and the average of the adaptive index multiplier samples is less 0.914. Rich counter is more than 10 during 2.5 sec.
6E1185


Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Bank 1 HO2S 1 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the engine harness. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. Diagnostic Trouble Codes other than P0172 may indicate a condition present which may cause a lean condition. If this is the case, repairing the condition which caused the other DTC will most likely correct the DTC P0172. 4. If the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0172 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, the rich condition is intermittent. Refer to Diagnostic Aids or Symptoms for additional information on diagnosing intermittent problems.
DTC P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to the applicable DTC charts and repair the other DTCs before proceeding with this chart. Are any Diagnostic Trouble Codes set other than P0172?
3 1. Start the engine and operate the vehicle in Closed Loop. 2. Observe BANK 1 L.T. FUEL TRIM display on the Tech 2. Are the displayed values more negative than the specified values? 4 1. Review and record the Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Clear the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0172 and operate the vehicle to duplicate the Failure Records conditions. 3. Monitor the Tech 2 Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0172 while operating the vehicle to duplicate the Failure Records conditions. 4. Continue operating the vehicle until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0172 test runs and note test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0172 failed this ignition? 5 Visually and physically inspect the air filter element and replace it if necessary. Did the air filter require replacement? 6 Visually and physically inspect the air intake duct for collapse or restriction and repair if necessary. Did your inspection reveal a condition requiring repair? 7 8 Start the engine and note the idle quality. Is a low or unsteady idle being experienced? With the engine idling, observe the IDLE AIR CONTROL display on the Tech 2. Is the IDLE AIR CONTROL value below the specified value? 9 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Physically inspect the throttle body bore, throttle plate, and IAC passages for coking and foreign objects. 3. If a problem was found, repair as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a condition requiring repair? Below 100 counts L.T. Fuel Trim: 14%
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 4
The rich condition is not present. If a driveability symptom still exists, refer to Symptoms. Go to Step 5
Verify repair
Go to Step 6
Verify repair Go to Step 8
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 9
Verify repair
Go to Step 10
6E1187
DTC P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) (Cont'd)

10
1. Perform the Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Check. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Did the test isolate a problem requiring repair? Verify repair 1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the fuel pressure regulator and inspect the hose for the presence of fuel. 2. If fuel is present in the vacuum hose, replace the fuel pressure regulator (refer to Fuel Metering System). Did the fuel pressure regulator require replacement? Verify repair Ignition ON engine OFF monitor the TP Angle display on the Tech 2 while slowly depressing the accelerator pedal. Does the TP Angle display increase steadily and evenly from minimum value at closed throttle to maximum value at wideopen throttle? Minimum 0% Maximum 100% Go to Step 13
Go to Step 11
11
Go to Step 12
12
Go to Step 17
13
1. Perform the Fuel System Pressure Test. 2. If the test isolates a problem, repair as necessary (refer to Engine Fuel or Fuel Metering System). Did the test isolate a problem requiring repair? Verify repair 1. Perform the Evaporative Emissions Control (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve Check. 2. If the test isolates a problem, repair as necessary. Did the test isolate a problem requiring repair? Verify repair 1. Perform the Injector Balance Test. 2. If the test isolates a problem, repair as necessary (refer to Fuel Metering System). Did the test isolate a problem requiring repair? Verify repair 1. Remove and visually/physically inspect the Bank 1 HO2S 1 for silicon contamination. This will be indicated by a powdery white deposit on the portion of the HO2S that is exposed to the exhaust stream. 2. If contamination is evident on the Bank 1 HO2S 1, replace the contaminated sensors. Did the sensor require replacement? Verify repair 1. Check the TP sensor mounting screws and tighten or replace them as necessary if they are loose or missing. 2. If the screws are OK, replace the TP sensor. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Go to Step 14
14
Go to Step 15
15
Go to Step 16
16
17
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0201 INJECTOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CYLINDER 1
060R100033
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) has four individual injector driver circuits. Each controls an injector. When a driver circuit is grounded by the PCM, the injector is activated. The PCM monitors the current in each driver circuit. The PCM measures a voltage drop through a fixed resistor and controls it. The voltage on each driver is monitored to detect a fault. If the voltage is not what the PCM expects to monitor on the circuit, a Diagnostic Trouble Code is set. This Diagnostic Trouble Code is also set if an injector driver is shorted to voltage. DTC P0201 is a type A code.

D The PCM will turn OFF the MIL on the third consecutive trip cycle in which the diagnostic has been run and the fault is no longer present. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code P0201 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles occur without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code P0201 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.

D D D D The battery voltage is more than 9 volts. Engine is running. Fuel pump is ON. The injector voltage does not equal the ignition voltage when the injector is commanded OFF or the injector voltage does not equal 0 volts when the injector is commanded ON. The above conditions are met for 5 seconds.
Diagnostic Aids
An injector driver circuit that is open or shorted to voltage will cause a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0201 to set. It will also cause a misfire due to an inoperative injector. A misfire Diagnostic Trouble Code will also be set indicating which cylinder is inoperative. Long term and short term fuel trims that are excessively high or low are a good indication that an injector is faulty. Use Fuel Injector Coil Test Procedure to check for faulty injectors.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D Open Loop fuel control will be in effect.
Test Description

3.This step determines if Diagnostic Trouble Code P0201 is the result of a hard failure or an intermittent condition. 5. This step tests the harness wiring and PCM control of the injectors using a test light. The fuel injector test connector is a gray 5 pin connector at the right rear of the valve cover. It can be identified by a blue connector lock which is tethered to the harness. J 3902145 is a test light with one light for each cylinder. The test light fits on the injector test connector. If the test light is ON steady before cranking the engine as well as while cranking the engine, then the injector driver circuit is shorted to voltage. If the test light blinks, the PCM and the wiring to the injectors are OK. Fuel Injector Coil Test Procedure will check if the injectors are faulty. 7. Because the test light was ON steady, voltage to the injector is OK, but the driver circuit is grounded at all times. This step determines if the circuit is shorted to ground or the PCM is faulty.
6E1189
901RX032
13. Normal injector resistance is slightly more than if tested directly at the injector because it includes resistance of the harness wires. The normal value is about 13.5 W.
DTC P0201 Injector Circuit Malfunction Cylinder 1

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Will the engine start? Go to Step 3
Go to OBD System Check Go to Engine Cranks But Will Not Run Chart
1. Install the Tech 2. Clear the Diagnostic Trouble Code. 2. Idle the engine for one minute. Does Diagnostic Trouble Code P0201 reset? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 1. Review the Freeze Frame data with the ignition ON and the engine OFF and note the parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within the Freeze Frame conditions as noted. Does P0201 reset? Go to Step 5 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the injector test connector. 3. Install the injector test light J 3902145 on the injector test connector. 4. Crank the engine while observing the light for cylinder 1. Does the injector test light blink? Note whether the injector test light was OFF or ON steady in step 5. Was the test light ON steady while cranking the engine? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 10
Go to Fuel Injector Coil Test Procedure
Go to Step 6
DTC P0201 Injector Circuit Malfunction Cylinder 1 (Cont'd)

1. Disconnect the PCM connector for the affected injectors. 2. With a test light connected to B+, probe the affected injector driver circuit. Does the test light illuminate? Go to Step 8 Go to OBD System Check Go to Step 9 Repair short to ground in the injector driver circuit. Is the action complete?
Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
10
1. Disconnect the injector test connector. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Use a test light connected to ground to probe each terminal on the PCM side of the injector test connector. Only the Ign+ terminal should illuminate the test light. Besides the Ign+, did any other terminal illuminate the test light? Go to Step 11 Verify repair Go to Step 12
11 12
Repair the short to voltage in the injector driver circuit. 1. Disconnect the injector test connector. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Use a test light connected to ground to probe each pin on the injector side of the connector. Did any terminal illuminate the test light? 1. Disconnect the injector test connector. 2. Ignition OFF. 3. Clip one lead of an ohmmeter to the ignition pin on the injector side of the test connector. 4. Touch the other lead to each of the other four pins in the test connector, one pin at a time. Instead of normal injector resistance, did the ohmmeter indicate an open in one of the injector circuits? Go to Step 14 Verify repair Go to Step 15
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 13
13
14 15
Repair the open circuit or open injector. Check for an open circuit between the injector test connector and the PCM connector for the Injector 1 control circuit. Was there an open circuit? Repair the open circuit. Verify repair
Go to Step 16
Go to Step 9
16
6E1191
060R100033
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) has four individual injector driver circuits. Each controls an injector. When a driver circuit is grounded by the PCM, the injector is activated. The PCM monitors the current in each driver circuit. The PCM measures a voltage drop through a fixed resistor and controls it. The voltage on each driver is monitored to detect a fault. If the voltage is not what the PCM expects to monitor on the circuit, a Diagnostic Trouble Code is set. This Diagnostic Trouble Code is also set if an injector driver is shorted to voltage. DTC P0202 is a type A code.


D D D D The battery voltage is greater than 9 volts. Engine is running. Fuel pump is ON. The injector voltage does not equal the ignition voltage when the injector is commanded OFF or the injector voltage does not equal 0 volts when the injector is commanded ON. The above conditions are met for 5 seconds.
Diagnostic Aids

Test Description

3.This step determines if Diagnostic Trouble Code P0202 is the result of a hard failure or an intermittent condition. 5.This step tests the harness wiring and PCM control of the injectors using a test light. The fuel injector test connector is a gray 5 pin connector at the right rear of the valve cover. It can be identified by a blue connector lock which is tethered to the harness. J 3902145 is a test light with one light for each cylinder. The test light fits on the injector test connector. If the test light is ON steady before cranking the engine as well as while cranking the engine, then the injector driver circuit is shorted to voltage. If the test light blinks, the PCM and the wiring to the injectors are OK. Fuel Injector Coil Test Procedure will check if the injectors are faulty. 7.Because the test light was ON steady, voltage to the injector is OK, but the driver circuit is grounded at all times. This step determines if the circuit is shorted to ground or the PCM is faulty.
901RX033

1. Install the Tech 2. Clear the Diagnostic Trouble Code. 2. Idle the engine for one minute. Does Diagnostic Trouble Code P0202 reset? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 1. Review the Freeze Frame data with the ignition ON and the engine OFF and note the parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within the Freeze Frame conditions as noted. Does P0202 reset? Go to Step 5 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the injector test connector. 3. Install the injector test light J 3902145 on the injector connector. 4. Crank the engine while observing the light for cylinder 2. Does the injector test light blink? Note whether the injector test light was OFF or ON steady in step 5. Was the test light ON steady while cranking the engine? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 10
Go to Step 6
6E1193

10
11 12
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 13
13
14 15
Go to Step 16
Go to Step 9
16
060R100033
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) has four individual injector driver circuits. Each controls an injector. When the driver circuit is grounded by the PCM, the injector is activated. The PCM monitors the current in each driver circuit. The PCM measures a voltage drop through a fixed resistor and controls it. The voltage on each driver is monitored to detect a fault. If the voltage is not what the PCM expects to monitor on the circuit, a Diagnostic Trouble Code is set. This Diagnostic Trouble Code is also set if an injector driver is shorted to voltage. DTC P0203 is a type A code.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was setas Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


Diagnostic Aids

Test Description

3. This step determines if Diagnostic Trouble Code P0203 is the result of a hard failure or an intermittent condition. 5. This step tests the harness wiring and PCM control of the injectors using a test light. The fuel injector test connector is a gray 5 pin connector at the right rear of the valve cover. It can be identified by a blue connector lock which is tethered to the harness. J 3902145 is a test light with one light for each cylinder. The test light fits on the injector test connector. If the test light is ON steady before cranking the engine as well as while cranking the engine, then the injector driver circuit is shorted to voltage. If the test light blinks, the PCM and the wiring to the injectors are OK. Fuel Injector Coil Test Procedure will check if the injectors are faulty. 7. Because the test light was ON steady, voltage to the injector is OK, but the driver circuit is grounded at all times. This step determines if the circuit is shorted to ground or the PCM is faulty.
6E1195
901RX034

1. Install the Tech 2. Clear the Diagnostic Trouble Code. 2. Idle the engine for one minute. Does Diagnostic Trouble Code P0203 reset? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 1. Review the Freeze Frame data with the ignition ON and the engine OFF and note the parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within the Freeze Frame conditions as noted. Does P0203 reset? Go to Step 5 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the injector test connector. 3. Install the injector test light J 3902145 on the injector connector. 4. Crank the engine while observing the light for cylinder 3. Does the injector test light blink? Note whether the injector test light was OFF or ON steady in step 5. Was the test light ON steady while cranking the engine? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 10
Go to Step 6

10
11 12
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 13
13
14 15
Go to Step 16
Go to Step 9
16
6E1197
060R100033
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) has four individual injector driver circuits. Each controls an injector. When the driver circuit is grounded by the PCM, the injector is activated. The PCM monitors the current in each driver circuit. The PCM measures a voltage drop through a fixed resistor and controls it. The voltage on each driver is monitored to detect a fault. If the voltage is not what the PCM expects to monitor on the circuit, a Diagnostic Trouble Code is set. This Diagnostic Trouble Code is also set if an injector driver is shorted to voltage. DTC P0204 is a type A code.


Diagnostic Aids

Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 3. This step determines if Diagnostic Trouble Code P0204 is the result of a hard failure or an intermittent condition. 5. This step tests the harness wiring and PCM control of the injectors using a test light. The fuel injector test connector is a gray 5 pin connector at the right rear of the valve cover. It can be identified by a blue connector lock which is tethered to the harness. J 3902145 is a test light with one light for each cylinder. The test light fits on the injector test connector. If the test light is ON steady before cranking the engine as well as while cranking the engine, then the injector driver circuit is shorted to voltage. If the test light blinks, the PCM and the wiring to the injectors are OK. Fuel Injector Coil Test Procedure will check if the injectors are faulty. 7. Because the test light was ON steady, voltage to the injector is OK, but the driver circuit is grounded at all times. This step determines if the circuit is shorted to ground or the PCM is faulty.
901RX035

1. Install the Tech 2. Clear the DTC. 2. Idle the engine for one minute. Does DTC P0204 reset? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 1. Review the Freeze Frame data with the ignition ON and the engine OFF and note the parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within the Freeze Frame conditions as noted. Does P0204 reset? Go to Step 5 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the injector test connector. 3. Install the injector test light J 3902145 on the injector connector. 4. Crank the engine while observing the light for cylinder 4. Does the injector test light blink? Note whether the injector test light was OFF or ON steady in step 5. Was the test light ON steady while cranking the engine? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 10
Go to Step 6
6E1199

10
11 12
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 13
13
14 15
Go to Step 16
Go to Step 9
16
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0300 RANDOM/MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED
060R100034
Circuit Description
If the PCM determines that the engine is misfiring and cannot determine the actual cylinder that is misfiring then it will log the trouble code P0300. This is normally the case shere the misfire is caused by the ignition coil(s) which would then cause a misfire to happen in more than one cylinder.

D None of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes are present: TP sensor, MAP sensor, CMP sensor, VSS, ECT, CKP sensor. D The engine speed is between 687 and 6250 RPM. D The system voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. D The engine coolant temperature sensor (ECT) indicates an engine temperature between 6.75C (20F) and 120C (248F). D Throttle angle is steady and throttle angle changes less than 2.73% per 100 milliseconds. D The PCM detects a crankshaft RPM variation indicating a misfire that is sufficient to cause catalytic converter damage or emissions levels to exceed the mandated standard. D TP sensor reads less than 3.125%. D Vehicle speed is greater than 19km/h (12mph). D Fuel level is more than 14.8%. D ECT is less than 7.0C (19.4F) at startup engine.
D ECT is less than 20.75C (69.35F) and 120C (248F). D Rough road table based on rough road valve from ABS vs vehicle speed. D Decelation index versus engine speed versus load and crank position. D Emission damage misfire ratio more than 2.00%. D Catalyst damage misfire ratio 1125%. Emission level is 5 failed 200 revolution blocks out of 16. Catalyst Damage level is 4 of 16 failed 200 engine cycle blocks.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D If the misfire is severe enough to cause possible catalyst damage, the PCM will flash the MIL for as long as the misfire remains at catalyst damaging levels. D Open Loop fuel control will be in effect. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


6E1201
Diagnostic Aids
The Tech 2 displays Misfire Cur. # 1 through #4 can be useful to determine whether the misfire is isolated to a single cylinder. D Damaged or faulty ignition coils Check for cracks or other damage. D Substitute a known good coil Swap the ignition coils and retest. If misfire follows the coil, replace the ignition coil. If the misfire is random, check for the following conditions: D System grounds Ensure all connections are clean and properly tightened. D Air induction system Check for disconnected or damaged vacuum hoses, incorrectly installed or faulty PCV valve, or for vacuum leaks at the throttle body, EGR valve, and intake manifold mounting surfaces. D Fuel pressure Perform a fuel system pressure test. A faulty fuel pump, plugged filter, or faulty fuel system pressure regulator will contribute to a lean condition. D Excessive engine vibration This may falsely set a P0300. Refer to Engine Mechanical Diagnosis to check for a falsely Mechanical condition or component. D Injector(s) Perform an injector coil/balance test to locate faulty injector(s) contributing to a lean or flooding condition. In addition to the above test, check the condition of the injector Orings. D EGR Check for a leaking valve, adapter, or feed pipes which will contribute to a lean condition or excessive EGR flow. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0300 Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Start and idle the engine. 2. Review and record the Tech 2 Freeze Frame data. 3. Operate the vehicle to duplicate the conditions present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set (as defined by the Freeze Frame data). 4. Monitor the Tech 2 Misfire Cur. # display for each cylinder. Is Misfire Cur. # display increasing for any cylinder (indicating a misfire currently occurring)? Go to Step 3
1. Visually and physically inspect the vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and improper connections. 2. If a problem is found, repair or replace the vacuum hoses as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 4 1. Visually and physically inspect the following areas for vacuum leaks: D Intake manifold D Injector Orings D EGR valve D EGR feed pipes Did your inspection reveal a vacuum leak? Verify repair Go to Step 5 Inspect the crankcase ventilation valve for proper installation or a cracked hose. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Remove and visually/physically inspect the ignition coils. Ensure that the coils are free of cracks and carbon tracking. 2. If a problem is found, replace the damaged ignition coils. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Remove the EGR valve and visually/physically inspect the pintle to ensure that it is not sticking partially open. Also, inspect the EGR valve pintle and seat for carbon deposits or burrs that may interfere with the pintle closing completely. 2. If a problem is found, clean the EGR valve pintle and seat or replace the EGR valve as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 8
1. Install a spark tester at the spark plug end of the ignition wire for the cylinder that is indicated by the Misfire Cur. Counters or Misfire Hist. Counters as having the most severe misfire (largest number of counts). 2. Crank the engine while observing the spark tester. A crisp, blue spark should be observed. Is adequate spark present?
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 9
6E1203
DTC P0300 Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected (Cont'd)

1. Remove the spark plugs from the cylinders that were indicated as misfiring. 2. Visually inspect the spark plug electrodes. Does your inspection reveal any spark plugs exhibiting excessive fouling?
Go to Engine Mechanical Diagnosis
Go to Step 10
10
1. Visually inspect the spark plug insulators for cracks, carbon tracking, or other damage. 2. If a problem is found, replace the faulty spark plug(s) as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the ignition control module.
Go to Step 11
11 12
1. Inspect the PCM injector grounds, power grounds and sensor grounds to ensure that they are clean, tight and in their proper locations. 2. If a problem is found, correct the faulty ground condition as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a poor ground? Verify repair 1. Perform the Fuel System Pressure Test procedure. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary (refer to Engine Fuel or Fuel Metering System). Was a fuel system problem found? Verify repair 1. Check the fuel for excessive water, alcohol, or other contaminants (refer to Diagnosis in Engine Fuel for procedure). Was the fuel contaminated? Verify repair 1. Perform the Injector Coil/Balance Test. 2. If a problem is found, replace the faulty injector(s) as necessary. Did any of the injectors require replacement? Verify repair Check for an engine mechanical problem. Refer to Engine Mechanical Diagnosis to diagnose the following conditions: D A faulty or incorrect camshaft D Leaking or sticky valves or piston rings D Excessive valve deposits D Loose or worn rocker arms D Weak valve springs D Incorrect valve timing D A leaking head gasket D A loose or broken motor mount Verify repair
Go to Step 13
13
Go to Step 14
14
Go to Step 15
15
Go to Step 16
16
060R100034
Circuit Description
If the PCM determines that the engine is misfiring and can determine the actual cylinder that is misfiring then it will log the individual trouble code for that cylinder P0301. This is normally the situation in the case of a failed fuel injector, spark plug or ignition lead.

D None of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes are present: TP sensor, MAP sensor, CMP sensor, VSS, ECT, CKP sensor. D The engine speed is between 687 and 6250 RPM. D The system voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. D The engine coolant temperature sensor (ECT) indicates an engine temperature between 6.75C (20F) and 120C (248F). D Throttle angle is steady and throttle angle changes less than 2.73% per 100 milliseconds. D The PCM detects a crankshaft RPM variation indicating a misfire that is sufficient to cause catalytic converter damage or emissions levels to exceed the mandated standard. D TP sensor reads less than 3.125%. D Vehicle speed is greater than 19km/h (12mph). D Engine under load. D Fuel level is more than 14.8%. D ECT is less than 7.0C (19.4F) at startup engine.



6E1205
Diagnostic Aids

1. Visually and physically inspect the vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and improper connections. 2. If a problem is found, repair or replace the vacuum hoses as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 4 1. Visually and physically inspect the following areas for vacuum leaks: D Intake manifold D Injector Orings D EGR valve D EGR feed pipes Did your inspection reveal a vacuum leak? Verify repair Go to Step 5 Inspect the crankcase ventilation valve for proper installation or a cracked hose. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Remove and visually/physically inspect the ignition coils. Ensure that the coils are free of cracks and carbon tracking. 2. If a problem is found, replace the damaged ignition coils. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Install a spark tester at the spark plug end of the ignition wire for the cylinder that is indicated by the Misfire Cur. Counters or Misfire Hist. Counters as having the most severe misfire (largest number of counts). 2. Crank the engine while observing the spark tester. A crisp, blue spark should be observed. Is adequate spark present? 1. Remove the spark plugs from the cylinders that were indicated as misfiring. 2. Visually inspect the spark plug electrodes. Does your inspection reveal any spark plugs exhibiting excessive fouling?
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9
6E1207

Go to Step 10
10 11
Go to Step 12
12
Go to Step 13
13
Go to Step 14
14
Go to Step 15
15
060R100034
Circuit Description

D None of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes are present: TP sensor, MAP sensor, CMP sensor, VSS, ECT, CKP sensor. D The engine speed is between 687 and 6250 RPM. D The system voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. D The engine coolant temperature sensor (ECT) indicates an engine temperature between 6.75C (20F) and 120C (248F). D Throttle angle is steady and throttle angle changes less than 2.73% per 100 milliseconds. D The PCM detects a crankshaft RPM variation indicating a misfire that is sufficient to cause catalytic converter damage or emissions levels to exceed the mandated standard. D TP sensor reads less than 3.125%. D Vehicle speed is greater than 19km/h (12mph). D Fuel level is more than 14.8%. D ECT is less than 7.0C (19.4F) at startup engine. D ECT is less than 20.75C (69.35F) and 120C (248F).
D Rough road table based on rough road valve from ABS vs vehicle speed. D Decelation index versus engine speed versus load and crank position. D Emission damage misfire ratio more than 2.00%. D Catalyst damage misfire ratio 1125%. Emission level is 5 failed 200 revolution blocks out of 16. Catalyst Damage level is 4 of 16 failed 200 engine cycle blocks.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D If the misfire is severe enough to cause possible catalyst damage, the PCM will flash the MIL for as long as the misfire remains at catalyst damaging levels. D Open Loop fuel control will be in effect. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DiagnosticTrouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


6E1209
Diagnostic Aids

Go to Step 12
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9
6E1211

Go to Step 10
10 11
Go to Step 12
12
Go to Step 13
13
Go to Step 14
14
Go to Step 15
15
060R100034
Circuit Description

D None of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes are present: TP sensor, MAP sensor, CMP sensor, VSS, ECT, CKP sensor. D The engine speed is between 687 and 6250 RPM. D The system voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. D The engine coolant temperature sensor (ECT) indicates an engine temperature between 6.75C (20F) and 120C (248F). D Throttle angle is steady and throttle angle changes less than 2.73% per 100 milliseconds. D The PCM detects a crankshaft RPM variation indicating a misfire that is sufficient to cause catalytic converter damage or emissions levels to exceed the mandated standard. D TP sensor reads less than 3.125%. D Vehicle speed is greater than 19km/h (12mph). D Fuel level is more than 14.8%. D ECT is less than 7.0C (19.4F) at startup engine. D ECT is less than 20.75C (69.35F) and 120C (248F).
D Rough road table based on rough road valve from ABS vs vehicle speed. D Decelation index versus engine speed versus load and crank position. D Emission damage misfire ratio more than 2.00%. D Catalyst damage misfire ratio 1125%. Emission level is 5 failed 200 revolution blocks out of 16. Catalyst Damage level is 4 of 16 failed 200 engine cycle blocks.



6E1213
Diagnostic Aids

Go to Step 12
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9
6E1215

Go to Step 10
10 11
Go to Step 12
12
Go to Step 13
13
Go to Step 14
14
Go to Step 15
15
060R100034
Circuit Description

D None of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes are present: TP sensor, MAP sensor, CMP sensor, VSS, ECT, CKP sensor. D The engine speed is between 687 and 6250 RPM. D The system voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. D The engine coolant temperature sensor (ECT) indicates an engine temperature between 6.75C (20F) and 120C (248F). D Throttle angle is steady and throttle angle changes less than 2.73% per 100 milliseconds. D The PCM detects a crankshaft RPM variation indicating a misfire that is sufficient to cause catalytic converter damage or emissions levels to exceed the mandated standard. D TP sensor reads less than 3.125%. D Vehicle speed is greater than 19km/h (12mph). D Engine under load. D Fuel level is more than 14.8%. D ECT is less than 7.0C (19.4F) at startup engine.



6E1217
Diagnostic Aids

Go to Step 12
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9
6E1219

Go to Step 10
10 11
Go to Step 12
12
Go to Step 13
13
Go to Step 14
14
Go to Step 15
15
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
060R100035
Circuit Description
The knock sensor (KS) system is used to detect engine detonation. The knock sensor produced an AC voltage signal. The knock sensor sends this signal to the PCM. The amplitude and the frequency of the AC voltage signal depends upon the knock level being detected. The PCM will then retard the spark timing based on the signals from the Knock Sensor. DTC P0325 is a type B code.

D The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate the second time the fault is detected. D The PCM will record operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code is stored. D The PCM will use a calculated spark retard value in order to minimize the knock during the conditions when the knock is likely to occur. The calculated value will vary based on the engine speed and load.

D No P0327 Diagnostic Trouble Code set. D Engine speed is above 2500 rpm. All the above mentioned conditions are met, and the following conditions are met for 8.75 seconds within a 10 second monitoring period: D Any of the four A/D voltages exceeds 1.5625 Volts. D Instantaneous A/D delta Voltage falls below 0.019531 Volts. D ECT is more than 60C. D Vacuum is lower than 35kPa. The above condition are met 40 test failures within 80 test sample during 125 msec.

D The MIL will turn off after 3 consecutive ignition cycles in which the diagnostic runs without a fault. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code will clear after 40 consecutive warm up cycles without a fault. D A Tech 2 can clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Diagnostic Aids
Correct any abnormal engine noise before using the diagnostic table. Check for an open ignition feed circuit.
6E1221
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1. The Powertrain OBD System Check prompts the technician to complete some basic checks and store the freeze frame data and failure records data on the Tech 2 if applicable. This creates an electronic copy of the data taken when the malfunction occurred. The information is then stored on the Tech 2 for later reference. 2. If the conditions for the test as described above are met, a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0325 will set and MIL will illuminate. 4. If the engine has an internal knock or audible noise that causes a knocking type noise on the engine block, the knock sensor may be responding to the noise. 6. The Tech 2 displays knock sensor activity in counts, approximately 2050 at idle. The counts should increase when engine speed is increased and the counts should decrease when engine speed is decreased.
7. Any circuitry, that is suspected as causing the complaint, should be thoroughly checked for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal to wiring connections or physical damage to the wiring harness. 8. If the KS module was previously replaced and the Diagnostic Trouble Code resets, a malfunctioning PCM is indicated. NOTE: Replacement PCMs must be reprogrammed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. 9. Checking the internal resistance of the knock sensor verifies if the knock sensor or the wiring to the knock sensor is OK.
DTC P0325 KS Circuit Malfunction

Was the Powertrain OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Start the engine. Install a Tech 2. Clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Run the engine at slightly more than 10% throttle angle. Go to Step 4 Go to Step 2
Go to Powertrain OBD System Check
1. 2. 3. 4.
Does the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminate? 3 1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with engine OFF. 2. Review the Freeze Frame data and note the parameters. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions and Conditions for Setting the DTC as noted. Does the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminate? 4 Listen to the engine while raising and lowering the engine speed. Is a knock or audible noise present? 5 Repair the mechanical engine problem or a loose bracket or component. Is the action complete? 6 Slowly increase the engine speed to the specified value. Does the KS Activity increase with the engine speed? 7 Check for a poor connection at the PCM connector, Knock sensor signal circuit and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary?
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 11
2500 RPM
Go to Step 8
DTC P0325 KS Circuit Malfunction (Cont'd)

Go to Step 13
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM connectors at the PCM. 3. With a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) connected to ground, measure the resistance of the knock sensor through the knock sensor signal circuit. Is the measured value within the specified value? 90K 110K W Go to Step 7 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 13 Check the knock sensor electrical connector for a poor connection and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? Check the knock sensor signal circuit for an open or a short to ground or to voltage and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? Replace the Knock Sensor (KS). Is the action complete? 1. Using the Tech 2, clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes. 2. Start the engine and idle at normal operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within the conditions for setting this Diagnostic Trouble Code as specified in the supporting text. Does the Tech 2 indicate that this diagnostic has ran and passed? Go to Step 14 Go to applicable DTC table
10
11
12 13
Go to Step 2
14
Check is any additional Diagnostic Trouble Codes are set. Are any Diagnostic Trouble Codes displayed that have not been diagnosed?
System OK
6E1223
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0327 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
060R100035
Circuit Description
The PCM uses the Knock Sensor (KS) in order to detect engine detonation. This allows the PCM to retard the Ignition Control (IC) spark timing based on the KS signal the PCM receives. The circuitry within the knock sensor pulls down the PCMsupplied 5 volt signal, so that under a no knock condition the signal on the KS circuit measures about 1.3 volts. The knock sensors produce an AC signal that rides on the 1.3 volts DC. The signals amplitude and frequency are dependent upon the amount of the knock being experienced. The PCM determines whether the knock is occurring by comparing the signal level on the KS circuit with a voltage level on the noise channel. The noise channel allows the CM to reject any false knock signal by indicating the amount of normal engine mechanical noise present. The normal engine noise varies depending on the engine speed and load. Then the ECM determines that an abnormally high noise channel voltage level is being experienced, a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0327 sets. This DTC is a type B DTC.
D Engine speed is more than 2500 rpm or equal to 2500 rpm. The above condition are met for 40 test failures within 80 test sample during 125 msec. Gain Test D Engine speed is greater than 2500 RPM. D Gain is equal to or greater than 23.875 dB.

D The PCM will illuminate the MIL the second time the fault is detected. D The PCM will store the conditions which were present then the Diagnostic Trouble Code set. D The PCM will use a calculated spark retard value in order to minimize the knock during the conditions when the knock is likely to occur. The calculated value will vary based on the engine speed and load.

D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D The Tech 2 Clear Info will clear the Diagnostic Trouble Code.

A/D Test D D D D Engine speed is equal to or greater than 2500 RPM. A/D Voltage is less than or equal to 0.0781 Volts. ECT is more than 60C. Vacuum is lower than 35kPa.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: A poor connection at the PCM. Inspect the knock sensor and the PCM connectors for: , broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals. D Backed out terminals D Broken locks D Improperly formed or damaged terminals Also, check the wiring harness for: shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. D A misrouted harness. Inspect the knock sensor harness in order to ensure that it is not routed too close to high voltage wires such as spark plug leads.
D Improper Knock Sensor torque specification. Torque the Knock Sensor to 19Nm (14 lbsft). Refer to Fastener Notice. Review the Fail Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed in order to help determine how often the conditions that caused the DTC to set occur. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. Ensures that the fault is present. 6. Ensures that the knock sensor is capable of detecting detonation.
DTC P0327 KS Circuit Low Input

Was the Powertrain OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
1. Operate the engine within the conditions specified in the diagnostic support Conditions for Setting the DTC. 2. Using a Tech 2, monitor theDiagnostic Trouble Code information for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0327 until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0327 test runs. 3. Observe the test results. Does the Tech 2 indicate the DTC P0327 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
1. Turn ON the Ignition leaving the engine OFF. 2. Review the Tech 2 Fail Records data. 3. IMPORTANT: Before clearing the DTCs, use the Tech 2 to record the Freeze Frame and the Failure Records for reference. This data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 4. Record the Tech 2 Fail Records data. 5. Operate the vehicle within the Fail Records conditions. 6. Using a Tech 2, monitor the DTC info for the DTC P0327 until the DTC P0327 test runs. 7. Observe the test results. Does the Tech 2 indicate the DTC P0327 Failed This Ignition? Go to Step 4
1. Disconnect the KS Sensor electrical connector. 2. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), measure the voltage between the KS signal circuit at the knock sensor harness connectors and ground. Is the voltage at the specified value? Approx. 5.0 V Go to Step 5 Go to Step 8
6E1225
DTC P0327 KS Circuit Low Input (Cont'd)

Measure the resistance of the KS sensor by connecting the between the KS sensor terminal and the engine block. Is the resistance of the KS sensor near the specified value? 100K W Go to Step 6 Go to Step 9
1. Check the KS signal circuit for a poor terminal connection at the knock sensor. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Engine Electrical. Was a problem found? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 9 1. ReConnect the KS Sensor in order to monitor the voltage between the KS sensor terminal and the engine ground. 2. Tap on the engine lift bracket, near the KS Sensor, while observing the signal indicated on the Tech 2. Is any signal indicated on the while tapping on the engine lift bracket? Go to Step 11 Go to Step 8
1. 2. 3. 4.
Turn OFF the ignition. Disconnect the PCM. Turn ON the ignition. Check the KS signal circuit between the PCM and the KS sensor connector for an open, a short to voltage, or a short to ground. 5. If a wiring problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Replace the KS Sensor. Refer to Knock Sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: If the PCM is faulty, reprogram the PCM. Refer to PCM Replacement/Programming. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 10
9 10
Go to Step 11
11
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Using the Tech 2, select the DTC and the Clear Info. Start the engine. Idle at the normal operating temperature. Select the DTC and the Specific. Enter the DTC number which was set. Operate the vehicle within the conditions for setting this DTC as specified in the supporting text. Go to Step 12 Go to applicable DTC table Go to Step 2
Does the Tech 2 indicate that this diagnostic ran and passed? 12 Using the Tech 2, select the Capture Info and the Review Info. Are any DTCs displayed that have not been diagnosed?
System OK
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE
060R100036
Circuit Description
The 58X reference signal is produced by the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. During one crankshaft revolution, 58 crankshaft pulses will be produced. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the 58X reference signal to calculate engine RPM and crankshaft position. The PCM constantly monitors the number of pulses on the 58X reference circuit and compares them to the number of camshaft position (CMP) signal pulses being received. If the PCM receives an incorrect number of pulses on the 58X reference circuit, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0336 will set. Diagnostic Trouble Code P0336 is a type B code.

Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbedthrough wire insulation or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for: D Poor connection Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, disconnect the PCM, turn the ignition on and observe a voltmeter connected to the 58X reference circuit at the PCM harness connector while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the PCM. A change in voltage will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to

D Engine is running. D Extra or missing pulse is detected between consecutive 58X reference pulses. D Above condition is detected in 10 of 100 crankshaft rotations.


be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
6E1227
DTC P0336 CKP Sensor Circuit Range/Performance

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Attempt to start the engine. Does the engine start? Go to Step 3
Go to OBD System Check Refer to Engine Cranks But Will Not Run chart
1. 2. 3. 4.
Review and record Failure Records information. Clear Diagnostic Trouble Code P0336. Start the engine and idle for 1 minute. Observe Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Go to Step 4
Is Diagnostic Trouble Code P0336 set? 4 1. Disconnect the PCM and CKP sensor. 2. Check for an open or a short to ground in the 58X reference circuit between the CKP sensor connector and the PCM harness connector. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? 5 1. Reconnect the PCM and CKP sensor. 2. Connect a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to measure voltage on the 58X reference circuit at the PCM connector. 3. Observe the voltage while cranking the engine. Is the voltage near the specified value? 6 Check the connections at the CKP sensor and replace the terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? 7 Replace the CKP sensor. IMPORTANT: The PCM must go through the Scan Tools Tooth Error Correction (TEC) procedure after CKP Sensor replacement. Refer to the Tooth Error Correction procedure. Is the action complete? 8 Check connections at the PCM and replace the terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? 9 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
Go to Step 5
2.5 V
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 6
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
Verify repair
Verify repair
Go to Step 9
Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0337 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
060R100036
Circuit Description
The 58X reference signal is produced by the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. During one crankshaft revolution, 58 crankshaft reference pulses will be produced. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the 58X reference signal to calculate engine RPM and crankshaft position. The PCM constantly monitors the number of pulses on the 58X reference circuit and compares them to the number of camshaft position (CMP) signal pulses being received. If the PCM does not receive pulses on the 58X reference circuit, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0337 will set. Diagnostic Trouble Code P0337 is a type B code.

Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbedthrough wire insulation or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for: D Poor connection Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, disconnect the PCM, turn the ignition on and observe a voltmeter connected to the 58X reference circuit at the PCM harness connector while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the PCM. A change in voltage will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to

D No camshaft position (CMP) sensor DTCs are set. D Engine cranking. D CKP reference pulse is not detected within 8 CMP pulses.


6E1229
DTC P0337 CKP Sensor Circuit Low Input

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Disconnect the CKP sensor. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), verify that 5 V reference and ground are being supplied at the sensor connector (PCM side). Are 5 V and ground being supplied to the sensor? Go to Step 5
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON. 2. With a DVM, backprobe the PCM connector 5 V reference and ground connections. Are 5 V reference and ground available at the PCM? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 9 Check 5 V reference or ground between the CKP sensor and PCM and repair the open circuit, short to ground or short to voltage. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and CKP sensor. 3. Check for an open or a short to ground in the 58X reference circuit between the CKP sensor connector and the PCM harness connector. 4. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Reconnect the PCM and CKP sensor. 2. Connect a DVM to measure voltage on the 58X reference circuit at the PCM connector. 3. Observe the voltage while cranking the engine. Is the voltage near the specified value? 2.5 V Go to Step 9 Go to Step 7 Check the connections at the CKP sensor and replace the terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 8 Replace the CKP sensor. IMPORTANT: The PCM must go through the Scan Tools Tooth Error Correction (TEC) procedure after a CKP Sensor replacement. Refer to Tooth Error Correction (TEC) procedure. Is the action complete? Verify repair
DTC P0337 CKP Sensor Circuit Low Input (Cont'd)

Check the connections at the PCM and replace the terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Go to Step 10
10
6E1231
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE
060R100037
Circuit Description
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is produced by the CMP sensor pulses when the engine is running and crankshaft position (CKP) sync pulses are also being received. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the CMP signal pulses to initiate sequential fuel injection. The PCM constantly monitors the number of pulses on the CMP signal circuit and compares the number of CMP pulses to the number of 58X reference pulses received. If the PCM receives an incorrect number of pulses on the CMP reference circuit, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0341 will set and the PCM will initiate injector sequence without the CMP signal with a one in four chance that injector sequence is correct. The engine will continue to start and run normally, although the misfire diagnostic will be affected if a misfiring condition occurs. DTC P0341 is a type B code.
D The PCM will initiate injector sequence without the CMP signal with a one in four chance that injector sequence is correct. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0341 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0341 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.
Diagnostic Aids
D If a CKP Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is also indicated, there may be a problem with the ground circuit because the CMP ground is spliced to the CKP ground wire. D If a fuel injector Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is also indicated, there may be a problem with the power supply to the CMP. The wire supplying CMP power is spliced to the wire supplying power to the fuel injectors. An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbedthrough wire insulation or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions:

D The engine is running (CMP reference pulses are being received). D Above condition fails for 10 occurrences within 100 test samples (15.6 m/s).

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected.

D Poor connection Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, disconnect the PCM, turn the ignition ON and observe a voltmeter connected to the CMP signal circuit at the PCM harness connector while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the CMP sensor. A change in voltage will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0341 CMP Sensor Circuit Range/Performance

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC information for DTC P0341 until the DTC P0341 test runs. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0341 failed this ignition cycle? Go to Step 3
1. Monitor voltage on the CMP signal circuit while cranking the engine. Does the voltage toggle between the specified values? 04 V Go to Step 4 Go to Step 7 Check for a poor connection of the CMP signal wire at the PCM terminal. Was a poor connection found? Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 6 Repair the damaged pin or terminal at the PCM. Replace the PCM IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the repair complete? Verify repair
5 6
1. Disconnect the CMP connector from the CMP Sensor. 2. Ignition ON. 3. At the CMP connector, use a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to check the voltage between the voltage signal wire and sensor ground. Does the DVM indicate the specified value? B+ 1. Ignition ON. 2. Use a DVM to measure between the ground and the CMP positive connector. Does the DVM indicate the specified value? B+
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 9
6E1233
DTC P0341 CMP Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (Cont'd)

9 10
Repair the open circuit. Is the repair complete? 1. Ignition ON. 2. Use a DVM to measure at the CMP connector between the battery + and the CMP ground wire. Does the DVM indicate the specified value? B+ Repair the open ground wire. Is the repair complete? Verify repair Go to Step 13 Verify repair Go to Step 14 Use an ohmmeter to check continuity of the signal wire between the CMP and the PCM. Was there an open circuit? Repair the open signal wire. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition ON. 2. Check the signal wire for a short to ground or a short to voltage. Was a problem found? Repair the signal circuit problem. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the CMP Sensor. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 11
11 12
13 14
Go to Step 15
Go to Step 16
15 16
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0342 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
060R100037
Circuit Description
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is produced by the CMP sensor pulses when the engine is running and crankshaft position (CKP) sync pulses are also being received. The PCM uses the CMP signal pulses to initiate sequential fuel injection. The PCM constantly monitors the number of pulses on the CMP signal circuit and compares the number of CMP pulses to the number of 58X reference pulses received. If the PCM does not receive pulses on the CMP reference circuit, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0342 will set and the PCM will initiate injector sequence without the CMP signal with a one in four chance that injector sequence is correct. The engine will continue to start and run normally, although the misfire diagnostic will be affected if a misfiring condition occurs. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0342 is a type B code.
D The PCM will initiate injector sequence without the CMP signal with a one in four chance that injector sequence is correct. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0342 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0342 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.
Diagnostic Aids
D If a CKP Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is also indicated, there may be a problem with the ground circuit because the CMP ground is spliced to the CKP ground wire. D If a fuel injector Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is also indicated, there may be a problem with the power supply to the CMP. The wire supplying CMP power is spliced to the wire supplying power to the fuel injectors. An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbedthrough wire insulation or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for the following:

D The engine is running. D The CMP sensor signal is not received by the PCM once every 4 cylinders. D The above condition occurs for 10 seconds.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected.

D Poor connection Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, disconnect the PCM, turn the ignition ON and observe a voltmeter connected to the CMP signal circuit at the
6E1235
PCM harness connector while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the CMP sensor. A change in voltage will indicate the location of the fault.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. Ensures that the fault is present.
DTC P0342 Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Low Input

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC information for DTC P0342 until the DTC P0342 test runs. Did the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0342 failed this ignition cycle? Go to Step 3
1. Use a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to monitor voltage on the CMP signal circuit while cranking the engine. Does the voltage toggle between the specified values? 04 V Go to Step 4 Go to Step 7 Check for a poor connection of the CMP signal wire at the PCM terminal. Was a poor connection found? Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 6 Repair the damaged pin or terminal at the PCM. Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the repair complete? Verify repair
5 6
1. Disconnect the CMP connector from the CMP Sensor. 2. Ignition ON. 3. At the CMP connector, check the voltage between the voltage signal wire and sensor ground. Does the DVM indicate the specified value? B+ 1. Ignition ON. 2. Use a DVM to measure between the ground and the CMP positive connector. Does the DVM indicate the specified value? B+ Repair the open circuit. Is the repair complete?
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9
DTC P0342 Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Low Input (Cont'd)

10
1. Ignition ON. 2. Use a DVM to measure at the CMP connector between the battery + and the CMP ground wire. Does the DVM indicate the specified value? B+ Repair the open ground wire. Is the repair complete?
Go to Step 12 Verify repair Go to Step 13 Verify repair
11 12
Use an ohmmeter to check continuity of the signal wire between the CMP and the PCM. Was there an open circuit? Repair the open signal wire. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition ON. 2. Check the signal wire for a short to ground or a short to voltage. Was a problem found? Repair the signal circuit problem. Is the action complete?
13 14
Go to Step 15 Verify repair Verify repair
Go to Step 16
15 16
Replace the CMP Sensor. Is the action complete?
6E1237
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0351 IGNITION COIL A PRIMARY/ SECONDARY CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
060R100038
Circuit Description
The ignition control circuit provides a zero volt or a 5 volt signal to the ignition control module. The normal circuit voltage is zero volts. When the module receives the 5 volt signal from the powertrain control module (PCM), it provides a ground path for the B+ voltage supplied to the ignition primary coil. When the PCM turns off the 5 volts to the module, the module will remove the ground path of the ignition primary coils; causing the magnetic field produces a voltage in the secondary coils which fires the spark plug. The circuit between the PCM and the ignition control module is monitored for an open circuit, short to voltage, and short to ground. When the PCM detects a problem in the ignition control circuit, it will set DTC P0351. DTC P0351 is a type A code.


Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at the PCM Inspect the harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connections. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; Open circuits, shorts to ground, or shorts to Voltage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Tech 2 display related to DTC P0351 while moving the connector and wiring related to the ignition system. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.

D Ignition ON. D The engine running. D Output voltage is not equal to 5 volts when output is ON. D Output voltage is not equal to 0 volt when output is OFF. D Twenty test failures within 40 samples of continuous circuit monitoring.

Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0351 Ignition Coil A Primary/Secondary Circuit Malfunction

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Check for a faulty connection or damaged terminals at the ignition control module. Was a problem found? Verify Repair
Go to Step 3
Check for a faulty connection or damaged terminals at the PCM connector. Was a problem found? Verify Repair Go to Step 4 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and the ignition control module. 3. Check the ignition control circuit for a short to voltage. Was a problem found? Verify Repair Verify Repair Verify Repair Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Check the ignition control circuit for a short to voltage. Was a problem found? Check for an open in the ignition control circuit. Was a problem found? Replace the ignition control module. Verify repair. Is there still a problem? Go to Step 8 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the repair complete? Verify Repair
5 6 7
6E1239
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0352 IGNITION COIL B PRIMARY/ SECONDARY CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
060R100038
Circuit Description
The ignition control circuit provides a zero volt or a 5 volt signal to the ignition control module. The normal circuit voltage is zero volts. When the module receives the 5 volt signal from the powertrain control module (PCM), it provides a ground path for the B+ voltage supplied to the ignition primary coil. When the PCM turns off the 5 volts to the module, the module will remove the ground path of the ignition primary coils; causing the magnetic field produces a voltage in the secondary coils which fires the spark plug. The circuit between the PCM and the ignition control module is monitored for an open circuit, short to voltage, and short to ground. When the PCM detects a problem in the ignition control circuit, it will set DTC P0352. DTC P0352 is a type A code.


Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at the PCM Inspect the harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connections. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; Open circuits, shorts to ground, or shorts to Voltage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Tech 2 display related to DTC P0351 while moving the connector and wiring related to the ignition system. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.

D Ignition ON. D The engine running. D Output voltage is not equal to 5 volts when output is ON. D Output voltage is not equal to 0 volt when output is OFF. D Twenty test failures within 40 samples of continuous circuit monitoring.

DTC P0352 Ignition Coil B Primary/Secondary Circuit Malfunction

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Check for a faulty connection or damaged terminals at the ignition control module. Was a problem found? Verify Repair
Go to Step 3
Check for a faulty connection or damaged terminals at the PCM connector. Was a problem found? Verify Repair Go to Step 4 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and the ignition control module. 3. Check the ignition control circuit for a short to voltage. Was a problem found? Verify Repair Verify Repair Verify Repair Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Check the ignition control circuit for a short to voltage. Was a problem found? Check for an open in the ignition control circuit. Was a problem found? Replace the ignition control module. Verify repair. Is there still a problem? Go to Step 8 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the repair complete? Verify Repair
5 6 7
6E1241
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0401 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED
060R100039
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) tests the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system during deceleration by momentarily commanding the EGR valve to open while monitoring the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor signal. When the EGR valve is opened, the PCM monitors the change in MAP input signal. The PCM compares the MAP change to a RPM vs. BARO table. When the PCM interprets the change in MAP to be out of limits, the PCM will set DTC P0401. The number of test samples required to accomplish this may vary according to the severity of the detected flow error. Normally, the PCM will only allow one EGR flow test sample to be taken during an ignition cycle. To aid in verifying a repair, the PCM allows twelve test samples during the first ignition cycle following a Tech 2 Clear Info or a battery disconnect. Between nine and twelve samples should be sufficient for the PCM to determine adequate EGR flow and pass the EGR test. DTC P0401 is a type A code.
D Engine coolant temperature is greater than 24C (165F). D System voltage is between 11.5 and 16 volts. D Vehicle speed is greater than 29 km/h (18 mph). D IAC position is steady, changing less than 5 counts. D A/C clutch status is unchanged.
Start Test
D D D D D TP angle is less than 0.8%. EGR duty cycle is less than 2%. MAP is steady, changing less than 1 kPa. Engine speed is between 1400 RPM and 2800 RPM. Compensated MAP between 10.3 kPa and 49.8 kPa.
Run Test
D Delta MAP is recorded during valve open conditions. D EGR valve is ramped over a time interval. Run Test will be aborted if any of the following are true: D Vehicle speed changes by greater than 6 km/h (4mph). D Engine RPM changes by greater than 50 rpm. D EGR is opened less than 95% of the commanded amount. During the Start Test and the Run Test, the EGR is closed then opened. The associated change in MAP is compared with the PCMs expected change value. If the

D No TP sensor, VSS, EVAP Purge, IAC, IAT sensor, MAP sensor, EGR Pintle Position sensor, ECT sensor, Excessive EGR DTCs set. D Barometric pressure is above 72 kPa.

difference between the two values exceeds the PCMs internal limit, a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0401 will set. DTC P0401 is a type A code. NOTE: Several deceleration cycles will be necessary to run a sufficient number of EGR flow tests to determine a pass or fail condition.

D The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate the first time the fault is detected. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code is stored. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code will clear after 40 consecutive warm up cycles without a fault. D The MIL will turn OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which the diagnostic runs without a fault.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC

D The MIL will turn OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which the diagnostic runs without a fault. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code will clear after 40 consecutive warm up cycles without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Codes can be cleared by using the Tech 2.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Actual EGR Position display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the EGR valve. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. D Ensure EGR valve is correctly mounted. See OnVehicle Service. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition. NOTE: If the EGR valve shows signs of excessive heat, check the exhaust system for blockage (possibly a plugged catalytic converter) using the Restricted Exhaust System Check.
6E1243
DTC P0401 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow Insufficient Detected

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Start the engine. 2. Monitor the MAP signal with a Tech 2 while idling. 3. While idling, depress the accelerator pedal about halfway down and immediately let the engine return to idle. Did the MAP value on the Tech 2 show an immediate large change? Go to Step 4 Verify repair
Go to Step 3
3 4
Replace the MAP sensor. 1. Inspect the exhaust system for modification of original installed parts or leaks. 2. If a problem was found, repair exhaust system as necessary. Was a condition present that required repair? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 5 1. Remove the EGR valve. 2. Visually and physically inspect the pintle, valve passages and the adapter for excessive deposits or any kind of a restriction. 3. If a problem if found, clean or replace EGR system components as necessary. Was a condition present that required repair? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6 1. Remove the EGR inlet and outlet pipes from the exhaust manifold and the intake manifold. 2. Inspect the manifold EGR ports and the EGR inlet and outlet pipes for a blockage caused by excessive deposits or other damage. 3. If a problem is found, correct the condition as necessary. Was a condition present that required repair? Go to Step 7 1. Review and record the Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Clear Diagnostic Trouble Code and monitor the Tech 2 System Info Screen while operating the vehicle as specified in Diagnostic Aids. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0401 until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0401 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0401 failed this ignition? Repair complete
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0402 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) EXCESSIVE FLOW DETECTED
060R100039
Circuit Description
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) closes the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system on engine startup to test for excessive (any) flow. If the PCM determines that EGR flow occurred on startup, in two consecutive trips, then DTC P0402 will set. DTC P0402 is a type B code.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Actual EGR Position display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the EGR valve. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. D Ensure EGR valve is correctly mounted. See OnVehicle Service. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition. NOTE: If the EGR valve shows signs of excessive heat, check the exhaust system for blockage (possible a plugged catalytic converter) using the Restricted Exhaust System Check.

D Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is above 5C (41F). D Engine RPM is less than 500 RPM. D EGR Pintle Position if greater than 55 counts. The above mentioned conditions must be met for 0.6 seconds during engine startup on two consecutive trips.
6E1245
DTC P0402 EGR Excessive Flow Detected

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Review and record the Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Clear Diagnostic Trouble Code and monitor the Tech 2 System Info Screen while operating the vehicle as specified in Diagnostic Aids. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P0401 until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0401 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P0401 failed this ignition?
Go to Step 3
1. Inspect the exhaust system for modification of original installed parts or leaks. 2. If a problem was found, repair exhaust system as necessary. Was a condition present that required repair? Verify repair Go to Step 4 1. Remove the EGR valve. 2. Visually and physically inspect the pintle, valve passages and the adapter for excessive deposits or any kind of a restriction. 3. If a problem if found, clean or replace EGR system components as necessary. Was a condition present that required repair? Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Remove the EGR inlet and outlet pipes from the exhaust manifold and the intake manifold. 2. Inspect the manifold EGR ports and the EGR inlet and outlet pipes for a blockage caused by excessive deposits or other damage. 3. If a problem is found, correct the condition as necessary. Was a condition present that required repair? Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0404 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE
060R100039
Circuit Description
An Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system is used to lower Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) emission levels caused by high combustion temperatures. It accomplishes this by feeding small amounts of exhaust gases back into the combustion chamber. When the air/fuel mixture is diluted with the exhaust gases, combustion temperatures are reduced. A linear EGR valve is used on this system. The linear EGR valve is designed to accurately supply exhaust gases to the engine without the use of intake manifold vacuum. The valve controls exhaust flow going into the intake manifold from the exhaust manifold through an orifice with a PCM controlled pintle. The PCM controls the pintle position using inputs from the Throttle Position (TP) and Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensors. The PCM then commands the EGR valve to operate when necessary by controlling an ignition signal through the PCM. This can be monitored on a Tech 2 as the Desired EGR Position. The PCM monitors the results of its command through a feedback signal. By sending a 5 volt reference and a ground to the EGR valve, a voltage signal representing the EGR valve pintle position is sent to the PCM. This feedback signal can also be monitored on a Tech 2 and is the actual position of the EGR pintle. The Actual EGR position should always be near the commanded or Desired EGR Position.
If the PCM detects a large difference between the desired EGR position and actual EGR position, then Diagnostic Trouble Code P0404 will set. DTC P0404 is a type B code.

D IAT is greater than 5C (41F). D EGR commanded ON (EGR Position changes is less than 3%). D Actual EGR Position and from Desired EGR. Should be within 15% must fail more than 2 interaions for 5 second. The above conditions are met 10 second.

D Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate the second time the fault is detected. D The PCM will record operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code is stored. D The EGR Valve is disabled.

D The MIL will turn OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which the diagnostic runs without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) can be cleared by using a Tech 2.
6E1247
Diagnostic Aids
Due to the moisture associated with exhaust systems, the EGR valve may freeze and stick in colder weather at times. After the vehicle is brought into a warm shop for repairs, the valve warms and the problem disappears. By watching the Actual EGR and Desired EGR Positions on a cold vehicle with a Tech 2, the fault can be verified easily. Check the freeze frame data to determine if the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set when the vehicle was cold by viewing the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT).
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1. The Powertrain OBD System Check prompts the technician to complete some basic checks and store the freeze frame and failure records data on the Tech 2 if applicable. This created an electronic copy of the data taken when the fault occurred. The information is then stored on the Tech 2 for later reference. 2. Commanding the EGR valve open determines whether the EGR system can control the EGR valve accurately and if the fault if present. 3. When the EGR valve electrical connector is disconnected, the Tech 2 should display the Actual EGR Position as 0%. If is does not, the fault lies either in the EGR signal circuit or the PCM. 4. A test light, when connected to ground, will glow dimly when the EGR valve is commanded to 25%, and brighter as the EGR valve is commanded to 100%. If the test light flashes, check the sensor ground for an open. 5. An open or poor connection condition may have caused this Diagnostic Trouble Code to set. Be sure to check the terminals for being backed out, improperly formed or damaged, and for poor tension.
7. The test light will have glowed brightly in the previous step if the EGR control circuit was shorted to B+ and the Actual EGR Position on the Tech 2 will display 100%. A test light that did not illuminate, indicates that the circuit may be open or shorted to ground. 9. If the EGR valve 5 volt reference is shorted to voltage, the DVM will read battery voltage and additional Diagnostic Trouble Codes may be set and engine performance will be poor. 12. The replacement PCM must be reprogrammed and the Tooth Error Correction (TEC) procedure must be performed. Refer to the latest procedures for PCM reprogramming and Powertrain Control Module for the Tooth Error Correction (TEC) Procedure. 13. Although the circuitry acted correctly when checked, a problem may still lie within the terminals which would not show up in probe type testing. Be sure to check the terminals for being backed out, improperly formed or damaged, and for poor tension. 17. All circuits to the EGR valve are OK at this point. The fault lies internally in the EGR valve and therefore must be replaced. Be sure all gasket material is removed from the EGR mounting surface. Even a small amount of material may cause a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0401 to set. For on vehicle service of the EGR Valve, refer to EGR Valve. 18. Check the terminals for being backed out, improperly formed or damaged, and for poor tension. 19. Clearing the Diagnostic Trouble Codes is a very important step for this diagnostic. The clearing function allows the EGR valve to relearn a new pintle position as the old position was inaccurate due to the malfunction that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code. The Diagnostic Trouble Code must be cleared with the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF or when the engine is idling. If the PCM sees a EGR command, the new pintle position will not be learned.
DTC P0404 EGR Circuit Range/Performance

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF. 2. Install a Tech 2. 3. Command the EGR valve to the specified values. Does the Actual EGR Position follow the Desired EGR Position? 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% Go to Step 19 Go to Step 3
1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF. 2. Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector. 3. With a test light connected to B+, probe the ground circuit to the EGR valve. Does the light illuminate? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5 1. Connect the test light to ground. 2. Probe the EGR control circuit to the EGR valve. 3. Command the EGR valve to the specified values using a Tech 2. As the command is raised, does the test light glow brighter, flash or maintain a steady glow? 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% Go to Step 6 Go to Step 19 Go to Step 7
Repair the open or poor connection in the EGR ground circuit. Is the action complete? With the test light still connected to ground, probe the signal circuit. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9
With the test light still connected to ground, again probe the control circuit without commanding the EGR valve with the Tech 2. Does the test light illuminate? Check the signal circuit for a short to voltage and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? With a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) connected to ground, probe the 5 V reference circuit. Is the voltage measured near the specified value? 5V Check the control circuit for a short to voltage and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? Connect the test light to B+ and again probe the control circuit. Does the light illuminate?
Go to Step 10 Go to Step 19 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 19 Go to Step 15
Go to Step 11 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 14 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 16
10
11
6E1249
DTC P0404 EGR Circuit Range/Performance (Cont'd)

12
Go to Step 19
13
Check the EGR ground circuit for a poor connection or proper terminal tension at the PCM and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? Check the 5 V reference circuit for a short to voltage and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? Check the control circuit for a short to ground and repair as necessary? Was a repair necessary? Check the control circuit for an open or poor connection at the EGR valve electrical connector and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? Replace the EGR valve. Is the action complete? Check the PCM electrical connector for a poor connection and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? 1. Using the Tech 2, clear Diagnostic Trouble Codes. 2. Start engine and idle at normal operating temperature. 3. Operate vehicle within the conditions for setting this Diagnostic Trouble Code as specified in the supporting text. Does the Tech 2 indicate that this diagnostic Ran and Passed?
14
15
16
17 18
19
Verify repair
Go to Step 2
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0405 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
060R100039
Circuit Description
An Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system is used to lower Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) emission levels caused by high combustion temperatures. It accomplishes this by feeding small amounts of exhaust gases back into the combustion chamber. When the air/fuel mixture is diluted with the exhaust gases, combustion temperatures are reduced. A linear EGR valve is used on this system. The linear EGR valve is designed to accurately supply exhaust gases to the engine without the use of intake manifold vacuum. The valve controls exhaust flow going into the intake manifold form the exhaust manifold through an orifice with a PCM controlled pintle. The PCM controls the pintle position using inputs from the Throttle Position (TP) and Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensors. The PCM then commands the EGR valve to operate when necessary by controlling an ignition signal through the PCM. This can be monitored on a Tech 2 as the Desired EGR Position. The PCM monitors the results of its command through a feedback signal. By sending a 5 volt reference and a ground to the EGR valve, a voltage signal representing the EGR valve pintle position is sent to the PCM. This feedback signal can also be monitored on a Tech 2 and is the actual position of the EGR pintle. The Actual EGR Position should always be near the commanded or Desired EGR Position.
If the PCM detects a continuous short to ground in the signal circuit or the sensor, then Diagnostic Trouble Code P0405 will set. DTC P0405 is a type A code.

D IAT is greater than 5C (41F). D A malfunction is present for 10 seconds.

D The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate the first time the malfunction is detected. D The PCM will record operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code is stored. D The EGR Valve is disabled.

D The MIL will turn OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which the diagnostic runs without a fault. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code will clear after 40 consecutive warm up cycles without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Codes can be cleared by using the Tech 2.
Diagnostic Aids
Due to the moisture associated with exhaust systems, the EGR valve may freeze and stick in colder weather at times. After the vehicle is brought into a warm shop for

repairs, the valve warms and the problem disappears. By watching the Actual EGR and Desired EGR Positions on a cold vehicle with a Tech 2, the fault can be verified easily. Check the freeze frame data to determine if the Diagnostic Trouble Code set when the vehicle was cold by viewing the Engine Coolant Temperature (EGR).
6E1251
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1. The Powertrain OBD System Check prompts the technician to complete some basic checks and store the freeze frame and failure records data on the Tech 2 if applicable. This creates an electronic copy of the data taken when the fault occurred. The information is then stored on the Tech 2 for later reference. 2. Commanding the EGR valve open determines whether the EGR system can control the EGR valve accurately and if the fault is present. 3. If the EGR valve 5 volt reference is shorted to ground, the DVM will read no voltage and an additional Diagnostic Trouble Code will be set and engine performance will be poor. When this circuit is open, only a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0405 will be set.
4. Jumping the 5 volt reference circuit to the signal circuit checks the signal circuit and PCM. The Tech 2 should display the Actual EGR Position as 100% if the signal circuit and PCM are OK. 6. Although the PCM and circuitry acted correctly in the previous step, a problem may still lie within the terminals which would not show up in probe type testing. Check the terminals for being backed out, improperly formed or damaged, and for poor tension. 10. All circuits to the EGR valve are OK at this point. The fault lies internally in the EGR valve and therefore must be replaced. Be sure all gasket material is removed from the EGR mounting surface. Even a small amount of material may cause a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0405 to set. Refer the EGR Valve for on vehicle service of the EGR valve. 13. The replacement PCM must be reprogrammed and the crankshaft position system variation procedure must be performed. Refer to the latest procedures for PCM reprogramming and Powertrain Control Module for the Tooth Error Correction Variation Procedure. 14. Check the terminals for being backed out, improperly formed or damaged, and for poor tension.
DTC P0405 EGR Sensor Circuit Low

1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF. 2. Install a Tech 2. 3. Command the EGR valve to the specified values. Does the Actual EGR Position follow the Desired EGR Position? 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% Go to Step 15 Go to Step 3
1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF. 2. Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector. 3. With a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) connected to ground, probe the 5 V reference circuit to the EGR valve. Does the DVM read near the specified value? 5V Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5 Jumper the EGR valve 5 volt reference circuit to the signal circuit. Does the Actual EGR Position display the specified value? 100% Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7
1. Connect the test light to B+. 2. Probe the 5 V reference circuit to the EGR valve. Does the test light illuminate? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
DTC P0405 EGR Sensor Circuit Low (Cont'd)

Check the 5 V reference and signal circuits for a poor connection or proper terminal tension and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? 1. Connect the test light to B+. 2. Probe the signal circuit to the EGR valve. Does the light illuminate? Check for a short to ground in the EGR valve 5 V reference circuit and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? Check for an open in the EGR valve 5 V reference circuit and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? Replace the EGR valve. Is the action complete? Check for a short to ground in the EGR valve signal circuit and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? Check for an open in the EGR valve signal circuit and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 15 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 15 Go to Step 15 Go to Step 15 Go to Step 15 Go to Step 15
Go to Step 10 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14
10 11
12
13
Go to Step 13
14
Check the affected circuit for a poor connection or proper terminal at the PCM and repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? 1. Using the Tech 2, clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes. 2. Start engine and idle at normal operating temperature. 3. Operate vehicle within the conditions for setting this Diagnostic Trouble Code as specified in the supporting text. Does the Tech 2 indicate that this diagnostic ran and passed?
15
Verify repair
Go to Step 2
6E1253
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0406 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
060R100039
Circuit Description
An Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system is used to lower Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) emission levels caused by high combustion temperatures. It accomplishes this by feeding small amounts of exhaust gases back into the combustion chamber. When the air/fuel mixture is diluted with the exhaust gases, combustion temperatures are reduced. A linear EGR valve is used on this system. The linear EGR valve is designed to accurately supply exhaust gases to the engine without the use of intake manifold vacuum. The valve controls exhaust flow going into the intake manifold form the exhaust manifold through an orifice with a PCM controlled pintle. The PCM controls the pintle position using inputs from the Throttle Position (TP) and Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensors. The PCM then commands the EGR valve to operate when necessary by controlling an ignition signal through the PCM. This can be monitored on a Tech 2 as the Desired EGR Position. The PCM monitors the results of its command through a feedback signal. By sending a 5 volt reference and a ground to the EGR valve, a voltage signal representing the EGR valve pintle position is sent to the PCM. This feedback signal can also be monitored on a Tech 2 and is the actual position of the EGR pintle. The Actual EGR Position should always be near the commanded or Desired EGR Position.
If the PCM detects a continuous short to ground in the signal circuit or the sensor, then DTC P0406 will set. Diagnostic Trouble Code P0406 is a type A code.

D IAT is greater than 5C (41F). D A malfunction is present for 10 seconds.

D The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate. D The PCM will record operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code is stored. D The EGR Valve is disabled.

D The MIL will turn OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which the diagnostic runs without a fault. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) can be cleared by using the Tech 2.
Diagnostic Aids
Due to the moisture associated with exhaust systems, the EGR valve may freeze and stick in colder weather at times. After the vehicle is brought into a warm shop for repairs, the valve warms and the problem disappears. By

watching the Actual EGR and Desired EGR Positions on a cold vehicle with a Tech 2, the fault can be verified easily. Check the freeze frame data to determine if the Diagnostic Trouble Code set when the vehicle was cold by viewing the Engine Coolant Temperature (EGR).
DTC P0406 EGR Sensor Circuit High

1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data, then clear the DTCs. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using the Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0406. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0406 Ran and Passed?
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve from the wiring harness. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check for voltage on the ignition feed circuit at the Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve wiring harness connector. Does the DVM read the following value? 12 Volts Go to Step 6 Go to Step 4 Check the ignition feed circuit, between the EGR sensor and the Engine IG. fuse, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 14 Go to Step 6 Using a DVM, check the resistance of the EGR solenoid. Does the DVM read the following value? less then 5 W Check the EGR solenoid valve Low circuit, between the EGR sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Linear Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve from the wiring harness. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Observe the EGR value on the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 display the following value(s)? 0 Volts 0% Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8
Go to Step 15
6E1255
DTC P0406 EGR Sensor Circuit High (Cont'd)

Check the EGR position feedback circuit, between the EGR sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair 1. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 2. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check for voltage on the 5 volt Reference signal circuit at the Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve wiring harness connector. Does the DVM read the following value? about 5 volts Check the 5 volt Reference signal circuit, between the EGR and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a DVM between the 5 volt Reference signal circuit and the 5 volt signal return (ground) circuit at the EGR wiring harness connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. Does the DVM read the following value? about 5 volts Check the 5 volt signal return (ground) circuit, between the EGR and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a fused jumper wire between the 5 volt Reference signal circuit and the EGR valve position feedback circuit at the EGR wiring harness connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Observe the EGR value on the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 display the following value(s)? 5 volts 100%
Go to Step 15
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 10
10
Go to Step 11
11
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 12
12
Go to Step 15
13
Go to Step 14
Go to Step 15
DTC P0406 EGR Sensor Circuit High (Cont'd)

14
Replace the Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve. Verify Repair. Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair.
15
6E1257
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD
060R100032
Circuit Description
The PCM uses the Bank 1 HO2S 1 and the Bank 1 HO2S 2 heated oxygen sensors. The Bank 1 HO2S 1 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the threeway catalytic converter. The Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst; this in turn indicates the catalysts ability to convert exhaust gases efficiently. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal will be far more active than that produced by the Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor. If the PCM detects a level of Bank 1 HO2S 2 activity that indicates the catalyst is no longer operating efficiently, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0420 will be set. DTC P0420 is a type A code.
D D D D D D
Absolute pressure more than 72 kpa. IAT is more than 10C and less than 70C. Engine run time is more than 360 sec. TPS is less than 3%. Idle time less than 60 sec. Oxygen capacity (OSC) time is less than 1.5 sec or equal to 1.5 sec. One pass fail decision per key on unless a step change is OSC time occurs.


D No related Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D The engine is operating in Closed Loop. D Engine coolant temperature is more than 70C and less than 120C (158F). D Calculated air flow is between 2.5 g/second and 7 g/second. D Vehicle speed is less than 3 km/h (3 mph). D Catalyst temperature is more than 450C and less than 950C. D Airflow reset time more than 8 sec or equal to 8 sec. D Airflow to reset is equal to 9g/s.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition. D Bank 1 HO2S 1/Bank 1 HO2S 2 Activity Test: Ensure that the engine is fully warmed up. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 1 HO2S 2 displays in Neutral while using the Tech 2 IAC RPM control function to maintain a mass air flow of 10 g/second. Compare the amount of activity (frequency and amplitude) on Bank 1 HO2S 1 to the activity on Bank 1 HO2S 2 over a 30 second period. If the amount of activity on Bank 1 HO2S 2 is nearly as great as the activity on Bank 1 HO2S 1, a problem exists. Use the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0420 diagnostic chart. If much less activity is noted on Bank 1 HO2S 2, the system is functioning properly. The TWC Monitor Test Counter displayed on the Tech 2 may be used to monitor the progress of the TWC diagnostic. To complete the TWC diagnostic with a good catalyst, the counter must be allowed to increment to 49 samples and roll over to 0 at least twice. A failed catalyst will require three or more 50sample tests to report a failure.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 7. Difficulty completing the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0420 Status This Ign. test may be encountered in areas where test conditions cannot be maintained easily, especially in urban areas. To minimize the amount of driving required to complete the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0420 Status This Ign. test, use the following procedure: D Allow the engine to warm completely. D With the vehicle in Neutral, monitor the calculated air flow on the Tech 2 and hold part throttle to maintain a reading of over 12 g/second for at least 2 minutes. This will achieve the warm catalyst required for running the test. D Operate the vehicle in second or third gear to remain in the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0420 test conditions described in Conditions for Setting the Diagnostic Trouble Code as much as possible. If you must stop the vehicle, maintain the warm catalyst criteria as follows: Place the vehicle in Neutral. Hold part throttle to maintain a calculated air flow reading of over 15 g/second for the duration of the stop. The TWC Monitor Test Counter displayed on the Tech 2 may be used to monitor the progress of the TWC diagnostic. To complete the TWC diagnostic with a good catalyst, the counter must be allowed to increment to 49 samples and roll over to 0 at least twice.
6E1259
DTC P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Diagnose other Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) first Are any other O2 Sensor Diagnostic Trouble Codes set?
Go to Step 3
1. Visually and physically inspect the threeway catalytic converter for damage. Check for the following: D dents D severe discoloration caused by excessive temperatures D holes D internal rattle caused by damaged catalyst 2. Also, ensure that the threeway catalytic converter is a proper original equipment manufacturer part. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 4 1. Visually and physically inspect the exhaust system between the threeway catalytic converter and the rear converter flange for leaks, damage, and loose or missing hardware. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? 1. Visually and physically inspect the Bank 1 HO2S 2. 2. Ensure that the Bank 1 HO2S 2 is secure and that the pigtail and wiring harness is not contacting the exhaust pipe or is not other wise damaged. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Replace the threeway catalytic converter. NOTE: Check for conditions which may cause catalyst damage (refer to Diagnostic Aids). Is the action complete? Go to Step 7 to verify repair
Go to Step 7 to verify repair
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
1. Review and record the Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Clear Diagnostic Trouble Code P0420. 3. Start the engine and allow it to warm up until the engine coolant temperature monitored on the Tech 2 is above the specified value. 4. Run the engine to maintain the specified mass air flow range for at least 2 minutes. 5. Operate the vehicle to maintain Diagnostic Trouble Code P0420 test conditions (for detailed instructions, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code Test Description in Diagnostic Support). 6. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for DTC P0420 until the DTC P0420 test runs. 7. Note the test result.
Engine coolant temp: greater than 60C (140F) Calculated air flow: between 7 g/second and 41 Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0420 passed this ignition? g/second
Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0440 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
060R100040
Circuit Description
The evaporative system includes the following components: D Fuel tank D EVAP vent solenoid D Fuel tank pressure sensor D Fuel pipes and hoses D Fuel vapor lines D Fuel cap D EVAP canister D Purge lines D EVAP canister purge valve D EVAP service port The evaporative emission system is checked by applying vacuum to the EVAP system and monitoring for a vacuum decay. The PCM monitors the vacuum level through the fuel tank pressure sensor signal. At an appropriate time, the EVAP canister purge valve and the EVAP vent solenoid are turned ON, allowing the engine to draw a small vacuum on the entire evaporative emission system. After the desired vacuum level has been achieved, the EVAP canister purge valve is turned OFF, sealing the system. If a sufficient vacuum level cannot be achieved, a large leak is indicated. This can be caused by the following conditions: D Missing or faulty fuel cap D Disconnected or faulty fuel tank pressure sensor
D Disconnected, damaged, pinched, or blocked fuel tank vapor line D Disconnected or faulty EVAP canister purge valve D Disconnected or faulty EVAP vent solenoid D Open ignition feed circuit to the EVAP vent or purge solenoid D Damaged EVAP canister D Leaking fuel sender assembly Oring D Leaking fuel tank or fuel filler neck Any of the above conditions can set a Diagnostic Trouble Code P0440. DTC P0440 is a type A code.

D Diagnostic trouble codes MAP, TPS, IAT, ECT, EGR, VSS, EVAP, Purge solenoid, and EVAP Vent solenoid not set. D The BARO is greater than 72.3 kPa. D IAT and ECT are between 4.2C and 35C (95F) at engine start up. D The difference between IAT and ECT at start up is less than 6.75C (12.2F). D The Fuel Tank Level Sensor reads between 15% and 85%. D Fuel Level counts vary by less than 12 counts in a 0.125 second time frame. D Maximum Engine Run time is at least 390 seconds. D Fuel surface is not sloshing.

D Fuel tank pressure change is less than calibrated pressure based on average fuel level. D Tank vacuum pressure is less than 10.1 mmH2O and integral vacuum pressure more than calibrated pressure based on average fuel level. The above conditions are met during one injection cycle.
6E1261
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1. The Powertrain OBD System Check prompts the technician to complete some basic checks and store the freeze frame and failure records data on the Tech 2 if applicable. This creates an electronic copy of the data taken when the malfunction occurred. The information is then stored on the Tech 2 for later reference. 4. If a vent solenoid or EVAP canister purge valve electrical malfunction is present, the purge system will not operate correctly. Repairing the electrical malfunction will very likely correct the condition that set Diagnostic Trouble Code P0440. 5. Check the fuel tank pressure sensor at ambient pressure. 7. Forces the fuel tank pressure sensor to rezero. 8. Determines whether or not the EVAP system is sealed sufficiently to be pressurized. If not, the large leak must be located and corrected before continuing with diagnosis. 9. Verifies that the fuel tank pressure sensor accurately reacts to EVAP system pressure changes. 12. Ensures that sufficient source vacuum is present at the EVAP canister purge valve. 13. Check for a stuck closed EVAP canister purge valve. 20. Insures proper system integrity.

D The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate. D The PCM will disable the EVAP purge vale solenoid. D The PCM will record operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The Freeze Frame and Failure Records buffers will store this information. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code is stored.

D The MIL will turn OFF after one ignition cycle in which the diagnostic runs without a fault. D Freeze Frame information and the history Diagnostic Trouble Code will clear after one ignition cycle in which the diagnostic runs without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Codes can be cleared with the Scan Tools Clear Info function.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D A missing, loose, or damaged fuel cap. D Missing or damaged Orings at the EVAP canister fuel vapor fittings and the purge line fittings. D A cracked EVAP canister. D Damaged or disconnected source vacuum line. EVAP purge line, vent hose or fuel tank vapor line. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the MAP sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit or components itself. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor share a ground with the ECT sensor, the TP sensor, the CKP, the CMP, and Automatic transmission temperature sensor. D A poor connection at the PCM: Inspect the harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals. D Damaged harness: Inspect the wiring harness to the EVAP vent solenoid, the EVAP purge solenoid, and the fuel tank pressure sensor for shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive and open circuits. D A kinked, pinched or plugged vacuum source, EVAP purge, or fuel tank vapor line. Verify that the lines are not restricted. Check for charcoal particles. Refer to Carbon Particles Removal from EVAP System before starting repairs. Reviewing the Fail Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0440 EVAP Control System Malfunction

Was the Powertrain OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to Applicable DTC Chart
Is Diagnostic Trouble Code P0461, P0462 or P0463 also set? 1. Visually/Physically check the fuel cap for missing or loose conditions. 2. Replace or tighten the fuel cap is necessary. Was a loose or missing fuel cap found? 1. Install a Tech 2. 2. Command the EVAP canister purge valve and vent solenoid ON and OFF with the Tech 2. Does the purge valve and sent solenoid click when commanded ON and OFF?
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 20
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5
Go to PCM Outputs Diagnosis
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the fuel cap. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Is the Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? (if no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.)
1.51V
Go to Step 8 Go to EVAP Control System Diagnosis
Go to Step 6
Has the battery been disconnected?
Go to Step 7
Disconnect the battery, wait 20 seconds then reconnect the battery. Is the action complete? Go to Step 5 IMPORTANT: Before continuing with this diagnosis, zero the EVAP Pressure and Vacuum gauges on the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413. Also, read the temperature variation instruction card. (refer to tool operating instructions). 1. Reinstall the fuel cap. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 3. Connect the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 to the EVAP service port. 4. Attempt to pressurize the EVAP system to the specified value using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 (monitor the pressure using the gauges on the cart with the switch in the HOLD position). Can the specified value be achieved? 5 in. H2O Go to Step 9
Go to Step 10
1. Maintain the fuel tank pressure at the specified value? 2. Observe the Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. Is the Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? 1.471.51V
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 11
6E1263
DTC P0440 EVAP Control System Malfunction (Cont'd)

10
1. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor line and the EVAP purge line from the EVAP canister. 2. Block the canister fitting for the fuel tank vapor line. 3. Connect a hand vacuum pump to the canister fitting for the EVAP purge line. 4. Ensure that the EVAP vent solenoid is still commanded ON (closed). 5. Attempt to apply the specified vacuum to the EVAP canister. Can vacuum be maintained at the specified value? 1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Restricted fuel tank vapor line. D Restricted EVAP purge line. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?
5 in. Hg (17 kPa)
Go to Step 15
Go to Step 14
11
Go to Step 20
Go to EVAP Control System Diagnosis
12
1. Disconnect the throttle body to EVAP emission canister purge vale vacuum hose from the EVAP canister purge valve. 2. Connect a hand vacuum pump to the EVAP canister purge vale vacuum source fitting. 3. Apply the specified amount of vacuum to the EVAP canister purge valve. 4. Command the EVAP purge valve ON, using the Tech 2. Does the EVAP canister purge vale release the vacuum? 10in. of Hg (34 kPa) Go to Step 13 Go to Step 17
13
1. Connect the in. Hg vacuum gauge on the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 of the vacuum source line. 2. Start the engine. 3. Stabilize the engine rpm near the specified value. 4. Momentarily depress the throttle open and then immediately let the throttle return to idle. Did the vacuum gauge read greater than the specified 2500 RPM 10 value when the throttle was opened then closed? in. Hg
Go to Step 18
14
1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Vent hose disconnected or damaged. D EVAP canister damaged. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? 1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Missing or malfunctioning fuel cap. D Disconnected or leaking fuel tank vapor line. D Disconnected or damaged EVAP purge line. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary?
Go to Step 20
Go to Step 19
15
Go to Step 20
Go to Step 16
DTC P0440 EVAP Control System Malfunction (Cont'd)

16
1. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON. 2. With the cart connected to the EVAP service port continuously attempt to pressurize the EVAP system by leaving the cart control knob in the pressurized position. 3. Using the ultrasonic leak detector J41416, locate and repair any leaks in the EVAP system (it may be necessary to partially lower the fuel tank to examine the top tank connections). Is the action complete? Replace the EVAP canister purge valve. Refer to Diagnostic Aids Is the action complete? Locate and repair the cause of no source or vacuum to the EVAP canister purge valve. Is the action complete? Replace the EVAP vent solenoid. Refer to Diagnostic Aids Is the action complete? IMPORTANT: Review the temperature variation instructions included with J41413 before performing this step. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 3. Pressurize the EVAP system to the specified value using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 (monitor pressure using the gauge on the cart). 4. Switch the rotary switch on the cart to HOLD and observe the EVAP pressure gauge. Does the pressure decrease to less than the specified value within 2 minutes? 2.14V
Go to Step 20 Go to Step 20 Go to Step 20 Go to Step 20
17
18
19
20
System OK
Go to Step 3
6E1265
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM SMALL LEAK DETECTED
060R100040
Circuit Description
The evaporative system includes the following components: D Fuel tank. D EVAP vent solenoid. D Fuel tank pressure sensor. D Fuel pipes and hoses. D Fuel vapor lines. D Fuel cap. D EVAP canister. D Purge lines. D EVAP canister purge valve. D EVAP service port. The evaporative emission system is checked by applying vacuum to the EVAP system and monitoring for a vacuum decay. The PCM monitors the vacuum level through the fuel tank pressure sensor signal. At an appropriate time, the EVAP canister purge valve and the EVAP vent solenoid are turned ON, allowing the engine to draw a small vacuum on the entire evaporative emission system. After the desired vacuum level has been achieved, the EVAP canister purge valve is turned OFF, sealing the system. A leak is detected by monitoring for a decrease in vacuum level over a given time period, when all other variables remain constant. A small leak in the system will cause Diagnostic Trouble Code P0442 to be set. DTC P0442 is a type A code.

D The BARO is greater than 72.3 kPa. D No: MAP, TPS, IAT, ECT, EGR, EVAP Purge Solenoid, EVAP Vent Solenoid, VSS, or System Voltage Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D IAT and ECT at startup are between 4.2C(40F) and 35C (95F). D The difference between IAT and ECT at startup is less than 6.75C (12.2F). D Fuel Level counts vary by less than 8 counts in a 0.125 second time frame. D The Fuel Tank Level Sensor reads between 15% and 85%. D Maximum Engine Run time is at least 390 seconds. D The difference between the actual Fuel Tank Pressure and the expected Fuel Tank Pressure is less than the PCMs expectation. D Fuel Tank Pressure slope is less than or equal to 2.4mm (0.098 inches)of water, per seconds. The above conditions are met, and the following condition is met once per ignition cycle: D A single 10 second vacuum decay slope and 2 five second vacuum slopes are all greater than or equal to the PCMs upper threshold.

D The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate. D The PCM will record operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The Freeze Frame and Failure Records buffers will store this information. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code is stored.

D The MIL will turn OFF after 3 consecutive ignition cycles in which the diagnostic runs without a fault. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code will clear after 40 consecutive warm up cycles without a fault. D A Tech 2 can clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
D Damaged harness: Inspect the wiring harness to the EVAP vent solenoid, the EVAP purge solenoid, and the fuel tank pressure sensor for an intermittent open or intermittent short circuit. Check for charcoal particles. Refer to Carbon Particle Removal from EVAP System before starting repairs. Reviewing the Fail Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that causes the Diagnostic Trouble Code to set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1. The Powertrain OBD System Check prompts the technician to complete some basic checks and store the freeze frame and failure records data on the Tech 2 if applicable. This creates an electronic copy of the data taken when the malfunction occurred. The information is then stored on the Tech 2 for later reference. 3. If a vent solenoid or EVAP canister purge valve electrical malfunction is present, the purge system will not operate correctly. Repairing the electrical malfunction will very likely correct the condition that set Diagnostic Trouble Code P0442. 4. Checks the fuel tank pressure sensor at ambient pressure. 6. Forces the fuel tank pressure sensor to rezero. 7. Verifies that the fuel tank pressure sensor accurately reacts to EVAP system pressure changes.
Diagnostic Aids
D A loose, missing, or damaged fuel cap. D Missing or damaged Orings at the fuel vapor fittings and the EVAP purge line canister fittings. D Cracked EVAP canister. D Damaged source vacuum line, EVAP purge line, EVAP vent hose or fuel vapor line. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the MAP sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit or components itself. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor share a ground with the ECT sensor, the TP sensor the CMP, the CKP and Automatic transmission temperature sensor. D Poor connection at PCM: Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection.
DTC P0442 EVAP Control System Small Leak Detected

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to Applicable DTC Table
Is Diagnostic Trouble Code P0461, P0462, or P0463 also set? 1. Install a Tech 2. 2. Command the EVAP canister purge valve and vent solenoid ON and OFF with the Tech 2? Does the purge valve and vent solenoid click ON and OFF?
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1.51V
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 5
6E1267
DTC P0442 EVAP Control System Small Leak Detected (Cont'd)

Go to Step 6
Disconnect the battery, wait 20 seconds then reconnect the battery. Is the action complete? Go to Step 4 IMPORTANT: Before continuing with this diagnosis, zero the EVAP Pressure and Vacuum Gauges on the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413. Also read the temperature variation instruction card. (Refer to tool operating instructions). 1. Reinstall the fuel cap. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 3. Connect the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 to the EVAP service port. 4. Pressurize the EVAP system to the specified value using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 (monitor the pressure using the gauge on the cart with the switch in the HOLD position. 5. Observe the Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. 5 in. H2O (2 Is the Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? in. H2O)
Go to Step 8
IMPORTANT: Review the temperature variation instructions included with the J41413 before performing this step. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 3. Pressurize the EVAP system to the specified value using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 (monitor the pressure using the gauge on the cart). 4. Switch the rotary switch on the cart to HOLD and observe the EVAP pressure gauge. Does the pressure decrease to less than the specified value within 2 minutes? 1.47 1.51V Go to Step 9
1. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor line and the EVAP purge line from the EVAP canister. 2. Block the fuel tank vapor line fitting on the canister. 3. Connect a hand vacuum pump to the EVAP purge line fitting on the canister. 4. Ensure that the EVAP vent solenoid is still commanded ON (closed). 5. Attempt to apply vacuum to the canister. Can the specified vacuum be maintained? 5 in. Hg 1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Vent hose disconnected or damaged. D EVAP canister damaged 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary Was a repair necessary?
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 10
10
Go to Step 14
Go to Step 11
DTC P0442 EVAP Control System Small Leak Detected (Cont'd)

11
Replace the EVAP vent solenoid. Refer to Diagnostic Aids Is the action complete? 1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Malfunctioning fuel cap. D Leaking fuel tank vapor line. D Damaged EVAP purge line. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary Was a repair necessary? 1. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 2. With the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 connected to the EVAP system by leaving the cart control knob in the pressurized position. 3. Using the ultrasonic leak detector J41416, locate and repair the leak in the EVAP system (it may be necessary to partially lower the fuel tank to examine the top tank connections). Is the action complete? IMPORTANT: Review the temperature variation instructions included with the J41413 before performing this step. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with engine OFF. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 3. Pressurize the EVAP system to the specified value using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 (monitor the pressure using the gauge on the cart). 4. Switch the rotary switch on the cart to HOLD and observe the EVAP pressure gauge. Does the pressure decrease to less than the specified value within 2 minutes? 2.14V
Go to Step 14
12
Go to Step 14
Go to Step 13
13
Go to Step 14
14
System OK
Go to Step 3
6E1269
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM VERY SMALL LEAK DETECTED
060R100040
Circuit Description
The evaporative system includes the following components: D Fuel tank. D EVAP vent solenoid. D Fuel tank pressure sensor. D Fuel pipes and hoses. D Fuel vapor lines. D Fuel cap. D EVAP canister. D Purge lines. D EVAP canister purge valve. D EVAP service port. The evaporative emission system is checked by applying vacuum to the EVAP system and monitoring for a vacuum decay. The PCM monitors the vacuum level through the fuel tank pressure sensor signal. At an appropriate time, the EVAP canister purge valve and the EVAP vent solenoid are turned ON, allowing the engine to draw a small vacuum on the entire evaporative emission system. After the desired vacuum level has been achieved, the EVAP canister purge valve is turned OFF, sealing the system. A leak is detected by monitoring for a decrease in vacuum level over a given time period, when all other variables remain constant. A very small leak in the system will cause Diagnostic Trouble Code P0456 to be set. DTC P0456 is a type A code.

D The BARO is greater than 72.3 kPa. D No: MAP, TPS, IAT, ECT, EGR, EVAP Purge Solenoid, EVAP Vent Solenoid, VSS, or System Voltage Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D IAT and ECT at startup are between 4.2C(40F) and 35C (95F). D The difference between IAT and ECT at startup is less than 6.75C (12.2F). D Fuel Level counts vary by less than 8 counts in a 0.125 second time frame. D The Fuel Tank Level Sensor reads between 40% and 85%. D Maximum Engine Run time is at least 390 seconds. D The difference between the actual Fuel Tank Pressure and the expected Fuel Tank Pressure is less than the PCMs expectation. D Fuel Tank Pressure slope is less than or equal to 1.09mm (0.043 inches) of water, per seconds. The above conditions are met, and the following condition is met once per ignition cycle: D A single 30 second vacuum decay slope and 5 six second vacuum slopes are all greater than or equal to the PCMs upper threshold.

D The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate. D The PCM will record operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The Freeze Frame and Failure Records buffers will store this information. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code is stored.

D The MIL will turn OFF after 3 consecutive ignition cycles in which the diagnostic runs without a fault. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code will clear after 40 consecutive warm up cycles without a fault. D A Tech 2 can clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
D Damaged harness: Inspect the wiring harness to the EVAP vent solenoid, the EVAP purge solenoid, and the fuel tank pressure sensor for an intermittent open or intermittent short circuit. Check for charcoal particles. Refer to Carbon Particle Removal from EVAP System before starting repairs. Reviewing the Fail Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that causes the Diagnostic Trouble Code to set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1. The Powertrain OBD System Check prompts the technician to complete some basic checks and store the freeze frame and failure records data on the Tech 2 if applicable. This creates an electronic copy of the data taken when the malfunction occurred. The information is then stored on the Tech 2 for later reference. 3. If a vent solenoid or EVAP canister purge valve electrical malfunction is present, the purge system will not operate correctly. Repairing the electrical malfunction will very likely correct the condition that set Diagnostic Trouble Code P0456. 4. Checks the fuel tank pressure sensor at ambient pressure. 6. Forces the fuel tank pressure sensor to rezero. 7. Verifies that the fuel tank pressure sensor accurately reacts to EVAP system pressure changes.
Diagnostic Aids
D A loose, missing, or damaged fuel cap. D Missing or damaged Orings at the fuel vapor fittings and the EVAP purge line canister fittings. D Cracked EVAP canister. D Damaged source vacuum line, EVAP purge line, EVAP vent hose or fuel vapor line. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the MAP sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit or components itself. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor share a ground with the ECT sensor, the TP sensor the CMP, the CKP and Automatic transmission temperature sensor. D Poor connection at PCM: Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection.
DTC P0456 EVAP Control System Very Small Leak Detected

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to Applicable DTC Table
Is Diagnostic Trouble Code P0461, P0462, or P0463 also set? 1. Install a Tech 2. 2. Command the EVAP canister purge valve and vent solenoid ON and OFF with the Tech 2? Does the purge valve and vent solenoid click ON and OFF?
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1.51V
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 5
6E1271
DTC P0456 EVAP Control System Very Small Leak Detected (Cont'd)
Go to Step 6
Disconnect the battery, wait 20 seconds then reconnect the battery. Is the action complete? Go to Step 4 IMPORTANT: Before continuing with this diagnosis, zero the EVAP Pressure and Vacuum Gauges on the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413. Also read the temperature variation instruction card. (Refer to tool operating instructions). 1. Reinstall the fuel cap. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 3. Connect the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 to the EVAP service port. 4. Pressurize the EVAP system to the specified value using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 (monitor the pressure using the gauge on the cart with the switch in the HOLD position. 5. Observe the Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. 5 in. H2O (2 Is the Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? in. H2O)
Go to Step 8
IMPORTANT: Review the temperature variation instructions included with the J41413 before performing this step. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 3. Pressurize the EVAP system to the specified value using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 (monitor the pressure using the gauge on the cart). 4. Switch the rotary switch on the cart to HOLD and observe the EVAP pressure gauge. Does the pressure decrease to less than the specified value within 2 minutes? 1.47 1.51V Go to Step 9
1. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor line and the EVAP purge line from the EVAP canister. 2. Block the fuel tank vapor line fitting on the canister. 3. Connect a hand vacuum pump to the EVAP purge line fitting on the canister. 4. Ensure that the EVAP vent solenoid is still commanded ON (closed). 5. Attempt to apply vacuum to the canister. Can the specified vacuum be maintained? 5 in. Hg 1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Vent hose disconnected or damaged. D EVAP canister damaged 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary Was a repair necessary?
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 10
10
Go to Step 14
Go to Step 11
DTC P0456 EVAP Control System Very Small Leak Detected (Cont'd)
11
Replace the EVAP vent solenoid. Refer to Diagnostic Aids Is the action complete? 1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Malfunctioning fuel cap. D Leaking fuel tank vapor line. D Damaged EVAP purge line. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary Was a repair necessary? 1. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 2. With the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 connected to the EVAP system by leaving the cart control knob in the pressurized position. 3. Using the ultrasonic leak detector J41416, locate and repair the leak in the EVAP system (it may be necessary to partially lower the fuel tank to examine the top tank connections). Is the action complete? IMPORTANT: Review the temperature variation instructions included with the J41413 before performing this step. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with engine OFF. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 3. Pressurize the EVAP system to the specified value using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 (monitor the pressure using the gauge on the cart). 4. Switch the rotary switch on the cart to HOLD and observe the EVAP pressure gauge. Does the pressure decrease to less than the specified value within 2 minutes? 2.14V
Go to Step 14
12
Go to Step 14
Go to Step 13
13
Go to Step 14
14
System OK
Go to Step 3
6E1273
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0443 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
060R100040
Circuit Description
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) controls the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve through the use of a control (ground) circuit. If the PCM commands the Purge solenoid to maximum duty cycle (100%) but the voltage remains High (12 Volts); or, if the PCM commands the Purge solenoid to minimum duty cycle (0%) but the voltage remains Low (0 volts), then DTC P0443 will set. DTC P0443 is a type A code.
D The PCM will store the conditions that were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in Failure Records.

D The PCM will turn OFF the MIL after three consecutive trips without a reported failure. D A History DTC will clear after 40 consecutive trips without a reported failure. D The DTC can be cleared using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.

D Ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts D Engine run time is greater than 32 seconds The above conditions are met for 20 test failures within 40 test samples while 12.5 msec. D PCM senses voltage is High with the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid commanded ON. D PCM senses voltage is Low with the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid commanded OFF.
Diagnostic Aids
D Poor connections , or a damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for: backedout terminals, improper mating or damaged terminals. Also check for open circuits, shorts to ground, and shorts to voltage. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the MAP sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit or components itself. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor share a ground with the ECT sensor, the TP sensor the CMP, the CKP, and automatic transmission temperature sensor.

D The PCM will illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected.
DTC P0443 EVAP Control System Purge Control Valve Circuit Malfunction
Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data, then clear the DTCs. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using the Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0443. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0443 Ran and Passed?
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid from the wiring harness connector from the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check for voltage on the Engine IG. Fuse pin of the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid wiring harness connector. Does the DVM read the following value? 12 Volts Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Check the suspect circuit between the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid connector and the Engine IG. Fuse for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Using a DVM, check the resistance of the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid. Does the DVM read the following value? less than 5 W Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) connectors from the PCM. 3. Check the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid control circuit between the PCM and EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8
6E1275
DTC P0443 EVAP Control System Purge Control Valve Circuit Malfunction (Cont'd)
Replace the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid. Verify Repair. Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair.
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
060R100040
Circuit Description
The evaporative system includes the following components: D Fuel tank. D EVAP vent solenoid. D Fuel tank pressure sensor. D Fuel pipes and hoses. D Fuel vapor lines. D Fuel cap. D EVAP canister. D Purge lines. D EVAP canister purge valve. D EVAP service port. The evaporative emission system is checked by applying vacuum to the EVAP system and monitoring for a vacuum decay. The PCM monitors the vacuum level through the fuel tank pressure sensor signal. At an appropriate time, the EVAP canister purge valve and the EVAP vent solenoid are turned ON, allowing the engine to draw a small vacuum on the entire evaporative emission system. After the desired vacuum level has been achieved, the EVAP canister purge valve is turned OFF, sealing the system. A restricted or blocked EVAP canister vent path is detected by drawing a vacuum on the EVAP system, turning OFF the EVAP vent solenoid and the EVAP
canister purge valve (EVAP vent solenoid Open, EVAP purge PWM 0%) and monitoring the fuel tank vacuum sensor input. With the EVAP vent solenoid open, any vacuum in the system should decrease quickly unless the vent path is blocked. A blockage can be caused by the following conditions: D Faulty EVAP vent solenoid (stuck closed). D Plugged, kinked or pinched vent hose. D Shorted EVAP vent solenoid driver circuit. D Plugged evaporative canister. If any of these conditions are present, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0446 will set. DTC P0446 is a type B code.

D The BARO is greater than 72.3 kPa. D No: MAP, TPS, IAT, ECT, EGR, EVAP Purge Solenoid, EVAP Vent Solenoid, VSS or System Voltage Diagnostic Trouble Codes. D IAT and ECT at startup are between 4.2C(40F) and 35C (95F). D The difference between IAT and ECT at startup is less than 6.75C (12.2F). D The Fuel Tank Level Sensor reads between 15% and 85%. The above conditions are met, and the following condition is met once while ignition cycle:

D Fuel Tank vacuum is greater than 20 cm (8 inches) of water while 2 seconds.
6E1277
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1. The Powertrain OBD System Check prompts the technician to complete some basic checks and store the freeze frame and failure records data on the Tech 2 if applicable. This creates an electronic copy of the data taken when the malfunction occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition. 3. If a vent solenoid electrical malfunction is present, the purge system will not operate correctly. Repairing the electrical malfunction will very likely correct the condition that set Diagnostic Trouble Code P0446. 4. Checks the fuel tank pressure sensor at ambient pressure. 6. Forces the fuel tank pressure sensor to rezero. 7. Verifies that the fuel tank pressure sensor accurately reacts to EVAP system pressure changes. 9. Checks for a blocked EVAP canister. 13. Duplicates the Powertrain OnBoard Diagnostic test.

D The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate. D The PCM will records operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The Freeze Frame and Failure Records buffers will store this information. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code is stored.

D The MIL will turn off after 3 consecutive ignition cycles in which the diagnostic runs without a fault. D A history DTC will clear after 40 consecutive warm up cycles without a fault. D A Tech 2 can clear the DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM: Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the MAP sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit or components itself. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor share a ground with the ECT sensor, the TP sensor the CKP, the CMP, and automatic transmission temperature sensor. D Damaged harness: Inspect the wiring harness to the EVAP vent solenoid and the fuel tank pressure sensor for shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. D Kinked, pinched or plugged vent hose: Verify that the vent hose between the canister and the EVAP vent solenoid is not restricted. Check for charcoal particles. Refer to Carbon Particles Removal from EVAP System before starting repairs. Reviewing the Fail Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that causes the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0446 EVAP Control System Vent Control Circuit Malfunction

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to Applicable DTC chart
Is Diagnostic Trouble Code P0461, P0462, or P0463 also set? 1. Install a Tech 2. 2. Command the EVAP canister purge valve and vent solenoid ON and OFF with the Tech 2? Does the purge valve and vent solenoid click ON and OFF? (if no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.)
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the fuel cap. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Is the Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? 1.51V Go to Step 7 Go to EVAP Control System Diagnosis Go to Step 5 Has the battery been disconnected?
Go to Step 6
Disconnect the battery, wait 30 seconds, then reconnect the battery. Is the action complete? Go to Step 4 IMPORTANT: Before continuing with this diagnosis, zero the EVAP Pressure and Vacuum Gauges on the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413. Also read the temperature variation instruction card. (Refer to tool operating instructions). 1. Reinstall the fuel cap. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 3. Connect the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 to the EVAP service port. 4. Pressurize the EVAP system to the specified value using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 (monitor the pressure using the gauge on the cart with the switch in the HOLD position. 5. Observe the Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. Is the Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? 1.52 1.69V Go to Step 8
1. Maintain the specified EVAP pressure. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid OFF (open) while observing the EVAP pressure gauge on the cart J41413. Does the EVAP pressure return to the specified value within 5 seconds? 0 in. H2O
Go to Step 9
6E1279
DTC P0446 EVAP Control System Vent Control Circuit Malfunction (Cont'd)
1. Disconnect the large vent hose (marked air) from the EVAP canister. 2. Switch the rotary switch on the cart J41413 to PURGE. 3. Start the engine and allow the engine to reach operating temperature. 4. Observe the vacuum gauge for 5 seconds while holding the engine speed at the specified value. Does the vacuum remain below the specified value? 1. Inspect the EVAP vent hose between the EVAP canister and the EVAP vent solenoid for being kinked, pinched, or other wise blocked. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?
30 in. H2O 2500 RPM
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 12
10
Go to Step 11
11
Replace the EVAP vent solenoid. Refer to Diagnostic Aids Is the action complete? Replace the EVAP canister. Refer to EVAP Canister Replacement. Is the action complete? 1. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 2. Pressurize the EVAP system to the specified value. 3. Switch the rotary switch on the cart J41413 to HOLD. 4. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid OFF (open) while observing the EVAP pressure gauge on the cart J41413. Does the EVAP pressure return to the specified value within 5 seconds? 1.51V
12
13
System OK
Go to Step 3
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0449 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM VENT VALVE/SOLENOID CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
060R100040
Circuit Description
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) controls the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve through the use of a control (ground) circuit. If the PCM commands the Vent solenoid but the voltage remains High (12 Volts); or, if the PCM commands the Vent solenoid OFF but the voltage remains Low (0 volts), then DTC P0449 will set. DTC P0449 is a type A code.

D The PCM will turn OFF the MIL after three consecutive trips without a reported failure. D A History DTC will clear after 40 consecutive trips without a reported failure. D The DTC can be cleared using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.
Diagnostic Aids
D Poor connections , or a damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for: backedout terminals, improper mating or damaged terminals. Also check for open circuits, shorts to ground, and shorts to voltage. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the MAP sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit or components itself. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor share a ground with the ECT sensor, the TP sensor, the CKP sensor, the CMP sensor and the automatic transmission temperature sensor.

D Ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts. D Engine run time is greater than 32 seconds. The above mentioned conditions are met and one of the following two conditions are met for 20 tests within a 40 tests test sample while 125 msec: D PCM senses voltage is High with the EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid commanded ON. D PCM senses voltage is Low with the EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid commanded OFF.

D The PCM will illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store the conditions that were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in Failure Records.
6E1281
DTC P0449 EVAP Control System Vent Valve/Solenoid Circuit Malfunction

Go to Step 3
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid from the wiring harness connector from the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check for voltage on the Engine IG. Fuse pin of the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid wiring harness connector. Does the DVM read the following value? 12 Volts Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Check the suspect circuit between the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid connector and the Engine IG. Fuse for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Using a DVM, check the resistance of the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid. Does the DVM read the following value? less than 5 W Go to Step 6 Go to Step 4 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) connectors from the PCM. 3. Check the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid control circuit between the PCM and EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair
DTC P0449 EVAP Control System Vent Valve/Solenoid Circuit Malfunction (Cont'd)
7 8
Replace the EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid. Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair. Go to Step 8 Verify repair. Go to Step 7
6E1283
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE
060R100041
Circuit Description
The Fuel Level sensor is an important input to the PCM for the Enhanced Evaporative System Diagnostic. The PCM needs the fuel level information in order to know the volume of fuel in the tank. The fuel level affects the rate of change in air pressure in the EVAP system. Several of the Enhanced Evaporative System Diagnostic subtest are dependent upon correct fuel level information. The diagnostic will not run when the tank is greater than 85% or less than 15% full. (This sensor signal disables the misfire when the fuel levels are less than 15%). DTC P0461 is a type D Code.

D The PCM turns the MIL off after 3 consecutive driving trips withouta fault condition present. D A history DTC will clear if no fault conditions have been detected for 40 warmup cycles (coolant temperature has risen 40F from the startup coolant temperature and the engine coolant temperature exceeds 160F during that same ignition cycle) or the Tech 2 clearing feature has been used.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 4. This step determines if the fuel gauge and fuel level sender module are operating correctly.

D The Fuel Level signal changes by less than 7 counts (0.14 volts) over a distance of 240 km (146 miles).

D The PCM will not turn on the MIL.
DTC P0461 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Range/Performance

1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Compare the fuel level on the Tech 2 with the vehicle fuel gauge. Are the levels approximately the same? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 5 1. 2. 3. 4. Record the vehicle fuel gauge reading. Turn OFF the ignition. Disconnect the PCMs connector. Turn ON the ignition. Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Did the vehicle fuel gauge reading change? 4 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the fuel tank level sensor connector. 3. Using a fused jumper wire, jump the fuel level input to the fuel level sensor ground. 4. Turn the ignition ON. Does the Tech 2 and the fuel gauge indicate the specified value? 5 6 Replace the Fuel tank level sensor.
0% (Empty)
Go to Step 6
Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Go to Step 7
1. Using the Tech 2, select the Diagnostic Trouble Code, and Clear Info. 2. Start the engine. 3. Idle at the normal operating temperature. 4. Select the DTC and the Specific 5. Enter the DTC number which was set. 6. Operate the vehicle within the conditions for setting this DTC. Does the Tech 2 indicate that this diagnostic Ran and Passed? System OK Go to Step 2
6E1285
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
060R100041
Circuit Description
The Fuel Level Sensor is an important input to the PCM for the Enhanced Evaporative System Diagnostic. The PCM needs the fuel level information in order to know the volume of fuel in the tank. The fuel level affects the rate of change in air pressure in the EVAP system. Several of the Enhanced Evaporative System Diagnostic subtest are dependent upon correct fuel level information. The diagnostic will not run when the tank is greater than 85% or less than 15% full. (This sensor signal disables the misfire when the fuel levels are less than 15%). If the PCM detects a continuous short to ground in the Fuel Level sensor or circuit, then a code P0462 will set. DTC P0462 is a type D code.


D The PCM turns the MIL OFF after 3 consecutive driving trips without a fault condition present. D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code will clear if no fault conditions have been detected for 40 warmup cycles (coolant temperature has risen 40F from the startup coolant temperature and the engine coolant temperature exceeds 160F during that same ignition cycle) or the Tech 2 clearing feature has been used.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 4. This step checks the wiring, connections, and the PCM. 6. This step checks the wiring, connections, and the PCM.

D The Fuel Level signal voltage is less than 0.06 volts. The condition is met for 150 test failures within 200 test samples.
DTC P0462 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Low Input

1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Observe the fuel level on the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 display the specified value? 0%1% Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Refer to Fuel Gauge Diagnosis. With a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to ground, probe the fuel level sensor input at the Fuel Level sensor. Is the voltage less than the specified value? 0.13 V Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 10 Check for a open in the fuel level sensor input circuit. Was a problem found? With a DVM to ground, probe the fuel level module output at the Fuel Level sensor. Is the voltage greater than the specified value? 2.9 V Go to Step 9 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 11 Repair the open in the fuel level sensor input circuit. Is the action complete? Repair the open in the fuel level output circuit. Is the action complete? Repair the short to voltage in the fuel level output circuit. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
3 4
5 6
7 8 9
10
Go to Step 11
11
1. 2. 3. 4.
Using the Tech 2, select the DTC and the Clear Info. Start the engine. Idle at the normal operating temperature. Select the Diagnostic Trouble Code and the Specific. 5. Enter the number which was set. 6. Operate the vehicle within the conditions for setting this Diagnostic Trouble Code as specified in the supporting text. Does the Tech 2 indicate that this diagnostic Ran and Passed? System OK Go to Step 2
6E1287
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
060R100041
Circuit Description
The Fuel Level sensor is an important input to the PCM for the Enhanced Evaporative System Diagnostic. The PCM needs the fuel level information in order to know the volume of fuel in the tank. The fuel level affects the rate of change in air pressure in the EVAP system. Several of the Enhanced Evaporative System Diagnostic subtests are dependent upon correct fuel level information. The diagnostic will not run when the tank is greater than 85% or less than 15% full. (This sensor signal disables the misfire when the fuel levels are less than 15%). If the PCM detects a continuous short to voltage in the Fuel Level sensor or circuit, then a DTC P0463 will set. DTC P0463 is a type D code.


D The PCM turns the MIL off after 3 consecutive driving trips without a fault condition present. D A history DTC will clear if no fault conditions have been detected for 40 warmup cycles (coolant temperature has risen 40F from the startup coolant temperature and the engine coolant temperature exceeds 160F during that same ignition cycle) or the Tech 2 clearing feature has been used.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 5. This step checks the wiring, connections, and the PCM. 7. This step checks the wiring, connections, and the PCM.

D The Fuel Level signal voltage is greater than 4.94 volts. The condition is met for 150 test failures within 200 test samples.
DTC P0463 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit High Input

1. Install the Tech 2. Observe the fuel level on the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 display the specified value? 99% 100% Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Refer to Fuel Gauge Diagnosis. With a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to ground, probe the Fuel Level sensor input at the Sensor Input cavity. Is the voltage greater than the specified value? 2.9 V Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 10 Check for a open in the Fuel Level sensor ground. Was a problem found? Check for an open in the Fuel Level sensor ground. Was a problem found? Repair the short to voltage in the fuel level input circuit. Is the repair complete? Repair the short to voltage in the fuel level output circuit. Is the repair complete? PCM to must be PCM Go to Step 11 Repair the open in the fuel level sensor ground. Is the repair complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement reprogrammed. Refer Replacement/Programming. Is the action complete?
3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10
11
1. 2. 3. 4.
Using the Tech 2, select the DTC and the Clear Info. Start the engine. Idle at the normal operating temperature. Select the Diagnostic Trouble Code and the Specific. 5. Enter the Diagnostic Trouble Code number which was set. 6. Operate the vehicle within the conditions for setting this Diagnostic Trouble Code as specified in the supporting text. Does the Tech 2 indicate that this diagnostic Ran and Passed? System OK Go to Step 2
6E1289
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Noisy Signal
060R100041
Circuit Description
The fuel level sensor is an important input to powertrain control module (PCM) for the enhanced evaporative system diagnostic. Fuel level information is needed for the PCM to know the volume of fuel in the tank. The fuel level affects the rate of change in air pressure in the evaporative system. The sending unit is a float in the fuel tank which moves a wiper arm across a variable resistor. Low fuel level causes high resistance in the sending unit, and this is recognized by the PCM because the circuit operates at a corresponding low voltage. When the circuit is continuously open or has a high resistance connection, DTC P0464 is set.

D The PCM records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The Failure Records buffers stores this information. D A history DTC is stored. D The PCM will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).

D A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm up cycles without a fault. D The Tech 2 can clear the DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
D Damaged harnessInspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the fuel level display on the scan tool while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.

D No Fuel level DTCs set. D Fuel volume level is more than 3%. D IAT is more than 10C. D Engine is Running. When there are 40 test failures within 60 test samples, it is stored.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 8. The following chart can be used to check the sending unit:
DTC P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Noisy Signal

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition Off, Engine Off. 2. Perform Visual/Fiscal Check for following point. D Loosen harness connector D Clacked harness connector D Poor wires condition D Fuel tank condition D Poor sensor condition 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 3
1. Disassemble fuel tank on the vehicle. 2. Check the below items. D Fuel sender. Was a problem found? Go to Step 4 Verify repair Go to Step 5 Go to Step 5 Replace the Fuel sender. Was the action completed? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Was the action complete?
4 5
6E1291
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0480 COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
060R100042
Circuit Description
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) controls the engagement of the cooling fan Low speed through the use of a relay and a control circuit. If the PCM commands the fan to Low speed and then senses that the fan did not turn ON, or if the PCM commands the fan OFF from Low speed and then senses that the fan did not turn OFF, the PCM will set a DTC P0480. DTC P0480 is a type D code.

D The PCM will not turn on the Malfunction Indicator Lamp. D The PCM will store the conditions that were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in Failure Records.

D A history DTC will clear after 40 consecutive trips without a reported failure. D The DTC can be cleared using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.

D Ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts. D Engine run time is greater than 32 seconds. The above conditions are met and one of the following conditions are met for 20 test within 40 test samples while 125 msec. D PCM sensed voltage is High with the Low Speed Fan OFF. OR D PCM sensed voltage is Low with the Low Speed Fan ON.
Diagnostic Aids
D Poor connections or a damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for: backed out terminals, improper mating or damaged terminals. Also check for open circuits, shorts to ground, and shorts to voltage.
DTC P0480 Cooling Fan 1 Control Circuit Malfunction

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data, then clear the DTCs. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using the Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0480. Does the Tech 2 indicate that DTC P0480 Ran and Passed?
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Remove the Low Fan Relay from the Underhood Electrical Center. 3. Ignition OFF. 4. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check for voltage on the ELEC. FAN Fuse pin of the Low fan Relay connector. Does the DVM read the following value? 12 Volts Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 1. Ignition ON. 2. Using a DVM, check for voltage on the ENGINE FAN Fuse pin of the Low Fan Relay connector. Does the DVM read the following value? 12 Volts Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Check the suspect circuit between the Low Fan Relay connector and Fuse for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair
6E1293
DTC P0480 Cooling Fan 1 Control Circuit Malfunction (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) connectors from the PCM. 3. Check the Low Fan Relay control circuit between the PCM and Underhood Electrical Center for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Reinstall the Low Fan Relay. 2. Using a fused jumper, ground the Low Fan Relay control circuit at the PCM connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. Does the fan run at low speed? Go to Step 9 Verify repair Go to Step 8 Replace the Low Fan Relay. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair.
8 9
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0481 COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
060R100042
6E1295
Circuit Description
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) controls the engagement of the cooling fan Low speed through the use of a relay and a control circuit. If the PCM commands the fan to Low speed and then senses that the fan did not turn ON, or if the PCM commands the fan OFF from Low speed and then senses that the fan did not turn OFF, the PCM will set a DTC P0481. DTC P0481 is a type D code.

D The PCM will not turn on the Malfunction Indicator Lamp. D The PCM will store the conditions that were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in Failure Records.


D Ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts. D Engine run time is greater than 32 seconds. The above conditions are met and one of the following conditions are met for 20 test within 40 test samples while 125 msec. D PCM sensed voltage is High with the High Speed Fan OFF. OR D PCM sensed voltage is High with the High Speed Fan ON.
Diagnostic Aids
D Poor connections or a damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for: backed out terminals, improper mating or damaged terminals. Also check for open circuits, shorts to ground, and shorts to voltage.
DTC P0481 Cooling Fan 2 Control Circuit Malfunction

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data, then clear the DTCs. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using the Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0480. Does the Tech 2 indicate that DTC P0480 Ran and Passed?
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Remove the Low Fan Relay from the Underhood Electrical Center. 3. Ignition OFF. 4. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check for voltage on the ELEC. FAN Fuse pin of the Low fan Relay connector. Does the DVM read the following value? 12 Volts Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 1. Ignition ON. 2. Using a DVM, check for voltage on the ENGINE FAN Fuse pin of the Low Fan Relay connector. Does the DVM read the following value? 12 Volts Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Check the suspect circuit between the Low Fan Relay connector and Fuse for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair
DTC P0481 Cooling Fan 2 Control Circuit Malfunction (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) connectors from the PCM. 3. Check the Low Fan Relay control circuit between the PCM and Underhood Electrical Center for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Reinstall the High Fan Relay. 2. Using a fused jumper, ground the High Fan Relay control circuit at the PCM connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. Does the fan run at High speed? Go to Step 9 Verify repair Go to Step 8 Replace the High Fan Relay. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair.
8 9
6E1297
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0502 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
060R100043
Circuit Description
The vehicle speed sensor has a magnet rotated by the transmission output shaft. Attached to the sensor is a hall effect circuit that interacts with the magnetic field created by the rotating magnet. A 12volt operating supply for the speed sensor hall circuit is supplied from the meter fuse. The VSS pulses to ground the 5volt signal sent from the powertrain control module (PCM) on the reference circuit. The PCM interprets vehicle speed by the number of pulses to ground per second on the reference circuit. DTC P0502 is a type B code.
The Decel Test will pass if vehicle speed is greater than 24 km/h (15mph). Power Test D MAP is greater than 70 kPa. D Throttle Position is between 25% and 70%. D Engine Speed is between 2200 RPM and 4400 RPM. The Power Test will fail if vehicle speed is less than 8 km/h (5 mph). The Power Test will pass if vehicle speed is greater than 8km/h (5mph) without any VSS DTCs present, or if vehicle speed is greater than 49 km/h (30mph) with VSS Diagnostic Trouble Codes present.

D Engine is running. D Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). D System voltage is between 10 and 16 volts. When the above conditions are met, one of the following tests will run: Decel Test D MAP is less than 35 kPa. D Throttle Position is less than 0.8%. D Engine Speed is between 1500 RPM and 3500 RPM. The Decel Test will fail if vehicle speed is less than 8 km/h (5mph).

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the second time the fault is detected. D Base shift logic on RPM only. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D Diagnostic Trouble Code P0502 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function. locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness: Inspect the wiring harness to the EVAP vent solenoid, the EVAP purge solenoid, and the fuel tank pressure sensor for an intermittent open or intermittent short circuit.
Diagnostic Aids
D Poor connection at PCM: Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken
DTC P0502 VSS Circuit Low Input

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the VSS connector. 3. Using a test light to battery +, probe the connector ground wire. Did the light illuminate? Go to Step 4 Verify repair
Go to Step 3
3 4
Repair the open in the sensor ground circuit. 1. Ignition ON, sensor disconnected. 2. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), measure at the VSS connector between ground and voltage supply. Was the measurement near the specified value? Repair the open or short to ground in the VSS sensor circuit. Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Check the BLU/BLK wire between the VSS sensor connector and the PCM for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground Was the faulty condition located? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Using a DVM, measure the resistance between the VSS sensor body and transmission case (ground). Is the resistance above the specified value? 10 K W Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Remove the VSS from the transmission case. 2. Visually inspect the VSS for damage. Does the VSS appear to be OK? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the VSS. Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Battery voltage
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 5
9 10
6E1299
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0506 IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED
060R100025
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) controls engine idle speed by adjusting the position of the idle air control (IAC) motor pintle. The IAC is a bidirectional stepper motor driven by two coils. The PCM applies current to the IAC coils in steps (counts) to extend the IAC pintle into a passage in the throttle body to decrease air flow. The PCM reverses the current to retract the pintle, increasing air flow. This method allows highly accurate control of idle speed and quick response to changes in engine load. If the PCM detects a condition where too low of an idle speed is present and the PCM is unable to adjust idle speed by increasing the IAC counts, DTC P0506 will set, indicating a problem with the idle control system. DTC O0506 is a type B code.
D D D D D
MAP is less than 60 kPa. Ignition voltage is between 9.5 volts and 16 volts. The throttle is closed. All conditions are met for 10 seconds. Engine speed is at least 100 RPM lower than desired idle, based upon PCM expectations.



D No intrusive tests being run. D Engine run time is more than 360 seconds. D No TPS, VSS, ECT, EGR, MAP, IAT, misfire, low voltage, fuel system CKP, Injector, O2 Sensor, VSS or canister purge Diagnostic Trouble Codes are set. D Barometric pressure is greater than 72.7 kPa. D Canister purge duty cycle is above 0%. D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) is above 50C (122F). D Intake air temperature above 40C (40F).
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM or IAC motor Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection.

D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. D Restricted air intake system Check for a possible collapsed air intake duct, restricted air filter element, or foreign objects blocking the air intake system. D Throttle body Check for objects blocking the IAC passage or throttle bore, excessive deposits in the IAC passage and on the IAC pintle, and excessive deposits in the throttle bore and on the throttle plate. D Large vacuum leak Check for a condition that causes a large vacuum leak, such as an incorrectly installed or faulty PCV valve or brake booster hose disconnected. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0506 Idle Control System RPM Lower Than Expected

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to other Diagnostic Trouble Code first Are any other Diagnostic Trouble Codes set?
Go to Step 3
1. Start the engine. 2. Turn all accessories OFF (A/C, rear defroster, etc.) 3. Using a Tech 2, command RPM up to 1500, down to 500, and then up to 1500 while monitoring Engine Speed on the Tech 2. Does the Engine Speed remain within the specified value of Desired Idle for each RPM command? +/50 RPM
No trouble found. Go to Diagnostic Aids
Go to Step 4
1. Disconnect the IAC. 2. Install IAC Noid Light J 37027A or equivalent. 3. With the engine running, command RPM up to 1500, down to 500, and then up to 1500 while observing the noid light. Does each noid light cycle red and green (never OFF)? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 1. Check the following circuits for an open, short to voltage, short to ground, or poor connection at the PCM: D IAC A low D IAC A high D IAC B low D IAC B high 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 Visually/physically inspect for the following conditions: D Throttle body tampering (adjustment screw plug removed). D Restricted air intake system. Check for a possible collapsed air intake duct, restricted air filter element, or foreign objects blocking the air intake system. D Throttle body. Check for objects blocking the IAC passage or throttle bore, excessive deposits in the IAC passage and on the IAC pintle, and excessive deposits in the throttle bore and on the throttle plate. Do any of the above require a repair?
Refer to appropriate section for onvehicle service
Go to Step 7
6E1301
DTC P0506 Idle Control System RPM Lower Than Expected (Cont'd)
1. Check for a poor connection at the IAC harness connector. 2. If a problem is found, replace faulty terminals as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check the IAC valve solenoids (A and B) for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground (the IAC body) D A short together Was the problem found? Verify repair Replace the IAC valve. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
9 10
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0507 IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED
060R100025
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) controls engine idle speed by adjusting the position of the idle air control (IAC) motor pintle. The IAC is a bidirectional stepper motor driven by two coils. The PCM applies current to the IAC coils in steps (counts) to extend the IAC pintle into a passage in the throttle body to decrease air flow. The PCM reverses the current to retract the pintle, increasing air flow. This method allows highly accurate control of idle speed and quick response to changes in engine load. If the PCM detects a condition where too high of an idle speed is present and the PCM is unable to adjust idle speed by increasing the IAC counts, Diagnostic Trouble Code P0507 will set, indicating a problem with the idle control system. DTC P0507 is a type B code.
D D D D
MAT above 40C (40F). All conditions are met for 5 seconds. MAP is less than 60 kPa. Engine speed is at least 200 RPM lower than desired idle, based upon PCMs expectations.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D No intrusive tests being run. D Engine run time is more than 360 seconds. D No TPS, VSS, ECT, EGR, MAP, MAT, CKP, Injector, O2 Sensor, misfire, fuel system or canister purge DTCs are set. D Barometric pressure is greater than 72.7 kPa. D Canister purge duty cycle is above 0%. D Intake air temperature above 50C (58F). D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) is above 50C (122F). D Ignition voltage is between 9.5 volts and 16 volts.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM or IAC motor Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or

damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. D Vacuum leak Check for a condition that causes a vacuum leak, such as disconnected or damaged hoses, leaks at EGR valve and EGR pipe to intake manifold, leak at the throttle body, a faulty or incorrectly installed PCV valve, leaks at the intake manifold, etc.
6E1303
D Throttle body Check for sticking throttle plate. Also inspect the IAC passage for deposits or objects which will not allow the IAC pintle to fully extend or properly seat. If Diagnostic Trouble Code P0507 cannot be duplicated, reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0507 Idle Control System RPM Higher Than Expected

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to other Diagnostic Trouble Code first Are any other Diagnostic Trouble Codes set?
Go to Step 3
1. Start the engine. 2. Turn all accessories OFF (A/C, rear defroster, etc.) 3. Using a Tech 2, command RPM up to 1500, down to 500, and then up to 1500 while monitoring Engine Speed on the Tech 2. Does the Engine Speed remain within the specified value of Desired Idle for each RPM command? +/50 RPM
No trouble found. Go to Diagnostic Aids
Go to Step 4
1. Disconnect the IAC. 2. Install IAC Noid Light J 37027A or equivalent. 3. With the engine running, command RPM up to 1500, down to 500, and then up to 1500 while observing the noid light. Does each noid light cycle red and green (never OFF)? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 1. Check the following circuits for an open, short to voltage, short to ground, or poor connection at the PCM: D IAC A low D IAC A high D IAC B low D IAC B high 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Visually/physically inspect for the following conditions: D Vacuum leaks D Throttle body tampering (adjustment screw plug removed). D Throttle plate or throttle shaft for binding. D Accelerator and cruise control cables for being misadjusted or for binding. D Faulty, missing, or incorrectly installed PCV valve. Do any of the above require a repair?
Go to Step 7
DTC P0507 Idle Control System RPM Higher Than Expected (Cont'd)
1. Check for a poor connection at the IAC harness connector. 2. If a problem is found, replace faulty terminals as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check the IAC valve solenoids (A and B) for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground (the IAC body) D A short together Was the problem found? Go to Step 9 Verify repair Replace the IAC valve. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Go to Step 10
9 10
6E1305
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0532 A/C REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
060R100044
Circuit Description
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors the A/C refigerant pressure through the use of a three wire sensor. If the PCM senses the pressure falls below a threshold value, then DTC P0532 will set. DTC P0532 is a type D code.

D A History DTC will clear after 40 consecutive trips without a reported failure. D The DTC can be cleared using a Scan Tools Clear Info function.

D A/C pressure sensor is below 5 counts (0.1 volt). The condition is met for 100 test failures within 200 samples.
Diagnostic Aids
Poor Conditions, or a damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for: backedout terminals, improper mating or damaged terminals. Also, check for open circuits, shorts to ground, and shorts to voltage.

D The PCM will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).
DTC P0532 A/C Refigerant Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Input

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 2. Review and record Scan Tools Failure Records data, then clear the DTCs. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using the Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0532. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0532 Ran and Passed?
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor wiring harness connector from the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor. 3. Start the vehicle, and monitor the A/C refrigerant pressure value with the Tech 2. Does the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor value on the Tech 2 hold steadily at the given value? less than 0.1 volts Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4
Check the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor signal circuit, between the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), for a short to voltage. Was the problem found? Verify repair Check the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor signal circuit, between the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor and the PCM for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit Was the problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 6
Check the 5 volt signal circuit, between the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to voltage D A short to ground Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), set to measure voltage between the 5 volt signal circuit and ground. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. Does the DVM indicate the following value? about 5 volts Go to Step 8
Go to Step 12
6E1307
DTC P0532 A/C Refigerant Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Input (Cont'd)
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a fused jumper between the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor and the 5 volt signal circuit, both at the wiring harnesses A/C refrigerant pressure sensor connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Observe the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor value displayed on the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 read the following value? about 5 volts Go to Step 9 Go to Step 12 Check the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), set to measure voltage between the ground circuit and the 5 volt signal circuit, both at the wiring harnesses A/C refigerant pressure sensor connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. Does the DVM indicate the following value? about 5 volts Go to Step 11 Go to Step 12 Replace the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor. Verify Repair. Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair.
10
11
12
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0533 A/C REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
060R100044
Circuit Description
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors the A/C refigerant pressure through the use of a three wire sensor. If the PCM senses the pressure falls below a threshold value, then DTC P0533 will set. DTC P0533 is a type D code.

D A history DTC will clear after 40 consecutive trips without a reported failure. D The DTC can be cleared using a Scan Tools Clear Info function.

D A/C pressure sensor is above 250 counts (4.88 volts). The condition is met for 100 test failure within 200 samples.
Diagnostic Aids
D Poor Conditions, or a damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for: backedout terminals, improper mating or damaged terminals. Also, check for open circuits, shorts to ground, and shorts to voltage.

D The PCM will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).
6E1309
DTC P0533 A/C Refigerant Pressure Sensor Circuit High Input

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 2. Review and record Scan Tools Failure Records data, then clear the DTCs. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using the Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0533. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0533 Ran and Passed?
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor wiring harness connector from the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor. 3. Start the vehicle, and monitor the A/C refrigerant pressure value with the Tech 2. Does the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor value on the Tech 2 hold steadily at the given value? less than 0.1 volts Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4
Check the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor signal circuit, between the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), for a short to voltage. Was the problem found? Verify repair Check the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor signal circuit, between the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor and the PCM for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit Was the problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 6
Check the 5 volt signal circuit, between the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to voltage D A short to ground Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), set to measure voltage between the 5 volt signal circuit and ground. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. Does the DVM indicate the following value? about 5 volts Go to Step 8
Go to Step 12
DTC P0533 A/C Refigerant Pressure Sensor Circuit High Input (Cont'd)
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a fused jumper between the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor and the 5 volt signal circuit, both at the wiring harnesses A/C refrigerant pressure sensor connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Observe the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor value displayed on the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 read the following value? about 5 volts Go to Step 9 Check the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), set to measure voltage between the ground circuit and the 5 volt signal circuit, both at the wiring harnesses A/C refigerant pressure sensor connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. Does the DVM indicate the following value? about 5 volts Replace the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor. Verify Repair.
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 10
10
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 12
11
12
6E1311
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0562 SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW
060R100045
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the system voltage on the ignition feed terminal to the PCM. A system voltage Diagnostic Trouble Code will set whenever the voltage is below a calibrated value. DTC P0562 is a type D code.
was set. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.


D Ignition ON. D System voltage is below 11.5 volts. The condition is met for 900 test failures at 15 min.
Diagnostic Aids
D If the Diagnostic Trouble Code sets when an accessory is operated, check for a poor connection or excessive current draw. D Check for an open circuit in the PCM main relays control (ground) circuit. D Check for open circuits or shorts to ground on the PCMs battery or ignition inputs. D Check for a faulty PCM main relay.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store as Failure Records conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code
DTC P0562 System Voltage Low

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), measure the battery voltage at the battery. Is the battery voltage greater than the specified value? 11.5 V Go to Step 3 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Select Ignition Volts on the Tech 2. 3. Start the engine and raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM. 4. Load the electrical system by turning on the headlights, high blower, etc. Is the ignition voltage approximately equal to the specified value? 13.2 V Go to Step 4 Check for excessive current draw with ignition OFF, engine OFF.
Go to OBD System Check Charge battery, then go to Step 3
Go to Starting/Char ging
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect the PCM connector at the PCM. Ignition ON, Engine OFF Using a DVM, measure the voltage at the PCM Main Relays two power inputs to the PCM.
Is it approximately equal to battery voltage? 5 1. Check for faulty connections at the PCM harness terminals. 2. Repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? 6 7 Check for an open battery feed circuit to the PCM. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 5
Verify repair
6E1313
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0563 SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH
060R100045
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the system voltage on the ignition feed terminals to the PCM. A system voltage Diagnostic Trouble Code will set whenever the voltage is above a calibrated value. DTC P0563 is a type A code.


D Ignition ON. D System voltage is above 16V. The above conditions are met for 900 test failures at 15 min.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for a faulty charging system components.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) for the first time the malfunction is detected. D The PCM will store as Failure Records conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.
DTC P0563 System Voltage High

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition OFF, engine OFF. 2. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), measure the battery voltage at the battery. Is the battery voltage greater than the specified value? 16 V Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1. Charge the battery and clean the battery terminals. 2. Clean the battery ground cable connection if corrosion is indicated. Is the battery voltage greater than the specified value? 16 V 1. Turn OFF all the accessories. 2. Install the Tech 2. 3. Select the ignition voltage parameter on the data list. 4. Start the engine and raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM. Is the voltage above the specified value? 16 V
Replace battery
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
Replace or repair the generator (see Charging System). Is a malfunction present? Verify repair Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E1315
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0601 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE MEMORY CHECK SUM ERROR
014RX002
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) used in this vehicle utilizes an electrically erasable programmable readonly memory (EEPROM). The EEPROM contains program information and the calibrations required for engine, transmission, and powertrain diagnostics operation. Unlike the PROM used in past applications, the EEPROM is not replaceable. When the PCM is replaced or a calibration update is required, the PCM must be programmed using a Tech 2. For the EEPROM programming procedure, Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. If the PCM detects a check sum error then DTC P0601 will set. DTC P0601 is a type A code.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the malfunction is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set in the Failure Records data only.


D Ignition on. D Check sum of soft ware and calibration not equal expected check sum.
Diagnostic Aids
D Diagnostic Trouble Code P0601 indicates that the contents of the EEPROM have changed since the PCM was programmed. The only possible repair is PCM reprogramming or replacement. Check service bulletins to program the replacement PCM with the correct software and calibration for the vehicle.
DTC P0601 Internal Control Module Memory Check Sum Error

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Reprogram PCM with most recent calibrations. Refer to Service Bulletins and PCM Reprogramming. Is there still a problem? Go to Step 3
Verify repair
6E1317
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1106 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT HIGH VOLTAGE
060R100026
Circuit Description
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure. The MAP sensor signal voltage to the PCM varies from below 2 volts at idle (low manifold pressure) to above 4 volts with the ignition ON, engine not running or at wideopen throttle (high manifold pressure). A speed density method of determining engine load is used on the 2.2L engine. This is calculated using inputs from the MAP sensor, RPM, the CKP sensor, and the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAP sensor is the main sensor used in this calculation, and measuring engine load is its main function. The MAP sensor is also used to determine manifold pressure changes while the linear EGR flow test diagnostic is being run, to determine engine vacuum level for some other diagnostics and to determine barometric pressure (BARO). Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code 401. The PCM compares the MAP sensor signal to a calculated MAP based on throttle position and various other engine load factors. If the PCM detects a MAP signal that is intermittently above the calculated value, Diagnostic Trouble Code P1106 will set. DTC P1106 is a type D code.
D Throttle angle is below 2.7% if engine speed is below 1000 RPM. D Throttle angle is below 10% if engine speed is above 1000 RPM. D The MAP sensor indicates an intermittent manifold absolute pressure above 90 kPa. The conditions are met for 64 test failures within 256 test samples.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Failure Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Leaking or plugged vacuum supply line to the MAP sensor. D Inspect PCM harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly

D No TP sensor Diagnostic Trouble Codes are present. D Engine is running.

formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D The MAP sensor shares a 5 Volt Reference with Fuel Pressure sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit. D The MAP sensor shares a ground with the IAT sensor EGR position sensor, MAP sensor, A/C pressure sensor, Fuel level sensor. D Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the MAP display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P1106 MAP Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC P0108 chart first Go to Step 6 Is DTC P0108 also set?
3 4
Are Diagnostic Trouble Code P0463, and/or P1121 also set? Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the MAP sensor. Was a problem found?
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 5
Check the MAP signal circuit between the MAP sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent short to voltage. Was a problem found? Check for an intermittent short to voltage on the 5 volt reference circuit between the PCM and the following components: D Fuel Tank Vapor Pressure Sensor Was a problem found? Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the PCM. Was a problem found?
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 8
Check for an intermittent open or a faulty splice in the sensor ground circuit. Was a problem found? (if no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.) Go to Step 10 Refer to Diagnostic Aids
Replace the faulty harness connector terminal for the sensor ground circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the intermittent open/short circuit in the wiring harness as necessary. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10
6E1319
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT LOW VOLTAGE
060R100026
Circuit Description
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure. The MAP sensor signal voltage to the powertrain control module (PCM) varies from below 2 volts at idle (low manifold pressure) to above 4 volts with the ignition ON, engine not running or at wideopen throttle (high manifold pressure). A speed density method of determining engine load is used on the 2.2l engine. This is calculated using inputs from the MAP sensor, the CKP sensor, and the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAP sensor is the main sensor used in this calculation, and measuring engine load is its main function. The MAP sensor is also used to determine manifold pressure changes while the linear EGR flow test diagnostic is being run, to determine engine vacuum level for some other diagnostics and to determine barometric pressure (BARO). Refer to DTC P0401. The PCM compares the MAP sensor signal to a calculated MAP based on throttle position and various other engine load factors. If the PCM detects a MAP signal that is intermittently below the calculated value, DTC P1107 will set. DTC P1107 is a type D code.
D Throttle angle is below 0% if engine speed is less than 1300 RPM. D Throttle angle is below 5% if engine speed is above 1300 RPM. D The MAP sensor indicates an intermittent manifold absolute pressure above 11 kPa. The above conditions are met for 64 test failures within 256 test samples.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Failure Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection.

D No TP sensor Diagnostic Trouble Codes are present. D Engine is running.

D The MAP sensor shares a 5 Volt Reference with the Fuel Pressure sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit. D The MAP sensor shares a ground with the IAT sensor EGR position sensor, MAP sensor, A/C pressure sensor, Fuel level sensor. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the MAP display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P1107 MAP Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC P0107 chart first Go to Step 6 Is DTC P0107 also set?
3 4
Is DTC P1122 and/or P0462 also set? Check for a poor 5 volt reference circuit terminal connection at the MAP sensor. Was a problem found?
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 5
Check the MAP signal circuit between the MAP sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent open or short to ground. Was a problem found? Check for an intermittent short to ground on the 5 volt reference circuit between the PCM and the following components: D Fuel Tank Vapor Pressure Sensor Was a problem found? Check for a poor 5 volt reference terminal connection at the PCM. Was a problem found?
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 8
Check for an intermittent open or a faulty splice in the 5 volt reference circuit. Was a problem found? (if no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.) Go to Step 10 Refer to Diagnostic Aids
Replace the faulty harness connector terminal for the 5 volt reference circuit and/or the MAP signal circuit as necessary. Is the action complete? Verify repair Repair the intermittent open/short circuit in the wiring harness as necessary. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10
6E1321
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT HIGH VOLTAGE
060R100027
Circuit Description
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor which measures the temperature of the air entering the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies 5 volts through a pullup resistor to the IAT sensor. When the intake air is cold, the sensor resistance is high and the PCM will monitor a high signal voltage on the IAT signal circuit. If the intake air is warm, the sensor resistance is lower causing the PCM to monitor a lower voltage. Diagnostic Trouble Code P1111 will set when the PCM intermittently detects an excessively high signal voltage on the intake air temperature sensor signal circuit. DTC P1111 is a type D code.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code set as Failure Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data. D Diagnostic Trouble Code P1111 does not illuminate the MIL.

D A history DTC P1111 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code P1111 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the IAT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the IAT sensor. A change in the IAT display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to

D D D D D The engine has been running for over 4 minutes. Vehicle speed is less than 32 km/h (20 mph). Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). Calculated air flow is less than 20g/second. IAT signal voltage indicates an intake air temperature intermittently less than 39C (38F) (4.94 volts). The above conditions are met for 20 test failures within a 256 test samples.

D The PCM will substitute a default value for intake air temperature.


C 100 80 60 45 35 25 15 5 5 15 30 40 F 212 176 140 113 95 77 59 41 23 5 22 40 W 177 332 667 1188 1802 2796 4450 7280 12300 21450 52700 100700 Temperature vs. Resistance Values (approximate)
6E1323
DTC P1111 IAT Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC P0113 chart first Is DTC P0113 also set?
Go to Step 3
1. Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the IAT sensor. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 4 1. Check for a poor IAT signal circuit terminal connection at the IAT sensor. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Check the IAT signal circuit between the IAT sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent open. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Check the IAT signal circuit between the IAT sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent short to voltage. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the PCM. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Check for an intermittent open or a faulty splice in the sensor ground circuit. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT LOW VOLTAGE
060R100027
Circuit Description
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor which measures the temperature of the air entering the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies 5 volts through a pullup resistor to the IAT sensor. When the intake air is cold, the sensor resistance is high and the PCM will monitor a high signal voltage on the IAT signal circuit. If the intake air is warm, the sensor resistance becomes lower, causing the PCM to monitor a lower voltage. Diagnostic Trouble Code P1112 will set when the PCM intermittently detects an excessively low signal voltage on the intake air temperature sensor signal circuit. DTC P1112 is a type D code.
Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data. D The PCM will substitute a default value for intake air temperature.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the IAT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the IAT sensor. A change in the IAT display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to

D The engine has been running for over 2 minutes. D Vehicle speed is greater than 48 km/h (30 mph). D IAT signal voltage is greater than 148C (298F) (about 0.10 volt). The above conditions are met for 20 test failures within 200 test samples.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code set as Failure

6E1325

Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. Verifies that the fault is present. 3. If DTC P1112 can be repeated only by duplicating the Failure Records conditions, refer to the Temperature vs. Resistance Value Chart. The chart may be used to test the IAT sensor at various temperatures to evaluate the possibility of a shifted sensor that may be shorted above or below a certain temperature. If this is the case, replace the IAT sensor.
DTC P1112 IAT Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC P0112 chart first Is DTC P0112 also set?
Go to Step 3
1. Check the IAT signal circuit between the IAT sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent short to ground. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1114 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT LOW VOLTAGE
060R100028
Circuit Description
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a thermistor mounted in the engine coolant stream. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies a voltage (about 5.0 volts) through a pullup resistor to the ECT signal circuit. When the engine coolant is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high, therefore the PCM will measure a high signal voltage. As the engine coolant warms, the sensor resistance becomes less, and the ECT signal voltage measured at the PCM drops. With a fully warmed up engine, the ECT signal voltage should measure about 1.5 to 2.0 volts. If the PCM detects an ECT signal that is intermittently below the range of the ECT sensor, Diagnostic Trouble Code P1114 will set. DTC P1114 is a type D code.
Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the ECT sensor. A change in the ECT display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

D Engine run time longer than 2 minutes. D The ECT sensor signal is intermittently greater than 150C (302F) (about 0.10 volt). The above conditions are met for 20 test failures within 200 test samples.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code set as Failure
6E1327
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

DTC P1114 ECT Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC P0117 first Is DTC P0117 also set? 1. Check the ECT signal circuit between the ECT sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent short to ground. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to OBD System Check Go to Step 3
2 3
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT HIGH VOLTAGE
060R100028
Circuit Description
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a thermistor mounted in the engine coolant stream. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies a voltage (about 5.0 volts) through a pullup resistor to the ECT signal circuit. When the engine coolant is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high, therefore the PCM will measure a high signal voltage. As the engine coolant warms, the sensor resistance becomes less, and the ECT signal voltage measured at the PCM drops. With a fully warmed up engine, the ECT signal voltage should measure about 1.5 to 2.0 volts. If the PCM detects an ECT signal that is intermittently above the range of the ECT sensor, Diagnostic Trouble Code P1115 will set. Diagnostic Trouble Code P1115 is a type D code.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code set as Failure Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the ECT sensor. A change in the ECT display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

D Engine run time longer than 180 seconds. D The ECT sensor signal is intermittently greater than 39C (38F) (4.94 volts) for a total of 10 seconds over a 100second period. The conditions are met for 20 test failures within 200 test samples.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
6E1329

DTC P1115 ECT Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC P0118 first Is DTC P0118 also set? 1. Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the ECT sensor. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
2 3
Go to Step 4
1. Check for a poor ECT signal circuit terminal connection at the ECT sensor. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Check the ECT signal circuit between the ECT sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent open. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Check the ECT signal circuit between the ECT sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent short to voltage. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the PCM. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Check for an intermittent open or a faulty splice in the sensor ground circuit. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
6E1331
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1121 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT HIGH VOLTAGE
060R100029
Circuit Description
The throttle position (TP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal that changes relative to the throttle blade angle. The signal voltage will vary from less than 1 volt at closed throttle to more than 4 volts at wide open throttle (WOT). The TP signal is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) for fuel control and for most of the PCM controlled outputs. If the PCM detects a TP signal that is intermittently above the range of the TP sensor, Diagnostic Trouble Code P1121 will be set. DTC P1121 is a type D code.

D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code P1121 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code P1121 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect the harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D The TP sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the MAP sensor and EGR position sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit or components itself. D The TP sensor share a ground with the ECT, the CKP, the CMP and the automatic transmission position sensor and the Fuel Pressure sensor. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the throttle position display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the TP sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.

D The ignition is ON. D TP sensor indicates a throttle position voltage intermittently greater than 4.88 volts. The above conditions are met for 20 test failures within 200 test samples.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code set as Failure Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

If Diagnostic Trouble Code P1121 cannot be duplicated, reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help to determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P1121 TP Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC P0123 first Go to Step 6 Is Diagnostic Trouble Code P0123 also set? Is Diagnostic Trouble Code P0463 and/or P1106 also set? Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the TP sensor. Was a problem found? Go to Step 9
2 3 4
Go to Step 5
Check the TP signal circuit between the TP sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent short to voltage. Was a problem found? Check for an intermittent short to voltage on the 5 volt reference circuit between the PCM and the following components: D MAP Sensor D EGR Position Sensor Was a problem found? Check for a poor sensor ground terminal connection at the PCM. Was a problem found?
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 8
Check for an intermittent open or a faulty splice in the sensor ground circuit. Was a problem found? (if no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.) Go to Step 10 Refer to Diagnostic Aids
Replace the faulty harness connector terminal for the sensor ground circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Repair intermittent open/short circuit in wiring harness as necessary. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10
6E1333
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1122 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT LOW VOLTAGE
060R100029
Circuit Description
The throttle position (TP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal that changes relative to the throttle blade angle. The signal voltage will vary from less than 1 volt at closed throttle to more than 4 volts at wide open throttle (WOT). The TP signal is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) for fuel control and for most of the PCM controlled outputs. If the PCM detects a TP signal that is intermittently above the range of the TP sensor, Diagnostic Trouble Code P1122 will be set. DTC P1122 is a type D code.

D A history Diagnostic Trouble Code P1122 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D Diagnostic Trouble Code P1122 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect the harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the throttle position display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the TP sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. D The TP sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the MAP sensor and Fuel Pressure sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit or components itself. D The TP sensor share a ground with the ECT, the CKP, the CMP and the automatic transmission position sensor and the Fuel Pressure sensor.

D The ignition is ON. D TP sensor indicates a throttle position signal intermittently less than 0.235 volt. The above conditions are met for 20 test failures within 200 test samples.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code set as Failure Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help to determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P1122 TP Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC P0122 first Go to Step 6 Is DTC P0122 also set? Is DTC P1107 and/or P0462 also set? Check for a poor 5 volt reference circuit or TP signal circuit terminal connection at the TP sensor. Was a problem found? Go to Step 9
2 3 4
Go to Step 5
Check the TP signal circuit between the TP sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent short to ground. Was a problem found? Check for an intermittent short to ground on the 5 volt reference circuit between the PCM and the following components: D EGR Position Sensor D MAP Sensor Was a problem found?
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 8
Check for a poor 5 volt reference circuit terminal connection at the PCM. Was a problem found? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8 Check for an intermittent open or a faulty splice in the 5 volt reference circuit. Was a problem found? (if no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.) Go to Step 10 Repair complete. If a driveability symptom still exists, refer to Symptoms. Repair complete. If a driveability symptom still exists, refer to Symptoms. Refer to Diagnostic Aids
Replace the faulty harness connector terminal(s) for the 5 volt reference circuit and/or the TP signal circuit as necessary. Is the action complete?
10
Repair intermittent open/short circuit in wiring harness as necessary. Is the action complete?
6E1335
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1133 O2 SENSOR INSUFFICIENT SWITCHING (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
060R100030
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) activity for 90 seconds after Closed Loop has been enabled. During this test period the PCM counts the number of times that the HO2S signal voltage crosses the richtolean and leantorich threshold. If the PCM determines that the HO2S did not switch enough times, Diagnostic Trouble Code P1133 will be set. A leantorich switch is determined when the HO2S voltage changes above and below 450 mV. DTC P1133 is a type B code.
switches above and below 450 mV. If fewer than 22 richtolean and 22 leantorich switches are detected, Diagnostic Trouble Code P1133 will be set.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D Open Loop fuel control will be in effect. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D No MAP, IAT, ECT, TPS, Fuel Trim, Injector, Misfire, CKP, EGR, EVAP Diagnostic Trouble Codes are present. D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) is above 60C (140F). D Engine is operating in Closed Loop. D The engine has been running at least two minutes. D Canister purge duty cycle is greater than 2%. D Calculated air flow between 17 and 32 grams/sec. D Engine speed is between 1500 RPM and 3500 RPM. D Above conditions are present for 1 second. D O2 sensor transitions crossing 0.30.6 V. D 90 seconds after Closed Loop and has been achieved, the PCM monitors the oxygen sensor as it

Diagnostic Aids
A malfunction in the HO2S heater ignition feed or ground circuit may cause a Diagnostic Trouble Code P1133 to set. Check HO2S heater circuitry for intermittent faults or poor connections. If connections and wiring are OK and

Diagnostic Trouble Code P1133 continues to set, replace the Bank 1 HO2S 1. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help to determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition. 3. A condition that affects other heated oxygen sensors indicates probable contamination. To avoid damaging the replacement sensors, correct the condition which caused the contamination before replacing the affected sensors. 5. This step checks for conditions which may cause the heated oxygen sensor to appear faulty. Correct any of the described conditions if present. 11. To avoid damaging replacement sensors, correct the condition which caused the contamination before replacing the affected sensors.
Test Description
DTC P1133 O2 Sensor Insufficient Switching (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 IMPORTANT: If any Diagnostic Trouble Codes are set refer to those Diagnostic Trouble Codes before proceeding with this diagnostic chart. 1. Engine idling at operating temperature. 2. Operate the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the Diagnostic Trouble Code criteria. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P1133 until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P1133 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate Diagnostic Trouble Code P1133 failed this ignition? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 11
3 4
Did the Tech 2 also indicate that the P1153 or P1154 tests failed? 1. Perform the Exhaust System Leak Test (refer to Exhaust System). After the Exhaust System Leak Test has been performed, return to this diagnostic. 2. If an exhaust leak is found, repair as necessary. Was an exhaust leak isolated?
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 5
Visually/physically inspect the following items: D Ensure that the Bank 1 HO2S 1 is securely installed. D Check for corrosion on the terminals. D Check the terminals at Bank 1 HO2S 1 and at the PCM. D Check for damaged wiring; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. Was a problem found in any of the above areas? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 1. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) at the PCM side of the connector, check the voltage between the high signal circuit and ground. Also measure between the low signal circuit and ground. Are both voltages in the specified range? 34 mV Go to Step 9 Go to Step 7
6E1337
DTC P1133 O2 Sensor Insufficient Switching (Bank 1 Sensor 1) (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Check for damage to PCM pins or terminals. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 Check for a short to voltage or ground or an open in the signal circuit. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM connector. 3. With the HO2S disconnected, check for high and low signal circuits shorted together between the PCM and HO2S. Was a problem found? Verify repair With the PCM connected and Bank 1 HO2S 1 disconnected from the harness, check Bank 1 HO2S 1 with a Tech 2. Is the voltage in the specified range? 430470 mV Replace the affected heated oxygen sensors. NOTE: Before replacing the sensors, the cause of the contamination must be determined and corrected. D D D Fuel contamination. Use of improper RTV sealant. Engine oil/coolant consumption. Verify repair
Go to Step 10
10
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 12
11
Is the action complete? 12 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1134 O2 SENSOR TRANSITION TIME RATIO (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
060R100030
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) activity for 90 seconds after Closed Loop has been established. During the monitoring period the PCM counts the number of times that the HO2S responds from richtolean and from leantorich and adds the amount of time it took to complete all transitions. With this information, an average time for all transitions can be determined. The PCM then divides the richtolean average by the leantorich average to obtain a ratio. If the HO2S transition time ratio is not within this range, Diagnostic Trouble Code P1134 will be set, indicating that the oxygen sensor is not responding as expected to changes in exhaust oxygen content. DTC P1134 is a type B code.
D 90 seconds after Closed Loop has been enabled, Bank 1 HO2S 1 transition ratio between leantorich and richtolean is less than 0.25 or greater than 4.43.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D Open Loop fuel control will be in effect. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the Diagnostic Trouble Code was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D No MAP, IAT, ECT, TPS, Fuel Trim, Injector, Misfire CKP, EGR, EVAP DTCs Set. D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) is above 60C (140F). D Engine is operating in Closed Loop. D The engine has been running at least two minutes. D Calculated air flow between 17 and 32 grams/sec. D Canister purge duty cycle is greater than 2%. D Engine speed is between 1500 RPM and 3500 RPM. D Above conditions are present for a 1second monitoring period.
Diagnostic Aids
A malfunction in the HO2S heater ignition feed or ground circuit may cause a Diagnostic Trouble Code P1133 to set. Check HO2S heater circuitry for intermittent faults or poor connections. If connections and wiring are OK and

Diagnostic Trouble Code P1134 continues to set, replace the Bank 1 HO2S 1. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
6E1339
Test Description
3. A condition that affects other heated oxygen sensors indicates probable contamination. To avoid damaging the replacement sensors, correct the condition which caused the contamination before replacing the affected sensors. 5. This step checks for conditions which may cause the heated oxygen sensor to appear faulty. Correct any of the described conditions if present. 11. To avoid damaging replacement sensors, correct the condition which caused the contamination before replacing the affected sensors.
DTC P1134 O2 Sensor Transition Time Ratio (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 IMPORTANT: If any DTCs are set refer to those DTCs before proceeding with this diagnostic chart. 1. Idle the engine at operating temperature. 2. Operate the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the Diagnostic Trouble Code criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Diagnostic Trouble Code info for Diagnostic Trouble Code P1134 until the Diagnostic Trouble Code P1134 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P1134 failed this ignition? Go to Step 3
1. Perform the Exhaust System Leak Test (refer to Exhaust System). After the Exhaust System Leak Test has been performed, return to this diagnostic. 2. If an exhaust leak is found, repair as necessary. Was an exhaust leak isolated? Verify repair Go to Step 4 Visually/physically inspect the following items: D Ensure that the Bank 1 HO2S 1 is securely installed. D Check for corrosion on the terminals. D Check the terminals at Bank 1 HO2S 1 and at the PCM. D Check for damaged wiring; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. Was a problem found in any of the above areas? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 5 1. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 1. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) at the PCM side of the connector, check the voltage between the high signal circuit and ground. Also measure between the low signal circuit and ground. Are both voltages in the specified range? 34 V Go to Step 6 Go to Step 8
DTC P1134 O2 Sensor Transition Time Ratio (Bank 1 Sensor 1) (Cont'd)

1. With Bank 1 HO2S 1 disconnected, jumper the high and low (PCM side) signal circuits to ground. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Tech 2 indicate less than 10 mV and immediately return to about 450 mV when the jumper is removed? Go to Step 10 Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 11 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 6
7 8 9 10
Repair condition as necessary. Is the action complete? Check for faulty PCM connections or terminal damage. Is the action complete? Repair open, short or grounded signal circuit. Is the action complete? Remove the Bank 1 H02S 1 and examine it for signs of: D Fuel contamination; D Improper RTV sealant (white powdery coating on sensor); D Engine oil/coolant consumption. Were signs of contamination observed? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the repair complete? Verify repair Verify repair
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 12
11
12
Replace the Bank 1 H02S 1. Is the action complete?
6E1341
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1171 FUEL SYSTEM LEAN DURING ACCELERATION
060R100032
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) internal circuitry can identify if the vehicle fuel system is capable of supplying adequate amounts of fuel during heavy acceleration (power enrichment). The PCM monitors the voltage of the oxygen sensor during power enrichment. When a power enrichment mode of operation is requested during Closed Loop operation (by heavy acceleration), the PCM will provide more fuel to the engine. Under these conditions the PCM should detect a rich condition (high oxygen sensor voltage). If this rich exhaust is not detected at this time, a Diagnostic Trouble Code P1171 will set. A plugged fuel filter or restricted fuel line can prevent adequate amounts of fuel from being supplied during power enrichment mode. DTC P1171 is a type A code.



D No MAP, IAT, ECT, TPS, Fuel Trim, Injector, Misfire, CKP, EGR, EVAP DTCs Set. D Engine is operating in Closed Loop. D Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). D While in power enrichment mode the oxygen sensor voltage remains below 400 mV for 3 seconds. D The commanded Air Flow Ratio is less than 3 sec. The above conditions are met for 40 failures in 40 samples.
Diagnostic Aids
D A restricted fuel filter or fuel line can supply adequate amounts of fuel at idle, but may not be able to supply enough fuel during heavy acceleration. D Water or alcohol in the fuel may cause low HO2S voltage during acceleration. D Check for faulty or plugged fuel injector(s). D Check for low fuel.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 4. When the engine is idling or at steady cruise, the HO2S voltage should vary from between approximately 100 mV to 900 mV. During power enrichment mode, more fuel is needed and the HO2S voltage should rise above 447 mV. This step checks to see if the HO2S is operating properly. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connector to absorb any small amount of fuel leakage that may occur when installing the gauge. Ignition ON, pump pressure should be 235320 kPa. 7. Add Caution: Use correct pliers so damage to fuel lines will not occur.
6E1343
DTC P1171 Fuel System Lean During Acceleration

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to component DTC charts Are any componentrelated Diagnostic Trouble Codes set? 1. Check the vehicles fuel tank for an adequate amount of fuel. 2. Add fuel to the vehicles fuel tank if the tank is almost empty. Was fuel added to the vehicles fuel tank? Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
1. Using a Tech 2, observe HO2S 1 voltage while running warm engine(75C95C [167F203F]) at 1200 RPM. 2. HO2S 1 voltage should vary within the specified range. Does the voltage toggle back and forth within the specified range? 100 900 mV
Go to Step 5
1. Disconnect the fuel pump relay and crank the engine to relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Install the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine and idle at normal operating temperature. 4. Disconnect the vacuum line going to the fuel pressure regulator. With the engine running, is the fuel pressure within the specified range? 284 325 kPa
Go to OBD System Check Verify repair
6 7
Check for restricted fuel lines or restricted inline filter. Was a problem found? 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Ignition ON, engine OFF. Using a Tech 2, enable the fuel pump to operate. Using pliers, slowly close the return line (do not exceed the first specified value). 414 kPa 325 kPa
Using the pliers, can the fuel pressure be manipulated to exceed the second specified value? 8 Check for: D Faulty fuel pump D Restricted fuel pump strainer (sock) D Incorrect fuel pump D Incorrect fuel being used D Hot fuel
Go to Step 8
Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKP) SYSTEM VARIATION NOT LEARNED
014RX002
Circuit Description
In order to detect engine misfire at higher engine speeds, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must know of any variation between the crankshaft sensor pulse. Most variations are due to the machining of the crankshaft reluctor wheel, however, other sources of variation are also possible. A Crankshaft Position Sensor Tooth Error Correction (TEC) procedure must be performed any time a change is made to the crankshaft sensor, crankshaft, or if the PCM measures the variations and then calculates compensation factors needed to enable the PCM to accurately detect engine misfire at all speeds and loads. The Tech 2 must be used to command the PCM to learn these variations. If for any reason the PCM is unable to learn these variations or they are out of an acceptable range, the PCM will set a DTC P1336. A PCM that has not had the Crankshaft Position Sensor Tooth Error Correction (TEC) Procedure performed due to replacement or reprogramming will also set a DTC P1336. DTC P1336 is a type A code.

D The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate the first time the error is detected. D The PCM will record operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. This information will be stored in the Freeze Frame and Failure Records buffers. D A history DTC is stored.

D The MIL will turn OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which the diagnostic runs without a fault. D A history DTC will clear after 40 consecutive warm up cycles without a fault. D DTC(s) can be cleared by using the Tech 2.
Diagnostic Aids
D Refer to TEC Learn Procedure CAUTION: When performing the Crankshaft Position Sensor Tooth Error Correction (TEC) Procedure always set the vehicle parking brake and block the drive wheels. Release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. Once the learn procedure is completed, engine control will be returned to the operator and the engine will respond to throttle position. DTC P1336 will only set if the PCM has not learned the crankshaft position sensor Tooth Error Correction (TEC). The PCM only needs to learn this variation once per life

D No ECT, Knock, CKP, or injector sensor DTCs. D PCM has not successfully learned crankshaft position Tooth Error Correction(TEC) within 5 attempts or 5 Km (3 miles).

cycle of the vehicle unless the crank sensor to crankshaft relationship is disturbed. Removing a part for inspection and then reinstalling the same part is considered a disturbance. A fully warmed up engine is critical to learning the variation correctly. If a valid learn occurs, no other learns can be completed that ignition cycle. If the engine cuts out before the specified learn procedure engine speed or at normal fuel cutoff RPM. The PCM is not in the learn procedure mode. Review the Crankshaft Position Sensor Tooth Error Correction (TEC) Procedure and reenable the learn procedure. Verify that the Tech 2 says Test in Progress. Excessive Crankshaft Variation Symptom Tech 2 Display Factors out of range Possible Causes Reluctor wheelmatching quality, run out, incorrect air gap Disturbancenoise on crank sensor circuit, reattempt the Learn procedure Engine too cold, reattempt the Learn Procedure Crank or Cam sensor DTCs setRepair first
6E1345
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1. The Powertrain OBD System Check prompts the technician to complete some basic checks and store the freeze frame and failure records data on the Tech 2 if applicable. This created an electronic copy of the data taken when the fault occurred. The information is then stored on the Tech 2 for later reference. 2. Engine temperature if critical to properly learn the Crankshaft Position Sensor Tooth Error Correction (TEC). Failure to properly warm the engine before performing this procedure will result in an inaccurate measurement of the Crankshaft Position Sensor Tooth Error Correction (TEC). The PCM learns this variation as the engine is decelerating and then allows engine control to be returned to the operator. All accessories must be turned OFF when learning the Crankshaft Position System angle variation. If the A/C is not disabled when the learn procedure is enable, the PCM will disable the A/C. When the PCM is ready to allow the learn procedure to run, the Tech 2 will display Test in Progress. 3. If after the specified number attempts the PCM cannot learn the crankshaft position Sensor Tooth Error Correction (TEC) then the variation is too large and no variation problem is corrected. 4. Being unable to learn the Crankshaft Position Sensor Tooth Error Correction (TEC) indicates that the variation is out of range. Using the Excessive Crankshaft Variation Trouble shooting will help to diagnose the area where the problem lies.
Opposing factors out of range
Sum out of range
Crank pulse count error
DTC P1336 CKP System Variation Not Learned

Perform the Crankshaft Position Sensor Tooth Error Correction(TEC) Learning Procedure as follows: When performing the Crankshaft Position Sensor Tooth Error Correction (TEC) Learning Procedure always set the vehicle parking brake and block the drive wheels. Release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. Once the learn procedure is completed, engine control will be returned to the operator and the engine will respond to throttle position. 1. Install a Tech 2. 2. Put vehicle in Park or Neutral. 3. Run the engine until it is above the specified temperature. 4. Set the vehicle parking brake and block the drive wheels. 5. Turn all accessories OFF. 6. Enable the Crankshaft Position Sensor Tooth Error Correction (TEC) Learning Procedure with the Tech 2. 7. Raise the engine RPM to the specified value RELEASING the throttle as soon as the engine shuts out. Does the Tech 2 indicate that Crankshaft Position 70C (158F) 3920 RPM System variation has been learned? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 3
Attempt Crankshaft Position System Variation Learning Procedures many times as the specified value. Does the Tech 2 indicate that Crankshaft Position System variation has been learned? 5 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4
Repair Check for a problem with the a Crank Sensor to Crankshaft relationship and repair as necessary? Refer to the Excessive Crankshaft Variation Symptom Table. Go to Step 5 1. Using the Tech 2, clear DTCs. 2. Start the engine and idle at normal operating temperature. 3. Operate vehicle within the conditions for setting this DTC as specified in the supporting text. Does the Tech 2 indicate that this diagnostic Ran and Passed? Go to Step 6 Go to applicable DTC table Go to Step 2
Check if any additional DTCs are set. Are any DTCs displayed that have not been diagnosed?
System OK
6E1347
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1380 ABS ROUGH ROAD SYSTEM FAULT
014RX002
Circuit Description
The PCM identifies an engine misfire by detecting the variations in crankshaft speed. The crankshaft speed variations can also occur when a vehicle is operated over a rough surface. The ABS (AntiLock Brake System) can detect when the vehicle is on a rough surface based on the wheel acceleration/deceleration data supplied by each wheel speed sensor. The EBCM (Electronic Brake Control Module) over the Class 2 serial data line sends this information to the PCM. The PCM then uses this information in order to determine if the crankshaft variations are being caused by an actual engine misfire or from being driven on a rough surface. This Diagnostic determines if the ABS system is not capable of detecting a rough road situation. DTC P1380 is a type D code.
detected misfire was true or due to operating the vehicle on a rough surface. A misfire can be a true misfire with or without setting this DTC. Check the EBCM for poor connections at the Class 2 serial data terminals. Be sure no true misfire exists after repairing the cause of this DTC.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1. The Powertrain OBD System Check prompts the technician to complete some basic checks and store the freeze frame and failure records data on the Tech 2 is applicable. This creates an electronic copy of the data taken when the malfunction occurred. The information is then stored on the Tech 2 for later reference. 2. ABS DTCs are found by selecting Chassis on the Tech 2. 3. Be careful to clear only DTCs and not the captured information stored on the Tech 2. The Tech 2 will issue a warning if this is about to happen. 4. A DTC P1380 being reset indicated that the PCM is not receiving the correct information from the EBCM due to an ABS DTC. 5. When DTC P1380 is set, and ABS DTC should also be set. 6. Refer to Section 5A of the service manual for ABS DTCs and repairs.

D 20 unusable ABS data values within a 50 value sample.

D A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warmup cycles without a fault. D The Tech 2 can clear the DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
The setting of this DTC indicates that a misfire was detected and that the PCM could not determine if the

8. Repair any condition that remains and is causing a misfire by following the table for any DTC that has set. 9. Replacement PCMs must be reprogrammed. Refer to the latest Isuzu Technical Communication System information for programming procedures.
DTC P1380 ABS Rough Road System Fault

1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF. 2. Install the Tech 2. 3. Check for any ABS DTCs. Were any ABS DTCs set? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 3 1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF. 2. Review the Freeze Frame data and note the parameters. Did a misfire DTC set? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Go to applicable DTC table Go to Step 10 Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9 Was a DTC P1380 also set? Did a ABS DTC also set? Repair the condition causing the ABS DTC. Is the action complete? Check if any additional DTCs are set. Are any DTCs displayed that has not been diagnosed?
Go to Step 10
4 5 6 7
System OK
8 9
Repair the condition causing the misfire. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed.Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 10
10
1. Using the Tech 2, clear the DTCs. 2. Start the engine and idle at normal operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within the conditions for setting this DTC as specified in the supporting text. Does the Tech 2 indicate that this diagnostic has Ran and Passed? Verify repair
6E1349
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1381 ABS ROUGH ROAD CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA FAULT
014RX002
Circuit Description
The PCM identifies an engine misfire by detecting the variations in crankshaft speed. The crankshaft speed variations can also occur when a vehicle is operated over a rough surface. The ABS (AntiLock Brake System) can detect when the vehicle is on a rough surface based on the wheel acceleration/deceleration data supplied by each wheel speed sensor. The EBCM (Electronic Brake Control Module) over the Class 2 serial data line sends this information to the PCM. The PCM then uses this information in order to determine if the crankshaft variations are being caused by an actual engine misfire or from being driven on a rough surface. DTC P1381 is a type D code.

D A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm up cycles without a fault. D The Tech 2 can clear the DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
The setting of this DTC indicates that a misfire was detected and that the PCM could not determine if the detected misfire was true or due to operating the vehicle on a rough surface. A misfire can be a true misfire with or without setting this DTC. Check the EBCM for poor connections at the Class 2 serial data terminals. Be sure no true misfire exists after repairing the cause of this DTC.

D No serial data for 15 second after previous data received.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1. The Powertrain OBD System Check indicates that a misfire was detected and that the PCM could not determine if the detected misfire was true or due to operating the vehicle on a rough surface. A misfire can be a true misfire with or without setting this DTC. Check the EBCM for poop connections at the Class 2 serial data terminals. Be sure no true misfire exists after repairing the cause of this DTC.

D The PCM records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The Failure Records buffers stores this information. D A history DTC is stored. D The PCM will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).

3. Refer to the ABS portion of the service manual for ABS DTCs and repairs. Performing the ABS Diagnostic System Check is the first step in diagnosing a serial data problem. 4. Be careful to clear only DTCs and not the captured information stored on the Tech 2. The Tech 2 will issue a warning if this is about to happen. 5. A DTC P1381 being reset indicates that the PCM is not receiving serial data from the EBCM due to a EBCM problem. 6. When DTC P1381 is set, ABS serial data should not be able to be displayed. 7. Repair any condition that is causing a misfire by following the table for any DTC that has set. 10. Replacement PCMs must be reprogrammed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures.
6E1351
DTC P1381 ABS Rough Road Class 2 Serial Data Fault

1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF. 2. Install the Tech 2. 3. Attempt to display the ABS data on the Tech 2. Can the ABS be displayed? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 4 Repair the condition causing the ABS data not to be displayed. Is the action complete? 1. Clear the DTCs. 2. Operate the vehicle within the same conditions as indicated within the Freeze Frame data and Conditions for Setting the DTC as noted while driving on rough surfaces. Did a misfire DTC set? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 8 Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7 Was a DTC P1380 also set? Can the ABS data be displayed? Repair the condition causing the misfire. Is the action complete? 1. Using the Tech 2, clear the DTCs. 2. Start the engine and idle at normal operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within the conditions for setting this DTC as specified in the supporting text. Does the Tech 2 indicate that this diagnostic has Ran and Passed? Go to Step 9 Go to applicable DTC table Go to Step 2
5 6 7 8
Check if any additional DTCs are set. Are any DTCs displayed that have not been diagnosed?
System OK
10
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1404 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) CLOSED VALVE
060R100039
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the exhaust gas recirculation(EGR) valve pintle position input to ensure that the valve responds properly to commands from the PCM to detect a fault if the pintle position sensor and control circuits are open or shorted. If the PCM detects a pintle position signal voltage below the normal range of the pintle position sensor, or a signal voltage that is not within a tolerance considered acceptable for proper EGR control system operation, the PCM will set a DTC P1404.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P1404 will clear after 40 consecutive warm up cylcles without a fault. D DTC P1404 can be cleared by using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Excessive deposits on EGR valve pintle or seat Check for deposits that may interfere with the EGR valve pintle extending completely or cause the pintle to stick. D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the EGR actual position display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the EGR valve. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition. NOTE: If the EGR valve show signs of excessive heat, check the exhaust system for blockage (possible a plugged catalytic converter) using the Restricted Exhaust System Check.

D IAT is above 5C (41) D EGR actual position is 16 counts below the EGR low threshold for 3 iterations per 5 seconds.

D The PCM will illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.
6E1353
DTC P1404 EGR Closed Valve

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Turn the ignition switch ON, with the engine OFF. 2. Review and record the Tech 2 Failure Records data, the clear the DTCs. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Failure Records conditions noted. 4. Using the Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P1404. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P1404 Ran and Passed
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve from the wiring harness. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check for voltage on the Ignition feed circuit at the Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve wiring harness connector. Does the DVM read the following value? 12 volts Go to Step 6 Go to Step 4 Check the Ignition feed circuit, between the EGR sensor and the Engine IG. fuse, for the following conditions: D An Open circuit D A short to ground Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 14 Go to Step 6 Using a DVM, check the resistance of the EGR solenoid. Does the DVM read the following value? less than 5 W Check the EGR solenoid valve Low circuit, between the EGR sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An Open circuit D A short to ground Was the problem found? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve from the wiring harness. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Observe the EGR value on the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 display the following value(s)? 0 volts 0% Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8 Check the EGR position feedback circuit, between the EGR sensor and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An Open circuit D A short to ground Was the problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 15
Go to Step 15
DTC P1404 EGR Closed Valve (Cont'd)

1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check for voltage on the 5 volt Reference signal circuit at the Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve wiring harness connector. Does the DVM read the following value? about 5 volts Check the 5 volt reference signal circuit, between the EGR and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An Open circuit D A short to ground Was the problem found?
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 10
10
11
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a DVM between the 5 volt reference signal circuit and the 5 volt signal return (ground) circuit at the EGR wiring harness connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. Does the DVM read the following value? about 5 volts Check the 5 volt signal return (ground) circuit, between the EGR and the PCM, for the following conditions: D An Open circuit D A short to ground Was the problem found?
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 12
12
13
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Place a fused jumper wire between the 5 volt reference signal circuit and the EGR valve position feedback circuit at the EGR wiring harness connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Observe the EGR value on the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 display the following value? 5 volts 100% Replace the Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Value. Verify repair.
Go to Step 14
Go to Step 15
14
15
6E1355
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1441 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM FLOW DURING NONPURGE
060R100040
Circuit Description
Canister purge is controlled by a solenoid valve that allows manifold vacuum to purge the canister. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a ground to energize the solenoid valve (purge ON). The EVAP purge solenoid control is pulsewidth modulated (PWM) and is turned ON and OFF several times a second. The duty cycle (pulse width) is determined by engine operating conditions including load, throttle position, coolant temperature and ambient temperature. The duty cycle is calculated by the PCM and the output is commanded when the appropriate conditions have been met. The EVAP purge vacuum switch is a normally closed switch positioned in the purge line between the canister and the EVAP purge solenoid. The EVAP purge vacuum switch will open when vacuum increases to greater than 5 inches of water pressure in the purge line. The PCM monitors the EVAP purge vacuum switch signal to determine if the evaporative emission control system is working properly. If the switch is open (purge flow detected) when the PCM is not commanding the EVAP purge solenoid ON, DTC P1441 will be set. DTC P1441 is a type A code.
D Startup intake air temperature (IAT) and startup engine coolant temperature(ECT) are both between 4.2C (40F) and 35C (95F). D The difference between startup ECT and startup IAT is less than 6.75C(12.2F). D The Fuel Tank Level Sensor reads between 15% and 85%. D Fuel thank vacuum is greater than 5 cm (2 inches) of water for 2 seconds.



D No active system voltage, ECT sensor, IAT sensor, VS sensor, MAP sensor, vacuum switch, or TP sensor, EGR, EVAP DTCs set. D BARO reading is above 72.3 kPa.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminaltowire connection. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the MAP sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit or components itself. D The Fuel Pressure Sensor share a ground with the TP sensor, the CKP sensor, the CAM sensor, ECT sensor, and the automatic transmission temperature sensor. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage; shorts to ground, shorts to battery positive, and open circuits. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the EVAP vacuum switch display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. The canister purge vacuum switch is normally closed when no vacuum (purge) is present. With the ignition ON and the engine OFF, there shouldnt be any vacuum (purge) present in the EVAP system. 3. Determines if the PCM is able to control the EVAP purge solenoid valve. 4. Determines if the DTC will set under the conditions present when the DTC was originally stored. If not, the fault is intermittent. 5. Checks for a grounded EVAP purge solenoid driver circuit, a faulty EVAP vacuum switch, or a leaking EVAP purge solenoid valve.
DTC P1441 EVAP System Flow During Non-Purge

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap. 3. Ignition ON. Observe Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. Is Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? 1.51 V Go to Step 3 1. Reinstall the fuel filler cap. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve ON (Closed). 3. Disconnect the canister side rubber hose end that hose is connected between the Purge Solenoid Valve and Canister. IMPORTANT: Before continuing with the diagnosis, zero the EVAP pressure and vacuum gauges on EVAP pressure / purge cart J41413 (refer to the tool operating instructions). And then monitor the fuel tank inner pressure using the Tech 2. Does the fuel tank pressure hold the specified value? 1.52 - 1.60 V Go to Step 4
Go to P0452 or P0453
Go to Step 6
6E1357
DTC P1441 EVAP System Flow During Non-Purge (Cont'd)

1. Disconnect the EVAP pressure / purge cart J41413, and then plug the hose end. 2. Disconnect the rubber hose end of engine vacuum source side, (the hose connected between Purge Solenoid Valve and engine). 3. Connect a vacuum hand pump to this rubber hose end. 4. Then apply -15 in H2O vacuum by the vacuum pump. 5. Monitor the fuel tank inner pressure using the Tech 2. Does the fuel tank inner pressure hold the specified value? 1.47 - 1.51 V Go to Step 6 Verify repair Go to Step 5
5 6
Replace the Purge Solenoid Valve. 1. Check for leaks, kinks or pinched hoses at the EVAP system rubber hose line, and also check if the rubber hoses are correctly connected or not. 2. Check for a leak from Vent Solenoid Valve and EVAP system rubber hoses, and also check for clogged Filter of air separator which is located near the vent solenoid valve. Was a problem found? Using the Vacuum Hose Routing Diagram, repair or re-connect the rubber hoses correctly.
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
1. Start engine. 2. Remove the Fuel Filler Cap. 3. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve ON (closed) and Purge Solenoid Valve OFF (0%). 4. Replace the Fuel Filler Cap. 5. Run the engine at 2500RPM constant while monitoring Fuel Tank Vacuum on the Tech 2. Does the fuel tank vacuum remain at the specified value while the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve ON (closed) and Purge Solenoid Valve OFF (0%)? Go to Diagnostic Aids
30 - 40%
Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1546 A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
060R100022
Circuit Description
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) controls the A/C Compressor Clutch Solenoid through the use of a relay and a control (ground) circuit. If the PCM commands the A/C Compressor Clutch Solenoid ON but the voltage remains High (12 volts) or, if the PCM commands the A/C Compressor Clutch Solenoid OFF but the voltage remains Low (0 volts), then DTC P1546 will set. DTC P1546 is a type D code.
D PCM senses voltage is Low with the A/C Compressor Clutch Solenoid commanded OFF.

D The PCM will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store the conditions that were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in Failure Records.

D Ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts. D Engine run time is greater than 32 seconds. The above mentioned conditions are met and one of the following two conditions are met for 20 test failure within a 40 test samples. D PCM senses voltage is High with the A/C Compressor Clutch Solenoid commanded ON. OR

Diagnostic Aids
D Poor connections, or a damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for: backedout terminals, improper mating or damaged terminals. Also check for open circuits, shorts to ground, and shorts to voltage.
6E1359
DTC P1546 A/C Compressor Clutch Output Circuit Malfunction

Go to Step 3
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Remove the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay from the Underhood Electrical Center. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 4. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check for voltage on the Fused pins of the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay connector. Does the DVM read the following value? 12 Volts Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Check the suspect circuit(s) between the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay connector and the Fuse for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) connectors from the PCM. 3. Check the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay control circuit between the PCM and Underhood Electrical Center for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Reinstall the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay. 2. Using a fused jumper, ground the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay control circuit at the PCM connector. 3. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. Does the A/C Compressor turn ON? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 7 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Check the A/C Compressor Clutch circuit between the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay and A/C Compressor Clutch for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8
DTC P1546 A/C Compressor Clutch Output Circuit Malfunction (Cont'd)

8 9
Replace the A/C Compressor Clutch Relay. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair. Verify repair
6E1361
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1618 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) PCM Interprocessor Communication Error
Circuit Description
The serial peripheral interface (SPI) communication is used internally by the PCM to send messages between the engine processor and the automatic transmission processor. Included in each message sent between the two-processors is a check sum of the message. Both the engine processor and automatic transmission processor will compare this check sum value with the calculated value. If the check sums dont match, the processor will view the new data as being corrupted and ignore the values. The processor will then use the previous message. The receiving processor will then send a message to the sending processor informing it that its last message was corrupted. The above conditions are met for 5 test failures within 20 test samples.

D The PCM will flash the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D The PCM will turn the Check Trans lamp OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault is no longer present. D A history DTC P1618 will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P1618 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D Ignition on. D Icluded check sum do not equal to a calculated check sum based on messages in either the engine processor or the automatic transmission processor.
DTC P1618 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) PCM Interprocessor Communication Error
Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 4 Is the EEPROM calibration the latest version available? Reprogram the PCM with the latest available calibrations. Does DTC 1618 re-appear when the OBD System Check is repeated? Go to Step 4
2 3
Repair completed
Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1625 PCM Unexpected Reset
014RX002
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors unexpected PCM reset. This will not turn on MIL light on, only records code DTC P1625.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P1625 will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P1625 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D Clock or COP (Computer Operating Properly) reset. D Illegal operational code software interupt. D Null interupt.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Failure Records only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D P1625 alone stored does not need diagnosis. Clear DTC code. NOTE: DTC P1625 is a DTC to record a PCM reset history. If DTC P1625 is not reset and no engine abnormality is found after clearance of DTC, it is not necessary to do any farther processing.
6E1363
DTC P1625PCM Unexpected Reset

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition is On. Install the Tech 2. Start the engine at let it Idle. On the Tech 2, select DTC info. Go to Step 3 Ignition is On. Clear DTC P1625 by using the Tech 2 Clear Info. Start the engine at let it Idle. On the Tech 2, select DTC info. Go to Step 4
Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P1625 failed? 3
Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P1625 failed? 4 1. Check for aftermarket electronics, such as transceiver stereos, and anti theft devices, they may radiate EMI into the control system if they are improperly installed. (This may cause a false sensor reading and turn on the MIL.) 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was the problem found?
Verify repair
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1627 PCM A/D CONVERSION MALFUNCTION
014RX002
Circuit Description
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors the 5 volt reference signal when the Ignition is ON. If the PCM senses an Analog to Digital (A/D) conversion error within the PCM, then DTC P1627 will set. DTC P1627 is a type A code.

D The PCM will turn OFF the MIL on the third consecutive trip without a reported failure. D A History DTC will clear after 40 consecutive trips without a reported failure. D The DTC can be cleared using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.

D Engine is running. D Any A/D DTCs set.
Diagnostic Aids
D Poor connections, or a damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for: backedout terminals, improper mating or damaged terminals. Also, check for open circuits, shorts to ground, and shorts to voltage.

D The PCM will illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will store the conditions that were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in Failure Records.
6E1365
DTC P1627 PCM A/D Conversion Malfunction

Go to Step 3
Check the suspect 5 volt reference circuit(s) for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 4 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair.
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P1635 5 VOLT REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
060R100046
Circuit Description
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors the 5 volt reference signal when the Ignition is ON. If the PCM senses the 5 volt reference signal circuit is above 5.12 volts or below 4.88 volts, then DTC P1635 will set. DTC P1635 is a type A code.

D The PCM will illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM will store the conditions that were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in Failure Records.

D Ignition voltage is greater than 6.3 volts. The above mentioned conditions are met and one of the following two conditions are met for 40 test failures within 80 test samples while 125 msec. D PCM senses the 5 volt reference signal circuit is above 5.12 volts. OR D PCM senses the 5 volt reference signal circuit is below 4.88 volts.

D The PCM will turn OFF the MIL on the third consecutive trip without a reported failure. D A History DTC will clear after 40 consecutive trips without a reported failure. D The DTC can be cleared using the Scan Tools Clear Info function.
Diagnostic Aids
Poor connections, or a damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for: backedout terminals, improper mating or damaged terminals. Also, check for open circuits, shorts to ground, and shorts to voltage.
6E1367
DTC P1635 5 Volt Reference Voltage Circuit Malfunction

Go to Step 3
Check the suspect 5 volt reference circuit(s) for the following conditions: D A short to ground D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 4 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair.
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Before using this section, perform the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check and verify all of the following items: D The powertrain control module (PCM) and malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)(Check Engine lamp) are operating correctly. D There are no DTC(s) stored. D Tech 2 data is within normal operating range. Refer to Typical Scan Data Values. D Verify the customer complaint and locate the correct symptom in the table of contents. Perform the procedure included in the symptom chart.
VISUAL/PHYSICAL CHECK
Several of the symptom procedures call for a careful visual/physical check. This can lead to correcting a problem without further checks and can save valuable time. This check should include the following items: D PCM grounds for cleanliness, tightness and proper location. D Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and proper connections, as shown on the Vehicle Emission Control Information label. Check thoroughly for any type of leak or restriction. D Air intake ducts for collapsed or damaged areas. D Air leaks at throttle body mounting area, manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and intake manifold sealing surfaces. D Ignition component for cracking, hardness, and carbon tracking. D Wiring for proper connections, pinches and cuts.
INTERMITTENTS
An intermittent problem may or may not turn on the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or store a Diagnostic Trouble Code. DO NOT use the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) charts for intermittent problems. The fault must be present to locate the problem. Most intermittent problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Perform a careful visual/physical check for the following conditions: D Poor mating of the connector halves or a terminal not fully seated in the connector (backed out). D Improperly formed or damaged terminal. D All connector terminals in the problem circuit should be carefully checked for proper contact tension. D Poor terminaltowire connection. This requires removing the terminal from the connector body to check. Road test the vehicle with a J 39200 Digital Multimeter connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal voltage when the malfunction occurs is a good indication that there is a fault in the circuit being monitored. Use a Tech 2 to help detect intermittent conditions.
The Scan Tools have several features that can be used to locate an intermittent condition. Use the following feature to find intermittent faults: D Using a Scan Tools Freeze Frame buffer or Failure Records buffer can aid in locating an intermittent condition. Review and record the information in the freeze frame or failure record associated with the intermittent DTC being diagnosed. The vehicle can be driven within the conditions that were present when the DTC originally set. To check for loss of diagnostic code memory, disconnect the MAP sensor and idle the engine until the MIL (Check Engine lamp) comes on. Diagnostic Trouble Code P0107 should be stored and kept in memory when the ignition is turned OFF. If not, the PCM is faulty. When this test is completed, make sure that you clear the Diagnostic Trouble Code P0107 from memory. An intermittent MIL (Check Engine lamp) with no stored Diagnostic Trouble Code may be caused by the following: D Ignition coil shorted to ground and arcing at ignition wires or plugs. D MIL (Check Engine lamp) wire to PCM shorted to ground. D Poor PCM grounds. Refer to the PCM wiring diagrams. Check for improper installation of electrical options such as lights, cellular phones, etc. Check all wires from the PCM to the ignition coils for poor connections. Check for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and check for other open diodes (refer to wiring diagrams in Electrical Diagnosis). If problem has not been found, refer to PCM Connector Symptom tables. D Check the Broadcast Code of the PCM, and compare it with the latest Isuzu service bulletins and/or Isuzu EEPROM reprogramming equipment to determine if an update to the PCMs reprogrammable memory has been released. To check the Broadcast Code, connect the Tech 2, then look for ID info, then select Broadcast Code. This should display a 4 character code, such as XBYA (example only). This identifies the contents of the reprogrammable software and calibration contained in the PCM. If the Broadcast code is not the most current available, it is advisable to reprogram the PCMs EEPROM memory, which may either help identify a hardtofind problem or may fix the problem.
6E1369
HARD START SYMPTOM

DEFINITION: Engine cranks, but does not start for a long time. Does eventually run, or may start but immediately stalls.
Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Perform a bulletin search. 2. If a bulletin that addresses the symptom is found, correct the condition as instructed in the bulletin. Was a bulletin found that addresses the symptom? Verify repair
Go to Step 3 Go to Visual / Physical Check
Was a visual/physical check performed? Go to Step 4
Check engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor for shift in value. 1. After 8 hours with the hood up and the engine not running, connect the Tech 2. 2. Ignition ON, engine not running. 3. Using the Tech 2, compare Engine Coolant Temperature to Intake Air Temperature. Are ECT and IAT within the specified value of each 5C ( 9F) other? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 5
1. Using a Tech 2, display the engine coolant temperature and note the value. 2. Check the resistance of the engine coolant temperature sensor. 3. For resistance specifications, refer to Temperature vs. Resistance chart in DTC P0118. Is the actual resistance near the resistance value in the chart for the temperature that was noted? Go to Step 7 Verify repair Go to Step 6
6 7
Replace the ECT sensor. Is the action complete? Locate and repair high resistance or connection in the ECT signal circuit or the ECT signal circuit or the PCM sensor ground. Verify repair Check for a faulty, plugged, or incorrectly installed PCV valve. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Visually/Physically inspect the secondary ignition wires. Check for the following conditions: D Verify that all ignition wire resistance are less than the specified value. D Verify that ignition wires are correctly routed to eliminate crossfiring. D Verify that ignition wires are not arcing to ground. Spraying the secondary ignition wires with a light mist of water may help locate an intermittent problem. Was a problem found? 22.4 k W Verify repair
Go to Step 10

10
Check for proper ignition voltage output with a spark testerJ 26792. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Remove the spark plugs and check for gas or oil fouling cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, heavy deposits, or improper heat range. 2. If spark plugs are fouled, the cause of fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. Was a problem found? Verify repair Check for a loose ignition control module ground. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Check the ignition coil secondary resistance. 2. Replace the coil if it is not within the specified range of resistance. Did the coil require replacement? 9 kW12 kW Verify repair Check IAC operation. Perform the procedure in the diagnostic chart DTC P0506, Step 6. Was a problem found? Verify repair Check for water or alcohol contaminated fuel. Was a problem found? Verify repair Perform the procedure in Fuel System Pressure Test to determine if there is a problem with fuel delivery. Was a problem found? Verify repair Check for the following engine mechanical problems (refer to Engine Mechanical): D Low compression D Leaking cylinder head gaskets D Worn camshaft D Camshaft drive belt slipped or stripped Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 11
11
12 13
Go to Step 14
14
15 16
Go to Step 17
17
Go to Step 18
18
Contact Technical Assistance
6E1371
SURGES AND/or CHUGGLES SYMPTOM

DEFINITION: Engine power variation under steady throttle or cruise. Feels like the vehicle speeds up and slows down with no change in the accelerator pedal.
Be sure that the driver understands A/C compressor operation as explained in the owners manual. Inform the customer how the A/C clutch operate. Is the customer experiencing a normal condition? System OK Go to Step 5 Check the fuel control Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S1). When monitored on the Tech 2, the H02S1 should respond quickly to different throttle positions. If it doesnt check for silicon or other contaminants from fuel or use of improper RTV sealant. The sensors may have a white powdery coating. Silicone contamination sends a rich exhaust signal which causes the PCM to command an excessively lean air/fuel mixture. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Check the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel System Pressure Test. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Monitor Long Term Fuel Trim on the Tech 2. Is Long Term Fuel Trim in the negative range (rich condition)? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 11 Verify repair Go to Step 12 Verify repair Check items that can cause the engine to run rich. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0172. Was a problem found? Check items that can cause the engine to run lean. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0171. Was a problem found? Check for proper ignition voltage output with the spark tester J 26792. Was a problem found? Check for a loose ignition control module ground. Was a problem found?
10
11

12
Visually/Physically inspect the secondary ignition wires. Check for the following conditions. D Verify that all ignition wire resistance are less than the specified value. D Verify that ignition wires are correctly routed to eliminated crossfiring. D Verify that ignition wires are not arcing to ground. Spraying the secondary ignition wires with a light mist of water may help to locate an intermittent problem. Was a problem found? 22.4 W Verify repair 1. Check ignition coil secondary resistance. 2. Replace the coil if it is not within the specified range of resistance. Did the coil require replacement? 9 kW 12 kW Verify repair 1. Remove the spark plugs and check for gas or oil fouling, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, heavy deposits or improper heat range. 2. If spark plugs are fouled, the cause of fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Check the injector connectors. 2. If any of the connectors are connected at an improper cylinder, correct as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Check the PCM grounds to verify that they are clean and tight. Refer to the PCM wiring diagrams in Electrical Diagnosis. Was a problem found? Verify repair Visually/physically check the vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and proper connections and routing as shown on the Vehicle Emission Control Information label. Was a problem found? Verify repair Check the exhaust system for a possible restriction: D damaged or collapsed pipes D internal muffler failure D Refer to Restricted Exhaust System Check to measure back pressure and determine if the catalytic converter is plugged. Verify repair 1. Review all the diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection. D Tech 2 data. D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer. D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system. Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 13
13
Go to Step 14
14
Go to Step 15
15
Go to Step 16
16
Go to Step 17
17
Go to Step 18
18
Go to Step 19
19
6E1373
LACK OF POWER, SLUGGISH OR SPONGY SYMPTOM

DEFINITION: Engine delivers less than expected power. Little or no increase in speed when accelerator pedal is pushed down partway.
1. Remove and check the air filter element for dirt or restrictions. Refer to Air Intake System in OnVehicle Service. 2. Replace the air filter element if necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 5 Check for proper ignition voltage output with the spark tester J 26792. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Remove the spark plugs and check gas or oil fouling, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, heavy deposits or improper heat range. 2. If spark plugs are fouled, the cause of fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8 Check the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel System Test. Was a problem found? 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at idle. 3. On the Tech 2, select F3: Miscellaneous Test, F6: Variable Intake Manifold. 4. Repeat Switch ON or OFF of VIM solenoid valve by using the Tech 2. 5. Check the solenoid working sound. 6. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Check for water or alcohol contaminated fuel. Was a problem found? Check the PCM grounds to verify that they are clean and tight. Refer to the PCM wiring diagrams in Electrical Diagnosis. Was a problem found? Verify repair
7 8
9 10
Go to Step 11

11
Check the exhaust system for a possible restriction: D Damaged or collapsed pipes D Internal muffler failure D Refer to Restricted Exhaust System Check to measure backpressure and determine if the catalytic converter is plugged. Was a problem found? Verify repair Check for the following engine mechanical problems: D Low compression D Leaking cylinder head gasket D Worn or incorrect camshaft D Loose timing belt Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Review all the diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection. D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer. D All electrical connections within suspected circuit and/or system. Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 12
12
Go to Step 13
13
6E1375
DETONATION/SPARK KNOCK SYMPTOM

DEFINITION: A mild to severe ping, usually worse under acceleration. The engine makes sharp metallic knocks that change with throttle opening.
1. If Tech 2 readings are normal and there are no engine mechanical faults, fill the fuel tank with a known quality gasoline that has a minimum octane rating of 87. Refer to Typical Scan Values. 2. Reevaluate the vehicle performance. Is detonation present? Go to Step 5 Verify repair 1. Check for obvious overheating problems: D Low engine coolant. D Restricted air flow to radiator, or restricted water flow through radiator. D Incorrect coolant solution. It should be a 50/50 mix of approved antifreeze/water. D Incorrect EGR operation. Refer to DTC P0401. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Check fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel System Pressure Test. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Check items that can cause an engine to run lean. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0171. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 Check spark plugs for proper heat range. Refer to General Information. Were incorrect spark plugs installed? Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Remove excessive carbon buildup with a top engine cleaner. Refer to instructions on the top engine cleaner can. 2. Reevaluate vehicle performance. Is detonation still present?

10
Check for an engine mechanical problem. Perform a cylinder compression check. Refer to Engine Mechanical. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 11
11
6E1377
ROUGH, UNSTABLE, OR INCORRECT IDLE, STALLING SYMPTOM

DEFINITION: Engine runs unevenly at idle. If severe, the engine or vehicle may shake. Engine idle speed may vary in RPM. Either condition may be severe enough to stall the engine.
Go to Step 3 Go to Visual / Physical Check Go to Step 5
Was a visual/physical check performed, including the rotor, ignition coil and secondary ignition wires? Go to Step 4 Verify repair Verify that the EGR valve is not mounted backwards. Was a problem found? 1. Check for incorrect idle speed. Ensure that the following conditions are present: D Engine fully warm. D Accessories are OFF. 2. Using a Tech 2, monitor IAC position. Is the IAC position within the specified values? 1. Visually/physically inspect for the following conditions: D Restricted air intake system. Check for a restricted air filter element, or foreign objects blocking the air intake system. D Check for objects blocking the IAC passage or throttle bore, excessive deposits in the IAC passage and on the IAC pintle, and excessive deposits in the throttle bore and on the throttle plate. D Check for a condition that causes a large vacuum leak, such as an incorrectly installed or faulty crankcase ventilation valve brake booster hose. Was a problem found? Verify repair
4 5
Between 10 and 50 counts
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 7 For further diagnosis, refer to DTC P0123
Using a Tech 2, monitor TP angle with the engine idling. Is the TP angle at the specified value and steady? 0% Go to Step 8
Check for proper ignition voltage output with the spark tester J 26792. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Remove the spark plugs and check for gas or oil fouling, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, heavy deposits or improper heat range. 2. If spark plugs are fouled, the cause of the fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 10

10
Check for a loose ignition control module ground. Refer to Electrical Ignition System. Was a problem found? Verify repair Monitor Long Term Fuel Trim on the Tech 2. Is Long Term Fuel Trim in the negative range (rich condition)? Check the items that can cause the engine to run rich. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0172. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 14 Is Long Term Fuel Trim significantly in the positive range (lean condition)? Check items that can cause the engine to run leading. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0171. Was a problem found? Verify repair Check the injector connections. If any of the injectors are connected to an incorrect cylinder, correct as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Perform the Injector Coil/Balance Test. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Check the following engine mechanical problems: D Low compression D Leaking cylinder head gasket D Worn or incorrect camshaft D Sticking or leaking valves D Valve timing D Broken valve springs D Camshaft drive belt slipped or stripped. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Check for faulty motor mounts. Refer to Engine Mechanical for inspection of mounts. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 11
11
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 13
12
Go to Step 13
13
Go to Step 15
14
Go to Step 14
15
16 17
Go to Step 18
18
Go to Step 19
19
6E1379
POOR FUEL ECONOMY SYMPTOM

DEFINITION: Fuel economy, as measured by an actual road test, is noticeably lower than expected. Also, economy is noticeably lower than it was on this vehicle at one time, as previously shown by an actual road test.
Check owners driving habits. D Is the A/C ON full time (defroster mode ON)? D Are tires at the correct pressure? D Are excessively heavy loads being carried? D Is acceleration too much, too often? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Review the items in Step 4 with the customer and advise as necessary. Is the action complete? System OK 1. Visually/physically check: Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and improper connections and routing as shown on the Vehicle Emission Control Information label. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Remove and check the air filter element for dirt or for restrictions. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Remove the spark plugs and check for gas or oil fouling, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes of heavy deposits. 2. Is spark plugs are fouled, the cause of fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 11 Verify repair Go to Step 12 Verify repair Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Check for low engine coolant level. Was a problem found? Check for an incorrect or faulty engine thermostat. Refer to Engine Cooling. Was a problem found? Check for low engine compression. Refer to Engine Mechanical. Was a problem found?
9 10
11

12
Check for excessive exhaust system backpressure. Refer to Restricted Exhaust System Check. Possible problems could be: D Damaged or collapsed pipes. D Internal muffler failure. D Plugged catalytic converter. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 15 Check for proper calibration of the speedometer. Does the speed indicated on the speedometer closely match the vehicle speed displayed on the Tech 2?
Go to Step 13
13
Go to Step 14
14
Diagnose and repair the inaccurate speedometer condition as necessary. Refer to Vehicle Speed Sensor in Electrical Diagnosis. Verify repair Go to Step 16 Verify repair Check the air intake system and the crankcase for air leaks. Was a problem found? 1. Review all the diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All connections within a suspected circuit and/or system Was a problem found? Verify repair Contact Technical Assistance Perform the procedure in Fuel System Pressure Test. Was the fuel pressure normal?
15
16
Go to Step 17
17
Verify repair
6E1381
EXCESSIVE EXHAUST EMISSIONS OR ODORS SYMPTOM

DEFINITION: Vehicle fails an emission test. There is excessive rotten egg smell. (Excessive odors do not necessarily indicate excessive emissions.)
Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Perform a bulletin search. 2. If a bulletin that addresses the symptom is found, correct the condition as instructed in the bulletin. Was a bulletin found that addresses the symptom? Was visual/physical check performed? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 13
Go to Step 13 Go to Step 3 Go to Visual / Physical Check
Check for vacuum leaks (vacuum lines, intake manifold, throttle body, etc.) Were any vacuum leaks found? 1. Check fuel cap for proper installation. 2. Secure the fuel cap if necessary. Was a problem found? 1. Check the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel System Pressure Test. Was a problem found? 1. Check for faulty, plugged or incorrectly installed PCV valve. 2. Verify that the PCV system is not plugged. Was a problem found? Check the injector connections. If any of the injectors are connected to an incorrect cylinder, correct as necessary. Was a problem found? Perform the Injector Coil/Balance Test. Was a problem found? Check for a problem with the engine cooling system. Was a problem found? Check the EVAP canister for fuel loading. Refer to Evaporative Emission Control System. Was a problem found? 1. Remove excessive carbon build-up with a top engine cleaner. Refer to the instructions on the top engine cleaner can. 2. Perform the exhaust emission test. Does the vehicle pass the test?
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 13 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 11
9 10 11
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 12
12
Go to Step 14 System OK Go to Step 14 System OK Go to Step 15 Go to Step 16
13 14
Perform the exhaust emission test. Does the vehicle pass the test? Does the exhaust emission test indicate excessive HC levels, or is Long Term Fuel Trim significantly in the negative range (rich condition)?

15
1. Check items that can cause the engine to run rich. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0172 Diagnostic Support. Make any necessary repairs. 2. Perform the exhaust emission test. Does the vehicle pass the test? System OK Go to Step 17
16
1. Check items that can cause the engine to run lean. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0171. Make any necessary repairs. 2. Perform the exhaust emission test. Does the vehicle pass the test? System OK Go to Step 18 Verify repair Go to Step 17
17 18
Check the EGR system (refer to DTC P0401). Was a problem found? Check for the following engine mechanical problems. D Low compression D Leaking cylinder head gasket D Worn or incorrect camshaft D Sticking or leaking valves D Valve timing D Broken Valve springs Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Review all the diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 19
19
6E1383
DIESELING, RUNON SYMPTOM

DEFINITION: Engine continues to run after key is turned OFF, but runs very rough. If engine runs smoothly, check the ignition switch and adjustment.
1. Check for a short between B+ and the ignition feed circuit. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Review all the diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All connections within a suspected circuit and/or system Was a problem found? Verify repair
BACKFIRE SYMPTOM
DEFINITION: Fuel ignites in the intake manifold, or in the exhaust system, making a loud popping noise.
Check for proper ignition voltage output with spark tester J 26792. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Remove the spark plugs and check for gas or oil fouling, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes of heavy deposits. 2. If spark plugs are fouled, the cause of fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Visually/physically inspect the secondary ignition wires. Check for the following conditions: D Verify that all ignition wire resistances are less than the specified value. D Verify that ignition wires are correctly routed to eliminate crossfiring. D Verify that ignition wires are not arcing to ground. Spraying the secondary ignition wires with a light mist of water may help locate an intermittent problem. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Check for an intermittent ignition system malfunction: D Intermittent CKP 58X signal. D Intermittent ignition feed circuit or sensor ground circuit to the crankshaft position sensor. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 To determine if there is a problem with fuel delivery, refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Check for the following engine mechanical problems: D Low compression D Leaking cylinder head gasket D Worn or incorrect camshaft D Incorrect valve timing D Sticking or leaking valves D Camshaft drive belt slipped or stripped. Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 10

Step Action Value(s) Yes
6E1385
No
10
Check the intake and exhaust manifold(s) for casting flash. Refer to Engine Mechanical. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Review all the diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 11
11
CUTS OUT, MISSES SYMPTOM

DEFINITION: Steady pulsation or jerking that follows engine speed; usually more pronounced as engine load increases.
Check the PCM grounds to verify that they are clean and tight. Refer to the PCM wiring diagrams in Electrical Diagnosis. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 5 Monitor Long Term Fuel Trim on the Tech 2. Is the Long Term Fuel Trim in the negative range (rich condition)? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7
Check items that can cause the engine to run rich. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0172. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 9 Is the long term fuel trim significantly in the positive range (lean condition)? Check items that can cause the engine to run lean. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0171. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Check for incorrect idle speed. Ensure that the following conditions are present: D Engine fully warm. D Accessories are OFF. 2. Using a Tech 2, monitor the IAC position. Is the IAC position within the specified values? 1. Visually/physically inspect for the following conditions: D Restricted air intake system. Check for a restricted air filter element, or foreign objects blocking the air intake system. D Check for objects blocking the IAC passage or throttle bore, excessive deposits in the IAC passage and on the IAC pintle, and excessive deposits in the throttle bore and on the throttle plate. D Check for a condition that causes a large vacuum leak, such as an incorrectly installed or faulty crankcase ventilation valve or brake booster hose disconnected. Was a problem found? Verify repair
7 8
Between 5 and 50 counts
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 10
10
Go to Step 11

6E1387
No
11
Check the injector connections. If any of the injectors are connected to an incorrect cylinder, correct as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Perform the Injector Coil/Balance Test. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Check for fuel in the pressure regulator vacuum hose. 2. If fuel is present, replace the fuel pressure regulator assembly. Was a problem found? Verify repair Check for proper ignition voltage output with spark tester J 26792. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Remove spark plugs and check for gas or oil fouling, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes of heavy deposits. 2. If spark plugs are fouled, the cause of fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. Was a problem found? Verify repair Check for a loose ignition control module ground. Was a problem found? Verify repair Using a Tech 2, monitor the TP angle with the engine idling. Is the TP angle at the specified value and steady? Go to Step 18 0% Verify repair
12 13
Go to Step 14
14
Go to Step 15
15
Go to Step 16 Go to Step 17 For further diagnosis, refer to DTC P0123 Go to Step 19
16 17
18 19
Check the PCV valve for proper operation. Was a problem found? Check for the following engine mechanical problems: D Low compression D Leaking cylinder head gasket D Worn or incorrect camshaft D Incorrect valve timing D Sticking or leaking valves D Camshaft drive belt slipped or stripped. Was a problem found? Verify repair Check for faulty motor mounts. Refer to Engine Mechanical for inspection of the mounts. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Review all the diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 20
20
Go to Step 21
21
HESITATION, SAG, STUMBLE SYMPTOM

DEFINITION: Momentary lack of response as the accelerator is pushed down. Can occur at any vehicle speed. Usually most pronounced when first trying to make the vehicle move, as from a stop sign. May cause the engine to stall if severe enough.
1. Check the fuel control heated oxygen sensor (HO2S1). The HO2S1 should respond quickly to different to throttle positions. If it doesnt, check for silicon or other contaminants from fuel or use of improper RTV sealant. The sensors may have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination sends a rich exhaust signal which causes the PCM to command an excessively lean air/fuel mixture. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 5 Check the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel System Pressure Test. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Observe the TP angle display on the Tech 2 while slowly increasing throttle pedal. Does the TP angle display steadily increase from 0% at closed throttle to 100% at WOT? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 7
Monitor Long Term Fuel Trim on the Tech 2. Is the Long Term Fuel Trim in the negative range (rich condition)? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 10 Verify repair
Check items that can cause the engine to run rich. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0172. Was a problem found? Check items that can cause the engine to run lean. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0171. Was a problem found? Check for proper ignition voltage output with spark tester J 26792 (ST125). For the procedure, refer to Electronic Ignition System. Was a problem found? Verify repair Check for a loose ignition control module ground. Was a problem found? Verify repair
10
11

6E1389
No
12
Visually/physically inspect the secondary ignition wires. Check for the following conditions: D Verify that all ignition wire resistances are less than the specified value. D Value that ignition wires are correctly routed to eliminate crossfiring. D Verify that ignition wires are not arcing to ground. Spraying the secondary ignition wires with a light mist of water may help locate an intermittent problem. Was a problem found? 30,000 W Verify repair Verify repair Replace the TP sensor.
Go to Step 14
13 14
1. Check the ignition coil secondary resistance. 2. Replace the coil if it is not within the specified value. Was a problem found? 9 kW 12kW Verify repair 1. Remove the spark plugs and check for gas or oil fouling, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes of heavy deposits. 2. If spark plugs are fouled, the cause of fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. Was a problem found? Verify repair Check the PCM grounds to verify that they are clean and tight. Refer to the PCM wiring diagrams in Electrical Diagnosis. Was a problem found? Verify repair Visually/physically check vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and proper connections and routing as shown on the Vehicle Emission Control Information label. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 15
15
Go to Step 16
16
Go to Step 17
17
Go to Step 18
18
RESTRICTED EXHAUST SYSTEM CHECK

Was the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Remove the HO2S2. D For removal procedures, refer to Heated Oxygen Sensors in OnVehicle Service. 2. Install the Exhaust Backpressure Tester in place of the Bank 1 HO2S. 3. Idle the engine at normal operating temperature. Does the reading on the gauge exceed the specified value? 8.62 kPa (1.25 psi) Go to Step 5
Go to Step 3
With the exhaust backpressure tester in place of HO2S, and the engine at normal operating temperature: Increase the engine speed to 2000 RPM while observing the gauge. Does the reading exceed the amount of the value column? 8.62 kPa (1.25 psi) Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4
1. Reinstall the HO2S2. (Refer to Heated Oxygen Sensors in OnVehicle Service for installation procedure.) 2. Remove the HO2S1. 3. Install the Exhaust BackPressure Tester BT8515V or equivalent in place of the HO2S1. 4. Bring the engine to normal operating temperature while observing the gauge. 5. Increase the engine speed to 2000 RPM (allow 10 seconds for pressure build) and observe the gauge. Did the reading exceed the specified value? Repair a restiction in the exhaust system after the catalytic converter. Possible faults include: D Collapsed pipe D Internal muffler failure
8.62 kPa (1.25 psi)
Go to Step 6
System OK
6 Replace the restricted catalytic converter. NOTE: Diagnostic Trouble Codes will be set by running the vehicle to normal operating temperature after a cold start with the O2 sensor disconnected. After performing these tests, use the Tech 2 to erase the Diagnostic Trouble Codes that were set by the lack of O2 sensor activity.
6E1391
DEFAULT MATRIX TABLE

SERVICE PROCEDURE DEFAULT STRATEGY
A referral strategy has been established to assist the technician with additional information when the cause of the failure cannot be determined. If no problem is found after performing diagnostics, then for further diagnostic information, refer to the default matrix table.
DEFAULT MATRIX TABLE

Strategy Based Diagnostic Charts OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check Initial Diagnosis Vehicle does not enter diagnostics. Vehicle enters diagnostics and communicates with the Tech 2. MIL is ON in diagnostics. Engine does not start and run. Engine starts and runs, no PCM codes set. Customer complains of vibration. OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check. OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check. PCM power and ground circuits OK. Data link voltage incorrect. Default Section(s) Chassis Electrical Ignition System Check
OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check PCM Power and Ground Check PCM Power and Ground Check
Chassis Electrical Chassis Electrical
Symptoms Intermittents
Initial Diagnosis 1. Onboard diagnostic (OBD) system check. 2. Careful visual/physical inspections. 1. OBD system check. 2. Sensors (ECT, MAP, TP); MAP output chart. 3. Fuel system electrical test, fuel system diagnosis. 4. Ignition system. 5. IAC system check. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. OBD system check. Heated oxygen sensors. Fuel system diagnosis. Ignition system. OBD system check. Fuel system diagnosis. Ignition system. EGR operation. EGR system check. OBD system check. EGR operation. EGR system check. Fuel system diagnosis. Ignition system.
Default Section(s) Chassis Electrical
Hard Starts
Engine Mechanical Ignition System Check Exhaust System Diagnosis
Surges and/or Chuggles
Calibration ID Broadcast Code/Service Bulletins Ignition System Check Generator Output Exhaust System Diagnosis Refer to Exhaust System in Engine Exhaust TCC Operation Calibration ID/Service Bulletins
Lack of Power, Sluggish or Spongy
Detonation / Spark Knock
Cooling System Ignition System Check Calibration ID/Service Bulletins

Hesitation, Sag, Stumble 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. OBD system check. TP. MAP output check. Fuel system diagnosis. Fuel injector and fuel injector balance test. 6. EVAP emission canister purge valve. 7. Ignition system. 1. OBD system check. 2. Cylinder balance test. 1. OBD system check. 2. Fuel injector and fuel injector balance test. 3. EVAP emission canister purge valve check. 4. Ignition system. 5. IAC operation. 6. EGR operation. EGR Operation EGR System Check Generator Output Voltage (refer to Chassis Electrical) Calibration ID/Service Bulletins Ignition System Check
Cuts Out, Misses Rough, Unstable, or Incorrect Idle, Stalling
Ignition System Check MAP Output Check Throttle Linkage IAC System Check EGR System Check A/C Clutch Control Circuit Diagnosis Crankcase Ventilation System Calibration ID/Service Bulletins Generator Output Voltage (refer to Chassis Electrical) Exhaust Diagnosis TCC Operation Exhaust System (refer to Engine Exhaust)
Poor Fuel Economy
1. 2. 3. 4.
OBD system check. Careful visual/physical inspection. Ignition system. Cooling system.
1. OBD system check.
Fuel System Electrical Diagnosis Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel Injector Fuel Injector Balance Test EGR System Check Exhaust Diagnosis Calibration ID/Service Bulletins
Excessive Exhaust Emissions or Odors
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
OBD system check. Emission test. Cooling system. Fuel system diagnosis. Fuel injector and fuel injector balance test. EVAP emission canister purge valve. Crankcase ventilation system. Ignition system. MAP output check.
Dieseling, RunOn
1. OBD system check. 2. Careful visual/physical inspection. 3. Fuel system diagnosis. 1. 2. 3. 4. OBD system check. Ignition system. Fuel system diagnosis. Fuel injector and fuel injector balance test. 5. EGR operation, EGR system check.
Backfire
Exhaust System Diagnosis, Intake Casting Flash, Ignition System Check

Misfire 1. 2. 3. 4. OBD system check. Ignition system. Fuel system diagnosis. Fuel injector and fuel injector balance test.
6E1393
Vibrations, Transmission, Driveshaft and Axle
Catalyst Monitor
1. OBD system check. 2. Careful visual/physical inspection. 3. Heated oxygen sensors. 1. 2. 3. 4. OBD system check. Careful visual/physical inspection. Fuel system diagnosis. Heated oxygen sensors.
Exhaust System
Fuel Trim
Exhaust System Intake Air System
Evaporative Emissions
1. OBD system check. 2. Careful visual/physical inspection. 3. Fuel system diagnosis. 1. OBD system check. 2. Careful visual/physical inspection.
Heated Oxygen Sensors
Exhaust System
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove spark plug cover on top of valve cover by removing four retaining bolts. 3. Disconnect electrical connector from the sensor.
8. Remove the retaining bolt for the sensor and pull up camshaft position sensor.
014RX005
Installation Procedure
1. Insert camshaft position sensor in position. 2. Install retaining bolt.
014RX003
4. Remove drive belt. Refer to Engine Mechanical Section. 5. Remove top harness cover installed on timing belt cover by removing a retaining screw. 6. Remove the retaining bolts holding crankshaft pulley, and pull crankshaft pulley while wiggling. Refer to Engine Mechanical Section. 7. Remove the retaining screws for timing belt cover and timing belt cover.
014RX007
3. Install the timing belt cover and the retaining screws. 4. Install the crank shaft pulley and the mounting bolts. Holes for mounting bolts are off the pitch. The pulley can be mounted only one way to install all mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts. Refer to Engine Mechanical section.
014RX004

5. Install the drive belt. Refer to Engine Mechanical Section.
6E1395
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Engine Mechanical Section.
014RX005
6. Install the top harness cover onto timing belt cover. 7. Connect electrical connector to the sensor and securely lock it. 8. Install the spark plug cover. 9. Connect the negative battery cable.
014RX003
3. Remove the power steering pump and mountingbracket from engine. Refer to Engine Mechanical Section. 4. Disconnect electrical connector from the sensor.
014RX004
014RX006

5. Remove the retaining bolt and sensor from the engine block. NOTE: Use caution to avoid any hot oil that might drip out. 3. Reinstall the power steering pump and bracket to the engine.
014RX006
0013
4. Reinstall the accessory drive belt. 5. Connect the negative battery cable.
1. Install the crank shaft position sensor to its position. 2. Install and tighten the mounting bolt. Refer to Engine Mechanical Section.
014RX003
IMPORTANT: PCM must relearn Crankshaft Position when the CKP sensor is replaced. Refer to CKP sensor learn mode on the Tech 2, or Tooth Error Correction in the Service Manual.
0013
6E1397
EEPROM
EEPROM
The Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically soldered within the PCM. The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the PCM needs to control Powertrain operation.
D Ensure the ignition is stay in ON position after programming is started.
901RX031
Functional Check
1. Perform the OnBoard Diagnostic System Check. 2. Start the engine and run for least one minute. 3. Check for DTCs using Tech 2. 4. If the PCM fails to program, proceed as follow: D Ensure that all PCM connections are OK. D Check the ITCS for latest version software. D Attempt to program PCM again. If PCM still cannot be programmed properly, replace PCM. The replacement PCM must be programmed.
014RX002
EEPROM Programming
1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC and retrieve information from the PCM. Ensure that the following condition have been met: D Battery is fully charged. D The Ignition is in ON position. D Tech 2 cable is securely connected to DLC. 2. Download latest program and calibration from ITCS. Always use latest ITCS software to program PCM. Refer to Uptodate ITCS users guide. 3. Reconnect Tech 2 to the DLC and program PCM. D Make sure the ignition is recycled after information is retrieved.
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Drain enough engine coolant so that the coolant level will be below the ECT sensor. 3. Remove electrical connector from the sensor located on the intake manifold above the ignition coil.

4. Unscrew the sensor from the manifold. D Bank 1 sensor 2 is mounted on the exhaust pipe behind the catalytic converter. 3. Disconnect pig tail electrical connector. IMPORTANT: The pigtail is permanently attached to the sensor. Be careful not to pull the wires out.
014RX008
1. Install the sensor into the intake manifold. Do not over tighten. 2. Connect electrical connector. 3. Add engine coolant to required level. Refer to Engine Cooling System Section. 4. Connect the negative battery cable.
014RX010
4. Unscrew sensors form the exhaust pipe. Because of the expansion and contraction of the metal in the exhaust system over time, this may be difficult if the engine temperature is below 48 degree C.
Inspection Procedure
NOTE: Both sensors are identical. Inspect each in the same way. 1. Inspect the pigtail and the electrical connector for grease, dirt, corrosion and bare wire or worn insulation. 2. Inspect the louvered end of the sensor for grease, dirt, excessive carbon build up or other contaminants.
0016
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Locate the two oxygen sensors. D Bank 1 sensor 1 is mounted on the exhaust pipe ahead of the catalytic converter.
TS23739
6E1399
NOTE: If HO2S is reinstalled after removal, special antiseize compound or the equivalent should be applied to the threads. Special antiseize compound, (P/N 5613695), is used on the HO2S threads. This compound consists of glass beads suspended in a liquid graphite solution. The graphite burns away with exhaust heat, but the glass beads will remain, making the sensor easier to remove. 1. Apply antiseize compound or the equivalent to the thread.
(PostCatalytic Converter Heater Oxygen Sensor Location)
014RX009
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. The IAT sensor is located in the intake air duct between the air filter and the throttle body.
TS23739
2. Install HO2S on the exhaust pipe. 3. Tighten the sensor to 55 Nm (40 lb ft) 4. Connect the pig tail to the wiring harness. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. (PreCatalytic Converter Heater Oxygen Sensor Location)
014RX011
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the sensor.
014RX010

4. Remove the sensor from intake air duct by using a rocking motion while pulling the sensor. 3. Remove a mounting bolt securing the sensor to the manifold. 4. Remove the sensor from the intake manifold using rocking motion while pulling the sensor.
0018
1. Install the IAT sensor into intake air duct. Make sure the sensoris pushed all the way into the intake air duct. 2. Connect electrical connector. 3. Connect the negative battery cable.
014RX012
1. Push MAP sensor into the manifold. Make sure the sensor is pushed always into its position. 2. Install a mounting bolts and tighten. 3. Connect electrical connector. 4. Connect the negative battery cable.
014RX011
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the sensor. (The MAP sensoris located on the intake manifold behind throttle body.)
014RX013
6E1401
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

Refer to Instrument Panel Removal Procedure.
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage
Electronic components used in the control system are often designed to carry very low voltage. Electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to same electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4000 volts for a person to even feel the zap of a static discharge. There are several way for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charge of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with opposite polarity. Static charge can cause damage, therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. NOTE: To prevent possible Electrostatic Discharge damage, follow these guidelines: D Do not touch the control module connector pins or soldered components on the control module circuit board. D Do not open the replacement part package until the part is ready to be installed. D Before removing the parts from the package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. D If the parts been handled while sliding across the seat, or while sitting from standing position, or walking a distance, touch a known good ground before installing the parts.
014RX002
NOTE: To prevent internal PCM damage, the ignition must be OFF position in order to disconnect or reconnect power to the PCM (for example: battery cable. pig tail, PCM fuse, jumper cable, etc.). IMPORTANT: When replacing the production PCM with a service PCM, it is important to transfer the broadcast code and production PCM number to the service PCM label. This will allow positive identification of PCM parts throughout the service life of the vehicle. Do not record this information on PCM metal cover. IMPORTANT: The ignition should always be in the OFF position in order to install or remove the PCM connectors. Service of the PCM should normally consist of either replacement of the PCM or EEPROM reprogramming. If the diagnostic procedure call for the PCM to be replaced, the replacement PCM should be checked first to ensure it has the correct part number. If it is, remove the faulty PCM and install the new service PCM. The service PCM EEPROM will need to be programmed. Additionally, after programming, the CKP Sensor Tooth Error Correction (TEC) Learn procedure will need to be performed.
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Block the wheels. 3. Remove ashtray inner.

4. Remove a screw located behind ashtray. 9. Disconnect the red, white and blue electrical connector at the PCM.
014RX014
5. Pull out Face trim of console. 6. Remove two screws located inside of center console storage box and pull up rear part of center console.
014RX017
10. Remove two nuts in the front of PCM. 11. Remove two nuts in the rear of PCM. 12. Pull the PCM out from dashboard.
014RX015
7. Unscrew the shift knob. 8. Remove four screw holding front part of the console and pull the console up.
014RX002
6E1403
1. Place PCM into its position and secure by four mounting screws.
3. Install the front center console and secure by four retaining screws.
014RX015
014RX002
4. Install the rear center console and secure it by two retaining screw into storage box.
2. Connect all three connectors to PCM. All connectors are color keyed. Same color male and female connectors join together.
014RX014
014RX017
5. Snap face plate into its position and secure it by a screw. 6. Insert ashtray inner. 7. Insert the shift knob. 8. Connect the negative battery cable. 9. Remove wheel blocks.
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the TPS electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and TP sensor from the throttle body. NOTE: Do not clean the TP sensor by soaking it in solvent. The sensor will be damaged as a result.
D If the throttle shaft is not binding and the throttle cable is properly adjusted, install a new TP sensor.
101RX003
1. Install the TP sensor on the throttle body with two screws.
101RX002
Function Check
Use a Tech 2 to check the TP sensor output voltage at closed throttle. D The voltage should be under 0.25 volts. D If the reading is greater than 0.25 volts, check the throttle shaft to see if it is binding. Check that the throttle cable is properly adjusted, also. Refer to Throttle Cable Adjustment.
101RX003
2. Connect the electrical connector.

3. Connect the negative battery cable.
6E1405
1. Inspect the electrical connector for signs of corrosion or warping. Replace the VSS if the electrical connector is corroded or warped. 2. Inspect the VSS driven gear for chips, breaks, or worn condition. Replace the VSS if the driven gear is chipped, broken or worn. 3. Inspect the Oring for wear, nicks, tears, or looseness. Replace the Oring if necessary.
101RX002
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. VSS is located on the right side of the transmission case just ahead of the rear propeller shaft. Disconnect the VSS electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the VSS from the transmission case by wiggling it slightly and pulling it straight out. IMPORTANT: Have a container ready to catch any fluid that leaks out when the VSS is removed from the transfer case.
014RX021
1. Install the VSS in the transmission case with the notch for the connector facing the rear. 2. Secure the VSS with mounting bolt. Tighten the bolt to 16 Nm (12 lb ft).
014RX020 014RX021
3. Connect electrical connector to the VSS. 4. Check the transmission oil level. Add oil if necessary.

5. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Remove the air filter element.
014RX020
014RX023
Air Filter
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect electrical connector at the IAT sensor. 2. Release the four latches securing the lid to the air cleaner housing. 3. Remove the air cleaner lid.
1. Install the air filter element in the air cleaner housing.
014RX023
2. Install the air cleaner lids. 3. Secure the three latches, holding the lid on the air cleaner housing.
014RX019

4. Connect the electrical connector to the IAT sensor.
6E1407
NOTE: Do not clean the IAC valve by soaking it in solvent. The valve will be damaged as a result.
014RX019 014RX022
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Cleaning and Inspection Procedure

D Clean the IAC valve Oring sealing surface, pintle valve seat and air passage. D Use carburetor cleaner and a parts cleaning brush to remove carbon deposit. Do not use a cleaner that contain methyl ethyl ketone. This is an extremely strong solvent and not necessary for this type of deposit. D Shiny spots on the pintle are normal and do not indicate misalignment or a bent pintle shaft. D Inspect the IAC valve Oring for cuts, cracks or distortion. Replace the Oring if damaged.
101RX002
2. Disconnect the IAC electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and IAC valve from the throttle body.
0006
Measurement Procedure
D In order to install a new IAC valve, measure the distance between the tip of the pintle and the mounting flange. If that measurement is 28 mm or less, the valve need no adjustment. If the measurement is greater than 28 mm, apply finger pressure and retract the valve. The force required to retract the pintle on a new valve will not damage the valve, shaft or pintle. NOTE: Do not push or pull on the IAC valve pintle on IAC valve that have been in service. The force required to move the pintle may damage it. IMPORTANT: Use an identical replacement part in order to replace a valve. IAC valve pintle shape and diameter are designed for the specific application.
2. Connect electrical connector to IAC valve. 3. Connect the negative battery cable.
101RX002
Intake Air Duct

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect electrical connector at IAT sensor. 3. Remove the IAT sensor if necessary. Refer to Intake Air Temperature Sensor Removal.
TS23746
1. Install IAC valve on the throttle valve body with the two screws. Tighten the screw to 1 Nm ( 9 lb in).
014RX011
4. Loosen retaining clamps at the throttle body and at the air filter box.
014RX022

5. Disconnect brake booster vacuum hose at intake manifold and at brake booster.
6E1409
1. Connect the intake air duct at the throttle body and at the air filter box. Make sure retaining hole is inserted to the intake air duct bracket.
014RX025
6. Remove retaining nut at the intake air duct bracket at top of valve cover. 7. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle body and at the air filter box.
014RX019
2. Tighten retaining clamp at the throttle body and at the air filter box. 3. Install a nut to the intake air duct bracket and tighten. 4. Connect brake booster vacuum hose to intake manifold and to brake booster and secure them with clamps.
014RX019
014RX026
5. Install IAT sensor if necessary. Refer to Intake Air Temperature Sensor Installation. 6. Connect electrical connector at IAT sensor.

7. Connect the negative battery cable. 3. Unscrew retaining bolt from Knock Sensor located passenger side of engine block just front of starter.
014RX011
IMPORTANT: Use an identical replacement part in order to replace a valve. IAC valve pintle shape and diameter are designed for the specific application.
014RX028
4. Remove Knock Sensor with retaining bolt.
Knock Sensor
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect pig tail electrical connector at near the top of generator.
1. Install Knock Sensor with retaining bolt. 2. Connect pig tail electrical connector. 3. Connect battery negative cable.
014RX029
014RX027
6E1411
Oil Pressure Switch

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect electrical connector at Oil Pressure Switch.
3. Connect battery negative cable.
014RX030
FUEL METERING SYSTEM Accelerator Cable Assembly

014RX030
Removal Procedure
1. Loosen the adjusting nut on the cable bracket mounting on the throttle body. 2. Remove the cable clip from holding bracket.
3. Unscrew Oil Pressure Switch from Oil Filter Mounting Housing.
014RX031
1. Install Oil Pressure Switch into Oil Filter Mounting Housing and tighten. 2. Connect electrical connector.
014RX026

3. Remove accelerator control cable (on the throttle valve end).
1. Install the accelerator control cable. 2. Install the grommet. 3. Install the accelerator control cable on the accelerator pedal.
101RW006
4. Remove the accelerator control cable (on the accelerator pedal end). 5. Remove the grommet. 6. Remove the accelerator control cable.
014RX032
Check the following items, and replace the control cable if any abnormality is found: D The control cable should move smoothly. D The control cable should not be bent or kinked. D The control cable should be free of damage and corrosion.
4. Install the accelerator control cable on the throttle valve.
101RW006
5. Install the cable clip to the holding bracket.
014RX032

6. Adjust the accelerator cable. Refer to Accelerator Cable Adjustment Section.
6E1413
Accelerator Pedal Replacement

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the accelerator pedal control cable from the acceleratorpedal assembly. 2. Remove the two screws retaining the accelerator pedal to the bulkhead. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal from the bulkhead.
014RX026
Accelerator Cable Adjustment

Adjustment Procedure
1. Loosen the adjusting nut. 2. Loosen the jam nut. 3. Pull the outer cable while fully closing the throttle valve. 4. Tighten the adjusting nut. 5. Tighten the jam nut. 6. Loosen the adjusting nut by three turns. 7. Tighten the jam nut again. 8. Manually operate valve. IMPORTANT: The valve lever must return up to the stopper screw. If the valve lever does not reach the stopper screw, repeat the procedure again from Step 1.
014RX033
1. Install the accelerator pedal assembly to the bulkhead with two screws. 2. Connect the accelerator control cable to the accelerator pedal assembly. 3. Adjust accelerator cable if necessary. Refer to Accelerator Cable Adjustment Section.
014RX034
014RX026
Fuel Filler Cap

Fuel Filler Cap
The Fuel filter cap includes a vacuum valve and a pressure valve. If high vacuum or pressure occurs in the fuel tank, each valve works to adjust the pressure in order to prevent damage to the tank at the EGR valve.
2. Remove the fuel filler cap.
NOTE: Replace the fuel filler cap with the same typeof filler cap that was originally installed on the vehicle. D Check the seal ring in the filler cap for any abnormality and for seal condition. D Replace the filler cap if any abnormality is found.
041RW005
3. Disconnect the fuel lines from the fuel filter on the engine side. 4. Disconnect the fuel line from the fuel filter on the fuel tank side.
TS23767
Fuel Filter
Removal Procedure
041RW006
5. Remove the bolt on the fuel filter holder.

6. Remove the fuel filter. 6. Connect the negative battery cable.
6E1415
041RW007
041RW006
1. Replace the fuel filter when the following occur: D Fuel leaks from the fuel filter body D The fuel filter body is damaged D The fuel filter is clogged with dust or sediment 2. If the drain hole is clogged at filler neck is clogged with dust, clean the drain hole with air.
041RW008
1. Install the fuel filter in the correct direction. 2. Install the bolt on the fuel filter holder. 3. Connect the fuel line on the engine side. 4. Connect the fuel line on the fuel tank side. 5. Install the fuel filler cap.
Fuel Injectors
Removal Procedure
NOTE: If the fuel injectors are leaking, the engine oil may be contaminated with fuel. Check the oil for signs of contamination and change the oil and filter if necessary. NOTE: Use care in removing the fuel injector in order to prevent damage to the fuel injector electrical connector pins or fuel injector nozzles. The fuel injector is an electrical component and should not be immersed in any type of cleaner as this may damage the fuel injector. IMPORTANT: Fuel injectors are serviced as complete assembly only. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
6. Remove Oring from the fuel injector. 7. Remove Oring backup from fuel injector.
014RX037
1. Inspect Oring for crack, damage or leaks. 2. Replace worn or damaged Oring. 3. Lubricate the new Orings with engine oil before installation.
1. Lubricate the new Oring with engine oil. 2. Install the Oring backup on the fuel injector. 3. Install new Oring on the fuel injector. 4. Install all four injector on the fuel rail. 5. Use new injector retainer clip to retain the injector to the fuel rail. 6. Coat the end of the fuel injector with engine oil.
014RX035
2. Disconnect electrical connector from fuel injector. 3. Remove the fuel rail. Refer to Fuel Rail Removal Procedure.
014RX036
4. Remove the fuel injector retainer clip. 5. Remove fuel injector assembly from fuel rail.
014RX037
7. Install fuel rail assembly. Refer to Fuel Rail Installation Procedure.

6E1417
NOTE: To prevent damage to the fuel pressure regulator, do not immerse the pressure regulator in solvent. 1. Depressurize the fuel system. Referto Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the fuel pump relay. 4. Disconnect the vacuum line form fuel pressure regulator.
014RX035
Fuel Pressure Regulator

Removal Procedure
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, it is necessary to relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system components. CAUTION: After relieving the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing fuel lines or connections. Reduce the chance of personal injury by covering the fuel line fitting with a shop towel before disconnecting the fittings. The towel will absorb any fuel that may leak out. When the disconnect is completed, place the towel in an approved container. NOTE: Compressed air must never used to test or clean a fuel pressure regulator, as damage to the fuel pressure regulator may occur.
014RX038
5. Remove the fuel pressure regulator retaining screw. 6. Remove the fuel pressure regulator retaining bracket. 7. Remove the fuel pressure regulator from fuel rail.
014RX039
014RX035
1. Insert the fuel pressure regulator into the fuel rail.
6. Crank the engine until it starts. Cranking the engine may take longer than usual due to trapped air in the fuel line.
014RX039
014RX035
2. Install the fuel pressure regulator retaining bracket ant tighten with a screw. 3. Connect vacuum line onto the fuel pressure regulator.

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, it is necessary to relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system components. CAUTION: After relieving the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing fuel lines or connections. Reduce the chance of personal injury by covering the fuel line fitting with a shop towel before disconnecting the fittings. The towel will absorb any fuel that may leak out. When the disconnect is completed, place the towel in an approved container. 1. Remove the fuel filler cap.
014RX038
4. Install the fuel pump relay. 5. Connect the negative battery cable.
041RW005

2. Remove the fuel pump relay from the underhood relay box. 3. Start the engine and allow it to stall. 4. Crank the engine for about 30 seconds. 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
6E1419
4. Remove fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Removal Procedure. 5. Using J39763, twist the fuel pump counterclock wise to release from fuel tank.
041RX001
6. Lift fuel pump to remove from fuel tank.

014RW089
Fuel Pump Assembly

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Drain all fuel from fuel tank from filler neck. 3. Remove the fuel pump relay from the fuse and relay box at right side of engine room.
041RX002
014RW089
Inspect intank fuel filter for tears, damage or evidence of dirt derbies or water in the fuel. If any of these condition exist, replace the intank fuel filter.
2. Using J39763, twist fuel pump assembly clock wise into the lock.
901RX036
041RX003
1. Insert the fuel pump assembly into fuel tank and place them at its position.
3. Install the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Installation Procedure. 4. Install the fuel pump relay. 5. Connect the negative battery cable.
041RX004
041RX002
6E1421
Fuel Pump Relay

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the fuse and relay box cover located right side of engine room. 2. Determine correct relay by consulting to the diagram on the cover. 3. Insert a small screwdriver or use thumb pressure to release the retainer of the relay. 4. Pull the relay straight up and out of the fuse and relay box.
IMPORTANT: An eightdigit identification number is stamped on side of the fuel rail. Refer to this number when you service the fuel rail or when a replacement part is required.
1. Inserts the relay into the correct place in the fuse and relay box with the catch slot aligned to retainer. 2. Press down until the catch of retainer engages. 3. Install fuse and relay box cover.
014RX035
1. Depressurize the fuel system. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Disconnect the fuel inlet at the rear of the engine. 3. Disconnect the fuel return line at front of the engine. 4. Disconnect the injector electrical connectors. 5. Remove the nuts holding wiring harness onto fuel rail. 6. Remove the bolts retaining fuel rail to the intake manifold. Lift up the injectors carefully to separate them from intake manifold. Lift up the fuel rail with injectors as assembly. Do not separate the fuel injectors from fuel rail. If an injector become separated from fuel rail, injector backup Oring and injector retainer clip must be replaced.
014RW089
Fuel Rail Assembly

Removal Procedure
NOTE: D Use care when removing the fuel rail assembly in order to prevent damage to the injector electrical connector terminal and the injector spray tips. D Fitting should be capped and holes plugged during servicing to prevent dirt and other contaminants from entering open lines and passage.
Drain residual fuel from fuel rail into an approved container.
014RX036

7. If removal of fuel pressure regulator is necessary. Refer to Fuel Pressure Regulator Removal Procedure. 8. If removal of fuel injector is necessary. Refer to Fuel Injectors Removal Procedure. 4. Install two fuel rail retaining bolts. Tighten fuel rail retaining bolts to 19 Nm (14 lb ft) 5. Place wiring harness in its place and secure it with two nuts. 6. Connect electrical connector to each fuel injector.
014RX037
014RX036
1. Install the fuel injectors if necessary. Refer to Fuel Injector Installation Procedure. 2. Install the fuel pressure regulator if necessary. Refer to Fuel Pressure Regulator Installation Procedure. 3. Place the fuel injector rail assembly on the manifold and insert the injectors into each port by pushing fuel rail.
7. Connect the fuel supply line securely. Do not over tighten. 8. Connect the fuel return line securely. Do not over tighten. 9. Connect the negative battery cable. 10. Crank the engine until it start. Cranking the engine may take longer than usual due to trapped air in the fuel system. Check for leak. If fuel leak is observed, stop engine immediately. Before correct fuel leak, be sure to depressurize system again.
014RX037 014RX035
6E1423
Fuel Tank
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove fuel filer cap. 3. Drain the fuel from fuel filler neck. 4. Disconnect the fuel filler hose at fuel tank. 5. Disconnect the air breather hose at the fuel tank. 6. Disconnect the evaporator hose at the fuel tank. 7. Hold entire fuel tank at the bottom with stands. 8. Disconnect fuel supply lines and fuel return line at near the fuel filter inside of body frame.
12. Remove fuel tank assembly from the vehicle. 13. Remove four nuts retaining tank under guard to the tank. 14. Remove the tank from the guard.
041RX002
1. Secure fuel tank into under guard with four retaining bolts, if necessary. 2. Place the fuel tank assembly onto stands. 3. Lift the fuel tank assembly near the position. 4. Connect two electrical connectors at fuel pump. 5. Lift the fuel pump to its position and secure it with four mounting bolts. Make sure that all hoses and fuel lines are out of way between the fuel tank and the fuel tank bracket. Tighten the fuel tank retaining bolts to 36 Nm (27 lb ft).
041RX005
9. Remove four bolts (two in front and two in rear) holding fuel tank to the frame. 10. Lower tank assembly from the vehicle a little to make access space on top. 11. Disconnect two electrical connectors at fuel pump.
041RX007
6. Connect fuel supply and return lines.

041RX006

7. Connect the fuel filler hose, the air breather hose and EVAP hose onto fuel tank and secure them with clamps. 7. Disconnect coolant lines.
014RX025
041RX006
8. Pour fuel into fuel tank. 9. Install fuel filler cap securely. 10. Connect the battery negative cable.
8. Remove the mounting bolts retaining the throttle body the intake manifold. 9. Lift up the throttle body from the intake manifolds.
014RX040
041RX005
Throttle body (TB)

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System. 3. Remove the air intake duct. Refer to Air Intake Duct Removal Procedure. 4. Remove the accelerator cable from throttle. Refer to Accelerator Cable Assembly Removal Procedure. 5. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the throttle position sensor and the idle air control valve solenoid. 6. Disconnect all vacuum hoses below air horn.
10. Remove the gaskets from the intake manifolds. 11. Remove the IAC. Refer to Idle Air Control Valve Solenoid Removal Procedure. 12. Remove TPS. Refer to Throttle Position Sensor Removal Procedure.
NOTE: Do not use solvent of any type when you clean the gasket surfaces on the intake manifold and the throttle body assembly. The gasket surface and the throttle body assembly may be damaged as results. 1. If the throttle body gasket needs to be released, remove any gasket material that may be stuck to the mating surfaces of the manifold.

2. Do not leave any scratches in the aluminum casting.
6E1425
5. Connect coolant line and secure them with clamps. 6. Connect all vacuum hoses and secure them with clamps if necessary. 7. Install accelerator control cable bracket onto the throttle body. 8. Connect accelerator control cable to throttle plate.
014RX041
1. Install IAC valve onto the throttle body. Refer to Idle Air Control Valve Solenoid Installation Procedure. 2. Install TPS onto the throttle body if necessary. Refer to TPS Installation Procedure. 3. Place the gasket then the throttle body on the manifold. 4. Install four mounting bolt. Tighten the throttle body mounting bolt to 13.5 Nm (10 lb ft).
014RX025
9. Connect electrical connector at IAC valve and TPS. 10. Install the air intake duct. Refer to Air Intake Duct Installation Procedure. 11. Fill the cooling system with required coolant. Refer to Engine Cooling System. 12. Connect the negative battery cable.
014RX041 101RX002
ELECTRONIC IGNITION SYSTEM Ignition Control Module (ICM)

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ignition control module. 3. Remove the two attaching screws. 4. Remove the ignition control module from the engine block.
8. Remove the ignition coil from the bracket.
1. Fasten the module to the engine block with two screws. 2. Reconnect the electrical connector. 3. Reconnect the negative battery terminal.
014RX043
1. Install the ignition coil onto the bracket with three mounting bolts. 2. Connect electrical connector at the ignition coil. 3. Connect spark plug cable to the ignition coil. 4. Connect heater supply and return hose and secure them with clamps. 5. Connect coolant return line and secure them with clamps. 6. Fill the cooling system with required coolant. Refer to Engine Cooling System. 7. Connect the negative battery cable.
041RX042
Ignition Coil
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Engine Cooling System. 3. Remove the heater supply and return hose. 4. Remove the coolant return hose. 5. Disconnect all four spark plug cables from the coil. 6. Disconnect electrical connector from the ignition coil. 7. Remove three mounting bolt from the ignition coil.
014RX044
6E1427
Spark Plugs
Removal Procedure
Type: NGK BPR6ES11 Spark Gap : 1.05 MM (0.040) Spark Plug Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove four bolt holding spark plug cover plate to top of valve cover, and remove the cover plate. 3. Pull ignition wire using hocks attached to end of spark plug cable.
2. Check the electrode condition and replace the spark plug if necessary.
014RX046
014RX043
4. Remove the spark plug.
If the spark plug electrodes and insulators are fouled with carbon or oil, the engine will not operate efficiently. There are number of possible causes: D Fuel mixture is too rich. D Oil in the combustion chamber. D The spark plug gap is not set correctly. If spark plug fouling is excessive, check the fuel and electrical system for possible causes of trouble. If fuel and electrical system are normal, install spark plug of a higher heat range which have the same physical dimensions as the original equipment spark plug. The following symptoms are characteristics of spark plugs that are running too hot: D Fuel mixture is too lean. D Heat range is incorrect.
014RX045
1. Check the insulator for cracks. Replace the spark plug if crack are present.
014RX047
If vehicle usage does not conform to normal driving conditions, a more suitable spark plug may be substituted. If fuel and electrical system are normal, in most cases of this sort, the problem can be corrected by using a colder

type spark plug with the same physical dimensions as the original equipment spark plug. 3. Check the gaskets for damage and replace if necessary. 4. Measure the spark plug gap. The specification is 1.05 mm (0.040). 5. Adjust the spark gap by bending the grounded electrode. The original equipment cables and the ignition coil are marked to show correct location of the cables. If spark plug cables or the ignition coil are replaced previously, before cables are removed from the ignition coil, mark the cables and the coil so they can be reconnected in the same position.
014RX050
014RX048
NOTE: Never puncture the spark plug cables insulation with a needle or the pointed end of a probe into the cable. An increase in resistance would be created which would cause the cable to become defective. 1. If the cable has broken or cracked insulation, it must be replaced. 2. If the terminals are corroded or loose, the cable must be replaced. 3. Check that the cable resistance does not exceed 10 k W per foot.
1. Tighten the spark plug to the 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 2. Push the spark plug cable in until it snaps in. 3. Install spark plug cover onto valve cover and secure it with four retaining bolts.
014RX049
Spark Plug Cables

Spark Plug Cables
The cable contains a synthetic conductor which is easily damaged. Never stretch or kink the cable. Disconnect the cable from spark plug and the ignition coil.
014RX051
6E1429
EMISSIONS Catalytic Converter

Catalytic Converter
Refer to Engine Exhaust.
Emission Label located bottom side ofthe hood. Use 6148M or equivalent when you replace the EVAP canister hoses.
EVAP Canister
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect all hoses. 2. Remove two mounting bracket nuts.
Air Conditioning Relay

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the fuse and relay box cover at right side of engine room. 2. Refer to the diagram on the cover to determine which is the correct relay. 3. Insert small screwdriver or use thumb pressure to release the retainer of the relay. 4. Pull the relay straight up and out of the fuse and relay box.
1. Inspect the hoses for cracks, damage and leaks. 2. Inspect the canister for damages.
014RX001
014RX052
1. Insert the relay into the correct place in the fuse and relay box with the catch slot aligned to retainer. 2. Press down until the catch of retainer engages. 3. Install fuse and relay box cover.
1. Install EVAP canister onto crossmember with two mounting bolts. 2. Connect all hoses and secure them with clamps.
Ignition Timing Adjustment

Ignition Timing Adjustment
There is no timing adjustment. The timing signal is furnished by the CKP and the CMP signal. PCM control the ignition timing.
EVAP Canister Hoses

EVAP Canister Hoses
To see the routing of the EVAP canister hoses, refer to Vehicle Emission Control Information in Diagnosis or
014RX054
EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect electrical connector at the vent valve. 3. Disconnect vent hoses from the solenoid valve. 4. Remove the filter and vent valve solenoid assembly by pulling it out from bracket. 5. Remove a screw holding the solenoid. 6. Remove vent valve solenoid from filter.
014RX054
EVAP Canister Purge Valve Solenoid

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect electrical connector from EVAP purge solenoid located just front of the ignition coil. 3. Disconnect the vacuum hoses from the solenoid. 4. Remove the ignition coil. Refer toIgnition Coil Removal Procedure.
014RX055
1. Install the vent valve solenoid to the filter and secure it witha screw. 2. Insert the vent valve assembly onto EVAP canister bracket. 3. Connect all hoses and secure them with clamps. 4. Connect electrical connector at vent valve solenoid. 5. Connect the negative battery cable.
014RX044

5. Remove the three bolts holding the ignition coil bracket. 6. Remove the ignition coil bracket with the purge solenoid still attached to it. 7. Insert small screw driver into the catch from the bottom hole to release the catch. 8. Slide EVAP purge solenoid out form the ignition bracket.
6E1431
Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect electrical connector at EGR valve. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector at Intake Air Temperature Sensor. 4. Remove air intake duct. Refer to Air Intake Duct Removal Procedure. 5. Remove crankshaft breather hose. 6. Remove two bolts holding EGR valve. 7. Remove EGR valve and gasket from the manifold.
014RX042
1. Insert EVAP purge solenoid valve onto the ignition coil bracket. 2. Install the ignition coil bracket to back of intake manifold. 3. Install the ignition coil. Refer to Ignition Coil Installation Procedure. 4. Connect vacuum hoses and electrical connector at the purge valve.
057RX001
1. Inspect the air passage for a restrtiction. If there is restriction, remove the object. Do not use any type of solvent, it may damage electrical system of EGR valve.
014RX044

2. Inspect restriction for valve movement. If there is restriction remove the object.
014RX056
1. Place the gasket and EGR valve on to the intake manifold. 2. Install mounting bolts and tighten. 3. Connect electrical connector at EGR valve 4. Connect the crankshaft breather hose and secure it with clamps. 5. Install the air intake duct. Refer to Air Intake Duct Installation Procedure. 6. Connect the negative battery cable.
014RX057
6E1433
Wiring and Connectors

Wiring Harness Service
The control module harness electrically connects the control module to the various solenoids, switches and sensors in the vehicle engine compartment and passenger compartment. Replace wire harnesses with the proper part number replacement. Because of the low amperage and voltage levels utilized in powertrain control systems, it is essential that all wiring in environmentally exposed areas be repaired with crimp and seal splice sleeves. The following wire harness repair information is intended as a general guideline only. Refer to Chassis Electrical for all wire harness repair procedures.
Wire Harness Repair: Twisted Shielded Cable

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the outer jacket. 2. Unwrap the aluminum/mylar tape. Do not remove the mylar.
PCM Connectors And Terminals

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the connector terminal retainer. 2. Push the wire connected to the affected terminal through the connector face so that the terminal is exposed. 3. Service the terminal as necessary.
047
1. Bend the tab on the connector to allow the terminal to be pulledinto position within the connector. 2. Pull carefully on the wire to install the connector terminal retainer.
3. Untwist the conductors. 4. Strip the insulation as necessary.
Connectors And Terminals

Connectors And Terminals
Use care when probing a connector and when replacing terminals. It is possible to short between opposite terminals. Damage to components could result. Always use jumper wires between connectors for circuit checking. NEVER probe through WeatherPack seals. Use an appropriate connector test adapter kit which contains an assortment of flexible connectors used to probe terminals during diagnosis. Use an appropriate fuse remover and test tool for removing a fuse and to adapt the fuse holder to a meter for diagnosis. Open circuits are often difficult to locate by sight because oxidation or terminal misalignment are hidden by the connectors. Merely wiggling a connector on a sensor, or in the wiring harness, may temporarily correct the open circuit. Intermittent problems may also be caused by oxidized or loose connections. Be certain of the type of connector/terminal before making any connector or terminal repair. WeatherPack and ComPack III terminals look similar, but are serviced differently.
048
1. Splice the wires using splice clips and rosin core solder. 2. Wrap each splice to insulate. 3. Wrap the splice with mylar and with the drain (uninsulated) wire.
Twisted Leads
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the damaged wire. 2. Remove the insulation as required.
051 049
4. Tape over the whole bundle to secure.
1. Use splice clips and rosin core solder in order to splice the two wires together.
050
052

2. Cover the splice with tape in order to insulate it from the other wires. 4. Tape the wires with electrical tape.
6E1435
055 053
3. Twist the wires as they were before starting this procedure.
WeatherPack Connector
Tools Required
J 28742A WeatherPack II Terminal Remover
Removal Procedure
A WeatherPack connector can be identified by a rubber seal at the rear of the connector. This engine room connector protects against moisture and dirt, which could form oxidation and deposits on the terminals. This protection is important, because of the low voltage and the low amperage found in the electronic systems. 1. Open the secondary lock hinge on the connector.
054
070

2. Use tool J 28742A or the equivalent to remove the pin and the sleeve terminals. Push on J 28742A to release. NOTE: Do not use an ordinary pick or the terminal may be bent or deformed. Unlike standard blade terminals, these terminals cannot be straightened after they have been improperly bent. 1. Replace the terminal. 2. Slip the new seal onto the wire. 3. Strip 5 mm (0.2) of insulation from the wire. 4. Crimp the terminal over the wire and the seal.
073
071
3. Cut the wire immediately behind the cable seal.
5. Push the terminal and the connector to engage the locking tangs. 6. Close the secondary locking hinge.
ComPack III
ComPack III
The ComPack III terminal looks similar to some WeatherPack terminals. This terminal is not sealed and is used where resistance to the environment is not required. Use the standard method when repairing a terminal. Do not use the WeatherPack terminal tool J 28742A or equivalent. These will damage the terminals.
072
Make certain the connectors are properly seated and all of the sealing rings are in place when you reconnect the leads. The secondary lock hinge provides a backup locking feature for the connector. The secondary lock hinge is used for added reliability. This flap should retain the terminals even if the small terminal lock tangs are not positioned properly. Do not replace the WeatherPack connections with standard connections. Read the instructions provided with the WeatherPack connector and terminal packages.
070
6E1437
MetriPack
Tools Required
J 35689 Terminal Remover
Removal Procedure
Some connectors use terminals called MetriPack Series 150. These may be used at the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. 1. Slide the seal (1) back on the wire. 2. Insert the J 35689 tool or equivalent (3) in order to release the terminal locking tang (2). 3. Push the wire and the terminal out through the connector. If you reuse the terminal, reshape the locking tang.
061
GENERAL DESCRIPTION PCM AND SENSORS

58X Reference PCM Input
The powertrain control module (PCM) uses this signal from the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to calculate engine RPM and crankshaft position at all speeds. The PCM also uses the pulses on this circuit to initiate injector pulses. If the PCM receives no pulses on this circuit, DTC P0337 will set. If the PCM receives a number of pulses other than the expected amount, DTC P0336 will set. The engine will not start and run without using the 58X reference signal.
A/C Request Signal

060
MetriPack terminals are also referred to as pulltoseat terminals. 1. In order to install a terminal on a wire, the wire must be inserted through the seal (2) and through the connector (3). 2. The terminal (1) is then crimped onto the wire. 3. Then the terminal is pulled back into the connector to seat it in place.
This signal tells the PCM when the A/C mode is selected at the A/C control switch. The PCM uses this signal to adjust the idle speed before turning ON the A/C clutch. The A/C compressor will be inoperative if this signal is not available to the PCM. For A/C wiring diagrams and diagnosis for the A/C electrical system, refer to A/C Clutch Circuit Diagnosis.

The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides a signal used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to calculate the ignition sequence. The CKP sensor initiates the 58X reference pulses which the PCM uses to calculate RPM and crankshaft position. For additional information, refer to Electronic Ignition System.

The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a thermistor (a resistor which changes value based on temperature) mounted in the engine coolant stream. Low coolant temperature produces a high resistance of about 100,000 W at 40C (40F). High temperature causes a low resistance of about 70 W at 130C (266F). The PCM supplies a 5volt signal to the ECT sensor through resistors internal to the PCM and then measures the voltage after the internal resistor. This signal voltage will be high when the engine is cold and low when the engine is hot. By measuring the voltage, the PCM calculates the engine coolant temperature. Engine coolant temperature affects most of the systems that the PCM controls. The Tech 2 displays engine coolant temperature in degrees. After engine startup, the temperature should rise steadily to about 85C (185F). It then stabilizes when the thermostat opens. If the engine has not been run for several hours (overnight), the engine coolant temperature and intake air temperature displays should be close to each other. A hard fault in the engine coolant sensor circuit will set DTC P0117 or DTC P0118. An intermittent fault will set a DTC P1114 or P1115.
0013
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor And Signal

The camshaft position (CMP) sensor sends a signal to the PCM. The PCM uses this signal as a sync pulse to trigger the injectors in the proper sequence. The PCM uses the CMP signal to indicate the position of the #1 piston during its power stroke. The CMP allows the PCM to calculate true sequential fuel injection (SFI) mode of operation. If the PCM detects an incorrect CMP signal while the engine is running, DTC P0341 will set. If the CMP signal is lost while the engine is running, the fuel injection system will shift to a calculated sequential fuel injection mode based on the last fuel injection pulse, and the engine will continue to run. It will run in the calculated sequential mode with a 1in4 chance of the injector sequence being correct. For further information, refer to DTC P0341 DTC P0342.
0016
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)

The electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory chip that is physically soldered within the PCM. The EEPROM contains the program and the calibration information that the PCM needs to control powertrain operation. Unlike the PROM used in past applications, the EEPROM is not replaceable. If the PCM is replaced, the new PCM will need to be programmed. Equipment containing the correct program and calibration for the vehicle is required to program the PCM.
014RX007
6E1439
Fuel Control Heated Oxygen Sensor (Pre Catalyst)

The fuel control heated oxygen sensor (Bank 1 HO2S 1) is mounted in the exhaust stream where it can monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. The oxygen present in the exhaust gas reacts with the sensor to produce a voltage output. This voltage should constantly fluctuate from approximately 100 mV to 900 mV. The heated oxygen sensor voltage can be monitored with a Tech 2. By monitoring the voltage output of the oxygen sensor, the PCM calculates the pulse width command for the injectors to produce the proper combustion chamber mixture. D Low HO2S voltage is a lean mixture which will result in a rich command to compensate. D High HO2S voltage is a rich mixture which will result in a lean command to compensate. An open Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal circuit will set a DTC P0134 and the Tech 2 will display a constant voltage between 400500 mV. A constant voltage below 300 mV in the sensor circuit (circuit grounded) will set DTC P0131. A constant voltage above 800 mV in the circuit will set DTC P0132. A slow transition between 300mV and 800mV will cause a DTC P0133 to set. A fault in the Bank 1 HO2S 1 heater circuit will cause DTC P0135 to set. The PCM can also detect HO2S response problems. If the response time of an HO2S is determined to be too slow, the PCM will store a DTC that indicates degraded HO2S performance.
1 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the threeway catalytic converter. The Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst. This indicates the catalysts ability to efficiently convert exhaust gases. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal will be more active than the signal produced by the Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor. The catalyst monitor sensors operate the same as the fuel control sensors. The Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensors main function is catalyst monitoring, but it also has a limited role in fuel control. If a sensor output indicates a voltage either above or below the 450 mV bias voltage for an extended period of time, the PCM will make a slight adjustment to fuel trim to ensure that fuel delivery is correct for catalyst monitoring. A problem with the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuit will set DTC P0137, P0138, P0140, OR P0141, depending on the specific condition. A fault in the heated oxygen sensor heater element or its ignition feed or ground will result in lower oxygen sensor response. This may cause incorrect catalyst monitor diagnostic results.
TS24067
0012
Catalyst Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensor (Post Catalyst)

Threeway catalytic converters are used to control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx). The catalyst within the converters promotes a chemical reaction. This reaction oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas and converts them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx by converting it to nitrogen. The PCM can monitor this process using the Bank 1 HO2S 2 heated oxygen sensor. The Bank 1 HO2S
D06RX025
0017
Legend (1) Bank 1 Sensor 1 (Fuel Control) (2) Catalytic Converter (3) Bank 1 Sensor 2 (Catalyst Monitor)

The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure (vacuum). The MAP sensor signal voltage to the PCM varies from below 2 volts at idle (high vacuum) to above 4 volts with the ignition ON, engine not running or at wideopen throttle (low vacuum). The MAP sensor is used to determine the following: D Manifold pressure changes while the linear EGR flow test diagnostic is being run. Refer to DTC P0401. D Engine vacuum level for other diagnostics. D Barometric pressure (BARO). If the PCM detects a voltage that is lower than the possible range of the MAP sensor, DTC P0107 will be set. A signal voltage higher than the possible range of the sensor will set DTC P0108. An intermittent low or high voltage will set DTC P1107 or P1106, respectively. The PCM can detect a shifted MAP sensor. The PCM compares the MAP sensor signal to a calculated MAP based on throttle position and various engine load factors. If the PCM detects a MAP signal that varies excessively above or below the calculated value, DTC P0106 will set.

The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor which changes its resistance based on the temperature of air entering the engine. Low temperature produces a high resistance of about 100,000 W at 40C (104F). High temperature causes low resistance of about 70 W at 130C (266F). The PCM supplies a 5volt signal to the sensor through a resistor internal to the PCM, and then monitors the signal voltage. The voltage will be high when the incoming air is cold. The voltage will be low when the incoming air is hot. By measuring the voltage, the PCM calculates the incoming air temperature. The IAT sensor signal is used to adjust spark timing according to the incoming air density. The Tech 2 displays the temperature of the air entering the engine. The temperature should read close to the ambient air temperature when the engine is cold and rise as underhood temperature increases. If the engine has not been run for several hours (overnight), the IAT sensor temperature and engine coolant temperature should read close to each other. A failure in the IAT sensor circuit will set DTC P0112, DTC P1111, DTC P1112, or DTC P0113.
Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Control

The PCM monitors the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) actual position and adjusts the pintle position accordingly. The PCM uses information from the following sensors to control the pintle position: D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. D Throttle position (TP) sensor. D Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor.
6E1441
light will not light when connected to the circuit. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because its resistance is too low. Therefore, a digital voltmeter with at least 10 megW input impedance is required to ensure accurate voltage readings. Tool J 39200 meets this requirement. The PCM controls output circuits such as the injectors, IAC, cooling fan relays, etc., by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through transistors or through either of the following two devices: D Output Driver Module (ODM) D Quad Driver Module (QDM)
PCM Components
The PCM is designed to maintain exhaust emission levels to government mandated standards while providing excellent driveability and fuel efficiency. The PCM monitors numerous engine and vehicle functions via electronic sensors such as the throttle position (TP) sensor, heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), and vehicle speed sensor (VSS). The PCM also controls certain engine operations through the following: D Fuel injector control D Ignition control module D Evaporative emission (EVAP) purge D A/C clutch control
014RX013

The powertrain control module (PCM) is located in the passenger compartment below the center console. The PCM controls the following: D Fuel metering system. D Ignition timing. D Onboard diagnostics for powertrain functions. Automatic Transmission Control System. The PCM constantly observes the information from various sensors. The PCM controls the systems that affect vehicle performance. The PCM performs the diagnostic function of the system. It can recognize operational problems, alert the driver through the Check Engine lamp, and store diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). DTCs identify the problem areas to aid the technician in making repairs.
PCM Voltage Description

The PCM supplies a buffered voltage to various switches and sensors. It can do this because resistors in the PCM which are so high in value that a test light may not illuminate when connected to the circuit. An ordinary shop voltmeter may not give an accurate reading because the voltmeter input impedance is too low. Use a 10megohm input impedance digital voltmeter (such as J 39200) to assure accurate voltage readings. The input/output devices in the PCM include analogtodigital converters, signal buffers, counters, and special drivers. The PCM controls most components with electronic switches which complete a ground circuit when turned ON. These switches are arranged in groups of 4 and 7, called either a quad driver module (QDM), which can independently control up to 4 output terminals, or Output Driver Module (ODM) which can independently control up to 7 outputs. Not all outputs are always used.
PCM Inputs/Outputs
Inputs Operating Conditions Read D D D D D D D D D D Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch ON or OFF Engine Coolant Temperature Crankshaft Position Exhaust Oxygen Content Manifold Absolute Pressure Battery Voltage Throttle Position Fuel Tank Vapor Pressure Fuel Tank Level Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Feedback
014RX002
PCM Function
The PCM supplies either 5 or 12 volts to power various sensors or switches. The power is supplied through resistors in the PCM which are so high in value that a test

D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D Knock Vehicle Speed Fuel Pump Voltage Power Steering Pressure Intake Air Temperature Camshaft Position Automatic Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor Automatic Transmission Speed Sensor
Reprogramming the PCM

The Rodeo allows reprogramming of the PCM without removing it from the vehicle. This provides a flexible and costeffective method of making changes in software calibrations. Refer to the latest Isuzu Technical Communication System information for reprogramming or flashing procedures.
Outputs Systems Controlled EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Ignition Control Fuel Injector Control Idle Air Control Coolant Fan Relays Electric Fuel Pump Relay Compressor Clutch Relay Air Conditioning Diagnostics OBD II Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine lamp) Data Link Connector (DLC) Data Output D Tachometer Signal D Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid
Tooth Error Correction (TEC) Service Bay Guidelines

Deceleration Fuel CutOff This procedure is very convenient because it can be done in the service bay. CAUTION: Appropriate safety measures should be taken to assure the safest conditions possible for all those people in the nearby vicinity of where the tooth error learn procedure is being performed. Vehicle Preparation Requirements and Safety Issues The vehicle needs sufficient engine oil, automatic transmission fluid, manual transmission gear box oil, power steering fluid, coolant, and brake fluid. Engine noise and exhaust should be considered by each assembly plant when deciding the location to perform the tooth error learn. Proper safety precautions should be taken. Anticipate unusual events such as a manual transmission accidentally being bumped into gear or a foot slipping off a clutch at high engine speed. The vehicle may cause other vehicles to be hit. If the transmission is in Park during the high engine speeds, the transmission Park Ratchet experiences excessive vibration and may momentarily slip. The vehicle is typically then in a Neutral type state and may roll, especially if the vehicle is on an incline. Under this condition the transmission should not slip into gear. The following summarizes the engine preparation requirements for a tooth error learn. Requirements: 1. At least 4 minutes of engine run time is required to have occurred at lest once during the life of the vehicle to insure that all of the oil passages are flushed of debris from machining, casting, and assembly. 2. At least 5 seconds of engine run time is required during the same key cycle as the tooth error learn to fill the oil passages and provide proper lubrication. 10 seconds is the preferred guideline. 3. At least 65 degrees Celsius Coolant temperature. Engine oil temperature of 38 degrees Celsius is required for lubrication, which correlates (in most engines) to 65 degrees Celsius Coolant temperature. This is a recommendation to insure a sufficiently lubricated engine 65 degrees Celsius Coolant temperature correlates to an engine oil temperature of 38 degrees Celsius.
PCM Service Precautions

The PCM is designed to withstand normal current draws associated with vehicle operation. Avoid over loading any circuit. When testing for opens and shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the PCMs circuits unless instructed to do so. These circuits should only be tested using digital voltmeter J 39200. The PCM should remain connected to the PCM or to a recommended breakout box.
014RX002

4. Vehicle must be in Park or Neutral. For a manual transmission vehicle, the clutch does not need to be depressed. The tooth error learn may be performed with either: 1. Gear box in Neutral, it does not matter if the clutch is depressed or not. 2. Gear Box in a gear and clutch depressed. NOTE: The first option is the recommended option due to safety concerns. The second option has the risk of the operators foot slipping off of the clutch with the vehicle being revved up and in gear. 5. A/C should always be turned OFF before performing the TEC learn procedure. 6. A Class II command from the Tech 2 is required to invoke the TEC learn procedure. 7. No Camshaft and/or Crankshaft Sensor DTC Codes present. Tooth Error Learn Procedures The following steps are required to learn the tooth error once the above mentioned vehicle preparation requirements are met: 1. Make sure that the tooth error learn procedure has been invoked with the Tech 2, other wise when the throttle is depressed, the RPM would go to the high RPM fuel cutoff and not be cutoff at the lower tooth error learning fuel cutoff limit. 2. Depress the brake pedal for safety reasons. 3. Depress the throttle pedal to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and keep the throttle at 100% for the duration of the Tooth Error Correction (TEC) learning process until the TEC is learned or the number of attempts to learn has been exceeded. The RPM will be limited to the upper TEC RPM limit until one of the two above mentioned conditions are met and the throttle is released to less than 5% Throttle Position Sensor (TPS). After this, the RPM limit will be the normal redline RPM limit. 4. The tooth error learning diagnostic will learn the tooth error as the engine decelerates in fuel cutoff. 5. During the tooth error learning procedure. TEC specific information is available which will indicate that the tooth error was properly learned and completed. Considerations For Locating The Tooth Error Learning Procedure The area that the tooth error learn is done should be well ventilated or have vehicle exhaust elimination system which attaches to the tail pipe and draws the vehicle exhaust out of the building. CAUTION: Appropriate safety measures should be taken to assure the safest conditions possible for all those people in the nearby vicinity of where the tooth error learn procedure is being performed. If possible, anchored or secured safety barriers should be in place in at least the front of the vehicle and in the back of the vehicle if possible to reduce the possibility of accidents. The figure below shows the proper placement of a frontal safety barrier.
6E1443
The area that the tooth error learn is done should be well ventilated or have vehicle exhaust elimination system which attaches to the tail pipe and draws the vehicle exhaust out of the building.

The throttle position (TP) sensor is a potentiometer connected to the throttle shaft on the throttle body. The PCM monitors the voltage on the signal line and calculates throttle position. As the throttle valve angle is changed (accelerator pedal moved), the TP sensor signal also changes. At a closed throttle position, the output of the TP sensor is about 0.25 volts. As the throttle valve opens, the output increases so that at wide open throttle (WOT), the output voltage should be about 4.75 volts. The PCM calculates fuel delivery based on throttle valve angle (driver demand). A broken or loose TP sensor may cause intermittent bursts of fuel from an injector and unstable idle because the PCM thinks the throttle is moving. A hard failure in the TP sensor 5volt reference or signal circuits will set either a DTC P0122 or DTC P0123. A hard failure with the TP sensor ground circuit may set DTC P0123 and DTC P0122. Once a DTC is set, the PCM will use an artificial default value based on engine RPM and mass air flow for the throttle position, and some vehicle performance will return. A high idle may result when either DTC P0122 or DTC P0123 is set. The PCM can detect intermittent TP sensor faults. DTC P1121 or DTC P1122 will set if an intermittent high or low circuit failure is being detected.
101RX003
Transmission Range Switch

IMPORTANT: The vehicle should not be driven with the transmission range switch disconnected; idle quality will be affected. The four inputs from the transmission range switch indicate to the PCM which position is selected by the transmission selector lever. This information is used for ignition timing, EVAP canister purge, EGR and IAC valve operation.

For more information on the transmission range switch, refer to 4L30E Automatic Transmission.
Electrostatic Discharge Damage

Electronic components used in the PCM are often designed to carry very low voltage. Electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4000 volts for a person to feel even the zap of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and induction. D An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a vehicle seat. D Charge by induction occurs when a person with wellinsulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components.

The PCM determines the speed of the vehicle by converting a pulsing voltage signal from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) into miles per hour. The PCM uses this signal to operate the speedometer.
0008
Use of Circuit Testing Tools

Do not use a test light to diagnose the powertrain electrical systems unless specifically instructed by the diagnostic procedures. Use Connector Test Adapter Kit J 35616 whenever diagnostic procedures call for probing connectors.
Aftermarket Electrical And Vacuum Equipment

Aftermarket (addon) electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment which connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems that is installed on a vehicle after it leaves the factory. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. NOTE: No addon vacuum equipment should be added to this vehicle. NOTE: Addon electrical equipment must only be connected to the vehicles electrical system at the battery (power and ground). Addon electrical equipment, even when installed to these guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain problem is to eliminate all aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, it may be diagnosed in the normal manner.
TS23793
NOTE: To prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage, follow these guidelines: D Do not touch the PCM connector pins or soldered components on the PCM circuit board. D Do not touch any electronic sensor module component leads. D Do not open the replacement part package until the part is ready to be installed. D Before removing the part from the package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. D If the part has been handled while sliding across the seat, while sitting down from a standing position, or while walking a distance, touch a known good ground before installing the part.
6E1445
Upshift Lamp
Refer to Up shift lamp diagnosis.
D The amount of fuel delivered. D The idle RPM.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION AIR INDUCTION

Air Induction System
The air induction system filters contaminants from the outside air, and directs the progress of the air as it is drawn into the engine. A remotemounted air cleaner prevents dirt and debris in the air from entering the engine. The air duct assembly routes filtered air to the throttle body. Air enters the engine by the following steps: 1. Through the throttle body. 2. Into the intake manifold. 3. Through the cylinder head intake ports. 4. Into the cylinders.
CMP Signal
The PCM uses the camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal to determine the position of the number 1 piston during its power stroke, allowing the PCM to calculate true sequential multiport fuel injection (SFI). Loss of this signal will set a DTC P0341 or DTC P0342. If the CMP signal is lost while the engine is running, the fuel injection system will shift to a calculated sequential fuel injection based on the last fuel injection pulse, and the engine will continue to run. The engine can be restarted and will run in the calculated sequential mode with the fault is present, with a 1in4 chance of being correct.
Clear Flood Mode

Clear a flooded engine by pushing the accelerator pedal down all the way. The PCM then deenergizes the fuel injectors. The PCM holds the fuel injectors deenergized as long as the throttle remains above 80% and the engine speed is below 800 RPM. If the throttle position becomes less than 80%, the PCM again begins to pulse the injectors ON and OFF, allowing fuel into the cylinders.
Deceleration Fuel Cutoff (DFCO) Mode

The PCM reduces the amount of fuel injected when it detects a decrease in the throttle position and the air flow. When deceleration is very fast, the PCM may cut off fuel completely for short periods.
Engine Speed/Vehicle Speed/ Fuel Disable Mode

The PCM monitors engine speed. It turns off the fuel injectors when the engine speed increases above 6000 RPM. The fuel injectors are turned back on when engine speed decreases below 5750 RPM.
028RX002
Fuel Cutoff Mode

No fuel is delivered by the fuel injectors when the ignition is OFF. This prevents engine runon. In addition, the PCM suspends fuel delivery if no reference pulses are detected (engine not running) to prevent engine flooding.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION FUEL METERING

Acceleration Mode
The PCM provides extra fuel when it detects a rapid increase in the throttle position and the air flow.
Fuel Injector
The sequential multiport fuel injection (SFI) fuel injector is a solenoidoperated device controlled by the PCM. The PCM energizes the solenoid, which opens a valve to allow fuel delivery. The fuel is injected under pressure in a conical spray pattern at the opening of the intake valve. Excess fuel not used by the injectors passes through the fuel pressure regulator before being returned to the fuel tank.
Accelerator Controls
The accelerator control system is a cabletype system with specific linkage adjustments. Refer to Cable Adjustment.
Battery Voltage Correction Mode

When battery voltage is low, the PCM will compensate for the weak spark by increasing the following:

A fuel injector which is stuck partly open will cause a loss of fuel pressure after engine shut down, causing long crank times. mixture to minimize exhaust emissions is 14.7 parts of air to 1 part of gasoline by weight, which allows the catalytic converter to operate most efficiently. Because of the constant measuring and adjusting of the air/fuel ratio, the fuel injection system is called a Closed Loop system. The PCM monitors signals from several sensors in order to determine the fuel needs of the engine. Fuel is delivered under one of several conditions called modes. All modes are controlled by the PCM.

The fuel pressure regulator is a diaphragmoperated relief valve mounted on the fuel rail with fuel pump pressure on one side and manifold pressure on the other side. The fuel pressure regulator maintains the fuel pressure available to the injector at three times barometric pressure adjusted for engine load. It may be serviced separately. If the pressure is too low, poor performance and a DTC P0171, or DTC P1171 will be the result. If the pressure is too high, a DTC P0172 will be the result. For information on diagnosing fuel pressure conditions, refer to Fuel System Diagnosis.
0003
Fuel Metering System Components

The fuel metering system is made up of the following parts: D The fuel injectors. D The throttle body. D The fuel rail. D The fuel pressure regulator. D The PCM. D The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. D The camshaft position (CMP) sensor. D The idle air control (IAC) valve. D The fuel pump. D The fuel pump relay. D The fuel tank vapor pressure sensor. Basic System Operation The fuel metering system starts with the fuel in the fuel tank. An electric fuel pump, located in the fuel tank, pumps fuel to the fuel rail through an inline fuel filter. The pump is designed to provide fuel at a pressure above the pressure needed by the injectors. A fuel pressure regulator in the fuel rail keeps fuel available to the fuel injectors at a constant pressure. A return line delivers unused fuel back to the fuel tank. Refer to Section 6C for further information on the fuel tank, line filter, and fuel pipes.
014RX038
Fuel Pump Electrical Circuit

When the key is first turned ON, the PCM energizes the fuel pump relay for two seconds to build-up the fuel pressure quickly. If the engine is not started within two seconds, the PCM shuts the fuel pump off and waits until the engine is cranked. When the engine is cranked and the 58X crankshaft position signal has been detected by the PCM, the PCM supplies 12 volts to the fuel pump relay to energize the electric intank fuel pump. An inoperative fuel pump will cause a nostart condition. A fuel pump which does not provide enough pressure will result in poor performance.
Fuel Metering System Purpose

The basic function of the air/fuel metering system is to control the air/fuel delivery to the engine. Fuel is delivered to the engine by individual fuel injectors mounted in the intake manifold near each intake valve. The main control sensor is the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) located in the exhaust system. The HO2S tells the PCM how much oxygen is in the exhaust gas. The PCM changes the air/fuel ratio to the engine by controlling the amount of time that the fuel injector is ON. The best
Fuel Rail
The fuel rail is mounted to the top of the engine and distributes fuel to the individual injectors. Fuel is delivered to the fuel inlet tube of the fuel rail by the fuel lines. The fuel goes through the fuel rail to the fuel pressure

regulator. The fuel pressure regulator maintains a constant fuel pressure at the injectors. Remaining fuel is then returned to the fuel tank.
6E1447
0006
Run Mode
014RX036
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve

The purpose of the idle air control (IAC) valve is to control engine idle speed, while preventing stalls due to changes in engine load. The IAC valve, mounted in the throttle body, controls bypass air around the throttle plate. By moving the conical valve (pintle) in (to decrease air flow) or out (to increase air flow), a controlled amount of air can move around the throttle plate. If the RPM is too low, the PCM will retract the IAC pintle, resulting in more air moving past the throttle plate to increase the RPM. If the RPM is too high, the PCM will extend the IAC pintle, allowing less air to move past the throttle plate, decreasing the RPM. The IAC pintle valve moves in small steps called counts. During idle, the proper position of the IAC pintle is calculated by the PCM based on battery voltage, coolant temperature, engine load, and engine RPM. If the RPM drops below a specified value, and the throttle plate is closed, the PCM senses a nearstall condition. The PCM will then calculate a new IAC pintle valve position to prevent stalls. If the IAC valve is disconnected and reconnected with the engine running, the idle RPM will be wrong. In this case, the IAC must be reset. The IAC resets when the key is cycled ON then OFF. When servicing the IAC, it should only be disconnected or connected with the ignition OFF. The position of the IAC pintle valve affects engine startup and the idle characteristics of the vehicle. If the IAC pintle is fully open, too much air will be allowed into the manifold. This results in high idle speed, along with possible hard starting and a lean air/fuel ratio. DTC P0507 may set. If the IAC pintle is stuck closed, too little air will be allowed in the manifold. This results in a low idle speed, along with possible hard starting and a rich air/fuel ratio. DTC P0506 may set. If the IAC pintle is stuck partway open, the idle may be high or low and will not respond to changes in the engine load.
The run mode has the following two conditions: D Open Loop D Closed Loop When the engine is first started, the system is in Open Loop operation. In Open Loop, the PCM ignores the signal from the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). It calculates the air/fuel ratio based on inputs from the TP, ECT, and MAP sensors. The system remains in Open Loop until the following conditions are met: D The HO2S has a varying voltage output showing that it is hot enough to operate properly (this depends on temperature). D The ECT has reached a specified temperature. D A specific amount of time has elapsed since starting the engine. D Engine speed has been greater than a specified RPM since startup. The specific values for the above conditions vary with different engines and are stored in the programmable read only memory (PROM). When these conditions are met, the system enters Closed Loop operation. In Closed Loop, the PCM calculates the air/fuel ratio (injector ontime) based on the signal from the HO2S. This allows the air/fuel ratio to stay very close to 14.7:1.
Starting Mode
When the ignition is first turned ON, the PCM energizes the fuel pump relay for two seconds to allow the fuel pump to build up pressure. The PCM then checks the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the throttle position (TP) sensor to determine the proper air/fuel ratio for starting. The PCM controls the amount of fuel delivered in the starting mode by adjusting how long the fuel injectors are energized by pulsing the injectors for very short times.
Throttle Body Unit

The throttle body has a throttle plate to control the amount of air delivered to the engine. The TP sensor and IAC valve are also mounted on the throttle body. Vacuum ports located behind the throttle plate provide the vacuum signals needed by various components. Engine coolant is directed through a coolant cavity in the throttle body to warm the throttle valve and to prevent icing.
014RX007

The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides a signal used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to calculate the ignition sequence. The sensor initiates the 58X reference pulses which the PCM uses to calculate RPM and crankshaft position. For additional information, refer to Electronic Ignition System.
014RX040
Electronic Ignition
GENERAL DESCRIPTION ELECTRONIC IGNITION SYSTEM

Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor sends a signal to the PCM. The PCM uses this signal as a sync pulse to trigger the injectors in the proper sequence. The PCM uses the CMP signal to indicate the position of the #1 piston during its power stroke. The CMP allows the PCM to calculate true sequential fuel injection (SFI) mode of operation. If the PCM detects an incorrect CMP signal while the engine is running, DTC P0341 will set. If the CMP signal is lost while the engine is running, the fuel injection system will shift to a calculated sequential fuel injection mode based on the last fuel injection pulse, and the engine will continue to run. It will run in the calculated sequential mode with a 1in4 chance of the injector being correct. For additional information, refer to DTC P0342.
The electronic ignition system controls fuel combustion by providing a spark to ignite the compressed air/fuel mixture at the correct time. To provide optimum engine performance, fuel economy, and control of exhaust emissions, the PCM controls the spark advance of the ignition system. Electronic ignition has the following advantages over a mechanical distributor system: D No moving parts. D Less maintenance. D Remote mounting capability. D No mechanical load on the engine. D More coil cooldown time between firing events. D Elimination of mechanical timing adjustments. D Increased available ignition coil saturation time.

D D D D D Camshaft position (CMP) sensor. Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Throttle position (TP) sensor. Vehicle speed (vehicle speed sensor). PCM and ignition system supply voltage.
6E1449
Ignition Control Module (ICM)

The powertrain control module (PCM) controls engine ignition through a solidstate switching unit called the ignition control module (ICM). The software in the PCM uses input from several sensors to determine the timing, duration, and strength of the spark.
0013
Ignition Coils
The 2.2L engine uses 2 ignition coils, 1 per 2 cylinders. A twowire connector provides a 12volt primary supply through the 15amp ignition coil fuse, and the ground wire is connected to a groundswitching ignition module. Radio frequency interference produced by the coil is controlled by a condenser which is mounted near the ignition coil.
014RX042
D The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor sends the PCM a 58X signal related to the exact position of the crankshaft.
014RX044
Ignition Control
The ignition control (IC) spark timing is the PCMs method of controlling the spark advance and the ignition dwell. The IC spark advance and the ignition dwell are calculated by the PCM using the following inputs: D Engine speed. D Crankshaft position (58X reference).
0013

D The camshaft position (CMP) sensor sends a signal related to the position of the camshaft. D Throttle position (TP) sensor. D Vehicle speed sensor (VSS). D Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
Spark Plug
Although worn or dirty spark plugs may give satisfactory operation at idling speed, they frequently fail at higher engine speeds. Faulty spark plugs may cause poor fuel economy, power loss, loss of speed, hard starting and generally poor engine performance. Follow the scheduled maintenance service recommendations to ensure satisfactory spark plug performance. Refer to Maintenance and Lubrication. Normal spark plug operation will result in brown to grayishtan deposits appearing on the insulator portion of the spark plug. A small amount of redbrown, yellow, and white powdery material may also be present on the insulator tip around the center electrode. These deposits are normal combustion byproducts of fuels and lubricating oils with additives. Some electrode wear will also occur. Engines which are not running properly are often referred to as misfiring. This means the ignition spark is not igniting the air/fuel mixture at the proper time. While other ignition and fuel system causes must also be considered, possible causes include ignition system conditions which allow the spark voltage to reach ground in some other manner than by jumping across the air gap at the tip of the spark plug, leaving the air/fuel mixture unburned. Refer to DTC P0300. Misfiring may also occur when the tip of the spark plug becomes overheated and ignites the mixture before the spark jumps. This is referred to as preignition. Spark plugs may also misfire due to fouling, excessive gap, or a cracked or broken insulator. If misfiring occurs before the recommended replacement interval, locate and correct the cause. Carbon fouling of the spark plug is indicated by dry, black carbon (soot) deposits on the portion of the spark plug in the cylinder. Excessive idling and slow speeds under light engine loads can keep the spark plug temperatures so low that these deposits are not burned off. Very rich fuel mixtures or poor ignition system output may also be the cause.Refer to DTC P0172. Oil fouling of the spark plug is indicated by wet oily deposits on the portion of the spark plug in the cylinder, usually with little electrode wear. This may be caused by oil during breakin of new or newly overhauled engines. Deposit fouling of the spark plug occurs when the normal redbrown, yellow or white deposits of combustion byproducts become sufficient to cause misfiring. In some cases, these deposits may melt and form a shiny glaze on the insulator around the center electrode. If the fouling is found in only one or two cylinders, valve stem clearances or intake valve seals may be allowing excess lubricating oil to enter the cylinder, particularly if the deposits are heavier on the side of the spark plug facing the intake valve.
014RX007
Based on these sensor signals, as well as engine load and engine coolant temperature information, the PCM controls the switching function of the ICM by sending it a 5V signal. As long as the ICM receives the signal, it allows battery voltage to the ignition coil. That voltage allows a magnetic field to build in the coil. When the PCM requires a spark plug to fire, it shuts off the 5V signal to the ICM grounding it internally. This triggers the ICM to switch off the battery voltage to the ignition coil, which causes the field to collapse. The lines of magnetic force pass through the secondary portion of the coil as they collapse. As they intersect the coil, they induce high voltage in the secondary ignition circuit which travels toward ground through the spark plug.
Ignition Control PCM Output

The PCM provides a zero volt (actually about 100 mV to 200 mV) or a 5volt output signal to the ignition control (IC) module. When the ignition control (IC) module receives the 5volt signal from the PCM, it provides a ground path for the B+ supply to the primary side of the coil and creates a magnetic field in the coil. When the PCM shuts off the 5volt signal to the ignition control module, the ground path for the primary coil is broken. The magnetic field collapses and induces a high voltage secondary impulse which fires the spark plug and ignites the air/fuel mixture.

The PCM is responsible for maintaining proper spark and fuel injection timing for all driving conditions. To provide optimum driveability and emissions, the PCM monitors the input signals from the following components in order to calculate spark timing: D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. D Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor.
6E1451
plug. Overtightening may cause the spark plug shell to be stretched and will result in poor contact between the seats. In extreme cases, exhaust blowby and damage beyond simple gap wear may occur. Cracked or broken insulators may be the result of improper installation, damage during spark plug regapping, or heat shock to the insulator material. Upper insulators can be broken when a poorly fitting tool is used during installation or removal, when the spark plug is hit from the outside, or is dropped on a hard surface. Cracks in the upper insulator may be inside the shell and not visible. Also, the breakage may not cause problems until oil or moisture penetrates the crack later.
TS23995
Excessive gap means that the air space between the center and the side electrodes at the bottom of the spark plug is too wide for consistent firing. This may be due to improper gap adjustment or to excessive wear of the electrode during use. A check of the gap size and comparison to the gap specified for the vehicle in Maintenance and Lubrication will tell if the gap is too wide. A spark plug gap that is too small may cause an unstable idle condition. Excessive gap wear can be an indication of continuous operation at high speeds or with engine loads, causing the spark to run too hot. Another possible cause is an excessively lean fuel mixture.
TS23994
A broken or cracked lower insulator tip (around the center electrode) may result from damage during regapping or from heat shock (spark plug suddenly operating too hot).
TS23992
Low or high spark plug installation torque or improper seating can result in the spark plug running too hot and can cause excessive center electrode wear. The plug and the cylinder head seats must be in good contact for proper heat transfer and spark plug cooling. Dirty or damaged threads in the head or on the spark plug can keep it from seating even though the proper torque is applied. Once spark plugs are properly seated, tighten them to the torque shown in the Specifications Table. Low torque may result in poor contact of the seats due to a loose spark
TS23993

D Damage during regapping can happen if the gapping tool is pushed against the center electrode or the insulator around it, causing the insulator to crack. When regapping a spark plug, make the adjustment by bending only the ground side terminal, keeping the tool clear of other parts. D Heat shock breakage in the lower insulator tip generally occurs during several engine operating conditions (high speeds or heavy loading) and may be caused by overadvanced timing or low grade fuels. Heat shock refers to a rapid increase in the tip temperature that causes the insulator material to crack. Spark plugs with less than the recommended amount of service can sometimes be cleaned and regapped, then returned to service. However, if there is any doubt about the serviceability of a spark plug, replace it. Spark plugs with cracked or broken insulators should always be replaced.
A/C Request Signal

This signal tells the PCM when the A/C mode is selected at the A/C control switch. The PCM uses this input to adjust the idle speed before turning on the A/C clutch. The A/C compressor will be inoperative if this signal is not available to the PCM. For A/C wiring diagrams and diagnosis for the A/C electrical system, refer to A/C Clutch Circuit Diagnosis.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM

EVAP Emission Control System Purpose
The basic evaporative emission (EVAP) control system used on all vehicles is the charcoal canister storage method. Gasoline vapors from the fuel tank flow into the canister through the inlet labeled TANK. These vapors are absorbed into the activated carbon (charcoal) storage device (canister) in order to hold the vapors when the vehicle is not operating. The canister is purged by PCM control when the engine coolant temperature is over 60C (140F), the IAT reading is over 10C (50F), and the engine has been running. Air is drawn canister through the air inlet grid. The air mixes with the vapor and the mixture is drawn into the intake manifold.
A/C CLUTCH DIAGNOSIS

A/C Clutch Circuit Operation
A 12volt signal is supplied to the A/C request input of the PCM when the A/C is selected through the A/C control switch. The A/C compressor clutch relay is controlled through the PCM. This allows the PCM to modify the idle air control position prior to the A/C clutch engagement for better idle quality. If the engine operating conditions are within their specified calibrated acceptable ranges, the PCM will enable the A/C compressor relay. This is done by providing a ground path for the A/C relay coil within the PCM. When the A/C compressor relay is enabled, battery voltage is supplied to the compressor clutch coil. The PCM will enable the A/C compressor clutch whenever the engine is running and the A/C has been requested. The PCM will not enable the A/C compressor clutch if any of the following conditions are met: D The engine speed is greater than 6315 RPM. D The ECT is greater than 119C (246F). D The throttle is more than 80% open.
EVAP Emission Control System Operation

The EVAP canister purge is controlled by a solenoid valve that allows the manifold vacuum to purge the canister. The Powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a ground to energize the solenoid valve (purge on). The EVAP purge solenoid control is pulsewidth modulated (PWM) (turned on and off several times a second). The duty cycle (pulse width) is determined by engine operating conditions including load, throttle position, coolant temperature and ambient temperature. The duty cycle is calculated by the PCM. The output is commanded when the appropriate conditions have been met. These conditions are: D The engine is fully warmed up. D The engine has been running for a specified time. D The IAT reading is above 10C (50F). D A continuous purge condition with no purge commanded by the PCM willset a DTC P1441. Poor idle, stalling and Poor driveability can be caused by: D A malfunctioning purge solenoid. D A damaged canister. D Hoses that are split, cracked, or not connected properly.
A/C Clutch Circuit Purpose

The A/C compressor operation is controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) for the following reasons: D It improves idle quality during compressor clutch engagement. D It improves wide open throttle (WOT) performance. D It provides A/C compressor protection from operation with incorrect refrigerant pressures. The A/C electrical system consists of the following components: 1. The A/C control switch. 2. The A/C refrigerant pressure switches. 3. The A/C compressor clutch. 4. The A/C compressor clutch relay. 5. The PCM.
Enhanced Evaporative Emission Control System

The basic purpose of the Enhanced Evaporative Emissions control system is the same as other EVAP systems. A charcoalfilled canister captures and stores gasoline fumes. When the PCM determines that the time is right, it opens a purge valve which allows engine vacuum to draw the fumes into the intake manifold. The

difference between this and other systems is that the PCM monitors the vacuum and/or pressure in the system to determine if there is any leakage. If the PCM determines that the EVAP system is leaking or not functioning properly, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in the PCM memory. The enhanced EVAP system is required to detect evaporative fuel system leaks as small as 0.040 in. (1.0 mm) between the fuel filler cap and purge solenoid. The system can test the evaporative system integrity by applying a vacuum signal (ported or manifold) to the fuel tank to create a small vacuum. The PCM then monitors the ability of the system to maintain the vacuum. If the vacuum remains for a specified period of time, there are no evaporative leaks and a PASS report is sent to the diagnostic executive. If there is a leak, the system either will not achieve a vacuum, or a vacuum cannot be maintained. Usually, a failure can only be detected after a cold start with a trip of sufficient length and driving conditions to run the needed tests. The enhanced EVAP system diagnostic will conduct up to eight specific subtests to detect fault conditions. If the diagnostic fails a subtest, the PCM will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) to indicate the type of fault detected. Electrical Components The electrical components that make up the enhanced EVAP system are: Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor The fuel tank pressure sensor is a threewire strain gauge sensor similar to a common MAP sensor. However, the fuel tank pressure sensor has very different electrical characteristics due to its pressure differential design. The sensor measures the difference between the air pressure (or vacuum) in the fuel tank and the outside air pressure. The sensor mounts at the top of the fuel pump assembly. A threewire electrical harness connects it to the PCM. The PCM supplies a fivevolt reference voltage and a ground to the sensor. The sensor will return a voltage between 0.1 and 4.9 volts. When the air pressure in the fuel tank is equal to the outside air pressure, such as when the fuel cap is removed, the output voltage of the sensor will be 1.3 to 1.7 volts. When the air pressure in the fuel tank is 4.5 in. H2O (1.25 kPa), the sensor output voltage will be 0.5 +/ 0.2 V. When there is neither vacuum nor pressure in the fuel tank, the sensor voltage will be 1.5 V. At 14 in. H2O (3.75 kPa), the sensor voltage will be 4.5 +/ 0.2 V. EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid Normally closed, the purge solenoid opens upon the PCMs signal to allow engine vacuum to purge gasoline fumes from the canister. Mounted on top of the upper intake manifold assembly. EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid Located next to the canister, the vent solenoid opens to allow air into the EVAP system. Fresh air is necessary to completely remove gasoline fumes from the canister during purge. The EVAP vent solenoid closes to seal off the evaporative emissions system for leak testing.
6E1453
Fuel Level Sensor The fuel level sensor is an important input to the PCM for the enhanced EVAP system diagnostic. The PCM needs fuel level information to know the volume of fuel in the tank. The fuel level affects the rate of change of air pressure in the EVAP system. Several of the enhanced EVAP system diagnostic subtests are dependent upon correct fuel level information. The diagnostic will not run when the tank is less than 15% or more than 85% full. Be sure to diagnose any Fuel Level Sensor DTCs first, as they can cause other DTCs to set. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The PCM compares the signals from the fuel tank pressure sensor and the MAP sensor to ensure that a relative vacuum is maintained in the EVAP system. NonElectrical Components Purge/Vacuum Hoses Made of rubber compounds, these hoses route the gasoline fumes from their sources to the canister and from the canister to the intake air flow. EVAP Canister Mounted on a bracket ahead of the fuel tank, the canister stores fuel vapors until the PCM determines that engine conditions are right for them to be removed and burned. Fuel Tank The tank has a builtin air space designed for the collection of gasoline fumes. Vacuum Source The vacuum source is split between two ports, one on either side of the throttle body. Fuel Cap The fuel cap is designed to be an integral part of the EVAP system.
System Fault Detection

The EVAP leak detection strategy is based on applying vacuum to the EVAP system and monitoring vacuum decay. The PCM monitors vacuum level via the fuel tank pressure sensor. At an appropriate time, the EVAP purge solenoid and the EVAP vent solenoid are turned ON, allowing the engine vacuum to draw a small vacuum on the entire evaporative emission system. After the desired vacuum level has been achieved, the EVAP purge solenoid is turned OFF, sealing the system. A leak is detected by monitoring for a decrease in vacuum level over a given time period, all other variables remaining constant. A small leak in the system will cause DTC P0442 to be set. If the desired vacuum level cannot be achieved in the test described above, a large leak or a faulty EVAP purge solenoid is indicated. Leaks can be caused by the following conditions: D Disconnected or faulty fuel tank pressure sensor D Missing or faulty fuel cap D Disconnected, damaged, pinched, or blocked EVAP purge line D Disconnected or damaged EVAP vent hose D Disconnected, damaged, pinched, or blocked fuel tank vapor line D Disconnected or faulty EVAP purge solenoid D Disconnected or faulty EVAP vent solenoid D Open ignition feed circuit to the EVAP vent or purge solenoid D Damaged EVAP canister

D Leaking fuel sender assembly Oring D Leaking fuel tank or fuel filler neck A restricted or blocked EVAP vent path is detected by drawing vacuum into the EVAP system, turning OFF the EVAP vent solenoid and the EVAP purge solenoid (EVAP vent solenoid OPEN, EVAP purge Pulse Width Modulate (PWM) 0%) and monitoring the fuel tank vacuum sensor input. With the EVAP vent solenoid open, any vacuum in the system should decrease quickly unless the vent path is blocked. A blockage like this will set DTC P0446 and can be caused by the following conditions: D Faulty EVAP vent solenoid (stuck closed) D Plugged, kinked or pinched vent hose D Shorted EVAP vent solenoid driver circuit D Plugged EVAP canister The PCM supplies a ground to energize the purge solenoid (purge ON). The EVAP purge control is PWM, or turned ON and OFF, several times a second. The duty cycle (pulse width) is determined by engine operating conditions including load, throttle position, coolant temperature and ambient temperature. The duty cycle is calculated by the PCM and the output is commanded when the appropriate conditions have been met. The system checks for conditions that cause the EVAP system to purge continuously by commanding the EVAP vent solenoid ON and the EVAP purge solenoid OFF (EVAP vent solenoid CLOSED, EVAP purge PWM 0%). If fuel tank vacuum level increases during the test, a continuous purge flow condition is indicated, which will set a DTC P1441. This can be caused by the following conditions: D EVAP purge solenoid leaking D EVAP purge and engine vacuum lines switched at the EVAP purge solenoid D EVAP purge solenoid driver circuit grounded
Linear EGR Valve Operation And Results Of Incorrect Operation

The linear EGR valve is designed to accurately supply EGR to the engine independent of intake manifold vacuum. The valve controls EGR flow from the exhaust to the intake manifold through an orifice with a PCMcontrolled pintle. During operation, the PCM controls pintle position by monitoring the pintle position feedback signal. The feedback signal can be monitored with a Tech 2 as Actual EGR Pos. Actual EGR Pos. should always be near the commanded EGR position (Desired EGR Pos.). The PCM also tests for EGR flow. If incorrect flow is detected, DTC P0401 will set. If DTC P0401 is set, refer to the DTC charts. The linear EGR valve is usually activated under the following conditions: D Warm engine operation. D Aboveidle speed. Too much EGR flow at idle, cruise or cold operation may cause any of the following conditions to occur: D Engine stalls after a cold start. D Engine stalls at idle after deceleration. D Vehicle surges during cruise. D Rough idle. D DTC P0300 (misfire detected). Too little or no EGR flow may allow combustion temperatures to get too high. This could cause: D Spark knock (detonation). D Engine overheating. D Emission test failure. D DTC P0401 (EGR Flow Insufficient detected). D Poor fuel economy.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM

EGR Purpose
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system is used to reduce emission levels of oxides of nitrogen (NOx). NOx emission levels are caused by a high combustion temperature. The EGR system lowers the NOx emission levels by decreasing the combustion temperature.
Linear EGR Valve

The main element of the system is the linear EGR valve. The EGR valve feeds small amounts of exhaust gas back into the combustion chamber. The fuel/air mixture will be diluted and combustion temperatures reduced.
0017
Linear EGR Control

The PCM monitors the EGR actual position and adjusts the pintle position accordingly. The PCM uses information from the following sensors to control the pintle position: D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. D Throttle position (TP) sensor.
EGR Pintle Position Sensor

The PCM monitors the EGR valve pintle position input to ensure that the valve responds properly to commands from the PCM and to detect a fault if the pintle position sensor and control circuits are open or shorted. If the PCM detects a pintle position signal voltage outside the normal range of the pintle position sensor, or a signal

voltage that is not within a tolerance considered acceptable for proper EGR system operation, the PCM will set DTC P0404.
6E1455
GENERAL DESCRIPTION POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM

Crankcase Ventilation System Purpose
The crankcase ventilation system is used to consume crankcase vapors in the combustion process instead of venting them to the atmosphere. Fresh air from the throttle body is supplied to the crankcase and mixed with blowby gases. This mixture is then passed through the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) port into the intake manifold. While the engine is running, exhaust gases and small amounts of the fuel/air mixture escape past the piston rings and enter the crankcase. These gases are mixed with clean air entering through a tube from the air intake duct.
028RX003
During normal, partthrottle operation, the system is designed to allow crankcase gases to flow through the PCV valve into the throttle body to be consumed by normal combustion. A plugged valve or PCV hose may cause the following conditions: D Rough idle. D Stalling or slow idle speed. D Oil leaks. D Sludge in the engine. A leaking PCV hose would cause: D Rough idle. D Stalling. D High idle speed.
SPECIAL TOOLS
J 39200 High Impedance Multimeter (Digital Voltmeter DVM)
J 26792/BT72201 Spark Tester
(1) PCMCIA Card (2) RS232 Loop Back Connector (3) SAE 16/19 Adapter (4) DLC Cable (5) TECH2
J 39021Box Port Fuel Injection Diagnostic Kit
J 37027A IAC Motor Analyzer
J 23738A Vacuum Pump with Gauge
J 34142B Unpowered Test Light
BT8515V Exhaust Back Pressure Tester
J 390215V Port Fuel Injector Tester
J 39194B Heated Oxygen Sensor Wrench
J 35616A/BT8637 Connector Test Adapter Kit
J 35689A Terminal Remover

6E1457
J 28742A Weather Pack II Terminal Remover
J 3902190 Injector Switch Box
J 3902145 Injector Test Light
1. J 41413 EVAP Pressure/Purge Diagnostic Station is a multipurpose tool which is used to perform several diagnostic procedures for enhanced emission testing. The station will accommodate a nitrogen gas filled cylinder which is used to pressurize the vehicle EVAP system for a leakdown test and leak location test when a vehicle is repaired for leakage in the enhanced evaporative emission control system. It also has two additional gauges (inches of mercury and inches of water) which are used to measure both source vacuum and EVAP canister purge vacuum to verify correct operation and vapor flow within the canister purge circuit. 2. J 41416 Ultrasonic Leak Detector is a microprocessorbased device used to detect leaks in the enhanced evaporative emission control system. The evaporative system is pressurized to 30 inches of water using the J 41413 EVAP Pressure/Purge Diagnostic System. Small leaks in the EVAP system will emit sound at a high frequency undetectable by a human ear but detectable with the J 41416. The technician traces along the evaporative system and can pinpoint leaks due to corroded lines, cracked hoses, or a damaged EVAP component. The detector includes a high quality set of headphones to block out surrounding shop noise and the LED sensitivity meter allows a visual reference for locating leaks in conjunction with the audio output heard through the headphones. Powered by (1) nine volt battery.
J 41413! EVAP Pressure/Purge Diagnostic Station
J 41416@ Ultrasonic Leak Detector
SECTION
ENGINE EXHAUST (Y22SE 2.2L)
RODEO
6F1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Exhaust Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Exhaust Pipe and Associated Parts . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Silencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Silencer and Associated Parts . . . 6F1 6F2 6F3 6F3 6F3 6F3 6F4 6F4 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Exhaust pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Exhaust pipe and Associated Parts . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6F4 6F4 6F5 6F5 6F5 6F5 6F6
Service Precaution
6F2
General Description
150R100010
When inspecting or replacing exhaust system components, make sure there is adequate clearance from all points on the underbody to prevent overheating the floor pan and possible damage to the passenger compartment insulation and trim materials. Check complete exhaust system and nearby body areas and rear compartment lid for broken, damaged, missing or mispositioned parts, open seams, holes, loose connections or other deterioration which could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the rear compartment or passenger compartment. Dust or water in the rear compartment may be an indication of a problem in one of these areas. Any faulty areas should be corrected immediately.
Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic converter is an emission control device added to the exhaust system to reduce pollutants from the exhaust gas stream. CAUTION: The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Periodic maintenance of the exhaust system is not required. If the vehicle is raised for other service, it is advisable to check the condition of the complete exhaust system. A dual bed monolith catalytic converter is used in combination with three way catalytic converter. Catalytic Types: Three way (Reduction/Oxidation) catalyst The catalyst coating on the three way (reduction) converter contains platinum and rhodium which lowers the levels of nitrous oxide (NOx) as well as hydrocarbons (HC) and carbon monoxide (Co).
Hangers
Various types of hangers are used to support exhaust system(s). These include conventional rubber straps, rubber rings, and rubber blocks. The installation of exhaust system supports is very important, as improperly installed supports can cause annoying vibrations which can be difficult to diagnose.
Gasket
The gasket must be replaced whenever a new exhaust pipe, muffler or catalytic converter is installed.
6F3
Front Exhaust Pipe

Front Exhaust Pipe and Associated Parts
150R100001
Legend (1) Front Exhaust Pipe Fixing Nuts (2) O2 Sensor (3) Front Exhaust Pipe Mounting Bracket (4) Front Exhaust Pipe Mounting Bracket Fixing Bolt
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
O2 Sensor Front Exhaust Pipe Fixing Bolt Front Exhaust Pipe Mounting Rubber Three Way Catalytic Converter Pre Catalytic Converter
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Raise the vehicle and support with suitable safety stands. 3. Disconnect O2 sensor harness connector and remove O2 sensors (2),(5). 4. Remove front exhaust pipe mounting bracket fixing bolt (4) and bracket. 5. Remove front exhaust pipe fixing bolts (6). 6. Remove front exhaust pipe fixing four stud nuts (1) from exhaust manifold. 7. Remove front exhaust pipe assembly.
Installation
1. Install front exhaust pipe assembly and tighten four stud nuts (1) and two bolts (6) to the specified torque: Torque: Stud Nuts : 28 Nm (21 lb ft) Bolts (6) : 43 Nm (32 lb ft) Bolts (4) : 23 Nm (17 lb ft) 2. Tighten O2 sensor and reconnect O2 sensor harness connector. Torque : 55 Nm (41 lb ft)
6F4
Exhaust Silencer
Exhaust Silencer and Associated Parts
150R100005
Legend (1) Exhaust Silencer (2) Front Exhaust Pipe Fixing Bolt (3) Exhaust Silencer Fixing Nuts (4) Exhaust Rear Pipe
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Mounting Rubber Mounting Rubber Mounting Rubber Exhaust Silencer Fixing Nuts
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Raise the vehicle and support with suitable safety stands. 3. Remove exhaust silencer fixing nuts (3) then disconnect rear exhaust pipe from exhaust silencer. 4. Remove front exhaust pipe fixing bolts (2) then disconnect exhaust silencer from front exhaust pipe. 5. Remove exhaust silencer mounting nuts (8) from chassis side then remove exhaust silencer (1).
Installation
1. Install the exhaust silencer (1) chassis side and tighten two nuts (8) to the specified torque. Nuts: 15 Nm (11 lb ft) 2. Tighten two Bolts (2) on front exhaust pipe to specified torque. Bolts: 43 Nm (32 lb ft) 3. Install the rear exhaust pipe and tighten two nuts (3) on exhaust silencer to specified torque. Nuts: 43 Nm (32 lb ft)
6F5
Rear Exhaust pipe

Rear Exhaust pipe and Associated Parts
150R100005
Legend (1) Exhaust Silencer (2) Front Exhaust Pipe Fixing Bolt (3) Exhaust Silencer Fixing Nuts (4) Exhaust Rear Pipe
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Mounting Rubber Mounting Rubber Mounting Rubber Exhaust Silencer Fixing Nuts
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Raise the vehicle and support with suitable safety stands. 3. Remove exhaust silencer fixing nuts (3), then disconnect exhaust rear pipe from exhaust silencer. 4. Remove mounting rubber (5), (6). 5. Remove exhaust rear pipe (4).
Installation
1. Install the mounting rubber (5), (6). 2. Install the exhaust rear pipe (4) and tighten two nuts (3) on exhaust silencer to specified torque. Nuts: 43 Nm (32 lb ft)
6F6

150R100002
SECTION
ENGINE LUBRICATION (Y22SE 2.2L)
RODEO
6G1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pump and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . 6G1 6G2 6G3 6G3 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6G4 6G4 6G4
Service Precaution
6G2
General Description
A gear type oil pump is derectly driven by the crankshaft and draws oil from the oil pan, via the suction pipe. The oil pressure created allows the oil to flow through the oil filter into the main oil gallery in the cylinder block. An oil pump pressure relief valve and oil filter bypass valve are incorporated in the system. From the main oil gallery in the cylinder block, the cylinder head and crankshaft main bearings are supplied with oil. The camshaft bearings and hydraulic tappets are supplied through the main feed galleries in the cylinder head. Vent valves allow air to be expelled from the oil galleries in the cylinder head. The balance shaft journals are directly fed from the crankshaft main bearings. The connecting rod bearings are fed via passages in the crankshaft. The oil returns to the oil pan via passages in the cylinder block.
C06RW004
Legend (1) Oil Strainer (2) Oil Pump (3) Relief Valve (4) Oil Filter (5) Safety Valve (6) Oil Gallery (7) Crankshaft Bearing (8) Crankshaft
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
Connecting Rod Bearing Connecting Rod Piston Oil Gallery; Cylinder Head Camshaft Camshaft Journal Tappet (HLA = Hydraulic Lash Adjuster) Vent Valve Oil Pan
6G3
Oil Pump
Oil Pump and Associated Parts
051RW004
Legend (1) Oil Pump Assembly (2) Oil Pressure Switch
(3) Gasket (4) Sleeve
6G4
Disassembly
1. Remove crankshaft timing pulley. 2. Remove oil pan. 3. Remove oil pan support. 4. Remove oil strainer. 5. Remove oil pump assembly. 6. Remove oil pressure switch. 7. Remove gasket. 8. Remove sleeve.
Oil Strainer
Check the oil strainer for cracking and scoring. If cracking and scoring are found, the oil strainer must be replaced.

CAUTION: Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage or any other abnormal conditions are found through inspection.
Body and Gears

The pump assembly must be replaced if one or more of the wrong conditions is discovered during inspection: Indentation of gear pair use feeler strip and straight edge. Dimension : 0.03 mm to 0.10 mm (0.0012 to 0.0039 in)
051R100003
Reassembly
1. Install oil pressure switch to the oil pump. Torque : 40 Nm (30 lb ft) 2. Install the oil pump with the sleeve and the gasket. Torque : 6 Nm (52 lb in) 3. Install oil strainer. Torque : 8 Nm (69 lb in) 4. Install oil pan support. Torque : 20 Nm (14 lb ft) 5. Install the oil pan. 1st step: 8 Nm (69 lb in) 6. Install crankshaft timing pulley. Tighten the bolts in 2 steps: 1st step: 130 Nm (94 lb ft) 2nd step: 45
051RW014
SECTION
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM (Y22SE 2.2L)
RODEO
6H1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accelerator Pedal Control Cable . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6H1 6H2 6H2 6H2 6H2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accelerator Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accelerator Pedal and Associated Parts . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6H2 6H3 6H3 6H3 6H3
Service Precaution
6H2
Accelerator Pedal Control Cable
035RX004
Legend (1) Accelerator Pedal (AP) Control Inner Cable (2) Grommet (3) Clip
(4) (5) (6) (7)
AP Control Cable Adjusting Nut AP Control Inner Cable (Throttle Valve Side) Accelerator Pedal (AP) Assembly
Removal
1. Loosen the nut(5) on the cable bracket mounted. 2. Remove cable clip(3). 3. Disconnect accelerator pedal (AP) control cable(6). (on throttle valve side) 4. Disconnect AP control cable(1). (on AP pedal(7) side) 5. Remove grommet(2). 6. Remove AP control cable(4).
Installation
1. Install AP control cable(4). 2. Install grommet(2). 3. Connect AP control inner cable(1). (on AP pedal(7) side) 4. Connect AP control inner cable(6). (on throttle valve side) 5. Install cable clip(3). 6. Install adjusting nut(5).
Inspection
Check the following items, and replace the control cable if any abnormality is found: D The control cable should move smoothly. D The control cable should not be bent or kinked. D The control cable should be free of damage and corrosion.
Adjustment
Adjust the AP free play by the adjusting nut (5). AP free play 5 mm (0.2 in) on tip of accelerator pedal.
6H3
Accelerator Pedal
Accelerator Pedal and Associated Parts Removal
1. Accelerator pedal control cable(1). 2. Accelerator pedal assembly(2).
Installation
1. Accelerator pedal assembly (2). 2. Accelerator pedal control cable (1). 3. Adjust the accelerator pedal free play, refer to the AP control cable in this manual.
035RX002
Legend (1) Accelerator Pedal Control Cable (2) Accelerator Pedal Assembly
SECTION
INDUCTION (Y22SE 2.2L)
RODEO
6J1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6J1 6J2 6J2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6J2 6J2
Service Precaution
6J2
Air Cleaner Filter

Removal
1. Remove positive ventilation hose connector. 2. Remove intake air temperature sensor. 3. Remove air cleaner duct assembly. 4. Remove air cleaner element.
Installation
1. Install air cleaner element. 2. Attach the air cleaner duct cover to the body completely, then clamp it with the clip. 3. Install intake air temperature sensor. 4. Install positive crankcase ventilation hose connector.
Inspection
Check the air cleaner filter for damage or dust clogging. Replace if it is damaged, or clean if it is clogged.
Cleaning Method
Tap the air cleaner filter gently so as not to damage the paper filter, or clean the element by blowing with compressed air of about 490 kPa (71 psi) from the clean side if it is extremely dirty.
130RW002
SECTION
ENGINE MECHANICAL (6VD1 3.2L)
RODEO
6A1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Engine Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting and Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A 6B 6C 6D1 6D2 6D3 Driveability and Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Speed Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . Induction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E2 6F 6G 6H 6J

CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Head Cover LH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Head Cover RH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Manifold LH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Manifold RH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankshaft Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve Stem Oil Controller , Valve Spring and Valve Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piston, Piston Ring and Connecting Rod . . . 6A2 6A3 6A4 6A19 6A19 6A20 6A21 6A21 6A21 6A22 6A22 6A22 6A24 6A24 6A24 6A25 6A25 6A25 6A26 6A26 6A26 6A27 6A27 6A28 6A31 6A31 6A32 6A34 6A34 6A34 6A36 6A36 6A36 6A37 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankshaft and Main Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Oil Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Head and Associated Parts . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve Spring, Oil Controller, Valve, Valve Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve Spring, Oil Controller, Valve, Valve Guide and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camshaft and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankshaft and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair for Bearings . . . . . . Inspection and Repair for Crankshaft . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A37 6A38 6A39 6A39 6A40 6A44 6A44 6A44 6A45 6A45 6A46 6A48 6A48 6A48 6A49 6A49 6A50 6A52 6A52 6A52 6A53 6A56 6A59 6A59 6A59 6A60 6A62 6A65 6A65 6A65 6A66 6A68 6A69
6A2

6A73 6A73 6A73 6A74 6A78 6A80 Cylinder Block and Associated Parts . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A80 6A80 6A81 6A82 6A85 6A91
Piston and Connecting Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piston, Connecting Rod and Associate Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Precaution
6A3
General Description
Engine Cleanliness And Care
An automobile engine is a combination of many machined, honed, polished and lapped surfaces with tolerances that are measured in the thousandths of a millimeter (ten thousandths of an inch). Accordingly, when any internal engine parts are serviced, care and cleanliness are important. Throughout this section, it should be understood that proper cleaning and protection of machined surfaces and friction areas is part of the repair procedure. This is considered standard shop practice even if not specifically stated. D A liberal coating of engine oil should be applied to all friction areas during assembly to protect and lubricate the surfaces on initial operation. D Whenever valve train components, pistons, piston rings, connecting rods, rod bearings, and crankshaft journal bearings are removed for service, they should be retained in order. D At the time of installation, they should be installed in the same locations and with the same mating surfaces as when removed. D Battery cables should be disconnected before any major work is performed on the engine. Failure to disconnect cables may result in damage to wire harness or other electrical parts. D The six cylinders of this engine are identified by numbers; Right side cylinders 1, 3 and 5, Left side cylinders 2, 4 and 6, as counted from crankshaft pulley side to flywheel side.
Cylinder Block
The cylinder block is made of aluminum diecast casting for 75Vtype six cylinders. It has a rear plate integrated structure and employs a deep skirt. The cylinder liner is cast and the liner inner diameter and crankshaft journal diameter are classified into grades. The crankshaft is supported by four bearings of which width is different between No.2, No.3 and No.1, No.4; the width of No.3 bearing on the body side is different in order to support the thrust bearing. The bearing cap is made of nodular cast iron and each bearing cap uses four bolts and two side bolts.
Cylinder Head
The cylinder head, made of aluminum alloy casting employs a pentroof type combustion chamber with a spark plug in the center. The intake and exhaust valves are placed in Vtype design. The ports are crossflow type.
Valve Train
Intake and exhaust camshaft on both banks are driven with a camshaft drive gear by the timing belt. The valves are operated by the camshaft and the valve clearance is adjusted to select suitable thickness shim.
Intake Manifold
The intake manifold system is composed of the aluminum cast common chamber and intake manifold attached with six fuel injectors.
General Information on Engine Service

The following information on engine service should be noted carefully, as it is important in preventing damage and contributing to reliable engine performance. D When raising or supporting the engine for any reason, do not use a jack under the oil pan. Due to the small clearance between the oil pan and the oil pump strainer, jacking against the oil pan may cause damage to the oil pickup unit. D The 12volt electrical system is capable of damaging circuits. When performing any work where electrical terminals could possibly be grounded, the ground cable of the battery should be disconnected at the battery. D Any time the intake air duct or air cleaner is removed, the intake opening should be covered. This will protect against accidental entrance of foreign material into the cylinder which could cause extensive damage when the engine is started.
Exhaust Manifold
The exhaust manifold is made of nodular cast iron.
Pistons and Connecting Rods

Aluminum pistons are used after selecting the grade that meets the cylinder bore diameter. Each piston has two compression rings and one oil ring. The piston pin made of chromium steel is offset 1mm toward the thrust side, and the thrust pressure of piston to the cylinder wall varies gradually as the piston travels. The connecting rods are made of forged steel. The connecting rod bearings are graded for correct size selection.
Crankshaft and Bearings

The crankshaft is made of Ductile castiron. Pins and journals are graded for correct size selection for their bearing.
6A4
Engine Diagnosis
First of all the engine diagnose to check the fuel quantity, the engine level and the engine coolant level.
Hard Starting
1. Starting Motor Does Not Turn Over Troubleshooting Procedure Turn on headlights and starter switch. Condition Headlights go considerably out or dim Possible cause Battery run down or under charged Terminals poorly connected Starting motor coil circuit shorted Starting motor defective Correction Recharge or replace battery Clean battery posts and terminals and connect properly Overhaul or replace Overhaul or replace
2. Ignition Trouble Starting Motor Turns Over But Engine Does Not Start tester. Before starting the engine, make sure that the Spark Test spark plug tester is properly grounded. To avoid electrical Disconnect an ignition coil from any spark plug. Connect shock, do not touch the part where insulation of the ignithe spark plug tester (For example J26792), start the ention coil is broken while the engine is running. gine, and check if a spark is generated in the spark plug Condition Spark jumps across gap Possible cause Spark plug defective Ignition timing incorrect Fuel not reaching fuel injector(s) or engine Valve timing incorrect Engine lacks compression No sparking takes place Ignition coil disconnected or broken Electronic module Ignition System with Correction Clean, adjust spark gap or replace Refer to Ignition System Refer to item 3 (Trouble in fuel system) Adjust Refer to item 4 (Engine lacks compression) Connect properly or replace Replace Correct Correct or replace
Poor connections in engine harness Powertrain Control Module cable disconnected or defective 3. Trouble In Fuel System Condition Starting motor turns over and spark occurs but engine does not start start. Possible cause Fuel tank empty Water in fuel system Fuel filter clogged Fuel pipe clogged Fuel pump defective Fuel pump circuit open Evaporative Emission System circuit clogged Control
Correction Fill Clean Replace filter Clean or replace Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Refer to Electronic Fuel Injection section
Multiport Fuel Injection System faulty

4. Engine Lacks Compression Condition Engine lacks compression Possible cause Spark plug loosely fitted or spark plug gasket defective Valve timing incorrect Cylinder head gasket defective Valve incorrectly seated Valve stem seized Valve spring weakened or broken Cylinder or piston rings worn Piston ring seized Correction
6A5
Tighten to specified torque or replace gasket Adjust Replace gasket Lap valve Replace valve and valve guide Replace Overhaul engine Overhaul engine.
Engine Compression Test Procedure

1. Start and run the engine until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Remove all the spark plugs. 4. Remove ignition coil fuse (15A) and disable the ignition system. 5. Remove the fuel pump relay from the relay and fuse box. 6. Engage the starter and check that the cranking speed is approximately 300 rpm. 7. Install cylinder compression gauge into spark plug hole. 8. With the throttle valve opened fully, keep the starter engaged until the compression gage needle reaches the maximum level. Note the reading. 9. Repeat the test with each cylinder. If the compression pressure obtained falls below the limit, engine overhaul is necessary. Limit; 1000 kPa (145 psi)
6A6
Rough Engine Idling or Engine Stalling

Condition Trouble in fuel injection system Possible cause Throttle shutting off incomplete Throttle position sensor circuit open or shorted Fuel injector circuits open or shorted Fuel injectors damaged Fuel pump relay defective Mass Airflow Sensor circuit open or poor connections Mass Airflow Sensor defective Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor circuit open or poor connections Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor defective Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor circuit open or poor connections Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor defective Intake Air Temperature sensor circuit open or poor connections Intake Air defective Temperature sensor Correction Correct or replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Replace Refer to Hard Start Refer to Hard Start Lap valve Replace filter element Readjust Replace Replace Replace
Ion Sensing Module cable broken or poor connections Ion Sensing Module defective Vehicle Speed Sensor circuit open or shorted Vehicle Speed Sensor defective Trouble in emission control system Powertrain Control Module defective Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve circuit open or poor connections Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve faulty Canister purge valve circuit open or poor connections Canister purge valve defective Evaporative Emission Canister Purge control valve defective Trouble in ignition system Others Engine lacks compression Valve incorrectly seated Air Cleaner Filter clogged Valve timing incorrect Idle air control valve broken Fast idle solenoid defective Positive Crankcase Ventilation valve defective or clogged
6A7
Rough Engine Running

Condition Engine misfires periodically Possible cause Ignition coil layer shorted Spark plugs fouling Spark plug(s) insulator nose leaking Fuel injector(s) defective Powertrain control module faulty Engine knocks periodically Spark plugs running too hot Powertrain control module faulty Ion Sensing module faulty Engine lacks power Spark plugs fouled Fuel injectors defective Mass Airflow Sensor or Intake Airflow Sensor circuit defective Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor or Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor circuit defective Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor circuit defective Powertrain Control Module faulty Intake Air Temperature Sensor or Intake Air Temperature Sensor circuit defective Throttle Position Sensor or Throttle Position Sensor circuit defective ION Sensing Module or ION Sensing Module circuits defective Replace Clean or install hotter type plug Replace Replace Replace Install colder type spark plugs Replace Refer or replace Clean Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Correction
Correct or replace
Correct or replace Correct or replace
6A8
Hesitation
Condition Hesitation on acceleration Possible cause Throttle Position Sensor adjustment incorrect Throttle Position Sensor circuit open or shorted Mass Airflow Sensor circuit open or poor connections Mass Airflow Sensor defective Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor circuit open or shorted MAP Sensor defective Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor circuit open or poor connections Ion Sensing Module circuit open or poor connections Ion Sensing Module defective IAT Sensor defective Hesitation at high speeds (Fuel pressure too low) Fuel tank strainer clogged Fuel pipe clogged Fuel filter clogged Defective fuel pump system Fuel Pressure Control Valve leaking Hesitation at high speeds (Fuel injector not working normally) Power supply or ground circuit for Multiport Fuel Injection System shorted or open Fuel Injector defective Cable of Multiport Fuel Injection System circuit open or poor connections Correction Replace throttle valve assembly Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Replace Check and replace Replace Check and correct or replace

Condition Hesitation at high speeds Possible cause Powertrain Control Module defective Throttle Position Sensor broken or poor connections cable Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Check and correct or replace Replace filter element Check and correct or replace Correction
6A9
Throttle Position Sensor defective Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor circuit open or shorted Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor defective Mass Airflow Sensor circuit open or poor connections Mass Airflow Sensor defective MAP Sensor cable broken or poor connections MAP Sensor defective IAT Sensor circuit open or poor connections IAT Sensor defective Ion Sensing Module circuit open or poor connections Ion Sensing Module defective Throttle valve not fully opened Air Cleaner Filter clogged Power supply voltage too low
6A10
Engine Lacks Power

Condition Trouble in fuel system Possible cause Fuel Pressure Control Valve not working normally Fuel injector clogged Fuel pipe clogged Fuel filter clogged or fouled Fuel pump drive circuit not working normally Fuel tank not sufficiently breathing due to clogged Evaporative Emission Control System circuit Water in fuel system Inferior quality fuel in fuel system Powertrain Control Module supplied poor voltage Throttle Position Sensor broken or poor connections cable Replace Clean or replace Clean Replace Correct or replace Clean or replace Correction
Clean Use fuel of specified octane rating Correct circuit Correct or replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Replace Replace filter element Correct or replace Repair Refer to Hard Start Troubleshooting Guide Install spark plugs of adequate heat range Replace
Throttle Position Sensor defective Mass Airflow Sensor not working normally Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor not working normally Intake Air Temperature Sensor not working normally Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor circuit open or shorted Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor defective Powertrain Control Module defective Trouble in intake or exhaust system Air Cleaner Filter clogged Air duct kinked or flattened TWC defective Ignition failure Heat range of spark plug inadequate Ignition coil defective

Condition Engine overheating Possible cause Level of Engine Coolant too low Fan clutch defective Incorrect fan installed Thermostat defective Engine Coolant pump defective Radiator clogged Radiator filler cap defective Level of oil in engine crankcase too low or wrong engine oil Resistance increased in exhaust system Replenish Replace Replace Replace Correct or replace Clean or replace Replace Change or replenish Correction
6A11
Clean exhaust system or replace defective parts Replace with Throttle Valve ASM Correct or replace Replace Replace (Use a thermostat set to open at 82C (180F)) Refer to Hard Start Adjust to recommended pressures Adjust Adjust or replace Correct level of engine oil Replace
Throttle Position Sensor adjustment incorrect Throttle Position Sensor circuit open or shorted Cylinder head gasket damaged Engine overcooling Engine lacks compression Others Thermostat defective Tire inflation pressure abnormal Brake drag Clutch slipping Level of oil in engine crankcase too high Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve defective
6A12
Engine Noisy
Abnormal engine noise often consists of various noises originating in rotating parts, sliding parts and other moving parts of the engine. It is, therefore, advisable to locate the source of noise systematically. Troubleshooting Procedure for Crankshaft Journals or Crankshaft Bearing Noise Condition Noise from crank journals or from crank bearings (Faulty and crank y crank journals j bearings usually make dull noise that becomes more evident when accelerating) Possible cause Oil clearance increased due to worn crank journals or crank bearings Crankshaft out of round Correction Replace crank bearings and crankshaft or regrind crankshaft and install the undersize bearing Replace crank bearings and crankshaft or regrind crankshaft and install the undersize bearing Crank bearing seized Replace crank bearings and crankshaft or regrind crankshaft and install the undersize bearing
Crank bearing seized
Troubleshooting Procedure for Connecting Rods or Connecting Rod Bearing Noise Short out each spark plug in sequence using insulated spark plug wire removers. Locate cylinder with defective bearing by listening for abnormal noise that stops when spark plug is shorted out. Condition Noise from connecting rods or from connecting rod bearings (Faulty connecting rods or y g connecting rod bearings usually make an abnormal noise slightly higher than the crank bearing noise, which becomes more evident when engine is accelerated) g ) Possible cause Bearing or crankshaft pin worn Correction Replace connecting rod bearings and crankshaft or regrind crankshaft pin and install the undersize bearing Replace connecting rod bearings and crankshaft or regrind crankshaft pin and install the undersize bearing Correct or replace Replace connecting rod bearings and crankshaft or regrind crankshaft pin and install the undersize bearing
Crankpin out of round
Connecting rod bent Connecting rod bearing seized
Troubleshooting Procedure for Piston and Cylinder Noise Abnormal noise stops when the spark plug on the cylinder with defective part is shorted out. Condition Piston and cylinder noise (Faulty piston or cylinder usually makes k a combined bi d mechanical h i l thumping g noise which increases when engine is suddenly accelerated but diminishes gradually as the engine warms up) Possible cause Piston clearance increased due to cylinder wear Piston seized Piston ring broken Piston defective Correction Replace piston and cylinder body Replace piston and cylinder body Replace piston and cylinder body Replace pistons and others
Troubleshooting Procedure for Piston Pin Noise Short out each spark plug and listen for change in engine noise. Condition Piston pin noise (Piston makes noise each time it goes up and down) Possible cause Piston pin or piston pin hole worn Correction Replace piston, piston pin and connecting rod assy

Troubleshooting Procedure for Slapping or Hitting etc Noise The slapping sound stops when spark plug on bad cylinder is shorted out. Condition Timing belt noise Possible cause Timing belt tension is incorrect Tensioner bearing defective Timing belt defective Timing pulley defective Timing belt comes in contact with timing cover Valve noise Valve clearance incorrect Valve and valve guide seized Valve spring broken or weakened Valve seat offpositioned Camshaft worn out Crankshaft noise Crankshaft end play excessive (noise occurs when clutch is engaged) Preignition due to use of spark plugs of inadequate heat range Carbon deposits chambers in combustion Correction
6A13
Replace pusher or adjust the tension pulley or replace timing belt Replace Replace Replace Replace timing belt and timing cover Replace adjusting shim Replace valve and valve guide Replace Correct Replace Replace thrust bearing
Engine knocking
Install Spark Plugs of adequate heat range Clean Replace fuel Refer to Section 6E Caution operator of incorrect gear selection Refer to Engine Lacks Power Replace Replace auto tentioner or drive belt
Fuel too low in octane rating Wide Open Throttle enrichment system failure Selection incorrect Others of transmission gear
Engine overheating Water pump defective Drive belt slipping
6A14
Abnormal Combustion
Condition Trouble in fuel system Possible cause Fuel pressure control valve defective Fuel filter clogged Fuel pump clogged Fuel tank or fuel pipe clogged Fuel injector clogged Fuel pump relay defective Power supply cable for fuel pump broken or poor connections Mass Airflow (MAF) Sensor circuit open or defective MAF Sensor defective Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor circuit open or shorted Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor defective Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor circuit open or shorted ECT Sensor defective Throttle Position Sensor adjustment incorrect Throttle Position Sensor defective Throttle Position Sensor connector poor connections Vehicle Speed Sensor cable poor connections or defective Vehicle Speed Sensor loosely fixed Vehicle Speed Sensor in wrong contact or defective Powertrain Control Module cable poor connections or defective Trouble in emission control system Heated Oxygen Sensor circuit open Heated Oxygen Sensor defective Signal vacuum hose loosely fitted or defective EGR Valve circuit open or shorted Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve defective ECT Sensor circuit open or shorted Canister Purge Valve circuit open or shorted Canister Purge Valve defective ECT Sensor defective Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve and hose clogged Evaporator system Trouble in ignition system Replace Replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Replace Reconnect, correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Replace Readjust Replace Reconnect Correct or replace Fix tightly Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Replace Correct or replace Refer to Section 6E Refer to Engine Lacks Power Correction

Condition Trouble in cylinder head parts Possible cause Carbon deposits chamber in combustion Correction Remove carbon Remove carbon
6A15
Carbon deposit on valve, valve seat and valve guide
6A16
Engine Oil Consumption Excessive

Condition Oil leaking Possible cause Oil pan drain plug loose Crankcase fixing bolts loosened Oil pan setting bolts loosened Oil pan gasket broken Front cover retaining bolts loose or gasket broken Head cover fixing bolts loose or gasket broken Oil filter adapter cracked Oil filter attachings bolt loose or rubber gasket broken Crankshaft front or rear oil seal defective Oil pressure unit loose or broken Blowby gas hose broken Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve clogged Engine/Transmission coupling failed Oil leaking into combustion chambers due to poor oor seal in valve system Oil leaking into combustion chambers due to poor seal in cylinder parts t Valve stem oil seal defective Valve stem or valve guide worn Cylinders and excessively Piston ring positioned pistons gaps worn Retighten Retighten Replace gasket Retighten or replace gasket Retighten or replace gasket Replace Retighten or replace oil filter Replace oil seal Retighten or replace Replace hose Clean Replace oil seal Replace Replace valve and valve guide Replace cylinder body assembly and pistons Correct Correct Replace cylinder body assembly and pistons Replace pistons and others Clean piston and replace rings Clean Use oil of recommended S.A.E. viscosity Continuous high speed operation and/or severe usage will normally cause increased oil consumption Correction Retighten or replace gasket
incorrectly
Piston rings set with wrong side up Piston ring sticking Piston ring and ring groove worn Return ports in oil rings clogged Positive Crankcase System malfunctioning Others Ventilation Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve clogged Improper oil viscosity Continuous high speed driving and/or severe usage such as trailer towing
6A17
Fuel Consumption Excessive

Condition Trouble in fuel system Possible cause Mixture too rich or too lean due to trouble in fuel injection system Fuel cut function does not work Trouble in ignition system Others Misfiring or abnormal combustion due to trouble in ignition system Engine idle speed too high Fuel system leakage Clutch slipping Brake drag Selection incorrect of transmission gear Correction Refer to Abnormal Combustion Refer to Abnormal Combustion Refer to Hard Start or Abnormal Combustion Reset Idle Air Control Valve Correct or replace Correct Correct Caution operator of incorrect gear selection Refer to Abnormal Combustion
Excessive Exhaust Gas Recirculation flow due to trouble in Exhaust Gas Recirculation system
Lubrication Problems
Condition Oil pressure too low Possible cause Wrong oil in use Relief valve sticking Oil pump not operating properly Oil pump strainer clogged Oil pump worn Oil pressure gauge defective Crankshaft bearing or connecting rod bearing worn Oil contamination Wrong oil in use Oil filter clogged Cylinder head gasket damage Burned gases leaking Oil not reaching valve system Oil passage in cylinder head or cylinder body clogged Replace Correct or replace Clean or replace strainer Replace Correct or replace Replace Replace with correct engine oil Replace oil filter Replace gasket Replace piston and piston rings or cylinder body assembly Clean or correct Correction Replace with correct engine oil
Engine Oil Pressure Check

1. Check for dirt, gasoline or water in the engine oil. a. Check the viscosity of the oil. b. Check the viscosity of the oil. c. Change the oil if the viscosity is outside the specified standard. d. Refer to the Maintenance and Lubrication section of this manual. 2. Check the engine oil level. The level should fall somewhere between the ADD and the FULL marks on the oil level dipstick. If the oil level does not reach the ADD mark on the oil level dipstick, engine oil must be added. 3. Remove the oil pressure unit.
4. Install an oil pressure gauge. 5. Start the engine and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature (About 80C). 6. Measure the oil pressure. Oil pressure should be: 392550 kPa (56.980.4 psi) at 3000 rpm. 7. Stop the engine. 8. Remove the oil pressure gauge. 9. Install the oil pressure unit. 10. Start the engine and check for leaks.
6A18
Malfunction Indicator Lamp

The instrument panel CHECK ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminates by self diagnostic system when the system checks the starting of engine, or senses malfunctions. Condition CHECK ENGINE MIL does not illuminate at the starting of engine Possible cause Bulb defective MIL circuit open Command signal circuit to operate self diagnostic system shorted Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cable loosely connected, disconnected or defective PCM defective CHECK ENGINE MIL illuminates, and stays on Deterioration of heated sensor internal element oxygen Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Correction
Replace Replace Reconnect properly Correct Correct or replace Replace Reconnect properly Correct Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace PCM Replace PCM
Heated oxygen sensor connector terminal improper contact Heated oxygen sensor lead wire shorted Heated oxygen sensor circuit open Deterioration of engine coolant temperature sensor internal element Engine coolant temperature sensor connector terminal improper contact Engine coolant temperature sensor lead wire shorted Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit open Throttle position sensor open or shorted circuits Deterioration of crankshaft position sensor Crankshaft position sensor circuit open or shorted Vehicle speed sensor circuit open Manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit open or shorted Intake air temperature sensor circuit open or shorted Fuel injector circuit open or shorted PCM driver transistor defective Malfunctioning of PCM RAM (Random Access Memory) or ROM (Read Only Memory)
6A19
Cylinder Head Cover LH

Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove engine cover from the dowels on the common chamber.
060RY022
Legend (1) Ignition Coil Connector (2) Bolt (3) Ignition Coil Assemblies
F06RY001
3. Disconnect positive crankcase ventilation hose. 4. Remove ground cable fixing bolt on cylinder head cover. 5. Ignition coil connector and ignition coil. D Disconnect the three connectors from the ignition coils. D Remove harness bracket bolt on cylinder head cover. D Remove fixing bolts on ignition coils.
6. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector then remove fuel injector harness bracket bolt. 7. Remove eight fixing bolts, then the cylinder head cover.
010RW001
NOTE: Where do you refer the tech in case of bolt removal difficulties.
6A20
Installation
1. Install cylinder head cover. D Clean the sealing surface of cylinder head and cylinder head cover to remove oil and sealing materials completely. D Apply sealant (TB-1207B or equivalent) of bead diameter 2-3 mm at eight place of arched area of camshaft bearing cap on front and rear sides. D The cylinder head cover must be installed with in 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent hardening of sealant. D Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 9 Nm (78 lb in)
060RY022
Legend (1) Ignition Coil Connector (2) Bolt (3) Ignition Coil Assembly CAUTION: Ignition coil assembly #6 is different from ignition coil assembly from #1 to #5. Ignition coil assembly #6 is short type. So, note it when installing ignition coil assembly of #6.
010RW008
2. Install fuel injection harness bracket and tighten bolt to the specified torque. Torque : 9 Nm (78 lb in) 3. Connect ignition coil connector and ignition coil, then tighten bolt to the specified torque. Torque : 4 Nm (35 lb in)
060RY00002
Legend (1) Long Type Ignition Coil Assemblies (# 1 # 5) (2) Short Type Ignition Coil Assembly (# 6) 4. Connect ground cable and tighten bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 9 Nm (78 lb in) 5. Install positive crankcase ventilation hose. 6. Install engine cover mating with the dowels.
6A21
Cylinder Head Cover RH

Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove engine cover from the dowele on the common chamber.
Installation
1. Install cylinder head cover. D Clean the sealing surface of cylinder head and cylinder head cover to remove oil and sealing materials completely. Apply sealant (TB-1207B or equivalent) bead (diameter 2-3 mm) at eight places of arched areas of camshaft bracket on front and rear sides. D The cylinder head cover must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant. D Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 9 Nm (78 lb in)
F06RY001
3. Disconnect ventilation hose from cylinder head cover. 4. Disconnect three ignition coil connectors from ignition coils and remove harness bracket bolts on cylinder head cover then remove ignition coil fixing bolts on ignition coils and remove ignition coils. 5. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector then remove fuel injector harness bracket bolt. 6. Remove eight fixing bolts then the cylinder head cover.
014RW019
2. Tighten fuel injector harness bracket bolts to specified torque then reconnect fuel injector harness connector. Torque : 7.8 Nm (69 lb in) 3. Connect ignition coil connector and tighten ignition coil fixing bolts to specified torque. Torque : 4 Nm (35 lb in) 4. Connect ventilation hose to cylinder head. 5. Install engine cover mating with the dowels.
010RW002
6A22
Common Chamber
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove air cleaner duct assembly. 9. Remove two bolts from common chamber rear side to remove fuel hose bracket. 10. Remove common chamber four bolts and four nuts then remove the common chamber.
013RY00001
025RY002
Legend (1) Positive Crankcase Ventilation Hose Connector (2) Intake Air Temperature Sensor (3) Air Cleaner Duct Assembly (4) Air Flow Sensor 3. Disconnect vacuum booster hose from common chamber. 4. Disconnect connector from manifold absolute pressure sensor, Ion sensing module, throttle position sensor, solenoid valve, electric vacuum sensing valve, and EGR valve. 5. Disconnect vacuum hose on canister VSV and positive crankcase ventilation hose, fuel rail assembly with pressure control valve bracket. 6. Remove ventilation hose from throttle valve and intake duct and remove water hose. 7. Remove the four throttle body fixing bolts. 8. Remove exhaust gas recirculation valve assembly fixing bolt and nut on common chamber and remove EGR valve assembly.
Legend (1) Common Chamber (2) Throttle Valve Assembly (3) Bolt
Installation
1. Install common chamber and tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque. Torque : Bolt : 25 Nm (18 lb ft) Nut : 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 2. Install fuel hose bracket and tighten bolts to specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in) 3. Install exhaust gas recirculation valve assembly and tighten bolt and nut to the specified torque. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 4. Install throttle body and tighten bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 5. Install ventilating hose to throttle valve and intake duct. 6. Connect vacuum hoses on canister VSV and positive crankcase ventilation hose. Tighten bolts for fuel rail assembly with pressure control valve bracket. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft)

7. Connect each connector. 8. Connect vacuum booster hose. 9. Connect the Ion sensing module connectors as shown in the illustration.
6A23
060RY00003
Legend (1) Green Connector (2) Blue Connector 10. Install air cleaner duct assembly.
013RY00001
Legend (1) Positive Crankcase Ventilation Hose Connector (2) Intake Air Temperature Sensor (3) Air Cleaner Duct Assembly (4) Mass Air Flow Sensor
6A24
Exhaust Manifold LH
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect O2 sensor connector. 3. Remove exhaust front pipe three stud nuts from exhaust side and two bolts from rear end of exhaust front pipe.
Installation
1. Install exhaust manifold and tighten exhaust manifold fixing nuts to the specified torque with new nuts. Torque: 57 Nm (42 lb ft) 2. Install exhaust front pipe and tighten three stud nuts and two bolts to the specified torque. Torque : Stud nuts: 67 Nm (49 lb ft) Bolts: 43 Nm (32 lb ft)
150R100011
Legend (1) Exhaust Front Pipe LH (2) O2 Sensor 4. Remove exhaust manifold eight fixing nuts and remove exhaust manifold from the engine. Legend (1) O2 Sensor (2) Exhaust Front Pipe LH 3. Reconnect O2 sensor connector.
150R100011
6A25
Exhaust Manifold RH
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove torsion bar. Refer to removal procedure in Front Suspension section. 3. Remove exhaust front pipe three stud nuts and two bolts then disconnect exhaust front pipe.
Installation
1. Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts to the specified torque. Torque : 57 Nm (42 lb ft) 2. Install exhaust front pipe and tighten three stud nuts and two bolts to the specified torque. Torque: Stud nuts: 67 Nm (49 lb ft) Bolts: 43 Nm (32 lb ft) 3. Install the torsion bar and readjust the vehicle height. Refer to installation and vehicle height adjustment procedure for front suspension.
150R100013
Legend (1) Exhaust Front Pipe RH (2) O2 Sensor 4. Remove exhaust manifold eight fixing nuts then the exhaust manifold.
6A26
Crankshaft Pulley
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove radiator upper fan shroud from radiator. 4. Move serpentine belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then remove serpentine belt.
850RW001 013RY00001
Legend (1) Positive Crankcase Ventilation Hose Connector (2) Intake Air Temperature Sensor (3) Air Cleaner Duct Assembly (4) Air Flow Sensor
Legend (1) Crankshaft Pulley (2) Cooling Fan Pulley (3) Tensioner (4) Generator (5) Air Conditioner Compressor (6) Power Steering Oil Pump (7) Idle Pulley (8) Driver Belt 5. Remove cooling fan assembly four fixing nuts, then the cooling fan assembly. 6. Remove crankshaft pulley assembly using J-8614-01 crankshaft holder, hold crankshaft pulley then remove center bolt and pulley.
Installation
1. Install crankshaft pulley using J-8614-01 crankshaft holder, hold the crankshaft pulley and tighten center bolt to the specified torque. Torque : 167 Nm (123 lb ft) 2. Install cooling fan assembly and tighten bolts/nuts to the specified torque. Torque : 22 Nm (16 lb ft) for fan pulley and fan bracket. Torque : 7.5 Nm (66.4 lb in) for fan and clutch assembly. 3. Move serpentine belt tensioner to loose side using wrench, then install serpentine belt to normal position. 4. Install radiator upper fan shroud. 5. Install air cleaner assembly.
6A27
Timing Belt
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove radiator upper fan shroud from radiator. 4. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then remove drive belt. 11. Remove right side timing belt cover then left side timing belt cover. 12. Remove lower timing belt cover 13. Remove pusher. CAUTION: The pusher prevents air from entering the oil chamber. Its rod must always be facing upward.
850RW001 014RW011
Legend (1) Crankshaft Pulley (2) Cooling Fan Pulley (3) Tensioner (4) Generator (5) Air Conditioner Compressor (6) Power Steering Oil Pump (7) Idle Pulley (8) Drive Belt 5. Remove cooling fan assembly four nuts, then the cooling fan assembly. 6. Remove cooling fan drive pulley assembly. 7. Remove idle pulley assembly. 8. Remove serpentine belt tensioner assembly. 9. Remove power steering pump assembly. 10. Remove crankshaft pulley assembly using J-8614-01 crankshaft holder, hold crankshaft pulley remove center bolt, then the pulley.
Legend (1) Up Side (2) Down Side (3) Direction For Installation (4) Locking Pin 14. Remove timing belt. CAUTION: 1. Do not bend or twist the belt, otherwise its core could be damaged. The belt should not be bent at a radius less than 30 mm. 2. Do not allow oil or other chemical substances to come in contact with the belt. They will shorten the life. 3. Do not attempt to pry or stretch the belt with a screw driver or any other tool during installation. 4. Store timing belt in a cool and dark place. Never expose the belt direct sunlight or heat.
6A28

1. Install timing belt. 1. Align groove of crankshaft timing pulley (2) with mark on oil pump (1). Align the mark on the crankshaft timing pulley (3) with alignment mark (white dotted line) on the timing belt (4). Secure the belt with a double clip or equivalent clip. NOTE: When timing marks are aligned, No.2 piston will be on Top Dead Center.
Installation
NOTE: For correct belt installation, the letter on the belt must be able to be read as viewed from the front of the vehicle.
014RW005
Legend (1) Crankshaft Timing Pulley (2) RH Bank Camshaft Drive Gear Pulley (3) Water Pump Pulley (4) Idle Pulley (5) LH Bank Camshaft Drive Gear Pulley (6) Tension Pulley (7) Alignment Mark on Oil Pump. (8) Alignment Mark on Timing Belt
014RW003
Legend (1) Alignment Mark on Oil Pump (2) Groove on Crankshaft Timing Pulley (3) Alignment Mark on Crankshaft Timing Pulley (4) Alignment Mark on Timing Belt
014RW006
Legend (1) Timing Belt (2) Engine Rotation Direction (3) Cylinder Head Side

2. Align the alignment mark on the RH bank camshaft drive pulley (2) to the alignment mark of the cylinder head cover RH (3). 3. Align the alignment mark (white line) on the timing belt (1) with alignment mark on the RH bank camshaft drive pulley (2) (on the left side as viewed from the front of the vehicle) and put the timing belt on the camshaft drive pulley. Secure the belt with a double clip or equivalent clip.
6A29
014RW00005
Legend (1) Alignment Mark on Timing Belt (White line). (2) Alignment Mark on Camshaft Drive Pulley. (3) Alignemnt Mark on Cylinder Head Cover LH. 6. Install crankshaft pulley temporarily and tighten center bolt by hand (do not use a wrench). Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to give some belt slack between the crankshaft timing pulley and the RH bank camshaft drive pulley. 2. Install pusher and tighten bolt to the specified torque. 1. Install the pusher while pushing the tension pulley to the belt. 2. Pull out pin from the pusher. NOTE: When reusing the pusher, press the pusher with approximately 100Kg to retract the rod, and insert a pin (1.4 mm piano wire).
014RW00004
Legend (1) Alignment Mark on Timing Belt (White line). (2) Alignment Mark on Camshaft Drive Pulley. (3) Alignemnt Mark on Cylinder Head Cover RH. 4. Align the alignment mark on the LH bank camshaft drive pulley (2) to the alignment mark of the cylinder head cover LH (3). 5. Align the alignment mark (white line) on the timing belt (1) with the alignment mark on the LH bank camshaft drive pulley (2). When aligning the timing marks, use a wrench to turn the camshaft drive pulley, then set the timing mark between timing belt and camshaft drive pulley and put the timing belt on the camshaft drive pulley. Secure the belt with a double clip or equivalent clip. NOTE: It is recommended for easy installation that the belt be secured with a double clip or equivalent clips after it is installed to each pulley.
014RW011
6A30

Legend (1) Timing Belt Cover (2) Rubber Bushing (3) Sealing Rubber (4) Cylinder Body 4. Install crankshaft pulley using J-8614-01, hold the crankshaft pulley and tighten center bolt to the specified torque. Torque : 167 Nm (123 lb ft) 5. Install fan pulley bracket and tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 22 Nm (16 lb ft) 6. Install power steering pump assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Torque : M8 bolt : 22 Nm (16 lb ft) M10 bolt : 46 Nm (34 lb ft) 7. Install cooling fan assembly and tighten bolts/nuts to the specified torque. Torque : 22 Nm (16 lb ft) for fan pulley and fan bracket. Torque : 7.5 Nm (66.4 lb in) for fan and clutch assembly. 8. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench, then install drive belt to normal position.
Legend (1) Up Side (2) Down Side (3) Direction for Installation (4) Locking Pin 3. Remove double clips or equivalent clips from timing belt pulleys. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise by two turns. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 3. Install timing belt cover. Remove crankshaft pulley that was installed in step 1 item 5. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 19 Nm (14 lb ft)
020RW004
Legend (1) Timing Belt Cover RH (2) Timing Belt Cover LH (3) Timing Belt Cover Lower
850RW001
Legend (1) Crankshaft Pulley (2) Cooling Fan Pulley (3) Tensioner (4) Generator (5) Air Conditioner Compressor (6) Power Steering Oil Pump (7) Idle Pulley (8) Drive Belt 9. Install radiator upper fan shroud. 10. Install air cleaner assembly.
020RW003
6A31
Camshaft
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove crankshaft pulley. D Refer to removal procedure for Crankshaft Pulley in this manual. 3. Remove timing belt. D Refer to removal procedure for Timing Belt in this manual. 4. Remove cylinder head cover LH. D Refer to removal procedure for Cylinder Head Cover LH in this manual. 5. Remove cylinder head cover RH. D Refer to removal procedure for Cylinder Head Cover RH in this manual. 6. Remove twenty fixing bolts from inlet and exhaust camshaft bearing cap on one side bank, then camshaft bearing cap. 9. Remove three fixing bolts from camshaft drive gear retainer, then camshaft drive gear assembly.
014RW026
Legend (1) Right Bank (2) Left Bank (3) Timing Mark on Retainer
014RW027
7. Remove camshaft assembly. 8. Remove fixing bolt for camshaft drive gear pulley.
6A32
Installation
1. Install camshaft drive gear assembly and tighten three bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in) 2. Tighten bolt for camshaft drive gear assembly pulley to the specified torque. Torque : 98 Nm (72 lb ft) 3. Tighten sub gear setting bolt. 1. Use J-42686 to turn sub gear to right direction until it aligns with the M5 bolt hole between camshaft driven gear and sub gear. 2. Tighten the M5 bolt to a suitable torque to prevent the sub gear from moving.
014RW020
Legend (1) Intake Camshaft Timing Gear for Right Bank (2) Intake Camshaft Timing Gear for Left Bank (3) Exhaust Camshaft Timing Gear (4) Discrimination Mark (LI: Left bank intake, RI: Right bank intake) (LE: Left bank exhaust, RE: Right bank exhaust)
014RW041
4. Install camshaft assembly and camshaft bearing caps, tighten twenty bolts on one side bank to the specified torque. 1. Apply engine oil to camshaft journal and bearing surface of camshaft bearing caps. 2. Align timing mark on intake camshaft (one dot for right bank, two dot for left bank) and exhaust camshaft (one dots for right bank, two dots for left bank) to timing mark on camshaft drive gear (one dot).
014RW023
Legend (1) Right Bank Camshaft Drive Gear (2) Left Bank Camshaft Drive Gear (3) Timing Mark on Drive Gear (4) Dowel Pin
6A33
014RW024
Legend (1) Right Bank (2) Left Bank
(3) Alignment Mark on Camshaft Drive Gear (4) Alignment Mark on Camshaft (5) Alignment Mark on Retainer
3. Tighten twenty bolts on numerical order an one side bank as shown in the illustration. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in)
5. Install cylinder head cover RH. D Refer to installation procedure for CYLINDER HEAD COVER RH in this manual. 6. Install cylinder head cover LH. D Refer to installation procedure for CYLINDER HEAD COVER LH in this manual. 7. Install timing belt. D Refer to installation procedure for TIMING BELT in this manual. 8. Install crankshaft pulley. D Refer to installation procedure for CRANKSHAFT PULLEY in this manual.
014RW031
6A34
Cylinder Head
Removal
1. Remove engine hood. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Drain radiator coolant. 4. Drain engine oil. 5. Remove crankshaft pulley. D Refer to removal procedure for Crankshaft Pulley in this manual. 6. Remove timing belt. D Refer to removal procedure for Timing Belt in this manual. 7. Remove cylinder head cover LH. D Refer to removal procedure for Cylinder Head Cover LH in this manual. 8. Remove cylinder head cover RH. D Refer to removal procedure for Cylinder Head Cover RH in this manual. 9. Remove common chamber. D Refer to removal procedure for Common Chamber in this manual. 10. Remove cylinder head assembly. 1. Loosen head bolts in reverse of tightening sequence. 2. Remove cylinder head assembly.
011RW005
Installation
1. Install cylinder head assembly to cylinder block. A. Put cylinder head gasket on the cylinder block. NOTE: There is discrimination mark R for right bank and L for left bank on the cylinder head gasket as shown in the illustration. Do not reuse cylinder head gasket.
B. Align dowel pin hole to dowel pin on the cylinder block. C. Position cylinder head on the cylinder bolock. D. Tighten two bolts temporarily by hand to prevent the cylinder head assembly from moving. E. Using J-24239-01 cylinder head bolt wrench, tighten bolts in numerical order as shown in the illustration to the specified torque.
014RW028
Legend (1) Cylinder Head (2) Cylinder Head Bolt (3) Camshaft

NOTE: Do not reuse cylinder head bolts. Do not apply any lubricant to the cylinder head bolts. Torque : Temporary : 29 Nm (22 lb ft) Final : 64 Nm (47 lb ft)
6A35
014RW029
2. Install common chamber. D Refer to installation procedure for Common Chamber in this manual. 3. Install cylinder head cover RH. D Refer to installation procedure for Cylinder Head Cover RH in this manual. 4. Install cylinder head cover LH. D Refer to installation procedure for Cylinder Head Cover LH in this manual. 5. Install timing belt. D Refer to installation procedure for Timing Belt in this manual. 6. Install crankshaft pulley. D Refer to installation procedure for Crankshaft Pulley in this manual.
6A36
Valve Stem Oil Controller , Valve Spring and Valve Guide

Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Drain engine oil. D Drain engine coolant. 3. Remove cylinder head assembly. D Refer to removal procedure for Cylinder Head in this manual. 4. Remove camshaft. D Refer to removal procedure for Camshaft in this manual. 5. Remove tappets with shim. NOTE: Do not damage shim surface. 6. Remove valve springs using J-8062 valve spring compressor and J-42898 valve spring compressor adapter then remove upper valve spring seat and lower seat.
Installation
1. Install valve guide using J-42899 valve guide installer. 2. Install oil controller using J-38537 oil controller installer. 3. Install lower valve spring seat, valve spring and upper valve spring seat then put split collars on the upper spring seat, using J-8062 valve spring compressor and J-42898 valve spring compressor adapter to install the split collars.
014RW042
014RW042
7. Remove oil controller using J-37281 oil controller remover, remove each valve stem oil controller. 8. Remove valve guide using J-37985 valve guide replacer.
4. Install tappet with shim. 5. Install camshaft assembly. D Refer to installation procedure for Camshaft in this manual. 6. Install cylinder head assembly. D Refer to installation procedure for Cylinder Head in this manual. 7. Fill engine oil until full level. 8. Fill engine coolant.
6A37
Piston, Piston Ring and Connecting Rod

Removal
F06RW011
Legend (1) Cylinder Head (2) Crankcase with Oil Pan (3) Oil Pipe
(4) Oil Strainer (5) Oil Gallery (6) Piston with Connecting Rod Assembly
1. Remove cylinder head assembly. D Refer to removal procedure for Cylinder Head in this manual.
2. Remove crankcase with oil pan. D Refer to removal procedure for Oil Pan and Crankcase in this manual.
6A38
3. Remove oil strainer fixing bolts, remove oil strainer assembly with O-ring.
015RW003
050RW002
Legend (1) Oil Pump (2) Oil Strainer (3) Oil Gallery (4) From Oil Filter (5) To Oil Filter 4. Remove three fixing bolts, oil pipe with O-ring. 5. Remove eight fixing bolts, oil gallery. 6. Remove piston with connecting rod assembly. (before removing the bearing cap, remove carbon on the top of cylinder bore and push piston with connecting rod out from the top of cylinder bore.)
Legend (1) Piston Front Mark (2) Piston Grade (3) Connecting Rod Front Mark 2. Install oil gallery and tighten the bolts in two steps, in the order shown in illustration. Torque : 1st step : 29 Nm (22 lb ft) 2nd step : 5565
Installation
1. Install piston with connecting rod assembly. D Apply engine oil to cylinder bore, connecting rod bearing and crank pin. When installing the piston, its front mark must face the engine front side. D The bearing cap number must be the same as connecting rod number. D Apply engine oil to the thread and seating surface of each nut. D Tighten nuts to the specified torque. Torque : 54 Nm (40 lb ft) D After tightening the nuts, make sure that the crankshaft rotates smoothly. NOTE: Do not apply engine oil to the bearing back faces and connecting rod bearing fitting surfaces. 3. Install oil pipe with O-ring. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in) 4. Install oil strainer assembly with O-ring. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 5. Install crankcase with oil pan. D Refer to installation procedure for Oil Pan and Crankcase in this manual. 6. Install cylinder head assembly. D Refer to installation procedure for Cylinder Head in this manual.
051RS009
6A39
Crankshaft and Main Bearings

Removal
F06RY002
Legend (1) Engine Assembly (2) Crankshaft Pulley (3) Timing Belt Cover (4) Timing Belt (5) Crankcase with Oil Pan (6) Oil Pipe (7) Oil Strainer
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Oil Pump Assembly Cylinder Body Side Bolt Oil Gallery Flywheel Rear Oil Seal Retainer Connecting Rod Cap Crankshaft Main Bearing Cap Crankshaft and Main Bearing
1. Remove engine assembly. D Refer to removal procedure for Engine Assembly in this manual. 2. Remove timing belt. D Refer to removal procedure for Timing Belt in this manual.
3. Remove oil pan and crankcase. D Refer to removal procedure for Oil Pan and Crankcase in this manual. 4. Remove oil pipe with O-ring. 5. Remove oil strainer assembly with O-ring.
6A40
6. Remove oil pump assembly. D Refer to removal procedure for Oil Pump in this manual. 7. Remove cylinder body side bolts. 8. Remove oil gallery. 9. Remove flywheel. 10. Remove rear oil seal retainer. D Refer to removal procedure for Rear Oil Seal in this manual. 11. Remove connecting rod caps. 12. Remove crankshaft main bearing caps. 13. Remove crankshaft and main bearings.
Installation
1. Install crankshaft and main bearings. D Install main bearing in the cylinder block and main bearing cap respectively. Apply new engine oil to upper and lower main bearings. NOTE: D D D D D D Do not apply engine oil to the bearing back faces. Make sure that main bearings are in correct position. Install crankshaft with care. Apply engine oil to the thrust washer. Install thrust washer on No.3 journal. Oil grooves in thrust washer must face the crankshaft.
015RS013
2. Install crankshaft main bearing caps. D Apply engine oil to the thread and seating surface of each bearing cap fixing bolt. NOTE: D Do not apply engine oil to the bearing back faces. D Install bearing caps, starting with cylinder block front side. D Tighten main bearing fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 39 Nm (29 lb ft) D After tightening the bolts, make sure that the crankshaft rotates smoothly. 3. Install connecting rod caps. D The cap number must be same as connecting rod number. D Apply engine oil to the thread and seating surface of each nut. D Tighten nuts to the specified torque. Torque : 54 Nm (40 lb ft) D After tightening the nuts, make sure that the crankshaft rotates smoothly. 4. Install rear oil seal retainer. D Remove oil on cylinder block and retainer fitting surface. D Apply sealant (TB1207B or equivalent) to retainer fitting surface as shown in illustration.
015RS012
D The oil seal retainer must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant.
6A41
015RW002
015RS018
Legend (1) Around Bolt Holes (2) Around Dowel Pin D Apply engine oil to oil seal lip and align a dowel pin hole in the cylinder block with that in the retainer. D Tighten retainer fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 18 Nm (13 lb ft)
6. Install oil gallery. D Clean contact surface of oil gallery and main bearing cap. Apply engine oil to oil gallery fixing bolts and tighten the bolts in two steps, in the order shown. Torque : 1st step : 29 Nm (22 lb ft) 2nd step : 5565 7. Install cylinder body side bolts and tighten bolts in order to the specified torque. Torque : 39 Nm (29 lb ft) NOTE: Do not apply the oil to the bolts.
015RW001
5. Install flywheel. D Clean tapped holes in the crankshaft. D Remove oil on crankshaft and flywheel fitting surface. NOTE: D Do not reuse the bolts. D Do not apply oil or thread lock to the bolts. D Tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 54 Nm (40 lb ft)
012RS007
8. Install oil pump assembly. D Remove oil on cylinder block and oil pump mounting surface. D Apply sealant (TB1207B or equivalent) to the oil pump mounting surface. D The oil pump assembly must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant.
6A42

D Properly apply a 4.5 mm (0.7 in) wide bead of sealant (TB1207C or equivalent) to the crankcase mounting surface. The bead must be continuous. D The crankcase must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant. D Tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in)
D Apply engine oil to oil seal lip. D Install oil pump in the cylinder block and tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
051RW002
Legend (1) Around Bolt Holes (2) Around Dowel Pin

013RW010
051RW001
013RW004
9. Install oil strainer with O-ring, tighten to the specified torque. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 10. Install oil pipe with O-ring, tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 11. Install crankcase. D Remove oil on crankcase mounting surface and dry the surface.
12. Install oil pan D Remove oil on oil pan mounting surface and dry the surface. D Properly apply a 4.5 mm (0.7 in) wide bead of sealant (TB1207C or equivalent) to the oil pan mounting surface. The bead must be continuous. D The oil pan must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant.

D Tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
6A43
013RW003
013RW002
13. Install timing belt. D Refer to installation procedure for Timing Belt in this manual. 14. Install engine assembly. D Refer to installation procedure for Engine Assembly in this manual.
6A44
Rear Oil Seal

Removal
1. Remove transmission assembly. D See Transmission section in this manual. 2. Remove flywheel. 3. Remove rear oil seal using a seal remover. NOTE: Take care not to damage the crankshaft or oil seal retainer when removing oil seal.
Installation
1. Apply engine oil to oil seal lip and install oil seal using J-39201.
015RS018
3. Install transmission. D See Transmission section in this manual. CAUTION: When assembling the engine and transmission, confirm that dowels have been mounted in the specified positions at the engine side. NOTE: Take care that dowel positions are different between the manual transmission and the automatic transmission. Otherwise, the transmission may be damaged.
015RS017
2. Install flywheel. D Clean tapped holes in the crankshaft. D Remove oil on the crankshaft and flywheel mounting surface. D Tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. NOTE: Do not reuse the bolts and do not apply oil or thread lock to the bolts. Torque : 54 Nm (40 lb ft)
012RS009
6A45
Engine Assembly
Removal
035RY00006
1. Disconnect battery ground and positive cable. 2. Remove battery. 3. Make alignment mark on the engine hood and hinges before removal in order to return the hood to original position exactly. 4. Remove engine hood. 5. Drain radiator coolant. 6. Disconnect Ion sensing module harness connectors, and manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connectors from sensor on common chamber. 7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connectors from throttle body. 8. Disconnect air duct with air cleaner cover. 9. Remove air cleaner assembly. 10. Disconnect canister vacuum hose. 11. Disconnect vacuum booster hose. 12. Disconnect three engine harness connectors. 13. Disconnect harness connector to transmission (left front side of engine compartment), disconnect shift on the fly harness connector from front side of front axle and remove transmission harness bracket from engine left side. 14. Disconnect ground cable between engine and frame. 15. Disconnect bonding cable connector on the back of right dash panel. 16. Disconnect bonding cable terminal on the left bank. 17. Disconnect starter harness connector from starter. 18. Disconnect generator harness connector from generator. 19. Disconnect coolant reserve tank hose from radiator. 20. Remove radiator upper and lower hoses. 21. Remove upper fan shroud. 22. Remove cooling fan assembly four fixing nuts, then the cooling fan assembly.
23. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then remove drive belt. 24. Remove power steering pump fixing bolts, then power steering pump. Place the power steering pump along with piping on the body side. 25. Remove air conditioning compressor fixing bolts from bracket and place the compressor along with piping on the body side. 26. Remove four O2 sensor harness connectors (two each bank) from exhaust front pipe. 27. Remove three exhaust pipe fixing nuts from each bank. 28. Remove two exhaust pipe fixing nuts from each exhaust pipe, then move exhaust pipe to rear side of vehicle. 29. Remove flywheel dust covers. 30. Disconnect two heater hoses from engine. 31. Disconnect fuel hoses from right side of transmission. CAUTION: Plug fuel pipes on engine side and fuel hoses from fuel tank. 32. Remove transmission assembly. Refer to Transmission section in this manual. 33. Support the engine by engine hoist. 34. Remove two left side engine mount fixing bolts from engine mount on chassis side. 35. Remove two right side engine mount fixing bolts from engine mount on chassis side. 36. Remove engine assembly.
6A46
Installation
CAUTION: When assembling the engine and transmission, confirm that dowels have been mounted in the specified positions at the engine side. NOTE: Take care that dowel positions are different between the manual transmission and the automatic transmission. If the engine is assembled in the condition that the dowels have not been mounted in the specified positions, the transmission may be damaged.
035RW005
Legend (1) Exhaust Front Pipe RH (2) O2 Sensor
012RS009
1. Install engine assembly. Tighten engine mount fixing bolts to frame to the specified torque. Torque: 41 Nm (30 lb ft) 2. Reconnect fuel hose to fuel pipe on engine. 3. Install transmission assembly. Refer to Transmission section in this manual. 4. Reconnect two heater hoses to engine. 5. Install flywheel dust covers. 6. Install exhaust pipe and temporally tighten two (each bank) rear exhaust flange nuts then tighten three stud nuts (each bank) between exhaust manifold and exhaust pipe, finally tighten rear side nuts to the specified torque. Torque: Nuts: 43 Nm (32 lb ft) Stud nuts: 67 Nm (49 lb ft)
035RW016
Legend (1) O2 Sensor (2) Exhaust Front Pipe LH 7. Reconnect O2 sensor connector. 8. Install cooling fan assembly and tighten bolts/nuts to the specified torque. Torque : 22 Nm (16 lb ft) for fan pulley and fan bracket. Torque : 7.5 Nm (66.4 lb in) for fan and clutch assembly.

9. Install air conditioner compressor to engine and tighten to the specified torque. 6VE1 Torque : M8 bolts : 22 Nm (16 lb ft) M10 bolts : 43 Nm (32 lb ft) 10. Install power steering pump, tighten fixing bolt to the specified torque. Torque : M8 bolts : 22Nm (16 lb ft) M10 bolts : 46 Nm (34 lb ft) 11. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench, then install drive belt to normal position. 23. Reconnect canister vacuum hose. 24. Install air cleaner assembly. 25. Reconnect air duct. 26. Reconnect throttle position sensor connector.
6A47
harness
025RY001
Legend (1) Throttle Position Sensor Connector (2) Throttle Valve Assembly 27. Reconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connectors. 28. Reconnect ion sensing module connectors as shown in the illustration.
850RW001
Legend (1) Crankshaft Pulley (2) Cooling Fan Pulley (3) Tensioner (4) Generator (5) Air Conditioner Compressor (6) Power Steering Oil Pump (7) Idle Pulley (8) Drive Belt 12. Install upper fan shroud. 13. Reconnect radiator upper and lower hoses. 14. Reconnect coolant reserve tank hose to radiator. 15. Reconnect generator harness connector. 16. Reconnect starter harness connector. 17. Reconnect bonding cable terminal on left bank 18. Reconnect bonding cable terminal on the back of right dash panel. 19. Reconnect ground cable between engine and chassis. 20. Reconnect harness connector to transmission and install transmission harness bracket on engine left side. 21. Reconnect three engine harness connectors. 22. Reconnect vacuum booster hose.
060RY00003
Legend (1) Green Connector (2) Blue Connector 29. Install engine hood to the original position. D Refer to installation procedure for Body section in this manual.
6A48
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head and Associated Parts
011RW008
Legend (1) Spark Plug (2) Cylinder Head Bolt (3) Camshaft Drive Gear Pulley Fixing Bolt (4) Camshaft Drive Gear Pulley (5) Camshaft Bearing Cap Fixing Bolt (6) Camshaft Bearing Cap (7) Camshaft Exhaust
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
Camshaft Intake Retainer Fixing Bolt Retainer Assembly Tappet with Shim Split Collar Valve Spring and Spring Upper Seat Valve
Disassembly
NOTE: D During disassembly, be sure that the valve train components are kept together and identified so that they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
D Before removing the cylinder head from the engine and before disassembling the valve mechanism, perform a compression test and note the results. 1. Remove camshaft drive gear pulley fixing bolt (3), then pulley (4).

2. Remove camshaft bearing cap fixing bolt (5), camshaft bearing cap (6), then camshaft exhaust (7), and intake side (8). 3. Remove tappet with shim (11). 4. Use the J8062 valve spring compressor and J42898 valve spring compressor adapter to remove the split collar (12), valve spring with upper seat (13) and valve (14).
6A49
2. Inspect cylinder head for cracks, especially between valve seats and in the exhaust ports. 3. Inspect cylinder head deck for corrosion, sand particles in head and porosity. CAUTION: D Do not attempt to weld the cylinder head. Replace it. D Do not reuse cylinder head bolts. 4. Inspect cylinder head deck, common chamber and exhaust manifold mating surfaces for flatness. These surfaces may be reconditioned by milling. If the surfaces are out of flat with round by more than specification, the surface should be ground to within specifications. Replace the head if it requires machining beyound the repairable limit. Head surface and manifold surface Standard: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less Warpage limit: 0.2 mm (0.0079 in) Maximum Repairable limit: 0.2 mm (0.0079 in) Head height Standard height : 133.2 mm (5.2441 in) Warpage limit : 0.2 mm (0.0079 in) Maximum Repairable limit : 133.0 mm (5.2362 in)
014RW042
5. Remove spark plug (1). CAUTION: Do not remove the spark plugs when the head and plugs are hot. Clean dirt and debris from spark plug recess areas before removal.
Clean
Cylinder head
Carefully remove all varnish, soot and carbon from the bare metal. Do not use surface conditioning disc on any gasket sealing surface.

1. Inspect cylinder head gasket and mating surfaces for leaks, corrosion and blowby. If the gasket has failed, determine the cause. Insufficient torque on head bolts Improper installation Loose or warped cylinder head Missing dowel pins Warped case surface
011RW019
5. Water jacket sealing plugs seating surfaces.
6A50
Reassembly
1. Install Spark plug and tighten all the spark plugs to specified torque. Torque: 18 Nm (13 lb ft) 2. Tighten sub gear setting bolt. 1. Use J42686 gear spring lever to turn sub gear to right direction until the M5 bolt aligns with the hole between camshaft driven gear and sub gear. 2. Tighten the M5 bolt to a suitable torque to prevent the sub gear from moving.
014RW020
Legend (1) Intake Camshaft Timing Gear for Right Bank (2) Intake Camshaft Timing Gear for Left Bank (3) Exhaust Camshaft Timing Gear (4) Discrimination Mark LI: Left Bank Intake RI: Right Bank Intake LE: Left Bank Exhaust RE: Right Bank Exhaust
014RW025
3. Install camshaft drive gear assembly and tighten three bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 10 Nm (87 lb in) 4. Install camshaft assembly and camshaft bearing cap, tighten twenty bolts on one side bank to the specified torque. 1. Apply engine oil to camshaft journal and bearing surface of camshaft bearing cap. 2. Align timing mark on intake camshaft (one dot for right bank, two dots for left bank) and exhaust camshaft (one dot for right bank, two dots for left bank) to timing mark on camshaft drive gear (one dot).
014RW023
6A51
014RW024
3. Tighten twenty bolts in numerical order on each bank as shown in the illustration. Torque: 10 Nm (87 lb in)
014RW031
5. Tighten bolt for camshaft drive gear assembly pulley to the specified torque. Torque: 98 Nm (72 lb ft)
6A52
Valve Spring, Oil Controller, Valve, Valve Guide

Valve Spring, Oil Controller, Valve, Valve Guide and Associated Parts
014RW039
Legend (1) Camshaft Bearing Cap Fixing Bolts (2) Camshaft Assembly Inlet (3) Camshaft Assembly Exhaust (4) Shim (5) Tappet (6) Split Collar
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Spring Upper Seat Valve Spring Oil Controller Spring Lower Seat Valve Guide Valve
Disassembly
1. Remove camshaft bearing cap fixing bolts (1). 2. Remove camshaft assembly (intake).
3. Remove camshaft assembly (Exhaust side). 4. Remove shim (4) and tappet (5).

5. Use the J8062 valve spring compressor and J42898 valve spring compressor adapter to remove split collar.
6A53
2. Measure the valve spring squareness with a steel square and replace the valve springs if the measured value exceeds the specified limit. Limit : 2 mm (0.079 in)
014RW042
6. Remove valve spring. 7. Remove valve. 8. Remove oil controller and spring lower seat. 9. Remove the valve guide using the J42899 valve guide replacer.
014RS005

Valve Spring
CAUTION: Visually inspect the valve springs and replace them if damage or abnormal wear is evident. 1. Measure the free height of the springs. The springs must be replaced if the free height is below the specified limit. Standard : 44.6 mm (1.756 in) Limit : 43.6 mm (1.717 in)
3. Using a spring tester to compress the springs to the installed height, measure the compressed spring tension, and replace the springs if the measured tension is below the specified limit. At installed height: 35.0 mm (1.38 in) Standard: 196 N (44 lb) Limit: Less than 181 N (41 lb)
014RS006
Valve Guide
CAUTION: Take care not to damage the valve seat contact surface, when removing carbon adhering to the valve head. Carefully inspect the valve stem for scratchs or abnormal wear. If these conditions are present, the valve and the valve guide must be replaced as a set.
014RS004
6A54
1. Measure the valve stem diameter with a micrometer. If the valve stem diameter is less than the specified limit, the valve and the valve guide must be replaced as a set. Diameter of Valve Stem Intake Standard : 5.977 mm5.959 mm (0.2353 in0.2346 in) Limit : 5.90 mm (0.2323 in) Exhaust Standard : 5.952 mm5.970 mm (0.2343 in0.2350 in) Limit : 5.90 mm (0.2323 in)
014RS008
2. Apply engine oil to the outside of the valve guide. Using valve guide replacer J42899, drive in a new valve guide from the camshaft side, and check the valve guide height. Valve guide upper end height: 13.0 mm (0.5118 in) (Measured from the cylinder head upper face)
014RS007
2. Measure the inside diameter of the valve guide with a micrometer. Subtract the measured outer diameter of the valve stem from the measured inner diameter of the valve guide. If the value exceeds the specified limit, the valve and the valve guide must be replaced as a set. Inside Diameter of the Vale Guide Inlet clearance Standard : 0.023 mm0.056 mm (0.0009 in0.0002 in) Limit : 0.20 mm (0.00787 in) Exhaust clearance Standard : 0.030 mm0.063 mm (0.0012 in0.0025 in) Limit : 0.20 mm (0.00787 in)
014RW046
3. Check the clearance. If the clearance is less than the specified value, ream the inside diameter of valve guide. Using a sharp 6 mm reamer, ream the valve guide to obtain the specified clearance.
Valve Guide Replacement

1. Using Valve guide replacer: J42899, drive out the valve guide from the combustion chamber side.
6A55
Valve Seat
1. Measure the protrusion of the valve stem when a new valve is installed in the cylinder head. If the protrusion of the valve stem exceeds the limit, replace the valve seat insert or the cylinder head assembly. Protrusion of valve stem Intake Standard: 39.32 mm (1.5480 in) Limit: 39.47 mm (1.5539 in) Exhaust Standard: 39.3 mm (1.5472 in) Limit: 39.45 mm (1.5531 in)
Contact Surface Angle on Valve Seat on Valve

1. Measure contact surface angle on valve seat. 2. If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace valve, valve guide and valve seat as a set. Valve contact surface angle: 45
014RS012
Valve Seat Insert Correction

1. Remove the carbon from the valve seat insert surface. 2. Use a valve cutter to minimize scratches and other rough areas. This will bring the contact width back to the standard value. Remove only the scratches and rough areas. Do not cut away too much. Take care not to cut away unblemished areas of the valve seat surface. Valve seat angle degree: 90
014RW047
2. Measure the valve seat contact width. Make the necessary corrections if the seat contact surface is damaged or rough or if the contact width wear exceeds the limit. Valve seat contact width Standard: 1.1 mm (0.0433 in) Limit: 1.7 mm (0.0669 in)
014RW059
014RS011
6A56

4. Carefully clean the valve seat pressfit section on the cylinder head side. 5. Heat the pressfit section with steam or some other means to cause expansion. Cool the valve seat with dry ice or some other means. 6. Insert the pressfit section into the valve seat horizontally. Standard fitting interference: 0.14 mm0.09 mm (0.0055 in0.0035 in) 7. After insertion, use a seat grinder to grind finish the seating face. Carefully note the seating angle, the contact width, and the depression. 8. Lap the valve and the seat.
3. Apply abrasive compound to the valve seat insert surface. 4. Insert the valve into the valve guide. 5. Turn the valve while lapping it to fit the valve seat insert. 6. Check that the valve contact width is correct. 7. Check that the valve seat insert surface is in contact with the entire circumference of the valve.
Reassembly
1. Install valve guide (1) to cylinder head. Apply engine oil to the outside of the valve guide. Using valve guide replacer J42899, drive in a new valve guide from the camshaft side. 2. Install oil controller (3) and spring lower seat (2). Using oil controller replacer J37281, drive in a new oil controller.
014RS014
Valve Seat Insert Replacement

1. Arc weld the rod at several points. Be careful not to damage the aluminum section. 2. Allow the rod to cool for a few minutes. This will cause the valve seat to shrink. 3. Strike the rod and pull it out.
014RW058
014RS015

3. Install valve to valve guide. Before installing valve guide apply engine oil to the outside of the valve stem. 4. Install valve spring to cylinder head. Attach the valve spring to the lower spring seat. The painted area of the valve spring should be facing downward.
6A57
Valve Clearance Adjustments

NOTE: To adjust valve clearance, apply engine oil to the cam as well as to the adjusting shim (2) with the cylinder head built on the cylinder block, give a few turns to the camshaft by means of timing pulley tightening bolt, and measure valve clearance when the nose of cam is just opposite of maximum cam lift (1) as shown in illustration below.
014RS020
5. Install lower valve spring seat, valve spring and upper valve spring seat then put split collars on the upper spring seat, using the J8062 valve spring compresor and J42898 valve spring compressor adapter to install the split collars.
014RW081
Legend (1) Cam (2) Shim (3) Tappet
Valve Clearance Standard Value (cold)

Intake: 0.23 mm0.33 mm (0.0091 in0.0130 in) Exhaust: 0.25 mm0.35 mm (0.0098 in0.0138 in)
Selection of Adjusting Shim

Shim to be selected = (Thickness of removed shim) + (Valve clearance measurement Standard valu) Based on the above formula, the best suited shim should be selected from 41 types of shim (differently thick at 0.02mm (0.0008 in) intervals from 2.40mm (0.0945 in) through 3.2mm (0.1260 in) thick). Install the shim and check valve clearance.
014RW042
6. Install tappet with shim. 7. Install camshaft assembly. D Refer to installation procedure for Camshaft in this manual.
6A58
Replacement of Shim
Let the cam push down the edge of tappet by using J42689 valve clearance adjusting tool and push out the shim with a flat blade screw driver as shown in illustrations below.
014RW084
014RW082
014RW083
6A59
Camshaft
Camshaft and Associated Parts
014RW040
Legend (1) Camshaft Bearing Cap Fixing Bolt (2) Camshaft Bearing Cap (3) Camshaft Assembly Intake (4) Camshaft Assembly Exhaust (5) Pulley Fixing Bolt
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Camshaft Drive Gear Pulley Retainer Fixing Bolt Retainer Camshaft Drive Gear Oil Seal
Disassembly
1. Remove fixing bolt (5) for camshaft drive gear pulley using J43041 universal holder.
014RW060
6A60

2. Use a micrometer to measure the diameter and the uneven wear of the camshaft journals. Replace the camshaft if the diameter or the uneven wear exceeds the specified limit. Journal Diameter Standard : 25.972 mm25.993 mm (1.0225 in1.0233 in) Limit : 25.8 mm (1.0157 in) Uneven wear : 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
2. Remove twenty fixing bolts from inlet and exhaust camshaft bearing cap on one side bank, then camshaft bearing cap (2).
014RW027
3. Remove camshaft assembly (3), (4). 4. Remove three fixing bolts (7) from camshaft drive gear retainer (8), then camshaft drive gear assembly.

1. Use a micrometer to measure the cam lobe height and uneven wear. Replace the camshaft if either the lobe height or the uneven wear exceeds the specified limit. Lobe height : 44.709 mm (1.7602 in) Uneven wear : 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
014RS023
3. Place the camshaft on Vblocks. Slowly rotate the camshaft and measure the runout with a dial indicator. Replace the camshaft if the runout exceeds the specified limit. Run out Limit : 0.1 mm (0.0039 in)
014RW043
014RW044

4. Measure the camshaft journal oil clearance. 1. Measure the camshaft bearing cap housing inside diameter. NOTE: Tighten camshaft bearing cap (2) to specified torque before measuring the camshaft bearing cap inside diameter. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in)
6A61
5. Replace the cylinder head and/or camshaft if the measured oil clearance exceeds the specified limit. 1. Carefully clean the camshaft journal, the camshaft bearing cap, and the cylinder head. 2. Install camshaft assembly and camshaft bearing cap (2), tighten twenty bolts (1) on one side bank to the specified torque. Torque: 10 Nm (87 lb in)
014RW031
2. Subtract the camshaft outside diameter from the camshaft bearing cap housing inside diameter. Oil Clearance Standard : 0.027 mm0.078 mm (0.0011 in0.0031 in) Limit : 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
014RW031
3. Measure the camshaft thrust clearance with a dial indicator. Replace the camshaft and/or the cylinder head if the camshaft thrust clearance exceeds the specified limit. Camshaft thrust Clearance Standard : 0.03 mm0.08 mm (0.0012 in.0.0031 in.) Limit : 0.12 mm (0.0047 mm)
014RW037
014RW035
6A62
Reassembly
1. Install camshaft drive gear assembly and tighten three bolts to specified torque. Torque: 10 Nm (87 lb in) 2. Tighten sub gear setting bolt. 1. Use J42686 to turn sub gear to right direction until the M5 bolt hole aligns between camshaft driven gear and sub gear. 2. Tighten M5 bolt suitable torque for prevent moving the sub gear.
014RW020
Legend (1) Intake Camshaft Timing Gear for Right Bank (2) Intake Camshaft Timing Gear for Left Bank (3) Exhaust Camshaft Timing Gear (4) Discerning Mark LI: Left Bank Intake RI: Right Bank Intake LE: Left Bank Exhaust RE: Right Bank Exhaust
014RW041
3. Install camshaft assembly and camshaft bearing caps, tighten twenty bolts on one side bank to the specified torque. 1. Apply engine oil to camshaft journal and bearing surface of camshaft bearing cap. 2. Align timing mark on intake camshaft (one dot for right bank, two dots for left bank) and exhaust camshaft (one dot for right bank, two dots for left bank) to timing mark on camshaft drive gear (one dot).
014RW023
6A63
014RW024
3. Tighten twenty bolts in numerical order on one side bank as shown in the illustration. Torque: 10 Nm (87 lb in)
4. If the oil seal requires replacement, use the J42985 to install the oil seal.
014RW034
014RW031
6A64
5. Tighten bolt for camshaft drive gear assembly pulley to the specified torque using the J43041 universal holder. Torque: 98 Nm (72 lb ft)
014RW060
6A65
Crankshaft
Crankshaft and Associated Parts
013RW009
Legend (1) Cylinder Head Assembly (2) Crankcase with Oil Pan (3) Oil Pipe and O-ring (4) Oil Strainer and O-ring (5) Oil Pump Assembly (6) Cylinder Block Side Bolts (7) Oil Gallery
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly Flywheel Rear Oil Seal Retainer and Oil Seal Main Bearing Cap Crankshaft Main Bearing Cap Fixing Bolts Oil Gallery Fixing Bolts
Disassembly
1. Remove cylinder head assembly (1). Refer to Cylinder Head in this manual. 2. Remove crankcase with oil pan (2). Refer to Oil Pan and Crankcase in this manual.
CAUTION: Take care not to damage or deform the sealing flange surface of crankcase. 3. Remove oil pipe and O-ring (3). 4. Remove oil strainer and O-ring (4). 5. Remove oil pump assembly (5). 6. Remove crankcase side bolts (6).
6A66
7. Remove oil gallery (7). 8. Remove piston and connecting rod assembly (8). Refer to Piston, Piston Ring and Connecting Rod in this manual. 9. Remove flywheel (9). 10. Remove rear oil seal retainer (10). 11. Remove main bearing cap (11). 12. Remove crankshaft (12).
Inspection and Repair for Bearings

1. Inspect Crankshaft Set the dial indicator as shown in the illustration and measure the crankshaft thrust clearance. If the thrust clearance exceeds the specified limit, replace the thrust bearings as a set. Thrust Clearance Standard : 0.06 mm0.24 mm (0.0024 in0.0094 in) Limit : 0.30 mm (0.0118 in)
015RS004
3. Remove the crankshaft. Remove the main bearings. 4. Clean the upper and lower bearings as well as the crankshaft main journal. 5. Check the bearings for damage or excessive wear. The bearings must be replaced as a set if damage or excessive wear is discovered during inspection. 6. Set the upper bearings and the thrust washers to their original positions. Carefully install the crankshaft. 7. Set the lower bearings to the bearing cap original position. 8. Apply plastigage to the crankshaft journal unit as shown in the illustration. NOTE: Do not set the plastigage on the oil hole.
015RS003
Main Bearing Clearance

1. Remove the bearing caps and measure the oil clearance. 2. Remove the main bearing cap fixing bolts in the sequence shown in the illustration. Arrange the removed main bearing caps in the cylinder number order. Remove the main bearings.
015RS005

9. Install main bearing caps, oil gallery and crank case bolts in the order shown, and tighten each bolt to the specified torque. NOTE: Do not apply engine oil to the crank case side bolts. Main bearing cap bolts. Torque: 39 Nm (29lb ft) Oil gallery fixing bolts. Torque: 1st step: 29 Nm (22 lb ft) 2nd step 55 65 Crank case side bolts Torque : 39 Nm (29lb ft) NOTE: Do not allow the crankshaft to rotate.
6A67
11. Measure the plastigage width and determine the oil clearance. If the oil clearance exceeds the specified limit, replace the main bearings as a set and/or replace the crankshaft. Standard : 0.019 mm0.043 mm (0.0007 in0.0017 in) Limit : 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
015RS008
12. Clean the plastigage from the bearings and the crankshaft. Remove the crankshaft and the bearings.
Crankshaft Inspection
Inspect the surface of the crankshaft journal and crank pins for excessive wear and damage. Inspect the oil seal fitting surfaces for excessive wear and damage. Inspect the oil ports for obstructions.
015RS006
10. Remove the main bearing caps in the sequence shown in the illustration.
015RS004
6A68
Inspection and Repair for Crankshaft

1. Carefully set the crankshaft on the Vblocks. Slowly rotate the crankshaft and measure the runout. If the crankshaft runout exceeds the specified limit, the crankshaft must be replaced. Runout : 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
Crankshaft Bearing Selection

When installing new crankshaft bearings or replacing bearings, refer to the selection table below. Select and install the new crankshaft bearings, paying close attention to the cylinder block journal hole. 1. Diameter size mark (1) and the crankshaft journal.
015RS010 015RS007
2. Measure the diameter and the uneven wear of main journal and crank pin. If the crankshaft wear exceeds the specified limit, crankshaft must be replaced. Main journal diameter : 63.918 mm63.933 mm (2.5165 in2.5170 in) Crank pin diameter : 53.922 mm53.937 mm (2.1229 in.2.1235 in.) Uneven wear limit : 0.005 mm (0.0002 in)
2. Diameter size mark (1). The diameter size marks are stamped on the No.1 crankshaft balancer as shown in the illustration.
015RS011
NOTE: Take care to ensure the bearings are positioned correctly.
015RS009
6A69
Legend (1) Number 1 and 4 main bearing upper and lower (2) Number 2 and 3 main bearing upper (3) Number 2 and 3 main bearing lower
015RS012
1 Size Mark
Main Bearing Bore Diameter
Crank Shaft Main Journal Diameter
2 Size Mark
Crank Shaft Bearing Size Mark (Upper Side) Blue
Crank Shaft Bearing Size Mark (Lower Side) Blue
Oil Clearance (Reference)
68.994-69.000 (2.7163-2.7165)
63.918-63.925 (2.5165-2.5167) 63.926-63.933 (2.5168-2.5170) 63.918-63.925 (2.5165-2.5167) 63.926-63.933 (2.5168-2.5170) 63.918-63.925 (2.5165-2.5167) 63.926-63.933 (2.5168-2.5170)
2 1
0.030-0.049 (0.0012-0.0019) 0.028-0.047 (0.0011-0.0019) 0.029-0.048 (0.0011-0.0019) 0.027-0.046 (0.0011-0.0018) 0.028-0.047 (0.0011-0.0019) 0.026-0.045 (0.0010-0.0018)
Brown 2 1 Green 2 1 Yellow
Brown
68.987-68.993 (2.7160-2.7163)
Green
68.980-68.986 (2.7157-2.7160)
Yellow
Reassembly
1. Crankshaft (12) D Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and the main bearing caps. D Be sure that they are positioned correctly. D Apply new engine oil to the upper and lower main bearing faces. NOTE: Do not apply engine oil to the main bearing back faces.
015RS012
6A70

D Apply engine oil to the oil seal lip. D Align the cylinder block dowel pin holes with the rear retainer dowel pins. D Tighten the rear retainer fixing bolts. New bolts should be used when installing rear retainer. Torque: 18 Nm (13 lb ft) NOTE: Be very careful not to disengage the oil seal garter spring during installation of the rear retainer. If the seal was removed from retainer for replacement, apply engine oil to the oil seal lip and install the oil seal using J39201 oil seal installer.
D Carefully mount the crankshaft. D Apply engine oil to the thrust washer. D Assemble the thrust washer to the No.3 bearing journal. The oil grooves must face the crankshaft.
015RS013
2. Rear oil seal (10) D Remove the oil from the cylinder block and the retainer mounting surface. D Apply sealant (TB1207B or equivalent) to the retainer mounting surface, following the pattern shown in the illustration. The retainer must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant.
015RW001
015RS017
015RW002
3. Flywheel (9) 1. Thoroughly clean and remove the oil from the threads of crankshaft. 2. Remove the oil from the crankshaft and flywheel mounting faces. 3. Mount the flywheel on the crankshaft and then install the washer.

4. Hold the crankshaft to prevent from rotating then install the bolts in the order shown to the specified torque. Torque: 54 Nm (40 lb ft) NOTE: Do not reuse the bolt and do not apply oil or thread lock to the bolt.
6A71
D Insert the piston/connecting rod assemblies into each cylinder with the piston ring compressor. The front marks must be facing the front of the engine. D Match the numbered caps with the numbers on the connecting rods. Align the punched marks on the connecting rods and caps. D Apply engine oil to the threads and seating faces of the nuts. D Tighten the nuts. Torque: 54 Nm (40 lb ft) After tightening the cap nuts, check to see that the crankshaft rotates smoothly. NOTE: Do not apply engine oil to the bearing back faces.
015RS018
4. Piston and connecting rod assembly (8) D Apply engine oil to the cylinder bores, the connecting rod bearings and the crankshaft pins. Check to see that the piston ring end gaps are correctly positioned.
015RS020
5. Install oil gallery (7) and tighten the bolts in 2 steps, in the order shown. 1st step: 29 Nm (22 lb ft) 2nd step: 55 65
015RS019
Legend (1) No.1 Compression Ring (2) No.2 Compression Ring (3) Oil Ring Side Rail Upper (4) Oil Ring Side Rail Lower (5) Piston Front Mark
051RS009
6A72
6. Cylinder block side bolts (6) D Tighten all the bolts to the specified torque in the order shown. NOTE: Do not apply engine oil to the crank case side bolts. Torque: 39 Nm (29 lb ft)
013RW010
Legend (1) Portion Between Bolt Holes (2) Bolt Hole Portion 11. Install cylinder head assembly, refer to Cylinder head in this manual.
012RS001
7. Install oil pump assembly (5), refer to Oil pump in this manual. 8. Install oil strainer and O-ring (4). 9. Install oil pipe and O-ring (3) and tighten the bolts. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 10. Install crankcase with oil pan (2). 1. Completely remove all residual sealant, lubricant and moisture from the sealing surfaces. The surfaces must be perfectly dry. 2. Apply a correct width bead of sealant (TB 1207C or its equivalent) to the contact surfaces of the oil pan. There must be no gaps in the bead. 3. The crankcase assembly must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application. 4. Tighten the bolts and nuts to the specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in)
6A73
Piston and Connecting Rod

Piston, Connecting Rod and Associate Parts
015RW019
Legend (1) Cylinder Head Assembly (2) Cylinder Head Gasket (3) Crankcase with Oil Pan (4) Oil Pipe and O-ring (5) Oil Strainer and O-ring (6) Oil Gallery
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly Piston Ring Piston Pin Piston Connecting Rod Connecting Rod Cap
Disassembly
1. Remove cylinder head assembly (1). Refer to Cylinder Head Removal in this manual. 2. Remove cylinder head gasket (2). 3. Remove crankcase with oil pan (3). Refer toOil Pan and Crankcase in this manual. 4. Remove oil pipe and O-ring (4).
5. Remove oil strainer and O-ring (5). 6. Remove oil gallery (6). 7. Remove connecting rod cap with connecting rod lower bearing (12). 8. Remove piston and connecting rod assembly (7). NOTE: Before removing piston and connecting rod assembly, measure thrust clearance.
6A74
015RS031
015RS023
D Remove any ridge or carbon build up from the top end of the cylinder. 9. Remove the piston rings (8) with a piston ring expander. Arrange the removed piston rings in the cylinder number order.
Legend (1) Press Ram (2) Piston (3) Connecting Rod (4) Piston Pin 11. Piston (10) 12. Connecting rod (11)

Pistons
Carefully clean away all the carbon adhering to the piston head and the piston ring grooves. NOTE: Never use a wire brush to clean the pistons. Damage will result. Visually check each piston for cracking, scoring, and other signs of excessive wear. If any of the above conditions are found, the piston must be replaced.
Piston Diameter
015RS022
10. Remove the piston pin (9) using J24086C piston pin service set and piston support with a press. NOTE: Keep the parts removed from each cylinder separate. All parts must be reinstalled in their original positions. Heating the connecting rod will permit easy removal of the piston pin.
1. Measure the piston outside diameter with micrometer at the piston grading position and a right angle to the piston pin. Piston grading position (from piston head) Piston grading position : 43.0 mm (1.6929 in)
6A75
015RV014
012RS002
The size mark (1) for piston outside diameter is represented as shown in Figure. Outside Diameter Size Mark A : 93.360 mm93.370 mm (3.6756 in3.6760 in) Size Mark B : 93.371 mm93.380 mm (3.6760 in3.6764 in) Size Mark C : 93.381 mm93.390 mm (3.6764 in3.6768 in)
Piston Rings
Any worn or damaged part discovered during engine overhaul must be replaced with a new one. 1. Ring end gap measurement D Insert the piston ring into the bore. D Push the ring by the piston, at a right angle to the wall, into the point at which the cylinder bore diameter is the smallest. D Measure the ring end gap. Compression Ring 1st ring Standard: Limit: 2nd ring Standard: Limit: Oil ring Standard: Limit: 0.150 mm0.450 mm (0.0059 in0.0177 in) 1.05 mm (0.0413 in) 0.450 mm0.600 mm (0.0177 in0.0236 in) 1.2 mm (0.0472 in) 0.300 mm0.400 mm (0.0118 in0.0157 in) 1.0 mm (0.0394 in)
015RS025
Measure the cylinder bore inside diameter (refer to Cylinder Block in this manual).
6A76
015RS026
015RS028
D Positioning mark (1) is painted as shown in the illustration. Marked T : No.1 Compression ring Marked T2 : No.2 Compression ring
Piston Pin
NOTE: Do not reuse the old piston pin. 1. Use a micrometer to measure the new piston pin outside diameter in both directions at three different positions. 2. Measure the inside diameter of the connecting rod small end. If the fitting interference between the small end and pin does not conform to the specified value, the connecting rod must be replaced. Standard : 0.023 mm0.038 mm (0.0009 in0.0015 in)
015RS027
2. Measure the clearance between the piston ring groove and the piston ring with a feeler gauge. If the piston ring groove / piston ring clearance exceeds the specified limit, the piston must be replaced. Compression Ring Clearance Standard : 0.025 mm0.065 mm (0.0006 in.0.0015 in) Limit : 0.1mm (0.0059 in)
015RS029

3. Insert the new pin into the piston and rotate it. If the pin rotates smoothly with no backlash, the clearance is normal. If there is backlash or roughness, measure the clearance. If the clearance exceeds the specified limit, the piston must be replaced. Clearance Standard : 0.010 mm0.017 mm (0.0004 in.0.0007 in) Limit : 0.040 mm (0.0016 in)
6A77
Connecting Rods
1. Check the connecting rod alignment If either the bend or the twist exceeds the specified limit, the connecting rod must be replaced. Bend per 100 mm (3.937 in) Limit: 0.15 (0.0059) Twist per 100 mm (3.937 in) Limit: 0.20 (0.0078)
015RS031
3. Measure the oil clearance between the connecting rod and the crankshaft. 1. Remove the connecting rod cap nuts and the rod caps (12). Arrange the removed rod caps in the cylinder number order. 2. Clean the rod bearings and the crankshaft pins. 3. Carefully check the rod bearings. If even one bearing is found to be damaged or badly worn, the entire bearing assembly must be replaced as a set. Reinstall the bearings in their original positions. Apply plastigage to the crank pin.
015RS030
2. Measure the connecting rod thrust clearance. Use a feeler gauge to measure the thrust clearance at the large end of the connecting rod If the clearance exceeds the specified limit, the connecting rod must be replaced. Standard : 0.16 mm0.35 mm (0.0063 in.0.0138 in) Limit : 0.40 mm (0.0157 in)
015RS032
4. Reinstall the rod caps (12) to their original positions. Tighten the rod cap nuts. Torque: 54 Nm (40 lb ft) NOTE: Do not allow the crankshaft to rotate.
6A78

7. Clean the plastigage from the bearings and the crankshaft pins.
5. Remove the rod caps. 6. Measure the width of the plastigage and determine the oil clearance. If the oil clearance exceeds the limit, replace the rod bearing as a set. Standard : 0.019 mm0.043 mm (0.0007 in0.0017 in) Limit : 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
Conrod Bearing Selection

Select and install the new connecting rod bearings, paying close attention to the connecting rod big end diameter size mark (1). NOTE: Take care not to confuse the alignment mark (2) and the size mark (1) during the installation procedure.
015RS008 015RS034
1 Size Mark A B C
Big end Bore Diameter 56.994-57.000 (2.2439-2.2441) 56.988-56.994 (2.2436-2.2439) 56.982-56.988 (2.2434-2.2436)
Crankshaft Pin Diameter
Connecting Rod Bearing Thickness (Reference) 1.512-1.516 (0.0595-0.0597)
Color of Size Mark Yellow Green Pink
Oil Clearance (Reference) 0.025-0.054 (0.0010-0.0021) 0.027-0.056 (0.0011-0.0022) 0.029-0.058 (0.0011-0.0023)
53.922-53.937 (2.1229-2.1235)
1.508-1.512 (0.0594-0.0595) 1.504-1.508 (0.0592-0.0594)
Reassembly
1. Install connecting rod 2. Install piston 3. Install piston pin D Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the piston pin. Try to insert the piston pin into the piston pin hole with normal finger pressure. NOTE: When changing piston / connecting rod combinations, do not change the piston / piston pin combination and do not reuse the old piston pin. D Attach the piston to the connecting rod with the piston front mark and the connecting rod front mark on the same side.
015RS036

D With J24086C Piston pin service set and a press, press fit the piston pin. NOTE: Heat the connecting rod small end to a suitable temperature to ensure smooth installation.
6A79
D Install piston rings in the following sequence. 1. Oil ring 1. Expander ring 2. Upper side rail 3. Lower side rail 2. 2nd compression ring 3. 1st compression ring D The compression rings must be set with the T or T2 mark facing up. Marked T : No.1 Compression ring Marked T2 : No.2 Compression ring D After installation, apply engine oil to the entire circumference of the piston rings. Check to see that all the rings rotate smoothly.
015RS037
Legend (1) Press Ram (2) Piston (3) Connecting Rod (4) Piston Pin 4. Install piston ring with the piston ring expander. The compression ring must be set with the T mark (1) facing up. Marked T : No.1 Compression ring Marked T2 : No.2 Compression ring
015RS038
5. Install piston and connecting rod assembly. D Insert the bearings into the connecting rods and caps. Apply new engine oil to the bearing faces and nuts. D Tighten the connecting rod cap nuts Torque : 54 Nm (40 lb ft) NOTE: Do not apply engine oil to the bearing back faces. 6. Oil gallery, refer to Crankshaft and main bearing in this manual. 7. Oil strainer and O-ring. 8. Oil pipe and O-ring. 9. Install crankcase with oil pan, refer to Oil pan and Crankcase in this manual. 10. Install cylinder head gasket. 11. Install Cylinder head assembly. D Refer to Cylinder head in this manual.
015RS027
6A80
Cylinder Block
Cylinder Block and Associated Parts
012RW010
Legend (1) Cylinder Head Assembly (2) Cylinder Head Gasket (3) Crankcase with Oil Pan (4) Oil Pipe and O-ring (5) Oil Strainer and O-ring (6) Oil Pump Assembly (7) Cylinder Block Side Bolts
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
Oil Gallery Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly Flywheel Rear Oil Seal Retainer Assembly Main Bearing Cap Crankshaft Cylinder Block
Disassembly
1. Remove cylinder head assembly. 2. Remove cylinder head gasket. 3. Remove crankcase with oil pan. 4. Remove oil pipe and O-ring.
5. Remove oil strainer and O-ring. 6. Remove oil pump assembly. 7. Remove crankcase side bolts. 8. Remove oil gallery. 9. Remove piston and connecting rod assembly. 10. Remove flywheel.

11. Remove rear oil seal retainer assembly. 12. Remove main bearing cap. 13. Remove crankshaft. 14. Remove cylinder block.
6A81
Cylinder Bore
Use a cylinder gauge to measure the cylinder bore diameter in both the axial and thrust directions. Each measurement should be made at six points. CAUTION: Be very careful not to allow any material to accidentally drop into the upper surface of the cylinder block. Be very careful not to scratch the upper surface of the cylinder block. Cylinder Bore Inside Diameter Limit : 93.530 (3.6823) If the measurement exceed the specified limit, the cylinder block must be replaced. Diameter Grade A : 93.400 mm93.410 mm (3.6772 in3.6776 in) Grade B : 93.411 mm93.420 mm (3.6776 in3.6779 in) Grade C : 93.421 mm93.430 mm (3.6780 in3.6783 in)

1. Remove the cylinder head gasket and any other material adhering to the upper surface of the cylinder block. Be very careful not to allow any material to accidentally drop into the cylinder block. Be very careful not to scratch the cylinder block. 2. Carefully remove the oil pump, rear oil seal retainer, and crankcase assembly installation surface seal. 3. Wipe the cylinder block clean. 4. Visually inspect the cylinder block. If necessary, use a flaw detector to perform a dye penetrate and hydraulic (or air pressure) test. If cracking or other damage is discovered, the cylinder block must either be repaired or replaced.
Flatness
1. Using a straightedge and feeler gauge, check that the upper surface of the cylinder block is not warped. CAUTION: Be very careful not to allow any material to accidentally drop into the upper surface of the cylinder block. Be very careful not to scratch the upper surface of the cylinder block. 2. The cylinder block must be reground or replaced if the warpage exceeds the limit. Warpage Limit : 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) Maximum repairable limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
012RS005
NOTE: For information on piston diameter, please refer to the section Inspection of the Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly in this manual.
012RS004
6A82

D Carefully mount the crankshaft. D Apply engine oil to the thrust washer. D Assemble the thrust washer to the No. 3 bearing journal. The oil grooves must face the crankshaft.
D The Grade mark (1) is stamped at the position illustrated.
012RS006
Reassembly
015RS013
1. Install cylinder block. 2. Install crankshaft. D Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and the main bearing caps. D Be sure that they are positioned correctly. D Apply new engine oil to the upper and lower main bearing faces. NOTE: Do not apply engine oil to the bearing back faces.
3. Install rear oil seal retainer. D Remove oil on cylinder block and retainer fitting surface. D Apply sealant (TB1207B or equivalent) to retainer fitting surface as shown in illustration. D The oil seal retainer must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant.
015RW002 015RS012
Legend (1) Number 1 and 4 main bearing upper and lower. (2) Number 2 and 3 main bearing upper. (3) Number 2 and 3 main bearing lower.

D Apply engine oil to oil seal lip and align a dowel pin hole in the cylinder block with that in the retainer. D Tighten retainer fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
6A83
5. Install piston and connecting rod assembly. D Apply engine oil to the cylinder bores, the connecting rod bearings and the crankshaft pins. NOTE: Do not apply engine oil to the bearing back faces. D Check to see that the piston ring end gaps are correctly positioned.
015RW001
4. Install flywheel 1. Thoroughly clean and remove the oil from the threads of crankshaft. 2. Remove the oil from the crankshaft and flywheel mounting faces. 3. Mount the flywheel on the crankshaft and then install the washer. 4. Holding the crankshaft stationary, tighten the flywheel bolts in the order shown. Torque: 54 Nm (40 lb ft) NOTE: Do not reuse the bolts and do not apply oil or thread lock to the bolts.
015RS019
Legend (1) No.1 Compression Ring (2) No.2 Compression Ring (3) Oil Ring Side Rail Upper (4) Oil Ring Side Rail Lower (5) Piston Front Mark D Insert the piston/connecting rod assemblies into each cylinder with the piston ring compressor. D The front marks (1) must be facing the front of the engine.
015RS018
015RS020
6A84

8. Install oil pump assembly. Refer to Oil Pump in this manual. 9. Install oil strainer and O-ring. 10. Install oil pipe and O-ring. 11. Install crankcase with oil pan. 1. Completely remove all residual sealant, lubricant and moisture from the sealing surfaces. The surfaces must be perfectly dry. 2. Apply a correct width bead of sealant (TB 1207C or its equivalent) to the contact surfaces of the crankcase. There must be no gaps in the bead. 3. The oil pan must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant. 4. Tighten the bolts and nuts to the specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in)
6. Install oil gallery and tighten the bolts in 2 steps in the order shown. 1st step : 29 Nm (22 lb ft) 2nd step : 55 65
012RS007
7. Install cylinder block side bolts (1) and tighten crankcase bolts in sequence shown in the illustration. Torque : 39 Nm (29 lb ft)
013RW010
Legend (1) Portion Between Both Holes (2) Bolt Hole Portions 12. Install cylinder head gasket. 13. Install cylinder head assembly. Refer to Cylinder Head in this manual.
012RW005
6A85
Main Data and Specification

Item Engine type, number of cylinders and arrangement Form of combustion chamber Valve mechanism Cylinder liner type Total piston displacement Cylinder bore x stroke Compression ratio Compression pressure at 300rpm Engine idling speed rpm Valve clearance Oil capacity Ignition timing Spark plug Plug gap Specifications 6VD1 Water cooled, four cycle V6 Pent-roof type 4-Cams, 4-Valves, DOHC Gear & Belt Drive Casted in cylinder drive 3165 cc 93.4mm x 77mm (3.677 in x 3.031 in) 9.1 1.37 MPa (14.0 Kg/cm2) Non adjustable (750) Intake: 0.28 mm (0.11 in) Exhaust: 0.30mm (0.12in) 5.3 liters Non adjustable (16 BTDC at idle rpm) PK16PR11, RC10PYP4, K16PR-P11 1.0 mm1.1 mm(0.0394 in 0.0433 in)
6A86
Ignition coil, Spark plug, Crankshaft position sensor and Under cover
E06R100001
6A87
Cylinder head cover, Cylinder head, Camshaft bearing cap, Common chamber, EGR valve and EGR pipe, Ion sensing module
E06R100002
6A88
Crankshaft main bearing, Flywheel, Crankcase, Oil pan, Timing belt tensioner, Timing pulley, timing belt cover, Oil pump, Oil gallery, Oil strainer and water pump
E06R100004

Connecting rod and Water pump
6A89
E06RW011
6A90
Engine mount
E06RW028
6A91
Special Tool
J2168702 Remover; tie rod end
J42985 Installer; Camshaft oil seal
J36390 Wrench; Oil filter
J39206 Installer; Pilot bearing
J8062 Compressor; Valve spring (1) J42898 Adapter; Compressor, Valve spring (2)
J861401 Holder; Crankshaft
J37281 Remover; Oil controller
J37228 Seal cutter
J38537 Installer; Oil controller
J39201 Installer; Real oil seal
J29107 Universal pitman arm puller
J39202 Installer; Oil pump oil seal
6A92

TOOL NO. TOOL NAME
ILLUSTRATION
J242391 Cylinder head bolt wrench
J42899 Replacer; Valve guide (1,2) J42687 Installer; Valve guide (1) J379851 Remover; Valve guide (2)
J42689 Adjusting Tool; Valve clearance
J42686 Lever; Gear spring
J43041 Holder; Universal
SECTION
ENGINE COOLING (6VD1 3.2L)
RODEO
6B1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draining and Refilling Cooling System . . . . . Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Water Pump and Associated Parts . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermostat and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B1 6B2 6B4 6B5 6B6 6B6 6B6 6B6 6B6 6B7 6B7 6B7 6B7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Belt and Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Belt and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B7 6B8 6B8 6B8 6B9 6B10 6B11 6B11 6B11 6B11 6B11 6B12 6B13
Service Precaution
6B2
General Description
030RW001
Legend (1) Water Pump (2) Thermostat (3) Radiator (4) Reserve Tank (5) Cooling Fan (6) Cylinder Block
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
Cylinder Head Right Bank Throttle Body Cylinder Block Cylinder Head Left Bank Heater
The cooling system is a pressurized Engine Coolant (EC) forced circulation type which consists of a water pump, thermostat cooling fan, radiator and other components. The automatic transmission fluid is cooled by the EC in the radiator.
Water Pump
The EC pump is a centrifugal impeller type and is driven by a timing belt.
030RS001
6B3
Thermostat
The thermostat is a wax pellet type with a air hole(1) and is installed in the thermostat housing.
D Calculating mixing ratio
F06RW005
031RW002
NOTE: Antifreeze solution + Water = Total cooling system capacity. D Total Cooling System Capacity D M/T 11.1Lit (2.93Us gal) D A/T 10.0Lit (2.64Us gal)
Radiator
The radiator is a tube type with corrugated fins. In order to raise the boiling point of the coolant, the radiator is fitted with a cap in which the valve is operated at 88.2 117.6 kPa (12.8 17.0 psi) pressure. (No oil cooler provided for M/T)
110RW023
Antifreeze Solution
D Relation between the mixing ratio and freezing temperature of the EC varies with the ratio of antifreeze solution in water. Proper mixing ratio can be determined by referring to the chart. Supplemental inhibitors or additives claiming to increase cooling capability that have not been specifically approved by Isuzu are not recommended for addition to the cooling system.
B06RW002
6B4
D Mixing ratio Check the specific gravity of engine coolant in the cooling system temperature ranges from 0C to 50C using a suction type hydrometer, then determine the density of the engine coolant by referring to the table.
B06RW003
Diagnosis
Engine Cooling Trouble
Condition Engine overheating Possible cause Low Engine Coolant level Incorrect fan installed Thermo meter unit faulty Faulty thermostat Faulty Engine Coolant temperature sensor Clogged radiator Faulty radiator cap Low engine oil level or use of improper engine oil Clogged exhaust system Faulty Throttle Position sensor Open or shorted Throttle Position sensor circuit Damaged cylinder head gasket Engine overcooling Engine slow to warmup Faulty thermostat Faulty thermostat Thermo unit faulty Replenish Replace Replace Replace Repair or replace Clean or replace Replace Replenish or change oil Clean exhaust system or replace faulty parts Replace throttle valve assembly Repair or replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Correction
6B5
Draining and Refilling Cooling System

Before draining the cooling system, inspect the system and perform any necessary service to ensure that it is clean, does not leak and is in proper working order. The engine coolant (EC) level should be between the MIN and MAX lines of reserve tank when the engine is cold. If low, check for leakage and add EC up to the MAX line. There should not be any excessive deposit of rust or scales around the radiator cap or radiator filler hole, and the EC should also be free from oil. Replace the EC if excessively dirty. 1. Completely drain the cooling system by opening the drain plug (2) at the bottom of the radiator.
9. After the engine has cooled, replenish with EC up to the MAX line of the reserve tank. 10. Start the engine. With the engine running at 3,000 rpm, make sure there is no running water sound from the heater core (behind the center console). 11. If the running water sound is heard, repeat steps 8 to 10.
110RW002
2. Remove the radiator cap. WARNING: TO AVOID THE DANGER OF BEING BURNED, DO NOT REMOVE THE CAP WHILE THE ENGINE AND RADIATOR ARE STILL HOT. SCALDING FLUID AND STEAM CAN BE BLOWN OUT UNDER PRESSURE. 3. Disconnect all hoses from the EC reserve tank. Scrub and clean the inside of the reserve tank with soap and water. Flush it well with clean water, then drain it. Install the reserve tank and hoses. 4. Refill the cooling system with the EC using a solution that is at least 50 percent antifreeze but no more than 70 percent antifreeze. 5. Fill the radiator to the base of the filler neck. Fill the EC reserve tank to MAX line when the engine is cold. 6. Block the drive wheels and firmly apply the parking brake. Shift an automatic transmission to P (Park) or a manual transmission to neutral. 7. Remove the radiator cap. Start the engine and warm it up at 2,500 3,000 rpm for about 30 minutes. 8. When the air comes out from the radiator filler neck and the EC level has gone down, replenish with the EC. Repeat this procedure until the EC level does not go down. Then stop the engine and install the radiator cap. Let the engine cool down.
6B6
Water Pump
Water Pump and Associated Parts
030RS002
Legend (1) Timing Belt (2) Idle Pulley
(3) Water Pump Assembly (4) Gasket
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Drain coolant. 3. Radiator hose (on inlet pipe side). 4. Remove timing belt. Refer to Timing Belt in this manual. 5. Remove Idle pulley. 6. Remove water pump assembly. 7. Remove gasket.
NOTE: To prevent the oil leakage, apply the LOCTITE 262 or an equivalent, to the arrow marked fixing bolt thread.
Inspection
Make necessary repair and parts replacement if extreme wear or damage is found during inspection. Should any of the following problems occur, the entire water pump assembly must be replaced. D Crack in the water pump body D EC leakage from the seal unit D Play or abnormal noise in the bearing D Cracks or corrosion in the impeller
030RW008
Installation
1. Install gasket, clean the mating surface of gasket before installation. 2. Install water pump assembly and tighten bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft) D Tightening order The tightening order are in the illustrate.
3. Idle pulley D Install idle pulley and tighten bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 52 Nm (38 lb ft) 4. Timing belt D Install timing belt. Refer to timing belt installation step in Timing Belt in this manual. 5. Connect radiator inlet hose and replenish EC. 6. Connect battery ground cable.
6B7
Thermostat
Thermostat and Associated Parts
031RS003
031RW001
Legend (1) Thermostat Housing (2) Thermostat (3) Outlet Pipe
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Drain engine coolant from the radiator and engine. 3. Disconnect radiator hose from the inlet pipe. 4. Remove thermostat housing. 5. Remove thermostat(2).
Confirm the temperature when the valve first begins to open. Valve opening temperature 74.5C 78.5C (166.1F 173.3F) Confirm the temperature when the valve is fully opened. Valve full open temperature and lift More than 8.5mm (0.33 in) at 90C (194F) Make necessary repair and parts replacement if extreme wear or damage is found during inspection.
Installation
1. Install thermostat into the outlet pipe(4) making sure that the air hole is in the up position. 2. Install thermostat housing and tighten bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 3. Installation rubber hose. 4. Replenish engine coolant (EC). 5. Start engine and check for EC leakage.
Inspection
Suspend the thermostat in a waterfilled container using thin wire. Place a thermometer next to the thermostat. Do not directly heat the thermostat. Gradually increase the water temperature. Stir the water so that the entire water is same temperature.
6B8
Radiator
Radiator and Associated Parts
110RW010
Legend (1) Oil Cooler Hose For Automatic Transmission (2) Radiator Hose (3) Fan Guide, Lower
(4) Reserve Tank Hose (5) Radiator Assembly (6) Reserve Tank
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Loosen a drain plug(2) to drain EC. 3. Disconnect oil cooler hose(1) on automatic transmission (A/T). 4. Disconnect radiator inlet hose and outlet hose from the engine.
5. Remove fan guide(1), clips(3) on both sides and the bottom lock, then remove fan guide lower(3) with fan shroud(4).
110RW001
110RW002

6. Disconnect the reserve tank hose(4) from radiator.
6B9
110RS006
110RX001
7. Lift up and remove the radiator assembly with hose, taking care not to damage the radiator core with a fan blade. 8. Remove rubber cushions on both sides at the bottom.
Radiator Core
1. A bent fin may result in reduced ventilation and overheating may occur. All bent fins must be straightened. Pay close attention to the base of the fin when it is being straightened. 2. Remove all dust, bugs and other foreign material.
Inspection
Radiator Cap
Measure the valve opening pressure of the pressurizing valve with a radiator filler cap tester. Replace the cap if the valve opening pressure is outside the standard range. Valve opening pressure kPa (psi) 93.3 122.7 (13.5 17.8) Cap tester: J2446001 Adapter: J33984A Check the condition of the vacuum valve in the center of the valve seat side of the cap. If considerable rust or dirt is found, or if the valve seat cannot be moved by hand, clean or replace the cap. Valve opening vacuum kPa (psi) 0 6.9 (0 1.0)
Flushing the Radiator

Thoroughly wash the inside of the radiator and the engine coolant passages with cold water and mild detergent. Remove all signs of scale and rust.
Cooling System Leakage Check

Use a radiator cap tester to force air into the radiator through the filler neck at the specified pressure of 150 kPa (22 psi) with a cap tester: D Leakage from the radiator D Leakage from the coolant pump D Leakage from the water hoses D Check the rubber hoses for swelling.
6B10

7. Connect battery ground cable. 8. Pour engine coolant up to filler neck of radiator, and up to MAX mark of reserve tank.
Cap tester: J2446001 Adapter: J33984A
110RX002
110RW012
Installation
1. Install rubber cushions on both sides of radiator bottom. 2. Install radiator assembly with hose, taking care not to damage the radiator core with a fan blade. 3. Connect reserve tank hose (4). 4. Install lower fan guide (3). 5. Connect radiator inlet hose and outlet hose to the engine. 6. Connect oil cooler hose (1) to automatic transmission.
Important operation (in case of 100% engine coolant change) procedure for filling with engine coolant.
Engine Coolant Filling Up Procedure

1. Make sure that the engine is cool. WARNING: WHEN THE COOLANT IS HEATED TO A HIGH TEMPERATURE, BE SURE NOT TO LOOSEN OR REMOVE THE RADIATOR CAP. OTHERWISE YOU MIGHT GET SCALDED BY HOT VAPOR OR BOILING WATER. TO OPEN THE RADIATOR CAP, PUT A PIECE OF THICK CLOTH ON THE CAP AND LOOSEN THE CAP SLOWLY TO REDUCE THE PRESSURE WHEN THE COOLANT HAS BECOME COOLER. 2. Open radiator cap pour coolant up to filler neck. 3. Pour coolant into reservoir tank up to MAX line. 4. Tighten radiator cap and start the engine. After idling for 2 to 3 minutes, stop the engine and reopen radiator cap. If the water level is lower, replenish. 5. After replenishing with coolant tighten radiator cap, warm up the engine at about 2000 rpm. Set heater adjustment to the highest temperature position, and let the coolant circulate also into heater water system. 6. Check to see the thermometer, continuously idle for 5 minutes and stop the engine. 7. When the engine has been cooled, check filler neck for water level and replenish if required. Should extreme shortage of coolant is found, check the coolant system and reservoir tank hose for leakage. 8. Pour coolant into the reservoir tank up to MAX line.
110RX001
6B11
Drive Belt and Cooling Fan

Drive Belt and Associated Parts
015RW005
Legend (1) Crankshaft Pulley (2) Generator (3) Power Steering Pump
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Water Pump and Cooling Fan Pulley Idle Pulley Tension Pulley Drive Belt
The drive belt adjustment is not required as automatic drive belt tensioner is equipped.
Installation
Install cooling fan assembly and tighten bolts/nuts to the specified torque. Torque : 22 Nm (16 lb ft) for fan pulley and fan bracket. Torque : 7.5 Nm (66.4 lb in) for fan and clutch assembly. NOTE: Fan belts for 6VD1 Gasoline Engine mounted on 98MY Rodeo(UE) have been brought into one. As a result, the rotating direction of a fan belt is opposite to the direction of cooling fan for 93 to 97MY 6VD1 with no interchangeability. Therefore, incorrect installation of a fan may cause the air to flow in the opposite direction, thus resulting in poor performance of the air conditioner and an increase in engine water temperature.
Removal
Move the tension pulley drive belt loosen side, remove the drive belt.
Inspection
Check drive belt for wear or damage, and replace with a new one as necessary.
6B12

M/T Cooling system Radiator Heat radiation capacity Heat radiation area Radiator front area Radiator dry weight Radiator cap valve opening pressure Engine coolant capacity Engine coolant pump Delivery Pump speed Thermostat Valve opening temperature Engine coolant total capacity 42N (9.4lb) 2.5lit (0.6 US gal) A/T Engine coolant forced circulation Tube type corrugated (2 tube in row) 70,000 kcal/h 9.74m@ (104.8ft@) 0.263m@ (2.83ft@) 45N (10.1lb) 2.4lit (0.6 US gal) 93.3 122.7kpa (13.5 17.8psi) Centrifugal impeller type 300 (317) or more 5000 50 rpm Wax pellet type with air hole 74.5 78.5C (166.1 173.3F) 11.1lit (2.93 US gal) 10.0lit (2.64 US gal) 77,800 kcal/h 11.74m@ (126.4ft@)
E06RW004
6B13
Special Tool
J2446001 Tester; radiator cap
J33984A Adapter; radiator cap
SECTION
ENGINE FUEL (6VD1 3.2L)
RODEO
6C1
ENGINE
ENGINE FUEL FOR LONG WHEEL BASE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . InTank Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tube / Quick Connector Fittings . . . . . Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cautions During Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C1 6C2 6C3 6C4 6C4 6C4 6C5 6C5 6C5 6C5 6C6 6C6 6C6 6C7 6C7 6C7 6C7 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reuse of QuickConnector. . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembling Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tank and Associated Parts. . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Gauge Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C7 6C8 6C8 6C9 6C9 6C9 6C9 6C9 6C10 6C10 6C10 6C10 6C10 6C10 6C11 6C11
Service Precaution
6C2
General Description
140R100026
Legend (1) Fuel Filler Cap (2) Fuel Tank (3) Rollover Valve (4) Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly (5) Fuel Filter (6) Fuel Rail Right (7) Right Bank (8) Fuel Rail Left (9) Left Bank EndOFCallout
(10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18)
Fuel Pressure Control Valve Common Chamber Duty Solenoid Valve Throttle Valve Canister Vent Hose Vent Solenoid Cut Valve Separator Shut off Valve (With Over Pressure Relief Valve)

When working on the fuel system, there are several things to keep in mind: Any time the fuel system is being worked on, disconnect the battery ground cable except for those tests where battery voltage is required. Always keep a dry chemical extinguisher near the work area. (Class B) fire
6C3
Fuel Metering
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is in complete control of this fuel delivery system during normal driving conditions. The intake manifold function, like that of a diesel, is used only to let air into the engine. The fuel is injected by separate injectors that are mounted over the intake manifold. The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor measures the changes in the intake manifold pressure which result from engine load and speed changes, which the MAP sensor converts to a voltage output. This sensor generates the voltage to change corresponding to the flow of the air drawn into the engine. The changing voltage is transformed into an electric signal and provided to the PCM. With receipt of the signals sent from the MAP sensor, Intake Air Temperature sensor and others, the PCM determines an appropriate fuel injection pulse width feeding such information to the fuel injector valves to affect an appropriate air/fuel ratio. The Multiport Fuel Injection system utilizes an injection system where the injectors turn on at every crankshaft revolution. The PCM controls the injector on time so that the correct amount of fuel is metered depending on driving conditions. Two interchangeable O rings are used on the injector that must be replaced when the injectors are removed. The fuel rail is attached to the top of the intake manifold and supplies fuel to all the injectors. Fuel is recirculated through the rail continually while the engine is running. This removes air and vapors from the fuel as well as keeping the fuel cool during hot weather operation. The fuel pressure control valve that is mounted on the fuel rail maintains a pressure differential across the injectors under all operating conditions. It is accomplished by controlling the amount of fuel that is recirculated back to the fuel tank based on engine demand. See Section Driveability and Emission for more information and diagnosis.
Replace all pipes with the same pipe and fittings that were removed. Clean and inspect O rings. Replace if required. Always relieve the line pressure before servicing any fuel system components. Do not attempt repairs on the fuel system until you have read the instructions and checked the pictures relating to that repair. Adhere to all Notices and Cautions. All gasoline engines are designed to use only unleaded gasoline. Unleaded gasoline must be used for proper emission control system operation. Its use will also minimize spark plug fouling and extend engine oil life. Using leaded gasoline can damage the emission control system and could result in loss of emission warranty coverage. All cars are equipped with an Evaporative Emission Control System. The purpose of the system is to minimize the escape of fuel vapors to the atmosphere.
6C4
Fuel Filter
Removal
CAUTION: When repair to the fuel system has been completed, start engine and check the fuel system for loose connection or leakage. For the fuel system diagnosis, see Section Driveability and Emission. 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove Fuel filler cap(1). 5. Remove fuel filter(3).
041RW003
Legend (1) Fuel Hose (2) Fuel Filter Fixing Bolt (3) Fuel Filter EndOFCallout
140R100023
Legend (1) Fuel Filler Cap (2) Receive Rubber Drain EndOFCallout 3. Disconnect fuel hoses(1) from fuel filter on both engine side and fuel tank side. 4. Fuel filter fixing bolt(2). Remove the fuel filter fixing bolt(2) on fuel filter holder.
Inspection
1. Replace the fuel filter if the fuel leaks from fuel filter body or if the fuel filter body itself is damaged. 2. Replace the filter if it is clogged with dirt or sediment. 3. Check clogged drain port of the receive rubber by the foreign material, repair or clear if found clog it.
6C5
Installation
1. Install the fuel filter in the proper direction. 2. Install fuel filter holder fixing bolt. 3. Connect fuel hoses on engine side(1) and fuel tank side(2).
Fuel Pump Flow Test

If reduction of fuel supply is suspected, perform the following checks. 1. Make sure that there is fuel in the tank. 2. With the engine running, check the fuel feed pipe and hose from fuel tank to injector for evidence of leakage. Retighten, if pipe or hose connection is loose. Also, inspect bent or kink fuel pipes and hoses. 3. Insert the hose from fuel feed pipe into a clean container, and check for fuel pump flow rate. 4. Connect the pump relay terminals with a jumper wire(1) as shown and start the fuel pump to measure delivery.
041RW001
4. Install fuel filler cap 5. Connect the battery ground cable.
Inspection
After installation, start engine and check for fuel leakage.
InTank Fuel Filter

The filter is located on the lower end of fuel pickup tube in the fuel tank. The fuel filter prevents dirt and water the fuel system not unless the filter is submerged in water. The fuel filter is maintenance free, that requires no maintenance. Excess water and sediment in the tank restricts fuel supply to the engine, resulting in engine stall. If this happens, the fuel tank would need to be cleaned thoroughly.
140R100013
CAUTION: Never generate sparks when connecting a jumper wire. Delivery Times 15 seconds Delivery 0.38 liters minimum
If the measure value is out of standard, conduct the pressure test.
Pressure test
For the pressure test to the fuel system, see Section 6E Fuel Control System.
6C6
Fuel Pump
Fuel Pump and Associated Parts
140R200008
Legend (1) Fuel Feed Port (2) Fuel Tube/Quick Connector (3) Fuel Return Port (4) Fuel Pump and Sender (FPS) Assembly EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Connector; Fuel Feed Pump Connector; Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Retainer (Fuel Pump Lock) Fuel Tank Assembly Seal; Fuel Pump
Removal
CAUTION: When repair to the fuel system has been completed, start engine and check the fuel system for loose connection or leakage. For the fuel system diagnosis, see SectionDriveability and Emission. 1. Remove fuel tank assembly(8). Refer to Fuel Tank Removal in this section. 2. Remove Fuel Tube/Quick Connector (2). NOTE: Refer to Fuel Tube/Quick Connector Fittings in this section when performing any repairs. 3. Remove the retainer (7) with tool J39765 and remove the fuel pump and sender (FPS) assembly (4).
140R100035

NOTE: After removing pump assembly (4), cover fuel tank to prevent any dust entering. 2. Install Fuel Tube/Quick Connector (2).
6C7
Installation
1. Install FPS assembly(4) with retainer (7) and new seal; fuel pump (9) by J39765.
NOTE: Refer to Fuel Tube/Quick Connector Fittings in this section when performing any repairs. 3. Install fuel tank assembly(8). Refer to Fuel Tank Installation.
Fuel Tube / Quick Connector Fittings

Precautions
Do not light a match or create a flame. Keep flames away from your work area to prevent flammable materials from catching fire. Disconnect battery ground cable to prevent electrical shorts. Pre-treat piping system or associated parts from thermal damage or from spattering when welding or similar heat-generating work.
Removal
1. Open the fuel cap to relieve the fuel pressure in the tank. Use compressed air to remove any dirt on the fuel quick connect fittings prior to disconnecting the fittings.
Cautions During Work
141R100002
When disconnecting the fuel pipe, cover the area with a cloth to prevent fuel from splashing as the fuel pipe may still have some pressure in it.
140R100032
Legend (1) O-ring (2) Port (3) Connector (4) Plastic Tube EndOFCallout Do not expose the assembly to battery electrolyte or do not wipe the assembly with a cloth used to wipe off spilt battery electorolyte. Piping that has been splattered with battery electrolyte or battery electrolyte soaked cloth that was wiped on the piping cannot be used.
6C8

After cleaning the port, insert it straight into the connector until it clicks. After it clicks, try pulling it out to make sure that it is not drawn and is securely locked.
2. For removal of the quick connector, hold the quick connector in one hand, and pull out the connentor with the other hand while pressing the square relieve button of the connector, as illustrated.
140R100037
140R100036
NOTE: Do not use tools of any kind. Only use bare hands when disconnecting the connector. Use a lubricant (light oil) and/or push and pull the connector until the pipe is disconnected. Cover the connectors that was removed with a plastic bag, to prevent dust or rain water from entering.
Assembling Advice
By applying engine oil or light oil to the pipe, port makes pipe assembly easier. The pipe assembly should take place immediately after applying oil (to prevent dust from sticking to the pipe surface which may decrease sealing ability). Test/Inspection After Assembling 1. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position and listen for pump start-up sound. Inspect for leaks, the fuel pressure will increase as the fuel pump is actuated. 3. Perform leak inspection (step 2) several times. 4. Start the engine and observe the engine idle speed. The presence of dirt in the fuel system may affect the fuel injection system.
140R100028
Reuse of QuickConnector
Replace the port and connector if scratch, dent or crack is found. Remove any dirt build up on the port when installing the connector. Replace the connector, if there is any forms of rust, dent, scratch.
6C9
Fuel Pump Relay

General Description
In order to control the FPS operation, the FPS relay is provided. When the starter switch is turned to ON position, the FPS relay operates the FPS for 2 seconds. When the key is turned to START position, the Engine Control Module receives the reference pulse from the Ignition Control Module and it operates the relay, again causing the FPS to feed fuel.
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank and Associated Parts
140R200024
Legend (1) Fuel Tank Assembly (2) Fuel Tank Fixing Bolt (QTY: 5) (3) Fuel Tank Fixing Nut (QTY: 1) (4) Separator Fixing Bolt (QTY: 2) (5) Fuel Filler Hose EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Fuel Vent Hose Fuel Feed Hose Fuel Return Hose Tank Pressure Sensor Connector Fuel Feed Pump Connector
Removal
CAUTION: When repair to the fuel system has been completed, start engine and check the fuel system for loose connection or leakage. For the fuel system diagnosis, see SectionDriveability and Emission. 1. Drain the fuel from the fuel tank, refer to the Fuel Pump Flow Test in this section. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable.
3. Loosen fuel filler cap to reduce the pressure in fuel tank. 4. Support underneath of the fuel tank assembly (1) with a lifter. 5. Disconnect fuel feed hose (7) and fuel return hose (8) near the fuel filter. NOTE: Plug both ends of the fuel hoses to prevent fuel leakage.
6C10

tighten the five fixing bolts (2) and one nut (3) to the specified torque. Torque: 68Nm (50lbft) 3. Install the separator and tighten two bolts (4). Torque: 10Nm (95lbin) 4. Connect fuel filler hose (5) and fuel vent hose and clip them firmly. 5. Connect fuel feed hose (7) and fuel return hose (8), and clip them firmly. 6. Tighten fuel filler cap until at least three clicks are heard. 7. Connect battery ground cable.
6. Disconnect fuel filler hose (5) and fuel vent hose (6) at the fuel filler neck. NOTE: Cover fuel hoses to prevent any dust entering. 7. Remove two bolts (4) and remove separator. 8. Remove the five fuel tank assembly fixing bolts (2) and one nut (3). 9. Lower the tank and connectors (9, 10). disconnect the wiring
Installation
1. Raise the fuel tank assembly (1) and connect the wiring connectors (9, 10). 2. Install fuel tank assembly along with protectors and
Fuel Gauge Unit

Refer to Fuel Pump in this section for removal and installation of the Fuel Gauge Unit, since the fuel gauge unit is linked to the fuel pump and sender assembly.
Fuel Filler Cap

General Description
A vacuum valve and pressure valve are built into the fuel filler cap which adjusts the fuel pressure in the fuel tank to prevent fuel tank damage.
Inspection
The fuel filler cap must be inspected for seal condition. The fuel filler cap must be replaced if found defective. CAUTION: A replacement fuel filler cap must be the same as the original. The fuel filler cap valve was designed primarily for this application and must be replaced with the same type or decreased engine performance may occur.
140R100029
Legend (1) Vacuum Valve (2) Pressure Valve (3) Seal Ring EndOFCallout
6C11

140R200023
Special Tool
J39765 Remover; fuel pump retainer
SECTION
ENGINE ELECTRICAL (6VD1 3.2L)
RODEO
6D11
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6D11 6D12 6D12 6D12 6D13 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 6D13 6D14 6D14 6D15
Service Precaution
6D12
Battery
General Description
There are six battery fluid caps on the top of the battery. These are covered by a paper label. The battery is completely sealed except for the six small vent holes on the side. These vent holes permit the escape of small amounts of gas generated by the battery. This type of battery has the following advantages over conventional batteries: 1. There is no need to add water during the entire service life of the battery. 2. The battery protects itself against overcharging. The battery will refuse to accept an extensive charge. (A conventional battery will accept an excessive charge, resulting in gassing and loss of battery fluid.) 3. The battery is much less vulnerable to self discharge than a conventional type battery.
3. Fluid Level Check

The fluid level should be between the upper level line(2) and lower level line(3) on side of battery. a. CORRECT FLUID LEVEL Charge the battery. b. BELOW LOWER LEVEL Replace battery.
Diagnosis
1. Visual Inspection
Inspect the battery for obvious physical damage, such as a cracked or broken case, which would permit electrolyte loss. Replace the battery if obvious physical damage is discovered during inspection. Check for any other physical damage and correct it as necessary.
061RX001
4. Voltage Check
1. Put voltmeter test leads to battery terminals. a. VOLTAGE IS 12.4V OR ABOVE Go to Step 5 Load Test. b. VOLTAGE IS UNDER 12.4V Go to procedure (2) below. 2. Determine fast charge amperage from specification. (See Main Data and Specifications in this section). Fast charge battery for 30 minutes at amperage rate no higher than specified value. Take voltage and amperage readings after charge. a. VOLTAGE IS ABOVE 16V AT BELOW 1/3 OF AMPERAGE RATE Replace battery. b. VOLTAGE IS ABOVE 16V AT ABOVE 1/3 OF AMPERAGE RATE Drop charging voltage to 15V and charge for 10 15 hours. Then go to Step 5 Load Test. c. VOLTAGE IS BETWEEN 12V AND 16V Continue charging at the same rate for an additional 31/2 hours. Then go to Step 5 Load Test. d. VOLTAGE BELOW 12V Replace Battery.
2. Hydrometer Check
There is a builtin hydrometer (Charge test indicator(1)) at the top of the battery. It is designed to be used during diagnostic procedures. Before trying to read the hydrometer, carefully clean the upper battery surface. If your work area is poorly lit, additional light may be necessary to read the hydrometer. a. BLUE RING OR DOT VISIBLE(5) Go to Step 4. b. BLUE RING OR DOT NOT VISIBLE(4) Go to Step 3.
061RX001
6D13
5. Load Test
1. Connect a voltmeter and a battery load tester across the battery terminals. 2. Apply 300 ampere load for 15 seconds to remove surface charge from the battery. Remove load. 3. Wait 15 seconds to let battery recover. Then apply specified load from specifications (See Main Data and Specifications in this section). Read voltage after 15 seconds, then remove load. a. VOLTAGE DOES NOT DROP BELOW THE MINIMUM LISTED IN THE TABLE The battery is good and should be returned to service. b. VOLTAGE IS LESS THAN MINIMUM LISTED Replace battery. ESTIMATED TEMPERATURE F 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 C 21 16 10 4 1 7 12 18 MINIMUM VOLTAGE V 9.6 9.5 9.4 9.3 9.1 8.9 8.7 8.5
Jump Starting
Jump Starting with an Auxiliary (Booster) Battery
CAUTION: Never push or tow the vehicle in an attempt to start it. Serious damage to the emission system as well as other vehicle parts will result. Treat both the discharged battery and the booster battery with great care when using jumper cables. Carefully follow the jump starting procedure, being careful at all times to avoid sparking. WARNING: FAILURE TO CAREFULLY FOLLOW THE JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE COULD RESULT IN THE FOLLOWING: 1. Serous personal injury, particularly to your eyes. 2. Property damage from a battery explosion, battery acid, or an electrical fire. 3. Damage to the electronic components of one or both vehicles particularly. Never expose the battery to an open flame or electrical spark. Gas generated by the battery may catch fire or explode. Remove any rings, watches, or other jewelry before working around the battery. Protect your eyes by wearing an approved set of goggles. Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with your eyes or skin. Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with fabrics or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a highly corrosive acid. Should battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin, fabric, or a painted surface, immediately and thoroughly rinse the affected area with clean tap water. Never allow metal tools or jumper cables to come in contact with the positive battery terminal, or any other metal surface of the vehicle. This will protect against a short circuit. Always keep batteries out of reach of young children.
The battery temperature must be estimated by feel and by the temperature the battery has been exposed to for the preceding few hours.
Battery Charging
Observe the following safety precautions when charging the battery: 1. Never attempt to charge the battery when the fluid level is below the lower level line on the side of the battery. In this case, the battery must be replaced. 2. Pay close attention to the battery during charging procedure. Battery charging should be discontinued or the rate of charge reduced if the battery feels hot to the touch. Battery charging should be discontinued or the rate of charge reduced if the battery begins to gas or spew electrolyte from the vent holes. 3. In order to more easily view the hydrometer blue dot or ring, it may be necessary to jiggle or tilt the battery. 4. Battery temperature can have a great effect on battery charging capacity. 5. The sealed battery used on this vehicle may be either quick charged or slow charged in the same manner as other batteries. Whichever method you decide to use, be sure that you completely charge the battery. Never partially charge the battery.
Jump Starting Procedure

1. Set the vehicle parking brake. If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, place the selector level in the PARK position. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, place the shift lever in the NEUTRAL position. Turn OFF the ignition. Turn OFF all lights and any other accessory requiring electrical power. 2. Look at the builtin hydrometer. If the indication area of the builtin hydrometer is completely clear, do not try to jump start.
6D14
3. Attach the end of one jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery. Attach the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery. Do not allow the vehicles to touch each other. This will cause a ground connection, effectively neutralizing the charging procedure. Be sure that the booster battery has a 12 volt rating. 4. Attach one end of the remaining cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery. Attach the other end of the same cable to a solid engine ground (such as the air conditioning compressor bracket or the generator mounting bracket) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. The ground connection must be at least 450 mm (18 in.) from the battery of the vehicle whose battery is being charged. WARNING: NEVER ATTACH THE END OF THE JUMPER CABLE DIRECTLY TO THE NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF THE DEAD BATTERY. 5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the good battery. Make sure that all unnecessary electrical accessories have been turned OFF. 6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery. 7. To remove the jumper cables, follow the above directions in reverse order. Be sure to first disconnect the negative cable from the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Battery Removal
061RX002
1. Remove negative cable (1). 2. Remove positive cable (2). 3. Remove retainer screw and rods (3). 4. Remove retainer (4). 5. Remove battery (5).
Battery Installation
1. Install battery (5). 2. Install retainer (4). 3. Install retainer screw and rods (3). NOTE: Make sure that the rod is hooked on the body side. 4. Install positive cable (2). 5. Install negative cable (1).
6D15

Model Voltage (V) ColdCranking Performance (Amp) Reserve Capacity (Min) Load Test (Amp) BCI Group No. 24R600 12 600 118 300 24
SECTION
IGNITION SYSTEM (6VD1 3.2L)
RODEO
6D21
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spark Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6D21 6D22 6D22 6D23 6D23 6D23 6D23 6D25 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankshaft Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6D25 6D25 6D25 6D26 6D26 6D26 6D27
Service Precaution
6D22
General Description
Ignition is done by the electronic ignition (El) that directly fires the spark plugs from ignition coils through spark plug wires without using a distributor. The firing orders are selected No.1, No.2, No.3, No.4, No.5, and No6. Since the cylinder on exhaust stroke requires less energy to fire its ignition plug, energy from the ignition coils can be utilized to fire the mating cylinder on compression stroke. After additional 360 rotation, respective cylinder strokes are reversed. The EI consists of six ignition coils,ignition control module, crank position sensor, powertrain control module (PCM) and other components. The ignition coils are connected with the PCM by means of a 80 pin connector. The ignition control module turns on/off the primary circuit of ignition coils, and also it controls the ignition timing at the engine speed below 538 rpm. A notch in the timing disc on the crankshaft activates the crank position sensor which then sends information such as firing order and starting timing of each ignition coil to the PCM. Further, the El employs ignition control (IC) to control similar to a distributor system. By receiving signals such as crank position,engine speed, water temperature and Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP), the PCM controls the ignition timing.
D06RY00037
Diagnosis
Refer to Section Drivability and Emissions for the diagnosis to electronic ignition system (El system).
6D23
Ignition Coil
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Ignition coil connector and ignition coil. D Disconnect three connector from ignition coil. D Remove harness bracket bolt on cylinder head cover. D Remove fixing bolts on ignition coil. Measure resistance of ignition coil assembly, and replace the ignition coil assembly if its value exceeds the standard.
060RW006
Installation
1. Install the ignition coil assembly (3). Connect ignition coil connector (1) and ignition coil (3), then tighten bolt (2) to the specified torque. Torque: 4 Nm (35 lb in)
060RY023
Legend (1) Ignition Coil Connector (2) Bolt (3) Ignition Coil Assembly

Check the ignition coil assembly for insulation. Check terminals for corrosion or damage, and replace as necessary. Measuring resistance of ignition coil assembly. Terminal No. 1 to 2 1 to 3 2 to 3 Limit Without 0 ohm or infinity maximum ohm. Same as above Same as above
060RY023
6D24
CAUTION: Ignition coil assembly #6 is different from ignition coil assembly from #1 to #5. Ignition coil assembly #6 is short type. So, note it when installing ignition coil assembly of #6.
060RY00002
Legend (1) Long type Ignition Coil Assemblies (#1 #5) (2) Short type Ignition Coil Assembly (#6) 2. Connect battery ground cable.
6D25
Spark Plug
Removal
1. Remove spark plugs.
Burning Electrodes
This fault is characterized by scorched or heavily oxidized electrode or blistered insulator nose. Possible causes: D Too lean mixture D Improper heat value

The spark plug affects entire engine performance and therefore its inspection is very important. D Check electrode and insulator for presence of cracks, and replace if any. D Check electrode for wear, and replace if necessary. D Check gasket for damage, and replace if necessary. D Measure insulation resistance with an ohmmeter, and replace if faulty. D Adjust spark plug gap to 1.05 mm (0.04 in).
Measuring Insulation Resistance

D Measure insulation resistance using a 500 volt megaohm meter. D Replace spark plugs if measured value is out of standard. Insulation resistance: 50 MW or more
011RS010 011RS011
NOTE: Do not adjust the spark plugs gap without new spark plugs. Do not damage to tip of spark plugs. Do not cleaning the spark plugs. If require the cleaning it due to heavy dirt, it is allowed only 20 seconds to be used spark plug cleaner. D Check fuel and electrical systems if spark plug is extremely dirty. D Use spark plugs having low heat value (hot type plug) if fuel and electrical systems are normal. D Use spark plugs having high heat value (cold type plug) if insulator and electrode are extremely burned.
Installation
1. Spark plugs D Tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Torque: 18 Nm (13 lb ft)
Sooty Spark Plugs

Much deposit of carbon or oil on the electrode and insulator of spark plug reduces the engine performance. Possible causes: D Too rich mixture D Presence of oil in combustion chamber D Incorrectly adjusted spark plug gap
6D26
Crankshaft Position Sensor

Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable 2. Wiring connector from crankshaft position sensor. 3. Remove crankshaft position sensor from cylinder block.
Installation
1. Install crankshaft position sensor into the cylinder block. Before installation,apply small amount of engine oil to the Oring. Torque: 10 Nm (87 lb in) 2. Reconnect wiring connector to crankshaft position sensor.
012RS008
6D27

Ignition System Ignition Form Spark Plug Type K16PRP11 RC10PYP4 PK16PR11 1.05 mm (0.04 in) 18 Nm (13lb ft) Electronic Ignition System (El system) with Crankshaft position Sensor
Plug gap Torque
E06R100003
SECTION
STARTING AND CHARGING SYSTEM (6VD1 3.2L)
RODEO
6D31
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6D31 6D32 6D32 6D34 6D35 6D35 6D35 6D37 6D38 6D310 6D313 6D314 6D317 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General OnVehicle Inspection . . . . . . . . . Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bench Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 6D317 6D317 6D318 6D318 6D318 6D319 6D319 6D320 6D321 6D323 6D324 6D325
Service Precaution
6D32
Starting System
General Description
Cranking Circuit
The cranking system consists of a battery, starter, starter switch, starter relay, etc. These main components are connected.
Starter
The cranking system employs a magnetic type reduction starter in which the motor shaft is also used as a pinion shaft. When the starter switch is turned on, the contacts of magnetic switch are closed, and the armature rotates. At the same time, the plunger is attracted, and the pinion is pushed forward by the shift lever to mesh with the ring gear. Then, the ring gear runs to start the engine. When the engine starts and the starter switch is turned off, the plunger returns, the pinion is disengaged from the ring gear, and the armature stops rotation. When the engine speed is higher than the pinion, the pinion idles, so that the armature is not driven.
6D33
D08R200066
6D34
Diagnosis
Condition Starter does not run Possible cause Charging failure Battery Failure Terminal connection failure Starter switch failure Starter relay failure Starter failure Correction Repair charging system Replace Battery Repair or replace terminal connector and/or wiring harness Repair or replace starter switch Replace Repair or replace starter
6D35
Starter
Removal
1. Battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect Heated O2 Sensor connector (1). 3. Remove exhaust front left pipe(2).
Installation
1. Install starter assembly(4). 2. Install mounting bolts and tighten bolts to specified torque(3). Torque: 40 Nm (30 lb ft) 3. Reconnect the connectors to terminals 50 (2) tighten terminals 30 (1) to specified torque. Torque: 9 Nm (78 lb in)
150R100011
4. Disconnect starter wiring connector from terminals 30 (1) and 50 (2). 5. Remove starter assembly mounting bolts on inside and outside(3). 6. Remove starter assembly (4) toward the bottom of engine.
065RY00050
Legend (1) Terminal 30 (2) Terminal 50 (3) Fixing Bolts (4) Starter Assembly EndOFCallout 4. Install exhaust front left pipe (2) and tighten bolts and nuts to specified torque. Stud Nuts Torque: 67 Nm (49 lb ft) Bolts Torque: 43 Nm (32 lb ft)
065RY00050
Legend (1) Terminal 30 (2) Terminal 50 (3) Fixing Bolts (4) Starter Assembly
E nd OFCa llou t
6D36
5. Connect two Heated O2 Sensor connector (1).
150R100011
6. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
6D37
Disassembled View
065R100012
Legend (1) Lead Wire (2) Through Bolt (3) Yoke Assembly (4) Yoke Cover (5) Brush and Brush Holder (6) Armature EndOFCallout
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
Housing Over Running Clutch Return Spring Steel Ball Idle Pinion Retainer Magnetic Switch
6D38
Disassembly
1. Remove the lead wire (1) from the magnetic switch. 2. Remove the through bolts (2).
065RY00055
Legend (1) Spring (2) Brush

065RY00053
Legend (1) Lead Wire (2) Through Bolt EndOFCallout 3. Remove the yoke from the magnetic. 4. Remove the yoke cover. 5. Use the long nose pliers to remove the brush and brush holder.
EndOFCallout 6. Remove the armature. 7. Remove the housing. 8. Remove the overrunning clutch from the housing.
065RY00056
065RY00054

9. Remove the return spring from the magnetic switch.
6D39
11. Remove the idle pinion from the magnetic switch.
065R100014
065R100015
10. Remove the steel ball from the overrunning clutch.
12. Remove the retainer from the magnetic switch.
065RY00058
065R100016
13. Remove the magnetic switch.
6D310

Check for continuity between commutator and shaft. Also, check for continuity between commutator and armature core, armature core and shaft. Replace commutator if there is continuity (i.e., internally grounded).

Armature
Measure the outer diameter of commutator, and replace with a new one if it is out of the limit. Standard: 30 mm (1.1811 in) Limit: 29 mm (1.1417 in)
065RS016
Measure runout of the commutator with a dial gauge. Repair or replace, if it exceeds the limit. Limit: 0.4 mm (0.0157 in)
065RS014
Check for continuity between segment and segment on the commutator. Replace commutator if there is no continuity (i.e., disconnected).
065RY00061
065RS015

Polish the commutator surface with sandpaper #500 to #600 if it is rough.
6D311
Brush
Measure the length of brush. Replace with a new one, if it is below the limit. Standard: 15 mm (0.5906 in) Limit: 11 mm (0.43 in)
065RW012
Measure the depth of insulator in commutator. Replace, if it is below the limit. Standard: 0.45 mm to 0.75 mm (0.0177 in to 0.0295 in) Limit: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
065RW014
Brush Holder
Check for continuity between brush holder (+) (4) and base (). Replace, if there is continuity (i.e., insulation is broken).
065RY00070
Legend (1) Insulator (2) Depth of Insulator (3) Commutator Segments EndOFCallout
065RW015
6D312

3. Return test Connect the ground (-) to terminal 50 and magnetic switch body. Verify that the pinion pulls out when the battery (+) pole is connected to terminal C and the pinion pulls away when the lead wire is disconnected from terminal 50.
Brush Spring
Use spring balancer to measure the spring setting force when remove the spring from the brush. Standard: 17.6523.54 N (38.951.9lb) Limit: 11.77 N (25.9lb)
Magnetic Switch
Temporarilly connect the magnetic switch between the overrunning clutch and housing. Perform the steps described below in 3 to 5 seconds. 1. Pull in test Connect the ground (-) to terminal C and magnetic switch body. Verify that the pinion pulls out when the battery (+) pole is connected to terminal 50.
065R100019
Field Coil
1. Check for continuity between the end of the field coil and yoke body. Replace the field coil, if there is continuity.
065R100017
2. Hold in test Observe that the pinion stays when the lead wire is disconnected from terminal C.
065RY00065
065R100018

2. Check continuity between the lead wire of terminal C and brush. Replace the yoke assembly, if there is no continuity.
6D313
065RY00068
Reassembly
065RY00066
Overrunning Clutch
1. Visual check for excessive wear or damage. 2. Test the pinion rotation, it must rotate smoothly when rotated clockwise and it shouldn't rotate when turned counterclockwise.
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: Grease application places Bearing in rear cover Gears in reduction gear Sliding portion of pinion
065RY00067
Bearing
1. Inspect excessive wear or damage. Replace the bearing if an abnormal noise is heard under normal operating condition.
6D314

Model Rating Voltage Output Time Number of teeth of pinion Rotating direction(as viewed from pinion) Weight(approx.) Noload characteristics Condition: Voltage Current Speed Load characteristics Condition: Voltage/Torque Current Speed Locking characteristics Condition: Voltage Current Torque 2.4V Maximum 500A 11.8Nm or more 8.5V/13.2 Nm (113 lbin) Maximum 350A 1000rpm or more 11.5V 90A or less 3000rpm or more 12 V 1.4 Kw 30 sec 9 Clockwise 37 N Specification
STARTING AND CHARGING SYSTEM (6VD1 3.2L) Torque Specifications
6D315
065R200002
6D316
150R100012
6D317
Charging System
General Description
The IC integral regulator charging system and its main components are connected as shown in illustration. The regulator is a solid state type and it is mounted along with the brush holder assembly inside the generator installed on the rear end cover. The generator does not require particular maintenance such as voltage adjustment. The rectifier connected to the stator coil has diodes to transform AC voltage into DC voltage. This DC voltage is connected to the output terminal of generator.
F06RX002
General OnVehicle Inspection

A basic wiring diagram is shown in the illustration. When operating normally, the indicator bulb will come on when the switch is turned on, and will then go out when the engine starts. If the indicator operates abnormally, or if an undercharged or overcharged battery condition occurs, the following procedure may be used to diagnose the charging system. Remember that an undercharged battery is often caused by accessories being left on overnight, or by a defective switch which allows a bulb, such as a trunk or glove box light, to stay on.
detach harness at generator, ground L terminal lead. a. Lamp lights, replace or repair generator. b. Lamp dose not light, locate open circuit between grounding lead and ignition switch. Bulb may be open. 4. Switch on, engine running at moderate speed. Light should be off. If not, detach wiring harness at generator. a. If light goes off, replace or repair generator. b. If light stays on, check for grounded L terminal wire in harness. 5. Battery undercharged or overcharged. a. Detach wiring generator. harness connector from
Observe the following procedure:

1. Visually check belt and wiring. 2. Go to step 5. for vehicles without charge indicator light. 3. Switch on, engine stopped, light should be on. If not,
b. With switch on, engine not running connect voltmeter from ground to L terminal in wiring harness, and to IG terminal. If used. Wiring
6D318

f. Connect ammeter at generator output terminal. Turn on accessories, load battery with carbon pile to obtain maximum amperes output. Maintain voltage at 13.0V or above. 1. If within 15 amperes of rated output, generator is OK. 2. If not within 15 amperes of rated output, replace or repair generator.
harness may connect to either L or IG or both. c. Zero reading indicates open circuit between terminal and battery. Connect as required. d. Re-connect harness connector to generator, run engine at moderate speed, with electrical accessories turned off. e. Measure voltage across battery. If above 16.0V, replace or repair generator.
Generator
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench then remove drive belt (1). 3. Disconnect the wire from disconnect the connector (4). terminal B and
Inspection
1. Disconnect the wiring connector from generator. 2. With the engine stopped, turn starter switch to on and connect a voltmeter between connector terminal L (1) and ground or between terminal S (2) and ground.
4. Remove generator fixing bolt (3). 5. Remove generator assembly (2).
066RX002
If there is no voltage present, then perform appropriate repair.

060RW002
3. Reconnect the wiring connector to the generator, run the engine at must indicate idle speed, and turn off all electrical devices other than engine. 4. Measure battery voltage. If it exceeds 16V, repair or replace the generator. 5. Connect an ammeter to output terminal of generator, and measure output current under load by turning on the other electrical devices (eg., headlights). At this time the amperes must not be less than 15A and the voltage must not be less than 13V.
6D319
Installation
1. Install generator assembly to the position. 2. Install generator assembly and tighten the fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: M10 bolt: 41 Nm (30 Ibft)
M8 bolt: 21 Nm (15 Ibft) 3. Connect wiring harness connector and direct terminal B. 4. Move drive belt tensioner to loose side using wrench, then install drive belt to normal position. 5. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Disassembled View
066RW022
Legend (1) Pulley Nut (2) Pulley (3) Front Cover Assembly (4) Rotor Assembly (5) Stator Assembly (6) Through Bolt EndOFCallout
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Nut Terminal Insulator Rear Cover Assembly Rectifier Brush Holder Assembly Regulator Assembly
6D320

4. Remove the screws with bearing retainer from front cover and remove bearing.
Disassembly
1. Remove the through bolt. Insert the tip of a pry bar into the gaps between the front cover and the stator core. Pry apart and separate the front cover, rotor, the rear cover and stator. NOTE: Take care not to scratch or otherwise damage the stator coil with pry bar.
F06RT023
5. Remove the mounting nuts holding the B terminal, the diode, and the brush holder. 6. Separate the rear cover from the stator.
F06RT021
2. Clamp the rotor in a vise and then remove the nut and pulley. 3. Remove the rotor assembly from the front cover.
F06RT024
F06RT022

7. Remove bolts which secure stator terminal to rectifier terminal, and remove stator. Standard: 27mm (1.06in) Limit: 26mm (1.02in)
6D321
2. Measure the outside diameter of the slip rings.
066RS030
8. Remove Bolts which secure regulator, rectifier and brush-holder, and separate these parts. NOTE: Do not apply a shock or load to regulator, rectifier and brush holder.
066RS032
3. Check resistance between slip rings, and replace if there is no continuity. Standard: 3.759 or less
066RW025 066RS033

Rotor Assembly
1. Check the face of the slip rings for contamination and roughness. If found to be scored, dress with a fine sandpaper (#500 600). If found to be contaminated, clean with a cloth saturated with alcohol.
6D322

2. Check for continuity across one of the stator coils and stator core. If a continuity exists, replace the coil. Standard: More than 1M 9
4. Check for continuity between slip ring and rotor core. In case of continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
066RS017
Stator Coil
1. Check for continuity across the stator coils. If no continuity exists, replace the coils. Resistance value at 20 C. Standard: Approx. 0.079
066RS035
Brush
Measure the brush length. Replace the brush if it exceeds the limit. Standard: 18.0mm (0.709in) Limit: 5.5mm (0.217in)
066RS034
066RW024
STARTING AND CHARGING SYSTEM (6VD1 3.2L) Rectifier Assembly

1. Measure the resistance between each diode terminal and aluminum diode fin in forward and reverse directions with the connection of the tester leads switched. The diodes are normal if resistance is nearly zero ohms in one direction and is infinitely high in the other direction. 2. If a diode has no resistance or equal resistance in both directions, it is defective and should be replaced together with the holder.
6D323
with the variable resistor resistance held constant). The measured voltage should be within the specified (14.4 0.3 volts) limits. If it is not, the regulator must be replaced.
066RX003
Reassembly
To reassemble, follow the disassembly steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: NOTE:
066RS036
IC Regulator Assembly
Connect a variable resistor, two 12V batteries, a fixed resistor, and a voltmeter to the IC regulator as shown in illustration. a. Measuring equipment specifications 1. Fixed resistor (R1) : 10 Ohms /3W 2. Variable resistor (Rv) : 0-300 Ohms/12W 3. Batteries (BAT1, BAT2) : 12V (2 Batteries) 4. DC voltmeter : 0-50V/0.5 steps (4 Check points) b. Measuring procedure 1. Measure the voltage V1 across the first battery (BAT1). If the reading is between 10 and 13 volts, the battery is normal. 2. Measure the voltage V3 across both the batteries (BAT1, BAT2). If the reading is between 20 and 26 bolts, the batteries are normal. 3. Gradually increase the resistance of the variable resistor from zero. Measure the voltage V2 (the voltage across the F and E terminals). Check to see that the voltage across V1 changes at this time. If there is no change, the voltage regulator is faulty and must be replaced. 4. Measure the voltage at V4 (the voltage across the variable resistor center tap and terminal E
Never make battery connections with polarities reversed, or battery will be shorted via the diodes. This will cause damage to the diodes. Do not connect generator B terminal to ground; it is connected directly to the battery. This cable will burn if it is connected to ground. Make sure to disconnect the positive (+) terminal of the battery when quick-charging battery . Diodes may be damaged due to abnormal pulse voltage generated by the quick charger. When reassembling the front section to rear section, insert a stiff wire into hole in the rear face of the rear cover from the outboard side to support the brush in raised position, then insert the front section to which rotor is assembled. Reassemble parts carefully to be sure they fit into their original position, paying attention to the insulated portions. Wipe insulating tubes, washers and plates clean and install them in position carefully to avoid getting oil or grease on them.
6D324
1. Using a press with a socket wrench attached, reassemble rotor and rear end cover assembly in the front cover.
Bench Test
Conduct a bench test of the generator.
066RS022
066RS023
2. Install pulley on the rotor. Secure the pulley directly in the vise between two copper plates, and tighten nut to the specified torque. Torque: 111 Nm (82lbft)
Preparation
Remove generator from the vehicle (see Generator removal). 1. Secure generator to the bench test equipment and connect wires. Terminal IG for energization Terminal L for neutral (warning lamp) Terminal B for output 2. Conduct the generator characteristic test. Characteristics of generator are shown in illustration. Repair or replace the generator if its outputs are abnormal.
066RS010
066RX001
6D325

Battery voltage Rated output Direction of rotation (as viewed from pulley side) Rated rotation speed Maximum speed rpm rpm Clockwise 5000 18000 V A 12 90
SECTION
RODEO 6VD1 3.2L ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSIONS
RODEO
6E21
ENGINE
6VD1 3.2L ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSIONS
CONTENTS
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tightening Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagrams and Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Wiring Diagram (1 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Wiring Diagram (2 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Wiring Diagram (3 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Wiring Diagram (4 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Wiring Diagram (5 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Wiring Diagram (6 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Wiring Diagram (7 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Pinout Table, 80-Way Blue Connector Row F1 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Pinout Table, 80-Way Blue Connector Row F20 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Pinout Table, 80-Way Blue Connector Row F41 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Pinout Table, 80-Way Blue Connector Row F61 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Pinout Table, 80-Way Red Connector Row S1 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Pinout Table, 80-Way Red Connector Row S21 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Pinout Table, 80-Way Red Connector Row S41 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Pinout Table, 80-Way Red Connector Row S61 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Locators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undercarriage Component Locator . . . . . . Fuse and Relay Panel (Underhood Electrical Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensors and Miscellaneous Component Locators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Strategy-Based Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC Stored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No DTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Matching Symptom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Trouble Found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying Vehicle Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OBD II Serviceablity Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Control Information Label . . . . . Visual / Physical Engine Compartment Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Knowledge of Tools Required . . . . . . Serial Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E6 6E6 6E7 6E7 6E8 6E9 6E10 6E11 6E12 6E13 6E14 6E14 6E15 6E16 6E17 6E19 6E21 6E23 6E25 6E27 6E29 6E30 6E31 6E33 6E33 6E33 6E33 6E33 6E33 6E33 6E33 6E33 6E33 6E34 6E34 6E35 6E35 Class 2 Serial Data Communications . . . . . On-Board Diagnostic (OBD II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Board Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comprehensive Component Monitor Diagnostic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Status and Drive Cycle for Satisfying Federal Inspection/Maintenance (I/M 240) Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common OBD II Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Diagnostic Executive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decimal/Binary/Hexadecimal Conversions Verifying Vehicle Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Diagnostic Trouble Codes Using The Tech 2 Scan Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech 2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Procedure (For Example) . . . . . DTC Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC Information Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamps Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relays Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVAP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instruments Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGR Control Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Intake Manifold Solenoid Test . . . Injector Balance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotting Snapshot Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotting Graph Flow Chart (Plotting graph after obtaining vehicle information) . . . . . . Flow Chart for Snapshot Replay (Plotting Graph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary System-Based Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . Primary System-Based Diagnostic . . . . . . . Fuel Control Heated Oxygen Sensor . . . . . HO2S Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalyst Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensors and Diagnostic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Misfire Monitor Diagnostic Operation . . . . . . . Misfire Monitor Diagnostic Operation . . . . . Misfire Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E35 6E35 6E35 6E35
6E36 6E36 6E36 6E37 6E39 6E39 6E39 6E40 6E41 6E41 6E42 6E43 6E43 6E44 6E44 6E46 6E47 6E48 6E50 6E52 6E52 6E54 6E54 6E55 6E56 6E57 6E57 6E57 6E57 6E57 6E58 6E58 6E58
6E22

6E59 6E59 6E59 6E60 6E60 6E60 6E60 6E63 6E63 6E63 6E64 6E68 6E68 6E68 6E68 6E68 6E68 6E68 6E69 6E73 6E73 6E73 6E73 6E76 6E76 6E78 6E78 6E84 6E84 6E84 6E87 6E87 6E87 6E89 6E89 6E89 6E89 6E93 6E93 6E93 6E93 6E96 6E96 6E96 6E100 6E102 6E102 Test Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel System Electrical Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure . . . . . . . . . Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel System Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Output Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporative (EVAP) Emissions Canister Purge Valve Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0101 MAF System Performance . . . . DTC P0102 MAF Sensor Circuit Low Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0103 MAF Sensor Circuit High Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0106 MAP System Performance . . . . DTC P0107 MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0108 MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0112 IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0113 IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0117 ECT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0118 ECT Sensor Circuit High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0125 ECT Excessive Time to Closed Loop Fuel Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0128 Thermostat Insufficient Temperature for Stable Operation . . . . . . . . . DTC P0131 HO2S Circuit Low Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0132 HO2S Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0133 HO2S Slow Response Bank 1 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0134 HO2S Circuit Insufficient Activity Bank 1 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E102 6E107 6E108 6E108 6E108 6E108 6E111 6E112 6E112 6E112 6E115 6E116 6E116 6E117 6E120 6E120 6E122 6E122 6E124 6E124 6E124 6E127 6E131 6E134 6E137 6E140 6E143 6E146 6E149 6E152 6E155 6E158 6E161 6E164 6E166 6E169 6E172 6E176
Fuel Trim System Monitor Diagnostic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Trim System Monitor Diagnostic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Trim Cell Diagnostic Weights . . . . . . . On-Board Diagnostic (OBD II) System Check Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/C Clutch Control Circuit Diagnosis . . . . . . . Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/C Clutch Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Ignition System Diagnosis . . . . . . . EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid and EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Check of The Evaporative Emission Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Metering System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel System Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Injector Coil Test Procedure and Fuel Injector Balance Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . Test Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Injector Coil Test Procedure (Steps 1-6) and Injector Balance Test Procedure (Steps 7-11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Diagnosis Multiple PCM Information Sensor DTCs Set Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Diagnosis Engine Tech 2 Data Definitions and Ranges Typical Scan Data Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) . . . . . . . Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON Steady . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Reduced Power Lamp (RPL) . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduced Power Lamp (RPL) ON Steady . . Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Control System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Cranks But Will Not Run . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DTC P0135 HO2S Heater Circuit Bank 1 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0137 HO2S Circuit Low Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0138 HO2S Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0140 HO2S Circuit Insufficient Activity Bank 1 Sensor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0141 HO2S Heater Circuit Bank 1 Sensor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0151 HO2S Circuit Low Voltage Bank 2 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0152 HO2S Circuit High Voltage Bank 2 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0153 HO2S Slow Response Bank 2 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0154 HO2S Circuit Insufficient Activity Bank 2 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0155 HO2S Heater Circuit Open Bank 2 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0157 HO2S Circuit Low Voltage Bank 2 Sensor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0158 HO2S Circuit High Voltage Bank 2 Sensor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0160 HO2S Circuit Insufficient Activity Bank 2 Sensor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0161 HO2S Heater Circuit Bank 2 Sensor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0171 Fuel Trim System Lean Bank 1 . DTC P0172 Fuel Trim System Rich Bank 1 . DTC P0174 Fuel Trim System Lean Bank 2 . DTC P0175 Fuel Trim System Rich Bank 2 . DTC P0201 Injector 1 Control Circuit . . . . . . DTC P0202 Injector 2 Control Circuit . . . . . . DTC P0203 Injector 3 Control Circuit . . . . . . DTC P0204 Injector 4 Control Circuit . . . . . . DTC P0205 Injector 5 Control Circuit . . . . . . DTC P0206 Injector 6 Control Circuit . . . . . . DTC P0300 Engine Misfire Detected . . . . . . . DTC P0301 Cylinder Misfire Detected . . . . . . DTC P0302 Cylinder Misfire Detected . . . . . . DTC P0303 Cylinder Misfire Detected . . . . . . DTC P0304 Cylinder Misfire Detected . . . . . . DTC P0305 Cylinder Misfire Detected . . . . . . DTC P0306 Cylinder Misfire Detected . . . . . . DTC P0325 ION Sensing Module/ION Sensing Knock Intensity Circuit Fault . . . . . . DTC P0336 58X Reference Signal Circuit . . DTC P0337 CKP Sensor Circuit Low Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0351 Ignition 1 Control Circuit . . . . . . . DTC P0352 Ignition 2 Control Circuit . . . . . . . DTC P0353 Ignition 3 Control Circuit . . . . . . . DTC P0354 Ignition 4 Control Circuit . . . . . . . DTC P0355 Ignition 5 Control Circuit . . . . . . . 6E179 6E182 6E185 6E188 6E191 6E194 6E197 6E200 6E204 6E207 6E210 6E213 6E216 6E219 6E222 6E226 6E230 6E234 6E238 6E241 6E244 6E247 6E250 6E253 6E256 6E260 6E262 6E264 6E266 6E268 6E270 6E272 6E275 6E278 6E281 6E284 6E287 6E290 6E293 DTC P0356 Ignition 6 Control Circuit . . . . . . . DTC P0401 EGR Flow Insufficient . . . . . . . . . DTC P0402 EGR Pintle Crank Error . . . . . . . DTC P0404 EGR Open Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0405 EGR Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0406 EGR High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0420 TWC System Low Efficiency Bank 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0430 TWC System Low Efficiency Bank 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0440 EVAP System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0442 EVAP System Small Leak Detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0444 EVAP Purge Control Circuit Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0445 EVAP Purge Control Circuit Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0446 EVAP Canister Vent Control Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0447 EVAP Vent Solenoid Circuit Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0448 EVAP Vent solenoid Circuit Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0452 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor (Vapor Pressure Sensor) Low Voltage . . . . . DTC P0453 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor (Vapor Pressure Sensor) High Voltage . . . . . DTC P0456 EVAP Very Small Leak . . . . . . . DTC P0461 Fuel Level Sensor Performance DTC P0462 Fuel Level Sensor CircuitLow Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0463 Fuel Level Sensor CircuitHigh Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0462 Fuel Level Sensor Noisy Signal DTC P0502 VSS Circuit Low Input . . . . . . . . . DTC P0506 Idle Air Control System Low RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0507 Idle Air Control System High RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0562 System Voltage Low . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0563 System Voltage High . . . . . . . . . DTC P0565 Cruise Main Switch Circuit Error DTC P0566 Cruise Cancel Switch Circuit Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0567 Cruise Resume Switch Circuit Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0568 Cruise Set Switch Circuit Error . DTC P0571 No Brake Switch Signal . . . . . . . DTC P0601 PCM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0602 PCM Programming Error . . . . . . DTC P0604 PCM RAM Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0606 PCM Internal Performance . . . . DTC P1106 MAP Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6E23
6E296 6E299 6E302 6E304 6E306 6E309 6E312 6E315 6E318 6E321 6E324 6E326 6E328 6E331 6E333 6E335 6E338 6E341 6E344 6E346 6E349 6E351 6E353 6E356 6E359 6E362 6E364 6E366 6E368 6E370 6E372 6E374 6E376 6E378 6E380 6E382 6E384
6E24

6E386 6E388 6E391 6E393 6E395 DTC P1515 Command - Actual TPS Correlation Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1516 Command - Actual TPS Correlation Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1523 Actuator Control Return Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1571 Brake Switch No Operation . . . . DTC P1625 PCM Unexpected Reset . . . . . . . DTC P1635 Reference Voltage # 1 Circuit Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1639 Reference Voltage # 2 Circuit Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1640 Driver-1-Output Circuit Fault (ODM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1650 Quad Driver Module A Fault . . Symptom Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Matrix Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Matrix Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On Vehicle Service Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor . Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) . . . . . . . . . . . Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor . . . . . . . ION Sensing Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor . Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) . . . . . . . . . . Reduced Power Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powertrain Control Module (PCM) . . . . . . . . . Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Throttle Position (TP) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Cleaner/Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accelerator Pedal Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . Accelerator Position Sensor Replacement . . Accelerator Position Sensor Adjustment . . . . Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Gauge Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Metering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Rail Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Throttle Body (TB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Ignition System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning Thermo Relay . . . . . . . . . . . EVAP Canister Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVAP Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E479 6E482 6E485 6E488 6E490 6E491 6E493 6E495 6E497 6E500 6E529 6E529 6E532 6E532 6E533 6E536 6E536 6E537 6E538 6E539 6E539 6E539 6E539 6E541 6E541 6E542 6E543 6E543 6E544 6E545 6E545 6E546 6E546 6E547 6E548 6E549 6E549 6E550 6E551 6E552 6E552 6E554 6E555 6E555 6E555 6E556 6E556
DTC P1107 MAP Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1111 IAT Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1112 IAT Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1114 ECT Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1115 ECT Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Trouble Code(DTC)P1120-TPS 1 Throttle Position Sensor (TPS1) Output Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1125 ETC (Electric Throttle Control) Limit Performance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1133 HO2S Insufficient Switching Bank 1 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1134 HO2S Transition Time Ratio Bank 1 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1153 HO2S Insufficient Switching Bank 2 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1154 HO2S Circuit Transition Time Ratio Bank 2 Sensor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1167 Fuel System Rich During Decel Fuel Cut Off (Bank 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1169 Fuel System Rich During Decel Fuel Cut Off (Bank 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1171 Fuel System Lean During Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1220 Throttle Position Senser2 (TPS2) Circuit Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1221 TPS1 TPS2 Correlation (Circuit Performance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1271 APS 1 2 Correlation Error . . . DTC P1272 APS 2 3 Correlation Error . . . DTC P1273 APS 1 3 Correlation Error . . . . DTC P1275 APS 1 Output Fault . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1280 APS 2 Output Fault . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1285 APS 3 Output Fault . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1290 ETC Forced Idle Mode . . . . . . . . DTC P1295 Power Management Mode . . . . DTC P1299 ETC Forced Engine Shutdown Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1310 ION Sensing Module Diagnosis DTC P1311 ION Sensing Module SEC Line 1 Circuit Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1312 ION Sensing Module SEC Line 2 Circuit Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1326 ION Sensing Module Combustion Quality Input Circuit Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1340 ION Sensing Module Cylinder ID Fault (Cylinder Synchronization Fail) . . . . DTC P1404 EGR Stuck Closed . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1441 EVAP System Flow During Non-Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1514 TPS - MAF Correlation Error . . .
6E398 6E401 6E404 6E408 6E412 6E416 6E420 6E422 6E424 6E427 6E430 6E433 6E436 6E439 6E442 6E444 6E446 6E448 6E450 6E452 6E454 6E457 6E460 6E463 6E466 6E469 6E472 6E475

Fuel Tank Pressure (Vapor Pressure) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid (Purge Duty Solenoid Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tank Vent Valve (Vent Solenoid Valve) . Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve . Wiring and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Connectors and Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Harness Repair: Twisted Shielded Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Twisted Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather-Pack Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Com-Pack III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metri-Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description (PCM and Sensors) . . . General Description (Air Induction) . . . . . . . . General Description (Fuel Metering) . . . . . . . General Description (Electronic Ignition System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/C Clutch Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description (Evaporative (EVAP) Emission System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description (Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description (Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6E557 6E558 6E559 6E559 6E560 6E560 6E561 6E561 6E562 6E563 6E564 6E565 6E566 6E571 6E572 6E574 6E577 6E577 6E582 6E583 6E585
6E25
6E26
Specifications
Tightening Specifications
Application EGR Bolt Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Fuel Drain Plug Fuel Pressure Regulator Attaching Screw Fuel Rail Bolts Fuel Tank Undercover Retaining Bolts Heated Oxygen Sensor Lower Intake Manifold to Engine Block Bolts Lower Intake Manifold to Engine Block Nuts Spark Plugs Throttle Body Mounting Bolts Common Chamber to Lower Intake Manifold Bolts VSS Retaining Bolt Nm 25 30 20 3 25 36 55 25 25 18 10 25 16 Lb Ft. 18 22 14 18 27 40 18 18 13 18 12 Lb In. 26 87
6E27
Diagrams and Schematics

PCM Wiring Diagram (1 of 7)
060R200082
6E28
060R200083
6E29
060R200043
6E210
060R200065
6E211
060R200041
6E212
060R200046
6E213
060R200084
6E214
PCM Pinouts
PCM Pinout Table, 80-Way Blue Connector Row F1 20
060RY00045
PIN F1 F2 F3 F4
PIN Function PCM Ground 5Volt Reference2 (AP Sensor 2) 5Volt Reference2 (TP Sensor 2) A/C Clutch
Wire Color BLK GRN RED/WHT GRY/RED
IGN ON 0.0V 5.0V 5.0V B+(A/C off)
ENG RUN 0.0V 5.0V 5.0V B+(A/C off)
Refer To Chassis Electrical Accelerator Position (AP) Sensor Throttle Position (TP) Sensor General Description and Operation, A/C Clutch Circuit Operation 4L30E T/Mission Chassis Electrical General Description, Mass Air Flow Sensor General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor HO2S 2 6D Section 6D Section
F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17
Relay Shift Solenoid Not Used Tachometer Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Starter Feed Mass Air Flow(MAF) Not Used Not Used Bank 1 HO2S Low
GRN/RED BLK/RED PNK BLK/BLU RED
0.0V 8.8V 4.9V 0.3V
0.0V 10.0V (at idle) 4.2V 0.10.9V
F18 F19 F20
Not Used Ignition Feed Ignition Feed
RED/GRN RED/WHT
B+ B+
B+ B+
6E215
060RY00156
PIN F21 F22 F23 F24 F25
PIN Function Bank 1 HO2S 1 Ground Not Used Bank 2 HO2S 1 Ground Not Used ION Sensing Module
Wire Color WHT BLU RED/BLU
IGN ON 0.0V 0.0V 1.555V
ENG RUN 0.0V 0.0V 1.555V
Refer To General Description General Description and Operation, ION Sensing Module General Description and Operation, ION Sensing Module General Description and Operation, IAT General Description and Operation, Manifold Absolute Pressure
F26
ION Sensing Module
RED/BLK
1.555V
1.555V
F27 F28 F29
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Signal Not Used Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal
GRN RED
0.54.9V 3.5V4.9V (depends on altitude and barometric pressure) B+ B+ 0.0V 0.0V
0.54.9V 0.6-1.3V
F30 F31 F32 F33 F34 F35 F36 F37 F38 F39 F40
Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Illuminated Switch Brake Switch PCM Ground
B+ B+ 0.0V 0.0V
Power Steering Chassis Electrical 4L30E T/Mission Chassis Electrical
GRN/YEL GRN/YEL RED BLK/BLU
6E216
060RY00046
PIN F41 F42 F43 F44
PIN Function Throttle Position(TP) 1 Sensor Ground Fuel Pump Relay Adaptor Case Bank 1 HO2S 2 Heater Ground A/C Request Stop Lamp Switch Adaptor Case Throttle Valve DC Motor(: REV) Not Used Bank 2 HO2S 2 Ground Not Used Bank 1 HO2S 2 Ground ECT Ground Vapor Pressure (Fuel Tank Pressure) Sensor Ground Not Used Injector Cylinder #5 Ignition Feed Class 2 Data Not Used Not Used
Wire Color GRN PNK/WHT VIO/RED ORN/WHT
IGN ON 0.0V 0.0V 0.0V 0.0V
ENG RUN 0.0V B+ 0.0V 0.0V
Refer To General Description and Operation, TPS On Vehicle Service, Fuel Pump Relay 4L30E T/Mission General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor HO2S 2 Chassis Electrical Chassis Electrical 4L30E T/Mission General Description and Operation, ETC General Description and Operation, ECT Sensor General Description and Operation, VP Sensor General Description and Operation, Fuel Injector Chassis Electrical General Description
F45 F46 F47 F48 F49 F50 F51 F52 F53 F54 F55 F56 F57 F58 F59 F60
GRN/BLK BRN/RED VIO/WHT BLU ORN RED YEL/BLK GRN GRN/BLK RED/WHT ORN/BLK
0.0V 0.0V B+ Duty Cycle 0.0V 0.0V 0.0V 0.0V B+ B+ 0.0V
0.0V 0.0V B+ Duty Cycle 0.0V 0.0V 0.0V 0.0V B+ B+ 0.0V
6E217
060RY00047
PIN F61 F62 F63 F64 F65 F66 F67
PIN Function Throttle Position(TP) 2 Sensor Ground Injector Cylinder #2 AP Sensor 1 Sensor Ground Injector Cylinder #4 Throttle Position(TP) 2 Sensor Signal Injector Cylinder #3 ION Sensing Module
Wire Color GRN/WHT GRN/ORN RED GRN/RED BLU/WHT GRN YEL
IGN ON 0.0V B+ 0.0V B+ 0.50.8V B+ 1.555V
ENG RUN 0.0V B+ 0.0V B+ 0.80.8V (at idle) B+ 1.555V
Refer To General Description and Operation, TPS General Description and Operation, Fuel Injector On-Vehicle Service General Description and Operation, Fuel Injector General Description and Operation, TPS General Description and Operation, Fuel Injector General Description and Operation, ION Sensing Module General Description and Operation, ION Sensing Module General Description and Operation, Fuel Injector General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor HO2S 1 Chassis Electrical General Description and Operation, CKP sensor General Description and Operation, ECT Sensor Chassis Electrical 4L30E T/Mission 4L30E T/Mission
F68
ION Sensing Module
RED
1.555V
1.555V
F69 F70 F71
Injector Cylinder #1 ANTI Theft Bank 2 HO2S 2 Heater Ground Auto Cruise Switch Resume Crankshaft Position Sensor ECT Sensor Ignition Feed Mode Switch Mode Switch
GRN/WHT WHT/GRN GRN/WHT
B+ 0.0V
B+ 0.0V
F72 F73 F74 F75 F76 F77
WHT/BLU WHT/BLU BLU/RED RED/GRN PNK/BLK PNK/BLU
0.0V 0.3V 0.54.9V B+ B+ B+
0.0V 2.2V 0.54.9V B+ B+ B+
6E218
PIN F78 F79 F80

PIN Function Wire Color PNK/YEL PNK BLU IGN ON 0.0V 0.0V 0.0V ENG RUN 0.0V 0.0V 0.0V Refer To 4L30E T/Mission 4L30E T/Mission On-Vehicle Service
Mode Switch Mode Switch AP Sensor 2 Ground
6E219
PCM Pinout Table, 80-Way Red Connector Row S1 20
060RY00069
PIN S1 S2
PIN Function PCM Ground Bank 1 HO2S 1 Heater Ground Not Used Not Used 5Volt Reference2 (CKP Sensor) Auto Cruise Switch Cancel Purge Duty Solenoid Valve Not Used Not Used Shift High (Band Apply) Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) Lamp Not Used ION Sensing Module
Wire Color BLK/PNK BLK/ORN
IGN ON 0.0V 0.0V
ENG RUN 0.0V 0.0V
Refer To Chassis Electrical General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor HO2S Appropriate Sensor (CKP Sensor, AP2 Sensor) Chassis Electrical EVAP Emission Control System 4L30E T/Mission Chassis Electrical General Description and Operation, ION Sensing Module General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor HO2S General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor HO2S
S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13
WHT GRY/GRN RED/BLU BRN/YEL WHT/GRN RED/WHT
5.0V 0.0V B+ B+ 0.0V 1.555V
5.0V 0.0V B+ B+ B+ 1.555V
S14 S15 S16
Bank 2 HO2S 1 Ground Bank 2 HO2S 2 Ground Bank 2 HO2S 2 Low
BLU ORN BLU
0.0V 0.0V 0.0V
0.0V 0.0V 0.1V
S17 S18
Bank 1 HO2S 1 Ground Bank 1 HO2S 1 Low
WHT WHT/BLU
0.0V 0.0V
0.0V 0.1V
6E220
PIN S19

PIN Function Wire Color RED/YEL IGN ON 1.555V ENG RUN 1.555V Refer To General Description and Operation, ION Sensing Module 4L30E T/Mission
ION Sensing Module
S20
Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Ground
RED/WHT
0.0V
0.0V
6E221
060RY00049
PIN S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26 S27 S28 S29 S30 S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 Audio
PIN Function Transmission Output Speed Sensor PCM Ground Bank 1 HO2S 2 Ground Not Used EGR Control High VSS Input Injector Cylinder #6 Winter Switch Auto Cruise Main Switch Shift Solenoid Ignition Feed TCC Solenoid Not Used ION Sensing Module
Wire Color YEL/GRN BLU/YEL BLK RED BLU/RED BLK/YEL GRN/YEL VIO/GRN WHT/GRN GRN RED/GRN BRN/WHT RED/GRN
IGN ON 0.0V 0.0V 0.0V B+ 0.0V B+ B+ 0.0V 0.0V B+ 0.0V 1.555V
ENG RUN 0.0V 0.0V 0.0V B+ 0.1V (at rest) B+ B+ 0.0V 0.0V B+ 0.0V 1.555V
Refer To Chassis Electrical 4L30E T/Mission Chassis Electrical General Description and Operation, EGR Control Chassis Electrical General Description and Operation, Fuel Injector 4L30E T/Mission Chassis Electrical 4L30E T/Mission Chassis Electrical T/Mission General Description and Operation, ION Sensing Module AP Sensor (Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor/MAP Sensor/EGR Position Sensor) Sensor
S36 S37
5Volt Reference (AP Sensor 1) 5Volt Reference (Vapor Pressure {Fuel Tank Pressure} Sensor/MAP Sensor/EGR Position Sensor) 5Volt Reference (TP Sensor 1)
BLK GRY/RED
5.0V 5.0V
5.0V 5.0V
S38
RED
5.0V
5.0V
TP Sensor
6E222
PIN S39 S40

PIN Function Wire Color WHT BLK/YEL IGN ON 0.0V 0.0V ENG RUN 0.0V 0.0V Refer To Chassis Electrical Chassis Electrical
Auto Cruise Set Lamp PCM Ground
6E223
060RY00050
PIN S41 S42
PIN Function AP Sensor 3 Sensor Ground Bank 2 HO2S 1 Heater Ground Solenoid Power Supply Rr Def. Relay Starter Relay Not Used Water Temp. Gauge Fuel Gauge DLC Fuel Sender Unit TCC Solenoid Vapor Pressure (Fuel Tank Pressure) Sensor Signal Power Switch Bank 2 HO2S 1 Low
Wire Color ORN/BLU WHT/RED
IGN ON 0.0V 0.0V
ENG RUN 0.0V 0.0V
Refer To On-Vehicle Service General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor HO2S 4L30E T/Mission 4L30E T/Mission General Description and Chassis Electrical General Description T/Mission General Description and Operation, VP Sensor 4L30E T/Mission General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor HO2S 4L30E T/Mission General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor HO2S
S43 S44 S45 S46 S47 S48 S49 S50 S51 S52 S53 S54
GRY/WHT RED/WHT BLK/BLU WHT/BLK YEL/RED RED/WHT ORN/GRN BRN/BLU GRY VIO/RED BLU
B+ B+ B+ B+ 0.0V 0.0V 0.24.8V B+ 0.0V
B+ B+ B+ B+ 0.0V 0.0V 0.24.8V B+ 0.1V
S55 S56 S57 S58
Transmission Output Speed Sensor Not Used Not Used Bank 1 HO2S 1 High
BLU/GRN ORN/BLU
0.0V 0.3V
0.0V 0.10.9V
6E224
PIN S59 S60

PIN Function Wire Color Light GRN BLU/YEL IGN ON 0.0V 0.54.9V ENG RUN 0.0V 0.54.9V Refer To Chassis Electrical On-Vehicle Service PCM and Sensors
Auto Cruise Set Switch Fuel Sender Unit
6E225
060RY00051
PIN S61 S62
PIN Function Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Ground ION Sensing Module
Wire Color YEL/GRN RED
IGN ON 0.0V 1.555V
ENG RUN 0.0V 1.555V
Refer To General Description and Operation, IAT General Description and Operation, ION Sensing Module General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor HO2S General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor HO2S General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor HO2S 4L30E T/Mission
S63
Bank 1 HO2S 2 High
WHT
0.3V
0.10.9V
S64
Bank 2 HO2S 1 High
PNK
0.3V
0.10.9V
S65
Bank 2 HO2S 2 High
GRN
0.3V
0.10.9V
S66
Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Position Signal Accelerator Position (AP) Sensor 1 Throttle Valve DC Motor(+: FWD) Not Used Not Used Ignition Feed Auto Cruise Main Lamp Variable Intake Manifold Canister Purge Cut Solenoid Valve Throttle Position (TP) 1 Sensor Signal
RED/BLK
0.54.9V (depends on temperature) 0.6V 0.410.45V Duty Cycle
0.54.9V (depends on temperature) 0.6V 0.410.45V Duty Cycle B+ B+ B+ (rpm 3600 over) 5.7V Tank empty 0.50.8V (at idle)
S67 S68 S69 S70 S71 S72 S73 S74 S75 S76
GRY/RED WHT GRN RED/GRN GRN/WHT YEL/BLK BRN/WHT BLU
General Description and Operation, EGR Control On-Vehicle Service General Description and Operation, ETC Chassis Electrical Chassis Electrical General Description General Description and Operation, EVAP General Description and Operation, TPS
B+ B+ 0.0V 6.0V Tank empty 0.50.8V
6E226
PIN S77 S78 S79 S80

PIN Function Wire Color ORN YEL BLU/GRN GRN IGN ON 5.0V 0.410.45V 4.554.99V 0V ENG RUN 5.0V 0.410.45V 0.410.45V 0V Refer To AP Sensor On-Vehicle Service On-Vehicle Service General Description and Operation, Manifold Absolute Pressure
5Volt Reference (AP Sensor 3) Accelerator Position (AP) Sensor 2 Accelerator Position (AP) Sensor 3 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Ground
6E227
Component Locators
Engine Component Locator
060R200040
6E228
Engine Component Locator Table Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Name Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Check Engine (MIL) Light Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Air Cleaner Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Fuel Rail Fuel Pressure Regulator ION Sensing module Common Chamber EVAP Duty Solenoid Valve Fuse/Relay Box Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Throttle Body Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Power Train Control Module (PCM) Location Rear right side of the engine On the throttle body On the intake air duct near the throttle body On the instrument panel beneath the tachometer On the left of the cylinder head cover Left front of the engine bay Attached to the air filter box On the Common Chamber Rear side of the engine Bolted to the top of the Common Chamber Top of the engine Bolted to the front of the coolant pipe Along the inside of the right fender Bolted to the top of the Common Chamber Between the intake air duct and the Common Chamber On the coolant crossover pipe at the front of the engine, near the throttle body Along the inside of the left fender
6E229
Undercarriage Component Locator
014RW142
Undercarriage Component Locator Table Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Name Fuel Pump Assembly and Vapor Pressure (Fuel Tank Pressure) Sensor Fuel Gauge Unit Evaporative (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid (EVAP Canister) Fuel Filter Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1, HO2S 1) Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1, HO2S 2) Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2, HO2S 1) Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2, HO2S 2) Location Installed in the top of the fuel tank Installed in the top of the fuel tank On the top of the bracket that is located behind the cross member On the top of the bracket that is located behind the cross member Located along the inside of the right frame rail, ahead of the fuel tank Protrudes from the transmission housing, just ahead of the propeller shaft Threaded into the exhaust pipe behind the right-hand catalytic converter Threaded into the exhaust pipe ahead of the right-hand catalytic converter Threaded into the exhaust pipe ahead of the left-hand catalytic converter Threaded into the exhaust pipe behind the left-hand catalytic converter
6E230
Fuse and Relay Panel (Underhood Electrical Center)
065RY00002
6E231
Sensors and Miscellaneous Component Locators
060RY00013
060RW111
T321067
060R200080
014RW126
055RY00002
6E232
041RW004
060RY00016
025RW005
060RY00023
060RY00014
6E233
Diagnosis Strategy-Based Diagnostics

Strategy-Based Diagnostics
The strategy-based diagnostic is a uniform approach to repair all Electrical/Electronic (E/E) systems. The diagnostic flow can always be used to resolve an E/E system problem and is a starting point when repairs are necessary. The following steps will instruct the technician how to proceed with a diagnosis: 1. Verify the customer complaint. D To verify the customer complaint, the technician should know the normal operation of the system. 2. Perform preliminary checks. D Conduct a thorough visual inspection. D Review the service history. D Detect unusual sounds or odors. D Gather diagnostic trouble code information to achieve an effective repair. 3. Check bulletins and other service information. D This includes videos, newsletters, etc. 4. Refer to service information (manual) system check(s). D System checks contain information on a system that may not be supported by one or more DTCs. System checks verify proper operation of the system. This will lead the technician in an organized approach to diagnostics. 5. Refer to service diagnostics.
3. Use a check sheet or other method to identify the circuit or electrical system component. 4. Follow the suggestions for intermittent diagnosis found in the service documentation. Most Scan Tools, such as the Tech 2, have data-capturing capabilities that can assist in detecting intermittents.
No Trouble Found
This condition exists when the vehicle is found to operate normally. The condition described by the customer may be normal. Verify the customer complaint against another vehicle that is operating normally. The condition may be intermittent. Verify the complaint under the conditions described by the customer before releasing the vehicle. 1. Re-examine the complaint. When the complaint cannot be successfully found or isolated, a re-evaluation is necessary. The complaint should be re-verified and could be intermittent as defined in Intermittents section, or could be normal. 2. Repair and verify. After isolating the cause, the repairs should be made. Validate for proper operation and verify that the symptom has been corrected. This may involve road testing or other methods to verify that the complaint has been resolved under the following conditions: D Conditions noted by the customer. D If a DTC was diagnosed, verify a repair by duplicating conditions present when the DTC was set as noted in the Failure Records or Freeze Frame data.

Verification of the vehicle repair will be more comprehensive for vehicles with OBD II system diagnostics. Following a repair, the technician should perform the following steps: IMPORTANT: Follow the steps below when you verify repairs on OBD II systems. Failure to follow these steps could result in unnecessary repairs. 1. Review and record the Failure Records and the Freeze Frame data for the DTC which has been diagnosed (Freeze Frame data will only be stored for an A or B type diagnostic and only if the MIL(Check Engine lamp) has been requested). 2. Clear the DTC(S). 3. Operate the vehicle within conditions noted in the Failure Records and Freeze Frame data. 4. Monitor the DTC status information for the DTC which has been diagnosed until the diagnostic test associated with that DTC runs.
DTC Stored
Follow the designated DTC chart exactly to make an effective repair.
No DTC
Select the symptom from the symptom tables. Follow the diagnostic paths or suggestions to complete the repair. You may refer to the applicable component/system check in the system checks.
No Matching Symptom
1. Analyze the complaint. 2. Develop a plan for diagnostics. 3. Utilize the wiring diagrams and the theory of operation. Combine technician knowledge with efficient use of the available service information.
Intermittents
Conditions that are not always present are called intermittents. To resolve intermittents, perform the following steps: 1. Observe history DTCs, DTC modes, and freeze frame data. 2. Evaluate the symptoms and the conditions described by the customer.
General Service Information

OBD II Serviceablity Issues
With the introduction of OBD II diagnostics across the entire passenger car and light-duty truck market in 1996, illumination of the MIL (Check Engine lamp) due to a non-vehicle fault could lead to misdiagnosis of the vehicle, increased warranty expense and customer
6E234

Vehicle Marshaling The transportation of new vehicles from the assembly plant to the dealership can involve as many as 60 key cycles within 2 to 3 miles of driving. This type of operation contributes to the fuel fouling of the spark plugs and will turn on the MIL (Check Engine lamp) with a P0300 Misfire DTC. Poor Vehicle Maintenance The sensitivity of OBD II diagnostics will cause the MIL (Check Engine lamp) to turn on if the vehicle is not maintained properly. Restricted air filters, fuel filters, and crankcase deposits due to lack of oil changes or improper oil viscosity can trigger actual vehicle faults that were not previously monitored prior to OBD II. Poor vehicle maintenance cant be classified as a non-vehicle fault, but with the sensitivity of OBD II diagnostics, vehicle maintenance schedules must be more closely followed. Related System Faults Many of the OBD II system diagnostics will not run if the PCM detects a fault on a related system or component. One example would be that if the PCM detected a Misfire fault, the diagnostics on the catalytic converter would be suspended until Misfire fault was repaired. If the Misfire fault was severe enough, the catalytic converter could be damaged due to overheating and would never set a Catalyst DTC until the Misfire fault was repaired and the Catalyst diagnostic was allowed to run to completion. If this happens, the customer may have to make two trips to the dealership in order to repair the vehicle.
dissatisfaction. The following list of non-vehicle faults does not include every possible fault and may not apply equally to all product lines. Fuel Quality Fuel quality is not a new issue for the automotive industry, but its potential for turning on the MIL (Check Engine lamp) with OBD II systems is new. Fuel additives such as dry gas and octane enhancers may affect the performance of the fuel. If this results in an incomplete combustion or a partial burn, it will show up as a Misfire DTC P0300. The Reed Vapor Pressure of the fuel can also create problems in the fuel system, especially during the spring and fall months when severe ambient temperature swings occur. A high Reed Vapor Pressure could show up as a Fuel Trim DTC due to excessive canister loading. High vapor pressures generated in the fuel tank can also affect the Evaporative Emission diagnostic as well. Using fuel with the wrong octane rating for the vehicle may cause driveability problems. Many of the major fuel companies advertise that using premium gasoline will improve the performance of the vehicle. Most premium fuels use alcohol to increase the octane rating of the fuel. Although alcohol-enhanced fuels may raise the octane rating, the fuels ability to turn into vapor in cold temperatures deteriorates. This may affect the starting ability and cold driveability of the engine. Low fuel levels can lead to fuel starvation, lean engine operation, and eventually engine misfire. Non-OEM Parts All of the OBD II diagnostics have been calibrated to run with OEM parts. Something as simple as a high-performance exhaust system that affects exhaust system back pressure could potentially interfere with the operation of the EGR valve and thereby turn on the MIL (Check Engine lamp). Small leaks in the exhaust system near the post catalyst oxygen sensor can also cause the MIL (Check Engine lamp) to turn on. Aftermarket electronics, such as transceivers, stereos, and anti-theft devices, may radiate EMI into the control system if they are improperly installed. This may cause a false sensor reading and turn on the MIL (Check Engine lamp). Environment Temporary environmental conditions, such as localized flooding, will have an effect on the vehicle ignition system. If the ignition system is rain-soaked, it can temporarily cause engine misfire and turn on the MIL (Check Engine lamp). Refueling A new OBD II diagnostic was introduced in 1996 on some vehicles. This diagnostic checks the integrity of the entire evaporative emission system. If the vehicle is restarted after refueling and the fuel cap is not secured correctly, the on-board diagnostic system will sense this as a system fault and turn on the MIL (Check Engine lamp) with a DTC P0440.
Emissions Control Information Label

The engine compartment Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper left corner is exhaust emission information. This identifies the emission standard (Federal, California, or Canada) of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and the type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every vehicle. If the label has been removed it should be replaced. It can be ordered from Isuzu Dealership.
Visual / Physical Engine Compartment Inspection

Perform a careful visual and physical engine compartment inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a problem without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing a visual/physical inspection: D Inspect all vacuum hoses for pinches, cuts, disconnections, and proper routing. D Inspect hoses that are difficult to see behind other components.

D Inspect all wires in the engine compartment for proper connections, burned or chafed spots, pinched wires, contact with sharp edges or contact with hot exhaust manifolds or pipes.
6E235
Remember, a fuel trim DTC may be triggered by a list of vehicle faults. Make use of all information available (other DTCs stored, rich or lean condition, etc.) when diagnosing a fuel trim fault.
Basic Knowledge of Tools Required

NOTE: Lack of basic knowledge of this powertrain when performing diagnostic procedures could result in an incorrect diagnosis or damage to powertrain components. Do not attempt to diagnose a powertrain problem without this basic knowledge. A basic understanding of hand tools is necessary to effectively use this section of the Service Manual.
Comprehensive Component Monitor Diagnostic Operation

Comprehensive component monitoring diagnostics are required to monitor emissions-related input and output powertrain components. The CARB OBD II Comprehensive Component Monitoring List Of Components Intended To illuminate MIL is a list of components, features or functions that could fall under this requirement. Input Components: Input components are monitored for circuit continuity and out-of-range values. This includes rationality checking. Rationality checking refers to indicating a fault when the signal from a sensor does not seem reasonable, i.e. Throttle Position (TP) sensor that indicates high throttle position at low engine loads or MAP voltage. Input components may include, but are not limited to the following sensors: D Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) D Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor D Throttle Position (TP) sensor D Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor D Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor D Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor In addition to the circuit continuity and rationality check, the ECT sensor is monitored for its ability to achieve a steady state temperature to enable closed loop fuel control. Output Components: Output components are diagnosed for proper response to control module commands. Components where functional monitoring is not feasible will be monitored for circuit continuity and out-of-range values if applicable. Output components to be monitored include, but are not limited to, the following circuits: D Control module controlled EVAP Canister Purge Valve D Electronic Transmission controls D A/C relays D VSS output D MIL control D Cruise control inhibit Refer to PCM and Sensors in General Descriptions. Passive and Active Diagnostic Tests A passive test is a diagnostic test which simply monitors a vehicle system or component. Conversely, an active test, actually takes some sort of action when performing diagnostic functions, often in response to a failed passive test. For example, the EGR diagnostic active test will force the EGR valve open during closed throttle decel and/or force the EGR valve closed during a steady state. Either action should result in a change in manifold pressure.
Serial Data Communications

Class 2 Serial Data Communications
Government regulations require that all vehicle manufacturers establish a common communication system. This vehicle utilizes the Class 2 communication system. Each bit of information can have one of two lengths: long or short. This allows vehicle wiring to be reduced by transmitting and receiving multiple signals over a single wire. The messages carried on Class 2 data streams are also prioritized. If two messages attempt to establish communications on the data line at the same time, only the message with higher priority will continue. The device with the lower priority message must wait. The most significant result of this regulation is that it provides Scan tool manufacturers with the capability to access data from any make or model vehicle that is sold. The data displayed on other Scan tools will appear the same, with some exceptions. Some Scan tools will only be able to display certain vehicle parameters as values that are a coded representation of the true or actual value. On this vehicle the Scan tool displays the actual values for vehicle parameters. It will not be necessary to perform any conversions from coded values to actual values.
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD II)

On-Board Diagnostic Tests
A diagnostic test is a series of steps, the result of which is a pass or fail reported to the diagnostic executive. When a diagnostic test reports a pass result, the diagnostic executive records the following data: D The diagnostic test has been completed since the last ignition cycle. D The diagnostic test has passed during the current ignition cycle. D The fault identified by the diagnostic test is not currently active. When a diagnostic test reports a fail result, the diagnostic executive records the following data: D The diagnostic test has been completed since the last ignition cycle. D The fault identified by the diagnostic test is currently active. D The fault has been active during this ignition cycle. D The operating conditions at the time of the failure.
6E236

The enable criteria for each diagnostic is listed on the first page of the DTC description in Section 6E under the heading Conditions for Setting the DTC. Enable criteria varies with each diagnostic, and typically includes, but is not limited to the following items: D engine speed D vehicle speed D ECT D MAF/MAP D barometric pressure D IAT D TP D high canister purge D fuel trim D TCC enabled D A/C on Trip Technically, a trip is a key on-run-key off cycle in which all the enable criteria for a given diagnostic are met, allowing the diagnostic to run. Unfortunately, this concept is not quite that simple. A trip is official when all the enable criteria for a given diagnostic are met. But because the enable criteria vary from one diagnostic to another, the definition of trip varies as well. Some diagnostics are run when the vehicle is at operating temperature, some when the vehicle first starts up; some require that the vehicle be cruising at a steady highway speed, some run only when the vehicle is idle; some diagnostics function with the TCC disabled. Some run only immediately following a cold engine start-up. A trip then, is defined as a key on-run-key off cycle in which the vehicle was operated in such a way as to satisfy the enabling criteria for a given diagnostic, and this diagnostic will consider this cycle to be one trip. However, another diagnostic with a different set of enable criteria (which were not met) during this driving event, would not consider it a trip. No trip will occur for that particular diagnostic until the vehicle is driven in such a way as to meet all the enable criteria.
Intrusive Diagnostic Tests This is any on-board test run by the Diagnostic Management System which may have an effect on vehicle performance or emission levels. Warm-Up Cycle A warm-up cycle means that engine at temperature must reach a minimum of 70C (160F) and rise at least 22C (40F) over the course of a trip. Freeze Frame Freeze Frame is an element of the Diagnostic Management System which stores various vehicle information at the moment an emissions-related fault is stored in memory and when the MIL is commanded on. These data can help to identify the cause of a fault. Refer to Storing And Erasing Freeze Frame Data in this section for more detailed information. Failure Records Failure Records data is an enhancement of the OBD II Freeze Frame feature. Failure Records store the same vehicle information as does Freeze Frame, but it will store that information for any fault which is stored in on-board memory, while Freeze Frame stores information only for emission-related faults that command the MIL on.
System Status and Drive Cycle for Satisfying Federal Inspection/Maintenance (I/M 240) Regulations
I/M Ready Status means a signal or flag for each emission system test that had been set in the PCM. I/M Ready Status indicates that the vehicle on-board emissions diagnostics have been run. I/M Ready Status is not concerned whether the emission system passed or failed the test, only that on-board diagnosis is complete. Not all vehicles use all possible I/M flags.
Common OBD II Terms

Diagnostic When used as a noun, the word diagnostic refers to any on-board test run by the vehicles Diagnostic Management System. A diagnostic is simply a test run on a system or component to determine if the system or component is operating according to specification. There are many diagnostics, shown in the following list: D Misfire D Oxygen sensors D Oxygen sensor heaters D EGR D Catalyst monitoring Enable Criteria The term enable criteria is engineering language for the conditions necessary for a given diagnostic test to run. Each diagnostic has a specific list of conditions which must be met before the diagnostic will run. Enable criteria is another way of saying conditions required.
The Diagnostic Executive

The Diagnostic Executive is a unique segment of software which is designed to coordinate and prioritize the diagnostic procedures as well as define the protocol for recording and displaying their results. The main responsibilities of the Diagnostic Executive are listed as the following: D Commanding the MIL (Check Engine lamp) on and off D DTC logging and clearing D Freeze Frame data for the first emission related DTC recorded D Non-emission related Service Lamp D Operating conditions Failure Records buffer, (the number of records will vary) D Current status information on each diagnostic D System Status (I/M ready)

The Diagnostic Executive records DTCs and turns on the MIL when emission-related faults occur. It can also turn off the MIL if the conditions cease which caused the DTC to set. Diagnostic Information The diagnostic charts and functional checks are designed to locate a faulty circuit or component through a process of logical decisions. The charts are prepared with the requirement that the vehicle functioned correctly at the time of assembly and that there are no multiple faults present. There is a continuous self-diagnosis on certain control functions. This diagnostic capability is complemented by the diagnostic procedures contained in this manual. The language of communicating the source of the malfunction is a system of diagnostic trouble codes. When a malfunction is detected by the control module, a diagnostic trouble code is set and the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Check Engine lamp) is illuminated. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) looks the same as the MIL you are already familiar with (Check Engine lamp). However, OBD II requires that it illuminate under a strict set of guide lines. Basically, the MIL is turned on when the PCM detects a DTC that will impact vehicle emissions. The MIL is under the control of the Diagnostic Executive. The MIL will be turned on if an emissions-related diagnostic test indicates a malfunction has occurred. It will stay on until the system or component passes the same test, for three consecutive trips, with no emissions related faults. If the vehicle is experiencing a misfire malfunction which may cause damage to the Three-Way Catalytic Converter (TWC), the MIL will flash once per second. This will continue until the vehicle is outside of speed and load conditions which could cause possible catalyst damage, and the MIL will stop flashing and remain on steady. Extinguishing the MIL When the MIL is on, the Diagnostic Executive will turn off the MIL after three(3) consecutive trips that a test passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. Although the MIL has been turned off, the DTC will remain in the PCM memory (both Freeze Frame and Failure Records) until forty(40) warm-up cycles after no faults have been completed. If the MIL was set by either a fuel trim or misfire-related DTC, additional requirements must be met. In addition to the requirements stated in the previous paragraph, these requirements are as follows: D The diagnostic tests that are passed must occur within 375 RPM of the RPM data stored at the time the last test failed. D Plus or minus ten (10) percent of the engine load that was stored at the time the last failed.
6E237
D Similar engine temperature conditions (warmed up or warming up ) as those stored at the time the last test failed. Meeting these requirements ensures that the fault which turned on the MIL has been corrected. The MIL (Check Engine lamp) is on the instrument panel and has the following function: D It informs the driver that a fault affects vehicle emission levels has occurred and that the vehicle should be taken for service as soon as possible. D As a bulb and system check, the MIL will come ON with the key ON and the engine not running. When the engine is started, the MIL will turn OFF. D When the MIL remains ON while the engine is running, or when a malfunction is suspected due to a driveability or emissions problem, a Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic (OBD ll) System Check must be performed. The procedures for these checks are given in On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check. These checks will expose faults which may not be detected if other diagnostics are performed first.
DTC Types
Each DTC is directly related to a diagnostic test. The Diagnostic Management System sets DTC based on the failure of the tests during a trip or trips. Certain tests must fail two (2) consecutive trips before the DTC is set. The following are the four (4) types of DTCs and the characteristics of those codes: D Type A D Emissions related D Requests illumination of the MIL of the first trip with a fail D Stores a History DTC on the first trip with a fail D Stores a Freeze Frame (if empty) D Stores a Fail Record D Updates the Fail Record each time the diagnostic test fails D Type B D Emissions related D Armed after one (1) trip with a fail D Disarmed after one (1) trip with a pass D Requests illumination of the MIL on the second consecutive trip with a fail D Stores a History DTC on the second consecutive trip with a fail (The DTC will be armed after the first fail) D Stores a Freeze Frame on the second consecutive trip with a fail (if empty) D Stores a Fail Record when the first test fails (not dependent on consecutive trip fails) D Updates the Fail Record each time the diagnostic test fails (Some special conditions apply to misfire and fuel trim DTCs) D Type C (if the vehicle is so equipped) D Non-Emissions related D Requests illumination of the Service D Stores a History DTC on the first trip with a fail
6E238

Storing and Erasing Freeze Frame Data and Failure Records Government regulations require that engine operating conditions be captured whenever the MIL is illuminated. The data captured is called Freeze Frame data. The Freeze Frame data is very similar to a single record of operating conditions. Whenever the MIL is illuminated, the corresponding record of operating conditions is recorded to the Freeze Frame buffer. Freeze Frame data can only be overwritten with data associated with a misfire or fuel trim malfunction. Data from these faults take precedence over data associated with any other fault. The Freeze Frame data will not be erased unless the associated history DTC is cleared. Each time a diagnostic test reports a failure, the current engine operating conditions are recorded in the Failure Records buffer. A subsequent failure will update the recorded operating conditions. The following operating conditions for the diagnostic test which failed typically include the following parameters: D Air Fuel Ratio D Air Flow Rate D Fuel Trim D Engine Speed D Engine Load D Engine Coolant Temperature D Vehicle Speed D TP Angle D AP Angle D MAP/BARO D Injector Base Pulse Width D Loop Status Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp In the case of an intermittent fault, the MIL (Check Engine lamp) may illuminate and then (after three trips) go OFF. However, the corresponding diagnostic trouble code will be stored in memory. When unexpected diagnostic trouble codes appear, check for an intermittent malfunction. A diagnostic trouble code may reset. Consult the Diagnostic Aids associated with the diagnostic trouble code. A physical inspection of the applicable sub-system most often will resolve the problem. Data Link Connector (DLC) The provision for communication with the control module is the Data Link Connector (DLC). It is located at the lower left of the instrument panel behind a small square cover. The DLC is used to connect to the Tech 2 Scan Tool. Some common uses of the Tech 2 are listed below:
D Does not store a Freeze Frame D Stores Fail Record when test fails D Updates the Fail Record each time the diagnostic test fails D Type D D Non-Emissions related D Not request illumination of any lamp D Stores a History DTC on the first trip with a fail D Does not store a Freeze Frame D Stores Fail Record when test fails D Updates the Fail Record each time the diagnostic test fails IMPORTANT: Only four Fail Records can be stored. Each Fail Record is for a different DTC. It is possible that there will not be Fail Records for every DTC if multiple DTCs are set. Special Cases of Type B Diagnostic Tests Unique to the misfire diagnostic, the Diagnostic Executive has the capability of alerting the vehicle operator to potentially damaging levels of misfire. If a misfire condition exists that could potentially damage the catalytic converter as a result of high misfire levels, the Diagnostic Executive will command the MIL to flash at a rate of once per second during those the time that the catalyst damaging misfire condition is present. Fuel trim and misfire are special cases of Type B diagnostics. Each time a fuel trim or misfire malfunction is detected, engine load, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature are recorded. When the ignition is turned off, the last reported set of conditions remain stored. During subsequent ignition cycles, the stored conditions are used as reference for similar conditions. If a malfunction occurs during two consecutive trips, the Diagnostic Executive treats the failure as a normal Type B diagnostic, and does not use the stored conditions. However, if a malfunction occurs on two non-consecutive trips, the stored conditions are compared with the current conditions. The MIL will then illuminate under the following conditions: D When the engine load conditions are within 10% of the previous test that failed. D Engine speed is within 375 rpm, of the previous test that failed. D Engine coolant temperature is in the same range as the previous test that failed.

D D D D Identifying stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Clearing DTCs. Performing output control tests. Reading serial data.
6E239

Verification of vehicle repair will be more comprehensive for vehicles with OBD II system diagnostic. Following a repair, the technician should perform the following steps: 1. Review and record the Fail Records and/or Freeze Frame data for the DTC which has been diagnosed (Freeze Frame data will only be stored for an A or B type diagnostic and only if the MIL has been requested). 2. Clear DTC(s). 3. Operate the vehicle within conditions noted in the Fail Records and/or Freeze Frame data. 4. Monitor the DTC status information for the DTC which has been diagnosed until the diagnostic test associated with that DTC runs. Following these steps are very important in verifying repairs on OBD ll systems. Failure to follow these steps could result in unnecessary repairs.
Reading Diagnostic Trouble Codes Using The Tech 2 Scan Tool

TS24064
Decimal/Binary/Hexadecimal Conversions
Beginning in 1996, Federal Regulations require that all auto manufacturers selling vehicles in the United States provide Scan Tool manufacturers with software information to display vehicle operating parameters. All Scan Tool manufacturers will display a variety of vehicle information which will aid in repairing the vehicle. Some Scan Tools will display encoded messages which will aid in determining the nature of the concern. The method of encoding involves the use of a two additional numbering systems: Binary and Hexadecimal. The binary number system has a base of two numbers. Each digit is either a 0 or a 1. A binary number is an eight digit number and is read from right to left. Each digit has a position number with the farthest right being the 0 position and the farthest left being the 7 position. The 0 position, when displayed by a 1, indicates 1 in decimal. Each position to the left is double the previous position and added to any other position values marked as a 1. A hexadecimal system is composed of 16 different alpha numeric characters. The alpha numeric characters used are numbers 0 through 9 and letters A through F. The hexadecimal system is the most natural and common approach for Scan Tool manufacturers to display data represented by binary numbers and digital code.
The procedure for reading diagnostic trouble code(s) is to use a diagnostic Scan Tool. When reading DTC(s), follow instructions supplied by tool manufacturer. Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes IMPORTANT: Do not clear DTCs unless directed to do so by the service information provided for each diagnostic procedure. When DTCs are cleared, the Freeze Frame and Failure Record data which may help diagnose an intermittent fault will also be erased from memory. If the fault that caused the DTC to be stored into memory has been corrected, the Diagnostic Executive will begin to count the warm-up cycles with no further faults detected, the DTC will automatically be cleared from the PCM memory. To clear Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), use the diagnostic Scan Tool clear DTCs or clear information function. When clearing DTCs follow instructions supplied by the tool manufacturer. When a Scan Tool is not available, DTCs can also be cleared by disconnecting one of the following sources for at least thirty (30) seconds. NOTE: To prevent system damage, the ignition key must be OFF when disconnecting or reconnecting battery power. D The power source to the control module. Examples: fuse, pigtail at battery PCM connectors, etc. D The negative battery cable. (Disconnecting the negative battery cable will result in the loss of other on-board memory data, such as preset radio tuning).
6E240
Tech 2
From 98 MY, Isuzu dealer service departments are recommended to use the Tech 2 Scan Tool. Please refer to the Tech 2 user guide.
901RW180
Legend (1) PCMCIA Card (2) RS 232 Loop Back Connector
(3) SAE 16/19 Adaptor (4) DLC Cable (5) Tech2
6E241
Tech 2 Features
1. Tech 2 is a 12 volt system. Do not apply 24 volts. 2. After connecting and/or installing the Vehicle Communications Interface (VCI) module, PCMCIA card and DLC connector to the Tech 2, connect the tool to the vehicle DLC. 3. Make sure the Tech 2 is OFF when removing or installing the PCMCIA card. 4. The PCMCIA card has a capacity of 10 Megabytes which is 10 times greater than the memory of the Tech 1 Mass Storage Cartridge. 5. The Tech 2 has the capability of two snapshots. 6. The PCMCIA card is sensitive to magnetism and static electricity, so care should be taken in the handling of the card. 7. The Tech 2 can plot a graph when replaying a snapshot. 8. Always return to the Main Menu by pressing the EXIT key several times before shutting down. 9. To clear Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), open Application Menu and press F1: Clear DTC Info.
7. Power the Tech 2 ON and verify the Tech 2 power up display.
060RW009
Getting Started
D Before operating the Isuzu PCMCIA card with the Tech 2, the following steps must be performed: 1. Insert the Isuzu system PCMCIA card (1) into the Tech 2 (5). 2. Connect the SAE 16/19 adapter (3) to the DLC cable (4). 3. Connect the DLC cable to the Tech 2 (5) 4. Make sure the vehicle ignition is off. 5. Connect the Tech 2 SAE 16/19 adapter to the vehicle DLC.
NOTE: The RS232 Loop back connector is only to use for diagnosis of Tech 2. Refer to user guide of the Tech 2.
826RW002
6. Turn on the vehicle ignition.
6E242
Operating Procedure (For Example)

The power up screen is displayed when you power up the tester with the Isuzu systems PCMCIA card. Follow the operating procedure below.
060R200038
060R100102

Menu D The following table shows which functions are used for the available equipment versions.
6E243
060RW223
060R100018
The following is a brief description of each of the sub menus in DTC Info and DTC. The order in which they appear here is alphabetical and not necessarily the way they will appear on the Tech 2.
DTC Modes
DTC Information Mode

Use the DTC info mode to search for a specific type of stored DTC information. DTC Status This selection will display any DTCs that have not run during the current ignition cycle or have reported a test failure during this ignition up to DTCs. DTC tests which run and pass will cause that DTC number to be removed from Tech 2 screen. Fail This Ignition This selection will display all DTCs that have failed during the present ignition cycle. History This selection will display only DTCs that are stored in the PCMs history memory. It will display all type A and B DTCs that have requested the MIL and have failed within the last 40 warm-up cycles. In addition, it will display all type C and type D DTCs that have failed within the last 40 warm-up cycles. Last Test Failed This selection will display only DTCs that have failed the last time the test run. The last test may have run during a previous ignition cycle if a type A or type B DTC is displayed. For type C and type D DTCs, the last failure must have occurred during the current ignition cycle to appear as Last Test Fail. MILSVC or Message Request This selection will display only DTCs that are requesting the MIL. Type C and type D DTCs cannot be displayed using this option. This selection will report type B DTCs only after the MIL has been requested.
060R100077
On OBD II vehicles there are options available in Tech 2 DTC mode to display the enhanced information available. After selecting DTC, the following menu appears: 1. Read DTC Info by Priority 2. Freeze Frame 3. Fail Records (not all applications) 4. DTC Info 5. Clear Info
6E244

4. Select F0:Lamps Test in the Miscellaneous Test.
Not Run Since Code Cleared This option will display up to DTCs that have not run since the DTCs were last cleared. Since any displayed DTCs have not run, their condition (passing or failing) is unknown. Test Failed Since Code Cleared This selection will display all active and history DTCs that have reported a test failure since the last time DTCs were cleared. DTCs that last failed more than 40 warm-up cycles before this option is selected will not be displayed.
Miscellaneous Test
This test consists of eight menus-Lights, Relays, EVAP, Fuel System, Instruments, EGR Control, Variable Intake Manifold Solenoid, and Injector Balance Tests. In these tests, Tech 2 sends operating signals to the systems to confirm their operations thereby to judge the normality of electric circuits. To judge intermittent trouble, 1. Confirm DTC freeze frame data, and match the freeze frame data as test conditions with the data list displayed by Miscellaneous Test. 2. Confirm DTC setting conditions, and match the setting conditions as test conditions with the data list displayed by Miscellaneous Test. 3. Refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. Down load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM.
060RY00080
5. Select F0:Malfunction Indicator Lamp.
Lamps Test
This test is conducted check MIL, Up Shift Lamp, Low Fuel Lamp, Reduced Power Lamp and Cruise Control Lamp for its working. Tech2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Run the Engine at idle. 3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
060RY00091
6. PushOn soft key. 7. Make sure Lamp illuminates. 8. If lamp illuminates, the Lamp is operating correctly.
060R100078

9. Select F2: Up Shift Lamp 17. Select F3:Reduced Power Lamp
6E245
060RY00076
060RY00077
10. Push On soft key. 11. Make sure Lamp illuminates. 12. If Lamp illuminates, the Lamp is operating correctly. 13. Select F2:Low Fuel Lamp
18. Push On soft key. 19. Make sure Lamp illuminates. 20. If Lamp illuminates, the Lamp is operating correctly. 21. Select F5:Cruise Control Lamp
060RY00092
060RY00078
14. Push On soft key. 15. Make sure Lamp illuminates. 16. If Lamp illuminates, the Lamp is operating correctly.
22. Push On soft key. 23. Make sure Lamp illuminates. 24. If Lamp illuminates, the Lamp is operating correctly.
6E246

5. Select F0:Fuel Pump Relay.
Relays Test
This test is conducted to check Fuel Pump Relay and A/C Clutch for proper operation. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Ignition SW is On. 3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
060RX021
6. Push On soft key.
060R100078
4. Select F1:Relay Test in the Miscellaneous Test.
060RY00093
7. Control Fuel Pump Relay and check data list. 8. If the data list changes, the Fuel Pump Relay is normal. 9. Select F1:A/C Clutch Relay. 10. Run the Engine at idle.
060RY00081

11. Turn on Air Conditioning.
6E247
4. Select F2: EVAP Test in the Miscellaneous Test.
060RY00094
060RY00082
12. Turn On and Off A/C Switch. 13. Contol A/C Clutch Relay and check data list. 14. If the data list changes, the Fuel Pump Relay is normal.
5. Select F0: Purge Solenoid.
EVAP Test
This test is conducted to check EVAP system for its power operation. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Run the Engine at idle. 3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
060RX025
060R100078
6E248

11. Push On or Off soft key.
6. Push Decrease or Increase soft key.
060RY00095
060RY00096
7. Control EVAP Purge Solenoid and check a data list. 8. If the data list changes, the Purge Solenoid is normal. 9. Turn engine off, turn ignition SW On. 10. Select F1:EVAP Vent Solenoid.
12. Control EVAP Vent Solenoid and check data list. 13. If the data list changes, the EVAP Vent Solenoid is normal.
Fuel System Test

This test is conducted check Fuel system for proper operation. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Ignition SW is On. 3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
060RX025
060R100078

4. Select F3: Fuel System in the Miscellaneous Menu. 6. Push Disable or Enable soft key.
6E249
060RY00083
060RY00097
5. Select F0: Fuel Trim Enable.
7. Control Fuel Trim and check data list. 8. If data list changes, the Fuel Trim is normal. 9. Select F1: Fuel Trim Reset.
060R200071
060R200071
6E250

13. Push Open Loop or Closed Loop soft key.
10. Push Reset soft key.
060RY00098
060RY00099
11. Select F2: O2-Loop status.
14. Control O2-Loop and check data list. 15. If data list changes, the O2-Loop is normal.
Instruments Test
This test is conducted check Instruments for proper operation. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Ignition SW is On. 3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
060R200071
12. This test is check the Closed Loop Status performance.
060R100078

4. Select F4: Instruments in the Miscellaneous Menu. 6. Push Decrease or Increase soft key.
6E251
060RY00106
060RY00100
5. Select F0: Fuel Gauge level.
7. Control Fuel Level and check data list. 8. If data list and Fuel gauge meter changes, Fuel Gauge level is normal. 9. Select F1: Tachometer Control Test.
060RY00107
060RY00107
6E252

4. Select F5: EGR Control Test in the Miscellaneous Test.
10. Push Inactive or active soft key.
060RY00101
11. Control tachometer and data list. 12. If data list and meter changes, the tachometer control is normal.
060RY00084
5. Control EGR Valve and check data list.
EGR Control Test

This test is conducted check EGR valve for proper operation. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Run the Engine at idle. 3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
060RY00103
6. If data list changes, the EGR Control is normal.
Variable Intake Manifold Solenoid Test

This test is conducted check VIM Solenoid for proper operation. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC.
060R100078

2. Ignition SW is On.
6E253
4. Select F6: Variable Intake Manifold Solenoid Test.
060RY00104
060RY00085
5. Push On or Off soft key.
060RX028 060R100078
6. Control VIM Solenoid check data list. 7. If data list changes, the VIM Solenoid is normal.
6E254

5. Select injector number and push injector off soft key.
Injector Balance Test

This test is conducted to make sure the appropriate electric signals are being sent to injectors Nos. 16. Tech 2 must be used for this test. Test Procedure: 1. Connect Tech 2 to the vehicle DLC. 2. Run the Engine at idle. 3. Select F3: Miscellaneous Test in the Application Menu.
060RY00105
6. Make sure of engine speed change. 7. If engine speed changes, the injector electric circuit is normal. If engine speed does not change, the injector electric circuit or the injector itself is not normal.

060R100078
4. Select F7: Injector Balance Test in the Miscellaneous Test.
This test selects several necessary items from the data list to plot graphs and makes data comparison on a long term basis. It is an effective test particularly in emission related evaluations.
060RY00086 060RX037
For trouble diagnosis, you can collect graphic data (snap shot) directly from the vehicle. You can replay the snapshot data as needed. Therefore, accurate diagnosis is possible, even though the vehicle is not available.
6E255
060R200070
6E256
060R200072
6E257
Primary System-Based Diagnostic

Primary System-Based Diagnostic
There are primary system-based diagnostics which evaluate system operation and its effect on vehicle emissions. The primary system-based diagnostics are listed below with a brief description of the diagnostic function: Oxygen Sensor Diagnosis The fuel control heated oxygen sensors (Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1) are diagnosed for the following conditions: D Heater performance (time to activity on cold start) D Slow response D Response time (time to switch R/L or L/R) D Inactive signal (output steady at bias voltage approx. 450 mV) D Signal fixed high D Signal fixed low The catalyst monitor heated oxygen sensors (Bank 1 HO2S 2 and Bank 2 HO2S 2) are diagnosed for the following conditions: D Heater performance (time to activity on cold start). D Signal fixed low during steady state conditions or power enrichment (hard acceleration when a rich mixture should be indicated). D Signal fixed high during steady state conditions or deceleration mode (deceleration when a lean mixture should be indicated). D Inactive sensor (output steady at approx. 438 mV). If the oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector or terminal are damaged, the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. DO NOT attempt to repair the wiring, connector or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly, it must have clean reference air provided to it. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor wire(s). Any attempt to repair the wires, connector or terminals could result in the obstruction of the reference air and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Refer to On-Vehicle Service, Heated Oxygen Sensors in this section.
HO2S Heater
Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for closed loop fuel control to begin operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors (Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank2 HO2S 1) to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by catalyst monitor and sensor (Bank 1 HO2S 2 and Bank 2 HO2S 2) to maintain a sufficiently high temperature which allows accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further away from the engine.
Catalyst Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensors and Diagnostic Operation
TS24067
Fuel Control Heated Oxygen Sensor

The main function of the fuel control heated oxygen sensors is to provide the control module with exhaust stream oxygen content information to allow proper fueling and maintain emissions within mandated levels. After it reaches operating temperature, the sensor will generate a voltage, inversely proportional to the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gases. The control module uses the signal voltage from the fuel control heated oxygen sensors while in closed loop to adjust fuel injector pulse width. While in closed loop, the PCM can adjust fuel delivery to maintain an air/fuel ratio which allows the best combination of emission control and driveability. The fuel control heated oxygen sensors are also used to determine catalyst efficiency.
To control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a three-way catalytic converter is used. The catalyst within the converter promotes a chemical reaction which oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas, converting them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx, converting it to nitrogen. The PCM has the ability to monitor this process using the pre-catalyst and post-catalyst heated oxygen sensors. The pre-catalyst sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the three-way catalytic converter. The post-catalyst sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst; this in turn indicates the catalysts ability to convert exhaust gases efficiently. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the pre-catalyst signal will be far more active than that produced by the post-catalyst sensor. In addition to catalyst monitoring, the heated oxygen sensors have a limited role in controlling fuel delivery. If the sensor signal indicates a high or low oxygen content for an extended period of time while in closed loop, the PCM will adjust the fuel delivery slightly to compensate.
6E258

Aftermarket HO2S characteristics may be different from the original equipment manufacturer sensor. This may lead to a false pass or a false fail of the catalyst monitor diagnostic. Similarly, if an aftermarket catalyst does not contain the same amount of cerium as the original part, the correlation between oxygen storage and conversion efficiency may be altered enough to set a false DTC.
D For the 3.5L w/automatic transmission, the pre-catalyst sensors are designated Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1. The post-catalyst sensors are Bank 1 HO2S 2 and Bank 2 HO2S 2. Catalyst Monitor Outputs The catalyst monitor diagnostic is sensitive to the following conditions: D Exhaust leaks D HO2S contamination D Alternate fuels Exhaust system leaks may cause the following: D Preventing a degraded catalyst from failing the diagnostic. D Causing a false failure for a normally functioning catalyst. D Preventing the diagnostic from running. Some of the contaminants that may be encountered are phosphorus, lead, silica, and sulfur. The presence of these contaminants will prevent the TWC diagnostic from functioning properly. Three-Way Catalyst Oxygen Storage Capacity The Three-Way catalyst (TWC) must be monitored for efficiency. To accomplish this, the control module monitors the pre-catalyst HO2S and post-catalyst HO2S oxygen sensors. When the TWC is operating properly, the post-catalyst oxygen sensor will have significantly less activity than the pre-catalyst oxygen sensor. The TWC stores and releases oxygen as needed during its normal reduction and oxidation process. The control module will calculate the oxygen storage capacity using the difference between the pre-catalyst and post catalyst oxygen sensors voltage levels. If the activity of the post-catalyst oxygen sensor approaches that of the pre-catalyst oxygen sensor, the catalysts efficiency is degraded. Stepped or staged testing level allow the control module to statistically filter test information. This prevents falsely passing or falsely failing the oxygen storage capacity test. The calculations performed by the on-board diagnostic system are very complex. For this reason, post catalyst oxygen sensor activity should not be used to determine oxygen storage capacity unless directed by the service manual. Two stages are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. Failure of the first stage will indicate that the catalyst requires further testing to determine catalyst efficiency. The seconds stage then looks at the inputs for the pre and post catalyst HO2S sensors more closely before determining if the catalyst is indeed degraded. This further statistical processing is done to increase the accuracy of oxygen storage capacity type monitoring. Failing the first (stage 1) test DOES NOT indicate a failed catalyst. The catalyst may be marginal or the fuel sulfur content could be very high.

Misfire is monitored as a function of the combustion quality (CQ) signals generated from the ignition current sense system. Combustion signals represent the degree of combustion in each cylinder. Misfire is detected when the combustion signal is below a predetermined value. The misfire ratio is calculated once every 100 engine cycles. For example, on a 6-cylinder engine, 600 ignition plug sparks occur every 100 cycles and if a misfire occurs 12 times during that time, the misfire is 12/600 100 = 2 %.
Misfire Counters
Whenever a cylinder misfires, the misfire diagnostic counts the misfire and notes the crankshaft position at the time the misfire occurred. These misfire counters are basically a file on each engine cylinder. A current and a history misfire counter are maintained for each cylinder. The misfire current counters (Misfire Cur #1-6) indicate the number of firing events out of the last 100 cylinder firing events which were misfires. The misfire current counter will display real time data without a misfire DTC stored. The misfire history counters (Misfire Hist #1-6) indicate the total number of cylinder firing events which were misfires. The misfire history counters will display 0 until the misfire diagnostic has failed and a DTC P0300 is set. Once the misfire DTC P0300 is set, the misfire history counters will be updated every 100 cylinder firing events. A misfire counter is maintained for each cylinder. If the misfire diagnostic reports a failure, the diagnostic executive reviews all of the misfire counters before reporting DTC. This way, the diagnostic executive reports the most current information. When crankshaft rotation is erratic, a misfire condition will be detected. Because of this erratic condition, the data that is collected by the diagnostic can sometimes incorrectly identify which cylinder is misfiring. Misfires are counted from more than one cylinder. Cylinder #1 has the majority of counted misfires. In this case, the Misfire Counters would identify cylinder #1 as the misfiring cylinder. The misfires in the other counters were just background noise caused by the erratic misfire rotation of the crankshaft. If the number of accumulated misfires is sufficient for the diagnostic to identify a true misfire, the diagnostic will set DTC P0300 Misfire Detected. Use diagnostic equipment to monitor misfire counter data on OBD II-compliant vehicles. Knowing which specific cylinder(s) misfired can lead to the root cause, even when dealing with a multiple cylinder misfire. Using the information in the misfire counters, identify which cylinders are misfiring. If the counter indicate cylinders

numbers 1 and 4 misfired, look for a circuit or component common to both cylinders number 1 and 4. Misfire counter information is located in the Eng. menu, Misfire Data sub-menu of the data list. The misfire diagnostic may indicate a fault due to a temporary fault not necessarily caused by a vehicle emission system malfunction. Examples include the following items: D Contaminated fuel D Low fuel D Fuel-fouled spark plugs D Basic engine fault
6E259

This system monitors the averages of short-term and long-term fuel trim values. If these fuel trim values stay at their limits for a calibrated period of time, a malfunction is indicated. The fuel trim diagnostic compares the averages of short-term fuel trim values and long-term fuel trim values to rich and lean thresholds. If either value is within the thresholds, a pass is recorded. If both values are outside their thresholds, a rich or lean DTC will be recorded. The fuel trim system diagnostic also conducts an intrusive test. This test determines if a rich condition is being caused by excessive fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. In order to meet OBD II requirements, the control module uses weighted fuel trim cells to determine the need to set a fuel trim DTC. A fuel trim DTC can only be set if fuel trim counts in the weighted fuel trim cells exceed specifications. This means that the vehicle could have a fuel trim problem which is causing a problem under certain conditions (i.e., engine idle high due to a small vacuum leak or rough idle due to a large vacuum leak) while it operates fine at other times. No fuel trim DTC would set (although an engine idle speed DTC or HO2S DTC may set). Use the Tech 2 to observe fuel trim counts while the problem is occurring. A fuel trim DTC may be triggered by a number of vehicle faults. Make use of all information available (other DTCs stored, rich or lean condition, etc.) when diagnosing a fuel trim fault.
Fuel Trim Cell Diagnostic Weights

No fuel trim DTC will set regardless of the fuel trim counts in cell 0 unless the fuel trim counts in the weighted cells are also outside specifications. This means that the vehicle could have a fuel trim problem which is causing a problem under certain conditions (i.e. engine idle high due to a small vacuum leak or rough due to a large vacuum leak) while it operates fine at other times. No fuel trim DTC would set (although an engine idle speed DTC or HO2S DTC may set). Use the Tech 2 to observe fuel trim counts while the problem is occurring.
6E260
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD II) System Check
060R200048
Circuit Description
The on-board diagnostic system check is the starting point for any driveability complaint diagnosis. Before using this procedure, perform a careful visual/physical check of the PCM and engine grounds for cleanliness and tightness. The on-board diagnostic system check is an organized approach to identifying a problem created by an electronic engine control system malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbedthrough wire insulation or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for poor connections or a damaged harness. Inspect the PCM harness and connector for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal-to-wire connection, and damaged harness.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 1.The MIL (Check Engine lamp) should be ON steady with the ignition ON and the engine OFF. If not, the No MIL chart should be used to isolate the malfunction. 2.The RPL (Reduced Power lamp) should be ON steady with the ignition ON and the engine OFF. If not, the No RPLchart should be used to isolate the malfunction.
3.Checks the Class 2 data circuit and ensures that the PCM is able to transmit serial data. 4.This test ensures that the PCM is capable of controlling the MIL (Check Engine lamp) and the MIL (Check Engine lamp) driver circuit is not shorted to ground. 5.This test ensures that the PCM is capable of controlling the RPL (Reduced Power lamp) and the RPL (Reduced Power lamp) driver circuit is not shorted to ground. 7.Check the DTCs (System ,Volts Supply circuit). 8.Check the DTCs (PCM{Software} detect Errors). 11.If the engine will not start, the Cranks But Will Not Run chart should be used to diagnose the condition. 14.A Tech 2 parameter which is not within the typical range may help to isolate the area which is causing the problem. 15.This vehicle is equipped with a PCM which utilizes an electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM). When the PCM is replaced, the new PCM must be programmed. Refer to PCM Replacement and Programming Procedures in Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Sensors of this section. 10. If the starter motor will not start, the starter control system chart should be used to diagnose the condition.
6E261
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD II) System Check

1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Observe the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL or Check Engine lamp). Is the MIL (Check Engine lamp)ON? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Observe the Reduced Power lamp. Is the RPL (Reduced Power lamp) ON? Go to Step 3
Go to No MIL(Check Engine lamp) Go to No RPL(Reduce d Power lamp)
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Install Tech 2. Ignition ON. Attempt to display PCM engine data with the Tech 2. Go to Step 4 Go to Step 12
Does the Tech 2 display PCM data? 4 1. Using the Tech 2 output tests function, select MIL (Check Engine lamp) control and command the MIL (Check Engine Lamp) OFF. 2. Observe the MIL (Check Engine lamp). Did the MIL (Check Engine lamp) turn OFF? 5 1. Using the Tech 2 output tests function, select MIL (Check Engine lamp) control and command the RPL (Reduced Power lamp) OFF. 2. Observe the RPL (Reduced Power lamp). Did the MIL (Reduced Power lamp) turn OFF? 6 7 Select Display DTCs with the Tech 2. Are any DTCs stored? Stored DTCs. P0562, P0563, P0601, P0602, P0604, P0606, P1625, P1635, P1639, P1640, P1650 Are the applicable DTCs stored? 8 Stored DTCs. P1514, P1515, P1516, P1523, P1125, P1290, P1295, P1299 Are the applicable DTCs stored? 9 Stored DTCs. 1. P0425, P0106, P0107, P1107, P0401, P1404, P0405, P1120, P1221, P1515, P1516, P1275, P1635, P1271, P1273, P1285, P1272 2. P0336, P0337, P1220, P1515, P1221, P1516, P1280, P1639, P1271, P1272 Are the applicable DTCs stored? 10 Attempt to crank the starter motor Did the starter motor crank? 11 Attempt to start the engine. Did the engine start and continue to run?
Go to Step 5
Go to MIL(Check Engine lamp) On Steady Go to RPL(Reduce d Power lamp) On Steady Go to Step 11
Go to applicable DTC table
Go to Step 8
Go to applicable DTC table
Go to Step 9
Go to Multiple PCM Information sensor DTCs Set
Go to Step 10 Go to Starter control system Go to Cranks But Will Not Run
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 6
6E262
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD II) System Check (Cont'd)

12
Compare PCM data values displayed on the Tech 2 to the typical engine scan data values. Are the displayed values normal or close to the typical values? Go to Symptom
Refer to indicated Component System Checks
13
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the PCM. 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 3. Check the Class 2 data circuit for an open, short to ground, or short to voltage. Also, check the DLC ignition feed circuit for an open or short to ground and the DLC ground circuit for an open. 4. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 14 1. Attempt to reprogram the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in On-Vehicle Service. 2. Attempt to display PCM data with the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 display PCM engine data? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 15 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Go to Step 2
14
15
6E263
060R100063
Circuit Description
When air conditioning and blower fan are selected, and if the system has a sufficient refrigerant charge, a 12-volt signal is supplied to the A/C request input of the powertrain control module (PCM). The A/C request signal may be temporarily canceled during system operation by the electronic thermostat in the evaporator case. When the A/C request signal is received by the PCM, the PCM supplies a ground from the compressor clutch relay if the engine operating conditions are within acceptable ranges. With the A/C compressor relay energized, voltage is supplied to the compressor clutch coil. The PCM will enable the compressor clutch to engage whenever A/C has been selected with the engine running, unless any of the following conditions are present: D The throttle is greater than 90%. D The ignition voltage is below 10.5 volts. D The engine speed is greater than 4500 RPM for 5 seconds or 5400 RPM.
D The engine coolant temperature (ECT) is greater than 125 C (257 F). D The intake air temperature (IAT) is less than 5C (41F). D The power steering pressure switch signals a high pressure condition.
Diagnostic Aids
To diagnose an the intermittent fault, check for following conditions: D Poor connection at the PCMInspect connections for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harnessInspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to OK, observe the A/C clutch while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the A/C. A sudden clutch malfunction will indicate the source of the intermittent fault.
6E264

3. This a test determine is the problem is with the refrigerant system. If the switch is open, A/C pressure gauges will be used to determine if the pressure switch is faulty or if the system is partially discharged or empty. 4. Although the normal complaint will be the A/C clutch failing to engage, it is possible for a short circuit to cause the clutch to run when A/C has not been selected. This step is a test for that condition. 7. There is an extremely low probability that both relays will fail at the same time, so the substitution process is one way to check the A/C Thermostat relay. Use a known good relay to do a substitution check.

This chart should be used for diagnosing the electrical portion of the A/C compressor clutch circuit. A Tech 2 will be used in diagnosing the system. The Tech 2 has the ability to read the A/C request input to the PCM. The Tech 2 can display when the PCM has commanded the A/C clutch ON. The Tech 2 should have the ability to override the A/C request signal and energize the A/C compressor relay.
Test Description
IMPORTANT: Do not engage the A/C compressor clutch with the engine running if an A/C mode is not selected at the A/C control switch. The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the Diagnostic Chart:

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to the other DTC chart(s) first Go to Air Conditioning to diagnose the cause of the open pressure switch Are any other DTCs stored?
Go to Step 3
1. Disconnect the electrical connector at the pressure switch located on the receiver/drier. 2. Use an ohmmeter to check continuity across the pressure switch. Is the pressure switch open?
Go to Step 4
IMPORTANT: Before continuing with the diagnosis, the following conditions must be met: D The intake air temperature must be greater than 15C. (60F). D The engine coolant temperature must be less than 119C (246F). 1. A/C OFF. 2. Start the engine and idle for 1 minute. 3. Observe the A/C compressor. Is the A/C compressor clutch engaged even though A/C has not been requested? Go to Step 37 Go to Step 5
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Idle the engine. A/C ON. Blower ON. Observe the A/C compressor. Engine idling. A/C ON. Blower ON. Observe the A/C Request display on the Tech 2. (Refer to the Miscellaneous test)
Is the A/C compressor magnetic clutch engaged? 6
Go to Step 6
Does the tool A/C Request display indicate Yes?
Go to Step 26
Go to Step 7
6E265

Temporarily substitute the A/C compressor relay in place of the A/C thermostat relay, then repeat Step 5. Did the A/C Request display indicate Yes? Go to Step 8 Verify repair Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 9 Go to Step 11 Replace the original A/C thermostat relay. Is the action complete? Does the blower operate? Repair the blower. Is the action complete? Check for a faulty 10A A/C fuse in the underdash fuse panel. Was the 10A fuse OK? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 12 Check for short circuit and make repairs if necessary. Replace the 10A A/C fuse. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Remove the glove box to gain access to the A/C thermostat. 2. Disconnect the thermostat connector. 3. Attach a fused jumper between ground and the thermostat wire. 4. A/C ON. 5. Blower ON. Dose A/C request indicate YES on the Tech 2? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 17 1. Ignition ON. 2. Use a DVM to check voltage at the electronic A/C thermostat. Was voltage equal to the specified value? B+ Go to Step 17 Go to Step 15 Check for open wire between the thermostat and the A/C switch. Was the wire open? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 17 Repair the open wire between the thermostat and the A/C switch. Is the action complete? Verify repair Check for an open circuit between A/C thermostat relay and PCM A/C request terminal (F45). Was there an open circuit? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 19 Repair the open circuit between the PCM and A/C thermostat relay. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Ignition ON. 2. Use a DVM to check voltage at the A/C pressure switch. Was voltage equal to the specified value? B+ Go to Step 21 Go to Step 20 Repair the open circuit between the 10A A/C fuse and the pressure switch. Is the action complete? Verify repair
8 9 10 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
6E266

21
Use an ohmmeter to check continuity between the pressure switch and the A/C thermostat relay. Was the circuit open? Go to Step 22 Go to Step 23 Repair the open circuit between the pressure switch and the A/C thermostat relay. Is the action complete? Verify repair Go to Step 24 Verify repair Go to Step 25 Check for damaged pin or terminal at F45 of the PCM. Was a damaged pin or terminal found? Repair the damaged pin or terminal. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
22
23 24 25
26
1. Remove the A/C compressor relay. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Use a DVM to check voltage at both of the wires at the A/C compressor relay socket. Is the voltage equal to the specified value? B+ Go to Step 28 Go to Step 27 Repair the faulty wire between the A/C fuse and the A/C compressor relay . Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A/C compressor relay removed. Engine idling. A/C ON. Blower ON. Use a DVM to measure voltage between the wire at the A/C compressor relay socket and battery. B+ Go to Step 32 Go to Step 29
27
28
Did the DVM indicate the specified value? 29 Check for an open wire between PCM terminal F4 and the A/C compressor relay. Was the wire open? 30 Repair the open wire between the PCM and the A/C compressor relay. Is the action complete? 31 Check for a damaged pin or terminal at F4 of the PCM. Was a damaged pin or a terminal found?
Go to Step 30
Go to Step 31
Go to Step 25
6E267

32
1. A/C compressor relay removed. 2. Connect a fused jumper at the A/C compressor relay socket with either wire. 3. Engine idling. 4. A/C ON. 5. Blower ON. Did the compressor magnetic clutch engage? Go to Step 33 Verify repair Go to Step 34 Repair the A/C compressor relay. Is the action complete? Check for an open circuit between the A/C compressor relay and the A/C clutch. Was an open circuit found? Go to Step 35 Go to Step 36 Repair the open circuit between the compressor Clutch and the A/C compressor relay. Is the action complete? Verify repair Service the compressor clutch or replace the compressor due to a faulty internal overheat switch. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Remove the A/C compressor relay. 2. Idle the engine. Is the compressor clutch still engaged when A/C is not selected? Go to Step 38 Go to Step 39
33 34
35
36
37
38
Repair the short to voltage between the A/C clutch and A/C compressor relay. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Reinstall the A/C compressor relay. 2. Remove the A/C thermostat relay. 3. Engine idling. Is the compressor clutch still engaged when A/C is not selected? Go to Step 40 Go to Step 42
39
40
Use a DVM to check for a short to ground between the A/C compressor relay and F4 of the PCM. Was a short detected? Go to Step 41 Go to Step 25 Repair the short to ground between the PCM and A/C compressor relay. Is the action complete? Verify repair Repair the short to ground between the A/C thermostat relay and the electronic thermostat. Is the action complete? Verify repair
41
42
6E268
Electronic Ignition System Diagnosis

If the engine cranks but will not run or immediately stalls, the Engine Cranks But Will Not Start chart must be used to determine if the failure is in the ignition system or the fuel system. If DTC P0300 through P0306, P0341, or P0336 is set, the appropriate diagnostic trouble code chart must be used for diagnosis. If a misfire is being experienced with no DTC set, refer to the Symptoms section for diagnosis.
Fuel Injector Coil Test Procedure and Fuel Injector Balance Test Procedure
EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid and EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve

A continuous purge condition with no purge commanded by the PCM will set a DTC P1441. Refer to the DTC charts for further information.
Visual Check of The Evaporative Emission Canister

D If the canister is cracked or damaged, replace the canister. D If fuel is leaking from the canister, replace the canister and check hoses and hose routing.
T32003
Fuel Metering System Check

Some failures of the fuel metering system will result in an Engine Cranks But Will Not Run symptom. If this condition exists, refer to the Cranks But Will Not Run chart. This chart will determine if the problem is caused by the ignition system, the PCM, or the fuel pump electrical circuit. Refer to Fuel System Electrical Test for the fuel system wiring schematic. If there is a fuel delivery problem, refer to Fuel System Diagnosis, which diagnoses the fuel injectors, the fuel pressure regulator, and the fuel pump. If a malfunction occurs in the fuel metering system, it usually results in either a rich HO2S signal or a lean HO2S signal. This condition is indicated by the HO2S voltage, which causes the PCM to change the fuel calculation (fuel injector pulse width) based on the HO2S reading. Changes made to the fuel calculation will be indicated by a change in the long term fuel trim values which can be monitored with a Tech 2. Ideal long term fuel trim values are around 0%; for a lean HO2S signal, the PCM will add fuel, resulting in a fuel trim value above 0%. Some variations in fuel trim values are normal because all engines are not exactly the same. If the evaporative emission canister purge is ON, the fuel trim may be as low as 38%. If the fuel trim values are greater than +23%, refer to DTC P0131, DTC P0151, DTC P0171, and DTC 1171 for items which can cause a lean HO2S signal.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. Relieve the fuel pressure by connecting the J 34730-1 Fuel Pressure Gauge to the fuel pressure connection on the fuel rail. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gauge is complete. Place the fuel pressure gauge bleed hose in an approved gasoline container. With the ignition switch OFF, open the valve on the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Record the lowest voltage displayed by the DVM after the first second of the test. (During the first second, voltage displayed by the DVM may be inaccurate due to the initial current surge.) Injector Specifications: Resistance (Ohms) 11.8 12.6 Voltage Specification at 10C-35C (50F-95F) 5.7 6.6
Fuel System Pressure Test

A fuel system pressure test is part of several of the diagnostic charts and symptom checks. To perform this test, refer to Fuel Systems Diagnosis.
D The voltage displayed by the DVM should be within the specified range. D The voltage displayed by the DVM may increase throughout the test as the fuel injector windings warm and the resistance of the fuel injector windings changes.

D An erratic voltage reading (large fluctuations in voltage that do not stabilize) indicates an intermittent connection within the fuel injector. 5. Injector Specifications: Highest Acceptable Voltage Reading Above/Below 35C/10C (95F/50F) 9.5 Volts Acceptable Subtracted Value
6E269
7. The Fuel Injector Balance Test portion of this chart (Step 7 through Step 11) checks the mechanical (fuel delivery) portion of the fuel injector. An engine cool-down period of 10 minutes is necessary in order to avoid irregular fuel pressure readings due to Hot Soak fuel boiling.
0.6 Volts
Injector Coil Test Procedure (Steps 1-6) and Injector Balance Test Procedure (Steps 7-11)
R262001
CYLINDER 1st Reading (1) 2nd Reading (2) Amount of Drop (1st Reading2nd Reading) Av.drop = 166 kPa/24 psi 10 kPa/1.5 psi = 156 176 kPa or 22.5 25.5 psi
1 296 kPa (43 psi) 131 kPa (19 psi) 165 kPa (24 psi) OK
2 296 kPa (43 psi) 117 kPa (17 psi) 179 kPa (26 psi) Faulty, Rich (Too Much Fuel Drop)
4 296 kPa (43 psi) 145 kPa (21 psi) 151 kPa (22 psi) Faulty, Lean (Too Little Fuel Drop)
NOTE: These figures are examples only.
6E270
Injector Coil Test Procedure (Steps 1-6) and Injector Balance Test Procedure (Steps 7-11)
Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Turn the engine OFF. NOTE: In order to prevent flooding of a single cylinder and possible engine damage, relieve the fuel pressure before performing the fuel injector coil test procedure. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Test Description Number 2. 3. Connect the J 39021-5V Fuel Injector Tester to B+ and ground, and to the J 39021-90 Injector Switch Box. 4. Connect the injector switch box to the grey fuel injector harness connector located on the front of the EVAP canister bracket. 5. Set the amperage supply selector switch on the fuel injector tester to the Coil Test 0.5 amp position. 6. Connect the leads from the J 39200 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to the injector tester. Refer to the illustrations associated with the test description. 7. Set the DVM to the tenths scale (0.0). 8. Observe the engine coolant temperature. Is the engine coolant temperature within the specified values?
10C (50F) to 35C (95F)
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
1. Set injector switch box injector #1. 2. Press the Push to Start Test button on the fuel injector tester. 3. Observe the voltage reading on the DVM. IMPORTANT: The voltage reading may rise during the test. 4. Record the lowest voltage observed after the first second of the test. 5. Set the injector switch box to the next injector and repeat steps 2, 3, and 4. Did any fuel injector have an erratic voltage reading (large fluctuations in voltage that did not stabilize) or a voltage reading outside of the specified values?
5.7-6.6 V
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 7
Replace the faulty fuel injector(s). Refer to Fuel Injector. Is the action complete? Go to Step 7
6E271
Injector Coil Test Procedure (Steps 1-6) and Injector Balance Test Procedure (Steps 7-11) (Cont'd)
1. Set injector switch box injector #1. 2. Press the Push to Start Test button on the fuel injector tester. 3. Observe the voltage reading on the DVM. IMPORTANT: The voltage reading may rise during the test. 4. Record the lowest voltage observed after the first second of the test. 5. Set the injector switch box to the next injector and repeat steps 2, 3, and 4. Did any fuel injector have an erratic voltage reading (large fluctuations in voltage that did not stabilize) or a voltage reading above the specified value?
9.5 V
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 6
1. Identify the highest voltage reading recorded (other than those above 9.5 V). 2. Subtract the voltage reading of each injector from the highest voltage selected in step 1. Repeat until you have a subtracted value for each injector. For any injector, is the subtracted Value in step 2 greater than the specified value? 0.6 V Go to Step 4 Go to Step 7
CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gauge is complete. 1. Connect the J 34730-1 Fuel Pressure Gauge to the fuel pressure test port. 2. Energize the fuel pump using the Tech 2. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gauge into an approved gasoline container. 4. Bleed the air out of the fuel pressure gauge. 5. With the fuel pump running, observe the reading on the fuel pressure gauge. Is the fuel pressure within the specified values?
296-376 kPa (43-55 psi)
Go to Step 8
Go to Fuel System Diagnosis Go to Fuel System Diagnosis
Turn the fuel pump OFF. Does the fuel pressure remain constant? Go to Step 9
6E272
Injector Coil Test Procedure (Steps 1-6) and Injector Balance Test Procedure (Steps 7-11) (Cont'd)
1. Connect the J 39021-5V Fuel Injector Tester and J 39021-90 Injector Switch Box the fuel injector harness connector. 2. Set the amperage supply selector switch on the fuel injector tester to the Balance Test 0.52.5 amp position. 3. Using the Tech 2 turn the fuel pump ON then OFF in order to pressurize the fuel system. 4. Record the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge after the fuel pressure stabilizes. This is the first pressure reading. 5. Energize the fuel injector by depressing the Push to Start Test button on the fuel injector tester. 6. Record the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge after the fuel pressure gauge needle has stopped moving. This is the second pressure reading. 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each fuel injector. 8. Subtract the second pressure reading from the first pressure reading for one fuel injector. The result is the pressure drop value. 9. Obtain a pressure drop value for each fuel injector. 10.Add all of the individual pressure drop values. This is the total pressure drop. 11. Divide the total pressure drop by the number of fuel injectors. This is the average pressure drop. Does any fuel injector have a pressure drop value that is either higher than the average pressure drop or lower than the average pressure drop by the specified value? 10 kPa (1.5 psi) Go to OBD System Check
Go to Step 10
10
Re-test any fuel injector that does not meet the specification. Refer to the procedure in step 9. NOTE: Do not repeat any portion of this test before running the engine in order to prevent the engine from flooding. Does any fuel injector still have a pressure drop value that is either higher than the average pressure drop or lower than the average pressure drop by the specified value?
10 kPa (1.5 psi)
Go to Step 11
Go to Symptoms
11
Replace the faulty fuel injector(s). Injector. Is the action complete?
Refer to Fuel Verify repair
6E273
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Diagnosis

To read and clear diagnostic trouble codes, use a Tech 2. IMPORTANT: Use of a Tech 2 is recommended to clear diagnostic trouble codes from the PCM memory. Diagnostic trouble codes can also be cleared by turning the ignition OFF and disconnecting the battery power from the PCM for 30 seconds. Turning off the ignition and disconnecting the battery power from the PCM will cause all diagnostic information in the PCM memory to be cleared. Therefore, all the diagnostic tests will have to be re-run. Since the PCM can have a failure which may affect only one circuit, following the diagnostic procedures in this section will determine which circuit has a problem and where it is. If a diagnostic chart indicates that the PCM connections or the PCM is the cause of a problem, and the PCM is replaced, but this does not correct the problem, one of the following may be the reason: D There is a problem with the PCM terminal connections. The terminals may have to be removed from the connector in order to check them properly. D EEPROM program is not correct for the application. Incorrect components or reprogramming the PCM with the wrong EEPROM program may cause a malfunction and may or may not set a DTC. D The problem is intermittent. This means that the problem is not present at the time the system is being checked. In this case, refer to the Symptoms portion of the manual and make a careful physical inspection of all component and wiring associated with the affected system. D There is a shorted solenoid, relay coil, or harness. Solenoids and relays are turned ON and OFF by the PCM using internal electronic switches called drivers. A shorted solenoid, relay coil, or harness will not damage the PCM but will cause the solenoid or relay to be inoperative.
The PCM provides the following sensors with a 5volt reference and a sensor ground signal: 1 D The exhaust gas recirculating (EGR) pintle position sensor D The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor D The throttle position (TP) sensor 1 D The acceleration position (AP) sensor 1 D The acceleration position (AP) sensor 3 D The Vapor Pressure Sensor 2 D The Crank position (CKP) sensor D The throttle position (TP) sensor 2 D The acceleration position (AP) sensor 2 The PCM monitors the separate feedback signals from these sensors in order to determine their operating status.
Diagnostic Aids
IMPORTANT: Be sure to inspect PCM and engine grounds for being secure and clean. A short to voltage in one of the sensor input circuits may cause one or more of the following DTCs to be set: D P0425 D P0108, P1106 D P0406 D P1120, P1515, P1221, P1516, P1635 D P1275, P1639, P1271, P1273 D P1285, P1272, P1273 D P0336, P0337 D P1220, P1515, P1221, P1515, P1516 D P1280, P1271, P1272 IMPORTANT: If a sensor input circuit has been shorted to voltage, ensure that the sensor is not damaged. A damaged sensor will continue to indicate a high or low voltage after the affected circuit has been repaired. If the sensor has been damaged, replace it. An open in the sensor ground circuit between the PCM and the splice will cause one or more of the following DTCs to be set: D P0425 D P0108, P1106 D P0406 D P1120, P1515, P1221, P1516, P1635 D P1275, P1639, P1271, P1273 D P1285, P1272, P1273 D P0336, P0337 D P1220, P1515, P1221, P1515, P1516 D P1280, P1271, P1272 A short to ground in the 5volt reference A or B circuit will cause one or more of the following DTCs to be set: D P0453 D P0106, P0107, P1107 D P0401, P1404, P0405 D P1120, P1515, P1221, P1516, P1635

Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors various sensors to determine the engine operating conditions. The PCM controls fuel delivery, spark advance, transmission operation, and emission control device operation based on the sensor inputs. The PCM provides a sensor ground to all of the sensors. The PCM applies 5 volts through a pullup resistor, and determines the status of the following sensors by monitoring the voltage present between the 5volt supply and the resistor: D The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor D The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor D The transmission fluid temperature (TFT) sensor
6E274

D Damaged harness. Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness is not damaged, observe an affected sensor fs displayed value on the Tech 2 with the ignition ON and the engine OFF while you move the connectors and the wiring harnesses related to the following sensors: D Vapor Pressure (Fuel Tank Pressure) Sensor D MAP Sensor D EGR D TPS1/TPS2 D APS1/APS2/APS3 D CKP
D P1275, P1639, P1271, P1273 D P1285, P1272, P1273 D P0336, P0337 D P1220, P1515, P1221, P1515, P1516 D P1280, P1271, P1272 Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM. Inspect the harness connectors for backedout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damage terminals, and a poor terminaltowire connection.

Was the On-Board (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
1. Turn the ignition OFF, disconnect the PCM. 2. Turn the ignition ON, check the 5 volt reference 1 and 2 circuit for the following conditions: D A poor connection at the PCM. D An open between the PCM connector and the splice. D A short to ground. D A short to voltage. Is there an open or short? Go to Step 3 Verify repair Go to Step 4 Repair the open or short. Is the action complete? Check the sensor ground circuit for the following conditions: D A poor connection at the PCM or the affected sensors. D An open between the PCM connector and the affected sensors. Is there an open or a poor connection? Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to applicable DTC table Go to Step 6 Repair the open or the poor connection. Is the action complete? Following below the DTCs stored: P1635, P1639 Measure the resistance below the items: D Between EGR sensor supply circuit and Vapor Pressure Sensor supply circuit. D Between MAP sensor supply circuit and Vapor Pressure Sensor supply circuit. D Between Vapor Pressure Sensor supply circuit and PCM harness connector. (5Volt supply circuit) Is the resistance near the specified value? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8
3 4
5 6
Go to Step 7
6E275
Multiple PCM Information Sensor DTCs Set (Cont'd)

Locate and repair the open circuit in the MAP or EGR or Vapor Pressure sensor supply circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Disconnect the MAP, Vapor pressure sensor and EGR connector. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Measure the resistance of the blow areas: D MAP sensor GND circuit. D EGR GND circuit. D Vapor pressure sensor GND circuit. Does the voltage resistance near the specified value? Go to Step 11 Go to Step 10 Locate and repair the short circuit in the MAP or EGR or Vapor Pressure sensor signal or GND circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Measure the resistance of the blow areas: D Between CKP Sensor supply circuit and PCM harness connector. (5Volt supply circuit) Does the voltage resistance near the specified value? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 12 Locate and repair the open circuit in the CKP or CMP sensor supply circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Measure the voltage of the blow areas: D CKP sensor GND circuit and shield circuit. Does the voltage resistance near the specified value? Go to Step 15 Go to Step 14 Locate and repair the short circuit in the CKP sensor signal or GND circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Go to applicable DTC table Are more of the following items for DTCs stored? EGR, Vapor Pressure Sensor, MAP, CKP, TPS, APS Replace the PCM. The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
10
11
12
13
14
15
Go to Step 16
16
6E276

ECT (Engine Coolant Temperature) Tech 2 Range 40C to 151C (40F to 304F) The engine coolant temperature (ECT) is mounted in the coolant stream and sends engine temperature information to the PCM. The PCM applies 5 volts to the ECT sensor circuit. The sensor is a thermistor which changes internal resistance as temperature changes. When the sensor is cold (high resistance), the PCM monitors a high signal voltage and interprets that as a cold engine. As the sensor warms (decreasing resistance), the voltage signal will decrease and the PCM will interpret the lower voltage as a warm engine. EGR DUTY CYCLE Tech 2 Range 0%-100% Represents the EGR valve driver PWM signal from the PCM. A duty cycle of 0% indicates that no EGR flow is being commanded; a 100% duty cycle indicates maximum EGR flow commanded. EGR FEEDBACK Tech 2 Range 0.00-5.00 Volts Indicates the EGR pintle position sensor signal voltage being monitored by the PCM. A low voltage indicates a fully extended pintle (closed valve); a voltage near 5 volts indicates a retracted pintle (open valve). ENGINE LOAD Tech 2 Range 0%-100% Engine load is calculated by the PCM from engine speed and MAF sensor readings. Engine load should increase with an increase in RPM or air flow. ENGINE RUN TIME Tech 2 Range 00:00:00-99:99:99 Hrs:Min:Sec Indicates the time elapsed since the engine was started. If the engine is stopped, engine run time will be reset to 00:00:00. ENGINE SPEED Range 0-9999 RPM Engine speed is computed by the PCM from the 58X reference input. It should remain close to desired idle under various engine loads with engine idling. EVAP PURGE PWM Tech 2 Range 0%-100% Represents the PCM commanded PWM duty cycle of the EVAP purge solenoid valve. 0% displayed indicates no purge; 100% displayed indicates full purge. FUEL PUMP Tech 2 Displays ON or OFF Indicates the PCM commanded state of the fuel pump relay driver circuit. HO2S BANK 1, SEN. 1 Tech 2 Range 0-1132 mV Represents the fuel control exhaust oxygen sensor output voltage. Should fluctuate constantly within a range between 10 mV (lean exhaust) and 1000 mV (rich exhaust) while operating in closed loop. HO2S BANK 1, SEN. 2 Tech 2 Range 0-1000mV Monitors the exhaust oxygen sensor output voltage. The PCM monitors the operating efficiency of catalytic converter by comparing the output voltages of sensor 1 and sensor 2 in this bank. If the catalytic converter is operating efficiently, the output voltage of sensor 1 will give a greater fluctuation than that of sensor 2. If the PCM detects an abnormal level of voltage fluctuation from sensor 2, a DTC P0420 will be set, indicating that the catalytic converter for this bank is no longer operating efficiently.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Diagnosis

An EGR flow check diagnosis of the linear EGR system is covered by DTC P0401. Pintle position error diagnosis is covered by DTC P0402, P0404, P1404, P0405, P0406. If EGR diagnostic trouble codes P0401 and/or P0402, P0404, P1404, P0405, P0406 are encountered, refer to the DTC charts.
Engine Tech 2 Data Definitions and Ranges

A/C CLUTCH Tech 2 Displays ON or OFF Indicates whether the PCM has commanded the A/C clutch ON. Used in A/C system diagnostic. A/C REQUEST Tech 2 Displays YES or NO Indicates the state of the A/C request input circuit from the HVAC controls. The PCM uses the A/C request signal to determine whether A/C compressor operation is being requested. AIR/FUEL RATIO Tech 2 Range 0.0-25.5 Air/fuel ratio indicates the PCM commanded value. In closed loop, the air/fuel ratio should normally be displayed around 14.2-14.7. A lower air/fuel ratio indicates a richer commanded mixture, which may be seen during power enrichment or TWC protection modes. A higher air/fuel ratio indicates a leaner commanded mixture. This can be seen during deceleration fuel mode. AP1 Tech 2 Range 0%-100% AP (accelerator pedal) angle is computed by the PCM from the AP sensor voltage. AP angle should display 13% at idle and 85-89% at wide open throttle. AP2 Tech 2 Range 0%-100% AP (accelerator pedal) angle is computed by the PCM from the AP sensor voltage. AP angle should display 85-89% at idle and 11-15% at wide open throttle. AP3 Tech 2 Range 0%-100% AP (accelerator pedal) angle is computed by the PCM from the AP sensor voltage. AP angle should display 85-89% at idle and 32-36% at wide open throttle. BAROMETRIC PRESSURE Tech 2 Range 10-105 kPa/0.00-5.00 Volts The barometric pressure reading is determined from the MAP sensor signal monitored during key up and wide open throttle (WOT) conditions. The barometric pressure is used to compensate for altitude differences and is normally displayed around 61-104 depending on altitude and barometric pressure. CHECK TRANS LAMP AUTO TRANSMISSION Indicates the need to check for a DTC with the Tech 2 when the lamp is flashing 0.2 seconds ON and 0.2 seconds OFF. DESIRED EGR POS. Tech 2 Range 0%-100% Represents the EGR pintle position that the PCM is commanding. DESIRED IDLE Tech 2 Range 0-3187 RPM The idle speed that the PCM is commanding. The PCM will compensate for various engine loads based on engine coolant temperature, to keep the engine at the desired speed.

HO2S BANK2, SEN. 1 Tech 2 Range 0-1132 mV Represents the fuel control exhaust oxygen sensor output voltage. Should fluctuate constantly within a range between 10mV (lean exhaust) and 1000 mV (rich exhaust) while operating in closed loop. HO2S BANK 2, SEN. 2Tech 2 Range 0-1000 mV Monitors the exhaust oxygen sensor output voltage. The PCM monitors the operating efficiency of catalytic converter by comparing the output voltages of sensor 1 and sensor 2 in this bank. If the catalytic converter is operating efficiently, the output voltage of sensor 1 will have a greater fluctuation than that of sensor 2. If the PCM detects an abnormal level of voltage fluctuation from sensor 2, a DTC P0430 will be set, indicating that the catalytic converter for this bank is no longer operating efficiently. HO2S BANK 1, SEN. 1Tech 2 Displays NOT READY or READY Indicates the status of the exhaust oxygen sensor. The Tech 2 will indicate that the exhaust oxygen sensor is ready when the PCM detects a fluctuating HO2S voltage sufficient to allow closed loop operation. This will not occur unless the exhaust oxygen sensor is warmed up. HO2S BANK 2, SEN. 1 Tech 2 Displays NOT READY or READY Indicates the status of the exhaust oxygen sensor. The Tech 2 will indicate that the exhaust oxygen sensor is ready when the PCM detects a fluctuating HO2S voltage sufficient to allow closed loop operation. This will not occur unless the exhaust oxygen sensor is warmed up. HO2S WARM UP TIME BANK 1, SEN. 1/BANK 1, SEN 2/BANK 2 SEN. 1/BANK 2 SEN. 2 Tech 2 Range 00:00:00-99:99:99 HRS:MIN:SEC Indicates warm-up time for each HO2S. The HO2S warm-up time is used for the HO2S heater test. The PCM will run the heater test only after a cold start (determined by engine coolant and intake air temperature at the time of start-up) and only once during an ignition cycle. When the engine is started the PCM will monitor the HO2S voltage. When the HO2S voltage indicates a sufficiently active sensor, the PCM looks at how much time has elapsed since start-up. If the PCM determines that tool much time was required for the HO2S to become active, a DTC will set. If the engine was warm when started, HO2S warm-up will the display 00:00:00. IAT (INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE) Tech 2 Range 40C to 151C (40F to 304F) The PCM converts the resistance of the intake air temperature sensor to degrees. Intake air temperature (IAT) is used by the PCM to adjust fuel delivery and spark timing according to incoming air density. IGNITION 1 Tech 2 Range 0-25.5 Volts This represents the system voltage measured by the PCM at its ignition feed.
6E277
INJ. PULSE BANK 1/INJ. PULSE BANK 2 Tech 2 Range 0-1000 msec. Indicates the amount of time the PCM is commanding each injector ON during each engine cycle. A longer injector pulse width will cause more fuel to be delivered. Injector pulse width should increase with increased engine load. LONG TERM FUEL TRIM BANK 1/BANK 2 The long term fuel trim is derived from the short term fuel trim values and represents a long term correction of fuel delivery for the bank in question. A value of 0% indicates that fuel delivery requires no compensation to maintain the PCM commanded air/fuel ratio. A negative value significantly below 0% indicates that the fuel system is rich and fuel delivery is being reduced (decreased injector pulse width). A positive value significantly greater than 0% indicates that a lean condition exists and the PCM is compensating by adding fuel (increased injector pulse width). Because long term fuel trim tends to follow short term fuel trim, a value in the negative range due to canister purge at idle should not be considered unusual. Fuel trim values at maximum authority may indicate an excessively rich or lean system. Fuel System STATUS Tech 2 Displays OPEN or CLOSED CLOSED indicates that the PCM is controlling fuel delivery according to oxygen sensor voltage. In OPEN the PCM ignores the oxygen sensor voltage and bases the amount of fuel to be delivered on TP sensor, engine coolant, and MAF sensor inputs only. MAF Tech 2 Range 0.0-512 gm/s MAF (mass air flow) is the MAF input frequency converted to grams of air per second. This indicates the amount of air entering the engine. MAP Tech 2 Range 10-105 kPa (0.00-4.97 Volts) The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor measures the change in the intake manifold pressure from engine load, EGR flow, and speed changes. As intake manifold pressure increases, intake vacuum decreases, resulting in a higher MAP sensor voltage and kPa reading. The MAP sensor signal is used to monitor intake manifold pressure changes during the EGR flow test, to update the BARO reading, and as an enabling factor for several of the diagnostics. MIL Tech 2 Displays ON or OFF Indicates the PCM commanded state of the malfunction indicator lamp. MISFIRE CUR. CYL. #1 /#2 /#3 /#4 / #5 / #6 Tech 2 Range 0-255 Counts The misfire current counters increase at a rate according to the number of the possible misfires being detected on each cylinder. The counters may normally display some activity, but the activity should be nearly equal for all the cylinders.
6E278

UPSHIFT LAMP (MANUAL TRANSMISSION) VEHICLE SPEED Tech 2 Range 0-255 km/h (0-155 mph) The vehicle speed sensor signal is converted into km/h and mph for display. WEAK CYLINDER Tech 2 Displays Cylinder Number This indicates that the PCM has detected crankshaft speed variations that indicate 2% or more cylinder firing events are misfires.
MISFIRE CUR. CYL. #1 /#2 /#3 /#4 / #5 / #6 Tech 2 Range 0-65535 Counts The misfire history counters display the relative level of misfire that has been detected on each cylinder. The misfire history counters will not update or show any activity until a misfire DTC (P0300) has become active. MISFIRE FAILURES SINCE FIRST FAIL Tech 2 Range 0-65535 Counts Indicates the number of 200 crankshaft revolution sample periods during which the level of misfire was sufficiently high to report a fail. MISFIRE PASSES SINCE FIRST FAIL Tech 2 Range 0-65535 Counts Indicates the number of 200 crankshaft revolution sample periods during which the level of misfire was sufficiently low to report a pass. POWER ENRICHMENT Tech 2 Displays ACTIVE or INACTIVE ACTIVE displayed indicates that the PCM has detected conditions appropriate to operate in power enrichment mode. The PCM will command power enrichment mode when a large increase in throttle position and load is detected. While in power enrichment mode, the PCM will increase the amount of fuel delivered by entering open loop and increasing the injector pulse width. This is done to prevent a possible sag or hesitation from occurring during acceleration. SPARK Tech 2 Range 64 to 64 Displays the amount of spark advance being commanded by the PCM on the IC circuit. START-UP ECT Tech 2 Range 40C to 151C (40F to 304F) Indicates the engine coolant temperature at the time that the vehicle was started. Used by the HO2S diagnostic to determine if the last start-up was a cold start. START-UP IAT Tech 2 Range 40C to 151C (40F to 304F) Indicates the intake air temperature at the time that the vehicle was started. Used by the HO2S diagnostic to determine if the last start-up was a cold start. TOTAL MISFIRE CURRENT COUNT Tech 2 Range 0-255 Indicates the total number of cylinder firing events that were detected as being misfires during the last 200 crankshaft revolution sample period. TP Tech 2 Range 0%-100% TP (throttle position) angle is computed by the PCM from the TP sensor voltage. TP angle should display 3-5% at idle and 100% at wide open throttle. CATALYST PROTECTION MODE Tech 2 Displays YES or NO YES displayed indicates that the PCM has detected conditions appropriate to operate in TWC protection mode. The PCM will decrease the air/fuel ratio to a value that depends on mass air flow (higher mass air flow = lower air/fuel ratio).
Typical Scan Data Values

Use the Typical Scan Data Values Table only after the On-Board Diagnostic System Check has been completed, no DTC(s) were noted, and you have determined that the on-board diagnostics are functioning properly. Tech 2 values from a properly-running engine may be used for comparison with the engine you are diagnosing. The typical scan data values represent values that would be seen on a normally-running engine. NOTE: A Tech 2 that displays faulty data should not be used, and the problem should be reported to the Tech 2 manufacturer. Use of a faulty Tech 2 can result in misdiagnosis and unnecessary replacement of parts. Only the parameters listed below are referred to in this service manual for use in diagnosis. For further information on using the Tech 2 to diagnose the PCM and related sensors, refer to the applicable reference section listed below. If all values are within the typical range described below, refer to the Symptoms section for diagnosis.
Test Conditions
Engine running, lower radiator hose hot, transmission in park or neutral, closed loop, accessories off, brake not applied and air conditioning off.

3.5L V-6 Engine (Automatic and Manual Transmission) Tech 2 Parameter A/C Clutch Relay A/C Request Data List Units Displayed Typical Data Values (IDLE) Off Typical Data Values (2500 RPM) Off Refer To
6E279
Engine
On/Off
General Description and Operation, A/C Clutch Circuit Operation General Description and Operation, A/C Request Signal General Description and Operation, Fuel System Metering Purpose General Description and Operation General Description and Operation General Description and Operation General Description and Operation
Engine
Yes/No
No
No
Air/Fuel Ratio
Engine
Ratio: _ to 1
14.7
14.7
APP Sensor1 APP Sensor2 APP Sensor3 Barometric Pressure
Percent Percent Percent kPa
1113 8788 8788 61-104 (depends on altitude and barometric pressure) Open 0V Off
3540 6065 5057 61-104 (depends on altitude and barometric pressure) Open 0V Off
Brake Light Switch Check Trans Lamp (Auto Trans) Cruise Main Switch Cruise Set Switch Cruise Cancel Switch Cruise Resume Switch Decel Fuel Cutoff Desired EGR Position Desired Idle Speed ECT (Engine Coolant Temp)
Engine Engine
Open 0V/Closed 12V On/Off
Refer to Section 5 4L30-E Automatic Transmission Diagnosis Refer to Section 10 Refer to Section 10 Refer to Section 10 Refer to Section 10
Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Active/Inactive
Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive
Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive
Engine
Active/Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
General Description and Operation, Deceleration Mode General Description and Operation, EGR Pintle Position Sensor General Description and Operation General Description and Operation, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor General Description and Operation, EGR Pintle Position Sensor
Engine
Percent
0%
0%
Engine Engine
RPM Degrees C, Degrees F
750 80-100C (176-212F)
800 80-100C (176-212F)
EGR Closed Pintle Position
Engine
Steps
20-40
20-40
6E280

Data List Units Displayed Typical Data Values (IDLE) 0% Typical Data Values (2500 RPM) 0% Refer To
Tech 2 Parameter EGR Duty Cycle
Engine
Percent
General Description and Operation, Linear EGR Operation and Results of Incorrect Operation General Description and Operation, Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
EGR Feedback EGR Normalized Engine Load
Volts Percent Percent
0.45-0.80 0% 2.0% - 5.5%
0.45-0.80 0% 8.0% - 16.0%
Time From Start Engine Speed
Engine
Sec
Varies. Resets at each engine start. Within 50 to +100 of Desired Idle 0%
Varies. Resets at each engine start. Actual engine speed 0%
Engine
RPM
Diagnosis, EVAP Emission Canister Purge Valve Check Diagnosis, EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid and EVAP Vacuum Switch and Visual Check; DTCs: P1441, P1442 General Description
EVAP Purge Solenoid EVAP Vent Valve
Engine
Percent
Engine
On/Off
Off
Off
Fuel System Status Fuel Level Fuel Level Sensor Fuel Tank (Vapor) Pressure Sensor Fuel Pump HO2S Bank 1 Sen.1 (millivolts) HO2S Bank 1 Sen.2 (millivolts) (Auto Trans) HO2S Bank 1 Sen.2 (millivolts) (Manual Trans) HO2S Bank 1 Sen.3 (millivolts) (Manual Trans)
Engine
Open Loop/Closed Loop Percent Volts Volts in. H2O
Closed Loop
Closed Loop
1.02 1.86 On 50-950 changing quickly 200-700 changing slowly On
1.02 2.57
Engine Fuel Engine Fuel General Description and Operation
Engine O2 Sensor Data O2 Sensor Data O2 Sensor Data
On/Off Millivolts
Engine Fuel General Description and Operation, Fuel control HO2S General Description and Operation, Fuel Metering System General Description and Operation, Fuel Metering System
50-950, always changing quickly 250-650 changing slowly
Millivolts
Millivolts
50-950 changing quickly
50-950 changing quickly
O2 Sensor Data
Millivolts
200-700 changing slowly
250-650 changing slowly
General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensor (Manual Trans)

Tech 2 Parameter HO2S Bank 2 Sen.1 (millivolts) HO2S Bank 2 Sen.2 (millivolts) (Auto trans) HO2S Bank 1 Sen.1 (ready/not ready) HO2S Bank 2 Sen.1 (ready/not ready) HO2S Warm-Up Time Bank 1 Sen.1 HO2S Warm-Up Time Bank 1 Sen.2 HO2S Warm-Up Time Bank 2 Sen.1 HO2S Warm-Up Time Bank 2 Sen.2 IAT (Intake Air Temp) Data List Units Displayed Typical Data Values (IDLE) 50-950 changing quickly 200-700 changing slowly Typical Data Values (2500 RPM) 50-950 changing quickly 250-650 changing slowly Refer To
6E281
O2 Sensor Data O2 Sensor Data O2 Sensor Data O2 Sensor Data O2 Sensor Data O2 Sensor Data O2 Sensor Data O2 Sensor Data Engine
Millivolts
General Description and Operation, Fuel Control HO2S General Description and Operation, Fuel Metering System General Description and Operation, Fuel Control HO2S; DTC: P0135 General Description and Operation, Fuel Control HO2S General Description and Operation, Fuel Control HO2S General Description and Operation, Fuel Control HO2S General Description and Operation, Fuel Control HO2S General Description and Operation, Catalyst Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensor (Auto Trans) General Description and Operation, Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Refer to Section 8 General Description and Operation, Electronic Ignition System General Description, Fuel Metering, Fuel Injector General Description, Fuel Metering, Fuel Injector General Description and ION Sensing Module General Description and ION Sensing Module General Description and ION Sensing Module General Description Diagnosis, Fuel Trim System Monitor; DTCs: P0171, P0172
Millivolts
Ready Yes/No
Ready Yes
Ready Yes
Ready Yes/No
Ready Yes
Ready Yes
Seconds
25-45
25-45
Seconds
60-100
60-100
Seconds
25-45
25-45
Seconds
60-100
60-100
Degrees C, Degrees F
0-100C, depends on underhood temperature Closed 0V 12.8-14.1
0-80C, depends on underhood temperature Closed 0V 12.8-14.1
Illumination Switch Ignition Voltage Inj. Pulse Bank 1 Inj. Pulse Bank 2 Knock Present Knock Signal Knock Sensor Retard Knock Counter Long Term FT Bank 1 (Long Term Fuel Trim)
Engine Engine
Closed 0V/Open 12V Volts
Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Misfire
Milliseconds Milliseconds No/Yes Percent CA Counts Counts and Percentage
2.0-4.0 2.0-4.0 No 14 0 100 to 150 counts, 22% to +17%
2.5-4.0 2.5-4.0 No 14 0 100 to 150 counts, 22% to +17%
6E282

Data List Units Displayed Typical Data Values (IDLE) 100 to 150 counts, 22% to +17% 2.85-6.65 Typical Data Values (2500 RPM) 100 to 150 counts, 22% to +17% 9.5-16.5 Refer To
Tech 2 Parameter Long Term FT Bank 2 (Long Term Fuel Trim) MAF (Mass Air Flow) MAP kPa (Manifold Absolute Pressure) MIL Misfire Cur. Cyl #1 Misfire Cur. Cyl #2 Misfire Cur. Cyl #3 Misfire Cur. Cyl #4 Misfire Cur. Cyl #5 Misfire Cur. Cyl #6 Misfire Hist. Cyl #1 Misfire Hist. Cyl #2 Misfire Hist. Cyl #3 Misfire Hist. Cyl #4 Misfire Hist. Cyl #5 Misfire Hist. Cyl #6 Misfire Failures Since First Fail Misfire Passes Since First Fail PNP (Park/Neutral Position) Power Enrichment PSP Switch (Power Steering Pressure)
Misfire
Counts and Percentage
Diagnosis, Fuel Trim System Monitor; DTCs: P0171 General Description and Operation, MAF; DTCs: P101, P0102, P0103 General Description and Operation, Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor; DTCs: P0106, P0107, P0108 On-Board Diagnostic System Check DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300 DTC P0300 4L30-E Automatic Transmission Diagnosis General Description and Operation, Acceleration Mode Refer to 2A Section
Engine
Grams per second Kilopascals Volts
Engine
23-40 0.65-1.32 Off 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P-N
19-32 0.46-1.10 Off 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P-N
Engine Misfire Misfire Misfire Misfire Misfire Misfire Misfire Misfire Misfire Misfire Misfire Misfire Misfire Misfire Engine
On/Off Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts P-N / R-D-3-2-L NO/YES
Engine
NO
NO
Engine
Normal/Hi
Normal Pressure
Normal Pressure

Tech 2 Parameter Spark (Advance) Start-Up ECT (Engine Coolant Temp) Start-Up IAT (Intake Air Temp) TCC Cruise Brake Switch Total Misfire Current Count TP Sensor 1 (Throttle Position Sensor 1) TP Sensor 2 (Throttle Position Sensor 2) Throttle at Idle Data List Units Displayed Typical Data Values (IDLE) 15-22 Typical Data Values (2500 RPM) 34-44 Refer To
6E283
Engine
Degrees Before Top Dead Center Degrees C, Degrees F
General Description and Operation, Electronic Ignition System General Description and Operation, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor General Description and Operation, Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Refer to Section 10 DTC P0300 General Description and Operation, Throttle Position (TP) Sensor General Description and Operation, Throttle Position (TP) Sensor General Description and Operation, Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Manual Transmission 4L30-E Automatic Transmission Diagnosis DTC P0300
Engine
Depends on engine coolant temperature at time of start-up Depends on intake air temperature at time of start-up Active 0-5 812
Depends on engine coolant temperature at time of start-up Depends on intake air temperature at time of start-up Active 0-5 2836
Engine
Degrees C, Degrees F
Engine Misfire Engine
Active/Inactive Counts Percentage
Engine
Percentage
812
2836
Engine
No/Yes
Yes
No
Upshift Lamp (manual trans) Vehicle Speed Weak Cylinder
Engine Engine Misfire
On/Off MPH / km/h Cylinder #
Off 0
Off 0
6E284
060R200049
Circuit Description
The Check Engine lamp (MIL) should always be illuminated and steady with the ignition ON and the engine stopped. Ignition feed voltage is supplied to the MIL bulb through the meter fuse. The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL driver circuit.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. A No MIL condition accompanied by a no-start condition suggests a faulty PCM ignition feed or battery feed circuit. 9. Using a test light connected to B+, probe each of the PCM ground terminals to ensure that a good ground is present. Refer to PCM Terminal End View for terminal locations of the PCM ground circuits. 12.In this step, temporarily substitute a known good relay for the PCM relay. The horn relay is nearby, and it can be verified as good simply by honking the horn. Replace the horn relay after completing this step. 17.This vehicle is equipped with a PCM which utilizes an electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM). When the PCM is replaced, the new PCM must be programmed. Refer to PCM Replacement and Programming Procedures Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Sensors.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent MIL may be cased by a poor connection, rubbed-through wire insulation, or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for the following items: D Inspect the PCM harness and connections for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal-to-wire connection, and damaged harness. D If the engine runs OK, check for a faulty light bulb, an open in the MIL driver circuit, or an open in the instrument cluster ignition feed. D If the engine cranks but will not run, check for an open PCM ignition or battery feed, or a poor PCM to engine ground.
6E285

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 Attempt to start the engine. Does the engine start?
2 3
Check the meter fuse for the instrument cluster ignition feed circuit. Is the fuse OK? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 16 Ignition ON, probe the ignition feed circuit at the cluster connector with a test light to ground. Is the test light ON? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 13 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Jumper the MIL driver circuit at the PCM connector to ground. 4. Ignition ON. Is the MIL ON? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 11 Check the PCM ignition feed and battery feed fuses (15 A engine fuse and 15 A PCM fuse). Are both fuses OK? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 15 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Disconnect the PCM. Ignition ON. Probe the ignition feed circuit at the PCM harness connector with a test light to ground. Go to Step 8 Go to Step 12
Is the test light ON? 8 Probe the battery feed circuit at the PCM harness connector with a test light to ground. Is the test light ON? 9 10 11 Check for a faulty PCM ground connection. Was a problem found? Check for damaged terminals at the PCM. Was a problem found? Check for an open MIL driver circuit between the PCM and the MIL. Was a problem found? 12 Substitute a known good relay for the PCM main relay. Was the malfunction fixed? 13 14 Repair the open in the ignition feed circuit. Is the action complete? Locate and repair the open PCM battery feed circuit. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 9 Verify repair Verify repair
Verify repair
Go to Step 18
Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair
Go to Step 13
6E286
No Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont'd)

15
Locate and repair the short to ground in the PCM ignition feed circuit or PCM battery feed circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the short to ground in the ignition feed circuit to the instrument cluster, and replace the fuse. Is the action complete? Verify repair Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to PCM in ON-Vehicle Service for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Go to Instrument Panel in Electrical Diagnosis
16
17
18
Check the MIL driver circuit for a poor connection at the instrument panel connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair
6E287
060R200049
Circuit description
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) should always be illuminated and steady with ignition ON and the engine stopped. Ignition feed voltage is supplied directly to the MIL indicator. The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL driver circuit. The MIL should not remain ON with the engine running and no DTC(s) set. A steady MIL with the engine running and no DTC(s) suggests a short to ground in the MIL driver circuit.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. If the MIL does not remain ON when the PCM is disconnected, the MIL driver wiring is not faulty. 3. If the MIL driver circuit is OK, the instrument panel cluster is faulty. 6. This vehicle is equipped with a PCM which utilizes an electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM). When the PCM is replaced, the new PCM must be programmed. Refer to PCM Replacement and Programming Procedures in Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Sensors.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed-through wire insulation, or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for the following items: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal-to-wire connection, and damaged harness.
6E288

Was the On-Board diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect PCM. 2. Ignition ON, observe the MIL (Service Engine Soon lamp). Is the MIL ON? Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the instrument panel cluster. 2. Check the MIL driver circuit between the PCM and the instrument panel cluster for a short to ground. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was the MIL driver circuit shorted to ground? Replace the instrument panel cluster. Is the action complete?
Go to OBD System Check Go to OBD System Check
Go to Step 4
1. Ignition OFF, reconnect the PCM. 2. Ignition ON, reprogram the EEPROM. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. 3. Using the Tech 2 output controls function, select MIL dash lamp control and command the MIL OFF. (Refer to the Miscellaneous test) Did the MIL turn OFF? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 6
6E289
No Reduced Power Lamp (RPL)
060R200073
Circuit Description
The Reduced Power lamp (RPL) should always be illuminated and steady with the ignition ON and the engine stopped. Ignition feed voltage is supplied to the RPL bulb through the meter fuse. The powertrain control module (PCM) orders the RPL ON signal for Multiplex Control Unit. When Multiplex Control Unit is received RPL ON signal that turn RPL ON by grounding the RPL driver circuit.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent RPL may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed-through wire insulation, or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for the following items: D Inspect the PCM and Multiplex Control Unit harness and connections for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal to wire connection, and damaged harness. D If the engine runs OK, check for a faulty light bulb, an open in the MIL driver circuit, or an open in the instrument cluster ignition feed. D If the engine cranks but will not run, check for an open PCM ignition or battery feed, or a poor PCM to engine ground.
2. A No RPL condition accompanied by a nostart condition suggests a faulty PCM ignition feed or battery feed circuit. 9. Using a test light connected to B+, probe each of the Multiplex Control Unit ground terminals to ensure that a good ground is present. Refer to Multiplex Control Unit Terminal End View for terminal locations of the Unit Terminal End View for terminal locations of the Multiplex Control Unit ground circuits. 12.Using a test light connected to B+, probe each of the PCM ground terminals to ensure that a good ground is present. Refer to PCM Terminal End View for terminal locations of the PCM ground circuits. 21.In this step, temporarily substitute a known good relay for the PCM relay. The horn relay is nearby, and it can be verified as good simply by honking the horn. Replace the horn relay after completing this step. 24.This vehicle is equipped with a PCM which utilizes an electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM). When the PCM is replaced, the new PCM must be programmed. Refer to PCM Replacement and Programming Procedures in Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Sensors.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart.
6E290
No Reduced Power Lamp (RPL)

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check Performed? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 Attempt to start the engine. Does the engine start?
2 3
Check the following fuses: MAIN(100A), B+1(60A), B+2(50A), METER(15A), ECM(15A) , ENGINE(15A) Was a problem found? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 4 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the cluster meter connector. 3. Ignition ON, Probe the ignition feed circuit at the cluster connector with a test light to ground. Is the test light ON? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 15 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Multiplex Control Unit. 3. Check the circuit (Lamp driver Circuit) between PCM and Multiplex Control Unit. Was a problem found? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 6 1. Reconnect the cluster meter connector. 2. Disconnect the Multiplex Control Unit. 3. Jumper the RPL driver circuit at the Multiplex Control Unit connector to ground. 4. Ignition ON. Is the RPL ON? Go to Step 7 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Probe the ignition feed circuit at the Multiplex Control Unit connector with a test light to ground. 3. Ignition ON. Is the test light ON? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 17 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check the circuit (Lamp driver Circuit) between PCM and Multiplex Control Unit. Was a problem found? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 9 Check the Multiplex Control Unit ground connection and circuit. Was a problem found? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 10 Check for damaged terminals at the Multiplex Control Unit. Was a problem found? Go to Step 20 Go to Step 11 1. Ignition ON. 2. Probe the ignition feed circuit at the PCM harness connector with a test light to ground. Is the test light ON? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 21
Go to Instrument Panel in Electrical Diagnosis
10
11
6E291
No Reduced Power Lamp (RPL) (Cont'd)

12
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Check for a faulty PCM ground connection and Circuit. Was a problem found? Go to Step 23 Go to Step 24 Verify repair Go to Step 13 Go to Step 25 Check for damaged terminals at the PCM. Was a problem found? Replace the fuse. Is the action complete? Locate and repair the cluster meter battery feed open circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the circuit between cluster meter and Multiplex Control Unit open circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the circuit Multiplex Control Unit battery feed open circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the between Multiplex Control Unit and PCM open circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the ground connection for Multiplex Control Unit circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Reconnect the Multiplex Control Unit. circuit. Is the action complete? Substitute a known good relay for the PCM main relay. Was the malfunction fixed? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 22 Repair the open in the ignition feed circuit. Is the action complete? Locate and repair the ground connection for PCM circuit. Is the action complete? PCM must be Verify repair Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement
13 14 15
16
17
18
19
20 21
22 23
24
Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E292
No Reduced Power Lamp (RPL) (Cont'd)

25
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Ignition OFF. Reconnect all connectors. Install the Tech 2. Ignition ON. Using the Tech 2 output controls function, select RPL dash lamp control and command the RPL ON. (Refer to the Miscellaneous test) Verify repair Go to Step 26
Did the RPL turn ON? 26 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check the circuit (DLC line) between PCM and DLC. Was a problem found? 27 Locate and repair the circuit the between PCM and DLC. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 27
Go to Step 24
Go to Step 25
6E293
Reduced Power Lamp (RPL) ON Steady
060R200073
Circuit Description
The Reduced Power lamp (RPL) should always be illuminated and steady with the ignition ON and the engine stopped. Ignition feed voltage is supplied to the RPL bulb through the meter fuse. The powertrain control module (PCM) orders the RPL ON signal for Multiplex Control Unit. When Multiplex Control Unit is received RPL ON signal that turn RPL ON by grounding the RPL driver circuit. The RPL should not remain ON with the engine running and no DTC(s) set. A steady RPL with the engine running and no DTC(s) suggests a short to ground in the RPL driver circuit.
D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal to wire connection, and damaged harness.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. If the RPL does not remain ON when the Multiplex Control Unit is disconnected, the RPL driver wiring is not faulty. 3. If the RPL driver circuit is OK, the instrument panel cluster is faulty. 10. This vehicle is equipped with a PCM which utilizes an electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM). When the PCM is replaced, the new PCM must be programmed. Refer to PCM Replacement and Programming Procedures in Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Sensors.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent RPL may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed through wire insulation, or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for the following items:
6E294
Reduced Power Lamp (RPL) ON Steady

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect Multiplex Control Unit. 2. Ignition ON, observe the RPL (Reduced Power Lamp). Is the RPL ON? Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the instrument panel cluster. 2. Check the RPL driver circuit between the Multiplex Control Unit and the instrument panel cluster for a short to ground. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was the RPL driver circuit shorted to ground? Verify repair Go to Step 4 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace the Multiplex Control Unit. Install the Tech 2 Ignition ON. Using the Tech 2 output controls function, select RPL dash lamp control and command the RPL OFF. (Refer to the Miscellaneous test) Verify repair Go to Step 5
Did the MIL turn OFF? 5 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check the circuit (Lamp driver Circuit) between PCM and Multiplex Control Unit. Was a problem found? 6 Locate and repair the circuit between Multiplex Control Unit and PCM open circuit. Is the action complete? 7 1. Install the Tech 2 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using the Tech 2 output controls function, select RPL dash lamp control and command the RPL OFF. (Refer to the Miscellaneous test) Did the MIL turn OFF? 8 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check the circuit (DLC line) between PCM and DLC. Was a problem found?
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 7
Go to Verify repair
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 10
6E295
Reduced Power Lamp (RPL) ON Steady (Cont'd)

9 10
Locate and repair the circuit between PCM and DLC. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement PCM must be Go to Step 2
Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Go to OBD System Check
6E296
Starter Control System Check
060R200062
Circuit Description
Starter control system is controlled by the Power Train Control Module (PCM). The PCM monitors starter switch signal (STARTposition ) and MODE switch (park or neutral) signal. PCM is operated by the ignition switch. Ignition feed voltage is supplied to the MODE switch and starter relay through the engine fuse. PCM turns the starter relay ON by grounding the starter relay driver circuit. The starter motor is operated until 30 seconds based on starter relay signal.
Test Description
2.If Anti-theft system is ON, PCM does not operate starter control system. 19.Refer to 6D section. 21.Refer to 6D section. 24.This vehicle is equipped with a PCM which utilizes an electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM). When the PCM is replaced,the new PCM must be programmed. Refer to PCM Replacement and Programming Procedures in Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Sensors.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation.
6E297
Starter Control System Check

Was the On-Board (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3
2 3
Was the Anti-theft System normally? Refer to Owners Manual. 1. 2. 3. 4. Gear position is park or neutral. Do not depress the accelerator pedal. Turn the key to START position. Release the key switch to the to ON position.
Does the engine crank? 4 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Select Display DTCs with the Tech 2. Are any DTCs stored? 5 Review and record for Tech 2 Failure Records data and DTCs. Were any DTCs information stored? 6 1. Gear position is park or neutral. 2. Do not depress the accelerator pedal. 3. Turn the key to START position. Is the engine cranking? 7 Check the antitheft module circuit. Check the circuit between PCM and antitheft module. Is the problem found? 8 9 Repair the circuit as necessary. Is the action complete? 1. Probe the anti-theft module circuit to GND. 2. Turn the key to START position. Is the engine cranking? 10 Check the anti-theft system. Refer to section 8H anti-theft.
Go to Step 27
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5 Go to DTCs Chart
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 27
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 11
11 12 13 Check the starter relay, starter fuse and engine fuse. Is the problem found? Replace the starter relay, starter fuse and engine fuse. Is the action complete? Check the starter circuit. 1. Ignition is OFF. 2. Remove the starter relay. 3. Check the circuit between starter relay and starter motor. Is the problem found? 14 Repair the circuit as necessary. Is the action complete?
Verify repair Go to Step 12 Verify repair
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 15
6E298
Starter Control System Check (Cont'd)

15
Check the starter circuit. 1. Remove the main fuse (100A). 2. Check the circuit between main fuse and starter motor. 3. Check the circuit between GND and starter motor. Is the problem found? Go to Step 16 Verify repair Go to Step 17
16 17
Repair the circuit as necessary. Is the action complete? Check the starter signal circuit. 1. Remove the starter fuse (10A). 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check the circuit between Powertrain Control module (PCM) and starter fuse. Is the problem found? Go to Step 18 Verify repair Go to Step 19
18 19
Repair the circuit as necessary. Is the action complete? Check the park or neutral signal circuit. 1. Remove the starter relay. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check the circuit between PCM and starter relay. Is the problem found? Go to Step 20 Verify repair Go to Step 21
20 21
Repair the circuit as necessary. Is the action complete? Check the park or neutral signal circuit. 1. Remove the starter relay. 2. Disconnect the MODE switch. 3. Remove the engine (15A) fuse and back up (15A) fuse. 4. Check the circuit between MODE switch and starter relay. 5. Check the circuit between MODE switch and engine fuse. 6. Check the circuit between MODE switch and PCM. 7. Check the circuit between MODE switch and back up fuse. Is the problem found? Go to Step 22 Verify repair Go to Step 23
22 23
Repair the circuit as necessary. Is the action complete? Check the MODE switch. Refer to 4L30E Automatic transmission. Is the problem found? Go to Step 24 Verify repair Go to Step 25 Replace the MODE switch. Is the action complete? Check the starter motor. Refer to Section 6D Engine Electrical. Is the problem found? Go to Step 26 Go to Step 28
24 25
6E299
Starter Control System Check (Cont'd)

26 27
Replace the starter motor. Is the action complete? Check the engine start times. Is the engine start time less than specified value? 10 sec. System OK Verify repair Go to the Engine Cranks But Will Not Run Chart
28
Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed.Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power ControlModule and Sensors for procedures.And also refer to latest Service Bulletin.Check to see if the latest software is released ornot. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2100
060R200083
6E2101
060R200075
6E2102
Circuit Description
The electronic Ignition system uses a coil -at-plug method of spark distribution. In this type of ignition system, the powertrain control module (PCM) triggers the correct driver outside the Ignition Current Sense System (ICSS), which then triggers the correct ignition coil based on the 58X signal received from the crankshaft position sensor (CKP). The spark plug connected to the coil fires when the ICSS opens the ground circuit for the coils primary circuit. During crank, the PCM monitors the CKP 58X signal. The CKP signal is used to determine which cylinder will fire first. After the CKP 58X signal has been processed by the PCM, it will command all six injectors to allow a priming shot of fuel for all the cylinders. After the priming, the injectors are left OFF during the next six 58X reference pulses from the CKP. This allows each cylinder a chance to use the fuel from the priming shot. During this waiting been received by the PCM. The ION sensor signal allows the PCM to operate the injectors sequentially based on camshaft position. If the camshaft position signal is not present at start - up, the PCM will begin sequential fuel delivery with a 1 -in-6 chance that fuel delivery is correct. The engine will run without a ION sensor signal, but will set a DTC code.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 5. An obvious cause of low fuel pressure would be an empty fuel tank. 6. The engine will easily start and run if a few injectors are disabled. It is not necessary to test all injectors at this time since this step is only a test to verify that all of the injectors have not been disabled by fuel contamination. 7. A blinking test light verifies that the PCM is monitoring the 58X crankshaft reference signal and is capable of activating the injectors. If there is an open or shorted driver circuit, DTCs 201 206 and a misfire DTC 300 306 should be set. 19. By using a spark tester, each ignition coils ability to produce 25,000 volts is verified. 25. If there is an open or shorted driver circuit, DTCs 201 206 and a misfire DTC 301 306 should be set. All six injector driver circuits can be checked at one time without removing the intake manifold if a J 39021 95 test light is available. This is the alternative procedure: D With the ignition OFF, disconnect the gray connector located at the rear of the air filter, attached to a bracket on the purge canister. D Connect test light J 39021 95 to the connector. Do any of the light constantly illuminate or fail to blink when the engine is cranked? If so, repair the short or open circuit, or replace the PCM if indicated. This procedure only tests the driver circuit as far as the test connection, so step 31 is added to test the circuit all the way to the injector.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent problem may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed - through wire insulation or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for the following items: D Poor connection or damaged harness-Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal-to-wire connection, and damaged harness. D Faulty engine coolant temperature sensor-Using a Tech 2, compare engine coolant temperature with intake air temperature on a completely cool engine. Engine coolant temperature should be within 10 C of intake air temperature. If not, replace the ECT sensor.

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Check the ignition coil fuse, the engine fuse, and the PCM fuse. Was a fuse blown? Go to Step 3 Verify repair
Go to Step 4
Check for a short to ground and replace the fuse. Is the action complete?
6E2103

1. Ignition OFF, install a fuel pressure gauge at the test fitting on the fuel supply line in the engine compartment. (Use a shop cloth to absorb any fuel leakage while making the connection.) 2. Ignition ON, observe the fuel pressure. Is the fuel pressure within the specified values, and 285 - 375 kPa does it hold steady? (43 55 psi) Go to Step 6 Go to Fuel System Electrical Test Go to Step 5 Go to Fuel System Diagnosis
Is any fuel pressure indicated?
Install the switch box J 390212 at the injector test connector and activate an injector. Did the fuel pressure drop when the injector was activated? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 18
Install an injector test light at the #2 cylinder injector harness connector. Does the light blink when the engine is cranked? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 24 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the 11-pin connector at the ION sensing module. 3. With a test light to B + , probe each of the 6 exposed ION sensing module pins, one at a time, while the engine is cranked. (Use the gray narrow Metri - Pak flexible female connector from the J - 35616 kit to make the pin accessible.) Does the light flash at each pin when the engine is cranked? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 9
1. Remove the 4-pin connector at the ION sensing module. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Use a test light at the harness connector to verify that the module is being supplied with B + and ground. Was a problem found? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 11 Repair the open ignition feed circuit or ground circuit to the ION sensing module. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Repair the ION sensing module. Is the action complete? 1. Reconnect the ION sensing module 11-pin connector. 2. Remove the electrical connector from each coil. 3. With a test light to B+, probe each of the coil connectors at the wire which runs to the ION sensing module. Does the light flash at each coil connector when the engine is cranked? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 13
10
11 12
13
Check for an open circuit between the coil and ION sensing module. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2104

14
1. Ignition ON. 2. While the coil connectors are disconnected, touch each coil connectors ignition feed terminal with a grounded test light (the ignition feed wire is YEL tracer). Did the test light illuminate? Go to Step 16 Verify repair Go to Step 15 Repair the open ignition feed circuit. Is the action complete? While the coil connectors are disconnected, touch each connectors secondary ground terminal with a test light to B +. (The ground wires are black.) Did the test light illuminate at each coil connector? Go to Step 18 Verify repair Go to Step 17 Repair the open secondary ground circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Test the fuel for contamination. 2. If a problem is found, clean the fuel system and correct the contaminated fuel condition as necessary. Replace the fuel filter and replace any injectors that are not delivering fuel (see Injector Balance Test). Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 19 1. Remove any ignition coil and install a spark tester at the spark plug end of the coil. 2. Observe the tester while the engine is cranking. Was a crisp, blue spark observed? Only one or two sparks followed by no result is considered the same as No Spark.
15 16
17 18
19
Go to Step 21
Go to Step 20
20
Replace the ignition coil, and return to Step 19 to test the remaining coils. Is the action complete? Verify repair Repeat Step 19 for each coil. Remove only one coil at a time, and reinstall each coil on its spark plug after testing, but do not refasten coils with screws at this time. After all coils have passed the spark test, does the engine start?
21
Refasten all coils with their screws
Go to Step 22
22
1. Remove the spark plugs from all cylinders. 2. Visually inspect the spark plug electrodes. 3. Replace any spark plugs with loose or missing electrodes or cracked insulators. Did your inspection reveal any spark plugs exhibiting excessive fouling?
Correct the fouling condition
Go to Step 23
6E2105

23
Refer to Engine Mechanical Diagnosis to diagnose the following conditions: D Faulty or incorrect camshaft drive belts D Leaking or sticky valves or rings D Excessive valve deposits D Weak valve springs D Incorrect valve timing D Leaking head gasket Is the action complete? Verify repair Go to Step 25 Observe the Engine Speed data display on the Tech 2 while cranking the engine. Is the engine RPM indicated? Go to Step 25 Go to Step 34 1. Disconnect the 7-pin gray connector at the rear of the air filter beneath the point where the air duct attaches to the MAF sensor. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a test light connected to ground, probe the ignition terminal at the PCM (female) side of the 7-pin connector. Is the test light ON? Go to Step 26 Go to Step 32 1. At the PCM (female) side of the connector, connect a test light between the ignition + terminal and one of the injector driver circuits at the same connector. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Observe the test light, and repeat the test for each injector driver circuit. Did the test light stay on when checking any of the 6 injector driver circuits? Go to Step 27 Go to Step 29
24
25
26
27
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the PCM. 2. Ignition ON, observe the test light. Is the test light ON? Go to Step 28 Go to Step 33 Locate and repair the short to ground in the injector driver circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Using the same test location as in step 26, connect a test light between the ignition terminal and one of the driver circuits. 2. Crank the engine and observe the test light. 3. Repeat for each injector driver circuit. Did the light blink during the test for each circuit? Go to Step 31 Verify repair Go to Step 30 Go to Step 33 Check for an open injector driver circuit. Was a problem found?
28
29
30
6E2106

31
1. At the injector (male) side of the gray connector mentioned in step 25, connect an ohmmeter between the ignition pin and one of the driver circuit pins. 2. Check for continuity in the circuit. 3. Repeat for each injector circuit. The readings should be approximately equal to the specified value for injector resistance. Was a problem found? 12.5 W PCM must be Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 8 Repair the ignition feed circuit. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement
32 33
Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? 34 1. Raise the vehicle and disconnect the CKP sensor harness. 2. Ignition ON. 3. With a test light to ground, probe the harness ignition feed terminal. Did the light illuminate? 35 Check the ignition feed wire between the sensor and the PCM for a short to ground or open circuit. Is the action complete? 36 1. Ignition ON. 2. At the CKP harness connector, connect a test light between the ignition and ground terminals. Did the light illuminate? 37 Check the sensor ground circuit for an open or short to voltage. Is the action complete? 38 Check the signal circuit between the sensor and the PCM for a short to ground, short to voltage, or an open. Was a problem found? 39 Replace the CKP position sensor. Is the action complete? Verify repair Go to Step 33 Verify repair Go to Step 39 Verify repair Go to Step 38 Go to Step 37 Verify repair Go to Step 36 Go to Step 35 Verify repair
6E2107
060R200044
6E2108
Circuit Description
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, the powertrain control module (PCM) energizes the fuel pump relay which applies power to the in-tank fuel pump. The fuel pump relay will remain ON as long as the engine is running or cranking and the PCM is receiving 58X crankshaft position pulses. If no 58X crankshaft position pulses are present, the PCM de-energizes the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds after the ignition is turned ON or the engine is stopped. The fuel pump delivers fuel to the fuel rail and injectors, then to the fuel pressure regulator. The fuel pressure regulator controls fuel pressure by allowing excess fuel to be returned to the fuel tank. With the engine stopped and ignition ON, the fuel pump can be turned ON by using a command by the Tech 2.


1. Remove the shoulder fitting cap. 2. Install fuel gauge J 34730-1 to the fuel feed line located in front of and above the right side valve train cover . 3. Reinstall the fuel pump relay.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed-through wire insulation, or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for the following items: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal-to-wire connection, and damaged harness.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. If the fuel pump is operating but incorrect pressure is noted, the fuel pump wiring is OK and the Fuel System Pressure Test chart should be used for diagnosis. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: D It is necessary to relieve fuel system pressure before connecting a fuel pressure gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure, below. D A small amount of fuel may be released when disconnecting the fuel lines. Cover fuel line fittings with a shop towel before disconnecting, to catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the procedure is completed.
6E2109

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Read the Caution above. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure and install the fuel pump pressure gauge to the test fitting. 3. Ignition ON, Engine is Off. 4. Use a Tech 2 to command the fuel pump ON. (Refer to the Miscellaneous Test.) Is there an immediate pressure build-up which indicates the pump is running? Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1. Verify that the pump is not running by removing the fuel filler cap and listening. 2. Command the pump ON with the Tech 2. Did the pump turn OFF after 2 seconds? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Using a test light connected to ground, probe the battery feed to the relay. Did the light illuminate?
Test completed
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 5
5 6
Repair short or open battery feed to fuel pump relay. Is the action complete? 1. Connect a test light between the two wires that connect to the fuel pump relay pull-in coil. 2. Ignition ON. Did the test light illuminate for 2 seconds and then turn off? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 7
1. With a test light connected to battery (), probe the fuel pump relay connector at the wire which runs from the relay pull-in coil to the PCM. 2. Ignition ON. Did the test light illuminate for 2 seconds and then turn off? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
Locate and repair open in the fuel pump relay ground circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Check for short or open between the PCM and the fuel pump relay. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 1. Check the fuel pump relay circuit for a poor terminal connection at the PCM. 2. If a problem is found, replace terminal as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11
10
6E2110
Fuel System Electrical Test (Cont'd)

11
12
1. Reconnect the fuel pump relay. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump electrical connector at the fuel tank. 3. Using a test light connected to ground, probe the fuel pump feed wire (harness side). 4. Command the fuel pump ON with a Tech 2. Did the light illuminate for 2 seconds? Go to Step 15 Go to Step 13 1. Honk the horn to verify that the horn relay is functioning. 2. Substitute the horn relay for the fuel pump relay. 3. Leave the test light connected as in step 12. 4. Command the fuel pump ON with the Tech 2. Did the test light illuminate for 2 seconds when the fuel pump was commanded ON? Go to Step 17 Go to Step 14
13
14
1. Re-connect the horn relay in its proper location. 2. Check for a short circuit, blown fuse or open circuit between the relay and the fuel tank. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. With the fuel pump electrical connector at the fuel tank disconnected, connect a test light between the feed wire and the ground wire (harness side). 2. Command the fuel pump ON with a Tech 2. Did the test light illuminate for 2 seconds? Go to Step 18 Verify repair Go to Step 16 Repair the open circuit in the fuel pump ground wire. Is the action complete? 1. Re-connect the horn relay in its proper location. 2. Replace the fuel pump relay. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the fuel pump. Is the action complete?
15
16 17
18
6E2111
Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check
060R200065
6E2112
Circuit Description
D The powertrain control module (PCM) controls engine speed by adjusting the position of the throttle control valve (DC motor). The throttle motor is a DC motor driven by one coil. The PCM applies current to the DC motor coil in PWM (%) to adjust the throttle valve into a passage in the throttle body to allow air flow. This method allows highly accurate control of engine speed and quick response to changes in engine load. D The acceleration position (AP1) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to acceleration pedal angle. The acceleration pedal angle will vary about 13% at idle position to about 87% at wide open throttle(WOT). APS signal is used to determine which DC motor will adjust throttle position. After the APS signal has been processed by the PCM, it will command DC motor to allow movement of throttle position.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. Visually/physically inspect for the following throttle valve conditions. 3. Visually/physically inspect for the following acceleration pedal conditions. 5. Check the following circuits for throttle valve and DC moter. Check the following TP sensor resistance and DC motor. 6. Check the following circuits for acceleration pedal. Check the following AP sensor resistance. 7. Following DTC: Error for ETC system.
Diagnostic Aids
D An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed-through wire insulation or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for poor connections or a damaged harness. Inspect the PCM harness and connector for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal-to-wire connection, and damaged harness. D Throttle body Check for objects blocking the DC motor or throttle bore, excessive deposits in the ETC passage and on the valve spring, and excessive deposits in the throttle bore and on the throttle valve plate. D Acceleration pedal Check for objects blocking the AP sensor or pedal arm with spring, excessive deposits in the acceleration pedal arm and on the acceleration pedal and lacking the pedal stopper rabber.
6E2113
Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Visually/physically inspect for the following conditions: D Throttle body tampering. D Restricted intake throttle system. Check for a possible collapsed air intake duct, restricted air filter element, or foreign objects blocking the air intake system. D Throttle body: Check for objects blocking the throttle passage or throttle bore, excessive deposits in the throttle passage and on the throttle valve, and excessive deposits in the throttle bore and on the throttle plate. D Throttle body with lever: When check for objects to send round the throttle spring lever that lever is smooth movement by less than 9 lbm{1.0 Nm}, and spring lever has not excessive play. D Throttle function: Check for the throttle function. When ignition switch ON that throttle lever is smooth operated by step on the acceleration pedal. Did any of the above require a repair? Visually/physically inspect for the following conditions: D Acceleration pedal tampering. D Acceleration pedal : Check for objects blocking the spring or pedal arm. D Acceleration pedal : For check for objects to move the acceleration pedal that pedal is smooth movement, and acceleration pedal arm has not excessive play. Did any of the above require a repair? 1. Check for a poor connection at the throttle body harness connector. 2. Check for a poor connection at the acceleration position sensor harness connector. 3. If a problem is found, replace faulty terminals as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
Refer to appropriate section for on-vehicle service
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5
Check the following circuits for an open, short to voltage, short to ground, or poor connection at the PCM: D Throttle position sensor 1 circuit. D Throttle position sensor 2 circuit. TPS, DC D Throttle DC motor circuit. mortor 17kW TPS, DC D Throttle position sensor resistance. mortor D Throttle DC motor resistance. change If a problem is found, repair as necessary. resistance 0.3100W Was a problem found?
Verify repair
Go to Step 6
6E2114
Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check (Cont'd)

Check the following circuits for an open, short to voltage, short to ground, or poor connection at the PCM: D Acceleration position sensor 1 circuit. D Acceleration position sensor 2 circuit. VccGND D Acceleration position sensor 3 circuit. AP1 2.64kW D Acceleration position sensor resistance. AP2 2.64kW If a problem is found, repair as necessary. AP3 Was the prblem found? 4.26.4kW Following below the DTCs stored: P1120, P1220, P1220, P1221, P1271, P1272, P1273, P1275, P1280, P1285, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1523 1. Install the Tech 2 2. Ignition ON but not engine run. 3. Check the value for APS and TPS. Was a problem found? Idle AP1 = 1115% AP2 = 8589% AP3 = 8589% TP1 = 813% TP2 = 813% WOT AP1 = 8589% AP2 = 1115% AP3 = 3236% TP1 = 8797% TP2 = 8797%
Verify repair Go to applicable DTC table
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9
System O.K.
1. Replace the faulty sensor. 2. Recheck the value for APS and TPS Refer to the procedure in step 8. Was the problem found? Go to Step 10 Verify repair Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to OnVehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for Procedures. And also refer to letest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is releasec or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Verify repair
10
6E2115
060R200182
6E2116

16.Check the spark plug associated with a particular fuel injector for fouling or saturation in order to determine if that particular fuel injector is leaking. If checking the spark plug associated with a particular fuel injector for fouling or saturation does not determine that a particular fuel injector is leaking, use the following procedure: D Remove the fuel rail, but leave the fuel lines and injectors connected to the fuel rail. Refer to Fuel Rail Assembly in On-Vehicle Service. D Lift the fuel rail just enough to leave the fuel injector nozzles in the fuel injector ports. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from fuel spraying on the engine, verify that the fuel rail is positioned over the fuel injector ports and verify that the fuel injector retaining clips are intact. D Pressurize the fuel system by connecting a 10 amp fused jumper between B+ and the fuel pump relay connector. D Visually and physically inspect the fuel injector nozzles for leaks. 17.A rich condition may result from the fuel pressure being above 376 kPa (55 psi). A rich condition may cause a DTC P0132 or a DTC P0172 to set. Driveability conditions associated with rich conditions can include hard starting (followed by black smoke) and a strong sulfur smell in the exhaust. 20.This test determines if the high fuel pressure is due to a restricted fuel return line or if the high fuel pressure is due to a faulty fuel pressure regulator. 21.A lean condition may result from fuel pressure below 333 kPa (48 psi). A lean condition may cause a DTC P0131 or a DTC P0171 to set. Driveability conditions associated with lean conditions can include hard starting (when the engine is cold ), hesitation, poor driveability, lack of power, surging , and misfiring. 22.Restricting the fuel return line causes the fuel pressure to rise above the regulated fuel pressure. Command the fuel pump ON with the Tech 2. The fuel pressure should rise above 376 kPa (55 psi) as the fuel return line becomes partially closed. NOTE: Do not allow the fuel pressure to exceed 414 kPa (60 psi). Fuel pressure in excess of 414 kPa (60 psi) may damage the fuel pressure regulator. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: D It is necessary to relieve fuel system pressure before connecting a fuel pressure gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure, below. D A small amount of fuel may be released when disconnecting the fuel lines. Cover fuel line fittings with a shop towel before disconnecting, to catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the procedure is completed.
Circuit Description
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the powertrain control module (PCM) will turn ON the in-tank fuel pump. The in-tank fuel pump will remain ON as long as the engine is cranking or running and the PCM is receiving 58X crankshaft position pulses. If there are no 58X crankshaft position pulses, the PCM will turn the in-tank fuel pump OFF 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON or 2 seconds after the engine stops running. The in-tank fuel pump is an electric pump within an integral reservoir. The in-tank fuel pump supplies fuel through an in-line fuel filter to the fuel rail assembly. The fuel pump is designed to provide fuel at a pressure above the pressure needed by the fuel injectors. A fuel pressure regulator, attached to the fuel rail, keeps the fuel available to the fuel injectors at a regulated pressure. Unused fuel is returned to the fuel tank by a separate fuel return line.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. Connect the fuel pressure gauge to the fuel feed line as shown in the fuel system illustration. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to absorb any fuel leakage that may occur when installing the fuel pressure gauge. With the ignition switch ON and the fuel pump running, the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge should be 333-376 kPa (48-55 psi). This pressure is controlled by the amount of pressure the spring inside the fuel pressure regulator can provide. 3. A fuel system that cannot maintain a constant fuel pressure has a leak in one or more of the following areas: D The fuel pump check valve. D The fuel pump flex line. D The valve or valve seat within the fuel pressure regulator. D The fuel injector(s). 4. Fuel pressure that drops off during acceleration, cruise, or hard cornering may case a lean condition. A lean condition can cause a loss of power, surging, or misfire. A lean condition can be diagnosed using a Tech 2. If an extremely lean condition occurs, the oxygen sensor(s) will stop toggling. The oxygen sensor output voltage(s) will drop below 500 mV. Also, the fuel injector pulse width will increase. IMPORTANT: Make sure the fuel system is not operating in the Fuel Cut-Off Mode. When the engine is at idle, the manifold pressure is low (high vacuum). This low pressure (high vacuum) is applied to the fuel pressure regulator diaphragm. The low pressure (high vacuum) will offset the pressure being applied to the fuel pressure regulator diaphragm by the spring inside the fuel pressure regulator. When this happens, the result is lower fuel pressure. The fuel pressure at idle will vary slightly as the barometric pressure changes, but the fuel pressure at idle should always be less than the fuel pressure noted in step 2 with the engine OFF.
6E2117


1. Remove the shoulder fitting cap. 2. Install fuel gauge J 34730-1 to the fuel feed line located in front of and above the right side valve train cover. 3. Reinstall the fuel pump relay.

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Turn the air conditioning system OFF. 3. Relieve fuel system pressure and install the fuel pressure gauge. 4. Turn the ignition ON. NOTE: The fuel pump will run for approximately 2 seconds. Use the Tech 2 to command the fuel pump ON. (Refer to the Miscellaneous Test.) 5. Observe the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge with the fuel pump running. Is the fuel pressure within the specified limits? 290-376 kPa (42-55 psi)
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 17
NOTE: The fuel pressure will drop when the fuel pump stops running, then it should stabilize and remain constant. Does the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge remain constant? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 12
1. When the vehicle is at normal operation temperature, turn the ignition ON to build fuel pressure and observe the measurement on the gauge. 2. Start the engine and observe the fuel pressure gauge. Did the reading drop by the amount specified after the engine was started? 21-105 kPa (3-15 psi) Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 9 Check for improper fuel
5 6
Is fuel pressure dropping off during acceleration, cruise, or hard cornering? Visually and physically inspect the following items for a restriction: D The in-pipe fuel filter. D The fuel feed line. Was a restriction found?
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
Remove the fuel tank and visually and physically inspect the following items: D The fuel pump strainer for a restriction. D The fuel line for a leak. D Verify that the correct fuel pump is in the vehicle. Was a problem found in any of these areas? Verify repair Go to Step 8
6E2118

8 9
Replace the fuel pump. Is the action complete? 1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the fuel pressure regulator. 2. With the engine idling, apply 12-14 inches of vacuum to the fuel pressure regulator. Does the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge drop by the amount specified? 21-105 kPa (3-15 psi) Go to Step 10 Go to Step 11 Verify repair
10
Locate and repair the loss of vacuum to the fuel pressure regulator. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the fuel pressure regulator. Is the action complete? 1. Run the fuel pump with the Tech 2. 2. After pressure has built up, turn off the pump and clamp the supply hose shut with suitable locking pliers which will not damage the hose. Does the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge remain constant? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 15
11 12
13
Visually inspect the fuel supply line and repair any leaks. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 14 Remove the fuel tank and inspect for leaky hose or in-tank fuel line. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. If the pliers are still clamped to the fuel supply hose, remove the locking pliers. 2. With suitable locking pliers, which will not damage the hose, clamp the fuel return line to prevent fuel from returning to the fuel tank. 3. Run the fuel pump with the Tech 2. 4. After pressure has built up, remove power to the pump. Does the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge remain constant? 376 kPa (55 psi) Go to Step 11 Verify repair Go to Step 18 Go to Step 16 Go to Step 21
14
15
16 17
Locate and replace any leaking fuel injector(s). Is the action complete? Is the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge above the specified limit?
6E2119

18
1. Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to the Fuel Pressure Relief. 2. Disconnect the fuel return line from the fuel rail. 3. Attach a length of flexible hose to the fuel rail return outlet passage. 4. Place the open end of the flexible hose into an approved gasoline container. 5. Run the fuel pump with the Tech 2. 6. Observe the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge with the fuel pump running. Is the fuel pressure within the specified limits? Locate and correct the restriction in the fuel return line. Is the action complete?
290-376 kPa (42-55 psi)
Go to Step 20
19 20
Visually and physically inspect the fuel rail outlet passages for a restriction. Was a restriction found? 0 kPa (0 psi) Verify repair Go to Step 22 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 23 Is the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge above the specified value? 1. Command the fuel pump ON with the Tech 2. 2. Using suitable pliers which will not damage the fuel hose, gradually apply pressure with the pliers to pinch the flexible fuel return hose closed. CAUTION: Do not let the fuel pressure exceed the second specified value. Does the fuel pressure indicated by the fuel pressure gauge rise above the first specified value? 376 kPa (55 psi) 414 kPa (60 psi)
21 22
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 7
23
1. Command the fuel pump ON with the Tech 2. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap and listen for the sound of the fuel pump running. 3. Turn the pump off. Was the fuel pump running? Go to Step 7
Go to Fuel System Electrical Test Chart
6E2120
060R200050
Circuit Description
A properly operation exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system will directly affect the air/fuel requirements of the engine. Since the exhaust gas introduced into the air/fuel mixture is an inert gas (contains very little or no oxygen), less fuel is required to maintain a correct air/fuel ratio. Introducing exhaust gas into the combustion chamber lowers combustion temperatures and reduces the formation of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas. Lower combustion temperatures also prevent detonation. If the EGR pintle were to stay closed, the inert exhaust gas would be replaced with air and the air/fuel mixture would be leaner. The powertrain control module (PCM) would compensate for the lean condition by adding fuel, resulting in higher long term fuel trim values.
Diagnostic Aids
The EGR valve chart is a check of the EGR system. An EGR pintle constantly in the closed position could cause detonation and high emissions of NOx. It could also result in high long term fuel trim values in the open throttle cell, but not in the closed throttle cell. An EGR pintle constantly in the open position would cause a rough idle. Also, an EGR mounted incorrectly (rotated 180) could cause rough idle. Check for the following items: D EGR passages Check for restricted or blocked EGR passages. D Manifold absolute pressure sensor A manifold absolute pressure sensor may shift in calibration enough to affect fuel delivery. Refer to Manifold Absolute Pressure Output Check.
6E2121

1 2 3
Check the EGR valve for looseness. Is the EGR valve Loose? Tighten the EGR valve. Is the action complete? 1. Place the transmission selector in Park or Neutral. 2. Start the engine and idle until warm. 3. Using a Tech 2, command EGR 50% ON. (Refer to the Miscellaneous Test.) Does the engine idle rough and lose RPMs? 1. Engine OFF. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a test light to ground, check the EGR harness between the EGR valve and the ignition feed. Does the test light illuminate? Go to Step 6 Verify repair Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Repair the EGR harness ignition feed. Was the problem corrected? 1. Remove the EGR valve. 2. Visually and physically inspect the EGR valve pintle, valve passages and adapter for excessive deposits, obstructions or any restrictions. Does the EGR valve have excessive deposits, obstructions or any restrictions? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8 Verify repair EGR system working properly. No problem found. Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
5 6
Clean or replace EGR system components as necessary. Was the problem corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Ground the EGR valve metal case to battery (). 2. Using a Tech 2, command EGR ON and observe the EGR valve pintle for movement. Does the EGR valve pintle move according to command? Go to Step 9 Go to DTC P1406 chart
1. Remove the EGR inlet and outlet pipes from the intake and exhaust manifolds. 2. Visually and physically inspect manifold EGR ports and EGR inlet and outlet pipes for blockage or restriction caused by excessive deposits or other damage. Do the manifold EGR ports or inlet and outlet pipes have excessive deposits, obstructions, or any restrictions?
Go to Step 10
EGR system working properly. No problem found.
10
Clean or replace EGR system components as necessary. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2122
060R200051
Circuit Description
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor measures the changes in the intake MAP which result from engine load (intake manifold vacuum) and engine speed changes; and converts these into a voltage output. The powertrain control module (PCM) sends a 5-volt reference voltage to the MAP sensor. As the MAP changes, the output voltage of the sensor also changes. By monitoring the sensor output voltage, the PCM knows the MAP. A lower pressure (low voltage) output voltage will be about 1-2 volts at idle. Higher pressure (high voltage) output voltage will be about 4-4.8 volts at wide open throttle. The MAP sensor is also used, under certain conditions, to measure barometric pressure, allowing the PCM to make adjustments for different altitudes. The PCM uses the MAP sensor to diagnose proper operation of the EGR system, in addition to other functions.
Test Description
IMPORTANT: Be sure to used the same diagnostic test equipment for all measurements. The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. Applying 34 kPa (10 inch Hg) vacuum to the MAP sensor should cause the voltage to be 1.5-2.1 volts less than the voltage at step 1. Upon applying vacuum to the sensor, the change in voltage should be instantaneous. A slow voltage change indicates a faulty sensor. 3. Check the vacuum hose to the sensor for leaking or restriction, Be sure that no other vacuum devices are connected to the MAP hose. IMPORTANT: Make sure the electrical connector remains securely fastened. 4. Disconnect the sensor from the bracket. Twist the sensor with your hand to check for an intermittent connection. Output changes greater than 0.10 volt indicate a bad sensor.
6E2123

1. Turn the ignition OFF and leave it OFF for 15 seconds. 2. Ignition ON. Dont crank engine. 3. The Tech 2 should indicate a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor voltage. 4. Compare this scan reading to scan reading of a known good vehicle obtained using the exact same procedure as in Steps 1-4. Is the voltage reading the same +/0.40 volt? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 5 1. Disconnect the vacuum hose at the MAP sensor and plug the hose. 2. Connect a hand vacuum pump to the MAP sensor. 3. Start the engine. 4. Apply 34 kPa (10 in.Hg) of vacuum and note the voltage change. Is the voltage change 1.5-2.1 volts less than Step 1? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 6 Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 4 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 7 Check the sensor cover for leakage or restriction. Does the hose supply vacuum to the MAP sensor only? Repair the hose blockage. Is the action complete? Check the sensor connection. Is the sensor connection good? Refer to On-Vehicle Service, MAP Sensor. Is the action complete? Repair the poor connection. Is the action complete?
3 4 5 6 7
6E2124
Evaporative (EVAP) Emissions Canister Purge Valve Check
060RY00398
Circuit Description
Canister purge is controlled by a solenoid valve that allows manifold vacuum to purge the canister. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a ground to energize the solenoid valve (purge ON). The EVAP purge solenoid control is turned ON and OFF several times a second. The duty cycle (pulse width or ON time) is determined by engine operating conditions including load, throttle position, coolant temperature and ambient temperature. The duty cycle is calculated by the PCM and the purge solenoid is enabled when the appropriate conditions have been met: D The engine run time after start is more than 60 seconds. D The engine coolant temperature is above 30C (86F). D The fuel control system is operating in the closed-loop mode.
Diagnostic Aids
D Make a visual check of vacuum hoses. D Check the throttle body for cracks. D Check the malfunction indicator lamp for a possible mechanical problem.
Test Description
The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 1. Check to see if the solenoid is open or closed. The solenoid is normally de-energized in this step, so it should be closed. 2. This step checks to determine if the solenoid was open due to an electrical circuit problem or a defective solenoid. 3. This should normally energize the solenoid, opening the valve and allowing the vacuum to drop (purge ON).
6E2125
Evaporative (EVAP) Emissions Canister Purge Valve Check

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 3. At the throttle body, disconnect the hose that goes to the purge solenoid. 4. Using a hand vacuum pump with an attached vacuum gauge J 23738-A, apply vacuum (10 in. Hg or 34 kPa) to the solenoid. Does the solenoid hold the vacuum? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 2 1. Disconnect the solenoid electrical connector. 2. As in Step 1, apply vacuum (10 in. Hg or 34 kPa) to the solenoid. Does the solenoid hold the vacuum? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 7 1. At the throttle body, put a cap over the vacuum port where the hose was disconnected for testing. This is to prevent a vacuum leak when the engine is started. 2. Ignition OFF. 3. Install the Tech 2. 4. Apply vacuum to the purge solenoid with the hand vacuum pump. 5. Start the engine, run at 2500 RPM. 6. Using the Tech 2, select Powertrain, 3.5V6 6VE1, F3: Misc. Tests, F2: EVAP Purge, F0: EVAP Purge. (Refer to the Misellaneous Test.) 7. Turn the purge solenoid ON. Did the vacuum drop when the purge was turned on? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 9 Go to Step 6
4 5 6
Check for a short to ground in the S7 Pin wire. Is there a short? Repair the short to ground. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Servicein Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Replace the faulty purge solenoid. Refer to On-Vehicle Service, EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2126
Evaporative (EVAP) Emissions Canister Purge Valve Check (Cont'd)

1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. At the throttle body, install a vacuum gauge where the hose from the purge solenoid was disconnected for testing. 3. Start the engine. 4. Stabilize the engine speed at about 2500 RPM. 5. Momentarily snap the throttle open and let it return to idle. Is there approximately 10 in. Hg (34 kPa) of vacuum available at the EVAP emission canister purge solenoid?
No problem found in the EVAP emission canister purge valve check
1. Disconnect the solenoid electrical connector. 2. Connect a test lamp between the harness terminals. Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 10 Probe terminal A and terminal B with a test lamp to ground. Does the test lamp light on both terminals? Go to Step 11 Verify repair Go to Step 13 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 14 Repair the short to voltage in the S7 Pin wire. Is the action complete? Does one of the terminals light the test lamp? Check for an open in the S7 Pin wire between the purge solenoid and the PCM. Was there an open circuit? Go to Step 15 Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 6 Repair the open in the BLK/YEL wire. Is the action complete? Repair the open in the S7 Pin wire. Is the action complete?
10
11 12 13
14 15
6E2127
PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes

The following table lists the diagnostic trouble codes supported by this vehicle application. If any DTCs not listed here are displayed by a Tech 2, the Tech 2 data may be faulty; notify the Tech 2 manufacturer of any DTCs displayed that are not included in the following table. PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC Description Type Illuminate MIL (Check Engine Lamp) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Illuminate RPL (Reduced Power Lamp) No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
P0101 P0102 P0103 P0106 P0107 P0108 P0112 P0113 P0117 P0118 P0125 P0128 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0134 P0135 P0137 P0138 P0140 P0141 P0151 P0152 P0153 P0154 P0155 P0157 P0158 P0160 P0161 P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175
MAF System Performance MAF Sensor Circuit Low Frequency MAF Sensor Circuit High Frequency MAP Rationality/Performance MAP Circuit Low Input Voltage MAP Circuit High Input Voltage IAT Circuit Low Input Voltage IAT Circuit High Input Voltage ECT Circuit Low Input Voltage ECT Circuit High Input Voltage ECT Insufficient for Closed Loop Fuel Control ECT Below Thermostat Regulating Temperature O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response (Bank 2 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 2 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank 2 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 2 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank 2 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor System too Lean (Bank 1) O2 Sensor System too Rich (Bank 1) O2 Sensor System too Lean (Bank 2) O2 Sensor System too Rich (Bank 2)
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
6E2128
DTC

Description Type Illuminate MIL (Check Engine Lamp) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Illuminate RPL (Reduced Power Lamp) No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
P0201 P0202 P0203 P0204 P0205 P0206 P0300 P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304 P0305 P0306 P0325 P0336 P0337 P0351 P0352 P0353 P0354 P0355 P0356 P0401 P0402 P0404 P0405 P0406 P0420 P0430 P0440 P0442 P0444 P0445 P0446 P0447 P0448 P0452 P0453 P0456 P0461
Injector 1 Control Circuit Injector 2 Control Circuit Injector 3 Control Circuit Injector 4 Control Circuit Injector 5 Control Circuit Injector 6 Control Circuit Engine Misfire Detected Engine Misfire Detected Cylinder #1 Engine Misfire Detected Cylinder #2 Engine Misfire Detected Cylinder #3 Engine Misfire Detected Cylinder #4 Engine Misfire Detected Cylinder #5 Engine Misfire Detected Cylinder #6 ION Sensing Module CKP Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (58X) CKP Sensor Circuit No signal (58X) Ignition 1 Control Circuit Ignition 2 Control Circuit Ignition 3 Control Circuit Ignition 4 Control Circuit Ignition 5 Control Circuit Ignition 6 Control Circuit EGR Flow Insufficient EGR Flow Excessive EGR Range/Performance (Open Valve) EGR Sensor Circuit Low Voltage EGR Sensor Circuit High Voltage Catalyst System Low Efficiency (Bank 1) Catalyst System Low Efficiency (Bank 2) EVAP Control System EVAP Control System Small Leak Detected EVAP Purge Control Circuit Open EVAP Purge Control Circuit Short EVAP Canister Vent Control Malfunction EVAP Vent Solenoid Circuit Open EVAP Vent Solenoid Circuit Short EVAP Control System Tank Pressure Sensor Low Input EVAP Control System Tank Pressure Sensor High Input EVAP Control System Very Small Leak Detected Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Range/Performance
A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B A A A A A A B B B B B A A B B D D B D D B B B D

DTC Description Type Illuminate MIL (Check Engine Lamp) Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No No No No Yes Yes
6E2129
Illuminate RPL (Reduced Power Lamp) No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
P0462 P0463 P0464 P0502 P0506 P0507 P0562 P0563 P0565 P0566 P0567 P0568 P0571 P0601 P0602 P0604 P0606 P1106 P1107 P1111 P1112 P1114 P1115 P1120 P1125 P1133 P1134 P1153 P1154 P1167 P1169 P1171 P1220 P1221 P1271 P1272 P1273 P1275 P1280
Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Low Input Voltage Fuel Level Sensor Circuit High Input Voltage Fuel Level Sensor Noisy Signal No VSS Signal Idle Speed Control RPM too Low Idle Speed Control RPM too High System Voltage is Low System Voltage is High Cruise Main Switch Circuit Error Cruise Cancel Switch Circuit Error Cruise Resume Switch Circuit Error Cruise Set Switch Circuit Error No Brake Switch Signal PCM/ECM Memory Checksum PCM/ECM Programming error PCM/ECM RAM error PCM/ECM Internal Performance MAP Circuit Intermittent High Voltage) MAP Circuit Intermittent Low Input Voltage IAT Circuit Intermittent High Voltage IAT Circuit Intermittent Low Input Voltage ECT Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage ECT Circuit Intermittent High Voltage TPS1 Circuit ETC Limit Performance Mode O2 Sensor Too Few Rich/Lean and Lean/Rich Switches (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Transition Switch Time ratio (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Too Few Rich/Lean and Lean/Rich Switches (Bank 2 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Transition Switch Time ratio (Bank 2 Sensor 1) Fuel supply System RICH During Decel Fuel Cut Off (Bank 1) Fuel supply System RICH During Decel Fuel Cut Off (Bank 2) Fuel supply System Lean During Power Enrichment TPS2 Circuit TPS1TPS2 Correlation (Circuit Performance) APS1APS2 Correlation (Circuit Performance) APS2APS3 Correlation (Circuit Performance) APS1APS3 Correlation (Circuit Performance) APS1 Circuit APS2 Circuit
B B D B B B D B D D D D D A D D D D D D D D D B A B B B B D D D B D D D D B B
6E2130
DTC

Description Type Illuminate MIL (Check Engine Lamp) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No Illuminate RPL (Reduced Power Lamp) No Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
P1285 P1290 P1295 P1299 P1310 P1311 P1312 P1326 P1340 P1404 P1441 P1514 P1515 P1516 P1523 P1571 P1625 P1635 P1639 P1640 P1650
APS3 Circuit ETC Forced Idle Mode ETC Power Management Mode ETC Forced Engine Shutdown in Mode ION Sensing Module Diagnostic ION Sensing Module SEC 1 Line Circuit Fault ION Sensing Module SEC 2 Line Circuit Fault ION Sensing Module Combustion Quality circuit ION Sensing Module Cylinder Synchronization EGR Range/Performance (Closed Valve) EVAP Control System Continuous Open Purge Flow TPSMAF Correlation CommandAcrual TPS Correlation CommandAcrual TPS Correlation Error Throttle Actuator Control Return Performance Brake Switch No Operation PCM/ECM System Reset Reference Voltage #1 Circuit Reference Voltage #2 Circuit ODM Output circuit Fault QDM Output Circuit Fault
B A A A A A A A B B B A A A D D D D D D D
6E2131
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0101 MAF System Performance
060R200052
Circuit Description
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor measures the amount of air which passes through it into the engine during a given time. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the mass air flow information to monitor engine operating conditions for fuel delivery calculations. A large quantity of air entering the engine indicates an acceleration or high load situation, while a small quantity or air indicates deceleration or idle. The MAF sensor produces a frequency signal which can be monitored using a Tech 2. The frequency will vary within a range of around 4 to 7g/s at idle to around 25 to 40g/s at maximum engine load. DTC P0101 will be set if the signal from the MAF sensor does not match a predicted value based on throttle position and engine RPM.
D The PCM will store condition which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0101 will clear after 40 consecutive trip cycles during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P0101 can be cleared using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. D The duct work at the MAF sensor for leaks. D An engine vacuum leak. D The PCV system for vacuum leaks. D An incorrect PCV valve. D The engine oil dip stick not fully seated. D The engine oil fill cap loose or missing. Check for the following conditions:

D D D D The engine is running. No TP sensor and MAP sensor DTCs are set. No MAF frequency DTCs are set. System voltage is between 11.5 volts and 16 volts.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected fault. D The PCM calculates an air flow value based on idle air control valve position, throttle position, RPM and barometric pressure.
6E2132

increase from about 36 g/s at idle to 100 g/s or greater at the time of the 12 shift. If not, check for a restriction. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0101 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P001 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness- Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Mass Air Flow (MAF) display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. D Plugged intake air duct or filter element D A wideopen throttle acceleration from a stop should cause the mass air flow displayed on a Tech 2 to
DTC P0101 MAF System Performance

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor harness connector from the MAF Sensor. 3. Place an unpowered test lamp between the 12 volt signal circuit and the ground circuit, both at the MAF Sensor connector. 4. Ignition ON, EngineOFF. Did the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, Engine OFF. 2. Using a Digital Voltmeter (DVM), check the 12 volt signal circuit for the correct voltage. Did the DVM indicate a value within the following range? 11.5 to 12.5 Volt Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Check the 12 volt signal circuit for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground Was the problem found? Verify repair Check the MAF ground circuit for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to voltage Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Check the MAF Sensor signal circuit between the PCM and the MAF Sensor for the following conditions: D An open circuit D A short to ground D A short to battery voltage Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7
6E2133
DTC P0101 MAF System Performance (Cont'd)

1. Connect the MAF Sensor wiring harness connector to the MAF Sensor. 2. Connect the Tech 2 to the vehicle. 3. Place the Transmission in Park/Neutral, and fully apply the Parking Brake. 4. Start the engine. 5. Select the Mass Air Flow (MAF) parameter on the Tech 2. With the engine idling, does the Tech 2 display the following value(s)? 4 to 7 g/s Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
Observe the Tech 2 value while increasing the engine RPM to its upper limit. Does the Tech 2 display the following value(s)? 25 to 40 g/s Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 9 Replace the MAF Sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The PCM must be reprogrammed. Refer to PCM reprogramming. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
9 10
6E2134
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0102 MAF Sensor Circuit Low Frequency
060R200052
Circuit Description
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor measures the amount of air which passes through it into the engine during a given time. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the mass air flow information to monitor engine operating conditions for fuel delivery calculations. A large quantity of air entering the engine indicates an acceleration or high load situation, while a small quantity of air indicates deceleration or idle. The MAF sensor produces a frequency signal which can be monitored using a Tech 2. The frequency will vary within a range of around 4 to 7g/s at idle to around 25 to 40 g/s at maximum engine load. DTC P0102 will be set if the signal from the MAF sensor is below the possible range of a normally operating MAF sensor.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Misrouted harness Inspect the MAF sensor harness to ensure that it is not routed too close to high voltage wires. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the MAF sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. D Plugged intake air duct or filter element A wide-open throttle acceleration from a stop should cause the mass air flow displayed on a Tech 2 to increase from

D The engine is running above 500 RPM for more than 10 seconds. D System voltage is above 11.5 volts. D MAF signal frequency is below 1.6g/s for a total of 50-percent of the last 1000 samples monitored. A sample is taken every cylinder event.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected fault. D The PCM calculates an air flow value based on idle air control valve position, throttle position, RPM and barometric pressure.

about 3-6 g/second at idle to 100 g/second or greater at the time of the 1-2 shift. If not, check for a restriction. If DTC P0102 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set.
6E2135
Test Description
2. This step verifies that the problem is present at idle. 4. A voltage reading of less than 4 or over 5 volts at the MAF sensor signal circuit indicates a fault in the wiring or a poor connection. 5. This verifies that ignition feed voltage and a good ground are available at the MAF sensor.
DTC P0102 MAF Sensor Circuit Low Frequency

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Start the engine. 2. With the engine idling, monitor MAF Frequency display on the Tech 2. Is the MAF Frequency below the specified value? 1.6 g/s Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0102. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0102 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect the MAF sensor connector. Ignition ON, engine OFF. Using a DVM, measure voltage between the MAF sensor signal circuit and battery ground. 11.512 V Go to Step 5 Go to Step 8
Is the voltage near the specified value? 5 Connect a test light between the MAF sensor ignition feed and ground circuits at the MAF sensor harness connector. Is the test light ON? 6 Connect a test light between the MAF sensor ignition feed circuit and battery ground. Is the test light ON? 7 1. Check for a poor connection at the MAF sensor. 2. If a poor connection is found, replace the faulty terminal(s). Was a poor connection found? 8 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the MAF sensor. 3. Disconnect the PCM connector for the MAF signal circuit. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 5. With the DVM, measure the voltage between the MAF signal terminal at the PCM and battery ground. Is the voltage under the specified value?
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 7
Verify repair
Go to Step 12
0V
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 10
6E2136
DTC P0102 MAF Sensor Circuit Low Frequency (Cont'd)

1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect the PCM connector. Ignition ON. Check the MAF sensor signal circuit for a short to 5 volts. Verify repair Ignition OFF. Disconnect the PCM connector. Ignition ON. Check the MAF sensor signal circuit between the PCM and the MAF sensor for an open, short to ground, or short to the MAF ground circuit. Verify repair Go to Step 13
Is the action complete? 10 1. 2. 3. 4.
Is the action complete? 11 Locate and repair the open in the ground circuit to the MAF sensor. Is the action complete? 12 Locate and repair the open in the ignition feed circuit to the MAF sensor. Is the action complete? 13 14 Replace the MAF sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
Go to Step 14
Verify repair
6E2137
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0103 MAF Sensor Circuit High Frequency
060R200052
Circuit Description
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor measures the amount of air which passes through it into the engine during a given time. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the mass air flow information to monitor engine operating conditions for fuel delivery calculations. A large quantity of air entering the engine indicates an acceleration or high load situation, while a small quantity of air indicates deceleration or idle. The MAF sensor produces a frequency signal which can be monitored using a Tech 2. The frequency will vary within a range of around 4 to 7g/s at idle to around 25 to 40 g/s at maximum engine load. DTC P0103 will be set if the signal from the MAF sensor is above the possible range of a normally operating MAF sensor.
D The PCM calculates an airflow value based on idle air control valve position, throttle position, RPM and barometric pressure. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.
Conditions for clearing the MIL/DTC


D The engine is running above 500 RPM for more than 10 seconds. D System voltage is above 11.5 volts. D MAF signal frequency is above 40g/s for a total of 50 percent of the last 200 samples monitored. A sample is taken every cylinder event.
Diagnostic Aids
If DTC P0103 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. This step verifies that the problem is present at idle.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected the fault.
6E2138
4. A frequency reading with the MAF sensor connector disconnected indicates an electromagnetic interference (EMI) related fault. 8. This vehicle is equipped with a PCM which utilizes an electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM). When the PCM is being replaced, the new PCM must be programmed. Refer to PCM Replacement and Programming Procedures in Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Sensors.
6E2139
DTC P0103 MAF Sensor Circuit High Frequency

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0103. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0103 failed this ignition? Go to Step 3
1. Start the engine. 2. With the engine idling, monitor MAF Frequency display on the Tech 2. Is MAF Frequency above the specified value? 40g/s Go to Step 4 Go to Step 7 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Disconnect the MAF sensor connector. Ignition ON, engine idling. Using a Tech 2, monitor MAF Frequency. 0g/s Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 6 Go to Step 8
Does the Tech 2 indicate a MAF Frequency at the specified value? 5 6 Replace the MAF sensor. Is the action complete? 1. Check the MAF harness for incorrect routing near high voltage components (solenoids, relays, motors). 2. If incorrect routing is found, correct the harness routing. Was a problem found? 7 1. With the engine idling, monitor MAF Frequency display on the Tech 2. 2. Quickly snap open throttle to wide open throttle while under a road load and record value. Does the Tech 2 indicate MAF Frequency above the specified value? 8 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
40g/s
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 8
Verify repair
6E2140
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0106 MAP System Performance
060R200051
Circuit Description
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure (vacuum). The MAP sensor signal voltage to the powertrain control module (PCM) varies from below 2 volts at idle (high vacuum) to above 4 volts at wide-open throttle (low vacuum) at sea level. The MAP sensor is used to determine manifold pressure changes while the linear exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) flow test diagnostic is being run (refer to DTC P0401), engine vacuum level for some other diagnostics, and barometric pressure (BARO). The PCM compares the MAP sensor signal to a calculated MAP based on throttle position and various engine load factors. If the PCM detects a MAP signal that varies excessively above or below the calculated value, DTC P0106 will set.
D The MAP value must vary for a total of 10 seconds over a 20-second period of time that the samples were monitored. D The failure must occur for 2 consecutive trips.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will default to a BARO value of 79.3 kPa. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D D D D D D D D No TP sensor DTCs are present. Engine speed is steady, changing less then 100 RPM. Engine speed is between 1000 rpm and 4000 rpm. Throttle position is steady, throttle angle changes less than 1%. EGR flow rate is steady, changing less than 4%. No change in brake switch, A/C clutch, TCC or power steering pressure switch status. Above conditions are met for longer than 1 second. Actual MAP value varies more than 10 kPa.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection.

D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the MAP display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0106 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in
6E2141
determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1107 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P0106 MAP System Performance

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0106. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0106 failed? Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Check for the following conditions: D Vacuum hoses disconnected, damaged, or incorrectly routed D Intake manifold vacuum leaks D Vacuum leaks at throttle body D Vacuum leaks at EGR valve flange and pipes D Crankcase ventilation valve faulty, missing or incorrectly installed. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Disconnect the MAP sensor electrical connector. 2. Observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2. Is the MAP value near the specified value? 11 kPa Go to Step 5
Go to Step 13
1. Connect a test light between B+ and the MAP sensor signal circuit at the MAP sensor harness connector. 2. Observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2. Is the MAP value near the specified value? 105 kPa Go to Step 6 Go to Step 9 1. Jumper the 5 volt reference circuit and the MAP signal circuit together at the MAP sensor harness connector. 2. Observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2. Is the MAP value near the specified value? 104 kPa Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the sensor ground circuit for high resistance, an open between the PCM and the MAP sensor, or for a poor connection at the PCM. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11
6E2142
DTC P0106 MAP System Performance (Cont'd)

1. Check the 5 volt reference circuit for high resistance, an open between the PCM and the MAP sensor, or a poor connection at the PCM. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check the MAP sensor signal circuit for high resistance, an open, a short to ground, or a short to the sensor ground circuit. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 1. Check the MAP sensor signal circuit for a poor connection at the PCM. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 14 1. Check for a poor connection at the MAP sensor. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 12 Replace the MAP sensor. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition OFF, disconnected the PCM. 2. Ignition ON, check the MAP signal circuit for a short to voltage or a short to the 5 volt reference circuit. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 14 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10
11
12 13
14
6E2143
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0107 MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
060R200051
Circuit Description
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure (vacuum). The MAP sensor signal voltage to the powertrain control module (PCM) varies from below 2 volts at idle (high vacuum) to above 4 volts with the ignition ON, engine not running or at wide-open throttle (low vacuum). The MAP sensor is used to determine manifold pressure changes while the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) flow test diagnostic is being run (refer to DTC P0401), to determine engine vacuum level for some other diagnostics and to determine barometric pressure (BARO). The PCM monitors the MAP signals for voltages outside the normal range of the MAP sensor. If the PCM detects a MAP signal voltage that is excessively low, DTC P0107 will be set.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected fault. D The PCM will default to a BARO value of 79.3 kPa. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D No TP sensor DTCs present. D Engine is running. D Throttle angle is above 1% if engine speed is less than 1000 RPM. D Throttle angle is above 2% if engine speed is above 1000 RPM. D The MAP sensor indicates manifold absolute pressure at or below 11 kPa for a total of approximately 10 seconds over a 16-second period. D Ignition voltage more than 11 volts.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Check for intermittent codes. D The MAP sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit . D The MAP sensor shares a ground with the Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor, the ECT sensor, and the Transmission Fluid Temperature sensor. D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken
6E2144

If DTC P0107 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P0107 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the MAP display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.
DTC P0107 MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. With the throttle closed, observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2. Is the MAP value near the specified value? 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0107. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0107 failed? Go to Step 4 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the MAP sensor electrical connector. 3. Jumper the 5 volt reference circuit and the MAP signal together at the MAP sensor harness connector. 4. Ignition ON. 5. Observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2. Is the MAP value near the specified value? (If no, start with diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.)
0 V 11 kPa at sea level
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
5 V 104 kPa
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 5
1. Disconnect the jumper. 2. Connect a test light between B+ and the MAP sensor signal circuit at the MAP sensor harness connector. 3. Observe the MAP value displayed on the Tech 2. Is the MAP value near the specified value. 5 V 104 kPa Go to Step 6 Go to Step 8 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the 5 volt reference circuit for an open or short to ground. 3. If the 5 volt reference circuit is open or shorted to ground, repair it as necessary. Was the 5 volt reference circuit open or shorted to ground? Verify repair Go to Step 7
Check the 5 volt reference circuit for a poor connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 11
6E2145
DTC P0107 MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check the MAP signal circuit for an open, short to ground, or short to the sensor ground circuit. 3. If the MAP sensor signal circuit is open or shorted to ground, repair it as necessary. Was the MAP signal circuit open or shorted to ground? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Check the MAP sensor signal circuit for a poor connection at the PCM and the MAP sensor; replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 11 Replace the MAP sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
6E2146
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0108 MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
060R200051
Circuit Description
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure (vacuum). The MAP sensor signal voltage to the powertrain control module (PCM) varies from below 2 volts at idle (high vacuum) to above 4 volts with the key ON, engine not running or at wide-open throttle (low vacuum). The MAP sensor is used to determine manifold pressure changes while the linear EGR flow test diagnostic is being run (refer to DTC P0401), to determine engine vacuum level for some other diagnostics and to determine barometric pressure (BARO). The PCM monitors the MAP signals for voltages outside the normal range of the MAP sensor. If the PCM detects a MAP signal voltage that is excessively high, DTC P0108 will be set.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected fault. D The PCM will default to a BARO value of 79.3 kPa. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D No TP sensor DTCs present. D Engine is running for more than 10 seconds. D Throttle position is below 3% if engine speed is below 1000 RPM. D Throttle position is below 10% if engine speed is above 1000 RPM. D The MAP sensor indicates an intermittent manifold absolute pressure above 80 kPa for a total of approximately 10 seconds over a 16-second period.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D The MAP sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor (Vapor Pressure Sensor). If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit. D The MAP sensor shares a ground with the Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor, the ECT sensor, and the Transmission Fluid Temperature sensor. D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken

locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the MAP display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.
6E2147
If DTC P0108 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1108 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P0108 MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. If the engine idle is rough, unstable or incorrect, repair the idle problem before using this chart. Refer to Symptoms section. 2. With the engine idling, note the MAP value on the Tech 2. Is the MAP reading above the specified value? 90 kPa Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect the MAP sensor electrical connector. Ignition ON. Note the MAP sensor voltage displayed on the Tech 2. (If no, start with diagnostic chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.)
Is the MAP sensor voltage at the specified value? 5 6 Probe the sensor ground circuit with a test light to B+. Is the test light ON? 1. Check the MAP signal circuit for a short to voltage or a short to the 5 volt reference circuit. 2. If the MAP sensor signal circuit is shorted, repair circuit as necessary. Was the MAP sensor signal circuit shorted? 7 1. Check for a poor sensor ground terminal connection at the MAP sensor electrical connector. 2. If a problem is found, replace the faulty terminal. Did the terminal require replacement? 8 Check for a plugged or leaking vacuum supply to the MAP sensor. Is the vacuum supply plugged or leaking? 9 1. Check for a poor sensor ground terminal connection at the PCM. 2. If a problem is found, replace the faulty terminal. Did the terminal require replacement?
11 kPa 0.0 V
Verify repair
Go to Step 11
Verify repair
Go to Step 8
Verify repair
Go to Step 12
Verify repair
Go to Step 10
6E2148
DTC P0108 MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Cont'd)

10
1. Check the continuity of the MAP sensor ground circuit. 2. If the MAP sensor ground circuit measures over 5 ohms, repair open or poor connection. Was a condition found and corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 11 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify Repair Verify repair
11
12
Replace the MAP sensor. Is the action complete?
6E2149
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0112 IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
D06RY00147
Circuit Description
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor which measures the temperature of the air entering the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies 5 volts through a pull-up resistor to the IAT sensor. When the intake air is cold, the sensor resistance is high and the PCM will monitor a high signal voltage on the IAT signal circuit. If the intake air is warm, the sensor resistance is lower, causing the PCM to monitor a lower voltage. DTC P0112 will set when the PCM detects an excessively low signal voltage on the intake air temperature sensor signal circuit.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-bout terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the IAT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the IAT sensor. A change in the IAT display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0112 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set.

D The engine has been running for over 15 seconds. D Vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph (48 km/h) . D IAT signal voltage indicates and intake air temperature greater than 148C (298F) (about 5 volts) for a total of 12.5 seconds over a 25-second period of time.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected fault. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.
6E2150
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. Verifies that the fault is present. 3. If DTC P0112 can be repeated only by duplicating the Failure Records condition, refer to the Temperature vs. Resistance Value table. The table may be used to test the IAT sensor at various temperatures to evaluate the possibility of a shifted sensor that may be stored above or below a certain temperature. If this is the case, replace the IAT sensor. If the IAT sensor appears to be OK, the fault is intermittent; refer to Diagnostic Aids.

C F OHMS Temperature vs. Resistance Values (approximate) 100 80 60 45 35 25 15 5 5 15 30 40 212 176 140 113 95 77 59 41 23 5 22 40 177 332 667 1188 1802 2796 4450 7280 12300 21450 52700 100700
6E2151
DTC P0112IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Using a Tech 2, monitor the intake air temperature (IAT). Is the intake air temperature greater than the specified value? 148C (283F) Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor the DTC info for DTC P0112. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0112 failed this ignition? Refer to Test Description
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect the IAT sensor electrical connector. Ignition ON. Observe the intake air temperature on the Tech 2.
Is the intake air temperature below the specified value? 5 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM electrical connectors. 3. Check the IAT sensor signal circuit for a short to ground. Is the IAT sensor signal circuit shorted to ground? 6 7 Replace the IAT sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
38C (36F)
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 7
Verify repair
6E2152
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0113 IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage
D06RY00147
Circuit Description
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor which measures the temperature of the air entering the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies 5 volts through a pull-up resistor to the IAT sensor. When the intake air is cold, the sensor resistance is high and the PCM will monitor a high signal voltage on the IAT signal circuit. If the intake air is warm, the sensor resistance is lower causing the PCM to monitor a lower voltage. DTC P0113 will set when the PCM detects an excessively high signal voltage on the intake air temperature sensor signal circuit.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D The IAT sensor shares a ground with the EGR position sensor and the TP sensor. Check the ground if these DTCs are set. D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the IAT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the IAT sensor. A change in the IAT display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0113 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set.

D D D D D The engine has been running for over 30 seconds. Vehicle speed is less than 20 mph (32 km/h). ECT signal temperature is above 60C (140F). Mass air flow is less then 20 g/second. IAT signal voltage indicates an intake air temperature less than 39C (38F) for total of 12.5 seconds over a 25-second period.

6E2153
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart: 2. Verifies that the fault is present. 3. If DTC P0113 can be repeated only by duplicating the Failure Records conditions, refer to the Temperature vs. Resistance Values table. The table may be used to test the IAT sensor at various temperatures to evaluate the possibility of a shifted sensor that may be open above or below a certain temperature. If this is the case, replace the IAT sensor. If the IAT sensor appears to be OK, the fault is intermittent; refer to Diagnostic Aids.

DTC P0113 IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Ignition ON, engine OFF. Observe the Intake Air Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Intake Air Temp below the specified value? 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data parameters. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0113. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0113 failed? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the IAT sensor electrical connector. 3. Jumper the IAT signal circuit and the sensor ground circuit together at the IAT sensor harness connector. 4. Ignition ON. 5. Observe the Intake Air Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Intake Air Temp at the specified value? 1. Jumper the IAT signal circuit at the IAT sensor harness connector to chassis ground. 2. Observe the Intake Air Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Intake Air Temp at the specified value?
38C (36F)
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
Refer to Test Description
140C (284F)
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 5
140C (284F)
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 8
6E2154
DTC P0113 IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Cont'd)

Check for poor connections at the IAT sensor and replace terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 10 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check the IAT sensor ground circuit for an open. 3. If the IAT sensor ground circuit is open, repair it as necessary. Was the IAT sensor ground circuit open? Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check the IAT signal circuit for an open. 3. If the IAT sensor signal circuit is open, repair it as necessary. Was the IAT signal circuit open? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Check for a poor sensor ground or IAT signal circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any of the terminals need to be replaced? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 11 Replace the IAT sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
6E2155
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0117 ECT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
D06RY00148
Circuit Description
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a thermistor mounted on a coolant crossover pipe at the front of the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies a voltage (about 5 volts) through a pull-up resistor to the ECT signal circuit. When the engine coolant is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high, therefore the PCM will measure a high signal voltage. As the engine coolant warms, the sensor resistance becomes lower, and the ECT signal voltage measured at the PCM drops. With a fully warmed-up engine, the ECT signal voltage should measure about 1.5 to 2.0 volts.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the ECT sensor. A change in the ECT display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0117 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1114 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.

D Engine running time is longer than 120 seconds. D The ECT sensor signal indicates an engine coolant temperature greater than 150C (302F) (about 0.10 V) for a total of 50 seconds over a 100second period.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected fault. D The PCM will substitute the ECT reading with a default engine coolant temperature value. The default value is based on start-up intake air temperature and running time. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.
6E2156
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. Verifies that the fault is present. 3. If DTC P0117 can be repeated only by duplicating the Failure Records conditions, refer to the Temperature vs. Resistance Values table. The table may be used to test the ECT sensor at various temperatures to evaluate the possibility of a shifted sensor that may be shorted above or below a certain temperature. If this is the case, replace the ECT sensor. If the ECT sensor appears to be OK, the fault is intermittent; refer to Diagnostic Aids.

6E2157
DTC P0117 ECT Sensor Low Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Observe the Eng Cool Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Eng Cool Temp below the specified value? 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0117. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0117 failed this ignition? 39C (38F) Go to Step 4
139C (282F)
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Disconnect the ECT sensor electrical connector. 2. Observe the Eng Cool Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Eng Cool Temp at the specified value? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the ECT signal circuit for a short to ground or a short to the sensor ground circuit. 3. If the ECT signal circuit is shorted. repair it as necessary. Was the ECT signal circuit shorted to ground?
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 7
6 7
Replace the ECT sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2158
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0118 ECT Sensor Circuit High Voltage
060R200053
Circuit Description
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a thermistor mounted in on a coolant crossover pipe at the front of the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies a voltage (about 5 volts) through a pull-up resistor to the ECT signal circuit. When the engine coolant is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high, therefore the PCM will measure a high signal voltage. As the engine coolant warms, the sensor resistance becomes less, and the ECT signal voltage measured at the PCM drops. With a fully warmed-up engine, the ECT signal voltage should measure about 1.5 to 2.0 volts.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: The ECT shares a ground with the Transmission Fluid Temperature sensor, the Fuel Tank Pressure sensor, and the MAP sensor. Check the ground if these DTCs are also set. D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the ECT sensor. A change in the ECT display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0118 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently,

D Engine running time is longer than 90 seconds. D The ECT sensor signal indicates an engine coolant temperature of 39C (38F) or less (about 5 volts) for a total of 50 seconds over a 100-second period.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected fault. D The PCM will substitute the ECT reading with a default engine coolant temperature value. The default value is based on start-up intake air temperature and running time. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

performing the DTC P1115 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
6E2159

Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. Verifies that the fault is present. 3. If DTC P0118 can be repeated only by duplicating the Failure Records conditions, refer to the Temperature vs. Resistance Value table. The table may be used to test the ECT sensor at various temperatures to evaluate the possibility of a shifted sensor that may be shorted above or below a certain temperature. If this is the case, replace the ECT sensor. If the ECT sensor appears to be OK, the fault is intermittent; refer to Diagnostic Aids.
DTC P0118 ECT Sensor Circuit High Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Observe the Eng Cool Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Eng Cool Temp below the specified value? 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor the DTC info for DTC P0118. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0118 failed? 1. Disconnect the ECT sensor electrical connector. 2. Jumper the ECT signal circuit and the sensor ground circuit together at the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Observe the Eng Cool Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Eng Cool Temp at the specified value? 1. Jumper the ECT signal circuit at the ECT sensor harness connector to chassis ground. 2. Observe the Eng Cool Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Eng Cool Temp at the specified value? Check for poor connections at the ECT sensor and replace terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair
39C (38F)
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
Refer to Test Description
140C (284F)
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 5
140C (284F)
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 10
6E2160
DTC P0118 ECT Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check the ECT sensor ground circuit for an open. 3. If the ECT sensor ground circuit is open, repair it as necessary. Was the ECT sensor ground circuit open? Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM, and check the ECT signal circuit for an open. 3. If the ECT sensor signal circuit is open, repair it as necessary. Was the ECT signal circuit open? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Check for a poor sensor ground or ECT signal circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any of the terminals need to be replaced? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 11 Replace the ECT sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
6E2161
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0125 ECT Excessive Time to Closed Loop Fuel Control
060R200053
Circuit Description
To provide the best possible combination of driveability, fuel economy, and emission control, a closed loop air/fuel metering system is used. When the vehicle is first started, the powertrain control module (PCM) controls fuel delivery in open loop, ignoring the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) signals and calculating air/fuel ratio based on inputs from the engine coolant temperature, throttle position, and mass air flow sensors. The PCM will begin using the Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 signals for controlling fuel delivery under closed loop conditions when the following conditions have been met: D The HO2S output signals are varying, indicating that the sensors are hot enough to operate properly. D The engine coolant temperature sensor indicates coolant temperature above 50C (122F). D Time since start-up is at least 16 seconds for a warm engine or 23 seconds for a cold engine.
D For a warm engine (intake air temperature is greater than 10C/50F), engine coolant temperature sufficient to allow closed loop operation (50C/122F) is not achieved within 2 minutes of start-up. For a cold engine (intake air temperature between (7C and 10C), engine coolant temperature sufficient to allow closed loop operation (50C/122F) is not achieved within 10 minutes of start-up. D The above condition fails 20 consecutive times.



D D D D No active IAT, MAF or ECT DTC(s) are present. Engine is running. Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h) . Intake air temperature is greater than 10C (14F) 0C (32F). D Startup engine coolant temperature is between 10C (14F) and 28C (82F).
6E2162
Diagnostic Aids
DTC P0125 set indicates a faulty ECT sensor. Comparing the engine coolant temperature displayed on a Tech 2 with actual coolant temperature measured with a thermometer may isolate this condition. If the displayed engine coolant temperature is not close to the actual coolant temperature, replace the ECT sensor. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0125 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage wince the DTC was last set.
Engine Coolant Temperature

Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. Comparing the engine coolant temperature displayed on a Tech 2 with actual coolant temperature measured with a thermometer may isolate this condition. If the displayed engine coolant temperature is not close to the actual coolant temperature, replace the ECT sensor. If the temperatures are close, the fault is intermittent; refer to Diagnostic Aids.
DTC P0125 ECT Excessive Time to Closed Loop Fuel Control

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to applicable ECT sensor DTC chart Are any ECT sensor DTCs set?
Go to Step 3
1. Allow the engine to cool completely. 2. Check the cooling system coolant level (refer to Cooling and Radiator). Is the coolant level OK? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 9 1. Start the engine. 2. With the engine idling, monitor ENG COOL TEMP display on the Tech 2. Does ENG COOL TEMP increase to above the specified value within 2 minutes? 21C (70F)
Go to Step 5
Check for proper operation of the thermostat (refer to Cooling and Radiator). Is the thermostat operating correctly? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 9
6E2163
DTC P0125 ECT Excessive Time to Closed Loop Fuel Control (Cont'd)
Compare engine coolant temperature displayed on the Tech 2 to the actual coolant temperature measured with a thermometer. (Observe normal precautions when opening the cooling system.) Is the Tech 2 engine coolant temperature indication close to the measured temperature? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 7
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Using a DVM, measure the resistance of the ECT at the PCM connector. 4. Compare the DVM reading with the chart in Test Description. Is the chart value approximately equal to the thermometer reading? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 8
Check for high resistance in wiring related to the ECT sensor. Also, check for poor connections at the ECT sensor and the PCM. Was a problem found? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 11 Refer to Cooling and Radiator for cooling system diagnosis and repair condition as necessary. Is the action complete? Verify repair Replace the faulty terminal(s) or repair faulty wiring as necessary. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the ECT sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10
11 12
6E2164
Diagnostic Trouble Code(DTC) P0128 Thermostat Insufficient Temperature for Stable Operation
060R200053
Circuit Description
D The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor thermistor mounted on a coolant crossover pipe at the front of the engine. This code determines if system has insufficient coolant temperatures for stable operation.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0128 will clear after 40 consecutive trip cycles during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P0128 can be cleared using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed. Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D Engine running. D No IAT, ECT and MAF DTCs set. D No VSS DTC set. Warm case(Ambient temperature is between 50F and 128F.): D Time for coolant to reach stabilized closed loop value is less than 239 sec. Cold case(Ambient temperature is between 20F and 50F.): D Time for coolant to reach stabilized thermostat regulation temperature is more than 263 sec.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCMInspect harness connectors for backed out terminals,improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harnessInspect the wiring harness for damage.


If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the Tech2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0128 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in
6E2165
determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P0128 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0128 Thermostat Insufficient Temperature for stable operation
Was the On-Board(OBD)System Check performed? Go to Step 2
1. Visually/physically check air duct and water pipe for splits, kinks, and proper connections and routing. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 3 1. Remove and check the Thermostat for stable operation. Refer to 6B section. 2. Replace the thermostat if necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 4 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0128. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0128 failed this ignition? 139C (282F) Go to Step 5
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Oberve the Eng Cool Temp display on the Tech 2. Is the Eng Cool Temp below the specified value? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the ECT signal circuit for a short to ground or a short to the sensor ground circuit. 3. If the ECT signal circuit is shorted, repair it as necessary. Was a problem found?
Verify repair
Go to Step 6
Verify repair
Refer to Diagnostic Go to Step 7
Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2166
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0131 HO2S Circuit Low Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a bias voltage of about 450 mV between the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) signal high and signal low circuits. When measured with a 10 megaohm digital voltmeter, this may display as low as 350 mV. The oxygen sensor varies the voltage within a range of about 1000 mV when the exhaust is rich, down through about 10 mV when exhaust is lean. The PCM constantly monitors the HO2S signal during closed loop operation and compensates for a rich or lean condition by decreasing or increasing injector pulse width as necessary. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage remains excessively low for an extended period of time, DTC P0131 will be set.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D Open loop fuel control will be in effect.


D D D D No related DTCs. Vehicle is operating in closed loop. Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). Closed loop commanded air/fuel ratio is between 14.5 and 14.8. D Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal voltage remains below 22 mV during normal closed loop operation for a total of 77 seconds over a 90-second period of time.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Heated oxygen sensor wiring The sensor pigtail may be routed incorrectly and contacting the exhaust system. D Poor PCM to engine block grounds. D Fuel pressure The system will go lean if pressure is too low. The PCM can compensate for some decrease. However, If fuel pressure is too low, a DTC P0131 may be set. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Lean injector(s) Perform Injector Balance Test. D Vacuum leaks Check for disconnected or damaged vacuum hoses and for vacuum leaks at the intake manifold, throttle body, EGR system, and PCV system.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected fault.

D Exhaust leaks An exhaust leak may cause outside air to be pulled into the exhaust gas stream past the HO2S, causing the system to appear lean. Check for exhaust leaks that may cause a false lean condition to be indicated. D MAF sensor The system can go lean if the MAF sensor signal indicates an engine airflow measurement that is not correct. Disconnect the MAF sensor to see if the lean condition is corrected. If so, replace the MAF sensor. D Fuel contamination Water, even in small amounts, can be delivered to the fuel injectors. The water can cause a lean exhaust to be indicated. Excessive alcohol in the fuel can also cause this condition. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis for the procedure to check for fuel contamination.
6E2167
D If none of the above conditions are present, replace the affected HO2S.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to step numbers on the diagnostic chart. 3. DTC P0131 failing during operation may indicate a condition described in the Diagnostic Aids above. If the DTC P0131 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0131 HO2S Circuit Low Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at normal operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within the parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage remain below the specified value? 22 mV Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data and note parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0131 until the DTC P0131 test runs. Note test result. Does Tech 2 indicate DTC P0131 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check the Bank 1 HO2S 1 high and low circuits for a short to ground or a short to the heater ground circuit. Are the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal circuits shorted to ground? Go to Step 5 Verify repair
Go to Step 6
5 6
Repair the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Turn the ignition OFF, HO2S 1 and PCM disconnected. 2. Check for short circuit between the high and low signal circuits. Was there continuity between the high and low circuits? Go to Step 7 Verify repair Go to Step 8 Repair the short between the high and low circuits. Is the action complete?
6E2168
DTC P0131 HO2S Circuit Low Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1 (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Reconnect the disconnected. 3. Ignition ON.
PCM,
leave
the
sensor Refer to Diagnostic Aids
Does the Tech 2 indicate Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage between the specified values? 9 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
425-475 mV
Go to Step 9
Verify repair
6E2169
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0132 HO2S Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a bias voltage of about 450 mV between the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) signal and low circuits. When measured with a 10 megaohm digital voltmeter, this may display as low as 320 mV. The oxygen sensor varies the voltage within a range of about 1000 mV when exhaust is rich, down through about 10 mV when exhaust is lean. The PCM constantly monitors the HO2S signal during closed loop operation and compensates for a rich or lean condition by decreasing or increasing injector pulse width as necessary. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage remains excessively high for an extended period of time, DTC P0132 will be set.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected fault. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D Open loop fuel control will be in effect.


D No related DTCs. D Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F) D Closed loop commanded air/fuel ratio is between 14.5 and 14.8. D Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal voltage remains above 952 mV during normal closed loop operation for a total of 77 seconds over a 90-second period. OR D Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal voltage remains above 500 mV during deceleration fuel cutoff mode operation for 3 seconds.
Diagnostic Aids
Check the following items: D Fuel pressure The system will go rich if pressure is too high. The PCM can compensate for some increase. However, if fuel pressure is too high, a DTC P0132 may be set. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Perform Injector Balance Test Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis.
6E2170

cause the DTC to set during deceleration fuel mode. An HO2S which is faulty and not allowing a full voltage swing between the rich and lean thresholds can also cause this condition. Operate the vehicle by monitoring the HO2S voltage with a Tech 2. If the HO2S voltage is limited within a range between 300 mV to 600 mV, check the HO2S signal circuit wiring and associated terminal conditions. D If none of the above conditions are present, replace the affected HO2S.
D Check the EVAP canister for fuel saturation If full of fuel, check canister control and hoses. Refer to Evaporative (EVAP) Emission Control System. D MAF sensor The system can go rich if MAF sensor signal indicates an engine airflow measurement that is not correct. Disconnect the MAF sensor to see it the rich condition is corrected. If so, replace the MAF sensor. D Check for a leak in the fuel pressure regulator diaphragm by checking the vacuum line to the regulator for the presence of fuel. There should be no fuel in the vacuum line. D An intermittent TP sensor output will cause the system to go rich due to a false indication of the engine acceleration. D Shorted Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) If the HO2S is internally shorted, the HO2S voltage displayed on the Tech 2 will be over 1 volt. Try disconnecting the affected HO2S with the key ON, engine OFF. If the displayed HO2S voltage changes from over 1000 mV to around 450 mV, replace the HO2S. Silicon contamination of the HO2S can also cause a high HO2S voltage to be indicated. This condition is indicated by a powdery deposit on the portion of the HO2S exposed to the exhaust stream. If contamination is noticed, replace the affected HO2S. D Open HO2S Signal Circuit or Faulty HO2SA poor connection or open in the HO2S signal circuit can
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. DTC P0132 failing during deceleration fuel cutoff mode operation may indicate a condition described in the Diagnostic Aids above. If the DTC P0132 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0132 HO2S Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage remain above the specified value?
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0132 until the DTC P0132 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0132 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 1. Ignition ON. At HO2S Bank 1 Sensor 1 connector (PCM side) use a DVM to measure voltages at the high and low signal terminals. 3-4 V Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Are the voltages in the specified range?
6E2171
DTC P0132 HO2S Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1 (Cont'd)

5 6
Repair short to voltage in signal circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition ON, engineOFF. 2. At Bank 1 HO2S 1 connector (PCM side) jumper both the HO2S high and low signal circuits (PCM side) to ground. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Is Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage below the specified value? 10 mV Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8 1. Disconnect the jumpers to ground from Bank 1 HO2S 1 PCM-side connector. 2. With the HO2S 1 connector disconnected, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Is Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage between the specified values? 425-475 mV Verify repair
Go to Step 8
6E2172
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0133 HO2S Slow Response Bank 1 Sensor 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) continuously monitors the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) activity for 90 seconds after closed loop has been enabled. During the monitoring period the PCM counts the number of times that a rich-to-lean and lean-to-rich response is indicated and adds the amount of time it took to complete all rich-to-lean transitions and lean-to-rich transitions. With this information, an average time for rich-to-lean and lean-to-rich transitions can be determined. If the average response time of either transition is too slow, a DTC P0133 will be set. A lean-to-rich transition is indicated when the HO2S voltage changes from less than 300 mV to greater than 600 mV. A rich-to-lean transition is indicated when the HO2S voltage changes from more than 600 mV to less than 300 mV. An HO2S that responds too slowly is likely to be faulty and should be replaced.
D Mass air flow is between 18 g/second and 42 g/second. D All above conditions are met for 3 seconds. D 90 seconds after closed loop has been enabled, Bank1 HO2S 1 average transition time between 300 mV and 600 mV is too slow. The lean-to-rich average transition response time was longer than 94 milliseconds or rich-to-lean average transition response time was longer than 105 milliseconds.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator Lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D Open loop fuel control will be in effect.


D No related DTCs. D Engine coolant temperature (ETC) is above 60C (140F). D Engine is operating in closed loop. D Engine has been running for at least 90 seconds. D Engine speed is between 1500 RPM and 3000 RPM. D Canister purge duty cycle is greater than 2%.
6E2173
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Bank 1 HO2S 1 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0133 cannot be duplicated, reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. Verifies that the fault is currently present. 3. HO2S transition time, ratio mean volts and switching DTCs set for multiple sensors indicate probable contamination. Before replacing the sensors, isolate and correct the source of the contamination to avoid damaging the replacement sensors.
6E2174
DTC P0133 HO2S Slow Response Bank 1 Sensor 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 NOTE: If any DTCs are set (expect P0153, P1133, P1134, P1153, and/or P1154), refer to those DTCs before proceeding with this diagnostic chart. 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Idle the engine at normal operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0133 until the DTC P0133 test runs. 5. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0133 failed this ignition? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 2
Refer to Diagnostic Aids Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6
3 4 5 6
Did the Tech 2 also indicate DTC P0153, P1133, P1134, P1153, and/or P1154 failed this ignition? Check for leaks at the pipe joints. Are the joints leaking? Tighten the Ubolt nuts at the leaking joints. Is the action complete? Check for gaskets that are damaged or improperly installed. Are there damaged or misaligned gaskets?
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 8
1. Replace damaged gaskets. 2. Align the connections. 3. Tighten the connections. Is the action complete? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 14 Check for loose exhaust flange connections. Are the flange connections loose? Tighten the stud nuts or bolts to specifications. Is the action complete? Check for burned or corroded exhaust pipes. Are the exhaust pipes burned or corroded? Replace the exhaust pipes, as required. Is the action complete? Check for leaks at the exhaust manifold. Are there leaks at the exhaust manifold? Tighten the bolts to specifications to replace the manifold if necessary. Is the action complete? Go to Step 2
8 9 10 11 12 13
6E2175
DTC P0133 HO2S Slow Response Bank 1 Sensor 1 (Cont'd)

14
Visually/physically inspect the following items: D Ensure that the Bank 1 HO2S 1 is securely installed. D Check for corrosion on terminals. D Check terminal tension (at Bank 1 HO2S 1 and at the PCM). D Check for damaged wiring. Was a problem found in any of the above areas? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 15 1. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 1. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a DVM at the PCM side of the HO2S 1 connector, measure the voltage between the high signal circuit and ground. Also measure the voltage between the low signal circuit and ground. Are both voltages in the specified range? 3-4 V Go to Step 16 Go to Step 19 1. With Bank 1 HO2S 1 disconnected, jumper the high and low (PCM side) signal circuits to ground. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Tech 2 indicate less than 10 mV and immediately return to about 450 mV when the jumper is removed?
15
16
Go to Step 21
Go to Step 22
17
Replace the affected heated oxygen sensors. NOTE: Before replacing sensors, the cause of the contamination must be determined and corrected. D D D Fuel contamination. Use of improper RTV sealant. Engine oil/coolant consumption. Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 20
Is the action complete? 18 19 20 21 22 Repair condition as necessary. Is the action complete? Check for faulty PCM connections or terminal damage. Is the action complete? Repair open, short or grounded signal circuit. Is the action complete? Replace Bank 1 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
6E2176
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0134 HO2S Circuit Insufficient Activity Bank 1 Sensor 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
D The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a bias voltage of about 450 mV between the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) high and low circuits. When measured with a 10 megaohm digital voltmeter, this may display as low as 320 mV. The oxygen sensor varies the voltage within a range of about 1000 mV when the exhaust is rich, down through about 10 mV when exhaust is lean. The PCM constantly monitors the HO2S signal during closed loop operation and compensates for a rich or lean condition by decreasing or increasing injector pulse width as necessary. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage remains at or near the 450 mV bias for an extended period of time, DTC P0134 will be set, indicating an open sensor signal or sensor low circuit. D Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for closed loop fuel control operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 to become active. D Oxygen sensor heaters are required by post-catalyst monitor sensors to maintain a sufficiently high temperature for accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further from the engine.
D The engine has been running for over 5 seconds. D Engine coolant temperature (ETC) is above 60C (140F). D Oxygen sensor heater has been determined to be functioning properly. D Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal voltage remains between 400 mV and 500 mV for a total of 77 seconds over a 90-second period of time.
Action Take When the DTC Sets



D No related DTCs. D Battery voltage is above 10 volts.
6E2177
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal-to-wire connection, and damaged harness. D Faulty HO2S heater or heater circuit With the ignition ON, engine OFF, after a cool down period, the HO2S 1 voltage displayed on the Tech 2 is normally 455-460 mV. A reading over 1000 mV indicates a signal line shorted to voltage. A reading under 5 mV indicates a signal line shorted to ground or signal lines shorted together. Disconnect the HO2S and connect a test light between the HO2S ignition feed and heater ground circuits. If the test light does not light for 2 seconds when the ignition is turned on, repair the open ignition feed or sensor ground circuit as necessary. If the test light lights and the HO2S signal and low circuits are OK, replace the HO2S.
D Intermittent test With the Ignition ON, monitor the HO2S signal voltage while moving the wiring harness and related connectors. If the fault is induced, the HO2S signal voltage will change. This may help isolate the location of the malfunction.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. If the DTC P0134 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent conditions is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0134 HO2S Circuit Insufficient Activity Bank 1 Sensor 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the engine above 1200 RPM for two minutes. Does the Tech 2 indicate Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage varying outside the specified values? 400-500 mV Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data and note parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0134 until the DTC P0134 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0134 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4 Verify repair
4 5
Check for a damaged harness. Was a problem found? Check for poor Bank 1 HO2S 1 high and low circuit terminal connections at the Bank 1 HO2S 1 harness connector and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Check for poor Bank 1 HO2S 1 high and low circuit terminal connections at the PCM and replace terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 7
6E2178
DTC P0134 HO2S Circuit Insufficient Activity Bank 1 Sensor 1 (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. With the PCM disconnected, check continuity of the Bank 1 HO2S 1 high circuit. 3. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 high circuit measures over 5.0 ohms, repair open or poor connection as necessary. Was a Bank 1 HO2S 1 high circuit problem found and corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 8
1. Ignition OFF. 2. With the PCM disconnected, check continuity of the Bank 1 HO2S 1 low circuit. 3. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 low circuit measures over 5 ohms, repair open or poor connection as necessary. Was a Bank 1 HO2S 1 low circuit problem found and corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 9
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 1 and jumper the HO2S high and low circuits (PCM side) to ground. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Is Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage in the specified range? 0-10 mV Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 11 Replace Bank 1 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
6E2179
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0135 HO2S Heater Circuit Bank 1 Sensor 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for closed loop fuel control operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by post-catalyst monitor sensors to maintain a sufficiently high temperature which allows accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further from the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) will run the heater test only after a cold start (determined by engine coolant and intake air temperature at the time of start-up) and only once during an ignition cycle. When the engine is started the PCM will monitor the HO2S voltage. When the HO2S voltage indicates a sufficiently active sensor, the PCM looks at how much time has elapsed since start-up. If the PCM determines that too much time was required for the Bank 1 HO2S 1 to become active, a DTC P0135 will set. The time it should take the HO2S to reach operating temperature is based on the accumulated amount of air that has passed through the MAF sensor and into the engine (more accumulated air flow = shorter time to HO2S activity).

D The engine has been running for over 120 seconds. D Heater signal is below 0.1A. D Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage does not change more than 150 mV from the bias voltage (between 400 mV and 500 mV) for a longer amount of time than it should. The maximum amount of time to come up to operating range is 150 seconds. This warm-up time depends on the engine coolant temperature at start-up and accumulate air flow since start-up.


6E2180

2. The HO2S should be allowed to cool before performing this test. If the HO2S heater is functioning, the signal voltage will gradually increase or decrease as the sensor element warms. If the heater is not functioning, the HO2S signal will remain near the 450 mV bias voltage. 4. Ensures that the ignition feed circuit to the HO2S is not open or shorted. The test light should be connected to a good chassis ground, in case the HO2S low or HO2S heater ground circuit is faulty. 5. Checks the HO2S heater ground circuit. 6. Checks or an open or shorted HO2S heater element. 10.An open HO2S signal or low circuit can cause the HO2S heater to appear faulty. Check these circuits before replacing the sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
DTC P0135 HO2S Heater Circuit Bank 1 Sensor 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 NOTE: If the engine has just been operating ,allow the engine to cool for at least 15 minutes before proceeding. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Connect a fused jumper at the fuel pump relay socket, between the battery positive at the relay and the relay wire that leads to the fuel pump and HO2S fuses. 3. Ignition OFF. 4. Install a Tech 2. 5. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 6. Monitor the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage for several minutes. Did the HO2S voltage go from bias voltage to above or below the specified values?
3 4
Inspect the fuse for the Bank 1 HO2S 1 ignition feed. Is the fuse open? 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Raise the vehicle. Disconnect the Bank 1 HO2S 1 electrical connector. Using a test light connected to a good ground (do not use Bank 1 HO2S 1 heater ground or Bank 1 HO2S 1 low), probe the ignition feed circuit at the Bank 1 HO2S 1 electrical connector (PCM harness side). Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
6E2181
DTC P0135 HO2S Heater Circuit Bank 1 Sensor 1 (Cont'd)

1. Allow the HO2S to cool for at least 15 minutes. 2. Using a DVM, measure the resistance between the Bank 1 HO2S 1 ignition feed and the Bank 1 HO2S 1 heater ground at the Bank 1 HO2S 1 pigtail. Is the HO2S heater resistance within the specified values? 3-6 ohms Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
Repair the open Bank 1 HO2S 1 ignition feed circuit to Bank 1 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Verify repair Repair the open Bank 1 HO2S 1 heater ground circuit to Bank 1 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Check for a poor connection at the Bank 1 HO2S 1 harness terminals. 2. If a poor connection is found, replace terminals. Was a poor connection found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 Check for a poor Bank 1 HO2S 1 high or low circuit terminal connection at the Bank 1 HO2S 1 harness connector and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 11 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the continuity of the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal circuit and the Bank 1 HO2S 1 low circuit. 3. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 high circuit or HO2S low circuit measures over 5 ohms, repair open or poor connection as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 12 Check for a poor Bank 1 HO2S 1 low circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 13 Check for a poor Bank 1 HO2S 1 high circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 14 Replace the Bank 1 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Locate and repair the short to ground in Bank 1 HO2S 1 ignition feed circuit and replace the fault fuse. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10
11
12
13
14 15
6E2182
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies bias voltage of about 450 mV between the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) signal high and signal low circuits. When measured with a 10 megaohm impedance digital voltmeter, this may display as low as 350 mV. The oxygen sensor varies the voltage within a range of about 1000 mV when exhaust is rich, down through about 10 mV when the exhaust is lean. The PCM constantly monitors the HO2S signal during closed loop operation and compensates for a rich or lean condition by decreasing or increasing injector pulse width as necessary. If the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains excessively low for an extended period of time, DTC P0137 will be set.
D Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains below 400 mV during power enrichment mode fuel control operation for up to 5 seconds.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected fault. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D D D D No related DTCs. Engine is operating in closed loop. Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). Closed loop commanded air/fuel ratio is between 14.5 and 14.8. D Throttle angle is between 3% and 19%. D Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains below 22 mV during normal closed loop operation for a total of 106 seconds over a 125-second period of time. OR
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Heated oxygen sensor wiring The sensor pigtail may be mispositioned and contacting the exhaust system. D Poor PCM to engine grounds. D Fuel pressure A condition which causes a lean exhaust can cause DTC P0137 to set. The system will go lean if pressure is too low. The PCM can

compensate for some decrease. However, if fuel pressure is too low, a DTC P0137 may be set. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. Lean injector(s) Perform Injector Balance Test. Vacuum leaks Check for disconnected or damaged vacuum hoses and for vacuum leaks at the intake manifold, throttle body, EGR system, and PCV system. Exhaust leaks An exhaust leak may cause outside air to be pulled into the exhaust gas stream past the HO2S, causing the DTC P0137 to set. Check for exhaust leaks near the Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor. MAF sensor The system can go lean if the MAF sensor signal indicates an engine airflow measurement that is not correct. Disconnect the MAF sensor to see if the lean condition is corrected. If so, replace the MAF sensor. Fuel contamination Water, even in small amounts, can be delivered to the fuel injectors. The water can cause a lean exhaust to be indicated. Excessive
6E2183
D D D
alcohol in the fuel can also cause this condition. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis for procedure to check for fuel contamination. D If none of the above conditions are present, replace the affected HO2S.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. DTC P0137 failing during operation may indicate a condition described in the Diagnostic Aids above. If the DTC0137 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within the parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage. Does the Bank 1 HO2S voltage remain below the specified value? 22 mV Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data and note parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0137 until the DTC P0137 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0137 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
1. Turn ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check the Bank 1 HO2S 2 high and low signal circuits for a short to ground or a short to the heater ground circuit. Were Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuits shorted? Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 6 Repair the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Leave the PCM and HO2S 2 disconnected. 3. Check for continuity between the high and low signal circuits. Was there continuity between the high and low circuits? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
5 6
6E2184

7 8
Repair the short between the high and low circuits. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Reconnect the PCM, leave HO2S 2 disconnected. 3. Ignition ON. Does the Tech 2 indicate Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage near the specified value? 425-475 mV Verify repair
Go to Step 9
6E2185
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies bias voltage of about 450 mV between the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) signal high and signal low circuits. When measured with a 10 megaohm digital voltmeter, this may display as low as 320 mV. The oxygen sensor varies the voltage within a range of about 1000 mV when exhaust is rich, down through about 10 mV when the exhaust is lean. The PCM constantly monitors the HO2S signal during closed loop operation and compensates for a rich or lean condition by decreasing or increasing injector pulse width as necessary. If the Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage remains excessively high for an extended period of time, DTC P0138 will be set.
D Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains above 500 mV during deceleration fuel cutoff mode operation for up to 3 seconds.



D No related DTCs. D Engine is operating in closed loop. D Closed loop commanded air/fuel ratio is between 14.5 and 14.8. D Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). D Throttle angle is between 3% and 19%. D Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains above 952 mV during normal closed loop operation for a total of 106 seconds over a 125-second period of time. OR
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Fuel pressure An excessively rich fuel mixture can cause a DTC P0138 to be set. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Rich injector(s) Perform Injector Balance Test. D Leaking injector Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis.
6E2186

D Open HO2S Signal Circuit of Faulty HO2S A poor connection or open in the HO2S signal circuit can cause the DTC to set during deceleration fuel mode. An HO2S which is faulty and not allowing a full voltage swing between the rich and lean thresholds can also cause this condition. Operate the vehicle while monitoring the HO2S voltage with a Tech 2. If the HO2S voltage is limited within a range between 300 mV to 600 mV, check the HO2S signal and wiring and associated terminal connections. D If none of the above conditions are present, replace the affected HO2S.
D Evaporative emissions (EVAP) canister purge Check for fuel saturation. If full of fuel, check the canister control and hoses. Refer to Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System. D MAF sensor The system can go rich if the MAF sensor signal indicates an engine airflow measurement that is not correct. Disconnect the MAF sensor to see if the rich condition is corrected. If so, replace the MAF sensor. D Check for a leak in fuel pressure regulator diaphragm by checking the vacuum line to the regulator for the presence of fuel. There should be no fuel in the vacuum line. D TP sensor An intermittent TP sensor output will cause the system to go rich, due to a false indication of the engine accelerating. D Shorted Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) If the HO2S is internally shorted the HO2S voltage displayed on the Tech 2 will be over 1 volt. Try disconnecting the affected HO2S with the key ON, engine OFF. If the displayed HO2S voltage changes from over 1000 mV to around 450 mV, replace the HO2S. Silicon contamination of the HO2S can also cause a high HO2S voltage to be indicated. This condition is indicated by a powdery deposit on the portion of the HO2S exposed to the exhaust stream. If contamination is noticed, replace the affected HO2S.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. DTC P0138 being set during deceleration fuel mode operation may indicate a condition described in the Diagnostic Aids above. If the DTC P0138 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within the parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage. Does the Bank 1 HO2S voltage remain above the specified value?
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0138 until the DTC P0138 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0138 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 1. Ignition ON. At the HO2S Bank 1 Sensor 2 connector (PCM side), use a DVM to measure voltages at the high and low signal terminals. 3-4 V Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Are the voltages above the specified range?
6E2187

5 6
Repair short to voltage in the signal circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition ON, engineOFF. 2. At Bank 1 HO2S 2 connector (PCM side) jumper both the HO2S high and low signal circuits (PCM side) to ground. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage. Is Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage below the specified value? 10 mV Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8 1. Disconnect the jumpers to ground from Bank 1 HO2S 2 PCMside connector. 2. With the HO2S 2 connector disconnected, monitor BANK 1 HO2S 2 voltage. Is the Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage between the specified values? 425-475 mV Verify repair
Go to Step 8
6E2188
Diagnostic Trouble Code(DTC) P0140 HO2S Circuit Insufficient Activity Bank 1 Sensor 2
060R200054
Circuit Description
To control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a three-way catalytic converter is used. The catalyst within the converter promotes a chemical reaction which oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas, converting them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx, converting it to nitrogen. The powertrain control module (PCM) has the ability to monitor this process using the Bank 1 HO2S 1 and the Bank 1 HO2S 2 heated oxygen sensors. The Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the three-way catalytic converter. The Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst; this in turn indicates the catalysts ability to convert exhaust gases efficiently. If catalyst is operating efficiently, the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal will be far more active than that produced by the Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor. If the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains between 400 mV and 500 mV for an extended period of time, DTC P0140 will be set. Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for closed loop fuel control operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by post-catalyst monitor sensors to
maintain a sufficiently high temperature for accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further from the engine.

D D D D D D No related DTCs. Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). The engine has been running for over 5 seconds. Oxygen sensor heater is functioning properly. Engine is operating in closed loop Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains between 426 mV and 474 mV for a total of 106 seconds over a 125-second period of time.

Conditions for Cleaning the MIL/DTC

6E2189
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal-to-wire connection, and damaged harness. D Faulty HO2S heater or heater circuitWith the ignitionON, engine OFF, the HO2S voltage displayed on a Tech 2 should gradually drop to below 250 mV. If not, disconnect the HO2S and connect a test light between the HO2S ignition feed and heater ground circuits. If the test light does not light, repair the open ignition feed or sensor ground circuit as necessary. If the test light lights and the HO2S signal and low circuits are OK, replace the HO2S.
D Intermittent testWith the ignition ON, monitor the HO2S signal voltage while moving the wiring harness and related connectors. If the fault is induced, the HO2S signal voltage will change. This may help isolate the location of the malfunction.
Test Description
Number (s) below refer to the step number (s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. If the DTC P0140 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0140 HO2S Circuit Insufficient Activity BANK 1 SENSOR 2

Go to Step 4
4 5
Check for a damaged harness. Was a problem found? Check for poor Bank 1 HO2S 2 high and low circuit terminal connections at the Bank 1 HO2S 2 harness connector and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Check for poor Bank 1 HO2S 2 high and low circuit terminal connections at the PCM and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Ignition OFF. 2. With the PCM disconnected, check continuity of the Bank 1 HO2S 2 high circuit. 3. If the Bank 1 HO2S 2 high circuit measures over 5.0 ohms, repair open or poor connection as necessary. Was a Bank 1 HO2S 2 high circuit problem found and corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 8
6E2190
DTC P0140 HO2S Circuit Insufficient Activity BANK 1 SENSOR 2 (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. With the PCM disconnected, check continuity of the Bank 1 HO2S 2 high circuit. 3. If the Bank 1 HO2S 2 low circuit measures over 5.0 ohms, repair open or poor connection as necessary. Was a Bank 1 HO2S 2 low circuit problem found and corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 9
1. Ignition ON, engineOFF. 2. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 2 and jumper the HO2S high and low circuits (PCM side) to ground. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage. Is Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage in the specified range? 0-10 mV Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 11 Replace Bank 1 HO2S 2. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
6E2191
060R200054
Circuit Description
Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for closed loop fuel control operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by post-catalyst monitor sensors to maintain a sufficiently high temperature which allows accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further from the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) will run the heater test only after a cold start (determined by engine coolant and intake air temperature at the time of start-up) and only once during an ignition cycle. When the engine is started the PCM will monitor the HO2S voltage. When the Bank HO2S voltage indicates a sufficiently active sensor, the PCM looks at how much time has elapsed since start-up. If the PCM determines that too much time was required for the Bank 1 HO2S 2 to become active, a DTC P0141 will set. The time it should take the HO2S to reach operating temperature is based on the total amount of air that has passed through the MAF sensor and into the engine (more total airflow = shorter time to HO2S activity).
D Ignition voltage is between 11 volts and 18 volts. D Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage does not change more than 150 mV from the bias voltage (between 400 mV500 mV) for a longer amount of time than it should. The maximum amount of time to come up to operating range is 120 seconds. This warm-up time depends on the engine coolant temperature at start-up and accumulated air flow since start-up.



D No related DTCs. D The engine has been running for over 120 seconds.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions:
6E2192

2. The HO2S should be allowed to cool before performing this test. If the HO2S heater is functioning, the signal voltage will gradually increase or decrease as the sensor element warms. If the heater is not functioning, the HO2S signal will remain near the 450 mV bias voltage. 4. This ensures that the ignition feed circuit to the HO2S is not open or shorted. The test light should be connected to a good chassis ground, in case the HO2S low or HO2S heater ground circuit is faulty. 5. This checks the HO2S heater ground circuit. 6. This checks for an open or shorted HO2S heater element. 11.An open HO2S signal or low circuit can cause the HO2S heater to appear faulty. Check these circuits before replacing the sensor.
D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 NOTE: If the engine has just been operating, allow the engine to cool for at least 15 minutes before proceeding. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Connect a fused jumper at the fuel pump relay socket, between the battery positive at the relay and the relay wire that leads to the fuel pump and HO2S fuses. 3. Ignition OFF. 4. Install a Tech 2. 5. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 6. Monitor the Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage for several minutes. Did the HO2S voltage go from bias voltage to above or below the specified values?
3 4
Inspect the fuse for Bank 1 HO2S 2 ignition feed. Is the fuse open? 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Raise the vehicle. Disconnect the Bank 1 HO2S 2 electrical connector. Using a test light connected to a good ground (do not use Bank 1 HO2S 2 heater ground or Bank 1 HO2S 2 low), probe the ignition feed circuit at the Bank 1 HO2S 2 electrical connector (PCM harness side). Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
6E2193

1. Allow the HO2S to cool for at least 15 minutes. 2. Using a DVM, measure the resistance between the Bank 1 HO2S 2 ignition feed and the Bank 1 HO2S 2 heater ground at the Bank 1 HO2S 2 pigtail. Is the HO2S resistance within the specified values? 3-6 ohms Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Repair the open Bank 1 HO2S 2 ignition feed circuit to Bank 1 HO2S 2. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Repair the open Bank 1 HO2S 2 heater ground circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Check for a poor connection at the Bank 1 HO2S 2 harness terminals. 2. If a poor connection is found, replace the terminals. Was a poor connection found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the continuity of the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuit and the Bank 1 HO2S 2 low circuit. 3. If the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuit or the HO2S low circuit measures over 5 ohms, repair the open or poor connection as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the continuity of the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal circuit and the Bank 1 HO2S 1 low circuit. 3. If the Bank 1 HO2S 1 high circuit or the HO2S low circuit measures over 5 ohms, repair the open or poor connection as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 12 Check for a poor Bank 1 HO2S 2 low circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 13 Check for a poor Bank 1 HO2S 2 high circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 14 Replace Bank 1 HO2S 2. Is the action complete? Locate and repair the short to ground in Bank 1 HO2S 2 ignition feed circuit and replace the faulty fuse. Is the action complete? Verify repair
8 9
10
11
12
13
14 15
6E2194
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a bias voltage of about 450 mV between the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) signal high and signal low circuits. When measured with a 10 megaohm digital voltmeter, this may display as low as 320 mV. The oxygen sensor varies the voltage within a range of about 1000 mV when the exhaust is rich, down through about 10 mV when exhaust is lean. The PCM constantly monitors the HO2S signal during closed loop operation and compensates for a rich or lean condition by decreasing or increasing injector pulse width as necessary. If the Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage remains excessively low for an extended period of time, DTC P0151 will be set.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D Open loop fuel control will be in effect.


D D D D No related DTCs. The engine is operating in closed loop. Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). Closed loop commanded air/fuel ratio is between 14.5 and 14.8. D Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal voltage remains below 22 mV during normal closed loop operation for a total of 77 seconds over a 90-second period of time.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Heated oxygen sensor wiring The sensor pigtail may be mispositioned and contacting the exhaust system. D Poor PCM to engine block grounds. D Fuel pressure The system will go lean if pressure is too low. The PCM can compensate for some decrease. However, if fuel pressure is too low, a DTC P0151 may be set. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Lean injector(s) Perform Injector Balance Test. D Vacuum leaks Check for disconnected or damaged vacuum hoses and for vacuum leaks at the intake manifold, throttle body, EGR system, and PCV system.


D Exhaust leaks An exhaust leak may cause outside air to be pulled into the exhaust gas stream past the HO2S, causing the system to appear lean. Check for exhaust leaks that may cause a false lean condition to be indicated. D MAF sensor The system can go lean if the MAF sensor signal indicates an engine airflow measurement that is not correct. Disconnect the MAF sensor to see if the lean condition is corrected. If so, replace the MAF sensor. D Fuel contamination Water, even in small amounts, can be delivered to the fuel injectors. The water can cause a lean exhaust to be indicated. Excessive alcohol in the fuel can also cause this condition. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis for the procedure to check for fuel contamination.
6E2195
D If none of the above conditions are present, replace the affected HO2S.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. DTC P0151 failing during operation may indicate a condition described in the Diagnostic Aids above. If the DTC P0151 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicate. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within the parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage remain below the specified value? 22 mV Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data and note parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0151 until the DTC P0151 test runs. 4. Note test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0151 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
1. Turn ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check the Bank 2 HO2S 1 high and low signal circuits for a short to ground or a short to the heater ground circuit. Were Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal circuits shorted? Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 6 Repair the Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Leave the PCM and HO2S 1 disconnected. 3. Check for continuity between the high and low signal circuits. Was there continuity between the high and low circuits? Go to Step 7 Verify repair Go to Step 8 Repair the short between the high and low circuits. Is the action complete?
5 6
6E2196

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Reconnect the PCM, leave HO2S disconnected. 3. Ignition ON. Does the Tech 2 indicate Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage near the specified value? 425-475 mV
Go to Step 9
6E2197
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a bias voltage of about 450 mV between the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) signal high and signal low circuits. When measured with a 10 megaohm digital voltmeter, this may display as low as 320 mV. The oxygen sensor varies the voltage within a range of about 1000 mV when the exhaust is rich, down through about 10 mV when exhaust is lean. The PCM constantly monitors the HO2S signal during closed loop operation and compensates for a rich or lean condition by decreasing or increasing the injector pulse width as necessary. If the Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage remains excessively high for an extended period of time, DTC P0152 will be set.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected fault D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D Open loop fuel control will be in effect.


D No related DTCs. D The engine is operating in closed loop. D The engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). D Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal voltage remains above 952 mV during normal closed loop operation for a total of 77 seconds over a 90-second period. OR D Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal voltage remains above 500 mV during deceleration fuel cutoff mode operation for up to 3 seconds.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Fuel pressure The system will go rich if pressure is too high. The PCM can compensate for some increase. However, if fuel pressure is too high, a DTC P0152 may be set. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Rich injector(s) Perform Injector Balance Test. D Leaking injector Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Evaporative emissions (EVAP) system Check the canister for fuel saturation. If the canister is full of fuel,
6E2198

cause the DTC to set during deceleration fuel mode. An HO2S which is faulty and not allowing a full voltage switch between the rich and lean thresholds can also cause the condition. Operate the vehicle while monitoring the HO2S voltage with a Tech 2. If the HO2S is limited within a range between 300 mV to 600 mV, check the HO2S signal circuit wiring and associated terminal connections. D If none of the above conditions are present, replace the affected HO2S.
D D D
check EVAP control system components and hoses. Refer to Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System. MAF sensor The system can go rich if the MAF sensor signal indicates an engine airflow measurement that is not correct. Disconnect the MAF sensor to see if rich condition is corrected. If so, replace MAF sensor. Check for leaking fuel pressure regulator diaphragm by checking vacuum line to regulator for the presence of fuel. There should be no fuel in the vacuum line. TP sensor An intermittent TP sensor output will cause the system to go rich, due to a false indication of the engine accelerating. Shorted Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) If the HO2S is internally shorted, the HO2S voltage displayed on the Tech 2 will be over 1 volt. Try disconnecting the affected HO2S with the key ON, engine OFF. If the displayed HO2S voltage changes from over 1000 mV to around 450 mV, replace the HO2S. Silicon contamination of the HO2S can cause a high HO2S voltage to be indicated. This condition is indicated by powdery deposit on the portion of the HO2S exposed to the exhaust stream. If contamination is noticed, replace the affected HO2S. Open HO2S Signal Circuit of Faulty HO2S A poor connection or open in the HO2S signal circuit can
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. DTC P0152 failing during deceleration fuel cutoff mode operation may indicate a condition described in the Diagnostic Aids above. If the DTC P0152 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Engine is at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within the parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage remain above the specified value?
952 mV (500 mV in deceleration fuel cut-off mode)
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0152 until the DTC P0152 test runs. 5. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0152 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect Bank 2 HO2S 1. Ignition ON. At HO2S Bank 2 Sensor 1 connector (PCM side) use a DVM to measure voltages at the high and low signal terminals. 3-4 V Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Are the voltages in the specified range?
6E2199

5 6
Repair short to voltage in signal circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition ON, engineOFF. 2. At Bank 2 HO2S 1 connector (PCM side) jumper both the HO2S high and low signal circuits (PCM side) to ground. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage. Is Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage below the specified value? 10 mV Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8 1. Disconnect the jumpers to ground from Bank 2 HO2S 1 PCM-side connector. 2. With the HO2S 1 connector disconnected, monitor Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage. Is the Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage between the specified values? 425-475 mV Verify repair
Go to Step 8
6E2200
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0153 HO2S Slow Response Bank 2 Sensor 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) continuously monitors the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) activity for 90 seconds after closed loop has been enabled. During the monitoring period the PCM counts the number of times that a rich-to-lean and lean-to-rich response is indicated and adds the amount of time it took to complete all rich-to-lean transitions and lean-to-rich transitions. With this information, an average time for rich-to-lean and lean-to-rich transitions can be determined. If the average response time of either transition is too slow, a DTC P0153 will be set. A lean-to-rich transition is indicated when the HO2S voltage changes from less than 300 mV to greater than 600 mV. A rich-to-lean transition is indicated when the HO2S voltage changes from more than 600 mV to less than 300 mV. An HO2S that responds too slowly is likely to be faulty and should be replaced.
D Mass air flow is between 18 g/second and 42 g/second. D All above conditions are met for 3 seconds. D 90 seconds after closed loop has been enabled, Bank 2 HO2S 1 average transition time between 300 mV and 600 mV is too slow. The lean-to-rich average transition response time was longer than 94 milliseconds or the rich-to-lean average transition response time was longer than 105 milliseconds.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. D Open loop fuel control will be in effect.


D No related DTCs. D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) is above 60C (140F). D The engine is operating in closed loop. D Engine has been running for over 60 seconds. D Canister purge duty cycle is above 2%. D Engine speed is between 1500 RPM and 3000 RPM.
6E2201
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Bank 2 HO2S 1 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. Verifies that the fault is currently present. 3. HO2S transition time, ratio mean volts and switching DTCs set for multiple sensors indicate probable contamination. Before replacing the sensors, isolate and correct the source of the contamination to avoid damaging the replacement sensors.
6E2202
DTC P0153 HO2S Slow Response Bank 2 Sensor 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 NOTE: If any DTCs are set, (except P0133, P1133, P1134, P1153, and/or P1154), refer to those DTCs before proceeding with this diagnostic chart. 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Idle the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0153 until the DTC P0153 test runs. 5. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0153 failed this ignition? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 2
3 4 5 6
Did the Tech 2 also indicate DTC P0153, P1133, P1134, P1153, and/or P1154 test failed this ignition? Check for leaks at the pipe joints. Are the joints leaking? Tighten the U-bolt nuts at the leaking joint. Is your action complete? Check for gaskets that are damage or improperly installed. Are there damaged or misaligned gaskets?
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 8
1. Replace the damaged gaskets. 2. Align the connections. 3. Tighten the connections. Is your action complete? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 14 Check for loose exhaust flange connections. Are the flange connections loose? Tighten the stud nuts or bolts to specifications. Is your action complete? Check for burned or corroded exhaust pipes. Are the exhaust pipes burned or corroded? Replace the exhaust pipes, as required. Is your action complete? Check for leaks at the exhaust manifold. Are there leaks at the exhaust manifold? Tighten the bolts to specifications or replace the manifold if necessary. Is your action complete? Go to Step 2
8 9 10 11 12 13
6E2203
DTC P0153 HO2S Slow Response Bank 2 Sensor 1 (Cont'd)

14
1. Visually/physically inspect the following items: D Ensure that the Bank 2 HO2S 1 is securely installed. D Check for corrosion on terminals. D Check terminal tension (at Bank 2 HO2S 1 and at the PCM). D Check for damaged wiring. Was a problem found in any of the above areas? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 15 1. Disconnect Bank 2 HO2S 1. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a DVM at the PCM side of the HO2S 1 connector, measure the voltage between the high signal circuit and ground. Are both voltages in the specified range? 3-4 V Go to Step 16 Go to Step 19 1. With Bank 2 HO2S 1 disconnected, jumper the high and low (PCM side) signal circuits to ground. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor the Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Tech 2 indicate less than 10 mV and immediately return to about 450 mV when the jumper is removed?
15
16
Go to Step 21
Go to Step 22
17
Replace the affected heated oxygen sensors. NOTE: Before replacing the sensors, the cause of the contamination must be determined and corrected. D D D Fuel contamination. Use of improper RV sealant. Engine oil/coolant consumption. Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 20
Is the action complete? 18 19 20 21 22 Repair condition as necessary. Is the action complete? Check for faulty PCM connections or terminal damage. Is the action complete? Repair open, short or grounded signal circuit. Is the action complete? Replace Bank 2 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
6E2204
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a bias voltage of about 450 mV between the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) high and low circuits. When measured with a 10 megaohm digital voltmeter, this may display as low as 320 mV. The oxygen sensor varies the voltage within a range of about 1000 mV when the exhaust is rich, down through about 10 mV when exhaust is lean. The PCM constantly monitors the HO2S signal during closed loop operation and compensates for a rich or lean condition by decreasing or increasing injector pulse width as necessary. If the Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage remains at or near the 450 mV bias for an extended period of time, DTC P0154 will be set, indicating an open sensor signal or sensor low circuit. Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for closed loop fuel control operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by post-catalyst monitor sensors to maintain a sufficiently high temperature for accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further from the engine.
D The engine has been running for over 5 seconds. D Oxygen sensor heater is functioning properly. D Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal voltage remains between 400 mV and 500 mV for a total of 77 seconds over a 90-second period of time.


Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for backed-out terminals,

D No related DTCs. D Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F).

improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal-to-wire-connection, and damaged harness. D Faulty HO2S heater or heater circuit With the ignition ON, engine OFF, the HO2S 1 voltage displayed on the Tech 2 is normally 455-460 mV. A reading over 1000 mV indicates a signal line shorted to voltage. A reading under 5 mV indicates a signal line shorted to ground or signal lines shorted together. If not, disconnect the HO2S and connect a test light between the HO2S ignition feed and heater ground circuits. If the test light does not light for 2 seconds when the ignition is turned on, repair the open ignition feed or sensor ground circuit as necessary. If the test light lights and the HO2S signal and low circuits are OK, replace the HO2S. D Intermittent test With the ignition ON, monitor the HO2S signal voltage while moving the wiring harness
6E2205
and related connectors. If the fault is induced, the HO2S signal voltage will change. This may help isolate the location of the malfunction.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. If the DTC P0154 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

Go to Step 4
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data and note parameters. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0154 until the DTC P0154 test runs. 5. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0154 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4 Verify repair
4 5
Check for a damaged harness. Was a problem found? Check for a poor Bank 2 HO2S 1 high and low circuit terminal connections at the Bank 2 HO2S 1 harness connector and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Check for a poor Bank 2 HO2S 1 high and low circuit terminal connections at the PCM and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 7
6E2206

1. Ignition OFF. 2. With the PCM disconnected, check continuity of the Bank 2 HO2S 1 high circuit. 3. If the Bank 2 HO2S 1 high circuit measures over 5.0 ohms, repair open or poor connection as necessary. Was a Bank 2 HO2S 1 high circuit problem found and corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 8
1. Ignition OFF. 2. With the PCM disconnected, check continuity of the Bank 2 HO2S 1 low circuit. 3. If the Bank 2 HO2S 1 low circuit measures over 5.0 ohms, repair open or poor connection as necessary. Was a Bank 2 HO2S 1 low circuit problem found and corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 9
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Disconnect Bank 2 HO2S 1 and jumper the HO2S high and low circuits (PCM side) to ground. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage. Is the Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage in the specified range? 0-10 mV Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 11 Replace Bank 2 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
6E2207
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0155 HO2S Heater Circuit Open Bank 2 Sensor 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for closed loop fuel control operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by post-catalyst monitor sensors to maintain a sufficiently high temperature which allows accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further from the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) will run the heater test only after a cold start (determined by engine coolant and intake air temperature at the time of start-up) and only once during an ignition cycle. When the engine is started the PCM will monitor the HO2S voltage. When the Bank HO2S voltage indicates a sufficiently active sensor, the PCM looks at how much time has elapsed since start-up. If the PCM determines that too much time was required for the Bank 2 HO2S 1 to become active, a DTC P0155 will set. The time it should take the HO2S to reach operating temperature is based on the total amount of air that has passed through the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and into the engine (more total air flow = shorter time to HO2S activity).
D Ignition voltage is between 11 volts and 18 volts. D Heater signal is below 0.1A. D Bank 1 HO2S 2 voltage does not change more than 150 mV from the bias voltage (between 400 mV-500 mV) for a longer amount of time than it should. The maximum amount of time to come up to operating range is 120 seconds. This warm-up time depends on the engine coolant temperature at start-up and accumulated air flow since start-up.


D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0155 will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P0155 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

6E2208

2. The HO2S should be allowed to cool before performing this test. If the HO2S heater is functioning, the signal voltage will gradually increase or decrease as the sensor element warms. If the heater is not functioning, the HO2S signal will remain near the 450 mV bias voltage. 4. Ensures that the ignition feed circuit to the HO2S is not open or shorted. The test light should be connected to a good chassis ground, in case the HO2S low or HO2S heater ground circuit is faulty. 5. Checks the HO2S heater ground circuit. 6. Checks for an open or shorted HO2S heater element. 10.An open HO2S signal or low circuit can cause the HO2S heater to appear faulty. Check these circuits before replacing the sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
DTC P0155 HO2S Heater Circuit Open Bank 2 Sensor 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 NOTE: If the engine has just been operating, allow the engine to cool for at least 15 minutes before proceeding. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Connect a fused jumper at the fuel pump relay socket, between the battery positive at the relay and the relay wire that leads to the fuel pump and HO2S fuses. 3. Ignition OFF. 4. Install a Tech 2. 5. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 6. Monitor the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage for several minutes. Did the HO2S voltage go from bias voltage to above or below the specified value?
3 4
Inspect the fuse for the Bank 2 HO2S 1 ignition feed. Is the fuse open? 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Raise the vehicle. Disconnect the Bank 2 HO2S 1 electrical connector. Using a test light connected to a known good ground (do not use Bank 2 HO2S 1 heater ground or Bank 2 HO2S 1 low), probe the ignition feed circuit at the Bank 2 HO2S 1 electrical connector (PCM harness side). Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7
Does the test light illuminate? 5 Connect the test light between Bank 2 HO2S 1 ignition feed and Bank 2 HO2S 1 heater ground. Does the test light illuminate?
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
6E2209
DTC P0155 HO2S Heater Circuit Open Bank 2 Sensor 1 (Cont'd)

1. Allow the HO2S to cool for at least 15 minutes. 2. Using a DVM, measure resistance between the Bank 2 HO2S 1 ignition feed and the Bank 2 HO2S 1 heater ground at the Bank 2 HO2S 1 pigtail. Is the HO2S resistance within the specified values? 3-6 ohms Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Repair the open Bank 2 HO2S 1 ignition feed circuit to Bank 2 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Repair the open Bank 2 HO2S 1 heater ground circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Check for a poor connection at the Bank 2 HO2S 1 harness terminals. 2. If a poor connection is found, replace terminals. Was a poor connection found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 Check for a poor Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal or low circuit terminal connection at the Bank 2 HO2S 1 harness connector and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 11 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the continuity of the Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal circuit and the Bank 2 HO2S 1 low circuit. 3. If the Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal circuit or HO2S low circuit measures over 5 ohms, repair open or poor connection as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 12 Check for a poor Bank 2 HO2S 1 low circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 13 Check for a poor Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 14 Replace Bank 2 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Locate and repair short to ground in Bank 2 HO2S 1 ignition feed circuit and replace the faulty fuse. Is the action complete? Verify repair
8 9
10
11
12
13
14 15
6E2210
060R200054
Circuit Description
To control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a three-way catalytic converter is used. The catalyst within the converter promotes a chemical reaction which oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas, converting them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx, converting it to nitrogen. The powertrain control module (PCM) has the ability to monitor this process using the Bank 2 HO2S 1 and the Bank 2 HO2S 2 heated oxygen sensors. The Bank 2 HO2S 1 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the three-way catalytic converter. The Bank 2 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst; this in turn indicates the catalysts ability to convert exhaust gases efficiently. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal will be far more active than that produced by the Bank 2 HO2S 2 sensor. If the Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains excessively low for an extended period of time, DTC P0157 will be set.
D Closed loop commanded air/fuel ratio is between 14.5 and 14.8 D Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains below 22 mV during normal closed loop operation for a total of 106 seconds over a 125-second period of time. OR D Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains below 400 mV during power enrichment mode fuel control operation for up to 5 seconds.



D No related DTCs. D The engine is operating in closed loop. D Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F).
6E2211
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Heated oxygen sensor wiring The sensor pigtail may be mispositioned and contacting the exhaust system. D Poor PCM to engine grounds. D Fuel pressure A condition which causes a lean exhaust can cause DTC P0157 to set. The system will go lean if pressure is too low. The PCM can compensate for some decrease. However, if fuel pressure is too low, a DTC P0157 may be set. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Lean injector(s) Perform Injector Balance Test. D Vacuum leaks Check for disconnected or damaged vacuum hoses and for vacuum leaks at the intake manifold, throttle body, EGR system, and PCV system. D Exhaust leaks An exhaust leak may cause outside air to be pulled into the exhaust gas stream past the HO2S, causing the DTC P0157 to set. Check for exhaust leaks near the Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor. D MAF sensor The system can go lean if the MAF sensor signal indicates an engine airflow
measurement that is not correct. Disconnect the MAF sensor to see if the condition is corrected. If so, replace the MAF sensor. D Fuel contamination Water, even in small amounts, can be delivered to the fuel injectors. The water can cause a lean exhaust to be indicated. Excessive alcohol in the fuel can also cause this condition. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis for the procedure to check for fuel contamination. D If none of above conditions are present, replace the affected HO2S 2.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. DTC P0157 failing during operation may indicate a condition described in the Diagnostic Aids above. If the DTC P0157 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated.

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within the parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage. Does the Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage remain below the specified value? 22 mV Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data and note parameters. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0157 until the DTC P0157 test runs. 5. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0157 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM. 3. Check the Bank 2 HO2S 2 high and low signal circuits for a short to ground or a short to the heater ground circuit. Were Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal circuits shorted? Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 6 Repair the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuit. Is the action complete?
6E2212

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Leave the PCM and HO2S 2 disconnected. 3. Check for continuity between the high and low signal circuits. Was there continuity between the high and low circuits? Go to Step 7 Verify repair Go to Step 8 Repair the short between the high and low circuits. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Reconnect the PCM, leave HO2S 2 disconnected. 3. Ignition ON. Does the Tech 2 indicate Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage near the specified value? 425-475 mV
7 8
Go to Step 9
Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2213
060R200054
Circuit Description
To control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a three-way catalytic converter is used. The catalyst within the converter promotes a chemical reaction which oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas, converting them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx, converting it to nitrogen. The powertrain control module (PCM) has the ability to monitor this process using the Bank 2 HO2S 1 and the Bank 2 HO2S 2 heated oxygen sensors. The Bank 2 HO2S 1 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the three-way catalytic converter. The Bank 2 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst; this in turn indicates the catalysts ability to convert exhaust gases efficiently. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal will be far more active than that produced by the Bank 2 HO2S 2 sensor. If the Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains excessively high for an extended period of time, DTC P0158 will be set.
D Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). D Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains above 952 mV during normal closed loop operation for a total of 106 seconds over a 125-second period. OR D Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains above 500 mV during deceleration fuel cutoff mode operation for up to 3 seconds.



D No related DTCs. D Engine is operating in closed loop. D Closed loop commanded air/fuel ratio is between 14.5 and 14.8.
6E2214

indicated by a powdery deposit on the portion of the HO2S exposed to the exhaust stream. If contamination is noticed, replace the affected HO2S. D Open HO2S signal or low circuit, or faulty HO2S A poor connection or open in the HO2S signal or low circuit can cause the DTC to set during deceleration fuel cutoff mode operation. An HO2S which is faulty and does not allow full voltage swing between the rich and lean thresholds can also cause this condition. Operate the vehicle while monitoring the HO2S voltage with a Tech 2. If the HO2S voltage is limited within a range between 300 mV to 600 mV, check the HO2S signal and low circuit wiring and associated terminal connections. If the wiring and connections are OK, replace the HO2S. D If none of above conditions are present, replace the affected HO2S.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Fuel pressure An excessively rich fuel mixture can cause a DTC P0158 to be set. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Rich injector(s) Perform Injector Balance Test. D Leaking injector Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. D Evaporative emissions (EVAP) canister purge Check for fuel saturation. If full of fuel, check canister control and hoses. Refer to Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System. D MAF sensor The system can go rich if the MAF sensor signal indicates an engine airflow measurement that is not correct. Disconnect the MAF sensor to see if a rich condition is corrected. If so, replace the MAF sensor. D Check for a leaking fuel pressure regulator diaphragm by checking the vacuum line to the regulator for the presence of fuel. There should be no fuel in the vacuum line. D TP sensor An intermittent TP sensor output will cause the system to go rich, due to a false indication of the engine accelerating. D Shorted Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) If the HO2S is internally shorted, the HO2S voltage displayed on the Tech 2 will be over 1 volt. Try disconnecting the affected HO2S with the key ON, engine OFF. If the displayed HO2S voltage changes from over 1000 mV to around 450 mV, replace the HO2S. Silicon contamination of the HO2S can also cause a high HO2S voltage to be indicated. This condition is
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. DTC P0158 being set during deceleration fuel cutoff mode operation may indicate a condition described in the Diagnostic Aids above. If the DTC P0158 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at operating temperature. 3. Operate the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage. Does the Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage remain above the specified value?
952 mV (500 mV in deceleration fuel cut-out mode)
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0158 until the DTC P0158 test runs. 5. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0158 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
6E2215

1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect Bank 2 HO2S 2. Ignition ON. At the HO2S Bank 2 Sensor 2 connector (PCM side), use a DVM to measure voltages at the high and low signal terminals. 3-4 V Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 6
Are the voltages in the specified range? 5 6 Repair short to voltage in signal circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. At Bank 2 HO2S 2 connector (PCM side) jumper both the HO2S high and low signal circuits (PCM side) to ground. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage. Is Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage below the specified value? 7 1. Disconnect the jumpers to ground from Bank 2 HO2S 2 PCM-side connector. 2. With the HO2S 2 connector disconnected, monitor Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage. Is Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage between the specified values? 8 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
10 mV
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 8
425-475 mV
Go to Step 8
Verify repair
6E2216
060R200054
Circuit Description
To control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a three-way catalytic converter is used. The catalyst within the converter promotes a chemical reaction which oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas, converting them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx, converting it to nitrogen. The powertrain control module (PCM) has the ability to monitor this process using the Bank 2 HO2S 1 and the Bank 2 HO2S 2 heated oxygen sensors. The Bank 2 HO2S 1 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the three-way catalytic converter. The Bank 2 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst; this in turn indicates the catalysts ability to convert exhaust gases efficiently. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal will be far more active than that produced by the Bank 2 HO2S 2 sensor. If the Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains between 400 mV and 500 mV for an extended period of time, DTC P0160 will be set. Heated Oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for closed loop fuel control operation and allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank
2 HO2S 1 to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by post-catalyst monitor sensors to maintain a sufficiently high temperature for accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further from the engine.

D D D D D D No related DTCs. Battery voltage is above 10 volts. The engine has been running for over 5 seconds. Oxygen sensor heater is functioning properly. Engine is in closed loop operation. Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal voltage remains between 426 mV and 474 mV for a total of 106 seconds over a 125-second period of time.


D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0160 will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles have occurred without a fault.

D DTC P0160 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
6E2217
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal-to-wire connection, and damaged harness. D Faulty HO2S heater or heater circuit With the ignition ON, engine OFF, the HO2S voltage displayed on a Tech 2 should gradually drop to below 250 mV. If not, disconnect the HO2S and connect a test light between the HO2S ignition feed and heater ground circuits. If the test light does not light, repair the open ignition feed or sensor ground circuit as necessary. If the test light lights and the HO2S signal and low circuits are OK, replace the HO2S.
D Intermittent test With the ignition ON, monitor the HO2S signal voltage while moving the wiring harness and related connectors. If the fault is induced, the HO2S signal voltage will change. This may help isolate the location of the malfunction.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. If the DTC P0160 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, an intermittent condition is indicated. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

Go to Step 4
4 5
Check for a damaged harness. Was problem found? Check for poor Bank 2 HO2S 2 high and low circuit terminal connections at the Bank 2 HO2S 2 harness connector and replace terminal(s) if necessary. Did either terminal require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Check for poor Bank 2 HO2S 2 high and low circuit terminal connections at the PCM and replace terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 7
6E2218

1. Ignition OFF. 2. With the PCM disconnected, check continuity of the Bank 2 HO2S 2 high circuit. 3. If the Bank 2 HO2S 2 high circuit measures over 5.0 ohms, repair open or poor connections as necessary. Was a Bank 2 HO2S 2 high circuit problem found and corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 8
1. Ignition OFF. 2. With the PCM disconnected, check continuity of the Bank 2 HO2S 2 low circuit. 3. If the Bank 2 HO2S 2 low circuit measures over 5 ohms, repair open or poor connections as necessary. Was a Bank 2 HO2S 2 low circuit problem found and corrected? Verify repair Go to Step 9
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Disconnect Bank 2 HO2S 2 and jumper the HO2S high and low circuits (PCM side) to ground. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage. Is Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage in the specified range? 0-10 mV Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 11 Replace Bank 2 HO2S 2. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
6E2219
060R200054
Circuit Description
Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for closed loop fuel control operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by post-catalyst monitor sensors to maintain a sufficiently high temperature which allows accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further from the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) will run the heater test only after a cold start (determined by engine coolant and intake air temperature at the time of start-up) and only once during an ignition cycle. When the engine is started, the PCM will monitor the HO2S voltage. When the Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage indicates a sufficiently active sensor, the PCM looks at how much time has elapsed since start-up. If the PCM determines that too much time was required for the Bank 2 HO2S 2 to become active, a DTC P0161 will set. The time it should take the HO2S to reach operating temperature is based on the total amount of air that has passed through the MAF sensor and into the engine (more total air flow = shorter time to HO2S activity).
D Ignition voltage is between 11 volts and 18 volts. D Average mass air flow for the sample period is less than 23 g/second. D Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage does not change more than 150 mV from the bias voltage (between 400 mV-500 mV) for a longer amount of time than it should. The maximum amount of time to come up to operating range is 120 seconds. This warm-up time depends on the engine coolant temperature at start-up and accumulated air flow since start-up.



6E2220

2. The HO2S should be allowed to cool before performing this test. If the HO2S heater is functioning, the signal voltage will gradually increase or decrease as the sensor element warms. If the heater is not functioning, the HO2S signal will remain near the 450 mV bias voltage. 4. This ensures that the ignition feed circuit to the HO2S is not open or shorted. The test light should be connected to a good chassis ground, in case the HO2S low or HO2S heater ground circuit is faulty. 5. This checks the HO2S heater ground circuit. 6. This checks for an open or shorted HO2S heater element. 11.An open HO2S signal or low circuit can cause the HO2S heater to appear faulty. Check these circuits before replacing the sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
Test Description

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 NOTE: If the engine has just been operating, allow the engine to cool for at least 15 minutes before proceeding. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Connect a fused jumper at the fuel pump relay socket, between the battery positive at the relay and the relay wire that leads to the fuel pump and HO2S fuses. 3. Ignition OFF. 4. Install a Tech 2. 5. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 6. Monitor the Bank 2 HO2S 2 voltage for several minutes. Did the HO2S voltage go from bias voltage to above or below the specified values?
Above 650 mV or Below 250 mV
3 4
Inspect the fuse for the Bank 2 HO2S 2 ignition feed. Is the fuse open? 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Raise the vehicle. Disconnect the Bank 2 HO2S 2 electrical connector. Using a test light connected to a known good ground (do not use Bank 2 HO2S 2 heater ground or Bank 2 HO2S 2 low), probe the ignition feed circuit at the Bank 2 HO2S 2 electrical connector (PCM harness side). Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
6E2221

1. Allow the HO2S to cool for at least 15 minutes. 2. Using a DVM, measure resistance between the Bank 2 HO2S 2 ignition feed and the Bank 2 HO2S 2 heater ground at the Bank 2 HO2S 2 pigtail. Is the HO2S resistance within the specified values? 3-6 ohms Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Repair the open Bank 2 HO2S 2 ignition feed circuit to Bank 2 HO2S 2. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Repair the open Bank 2 HO2S 2 heater ground circuit. Is the action complete? 1. Check for a poor connection at the Bank 2 HO2S 2 harness terminals. 2. If a poor connection is found, replace the terminals. Was a poor connection found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the continuity of the Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal circuit and the Bank 2 HO2S 2 low circuit. 3. If the Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal circuit or HO2S low circuit measures over 5 ohms, repair the open or poor connection as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and check the continuity of the Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal circuit and the Bank 2 HO2S 2 low circuit. 3. If the Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal circuit or HO2S low circuit measures over 5 ohms, repair the open or poor connection as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 12 Check for a poor Bank 2 HO2S 2 low circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 13 Check for a poor Bank 2 HO2S 2 high circuit terminal connection at the PCM and replace the terminal if necessary. Did the terminal require replacement? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 14 Replace Bank 2 HO2S 2. Is the action complete? Locate and repair the short to ground in the Bank 2 HO2S 2 ignition feed circuit and replace the faulty fuse. Is the action complete? Verify repair
8 9
10
11
12
13
14 15
6E2222
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 Fuel Trim System Lean Bank 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
To provide the best possible combination of driveability, fuel economy, and emission control, a closed loop air/fuel metering system is used. While in closed loop, the powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 signals and adjusts fuel delivery based upon the HO2S signal voltages. A change made to fuel delivery will be indicated by the long and short term fuel trim values which can be monitored with a Tech 2. Ideal fuel trim values are around 0%; if the HO2S signals are indicating a lean condition the PCM will add fuel, resulting in fuel trim values above 0%. If a rich condition is detected, the fuel trim values will be below 0%, indicating that the PCM is reducing the amount of fuel delivered. If an excessively lean condition is detected on Bank 1, the PCM will set DTC P0171. The PCMs maximum authority to control long term fuel trim allows a range between 15% (automatic transmission) or 12% (manual transmission) and +20%. The PCM monitors fuel trim under various engine speed/load fuel trim cells before determining the status of the fuel trim diagnostic.
D Engine coolant temperature is between 6C (42.8F) and 105C (221F). D Intake air temperature is between 40C (40F) and 120C (248F). D Manifold absolute pressure is between 24 kPa and 99 kPa. D Throttle angle is steady below 95%. D Vehicle speed is below 136 km/h (85 mph). D Engine speed is between 400 and 6,000 RPM. D Barometric pressure is greater than 72.5 kPa. D Mass air flow is between 2 g/second and 200 g/second. D Ignition voltage is above 9.5 volts. D Fuel system is in closed loop. D Canister purge duty cycle is greater than 0% if on.


D None of the following: EGR DTCs, HO2S DTCs, (response, transition, open, low volts, no activity), MAF DTCs, TP sensor DTCs, MAP DTCs, IAT DTCs, canister purge DTCs, EVAP DTCs, injector circuit DTCs, or misfire DTCs.


6E2223
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Bank 1 HO2S 1 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the engine harness. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. DTCs other than P0171 and P0174 may indicate a condition present which may cause a lean condition. If this is the case, repairing the condition which caused the other DTC will most likely correct the DTC P0171/P0174. 4. If the DTC P0171 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, the lean condition is intermittent. Refer to Diagnostic Aids or Symptoms for additional information on diagnosing intermittent problems.
6E2224
DTC P0171 Fuel Trim System Lean Bank 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to the applicable DTC charts and repair the other DTCs before proceeding with this chart Are any DTCs set other than P0171 and P0174?
3 1. Start the engine and operate the vehicle in closed loop. 2. Observe the BANK 1 L.T. FUEL TRIM display on the Tech 2. Is the displayed value greater than the specified value? 4 1. Review and record the Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTC P0171/P0174 and operate the vehicle to duplicate the Failure Records conditions. 3. Monitor the Tech 2 DTC info for DTC P0171 while operating the vehicle to duplicate the Failure Records conditions. 4. Continue operating the vehicle until the DTC P0171 test runs and note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0171 failed this ignition? 5 6 Was DTC P0174 also set? Visually and physically inspect the vacuum hoses for disconnections, splits, kinks, improper routing and improper connections and repair any problem found. Did your inspection reveal a problem requiring repair? 7 Visually and physically inspect the crankcase ventilation valve for proper installation and repair any problem found (refer to Crankcase Ventilation System). Did your inspection reveal a problem requiring repair? 8 1. Inspect the MAF sensor inlet screen for damage or for the presence of foreign objects which may partially block the air flow sample through the MAF sensor. 2. Correct any problem that is found as necessary. Did your inspection of the MAF sensor reveal a condition requiring repair? 9 10 Start the engine and note the idle quality. Is a high or unsteady idle being experienced? 1. Visually and physically inspect the throttle body, intake manifold, EGR valve and the EGR feed pipe for vacuum leaks. 2. Repair any vacuum leaks as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a vacuum leak?
Go to Step 3
L.T. Fuel Trim: +20%
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 4
The lean condition is not present. If a driveability symptom still exists, refer to Symptoms section. Go to Step 15
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
Verify repair
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9 Go to Step11
Verify repair
Go to Step 11
6E2225
DTC P0171 Fuel Trim System Lean Bank 1 (Cont'd)

11
Check the fuel for excessive water, alcohol, or other contaminants (see Diagnosis in Engine Fuel for the procedure) and correct the contaminated fuel condition if present (see Engine Fuel). Was the fuel contaminated? Verify repair Go to Step 12 1. Visually and physically inspect the PCM injector grounds, power grounds and sensor grounds to ensure that they are clean, tight, and in their proper locations. 2. If a faulty ground condition is present, correct it as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a condition requiring repair? Verify repair Go to Step 13 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 2. Operate the vehicle in closed loop while monitoring the BANK 1 S.T. FUEL TRIM displayed on the Tech 2. Does BANK 1 S.T. FUEL TRIM value decrease to near the specified value? 0% Go to Step 19 Go to Step 14
12
13
14
Perform the procedure in the Fuel System Pressure Test and repair fuel system problem if necessary. Did Fuel System Pressure Test isolate a condition requiring repair? Verify repair Go to Step 15
15
1. Visually and physically inspect the intake manifold, injector O-rings, EGR adapter, EGR valve and the EGR feed pipes for vacuum leaks. 2. Repair any problem that is found. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 16 Visually and physically inspect the Bank 1 exhaust manifold for leaks and loose or missing hardware and correct any problem found. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 17 Perform the Injector Balance Test, and correct any problem found (refer to Fuel Metering System). Did Injector Balance Test isolate a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 18 1. Visually and physically inspect the Bank 1 HO2S 1 to ensure that it is installed securely and that the Bank 1 HO2S 1 pigtail and wiring harness are not contacting the exhaust or otherwise damaged. 2. If a problem is found, correct it as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the MAF sensor. Is the action complete?
16
17
18
19
6E2226
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0172 Fuel Trim System Rich Bank 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
To provide the best possible combination of driveability, fuel economy, and emission control, a closed loop air/fuel metering system is used. While in closed loop, the powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the Bank 1 heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 signals and adjusts fuel delivery based upon the HO2S signal voltages. A change made to fuel delivery will be indicated by the long and short term fuel trim values which can be monitored with a Tech 2. Ideal fuel trim values are around 0%; if the HO2S signals are indicating a lean condition the PCM will add fuel, resulting in fuel trim values above 0%. If a rich condition is detected, the fuel trim values will be below 0%, indicating that the PCM is reducing the amount of fuel delivered. If an excessively rich condition is detected on Bank 1, the PCM will set DTC P0172. The PCMs maximum authority to control long term fuel trim allows a range between 15% (automatic transmission) or 12 (manual transmission) and +20%. The PCMs maximum authority to control short term fuel trim allows a range between 11% and +20%. The PCM monitors fuel trim under various engine speed/load fuel trim cells before determining the status of the fuel trim diagnostic. D D D D D D D D D D D
DTCs, canister purge DTCs, EVAP DTCs, injector circuit DTCs, or misfire DTCs. Engine coolant temperature is between 6C (42.8F) and 105C (221F). Intake air temperature is between 40C (40F) and 120C (248F). Manifold absolute pressure is between 24 kPa and 99 kPa. Throttle angle is steady below 95%. Vehicle speed is below 136 km/h (85 mph). Engine speed is between 400 and 6,000 RPM. Barometric pressure is greater than 72.5 kPa. Mass air flow is between 2 g/second and 200 g/second. Ignition voltage is above 9.5 volts. Fuel system is in closed loop. Canister purge duty cycle is greater than 0%, if ON.


D None of the following was set: EGR DTCs, HO2S DTCs, (response, transition, open, low volts, no activity), MAF DTCs, TPS DTCs, MAP DTCs, IAT


D A history DTC P0172 will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P0172 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
6E2227
the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. DTCs other than P0172 and P0175 may indicate a condition present which may cause a lean condition. If this is the case, repairing the condition which caused the other DTC will most likely correct the DTC P0172/P0175. 4. If the DTC P0172 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, the rich condition is intermittent. Refer to Diagnostic Aids or Symptoms for additional information on diagnosing intermittent problems.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Bank 1 HO2S 1 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the engine harness. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often
DTC P0172 Fuel Trim System Rich Bank 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to the applicable DTC charts and repair the other DTCs before proceeding with this chart Are any DTCs set other than P0172 and P0175?
3 1. Start the engine and operate the vehicle in closed loop. 2. Observe B1 Long Term Fuel Trim display on the Tech 2. Is the displayed value more negative than the specified value? 4 1. Review and record the Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTC P0172/P0175 and operate the vehicle to duplicate the Failure Records conditions. 3. Monitor the Tech 2 DTC info for DTC P0172 while operating the vehicle to duplicate the Failure Records conditions. 4. Continue operating the vehicle until the DTC P0172 test runs and note test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0172 failed this ignition? 5 6 Is DTC P0175 also set? Visually and physically inspect the air filter element and replace it if necessary. Did the air filter require replacement? 7 Visually and physically inspect the air intake duct for collapse or restriction and repair if necessary. Did your inspection reveal a condition requiring repair? L.T. Fuel Trim: 15% (auto. trans.) OR 12% (man. trans.)
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 4
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
Verify repair
Go to Step 8
6E2228
DTC P0172 Fuel Trim System Rich Bank 1 (Cont'd)

Inspect the MAF sensor inlet screen for damage or for the presence of foreign objects which may partially block air flow through the screen and correct any problem found. Did your inspection of the MAF sensor reveal a condition requiring repair or replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 11
9 10
Start the engine and note the idle quality. Is a low or unsteady idle being experienced? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Physically inspect the throttle body bore and throttle plate for coking and foreign objects. 3. If a problem was found, repair as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a condition requiring repair? Verify repair Go to Step 11 1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the fuel pressure regulator and inspect the hose for the presence of fuel. 2. If fuel is present in the vacuum hose, replace the fuel pressure regulator (refer to Fuel Metering System). Did the fuel pressure regulator require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 12 Ignition ON, engine OFF, monitor the TP1 Angle display on the Tech 2 while slowly depressing the accelerator pedal. Does the TP Angle display increase steadily and evenly from minimum value at closed throttle to maximum value at wide-open throttle? Minimum 8% Maximum 92%
11
12
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 21
13
1. Disconnect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 2. Operate the vehicle in closed loop while monitoring the BANK 1 L.T. FUEL TRIM and BANK 1 S. T. FUEL TRIM display on the Tech 2. Did both values change to near the specified value? 0% Go to Step 22 Go to Step 14 1. Perform Fuel System Pressure Test. 2. If Fuel System Pressure Test isolates a problem, repair as necessary (refer to Engine Fuel or Fuel Metering System). Did the Fuel System Pressure Test isolate a problem requiring repair? Verify repair Go to Step 15
14
15
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Connect a test light between the harness connector terminals of canister purge solenoid. Is the test light on? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 19 Check for short to ground in the wire (YEL/RED) between the canister purge solenoid and PCM terminal S-48. Was there a short to ground? Go to Step 17 Verify repair Go to Step 18 Repair the short to ground. Is the action complete?
16
17
6E2229

18
Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
19
1. Perform the Injector Balance Test. 2. If Injector Balance Test isolates a problem, repair as necessary (refer to Fuel Metering System). Did the Injector Balance Test isolate a problem requiring repair? Verify repair Go to Step 20
20
1. Remove and visually/physically inspect the Bank 1 HO2S 1 for silicon contamination. This will be indicated by a powdery deposit on the portion of the HO2S that is exposed to the exhaust stream. 2. If contamination is evident on the Bank 1 HO2S 1, replace the contaminated sensors. Did the sensor require replacement? Verify repair 1. Check the TP sensor mounting screws and tighten or replace them as necessary if they are loose or missing. 2. If the screws are OK, replace the TP sensor. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair
21
22
Replace the MAF sensor. Is the action complete?
6E2230
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0174 Fuel Trim System Lean Bank 2
060R200054
Circuit Description
To provide the best possible combination of driveability, fuel economy, and emission control, a closed loop air/fuel metering system is used. While in closed loop, the powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 signals and adjusts fuel delivery based upon the HO2S signal voltages. A change made to fuel delivery will be indicated by the long and short term fuel trim values which can be monitored with a Tech 2. Ideal fuel trim values are around 0%; if the HO2S signals are indicating a lean condition the PCM will add fuel, resulting in fuel trim values above 0%. If a rich condition is detected, the fuel trim values will be below 0%, indicating that the PCM is reducing the amount of fuel delivered. If an excessively lean condition is detected on Bank 2, the PCM will set DTC P0174. The PCMs maximum authority to control long term fuel trim allows a range between 15%(automatic transmission) or 12%(manual transmission) and +20%. The PCM monitors fuel trim under various engine speed/load fuel trim cells before determining the status of the fuel trim diagnostic.
D Intake air temperature is between 40C (40F) and 120C (248F). D Manifold absolute pressure is between 24 kPa and 99 kPa. D Throttle angle is steady between 3 and 95%. D Vehicle speed is below 136 km/h (85 mph). D Engine speed is between 400 and 6,000 RPM. D Barometric pressure is greater than 72.5 kPa. D Mass air flow is between 2 g/second and 200 g/second. D Ignition voltage is above 9.5 volts. D Fuel system is in closed loop. D Canister purge duty cycle is greater than 0%, if ON.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the failure is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D None of the following DTCs are set: idle system, EGR, HO2S, (response, transition, open, low volts, no activity), MAF, TP sensor, MAP, IAT, canister purge, EVAP, injector circuit, or misfire. D Engine coolant temperature is between 6C (42.8F) and 105C (221F).
6E2231
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Bank 2 HO2S 1 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the engine harness. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. DTCs other than P0171 and P0174 may indicate a condition present which may cause a lean condition. If this is the case, repairing the condition which caused the other DTC will most likely correct the DTC P0171/P0174. 4. If the DTC P0174 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, the lean condition is intermittent. Refer to Diagnostic Aids or Symptoms for additional information on diagnosing intermittent problems.
6E2232
DTC P0174 Fuel Trim System Lean Bank 2

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to the applicable DTC charts and repair the other DTCs before proceeding with this chart. Are any DTCs set other than P0174 and P0171?
3 1. Start the engine and operate the vehicle in closed loop. 2. Observe the BANK 2 L.T. FUEL TRIM display on the Tech 2. Is the displayed values greater than the specified values? 4 1. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTC P0171/P0174 and operate the vehicle to duplicate the Failure Records conditions. 3. Monitor the Tech 2 DTC info for DTC P0174 while operating the vehicle to duplicate the Failure Records conditions. 4. Continue operating the vehicle until the DTC P0174 test runs. 5. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0174 failed this ignition? 5 6 Was DTC P0171 also set? Visually and physically inspect the vacuum hoses for disconnections, splits, kinks, improper routing and improper connections and repair any problem found. Did your inspection reveal a problem requiring repair? 7 Visually and physically inspect the crankcase ventilation valve for proper installation and repair any problem found (refer to Crankcase Ventilation System). Did your inspection reveal a problem requiring repair? 8 1. Inspect the MAF sensor inlet screen for damage or for the presence of foreign objects which may partially block the air flow sample through the MAF sensor. 2. Correct any problem that is found as necessary. Did your inspection of the MAF sensor reveal a condition requiring repair? 9 Start the engine and note the idle quality. Is a high or unsteady idle being experienced? L.T. Fuel Trim: +20%
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 4
The lean condition is not present. If a driveability symptom still exists, refer to Symptoms section. Go to Step 15
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
Verify repair
Go to Step 8
6E2233
DTC P0174 Fuel Trim System Lean Bank 2 (Cont'd)

10
1. Visually and physically inspect the throttle body, intake manifold, EGR valve and the EGR feed pipe for vacuum leaks. 2. Repair any vacuum leaks as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a vacuum leak? Verify repair Go to Step 11 Check the fuel for excessive water, alcohol, or other contaminants (see Diagnosis in Engine Fuel for procedure) and correct the contaminated fuel condition is present (see Engine Fuel). Was the fuel contaminated? Verify repair Go to Step 12 1. Visually and physically inspect the PCM injector grounds, power grounds and sensor grounds to ensure that they are clean, tight, and in their proper locations. 2. If a faulty ground condition is present, correct it as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a condition requiring repair? Verify repair Go to Step 13 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 2. Operate the vehicle in closed loop while monitoring the BANK 2 S.T. FUEL TRIM displayed on the Tech 2. Does the BANK 2 S.T. FUEL TRIM value decrease to near the specified value? 0% Go to Step 19 Go to Step 14
11
12
13
14
Perform the procedure in the Fuel System Pressure Test and repair fuel system problem if necessary. Did the Fuel System Pressure Test isolate a condition requiring repair? Verify repair Go to Step 15
15
1. Visually and physically inspect the intake manifold, injector O-rings, EGR adapter, EGR valve and the EGR feed pipes for vacuum leaks. 2. Repair any problem that is found. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 16 Visually and physically inspect the Bank 2 exhaust manifold for leaks and loose or missing hardware and correct any problem found. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 17 Perform the Injector Balance Test and correct any problem found (refer to Fuel Metering System). Did the Injector Balance Test isolate a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 18 1. Visually and physically inspect the Bank 2 HO2S 1 to ensure that it is installed securely and that the Bank 2 HO2S 1 pigtail and wiring harness are not contacting the exhaust or otherwise damaged. 2. If a problem is found, correct it as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the MAF sensor. Is the action complete?
16
17
18
19
6E2234
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0175 Fuel Trim System Rich Bank 2
060R200054
Circuit Description
To provide the best possible combination of driveability, fuel economy, and emission control, a closed loop air/fuel metering system is used. While in closed loop, the powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 signals and adjusts fuel delivery based upon the HO2S signal voltages. A change made to fuel delivery will be indicated by the long and short term fuel trim values which can be monitored with a Tech 2. Ideal fuel trim values are around 0%; if the HO2S signals are indicating a lean condition the PCM will add fuel, resulting in fuel trim values above 0%. If a rich condition is detected, the fuel trim values will be below 0%, indicating that the PCM is reducing the amount of fuel delivered. If an excessively rich condition is detected on Bank 2, the PCM will set DTC P0175. The PCMs maximum authority to control long term fuel trim allows a range between 15%(automatic transmission) or 12%(manual transmission) and +20%. The PCMs maximum authority to control short term fuel trim allows a range between 11% and +20%. The PCM monitors fuel trim under various engine speed/load fuel trim cells before determining the status of the fuel trim diagnostic. D D D D D D D D D D
activity), MAF, TPS, MAP, IAT, canister purge, EVAP, injector circuit, or misfire. Engine coolant temperature is between 6C (42.8F) and 105C (221F). Intake air temperature is between 40C (40F) and 120C (248F). Manifold absolute pressure is between 24 kPa and 99 kPa. Throttle angle is steady between 3 and 95%. Vehicle speed is below 136 km/h (85 mph). Engine speed is between 400 and 6,000 RPM. Barometric pressure is greater than 72.5 kPa. Mass air flow is between 2 g/second and 200 g/second. Ignition voltage is above 9.5 volts. Fuel system is in closed loop.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the failure is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D None of the following DTCs are set: idle system, EGR, HO2S, (response, transition, open, low volts, no


6E2235
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. DTCs other than P0172 and P0175 may indicate a condition present which may cause a lean condition. If this is the case, repairing the condition which caused the other DTC will most likely correct the DTC P0172/P0175. 4. If the DTC P0175 test passes while the Failure Records conditions are being duplicated, the rich condition is intermittent. Refer to Diagnostic Aids or Symptoms for additional information on diagnosing intermittent problems.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed -out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Bank 2 HO2S 1 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the engine harness. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records Vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often
DTC P0175 Fuel Trim System Rich Bank 2

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to the applicable DTC charts and repair the other DTCs before proceeding with this chart. Are any DTCs set other than P0172 and P0175?
3 1. Start the engine and operate the vehicle in closed loop. 2. Observe the BANK 2 L.T. FUEL TRIM display on the Tech 2. Is the displayed value more negative than the specified value? 4 1. Review and record the Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTC P0172/P0175 and operate the vehicle to duplicate the Failure Records conditions. 3. Monitor the Tech 2 DTC info for DTC P0175 while operating the vehicle to duplicate the Failure Records conditions. 4. Continue operating the vehicle until the DTC P0175 test runs. 5. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0175 failed this ignition? 5 6 Was DTC P0172 also set? Visually and physically inspect the air filter element and replace it if necessary. Did the air filter require replacement? L.T. Fuel Trim: 15% (auto. trans.) OR 12% (man. trans.)
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 4
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
6E2236

Visually and physically inspect the air intake duct for collapse or restriction and repair if necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem requiring repair? Verify repair Go to Step 8 Inspect the MAF sensor inlet screen for damage or for the presence of foreign objects which may partially block air flow through the screen and correct any problem found. Did your inspection of the MAF sensor reveal a condition requiring repair or replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 11
9 10
Start the engine and note the idle quality. Is a low or unsteady idle being experienced? 1. Turn the ignition off and physically inspect the throttle body bore, throttle plate, and IAC passages for coking and foreign objects. 2. If a problem was found, repair as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a condition requiring repair? Verify repair Go to Step 11 1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the fuel pressure regulator and inspect the hose for the presence of fuel. 2. If fuel is present in the vacuum hose, replace the fuel pressure regulator (refer to Fuel Metering System). Did the fuel pressure regulator require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 12 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Monitor the TP Angle display on the Tech 2 while slowly depressing the accelerator pedal. Does the TP Angle display increase steadily and evenly from minimum value at closed throttle to maximum value at wide-open throttle? Minimum 8% Maximum 92%
11
12
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 21
13
1. Disconnect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 2. Operate the vehicle in closed loop while monitoring the BANK 2 L.T. FUEL TRIM and BANK 2 S.T. FUEL TRIM display on the Tech 2. Did both values change to near the specified value? 0% Go to Step 22 Go to Step 14 1. Perform the Fuel System Pressure Test. 2. If Fuel System Pressure Test isolates a problem, repair as necessary (refer to Engine Fuel or Fuel Metering System). Did the Fuel System Pressure Test isolate a condition requiring repair? Verify repair Go to Step 15
14
15
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Connect a test light between the harness connector terminals of canister purge solenoid. Is the test light on? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 19 Check for short to ground in the wire (YEL/RED) between the canister purge solenoid and PCM terminal S-48. Was there a short to ground? Go to Step 17 Go to Step 18
16
6E2237

17 18
Repair the short to ground. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair
19
1. Perform the Injector Balance Test. 2. If the Injector Balance Test isolates a problem, repair as necessary (refer to Fuel Metering System). Did the Injector Balance Test isolate a problem requiring repair? Verify repair Go to Step 20
20
1. Remove and visually/physically inspect the Bank 2 HO2S 1 for silicon contamination. This will be indicated by a powdery deposit on the portion of the HO2S that is exposed to the exhaust stream. 2. If contamination is evident on the Bank 2 HO2S 1, replace the contaminated sensor. Did the sensor require replacement? Verify repair 1. Check the TP sensor mounting screws and tighten or replace them as necessary if they are loose or missing. 2. If the screws are OK, replace the TP sensor. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair
21
22
Replace the MAF sensor. Is the action complete?
6E2238
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0201 Injector 1 Control Circuit
060R200023
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) has six individual injector driver circuits. Each controls an injector. When a driver circuit is grounded by the PCM, the injector is activated. The PCM monitors the current in each driver circuit. The voltage on each driver is monitored to detect a fault. If the voltage is not what the PCM expects to monitor on the circuit, a DTC is set. This DTC is also set if an injector driver is shorted to voltage or if there is an open circuit.

D The PCM will turn OFF the MIL on the third consecutive trip cycle in which the diagnostic has been run and the fault is no longer present. D A history DTC P0201 will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles occur without a fault. D DTC P0201 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Diagnostic Aids
An injector driver circuit that is open or shorted to voltage will cause a DTC P0201 to set. It will also cause a misfire due to an inoperative injector. A misfire DTC will also be set indicating which cylinder is inoperative. Long term and short term fuel trims that are excessively high or low are a good indication that an injector is faulty. Use Fuel Injector Coil Test Procedure to check for faulty injectors.

D The battery voltage is more than 9 volts. D Engine speed is more than 700 rpm. D The engine is turning, determined by 58X crankshaft position input signal. D The injector voltage does not equal the ignition voltage when the injector is commanded OFF or the injector voltage does not equal 0 volts when the injector is commanded ON. D The above conditions are met for 5 seconds.

6E2239
Test Description
The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. This step determines if DTC P0201 is the result of a hard failure or an intermittent condition. 5. A special injector test connector is provided so that the injectors can be electrically tested without removal of the manifold. The test connector can be identified by the blue connector lock which is tethered to the wiring harness. If the light for cylinder 1 is ON steady before cranking the engine as well as while cranking the engine, then the injector driver circuit is shorted to ground. If the test light blinks while cranking, the PCM and the wiring to the injectors are OK. The Fuel Injector Coil Test Procedure will check if the injectors are faulty.
R321054
7. Because the test light was ON steady, voltage to the injector is OK, but the driver circuit is grounded at all times. This step determines if the circuit is shorted to ground or the PCM is faulty. 9. The reading should be about 12-14W. 10.Locating the open in the harness or in the injector will require removal of the manifold to provide access.
DTC P0201 Injector 1 Control Circuit

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Will the engine start? Go to Step 3
Go to OBD System Check Go to Engine Cranks But Will Not Run chart
1. Install the Tech 2. Clear the DTC. 2. Idle the engine for one minute. Does DTC P0201 reset? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 1. Review the Freeze Frame data with the ignition ON and the engine OFF and note the parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within the Freeze Frame conditions as noted. Does P0201 reset? Go to Step 5 1. Engine OFF. 2. Disconnect the injector connector. 3. Install an injector test light J-39021-65 on the injector test connector. 4. Crank the engine and note the light. Does the injector test light blink?
Go to Step 6
6E2240
DTC P0201 Injector 1 Control Circuit (Cont'd)

Note whether the injector test light for cylinder 1 was OFF or ON steady in step 5. Was the test light ON steady while cranking the engine? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 9
1. Disconnect the injector test connector. 2. At the injector side of the harness, connect an ohmmeter between the positive wire (red with blue tracer) and the wire for cylinder 1 (green with white tracer). Does the ohmmeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 11 Verify repair Go to Step 10 Repair the open injector harness wire or open injector. Is the action complete? At the PCM side of the injector test connector, check the green/white wire for a short to voltage. Was there a short to voltage? Go to Step 12 Verify repair Go to Step 13 Repair the short to voltage. Is the action complete? Check for an open circuit between the injector test connector and the PCM. Was there an open circuit? Go to Step 14 Verify repair Go to Step 15 Repair the open circuit. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
12 13
14 15
6E2241
060R200023
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) has six individual injector driver circuits. Each controls an injector. When a driver circuit is grounded by the PCM, the injector is activated. The PCM monitors the current in each driver circuit. The voltage on each driver is monitored to detect a fault. If the voltage is not what the PCM expects to monitor on the circuit, a DTC is set. This DTC is also set if an injector driver is shorted to voltage or if there is an open circuit.

Diagnostic Aids


6E2242
Test Description
R321055
7. Because the test light was ON steady, voltage to the injector is OK, but the driver circuit is grounded at all times. This step determines if the circuit is shorted to ground or the PCM is faulty. 9.The reading should be about 12-14W. 10.Locating the open in the harness or in the injector will require removal of the manifold to provide access.

1. Install the Tech 2. Clear the DTC. 2. Idle the engine for one minute. Does DTC P0202 reset? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 1. Review the Freeze Frame data with the ignition ON and the engine OFF and note the parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within the Freeze Frame conditions as noted. Does P0202 reset? Go to Step 5 1. Engine OFF. 2. Disconnect the injector test connector. 3. Install an injector test light J-39021-65 on injector connector. 4. Crank the engine and note the light. Does the cylinder 2 test light blink?
Go to Step 6
6E2243

1. Disconnect the injector test connector. 2. At the injector side of the harness, connect an ohmmeter between the positive wire (red with blue tracer) and the wire for cylinder 2 (green with orange tracer). Does the ohmmeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 11 Verify repair Go to Step 10 Repair the open injector harness wire or open injector. Is the action complete? At the PCM side of the injector test connector, check the green/orange wire for a short to voltage. Was there a short to voltage? Go to Step 12 Verify repair Go to Step 13 Repair the short to voltage. Is the action complete? Check for an open circuit between the injector test connector and the PCM. Was there an open circuit? Go to Step 14 Verify repair Go to Step 15 Repair the open circuit. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
12 13
14 15
6E2244
060R200023
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) has six individual injector driver circuits. Each controls an injector. When the driver circuit is grounded by the PCM, the injector is activated. The PCM monitors the current in each driver circuit. The voltage on each driver is monitored to detect a fault. If the voltage is not what the PCM expects to monitor on the circuit, a DTC is set. This DTC is also set if an injector driver is shorted to voltage or if there is an open circuit.

Diagnostic Aids

D The battery voltage is more than 9 volts. D Engine speed is more than 700 rpm. D The engine is turning, determined by the 58X crankshaft position input signal. D The injector voltage does not equal the ignition voltage when the injector is commanded OFF or the injector voltage does not equal 0 volts when the injector is commanded ON. D The above conditions are met for 5 seconds.

6E2245
Test Description
R321056

1. Install the Tech 2. Clear the DTC. 2. Idle the engine for one minute. Does DTC P0203 reset? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 1. Review the Freeze Frame data with the ignition ON and the engine OFF and note the parameters. 2. Operate the vehicle within the Freeze Frame conditions as noted. Does P0203 reset? Go to Step 5 1. Engine OFF. 2. Disconnect the injector test connector . 3. Install an injector test light J-39021-65 on injector connector. 4. Crank the engine and note the light. Does the cylinder 3 test light blink?
Go to Step 6
6E2246

1. Disconnect the injector test connector. 2. At the injector side of the harness, connect an ohmmeter between the positive wire (red with blue tracer) and the wire for cylinder 3 (green). Does the ohmmeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 11 Verify repair Go to Step 10 Repair the open injector harness wire or open injector. Is the action complete? At the PCM side of the injector test connector, check the green wire for a short to voltage. Was there a short to voltage? Go to Step 12 Verify repair Go to Step 13 Repair the short to voltage. Is the action complete? Check for an open circuit between the injector test connector and the PCM. Was there an open circuit? Go to Step 14 Verify repair Go to Step 15 Repair the open circuit. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
12 13
14 15
6E2247
060R200023
Circuit Description

Diagnostic Aids


6E2248
Test Description
R321057

Go to Step 6
6E2249

1. Disconnect the injector test connector. 2. At the injector side of the harness, connect an ohmmeter between the positive wire (red with blue tracer) and the wire for cylinder 4 (green/red). Does the ohmmeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 11 Verify repair Go to Step 10 Repair the open injector harness wire or open injector. Is the action complete? At the PCM side of the injector test connector, check the green/red wire for a short to voltage. Was there a short to voltage? Go to Step 12 Verify repair Go to Step 13 Repair the short to voltage. Is the action complete? Check for an open circuit between the injector test connector and the PCM. Was there an open circuit? Go to Step 14 Verify repair Go to Step 15 Repair the open circuit. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
12 13
14 15
6E2250
060R200023
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) has six individual injector driver circuits. Each controls an injector. When the driver circuit is grounded by the PCM, the injector is activated. The PCM monitors the current in each driver circuit. If the voltage is not what the PCM expects to monitor on the circuit, a DTC is set. This DTC is also set if an injector driver is shorted to voltage or if there is an open circuit.


Diagnostic Aids

6E2251
Test Description
The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. This step determines if DTC P0205 is the result of a hard failure or an intermittent condition. 5. A special injector test connector is provided so that the injectors can be electrically tested without removal of the manifold.The test connector can be identified by the blue connector lock which is tethered to the wiring harness. If the light for cylinder 5 is ON steady before cranking the engine as well as while cranking the engine, then the injector driver circuit is shorted to ground. If the test light blinks while cranking, the PCM and the wiring to the injectors are OK. The Fuel Injector Coil Test Procedure will check if the injectors are faulty.
R321058

Go to Step 6
6E2252

1. Disconnect the injector test connector. 2. At the injector side of the harness, connect an ohmmeter between the positive wire (red with blue tracer) and the wire for cylinder 5 (green with black tracer). Does the ohmmeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 11 Verify repair Go to Step 10 Repair the open injector harness wire or open injector. Is the action complete? At the PCM side of the injector test connector, check the green/black wire for a short to voltage. Was there a short to voltage? Go to Step 12 Verify repair Go to Step 13 Repair the short to voltage. Is the action complete? Check for an open circuit between the injector test connector and the PCM. Was there an open circuit? Go to Step 14 Verify repair Go to Step 15 Repair the open circuit. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
12 13
14 15
6E2253
060R200023
Circuit Description

Diagnostic Aids


6E2254
Test Description
The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. This step determines if DTC P0206 is the result of a hard failure or an intermittent condition. 5. A special injector test connector is provided so that the injectors can be electrically tested without removal of the manifold.The test connector can be identified by the blue connector lock which is tethered to the wiring harness. If the light for cylinder 6 is ON steady before cranking the engine as well as while cranking the engine, then the injector driver circuit is shorted to ground. If the test light blinks while cranking, the PCM and the wiring to the injectors are OK. The Fuel Injector Coil Test Procedure will check if the injectors are faulty.
R321059

Go to Step 6
6E2255

1. Disconnect the injector test connector. 2. At the injector side of the harness, connect an ohmmeter between the positive wire (red with blue tracer) and the wire for cylinder 6 (green with yellow tracer). Does the ohmmeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 11 Verify repair Go to Step 10 Repair the open injector harness wire or open injector Is the action complete? At the PCM side of the injector test connector, check the green/yellow wire for a short to voltage. Was there a short to voltage? Go to Step 12 Verify repair Go to Step 13 Repair the short to voltage. Is the action complete? Check for an open circuit between the injector test connector and the PCM. Was there an open circuit? Go to Step 14 Verify repair Go to Step 15 Repair the open circuit. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to the latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10 11
12 13
14 15
6E2256
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0300 Engine Misfire Detected

Circuit Description
Misfire is monitored as a function of the combustion quality (CQ) signals generated from the ION Sensing Module. Combustion signals represent the degree of combustion in each cylinder. Misfire is detected when the combustion signal is below a predetermined value. This DTC P0300 will determine if a multiple cylinder misfire is occurring by monitoring the Combustion Quality. D Damaged or faulty ignition coil Check for cracks or other damage. D Substitute a known good coil Swap the ignition coils and retest. If the misfire follows the coil, replace the ignition coil. If the misfire is random, check for the following conditions: D System grounds Ensure all connections are clean and properly tightened. D MAF A mass air flow (MAF) sensor output that causes the PCM to sense a lower than normal air flow will cause a lean condition. D Air induction system Air leaks into the induction system which bypass the MAF sensor will cause a lean condition. Check for disconnected or damaged vacuum hoses, incorrectly installed or faulty PCV valve, or for vacuum leaks at the throttle body, EGR valve, and intake manifold mounting surfaces. D Fuel pressure Perform a fuel system pressure test. A faulty fuel pump, plugged filter, or faulty fuel system pressure regulator will contribute to a lean condition. D Injector(s) Perform an injector coil/balance test to locate faulty injector(s) contributing to a lean or flooding condition. In addition to the above test, check the condition of the injector O-rings. D EGR Check for a leaking valve, adapter, or feed pipes which will contribute to a lean condition or excessive EGR flow. D Fuel quality Using fuel with the wrong octane rating for the vehicle may cause driveability problems. Although alcohol-enhanced fuels may raise the octane rating, the fuels ability to turn into vapor in cold temperatures deteriorates. This may affect the cold driveability of the engine. The Reid Vapor Pressure of the fuel can also create problems in the fuel system, especially during the spring and fall when changes by the refineries may not coincide with changes in the weather. D Vehicle marshalling The transportation of new vehicles from the assembly plant to the dealership can involve as many as 60 key cycles within 2 to 3 miles of driving. This type of operation contributes to the fuel fouling of the spark plugs and will turn on the MIL with a P0300 Misfire DTC. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

D None of the following DTCs occur: TP sensor, MAF sensor, VSS, ECT sensor. D The engine speed is between 600 and 6250 RPM. D The system voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. D The engine temperature sensor (ECT) indicates an engine temperature between 7C (20F) and 110C (230F). D Throttle angle is steady and throttle changes less than 2% per 125 milliseconds.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected the fault. D If the misfire is severe enough to cause possible catalyst damage, the PCM will flash the MIL for as long as the misfire remains at catalyst damaging levels. D The PCM will disable the TCC operation. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle in which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0300 will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles occur without a fault. D DTC P0300 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Diagnostic Aids
The Tech 2 display Misfire Cur. #1 through #6 can be useful to determine whether the misfire is isolated to a single cylinder.
6E2257
DTC P0300 Engine Misfire Detected

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Start the engine. Run the engine at idle. 2. Review and record the Tech 2 Freeze Frame data. 3. Operate the vehicle to duplicate the conditions present when the DTC was set (as defined by the Freeze Frame data). 4. Monitor the Tech 2 Misfire Cur. # display for each cylinder. Is Misfire Cur. # display increasing for any cylinder (indicating a misfire currently occurring)? Go to Step 3
1. Visually and physically inspect the vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and improper connections. 2. If a problem is found, repair or replace the vacuum hoses as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 4 1. Visually and physically inspect the following areas for vacuum leaks: D The intake manifold D The injector O-rings D The EGR adapter D The EGR feed pipes D ION Sensing Module 2. If a problem is found, repair the vacuum leak as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a vacuum leak? Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Visually and physically inspect the crankcase ventilation valve for improper installation or damaged grommet. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary (refer to Crankcase Ventilation System). Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Inspect the MAF sensor inlet screen for damage or for the presence of foreign objects that may partially block the air flow sample through the MAF sensor. 2. If a problem is found, repair or replace the MAF sensor as necessary. Did your inspection of the MAF sensor reveal a condition requiring repair or replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 7
1. Remove the EGR valve and visually/physically inspect the valve to ensure that the pintle is not sticking partially open. Also, inspect the EGR valve pintle and seat for carbon deposits or burrs that may interfere with the pintle closing completely. 2. If a problem is found, clean the EGR valve pintle and seat or replace the EGR valve as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 8
6E2258
DTC P0300 Engine Misfire Detected (Cont'd)

1. Install a spark tester at the spark plug end of the ignition coil for a cylinder that indicated a misfire. 2. Crank the engine while observing the spark tester. A crisp, blue spark should be observed. Is adequate spark present? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 9 1. Remove and visually/physically inspect the ignition coil(s) associated with the cylinders that were indicated as misfiring. Ensure that the coil(s) are free of cracks. 2. If a problem is found, replace the damaged ignition coil(s) as necessary. Did any ignition coils require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 10 1. Remove the spark plugs from the cylinders that were indicated as misfiring. 2. Visually inspect the spark plug electrodes. Does your inspection reveal any spark plugs exhibiting excessive fouling?
10
Go to Step 11
11
1. Visually inspect the spark plug insulators for cracks, carbon tracking, or other damage. 2. If a problem is found, replace the faulty spark plug(s) as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 12 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor electrical connector. BANK 1 L.T. 2. Operate the vehicle in closed loop while FUEL TRIM monitoring the BANK 1 L.T. FUEL TRIM and below +20%; BANK 1 S.T. FUEL TRIM display on the Tech 2. BANK 1 S.T. Do both values decrease below the specified values? FUEL TRIM below +50% Replace the ignition coil control module. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Visually and physically inspect the PCM injector grounds, power grounds and sensor grounds to ensure that they are clean, tight and in their proper locations. 2. If a problem is found, correct the faulty ground condition as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a poor ground? Verify repair Go to Step 15 1. Perform the Fuel System Pressure Test procedure. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary (refer to Engine Fuel or Fuel Metering System). Was a fuel system problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 16 1. Check the fuel for excessive water, alcohol, or other contaminants (refer to Diagnosis in Engine Fuel for procedure). 2. If a problem is found, correct the contaminated fuel condition as necessary. Was the fuel contaminated? Verify repair Go to Step 17
12
Go to Step 13
Replace the ignition coil of the affected cylinder
13 14
15
16
6E2259
DTC P0300 Engine Misfire Detected (Cont'd)

17
1. Perform the Injector Coil/Balance Test. 2. If a problem is found, replace faulty injector(s) as necessary. Did any of the injectors require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 18 1. Check for an engine mechanical problem. Refer to Engine Mechanical Diagnosis to diagnose the following conditions: D A faulty or incorrect camshaft D Leaking or sticky valves or rings D Excessive valve deposits D Weak valve springs D Incorrect valve timing D A leaking head gasket D A loose or broken motor mount 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a basic engine mechanical problem found and repaired? Verify repair Go to Step 19
18
19
1. Check for a transmission TCC problem. Refer to 4L30-E Automatic Transmission Diagnosis. 2. If a problem is found, repair the transmission as necessary. Refer to 4L30-E Automatic Transmission Unit Repair. Was a transmission problem found and repaired? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 20 Replace the MAF sensor. Is the action complete?
20
6E2260
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0301 Cylinder Misfire Detected

Circuit Description
Misfire is monitored as a function of the combustion quality (CQ) signals generated from the ignition current sense system. Combustion signals represent the degree of combustion in each cylinder. Misfire is detected when the combustion signal is below a predetermined value. This DTC P0301 will determine if the No.1 cylinder misfire is occurring by monitoring the Combustion Quality.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive ignition cycle in which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0301 will clear after 40 consecutive ignition cycles occur without a fault. D DTC P0301 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D None of the following DTCs occur: TP sensor, MAF sensor, vehicle speed sensor, ECT sensor. D The engine speed is between 600 and 6250 RPM. D The system voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. D The ECT indicates an engine temperature between 7C (28F) and 110C (230F). D The throttle angle is steady and throttle change less than 2% per 125 milliseconds.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D System grounds Ensure all connections are clean and properly tightened. D Injector Perform the injector coil/balance test to locate a faulty injector that contributes to a lean condition on the affected cylinder. In addition to the above test, check the condition of the injector O-ring. D Faulty spark plug Check for a cracked insulator, carbon tracking, incorrect gap, and worn electrodes. D Damaged or faulty ignition coil Check for cracks or other damage. D Substitute a known good coil Swap the ignition coils and retest. If the misfire follows the coil, replace the ignition coil.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected the fault. D If the misfire is severe enough to cause possible catalyst damage, the PCM will flash the MIL for as long as the misfire remains at catalyst damaging levels. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.
DTC P0301 Cylinder Misfire Detected

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Start the engine. Run the engine at idle. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Freeze Frame data. 3. Monitor Misfire Cur. #1 on the Tech 2. Is Misfire Cur. #1 increasing (indicating a misfire currently occurring)? Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
Monitor Misfire Hist. #1 while operating the vehicle to duplicate the conditions present when the DTC was set (as defined by the Freeze Frame data recorded in Step 2). Is Misfire Hist. #1 increasing (indicating a misfire currently occurring)? Go to Step 4
1. Visually and physically inspect the vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and improper connections. Also, inspect the intake manifold for a vacuum leak. 2. If a problem is found, repair it as necessary. Did the inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Install a spark tester at the spark plug end of the cylinder #1 ignition coil. 2. Crank the engine while observing the spark tester. A crisp, blue spark should be observed. Is adequate spark present? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 6
6E2261
DTC P0301 Cylinder Misfire Detected (Cont'd)

1. Remove and visually/physically inspect the ignition coil associated with cylinder #1. Ensure that the coil is free of cracks and carbon tracking. 2. If a problem is found, replace the damaged ignition coil as necessary. Did the visual inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Measure the ignition coil primary resistance. 2. If resistance is not within the specified value, replace the faulty ignition coil. Did the ignition coil require replacement? 2.6-2.7 KW Verify repair Go to Contaminatio n Diagnosis chart in Engine Mechanical Diagnosis Go to Step 12 Remove the cylinder #1 spark plug and visually inspect the spark plug electrode. Does the inspection reveal excessive fouling?
9 1. Visually inspect the spark plug insulator for cracks, carbon tracking, or other damage. 2. If the spark plug is damaged, replace the spark plug. Did the inspection reveal a problem? 10 1. Perform the Injector Coil/Balance Test. 2. If any faulty injectors are found, replace them as necessary. Did any of the injectors require replacement? 11 1. Inspect the injector O-rings for a vacuum leak. 2. If a problem is found, repair it as necessary. Did the inspection reveal a problem? 12 Check for an engine mechanical problem. Refer to Engine Mechanical Diagnosis to diagnose and repair the following conditions: D A faulty or incorrect camshaft D Leaking or sticky valves or rings D Excessive valve deposits D Weak valve springs D A leaking head gasket Was a basic engine mechanical problem found?
Go to Step 9
Verify repair
Go to Step 10
Verify repair
Go to Step 11
Verify repair
Go to Step 12
Verify repair
6E2262

Circuit Description


Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D System grounds Ensure all connections are clean and properly tightened. D Injector Perform the injector coil/balance test to locate a faulty injector that contributes to a lean condition on the affected cylinder. In addition to the above test, check the condition of the injector O-ring. D Faulty spark plug Check for a cracked insulator, carbon tracking, incorrect gap, and worn electrodes. D Damaged or faulty ignition coil Check for cracks, carbon tracking or other damage. D Substitute a known good coil Swap the ignition coils and retest. If the misfire follows the coil, replace the ignition coil.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D If the misfire is severe enough to cause possible catalyst damage, the PCM will flash the MIL for as long as the misfire remains at catalyst damaging levels. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

Go to Step 3
6E2263

Go to Step 9
Verify repair
Go to Step 10
Verify repair
Go to Step 11
Verify repair
Go to Step 12
Verify repair
6E2264

Circuit Description


Diagnostic Aids


Go to Step 3
6E2265

Go to Step 9
Verify repair
Go to Step 10
Verify repair
Go to Step 11
Verify repair
Go to Step 12
Verify repair
6E2266

Circuit Description


Diagnostic Aids


Go to Step 3
1. Visually and physically inspect the vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and improper connections. Also, inspect the intake manifold for a vacuum leak. 2. If a problem is found, repair it as necessary. Did the inspection reveal a problem? Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Install a spark tester at the spark plug end of the cylinder #4 ignition wire. 2. Crank the engine while observing the spark tester. A crisp, blue spark should be observed. Is adequate spark present? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 6
6E2267

Go to Step 9
Verify repair
Go to Step 10
Verify repair
Go to Step 11
Verify repair
Go to Step 12
Verify repair
6E2268

Circuit Description


D None of the following DTCs occur: TP sensor, MAF sensor,vehicle speed sensor, ECT sensor. D The engine speed is between 600 and 6250 RPM. D The system voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. D The ECT indicates an engine temperature between 7C (28F) and 110C (230F). D The throttle angle is steady and throttle change less than 2% per 125 milliseconds.
Diagnostic Aids


Go to Step 3
6E2269

Go to Step 9
Verify repair
Go to Step 10
Verify repair
Go to Step 11
Verify repair
Go to Step 12
Verify repair
6E2270

Circuit Description


D None of the following occur: TP sensor, MAF sensor, vehicle speed sensor, ECT sensor. D The engine speed is between 600 and 6250 RPM. D The system voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. D The ECT indicates an engine temperature between 7C (28F) and 110C (230F). D The throttle angle is steady and throttle change less than 2% per 125 milliseconds.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D System grounds Ensure all connections are clean and properly tightened. D Injector Perform the injector coil/balance test to locate a faulty injector that contributes to a lean condition on the affected cylinder. In addition to the above test, check the condition of the injector O-ring. D Faulty spark plug Check for a cracked insulator, carbon tracking, incorrect gap, and worn electrodes. D Damaged or faulty ignition coil Check for cracks or other damage. D Substitute a known good coil Swap the ignition coils and retest. If the misfire follows the coil, replace the ignition coil.


Go to Step 3
6E2271

9 1. Visually inspect the spark plug insulator for cracks, carbon tracking, or other damage. 2. If the spark plug is damaged, replace the spark plug. Did the inspection reveal a problem? 10 1. Perform the Injector Coil/Balance Test. 2. If any faulty injectors are found, replace them as necessary. Did any of the injectors require replacement? 11 1. Inspect the intake manifold and the injector O-rings for a vacuum leak. 2. If a problem is found, repair it as necessary. Did the inspection reveal a problem? 12 Check for an engine mechanical problem. Refer to Engine Mechanical Diagnosis to diagnose and repair the following conditions: D A faulty or incorrect camshaft D Leaking or sticky valves or rings D Excessive valve deposits D Weak valve springs D A leaking head gasket Was a basic engine mechanical problem found?
Go to Step 9
Verify repair
Go to Step 10
Verify repair
Go to Step 11
Verify repair
Go to Step 12
Verify repair
6E2272
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0325 ION Sensing Module/ION Sensing Knock Intensity Circuit Fault
060R200055
Circuit Description
The Power Control Module (PCM) checks the validity of the signals used in the ION Sensing module at the following engine operating conditions. D The test is performed to evacuate the Knock Intensity (KI) signal pulse width if it is within a predetermined range. If the KI signal pulse width is out of the predetermined range, the fail counter will be incremented. If the failure counter exceeds the calibration, then test is complete and a failure will be reported. If the sample counter threshold is reached before the failure threshold, then the test is complete and a pass will be reported. This test will detect an open/short in the KI line circuit, ION module faults and analog input faults in the PCM.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0325 will clear after 40 consecutive trip cycles during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P0325 can be cleared using the Tech2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D D D D Ignition voltage is between 10volt and 16 volts. No Crank DTCs set. No EST DTCs set. No Misfire DTCs set.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM- Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected the fault. D The PCM calculates an air flow value based on idle air control valve position, throttle position, RPM and barometric pressure.

If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Knock Present, Knock Sensor Noise Channel display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.
6E2273
If DTC P0325 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P0325 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P0325 - ION Sensing Module Knock Intensity Circuit Fault

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the ION sensing module. 3. Disconnect the PCM. Is the action complete? Go to Step 4 Check the ION sensing harness between the PCM (F68) and ION sensing module circuit (RED Wire) at the KI line harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 1. Disconnect the ignition coil. Is the action complete? Check the ION sensing harness for open or short circuit between the ignition coil and ION sensing module circuit at the harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Check the following items; 1. Ignition coil and ignition coil circuit. 2. Ignition coil ground circuit for a poor connection. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
5 6
8 9
Replace the Ignition coil. Is the action complete? Check the following items; 1. ION sensing module ground circuit for a poor connection. 2. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 11 Go to Step 11
10
Repair wiring harness. Is the action complete?
6E2274
DTC P0325 - ION Sensing Module Knock Intensity Circuit Fault (Cont'd)
11 12
Replace the ION Sensing module. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not .And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 12
6E2275
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0336 58X Reference Signal Circuit
060R200066
Circuit Description
The 58X reference signal is produced by the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. During one crankshaft revolution, 58 crankshaft pulses will be produced. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the 58X reference signal to calculate engine RPM and crankshaft position. The PCM constantly monitors the number of pulses on the 58X reference circuit. If the PCM receives an incorrect number of pulses on the 58X reference circuit, DTC P0336 will set.


D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0336 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P0336 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D Engine is running. D Extra or missing pulse is detected between consecutive 58X reference pulses. D Above condition is detected in 10 of 100 crankshaft rotations.
6E2276
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed-through wire insulation or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for: D Poor connection - Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, disconnect the PCM, turn the ignition on and observe a voltmeter connected to the 58X reference circuit at the PCM harness connector while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the PCM. A change in voltage will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
6E2277
DTC P0336 58X Reference Signal Circuit

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Attempt to start the engine. Does the engine start? Go to Step 3
1. 2. 3. 4.
Review and record Failure Records information. Clear DTC P0336. Start the engine and idle for 1 minute. Observe DTCs. Go to Step 4
Is DTC P0336 set? 4 1. Disconnect the PCM and CKP sensor. 2. Check for an open or a short to ground in the 58X reference circuit between the CKP sensor connector and the PCM harness connector. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? 5 1. Reconnect the PCM and CKP sensor. 2. Connect a DVM to measure voltage on the 58X reference circuit at the PCM connector. 3. Observe the voltage while cranking the engine. Is the voltage near the specified value? 6 Check the connections at the CKP sensor and replace the terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? 7 Replace the CKP sensor. Use caution to avoid any hot oil that may drip out. Is the action complete? 8 Check connections at the PCM and replace the terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? 9 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
Go to Step 5
2.5 V
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 6
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
Verify repair
Verify repair
Go to Step 9
Verify repair
6E2278
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0337 CKP Sensor Circuit Low Frequency
060R200066
Circuit Description
The 58X reference signal is produced by the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. During one crankshaft revolution, 58 crankshaft reference pulses will be produced. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the 58X reference signal to calculate engine RPM and crankshaft position. The PCM constantly monitors the number of pulses on the 58X reference circuit. If the PCM does not receive pulses on the 58X reference circuit, DTC P0337 will set.



D Engine cranking. D Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor signal is not present between two cam pulses. D CKP reference pulse is not detected within 8 CMP pulses.
6E2279
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed-through wire insulation or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for: D Poor connection Inspect the PCM harness and connectors for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, disconnect
the PCM, turn the ignition on and observe a voltmeter connected to the 58X reference circuit at the PCM harness connector while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the PCM. A change in voltage will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
DTC P0337 CKP Sensor Circuit Low Frequency

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 Attempt to start the engine. Does the engine start?
Go to OBD System Check Go to Chart 3
2 3
1. 2. 3. 4.
Review and record Failure Records information. Clear DTC P0337. Start the engine and idle for 1 minute. Observe DTCs. Go to Step 4
Is DTC P0337 set? 4 1. Disconnect the CKP sensor. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a DVM, verify that 5 V reference and ground are being supplied at the sensor connector (PCM side). Are 4-6 volts and ground available at the sensor? 5 1. Ignition ON. 2. With a DVM, backprobe the PCM connector 5 V reference and ground connections. Are 5 V reference and ground available at the PCM? 6 Check 5 V reference or ground between the CKP sensor and PCM and repair the open circuit, short to ground or short to voltage. Is the action complete? 7 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and CKP sensor. 3. Check for an open or a short to ground in the 58X reference circuit between the CKP sensor connector and the PCM harness connector. 4. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? 8 1. Reconnect the PCM and CKP sensor. 2. Connect a DVM to measure voltage on the 58X reference circuit at the PCM connector. 3. Observe the voltage while cranking the engine. Is the voltage near the specified value? 9 Check the connections at the CKP sensor and replace the terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement?
Refer to Diagnostic Aid
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 11
Verify repair
Verify repair
Go to Step 8
2.5 V
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 9
Verify repair
Go to Step 10
6E2280
DTC P0337 CKP Sensor Circuit Low Frequency (Cont'd)

10
Replace the CKP sensor. Use caution and avoid hot oil that may drip out. Is the action complete? Verify repair Check the connections at the PCM and replace the terminals if necessary. Did any terminals require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 12 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
11
12
6E2281
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0351 Ignition 1 Control Circuit
060R200055
Circuit Description
ION Sensing Module has the function to energize and de-energize the primary ignition coil in response to signals from the PCM. The PCM controls ignition timing and dwell time. This diagnosis detects open circuit or short-circuiting in the Ignition Electronic Spark Timing (EST) line by monitoring EST signals. A failure determination is made when the signal voltage remains higher or lower than the threshold for corresponding fault code beyond a predetermined time period. When the PCM detects a problem on EST control circuit 1, it will set a DTC P0351.
D The output voltage is not equal to 0 volts when output is OFF. D Ten test failures occur within 10 samples of continuous spark events.



D The ignition is ON. D The engine is running, determined by the 58X crankshaft position input signal. D The output voltage is not equal to 5 volts when output is ON.
6E2282

Tech 2 display related to DTC P0351 while moving the connector and wiring related to the ignition system. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect the harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connections. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the
DTC P0351 Ignition 1 Control Circuit

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Record conditions as noted. 4. Use a Tech 2 to monitor the DTC information for DTC P0351 until the DTC P0351 test runs. 5. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0351 failed this ignition cycle? Go to Step 3 Verify repair Verify repair
Go to Diagnostic Aids Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
3 4 5
Check for faulty connection at ignition coil. Was a problem found? Check for faulty connection at PCM connector. Was a problem found? 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Back probe the ignition control circuit 1 at the ION Sensing Module with a DVM. Is the voltage near the specified value? 25-55 mV Go to Step 6 Go to Step 9 1. Ignition ON, engine running. 2. Back probe the ignition control circuit at the ION Sensing Module for the cylinder being tested. Is the voltage in the specified range, rapidly toggling back and forth to a reading 20-50 mV higher? 100-180 mV Go to Step 7 Go to Step 13
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the 3-pin and connector at the ignition coil. 3. Check ignition control circuit 1 voltage at the ignition coil connector while cranking the engine. Does the voltage measure between the specified values? 200-1200 mV Go to Step 8 Verify repair Go to Step 11
8 9
Replace the ignition coil. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM and the ignition coil. 3. Check ignition control circuit 1 for short to ground. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 10 Go to Step 13 Check ignition control circuit 1 for short to voltage. Was a problem found?
10
6E2283
DTC P0351 Ignition 1 Control Circuit (Cont'd)

11 12 13
Check for an open ignition control circuit 1. Was the ignition control circuit open? Repair the open ignition control circuit. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 12 Go to Step 13
6E2284
060R200055
Circuit Description



D The ignition is ON. D The engine is running, determined by the 58 X crankshaft position input signal. D The output voltage is not equal to 5 volts when output is ON.
6E2285
Diagnostic Aids

3 4 5
Check for faulty connection at ignition coil. Was a problem found? Check for faulty connection at PCM connector. Was a problem found? 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Back probe the ignition control circuit 2 at the ION Sensing Module with a DVM . Is the voltage near the specified value? 25-55 mV Go to Step 6 Go to Step 9 1. Ignition ON, engine running. 2. Back probe the ignition control circuit at the ION Sensing Module for the cylinder being tested. Is the voltage in the specified range, rapidly toggling back and forth to a reading 20-50 mV higher? 100-180 mV Go to Step 7 Go to Step 13
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the 3-pin connector at the ignition coil. 3. Check ignition control circuit 2 voltage at the ignition coil connector while cranking the engine connector. Does the voltage measure between the specified 200-1200 mV values? Go to Step 8 Verify repair Go to Step 11
8 9
10
6E2286

11 12 13
6E2287
060R200055
Circuit Description



6E2288

Diagnostic Aids

3 4 5
Check for faulty connection at ignition coil. Was a problem found? Check for faulty connection at PCM connector. Was a problem found? 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Back probe the ignition control circuit 3 at the ION Sensing Module with a DVM positive lead with the negative lead to ground. Is the voltage near the specified value? 25-55 mV Go to Step 6 Go to Step 9 1. Ignition ON, engine running. 2. Back probe the ignition control circuit at the ION Sensing Module for the cylinder being tested. Is the voltage in the specified range, rapidly toggling back and forth to a reading 20-50 mV higher? 100-180 mV Go to Step 7 Go to Step 13
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the 3-pin connector at the ignition coil. 3. Check ignition control circuit 3 voltage at the ignition coil connector while cranking the engine. Does the voltage measure between the specified 200-1200 mV values? Go to Step 8 Verify repair Go to Step 11
8 9
10
6E2289

11 12 13
6E2290
060R200055
Circuit Description



6E2291
Diagnostic Aids

3 4 5
Check for faulty connection at ignition coil. Was a problem found? Check for faulty connection at PCM connector. Was a problem found? 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Back probe the ignition control circuit 4 at the ION Sensing with a DVM positive lead with the negative lead to ground. Is the voltage near the specified value? 25-55 mV Go to Step 6 Go to Step 9 1. Ignition ON, engine running. 2. Back probe the ignition control circuit at the ION Sensing Module for the cylinder being tested. Is the voltage in the specified range, rapidly toggling back and forth to a reading 20-50 mV higher? 100-180 mV Go to Step 7 Go to Step 13
8 9
10
6E2292

11 12 13
Check for an open ignition control circuit 4. Was the ignition control circuit open? Repair the open in ignition control circuit. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 12 Go to Step 13
6E2293
060R200055
Circuit Description
ION Sensing Module has the function to energize and de-energize the primary ignition coil in response to signals from the PCM. The PCM controls ignition timing and dwell time. This diagnosis detects open circuit or short-circuiting in the Ignition Electronic Spark Timing (EST) line by monitoring EST signals. A failure determination is made when the signal voltage remains higher or lower than the threshold for corresponding fault code beyond a predetermined time period. When the PCM detects a problem on EST in control circuit 5, it will set a DTC P0355.



6E2294

Diagnostic Aids

3 4 5
8 9
10
6E2295

11 12 13
6E2296
060R200055
Circuit Description
D The output voltage is not equal to 0 volts when output is OFF. D Ten test failures occur within 10 samples of continuous circuit monitoring.



6E2297
Diagnostic Aids

3 4 5
8 9
10
6E2298

11 12 13
6E2299
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0401 EGR Flow Insufficient
060R200050
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) tests the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system during deceleration by momentarily commanding the EGR valve to open while monitoring the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor signal. When the EGR valve is opened, the PCM monitors the change in MAP input signal. The PCM compares the MAP change to a RPM vs. BARO table. When the PCM interprets the change in MAP to be out of limits, the PCM will set DTC P0401. The number of test samples required to accomplish this may vary according to the severity of the detected flow error. Normally, the PCM will only allow one EGR flow test sample to be taken during an ignition cycle. To aid in verifying a repair, the PCM allows twelve test samples during the first ignition cycle following a Tech 2 Clear Info or a battery disconnect. Between nine and twelve samples should be sufficient for the PCM to determine adequate EGR flow and pass the EGR test.
D A/C clutch status is unchanged. D TCC status is unchanged.
Start Test
D D D D D D TP angle is less than 0.8%. EGR duty cycle is less than 1%. MAP is steady, changing less than 2 kPa. Engine speed is between 1100 RPM and 2000 RPM (M/T). MAP between 10 kPa and 40 kPa. Engine speed is between 900 RPM and 1500 rpm (A/T). The test will be aborted if the vehicle speed changes by more than 16 km/h (10 mph), engine speed changes by more than 100 RPM or the EGR is opened less than 95% of commanded position. The PCM will only run the EGR test during a closed throttle condition. The PCM will only run the EGR test at vehicle speeds above 24 km/h (15 mph). Several deceleration cycles will be necessary to run a sufficient number of EGR flow tests.
D D D

D No TP sensor, vehicle speed sensor (VSS), MAP sensor, IAT sensor, IAC, EGR Pintle Position sensor, ECT sensor, misfire, or automatic transmission DTCs set. D Engine coolant temperature is greater than 60C (140F). D Ignition voltage between 11.5 and 16 volts. D Vehicle speed is greater than 24 km/h (15 mph).

6E2300
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Actual EGR Position display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the EGR valve. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. D Ensure EGR valve is correctly mounted. See On-Vehicle Service. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition. NOTE: If the EGR valve shows signs of excessive heat, check the exhaust system for blockage (possibly a plugged catalytic converter) using the Restricted Exhaust System Check.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart 3. A malfunctioning MAP sensor can set an EGR DTC. The MAP sensor could send a constant signal which is not low enough to set a low MAP DTC. The constant signal from the MAP sensor also may not be high enough to set a high MAP DTC. This step verifies that the MAP sensor is responding.
6E2301
DTC P0401 EGR Flow Insufficient

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC 1404 Is DTC P1404 also set? 1. Start the engine. 2. Monitor the MAP signal with a Tech 2 while idling. 3. While idling, jab the accelerator pedal about halfway down and immediately let the engine return to idle. Did the MAP value on the Tech 2 show an immediate large change? Go to Step 5 Verify repair
2 3
Go to Step 4
4 5
Replace the MAP sensor. Is the action complete? 1. Inspect the exhaust system for modification of original installed parts or leaks. 2. If a problem was found, repair exhaust system as necessary. Was a condition present that required repair? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 6 1. Remove the EGR valve. 2. Visually and physically inspect the pintle, valve passages and the adapter for excessive deposits or any kind of a restriction. 3. If a problem is found, clean or replace EGR system components as necessary. Was a condition present that required repair? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7 1. Remove the EGR inlet and outlet pipes from the exhaust manifold and the intake manifold. 2. Inspect the manifold EGR ports and the EGR inlet and outlet pipes for a blockage caused by excessive deposits or other damage. 3. If a problem is found, correct the condition as necessary. Was a condition present that required repair? Go to Step 8 1. Review and record the Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Clear DTC and monitor the Tech 2 System Info Screen while operating the vehicle as specified in Diagnostic Aids. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0401 until the DTC P0401 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0401 failed this ignition? Repair complete
6E2302
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0402 EGR Pintle Crank Error
060R200050
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the EGR valve pintle position input to ensure that the valve responds properly to commands from the PCM, and to detect a fault if pintle position is stuck open. If the PCM detects a pintle position signal indicates more than 21.5% and more than for 625 msec during cranking, the PCM will set DTC P0402.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Foreign material on EGR valve between pintle and seat may cause EGR stuck open. Inspect foreign material in EGR valve. D Excessive carbon deposit may cause unsmooth operation of EGR valve shaft. Inspect for carbon deposit and clean up inside of carbon deposit. D Poor connection or damaged harnessinspect the wiring harness for damage If the harness appears to be OK, observe the EGR actual position display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to EGR valve. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. NOTE: If the EGR valve shows signs of excessive heat, check the exhaust system for blockage (possibly a plugged catalytic converter) using the Restricted Exhaust System Check.

D Ignition voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. D At Engine revolution less than 600 RPM, EGR pintle position indicates more than 21.0% and more than for 625 msecs.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in Failure Records data.

6E2303
DTC P0402 EGR Pintle Crank Open Error

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0402 until the DTC P0402 test runs. Note the result. Does the Tech 2 indicates DTC P0402 failed this ignition? Go to Step 3
1. Disconnect the EGR valve harness connector. 2. Inspect the EGR valve and connectors for damaged pin or terminals. Were there any damaged pins or terminals? Go to Step 4 Verify repair Go to Step 5 Repair the damaged pin or terminal. Is the action complete? 1. Remove EGR valve from Engine. 2. Inspect EGR valve whether there is any foreign material between seat and pintle. Was any foreign material in EGR valve? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 1. Remove EGR valve foreign material from EGR valve and clean up inside. 2. Visually inspect for damage of pintle and seat, which leakage may occur. Was there any severe damage which affects function? Go to Step 7 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Reconnect. Ignition OFF. Install the Tech 2. Run the engine at idle. On Tech-II, select special function for EGR. Use the UP arrow to increase the EGR from 0% to 40%. Go to Step 9 Verify repair Go to Step 8 Verify repair
4 5
Did EGR work properly? 8 9 Replace the EGR valve. Does DTC P0402 still fail DTC test on the Tech 2? Replace the PCM. Is the action complete?
6E2304
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0404 EGR Open Stuck
060R200050
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the EGR valve pintle position input to ensure that the valve responds properly to commands from the PCM, and to detect a fault if pintle position is different from commanded position. If the PCM detects a pintle position signal indicates more than 15 points different between current and commanded and more than 15 seconds, the PCM will set DTC P0404.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in Failure Records data.


D D D D D The engine is running. Ignition voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. Intake Air Temp is more than 3C (37.4F). Desire EGR position is less than 3%. The difference between desired EGR and current EGR is less than 3%. D Difference EGR pintle position between current and commanded position becomes more than 15% and last more than 15 seconds, and this condition meets three times in a trip. Then it trigger, the PCM lights on.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Excessive carbon deposit on EGR valve shaft may cause EGR stuck open or unsmooth operation. Those carbon deposit may occur by unusual port operation. Clean up carbon may make smooth function of EGR valve. D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the EGR actual position display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to EGR valve. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected the fault.
6E2305
DTC P0404 EGR Open Stuck

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, review and record Tech 2 Failure Records Data. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0404 until the DTC P0404 test runs. Note the result. Does the Tech 2 indicates DTC P0404 failed this ignition? Go to Step 3
1. Disconnect the EGR valve harness connector. 2. Inspect the EGR valve and connectors for damaged pin or terminals. Were there any damaged pins or terminals? Go to Step 4 Verify repair Go to Step 5 Is the action complete? Repair the damaged pin or terminal. 1. Remove EGR valve from Engine. 2. Inspect EGR valve whether there is any excessive carbon deposit on EGR shaft. Was excessive carbon deposit on EGR valve shaft? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 1. Clean up EGR valve shaft and inside of EGR valve. 2. Visually inspect damage of pintle and seat if is bent, leakage may occur. Was there any severe damage which affects function? Go to Step 8 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Reconnect. Ignition OFF. Install the Tech 2. Run the engine at idle. On the Tech 2, select EGR Control Test. Use the UP arrow to increase the EGR from 0% to 40%. Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8 Verify repair
4 5
Did EGR work properly? 8 9 Replace the EGR valve. Does DTC P0404 still fail DTC test on the Tech 2? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
6E2306
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0405 EGR Low Voltage
060R200050
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the EGR valve pintle position input to ensure that the valve responds properly to command from the PCM. If current pintle position voltage indicates less than 0.1 V and last more than 10 seconds, then the PCM will set DTC P0405.


D Ignition voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. D Intake Air Temp is more than 3C (37.4F). D EGR pintle position is less than 2% and last more than 10 sec. Action taken when the DTC sets.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the EGR actual position display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to EGR valve. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected the fault. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in Failure Records data.
6E2307
DTC P0405 EGR Low Voltage

1. Disconnect the EGR valve harness connector. 2. Inspect the EGR valve and connectors for damaged pin or terminals. Were there any damaged pins or terminals? Go to Step 4 Verify repair Go to Step 5 Repair the damaged pin or terminal. Is the action complete? 1. Disconnect the EGR harness connector. 2. Ignition ON. 3. At the EGR valve, use a DVM to check the voltage at the 5 volt reference wire (BLU/RED) and ground. Did the DVM indicate the specified value? 46 V Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 1. Disconnect the EGR harness connector. 2. Measure resistance between terminal 5 volt reference wire and ground. Was resistance in range? 55.5 KW Go to Step 10 Go to Step 17 1. Ignition ON. 2. At the PCM connector, backprobe with a DVM at the 5 volt reference for the EGR valve. Did the DVM indicate the specified value? 46 V Go to Step 8 Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 18 Repair the open 5 volt reference circuit. Is the action complete? Repair the damaged sensor ground wire. Is the action complete? 1. Disconnect the EGR harness 2. Use an ohmmeter to measure between the pintle position pin and the sensor ground pin on the EGR valve. NOTE: J-35616 Connector Test Adapter Kit may be useful for gaining access to the recessed pins on the valve. Was the ohmmeter reading approximately equal to the specified value? 1 to 1.25 KW Go to Step 13 Go to Step 17
4 5
8 9 10
11
1. Ignition ON. 2. Backprobe with a DVM to measure voltage at EGR valve pintle position pin and sensor ground pin. Was voltage in range?
Less than 0.1 V
Go to Step 17
Go to Step 12
6E2308
DTC P0405 EGR Low Voltage (Cont'd)

12
1. Ignition ON. 2. Backprobe with a DVM to measure voltage at PCM sensor ground pin and pintle position pin. Was voltage in range? 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the EGR harness. 3. Check short circuit between EGR pintle position circuit and EGR ground circuit. Was any short circuit?
Less than 0.1 V
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 18
13
Go to Step 14
Go to Step 18
14
Locate and repair the short to ground in the pintle position circuit Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Disconnect the PCM. Ignition ON. Measure the voltage between the EGR pintle position circuit and ground.
15
Is the measured voltage near the specified value? 16 Check for a short circuit between other wires and the pintle position circuit Is there any short circuit?
Less than 0.1 V
Go to Step 17 Repair short circuit and then Verify repair Go to Step 18 Go to Step 4
Go to Step 16
17 18 19 Replace the EGR valve. Does DTC P1404 still fail DTC test on the Tech 2? Examine the PCM pin and terminal connection. Was there a damaged terminal? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 17 Verify repair Go to Step 19
Verify repair
6E2309
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0406 EGR High Voltage
060R200050
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the EGR valve pintle position input to ensure that the valve responds properly to command from the PCM. If current pintle position voltage indicates more than 4.8 V and last more than 10 seconds, then the PCM will set DTC P0406.


D Ignition voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. D Intake Air temp is more than 3C (37.4F). D EGR pintle position is more than 99% and last more than 10 sec.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the EGR actual position display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to EGR valve. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.

6E2310
DTC P0406 EGR High Voltage

1. Disconnect the EGR valve harness connector. 2. Inspect the EGR valve and connectors for damaged pin or terminals. Were there any damaged pins or terminals? Go to Step 4 Verify repair Go to Step 5 Is the action complete? Repair the damaged pin or terminal. Is the action complete? 1. Disconnect the EGR harness connector. 2. Ignition ON. 3. At the EGR valve, use a DVM to check the voltage at the 5 volt reference wire (BLU/RED). Did the DVM indicate the specified value? 46 V Go to Step 8 Go to Step 6 1. Ignition ON. 2. At the PCM connector, backprobe with a DVM at the 5 volt reference for the EGR valve. Did the DVM indicate the specified value? 46 V Go to Step 7 Verify repair Go to Step 16 Repair the open 5 volt reference circuit Is the action complete? 1. Ignition OFF 2. Disconnect the EGR harness. 3. Use a DVM to check for an resistance between 5 V reference and Sensor Ground at EGR sensor terminals. NOTE: J-35616 Connector Test Adapter Kit may be useful for gaining access to the recessed pins on the valve. Was the measured resistance in range? 5 to 5 KW Go to Step 9 Go to Step 15
4 5
7 8
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the EGR harness. 3. Use a DVM to check for an resistance between Sensor Ground and Signal Wire at EGR sensor terminal. Is there an open circuit? Go to Step 15 Go to Step 10 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the EGR harness at PCM connector. 3. Use a DVM to check for shorted wire between S37 and F53. Is there a shorted wire? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 11
10
6E2311
DTC P0406 EGR High Voltage (Cont'd)

11
1. Ignition ON. 2. Use a DVM to backprobe at terminal Connector of EGR valve for voltage. Was measured voltage more than 4.8 V? 1. Ignition ON. 2. Stay the EGR harness connected. 3. Check voltage by backprobing at PCM S37 terminal. Was voltage more than 4.8 V?
more than 4.8 V
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 12
12
4.8 V
Go to Step 16
Go to Step 13
13
1. Locate short circuit at EGR harness between BLU/RED to GRY/RED or GRY/RED to YEL, BLU/RED. 2. Replace EGR harness. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 16 Verify repair Replace EGR harness. Is the action complete? Replace the EGR valve. Does DTC P1404 still fail DTC test on the Tech 2? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
14 15 16
6E2312
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0420 TWC System Low Efficiency Bank 1
T321075
Circuit Description
To control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a three-way catalyst (TWC) is used. The catalyst promotes a chemical reaction which oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas, converting them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx, converting it to nitrogen. The powertrain control module (PCM) has the ability to monitor this process using the Bank 1 HO2S 1 and the Bank 1 HO2S 2 heated oxygen sensors. The Bank 1 HO2S 1 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the three-way catalytic converter. The Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst; this in turn indicates the catalysts ability to convert exhaust gases efficiently. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal will be far more active than that produced by the Bank 1 HO2S 2 sensor. If the PCM detects a level of Bank 1 HO2S 2 activity that indicates the catalyst is no longer operating efficiently, DTC P0420 will be set.
D Barometric Pressure is more than 72 kPa.


Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition. The TWC Monitor Test Counter displayed on the Tech 2 may be used to monitor the progress of the TWC diagnostic. To complete the TWC diagnostic with a good catalyst, the counter must be allowed to increment to 49 samples and roll over to 0 at least twice. A failed catalyst

D D D D D D D D D D No related DTCs. The engine is operating in closed loop, Engine air load is below 99%. Engine coolant temperature is between 70C (158F) and 120C (248F). Mass air flow is between 2.5 g/second and 10 g/second. Engine speed is below 200 RPM. Catalyst temperature is above 350C (662F). The PCM determines that the catalysts oxygen storage capacity is below the acceptable threshold. Intake Air Temperature is between 10C (14F) and 70C (158F). Throttle angle is less than 1.5%.

will require three or more 50-sample tests to report a failure.
6E2313
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 7. Difficulty completing the DTC P0420 Status This Ign, test may be encountered in areas where test conditions cannot be maintained easily, especially in urban areas. To minimize the amount of driving required to complete the DTC P0420 Status This Ign, test, use the following procedure: D Allow the engine to warm up completely. D With the vehicle in Park, monitor mass air flow on the Tech 2 and hold part throttle to maintain a reading of over 12 g/second for at least 2 minutes. This will achieve the warm catalyst required for running the test. D Operate the vehicle in second or third gear to remain in the DTC P0420 test conditions described in Conditions for Setting the DTC as much as possible. If you must stop the vehicle, maintain the warm catalyst criteria as follows: Place the vehicle in Park or Neutral, Hold part throttle to maintain a mass air flow reading of over 15 g/second for the duration of the stop.
6E2314
DTC P0420 TWC System Low Efficiency Bank 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Diagnose other DTC(s) first Are any other DTCs set (such as P0140)?
Go to Step 3
1. Visually and physically inspect the three-way catalytic converter for damage. Check for the following: D dents D severe discoloration caused by excessive temperatures D holes D internal rattle caused by damaged catalyst 2. Also, ensure that the three-way catalytic converter is a proper original equipment manufacturer part. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 4 1. Visually and physically inspect the exhaust system between the three-way catalytic converter and the rear converter flange for leaks, damage, and loose or missing hardware. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? 1. Visually and physically inspect the Bank 1 HO2S 2. 2. Ensure that the Bank 1 HO2S 2 is secure and that the pigtail and wiring harness is not contacting the exhaust pipe or is not otherwise damaged. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Replace the three-way catalytic converter. NOTE: Check for conditions which may cause catalyst damage (refer to Diagnostic Aids). Is the action complete? Go to Step 7 to verify repair
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
1. Review and record the Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Clear DTC P0420. 3. Start the engine and allow it to warm up until the engine coolant temperature monitored on the Tech 2 is above the specified value. 4. Run the engine to maintain the specified mass air flow range for at least 2 minutes. Engine 5. Operate the vehicle to maintain DTC P0420 test coolant temp: conditions (refer to DTC Test Description in greater than Diagnostic Support for detailed instructions). 60C 6. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0420 (140F). until the DTC P0420 test runs. Mass air flow: 7. Note the test result. between 8 Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0420 passed this g/second and ignition? 50 g/second
Complete repair. If a driveability symptom still exists, refer to Symptoms.
Go to the Diagnostic Aids
6E2315
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0430 TWC System Low Efficiency Bank 2
T321075
Circuit Description
To control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a three-way catalyst (TWC) is used. The catalyst promotes a chemical reaction which oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas, converting them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx, converting it to nitrogen. The powertrain control module (PCM) has the ability to monitor this process using the Bank 2 HO2S 1 and the Bank 2 HO2S 2 heated oxygen sensors. The Bank 2 HO2S 1 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the three-way catalytic converter. The Bank 2 HO2S 2 sensor produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst; this in turn indicates the catalysts ability to convert exhaust gases efficiently. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal will be far more active than that produced by the Bank 2 HO2S 2 sensor. If the PCM detects a level of Bank 2 HO2S 2 activity that indicates the catalyst is no longer operating efficiently, DTC P0430 will be set.
D Mass air flow is between 2.5 g/second and 10 g/second. D Change in engine load is below 8%. D Engine speed is below 200 RPM. D Catalyst temperature is above 350C (662F). D The PCM determines that the catalysts oxygen storage capacity is below the acceptable threshold. D Intake air temperature is between 20C (4F) and 70C (158F). D Throttle angle is less than 1.5%. D Barometric Pressure is more than 72 kPa.



D D D D No related DTCs. The engine is operating in closed loop. Engine air load is below 99%. Engine coolant temperature is between 70C (158F) and 120C (248F).
6E2316
Diagnostic Aids
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 7. Difficulty completing the DTC P0430 Status This Ign, test may be encountered in areas where test conditions cannot be maintained easily, especially in urban areas. To minimize the amount of driving required to complete the DTC P0430 Status This Ign, test, use the following procedure: D Allow the engine to warm up completely. D With the vehicle in Park, monitor mass air flow on the Tech 2 and hold part throttle to maintain a reading of over 12 g/second for at least 2 minutes. This will achieve the warm catalyst required for running the test. D Operate the vehicle in second or third gear to remain in the DTC P0430 test conditions described in Conditions for Setting the DTC as much as possible. If you must stop the vehicle, maintain the warm catalyst criteria as follows: Place the vehicle in Park or Neutral, Hold part throttle to maintain a mass air flow reading of over 15 g/second for the duration of the stop. The TWC Monitor Test Counter displayed on the Tech 2 may be used to monitor the progress of the TWC diagnostic. To complete the TWC diagnostic with a good catalyst, the counter must be allowed to increment to 49 samples and roll over to 0 at least twice.
6E2317
DTC P0430 TWC System Low Efficiency Bank 2

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Diagnose other DTC(s) first Are any other DTCs set (such as P0160)?
Go to Step 3
1. Visually and physically inspect the three-way catalytic converter for damage. Check for the following: D dents D severe discoloration caused by excessive temperatures D holes D internal rattle caused by damaged catalyst 2. Also, ensure that the three-way catalytic converter is a proper original equipment manufacturer part. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 4 1. Visually and physically inspect the exhaust system between the three-way catalytic converter and the rear converter flange for leaks, damage, and loose or missing hardware. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? 1. Visually and physically inspect the Bank 2 HO2S 2. 2. Ensure that the Bank 2 HO2S 2 is secure and that the pigtail and wiring harness is not contacting the exhaust pipe or is not otherwise damaged. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Did your inspection reveal a problem? Replace the three-way catalytic converter. NOTE: Check for conditions which may cause catalyst damage (refer to Diagnostic Aids). Is the action complete? Go to Step 7 to verify repair
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
1. Review and record the Tech 2 Failure Records data. 2. Clear DTC P0430. 3. Start the engine and allow it to warm up until the engine coolant temperature monitored on the Tech 2 is above the specified value. 4. Run the engine to maintain the specified mass air flow range for at least 6 minutes. Engine 5. Operate the vehicle to maintain DTC P0430 test coolant temp: conditions (refer to DTC Test Description in greater than Diagnostic Support for detailed instructions). 70C 6. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0430 (158F). until the DTC P0430 test runs. Mass air flow: 7. Note the test result. between 2.5 Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0430 passed this g/second and ignition? 10 g/second
Complete repair. If a driveability symptom still exists, refer to Symptoms.
Go to the Diagnostic Aids
6E2318
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0440 EVAP System
060RY00398
Circuit Description
The evaporative system includes the following components: D Fuel tank D EVAP canister purge duty solenoid valve D Fuel tank (vapor) pressure sensor D Fuel pipes and hoses D Vapor lines D Fuel cap D Evaporative emissions canister D Purge lines D EVAP canister vent valve (purge solenoid) The evaporative leak detection diagnostic strategy is based on applying vacuum to the EVAP system and monitoring vacuum decay. The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors vacuum level via the fuel tank pressure sensor input. At an appropriate time, the EVAP canister purge solenoid and the EVAP canister vent solenoid are turned ON, allowing engine vacuum to draw a small vacuum on the entire evaporative emissions system. If a sufficient vacuum level cannot be achieved, a large leak or a faulty EVAP canister purge solenoid is indicated. This can be caused by the following conditions: D Disconnected or faulty fuel tank pressure sensor D Missing or faulty fuel cap D Disconnected, damaged, pinched, or blocked EVAP purge line D Disconnected or damaged EVAP vent hose
D Disconnected, damaged, pinched, or blocked fuel tank vapor line D Disconnected or faulty EVAP canister duty solenoid D Open ignition feed circuit to the EVAP canister vent solenoid D Damaged EVAP canister D Leaking fuel sender assembly O-ring D Leaking fuel tank or fuel filler neck Any of the above conditions can set DTC P0440.

D No TP sensor, IAT sensor, ECT sensor, or MAP sensor DTCs set. D Start-up engine coolant temperature is less than 32C (90F). D Start-up engine coolant temperature is not more than 7C (13F) greater than start-up intake air temperature. D Start-up intake air temperature is greater than 4C (39F) . D Start-up intake air temperature is not more than 2C (4F) greater than start-up engine coolant temperature. D Vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). D Throttle position is greater than 3%. D Minimal fuel slosh. D BARO is greater than 70 kPa. D The EVAP system is unable to achieve or maintain vacuum during the diagnostic test.

D Engine speed is less than 1200 RPM. D Above conditions are present for 60 to 180 seconds.
6E2319

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected the fault. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. If an EVAP canister vent solenoid or an EVAP canister purge solenoid electrical fault is present, the purge system will not operate correctly. Repairing the electrical fault will very likely correct the condition that set DTC P0440. 3. Checks the fuel tank pressure sensor at ambient pressure. 4. Determines whether or not the EVAP system can be sealed sufficiently to be pressurized. If not, the large leak must be located and corrected before continuing with diagnosis. 5. Verifies that the fuel tank pressure sensor accurately reacts to EVAP system pressure changes. 8. Checks for a blocked EVAP canister purge solenoid. The PCM commands the EVAP canister purge solenoid OFF (open) and the vent solenoid ON (closed) with the Tech 2 System Perf, EVAP output control function activated. Any pressure in the system should be released through the EVAP canister purge solenoid within a few seconds when System Perf, is activated. 9. Ensures that sufficient source vacuum is present at the EVAP canister purge solenoid.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF when the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0440 will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P0440 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Cracked or punctured EVAP canister. D Damaged or disconnected source vacuum line, EVAP purge line, vent hose or fuel tank vapor line. D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harnessInspect the wiring harness to the EVAP canister vent solenoid, EVAP canister purge solenoid and the fuel tank pressure sensor for an intermittent open or short circuit. D Kinked, pinched, or plugged vacuum source, EVAP purge, or fuel tank vapor lineVerify that the lines are not restricted.
DTC P0440 EVAP System

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to other DTC first Is DTC P0452 or P0453 also set? 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Remove the fuel cap. Ignition ON. Observe Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. 1.51 V Go to Step 4
2 3
Does the Tech 2 indicate Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? 4 1. Replace the fuel cap. 2. Engine is running. 3. Observe Fuel Tank Vacuum on the Tech 2. Does Tech 2 indicate Fuel Tank Vacuum at the specified value?
Go to DTC P0452 or DTC P0453
1.471.51 V
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 6
6E2320
DTC P0440 EVAP System (Cont'd)

Ignition OFF. 1. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor line and the EVAP purge line from the EVAP canister. 2. Block the canister fitting for the fuel tank vapor line. 3. Connect a hand vacuum pump to the canister fitting for the EVAP purge line. 4. Ensure that the EVAP canister vent solenoid is still commanded ON (closed). 5. Attempt to apply vacuum to the EVAP canister. Observe Fuel tank pressure on the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 indicate Fuel tank pressure at the specified value? 1.471.51 V Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7
1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Restricted fuel tank vapor line. D Restricted EVAP purge line. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Vent hose disconnected or the damaged. D EVAP canister damaged. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to DTC P0452 or DTC P0453
Go to Step 11
1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Missing or faulty fuel cap. D Disconnected or leaking fuel tank vapor line. D Disconnected or damaged EVAP purge line. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 9 Replace the EVAP canister purge solenoid. Is the action complete? Locate and repair cause of no source vacuum to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Replace the EVAP canister vent solenoid. Is the action complete?
9 10
11
6E2321
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0442 EVAP System Small Leak Detected
060RY00398
Circuit Description
The evaporative system includes the following components: D Fuel tank D EVAP canister vent solenoid D Fuel tank (vapor) pressure sensor D Fuel pipes and hoses D Vapor lines D Fuel cap D Evaporative emissions canister D Purge lines D EVAP canister purge solenoid The evaporative leak detection diagnostic strategy is based on applying vacuum to the EVAP system and monitoring vacuum decay. The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors vacuum level via the fuel tank pressure sensor input. At an appropriate time, the EVAP canister purge solenoid and the EVAP canister vent solenoid are turned ON, allowing engine vacuum to draw a small vacuum on the entire evaporative emissions system. After the desired vacuum level has been achieved, the EVAP canister purge solenoid is turned OFF, sealing the system. A leak is detected by monitoring for a decrease in vacuum level over a given time period, all other variables remaining constant. A small leak in the system will cause DTC P0442 to be set.

D No TP sensor, ECT sensor, Tank pressure sensor, IAT sensor, or MAP sensor DTCs set. D BARO is more than 70 kPa. D Engine speed is less than 1200 RPM. D Fuel level is between 15% and 85%. D Vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). D The DTC P0440 diagnostic test has passed. D A vacuum decay condition, indicating a small leak, is detected during the diagnostic test.


6E2322

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Cracked or punctured EVAP canister. D Damaged source vacuum line, EVAP purge line, EVAP vent hose or fuel tank vapor line. D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harnessInspect the wiring harness to the EVAP canister vent solenoid, EVAP canister purge solenoid and the fuel tank pressure sensor for an intermittent open or short circuit. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. If an EVAP canister vent solenoid or an EVAP canister purge solenoid electrical fault is present, the purge system will not operate correctly. Repairing the electrical fault will very likely correct the condition that set DTC P0442. 3. Checks the fuel tank pressure sensor at ambient pressure. 4. Verifies that the fuel tank pressure sensor accurately reacts to EVAP system pressure changes.
DTC P0442 EVAP System Leak Detected

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Remove the fuel cap. Ignition ON. Observe Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. 1.51V Go to Step 3
Does the Tech 2 indicate Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? 3 IMPORTANT: Before continuing with diagnosis, zero the EVAP pressure and vacuum gauges on EVAP pressure/purge cart J 41413 (refer to tool operating instructions). 1. Replace the fuel cap. 2. Capture Failure Records data for DTC P0442 and clear DTCs. 3. Connect the EVAP pressure/purge cart J 41413 to the EVAP service port. 4. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP canister vent solenoid ON (closed). 5. Using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J 41413, pressurize the EVAP system to the specified value. 6. Observe Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 indicate Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? 4 1. Ignition ON, engine idling. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP canister vent solenoid ON (closed). 3. Using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J 41413, pressurize the EVAP system to 15 in. H2O. 4. Switch the rotary switch on the cart to HOLD and observe the EVAP pressure gauge. Does the pressure decrease to less than the specified value within 30 seconds?
Go to Fuel Tank Pressure System
1.47V
Go to Step 4
1.47 1.51V
Go to Step 5
6E2323
DTC P0442 EVAP System Leak Detected (Cont'd)

1. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor line and the EVAP purge line from the EVAP canister. 2. Block the canister fitting for the fuel tank vapor line. 3. Connect a hand vacuum pump to the canister fitting for the EVAP purge line. 4. Ensure that the EVAP canister vent solenoid is still commanded ON (closed). 5. Attempt to apply vacuum to the EVAP canister. Can the vacuum be maintained at the specific value? 1.46V Go to Step 8 Go to Step 6 1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Vent hose disconnected or damaged. D EVAP canister damaged. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 7 Replace the EVAP canister vent solenoid. Is the action complete? 1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Missing or faulty fuel cap. D Disconnected or leaking fuel tank vapor line. D Disconnected or damaged EVAP purge line. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9 1. Using Tech 2, command the EVAP canister vent solenoid ON (closed). 2. With the cart connected to the EVAP service port, continuously attempt to pressurize the EVAP system by leaving the cart control knob in the pressurize position. 3. Using ultrasonic leak detector J 41416, locate and repair leak in EVAP system. (It may be necessary to partially lower the fuel tank to examine the connections on top of the tank.) Is the action complete? Go to Step 10 1. Ignition ON, engine not running. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP canister vent solenoid ON (closed). 3. Using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J 41413, pressurize and monitor the EVAP system to 15 in. H2O. 4. Switch the rotary switch on the cart to HOLD and observe the EVAP pressure gauge. Does the pressure decrease to less than the specified value within 30 seconds? 2.14V Go to Step 2 Verify repair
7 8
10
6E2324
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0444 EVAP Purge Control Circuit Open
060RY00398
Circuit Description
The canister purge solenoid valve is controlled by the Power Train Control Module (PCM).The PCM monitors vacuum level via the fuel tank pressure sensor input. At an appropriate time, the EVAP canister purge solenoid is ON, allowing engine vacuum to draw a small vacuum on the entire evaporative emissions system.
D DTC P0444 can be cleared using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the EVAP purge solenoid display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0444 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P0444 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.

D The Ignition is ON. D Engine is running. D System voltage is between 11.5 volts and 16 volts.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set in the Failure Records data only.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0444 will clear after 40 consecutive trip cycles during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault.
6E2325
DTC P0444 EVAP Purge Control Circuit Open

1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Ignition is ON, 3. Engine is ON and operate the accelerator pedal for 3 or 4 times. 4. Observe the EVAP purge solenoid reading on the Tech 2. Is the EVAP purge solenoid reading near the specified More than 1% value?
Go to Step 3
Check the power supply circuit. 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition is OFF. Disconnect the canister purge solenoid valve. Ignition is ON. Using a DVM, measure at the EVAP purge solenoid connector between ground and voltage supply.
Was the measurement near the specified value? 4 Check the signal circuit for the EVAP purge solenoid. 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition is OFF. Disconnect the canister purge solenoid valve. Disconnect the PCM. Check the circuit between EVAP purge solenoid connector and PCM connector.
Battery voltage
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5
Is the problem found? 5 6 Repair the circuit as necessary. Is the action complete? Check the canister purge solenoid valve. Using a DVM, measure resistance for purge solenoid valve connector terminal. Is the purge solenoid valve resistance within the specified values? 7 8 Replace the canister purge solenoid valve. Is the action complete? Replace the IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement PCM must be
Go to Step 6
2530 W (at 68F{20C})
Go to Step 7
6E2326
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0445 EVAP Purge Control Circuit Short
060RY00398
Circuit Description
The canister purge solenoid valve is controlled by the Power Train Control Module (PCM). The PCM monitors vacuum level via the fuel tank pressure sensor input. At an appropriate time, the EVAP canister purge solenoid is ON, allowing engine vacuum to draw a small vacuum on the entire evaporative emissions system.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the EVAP purge solenoid display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0445 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P0445 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.



6E2327
DTC P0445 EVAP Purge Control Circuit Short

1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Ignition is ON, 3. Observe the EVAP purge solenoid reading on the Tech 2. Is the EVAP purge solenoid reading near the specified value? 0%
Go to Step 3
Check the signal circuit for canister purge solenoid valve. 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition is OFF. Disconnect the canister purge solenoid valve. Disconnect the PCM. Check the circuit between EVAP purge solenoid connector and PCM connector. Go to Step 4 Verify repair Go to Step 5
Is the problem found? 4 5 Repair the circuit as necessary. Is the action complete? Check the canister purge solenoid valve. Using a DVM, measure resistance for purge solenoid valve connector terminal. Is the purge solenoid valve resistance within the specified values? 6 7 Replace the canister purge solenoid valve. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement PCM must be
2530 (at 68F{20C})
Go to Step 6
6E2328
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0446 EVAP Canister Vent Control Malfunction
060RY00398
Circuit Description
The evaporative system includes the following components: D Fuel tank D EVAP canister vent solenoid D Fuel tank (vapor) pressure sensor D Fuel pipes and hoses D Vapor lines D Fuel cap D Evaporative emissions canister D Purge lines D EVAP canister purge solenoid An incorrect fuel tank pressure sensor signal is detected by monitoring fuel tank pressure when the key is first turned ON during a cold start. If the fuel tank pressure signal is out of range, DTC P0446 will set. A restricted or blocked EVAP vent path is detected by monitoring fuel tank pressure during normal operation (EVAP canister vent solenoid open, EVAP canister purge solenoid normal). With the EVAP canister vent solenoid open, vacuum level in the system should be very low unless the vent path is blocked. A blockage can be caused by the following condition: D Faulty EVAP canister vent solenoid (stuck closed). D Plugged, kinked or pinched vent hose. D Shorted EVAP canister vent solenoid driver circuit. D Plugged evaporative canister.
If any of these conditions are present, DTC P0446 will set.

D No TP sensor, ECT sensor, Tank pressure sensor, IAT sensor, or MAP sensor DTCs set. D Start-up engine coolant temperature and start-up intake air temperature are more than 4C (39F) but less than 34C(93F). D Start-up engine coolant temperature is not more than 7C (13F) greater than start-up intake air temperature. D Fuel tank level is between 15% and 85%. D BARO is greater than 70 kPa.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected the fault. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC set as Freeze Frame and Failure Records data.


6E2329
how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harnessInspect the wiring harness to the EVAP canister vent solenoid, EVAP canister purge solenoid and the fuel tank pressure sensor for an intermittent open or short circuit. D Kinked, pinched, or plugged vent hoseVerify that the vent hose between the EVAP canister and EVAP canister vent solenoid is not restricted. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. If a vent solenoid electrical fault is present, the purge system will not operate correctly. Repairing the electrical fault will very likely correct the condition that set DTC P0446. 3. Checks the fuel tank pressure sensor at ambient pressure. 4. Verifies that the fuel tank pressure sensor accurately reacts to EVAP system pressure changes. 6. Checks for a blocked EVAP canister.
DTC P0446 EVAP Canister Vent Control Malfunction

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON. 2. Capture Failure Records data for DTC P0446 and clear DTCs. 3. Ignition OFF. 4. Remove the fuel cap. 5. Ignition ON. 6. Observe Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. Does Tech 2 indicate Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? 1.51V Go to Step 3
IMPORTANT: Before continuing with diagnosis, zero the EVAP pressure and vacuum gauges on the EVAP pressure/purge cart J 41413 (refer to tool operating instructions). 7. Replace the fuel cap. 8. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid ON (closed). 9. Connect the EVAP pressure/purge cart J 41413 to the EVAP service port. 10.Using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J 41413, pressurize the EVAP system to the specified value. 11. Observe Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. Does Tech 2 indicate Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? 1.52 1.69V Go to Step 4
1. Maintain the EVAP pressure at 5 in. at H2O. 2. Using Tech 2, command the EVAP vent solenoid OFF (open) while observing the EVAP pressure gauge on the cart J 41413. Does the EVAP pressure return to the specified value within 30 seconds? 0 in. H2O
Go to Step 5
6E2330
DTC P0446 EVAP Canister Vent Control Malfunction (Cont'd)

1. Disconnect the large vent hose (marked AIR) from the EVAP canister. 2. Switch the rotary switch on the cart J 41413 to PURGE. 3. Ignition ON, engine idling at normal operating temperature. 4. Observe vacuum gauge for 5 seconds while holding the engine speed at 2500 RPM. Does the vacuum remain less than the specified value? 30 in. H2O Go to Step 6 Go to Step 8 1. Inspect the vent hose between the EVAP canister and the EVAP canister vent solenoid for kinks, pinched areas, or any other form of blockage. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 7 Replace the EVAP canister vent solenoid. Is the action complete? Replace the EVAP canister. Is the action complete? 1. Using Tech 2, command the EVAP canister vent solenoid ON (closed). 2. Using the EVAP pressure/purge cart J 41413, pressurize and monitor the EVAP system to 15 in. H2O. 3. Switch the rotary switch on cart J 41413 to HOLD. 4. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP canister vent solenoid OFF (open) while observing the EVAP pressure gauge on cart J 41413. Does the EVAP pressure return to the specified value within 30 seconds? 0 in. H2O Verify repair Go to Step 2
7 8 9
6E2331
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0447 EVAP Vent Solenoid Circuit Open
060RY00398
Circuit Description
The canister purge solenoid valve is controlled by the Power Train Control Module (PCM).The PCM monitors vacuum level via the fuel tank pressure sensor input. At an appropriate time, the EVAP canister vent solenoid is ON, allowing engine vacuum to draw a small vacuum on the entire evaporative emissions system.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the EVAP vent valve display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0447 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P0447 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.



6E2332
DTC P0447 EVAP Vent Solenoid Circuit Open

1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Ignition is ON, 3. Engine is ONand operate the acceleration pedal for 3 or 4 times. 4. Observe the EVAP vent solenoid reading on the Tech 2. Is the EVAP vent solenoid reading to ON? Check the power supply circuit. 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition is OFF. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid valve. Ignition is ON. Using a DVM, measure at the EVAP vent solenoid connector between ground and voltage supply.
Go to Step 3
Was the measurement near the specified value? 4 Check the signal circuit for vent solenoid valve. 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition is OFF. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid valve. Disconnect the PCM. Check the circuit between EVAP vent solenoid connector and PCM connector.
Battery voltage
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5
Is the problem found? 5 6 Repair the circuit as necessary. Is the action complete? Check the canister vent solenoid valve. Using a DVM, measure resistance for vent solenoid valve connector terminal. Is the vent solenoid valve resistance within the specified values? 7 8 Replace the canister vent solenoid valve. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement PCM must be
21.8-28.5W (at 68F{20C}) Verify repair
6E2333
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0448 EVAP Vent solenoid Circuit Short
060RY00398
Circuit Description
The canister purge solenoid valve is controlled by the Power Train Control Module (PCM). The PCM monitors vacuum level via the fuel tank pressure sensor input. At an appropriate time, the EVAP canister vent solenoid is ON, allowing engine vacuum to draw a small vacuum on the entire evaporative emissions system.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the EVAP vent valve display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0448 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P0448 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.



6E2334
DTC P0448 EVAP Vent Solenoid Circuit Short

1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Ignition is ON, 3. Observe the EVAP vent solenoid reading on the Tech 2. Is the EVAP vent solenoid reading near the specified value? 0%
Go to Step 3
Check the signal circuit for canister vent solenoid valve. 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition is OFF. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid valve. Disconnect the PCM. Check the circuit between EVAP vent solenoid connector and PCM connector. Go to Step 4 Verify repair Go to Step 5
Is the problem found? 4 5 Repair the circuit as necessary. Is the action complete? Check the canister vent solenoid valve. Using a DVM, measure resistance for purge solenoid valve connector terminal. Is the vent solenoid valve resistance within the specified values? 6 7 Replace the canister vent solenoid valve. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement PCM must be
21.8-28.5W (at 68F{20C})
Go to Step 6
6E2335
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0452 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor (Vapor Pressure Sensor) Low Voltage
060R200050
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors fuel tank pressure sensor (Vapor pressure sensor) of the Enhanced Evap system. When the tank pressure output indicates low voltage, PCM will set DTC P0452.

D Tank sensor output is less than 0.2 volts for 12.5 sec. D 100 test failures within a 200 tests.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Open circuit of 5 volt reference line Inspect wiring harness from PCM to the sensor. The PCM turns P0452, and P0107 at the same time. D Open circuit or short circuit to ground line Inspect wiring harness from PCM to the sensor. The PCM turns P0452 and P0107 at the same time. D Tank fuel pressure sensor malfunction may cause P0452. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.


6E2336
DTC P0452 Tank Pressure Sensor Low Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, review and record Tech 2 Failure Records Data. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0452 until the DTC P0452 test runs. Note the result. Does the Tech 2 indicates DTC P0452 or P0452/P0107 failed this ignition?
P0452/P0107 turn on Go to Step 3 P0452 turns on Go to Step 6
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect connector at the PCM. Ignition ON. At the PCM connector, measure voltage with a DVM at F54 and S37 terminals. 46 V Go to Step 4 Go to Step 10
Was the voltage in range? 4 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Connect the PCM connector to the PCM. 3. Backprobe with a DVM at fuel tank pressure sensor between 5 V reference terminal and sensor ground terminal. Was the voltage within range? 5 1. Locate open wiring of 5 volt reference circuit from the PCM to fuel tank pressure sensor. 2. Repair wiring harness. Is the action complete? 6 1. Ignition ON 2. At the PCM connector, backprobe with a DVM at the sensor output for the voltage. Was voltage within the range? 7 At the sensor output terminal, backprobe with a DVM at the sensor output Was voltage within range? 8 1. Locate open circuit or short circuit to ground line. 2. Repair the harness. Is the action complete?
46 V
For P0452 go to Step 5 and for P0107, go to diagnosis section.
Go to Step 5
Verify repair
Less than 0.2 V Less than 0.2 V
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 8
Verify repair
6E2337
DTC P0452 Tank Pressure Sensor Low Voltage (Cont'd)

1. Locate open circuit or short circuit to ground line. 2. Repair the harness. Is the action complete? Verify repair Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10
6E2338
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0453 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor (Vapor Pressure Sensor) High Voltage
060R200050
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors fuel tank pressure sensor (Vapor pressure sensor) of the Enhanced Evap system. When the tank pressure output indicates high voltage , PCM will set DTC P0453.
D A history DTC P0453 will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles have occurred without a fault. D Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Open circuit of sensor ground line Inspect wiring harness from PCM to the sensor. The PCM turns P0453, and P0108 at the same time. D Open circuit or short circuit to 5 volt reference line Inspect wiring harness from PCM to the sensor. The PCM turns P0453 and P0108 at the same time. D Tank fuel pressure sensor malfunction may cause P0453. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

D Tank sensor output is more than 4.9 volts for 12.5 sec. D 100 test failures within a 200 tests.


6E2339
DTC P0453 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor High Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, review and record Tech 2 Failure Records Data. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P0453 until the DTC P0453 test runs. Note the result. Does the Tech 2 indicates DTC P0452 or P0452/P0107 failed this ignition?
P0453/P0108 turn on Go to Step 3 P0452 turns on Go to Step 6
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Disconnect connector at the PCM. Ignition ON. At the PCM connector, measure voltage with a DVM at F54 and S37 terminals. 46 V Go to Step 4 Go to Step 10
Was the voltage in range of voltage? 4 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Connect the PCM connector to the PCM. 3. Disconnect sensor harness at fuel pressure sensor. Measure voltage with a DVM at the end of the tank pressure wiring between 5 V reference terminal and sensor ground terminal. Was the voltage within range? 5 1. Locate open wiring of ground line from the PCM to fuel tank pressure sensor. 2. Repair wiring harness. Is the action complete? 6 1. Ignition ON. 2. At the PCM connector, backprobe with a DVM at the sensor output for the voltage. Was voltage within range? 7 At the sensor output terminal, backprobe with a DVM at the sensor output. Was the voltage within range? 8 1. Locate open circuit or short circuit to ground line. 2. Repair the harness. Is the action complete?
46 V
For P0453 go to Step 6 and for P0108, go to diagnosis section.
Go to Step 5
Verify repair
More than 4.9 V More than 4.9 V
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 8
Verify repair
6E2340
DTC P0453 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor High Voltage (Cont'd)

9 10
Replace the tank pressure sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair
6E2341
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0456 EVAP Very Small Leak
060R200050
Circuit Description
The evaporative system includes the following components: D Fuel tank D EVAP canister vent solenoid D Fuel tank (vapor) pressure sensor D Vapor lines D Fuel cap D Evaporative emissions canister D Purge lines D EVAP canister purge solenoid The evaporative leak detection diagnostic strategy is based on applying vacuum to the EVAP system and monitoring vacuum decay. The powertrain control module(PCM)monitors vacuum level via the fuel tank pressure sensor input. At an appropriate time, the EVAP canister purge solenoid and the EVAP canister vent solenoid are turned ON, allowing engine vacuum to draw a very small look on the entire evaporative emissions system. After the desired vacuum level has been achieved, the EVAP canister purge solenoid is turned OFF, sealing the system. A leak is detected by monitoring for a decrease in vacuum level over a given time period, all other variables remaining constant. A very small leak in the system will cause DTC P0456 to be set.

D D D D D D D D D D D No MAP DTCs set. No TPS DTCs set. No IAT DTCs set. No ECT DTCs set. No tank pressure sensor DTCs set. Baro is more than 70KPa. Fuel level is between 40% and 80%. Throttle angle is less than 3%. Engine speed is less than 1200 RPM. Vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). A vacuum decay condition, indicating a very small leak, is detected during the diagnostic test.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will store condition which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data. Warm up cycles have occurred without a fault.

6E2342
D A history DTC P0456 will clear after 40 consecutive trip cycle during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P0456 can be cleared using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Cracked or punctured EVAP canister. D Damaged source vacuum line, EVAP purge line, EVAP vent hose or fuel tank vapor line. to wire connection. D Poor connection at PCMInspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness to the EVAP canister purge solenoid and the fuel tank pressure sensor for an intermittent open or short circuit. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
6E2343
Diagnostic Trouble Code(DTC)P0456 EVAP Very Small Leak

1. 2. 3. 4.
Ignition OFF. Remove the fuel cap. Ignition ON. Observe Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. 1.51V Go to Step 3
Does the Tech 2 indicate Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? 3 1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Vent hose disconnected or damaged. D EVAP canister damaged. D Fuel cap damaged 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? 4 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF. Install the fuel cap. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 5. Using theTech 2,monitor the DTC info for DTC P0456. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P0456? 5 1. Ignition ON, engine idling. 2. Observe Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. Does the Tech 2 indicate Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? 6 1. Ignition ON, engine idling. 2. Using theTech 2, command the EVAP canister vent solenoid ON (closed) 3. Observe EVAP canister vent solenoid operation second value? 4. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? 7 1. Visually/physically check for the following conditions: D Disconnected or leaking fuel tank vapor line. D Disconnected or damaged EVAP purge line. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?
Verify repair
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
Verify repair
6E2344
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0461 Fuel Level Sensor Performance
060RY00163
Circuit Description
When there are 12 test failures within 80 test samples, it is stored.


D DTC P0461 can be cleared by using the scan tool Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D Sensor output change is more than 2% within 200km. Or Sensor movement position change is less than 15% within 200km. D IAT is more than 0C. D MAP changing in 3 sec is less than 10kPa. D Engine speed changing in 3 sec is less than 50rpm.
Diagnostic Aids
6E2345
DTC P0461 Fuel Level Sensor Performance

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition Off, Engine Off. Install Tech 2. Ignition On, Engine Off. Check DTC P0462, P0463.
Was the DTC stored? 3 4 Check DTC P0464. Was the DTC stored? 1. Ignition Off, Engine Off. 2. Replace the fuel level sensor. Was the action complete?
Go to applicable DTC table Go to DTC P464 table
Verify repair
6E2346
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0462 Fuel Level Sensor CircuitLow Voltage
060RY00163
Circuit Description
The fuel level sensor is an important input to powertrain control module (PCM) for the enhanced evaporative system diagnostic. Fuel level information is needed for the PCM to know the volume of fuel in the tank. The fuel level affects the rate of change in air pressure in the evaporative system. Several of the enhanced evaporative system diagnostic sub-tests are dependent upon correct fuel level information. The diagnostic will not run when the tank is more than 85% or less than 15% full. Fuel level DTCs should be diagnosed before other evaporative system DTCs because they can cause other DTCs to be set. The sending unit is a float in the fuel tank which moves a wiper arm across a variable resistor. Low fuel level causes high resistance in the sending unit, and this is recognized by the PCM because the circuit operates at a corresponding low voltage. When the circuit is continuously open or has a high resistance connection, DTC P0462 is set.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected the fault. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF after three consecutive trips without a fault condition present. A history DTC will be cleared if no fault conditions have been detected for 40 warm-up cycles (engine coolant temperature has risen 4C (40F) from the start-up ECT, and ECT exceeds 71C (160F) during that same ignition cycle). D DTC P0462 can be cleared by using the scan tool Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Diagnostic Aids

D D D D D Fuel tank level slosh test is completed. Fuel tank level main test is completed. Fuel tank level data is valid. Fuel tank level signal is less than a specified value. There are 100 test failures within a 200-test sample.
6E2347
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 8. The following chart can be used to check the sending unit:
6E2348
DTC P0462 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Disconnected the fuel level sensor harness from its connector at the fuel tank. 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 3. Using a DVM, measure the voltage between the sensor harness positive and ground wires. Is the voltage approximately equal to the specified value? 5V Go to Step 6
Go to Step 3
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. With a DVM, backprobe the PCM connector at the terminal which supplies 5 volts to the fuel level sensor. Is the voltage approximately equal to the specified value? 5V Go to Step 4 Go to Step 9
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Fuel level sensor disconnected from wiring harness. 3. With a DVM, probe the 5-volt supply wire at the sensor harness. Is the voltage approximately equal to the value measured in Step 4? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 9
Check for open or high resistance connection in the ground wire between the PCM and the fuel level sensor. Is the action complete? Verify repair Remove the fuel level sensor and check the following: D Does the arm move freely? D Are the wires open or intermittently open when wiggled? D Do the resistance values match the specification chart? Was a problem found? Go to Step 7 Verify repair Go to Step 9 Replace the fuel level sensor. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
7 8
Short to ground between the PCM connector and the fuel level sensor. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2349
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0463 Fuel Level Sensor CircuitHigh Voltage
060RY00163
Circuit Description
The fuel level sensor is an important input to powertrain control module (PCM) for the enhanced evaporative system diagnostic. Fuel level information is needed for the PCM to know the volume of fuel in the tank. The fuel level affects the rate of change in air pressure in the evaporative system. Several of the enhanced evaporative system diagnostic sub-tests are dependent upon correct fuel level information. The diagnostic will not run when the tank is more than 85% or less than 15%, full. Fuel level DTCs should be diagnosed before other evaporative system DTCs because they can cause other DTCs to be set. The sending unit is a float in the fuel tank which moves a wiper arm across a variable resistor. High fuel level causes low resistance in the sending unit. This is recognized by the PCM because the circuit operates at a corresponding high voltage. When the circuit is continuously shorted to a voltage source greater than a specified value, or when the 5 volt signal is shorted to ground, DTC P0463 is set.


D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF after three consecutive trips without a fault condition present. A history DTC will be cleared if no fault conditions have been detected for 40 warm-up cycles (engine coolant temperature has risen 4C (40F) from the start-up ECT, and ECT exceeds 71C (160F) during that same ignition cycle) or the scan tool clearing function has been used. D DTC P0463 can be cleared by using the scan tool Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D D D D D Fuel tank level slosh test is completed. Fuel tank level main test is completed. Fuel tank level data is valid. Fuel tank level signal is greater than a specified value. There are 100 test failures within a 200-test sample.
6E2350
Diagnostic Aids
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. The ETC and MAP sensors share a ground at PCM terminal D9. 9. Equates the resistance values at various float positions to the following fuel gauge readings:
DTC P0463 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit High Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Disconnected the fuel level sensor harness from its connector at the fuel tank. 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 3. Using a DVM, measure the voltage between the sensor harness positive and ground wires. Is the voltage approximately equal to the specified value? 5V Go to Step 8
Go to Step 3
With the negative DVM lead connected to ground, use the positive DVM lead to probe the sensor ground wire with the harness still disconnected. Does the DVM indicate a short to a voltage source? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5 Repair short to voltage between the sensor and the PCM. Is the repair complete? Verify repair With the negative DVM lead connected to ground, use the positive DVM lead to probe the sensor positive wire with the harness still disconnected. Does the DVM indicate a voltage greater than the specified value? 5V Go to Step 4 Verify repair Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7
6 7
Open circuit between the PCM connector and the fuel level sensor? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Verify repair
Remove the fuel level sensor and check the following: D Does the arm move freely? D Are the wire leads shorted together? D Do the resistance values match the specification chart? Was a problem found? Go to Step 9 Verify repair Go to Step 7 Replace the fuel level sensor. Is the repair complete?
6E2351
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0462 Fuel Level Sensor Noisy Signal
060RY00163
Circuit Description
When there are 12 test failures within 80 test samples, it is stored.



D D D D D Sensor output changing is more than 15%. Fuel volume level is more than 0.01%. IAT is more than 0C. Vehicle speed is more than 1km/h. Throttle position is more than 2%.
Diagnostic Aids
6E2352
DTC P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Noisy Signal

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition Off, Engine Off. 2. Perform Visual/Physical Check for following points. D Lose harness connector D Clacked harness connector D Poor wire condition D Fuel tank condition D Poor sensor condition 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 3
1. Disassemble fuel tank on the vehicle. 2. Check the below items. D Fuel sender Was a problem found? Go to Step 4 Verify repair Go to Step 5 Go to Step 5 Replace the Fuel sender. Was the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Was the action completed? Verify repair
4 5
6E2353
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0502 VSS Circuit Low Input
060R200056
Circuit Description
The vehicle speed sensor has a magnet rotated by the transmission output shaft. Attached to the sensor is a hall effect circuit the interacts with the magnetic field treated by the rotating magnet. A 12-volt operating supply for the speed sensor hall circuit is supplied from the meter fuse. The VSS pulses to ground the 9-volt signal sent from the powertrain control module (PCM) on the reference circuit. The PCM interprets vehicle speed by the number of pulses to ground per second on the reference circuit.

Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 10. To avoid backprobing the VSS and possibly damaging a seal or terminal, the VSS output can be tested at the point where the transmission harness connects to the engine harness. Power and ground are applied by jumpers to the VSS through the connectors which are located to the rear of the air cleaner assembly. The VSS signal is monitored with a DVM as the rear driveshaft turns. The wheels can be turned to rotate the driveshaft, or in 2-wheels-drive vehicles the driveshaft can be turned directly.

D D D D D Engine is running. Engine speed is between 1800 RPM and 2500 RPM. Throttle angle is between 10% and 40%. Engine load is greater than 50 kPa. PCM detects no VSS signal for 12.5 seconds over a period of 15 seconds.

6E2354
DTC P0502 VSS Circuit Low Input

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 10 Does the speedometer work? 1. Disconnect the VSS connector. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a test light to battery +, probe the connector ground wire. Did the light illuminate? Go to Step 5 Verify repair
2 3
Go to Step 4
4 5
Repair the sensor ground. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition ON, sensor disconnected. 2. Using a DVM, measure at the VSS connector between ground and voltage supply. Was the measurement near the specified value? Repair the open or short to ground which may have blown the meter fuse. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Ignition ON, VSS disconnected. 2. Using a DVM, measure at the VSS connector between ground and the wire from the speedometer. Was the measurement near the specified value? 7.5-8 V Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8 Check for an open or short circuit between the speedometer and the VSS. Was an open or short circuit located? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 9 Replace the speedometer. Is the action complete?
Battery voltage
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 6
6E2355
DTC P0502 VSS Circuit Low Input (Cont'd)

10
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the MAF sensor. The connector attaches the VSS wires from the transmission harness to the left-side engine harness. 3. Disconnect the black 16-way connector. 4. Select a terminal adapter from kit J 35616 that can be used with a jumper to supply B+ to the blue wire with a yellow tracer (transmission side of the connector). 5. Use another terminal adapter to attach a voltmeter to the light-green wire with a white tracer (next to the wire in the previous step.) 6. Disconnect the blue connector next to the black 16-way connector, and locate the black/red tracer wire at one corner of the blue connector. The black/red wire is the VSS ground. Use a terminal adapter to attach a jumper to ground to the black/red VSS ground wire at the transmission side of the blue connector. 7. Raise the rear wheels off the ground with transmission in neutral. Does the DVM toggle back and forth between 0.6 V and 10 V as the wheels (and driveshaft) are rotated? Go to Step 11 Verify repair Go to Step 12
11 12
Replace the VSS. Is the action complete? Check for an open or short between the PCM and the speedometer. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 13 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. ANd also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
13
6E2356
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0506 Idle Air Control System Low RPM
060R200057
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) controls engine speed by adjusting the position of the throttle control valve (DC motor). The throttle motor is a DC motor driven by one coil. The PCM applies current to the DC motor coil in position (%) to adjustment the throttle valve into a passage in the throttle body to air flow. This method allows highly accurate control of engine speed and quick response to changes in engine load. If the PCM detects a condition where too low of an idle speed is present and the PCM is unable to adjust idle speed by increasing the throttle position, DTC P0506 will set, indicating a problem with the idle control system.
D Engine speed is more than 100-200 RPM lower than desired idle based upon coolant temperature.



D No TPS, VSS, ECT, EGR, MAF, MAP, IAT, low voltage, fuel system, canister purge, injector control, or ignition control DTCs are set. D MAP is less than 60 kPa. D Canister purge duty cycle is above 10%. D Engine running time is more than 125 seconds. D Vehicle speed is less than 1 mph. D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) is above 50C (122F). D Ignition voltage is between 9.5 volts and 16.7 volts. D The throttle is closed. D EVAP purge duty cycle more than 10%. D All conditions are met for 10 seconds. D Barometric pressure is more than 74.5 kPa.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM or throttle DC motor Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. D Restricted air intake system Check for a possible collapsed air intake duct, restricted air filter element, or foreign objects blocking the air intake system. D Throttle body Check for objects blocking the ETC passage or throttle bore, excessive deposits in the

ETC passage and on the ETC position, and excessive deposits in the throttle bore and on the throttle plate. D Large vacuum leak Check for a condition that causes a large vacuum leak, such as an incorrectly installed or faulty PCV valve or brake booster hose disconnected.
6E2357
DTC P0506 Idle Air Control System Low RPM

Visually/physically inspect for the following conditions: D Throttle body tampering. D Restricted intake throttle system. Check for a possible collapsed air intake duct, restricted air filter element, or foreign objects blocking the air intake system. D Throttle body: Check for objects blocking the throttle passage or throttle bore, excessive deposits in the throttle passage and on the throttle valve, and excessive deposits in the throttle bore and on the throttle plate. D Throttle body with lever: Check for objects send round the throttle spring lever that lever is smooth movement, and spring lever has not excessive play Do any of the above require a repair? Visually/physically inspect for the following conditions: D Acceleration pedal tampering. D Acceleration pedal : Check for objects blocking the spring or pedal arm. D Acceleration pedal : Check for objects move the acceleration pedal that pedal is smooth movement, and acceleration pedal arm has not excessive play. Do any of the above require a repair? 1. Check for a poor connection at the throttle body harness connector. 2. Check for a poor connection at the acceleration position sensor harness connector. 3. If a problem is found, replace faulty terminals as necessary. Was a problem found?
Go to Step 3
Refer to appropriatese ction for on-vehicle service
Go to Step 4
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
Check the following circuits for an open, short to voltage, short to ground, or poor connection at the PCM: D Throttle position sensor 1 circuit. D Throttle position sensor 2 circuit. D Throttle DC motor circuit. Vcc-GND 17kW D Throttle position sensor resistance. SIG-DND D Throttle DC motor resistance. change D If a problem is found, repair as necessary. resistance0.3 100W Was a problem found?
Verify repair
Go to Step 6
6E2358
DTC P0506 Idle Air Control System Low RPM (Cont'd)

6 7
Replace the throttle valve. Is the action complete? 1. Check the following circuits for an open, short to voltage, short to ground, or poor connection at the PCM: Accelerator position sensor 1 circuit. Accelerator position sensor 2 circuit. Sensor resistance. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Vcc-GND 46kW SIG-DND change resistance Go to Step 3
Verify repair Go to Step 9 Go to applicable DTC table Go to applicable DTC table
Go to Step 8
8 9
Replace the acceleration position sensor. Is the action complete? Following below the DTCs stored: P1125, P1290, P1295, P1299 Following below the DTCs stored:P1514, P1515, P1516, P1523, P1271, P1272, P1273 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
Go to Step 10
10
Go to Step 11
11
6E2359
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0507 Idle Air Control System High RPM
060R200057
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) controls engine speed by adjusting the position of the throttle control valve (DC motor). The throttle motor is a DC motor driven by one coil. The PCM applies current to the DC motor coil in position (%) to adjustment the throttle valve into a passage in the throttle body to air flow. This method allows highly accurate control of engine speed and quick response to changes in engine load. If the PCM detects a condition where too high of an idle speed is present and the PCM is unable to adjust idle speed by increasing the throttle position, DTC P0507 will set, indicating a problem with the idle control system.
D All conditions are met for 10 seconds. D Engine speed is more than 100-200 RPM higher than desired idle based upon coolant temperature. D Barometric pressure is more than 74.5 kPa.



D No TPS, VSS, ECT, EGR, MAF, MAP, IAT, low voltage, fuel system, canister purge, injector control or ignition control DTCs are set. D Barometric pressure is above 75 kPa. D Canister purge duty cycle is above 10%. D Engine running time is more than 125 seconds. D Vehicle speed is less than 1 mph. D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) is above 50C (122F). D Ignition voltage is between 9.5 volts and 16.7 volts. D The throttle is closed. D EVAP purge duty cycle is more than 10%.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM or throttle DC motor Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or
6E2360

D Throttle body Check for sticking throttle plate. Also inspect the air passage for deposits or objects which will not allow the ETC position to fully extend or properly seat. If DTC P0507 cannot be duplicated, reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. D Vacuum leak Check for a condition that causes a vacuum leak, such as disconnected or damaged hoses, leaks at EGR valve and EGR pipe to intake manifold, leak at the throttle body, a faulty or incorrectly installed PCV valve, leaks at the intake manifold, etc.
DTC P0507 Idle Air Control System High RPM

Visually/physically inspect for the following conditions: D Throttle body tampering. D Restricted intake throttle system. Check for a possible collapsed air intake duct, restricted air filter element, or foreign objects blocking the air intake system. D Throttle body: Check for objects blocking the throttle passage or throttle bore, excessive deposits in the throttle passage and on the throttle valve, and excessive deposits in the throttle bore and on the throttle plate. D Throttle body with lever: Check for objects send round the throttle spring lever that lever is smooth movement, and spring lever has not excessive play Do any of the above require a repair? Visually/physically inspect for the following conditions: D Accelerator pedal tampering. D Accelerator pedal : Check for objects blocking the spring or pedal arm. D Accelerator pedal : Check for objects move the accelerator pedal that pedal is smooth movement, and accelerator pedal arm has not excessive play. Do any of the above require a repair? 1. Check for a poor connection at the throttle body harness connector. 2. Check for a poor connection at the accelerator position sensor harness connector. 3. If a problem is found, replace faulty terminals as necessary. Was a problem found?
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 4
Verify repair
Go to Step 7
6E2361
DTC P0507 Idle Air Control System High RPM (Cont'd)

Check the following circuits for an open, short to voltage, short to ground, or poor connection at the PCM: D Throttle position sensor 1 circuit. D Throttle position sensor 2 circuit. D Throttle DC motor circuit. Vcc-GND 17kW D Throttle position sensor resistance. SIG-GND D Throttle DC motor resistance. change D If a problem is found, repair as necessary. resistance 0.3 100W Was a problem found? Replace the throttle valve. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 6
6 7
1. Check the following circuits for an open, short to voltage, short to ground, or poor connection at the PCM: D Accelerator position sensor 1 circuit. D Accelerator position sensor 2 circuit. D Sensor 3 circuit. D Sensor resistance. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Replace the accelerator position sensor. Is the action complete?
Vcc-GND 46kW SIG-GND change resistance
Verify repair Go to Step 9 Go to applicable DTC table Go to applicable DTC table
Go to Step 8
8 9
Stored DTCs: P1125, P1290, P1295, P1299
Go to Step 10
10
Stored DTCs: P1514, P1515, P1516, P1523, P1271, P1272, P1273 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. ANd also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Go to Step 11
11
Verify repair
6E2362
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0562 System Voltage Low
060R200058
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the system voltage on the ignition feed terminal to the PCM. A system voltage DTC will set whenever the voltage is below a calibrated value.


D Ignition ON. D System voltage is below 11.5 volts for 40 seconds.
Diagnostic Aids
If the DTC sets when an accessory is operated, check for a poor connection or excessive current draw.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store as Failure Records conditions which were present when the DTC was set. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.
6E2363
DTC P0562 System Voltage Low

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Using a DVM, measure the battery voltage at the battery. Is the battery voltage greater than the specified value? 11.5 V Go to Step 3 1. Install a Tech 2. 2. Select Ignition Volts on the Tech 2. 3. Start the engine and raise the engine speed to the specified value. 4. Load the electrical system by turning on the headlights, high blower, etc. Is the ignition voltage approximately equal to the specified value? 2000 RPM 12.8-14.1 V Go to Step 4
Go to OBD System Check Charge battery, then go to Step 3
Go to Starting/Char ging
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM connector at the PCM. 3. Using a DVM, measure the battery voltage at the PCM connector F-20 and F-57. Is it approximately equal to battery voltage? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 1. Check for faulty connections at the PCM harness terminals. 2. Repair as necessary. Was a repair necessary? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 Check for an open battery feed circuit to the PCM. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. ANd also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6 7
6E2364
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0563 System Voltage High
060R200058
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the system voltage on the ignition feed terminals to the PCM. A system voltage DTC will set whenever the voltage is above a calibrated value.


D Ignition ON. D System voltage is above 16 volts for 40 seconds.
Diagnostic Aids
If the DTC sets when an accessory is operated, check for a poor connection or excessive current draw.

6E2365
DTC P0563 System Voltage High

Was the ON-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Using a DVM, measure the battery voltage at the battery. Is the battery voltage less than the specified value? 11.5 V Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1. Charge the battery and clean the battery terminals. 2. Clean the battery ground cable connection if corrosion is indicated. Is the battery voltage less than the specified value? 11.5 V 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn OFF all the accessories. Install a Tech 2. Select the ignition voltage parameter on the Tech 2. Start the engine and raise the engine RPM to the specified value. 2000 RPM
Replace battery
Go to Step 4
Is the voltage more than 2.5 volts greater than the measurement taken in step 2 or 3? 5 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. ANd also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete?
Go to Starting/ Charging
Go to Step 5
Verify repair
6E2366
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0565 Cruise Main Switch Circuit Error
060R100094
Circuit Description
The cruise control keeps the vehicle running at a fixed speed until a signal canceling this fixed speed is received. When the main switch is turned on with the vehicle in the running mode, the battery voltage is applied to power train control module(PCM). When a signal from the control switch is input to PCM while the vehicle is in this state, the cruise control system is activated. Also, while the PCM is operating, the CRUISE MAIN indicator light in the meter assembly lights up.


D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P0565 will clear after 40 consecutive trip cycle during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P0565 can be cleared using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D D D D D The Ignition is ON. Engine is running. System voltage is between 11.5 volts and 16 volts. The switch contact remains on for 15 seconds or more. Noises are generated by poor switch contact 60 times within 1 second.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following:

D Poor connections. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the
6E2367
cruise main switch display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0565 cannot be duplicated, the information included n the Failure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P0565 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P0565 Cruise Main Switch Circuit Error

1. Ignition ON, engine ON. 2. Observe the cruise main lamp in the switch. Is the cruise main lamp ON? Go to Step 3 Go to Diagnostic Aids Go to Step 4 1. Push the auto cruise main switch. 2. Observe the cruise main lamp in the switch. Is the cruise main lamp OFF? Check the signal circuit for auto cruise main switch. 1. Ignition is OFF. 2. Disconnect the powertrain control module(PCM). 3. Disconnect the cruise main switch. Check for an open cruise main switch signal circuit between the PCM and the cruise main switch. Is a problem found? Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 8
Go to Step 4
5 6 7
Repair the auto cruise main switch signal circuit. Is the action complete? Check the auto cruise main switch and lamp circuit. Is a problem found? Repair or replace the auto cruise main switch and lamp circuit. Is the action complete? PCM must be Verify repair Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement
6E2368
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0566 Cruise Cancel Switch Circuit Error
060R100094
Circuit Description
The cruise control keeps the vehicle running at a fixed speed until a signal canceling this fixed speed is received. When the main switch is turned on with the vehicle in the running mode, the battery voltage is applied to powertrain control module(PCM). When a signal from the control switch is input to PCM while the vehicle is in this state, the cruise control system is activated. Also, while the PCM is operating, the CRUISE MAIN indicator light in the meter assembly lights up. When the cancel switch is ON, cruise system is OFF.
D Noises are generated by poor switch contact 100 times within 1.6 seconds.



D D D D The Ignition is ON. Engine is running. System voltage is between 11.5 volts and 16 volts. The switch contact remains on for 40 seconds or more.

6E2369
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection.
D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the cruise cancel switch display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0566 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTCP0566 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P0566 Cruise Cancel Switch Circuit Error

Check the signal circuit for auto cruise cancel switch. 1. Ignition is OFF. 2. Disconnect the powertrain control module(PCM). 3. Disconnect the cruise cancel switch. Check for cruise cancel switch signal circuit between the PCM and the cruise cancel switch. Is a problem found? PCM must be Go to Step 3 Verify repair Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6
3 4 5 6
Repair the main cruise cancel switch signal circuit. Is the action complete? Check the auto cruise main switch. Is a problem found? Repair or replace the main cruise main switch. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement
6E2370
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0567 Cruise Resume Switch Circuit Error
060R200086
Circuit Description
The cruise control keeps the vehicle running at a fixed speed until a signal canceling this fixed speed is received. When the main switch is turned on with the vehicle in the running mode, the battery voltage is applied to powertrain control module(PCM). When a signal from the control switch is input to PCM while the vehicle is in this state, the cruise control system is activated. Also, while the PCM is operating, the CRUISE MAIN indicator light in the meter assembly lights up. When the resume switch is ON, vehicle speed is reset to the previous set speed.



D D D D The Ignition is ON. Engine is running. System voltage is between 11.5 volts and 16 volts. The switch contact remain on for 50 seconds or more.
6E2371
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage.
If the harness appears to be OK, observe the Cruise resume switch display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0567 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTCP0567 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P0567 Cruise Resume Switch Circuit Error

Check the signal circuit for auto cruise resume switch. 1. Ignition is OFF. 2. Disconnect the powertrain control module (PCM). 3. Disconnect the cruise resume switch. Check for cruise resume switch signal circuit between the PCM and the cruise resume switch. Is a problem found? Go to Step 3 PCM must be Verify repair Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6
3 4 5 6
Repair the main cruise resume switch signal circuit. Is the action complete? Check the auto cruise resume switch. Is a problem found? Repair or replace the main cruise resume switch. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement
6E2372
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0568 Cruise Set Switch Circuit Error
060R200086
Circuit Description
The cruise control keeps the vehicle running at a fixed speed until a signal canceling this fixed speed is received. When the main switch is turned on with the vehicle in the running mode, the battery voltage is applied to powertrain control module (PCM). When a signal from the control switch is input to PCM while the vehicle is in this state, the cruise control system is activated. Also, while the PCM is operating, the CRUISE MAIN indicator light in the meter assembly lights up. When the set switch is ON, vehicle speed is set.



D D D D The Ignition is ON. Engine is running. System voltage is between 11.5 volts and 16 volts. The switch contact remain on for 120 seconds or more.

6E2373
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection.
D Damaged harnessInspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the cruise set switch display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P0568 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTCP0568 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P0568 Cruise Set Switch Circuit Error

1. Ignition ON, engine ON. 2. Observe the cruise indicator lamp in the meter. Is the cruise indicator lamp ON? Go to Step 3 Go to Diagnostic Aids Go to Step 4 1. Push the auto cruise set switch. 2. Observe the cruise indicator lamp in the meter. Is the cruise indicator lamp OFF ? Check the signal circuit for auto cruise set switch. 1. Ignition is OFF. 2. Disconnect the powertrain control module (PCM). 3. Disconnect the cruise set switch. Check for cruise set switch signal circuit between the PCM and the cruise set switch. Is a problem found? Go to Step 5 PCM must be Verify repair Go to Step 7 Verify repair Go to Step 6 Go to Step 8
Go to Step 5
5 6 7 8
Repair the main cruise set switch signal circuit. Is the action complete? Check the auto cruise set switch. Is a problem found? Repair or replace the main cruise set switch. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement
6E2374
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0571 No Brake Switch Signal
060R100093
Circuit Description
The brake switch has 3 functions. D Brake pedal operation check D Brake light operation (On and off) D Cruise control (Cancel) The PCM receives vehicle speed and switch position signals from the brake switch. The PCM sets brake operating conditions in response to these signals. If the brake switch is on, the brake system is in normal operation (cruise control cancelled).

D The PCM will not turn the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ON. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Failure Records only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.


D Two brake switch signals not acknowledged after signal changed. D VSS not defective. D Engine is running. D Vehicle speed above 20km/h.
Diagnostic Aids
6E2375
DTC P01571 No Brake Switch Signal

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition Off. Engine Off. 2. Check following fuses. D BACK 15A D STOP LAMP 15A Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 3
1. Make adjustment to the brake switch. The brake switch is installed to the brake pedal assembly. (Refer to Brake switch in 10A CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM.) Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 4 1. Push the shaft at brake switch. 2. Check shaft operation for smooth movements. Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Disconnect the connector at brake switch. 2. Check following terminal pin at ohmmeter. (Leave the shaft position at brake switch. Dont Between pin1 push it.) and pin2 is D Between pin 1 and pin 2 0W, Between D Between pin 3 and pin 4 pin3 and pin4 Was it specified value? is W 1. Disconnect the connector at brake switch. 2. Check following terminal pin at ohmmeter. (Push the shaft position at brake switch and hold it) Between pin1 and pin2 is D Between pin 1 and pin 2 W, Between D Between pin 3 and pin 4 pin3 and pin4 is 0W Was it specified value? 1. Probe related circuits for open or short to ground. 2. If a problem was found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Replace the ECM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Was the action completed? Verify repair Verify repair
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 9
1. Replace the brake switch. Was the action completed?
6E2376
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0601 PCM Memory
060RY014
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) used in this vehicle utilizes an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM). The EEPROM contains program information and the calibrations required for engine, transmission, and powertrain diagnostics operation. Unlike the PROM used in past applications, the EEPROM is not replaceable. When the PCM is replaced or a calibration update is required, the PCM must be programmed using a Tech 2. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for the EEPROM programming procedure.


D The PCM detects an internal program fault (check sum error).
Diagnostic Aids
D DTC P0601 indicates that the contents of the EEPROM have changed since the PCM was programmed. The only possible repair is PCM replacement. Remember to program the replacement PCM with the correct software and calibration for the vehicle.

6E2377
DTC P0601 PCM Memory

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. ANd also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2378
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0602 PCM Programming Error
060RY014
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) uses Main CPU and Watchdog CPU software/calibration.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set in the Failure Records data only.


D This code detects inconsistencies between Main CPU and Watchdog CPU software/calibration.

6E2379
DTC P0602 PCM Programming Error

6E2380
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0604 PCM RAM Error
060RY014
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) uses Main CPU RAM and Watchdog CPU RAM.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set in the Failure Records data only.


D This code detects inconsistencies between Main CPU RAM and Watchdog CPU RAM.

6E2381
DTC P0604 PCM RAM Error

6E2382
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0606 PCM Internal Performance
060RY014
Circuit Description
The input/output devices in the PCM include analog-to-digital converters, signal buffers, counters, and special drivers. The PCM controls most components with electronic switches which complete a ground circuit when turned ON. These switches are arranged in groups of 4 and 7, called either a surface-mounted quad driver module (QDM), which can independently control up to 4 output terminals, or QDMs which can independently control up to 7 outputs.



D This code detects inconsistencies between Main CPU A/D converters and Watchdog CPU A/D converters.
6E2383
DTC P0606 PCM Internal Performance

6E2384
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1106 MAP Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage
060R200051
Circuit Description
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure (vacuum). The MAP sensor signal voltage to the PCM varies from below 2 volts at idle (high vacuum) to above 4 volts with the ignition ON, engine not running or at wide-open throttle (low vacuum). The MAP sensor is used to determine manifold pressure changes while the liner EGR flow test diagnostic is being run (refer to DTC P0401), to determine engine vacuum level for some other diagnostics and to determine barometric pressure (BARO). The PCM compares the MAP sensor signal to a calculated MAP based on throttle position and various engine load factors. If the PCM detects a MAP signal that is intermittently above the calculated value, DTC P1106 will set.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Failure Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Leaking or plugged vacuum supply line to the MAP sensor. D Inspect PCM harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the MAP display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often

D No TP sensor DTCs are present. D Engine is running for at least 10 seconds. D Throttle angle is below 3% if engine speed is below 1000 RPM. D Throttle angle is below 10% if engine speed is above 1000 RPM. D The MAP sensor indicates an intermittent manifold absolute pressure above 80 kPa for a total of approximately 5 seconds over a 16-second period of time.

the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition. D The MAP sensor shares a 5 Volt Reference with the Fuel Tank Pressure sensor. Check the 5 Volt reference if this DTC is also set.
6E2385
D The MAP sensor shares a ground with the Fuel Tank Pressure sensor and the ECT Sensor. Check the ground if these other DTCs are also set.
DTC P1106 MAP Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC P0108 chart first Go to Step 6 Is DTC P0108 also set?
3 4
Are DTC P1111, P1115, and/or P1120 also set? Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the MAP sensor. Was a problem found?
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 5
Check the MAP signal circuit between the MAP sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent short to voltage. Was a problem found? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 8 Check for an intermittent short to voltage on the 5 volt reference circuit between the PCM and the following components: D MAP sensor D EGR valve D TP sensor Was a problem found? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 7 Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the PCM. Was a problem found? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8 Refer to Diagnostic Aids Check for an intermittent open or a faulty splice in the sensor ground circuit. Was a problem found? Go to Step 10 Replace the faulty harness connector terminal for the sensor ground circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair Locate and repair the intermittent open/short circuit in the wiring harness as necessary. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10
6E2386
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1107 MAP Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage
060R200051
Circuit Description
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure (vacuum). The MAP sensor signal voltage to the powertrain control module (PCM) varies from below 2 volts at idle (high vacuum) to above 4 volts with the ignition ON, engine not running or at wide-open throttle (low vacuum). The MAP sensor is used to determine manifold pressure changes while the linear EGR flow test diagnostic is being run (refer to DTC P0401), to determine engine vacuum level for some other diagnostics and to determine barometric pressure (BARO). The PCM compares the MAP sensor signal to a calculated MAP based on throttle position and various engine load factors. If the PCM detects a MAP signal that is intermittently below the calculated value, DTC P1107 will be set.
approximately 5 seconds over a 16-second period of time.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Failure Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

D A history DTC P1107 will Clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P1107 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D D D D No TP sensor DTCs are present. Engine is running. Ignition voltage is more than 11 volts. Throttle angle is above 1% if engine speed is less than 1000 RPM. D Throttle angle is above 3% if engine speed is above 1000 RPM. D The MAP sensor indicates an intermittent manifold absolute pressure below 11 kPa for a total of
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D The MAP Sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the EGR Valve. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference circuit or components itself. D The MAP Sensor share a ground with the EGR Valve and the IAT Sensor.

D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the MAP display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.
6E2387
DTC P1107 MAP Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC P0107 chart first Is DTC P0107 also set?
Go to Step 3
Check for a poor 5 volt reference circuit or MAP signal circuit terminal connection at the MAP sensor. Was a problem found? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 4 Check the MAP signal circuit between the MAP sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent open or short to ground. Was a problem found? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 7 Check for an intermittent short to ground on the 5 volt reference circuit between the PCM and the following components: D MAP sensor D EGR valve D TP sensor Was a problem found? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 6 Check for a poor 5 volt reference terminal connection at the PCM. Was a problem found? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7 Check for an intermittent open or a faulty splice in the 5 volt reference circuit. Was a problem found? (If no, start with the diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.) Refer to Diagnostic Aids
Go to Step 9
Replace the faulty harness connector terminal(s) for the 5 volt reference circuit and/or the MAP signal circuit as necessary. Is the action complete? Verify repair Repair intermittent open/short circuit in the wiring harness as necessary. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2388
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1111 IAT Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage
D06RY00147
Circuit Description
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor which measures the temperature of the air entering the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies 5 volts through a pull-up resistor to the IAT sensor. When the intake air is cold, the sensor resistance is high and the PCM will monitor a high signal voltage on the IAT signal circuit. If the intake air is warm, the sensor resistance is lower causing the PCM to monitor a lower voltage. DTC P1111 will set when the PCM intermittently detects an excessively high signal voltage on the intake air temperature sensor signal circuit.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC set as Failure Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data. D DTC P1111 does not illuminate the MIL.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the IAT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the IAT sensor. A change in the IAT display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

D D D D D The engine has been running for over 30 seconds. Vehicle speed is less than 32 km/h (20 mph). Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). Mass air flow is less than 20g/second. IAT signal voltage indicates and intake air temperature intermittently less than 39C (38F) (about 5 volts) for approximately 2.5 seconds over a 25-second period of time.

D The PCM will substitute a default value for intake air temperature.
6E2389

6E2390
DTC P1111 IAT Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage

3 4
Is DTC P1115, also set? 1. Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the IAT sensor. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?
Verify repair
Go to Step 5
1. Check for a poor IAT signal circuit terminal connection at the IAT sensor. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Check the IAT signal circuit between the IAT sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent open. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Check the IAT signal circuit between the IAT sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent short to voltage. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the PCM. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Check for an intermittent open or a faulty splice in the sensor ground circuit. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
6E2391
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1112 IAT Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage
D06RY00147
Circuit Description
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor which measures the temperature of the air entering the engine. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies 5 volts through a pull-up resistor to the IAT sensor. When the intake air is cold, the sensor resistance is high and the PCM will monitor a high signal voltage on the IAT signal circuit. If the intake air is warm, the sensor resistance becomes lower, causing the PCM to monitor a lower voltage. DTC P1112 will set when the PCM intermittently detects an excessively low signal voltage on the intake air temperature sensor signal circuit.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the IAT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the IAT sensor. A change in the IAT display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

D The engine has been running for over 15 seconds. D Vehicle speed is greater than 48 km/h (30 mph). D IAT signal voltage is greater than 148C (298F) (about 0.10 volt) for a total of 2.5 seconds over a 25-second period of time.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Failure Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data. D The PCM will substitute a default value for intake air temperature.
6E2392
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 2. Verifies that the fault is present. 3. If DTC P1112 can be repeated only by duplicating the Failure Records conditions, refer to the Temperature vs. Resistance Value Chart. The chart may be used to test the IAT sensor at various temperatures to evaluate the possibility of a shifted sensor that may be shorted above or below a certain temperature. If this is the case, replace the IAT sensor.

DTC P1112 IAT Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC P0112 first Is DTC P0112 also set? 1. Check the IAT signal circuit between the IAT sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent short to ground. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
2 3
6E2393
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1114 ECT Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage
060R200053
Circuit Description
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a thermistor mounted in the engine coolant stream. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies a voltage (about 5.0 volts) through a pull-up resistor to the ECT signal circuit. When the engine coolant is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high, therefore the PCM will measure a high signal voltage. As the engine coolant warms, the sensor resistance becomes less, and the ECT signal voltage measured at the PCM drops. With a fully warmed up engine, the ECT signal voltage should measure about 1.5 to 2.0 volts. If the PCM detects an ECT signal that is intermittently below the range of the ECT sensor, DTC P1114 will set.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC set as Failure Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the ECT sensor. A change in the ECT display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often

D Engine run time longer than 120 seconds. D The ECT sensor signal is intermittently greater than 150C (302F) (about 0.10 volt) for a total of 10 seconds over a 100-second period.

6E2394

DTC P1114 ECT Circuit Intermittent Low Voltage

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to DTC P0117 first Is DTC P0117 also set? 1. Check the ECT signal circuit between the ECT sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent short to ground. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
2 3
6E2395
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1115 ECT Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage
060R200053
Circuit Description
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a thermistor mounted in the engine coolant stream. The powertrain control module (PCM) applies a voltage (about 5.0 volts) through a pull-up resistor to the ECT signal circuit. When the engine coolant is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high, therefore the PCM will measure a high signal voltage. As the engine coolant warms, the sensor resistance becomes less, and the ECT signal voltage measured at the PCM drops. With a fully warmed up engine, the ECT signal voltage should measure about 1.5 to 2.0 volts. If the PCM detects an ECT signal that is intermittently above the range of the ECT sensor, DTC P1115 will set.
D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Failure Records data only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the ECT display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the ECT sensor. A change in the ECT display will indicate the location of the fault. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often

D Engine running time longer than 90 seconds. D The ECT sensor signal is intermittently greater than 39C (38F) (about 5 volts) for a total of 10 seconds over a 100-second period.

6E2396

6E2397
DTC P1115 ECT Sensor Circuit Intermittent High Voltage

3 4
Is DTC P1111 also set? 1. Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the ECT sensor. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?
Verify repair
Go to Step 5
1. Check for a poor ECT signal circuit terminal connection at the ECT sensor. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Check the ECT signal circuit between the ECT sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent open. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Check the ECT signal circuit between the ECT sensor connector and the PCM for an intermittent short to voltage. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Check for a poor sensor ground circuit terminal connection at the PCM. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Check for an intermittent open or a faulty splice in the sensor ground circuit. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
6E2398
Diagnostic Trouble Code(DTC) P1120-TPS 1 Throttle Position Sensor (TPS1) Circuit Fault
D06RY00111
Circuit Description
D The throttle position (TP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to throttle blade angle. The throttle blade angle will vary about 8 % at closed throttle to about 92 % at wide open throttle(WOT). This code detects a continuous short to ground or high in either the cicuit or the sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D The MAP sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the Fuel Tank Pressure, APS1, APS3 and EGR value. D The MAP sensor shares a ground with the Fuel Tank Pressure, the ECT sensor, and the Transmission Fluid. D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals,and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK,observe the TPS 1 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.

D The Ignition is ON. D The throttle blade angle is less than 2.5 % or more tnan 97.5 % for 18 failres within 500 test samples (15.6m sec)


D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A histror DTC P1120 will clear after 40 cosecutive trip cycle during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault.

If DTC P1120 cannot be duplicated,the information included in the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1120 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
6E2399
Diagnostic Trouble Code(DTC)P1120-TPS 1 Circuit Fault

Go to OBD System Check Go to ETC System check
Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 1. Ignition ON, engine not running. 2. Observe the MAP reading on the Tech 2. Is the MAP reading less than the specified value? 100kPa Go to Step 4
Go to Step 7
1. Disconnect the MAP sensor. 2. Connect a test 5 volt reference circuit and the MAP signal at the MAP sensor harness connector. 3. Observe the MAP reading on the Tech 2. Is the MAP reading less than the specified value? (If no, start with diagnosis chart forother sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.)
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 5
1. Check the MAP signal circuit between the PCM and MAP grund circuit. 2. If the MAP signal circuit is open or shoted, repair it as necessary. Was the MAP signal circuit open or shorted? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 13 Replace the MAP sensor. Is the action complete? Observe the TP angle reading on the Tech 2 while slowly opening the throttle. Closed throttle TP sensor 1= Does the TP angle increase steadily and evenly from 8 13% Wide the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle open throttle value? TP sensor 1= 8797% Was the DTC P1120 stored? Go to Step 13
6 7
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 9 Refer to Diagnostic Aids
1. Connect a DVM between the 5Volt reference circuit and the TP sensor ground circuit at the TP1sensor harness connector. 2. Observe the voltage using a DVM. Is the voltage near the specified value? 5V Go to Step 10 Go to Step 11
6E2400
Diagnostic Trouble Code(DTC)P1120-TPS 1 Circuit Fault (Cont'd)

10
Check the following items; 1. TP1 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. TP1 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the TP sensor. 3. TP1 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found,repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11
11
Check the following items; 1. TP signal circuit or 5 volt reference circuit for a poor connection. 2. TP signal circuit or 5 volt reference circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the TP sensor. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? PCM must be Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 12 Go to Step 13
12 13
Replace the TP sensor. Was a problem corrected? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement
Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRMMED SOFTWARE to the replasement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2401
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1125 ETC (Electric throttle control) Limit Performance Mode
060R200064
Circuit Description
D The acceleration position (AP1) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to acceleration pedal angle. The acceleration pedal angle will vary about 13 % at idle position to about 87 % at wide open throttle (WOT). This code detects if the system is in Limit Performance Mode (Fail safe Mode) and Multiple DTCs performance Mode.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals,and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the APP sensor 1, APP sensor 2, APP sensor 3 display on the Tech 2 While moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1125 cannot be duplicated,the information includedin the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently,performing the DTC P1125 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.

D The Ignition is ON. D Limit Performance Mode is active. (Fail safe Mode)


D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P1125 will clear after 40 cosecutive trip cycle during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault.
6E2402
DTC P1125 ETC Limit Performance Model

Observe the AP angle reading on the Tech 2 while slowly opening the throttle.
Idle position AP sensor 1 Does the AP angle increase steadily and evenly from = 1115% AP the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle sensor 2, 3 = 8589% open value? throttle AP sensor 1 = 8589% AP sensor 2 = 1115% AP sensor 3 = 3236% Was the P1125 stored?
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 8
1. Connect a DVM between the 5 Voltge supply circuit and the AP1, AP2 AND AP3 sensor ground circuit at the AP sensor harness connector. 2. Observe the voltage using a DVM. Is the voltage reading near the specified value? 5V Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Check the following items; 1. AP1, AP2 or AP3 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. AP1, AP2 or AP3 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the AP sensor. 3. AP1, AP2 or AP3 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6
Check the following items; 1. AP1, AP2 or AP3 signal circuit or 5 volge supply circuit for a poor connection. 2. AP1, AP2 or AP3 signal circuit or 5 volge supply circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the AP1, AP2 or AP3 sensor. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7
6E2403
DTC P1125 ETC Limit Performance Model (Cont'd)

7 8
Replace the AP sensor. Was a problem corrected? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed.Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replasement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 8
6E2404
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1133 HO2S Insufficient Switching Bank 1 Sensor 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) activity for 90 seconds after closed loop and stoichiometric operation have been enabled. During this test period the PCM counts the number of times that the HO2S signal voltage crosses the rich-to-lean and lean-to-rich threshold. If the PCM determines that the HO2S did not switch enough times, DTC P1133 will be set. A lean-to-rich switch is determined when the HO2S voltage changes above and below 450 mV. Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for closed loop fuel control operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by post-catalyst monitor sensors to maintain a sufficiently high temperature for accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further from the engine.
D Mass air flow (MAF) is between 9 g/second and 42 g/second. D Above conditions are present for 3 seconds. D 90 seconds after closed loop and stoichiometric operation have been achieved, the PCM monitors the oxygen sensor as it switches above and below 450 mV. If fewer than 23 rich-to-lean and lean-to-rich switches are detected, DTC P1133 will be set.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after the second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D Open loop fuel control will be in effect. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P1133 will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P1133 can be cleared by using Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) is above 60C (140F). D Engine is operating in closed loop. D The engine has been running at least one minute. D Canister purge duty cycle is greater than 2%. D Engine speed is between 1500 RPM and 3000 RPM.
6E2405
Diagnostic Aids
A malfunction in the HO2S heater ignition feed or ground circuit may cause a DTC P1133 to set. Check HO2S heater circuitry for intermittent faults or poor connections. If connections and wiring are OK and DTC P1133 continues to set, replace the Bank 1 HO2S 1. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help to determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
3. A condition that affects other heated oxygen sensors indicates probable contamination. To avoid damaging the replacement sensors, correct the condition which caused the contamination before replacing the affected sensors. 5. This step checks for conditions which may cause the heated oxygen sensor to appear faulty. Correct any of the described conditions if present. 11.To avoid damaging replacement sensors, correct the condition which caused the contamination before replacing the affected sensors.
Test Description
DTC P1133 HO2S Insufficient Switching Bank 1 Sensor 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 IMPORTANT: If any DTCs are set (except P1153 or P1154) refer to those DTCs before proceeding with this diagnostic chart. 1. Engine idling at operating temperature. 2. Operating the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P1133 until the DTC P1133 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P1133 failed this ignition? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 20 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 2
3 4 5 6
Did the Tech 2 also indicate that the P1153 or P1154 tests failed? Check for leaks at the exhaust pipe joints. Are the joints leaking? Tighten the bolt/nuts at the leaking joints. Is your action complete? Check for gaskets that are damaged or improperly installed. Are there damaged or misaligned gaskets?
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 8
1. Replace the damaged gaskets. 2. Align the connections. 3. Tighten the connections. Is your action complete? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 12 Check for loose exhaust flange connections. Are the flange connections loose? Tighten the stud nuts or bolts to specifications. Is your action complete? Check for burned or corroded exhaust pipes. Are the exhaust pipes burned or corroded?
8 9 10
6E2406
DTC P1133 HO2S Insufficient Switching Bank 1 Sensor 1 (Cont'd)

11 12 13
Replace the exhaust pipes, as required. Is your action complete? Check for leaks at the exhaust manifold. Are there leaks at the exhaust manifold? Tighten the bolts to specifications or replace the manifold if necessary. Is your action complete? Go to Step 2 Visually/physically inspect the following items: D Ensure that the Bank 1 HO2S 1 is securely installed. D Check for corrosion on the terminals. D Check the terminals at Bank 1 HO2S 1 and at the PCM. D Check for damaged wiring. Was a problem found in any of the above areas? Verify repair Go to Step 15 1. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 1. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a DVM at the PCM side of the connector, check the voltage between the high signal circuit and ground. Also measure between the low signal circuit and ground. Are both voltages in the specified range? 3-4 mV Go to Step 18 Go to Step 16 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Check for damage to PCM pins or terminals. Was a problem found. Verify repair Go to Step 17 Check for a short to voltage or ground or an open in the signal circuit. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 18 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM connector. 3. With the HO2S disconnected, check for high and low signal circuits shorted together between the PCM and HO2S. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 19 With the PCM connected and Bank 1 HO2S 1 disconnected from the harness, check Bank 1 HO2S 1 with a Tech 2. Is the voltage in the specified range? 425-475 mV Go to Step 21 Go to Step 22 Replace the affected heated oxygen sensors. NOTE: Before replacing the sensors, the cause of the contamination must be determined and corrected. D D D Fuel contamination Use of improper RTV sealant. Engine oil/coolant consumption. Verify repair Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14 Go to Step 2
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Is the action complete?
6E2407

21 22
Replace Bank 1 HO2S 1. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair
6E2408
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1134 HO2S Transition Time Ratio Bank 1 Sensor 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) activity for 90 seconds after closed loop and stoichiometric operation have been established. During the monitoring period the PCM counts the number of times that the HO2S responds from rich-to-lean and from lean-to-rich and adds the amount of time it took to complete all transitions. With this information, an average time for all transitions can be determined. The PCM then divides the rich-to-lean average by the lean-to-rich average to obtain a ratio. If the HO2S transition time ratio is not within this range, DTC P1134 will be set, indicating that the oxygen sensor is not responding as expected to changes in exhaust oxygen content.
D 90 seconds after closed loop and stoichiometric operation have been enabled, Bank 1 HO2S 1 transition ratio between lean-to-rich and rich-to-lean is less than 0.44 or greater than 3.8.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after second consecutive trip in which the fault is detected. D Open loop fuel control will be in effect. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.


D No related DTCs. D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) is above 60C (140F). D Engine is operating in closed loop, D The engine has been running at least one minute. D Canister purge duty cycle is greater than 2%. D Engine speed is between 1500 RPM and 3000 RPM. D Mass air flow (MAF) is between 18 g/second and 42 g/second. D Above conditions are present for a 3-second monitoring period.
Diagnostic Aids
A malfunction in the HO2S heater ignition feed or ground circuit may cause a DTC P1134 to set. Check HO2S heater circuitry for intermittent faults or poor connections. If connections and wiring are OK and DTC P1134 continues to set, replace the Bank 1 HO2S 1.

6E2409
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 3. A condition that affects other heated oxygen sensors indicates probable contamination. To avoid damaging replacement sensors, correct the condition which caused the contamination before replacing the affected sensors.
5. This step checks for conditions which may cause the heated oxygen sensor to appear faulty. Correct any of the described conditions if present. 8. To avoid damaging replacement sensors, correct the condition which caused the contamination before replacing the affected sensors.
DTC P1134 HO2S Transition Time Ratio Bank 1 Sensor 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 IMPORTANT: If any DTCs are set (except P1153 and/or P1154), refer to those DTCs before proceeding with this diagnostic chart. 1. Idle the engine at operating temperature. 2. Operate the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P1134 until the DTC P1134 test runs. 4. Note the test result. Does Tech 2 indicate DTC 1134 failed this ignition? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 2
3 4 5 6
Did the Tech 2 also indicate P1153, and/or P1154 test failed? Check for leaks at the exhaust pipe joints. Are the joints leaking? Tighten the U-bolt nuts at the leaking joints. Is your action complete? Check for gaskets that are damaged or improperly installed. Are there damaged or misaligned gaskets?
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 8
1. Replace the damaged gaskets. 2. Align the connections. 3. Tighten the connections. Is your action complete? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 12 Check for loose exhaust flange connections. Are the flange connections loose? Tighten the stud nuts or bolts to specifications. Is your action complete? Check for burned or corroded exhaust pipes. Are the exhaust pipes burned or corroded? Replace the exhaust pipes, as required. Is your action complete?
8 9 10 11
6E2410
DTC P1134 HO2S Transition Time Ratio Bank 1 Sensor 1 (Cont'd)

12 13
Check for leaks at the exhaust manifold. Are there leaks at the exhaust manifold? Tighten the bolts to specifications or replace the manifold if necessary. Is your action complete? Go to Step 2 Visually/physically inspect the following items: D Ensure that the Bank 1 HO2S 1 is securely installed. D Check for corrosion on terminals. D Check the terminal tension (at Bank 1 HO2S 1 and at the PCM). D Check for damaged wiring. Was a problem found in any of the above areas? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 15 1. Disconnect Bank 1 HO2S 1. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a DVM at the PCM side of the HO2S 1 connector, measure the voltage between the high signal circuit and ground. 4. Also measure the voltage between the low signal circuit and ground. Are both voltages in the specified range? 3-4V Go to Step 16 Go to Step 19 1. With Bank 1 HO2S 1 disconnected, jumper the high and low (PCM side) signal circuits to ground. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor the Bank 1 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Tech 2 indicate less than 10 mV and immediately return to about 450 mV when the jumper is removed? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14
14
15
16
Go to Step 21
Go to Step 22
17
Replace affected heated oxygen sensors. NOTE: Before replacing sensors, the cause of the contamination must be determined and corrected. D D D Fuel contamination. Use of improper RTV sealant. Engine oil/coolant consumption. Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 20 Go to Step 7
Is the action complete? 18 19 20 Repair condition as necessary. Is the action complete? Check for faulty PCM connections or terminal damage. Is the action complete? Repair open, short or grounded signal circuit. Is the action complete?
6E2411

21 22
6E2412
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1153 HO2S Insufficient Switching Bank 2 Sensor 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) activity for 90 seconds after closed loop and stoichiometric operation have been enabled. During this test period the PCM counts the number of times that the HO2S signal voltage crosses the rich-to-lean and lean-to-rich thresholds. If the PCM determines that the HO2S did not switch enough times, DTC P1153 will be set. A lean-to-rich switch is determined when the HO2S voltage changes above and below 450 mV. Heated oxygen sensors are used to minimize the amount of time required for closed loop fuel control operation and to allow accurate catalyst monitoring. The oxygen sensor heater greatly decreases the amount of time required for fuel control sensors Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1 to become active. Oxygen sensor heaters are required by post-catalyst monitor sensors to maintain a sufficiently high temperature for accurate exhaust oxygen content readings further from the engine.
D Mass air flow is between 8 g/second and 42 g/second. D Above conditions are present for a 3 seconds. D 90 seconds after closed loop and stoichiometric operation have been enabled, the PCM monitors the oxygen sensor switching above and below 450 mV. If fewer than 27 rich-to-lean and lean-to-rich switches for Bank 2 HO2S 1 are detected, DTC P1153 will set.



D The engine is operating in closed loop, D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) is above 60C (140F). D The engine has been running for over 60 seconds. D Canister purge duty cycle is greater than 2%. D Engine speed is between 1500 RPM and 3000 RPM.
6E2413
Diagnostic Aids
A malfunction in the HO2S heater ignition feed or ground circuit may cause a DTC P1153 to set. Check HO2S heater circuitry for intermittent faults or poor connections. If connections and wiring are OK and DTC P1153 continues to set, replace the Bank 2 HO2S 1. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
3. A condition that affects other heated oxygen sensors indicates probable contamination. To avoid damaging replacement sensors, correct the condition which caused the contamination before replacing the affected sensors. 5. This step checks for conditions which may cause the heated oxygen sensor to appear faulty. Correct any of the described conditions if present. 8. To avoid damaging replacement sensors, correct the condition which caused the contamination before replacing the affected sensors.
Test Description
DTC P1153 HO2S Insufficient Switching Bank 2 Sensor 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 IMPORTANT: If any DTCs are set, (except P1133 and/or P1134), refer to those DTCs before proceeding with this diagnostic chart. 1. Idle the engine at operating temperature. 2. Operate the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P1153 until the DTC P1153 test runs. Note the test result. Does Tech 2 indicate DTC failed this ignition? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 20 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 2
3 4 5 6
Did the Tech 2 also indicate P1133 and/or P1134 test failed? Check for leaks at the exhaust pipe joints. Are the joints leaking? Tighten the U-bolt nuts at the leaking joints. Is your action complete? Check for gaskets that are damaged or improperly installed. Are there damaged or misaligned gaskets?
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 8
1. Replace the damaged gaskets. 2. Align the connections. 3. Tighten the connections. Is your action complete? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 12 Check for loose exhaust flange connections. Are the flange connections loose? Tighten the stud nuts or bolts to specifications. Is your action complete? Check for burned or corroded exhaust pipes. Are the exhaust pipes burned or corroded?
8 9 10
6E2414

11 12 13
Replace the exhaust pipes, as required. Is your action complete? Check for leaks at the exhaust manifold. Are there leaks at the exhaust manifold? Tighten the bolts to specifications or replace the manifold if necessary. Is your action complete? Go to Step 2 Visually/physically inspect the following items: D Ensure that the Bank 2 HO2S 1 is securely installed. D Check for corrosion on terminals. D Check the terminal tension at Bank 2 HO2S 1 and at the PCM. D Check for damaged wiring. Was a problem found in any of the above areas? Verify repair Go to Step 15 1. Disconnect Bank 2 HO2S 1. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a DVM at the PCM side of the connector, check the voltage between the high signal circuit and ground. Also measure between the low signal circuit and ground. Are both voltages in the specified range? 3-4V Go to Step 18 Go to Step 16 1. Ignition ON. 2. Check for damage to PCM pins or terminals. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 17 Check for short to voltage or ground or an open in the signal circuit. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 18 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM connector. 3. With HO2S disconnected, check for high and low signal circuits shorted together between the PCM and HO2S. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 19 With the PCM connected and Bank 2 HO2S 1 disconnected from the harness, check Bank 2 HO2S 1 with a Tech 2. Is the voltage in the specified range? 425-475 mV Go to Step 21 Go to Step 22 Replace affected heated oxygen sensors. NOTE: Before replacing sensors, the cause of the contamination must be determined and corrected. D D D Fuel contamination. Use of improper RTV sealant. Engine oil/coolant consumption. Verify repair Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14 Go to Step 2
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Is the action complete?
6E2415

21 22
6E2416
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1154 HO2S Circuit Transition Time Ratio Bank 2 Sensor 1
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) activity for 90 seconds after closed loop and stoichiometric operation have been enabled. During the monitor period the PCM counts the number of times that the HO2S responds from rich-to-lean and from lean-to-rich and adds the amount of time it took to complete all transitions. With this information, an average time for all transitions can be determined. The PCM then divides the rich-to-lean average by the lean-to-rich average to obtain a ratio. If the HO2S transition time ratio is not within this range, DTC P1154 will be set, indicating that the oxygen sensor is not responding as expected to changes in exhaust oxygen content.
D 90 seconds after closed loop and stoichiometric operation have been enabled, Bank 2 HO2S 1 transition ratio between lean to rich and rich to lean is less than 0.44 or greater than 3.8.



D No related DTCs. D Engine coolant temperature (ETC) is above 60C (140F). D The engine is operating in closed loop, D The engine has been running at least one minute. D Canister purge duty cycle is greater than 2%. D Engine speed is between 1500 RPM and 3000 RPM. D Mass air flow is between 18 g/second and 42 g/second. D Above conditions are present for a 3-second monitoring period.
Diagnostic Aids
A multifunction in the HO2S heater ignition feed or ground circuit may cause a DTC P1154 to set. Check HO2S heater circuitry for intermittent faults or poor connections.

If connections and wiring are OK and DTC P1154 continues to set, replace the Bank 2 HO2S 1. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
6E2417
Test Description
3. A condition that affects other heated oxygen sensors indicates probable contamination. To avoid damaging replacement sensors, correct the condition which caused the contamination before replacing the affected sensors. 5. This step checks for conditions which may cause the heated oxygen sensor to appear faulty. Correct any of the described conditions if present. 8. To avoid damaging replacement sensors, correct the condition which caused the contamination before replacing the affected sensors.
DTC P1154 HO2S Transition Time Ratio Bank 2 Sensor 1

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 IMPORTANT: If any other DTCs are set (except P1133 and/or P1134), refer to those DTCs before proceeding with this diagnostic chart. 1. Idle the engine at operating temperature. 2. Operate the vehicle within parameters specified under Conditions for Setting the DTC criteria included in Diagnostic Support. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P1154 until the DTC P1154 test runs. Note the test result. Does Tech 2 indicate DTC failed this ignition? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 2
3 4 5 6
Did the Tech 2 also indicate P1133, and/or P1134 test failed? Check for leaks at the exhaust pipe joints. Are the joints leaking? Tighten the U-bolt nuts at the leaking joints. Is your action complete? Check for gaskets that are damaged or improperly installed. Are there damaged or misaligned gaskets?
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 8
1. Replace the damaged gaskets. 2. Align the connections. 3. Tighten the connections. Is your action complete? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 12 Check for loose exhaust flange connections. Are the flange connections loose? Tighten the stud nuts or bolts to specifications. Is your action complete? Check for burned or corroded exhaust pipes. Are the exhaust pipes burned or corroded? Replace the exhaust pipes, as required. Is your action complete?
8 9 10 11
6E2418

12 13
Check for leaks at the exhaust manifold. Are there leaks at the exhaust manifold? Tighten the bolts to specifications or replace the manifold if necessary. Is your action complete? Go to Step 2 Visually/physically inspect the following items: D Ensure that the Bank 2 HO2S 1 is securely installed. D Check for corrosion on terminals. D Check terminal tension (at Bank 2 HO2S 1 and at the PCM). D Check for damaged wiring. Was a problem found in any of the above areas? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 15 1. Disconnect Bank 2 HO2S 1. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a DVM at the PCM side of the HO2S 1 connector, measure the voltage between the high signal circuit and ground. Also measure the voltage between the low signal circuit and ground. Are both voltages in the specified range? 3-4 V Go to Step 16 Go to Step 19 1. With Bank 2 HO2S 1 disconnected, jumper the high and low (PCM side) signal circuits to ground. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor the Bank 2 HO2S 1 voltage. Does the Tech 2 indicate less than 10 mV and immediately return to about 450 mV when the jumper is removed? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14
14
15
16
Go to Step 21
Go to Step 22
17
Replace affected heated oxygen sensors. NOTE: Before replacing sensors, the cause of the contamination must be determined and corrected. D D D Fuel contamination. Use of improper RTV sealant. Engine oil/coolant consumption. Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 20
Is the action complete? 18 19 20 Repair condition as necessary. Is the action complete? Check for faulty PCM connections or terminal damage. Is the action complete? Repair open, short or grounded signal circuit. Is the action complete?
6E2419

21 22
6E2420
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1167 Fuel System Rich During Decel Fuel Cut Off (Bank 1)
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) continuously monitors the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) activity for 90 seconds after closed loop has been enabled. During the monitoring period the powertrain control module (PCM) counts the number of times a rich to lean response is indicated and adds the amount of time it look to complete all rich to lean transitions and lean to rich transitions. This code detects if Bank1 O2 sensor indicated rich exhaust while in Decel Fuel Cut Off (DFCO) for fuel control sensors.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Failure Records only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

D A history DTC P1167 will clear after 40 consecutive trip cycles during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P1167 can be cleared using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D No related DTCs. D The engine coolant temperature is more than 60 C (140 F). D Engine is operating in closed loop power enrichment mode for 3 seconds. D While in power enrichment mode the oxygen sensor voltage remains more than 600mV in DFCO.
Diagnostic Aids
D Check for faulty fuel injectors and fuel pump.
6E2421
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1167 Fuel System Rich During Decel Fuel Cut Off (Bank1)
Was the On-Board (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to component DTC charts
Are any component related DTCs set?
Go to Step 3
1. Place the transmission in Park. 2. Using a Tech 2, HO2S 1 voltage while running warm engine 75 C 95 C (167 F 203 F) at 1200 RPM. 3. HO2S 1 voltages should vary within the specified range. (100 900mV) 4. Quickly open the wide open the throttle for a few seconds. Did the voltage suddenly rise toward the low end of the 100 600 mV specified range?
Go to Step 4
1. Disconnect the fuel pump relay and crank the engine to relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Install the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine and idle at normal operating temperature. 4. Disconnect the vacuum line going to the fuel pressure regulator. With the engine running, is the fuel pressure within the 280 325Kpa specified range? (41 46psi)
Go to Step 5
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Remove the fuel pump relay and replace it with a fused jumper which will connect the relays battery terminal to the terminal leading to the fuel pump fuse. 3. While the fuel pump is operating, use pliers to slowly close the return line (do not exceed the first specified value). Using the pliers to restrict the return line, can the fuel pressure be manipulated to exceed the second value? Is the fuel pressure gauge reading near the specified value?
325KPa (46psi) 414KPa (60psi)
Go to Step 6
Check the following items; D Faulty fuel pump D Incorrect fuel pump D Incorrect fuel being used D Cold fuel If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
6E2422
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1169 Fuel System Rich During Decel Fuel Cut Off (Bank 2)
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module(PCM) continuously monitors the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) activity for 90 seconds after closed loop has been enabled. During the monitoring period the powertrain control module (PCM) counts the number of times a rich to lean response is indicated and adds the amount of time it look to complete all rich to lean transitions and lean to rich transitions. This code detects if Bank2 sensor indicated rich exhaust while in Decel Fuel Cut Off (DFCO) for fuel control sensors.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction malfunction indicator lamp(MIL). D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Failure Records only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

D A history DTC P1169 will clear after 40 consecutive trip cycles during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P1169 can be cleared using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D No related DTCs. D The engine coolant temperature is more than 60 C (140 F). D Engine is operating in closed loop power enrichment mode for 3 seconds. D While in power enrichment mode the oxygen sensor voltage remains more than 600mV in DFCO.
Diagnostic Aids
D Check for faulty fuel injectors and fuel pump. D Check the pressure regulator.
6E2423
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1169 Fuel System Rich During Decel Fuel Cut Off (Bank2)
Was the On-Board (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to component DTC charts
Are any component related DTCs set?
Go to Step 3
1. Place the transmission in Park. 2. Using a Tech 2, HO2S 2 voltage while running warm engine75 C 95 C (167 F 203 F) at 1200 RPM. 3. HO2S 1 voltages should vary within the specified range. (100 900mV) 4. Quickly open the wide open the throttle for a few seconds. Did the voltage suddenly rise toward the low end of the specified range? 100 600 mV
Go to Step 4
1. Disconnect the fuel pump relay and crank the engine to relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Install the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine and idle at normal operating temperature. 4. Disconnect the vacuum line going to the fuel pressure regulator. With the engine running, is the fuel pressure within the 280 325Kpa specified range? (41 46psi)
Go to Step 5
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Remove the fuel pump relay and replace it with a fused jumper which will connect the relays battery terminal to the terminal leading to the fuel pump fuse. 3. While the fuel pump is operating, use pliers to slowly close the return line (do not exceed the first specified value). Using the pliers to restrict the return line, can the fuel pressure be manipulated to exceed the second value? Is the fuel pressure gauge reading near the specified value?
325KPa (46psi) 414KPa (60psi)
Go to Step 6
Check the following items; D Faulty fuel pump D Incorrect fuel pump D Incorrect fuel being used D Cold fuel. If a problem is found, repair one as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
6E2424
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1171 Fuel System Lean During Acceleration
060R200054
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) internal circuitry can identify if the vehicle fuel system is capable of supplying adequate amounts of fuel during heavy acceleration (power enrichment). The PCM monitors the voltage of the oxygen sensor during power enrichment. When a power enrichment mode of operation is requested during closed loop operation (by heavy acceleration), the PCM will provide more fuel to the engine. Under these conditions the PCM should detect a rich condition (high oxygen sensor voltage). If this rich exhaust is not detected at this time, a DTC P1171 will set. A plugged fuel filter, restricted fuel line, restricted in-tank filter or defective fuel pump can prevent adequate amounts of fuel from being supplied during power enrichment mode.



D No related DTCs. D Engine is operating in closed loop power enrichment mode for 3 seconds. D Engine coolant temperature is above 60C (140F). D While in power enrichment mode the oxygen sensor voltage remains below 400 mV for 3 seconds.
Diagnostic Aids
D A restricted fuel filter or fuel line, restricted in-tank filter, or a defective fuel pump may supply adequate amounts of fuel at idle, but may not be able to supply enough fuel during heavy acceleration. D Water or alcohol in the fuel may cause low HO2S voltage during acceleration. D Check for faulty or plugged fuel injector(s). D Check for low fuel.
6E2425
Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 4. When the engine is idling or at steady cruise, the HO2S voltage should vary from between approximately 100 mV to 900 mV. It is possible to measure a satisfactory fuel pressure at idle even though the pressure may drop at high flow requirements. It may be necessary to watch fuel pressure at high engine load.
5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connector to absorb any small amount of fuel leakage that may occur when installing gauge. Ignition ON, pump pressure should be 280-320 kPa. 7. Add Caution, Use correct pliers so damage to fuel lines will not occur.
DTC P1171 Fuel System Lean During Acceleration

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Go to component DTC charts Are any component-related DTCs set?
Go to Step 3
1. Check the vehicles fuel tank for an adequate amount of fuel. 2. Add fuel to the vehicles fuel tank if the tank is almost empty. Was fuel added to the vehicles fuel tank? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5 1. Place the transmission in park. 2. Using a Tech 2, observe HO2S 1 voltage while running warm engine 75C-95C (167F-203F) at 1200 RPM. 3. HO2S 1 voltage should vary within the specified range. 4. Quickly open the throttle too halfway for a few seconds. Did the voltage suddenly rise toward the high end of the specified range? 100-900 mV
Go to Fuel System Electrical Test
Go to Step 5
1. Disconnect the fuel pump relay and crank the engine to relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Install the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine and idle at normal operating temperature. 4. Disconnect the vacuum line going to the fuel pressure regulator. With the engine running, is the fuel pressure within the specified range? 280-325 kPa (41-46 psi)
Go to OBD System Check Verify repair
Check for restricted fuel lines or restricted in-line filter. Was a problem found?
6E2426
DTC P1171 Fuel System Lean During Acceleration (Cont'd)

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Remove the fuel pump relay and replace it with a fused jumper which will connect the relays battery terminal to the terminal leading to the fuel pump fuse. 3. While the fuel pump is operating, use pliers to slowly close the return line (do not exceed the first specified value). Using the pliers to restrict the return line, can the fuel pressure be manipulated to exceed the second specified value?
325 kPa (46 psi) 414 kPa (60 psi)
Go to Step 8
Check for: D Faulty fuel pump D Restricted fuel pump strainer (sock) D Incorrect fuel pump D Incorrect fuel being used D Hot fuel Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2427
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1220 Throttle Position Senser2 (TPS2) Circuit Fault
D06RY00111
Circuit Description
D The throttle position (TP2) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to throttle blade angle. The throttle blade angle will vary about 8 % at closed throttle to about 92 % at wide open throttle (WOT). This code detects a continuous short to ground or high in either the cicuit or the sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D The CKP sensor shares 5 Volt reference with the TP sensor 2. If these codes are also set, it could indicate a problem with the 5 Volt reference curcuit. D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals,improper mating,broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals,and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harnessInspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK,observe the TP sensor display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1120 cannot be duplicated,the information included in the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently,performing the DTC P1120 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.

D The Ignition is ON. D The throttle blade angle is less than 2.5 % or more tnan 97.5 % for 18 failres within 500 test samples (15.6m sec).


D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condtion is no longer present. D A history DTC P1120 will clear after 40 consecutive trip cycle during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P1120 can be cleared using the Tech2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
6E2428
DTC P1220-TPS 2 Circuit Fault

Go to OBD System Check Go to ETC System Check
Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 1. Disconnect the CKP sensor. 2. Connect a test 5 volt reference circuit and the CKP signal at the CKP sensor harness connector. 3. Observe the CKP reading on the DVM. Is the CKP reading less than the specified value? (If no, start with diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.)
5V
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 4
1. Check the CKP signal circuit between the PCM and CKP ground circuit. 2. If the CKP signal circuit is open or shorted, repair as necessary. Was the CKP signal circuit open or shorted? Idle position = 8589% Open throttle = 1115% Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 6 Replace the CKP sensor. Is the action complete? 1. Ignition ON, engine not running. 2. Observe the AP2 reading on the Tech2. Is the AP2 reading less than the specified value?
5 6
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 10
1. Disconnect the AP sensor 2. 2. Connect the Tech2 5 Volt reference circuit and the AP2 signal at the Ap2 sensor harness connector. 3. Observe the AP2 reading on the Tech 2. Is the AP2 reading less than the specified value? (If no, start with diagnosis chart forother sensors in the circuit and see if 5V returns.)
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 8
1. Check the Ap2 sensor signal circuit between the PCM and AP2 sensor grund circuit. 2. If the AP2 sensor signal circuit open or shoted, repair it as necessary. Was the AP2 sensor signal circuit open or shorted? Closed TP sensor 1 = 813% TP sensor 2 = 813% Wide open TP sensor 1 = 8797% TP sensor 2 = 8797% Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 16 Replace the AP sensor 2. Is the action complete? Observe the TP angle reading on the Tech-2 while slowly opening the throttle. Does the TP angle increase steadily and evenly from the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle value?
9 10
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 12
6E2429
DTC P1220-TPS 2 Circuit Fault (Cont'd)

11
Was the DTC P1220 stored? Go to Step 16
12
1. Connect a DVM between the 5Volt reference circuit and the TP2 sensor ground circuit at the TPsensor harness connector. 2. Observe the voltage using a DVM. Is the voltage near the specified value? 5V Go to Step 13 Go to Step 16 Check the following items; 1. TP2 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. TP2 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the TP2 sensor. 3. TP2 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found,repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 14
13
14
Check the following items; 1. TP2 signal circuit or 5 volt reference circuit for a poor connection. 2. TP2 signal circuit or 5 volt reference circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the TP sensor. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 15 Go to Step 16
15 16
Replace the TP sensor. Was a problem corrected? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replasement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2430
Diagnosis Truble Code(DTC) P1221 TPS1 TPS2 correlation(Circuit Performance)
060R200069
Circuit Description
D The powertrain control module (PCM) controls engine speed by adjusting the position of the throttle control valve (DC motor). The throttle motor is a DC motor driven by one coil. The PCM applies current to DC motor coil in steps (%) to adjustment the valve into a passage in the throttle body to air flow. This method allows highly accurate control of engine speed and quick response to changes in engine load. D The acceleration position (AP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to acceleration pedal angle. The acceleration pedal angle (AP1) will vary about 13% at idle position to about 87% at open throttle(WOT). APS signal is used to determine which DC will adjusting throttle position. After the APS signal has been processed by the PCM, it will command DC motor to allow a move of throttle position.
D Acceleration pedal Check for objects blocking the AP sensor or pedal arm with spring, and excessive deposits in the acceleration pedal arm and on the acceleration pedal.
Diagnostic Aids
D An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbedthrough wire insulation or a wire broken inside the insulation. Check for poor connections or a damaged harness. Inspect the PCM harness and connector for improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor terminal-to-wire connection, and damaged harness. D Throttle body Check for objects blocking the DC motor or throttle bore, excessive deposits in the ETC passage and on the valve spring, and excessive deposits in the throttle bore and on the throttle valve plate.
6E2431
Diagnosis Truble Code(DTC) P1221 TPS1 TPS2 correlation(Circuit Perfoemance)

Was the On-Board (OBD) System Checkperformed? Go to Step 2
Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 Go to applicable DTC table Following below the DTCs stored: P1120,P1220 Do any of the above require a repair?
Go to Step 4
1. Obsarve the TP angle reading on the Tech 2 while slowly operating the acceleration pedal.
Throttle ClosedTPS1 Does the TP angle increase steadily and eventry from 813% TPS2 the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle 813% Wide Open Throttle value? TPS1 8797% TPS2 8797% Was the DTC P1221 stored?
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 9
1. Check the following items; D TPS1 and TPS2 signal curcuit for a short to boltag or GND. D TPS1 and TPS2 sensor ground curcuit for high resistance between the PCM and TP sensors. D TPS1 and TPS2 5 volt reference curcuit for high risistance between the PCM and TP sensors. 2. If aproblem found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Reobserve the TP angle reading on the Tech 2 while slowly operating the acceleration pedal. Throttle ClosedTPS1 Does the TP angle increase steadily and eventry from 813% TPS2 the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle 813% Wide Open Throttle value? TPS1 8797% TPS2 8797%
Verify repair
Go to Step 8
6E2432
Diagnosis Truble Code(DTC) P1221 TPS1 TPS2 correlation(Circuit Perfoemance) (Cont'd)

8 9
1. Replace the TP sensor. Was a problem corrected? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement PCM must be Verify repair Go to Step 9
Refer to ONVehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the adtion complete? Verify repair
6E2433
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1271 APS 1 2 Correlation Error
060R200064
Circuit Description
D The acceleration position (AP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to acceleration pedal angle. The acceleration pedal angle (AP1) will vary about 13% at idle position to about 87% at wide open throttle(WOT). This code detects a correlation error between APS1 and APS2.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the APP sensor 1, APP sensor 2 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1271 cannot be duplicated,the information included in the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTCP1271 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.

D The Ignition is ON. D The acceleration pedal angle difference is less than 4.5 % between ASP1 and APS2 for 50 counts within 50 test samples (15.6 m sec).


D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P1271 will clear after 40 consecutive trip cycle during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault.
6E2434
DTC P1271 APS 1 2 Correlation Error

Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 Observe the AP angle reading on the Tech 2 while slowly opening the throttle. Idle position AP sensor 1 Does the AP angle increase steadily and evenly from = 1115% AP sensor 2 = the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle 85 89% Wide value? open throttle AP sensor 1 = 8589% AP sensor 2 = 1115% Was the DTC P1271 stored? Go to Step 9
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5 Refer to Diagnositec Aids
1. Connect a test light between the 5 Voltge supply circuit and the AP sensor signal circuit at the AP1, AP2 sensor harness connector. 2. Observe the AP sensor reading on the Tech 2. Is the AP sensor reading near the specified value? 5V Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Check the following items; 1. AP1and AP2 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. AP1and AP2 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the AP sensor. 3. AP1and AP2 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7
Check the following items; 1. AP1and AP2 signal circuit or 5 volge supply circuit for a poor connection. 2. AP1and AP2 signal circuit or 5 volge supply circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the AP1 and AP2 sensor. 3. If a problem is found,repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8
6E2435
DTC P1271 APS 1 2 Correlation Error (Cont'd)

8 9
Replace the AP sensor. Was a problem corrected? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement PCM must be Verify repair Go to Step 9
Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released ornot. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replasement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2436
060R200064
Circuit Description
D The acceleration position (AP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to acceleration pedal angle. The acceleration pedal angle (AP2) will vary about 87 % at idle position to about 13 % at wide open throttle (WOT). This code detects a correlation error betweenAPS2 and APS3.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals,improper mating,broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals,and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the APP sensor 2, APP sensor 3 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1272 cannot be duplicated, the information includedin the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1272 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.



6E2437

Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 Observe the AP angle reading on the Tech 2 while slowly opening the throttle. Idleposition AP sensor 2 Does the AP angle increase steadily and evenly from = 8589% AP sensor 3 = the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle 85 89% Wide value? open throttle AP sensor 2 = 1115% AP sensor 3 = 3236% Was the DTC P1272 stored? Go to Step 9
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5 Refer to Diagnositc Aids
1. Connect a test light between the 5 Voltge supply circuit and the AP sensor signal circuit at the AP2 and AP3 sensor harness connector. 2. Observe the AP sensor reading on the Tech 2. Is the AP sensor reading near the specified value? 5V Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Check the following items; 1. AP2 and AP3 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. AP2 and AP3 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the AP sensor. 3. AP2 and AP3 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found,repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7
Check the following items; 1. AP2 and AP3 signal circuit or 5 volge supply circuit for a poor connection. 2. AP2 and AP3 signal circuit or 5 volge supply circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the AP2 and AP3 sensor. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8
6E2438

8 9
Replace the AP sensor. Was a probelm corrected? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 9
6E2439
060R200064
Circuit Description
D The acceleration position (AP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to acceleration pedal angle. The acceleration pedal angle (AP1) will vary about 13 % at idle position to about 87 % at wide open throttle (WOT). This code detects a correlation error between APS1 and APS3.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals,and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK,observe the APP sensor 1, APP sensor 3 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1273 cannot be duplicated,the information included in the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently,performing the DTC P1273 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.



6E2440

Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 Observe the AP angle reading on the Tech2 while slowly opening the throttle. Idleposition AP sensor 1 Does the AP angle increase steadily and evenly from = 1115% AP sensor 3 = the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle 85 89% Wide value? open throttle AP sensor 1 = 8589% AP sensor 3 = 3236% Was the DTC P1273 stored? Go to Step 9
Go to Step 4
1. Connect a test light between the 5 Voltge supply circuit and the AP sensor signal circuit at the AP1 and AP3 sensor harness connector. 2. Observe the AP sensor reading on the Tech 2. Is the AP sensor reading near the specified value? 5V Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Check the following items; 1. AP1 and AP3 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. AP1 and AP3 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the AP sensor. 3. AP1 and AP3 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7
Check the following items; 1. AP1 and AP3 signal circuit or 5 volge supply circuit for a poor connection. 2. AP1 and AP3 signal circuit or 5 volge supply circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the AP1 and AP3 sensor. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8
6E2441

8 9
Replace the AP sensor. Was a problem corrected? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released ornot. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replasement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 9
6E2442
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1275 APS 1 Circuit Fault
060R200064
Circuit Description
D The acceleration position (AP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to acceleration pedal angle. The acceleration pedal angle (AP1) will vary about 13 % at idle position to about 87 % at wide open throttle (WOT). This code detects a continuous short to ground or high in either the cicuit or the sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D The MAP sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the Fuel Tank Pressure, APS1, APS3 and EGR value. D The MAP sensor shares a ground with the Fuel Tank Pressure, the ECT sensor, and the Transmission Fluid. D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals,and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK,observe the APP sensor 1 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1275 cannot be duplicated,the information included in the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1275 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.

D The Ignition is ON. D The acceleration pedal angle is less than 2.5 % or more than 97 % for 12 counts within 500 test samples.

D The PCM will store condition which werepresent when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

6E2443
DTC P1275 APS 1 Circuit Fault

Observe the AP angle reading on the Tech 2 while slowly opening the throttle. Does the AP angle increase steadily and evenly from the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle value?
Idle position AP sensor 1 = 1115% Wide open throttle AP sensor 1 = 8589%
Go to Step 3
Was the DTC P1275 sotred? Go to Step 8
1. Connect a test light between the 5 Voltge supply circuit and the AP1 sensor signal circuit at the AP sensor harness connector. 2. Observe the AP sensor reading on the Tech 2. Is the AP sensor reading near the specified value? 5V Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Check the following items; 1. AP1 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. AP1 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the AP sensor. 3. AP1 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found,repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6
Check the following items; 1. AP1 signal circuit or 5 volge supply circuit for a poor connection. 2. AP1 signal circuit or 5 volge supply circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the AP1 sensor. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
7 8
Replace the AP sensor. Was a problem corrected? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2444
060R200064
Circuit Description
D The acceleration position (AP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to acceleration pedal angle. The acceleration pedal angle (AP2) will vary about 87 % at idle position to about 13 % at wide open throttle(WOT). This code detects a continuous short to ground or high in either the cicuit or the sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals,and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the APP sensor 2 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1280 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1280 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.



6E2445
DTC P1280 - APS 2 Circuit Fault

Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4 Refer to Diagnostid Aids
1. Connect a test light between the 5 Voltge supply circuit and the AP2 sensor signal circuit at the AP sensor harness connector. 2. Observe the AP sensor reading on the Tech 2. Is the AP sensor reading near the specified value? 5V Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Check the following items; 1. AP2 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. AP2 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the AP sensor. 3. AP2 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6
7 8
Replace the AP sensor. Was a problem corrected? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed.Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replasement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2446
060R200064
Circuit Description
D The acceleration position (AP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to acceleration pedal angle. The acceleration pedal angle (AP3) will vary about 87 % at idle position to about 34 % at wide open throttle(WOT). This code detects a continuous short to ground or high in either the circuit or the sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D The MAP sensor shares a 5 Volt reference with the Fuel Tank Pressure, APS1, APS3 and EGR value. D The MAP sensor shares a ground with the Fuel Tank Pressure, the ECT sensor, and the Transmission Fluid. D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals,and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the APP sensor 3 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1285 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1285 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.



6E2447
DTC P1285 APS 3 Circuit Fault

Go to Step 3
1. Connect a test light between the 5 Voltge supply circuit and the AP3 sensor signal circuit at the AP sensor harness connector. 2. Observe the AP sensor reading on the Tech 2. Is the AP sensor reading near the specified value? 5V Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 1. Check the following items; AP3 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. AP3 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the AP sensor. 3. AP3 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6
7 8
Replace the AP sensor. Was a problem corrected Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released ornot. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replasement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2448
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1290 ETC Forced Idle Mode
060R200069
Circuit Description
D The acceleration position (AP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to acceleration pedal angle. The acceleration pedal angle (AP1) will vary about 13 % at idle position to about 87 % at wide open throttle (WOT). This code detects that if the systm is in Forced Idle Mode. (Fail safe Mode)
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the APP sensor 1, APP sensor 2, APP sensor 3 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1290 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1290 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.

D The Ignition is ON. D Forced Idle Mode is active. (Fail safe Mode)


D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condtion is no longer present. D A history DTC P1290 will clear after 40 cosecutive trip cycle during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P1290 can be cleared using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
6E2449
DTC P1290 - ETC Forced Idle Mode

Was the On - Board (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Check for a poor conection at the AP1,AP2,AP3 sensor harness conector. 2. If a problem found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found ? Verify repair
Go to Step 3
1. Check the curcuit between the PCM and each terminal of AP1,AP2 and AP3 sensor. 2. If the curcuit is open or shorted, repair it as necessary. Was the curcuit open or short? Vefiry repair Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Replace the AP sensor. Is the action complate? Observe the AP angle reading on the Tech 2 while slowly opening the throttle. Idle position AP sensor 1 Does the AP angle increase steadily and evenly from = 1115% AP the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle sensor 2,3 = 8589% Wide value? open throttle AP sensor 1 = 8589% AP sensor 2 = 1115% AP sensor 3 = 3236% Replace the PCM; The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ONVehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replasement PCM. Is the action complate? Verify repair
4 5
Go to Step 6
6E2450
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1295 Power Management Mode
D06RY00111
Circuit Description
D The throttle position (TP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to throttle position (blade angle). The throttle blade angle will vary about 8 % at closed throttle to about 92 % at wide open throttle (WOT). D The DC motor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to command throttle position (blade angle). D The mass air flow (MAF) sensor measures the amount of air which passes through it into the engine during a given time. The powertrain Control Module (PCM) uses the mass air flow information to monitor engine operating conditions for fuel delivery calculations. A large quantitiy of air entering the engine indicates an accleration or high load situation, while a small quantity or air indicates deceleration or idle. The MAF sensor produces a frequency signal which can be monitored using a Tech 2. The frequency will vary within a range of around 4 to 7g/s at idle to around 25 to 40g/s at maximum engine load. D This DTC ditects that if the systm is in PowerManagement Mode.(Fail safe Mode)
D The PCM calculates an air flow value based on idle air control valve position, throttle position, RPM and barometric pressure. D The PCM will store condition which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals,and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the

D The ignition is ON. D Power Management Mode is active. (Fail safe Mode)


TP sensor 1, TP sensor 2 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.If DTC P1295 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Faillure Records data can
6E2451
be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1295 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P1295 - Power Management Mode

Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 1. Obsarve the TP angle reading on the Tech 2 while Closed slowly operating the acceleration pedal. throttle TPS1 = 813% Does the TP angle increase steadily and eventry from TPS2 = the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle 813% Wide value? Open Throttle TPS1 = 8797% TPS2 = 8797% Was the DTC P1295 stored? Go to Step 10
Go to Step 4
1. Check the curcuit between the PCM and each terminal of TP1 and TP2 sensor. Was the curcuit open or shorted? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 1. Repair the faulty wiring harness. Was a problem corrected? 1. Ignition On, engine Off. 2. Operate the throttle lever by hand (Dont operate the acceleration pedal ). Was the DTC P1515 or P1516 stored? PCM must be Go to Step 9 Verify repair Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9 1. Replace the TP sensor. Was a problem corrected? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement
6 7
8 9
Refer to ONVehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the adtion complete? Varify repair
6E2452
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1299 ETC Forced Engine Shutdown Mode
D06RY00111
Circuit Description
D The throttle position sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to throttle position (blade angle). The throttle blade angle will vary about 8% at closed throttle to about 92% at wide open throttle(WOT). D The DC motor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to command throttle position (blade angle). D The mass air flow (MAF) sensor measures the amount of air which passes through it into the engine during a given time. The powertrain Control Module (PCM) uses the mass air flow information to monitor engine operating conditions for fuel delivery calculations. A laege quantitiy of air entering the engine indicates an accleration or high load situation, while a small quantity or air indicates deceleration or idle. The MAF sensor produces a frequency signal which can be monitored using a Tech 2. The frequency will vary within a range of around 4 to 7g/s at idle to around 25 to 40g/s at maximum engine load. D This DTC ditects if the system is in ECT Forced Engine Shutdown Mode.(Fail safe Mode)


Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals,and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the TP sensor 1, TP sensor 2 display on the Tech 2 while

D The ignition is ON. D ECT Forced Engine Shutdown Mode is active. (Fail safe Mode)

moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1299 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Faillure Records data can
6E2453
DTC P1299 - ETC Forced Engine Shutdown Mode

Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 1. Obsarve the TP angle reading on the Tech 2 while Closed slowly operating the acceleration pedal. throttle TPS1 = 813% Does the TP angle increase steadily and eventry from TPS2 = the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle 813% Wide value? Open Throttle TPS1 = 8797% TPS2 = 8797% Was the DTC P1299 stored? Go to Step 10
Go to Step 4
1. Check the curcuit between the PCM and each terminal of TP1 and TP2 sensor. Was the curcuit open or shorted? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 1. Repair the faulty wiring harness. Was a problem corrected? 1. Ignition On, engine Off. 2. Operate the throttle lever by hand (Dont operate the acceleration pedal ). Was the DTC P1515 or P1516 stored? PCM must be Go to Step 9 Verify repair Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9 1. Replace the TP sensor. Was a problem corrected? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement
6 7
8 9
Refer to ONVehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the adtion complete? Varify repair
6E2454
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1310 ION Sensing Module Diagnosis
060R200068
Circuit Description
The Power Control Module (PCM) checks the validity of the signals used in the ION Sensing module at the following engine operating conditions. D The Deceleration Fuel Cut Off (DFCO) test is performed to evaluate the Combustion Quality (CQ) signal pulse width D If it is below a predetermined value, the value it is expected to be during DFCO conditions. If the CQ signal pulse width is above the predetermined threshold, the fail counter will be incremented. If the failure counter exceeds the calibration, then the test is complete and a failure will be reported. D The Power Enrichment (PE) test is performed to evaluate the Combustion Quality (CQ) signal pulse width D If it is below a predetermined value, the value is expected to be during PE conditions. If the CQ signal pulse width is above the predetermined threshold, the fail counter will be incremented. If the failure counter exceeds the calibration, then the test is complete and a failure will be reported. D The Combustion Quality (CQ) test is performed to check if inappropriate (CQ) signal status were detected. If missing CQ pulses or multiple CQ pulses or CQ pulse width calculation errors were detected, the fail counter will be incremented. If the failure counter exceeds the calibration, then the test is complete and a failure will be reported.

D D D D D D Ignition voltage is between 10volt and 16 volts. MAP sensor signal is between 26kPa and 100 kPa. Fuel level is more than 19%. Engine speed is between 650rpm and 6500rpm. No Crank DTCs set. No System voltage DTCs set.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM calculates an air flow value based on idle air control valve position, throttle position, RPM and barometric pressure. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

6E2455
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection.
D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1310 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1310 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P1310 - ION Sensing Module Diagnostic

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the ION Sensing module. 3. Disconnect the PCM. Is the action complete? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Check the ION Sensing harness between the PCM and ION Sensing module circuit harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 1. Disconnect the ignition coil. Is the action complete? Check the ION Sensing harness between the ignition coil and ION Sensing module circuit at the ION Sensing Module harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Check the following items; 1. Ignition coil and ignition coil circuit. 2. Ignition coil ground circuit for a poor connection. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
5 6
8 9
Replace the Ignition coil. Is the action complete? Check the following items; 1. ION Sensing module ground circuit for a poor connection. 2. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10
6E2456
DTC P1310 - ION Sensing Module Diagnostic (Cont'd)

10 11
Replace the ION Sensing module. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement PCM must be Verify repair Go to Step 11
6E2457
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1311 ION Sensing Module SEC Line 1 Circuit Fault
060R200068
Circuit Description
D The Power Control Module (PCM) will compare the secondary current reading to predetermined maximum and minimum thresholds. If the secondary current signal pulse width is out of the predetermined range, the fail counter will be incremented. If the failure counter exceeds the calibration, then the PCM is complete and a failure will be reported. If the sample counter threshold is reached before the failure threshold, then the PCM is complete and pass will be reported. This PCM will detect an open/short circuit in the secondary current sense input circuit, misfire on the entire bank for the secondary current sense input circuit, coil failure, and same internal Ignition Current Sense System (ICSS) module faults.



D D D D D Ignition voltage is between 10volt and 16 volts. MAP sensor signal is between 26kPa and 100 kPa. Fuel level is more than 19%. Engine speed is between 650rpm and 6500rpm. ION Sensing Module circuit is open or shorted signals on the SEC 1 line.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions:
6E2458

D A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1311 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. D If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1311 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor.
DTC P1311 - ION Sensing Module SEC Line 1 Circuit Fault

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the ION Sensing module. 3. Disconnect the PCM. Is the action complete? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Check the ION Sensing module harness between the PCM and ION Sensing module circuit at the ION Sensing module harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 5 1. Disconnect the ignition coil. Is the action complete? Check the ION Sensing module harness between the ignition coil and ION Sensing module circuit at the SEC line 1 harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Check the following items; 1. Ignition coil and ignition coil circuit. 2. Ignition coil ground circuit for a poor connection. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
5 6
8 9
6E2459
DTC P1311 - ION Sensing Module SEC Line 1 Circuit Fault (Cont'd)
10 11
6E2460
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1312 ION Sensing Module SEC Line 2 Circuit Fault
060R200068
Circuit Description
D The Power Control Module (PCM) will compare the secondary current reading to predetermined maximum and minimum thresholds. If the secondary current signal pulse width is out of the predetermined range, the fail counter will be incremented. If the fail counter exceeds the calibration, then the PCM is complete and a failure will be reported. If the sample counter threshold is reached before the failure threshold, then the PCM is complete and pass will be reported. This PCM will detect an open/short circuit in the secondary current sense input circuit, misfire on the entire bank for the secondary current sense input circuit, coil failure, and same internal Ignition Current Sense System (ICSS) module faults.



D D D D D Ignition voltage is between 10volt and 16 volts. MAP sensor signal is between 26kPa and 100 kPa. Fuel level is more than 19%. Engine speed is between 650rpm and 6500rpm. ION Sensing Module circuit is open or shorted signals on the SEC 2 line.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions:

D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor.
6E2461
A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1312 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1312 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
DTC P1312 - ION Sensing Module SEC Line 2 Circuit Fault

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the ION Sensing module. 3. Disconnect the PCM. Is the action complete? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Check the ION Sensing module harness between the PCM and ICSS module circuit at the ION Sensing Module harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 5 1. Disconnect the ignition coil. Is the action complete? Check the ION Sensing module harness between the ignition coil and ION Sensing module circuit at the SEC line 2 harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Check the following items; 1. Ignition coil and ignition coil circuit. 2. Ignition coil ground circuit for a poor connection. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
5 6
8 9
6E2462
DTC P1312 - ION Sensing Module SEC Line 2 Circuit Fault (Cont'd)
10 11
6E2463
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1326 ION Sensing Module Combustion Quality Input Circuit Fault
060R200068
Circuit Description
The Power Control Module (PCM) checks the validity of the signals used in the ION Sensing module at the following engine operating conditions. D The test is performed to evacuate the Combustion Quality (CQ) signal pulse width if it is within a predetermined range. If the CQ signal pulse width is out of the predetermined range, the fail counter will be incremented. If the failure counter exceeds the calibration, then test is complete and a failure will be reported. If the sample counter threshold is reached before the failure threshold, then the test is complete and a pass will be reported. This test will detect an open/short in the CQ line circuit, ION Sensing module faults and analog input faults in the PCM.

Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1326 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can

D Ignition voltage is between 10volt and 16 volts. D No Crank DTCs set. D No cylinder ID DTCs set.

6E2464

If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1326 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set.
DTC P1326 - ION Sensing Module Combustion

1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the ION Sensing module. 3. Disconnect the PCM. Is the action complete? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Check the ION Sensing module harness between the PCM and ION Sensing module circuit at the QC line harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 5 1. Disconnect the ignition coil. Is the action complete? Check the ION Sensing module harness between the ignition coil and ICSS module circuit at the ION Sensing Module harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Check the following items; 1. Ignition coil and ignition coil circuit. 2. Ignition coil ground circuit for a poor connection. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
5 6
8 9
6E2465
DTC P1326 - ION Sensing Module Combustion (Cont'd)

10 11
Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin .Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2466
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1340 ION Sensing Module Cylinder ID Fault (Cylinder Synchronization Fail)
060R200068
Circuit Description
The Power Control Module (PCM) checks the validity of the signals used in the ION Sensing module at the following engine operating conditions. D This test will return a fault if the cylinder synchronization routine has not been completed after a predetermined number of events after crank. This test will detect fault that will prevent the PCM from synchronization, such as Knock Signal (KI) Combustion Quality (CQ) lines being swapped, shorted spark plugs, ION Sensing module faults, an PCM hardware faults.


D D D D D D D Ignition voltage is between 11volts and 16 volts. Engine speed is between 650rpm and 6250rpm. No ECT DTCs set. No injector DTCs set. No Fuel Trim DTCs set. No Misfire DTCs set. No system voltage DTCs set.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connections. D Misrouted harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harnessInspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor.

D The PCM will ON the MIL after second trip with detected the fault. D The PCM calculates an air flow value based on idle air control valve position, throttle position, RPM and barometric pressure.

A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1340 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Failure Records data can be useful in determining vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set.
6E2467
DTC P1340 - ION Sensing Module Cylinder ID Fault (Cylinder Synchronization Fail)
1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the ION Sensing module. 3. Disconnect the PCM. Is the action complete? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Check the ION Sensing module harness between the PCM and ICSS module circuit at the QC line harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 5 1. Disconnect the ignition coil. Is the action complete? Check the ION Sensing module harness between the ignition coil and ION Sensing module circuit at the ION Sensing Module harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Check the following items; 1. Ignition coil and ignition coil circuit. 2. Ignition coil ground circuit for a poor connection. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
5 6
8 9
6E2468
DTC P1340 - ION Sensing Module Cylinder ID Fault (Cylinder Synchronization Fail) (Cont'd)
10 11
Replace the ION Sensing module. Is the action complete? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 11
6E2469
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1404 EGR Stuck Closed
060R200050
Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors the EGR valve pintle position input to ensure that the valve responds properly to commands from the PCM, and to detect a fault if current pintle zero position is different from the learned zero position. If the PCM detects a pintle position signal indicates more than 30 % different between current zero position and the learned zero position for more than 5 seconds, and this condition exists 3 times during trip, then the PCM will set DTC P1404.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Excessive carbon deposit on EGR valve shaft and/or foreign material may cause the EGR valve not to fully seat. The carbon deposit may occur by unusual port operation. Remove foreign material and/or excessive carbon deposit on EGR valve shaft and to allow the EGR valve to be fully seated. D Poor connection or damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

D D D D Ignition voltage is between 11 and 16 volts. Intake Air temp is more than 3C. Desired EGR position is more than 3 %. Difference of EGR pintle position between current and the learned zero is more than 30 % for more than 5 seconds, and exists three times to the above condition during a trip the PCM will set DTC 1404. Then it trigger the PCM light on.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) after consecutive 2nd trip in which the fault is detected. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in Failure Records data.
6E2470
DTC P1404 EGR Stuck Closed

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, review and record Tech 2 Failure Records Data. 2. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 3. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC inf. for DTC P1404 until the DTC P1404 test runs. Note the result. Does the Tech 2 indicates DTC P1404 failed this ignition? Go to Step 3
1. Disconnect the EGR valve harness connector. 2. Inspect the EGR valve and connectors for damaged pin or terminals. Were there any damaged pins or terminals? Go to Step 4 Verify repair Go to Step 5 Repair the damaged pin or terminal. Is the action complete? 1. Remove EGR valve from Engine. 2. Inspect EGR valve for any excessive carbon deposit on EGR shaft. 3. Inspect for any foreign material inside of EGR valve. Was excessive carbon deposit on EGR valve shaft and/or foreign material in EGR valve ? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7
4 5
1. Clean up EGR valve shaft and inside of EGR valve. 2. Remove foreign material from EGR valve. 3. Visually inspect damage of pintle and seat to see if it is bent. If damaged, leakage may occur. Was there any severe damage which affects function? Go to Step 9 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Install the EGR valve. Ignition OFF. Install the Tech 2. Run the engine at idle. On the Tech 2, select EGR Control Test. Use the UP arrow to increase the EGR from 0% to 40%. Verify repair
Did EGR work properly? 8 1. Reset the learned zero EGR valve position. 2. Repeat step 7. Did EGR work properly?
Go to Step 8
Verify repair
Go to Step 9
6E2471
DTC P1404 EGR Stuck Closed (Cont'd)

9 10
Replace the EGR valve. Does DTC P1404 still fail DTC test on the Tech 2? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Go to Step 10 Verify repair
6E2472
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1441 EVAP System Flow During Non-Purge
060RY00398
Circuit Description
Canister purge is controlled by a solenoid valve that allows manifold vacuum to purge the canister. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a ground to energize the solenoid valve (purge ON). The EVAP purge solenoid control is pulse-width modulated (PWM) or turned ON and OFF several times a second. The duty cycle (pulse width) is determined by engine operating conditions including load, throttle position, coolant temperature and ambient temperature. The duty cycle is calculated by the PCM and the output is commanded when the appropriate conditions have been met.
D Fuel level is between 15% and 85%. D All conditions are present for at least 3 seconds.


D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condition is no longer present. D A history DTC P1441 will clear after 40 consecutive warmup cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P1441 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D No active ECT sensor, IAT sensor, MAP sensor, or TP sensor DTCs set. D BARO reading is above 85 kPa. D Engine coolant temperature is below 70C (158F). D Start-up intake air temperature (IAT) and start-up engine coolant temperature (ECT) are both above 5C (41F). D The difference between start-up ECT and start-up IAT is less than 25C (45F). D TP sensor indicates a throttle position above 12%. D Battery voltage is between 11.5 volts and 16 volts. D Engine speed is between 800 and 6,000 RPM. D Canister purge duty cycle is below 3%.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wring harness for damage. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault.

6E2473
Test Description
3. Determines if the PCM is able to control the EVAP purge solenoid valve. 4. Determines if the DTC will set under the conditions present when the DTC was originally stored. If not, the fault is intermittent. 5. Checks for a grounded EVAP purge solenoid driver circuit, a faulty EVAP vacuum switch, or a leaking EVAP purge solenoid valve.
DTC P1441 EVAP System Flow During Non-Purge

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Remove the fuel filler cap. Ignition ON. Observe Fuel Tank Pressure on the Tech 2. 1.51V Go to Step 3
Is Fuel Tank Pressure at the specified value? 3 1. Re-install the fuel filler cap. 2. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve ON (Closed). 3. Disconnect the canister side rubber hose end that hose is connected between the Purge Solenoid Valve and Canister. IMPORTANT: Before continuing with the diagnosis, zero the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413 (refer to the tool operating instructions). And them monitor the fuel tank inner pressure using the Tech 2. Does the fuel tank pressure remain the specified value? 4 1. Disconnect the EVAP pressure/purge cart J41413, and then plug the hose end. 2. Disconnect the rubber hose end of engine vacuum source side, (the hose connected between Purge Solenoid Valve and engine). 3. Connect the vacuum hand pump to this rubber hose end. 4. Then apply the -15 in H2O vacuum by the vacuum pump. 5. Monitor the fuel tank inner pressure using the Tech 2. Does the fuel tank inner pressure hold the specified value? 5 Replace the Purge Solenoid Valve.
Go to DTC P0452 or P0453
1.52 - 1.60V
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 6
1.47 - 1.51V
Go to Step 6 Verify Repair
Go to Step 5
6E2474
DTC P1441 EVAP System Flow During Non-Purge (Cont'd)

1. Check leaks, kinks or pinched hoses at the EVAP system rubber hose line, and also check if the rubber hoses are correctly connected or not. 2. Check for a leak from Vent Solenoid Valve and EVAP system rubber hoses, and also check for clogged Filter of air separator which is located near the vent solenoid valve. Was a problem found? Using the Vacuum Hose Routing Diagram, repair or re-connect the rubber hoses correctly.
Verify Repair
Go to Step 7
1. Start engine. 2. Remove the Fuel Filler cap. 3. Using the Tech 2, command the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve ON (closed) and Purge Solenoid Valve OFF (0%). 4. Replace the Fuel Filler Cap. 5. Run the engine at 2500RPM constant while monitoring Fuel Tank Vacuum on the Tech 2. Does the fuel tank vacuum remain at the specified value while the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve ON (closed) and Purge Solenoid Valve OFF (0%)? Go to Diagnostic Aids
30 - 40 %
Verify Repair
6E2475
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1514 TPS - MAF Correlation Error
060R200061
Circuit Description
D The throttle position (TP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to throttle blade angle. The throttle blade angle will vary about 8 % at closed throttle to about 92 % at wide open throttle (WOT). D The mass air flow (MAF) sensor measures the amount of air which passes through it into the engine during a given time. The powertrain Control Module (PCM) uses the mass air flow information to monitor engine operating conditions for fuel delivery calculations. A large quantitiy of air entering the engine indicates an accleration or high load situation, while a small quantity or air indicates deceleration or idle. The MAF sensor produces a frequency signal which can be monitored using a Tech 2. The frequency will vary within a range of around 4 to 7g/s at idle to around 25 to 40g/s at maximum engine load.
D The PCM calculates an air flow value based on idle air control valve position, throttle position, RPM and barometric pressure. D The PCM will store condition which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM - Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating,broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals,and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness - Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the

D D D D The engine is running. No MAF sensor DTCs are set. Throttle actuation mode is not off. MAF reading-ETC estimated air flow is less than 40g/s for 250 failres within test 1000 test samples (15.6 m sec).

6E2476

A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1514 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set. If it is determined that the DTC occurs intermittently, performing the DTC P1514 Diagnostic Chart may isolate the cause of the fault.
Mass Air Flow, TP sensor 1, TP sensor 2 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. D Plugged intake air duct or filter element D A wide - open throttle acceleration from a stop should cause the mass air flow displayed on a Tech 2 to increase from about 3 6 g/s at idle to 100 g/s or greater at the time of the 1 2 shift. If not, check for a restriction.
DTC P1514 - TPS-MAF Correlation Error

Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF. 2. Review and record Tech 2 Failure Records data. 3. Operate the vehicle within Failure Records conditions as noted. 4. Using a Tech 2, monitor DTC info for DTC P1514. Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P1514 failed this ignition? Go to Step 4
1. Start the engine. 2. With the engine idling, monitor MAF Frequency display on the Tech 2. Is the MAF Frequency below the specified value? 4 7 g/s Go to Step 5 Go to Step 8 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition OFF. Disconnect the MAF sensor connector. Ignition ON, engine idling. Using a Tech 2, monitor MAF Frequency. 0g/s Go to Step 6 Verify repair Go to Step 7
Does the Tech 2 indicate a MAF Frequency at the specified value? 6 7 Replace the MAF sensor. Is the action complete? 1. Check the MAF harness for incorrect routing near high voltage components (solenoids, relays, motors). 2. If incorrect routing is found, correct the harness routing. Was a problem found? 8 1. With the engine idling, monitor MAF Frequency. display on the Tech 2. 2. Quickly snap open throttle to wide open throttle while under a road load and record value. Does the Tech 2 indicate a MAF Frequency at thespecified value? 9 1. IgnitionON, engine not running. 2. Observe the MAP reading on the Tech 2. Is the MAP reading less than the specified value?
Verify repair
Go to Step 8
4 7 g/s
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 9
100kPa
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 13
6E2477
DTC P1514 - TPS-MAF Correlation Error (Cont'd)

10
1. Disconnect the MAP sensor. 2. Connect a test 5 volt reference circuit and the MAP signal at the MAP sensor harness connector. 3. Observe the MAP reading on the Tech 2. Is the MAP reading less than the specified value? (If no, start with diagnosis chart for other sensors in the circuit and see if 5Vreturns.)
5V
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 18
11
1. Check the MAP signal circuit between the PCM and MAP ground circuit. 2. If the MAP signal circuit is open or shoted, repair it as necessary. Was the MAP signal circuit open or shorted? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 12 Replace the MAP sensor. Is the action complete? Observe the TP angle reading on the Tech 2 while slowly opening the throttle. Closed throttle TP sensor 1 = Does the TP angle increase steadily and evenly from 813% TP the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle sensor 2= value? 813% Wide open throttle TP sensor 1 = 8797% TP sensor 2 = 8797% 1. Connect a DVM between the 5Volt reference circuit and the TP1 and TP2 sensor ground circuit at the TP sensor harness connector. 2. Observe the voltage using a DVM. Is the voltage near the specified value? 5V Go to Step 15 Go to Step 18 Check the following items; 1. TP1 and TP2 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. TP1 and TP2 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the TP sensor. 3. TP1 and TP2 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 16
12 13
Go to Step 18
Go to Step 14
14
15
16
Check the following items; 1. TP1and TP2 signal circuit or 5 volt reference circuit for a poor connection. 2. TP1 and TP2 signal circuit or 5 volt reference circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the TP1and TP2 sensor. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 17
6E2478
DTC P1514 - TPS-MAF Correlation Error (Cont'd)

17 18
Replace the TP sensor. Was a problem corrected? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin.Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replasement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 18
6E2479
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1515 Command - Actual TPS Correlation Error
D06RY00111
Circuit Description
D The throttle position (TP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to throttle position (blade angle). The throttle blade angle will vary about 8 % at closed throttle to about 92 % at wide open throttle(WOT). D The DC motor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to command throttle position (blade angle). D This DTC ditects the difference between actual throttle position and command throttle position.


D The ignition is ON. D Throttle actuation mode is normal. D Command Throttle position - Actual Throttle position is more than + 5 % for 100 counts within test 1000 test samples (15.6 m sec) else Actual Throttle position is less than + 40 % and Command Throttle position Actual Throttle position is more than - 5 % or Command Throttle position - Actual Throttle position is more than - 20 % for 150 failres within test 1000 test samples (15.6 m sec).
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, mproper mating, locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the TP sensor 1, TP sensor 2 display on the Tech2 while

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM calculates an air flow value based on idle air control valve position, throttle position, RPM and barometric pressure.
6E2480

moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1515 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Faillure Records data can
DTC P1515 - Command - Actual TPS Correlation Error

Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 1. Ignition On, engine Off. 2. Operate the throttle lever by hand (Dont operate the acceleration pedal). Was the DTC P1515 or P1516 stored? Go to Step 4
Go to Step 6
1. Check the DC mortor harness between the PCM and DC mortor curcuit at the DC mortor harness connector. 2. If a problem found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Replace the throttle assembly (DC mortor). Is the action complete? Observe the TP angle reading on the Tech 2 while slowly opening the throttle. Closed throttle TP sensor 1 = Does the TP angle increase steadily and evenly from 813% TP the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle sensor 2= value? 813% Wide Open throttle TP sensor 1 = 8797% TP sensor 2 = 8797% Check the following items; 1. TP1 and TP2 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. TP1 and TP2 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the TP sensor. 3. TP1and TP2 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found,repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8
5 6
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 7
6E2481
DTC P1515 - Command - Actual TPS Correlation Error (Cont'd)

Check the following items; 1. TP1 and TP2 signal circuit or 5 volt reference circuit for a poor connection. 2. TP1 and TP2 signal circuit or 5 volt reference circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the TP1 and TP2 sensor. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
9 10
Replace the TP sensor. Was a problem found? Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to ON-Vehicle Service in Power Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replasement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
6E2482
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1516 Command - Actual TPS Correlation Error
D06RY00111
Circuit Description
D The throttle position (TP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to throttle position (blade angle). The throttle blade angle will vary about 8% at closed throttle to about 92 % at wide open throttle (WOT). D The DC motor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to command throttle position (blade angle). D This DTC detects the dufference between actual throttle position and command throttle position in steady state.


D The ignition is ON. D Throttle Actuation mode is normal. D Command Throttle position-Actual Throttle positionis less than 8 % when desird TPS is sutudy wihtin 0.5 %for 30 second within test samples (30 second)
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Damaged harness - Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the TP sensor 1, TP sensor 2 display on the Tech2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor.

D The PCM will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) the first time the fault is detected. D The PCM calculates an air flow value based on idle air control valve position, throttle position, RPM and barometric pressure. D The PCM will store condition which were present when the DTC was set as Freeze Frame and in the Failure Records data.

A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1516 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set.
6E2483
DTC P1516 - Command - Actual TPS Correlation Error

Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 1. Ignition On, engine Off. 2. Operate the throttle lever by hand (Dont operate the acceleration pedal). Was the DTC P1515 or P1516 stored? Go to Step 4
Go to Step 6
1. Check the DC mortor harness between the PCM and DC mortor curcuit at the DC mortor harness connector. 2. If a problem found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 5 Replace the throttle assembly (DC mortor). Is the action complete? Observe the TP angle reading on the Tech 2 shile slowly opening the throttle. Closed throttle TP sensor 1 = Does the TP angle increase steadily and evenly from 813% TP the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle sensor 2= value? 813% Wide Open throttle TP sensor 1 = 8797% TP sensor 2 = 8797% Check the following items; 1. TP1 and TP2 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. TP1 and TP2 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the TP sensor. 3. TP1and TP2 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found,repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8
5 6
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 7
6E2484
DTC P1516 - Command - Actual TPS Correlation Error (Cont'd)

Check the following items; 1. TP1 and TP2 signal circuit or 5 volt reference circuit for a poor connection. 2. TP1 and TP2 signal circuit or 5 volt reference circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the TP1 and TP2 sensor. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
9 10
6E2485
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1523 Actuator Control Return Performance
D06RY00111
Circuit Description
D The throttle position (TP) sensor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to throttle position (blade angle). The throttle blade angle will vary about 8 % at closed throttle to about 92 % at wide open throttle(WOT). D The DC motor circuit provides a voltage signal relative to command throttle position (blade angle). D This DTC ditects if the throttle return to the default position at key on, steady state.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent may be caused by the following: D Poor connectons. D Mis routed harness. D Rubbed through wire insulation. D Broken wire inside the insulation. Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM-Inspect harness connectors for backed out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal to wire connection. D Throttle function: Check for the throttle function. When ignition switch ON that throttle lever is smooth operated by step on the acceleration pedal. D Damaged harness-Inspect the wiring harness for damage. If the harness appears to be OK, observe the TP sensor 1, TP sensor 2 display on the Tech 2 while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the sensor. A change in the display will indicate the location of the fault. If DTC P1523 cannot be duplicated, the information included in the Faillure Records data can be useful in determined vehicle mileage since the DTC was last set.

D The ignition is ON. D Normalized TPS is less than 7 % or Normalized TPS is more than 25 %.


D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condtion is no longer present. D A history DTC P1523 will clear after 40 cosecutive trip cycle during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault.
6E2486
DTC P1523 - Actuator Control Return Performance

Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 Observe the TP angle reading on the Tech 2 while slowly opening the throttle. Closed throttle TP sensor 1 = Does the TP angle increase steadily and evenly from 813% TP the closed throttle value to the wide open throttle sensor 2= value? 813% Wide open throttle TP sensor 1 = 8797% TP sensor 2 = 8797% 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the DC motor. Is the DC motor reading near the specified value? 0.3 100 W Go to Step 5
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 6
1. Check the DC motor harness between the PCM and DC Motor circuit at the DC motor harness connector. 2. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 8 Go to Step 5 Refer to Diagnostic Aids Replace the throttle assembly (DC motor). Is the action complete? Was the DTC P1523 stored? Go to Step 12
6 7
1. Connect a DVM between the 5Volt reference circuit and the TP1 and TP2 sensor ground circuit at the TP sensor harness connector. 2. Observe the voltage using a DVM. Is the voltage near the specified value? 5V Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Check the following items; 1. TP1 and TP2 signal circuit for a short to voltage. 2. TP1 and TP2 sensor ground circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the TP sensor. 3. TP1and TP2 sensor ground circuit for a poor connection. 4. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10
6E2487
DTC P1523 - Actuator Control Return Performance (Cont'd)

10
Check the following items; 1. TP1and TP2 signal circuit or 5 volt reference circuit for a poor connection. 2. TP1 and TP2 signal circuit or 5 volt reference circuit for high resistance between the PCM and the TP1and TP2 sensor. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 11
11 12
6E2488
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1571 Brake Switch No Operation
060R200067
Circuit Description
The brake switch has 3 functions. D Brake pedal operation check D Brake light operation (On and off) D Cruise control (Cancel) The PCM receives vehicle speed and switch position signals from the brake switch. The PCM sets brake operating conditions in response to these signals. If the brake switch is on, the brake system is in normal operation (cruise control cancelled).



D Two break switch signals do not acknowledge after signal changed. D Switch does not change during accelerating vehicle or decelerating. D VSS is not fault. D Engine is running.
Diagnostic Aids
6E2489
DTC P1571 Brake Switch No Operation

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Ignition Off. Engine Off. 2. Check following fuses. D BACK 15A D STOP LAMP 15A Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 3
1. Make adjustment to the brake switch. (Refer to Brake switch in 10A CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM.) Was the problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 4 1. Push the shaft on brake switch. 2. Check shaft operation for smooth movement. Was the problem found? Verify repair 1. Disconnect the connector at brake switch. 2. Check following terminal pin by ohmmeter. (Leave the shaft position at brake switch. Dont Between pin1 push it.) and pin2 is D Between pin 1 and pin 2 0W, Between D Between pin 3 and pin 4 pin3 and pin4 Was it specified value? is W 1. Disconnect the connector at brake switch. 2. Check following terminal pin at ohmmeter. (Dont press the button of the brake switch.) D D Between pin 1 and pin 2 Between pin 3 and pin 4
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 9
Was it specified value? 7 1. Probe related circuits for open or short to ground. 2. If a problem was found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? 8 1. Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Was the action completed? 9 1. Replace the brake switch. Was the action completed?
Between pin1 and pin2 is W, Between pin3 and pin4 is 0W
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 9
Verify repair
Go to Step 8
6E2490
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1625 PCM Unexpected Reset

Circuit Description
The powertrain control module (PCM) monitors unexpected PCM reset. This will not turn on MIL light on, only record code DTC P1625.


D Clock or COP (Computer Operating Properly) reset.

Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D P1625 stored alone does not need diagnosis. Clear DTC code.
DTC P1625 PCM Unexpected Reset

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition is ON. Install the Tech 2. Start the engine and let it Idle. On the Tech 2, select DTC info. Go to Step 3 Ignition is ON. Clear DTC P1625 by using the Tech 2 Clear Info. Start the engine and let it Idle. On the Tech 2, select DTC info. Go to Step 4
Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P1625 failed? 3
Does the Tech 2 indicate DTC P1625 failed? 4 1. Check for aftermarket electronics, such as transceiver, stereos, and anti theft devices. They may radiate EMI into the control system if they are improperly installed. (This may cause a false sensor reading and turn on the MIL.) 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found?
Verify repair
6E2491
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1635 Reference Voltage # 1 Circuit Fault
D06RY00093
Circuit Description
The TP sensor # 1 shares a 5 Volt reference with the PCM. If the PCM detects the 5 Volt reference for the TP sensor # 1 is failure, DTCP1635 will be set.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condtion is no longer present. D A history DTC P1635 will clear after 40 cosecutive trip cycle during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P1635 can be cleared using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed. Tech2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D The ignition is ON. D The 5 Volt reference voltage for the TP sensor # 1 is less than 4 volts. D The 5 Volt reference voltage for the TP sensor # 1 is more than 5 volts.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) .
6E2492

1. Connect a DVM between the 5volt reference curcuit and the TP1 and TP2 sensor ground curcuit. 2. Check the voltage using a DVM. Is the voltage near the specified value? 5V Varify repair Go to Step 3 1. Check the TPS1and TPS2 5 volt reference curcuit. 2. If the curcuit is open or shorted, repair it as necessary. Was the curcuit open or short? Varify repair Go to Step 4 1. Check the TP1 and TP2 sensor ground curcuit. 2. If the curcuit is open or shorted, repair it as necessary. Was the curcuit open or short? Varify repair Go to Step 5 1. Observe the battery voltage and circuit. 2. If a problem found, repair it as necessary. Was a problem found? PCM must be Verify repair Go to Step 6 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement
6E2493
060R200064
Circuit Description
The TP sensor # 1 shares a 5 Volt reference with the PCM. If the PCM detects the 5 Volt reference for the AP sensor # 1 is failure, DTCP1635 will be set.

D The PCM will turn the MIL OFF on the third consecutive trip cycle during which the diagnostic has been run and the fault condtion is no longer present. D A history DTC P1639 will clear after 40 cosecutive trip cycle during which the warm up cycles have occurred without a fault. D DTC P1639 can be cleared using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed. Tech2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.

D The ignition is ON. D The 5 Volt reference voltage for the AP sensor # 1 is less than 4 volts. D The 5 Volt reference voltage for the AP sensor # 1 is more than 5 volts.

D The PCM will not illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) .
6E2494

1. Connect a DVM between the 5volt reference curcuit and the AP1, AP2 and AP3 sensor ground curcuit. 2. Check the voltage using a DVM. Is the voltage near the specified value? 5V Varify repair Go to Step 3 1. Check the APS1, APS2 and APS3 5 volt reference curcuit. 2. If the curcuit is open or shorted, repair it as necessary. Was the curcuit open or short? Varify repair Go to Step 4 1. Check the AP1, AP2 and AP3 sensor ground curcuit. 2. If the curcuit is open or shorted, repair it as necessary. Was the curcuit open or short? Varify repair Go to Step 5 1. Observe the battery voltage and circuit. 2. If a problem found, repair it as necessary. Was a problem found? PCM must be Verify repair Go to Step 6 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The programmed. replacement
6E2495
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1640 Driver-1-Output Circuit Fault (ODM)

Circuit Description
Output driver modules (ODMs) are used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to turn ON many of the current-driven devices that are needed to control various engine and transmission functions. Each ODM is capable of controlling up to 7 separate outputs by applying ground to the device which the PCM is commanding ON. Unlike the Quad Driver Modules (QDMs) used in prior model years, ODMs have the capability of diagnosing each output circuit individually. DTC P1640 set indicates an improper voltage level has been detected on an ODM output. Since A/C is an option, No A/C will cause the air conditioning clutch relay output to always fail. If a fault is seen on the air conditioning clutch relay output, it will not be logged as a fault until the A/C request input interrupts a high voltage, indicating that A/C has been installed. D The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC was set as Failure Records only. This information will not be stored as Freeze Frame data.

D A history DTC P1640 will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles occur without a fault. D DTC P1640 can be cleared by using the Tech 2 Clear Info function or by disconnecting the PCM battery feed.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage, If the harness appears to be OK, disconnect the PCM, turn the ignition ON and observe a voltmeter connected to the suspect driver circuit at the PCM harness connector while moving connectors and wiring harnesses related to the MIL. A change in voltage will indicate the location of the fault. D Poor connection at component Examine for damaged connectors, unplugged connector, or damaged terminals at the following locations: Instrument cluster harness, canister purge solenoid, A/C clutch relay. An open ignition feed circuit at any of these components will cause DTC P1640 to be set. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

D D D D Ignition ON. Engine running. Ignition voltage is above 13.2 volts for 4 seconds. Output voltage does not equal ignition voltage when output is OFF or output voltage is not less than 1 volt when output is ON. D Above conditions occur for at least 1 second.

DTC P1640 Driver-1-Output Circuit Fault (ODM)

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Check the fuse for the driver circuit that was shown as faulty. Was the fuse blown? Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1. Check for a short to ground between the fuse and the affected component. 2. Replace the fuse after making any necessary repairs. Is the action complete? Verify repair Disconnect the PCM connector for the affected driver circuit. Is there any damage to the PCM pin or connector? Go to Step 5 Verify repair Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 13 Repair the damaged pin or terminal. Is the action complete? Were either of the lamp circuits for Check Engine or Check Trans indicated as faulty by the Tech 2?
5 6
6E2496
DTC P1640 Driver-1-Output Circuit Fault (ODM) (Cont'd)

1. Leave the PCM connector for the lamp driver circuit disconnected. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a DVM, check the voltage at the PCM connector for the affected lamp driver circuit. Was the voltage equal to the specified value? B+ Go to Step 15 Go to Step 8 1. Ignition ON. 2. Check for battery voltage at the fuse for the affected lamp circuit. Was battery voltage available at the fuse? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9 Repair the open circuit between the ignition switch and the fuse. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM connector for the affected driver terminal. 3. Connect an ohmmeter between a good ground and the PCM connector for the affected driver. Did the ohmmeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 11 Go to Step 12 Repair the short to ground between the affected component and its PCM driver terminal. Is the action complete? Verify repair Repair the open circuit between the fuse and the PCM driver terminal for the affected circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Connect the PCM. 2. Start the engine and let it idle. 3. Backprobe the affected terminal at the PCM with a DVM. Was the voltage equal to the specified value? +B Go to Step 15 Go to Step 14 1. Run the engine at idle. 2. Check for battery voltage at the fuse for the affected circuit. Was battery voltage available at the fuse? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
10
11
12
13
14
15
6E2497
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1650 Quad Driver Module A Fault

Circuit Description
The Quad Driver Module (QDMs) are used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to turn ON currentdriven devices that are needed to control two engine functions. The PCM monitors open or short circuit of either of Canister Control Purge (CCP) Vent solenoid or Variable Intake Manifold (VIM). locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, and poor terminal-to-wire connection. D Damaged harness Inspect the wiring harness for damage, If the harness appears to be OK, disconnect the PCM, turn the ignition ON and observe a voltmeter connected to the suspect driver circuit at the PCM harness connector while moving connectors and wiring harnesses relates to the MIL. A change in voltage will indicate the location of the fault. D Poor connection at component Examine for damaged connectors, unplugged connector, or damaged terminals at the following locations: canister purge solenoid, fuel level sensor. An open ignition feed circuit at any of these components will cause DTC P1650 to be set. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.

D D D D Ignition ON. Engine running. Ignition voltage. Output voltage does not equal voltage and is not less than 1 volt when out put is ON. D Above conditions occur for at least 0.5 second.

The following PCM pins are controlled by Quad driver modules (QDMs):
D S74 VIM D S48 Canister control purge

Test Description
Number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the Diagnostic Chart. 4. The Tech 2 Driver Module Status indicates the PCM pin that is affected. 9.The Tech 2 may indicate short circuit even when the problem is an open circuit. The cause of an open circuit may be in the component itself. 11.A short to ground on the ignition side of the component will blow the fuse. Since the fuse was checked in Step 2, a short to ground would be between the affected component and the PCM.
Diagnostic Aids
Check for the following conditions: D Poor connection at PCM Inspect harness connectors for backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken
DTC P1650 Quad Driver Module (QDM) Fault

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 Check the fuse for the driver circuit that was shown as faulty. Was the fuse blown? Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
1. Check for a short to ground between the fuse and the affected component. 2. Replace the fuse after making any necessary repairs. Is the action complete? Verify repair Disconnect the PCM connector for the affected driver circuit. Is there any damage to the PCM pin or connector? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
6E2498
DTC P1650 Quad Driver Module (QDM) Fault (Cont'd)

5 6 7
Repair the damaged pin or terminal. Is the action complete? Were either of the lamp circuits for Check Engine or Check Trans. indicated as faulty by the Tech 2? 1. Leave the PCM connector for the lamp driver circuit disconnected. 2. Ignition ON. 3. Using a DVM, check the voltage at the PCM connector for the affected lamp driver circuit. Was the voltage equal to the specified value? B+ Go to Step 15 Go to Step 8 1. Ignition ON. 2. Check for battery voltage at the fuse for the affected lamp circuit. Was battery voltage available at the fuse? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9 Repair the open circuit between the ignition switch and the fuse. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the PCM connector for the affected driver terminal. 3. Connect an ohmmeter between a good ground and the PCM connector for the affected driver. Did the ohmmeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 11 Go to Step 12 Repair the short to ground between the affected component and its PCM driver terminal. Is the action complete? Verify repair Repair the open circuit between the fuse and the PCM driver terminal for the affected circuit. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Connect the PCM. 2. Start the engine and let it idle. 3. Backprobe the affected terminal at the PCM with a DVM. Was the voltage equal to the specified value? +B Go to Step 15 Go to Step 14 Verify repair Go to Step 7 Go to Step 13
10
11
12
13
6E2499
DTC P1650 Quad Driver Module (QDM) Fault (Cont'd)

14
1. Run the engine at idle. 2. Check for battery voltage at the fuse for the affected circuit. Was battery voltage available at the fuse? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9 Replace the PCM. IMPORTANT: The replacement PCM must be programmed. Refer to On-Vehicle Service in Powertrain Control Module and Sensors for procedures. And also refer to latest Service Bulletin. Check to see if the Latest software is released or not. And then Down Load the LATEST PROGRAMMED SOFTWARE to the replacement PCM. Is the action complete? Verify repair
15
6E2500
Symptom Diagnosis
Preliminary Checks
Before using this section, perform the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check and verify all of the following items: D The powertrain control module (PCM), and malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (Check Engine lamp) and Reduced Power Lamp (RPL) are operating correctly. D There are no DTC(s) stored. D Tech 2 data is within normal operating range. Refer to Typical Scan Data Values. D Verify the customer complaint and locate the correct symptom in the table of contents. Perform the procedure included in the symptom chart.
Visual/Physical Check
Several of the symptom procedures call for a careful visual/physical check. This can lead to correcting a problem without further checks and can save valuable time. This check should include the following items: D PCM grounds for cleanliness, tightness and proper location. D Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and proper connections, as shown on the Vehicle Emission Control Information label. Check thoroughly for any type of leak or restriction. D Air intake ducts for collapsed or damaged areas. D Air leaks at throttle body mounting area, mass air flow (MAF) sensor and intake manifold sealing surfaces. D Ignition components for cracking, hardness, and carbon tracking. D Wiring for proper connections, pinches and cuts.
Intermittents
IMPORTANT: An intermittent problem may or may not turn on the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or store a DTC. DO NOT use the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) charts for intermittent problems. The fault must be present to locate the problem. Most intermittent problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Perform a careful visual/physical check for the following conditions: D Poor mating of the connector halves or a terminal not fully seated in the connector (backed out). D Improperly formed or damaged terminal. D All connector terminals in the problem circuit should be carefully checked for proper contact tension. D Poor terminal-to-wire connection. This requires removing the terminal from the connector body to check. Road test the vehicle with a J 39200 Digital Multimeter connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal voltage when the malfunction occurs is a good indication that there is a fault in the circuit being monitored. Use a Tech 2 to help detect intermittent conditions. The scan tool has several features that can be used to locate
an intermittent condition. Use the following feature to find intermittent faults: D Using a Tech 2s Freeze Frame buffer or Failure Records buffer can aid in locating an intermittent condition. Review and record the information in the freeze frame or failure record associated with the intermittent DTC being diagnosed. The vehicle can be driven within the conditions that were present when the DTC originally set. To check for loss of diagnostic code memory, disconnect the MAP sensor and idle the engine until the MIL (Check Engine lamp) comes on. DTC P0107 should be stored and kept in memory when the ignition is turned OFF. If not, the PCM is faulty. When this test is completed, make sure that you clear the DTC P0107 from memory. An intermittent MIL (Check Engine lamp) with no stored DTC may be caused by the following: D Ignition coil shorted to ground and arcing. D MIL (Check Engine lamp) wire to PCM shorted to ground. D Poor PCM grounds. Refer to the PCM wiring diagrams. Check for improper installation of electrical options such as lights, cellular phones, etc. Check all wires from the PCM to the ignition coils for poor connections. Check for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and check for other open diodes (refer to wiring diagrams in Electrical Diagnosis). If problem has not been found, refer to PCM Connector Symptom tables. D Check the Calibration ID of the PCM, and compare it with the latest Isuzu service bulletins and/or Isuzu EEPROM reprogramming equipment to determine if an update to the PCMs reprogrammable memory has been released. To check the Calibration ID, connect the Tech 2, then look for Powertrain, then select Calibration ID. This identifies the contents of the reprogrammable software and calibration contained in the PCM. If the Calibration ID is not the most current available, it is advisable to reprogram the PCMs EEPROM memory, which may either help identify a hard-to-find problem or may fix the problem. D Calibration ID (example) Part number Broadcast Code Identifier 9377709 CYYD 801
6E2501
Hard Start Symptom

DEFINITION: Engine cranks, but does not start for a long time. Does eventually run, or may start but immediately stall. Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 1. Perform a bulletin search. 2. If a bulletin that addresses the symptom is found, correct the condition as instructed in the bulletin. Was a bulletin found that addresses the symptom? Verify repair
Go to Step 4 Go to Visual/ Physical Check
Check engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor for shift in value. After 8 hours with the hood up and the engine not running, connect the Tech 2. With the ignition ON and the engine not running, compare engine coolant temperature to intake air temperature. Are ECT and IAT within the specified value of each 5C ( 9F) other? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 6
1. Using a Tech 2, display the engine coolant temperature and note the value. 2. Check the resistance of the engine coolant temperature sensor. 3. Refer to Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature vs. Resistance chart on DTC P0118 Diagnostic Support for resistance specifications. Is the resistance value near the resistance for the temperature noted? Go to Step 8 Verify repair Go to Step 7
7 8
Replace the ECT sensor. Is the action complete? Locate and repair high resistance or poor connection in the ECT signal circuit or the ECT sensor ground. Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Check for a faulty, plugged, or incorrectly installed PCV valve. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 1. Check for water- or alcohol-contaminated fuel. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11 1. Perform the procedure in Fuel System Pressure Test. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 12
10
11
6E2502
Hard Start Symptom (Cont'd)

12
1. Check for proper ignition voltage output with spark tester J 26792 (ST-125). Refer to Electric Ignition System for procedure. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 13 1. Remove spark plugs. Check for wet plugs, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, or heavy deposits. Refer to Electronic Ignition System. NOTE: If spark plugs are gas or oil fouled, the cause of the fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 14
13
14
1. Check for a loose ignition coil ground and ION Sensing module circuit. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 15 1. Remove the ignition coils and check the ignition coils for cracks or carbon tracking. 2. If a problem is found, replace affected coil(s) as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 16 1. Check for the following engine mechanical problems (refer to Engine Mechanical): D Low compression D Leaking cylinder head gaskets D Worn or incorrect camshaft D Camshaft drive belt slipped or stripped 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 17 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
15
16
17
6E2503
Surges and/or Chuggles Symptom

DEFINITION: Engine power variation under steady throttle or cruise. Feels like the vehicle speeds up and slows down with no change in the accelerator pedal. Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
Be sure that the driver understands transmission torque converter clutch and A/C compressor operation as explained in the owners manual. Inform the customer how the TCC and the A/C clutch operate. Is the customer experiencing a normal condition? System OK Go to Step 6 1. Check the fuel control heated oxygen sensors (HO2S, B1S1 and B2S1). The fuel control heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) should respond quickly to different throttle positions. If they dont, check them for silicone or other contaminants from fuel or use of improper RTV sealant. The sensors may have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The PCM will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. For more information, refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Sensors. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7
1. Check the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel System Pressure Test. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 Monitor the long term fuel trim on the Tech 2. Is the long term fuel trim significantly in the negative range (rich condition)? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
1. Check items that can cause the engine to run rich. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0172 Diagnostic Support. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 11 Verify repair
6E2504
Surges and/or Chuggles Symptom (Cont'd)

10
1. Check items that can cause the engine to run lean. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0171. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 11 Verify repair 1. Check for proper ignition voltage output with spark tester J 26792 (ST-125). Refer to Electric Ignition System for procedure. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 12 1. Check for a loose ignition coil ground and ION Sensing module circuit. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 13 1. Check the ignition coils for cracks or carbon tracking. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 15 1. Remove the spark plugs and check for wet plugs, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, or heavy deposits. Refer to Electronic Ignition System. NOTE: If spark plugs are gas or oil fouled, the cause of the fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 15
11
12
13
14
15
1. Check the injector connections. 2. If any of the injector connectors are connected to an incorrect cylinder, correct as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 16 1. Check PCM grounds for the cleanliness, tightness and proper locations. Refer to the PCM wiring diagrams in Electrical Diagnosis. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 17 1. Check MAF sensor connections. 2. If a problem is found, replace the faulty terminals as necessary. Refer to Electrical Diagnosis for wiring repair procedures. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 18 1. Visually/physically check vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and proper connections and routing as shown on the Vehicle Emission Control Information label. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 19
16
17
18
6E2505
Surges and/or Chuggles Symptom (Cont'd)

19
1. Check the exhaust system for possible restriction: D Inspect the exhaust system for damaged or collapsed pipes. D Inspect the muffler for heat distress or possible internal failure. D Check for a possible plugged three-way catalytic converter by checking the exhaust system back pressure. Refer to Restricted Exhaust System Check. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 20 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
20
6E2506
Lack of Power, Sluggish, or Spongy Symptoms

DEFINITION: Engine delivers less than expected power. Little or no increase in speed when accelerator pedal is pushed down part-way. Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
1. Remove and check the air filter element for dirt or restrictions. Refer to Air Intake System in ON-Vehicle Service. 2. Replace the air filter element if necessary. Was a repair required? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Check for low fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel System Pressure Test. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Check for water- or alcohol-contaminated fuel. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Install the Tech 2. 2. Run the engine at idle. 3. On the Tech 2, select F3: Miscellaneous Test, F6: Variable Intake Manifold. 4. Repeat Switch ON or OFF of VIM solenoid valve by using the Tech 2. 5. Check to see if the actuator works normally. 6. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 1. Check for proper ignition voltage output with spark tester J 26792 (ST-125). Refer to Electronic Ignition System for procedure. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10
6E2507
Lack of Power, Sluggish, or Spongy Symptoms (Cont'd)

10
1. Remove the spark plugs and check for wet plugs, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, or heavy deposits. Refer to Electronic Ignition System. NOTE: If spark plugs are gas or oil fouled, the cause of the fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11
11
1. Check the ignition coils for cracks or carbon tracking. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 12 1. Check the PCM grounds for cleanliness, tightness and proper locations. Refer to the PCM wiring diagrams in Electrical Diagnosis. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 13 1. Check the exhaust system for possible restriction: D Inspect the exhaust system for damaged or collapsed pipes. D Inspect the muffler for heat distress or possible internal failure. D Check for a possible plugged three-way catalytic converter by checking the exhaust system back pressure. Refer to Restricted Exhaust System Check. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 14 1. Check the torque converter clutch (TCC) for proper operation. Refer to 4L30-E Transmission Diagnosis. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 15 1. Check for an engine mechanical problem. Check for low compression, incorrect or worn camshaft, loose timing belt, etc. Refer to Engine Mechanical. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 16 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
12
13
14
15
16
6E2508
Detonation/Sparks Knock Symptoms

DEFINITION: A mild to severe ping, usually worse under acceleration. The engine makes sharp metallic knocks that change with throttle opening. Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
1. Perform a bulletin search. 2. If a bulletin that addresses the symptom is found, correct the condition as instructed in the bulletin. Was a bulletin found that addresses the symptom? Verify repair Go to Step 3 Go to Visual/ Physical Check Was a visual/physical check performed? Go to Step 4
If Tech 2 readings are normal (refer to Typical Scan Values) and there are no engine mechanical faults, fill the fuel tank with a known quality gasoline that has a minimum octane rating of 87 and re-evaluate the vehicle performance. Is detonation present? Go to Step 5 Verify repair 1. Check the transmission range switch circuit. Use a Tech 2 and be sure the Tech 2 indicates that the vehicle is in drive with the gear selector in drive or overdrive. 2. If a problem is found, diagnose and repair the transmission range switch as necessary (refer to 4L30-E Automatic Transmission Diagnosis). Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 1. Check TCC operation. Refer to 4L30-E Transmission Diagnosis. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Check for obvious overheating problems: D Low engine coolant. D Restricted air flow to radiator, or restricted water flow through radiator. D Correct coolant solution should be a 50/50 mix of approved antifreeze/coolant and water. Refer to Engine Cooling. D EGR operation. Refer to DTC P0401. D ION sensing module fault. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the ION sensing module. 3. Disconnect the PCM. Is the action complete? Go to Step 9 Check the ION sensing harness between the PCM (F68) and ION sensing module circuit (RED Wire) at the Kl line harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10
6E2509
Detonation/Sparks Knock Symptoms (Cont'd)

10 11
1. Disconnect the ignition coil. Is the action complete? Check the ION sensing harness between the ignition coil and ION sensing module circuit at the DC motor harness connector. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 12 Check the following items; 1. Ignition coil and ignition coil circuit. 2. Ignition coil ground circuit for a poor connection. 3. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Verify repair Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14 Go to Step 11
12
13 14
Replace the Ignition coil. Is the action complete? Check the following items; 1. ION sensing module ground circuit for a poor connection. 2. If a problem is found, repair wiring harness as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 10 Verify repair Go to Step 16 Go to Step 16
15 16
Replace the ION sensing module. Is the action complete? 1. Check fuel pressure. Refer to Chart Fuel System Pressure Test. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Check items that can cause an engine to run lean (long term fuel trim significantly in the positive range). For a lean condition, refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0171 Diagnostic Support. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 18 1. Spark plugs for proper heat range. Refer to General Information. 2. If incorrect spark plugs are installed, replace spark plugs as necessary. Did any spark plugs require replacement? Verify repair Go to Step 19 1. Remove excessive carbon buildup with a top engine cleaner. Refer to instructions on the top engine cleaner can. 2. Re-evaluate vehicle performance. Is detonation still present? Go to Step 20 Verify repair
Go to Step 17
17
18
19
6E2510
Detonation/Sparks Knock Symptoms (Cont'd)

20
1. Check for an engine mechanical problem. Perform a cylinder compression check. Refer to Engine Mechanical. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 21 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
21
6E2511
Rough, Unstable, or Incorrect Idle, Stalling Symptom

DEFINITION: Engine runs unevenly at idle. If severe, the engine or vehicle may shake. Engine idle speed may vary in RPM. Either condition may be severe enough to stall the engine. Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 3 1. Perform a bulletin search. 2. If a bulletin that addresses the symptom is found, correct the condition as instructed in the bulletin. Was a bulletin found that addresses the symptom? Go to Step 14
1. Check the PCM grounds for cleanliness, tightness and proper routing. Refer to the PCM wiring diagrams in Electrical Diagnosis. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6 Observe the long term fuel trim on the Tech 2. Is the long term fuel trim significantly in the negative range (rich condition)? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
1. Check items that can cause the engine to run rich. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0172 Diagnostic Support. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 10 Is the long term fuel trim significantly in the positive range (lean condition)? 1. Check items that can cause the engine to run lean. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0171 Diagnostic Support. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 1. Check for incorrect idle speed. Ensure that the following conditions are present: D The engine is fully warm. D The accessories are OFF. 2. Using a Tech 2, monitor the Engine Speed. Is the Engine Speed within the specified values?
8 9
10
Desired Idle Speed
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 11
6E2512
Rough, Unstable, or Incorrect Idle, Stalling Symptom (Cont'd)

11
1. Visually/physically inspect for the following conditions: D Restricted air intake system. Check for a possible collapsed air intake duct, restricted air filter element, or foreign objects blocking the air intake system. D Large vacuum leak. Check for a condition that causes a large vacuum leak, such as an incorrectly installed or faulty crankcase ventilation valve or a disconnected brake booster hose. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Check the injector connections. If any of the injectors are connected to an incorrect cylinder, correct as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 13 1. Perform the Injector Coil/Balance Test in Fuel Metering System. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 14 1. Check for fuel in the pressure regulator vacuum hose. 2. If fuel is present, replace the fuel pressure regulator assembly. Refer to Fuel Metering System. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 15 1. Check for proper ignition voltage output with spark tester J 26792 (ST-125). Refer to Electronic Ignition System for the procedure. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 16 1. Remove spark plugs. Check for wet plugs, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, or heavy deposits. Refer to Electronic Ignition System. NOTE: If spark plugs are gas or oil fouled, the cause of the fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 17
12
13
14
15
16
17
1. Check for a loose ignition coil ground and ION Sensing Module circuit. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 18 1. Check ignition coils for cracks or carbon tracking. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 19
18
6E2513
Rough, Unstable, or Incorrect Idle, Stalling Symptom (Cont'd)

19
Using a Tech 2, monitor the throttle position 1 and 2 angle with the engine idling. Is the TP angle at the specified value and steady? 8 10% Go to Step 20 1. Check the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve for proper operation. Refer to Crankcase Ventilation System. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
Refer to DTC for further diagnosis
20
Go to Step 21
21
1. Check the transmission range switch circuit. Use a Tech 2 and be sure the Tech 2 indicates that the vehicle is in drive with the gear selector in drive or overdrive. 2. If a problem is found, diagnose and repair the transmission range switch as necessary (refer to 4L30-E Automatic Transmission Diagnosis). Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 22 1. Check for the following engine mechanical items. Refer to Engine Mechanical for diagnosis procedures: D Low compression D Sticking or leaking valves D Worn camshaft lobe(s) D Camshaft drive belt slipped or stripped D Incorrect valve timing D Worn rocker arms D Broken valve springs 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 23
22
23
1. Check for faulty motor mounts. Refer to Engine Mechanical for inspection of mounts. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 24 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
24
6E2514
Poor Fuel Economy Symptom

DEFINITION: Fuel economy, as measured by an actual road test, is noticeably lower than expected. Also, economy is noticeably lower than it was on this vehicle at one time, as previously shown by an actual road test. (Non-standard tires will cause odometer readings to be incorrect, and that may cause fuel economy to appear poor when it is actually normal.) Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
Check owners driving habits. D Is the A/C ON full time (defroster mode ON)? D Are tires at the correct pressure? D Are excessively heavy loads being carried? D Is acceleration too much, too often? Was a problem found? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Review the items in Step 4 with the customer and advise as necessary. Is the action complete? System OK 1. Visually/physically check: Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and improper connections and routing as shown on the Vehicle Emission Control Information label. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Remove and check the air filter element for dirt or for restrictions. Refer to Air Intake System. 2. Replace the air filter element if necessary. Was a repair required? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Remove spark plugs and check for wet plugs, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, or heavy deposits. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement. NOTE: If spark plugs are gas or oil fouled, the cause of the fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9
1. Check for low engine coolant level. Refer to Engine Cooling. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10
6E2515
Poor Fuel Economy Symptom (Cont'd)

10
1. Check for an incorrect or faulty engine thermostat. Refer to Engine Cooling. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11 1. Check for low engine compression. Refer to Engine Mechanical. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 12 1. Check the TCC operation. Refer to 4L30-E Transmission Diagnosis. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 13 1. Check the exhaust system for possible restriction: D Inspect the exhaust system for damaged or collapsed pipes. D Inspect the muffler for heat distress or possible internal failure. D Check for a possible plugged three-way catalytic converter by checking the exhaust system back pressure. Refer to Restricted Exhaust System Check. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 14 Check for proper calibration of the speedometer. Does the speed indicated on the speedometer closely match the vehicle speed displayed on the Tech 2? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 15
11
12
13
14
15
Diagnose and repair an inaccurate speedometer condition as necessary. Refer to Vehicle Speed Sensor in Electrical Diagnosis. Was a problem found? Verify repair 1. Check the air intake system and the crankcase for air leaks. Refer to Air Intake System and Crankcase Ventilation System. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 17 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. When all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records buffer D All connections within a suspected circuit and/or system. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Contact Technical Assistance Go to Step 18 Perform the procedure in Fuel System Pressure Test. Was the fuel pressure normal?
16
17
18
Verify repair
6E2516
Excessive Exhaust Emissions or Odors Symptom

DEFINITION: Vehicle fails an emission test. Vehicle has excessive rotten egg smell. (Excessive odors do not necessarily indicate excessive emissions.) Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
1. Perform a bulletin search. 2. If a bulletin that addresses the symptom is found, correct the condition as instructed in the bulletin. Was a bulletin found that addresses the symptom? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 3 Go to Visual/ Physical Check Was a thorough visual/physical check performed? Go to Step 4
1. Check for vacuum leaks. Check vacuum lines, intake manifold, throttle body, etc. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Were any vacuum leaks located? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 5 1. Check the fuel cap for proper installation. 2. Secure the fuel cap if necessary. Was the fuel cap installed properly? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 13 1. Check the fuel pressure. Perform the procedure in Fuel System Pressure Test. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 7 1. Check for a faulty, plugged, or incorrectly installed crankcase ventilation valve; also check the crankcase ventilation system for plugging. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 8 1. Check the injector connections. 2. If any of the injectors are connected to an incorrect cylinder, correct as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 9 1. Perform the Injector Coil/Balance Test in Fuel Metering System. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 10 1. Refer to Engine Cooling for cooling system diagnosis. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 11 1. Check EVAP canister for fuel loading. Refer to Evaporative Emission Control System. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 12
10
11
6E2517
Excessive Exhaust Emissions or Odors Symptom (Cont'd)

12
1. Remove excessive carbon buildup with a top engine cleaner. Refer to the instructions on the top engine cleaner can. 2. Perform the exhaust emission test. Does the vehicle pass the test? System OK System OK Go to Step 14 Go to Step 14 Perform the exhaust emission test. Does the vehicle pass the test? Does the exhaust emission test indicate excessive CO and HC levels or is long term fuel trim significantly in the negative range (rich condition)? 1. Check items that can cause the engine to run rich. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0172 Diagnostic Support. Make any necessary repairs. 2. Perform the exhaust emission test. Does the vehicle pass the test? System OK Go to Step 17 1. Check items that can cause the engine to run lean. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0171 Diagnostic Support. Make any necessary repairs. 2. Perform the exhaust emission test. Does the vehicle pass the test? System OK Go to Step 17 1. Check the EGR system (refer to DTC P0401). 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 18 1. Check for an engine mechanical problem. Perform a cylinder compression check (refer to Engine Mechanical). 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 19
13 14
Go to Step 15
Go to Step 16
15
16
17
18
19
1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records butter D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
6E2518
Dieseling, Run-On Symptom

DEFINITION: Engine continues to run after key is turned OFF, but runs very rough. If engine runs smooth, check ignition switch and adjustment. Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
1. Check for a short between B+ and any of the ignition feed circuits. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records butter D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
6E2519
Backfire Symptom
DEFINITION: Fuel ignites in the intake manifold, or in the exhaust system, making a loud popping noise. Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
1. Check for proper ignition voltage coil output with spark tester J 26792 (ST-125). Refer to Electric Ignition System for procedure. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 5 1. Remove spark plugs and check for wet plugs, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, or heavy deposits. Refer to Electronic Ignition System. NOTE: If spark plugs are gas or oil fouled, the cause of the fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. Refer to DTC P0172 to determine the cause of a rich condition or Engine Mechanical for an oil fouling condition. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6
1. Visually/physically inspect the ignition coils for cracks. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 1. Check for an intermittent ignition system malfunction: D Intermittent CKP 58X signal. D Intermittent ignition feed circuit or sensor ground circuit to the crankshaft position sensor. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 8 1. Check the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel System Pressure Test. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9
6E2520
Backfire Symptom (Cont'd)

1. Check for the following engine mechanical conditions. Refer to Engine Mechanical for diagnosis procedures: D Low compression D Sticking or leaking valves D Worn camshaft lobe(s) D Camshaft drive belt slipped or stripped D Incorrect valve timing 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10
10
1. Check the intake and exhaust manifold(s) for casting flash. Refer to Engine Mechanical. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records butter D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
11
6E2521
Cuts Out, Misses Symptom

DEFINITION: Steady pulsation or jerking that follows engine speed; usually more pronounced as engine load increases. Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
1. Perform a bulletin search. 2. If a bulletin that addresses the symptom is found, correct the condition as instructed in the bulletin. Was a bulletin found that addresses the symptom? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 3 Go to Visual/ Physical Check Go to ETC System Check Was a visual/physical check performed? Go to Step 4
Was the Electric Throttle Control (ETC) System Check performed? Go to Step 5 1. Check the PCM grounds for clearness, tightness and proper routing. Refer to the PCM wiring diagrams in Electrical Diagnosis. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
Go to Step 6
Observe the long term fuel trim on the Tech 2. Is the long term fuel trim significantly in the negative range (rich condition)? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
1. Check items that can cause the engine to run rich. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0172 Diagnostic Support. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 10 Is the long term fuel trim significantly in the positive range (lean condition)? 1. Check items that can cause the engine to run lean. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0171 Diagnostic Support. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 10 1. Check for incorrect idle speed. Ensure that the following conditions are present: D The engine is fully warm. D The accessories are off. 2. Using a Tech 2, monitor the Engine Speed. Is the Engine Speed within the specified values?
8 9
10
Desired Idle Speed
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 11
6E2522
Cuts Out, Misses Symptom (Cont'd)

11
1. Visually/physically inspect for the following conditions: D Restricted air intake system. Check for a possible collapsed air intake duct, restricted air filter element, or foreign objects blocking the air intake system. D Large vacuum leak. Check for a condition that causes a large vacuum leak, such as an incorrectly installed or faulty PCV valve or brake booster hose disconnected . 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 9 Check the injector connections. If any of the injectors are connected to an incorrect cylinder, correct as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 13 1. Perform the Injector Coil/Balance Test in Fuel Metering System. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 14 1. Check for fuel in the pressure regulator vacuum hose. 2. If fuel is present, replace the fuel pressure regulator assembly. Refer to Fuel Metering System. 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 15 1. Check for proper ignition voltage output with spark tester J 26792 (ST-125). Refer to Electronic Ignition System for the procedure. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 16 1. Remove spark plugs. Check for wet plugs, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, or heavy deposits. Refer to Electronic Ignition System. NOTE: If spark plugs are gas or oil fouled, the cause of the fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 17
12
13
14
15
16
17
1. Check for a loose ignition coil ground and ION Sensing module circuit. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 18 1. Check ignition coils for cracks or carbon tracking. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 19 Refer to DTC P0123 for further diagnosis Using a Tech 2, monitor the TP 1, 2 angle with the engine idling. Is the TP angle at the specified value and steady? 8 10% Go to Step 20
18
19
6E2523
Cuts Out, Misses Symptom (Cont'd)

20
1. Check the PCV valve for proper operation. Refer to Crankcase Ventilation System. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 21 1. Check the transmission range switch circuit. Use a Tech 2 and be sure the Tech 2 indicates that the vehicle is in drive with the gear selector in drive or overdrive. 2. If a problem is found, diagnose and repair the transmission range switch as necessary (refer to 4L30-E Automatic Transmission Diagnosis). Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 22 1. Check the following engine mechanical items. Refer to Engine Mechanical for diagnosis procedures: D Low compression D Sticking or leaking valves D Worn camshaft lobe(s) D Camshaft drive belt slipped or stripped D Incorrect valve timing D Worn rocker arms D Broken valve springs 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 23
21
22
23
1. Check for faulty motor mounts. Refer to Engine Mechanical for inspection of mounts. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 24 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records butter D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
24
6E2524
Hesitation, Sag, Stumble Symptom

DEFINITION: Momentary lack of response as the accelerator is pushed down. Can occur at any vehicle speed. Usually most pronounced when first trying to make the vehicle move, as from a stop sign. May cause the engine to stall if severe enough. Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2
1. Check the fuel control heated oxygen sensors (HO2S, B1S1 and B2S1). The fuel control heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) should respond quickly to different throttle positions. If they dont, check them for silicon or other contaminants from fuel or use of improper RTV sealant. The sensors may have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The PCM will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. For more information, refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Sensors. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 6
1. Check the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel System Pressure Test. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 7 Observe the TP 1, 2 angle display on the Tech 2 while slowly increasing accelerator pedal depression. Does the TP angle display steadily increase from 8 10% at closed throttle to 90 92% at WOT? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
Monitor the long term fuel trim on the Tech 2. Is the long term fuel trim significantly in the negative range (rich condition)? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
1. Check items that can cause the engine to run rich. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0172 Diagnostic Support. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11
6E2525
Hesitation, Sag, Stumble Symptom (Cont'd)

10
1. Check items that can cause the engine to run lean. Refer to Diagnostic Aids in DTC P0171 Diagnostic Support. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 11 1. Check for proper ignition voltage output with spark tester J 26792 (ST-125). Refer to Electronic Ignition System for the procedure. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 12 1. Check for a loose ignition coil ground and ION Sensing module circuit. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 13 1. Check the ignition coils for cracks or carbon tracking. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 14 1. Remove spark plugs and check for wet plugs, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, or heavy deposits. Refer to Electronic Ignition System. NOTE: If spark plugs are gas or oil fouled, the cause of the fouling must be determined before replacing the spark plugs. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 15
11
12
13
14
15
1. Check the PCM grounds for clearness, tightness and proper routing. Refer to the PCM wiring diagrams in Electrical Diagnosis. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 16 1. Check the MAF sensor connections. 2. If a problem is found, replace the faulty terminals as necessary. Refer to Electrical Diagnosis for wiring repair procedures. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 17
16
6E2526
Hesitation, Sag, Stumble Symptom (Cont'd)

17
1. Visually/physically check vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and proper connections and routing as shown on the Vehicle Emission Control Information label. 2. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair Go to Step 18 1. Review all diagnostic procedures within this table. 2. If all procedures have been completed and no malfunctions have been found, review/inspect the following: D Visual/physical inspection D Tech 2 data D Freeze Frame data/Failure Records butter D All electrical connections within a suspected circuit and/or system 3. If a problem is found, repair as necessary. Was a problem found? Verify repair
18
6E2527
Bank 1 Restricted Exhaust System Check

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Remove the Bank 1 HO2S 2. 2. Install the Exhaust Backpressure Tester (BT-8515-V or equivalent) in place of the Bank 1 HO2S 2. 3. Run the engine at normal operating temperature. 4. Increase the engine speed to 2000 RPM and allow 10 seconds for pressure to build. 5. Observe the exhaust system backpressure reading on the gauge. Does the reading exceed the amount in the value column? 8.62 kPa (1.25 psi) Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
Repair the restriction in the exhaust system after the catalytic converter. Possible faults include: D Collapsed pipe D Heat distress D Internal muffler failure Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Install the Bank 1 HO2S 2. 2. Install the Exhaust Backpressure Tester in place of Bank 1 HO2S 1. 3. Run the engine at normal operating temperature. 4. Increase the engine speed to 2000 RPM and allow 10 seconds for pressure to build. 5. Observe the exhaust system backpressure reading on the gauge. Does the reading exceed the amount in the value column? 8.62 kPa (1.25 psi) Go to Step 5 Verify repair
No trouble found. If a driveability symptom exists, refer to symptom charts
Repair the restriction in the catalytic converter. Is the action complete?
NOTE: DTCs will be set by running the vehicle to normal operating temperature after a cold start with the O2 sensor disconnected. After performing these tests, use the Tech 2 to erase the DTCs that were set by the lack of O2 sensor activity.
6E2528
Bank 2 Restricted Exhaust System Check

Was the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 1. Remove the Bank 2 HO2S 2. 2. Install the Exhaust Backpressure Tester (BT-8515-V or equivalent) in place of the Bank 2 HO2S 2. 3. Run the engine at normal operating temperature. 4. Increase the engine speed to 2000 RPM and allow 10 seconds for pressure to build. 5. Observe the exhaust system backpressure reading on the gauge. Does the reading exceed the amount in the value column? 8.62 kPa (1.25 psi) Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
Repair the restriction in the exhaust system after the catalytic converter. Possible faults include: D Collapsed pipe D Heat distress D Internal muffler failure Is the action complete? Verify repair 1. Install the Bank 2 HO2S 2. 2. Install the Exhaust Back pressure Tester in place of Bank 1 HO2S 1. 3. Run the engine at normal operating temperature. 4. Increase the engine speed to 2000 RPM and allow 10 seconds for pressure to build. 5. Observe the exhaust system backpressure reading on the gauge. Does the reading exceed the amount in the value column? 8.62 kPa (1.25 psi) Go to Step 5 Verify repair
No trouble found. If a driveability symptom exists, refer to symptom charts
Repair the restriction in the catalytic converter. Is the action complete?
NOTE: DTCs will be set by running the vehicle to normal operating temperature after a cold start with the O2 sensor disconnected. After performing these tests, use the Tech 2 to erase the DTCs that were set by the lack of O2 sensor activity.
6E2529
Default Matrix Table

Service Procedure Default Strategy
A referral strategy has been established to assist the technician with additional information when the cause of the failure cannot be determined. If no problem is found after performing diagnostics, then refer to the default matrix table for further diagnostic information. Default Matrix Table Strategy Based Diagnostic Charts On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check Initial Diagnosis Vehicle does not enter diagnostics. Vehicle enters diagnostics and communicates with the Tech 2. MIL is ON in diagnostics. Engine does not start and run. Engine starts and runs, no PCM codes set. Customer complains of vibration. Engine starts and runs, no PCM codes set. Customer complains of harsh or soft shift, poor performance, delayed or no engagement into drive or reverse, transmission fluid leak, transmission noise or vibration, or improper TCC operation. On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check. On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check. PCM power and ground circuits OK. Data link voltage incorrect. Engine starts and runs, no PCM codes set. Customer complains of harsh or soft shift, poor performance, delayed or no engagement into drive or reverse, transmission fluid leak, transmission noise or vibration, or improper TCC operation. Initial Diagnosis 1. On-board Diagnostic (OBD) system check. 2. Careful visual/physical inspections. 1. OBD system check. 2. ETC system check. 3. Sensors (ECT, MAP, MAF, TP) ; MAP output chart. 4. Fuel system electrical test, fuel system diagnosis. 5. Ignition system. Default Section(s) Chassis Electrical Ignition System Check
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check
Automatic Transmission
PCM Power and Ground Check PCM Power and Ground Check
Chassis Electrical Chassis Electrical
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check
Automatic Transmission
Symptoms Intermittents
Default Section(s) Chassis Electrical
Hard Starts
Engine Mechanical, Ignition System Check, Exhaust System Diagnosis
6E2530

Symptoms Initial Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. OBD system check. ETC system check. Heated oxygen sensors. Fuel system diagnosis. Ignition system. OBD system check. ETC system check. Fuel system diagnosis. Ignition system. EGR operation. EGR system check. OBD system check. Transmission range switch. EGR operation. EGR system check. TCC operation. Fuel system diagnosis. Ignition system. ION sensing module check. Default Section(s) Calibration ID/Service Bulletins, Ignition System Check, Generator Output, Exhaust System Diagnosis, 4L30-E System Test Refer to Exhaust System in Engine Exhaust, TCC Operation, Calibration ID/Service Bulletins
Surges and/or Chuggles
Lack of Power, Sluggish or Spongy
Detonation/Spark Knock
TCC operation, Cooling System, Ignition System Check, Calibration ID/Service Bulletins
Rough, Unstable, or Incorrect Idle, Stalling
1. OBD system check. 2. ETC system check. 3. Fuel injector and fuel injector balance test. 4. EVAP emission canister purge valve check. 5. Ignition system. 6. EGR operation. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. OBD system check. Careful visual/physical inspection. Ignition system. Cooling system.
MAP Output Check, Throttle Linkage, EGR System Check, A/C Clutch Control Circuit Diagnosis, Crankcase Ventilation System, Calibration ID/Service Bulletins, Generator Output Voltage (refer to Chassis Electrical), Exhaust Diagnosis TCC Operation, Exhaust System (refer to Engine Exhaust)
Poor Fuel Economy
Hesitation, Sag, Stumble
OBD system check. ETC system check. TP. MAP output check. Fuel system diagnosis. Fuel injector and fuel injector balance test. 7. EVAP emission canister purge valve. 8. Ignition system. 1. OBD system check. 2. Cylinder balance test. 3. ETC system check. 1. OBD system check.
EGR Operation, EGR System Check, Generator Output Voltage (refer to Chassis Electrical), Calibration ID/Service Bulletins, Ignition System Check
Cuts Out, Misses
Ignition System Check
Fuel System Electrical Diagnosis, Fuel System Diagnosis, Fuel Injector and Fuel Injector Balance Test.

Symptoms Excessive Exhaust Emissions or Odors 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Dieseling, Run-On Initial Diagnosis OBD system check. Emission test. Cooling system. Fuel system diagnosis. Fuel injector and fuel injector balance test. EVAP emission canister purge valve. Crankcase ventilation system. Ignition system. MAP output check.
6E2531
Default Section(s) EGR System Check, Exhaust Diagnosis, Calibration ID/Service Bulletins
1. OBD system check. 2. Careful visual/physical inspection. 3. Fuel system diagnosis. 1. 2. 3. 4. OBD system check. Ignition system. Fuel system diagnosis. Fuel injector and fuel injector balance test. 5. EGR operation, EGR system check. 1. 2. 3. 4. OBD system check. Ignition system. Fuel system diagnosis. Fuel injector and fuel injector balance test.
Backfire
Exhaust System Diagnosis, Intake Casting Flash, Ignition System Check
Misfire
Vibrations, Transmission, Driveshaft and Axle
Catalyst Monitor
1. OBD system check. 2. Careful visual/physical inspection. 3. Heated oxygen sensors. 1. 2. 3. 4. OBD system check. Careful visual/physical inspection. Fuel system diagnosis. Heated oxygen sensors, MAF sensors.
Exhaust System
Fuel Trim
Exhaust System Intake Air System
Evaporative Emissions
1. OBD system check. 2. Careful visual/physical inspection. 3. Fuel system diagnosis. 1. OBD system check. 2. Careful visual/physical inspection.
Heated Oxygen Sensors
Exhaust System
6E2532
On Vehicle Service Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector to the CKP sensor. 3. Remove one bolt and the CKP sensor from the right side of the engine block, just behind the mount. NOTE: Use caution to avoid any hot oil that might drip out.
TS22909
3. Connect the electrical connector to the CKP sensor. 4. Connect the negative battery cable.

Removal Procedure
NOTE: Care must be taken when handling the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Damage to the ECT sensor will affect proper operation of the fuel injection system. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Drain the radiator coolant. Refer to Draining and Refilling Cooling System in Engine Cooling section. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
TS22909
1. Inspect the sensor O-ring for cracks or leaks. 2. Replace the O-ring if it is worn or damaged. 3. Lubricate the new O-ring with engine oil. 4. Install the lubricated O-ring.
1. Install the CKP sensor in the engine block. 2. Install the CKP sensor mounting bolt. Tighten D Tighten the mounting bolt to 9 Nm (78 lb in.).
014RY00001

4. Remove the ECT sensor from the coolant crossover. 3. Connect the electrical connector.
6E2533
014RY00002
014RY00003
1. Apply sealer or the equivalent to the threads of the ECT sensor. 2. Install the ECT sensor in the coolant crossover. Tighten D Tighten the ECT sensor to 30 Nm (22 lb ft.).
4. Fill the radiator with coolant. Refer to Draining and Refilling Cooling System in Engine Cooling section. 5. Connect the negative battery cable.
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Locate the four oxygen sensors.
014RY00002
060RW008
6E2534

D Bank 2 sensor 1 is mounted on the exhaust pipe ahead of the left-hand catalytic converter.
D Bank 1 sensor 1 is mounted on the exhaust pipe ahead of the right-hand catalytic converter.
TS22912
TS22914
D Bank 1 sensor 2 is mounted behind the right-hand catalytic converter.
D Bank 2 sensor 2 is mounted behind the left-hand catalytic converter.
TS22913
TS22915

3. Disconnect the pigtail from the wiring harness.
6E2535
060RY00128
060RY00128
IMPORTANT: The pigtail is permanently attached to the sensor. Be careful not to pull the wires out. NOTE: Do not use a torch to remove an HO2S unless the sensor is being replaced. Using a torch could damage the sensor. 4. Remove the sensor from the exhaust pipe. D Because of the expansion and contraction of the metal in the exhaust system over time, this may be difficult if the engine temperature is below 48C (120F).
IMPORTANT: D There is a special anti-seize compound on the HO2S threads. This compound consists of glass beads suspended in a liquid graphite solution. The graphite burns away with engine heat, but the glass beads will remain, making the sensor easier to remove. D New or service sensors will already have the compound applied to the threads. If a sensor is removed and is to be reinstalled for any reason, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied. 1. Apply anti-seize compound or the equivalent to the threads of the oxygen sensor, if necessary. 2. Install the oxygen sensor on the exhaust pipe in its original position. Tighten D Tighten the oxygen sensor to 55 Nm (40 lb ft.).
060RY00128
All four sensors are identical. Inspect each in the same way. 1. Inspect the pigtail and the electrical connector for grease, dirt, corrosion, and bare wires or worn insulation. 2. Inspect the louvered end of the sensor for grease, dirt, or other contaminations.
060RY00128
3. Connect the pigtail to the wiring harness. 4. Connect the negative battery cable.
6E2536

3. Install the engine cover. 4. Connect the negative battery cable.

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the engine cover 3. The IAT sensor is located in the intake air duct, behind the throttle body. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the IAT sensor.
ION Sensing Module

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the ION sensing module connector. 3. Remove the bolts and the ION sensing module from the common chamber.
TS23741
060RY00087
5. Remove the IAT sensor from the intake air duct by using a rocking motion while pulling the sensor.
1. Install the ION sensing module on the common chamber with the bolts. Tighten D Tighten the ION sensing module to 4 Nm (35 lb in.).
1. Install the IAT sensor into the grommet in the intake air duct. 2. Correct the IAT electrical connector.
TS23741

2. Connect the ION sensing module connectors as shown in the illustration.
6E2537
4. Remove the intake air duct from the MAF sensor. 5. Remove the MAF sensor from the air cleaner.
060RY00003
TS23781
Legend (1) Green Color Connector (2) Blue Color Connector 3. Connect the negative battery cable.
1. Install the MAF sensor on the air cleaner with the clamp. 2. Install the intake air duct and the clamp on the MAF sensor.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the MAF sensor.
TS23781
3. Tighten the clamps to secure the MAF sensor to the intake air duct and the air cleaner. 4. Connect the MAF electrical connector. 5. Connect the negative battery cable.
TS23740
3. Loosen the clamps which secure the intake air duct and the air cleaner to the MAF sensor.
6E2538

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the MAP sensor.
1. Install the MAP sensor in the mounting bracket.
055RW002
2. Install the mounting bracket retaining bolt on the common chamber. Tighten D Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (12 lb ft.). 3. Connect the MAP electrical connector.
055RY00001
3. Remove the bolt securing the MAP sensor to the mounting bracket on the common chamber. 4. Remove the MAP sensor from the mounting bracket.
055RY00001
055RW002
6E2539

Removal and Installation Procedure
Refer to Warning light bulb, indicator light valve, illumination light bulb, A/T indicator light bulb in Meter and Gauge.
D Do not open the replacement part package until the part is ready to be installed. D Before removing the part from the package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. D If the part has been handled while sliding across the seat, or while sitting down from a standing position, or while walking a distance, touch a known good ground before installing the part. NOTE: To prevent internal PCM damage, the ignition must be in the OFF position in order to disconnect or reconnect power to the PCM (for example: battery cable, PCM pigtail, PCM fuse, jumper cables, etc.). IMPORTANT: When replacing the production PCM with a service PCM, it is important to transfer the broadcast code and production PCM number to the service PCM label. This will allow positive identification of PCM parts throughout the service life of the vehicle. Do not record this information on the metal PCM cover. IMPORTANT: The ignition should always be in the OFF position in order to install or remove the PCM connectors. Service of the PCM should normally consist of either replacement of the PCM or EEPROM programming. If the diagnostic procedures call for the PCM to be replaced, the PCM should be checked first to ensure it is the correct part. If it is, remove the faulty PCM and install the new service PCM. The service PCM EEPROM will not be programmed. DTC P0601 indicates the check sum error.
Reduced Power Lamp

The reduced power lamp (RPL) turns on when the ignition key is moved to the ON position. It should turn off in approximately 3 seconds or immediately after the engine starts. If the RPL turns on during vehicle operation, a vehicle system failure resulting in reduced engine output is indicated. If both the reduced RPL and the check engine light turn on, a serious problem affecting vehicle performance is indicated. Refer to the OBD system check NO and RPL ON steady in this manual.

Service Precaution
NOTE: To prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the PCM, do not touch the connector pins or soldered components on the circuit board.
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Block the wheels. 3. Remove the two screws from the PCM electrical connectors. 4. Disconnect the PCM electrical connectors.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage

Electronic components used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. Electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4,000 volts for a person to even feel the zap of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. NOTE: To prevent possible Electrostatic Discharge damage, follow these guidelines: D Do not touch the control module connector pins or soldered components on the control module circuit board.
060RY00065
6E2540

2. Connect the PCM electrical connectors. 3. Install the two screws to PCM electrical connectors.
5. After removing the clip which fixes the PCM to the bracket, remove PCM.
060RY00067
060RY00065
1. Install the PCM to bracket and fix with the clip.
060RY00066
6E2541
EEPROM
General Description
The Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically soldered within the PCM. The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the PCM needs to control powertrain operation.
3. Remove the bolts and the TP sensor from the throttle body.
EEPROM Programming
1. Set-up Ensure that the following conditions have been met: D The battery is fully charged. D The ignition is ON. D The Vehicle Interface Module cable connection at the DLC is secure. 2. Program the PCM using the latest software matching the vehicle. Refer to up-to-date Techline equipment users instructions. 3. If the PCM fails to program, proceed as follows: D Ensure that all PCM connections are OK. D Check the Techline equipment for the latest software version. D Attempt to program the PCM. If the PCM still cannot be programmed properly, replace the PCM. The replacement PCM must be programmed.
060R200185
NOTE: Do not clean the TP sensor by soaking it in solvent. The sensor will be damaged as a result.
Function Check
Use a Tech 2 to check the TP sensor output voltage at closed throttle. D The voltage should be TP1 about 0.4V, TP2 about 4.6V and TP3 about 4.6V. D If the reading is abnormal value, check the throttle shaft to see if it is binding.
Functional Check
1. Perform the On-Board Diagnostic System Check. 2. Start the engine and run for one minute. 3. Scan for DTCs using the Tech 2.
1. Install the TP sensor on the throttle body with the bolts.

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the TPS electrical connector.
060R200185
2. Connect the TP electrical connector. 3. Install the negative battery cable.
6E2542

Removal Procedure
CAUTION: The VSS is located on the right side of the transfer case just ahead of the rear propeller shaft and very close to the exhaust pipes for 4WD and on the extension cover for 2WD. Be sure that the exhaust pipes are cool enough to touch before trying to remove the VSS. If the pipes are hot, you could be burned. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the VSS electrical connector.
1. Inspect the electrical connector for signs of corrosion or warping. Replace the VSS if the electrical connector is corroded or warped. 2. Inspect the VSS driven gear for chips, breaks, or worn condition. Replace the VSS if the driven gear is chipped, broken or worn. 3. Inspect the O-ring for wear, nicks, tears, or looseness. Replace the O-ring if necessary.
1. Install the VSS in the transfer case with the notch for the connector facing the rear. 2. Secure the VSS in place with the clamp and the bolt. Tighten D Tighten the bolt to 16 Nm (12 lb ft.).
TS23748
3. Remove the bolt and the clamp securing the VSS in place. IMPORTANT: Have a container ready to catch any fluid that leaks out when the VSS is removed from the transfer case for 4WD and on the extension cover for 2WD.
TS23780
3. Connect the VSS electrical connector.
TS23780
4. Remove the VSS from the transfer case by wiggling it slightly and pulling it straight out.
TS23748
4. Check the transfer case oil level. necessary. 5. Connect the negative battery cable.
Add fluid if
6E2543
Air Cleaner/Air Filter

Removal Procedure
1. Loosen the clamp between the air cleaner lid and the mass air flow sensor.
1. Install the air cleaner housing in the vehicle with the retaining bolts. 2. Install the air filter element in the air cleaner housing. 3. Install the air cleaner lid on the MAF sensor and the air cleaner housing.
025RY00001
2. Release the four latches securing the lid to the air cleaner housing. 3. Remove the air cleaner lid. 4. Remove the air filter element. 5. Remove the retaining bolts and the air cleaner housing from the vehicle.
025RY00003
Legend (1) Air Cleaner Housing (2) Air Filter Element (3) Air Cleaner Lid (4) Mass Air Flow Sensor 4. Tighten the clamp and secure the four latches between the lid and the air cleaner housing.
Common Chamber
Refer to Common Chamber in Engine Mechanical section.
025RY00002
Legend (1) Air Cleaner Housing (2) Air Filter Element (3) Air Cleaner Lid
6E2544
Accelerator Pedal Replacement

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical harness accelerator position sensor. from the
1. Install the accelerator pedal assembly on the bulkhead. 2. Install the two screws to the accelerator pedal assembly. Tighten D Tighten the screws to 22 Nm (16 lb ft.).
101RY00006 101RY00007
Legend (1) Accelerator Position Sensor (2) Accelerator Pedal Assembly 3. Remove the two screws from the accelerator pedal assembly.
3. Connect the electrical harness to the accelerator position sensor.
101RY00006
Legend (1) Accelerator Position Sensor (2) Accelerator Pedal Assembly

101RY00007
4. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly from the bulkhead.
4. Install the negative battery cable.
6E2545
Accelerator Position Sensor Replacement

CAUTION: Remove the Accelerator (A) pedal assembly as a unit to have it serviced. Do not remove the Accelerator Position (AP) sensor on the A pedal. If the AP sensor is removed for emergency cause, refer to following items as necessary.
Legend (1) AP Sensor (2) AP Screw
1. Install the accelerator position (AP) sensor to bolts with accelerator (A) pedal. 2. Connect the connector to AP sensor. 3. Install the negative battery cable.
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical harness from the AP sensor.
Accelerator Position Sensor Adjustment

AP sensor is controled three maltiple control system, and adjust the idle position and WOT position are between A and B for AP sensor 1, AP sensor 2, and AP sensor 3. Refer to How to adjust for AP sensor.
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical harness from the AP sensor.
How To Adjust For AP Sensor

1. Connect the Tech 2 to DLC on vehicle. 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF.. 3. Display the APS date list. Check the following item for AP position (%).
101RY00006
Legend (1) AP Sensor (2) A Pedal Assembly 3. Remove the AP sensor.
AP position (%) Idle position A APS1 APS2 APS3 13% 87 2% 87 1% WOT position B 87 2% 13 2% 34 2%
101RY00009
060RY00305
6E2546
4. If the problem was found, adjust as necessary.
Fuel Filter
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap.
101RY00011
Fuel Filler Cap

General Description
The fuel filler cap includes a vacuum valve and a pressure valve. If high vacuum or high pressure occurs in the fuel tank, each valve works to adjust the pressure in order to prevent damage to the tank.
041RY00001
3. Disconnect the fuel hose from the fuel filter on the engine side. 4. Disconnect the fuel hose from the fuel filter on the fuel tank side. 5. Remove the bolt on the fuel filter holder.
TS23767 041RW003
NOTE: Replace the fuel filler cap with the same type of filler cap that was originally installed on the vehicle. D Check the seal ring in the filler cap for any abnormality and for seal condition. D Replace the filler cap if any abnormality is found.
Legend (1) Fuel Hose (2) Fuel Filter Fixing Bolt (3) Fuel Filter 6. Remove the fuel filter.
6E2547
1. Replace the fuel filter when the following occur: D Fuel leaks from the fuel filter body. D The fuel filter body is damaged. D The fuel filter is clogged with dirt or sediment. 2. If the drain hole is clogged, clean the drain.
Legend (1) Fuel Hose (2) Fuel Filter Fixing Bolt (3) Fuel Filter 5. Install the fuel filler cap.
041RY00001

041RY00002
1. Install the fuel filter in the correct direction. 2. Install the bolt on the fuel filter holder. Tighten D Tighten the screws to 20 Nm (14 lb ft.). 3. Connect the fuel hose on the engine side. 4. Connect the fuel hose on the fuel tank side.
Fuel Gauge Unit

Removal Procedure
Refer to Fuel Gauge Unit Engine Fuel section.
014RW133
041RW003
6E2548
Fuel Injectors
Removal Procedure
NOTE: If the fuel injectors are leaking, the engine oil may be contaminated with fuel. Check the oil for signs of contamination and change the oil and the filter if necessary. NOTE: Use care in removing the fuel injectors in order to prevent damage to the fuel injector electrical connector pins or the fuel injector nozzles. The fuel injector is an electrical component and should not be immersed in any type of cleaner as this may damage the fuel injector. IMPORTANT: Fuel injectors are serviced as a complete assembly only. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the common chamber. Refer to Common Chamber in Engine Mechanical section. 3. Remove the fuel rail. Refer to Fuel Rail section.
4. Remove the injector retainer clip.
040RY00001
5. Remove the fuel injector assembly. 6. Remove the O-ring from the fuel injector. 7. Remove the O-ring backup from the fuel injector .
1. Inspect the O-rings for cracks or leaks. 2. Replace worn or damaged O-rings. 3. Lubricate the new O-rings with engine oil before installation.
1. Install the O-ring backup on the fuel injector. 2. Install the new O-ring on the fuel injector. 3. Install the fuel injector on the fuel rail.
014RW164
040RY00001
4. Use new fuel injector retainer clips to retain the fuel injector to the fuel rail. 5. Coat the end of the fuel injector with gasoline.

6. Install the fuel rail. Refer to Fuel Rail section.
6E2549
2. Remove the fuel pump relay from the underhood relay box. Refer to Fuel Pump Relay section.
014RW164
7. Install the common chamber. Refer to Common Chamber in Engine Mechanical section. 8. Install the engine cover. 9. Connect the negative battery cable.
014RY00004
3. Start the engine and allow it to stall. 4. Crank the engine for 30 seconds. 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Fuel Metering System

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, there are necessary to relieve the fuel system pressure before filler and gauge unit servicing the fuel system components. CAUTION: After relieving the system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing fuel lines or connections. Reduce the chance of personal injury by covering the fuel line fittings with a shop towel before you disconnect the fittings. The towels will absorb any fuel that may leak out. When the disconnect is completed, place the towel in an approved container. 1. Remove the fuel cap.
Fuel Pump Assembly

Removal Procedure
Refer to Fuel Tank In Fuel Pump Relay section.
014RW133
6E2550
Fuel Pump Relay

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the fuse and relay box cover from under the hood. 2. Consult the diagram on the cover to determine which is the correct relay. 3. Insert a small screwdriver into the catch slot on the forward side of the fuel pump relay. D The screwdriver blade will release the catch inside.
1. Insert the relay into the correct place in the fuse and relay box with the catch slot facing forward. 2. Press down until the catch engages. D An audible click will be heard.
014RY00004
3. Install the fuse and relay box cover.
D08RY00291
4. Pull the relay straight up and out of the fuse and relay box.
014RY00004
6E2551
Fuel Rail Assembly

Removal Procedure
NOTE: D Do not attempt to remove the fuel inlet fitting on the fuel rail. It is staked in place. Removing the fuel inlet fitting will result in damage to the fuel rail or the internal O-ring seal. D Use care when removing the fuel rail assembly in order to prevent damage to the injector electrical connector terminals and the injector spray tips. D Fittings should be capped and holes plugged during servicing to prevent dirt and other contaminants from entering open lines and passages. IMPORTANT: An eight-digit identification number is stamped on the side of the fuel rail. Refer to this number when you service the fuel rail or when a replacement part is required.
2. If an injector becomes separated from the fuel rail, the infector O-ring seals and the retainer clip must be replaced. 3. Drain residual fuel into an approved container.
014RW164
8. If removal of the fuel pressure regulator is necessary, refer to Fuel Pressure Regulator section. 9. If removal of the fuel injectors is necessary, refer to Fuel Injectors section.
1. If the fuel injectors were removed, install them. Refer to Fuel Injectors section. 2. If the fuel pressure regulator was removed, install it. Refer to Fuel Pressure Regulator section. 3. Install the common chamber. Refer to common chamber in engine Mechanical section.
014RY00008
Before removal, the fuel rail assembly may be cleaned with a spray type engine cleaner. Follow the spray package instructions. Do not immerse the fuel rails in liquid cleaning solvent. 1. Depressurize the fuel system. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure in this Section. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the engine cover. 4. Disconnect the throttle position sensor electrical connector from throttle body. 5. Disconnect the connectors from manifold absolute pressure sensor, solenoid valve, electric vacuum sensing valve. 6. Disconnect the vacuum hose on canister VSV and positive crankcase ventilation hose. 7. Remove the common chamber. Refer to the common chamber in Engine Mechanical section. 1. Lift up carefully on the fuel injectors. Do not separate the fuel injectors from the fuel rail.
014RW164
4. Connect the vacuum hose on Canister VSV and positive crankcase ventilation hose.
6E2552
5. Connect the connectors to manifold absolute pressure sensor, solenoid valve, electric vacuum sensing valve. 6. Connect the throttle position sensor electrical connector to throttle body. 7. Install the engine cover. 8. Connect the negative battery cable. 9. Crank the engine until it starts. Cranking the engine may take longer than usual due to trapped air in the fuel rail and in the injectors.
Throttle Body (TB)

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System section. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors: D Throttle position (TP) sensor. D Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. Refer to Intake Air Temperature Sensor section.
Fuel Tank
Removal Procedure
Refer to Fuel Tank In Fuel Pump Relay
060RY00014
014RW134
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose below the air horn. 5. Remove the intake air duct clamp. 6. Disconnect the intake air duct. 7. Disconnect the coolant lines from the throttle body. 8. Remove the bolts from the common chamber. 9. Remove the throttle body from the common chamber. 10. Remove the gasket from the common chamber.
060R200183
11. Remove the TP sensor. Refer to Throttle Position (TP) Sensor section.
6E2553
NOTE: Do not use solvent of any type when you clean the gasket surfaces on the intake manifold and the throttle body assembly. The gasket surfaces and the throttle body assembly may be damaged as a result. D If the throttle body gasket needs to be replaced, remove any gasket material that may be stuck to the mating surfaces of the manifold. D Do not leave any scratches in the aluminum casting.
9. Connect all the electrical connectors: D Throttle position (TP) sensor. D Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. Refer to Intake Air Temperature Sensor section.
1. Install the TP sensor. Refer to Throttle Position (TP) Sensor section. 2. Install the gasket on the common chamber. 3. Install the throttle body on the common chamber. 4. Secure the gasket and the throttle body with the four bolts. D The vacuum lines must be properly routed under the throttle body before tightening the mounting bolts. Tighten D Tighten the throttle body mounting bolts to 10 Nm (87 lb in).
060RY00020
10. Install the accelerator cable assembly. Refer to Accelerator Cable in Engine Speed Control System section. 11. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System section. 12. Install the negative battery cable.
060R200183
5. Install the coolant lines. 6. Connect all the vacuum lines. 7. Install the intake air duct. 8. Tighten the intake air duct clamp.
6E2554

CAUTION: Ignition coil assembly #6 is different from ignition coil assembly #1 to #5. Ignition coil assemblies #6 is short type. Be careful it when installing ignition coil assembly of #6.
Electronic Ignition System

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil connector at the ignition coil assemblies. 3. Remove the two screws that secure the ignition coil assemblies to the rocker cover.
060RY00002
Legend (1) Long Type Ignition Coil Assemblies (#1 #5) (2) Short Type Ignition Coil Assembly (#6)
060RY022
3. Install ignition coil assemblies and tighten the fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 4 Nm (35.4 Ib in)
Legend (1) Ignition Coil Connectors (2) Bolts (3) Ignition Coil Assemblies 4. Remove the ignition coil assemblies and the spark plug boot from the spark plug. D Twist the ignition coil assemblies while pulling it straight up. 5. Use the appropriate spark plug socket in order to remove the spark plug from the engine.
NOTE: The plug must thread smoothly into the cylinder head and be fully seated. Use a thread chaser if necessary to clean the threads in the cylinder head. Cross-threading or failure to fully seat the spark plug can cause plug overheating, exhaust blow-by gases, or thread damage. Do not overtighten the spark plugs. Over tightening can cause aluminum threads to strip. 1. Install the spark plug in the engine. appropriate spark plug socket. Use the Legend (1) Ignition Coil Connectors (2) Bolts (3) Ignition Coil Assemblies 4. Connect the ignition coil connector at the ignition coil assemblies. 5. Connect the negative battery cable.
060RY022
Tighten D Tighten the spark plug to 18 Nm (13 lb ft.). 2. Install the ignition coil assemblies and spark plug boot over the spark plug.
6E2555
Catalytic Converter
Refer to Engine Exhaust in Engine section.
1. Insert the relay into the correct place in the fuse and relay box with the catch slot facing forward. 2. Press down until the catch engages. D An audible click will be heard. 3. Install the fuse and relay box cover.
Air Conditioning Thermo Relay

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the fuse and relay box cover from under the hood. 2. Consult the diagram on the cover to determine which is the correct relay. 3. Insert a small screwdriver into the catch slot on the forward side of the fuel pump relay. D The screwdriver blade will release the catch inside.
014RY00007
EVAP Canister Hoses

Service Information
To view the routing of the EVAP canister hoses, refer to Vehicle Emission Control Information in Diagnosis. Use 6148M or equivalent when you replace the EVAP canister hoses.
D08RW131
4. Pull the relay straight up and out of the fuse and relay box.
014RY00007
6E2556
EVAP Canister
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the two hoses from the EVAP canister. 3. Disconnect the fuel vapor connector and the purge hose from the EVAP canister vent solenoid. 4. Remove the two retaining bolts the EVAP canister to the mounting bracket on the cross member. 5. Remove the retaining bolt on the mounting bracket the slide the canister out of mounting bracket.
4. Connect the two hoses to the EVAP canister.
060R200081
EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the connector and hose.
060R200081
1. Inspect the hoses for cracks and leaks. 2. Inspect the canister for a damaged case.
1. Slide the canister into mounting bracket and install the mounting bracket bolt. 2. Install the retaining bolts the EVAP canister to the mounting bracket on the cross member. 3. Connect the fuel vapor connector to the EVAP canister vent solenoid.
014RW132

3. Slide the out of EVAP canister vent solenoid from mounting bracket. 2. Connect the connector and hose.
6E2557
014RW132 014RW135
1. Check for cracks or leaks. 2. Energize the solenoid and try to blow through it. The solenoid should not allow passage of air when energized. (J 35616 Connector Test Kit can be used to easily attach jumper wires from the battery to the solenoid).
Fuel Tank Pressure (Vapor Pressure) Sensor

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the fuel pump assembly. Refer to Fuel Tank In Fuel Pump. 2. Carefully pry the fuel tank pressure sensor out of the top of the fuel pump assembly.
1. Slide the into EVAP canister vent solenoid into the mounting bracket.
014RW133
014RW135
1. Inspect the vapor pressure sensor for cracks in the housing and corrosion on the electrical terminals. 2. Inspect the rubber grommet for tears and signs of rot.
6E2558

3. Disconnect the vacuum hoses from the EVAP canister purge solenoid.
1. Install the rubber grommet on the fuel pump assembly.
060R200080
014RW133
2. Install the fuel tank vapor pressure sensor on the fuel pump assembly. D Insert the sensor nipple firmly into the grommet. D Keep twisting and pushing the sensor until the wide portion of the nipple shows on the other side of the grommet. 3. Install the fuel pump assembly on the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank In Fuel Pump..
4. Remove the EVAP canister purge solenoid retaining bolt from the common chamber. 5. Remove the EVAP canister purge solenoid.
1. Install the EVAP canister purge solenoid on the upper intake manifold. 2. Install the EVAP canister purge solenoid retaining bolt. Tighten D Tighten the bolts to 20 Nm (16 lb ft.). 3. Connect the vacuum hoses to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the EVAP canister purge solenoid.
EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid (Purge Duty Solenoid Valve)

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EVAP canister purge solenoid.
060R200080
6E2559
Fuel Tank Vent Valve (Vent Solenoid Valve)

Refer to Fuel Pump section.
1. Install the gasket on the common chamber. 2. Install the EGR valve on the common chamber. 3. Secure the EGR valve and the gasket with the bolts. Torque: 25 Nm (18 Ib ft) NOTE: It is possible to install the EGR valve rotated 180 from the correct position. Make sure that the base of the valve is placed so that it aligns with the mounting flange.
Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector at the EGR valve.
014RW098
4. Connect the electrical connector at the EGR valve.
014RW139
3. Remove the bolts from the common chamber.
014RW139
014RW098
4. Remove the EGR valve from the common chamber manifold. 5. Remove the gasket from the common chamber manifold.
6E2560

2. Install the vacuum hose on the PCV valve and secure the vacuum hose with the clamp.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the vacuum hose at the PCV valve. D Slide the clamp back to release the hose. 2. Pull the PCV valve from the rubber grommet in the right valve cover.
014RW097
Wiring and Connectors

Wiring Harness Service
014RW097
Before inspecting the PCV valve, make sure that the hoses are connected properly and are in good condition. Also check that the oil pan and rocker cover gaskets are sealing properly.
PCV Valve
1. Run the engine at normal operating temperature. 2. Disconnect the valve from the rocker cover. RESULT: A hissing noise should be heard from the valve. If no noise is heard, the PCV valve or hose is plugged. 3. Remove the PCV valve from the engine. a. Blow air into the rocker cover side of the valve. RESULT: Air should pass freely. b. Blow air into the air cleaner side of the valve. RESULT: Air should not pass through the valve. 4. Re-install the PCV valve and remove the oil filler cap. RESULT: A small vacuum should be felt at the oil filler hole.
The control module harness electrically connects the control module to the various solenoids, switches and sensors in the vehicle engine compartment and passenger compartment. Replace wire harnesses with the proper part number replacement. Because of the low amperage and voltage levels utilized in powertrain control systems, it is essential that all wiring in environmentally exposed areas be repaired with crimp and seal splice sleeves. The following wire harness repair information is intended as a general guideline only. Refer to Chassis Electrical section for all wire harness repair procedures.
Connectors and Terminals

Use care when probing a connector and when replacing terminals. It is possible to short between opposite terminals. Damage to components could result. Always use jumper wires between connectors for circuit checking. NEVER probe through Weather-Pack seals. Use an appropriate connector test adapter kit which contains an assortment of flexible connectors used to probe terminals during diagnosis. Use an appropriate fuse remover and test tool for removing a fuse and to adapt the fuse holder to a meter for diagnosis. Open circuits are often difficult to locate by sight because oxidation or terminal misalignment are hidden by the connectors. Merely wiggling a connector on a sensor, or in the wiring harness, may temporarily correct the open circuit. Intermittent problems may also be caused by oxidized or loose connections. Be certain of the type of connector/terminal before making any connector or terminal repair. Weather-Pack and Com-Pack III terminals look similar, but are serviced differently.
1. Push the PCV valve into the rubber grommet in the left valve cover.
6E2561
PCM Connectors and Terminals

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the connector terminal retainer. 2. Push the wire connected to the affected terminal through the connector face so that the terminal is exposed. 3. Service the terminal as necessary.
4. Strip the insulation as necessary.
1. Bend the tab on the connector to allow the terminal to be pulled into position within the connector. 2. Pull carefully on the wire to install the connector terminal retainer.
Wire Harness Repair: Twisted Shielded Cable

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the outer jacket. 2. Unwrap the aluminum/mylar tape. Do not remove the mylar.
048
1. Splice the wires using splice clips and rosin core solder. 2. Wrap each splice to insulate. 3. Wrap the splice with mylar and with the drain (uninsulated) wire.
047
3. Untwist the conductors.

049
6E2562
4. Tape over the whole bundle to secure.
1. Use splice clips and rosin core solder in order to splice the two wires together.
050
Twisted Leads
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the damaged wire. 2. Remove the insulation as required.
052
2. Cover the splice with tape in order to insulate it from the other wires.
053
051

3. Twist the wires as they were before starting this procedure.
6E2563
Weather-Pack Connector
Tools Required
J 28742-A Weather-Pack II Terminal Remover
Removal Procedure
A Weather-Pack connector can be identified by a rubber seal at the rear of the connector. This engine room connector protects against moisture and dirt, which could form oxidation and deposits on the terminals. This protection is important, because of the low voltage and the low amperage found in the electronic systems. 1. Open the secondary lock hinge on the connector.
054
4. Tape the wires with electrical tape. Hold in place.
070
2. Use tool J 28742-A or the equivalent to remove the pin and the sleeve terminals. Push on J 28742-A to release. NOTE: Do the use an ordinary pick or the terminal may be bent or deformed. Unlike standard blade terminals, these terminals cannot be straightened after they have been improperly bent.
055
071
6E2564

5. Push the terminal and the connector to engage the locking tangs.
3. Cut the wire immediately behind the cable seal.
072 070
Make certain the connectors are properly seated and all of the sealing rings are in place when you reconnect the leads. The secondary lock hinge provides a backup locking feature for the connector. The secondary lock hinge is used for added reliability. This flap should retain the terminals even if the small terminal lock tangs are not positioned properly. Do not replace the Weather-Pack connections with standard connections. Read the instructions provided with the Weather-Pack connector and terminal packages. 1. Replace the terminal. 2. Slip the new seal onto the wire. 3. Strip 5 mm (0.2) of insulation from the wire. 4. Crimp the terminal over the wire and the seal.
6. Close the secondary locking hinge.
Com-Pack III
General Information
The Com-Pack III terminal looks similar to some Weather-Pack terminals. This terminal is not sealed and is used where resistance to the environment is not required. Use the standard method when repairing a terminal. Do not use the Weather-Pack terminal tool J 28742-A or equivalent. These will damage the terminals.
073
6E2565
Metri-Pack
Tools Required
J 35689 Terminal Remover
2. The terminal (1) is then crimped onto the wire.
Removal Procedure
Some connectors use terminals called Metri-Pack Series 150. These may be used at the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. 1. Slide the seal (1) back on the wire. 2. Insert the J 35689 tool or equivalent (3) in order to release the terminal locking tang (2).
061
3. Then the terminal is pulled back into the connector to seat it in place.
060
3. Push the wire and the terminal out through the connector. If you reuse the terminal, reshape the locking tang.
Metri-Pack terminals are also referred to as pull-to-seat terminals. 1. In order to install a terminal on a wire, the wire must be inserted through the seal (2) and through the connector (3).
6E2566

PCM calculates the engine coolant temperature. Engine coolant temperature affects most of the systems that the PCM controls. The Tech 2 displays engine coolant temperature in degrees. After engine start-up, the temperature should rise steadily to about 85C (185F). It then stabilizes when the thermostat opens. If the engine has not been run for several hours (overnight), the engine coolant temperature and intake air temperature displays should be close to each other. A hard fault in the engine coolant sensor circuit will set DTC P0177 or DTC P0118. An intermittent fault will set a DTC P1114 or P1115.
General Description (PCM and Sensors)

58X Reference PCM Input
The powertrain control module (PCM) uses this signal from the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to calculate engine RPM and crankshaft position at all engine speeds. The PCM also uses the pulses on this circuit to initiate injector pulses. If the PCM receives no pulses on this circuit, DTC P0337 will set. The engine will not start and run without using the 58X reference signal.
A/C Request Signal

This signal tells the PCM when the A/C mode is selected at the A/C control head. The PCM uses this to adjust the idle speed before turning ON the A/C clutch. The A/C compressor will be inoperative if this signal is not available to the PCM. Refer to A/C Clutch Circuit Diagnosis section for A/C wiring diagrams and diagnosis for the A/C electrical system.

The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides a signal used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to calculate the ignition sequence. The CKP sensor initiates the 58X reference pulses which the PCM uses to calculate RPM and crankshaft position. Refer to Electronic Ignition System section for additional information.
0016
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)

The electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory chip that is physically soldered within the PCM. The EEPROM contains the program and the calibration information that the PCM needs to control powertrain operation. Unlike the PROM used in past applications, the EEPROM is not replaceable. If the PCM is replaced, the new PCM will need to be programmed. Equipment containing the correct program and calibration for the vehicle is required to program the PCM.
Fuel Control Heated Oxygen Sensors

The fuel control heated oxygen sensors (Bank 1 HO2S 1 and Bank 2 HO2S 1) are mounted in the exhaust stream where they can monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. The oxygen present in the exhaust gas reacts with the sensor to produce a voltage output. This voltage should constantly fluctuate from approximately 100 mV to 900 mV. The heated oxygen sensor voltage can be monitored with a Tech 2. By monitoring the voltage output of the oxygen sensor, the PCM calculates the pulse width command for the injectors to produce the proper combustion chamber mixture. D Low HO2S voltage is a lean mixture which will result in a rich command to compensate. D High HO2S voltage is a rich mixture which will result in a lean command to compensate.
0013

The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a thermistor (a resistor which changes value based on temperature) mounted in the engine coolant stream. Low coolant temperature produces a high resistance of 100,000 ohms at 40C (40F). High temperature causes a low resistance of 70 ohms at 130C (266F). The PCM supplies a 5-volt signal to the ECT sensor through resistors in the PCM and measures the voltage. The signal voltage will be high when the engine is cold and low when the engine is hot. By measuring the voltage, the

An open Bank 1 HO2S 1 signal circuit will set a DTC P0134 and the Tech 2 will display a constant voltage between 400-500 mV. A constant voltage below 300 mV in the sensor circuit (circuit grounded) will set DTC P0131. A constant voltage above 800 mV in the circuit will set DTC P0132. Faults in the Bank 2 HO2S 1 signal circuit will cause DTC 0154 (open circuit), DTC P0151 (grounded circuit), or DTC P0152 (signal voltage high) to set. A fault in the Bank 1 HO2S 1 heater circuit will cause DTC P0135 to set. A fault in the Bank 2 HO2S 1 heater circuit will cause DTC P0155 to set. The PCM can also detect HO2S response problems. If the response time of an HO2S is determined to be too slow, the PCM will store a DTC that indicates degraded HO2S performance.
6E2567
will make a slight adjustment to fuel trim to ensure that fuel delivery is correct for catalyst monitoring. A problem with the Bank 1 HO2S 2 signal circuit will set DTC P0137, P0138, or P0140, depending on the specific condition. A problem with the Bank 2 HO2S 2 signal circuit will set DTC P0157, P0158, or P0160, depending on the specific condition. A fault in the heated oxygen sensor heater element or its ignition feed or ground will result in lower sensor response. This may cause incorrect catalyst monitor diagnostic results.
TS24067
060RY00127
Catalyst Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensors

Three-way catalytic converters are used to control emissions of hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx). The catalyst within the converters promotes a chemical reaction. This reaction oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas and converts them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx by converting it to nitrogen. The PCM can monitor this process using the Bank 1 HO2S 2 and the Bank 2 HO2S 2 heated oxygen sensors. The Bank 1 HO2S 1 and the Bank 2 HO2S 1 sensors produce an output signal which indicates the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas entering the three-way catalytic converter. The Bank 1 HO2S 2 and the Bank 2 HO2S 2 sensors produce an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst. This indicates the catalysts ability to efficiently convert exhaust gases. If the catalyst is operating efficiently, the Bank 1 HO2S 1 and the Bank 2 HO2S 1 signals will be more active than the signals produced by the Bank 1 HO2S 2 and the Bank 2 HO2S 2 sensors. The catalyst monitor sensors operate the same as the fuel control sensors. The Bank 1 HO2S 2 and the Bank 2 HO2S 2 sensors main function is catalyst monitoring, but they also have a limited role in fuel control. If a sensor output indicates a voltage either above or below the 450 mV bias voltage for an extended period of time, the PCM
TS23365A
Legend (1) Bank 1 Sensor 1 (Fuel Control) (2) Catalytic Converter (3) Bank 1 Sensor 2 (Catalyst Monitor) (4) Bank 2 Sensor 1 (Fuel Control) (5) Bank 2 Sensor 2 (Catalyst Monitor)

The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor which changes its resistance based on the temperature of air entering the engine. Low temperature produces a high
6E2568
resistance of 100,000 ohms at 40C (40F). High temperature causes low resistance of 70 ohms at 130C (266F) . The PCM supplies a 5-volt signal to the sensor through a resistor in the PCM and monitors the signal voltage. The voltage will be high when the incoming air is cold. The voltage will be low when the incoming air is hot. By measuring the voltage, the PCM calculates the incoming air temperature. The IAT sensor signal is used to adjust spark timing according to the incoming air density. The Tech 2 displays the temperature of the air entering the engine. The temperature should read close to the ambient air temperature when the engine is cold and rise as underhood temperature increases. If the engine has not been run for several hours (overnight), the IAT sensor temperature and engine coolant temperature should read close to each other. A fault in the IAT sensor circuit will set DTC P0112 or DTC P0113.
Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Control

The PCM monitors the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) actual position and adjusts the pintle position accordingly. The PCM uses information from the following sensors to control the pintle position: D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. D Throttle position (TP) sensor. D Mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
0007

The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure (vacuum). The MAP sensor signal voltage to the PCM varies from below 2 volts at idle (high vacuum) to above 4 volts with the ignition ON, engine not running or at wide-open throttle (low vacuum). The MAP sensor is used to determine the following: D Manifold pressure changes while the linear EGR flow test diagnostic is being run. Refer to DTC P0401. D Barometric pressure (BARO). If the PCM detects a voltage that is lower than the possible range of the MAP sensor, DTC P0107 will be set. A signal voltage higher than the possible range of the sensor will set DTC P0108. An intermittent low or high voltage will set DTC P1107, respectively. The PCM can detect a shifted MAP sensor. The PCM compares the MAP sensor signal to a calculated MAP based on throttle position and various engine load factors. If the PCM detects a MAP signal that varies excessively above or below the calculated value, DTC P0106 will set.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor

The mass air flow (MAF) sensor measures the difference between the volume and the quantity of air that enters the engine. Volume means the size of the space to be filled. Quantity means the number of air molecules that will fit into the space. This information is important to the PCM because heavier, denser air will hold more fuel than lighter, thinner air. The PCM adjusts the air/fuel ratio as needed depending on the MAF value. The Tech 2 reads the MAF value and displays it in terms of grams per second (gm/s). At idle, the Tech 2 should read between 4-7 gm/s on a fully warmed up engine. Values should change quickly on acceleration. Values should remain stable at any given RPM. A failure in the MAF sensor or circuit will set DTC P0101, DTC P0102, or DTC P0103.
055RW004
6E2569

The powertrain control module (PCM) is located in the passenger compartment below the center console. The PCM controls the following: D Fuel metering system. D Transmission shifting (automatic transmission only). D Ignition timing. D On-board diagnostics for powertrain functions. The PCM constantly observes the information from various sensors. The PCM controls the systems that affect vehicle performance. The PCM performs the diagnostic function of the system. It can recognize operational problems, alert the driver through the MIL (Check Engine lamp), and store diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). DTCs identify the problem areas to aid the technician in making repairs.
sensor, heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), and vehicle speed sensor (VSS). The PCM also controls certain engine operations through the following: D Fuel injector control D Ignition control module D ION sensing module D Automatic transmission shift functions D Cruise control D Evaporative emission (EVAP) purge D A/C clutch control
PCM Voltage Description

The PCM supplies a buffered voltage to various switches and sensors. It can do this because resistance in the PCM is so high in value that a test light may not illuminate when connected to the circuit. An ordinary shop voltmeter may not give an accurate reading because the voltmeter input impedance is too low. Use a 10-megohm input impedance digital voltmeter (such as J 39200) to assure accurate voltage readings. The input/output devices in the PCM include analog-to-digital converters, signal buffers, counters, and special drivers. The PCM controls most components with electronic switches which complete a ground circuit when turned ON. These switches are arranged in groups of 4 and 7, called either a surface-mounted quad driver module (QDM), which can independently control up to 4 output terminals, or QDMs which can independently control up to 7 outputs. Not all outputs are always used.
PCM Function
The PCM supplies either 5 or 12 volts to power various sensors or switches. The power is supplied through resistances in the PCM which are so high in value that a test light will not light when connected to the circuit. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because its resistance is too low. Therefore, a digital voltmeter with at least 10 megohms input impedance is required to ensure accurate voltage readings. Tool J 39200 meets this requirement. The PCM controls output circuits such as the injectors, fan relays, etc., by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through transistors or through either of the following two devices: D Output Driver Module (ODM) D Quad Driver Module (QDM)
PCM Input/Outputs
Inputs Operating Conditions Read D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D Air Conditioning ON or OFF Engine Coolant Temperature Crankshaft Position Exhaust Oxygen Content Electronic Ignition Manifold Absolute Pressure Battery Voltage Throttle Position Vehicle Speed Fuel Pump Voltage Power Steering Pressure Intake Air Temperature Mass Air Flow Engine Knock Acceleration Position EVAP Canister Purge Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Ignition Control Fuel Control ION Sensing Module Electric Fuel Pump Air Conditioning
Outputs Systems Controlled

060RY00068
PCM Components
The PCM is designed to maintain exhaust emission levels to government mandated standards while providing excellent driveability and fuel efficiency. The PCM monitors numerous engine and vehicle functions via electronic sensors such as the throttle position (TP)
6E2570
D Diagnostics Malfunction Indicator Lamp Data Link Connector (DLC) Data Output D Transmission Control Module
Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor

The transmission fluid temperature sensor is a thermistor which changes its resistance based on the temperature of the transmission fluid. For a complete description of the TFT sensor, refer to 4L30-E Automatic Transmission Diagnosis section. A failure in the TFT sensor or associated wiring will cause DTC P0712 or DTC P0713 to set. In this case, engine coolant temperature will be substituted for the TFT sensor value and the transmission will operate normally.
PCM Service Precautions

The PCM is designed to withstand normal current draws associated with vehicle operation. Avoid overloading any circuit. When testing for opens and shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the PCMs circuits unless instructed to do so. These circuits should only be tested using digital voltmeter J 39200. The PCM should remain connected to the PCM or to a recommended breakout box.
Transmission Range Switch (Mode Switch)

IMPORTANT: The vehicle should not be driven with the transmission range switch disconnected; idle quality will be affected. The four inputs from the transmission range switch indicate to the PCM which position is selected by the transmission selector lever. This information is used for ignition timing, EVAP canister purge, EGR operation. For more information on the transmission on the transmission range switch, refer to 4L30-E Automatic Transmission section.
Reprogramming The PCM

Reprogramming of the PCM is done without removing it from the vehicle . This provides a flexible and cost-effective method of making changes in software calibrations. Refer to the latest Techline information on reprogramming or flashing procedures.

The throttle position (TP) sensor is a potentiometer connected to the throttle shaft on the throttle body. The PCM monitors the voltage on the signal line and calculates throttle position. As the throttle valve angle is changed (accelerator pedal moved), the TP sensor signal also changes. At a closed throttle position, the output of the TP1 sensor is low. As the throttle valve opens, the output increases so that at wide open throttle (WOT), the output voltage should be above 92% (Tech 2 Display). The PCM calculates fuel delivery based on throttle valve angle (driver demand). A broken or loose TP sensor may cause intermittent bursts of fuel from an injector and unstable idle because the PCM thinks the throttle is moving.

The PCM determines the speed of the vehicle by converting a pulsing voltage signal from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) into miles per hour. The PCM uses this signal to operate the cruise control, speedometer, and the TCC and shift solenoids in the transmission. For more information on the TCC and shift solenoids, refer to 4L30-E Automatic Transmission section.
0008
Use of Circuit Testing Tools

Do not use a test light to diagnose the powertrain electrical systems unless specifically instructed by the diagnostic procedures. Use Connector Test Adapter Kit J 35616 whenever diagnostic procedures call for probing connectors.
060RY00027
6E2571
Aftermarket Electrical and Vacuum Equipment

Aftermarket (add-on) electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment which connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems that is installed on a vehicle after it leaves the factory. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. NOTE: No add-on vacuum equipment should be added to this vehicle. NOTE: Add-on electrical equipment must only be connected to the vehicles electrical system at the battery (power and ground). Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain problem is to eliminate all aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, it may be diagnosed in the normal manner.
D Charge by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentary touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. NOTE: To prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage, follow these guidelines: D Do not touch the PCM connector pins or soldered components on the PCM circuit board. D Do not open the replacement part package until the part is ready to be installed. D Before removing the part from the package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. D If the part has been handled while sliding across the seat, while sitting down from a standing position, or while walking a distance, touch a known good ground before installing the part.
General Description (Air Induction)

Air Induction System
The air induction system filters contaminants from the outside air, and directs the progress of the air as it is drawn into the engine. A remote-mounted air cleaner prevents dirt and debris in the air from entering the engine. The air duct assembly routes filtered air to the throttle body. Air enters the engine by to following steps: 1. Through the throttle body. 2. Into the common chamber. 3. Through the cylinder head intake ports. 4. Into the cylinders.
Electrostatic Discharge Damage

Electronic components used in the PCM are often designed to carry very low voltage. Electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4000 volts for a person to feel even the zap of a static discharge.
TS23793
There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and induction. D An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a vehicle seat.
055RV010
6E2572
General Description (Fuel Metering)

Acceleration Mode
The PCM provides extra fuel when it detects a rapid increase in the throttle position and the air flow.
Battery Voltage Correction Mode

When battery voltage is low, the PCM will compensate for the weak spark by increasing the following: D The amount of fuel delivered. D The idle RPM. D Ignition dwell time.
Clear Flood Mode

Clear a flooded engine by pushing the accelerator pedal down all the way. The PCM then de-energizes the fuel injectors. The PCM holds the fuel injectors de-energized as long as the throttle remains above 80% and the engine speed is below 800 RPM. If the throttle position becomes less than 80%, the PCM again begins to pulse the injectors ON and OFF, allowing fuel into the cylinders.
014RY00009
Fuel Metering System Components

The fuel metering system is made up of the following parts: D The fuel injectors. D The throttle body. D The fuel rail. D The fuel pressure regulator. D The PCM. D The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. D The ION sensing module. D The fuel pump. D The fuel pump relay. Basic System Operation The fuel metering system starts with the fuel in the fuel tank. An electric fuel pump, located in the fuel tank, pumps fuel to the fuel rail through an in-line fuel filter. The pump is designed to provide fuel at a pressure above the pressure needed by the injectors. A fuel pressure regulator in the fuel rail keeps fuel available to the fuel injectors at a constant pressure. A return line delivers unused fuel back to the fuel tank. Refer to Section 6C for further information on the fuel tank, line filter, and fuel pipes.
Deceleration Mode
The PCM reduces the amount of fuel injected when it detects a decrease in the throttle position and the air flow. When deceleration is very fast, the PCM may cut off fuel completely for short periods.
Engine Speed/Vehicle Speed/Fuel Disable Mode

The PCM monitors engine speed. It turns off the fuel injectors when the engine speed increases above 6400 RPM. The fuel injectors are turned back on when engine speed decreases below 6150 RPM.
Fuel Cutoff Mode

No fuel is delivered by the fuel injectors when the ignition is OFF. This prevents engine run-on. In addition, the PCM suspends fuel delivery if no reference pulses are detected (engine not running) to prevent engine flooding.
Fuel Injector
The sequential multiport fuel injection (SFI) fuel injector is a solenoid-operated device controlled by the PCM. The PCM energizes the solenoid, which opens a valve to allow fuel delivery. The fuel is injected under pressure in a conical spray pattern at the opening of the intake valve. Excess fuel not used by the injectors passes through the fuel pressure regulator before being returned to the fuel tank. A fuel injector which is stuck partly open will cause a loss of fuel pressure after engine shut down, causing long crank times.
Fuel Metering System Purpose

The basic function of the air/fuel metering system is to control the air/fuel delivery to the engine. Fuel is delivered to the engine by individual fuel injectors mounted in the intake manifold near each intake valve. The main control sensor is the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) located in the exhaust system. The HO2S tells the PCM how much oxygen is in the exhaust gas. The PCM changes the air/fuel ratio to the engine by controlling the amount of time that fuel injector is ON. The best mixture to minimize exhaust emissions is 14.7 parts of air to 1 part of gasoline by weight, which allows the catalytic converter to operate most efficiently. Because of the constant measuring and adjusting of the air/fuel ratio, the fuel injection system is called a closed loop system.

The PCM monitors signals from several sensors in order to determine the fuel needs of the engine. Fuel is delivered under one of several conditions called modes. All modes are controlled by the PCM.
6E2573

The fuel pressure regulator is a diaphragm-operated relief valve mounted on the fuel rail with fuel pump pressure on one side and manifold pressure on the other side. The fuel pressure regulator maintains the fuel pressure available to the injector at three times barometric pressure adjusted for engine load. It may be serviced separtely. If the pressure is too low, poor performance and a DTC P0131, DTC P0151,DTC P0171 or DTC P1171 will be the result. If the pressure is too high, excessive odor and/or a DTC P0132, DTC P0152,DTC P0172 will be the result. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis for information on diagnosing fuel pressure conditions.
055RW009
Run Mode
The run mode has the following two conditions: D Open loop D Closed loop When the engine is first started the system is in open loop operation. In open loop, the PCM ignores the signal from the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). It calculates the air/fuel ratio based on inputs from the TP, ECT, and MAF sensors. The system remains in open loop until the following conditions are met: D The HO2S has a varying voltage output showing that it is hot enough to operate properly (this depends on temperature). D The ECT has reached a specified temperature. D A specific amount of time has elapsed since starting the engine. D Engine speed has been greater than a specified RPM since start-up. The specific values for the above conditions vary with different engines and are stored in the programmable read only memory (PROM). When these conditions are met, the system enters closed loop operation. In closed loop, the PCM calculates the air/fuel ratio (injector on-time) based on the signal from the HO2S. This allows the air/fuel ratio to stay very close to 14.7:1.
014RY00010
Fuel Pump Electrical Circuit

When the key is first turned ON, the PCM energizes the fuel pump relay for two seconds to build up the fuel pressure quickly. If the engine is not started within two seconds, the PCM shuts the fuel pump off and waits until the engine is cranked. When the engine is cranked and the 58 X crankshaft position signal has been detected by the PCM, the PCM supplies 12 volts to the fuel pump relay to energize the electric in-tank fuel pump. An inoperative fuel pump will cause a no-start condition. A fuel pump which does not provide enough pressure will result in poor performance.
Starting Mode
When the ignition is first turned ON, the PCM energizes the fuel pump relay for two seconds to allow the fuel pump to build up pressure. The PCM then checks the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the throttle position (TP) sensor to determine the proper air/fuel ratio for starting. The PCM controls the amount of fuel delivered in the starting mode by adjusting how long the fuel injectors are energized by pulsing the injectors for very short times.
Fuel Rail
The fuel rail is mounted to the top of the engine and distributes fuel to the individual injectors. Fuel is delivered to the fuel inlet tube of the fuel rail by the fuel lines. The fuel goes through the fuel rail to the fuel pressure regulator. The fuel pressure regulator maintains a constant fuel pressure at the injectors. Remaining fuel is then returned to the fuel tank.
6E2574
Throttle Body Unit

The throttle body has a throttle plate to control the amount of air delivered to the engine. The TP sensor are also mounted on the throttle body. Vacuum ports located behind the throttle plate provide the vacuum signals needed by various components. Engine coolant is directed through a coolant cavity in the throttle body to warm the throttle valve and to prevent icing.
0013
Ignition Coils
A separate coil-at-plug module is located at each spark plug. The coil-at-plug module is attached to the engine with two screws. It is installed directly to the spark plug by an electrical contact inside a rubber boot. A three-way connector provides 12-volt primary supply from the 15-amp ignition fuse, a ground-switching trigger line from the PCM, and a ground.
060R200184
General Description (Electronic Ignition System)

The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides a signal used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to calculate the ignition sequence. The sensor initiates the 58X reference pulses which the PCM uses to calculate RPM and crankshaft position. Refer to Electronic Ignition System section for additional information.
Electronic Ignition
The electronic ignition system controls fuel combustion by providing a spark to ignite the compressed air/fuel mixture at the correct time. To provide optimum engine performance, fuel economy, and control of exhaust emissions, the PCM controls the spark advance of the ignition system. Electronic ignition has the following advantages over a mechanical distributor system: D No moving parts. D Less maintenance. D Remote mounting capability. D No mechanical load on the engine. D More coil cooldown time between firing events. D Elimination of mechanical timing adjustments. D Increased available ignition coil saturation time.
060RY00022
Ignition Control
The ignition control (IC) spark timing is the PCMs method of controlling the spark advance and the ignition dwell. The IC spark advance and the ignition dwell are calculated by the PCM using the following inputs: D Engine speed. D Crankshaft position (58X reference). D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. D Throttle position (TP) sensor. D ION sensing module. D Park/Neutral position (PRNDL input).

D Vehicle speed (vehicle speed sensor). D PCM and ignition system supply voltage. D The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor sends the PCM a 58X signal related to the exact position of the crankshaft. D EST line is enabled.
6E2575
060RY00029
Ignition Control PCM Output

TS22909
Based on these sensor signals and engine load information, the PCM sends 5V to each ignition coil.
The PCM provides a zero volt (actually about 100 mV to 200 mV) or a 5-volt output signal to the ignition control (IC) module. Each spark plug has its own primary and secondary ignition coil assembly (coil-at-plug) located at the spark plug itself. When the ignition coil receives the 5-volt signal from the PCM, it provides a ground path for the B+ supply to the primary side of the coil-at -plug module. When the PCM shuts off the 5-volt signal to the ION sensing module, the ground path for the primary coil is broken. The magnetic field collapses and induces a high voltage secondary impulse which fires the spark plug and ignites the air/fuel mixture. The circuit between the PCM and the ignition coil is monitored for open circuits, shorts to voltage, and shorts to ground. If the PCM detects one of these events, it will set one of the following DTCs: D P0351: Ignition coil Fault on Cylinder #1 D P0352: Ignition coil Fault on Cylinder #2 D P0353: Ignition coil Fault on Cylinder #3 D P0354: Ignition coil Fault on Cylinder #4 D P0355: Ignition coil Fault on Cylinder #5 D P0356: Ignition coil Fault on Cylinder #6
060RY00116
This module has the function to energize and de-energize the primary ignition coil in response to signals from the PCM. The Throttle PCM controls ignition timing and dwell time. Continuity and out-or-range value check: This diagnosis detects open circuit or short-circuiting in the Electronic Spark Timing (EST) line by monitoring EST signals. A failure determination is made when the signal voltage remains higher or lower than the threshold for corresponding fault code beyond a predetermined time period. Diagnosis enabling conditions are as follows: D RPM is higher than the specified threshold.

The PCM is responsible for maintaining proper spark and fuel injection timing for all driving conditions. To provide optimum driveability and emissions, the PCM monitors the input signals from the following components in order to calculate spark timing: D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. D Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. D Mass air flow (MAF) sensor. D PRNDL input from transmission range switch. D Throttle position (TP) sensor. D Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) .
6E2576
D Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
Spark Plug
Although worn or dirty spark plugs may give satisfactory operation at idling speed, they frequency fail at higher engine speeds. Faulty spark plugs may cause poor fuel economy, power loss, loss of speed, hard starting and generally poor engine performance. Follow the scheduled maintenance service recommendations to ensure satisfactory spark plug performance. Refer to Maintenance and Lubrication section. Normal spark plug operation will result in brown to grayish-tan deposits appearing on the insulator portion of the spark plug. A small amount of red-brown, yellow, and white powdery material may also be present on the insulator tip around the center electrode. These deposits are normal combustion by-products of fuels and lubricating oils with additives. Some electrode wear will also occur. Engines which are not running properly are often referred to as misfiring. This means the ignition spark is not igniting the air/fuel mixture at the proper time. While other ignition and fuel system causes must also be considered, possible causes include ignition system conditions which allow the spark voltage to reach ground in some other manner than by jumping across the air gap at the tip of the spark plug, leaving the air/fuel mixture unburned. Refer to DTC P0300. Misfiring may also occur when the tip of the spark plug becomes overheated and ignites the mixture before the spark jumps. This is referred to as pre-ignition. Spark plugs may also misfire due to fouling, excessive gap, or a cracked or broken insulator. If misfiring occurs before the recommended replacement interval, locate and correct the cause. Carbon fouling of the spark plug is indicated by dry, black carbon (soot) deposits on the portion of the spark plug in the cylinder. Excessive idling and slow speeds under light engine loads can keep the spark plug temperatures so low that these deposits are not burned off. Very rich fuel mixtures or poor ignition system output may also be the cause. Refer to DTC P0172. Oil fouling of the spark plug is indicated by wet oily deposits on the portion of the spark plug in the cylinder, usually with little electrode wear. This may be caused by oil during break-in of new or newly overhauled engines. Deposit fouling of the spark plug occurs when the normal red-brown, yellow or white deposits of combustion by products become sufficient to cause misfiring. In some cases, these deposits may melt and form a shiny glaze on the insulator around the center electrode. If the fouling is found in only one or two cylinders, valve stem clearances or intake valve seals may be allowing excess lubricating oil to enter the cylinder, particularly if the deposits are heavier on the side of the spark plug facing the intake valve.
TS23995
Excessive gap means that the air space between the center and the side electrodes at the bottom of the spark plug is too wide for consistent firing. This may be due to improper gap adjustment or to excessive wear of the electrode during use. A spark plug gap that is too small may cause an unstable idle condition. Excessive gap wear can be an indication of continuous operation at high speeds or with engine loads, causing the spark to run too hot. Another possible cause is an excessively lean fuel mixture.
TS23992
Low or high spark plug installation torque or improper seating can result in the spark plug running too hot and can cause excessive center electrode wear. The plug and the cylinder head seats must be in good contact for proper heat transfer and spark plug cooling. Dirty or damaged threads in the head or on the spark plug can keep it from seating even though the proper torque is applied. Once spark plugs are properly seated, tighten them to the torque shown in the Specifications Table. Low torque may result in poor contact of the seats due to a loose spark plug. Overtightening may cause the spark plug shell to be stretched and will result in poor contact

between the seats. In extreme cases, exhaust blow-by and damage beyond simple gap wear may occur. Cracked or broken insulators may be the result of improper installation, damage during spark plug re-gapping, or heat shock to the insulator material. Upper insulators can be broken when a poorly fitting tool is used during installation or removal, when the spark plug is hit from the outside, or is dropped on a hard surface. Cracks in the upper insulator may be inside the shell and not visible. Also, the breakage may not cause problems until oil or moisture penetrates the crack later.
6E2577
A/C Clutch Circuit Purpose

The A/C compressor operation is controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) for the following reasons: D It improvises idle quality during compressor clutch engagement. D It improvises wide open throttle (WOT) performance. D It provides A/C compressor protection from operation with incorrect refrigerant pressures. The A/C electrical system consists of the following components: D The A/C control head. D The A/C refrigerant pressure switches. D The A/C compressor clutch. D The A/C compressor clutch relay. D The PCM.
A/C Request Signal

This signal tells the PCM when the A/C mode is selected at the A/C control head. The PCM uses this to adjust the idle speed before turning on the A/C clutch. The A/C compressor will be inoperative if this signal is not available to the PCM. Refer to A/C Clutch Circuit Diagnosis section for A/C wiring diagrams and diagnosis for A/C electrical system.
General Description (Evaporative (EVAP) Emission System)

TS23994

A/C Clutch Circuit Operation
A 12-volt signal is supplied to the A/C request input of the PCM when the A/C is selected through the A/C control switch. The A/C compressor clutch relay is controlled through the PCM. This allows the PCM to modify the idle air control position prior to the A/C clutch engagement for better idle quality. If the engine operating conditions are within their specified calibrated acceptable ranges, the PCM will enable the A/C compressor relay. This is done by providing a ground path for the A/C relay coil within the PCM. When the A/C compressor relay is enabled, battery voltage is supplied to the compressor clutch coil. The PCM will enable the A/C compressor clutch whenever the engine is running and the A/C has been requested. The PCM will not enable the A/C compressor clutch if any of the following conditions are met: D The throttle is greater than 90%. D The engine speed is greater than 6315 RPM. D The ECT is greater than 119C (246F). D The IAT is less than 5C (41F). D The throttle is more than 80% open.
EVAP Emission Control System Purpose

The basic evaporative emission (EVAP) control system used on all vehicles is the charcoal canister storage method. Gasoline vapors from the fuel tank flow into the canister through the inlet labeled TANK. These vapors are absorbed into the activated carbon (charcoal) storage device (canister) in order to hold the vapors when the vehicle is not operating. The canister is purged by PCM control when the engine coolant temperature is over 60C (140F), the IAT reading is over 10C (50F), and the engine has been running. Air is drawn into the canister through the air inlet grid. The air mixes with the vapor and the mixture is drawn into the intake manifold.
EVAP Emission Control System Operation

The EVAP canister purge is controlled by a solenoid valve that allows the manifold vacuum to purge the canister. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a ground to energize the solenoid valve (purge on). The EVAP purge solenoid control is pulse-width modulated (PWM) (turned on and off several times a second). The duty cycle (pulse width) is determined by engine operating conditions including load, throttle positron, coolant temperature and ambient temperature. The duty cycle is calculated by the PCM. The output is commanded when the appropriate conditions have been met. These conditions are: D The engine is fully warmed up. D The engine has been running for a specified time. D The IAT reading is above 10C (50F).
6E2578
A continuous purge condition with no purge commanded by the PCM will set a DTC P1441. Poor idle, stalling and poor driveability can be caused by: D A malfunctioning purge solenoid. D A damaged canister. D Hoses that are split, cracked, or not connected properly.
Enhanced Evaporative Emission Control System

The basic purpose of the Enhanced Evaporative Emissions control system is the same as other EVAP systems. A charcoal-filled canister captures and stores gasoline fumes. When the PCM determines that the time is right, it opens a purge valve which allows engine vacuum to draw the fumes into the intake manifold. The difference between this and other systems is that the PCM monitors the vacuum and/or pressure in the system to determine if there is any leakage. If the PCM determines that the EVAP system is leaking or not functioning properly, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in the PCM memory. The enhanced EVAP system is required to detect evaporative fuel system leaks as small as 0.020 in. (1.0 mm) between the fuel filler cap and purge solenoid. The system can test the evaporative system integrity by applying a vacuum signal (ported or manifold) to the fuel tank to create a small vacuum. The PCM then monitors the ability of the system to maintain the vacuum. If the vacuum remains for a specified period of time, there are no evaporative leaks and a PASS report is sent to the diagnostic executive. If there is a leak, the system either will not achieve a vacuum, or a vacuum cannot be maintained. Usually, a failure can only be detected after a cold start with a trip of sufficient length and driving conditions to run the needed tests. The enhanced EVAP system diagnostic will conduct up to eight specific sub-tests to detect fault conditions. If the diagnostic fails a sub-test, the PCM will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) to indicate the type of detected.
6E2579
060R200182
6E2580
Electrical Components The electrical components that make up the enhanced EVAP system are: D Fuel Tank (Vapor) Pressure Sensor. The fuel tank pressure sensor is a three-wire strain gauge sensor similar to a common MAP sensor. However, the fuel tank pressure sensor has very different electrical characteristics due to its pressure differential design. The sensor measures the difference between the air pressure (or vacuum) in the fuel tank and the outside air pressure. The sensor mounts at the top of the fuel pump assembly. A three-wire electrical harness connects it to the PCM. The PCM supplies a five-volt reference voltage and a ground to the sensor. The sensor will return a voltage between 0.1 and 4.9 volts. When the air pressure in the fuel tank is equal to the outside air pressure, such as when the fuel cap is removed, the output voltage of the sensor will be 1.3 to 1.7 volts. When the air pressure in the fuel tank is 4.5 in. H2O (1.25 kPa), the sensor output voltage will be 0.5 0.2 V. When there is neither vacuum nor pressure in the fuel tank, the sensor voltage will be 1.5 V. At 14 in. H2O (3.75 kPa), the sensor voltage will be 4.5 0.2 V. D EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid. Normally closed, the purge solenoid opens upon the PCMs signal to allow engine vacuum to purge gasoline fumes from the canister. Mounted on the water pipe to front of the engine assembly.
060R200081
D Fuel Level Sensor. The fuel level sensor is an important input to the PCM for the enhanced EVAP system diagnostic. The PCM needs fuel level information to know the volume of fuel in the tank. The fuel level affects the rate of change of air pressure in the EVAP system. Several of the enhanced EVAP system diagnostic sub-tests are dependent upon correct fuel level information. The diagnostic will not run when the tank is less than 15% or more than 85% full. Be sure to diagnose any Fuel Level Sensor DTCs first, as they can cause other DTCs to set.
060R200080
D EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid. Located next to the canister, the vent solenoid opens to allow air into the EVAP system. Fresh air is necessary to completely remove gasoline fumes from the canister during purge. The EVAP vent solenoid closes to seal off the evaporative emissions system for leak testing.
014RW114
D Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor. The PCM compares the signals from the fuel tank pressure sensor and the MAP sensor to ensure that a relative vacuum is maintained the EVAP system.
6E2581
055RW004
Non-Electrical Components D Purge/Vacuum Hoses. Made of rubber compounds, these hoses route the gasoline fumes from their sources to the canister and from the canister to the intake air flow. D EVAP Canister. Mounted on a bracket ahead of the fuel tank, the canister stores fuel vapors until the PCM determines that engine conditions are right for them to be removed and burned. D Fuel Tank. The tank has a built-in air space designed for the collection of gasoline fumes.
060R200081
D Vacuum Source. The vacuum source is split between two ports, one on either side of the throttle body. D Fuel Cap. The fuel cap is designed to be an integral part of the EVAP system.
System Fault Detection The EVAP leak detection strategy is based on applying vacuum to the EVAP system and monitoring vacuum decay. The PCM monitors vacuum level via the fuel tank pressure sensor. At an appropriate time, the EVAP purge solenoid and the EVAP vent solenoid are turned ON, allowing the engine vacuum to draw a small vacuum on the entire evaporative emission system. After the desired vacuum level has been achieved, the EVAP purge solenoid is turned OFF, sealing the system. A leak is detected by monitoring for a decrease in vacuum level over a given time period, all other variables remaining constant. A small leak in the system will cause DTC P0442 to be set. If the desired vacuum level cannot be achieved in the test described above, a large leak or a faulty EVAP purge solenoid is indicated. Leaks can be caused by the following conditions: D Disconnected or faulty fuel tank pressure sensor D Missing or faulty fuel cap D Disconnected, damaged, pinched, or blocked EVAP purge line D Disconnected or damaged EVAP vent hose D Disconnected, damaged, pinched, or blocked fuel tank vapor line D Disconnected or faulty EVAP purge solenoid D Disconnected or faulty EVAP vent solenoid D Open ignition feed circuit to the EVAP vent or purge solenoid D Damaged EVAP canister D Leaking fuel sender assembly O-ring D Leaking fuel tank or fuel filler neck A restricted or blocked EVAP vent path is detected by drawing vacuum into the EVAP system, turning OFF the EVAP vent solenoid and the EVAP purge solenoid (EVAP vent solenoid OPEN, EVAP purge Pulse Width Modulate (PWM) 0%) and monitoring the fuel tank vacuum sensor input. With the EVAP vent solenoid open, any vacuum in the system should decrease quickly unless the vent path is blocked. A blockage like this will set DTC P0446 and can be caused by the following conditions: D Faulty EVAP vent solenoid (stuck closed) D Plugged, kinked or pinched vent hose D Shorted EVAP vent solenoid driver circuit D Plugged EVAP canister The PCM supplies a ground to energize the purge solenoid (purge ON). The EVAP purge control is PWM, or turned ON and OFF, several times a second. The duty cycle (pulse width) is determined by engine operating conditions including load, throttle position, coolant temperature and ambient temperature. The duty cycle is calculated by the PCM and the output is commanded when the appropriate conditions have been met.
6E2582
The system checks for conditions that cause the EVAP system to purge continuously by commanding the EVAP vent solenoid ON and the EVAP purge solenoid OFF (EVAP vent solenoid CLOSED, EVAP purge PWM 0%). If fuel tank vacuum level increases during the test, a continuous purge flow condition is indicated, which will set a DTC P1441. This can be cause by the following conditions: D EVAP purge solenoid leaking D EVAP purge and engine vacuum lines switched at the EVAP purge solenoid D EVAP purge solenoid driver circuit grounded Onboard Vapor Recovery (ORVR) system
057RW002
Linear EGR Valve

The main element of the system is the linear EGR valve. The EGR valve feeds small amounts of exhaust gas back into the combustion chamber. The fuel/air mixture will be diluted and combustion temperatures reduced.
Linear EGR Control

The PCM monitors the EGR actual positron and adjusts the pintle position accordingly. The uses information from the following sensors to control the pintle position: D Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. D Throttle position (TP) sensor. D Mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
060R100095
Separator attaches after hose evaporative fuel. It protects EVAP Canister from liquid fuel. It guarantees EVAP Canister performance. When vibration bounces fuel level, liquid fuel will accrete to EVAP Canister. It separates liquid fuel.
Linear EGR Valve Operation and Results of Incorrect Operation

The linear EGR valve is designed to accurately supply EGR to the engine independent of intake manifold vacuum. The valve controls EGR flow from the exhaust to the intake manifold through an orifice with a PCM controlled pintle. During operation, the PCM controls pintle position by monitoring the pintle position feedback signal. The feedback signal can be monitored with a Tech 2 as Actual EGR Pos. Actual EGR Pos. should always be near the commanded EGR position (Desired EGR Pos.). If a problem with the EGR system will not allow the PCM to control the pintle position properly, DTC P1406 will set. The PCM also tests for EGR flow. If incorrect flow is detected, DTC P0401 will set. If DTCs P0401 and/or P1406 are set, refer to the DTC charts. The linear EGR valve is usually activated under the following conditions: D Warm engine operation. D Above-idle speed. Too much EGR flow at idle, cruise or cold operation may cause any of the following conditions to occur: D Engine stalls after a cold start. D Engine stalls at idle after deceleration.
General Description (Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System)

EGR Purpose
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system is use to reduce emission levels of oxides of nitrogen (NOx). NOx emission levels are caused by a high combustion temperature. The EGR system lowers the NOx emission levels by decreasing the combustion temperature.

D Vehicle surges during cruise. D Rough idle. D DTC P0300 (misfire detected). Too little or no EGR flow may allow combustion temperatures to get too high. This could cause: D Spark knock (detonation). D Engine overheating. D Emission test failure. D DTC P0401 (EGR flow test). D Poor fuel economy.
6E2583
addition, the PCV valve can seal the common chamber off in case of sudden high pressure in the crankcase.
028RV002
While the engine is running, exhaust fuses and small amounts of the fuel/air mixture escape past the piston rings and enter the crankcase. These gases are mixed with clean air entering through a tube from the air intake duct.
0017
EGR Pintle Position Sensor

The PCM monitors the EGR valve pintle position input to endure that the valve responds properly to commands from the PCM and to detect a fault if the pintle position sensor and control circuits are open or shorted. If the PCM detects a pintle position signal voltage outside the normal range of the pintle position sensor, or a signal voltage that is not within a tolerance considered acceptable for proper EGR system operation, the PCM will set DTC P1406.
General Description (Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System)

Crankcase Ventilation System Purpose
The crankcase ventilation system is use to consume crankcase vapors in the combustion process instead of venting them to the atmosphere. Fresh air from the throttle body is supplied to the crankcase and mixed with blow-by gases. This mixture is then passed through the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve into the common chamber.
Crankcase Ventilation System Operation

The primary control is through the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve. The PCV valve meters the flow at a rate that depends on the intake vacuum. The PCV valve restricts the flow when the inlet vacuum is highest. In
060R200063
During normal, part-throttle operation, the system is designed to allow crankcase gases to flow through the PCV valve into the throttle body to be consumed by normal combustion.
6E2584
A plugged valve or PCV hose may cause the following conditions: D Rough idle. D Stalling of slow idle speed. D Oil leaks. D Sludge in the engine. A leaking PCV hose would cause: D Rough idle. D Stalling. D High idle speed.
6E2585
Special Tools
J 39200 High Impedance Multimeter (Digital Voltmeter DVM)
J 37027-A IAC Motor Analyzer
(1) PCMCIA Card (2) RS232 Loop Back Connector (3) SAE 16/19 Adapter (4) DLC Cable (5) TECH2
J 23738-A Vacuum Pump with Gauge
J 34142-B Unpowered Test Light
BT-8515/8515V Exhaust Back Pressure Tester
Connector Test Adapter Kit J 35616-A/BT-8637
J 39194-B Heated Oxygen Sensor Wrench
J 26792/BT-7220-1 Spark Tester
J 35689-A Terminal Remover
J 34730-E Port Fuel Injection Diagnostic Kit
J 28742-A Weather Pack II Terminal Remover
6E2586

TOOL NO. TOOL NAME 1. J 41413 EVAP Pressure/Purge Diagnostic Station is a multipurpose tool which is used to perform several diagnostic procedures for enhanced emission testing. The station will accommodate a nitrogen gas filled cylinder which is used to pressurize the vehicle EVAP system for a leakdown test and leak location test when a vehicle is repaired for leakage in the enhanced evaporative emission control system. It also has two additional gauges (inches of mercury and inches of water) which are used to measure both source vacuum and EVAP canister purge vacuum to verify correct operation and vapor flow within the canister purge circuit. 2. J 41416 Ultrasonic Leak Detector is a microprocessor-based device used to detect leaks in the enhanced evaporative emission control system. The evaporative system is pressurized to 30 inches of water using the J 41413 EVAP Pressure/Purge Diagnostic System. Small leaks in the EVAP system will emit sound at a high frequency undetectable by a human ear but detectable with the J 41416. The technician traces along the evaporative system and can pinpoint leaks due to corroded lines, cracked hoses, or a damaged EVAP component. The detector includes a high quality set of headphones to block out surrounding shop noise and the LED sensitivity meter allows a visual reference for locating leaks in conjunction with the audio output heard through the headphones. Powered by (1) nine volt battery.
ILLUSTRATION
J 39021-90 Injector Switch Box
J 39021-65 Injector Test Light
J 41413! EVAP Pressure/Purge Diagnostic Station
J 41416@ Ultrasonic Leak Detector
SECTION
ENGINE EXHAUST (6VD1 3.2L)
RODEO
6F1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three Way Catalytic Converter RH and Forked Exhaust Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three Way Catalytic Converter RH and Forked Exhaust Pipe and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three Way Catalytic Converter LH and Forked Exhaust Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three Way Catalytic Converter LH and Forked Exhaust Pipe and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6F1 6F2 6F3 6F3 6F3 6F3 6F4 6F4 6F4 6F4 Forked Exhaust Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forked Exhaust Pipe and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Silencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Silencer and Associated Parts . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Exhaust pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Exhaust pipe and Associated Parts . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6F5 6F5 6F5 6F5 6F6 6F6 6F6 6F6 6F7 6F7 6F7 6F7 6F8
Service Precaution
6F2
General Description
150RW023
When inspecting or replacing exhaust system components, make sure there is adequate clearance from all points on the underbody to prevent overheating the floor pan and possible damage to the passenger compartment insulation and trim materials. Check complete exhaust system and nearby body areas and rear compartment lid for broken, damaged, missing or mispositioned parts, open seams, holes, loose connections or other deterioration which could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the rear compartment or passenger compartment. Dust or water in the rear compartment may be an indication of a problem in one of these areas. Any faulty areas should be corrected immediately.
Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic converter is an emission control device added to the exhaust system to reduce pollutants from the exhaust gas stream. CAUTION: The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Periodic maintenance of the exhaust system is not required. If the vehicle is raised for other service, it is advisable to check the condition of the complete exhaust system. A dual bed monolith catalytic converter is used in combination with three way catalytic converter. Catalytic Converter Types: Three way (Reduction/Oxidation) catalyst The catalyst coating on the three way (reduction) converter contains platinum and rhodium which lowers the levels of nitrous oxide (NOx) as well as hydrocarbons (HC) and carbon monoxide (Co).
Hangers
Various types of hangers are used to support exhaust system(s). These include conventional rubber straps, rubber rings, and rubber blocks. The installation of exhaust system supports is very important, as improperly installed supports can cause annoying vibrations which can be difficult to diagnose.
Gasket
The gasket must be replaced whenever a new exhaust pipe, muffler or catalytic converter is installed.
6F3
Three Way Catalytic Converter RH and Forked Exhaust Pipe

Three Way Catalytic Converter RH and Forked Exhaust Pipe and Associated Parts
150RY00003
Legend (1) Front Exhaust Pipe Assembly Fixing Nuts (2) O2 Sensor Terminal Connector (3) Three Way Catalytic Converter RH (4) Mounting Rubber (5) Forked Exhaust Pipe Fixing Bolts
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
O2 Sensor Terminal Connector Forked Exhaust Pipe Forked Exhaust Pipe Fixing Nuts Exhaust Silencer Fixing Nuts Forked Exhaust Pipe Fixing Bolts
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Lift up the vehicle and support with suitable safety stands. 3. Disconnect O2 sensor harness connectors (2) (6). 4. Remove the forked exhaust pipe fixing bolts and nuts (5) (8) (10) and the exhaust silencer fixing nuts (9), then remove the forked exhaust pipe (7) and the mass damper. 5. Remove the front exhaust pipe assembly fixing nuts (1) and the mounting rubber (4), then remove the three way catalytic converter (3).
Installation
1. Install the three way catalytic converter (3) and the mounting rubber (4), and tighten the fixing nuts (1) to the specified torque. Torque Nuts : 67 Nm (49 lb ft) 2. Install the forked exhaust pipe (7), and tighten the fixing bolts (5) & nuts (8) (9) to the specified torque. Torque Bolts&Nuts : 43 Nm (32 lb ft) Nuts : 43 Nm (32 lb ft) 3. Connect the O2 sensor connectors (2) (6).
6F4
Three Way Catalytic Converter LH and Forked Exhaust Pipe

Three Way Catalytic Converter LH and Forked Exhaust Pipe and Associated Parts
150RY00004
Legend (1) Forked Exhaust Pipe Fixing Bolts (2) Forked Exhaust Pipe (3) Forked Exhaust Pipe Fixing Nuts (4) Exhaust Silencer Fixing Nuts (5) Forked Exhaust Pipe Fixing Bolts
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Mounting Rubber O2 Sensor Terminal Connector Three Way Catalytic Converter LH O2 Sensor Terminal Connector Front Exhaust Pipe Assembly Fixing Nuts
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Lift up the vehicle and support with suitable safety stands. 3. Disconnect O2 sensor harness connectors (7) (9). 4. Remove the forked exhaust pipe fixing bolts and nuts (1) (3) (5) and the exhaust silencer fixing nuts (4), then remove the forked exhaust pipe (2). 5. Remove the front exhaust pipe assembly fixing nuts (10) and the mounting rubber (6), then remove the three way catalytic converter (8).
Installation
1. Install the three way catalytic converter (8) and the mounting rubber (6), and tighten the fixing nuts (10) to the specific torque. Torque Nuts: 67 Nm (49 lb ft) 2. Install the forked exhaust pipe (2) and tighten the fixing bolts (1) (5) and nuts (3) (4) to the specified torque. Torque Bolts&Nuts: 43 Nm (32 lb ft) Nuts: 43 Nm (32 lb ft) 3. Connect the O2 sensor connectors (7) (9).
6F5
Forked Exhaust Pipe

Forked Exhaust Pipe and Associated Parts
150RY00005
Legend (1) Forked Exhaust Pipe Fixing Bolts (2) Forked Exhaust Pipe
(3) Forked Exhaust Pipe Fixing Nuts (4) Exhaust Silencer Fixing Nuts (5) Forked Exhaust Pipe Fixing Bolts
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Lift up the vehicle and support with suitable safety stands. 3. Remove the forked exhaust pipe fixing bolts & nuts (1) (3) (5) and the exhaust silencer fixing nuts (4), then remove the forked exhaust pipe (2).
Installation
1. Install the forked exhaust pipe (2), and tighten the fixing bolts (1) (5) and the nuts (3) (4) to the specified torque. Torque Bolts&nuts : 43 Nm (32 lb ft) Nuts : 43 Nm (32 lb ft)
6F6
Exhaust Silencer
Exhaust Silencer and Associated Parts
150RY00006
Legend (1) Forked Exhaust Pipe (2) Support Rubber Fixing Nuts
(3) Exhaust Silencer (4) Exhaust Silencer Fixing Nuts (5) Rear Exhaust Pipe Fixing Nuts
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Lift up the vehicle and support with suitable safety stands. 3. Remove the support rubber fixing nuts (2), the exhaust silencer fixing nuts (4) and rear exhaust pipe fixing nuts (5), then remove the exhaust silencer (3).
Installation
1. Install the exhaust silencer (3) and tighten the fixing nuts (4) (5) to the specified torque. Torque Nuts: 43 Nm (32 lb ft) 2. Tighten the support rubber fixing nuts (2) to the specified torque. Torque Bolts: 15 Nm (11 lb ft)
6F7
Rear Exhaust pipe

Rear Exhaust pipe and Associated Parts Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Lift up the vehicle and support with suitable safety stands. 3. Remove the rear exhaust fixing nuts (2) and the mounting rubbers (1) (3), then remove the rear exhaust pipe (4).
Installation
1. Install the rear exhaust pipe (4) and the mounting rubbers (1) (3), then tighten the fixing nuts (2) to the specified torque. Torque Nuts: 43 Nm (32 lb ft)
150RW028
Legend (1) Mounting Rubber (2) Rear Exhaust Pipe Fixing Nuts (3) Mounting Rubber (4) Rear Exhaust Pipe
6F8

150RY00007
SECTION
ENGINE LUBRICATION (6VD1 3.2L)
RODEO
6G1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pump and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pan and Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6G1 6G2 6G3 6G3 6G4 6G4 6G5 6G7 6G7 6G7 Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pump Oil Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6G9 6G9 6G9 6G11 6G11 6G11 6G12 6G12 6G12 6G13
Service Precaution
6G2
General Description
C06RW003
Legend (1) Oil Strainer (2) Oil Pump (3) Relief Valve (4) Oil Pressure Switch (5) Oil Filter (6) Safety Valve (7) Oil Gallery (8) Crankshaft Bearing (9) Crankshaft
(10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18)
Connecting Rod Bearing Connecting Rod Piston Oil Gallery; Cylinder Head Camshaft Camshaft Journal Front Journal; Camshaft Drive Gear Rear Journal; Camshaft Drive Gear Oil Pan
6G3
Oil Pump
Oil Pump and Associated Parts
051RW005
Legend (1) Crankshaft Timing Pulley (2) Crankcase with Oil Pan (3) Oil Pipe (4) Oil Strainer (5) Oil Pump Assembly (6) Plug (7) Spring
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
Relief Valve Oil Pump Cover Driven Gear Drive Gear Oil Seal O-ring Oil Pump Body
6G4
Disassembly
1. Remove crankshaft timing pulley. 2. Remove crankcase with oil pan. 3. Remove oil pipe. 4. Remove oil strainer. 5. Remove oil pump assembly. 6. Remove plug. 7. Remove spring. 8. Remove relief valve. 9. Remove oil pump cover. 10. Remove driven gear. 11. Remove drive gear. 12. Remove oil seal. 13. Remove O-ring.
Body and Gears

The pump assembly must be replaced if one or more of the conditions below is discovered during inspection. D Badly worn or damaged driven gear (10). D Badly worn drive gear (11) driving face. D Badly scratched or scored body sliding face (14) or driven gear (10). D Badly worn or damaged gear teeth. Measure the clearance between the body and the driven gear with a feeler gauge. Standard : 0.10 mm0.18 mm (0.0039 in.0.0070 in) Limit : 0.20mm (0.0079 in)

CAUTION: Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage or any other abnormal conditions are found during inspection.
Relief Valve
D Check to see that the relief valve slides freely. D The oil pump must be replaced if the relief valve does not slide freely. D Replace the spring and/or the oil pump assembly (5) if the spring is damaged or badly worn.
051RS004
D Measure the clearance between the drive gear and driven gear with a feeler gauge. Standard : 0.11 mm0.24 mm (0.0043 in0.0094 in) Limit : 0.35mm (0.0138 in)
051RS002
051RS003

D Measure the side clearance with a precision straight edge and a feeler gauge. Clearance Standard : 0.03 mm0.09 mm (0.0011 in0.0035 in) Limit : 0.15mm (0.0059 in)
6G5
4. Install relief valve (8) and apply engine oil to the relief valve and spring (7). 5. Install spring (7). 6. Install the plug (6). Torque : 8 Nm (69 lb in)
051RS007 051RS005
Oil Strainer
Check the oil strainer for cracking and scoring. If cracking and scoring are found, the oil strainer must be replaced.
7. Install oil pump assembly (5). D Carefully remove any oil from the cylinder body and the pump. Apply sealant (TB1207B or equivalent) to the pump fitting face as shown in illustration. Take care that sealant is not applied to oil port surfaces. The oil pump assembly must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant. CAUTION: Do not apply an excessive amount of sealant to the contact surface. Applying too much sealant will overflow the contact surfaces. This could cause serious damage to the engine. D Attach oil pump assembly to cylinder body. D Tighten the oil pump fixing bolts. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lbft)
051RS006
Reassembly
1. Install drive gear (11). 2. Install driven gear (10). 3. Install oil pump cover (9) and first, loosely tighten all of the attaching screws. Next, tighten the attaching screws to the specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in) After installation, check that the gear rotates smoothly.
051RW002
6G6

9. Install oil strainer (4) with O-ring (13). Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 10. Install oil pipe (3) with O-ring (13). Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 11. Install crankcase with oil pan (2). D Remove oil on crankcase mounting surface and dry the surface. D Apply a proper 4.5 mm (0.7 in) wide bead of sealant (TB1207C or equivalent) to the crankcase mounting surface. The bead must be continuous. D The crankcase must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant. D Tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in)
051RW001
Legend (1) Around Bolt Holes (2) Around Dowel Pin 8. Install the new oil seal (12). Apply engine oil to the oil seal lip before installation then use J39202 oil seal Installer, install oil seal.
013RW010
12. Install crankshaft timing pulley.
015RS001
6G7
Oil Pan and Crankcase

Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Lift vehicle by supporting the frame. 3. Remove under cover. 4. Drain engine oil. 5. Remove front wheels. 6. Remove oil level dipstick from level gauge tube. 7. Remove radiator under fan shroud. 8. Remove shift on the fly from axle housing. 9. Remove suspension cross member fixing bolts, 2 pcs each per side and remove suspension cross member. 10. Remove axle housing assembly four fixing bolts from housing isolator side and mounting bolts from wheel side. At this time support the axle with a garage jack and remove axle housing assembly. (for 44) 11. Remove the steering unit assembly. 12. Remove starter fixing bolts. 13. Remove oil pan fixing bolts. 14. Remove oil pan, using J-37228 sealer cutter, remove oil pan.
013RS003
Installation
1. Install crankcase. A. Remove residual sealant, lubricant and moisture from mounting surface, then dry thoroughly. B. Properly apply a 4.5 mm (0.7 in) wide bead of sealant (TB-1207C or equivalent) to mounting surface of crankcase. Sealant bead must be continuous. D The crankcase must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant.
013RS003
15. Remove crankcase fixing bolts. 16. Remove crankcase, using J-37228 sealer cutter, remove crankcase. NOTE: Do not deform or damage the flange of oil pan and crankcase. Replace the oil pan and/or crankcase if deformed or damaged.
013RW010
6G8

4. Install axle housing assembly and tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. (for 44) Axle case bolts Torque : 82 Nm (61 lb ft) Mounting bolts Torque : 152 Nm (112 lb ft)
C. Install crankcase, tighten crankcase fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in)
013RW004
2. Install oil pan A. Remove residual sealant, lubricant and moisture from mounting surface, then dry thoroughly. B. Properly apply a 4.5 mm (0.7 in) wide bead of sealant (TB-1207C or equivalent) to mounting surface of oil pan. Sealant beat must be continuous. D The crankcase must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant.
013RW005
5. Install the shift on the fly. 6. Install relay lever assembly and tighten fixing bolts. Torque: 44 Nm (33 lb ft) 7. Install suspension cross member and tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 78 Nm (58 lb ft)
013RW003
013RW007
C. Install oil pan, tighten oil pan fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in) 3. Install starter and tighten fixing bolts. Torque: 40 Nm (30 lb ft)
8. Install radiator under fan shroud. 9. Install under cover. 10. Install engine oil level dipstick. 11. Fill engine oil until full level on engine oil gauge dipstick.
6G9
Oil Pump
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Drain engine oil. 3. Remove crankcase assembly. D Refer to removal procedure for Oil Pan and Crankcase in this manual. 4. Remove crankshaft pulley. D Refer to removal procedure for Crankshaft Pulley in this manual. 5. Remove timing belt. D Refer to removal procedure for Timing Belt in this manual. 6. Remove timing pulley from crankshaft. 7. Remove four fixing bolts from oil filter assembly. 8. Remove oil strainer fixing bolts, remove oil strainer assembly with O-ring. 9. Remove three bolts from oil pipe and O-ring. 10. Remove eight oil pump fixing bolts, then oil pump assembly. 11. Remove sealant from mounting surface of oil pump assembly, cylinder block and take care not to damage mounting surfaces of oil pump and cylinder block. D Use J-39202 installer when installing new oil seal. D Apply engine oil to oil seal lip. D Install oil pump assembly to the cylinder block. NOTE: Do not damage oil seal during installation of oil pump assembly.
015RS001
Installation
1. Install oil pump assembly D Apply sealant (TB-1207B or equivalent) to the oil pump mounting surfaces as shown in the illustration. D The oil pump assembly must be installed within 5 minutes after sealant application to prevent premature hardening of sealant. NOTE: Do not apply sealant to the oil ports.
D Tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
051RW001
2. Install oil pipe with O-ring, tighten fixing bolt to the specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in) 3. Install oil strainer with O-ring, tighten fixing bolt to the specified torque. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
051RW002
6G10 ENGINE LUBRICATION (6VD1 3.2L)

4. Install oil filter assembly and tighten bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
050RW001
Legend (1) Oil Pump (2) Oil Filter (3) Oil Gallery (4) From Oil Filter (5) To Oil Filter 5. Install timing pulley on crankshaft. Install timing belt. D Refer to installation procedure for Timing Belt in this manual. 6. Install crankshaft pulley. D Refer to install procedure for Crankshaft Pulley in this manual. 7. Install crankcase assembly. D Refer to installation procedure for Oil Pan and Crankcase in this manual. 8. Refill engine oil until full level on engine oil dipstick.
6G11
Oil Pump Oil Seal

Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Drain engine oil. 3. Remove crankshaft pulley. D Refer to removal procedure for Crankshaft Pulley in this manual. 4. Remove timing belt. D Refer to removal procedure for Timing Belt in this manual. 5. Remove timing pulley from crankshaft. 6. Remove oil pump oil seal using a sealer puller. NOTE: Take care not to damage sealing surfaces of oil pump and crankshaft when removing oil seal.
Installation
1. Install oil pump oil seal, apply engine oil to oil seal lip, then install oil seal using J-39202 installer.
015RS001
2. Install timing pulley to crankshaft. 3. Install timing belt. D Refer to installation procedure for Timing Belt in this manual. 4. Install crankshaft pulley. D Refer to installation procedure for CRANKSHAFT PULLEY in this manual. 5. Refill engine oil until full level.
6G12 ENGINE LUBRICATION (6VD1 3.2L)
Oil Filter
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Drain engine oil. 3. Remove oil filter using J-36390 filter wrench.
Installation
1. Clean filter fitting surface and apply small amount of engine oil to sealing surface. 2. Install oil filter cartridge by hand until it comes in contact with sealing surface then rotate additional 2/3 turn to tighten using J-36390 filter wrench.
050RW001
Legend (1) Oil Pump (2) Oil Filter (3) Oil Gallery (4) From Filter (5) To Filter 3. Fill engine oil until full level on dipstick. 4. Reconnect battery ground cable.
6G13

Item Oil capacity Specifications 6VD1 5.3 liters
Crankcase, Oil pan, Timing belt tensioner, Timing pulley, timing belt cover, Oil pump, Oil gallery, Oil strainer
E06R100004
SECTION
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM
RODEO
6H1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accelerator Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accelerator Pedal and Associated Parts . . 6H1 6H2 6H2 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6H2 6H2
Service Precaution
6H2
Accelerator Pedal
Accelerator Pedal and Associated Parts Installation
1. Install Accelerator pedal assembly (2). 2. Connect AP sensor (1) harness connector. 3. Connect battery ground cable.
101RY00006
Legend (1) Accelerator Position Sensor (2) Accelerator Pedal Assembly
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect Accelerator position (AP) sensor (1) connector from Accelerator pedal assembly. 3. Remove Accelerator pedal assembly (2).
SECTION
INDUCTION (6VD1 3.2L)
RODEO
6J1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Cleaner Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6J1 6J2 6J2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6J2 6J2
Service Precaution
6J2
Air Cleaner Element

Removal
1. Remove positive ventilation hose connector(1). 2. Remove intake air temperature sensor(2). 3. Remove air flow sensor(3). 4. Remove air cleaner duct assembly(4). 5. Remove air cleaner element(5).
Installation
1. Install air cleaner element(5). 2. Attach the mass air cleaner duct cover to the body completely, then clamp it with the clip(4). 3. Install air flow sensor(3). 4. Install air temprature sensor(2). 5. Install positive crankcase ventilation hose connector(1).
130RW003
Inspection
Check the air cleaner filter for damage or dust clogging. Replace if it is damaged, or clean if it is clogged.
130RW003
Cleaning Method
Tap the air cleaner filter gently so as not to damage the paper filter, or clean the element by blowing with compressed air of about 490 kPa (71 psi) from the clean side if it is extremely dirty.
130RW002
SECTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (4L30E)
RODEO
7A1
TRANSMISSION
CONTENTS
Automatic Transmission (4L30E) . . . . . . . . . Transmission Control System (4L30E) (V6 3.2L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Control System (4L30E) (HEC 2.2L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A 7A1 7A2 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B 7C

CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Range Reference Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal Operation of 2001 4L30E Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driver Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Diagnosis Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Inspection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Transmission Fluid Level and Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical / Hydraulic Diagnosis Check Trans Indicator Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical / Hydraulic Diagnosis Symptoms Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stall Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift Speed Chart (V6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lockup Speed Chart (V6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift Speed Chart (HEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lockup Speed Chart (HEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift Lock Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission and Associated Parts . . . . . . 7A2 7A3 7A4 7A5 7A5 7A5 7A8 7A9 7A10 7A11 7A12 7A13 7A22 7A23 7A25 7A26 7A27 7A28 7A29 7A29 7A29 7A29 7A31 7A31 7A31 7A34 7A36 7A36 7A36 7A37 7A37 7A38 7A39 7A39 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solenoid (Main Case Valve Body) . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solenoid (Adapter Case Valve Body) . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve Body Assembly (Main Case) . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve Body Assembly (Adapter Case) . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (V6) . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (HEC) . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Sensor (Extension Assembly) . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor (Main Case) (V6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor (Adapter Case) (HEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Oil Seal (Converter Housing) . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Oil Seal (Extension Assembly) . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A41 7A48 7A55 7A55 7A55 7A56 7A56 7A56 7A57 7A57 7A57 7A58 7A58 7A58 7A59 7A59 7A59 7A60 7A60 7A60 7A61 7A61 7A61 7A62 7A62 7A62 7A63 7A63 7A63 7A64 7A64 7A64 7A65 7A65 7A65
7A2

7A66 7A66 7A71 7A82 7A82 7A82 7A82 7A82 7A83 7A83 7A83 7A83 7A83 7A84 7A84 7A85 7A85 7A85 7A86 7A86 7A86 7A86 7A86 7A87 7A87 7A87 7A88 7A88 7A88 7A88 7A89 7A89 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sprag Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Accumulator Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse Clutch Piston and Center Support . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overrun Clutch and Turbine Shaft . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4L30E Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A89 7A90 7A90 7A90 7A90 7A90 7A91 7A91 7A91 7A92 7A92 7A93 7A93 7A93 7A94 7A94 7A95 7A95 7A96 7A96 7A96 7A97 7A97 7A98 7A98 7A98 7A100 7A100 7A101 7A106 7A109
Transmission (4L30E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converter Housing and Oil Pump Assembly Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Case Valve Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adapter Case Valve Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Third Clutch and Sprag Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Third Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Precaution
7A3
Construction
A07R100002
Legend (1) Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) (2) Overdrive Free Wheel (One Way Clutch) (OFW) (3) Fourth Clutch (C4) (4) Overrun Clutch (OC) (5) Overdrive Unit
Reverse Clutch (RC) Second Clutch (C2) Third Clutch (C3) Principle Sprag Assembly (One Way Clutch) (PFW) (10) Ravigneaux Planetary Gear Set (11) Brake Band (B)
(6) (7) (8) (9)
7A4
Range Reference Chart
C07RT010
7A5
Normal Operation of 2001 4L30E Transmission

Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Application Conditions:
The TCC is normally applied in 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears only when all of the following conditions exist: The engine coolant temperature is above 70C (158F). The brake pedal is released. The shift pattern requests TCC apply. Moreover, TCC is always applied in 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears when the transmission oil temperature is above 135C (275F). This mode should be canceled at 125C (257F).
Diagnosis
Introduction
The systematic troubleshooting information covered by this Section offers a practical and systematic approach to diagnosing 4L30E transmission, using information that can be obtained from road tests, electrical diagnosis, oil pressure checks or noise evaluation. The key to correcting a complaint is to make use of all of the available symptoms and logically letting them direct you to the cause. When dealing with automatic transmission complaints, it is best to gather as many symptoms as possible before making the decision to remove the transmission from the vehicle. Frequently, the correction of the complaint does not require removal of the transmission from the vehicle.
ATF Warning Lamp (V6)

The ATF warning lamp will be constantly on (not flashing) if the transmission oil temperature is above 145C (293F). The ATF warning lamp goes off again when the transmission oil temperature is below 125C (257F).
Driver Information
To analyze the problem fill out a complete description of the owners complaint. Please draw a circle around the right information and complete the following form. (The next page is an example of a completed form.)You can draw a circle around many numbers if you are not sure.
Reverse Lock Out (V6)

With the selector lever in reverse position, the PCM will not close the PWM solenoid until the vehicle is below 15 km/h (9.3 mph), thus preventing reverse engagement above this speed.
7A6
F07RT036
Example of form completed.
7A7
F07RT037
7A8
General Diagnosis Procedure
F07RT038
7A9
Preliminary Inspection Chart
F07R100002
7A10 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (4L30E)
Checking Transmission Fluid Level and Condition

Checking fluid level and condition (color and odor) at regular intervals will provide early diagnosis information about the transmission. This information may be used to correct a condition that, if not detected early, could result in major transmission repairs. IMPORTANT: When new, automatic transmission fluid is red in color. As the vehicle is driven, the transmission fluid will begin to look darker in color. The color may eventually appear light brown. A dark brown color with burnt odor may indicate excessive fluid deterioration and signal a need for fluid change.
Fluid Level
When adding or changing fluid, use only DEXRON III. Refer to Maintenance and Lubrication in General Information section for maintenance information and servicing interval. CAUTION: DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling will cause foaming, loss of fluid, abnormal shifting and possible damage to the transmission. 1. Park the vehicle on level ground and apply the parking brake firmly. 2. Check fluid level with engine running at idle. NOTE: Be sure that transmission fluid temperature is below 30C (86F). 3. Move the selector lever through all gear ranges. 4. Move the selector lever to Park. 5. Let engine idle for 3 minutes and open the overfill screw (1). 6. Add released transmission fluid until it flows out over the overfill screw opening. 7. Let engine idle until a fluid temperature between 32C (90F) and 57C (135F) is reached, then close the overfill screw (1). Torque: 38 Nm (28 lb ft) NOTE: To prevent fluid leaks, the overfill screw and oil drain screws gasket must be replaced each time these screws are removed. NOTE: Check transmission fluid temperature with scan tool. Minimum fluid level 57C (135F) Maximum fluid level 32C (90F)
242RW003
CAUTION: Do not open overfill screw with engine stopped. CAUTION: DO NOT CHECK FLUID LEVEL UNDER THESE CONDITIONS: D Immediately after driving at sustained highway speeds. D In heavy city traffic during hot weather. D If vehicle is towing a trailer. If the vehicle has been operated under these conditions, shut the engine off and allow the vehicle to cool for thirty (30) minutes. After the cool down period, restart the vehicle and continue from step 2 above.
7A11
Fluid Condition
FLUID CONDITION NORMAL* COLOR DRAIN REQUIRED? CONTAMINATION RED OR LIGHT BROWN NO NONE BROWN YES Very small amount of foreign material in bottom of pan Remove both pans Change filter Flush cooler Add new fluid Check level CONTAMINATED NONTRANSPAREN T / PINK YES Contamination by coolant or other source BROWN YES Large pieces of metal or other foreign material in bottom of pan Transmission overhaul required Flush cooler and cooler lines Add new fluid Check level
CORRECT LEVEL AND CONDITION
1. LOW LEVEL: A. Add fluid to obtain proper level & check for external leaks. B. Correct cause of leak. 2. HIGH LEVEL: Remove excess fluid
Repair/replace radiator cooler Transmission overhaul required Check for: D Damaged plates and seals D Contaminated solenoids Flush cooler Add new fluid Check level
*Fluid should be changed according to maintenance schedule.
Test Driving
Some 4L30E automatic transmission complaints will require a test drive as a part of the diagnostic procedure. Some codes will not set unless the vehicle is moving. The purpose of the test drive is to duplicate the customers complaint condition and set a current Powertrain Control Module (PCM) trouble code. Perform this procedure before each 4L30E automatic transmission repair, and again after repairs are made. IMPORTANT: D Duplicate the condition under which the customers complaint was observed. D Depending on the complaint, the line pressure gauge and the scan tool may be required during the test drive. D During the test drive, it is important to record all necessary data from the areas being monitored, for use in diagnosis. Also listen for and note any unusual noises. The following procedure should be used to test drive 4L30E automatic transmission complaint vehicles: 1. Turn the ignition ON without starting the engine. Check that the CHECK TRANS lamp comes on for approximately 2 seconds and then goes out and remains out. D If the lamp is flashing, GOTO Check Trans Indicator in Transmission Control System (4L30E) section. D If no serial data is present, GOTO OBD System Check. Refer to Driveability and Emissions in Engine section.
D If the lamp stays ON or stays OFF, GOTO Check Trans Check in Transmission Control System (4L30E) section. 2. Drive the vehicle. During the test drive, be sure that the transmission achieves normal operating temperature (approx. 20 minutes). Allow the transmission to go through all of its gear ranges, checking shift timing and firmness. Duplicate the owner s complaint condition as closely as possible during the test drive. 3. If, during the test drive, the CHECK TRANS lamp comes on, use the scan tool to check for trouble codes. 4. If, during the test drive, a problem is felt, but the CHECK TRANS lamp does not come on and no trouble codes are present, drive the vehicle with the PCM disconnected (manually shifting the vehicle). D In Manual L, the vehicle operates in first gear. D In Manual 2, the vehicle operates in third gear. D In Manual 3 or D, the vehicle operates in fourth gear. If the problem still exists with the PCM disconnected, refer to Mechanical/Hydraulic Diagnosis in this section. 5. If no problem has been found at this point, check all underhood connections that supply power to the PCM and ignition fuses. Physically and visually inspect all the PCM harness connectors for loose or corroded terminals. Inspect the PCM ground points.
Mechanical / Hydraulic Diagnosis Check Trans Indicator Chart

Perform Preliminary Inspection First!
When the CHECK TRANS indicator is flashing, it indicates that a problem related to the transmission, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the vehicle harness has occurred. The system is now operating in a BACKUP MODE where the risk of further damaging the transmission has been reduced. The vehicle may be shifted manually. If the initial problem is intermittent or seldom, switching the engine OFF/ON might allow normal operation again until the problem reoccurs.
F07RT013
7A13
Mechanical / Hydraulic Diagnosis Symptoms Index

Perform Preliminary Inspection First! CHART 1 2 3 4 5a 5b 6 7 8 9a 9b 9c 10 11 12 13 14 15a 15b 16 SYMPTOMS NO ENGINE START IN NEUTRAL OR PARK NO FORWARD GEARS IN ANY RANGE/NO REVERSE NO ENGINE BRAKE IN ANY RANGE POOR SHIFTING IN ALL GEARS (ALL HARSH OR ALL SOFT) DELAYS IN DRIVE AND REVERSE DELAYS IN REVERSE ONLY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) P0730 HARSH 12 SHIFT HARSH 34 SHIFT 32 DOWNSHIFT COMPLAINT HARSH SHIFT WHEN SHIFTING INTO D OR ACCELERATING FROM STOP COASTDOWN HARSH SHIFT OR CLUNK AT 32 DOWNSHIFT INTERMITTENT 4TH TO 2ND GEAR DOWNSHIFT AT STEADY SPEED ENGINE FLARE AT SHIFTING DURING TURNING ONLY (USUALLY WITH WARM ENGINE) ENGINE FLARE DURING 12 OR 23 SHIFT SHUDDER ONLY DURING TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) APPLYING POSSIBLE CAUSES OF TRANSMISSION NOISE POSSIBLE CAUSES OF LOW LINE PRESSURE POSSIBLE CAUSES OF HIGH LINE PRESSURE POSSIBLE CAUSES OF TRANSMISSION FLUID LEAKS
NOTE: Numbers with parenthesis on the following charts refer to Parts List at end of this section.
Chart 1: No Engine Start In Neutral Or Park

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Does engine start when shift lever moved from drive to neutral mostly in hot condition? Does engine start in park at any condition? Does engine also not start in neutral when shift lever moved from park to neutral? Check mode switch (63) setting. Readjust if necessary. Problems fixed? Check start circuit of mode switch (63) open in neutral. Was open found? Retest vehicle Locate and repair open(s). Go to Step 5 Replace mode switch (63). Yes Go to Step 2 Retest vehicle Go to Step 4 No Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Chart 2: No Forward Gears In Any Range/No Reverse

Step 1 Action Check line pressure. Refer to Line Pressure Test in this section. Was line pressure normal? Go to Step 2 2 1. Check internal linkage: Manual linkage (58) not moving manual valve (326). 2. Check for internal mechanical damage: Turbine shaft (506) broken loose. Overrun roller clutch (516) broken loose. Was the problem found? Repair or replace Yes No Use Chart 15a: Possible Causes of Low Line Pressure in this section.
Chart 3: No Engine Brake In Any Range

Step 1 Action Check line pressure. Refer to Line Pressure Test in this section. Was line pressure normal? Go to Step 2 2 1. Check for overrun clutch leaks caused by: Damaged piston lip (513) Check ball defective (504) 2. Check for overrun lockout valve (705) stuck by foreign material. 3. Check for leaks at turbine shaft (506) caused by: Teflon seal rings damaged (508) Excessive wear of turbine shaft bearing surfaces. Was the problem found? Repair or replace Yes No Use Chart 15a: Possible Causes of Low Line Pressure in this section.
7A15
Chart 4: Poor Shifting In All Gears (All Harsh Or All Soft)

Step 1 2 Action Check line pressure. Refer to Line Pressure Test in this section. Was line pressure normal? 1. Check for these conditions which could affect clutch apply time: Defective band apply solenoid (323). Defective servo or/and accumulator piston. Excessive clutch piston travel. 2. Check of possible causes of internal leaks: Cut or damaged sealing ring(s) Damaged sealing gasket(s) Check ball missing or out of location in 2nd and 3rd clutch pistons. 3. Check for causes of burned clutch plates or band. Was the problem found? 3 Was the line pressure high? Repair or replace Use Chart 15a: Possible Causes of Low Line Pressure in this section. Use Chart 15b: Possible Causes of High Line Pressure in this section. Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 Yes No
Go to Step 4 4 Does DTCs P0560 (HEC Model) and P0705 set? Diagnose those DTC(s) first.
Chart 5a: Delays In Drive and Reverse

NOTE: A short delay (less than 3 seconds) when first engaging drive or reverse after allowing vehicle to sit overnight is normal. Step 1 Was line pressure normal? Action Check line pressure. Refer to Line Pressure Test in this section. Yes More than 3 second delay in drive and reverse with engine off 1 hour or less. Teflon seals (508) on turbine shaft damaged. Repair No
Use Chart 15a: Possible Causes of Low Line Pressure in this section.
Chart 5b: Delays In Reverse Only

Step 1 Action Check line pressure. Refer to Line Pressure Test in this section. Was line pressure normal? Go to Step 2 2 Main case valve body gasket (88) damaged. Reverse check ball (85) in valve body (84) missing or out of location. Check for restrictions at valve body transfer plate orifice. Was the problem found? Repair Yes No Use Chart 15a: Possible Causes of Low Line Pressure in this section.
Chart 6: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0730

Step 1 Action Check line pressure. Refer to Line Pressure Test in this section. Was line pressure normal? Go to Step 2 2 1. 1st and 2nd gear missing or 3rd and 4th gear missing. Check appropriate shift valve. If OK replace solenoid. 2. No engine brake in any range (All ranges in Drive and Reverse are OK) Check for suspected conditions modifying delays to clutch apply: Overrun clutch seal damaged. Excessive overrun clutch piston travel. Defective 34 accumulator piston. Causes of internal leaks. Causes of burned clutch plates. 3. 1st and 4th gear missing or 2nd and 3rd gear missing. Shift solenoid A stuck. Replace shift solenoid A. 4. DTC P0730 is set in D range 1st gear above 3500 rpm. Go to Step 3. 5. DTC P0730 is set in D range 3rd gear between 55-80 mph. NOTE: Perform this test within safe and legal limits. Check for suspected conditions modifying delays to clutch apply: 3 4th clutch seal damaged. Excessive 4th clutch piston travel. Defective 34 accumulator piston. Causes of internal leaks. Causes of burned clutch plates. Repair or replace Shift solenoid A stuck. Replace shift solenoid A. Yes No Use Chart 15b: Possible Causes of High Line Pressure in this section.
Was the problem found? Check 3rd gear in D in winter mode. Does vehicle move? 4 Check for suspected conditions modifying delays to clutch apply: 2nd clutch seal damaged. Excessive 2nd clutch piston travel. Defective accumulator piston. Causes of internal leaks. Check ball missing or out of location in 2nd clutch. Seals cut, damaged or missing. Gaskets defective. Causes of burned clutch plates. Was the problem found?
Go to Step 4
Repair or replace
7A17
Chart 7: Harsh 12 Shift

Step 1 Action Check line pressure. Refer to Line Pressure Test in this section. Was line pressure normal? Yes Check for 12 accumulator valve (320) stuck by foreign material in main case valve body. No Use Chart 15b: Possible Causes of High Line Pressure in this section.
Chart 8: Harsh 34 Shift

Step 1 Action Check line pressure. Refer to Line Pressure Test in this section. Was line pressure normal? Go to Step 2 2 1. Check for 34 accumulator valve (407) stuck in adapter case valve body (401). 2. Check for 34 accumulator piston (18) stuck in adapter case (20). Was the problem found? Repair or replace Yes No Use Chart 15b: Possible Causes of High Line Pressure in this section.
Chart 9a: 32 Downshift Complaint

Step 1 Action Check line pressure. Refer to Line Pressure Test in this section. Was line pressure normal? Go to Step 2 2 Does DTC P1850 set? Diagnose P1850 first. Yes No Use Chart 15a: Possible Causes of Low Line Pressure in this section. Replace band apply solenoid (PWM) (323).
Chart 9b: Harsh Shift When Shifting Into D Or Accelerating From Stop
Step 1 Action Check line pressure. Refer to Line Pressure Test in this section. Was line pressure normal? Go to Step 2 2 Does DTC P1850 set? Diagnose P1850 first. Yes No Use Chart 15b: Possible Causes of High Line Pressure in this section. Replace band apply solenoid (PWM) (323).
Chart 9c: Coastdown Harsh Shift Or Clunk At 32 Downshift

Step 1 Action Check line pressure. Refer to Line Pressure Test in this section. Was line pressure normal? Go to Step 2 2 Does DTC P1850 set? Diagnose P1850 first. Yes No Use Chart 15b: Possible Causes of High Line Pressure in this section. Replace band apply solenoid (PWM) (323).
Chart 10: Intermittent 4TH TO 2ND Gear Downshift At Steady Speed

Step 1 Action Check for consistent speed sensor reading with scan tool. Was the reading correct? 2 1. Check for wiring harness damage or short to ground. If OK, go to (2). 2. Check transmission speed sensor connections. If OK, go to (3). 3. Replace transmission speed sensor. Was the replacement complete? Yes Replace mode switch for intermittent contact. No
Go to Step 2
Replace speed sensor.
Chart 11: Engine Flare At Shifting During Turning Only (Usually With Warm Engine)
Step 1 Action Check for oil leaks at transmission. Was the problem found? Yes Replace transmission oil filter and gasket. No
Chart 12: Engine Flare During 12 Or 23 Shift

Step 1 Action Check line pressure. Refer to Line Pressure Test in this section. Was line pressure normal? Go to Step 2 2 1. Check for a stuck 12 accumulator valve (320). 2. Check for servo piston (106) leaks. 3. Check for a stuck band apply solenoid (323). Was line pressure normal? Repair or replace Yes No Use Chart 15a: Possible Causes of Low Line Pressure in this section.
7A19
Chart 13: Shudder Only During Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Applying
Step 1 Action 1. TCC shudder is one of the most commonly misdiagnosed conditions in an automatic transmission. The key to diagnosing TCC shudder is to note when it happens and under what conditions. Once the TCC has been fully applied, it is nearly impossible to make it shudder. TCC shudder (short burst of noise normally less than 1 second) will only occur during clutch applying. It is not a steady state condition. 2. Drive until whole drivetrain is at normal operating temperature. On 4WD vehicles, the test must be performed with transfer case selector lever in 2H position. Shudder is a short burst of noise normally less than 1 second in duration, and can be induced by the following maneuver: 3. From coast condition at 50 mph in D range (Normal mode), depress the throttle to 1/4-1/3 throttle. If present, shudder will occur within 5 seconds together with TCC application. (The scan tool may be used to determine the exact time of TCC application.) Was the problem found? Yes No
Replace transmission fluid and filter (remove both pans) and flush cooler lines. Replace converter assembly and O-ring on turbine shaft
Perform mechanical inspection of other drivetrain components.
Chart 14: Possible Causes of Transmission Noise

CAUTION: Before checking transmission for what is believed to be transmission noise, ensure presence and positioning of insulating plugs, pads etc. Also make sure that noise does not come from other drivetrain components. Condition Whine or Buzz Possible cause Oil level low Plugged or restricted oil filter Damaged oil filter gasket Knocking noise transmission transmission. from front of Loose bolts (Converter to flex plate) Cracked or broken flex plate Converter damaged Knocking noise while driving, mostly on acceleration. Transmission mount loose or broken Cooler line mounts loose or broken Cooler lines touching body or frame Knocking noise when vehicle is stationary stationary. Loose flex plate mounting bolts Cracked or broken flex plate Damaged converter Correction Fill with ATF, check for external leaks. Inspect oil filter. Replace oil filter or ATF as necessary. Replace oil filter gasket. Tighten to specifications. Replace flex plate. Replace converter. Tighten mount bolts or replace transmission mount. Tighten or replace cooler line mounts. Repair or replace as necessary. Tighten to specifications. Replace flex plate. Replace converter.
Chart 15a: Possible Causes of Low Line Pressure

Step 1 2 3 Check oil level. Was the problem found? Check for defective throttle position sensor. Was the problem found? Check for plugged, loose, or damaged oil filter (79). Was the problem found? 4 Check for a stuck force motor plunger (404). (Adapter case valve body) Was the problem found? 5 6 7 Check for a stuck feed limit valve (412). (Adapter case valve body) Was the problem found? Check for loose converter bolts (4 & 5). Was the problem found? Check for a stuck pressure regulator valve (208). (Oil pump) Was the problem found? 8 9 Check for a stuck boost valve (205). (Oil pump) Was the problem found? Check for blocked intermediate oil passages to pressure regulator valve. (Oil pump) Was the problem found? 10 11 Check for defective oil pump (9, 201, 202 & 209). Was the problem found? Check for internal leaks. Check balls missing or out of location in valve bodies Seals cut or damaged Gaskets defective, etc. Was the problem found? Fill with ATF. Replace throttle position sensor. Inspect oil filter, tighten bolts or replace oil filter (79). Replace force motor plunger (404). Replace feed limit valve (412). Tighten converter bolts (4 & 5). Replace pressure regulator valve (208). Replace boost valve (205). Replace oil pump. Replace oil pump. Install balls, or correct ball location. Replace seals. Replace gaskets. Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 Action Yes No
Go to Step 4
7A21
Chart 15b: Possible Causes of High Line Pressure

NOTE: If transmission is operating in backup mode, high line pressure will be present. Step 1 2 Was the problem found? Check for a stuck force motor plunger (404). (Open circuit/intermittent) (Adapter case valve body) Was the problem found? 3 4 5 Check for a stuck feed limit valve (412). (Adapter case valve body) Was the problem found? Check converter bolts (4 & 5). Was the problem found? Check for a stuck pressure regulator valve (208). (Oil pump) Was the problem found? 6 7 Check for a stuck boost valve (205). (Oil pump) Was the problem found? Check for internal leaks. Check balls missing or out of location in valve bodies Seals cut or missing Gaskets defective, etc. Was the problem found? Action Check for defective throttle position sensor. Yes Replace throttle position sensor. Replace force motor plunger (404). Replace feed limit valve (412). Tighten converter bolts (4 & 5). Replace pressure regulator valve (208). Replace boost valve (205). Install balls, or correct ball location. Replace seals. Replace gaskets. No Go to Step 2
Chart 16: Possible Causes of Transmission Fluid Leaks

Before attempting to correct an oil leak, the actual source of the leak must be determined. In many cases, the source of the leak may be difficult to determine due to wind flow around the engine and transmission. The suspected area should be wiped clean before inspecting for the source of the leak. Oil leaks around the engine and transmission are generally carried toward the rear of the vehicle by the air stream. In determining the source of an oil leak, the following two checks should be made: 1. With the engine running, check for external line pressure leaks. 2. With the engine off, check for oil leaks due to the raised oil level caused by drainback of converter oil into the transmission.
Possible Causes of Fluid Leaks Due To Sealing Malfunction
240RX008
Legend (1) Electrical Connector (Main Case) Seal (2) Transmission Vent (Breather) (3) Speed Sensor Oring (4) Extension (Adapter) Lip Seal (5) Extension (Adapter) to Main Case Gasket (6) Overfill and Oil Drain Screws Gasket (7) Oil Pan Gasket (Main Case) (8) Selector Shaft Seal
(9) Oil Cooler Connectors (2) (10) Oil Pan Gasket (Adapter Case) (11) Converter housing attaching bolts not correctly torqued (12) Converter Housing Lip Seal (13) Line Pressure Tap Plug (14) Electrical Connector (Adapter Case) Seal (15) Adapter Case Seal Rings (2)
Stall Test
The stall test allows you to check the transmission for internal abrasion and the one way clutch for slippage. Torque converter performance can also be evaluated. The stall test results together with the road test results will identify transmission components requiring servicing or adjustment.
5. Hold the brake pedal down as far as it will go. 6. Place the selector in the D range. 7. Gradually push the accelerator pedal to the floor. The throttle valve will be fully open. Note the engine speed at which the tachometer needle stabilizes. Stall Speed : : 2,100 150rpm (V6) 2,200 150rpm (HEC)
Stall Test Procedure:

1. Check the level of the engine coolant, the engine oil, and the automatic transmission fluid. Replenish if necessary. 2. Block the wheels and set the parking brake. 3. Connect a tachometer to the engine. 4. Start the engine and allow it to idle until the engine coolant temperature reaches 70 80C (158 176F).
NOTE: Do not continuously run this test longer than 5 seconds. 8. Release the accelerator pedal. 9. Place the selector in the N range. 10. Run the engine at 1,200 rpm for one minute. This will cool the transmission fluid.

11. Repeat Steps 7 10 for the 3, 2, L and R ranges.
7A23
14. Tighten the pressure detection plug to the specified torque. Torque: 914Nm (710lb ft)
Line Pressure Test

The line pressure test checks oil pump and control valve pressure regulator valve function. It will also detect oil leakage.
Line Pressure Test Procedure:

1. Check the level of the engine coolant, the engine oil, and the automatic transmission fluid. Replenish if required. 2. Block the wheels and set the parking brake. 3. Remove the pressure detection plug at the left side of the transmission case. Set J29770A pressure gauge and adapter to the pressure detection plug hole.
241RS001
4. Start the engine and allow it to idle until the engine coolant temperature reaches 7080C (158176F). 5. Hold the brake pedal down as far as it will go. 6. Place the selector in the D range. 7. Note the pressure gauge reading with the engine idling. 8. Gradually push the accelerator pedal to the floor. The throttle valve will be fully open. Note the pressure gauge reading with the accelerator pedal fully depressed. NOTE: Do not continuously run this test longer than 5 seconds. 9. Release the accelerator pedal. 10. Place the selector in the N range. 11. Run the engine at 1,200 rpm for one minute. This will cool the transmission fluid. 12. Repeat Steps 711 for the 3, 2, L, and R ranges. 13. Install a pressure detection plug to the transmission case, applying recommended thread locking agent (LOCTITE 242) or its equivalent to thread of plug. Make sure that thread is cleaned before applying locking agents.

(V6) MODE NORMAL/POWER WINTER NORMAL/POWER WINTER NORMAL/POWER WINTER NORMAL/POWER WINTER (HEC) MODE NORMAL/POWER WINTER NORMAL/POWER WINTER NORMAL/POWER WINTER NORMAL/POWER WINTER LEVER POSITION D,3,2,L D REVERSE D, 3, 2, L D REVERSE ENGINE SPEED IDLE IDLE IDLE STALL SPEED STALL SPEED STALL SPEED LINE PRESSURE kPa 317373 317373 400476 1,0541,172 1,0541,172 1,2061,344 PSI 4654 4654 5869 153170 153170 175195 FORCE MOTOR CURRENT (mA) VARIABLE 9001,000 9001,000 100200 100200 100200 LEVER POSITION D,3,2,L D REVERSE D, 3, 2, L D REVERSE ENGINE SPEED IDLE IDLE IDLE STALL SPEED STALL SPEED STALL SPEED LINE PRESSURE kPa 590730 300390 460630 1,2501,380 1,2501,380 1,4001,580 PSI 86106 4457 6791 181200 181200 203229 FORCE MOTOR CURRENT (mA) 680720 1,0201,060 880920 70110 70110 340380
7A25
Shift Speed Chart (V6)

Transfer gear ratio Rear axle ratio High: 1.000 4.100
Normal mode
Upshift Range D (Drive) Throttle opening Fully opened Half throttle 12 23 (First Gear) (Second Gear) (Second Gear) (Third Gear) km/h (mph) km/h (mph) 54 60 (34 37) 34 40 (21 25) 111 117 (69 73) 64 70 (40 44) 34 (Third Gear) (Fourth Gear) km/h (mph) 169 175 (105 109) 117 123 (73 76)
Downshift Range Throttle opening Fully opened D (Drive) Half throttle Fully closed 12 23 (First Gear) (Second Gear) (Second Gear) (Third Gear) km/h (mph) km/h (mph) 46 52 (29 32) 15 21 (9 13) 14 20 (9 12) 89 95 (55 59) 36 42 (22 26) 21 27 (13 17) 34 (Third Gear) (Fourth Gear) km/h (mph) 159 165 (99 103) 74 80 (46 50) 28 34 (17 21)
Power mode
Winter mode
D range, winter mode ON OFF 31 37 km/h (19 23 mph)
Lockup Speed Chart (V6)

Transfer gear ratio Rear axle ratio High: 1.000 4.100 Lockup ON Mode D range, opening Throttle o ening 6% 2nd km/h (mph) 75 81 (47 50) 75 81 (47 50) 3rd km/h (mph) 68 74 (42 46) 80 86 (50 53) 4th km/h (mph) 76 82 (47 51) 80 86 (50 53) 2nd km/h (mph) 69 75 (43 47) 69 75 (43 47) Lockup OFF 3rd km/h (mph) 47 53 (29 33) 71 77 (44 48) 4th km/h (mph) 72 78 (45 48) 75 81 (47 50)
Normal Power
7A27
Shift Speed Chart (HEC)

Rear axle ratio 4.777
Normal mode
Power mode
Winter mode
D range, winter mode ON OFF 31 37 km/h (19 23 mph)
Lockup Speed Chart (HEC)

Rear axle ratio 4.777 Lockup ON Mode D range, opening Throttle o ening 6% 2nd km/h (mph) 77 83 (48 52) 66 72 (41 45) 3rd km/h (mph) 77 83 (48 52) 70 76 (44 47) 4th km/h (mph) 77 83 (48 52) 70 76 (44 47) 2nd km/h (mph) 72 78 (45 48) 61 67 (38 42) Lockup OFF 3rd km/h (mph) 41 47 (25 29) 62 68 (38 42) 4th km/h (mph) 61 67 (38 42) 66 72 (41 31)
Normal Power
7A29
Changing Transmission Fluid

There is no need to change the transmission fluid unless the transmission is used under one or more of the following heavy duty conditions. A. Repeated short trips B. Driving on rough roads C. Driving on dusty roads D. Towing a trailer If the vehicle is used under these conditions, change the fluid every 20,000 miles (32,000 km). 1. Place a large drain pan under the oil pan. 2. Remove the transmission oil drain screw (2) and drain fluid. 3. Tighten drain screw (2). Torque: 38 Nm (28 lb ft) 4. Remove the transmission overfill screw (1) and fill transmission through overfill screw opening, using DEXRONIII ATF. NOTE: Add transmission fluid until it flows out over the overfill screw opening. 5. Let engine idle until a fluid temperature between 32C (90F) and 57C (135F) is reached. 6. Add transmission fluid until it flows out over the overfill screw opening, then close the overfill screw (1). Torque: 38 Nm (28 lb ft)
NOTE: To prevent fluid leaks, the overfill screw and oil drain screws gasket must be replaced each time these screws are removed. NOTE: Check transmission fluid temperature with scan tool. 7. Reset Oil Life Monitor data by using Tech 2. Refer to Tech 2 OBD II Connection in Transmission Control System (4L30-E) section.
242RW003
Selector Lever
Inspection
1. Make sure that when the selector lever is shifted from P to L, a clicking can be felt at each shift position. Make sure that the gear corresponds to that of the position plate indicator. 2. Check to see if the selector lever can be shifted as shown in illustration.
Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Set ignition Key in LOCK position and selector lever in P position. 3. Remove transfer control lever knob (44). 4. Remove lower cluster assembly.
740RW021 C07RW009

5. Remove rear console. (42)
256RW005
745R100001
6. Remove center console. (44)
7. Remove selector lever knob and cover.
256RW020
256RW006
8. Disconnect select cable. D Refer to Select Cable in this section. 9. Disconnect shift lock cable. D Refer to Shift Lock Cable in this section. 10. Disconnect harness connector.

11. Remove selector lever subassembly. 5. Install selector lever knob and cover.
7A31
256RX001
256RX002
Installation
1. Install selector lever subassembly. 2. Connect harness connector. 3. Connect shift lock cable. D Refer to Shift Lock Cable in this section. 4. Connect select cable. D Refer to Select Cable in this section.
6. Install center console. 7. Install rear console. 8. Install lower cluster assembly. 9. Install transfer control lever knob (44). 10. Connect negative () battery cable. 11. After installation, make sure that the selector lever operates normally, and that each selector position is properly indicated. (The red mark shows through the window.)
Select Cable
Removal
1. Set selector lever in P position. 2. Remove transfer control lever knob, lower cluster assembly, rear console, center console, selector lever knob and cover. D Refer to Selector Lever in this section. 3. Disconnect inner cable by pulling projection on pin. (44)
256RW022

4. Press down claws and disconnect cable assembly.
A07RW017
5. Disconnect PCM harness connectors and remove nuts that fasten grommet in select cable assembly. 6. Disconnect inner cable. (V6)
210RW013

7. Slide sleeve and disconnect cable assembly.
7A33
A07RW082
8. Pull lock.
A07RW015
9. Draw select cable assembly into the interior side.
Installation
1. Set selector lever in P position. 2. Let out select cable transmission side end from floor hole. 3. Fit outer cable into bracket in selector lever assembly.
A07RW016
4. Set inner cable end in selector lever and push pin into selector lever hole and inner cable end. (44)
256RW023

5. Check that lock projects. 8. Push lock into adjust end fitting attachment.
7A35
A07RW015
A07RW014
6. Connect adjust end fitting attachment to the bracket on transmission. 7. Set select lever P position and connect inner cable to select lever. (V6)
9. Install grommet. 10. About following installation steps, refer to Selector Lever in this section.
210RW013
Shift Lock Cable

Removal
1. Set ignition key in LOCK position and selector lever in P position. 2. Remove transfer control lever knob (44), lower cluster assembly, rear console, center console, selector lever knob and cover. D Refer to Selector Lever in this section. 3. Disconnect inner cable from selector lever assembly then push claw and disconnect cable assembly. 6. Remove spring pin and disconnect inner cable. D Disconnect outer cable from bracket.
256RW008
Installation
1. Set ignition key in LOCK position and selector lever in P position. 2. Connect outer cable to bracket near steering lock. D Connect inner cable to steering lock and install spring pin. 3. Install steering column cover and instrument lower cover. 4. Install adjust body of cable assembly to bracket in selector lever assembly. D Install inner cable to lever, pulling inner cable with outer cable.
256RW016
4. Disconnect lock adjust.
256RW017
5. Remove instrument panel lower cover and steering column cover.
256RW018

5. Check that cable moves smoothly, lightly pulling outer cable rearward.
7A37
6. Connect lock adjust, aligning T mark in the Up position.
256R100001
256RW017
7. About following installation steps, refer to Selector Lever in this section. 8. Check the shift lock operation: a. Selector lever should not be moved out of P position with ignition key in Lock position. b. Selector lever can be moved out of P position with ignition key in ONposition only when brake pedal is depressed. c. ignition key can be turned to LOCK position only when selector lever is in P position (key can be pulled out). 9. If a. and c. fail, readjust cable. If b. fails, readjust connector wiring and brake pedal switch.
Mode Switch
Removal
1. Place selector lever in neutral. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Remove mode switch cover (1) (V6). 4. Disconnect selector lever (2) from the mode switch. 5. Remove bracket with cable (3). 6. Disconnect transmission harness from the mode switch connector (4). 7. Remove bracket with mode switch connector from the transmission case. 8. Remove mode switch connector (4) from the bracket (5). 9. Remove two mode switch bolts and nut then remove mode switch (6). (V6)
210RW014
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points; 1. Torque Mode switch bolt: 13 Nm (113 lb in) Selector lever nut: 23 Nm (17 lb ft) 2. Mode switch setting procedure Perform either of the following adjustment procedures: Procedure 1 a. b. c. d. e. Place selector lever in neutral. Remove selector lever from the mode switch. Remove the mode switch cover. Loosen the two 10 mm screws. Rotate the mode switch until the slot in the mode switch housing aligns with the selector shaft bushing, and insert a 3/32 in. (2.4 mm) drill bit or punch (1) into the slot. f. Tighten the screws to 13 Nm (113 lb in). g. After completing adjustment, snap the mode switch cover into place. h. Reinstall the selector lever.
i. Remove multimeter and install mode switch harness connector with bracket to the transmission case. j. Connect transmission harness connector to mode switch connector.
F07RW003
249RW001
Procedure 2 a. Place selector lever in neutral. b. Disconnect transmission harness connector from mode switch connector. c. Remove mode switch connector with bracket from the transmission case. d. Connect multimeter (resistance mode) to terminals 1(E) and 4(H) on mode switch connector. e. Loosen two mounting screws. f. Rotate mode switch slightly in both directions to determine the range (approx. 5 degrees) of electrical contact. g. Position mode switch in middle of contact range. h. Tighten two mounting screws.
7A39
Transmission Assembly
Transmission and Associated Parts
(V6 Model)
240RY00041
Legend (1) Transfer Protector (44) (2) Fairing Plate (3) Rear Propeller Shaft (4) Front Propeller Shaft (44) (5) Center Exhaust Pipe (44) (6) Fuel Pipe Heat Protector (7) Harness Heat Protector (8) Rear Mount Nut (9) Third Crossmember
(10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18)
Transmission Oil Cooler Pipe Starter Under Cover Transfer Control Lever (44) Select Cable Torque Converter Bolt Engine-Transmission Bolt Transmission Assembly Rear Mount Rubber and Propeller Protector Assembly (42)

(HEC Model)
240R100007
Legend (1) Transmission Oil Cooler Pipe (2) Select Cable (3) Rear Propeller Shaft (4) Rear Mount Rubber and Propeller Protector Assembly (5) Fuel Pipe Heat Protector
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Third Crossmember Under Cover Torque Converter Bolt Rear Mount Nut Engine-Transmission Bolt Harness Connector Transmission Assembly
7A41
Removal
NOTE: Before removing transmission and transfer assembly from vehicle, change the transfer mode to 2WD using push button on dash panel (V6, 44). 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove transfer protector (44) and fairing plate (V6).
401RW007
4. Remove center exhaust pipe (V6, 44).
150RW006
3. Remove rear propeller shaft and front propeller shaft (44). NOTE: Apply alignment marks on the flange at both front and rear sides.
150RW008
401RW008

5. Remove fuel pipe heat protector and clip. 6. Disconnect fuel pipe bracket from third crossmember. (V6, 44)
240RW014
141RW004
(V6, 42)
7. Disconnect fuel pipe bracket from transmission side. (V6, 44)
141RW006
141R100004

(HEC)
7A43
Fuel hose connector removal procedure If removal of the fuel hose connector is required for transmission servicing and/or replacement, follow the steps below.
253R100002
(HEC)
141RY00007
NOTE: D An O-ring is used as a seal between the fuel pipe and the connector. Take care not to damage the contact surfaces during the removal procedure. Do not allow the surface to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign material. D Perform the entire removal procedure with your hands. Do not use tools. 1. Separating the connector and fuel pipe 1. Clean the fuel pipe and connector to remove mud and other dirt.
141R100003

2. Pull the black plastic piece toward the connector. Hold the piece near the connector. Pull the connector from the fuel pipe. If the connector and fuel pipe are stuck together, jiggle the connector back and forth to loosen the connector. Do not yank the connector from the fuel pipe. 3. Tie a vinyl bag around the connector and fuel pipe to protect them from dirt.
141RY00004
2. Joining the connector and fuel hose 1. Remove the vinyl bag from the connector and fuel hose. Check that the contact surfaces are undamaged and free of dirt and other foreign material. Clean if necessary. 2. Align the axis of the fuel pipe and connector. Push the connector into the fuel pipe until a distinct click is heard.
141RY00002
141RY00003
141RY00005

3. Gently pull on the connector to check that it is securely latched.
7A45
10. Support transmission with a jack. Remove rear mount nuts from third crossmember. (44)
141RY00006
8. Disconnect transmission harness connector and clip. Connector : Adapter case, mode switch, main case, magnetic sensor, transfer switch (44), 24 actuator (44) and car speed sensor. 9. Remove harness heat protector (V6).
F07RW008
(42)
F07R100005
11. Remove third crossmember.

815RW002

12. Disconnect transmission oil cooler pipes from A/T side. 13. Remove oil pipe clamp and bracket from the converter housing. 14. Loosen oil cooler pipe clamp bolt at the engine mount side. (V6, 44) 15. Remove select cable by disconnecting inner cable from select lever and removing outer cable with bracket.
256RW025
16. Remove starter (V6). 17. Remove under covers from the transmission and engine.
253RY001
(HEC)
(HEC)
240R100005 253R100001

18. Remove transfer control lever fixing bolts and push up transfer control lever (V6, 44). (HEC)
7A47
240R100004
262RW015
19. Remove flex plate torque converter fixing bolts (6 pieces) by turning crankshaft. (V6)
20. Remove engine transmission fixing bolts. 21. Remove exhaust pipe bracket from converter housing and exhaust pipe (HEC).
150R100009 240RW005
22. Pull out transmission from the engine. 23. Remove the rear mount rubber and propeller protector assembly if required (42).
Installation
1. Slowly raise transmission jack until front of the transmission is aligned with rear of the engine. Attach the transmission to the engine. 2. Tighten engine transmission bolts as shown in the figure. (V6)
F07RY001

(HEC)
7A49
F07R100006
D Install exhaust pipe bracket to converter housing and exhaust pipe (HEC).
3. Align the flex plate torque converter bolt boss with flex plate hole by turning the torque converter. Install flex plate torque converter bolts (6 pieces) by turning the crankshaft. Torque: : 54 Nm (40 lb ft) (V6) 29 Nm (22 lb ft) (HEC)
NOTE: Do not reuse the flex plate torque converter bolt. (V6)
150R100009
240RW005

(HEC) (HEC)
240R100004
240R100005
4. Install transfer control lever on the transfer case (V6, 44).
Torque: 8 Nm (69 lb in) (V6 / HEC) 6. Install starter (V6). Torque: 40 Nm (30 lb ft) 7. Install select cable by connecting inner cable to select lever and installing outer cable with bracket.
262RW015
5. Install under covers to the transmission and engine.
256RW025

8. Connect transmission oil cooler pipes to A/T. Torque: 44 Nm (33 lb ft) 9. Install oil cooler pipe clamp and bracket to the converter housing. (V6, 44) 11. Install third crossmember. Torque: 76 Nm (56 lb ft) 12. Install rear mount nuts. Torque: 50 Nm (37 lb ft) (44)
7A51
253RY001 F07RW008
(HEC)
(42)
253R100001
10. Tighten oil cooler pipe clamp bolt at the engine mount side.
F07R100005

13. Install harness heat protector (V6). Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) (V6, 44)
240RW014
815RW002
(V6, 42)
14. Connect transmission harness connector and clip. Connector : Adapter case, mode switch, main case, magnetic sensor, transfer switch (44), 24 actuator (44) and car speed sensor. 15. Connect fuel pipe bracket to transmission side. NOTE: See NOTE of removal steps. (V6, 44)
141RW006
141R100004

(HEC)
7A53
17. Connector fuel pipe bracket to third crossmember.
253R100002
141RW004
(HEC)
18. Install center exhaust pipe (V6, 44). Torque: 43 Nm (32 lb ft)
141R100003
16. Install fuel pipe heat protector and clip.

150RW008

19. Install front propeller shaft (44) and rear propeller shaft. Torque: 63 Nm (46 lb ft) 20. Install transfer protector (44) and fairing plate (V6).
150RW006
7A55
Solenoid (Main Case Valve Body)

Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support it on jack stands. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Drain fluid. 4. Remove sixteen 10 mm screws, main case oil pan, magnet, and gasket. 5. Remove three 13 mm screws, oil filter. 6. Disconnect wiring harness from band control solenoid and shift solenoids. Pull only on connectors, not on wiring harness. 7. Remove spring pin for shift solenoid A, shift solenoid B, and band control solenoid respectively, using suitable pliers taking care not to damage solenoids.
Installation
1. Install shift solenoid A, shift solenoid B, band control solenoid with new gaskets to main case valve body respectively. 2. Carefully install spring pin with hammer to avoid damage to valve body, etc.
243RW004
3. Connect wiring harness to solenoids. 4. Install oil filter with a new gasket and the three 13 mm screws, tighten to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (15 lb ft) 5. Install magnet, main case oil pan with new gasket, and sixteen 10 mm screws. Tighten the screws to the specified torque. Torque: 11 Nm (96 lb in) 6. Fill transmission through the overfill screw hole of oil pan, using ATF DEXRONIII. Refer to Changing Transmission Fluid in this section. 7. Connect battery ground cable.
210RW010
244RW003
8. Remove shift solenoid A, shift solenoid B, band control solenoid, and gaskets from main case valve body. Do not pull on wiring harness. Remove solenoids by grasping the metal tip.
Solenoid (Adapter Case Valve Body)

Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support it on jack stands. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Drain fluid. 4. Remove adapter case oil pan twelve fixing 10 mm screws, adapter case oil pan, and gasket. NOTE: Oil pan still contains transmission fluid. Place a large drain container under the oil pan and drain the fluid carefully. 5. Disconnect wiring harness from force motor solenoid and converter clutch solenoid. Pull only on connectors, not on wiring harness. 6. Remove 11 mm bolt and converter clutch solenoid with two O-rings.
Installation
1. Install force motor solenoid, retainer, and 11 mm bolt to adapter case valve body. Tighten the bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 10 Nm (87 lb in) 2. Install converter clutch solenoid with two O-rings, and 11 mm bolt to adapter case valve body. Tighten the bolt to the specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in) 3. Connect wiring harness assembly to solenoids. 4. Install adapter case oil pan, new gasket, and twelve 10 mm screws. Tighten the screws to the specified torque. Torque : 11 Nm (96 lb in) 5. Fill transmission through overfill screw hole oil pan, using ATF DEXRONIII. Refer to Changing Transmission Fluid in this section. 6. Connect battery ground cable.
210RW011
7. Remove 11 mm bolt, retainer, and force motor solenoid.
210R100002
7A57
Valve Body Assembly (Main Case)

Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support it on jack stands. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Drain fluid. 4. Remove sixteen 10 mm screws, main case oil pan, magnet and gasket. 5. Remove three 13 mm oil filter fixing screws, then remove oil filter. 6. Remove two 13 mm manual detent fixing screws, then remove roller and spring assembly. 7. Disconnect wiring harness from band control solenoid and shift solenoids. Pull only on connectors, not on wiring harness. 8. Remove four 13 mm servo cover fixing screws, then remove servo cover and gasket. 9. Remove seven 13 mm valve body fixing screws. D Disconnect ground wire from the main case valve body (HEC). 10. Remove main case valve body with manual valve link and transfer plate. Note the position of the link (long end into valve, short end into range selector lever). 11. Remove transfer plate gasket from main case. 12. Remove two check balls from main case. 4. Install seven 13 mm screws, and tighten them to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (15 lb ft)
243RS008
5. Install 8.5 mm connector of ground wire under the head of this valve body bolt and reinstall it. Tighten the bolt to the specified torque (HEC). Torque: 20 Nm (15 lb ft)
Installation
1. Install two check balls to main case.
244RW001
244RW002
2. Inspect electrical 7 way (V6) or 4 way (HEC) connector and seal of main case. Replace if necessary. 3. Use two J25025B guide pin to install main case. D Install valve body complete assembly and manual valve link. NOTE: Valve must be extended as the short end of manual valve link is connected to the range selector lever. Long end of link goes into valve.
6. Remove two guide pins from main case. 7. Install servo cover gasket, cover, and four 13 mm screws. Tighten the screws to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 8. Connect wiring harness to band control and shift solenoids. 9. Install roller and spring assembly to manual detent. D Install two 13 mm screws, and tighten them to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (15 lb ft)

10. Install oil filter and three 13 mm screws. Tighten to the specified torque. Torque : 20 Nm (15 lb ft) 11. Install oil pan gasket, magnet, oil pan and sixteen 10 mm screws. Tighten the screws to the specified torque. Torque: 11 Nm (96 lb in) 12. Fill transmission through overfill screw hole of oil pan, using ATF DEXRONIII. Refer to Changing Transmission Fluid in this section. 13. Connect battery ground cable.
Valve Body Assembly (Adapter Case)

Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support it on jack stands. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Drain fluid. 4. Remove twelve 10 mm adapter case oil pan fixing screws, adapter case oil pan, and gasket. NOTE: Oil pan still contains transmission fluid. Place a large drain container under the oil pan. Drain the fluid carefully. 5. Disconnect wiring harness from force motor solenoid and converter clutch solenoid. Pull only on connectors, not on wiring harness. 6. Remove seven 13 mm screws from adapter case valve body assembly, then remove transfer plate, two gaskets, and adapter case valve body.
Installation
1. Inspect electrical 4 way (V6) or 5 way (HEC) connector and seal of adapter case. Replace if necessary. 2. Install gasket, transfer plate, and gasket. 3. Install adapter case valve body and seven 13 mm screws. Tighten the screws to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (15 lb ft) 4. Connect wiring harness assembly to converter clutch solenoid and force motor. 5. Install oil pan gasket, oil pan, and twelve 10 mm screws. Tighten the screws to the specified torque. Torque: 11 Nm (96 lb in) 6. Fill transmission through the overfill screw hole of oil pan, using ATF DEXRONIII, refer to Changing Transmission Fluid in this section. 7. Connect battery ground cable.
7A59
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (V6)

Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect PCM wiring harness connectors from PCM. 3. Remove PCM from bracket.
825R100018
Installation
1. Install PCM to bracket. 2. Connect PCM wiring harness connectors to PCM. 3. Connect battery ground cable.
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (HEC)

Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove lower cluster assembly, center console and front console. 3. Disconnect PCM wiring harness connectors from PCM. 4. Remove four retaining nuts and PCM with bracket from instrument panel stay. 5. Remove PCM from bracket.
828R100002
Installation
1. Install two brackets to PCM. 2. Install PCM with bracket to instrument panel stay and four retaining nuts. 3. Connect PCM wiring harness connectors to PCM. 4. Install center console, front console, and lower cluster assembly. 5. Connect battery ground cable.
7A61
Speed Sensor (Extension Assembly)

Removal
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove front console (V6, 44). 3. Remove selector lever assembly (V6, 44). 4. Disconnect speed sensor harness connector from speed sensor. 5. Remove one 10 mm screw and speed sensor with O-ring.
241R100002
Installation
1. Inspect the speed sensor O-ring, and replace it if necessary. 2. Install speed sensor assembly and 10 mm screw. Torque: 9 Nm (78 lb in) 3. Connect speed sensor harness connector to speed sensor. 4. Install selector lever assembly (V6, 44). D Adjust shift lock cable. Refer to Shift Lock Cable in this section. 5. Install front console (V6, 44). 6. Connect battery ground cable.
Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor (Main Case) (V6)

Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support it on jack stands. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Drain fluid. 4. Remove sixteen 10 mm main case oil pan fixing screws, main case oil pan, and gasket. 5. Disconnect wiring harness from shift solenoids, band apply solenoid, and 7 way connector of main case. Pull only on connectors, not on wiring harness. 6. Remove wiring harness assembly with transmission oil temperature sensor.
Installation
1. Install wiring harness assembly with transmission oil temperature sensor to band apply solenoid, shift solenoids, and 7 way connector of main case. 2. Install oil pan gasket, oil pan and sixteen 10 mm fixing screws. Tighten the screws to the specified torque. Torque: 11 Nm (96 lb in) 3. Fill transmission through the overfill screw hole of oil pan, using ATF DEXRONIII. Refer to Changing Transmission Fluid in this section. 4. Connect battery ground cable.
244RY001
7A63
Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor (Adapter Case) (HEC)

Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and support it on jack stands. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Drain fluid. 4. Remove twelve 10 mm adapter case oil pan fixing screws, adapter case oil pan, and gasket. NOTE: Oil pan still contains transmission fluid. Place a large drain container under the oil pan and drain the fluid carefully. 5. Disconnect wiring harness from force motor solenoid, converter clutch solenoid, and 5 way connector of adapter case. Pull only on connectors, not on wiring harness. 6. Disconnect ground wire from converter clutch solenoid wiring harness connector. 7. Remove wiring harness assembly with transmission oil temperature sensor.
Installation
1. Connect ground wire to converter clutch solenoid wiring harness connector of the wiring harness assembly. 2. Install wiring harness assembly with transmission oil temprature sensor to converter clutch solenoid, force motor, and 5 way connector of adapter case. 3. Install oil pan gasket, oil pan and twelve 10 mm fixing screws. Tighten the screws to the specified torque. Torque: 11 Nm (96 lb in) 4. Fill transmission through the overfill screw hole of oil pan, using ATF DEXRONIII. Refer to Changing Transmission Fluid in this section. 5. Connect battery ground cable.
243RW002
Front Oil Seal (Converter Housing)

Removal
1. Remove transmission assembly from the vehicle, refer to Transmission Assembly in this section. 2. Remove torque converter from converter housing. 3. Remove three screws and oil seal ring from converter housing. (V6)
Installation
1. Apply clean ATF to the new oil seal ring lip. D Install oil seal ring to converter housing, tighten to the specified torque. Torque: 3 Nm (26 lb in) 2. Install torque converter to converter housing. 3. Install transmission assembly to the vehicle, refer to Transmission in this section.
241RW008
(HEC)
241R100001
7A65
Rear Oil Seal (Extension Assembly)

Removal
1. Remove transfer case assembly from the vehicle (44). Refer to Transfer Case in Drive Line/Axle section. 2. Remove rear oil seal from transmission extension assembly. (44)
Installation
1. Use J36797 extension assembly oil seal installer, and install the rear oil seal to the transmission extension assembly. 2. Install the transfer case assembly to the vehicle (44). Refer to Transfer Case in Drive Line/Axle section.
241RW005
Transmission (4L30E)
Disassembly
NOTE: During the disassembly and reassembly, perform the following: D Wash each part thoroughly, and blow air through each oil passage and groove to eliminate blockage. D Seal rings, roll pins, and gaskets should be replaced. D When assembling the components, apply DEXRONIII Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) to each seal, rotating part, and sliding part. D Do not dip part facings, such as clutch or brake drive plates, in cleaner when washing it. Also, always coat parts with new ATF two or three times after cleaning with solvent. 1. Remove torque converter (1). D Drain fluid from torque converter. D Attach J876302 holding fixture to the transmission and set it on J328920 holding fixture base. NOTE: Do not overtighten the tool, as case damage may result. 2. Remove O-ring (2) from turbine shaft. 3. Remove two 10mm mode switch screws, selector lever nut, cover (V6), and mode switch (3). 4. Remove twelve 10mm adapter case oil pan (4) fixing screws, adapter oil pan, and gasket. 5. Disconnect electrical wiring connections (5) from solenoids and 4 way (V6) or 5 way (HEC) connector of adapter case. Pull on connectors only, not on wiring harness. 6. Remove seven 13mm adapter case valve body (6) fixing screws, adapter case valve body assembly, transfer plate, and two gaskets. D Remove wiring harness and 4 way (V6) or 5 way (HEC) connector. 7. Remove sixteen 10mm main case oil pan (7) fixing screws, main oil pan, magnet, and gasket. 8. Remove three 13mm oil filter (8) fixing screws and oil filter. 9. Remove two 13mm manual detent (9) fixing screws, roller and spring, and manual detent. 10. Disconnect wiring harness assembly (10) from band apply solenoid, shift solenoids, and main case 7 way (V6) or 4 way (HEC) connector. Pull on connectors only, not on wiring harness. 11. Remove four 13mm servo cover (11) fixing screws, servo cover, and gasket. 12. Remove seven 13mm valve body screws and ground wire (HEC) from main case. D Remove wiring harness assembly (5) from the adapter case side. D Remove main valve body assembly (12) with manual valve link and transfer plate. Note the position of the link (long end into valve, short end into range selector lever). D Remove 7 way (V6) or 4 way (HEC) connector. D Remove gasket transfer plate from main case. 13. Remove two check balls (13) from main case.
420RW021

(V6)
7A67
240RY001

(HEC)
240R100008
14. Turn transmission to vertical position to drain fluid. Return back to horizontal position when drained. D Install J23075 servo piston spring compressor with offset to the rear of case. D Compress servo piston assembly. D Remove servo piston retaining ring (14). D Slowly release servo piston assembly (15). D Remove tool.

15. Remove servo piston assembly (15), return spring (16), and servo apply rod (17).
7A69
19. Remove speed wheel (21). 20. Remove wheel parking lock (with seal ring) (22).
242RS002
241RW012
16. Rotate transmission to horizontal position, pan side down. D Remove one 10mm screw, and speed sensor (18) with O ring. 17. Remove seven 8mm extension assembly hexagon socket head screws, extension assembly (19), and gasket. 18. Remove retaining ring (20). (44) NOTE: Use extra long, needle nose pliers. D Remove flange nut (20). (42) D Remove flange and Oring (20). (42)
21. Rotate transmission to vertical position, converter housing up. D Loosen the converter housing and oil pump assembly fixing screws, but do not remove, the five 13 mm inner screws unless oil pump disassembly is required. D Remove seven outer screws. D Remove converter housing and oil pump assembly (23). 22. Remove gasket (24).

23. Remove selective thrust washer (25). 28. Remove thrust washer (31).
241RW004
252RS001
24. Remove fourth clutch retainer (26). 25. Grasp turbine shaft and lift out the overrun clutch housing assembly (27) and fourth clutch plates (28). 26. Remove thrust bearing assembly (29). 27. Remove overdrive internal gear (30).
29. Remove adapter case and center support assembly (with fourth clutch piston) (32). 30. Remove seal ring (33). 31. Remove selective thrust washer (34) and two O-ring seals (35) from main case. 32. Use J23327 and J2332790 compressor to compress the fourth clutch spring retainer and springs (37). D Release snap ring (36) from groove. D Remove clutch compressor and snap ring (36). 33. Remove retainer and spring assembly (37). 34. Insert two converter housing/main case screws to hold adapter case while pulling out fourth clutch piston (38). D Remove fourth clutch piston assembly (38) from the adapter case. D Remove converter housing/main case screws. 35. Grasp intermediate shaft, twist and pull out the second and third clutch drum assemblies with reverse clutch plates (39) while holding onto output shaft. 36. Separate second (40) and third clutch (41) assemblies. 37. Remove thrust washer (42). 38. Remove reverse clutch plates (43 and 44) and reverse clutch pressure plate (45). 39. Remove bearing (46) and washer (47). 40. Remove planetary carrier assembly (48). 41. Remove thrust bearing (49).

42. Remove reaction sun gear (50) 43. Remove needle bearing (51). 44. Remove brake drum (52). 45. Remove brake band (53). 46. Remove thrust bearing (54).
7A71
48. Remove parking lock and range selector lever 17 mm nut (57). 49. Remove parking lock and range selector lever (56), and actuator assembly. 50. Remove selector shaft (58). NOTE: Inspect the shaft for burrs before removing to prevent damaging seal. If necessary, remove burrs by lightly sanding with an oilstone.
249RS004
Reassembly
1. Inspect selector shaft seal and replace it if necessary. NOTE: Use a seal installer when replacing the seal.
242RS003
D Install selector shaft. NOTE: Spring pin groove must be positioned inside the case. 2. Install spring pin. Be sure the selector shaft can move freely.Do not push the pin flush with the case surface. Leave enough height for removal. 3. Install actuator assembly (1).
47. Rotate case to horizontal position, valve body side facing up. D Remove spring pin (55), using cutting pliers, then remove parking lock and selector lever assembly (56). NOTE: Insert wire in the center of the spring pin to prevent it from collapsing during removal. Be aware of pin height. Protect machined face of main case.

4. Install parking lock and range selector lever (2) and new 17 mm nut. Tighten the nut to the specified torque. Torque: 22 Nm (16 lb ft)
248RS001
11. Install the thrust bearing (9) on the output shaft. NOTE: Use petroleum jelly to hold the thrust bearing in place.
249RS005
5. Rotate main case to vertical position, extension end facing down. D Install brake band assembly (3). NOTE: Be sure to align servo pin area with the servo hole. 6. Install thrust bearing (4). NOTE: The case bushing acts as a guide for the thrust bearing. 7. Install brake drum (5). 8. Install reaction sun gear (6). 9. Install needle bearing (7). 10. Inspect planetary carrier assembly (8) for wear and damage. If necessary replace it. D Measure pinion end play clearance with a feeler gauge. Clearance: 0.13mm0.89mm (0.005 in0.035 in) If clearance is outside specified value, replace the planetary carrier assembly.
12. Align planetary pinions. Each pinion is marked with double points to indicate the master tooth space and exactly opposite with a single point to indicate the master tooth. The markings on the planetary carrier consist of double lines which are to be lined up with the double points on two opposite pinions; the single lines are to be lined up with the single points on the other two pinions. D After all four pinions are lined up, slide on the third clutch assembly. Rotate third clutch and check mark alignment. Considering that the ring gear tooth between the double points of one planetary pinion is tooth number 1, count the teeth to check that the single points on the two adjacent pinions are between teeth 23 and 24 of the ring gear, and that the ring gear tooth between the double points of the opposite pinion is tooth number 46. If the ring gear and pinions are not lined up, remove and realign them.

13. Install planetary carrier (8) with third clutch (12). NOTE: Do not force. When properly aligned, the parts will fit together easily. 15. Install bearing (11) and washer (10).
7A73
NOTE: Use petroleum jelly to hold the washer and bearing in place.
248RS002
242RW002
14. Remove the third clutch (12).
16. Carefully align the second clutch plate inner tangs. D Install thrust washer, tangs pointing downward, and locating tang positioned in slot on second clutch hub. NOTE: Use petroleum jelly to hold thrust washer in place. 17. Install third clutch and intermediate shaft assembly (13) into the second clutch drum (14).

18. Install second and third clutch assemblies into the main case. Twist output shaft and clutch assemblies to ensure proper fit. 5. Measure the gap and select appropriate washer as shown in the chart. Selective Thrust Washer Gap: mm(in) 1.53 1.63 (0.060 0.064) 1.72 1.82 (0.068 0.072) 1.91 2.01 (0.075 0.079) 2.10 2.20 (0.083 0.087) 2.29 2.39 (0.090 0.094) 2.48 2.58 (0.098 0.102) Color Yellow Red Black Natural Green Blue
FOLLOWING THE PROCEDURE SHOULD RESULT IN FINAL ENDPLAY FROM 0.36 mm TO 0.79 mm (0.014 in TO 0.031 in)
247RS001
19. Install pressure plate (15) with lip side up, tang facing valve body face. 20. Install reverse clutch plates. Start with a steel plate (17) and alternate with a lined plate (16). 21. Install waved clutch plate (18) with center tang facing valve body side.
247R100001
247RS002
22. Second clutch end play measurement 1. Install the J23085A selective washer gauging tool (with spacer ring) on the case flange and against the intermediate shaft. 2. Position the inner shaft of the gauging tool against the thrust surface of the second clutch hub. 3. Tighten thumb screw. Remove the tool. 4. Fit the spacer ring on the inner shaft of the tool.
247RS004

23. Inspect fourth clutch piston seals and replace if necessary. D Lubricate J38554 fourth clutch piston fitter and install it on fourth clutch piston (19). D Install fourth clutch piston (19) in adapter case (20). D Remove fitter.
7A75
252RS004
26. Install selective washer using petroleum jelly. 27. Install two O-ring seals (24) in main case and adapter case/main case seal ring (25). 28. Install J38588 guide pins. D Install adapter case and center support assembly to main case.
252RS003
24. Install retainer and spring assembly (22) into fourth clutch piston (21). 25. Install snap ring (23) in adapter case. D Install J23327 and J2332790 fourth clutch spring compressor. D Seat snap ring in groove. D Remove compressor.
252RW002
242RS004

29. Install thrust washer (26) into adapter case, with tangs pointing downwards. 30. Preassemble overdrive internal gear (27) and thrust bearing assembly (28) onto the turbine shaft and overrun clutch assembly. NOTE: Install bearing assembly, black side up. Use petroleum jelly to keep assembly in place. 31. Install overdrive carrier (30) and internal gear assembly into adapter case. 32. Install fourth clutch plates (29) in the following order: Steel, Lined, Steel, Steel, Lined, Steel. Steel plates go in with short tang facing towards valve body surface. 33. Install fourth clutch retainer(31) with the notch facing up and positioned towards valve body surface. 5. Set selective thrust washer aside. Selective Thrust Washer Gap: mm(in) 1.53 1.63 (0.060 0.064) 1.72 1.82 (0.068 0.072) 1.91 2.01 (0.075 0.079) 2.10 2.20 (0.083 0.087) 2.29 2.39 (0.090 0.094) 2.48 2.58 (0.098 0.102) Color Yellow Red Black Natural Green Blue
FOLLOWING THE PROCEDURE SHOULD RESULT IN FINAL ENDPLAY FROM 0.1 mm TO 0.8 mm (0.004 in TO 0.03 in)
252RW004
34. Overdrive clutch end play measurement 1. Install the J23085A selective washer gauging tool on the adapter case flange and against the input shaft. 2. Position the inner shaft of the tool against the thrust surface of the overrun clutch housing. 3. Tighten thumb screw. Remove the tool. 4. Measure gap. Select appropriate size washer as shown in the chart.
252RS005
252RS006

35. Install selective washer (32). NOTE: Use petroleum jelly to hold selective washer in place. 36. Install gasket (33). 37. Install converter housing and oil pump assembly (34) to adapter case. D Fit and tighten seven outer 13 mm screws. Torque: 39 Nm (29 lb ft) D Ensure free rotation of oil pump using J2308201 oil pump rotation tool.
7A77
5. Pull turbine shaft further upwards with puller. Read end play shown on indicator. End play: 0.1mm 0.8mm (0.004 in 0.031in) 6. Remove axial play checking tool and puller. NOTE: If end play is not correct, repeat selective washer selection.
252RW001
39. Inspect extension assembly oil seal and replace if necessary, using J36797 extension assembly oil seal installer. D Rotate transmission to horizontal position, with valve body side down. D Inspect parking wheel seal ring. necessary. Replace if
D Install wheel parking lock assembly (35). 40. Install speed wheel (36) and snap ring (37). (44) NOTE: Use extra long, needle nose pliers. Install flange, Oring and nut. (42)
241RW010
38. Overdrive clutch end play measurement 1. Fit J25022 and J247731 turbine shaft puller on turbine shaft. 2. Position axial play checking tool on converter housing mating face. 3. Pull turbine shaft upwards with puller until first resistance is met. (due to weight of overdrive assembly) 4. Maintain shaft in this position and set indicator to zero.
41. Install gasket onto extension assembly with a thin coating of oil. D Install extension assembly (38), and align parking pawl shaft. D Install actuator assembly into extension assembly. D Install seven 8 mm hexagon socket head screws. Torque: 32 Nm (24 lb ft) 42. Inspect speed sensor O-ring. Replace if necessary. D Install speed sensor assembly (39) and 10 mm screw. Torque: 9 Nm (78 lb in)

43. Main case end play measurement 1. Attach axial play checking tool on the extension assembly and set indicator to zero on output shaft. 2. Manually push output shaft upwards. End play: 0.36mm 0.80mm (0.014 in 0.031in) 3. Remove axial play checking tool. 4. If end play is not correct, repeat selective washer selection.
241RW013
(44)
241RS005
44. Inspect servo piston seal ring. Replace if necessary. D Ensure brake band is correctly positioned. Rotate output shaft if necessary. D Install J38428 servo piston fitter in servo bore. D Install apply rod (40), round end toward band, return spring (41) and piston assembly (42). 45. Install the J23075 servo spring compressor with offset to rear of case. D Compress servo piston seal ring, using fitter while tightening the tool screw. D Install servo piston retaining ring (43). D Remove tool. D Adjust the brake band by tightening the servo adjusting screw to 4.5 Nm torque. Be certain the lock nut is loose, then back-off the screw five turns exactly. Hold piston sleeve with wrench and tighten lock nut to 18.5 Nm torque. Be certain the adjusting screw does not turn.
241RS004
7A79
NOTE: Valve must be extended as the short end of manual valve link is connected to the range selector lever. Long end of link goes into valve. D Install seven 13 mm screws, tighten the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (15 lb ft) D Pass ground wire of adapter case wiring harness assembly through the hole joining adapter fluid area and main case fluid area (HEC). D Assemble 8.5 mm connector of ground wire under the head of this valve body bolt and reinstall it (HEC). D Remove two guide pins.
242RW004
46. Install two check balls (44).
244RW001
49. Install servo cover gasket, cover (46) and four 13 mm screws. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 50. Connect wiring harness (47) to band control, shift solenoids, and main case 7 way (V6) or 4 way (HEC) connector. 51. Install manual detent roller and spring assembly (48) with clip. D Install two 13 mm screws. Torque: 20 Nm (15 lb ft) 52. Install oil filter (49) and three 13 mm screws. Torque: 20 Nm (15 lb ft)
244RW002
53. Install oil pan gasket, magnet, main oil pan (50), sixteen 10 mm screws. Torque: 11 Nm (96 lb in) 54. Inspect adapter case electrical connector and seal. Replace if necessary. D Install electrical 4 way (V6) or 5 way (HEC) connector and harness assembly (52) in bottom of adapter case. 55. Install gasket, transfer plate, and gasket. D Install adapter case valve body (51) complete and seven 13 mm screws. Torque: 20 Nm (15 lb ft)
47. Inspect main case electrical connector and seal, replace if necessary. D Install electrical 7 way (V6) or 4 way (HEC) connector/main case and wiring harness. 48. Install two J25025B guide pins into main case. D Install main case valve body complete assembly (45) and manual valve link.

56. Connect wiring harness harness assembly (52) to converter clutch solenoid, force motor, and 4 way (V6) or 5 way (HEC) connector. 57. Install oil pan gasket, adapter case oil pan (53), and twelve 10 mm screws. Torque: 11 Nm (96 lb in) D Rotate transmission, with bottom pan facing down. 58. Install mode switch (54), two 10 mm screws, selector lever nut, and cover (V6). 10 mm screw Torque: 13 Nm (113 lb in) Nut Torque: 23 Nm (17 lb ft) D Adjust using setting tool, refer to Mode Switch in this section. 59. Install O-ring (55) on turbine shaft. (V6) 60. Install torque converter (56). The converter assembly must be replaced under any of the following conditions: a. Evidence of damage to the pump assembly. b. Metal particles are found after flushing the cooler lines. c. External leaks in hub weld area. d. Converter pilot broken, damaged, or poor fit into crankshaft. e. Converter hub scored or damaged. f. Internal failure in stator. g. Contamination from engine coolant. h. Excess end play. D Rotate transmission, bell housing up. Spin converter to insure proper fit. 61. Fill transmission through the overfill screw hole of oil pan, using ATF DEXRONIII. Refer to Changing Transmission Fluid in this section.
240RY002

(HEC)
7A81
240R100009
Converter Housing and Oil Pump Assembly

Disassembled View
241RW003
Legend (1) Converter Housing (2) Outer Seal Ring (3) Gasket
(4) Wear Plate (5) Oil Pump Assembly (6) Oil Seal Ring
Disassembly
1. Remove oil pump assembly from converter housing. 2. Remove outer seal ring. 3. Remove gasket. 4. Remove wear plate. 5. Remove oil seal ring.
D Tighten five inner 13mm bolts in an alternating pattern. Torque: 20 Nm (15 lb ft)

Visual Check:
If any damage, deformation, or local wear is found in a converter housing, outer seal ring, wear plate, or oil seal ring, replace it.
Reassembly
1. Install wear plate onto oil pump assembly. 2. Install converter housing onto complete oil pump assembly. Align with two short J38588 guide pins on outer bolt holes. D Loosely install five 13mm bolts. D Center converter housing using J38557 centering tool. 3. Install oil seal ring (3 screws). Torque: 3 Nm (26 lb in) 4. Install gasket. 5. Install outer seal ring.
241RW002
7A83
Oil Pump
Disassembled View
241RS014
Legend (1) Oil Pump Drive Gear (2) Oil Pump Driven Gear (3) Pin (4) Plug (5) Spring (6) Converter Clutch Control Valve (7) Snap Ring (8) Spring Seat (9) Spring
(10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18)
Throttle Signal Accumulator Piston Sleeve Pin Sleeve Boost Valve Spring Seat Valve Spring Spring Seat Pressure Regulator valve Oil Pump Assembly
Disassembly
1. Remove oil pump drive gear (1) and driven gear (2). 2. Remove pin (3) from oil pump assembly (18). 3. Remove plug (4), spring (5), and converter clutch control valve (6). 4. Remove snap ring (7) from oil pump assembly (18). 5. Remove spring seat (8), spring (9), and throttle signal accumulator piston (10). 6. Remove sleeve pin (11) from oil pump assembly (18). 7. Remove sleeve (12), boost valve (13), spring seat (14), valve spring (15), spring seat (16), and pressure regulator valve (17).
Reassembly
1. Lubricate and preinstall pressure regulator spring seat (16) on valve (17), with the flat side against shoulder. 2. Install pressure regulator valve (17) and spring seat (16) assembly, valve spring (15), and spring seat (14) with the flat side away from spring to oil pump assembly (18). 3. Assemble boost valve (13) into sleeve (12). 4. Install boost valve and sleeve assembly, and sleeve pin (11) to oil pump assembly (18). 5. Install throttle signal accumulator piston (10), spring (9), and spring seat (8), with the flat side away from the spring, and snap ring (7) to oil pump assembly (18). 6. Install converter clutch control valve (6), spring (5), plug (4), and pin (3) to oil pump assembly (18). 7. Install oil pump driven gear (2) and drive gear (1).

Visual Check:
If any damage, deformation or wear is found, replace the damaged part.
Main Case Valve Body

Disassembled View
244RS010
Legend (1) Gaskets and Transfer Plate (2) Manual Valve (3) Band Control Solenoid (4) Pin (5) Waved Washer (6) Spring Pin (7) Solenoid A (8) Retainer (9) 12/34 Shift Valve (10) Spring (11) Spring Pin (12) Solenoid B (13) Retainer (14) 23 Shift Valve
(15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28)
Spring Spring Pin Plug Spring Low Pressure Control Valve Spring Pin Plug Band Control Screen Assembly Spring Pin Plug 12 Accumulator Valve 12 Accumulator Control Valve Check ball Main Case Valve Body
7A85
Disassembly
1. Remove two 11mm bolts from valve body (28), then remove gaskets and transfer plate (1). 2. Remove manual valve (2). 3. Push in band control solenoid (3) to compress waved washer (5), and remove pin (4). 4. Remove band control solenoid (3) and waved washer (5). 5. Remove spring pin (6) with a 3 mm diameter punch. 6. Remove solenoid A (7) by grasping the metal tip. Do not grasp the connector housing. 7. Remove retainer (8), 12/34 shift valve (9) and spring (10). 8. Remove spring pin (11) with a 3 mm diameter punch. 9. Remove solenoid B (12) by grasping the metal tip. Do not grasp the connector housing. 10. Remove retainer (13), 23 shift valve (14), and spring (15). 11. Remove spring pin (16), plug (17), spring (18) and low pressure control valve (19). 12. Remove spring pin (20), plug (21), and band control screen assembly (22). 13. Remove spring pin (23), plug (24), 12 accumulator valve (25), and 12 accumulator control valve (26). 14. Remove 1 check ball (27) from valve body (28).
Reassembly
1. Install 12 accumulator control valve (26), 12 accumulator valve (25), plug (24), and spring pin (23). 2. Install band control screen assembly (22), plug (21), and spring pin (20). 3. Install low pressure control valve (19), spring (18), plug (17), and spring pin (16). 4. Install spring (15), 23 shift valve (14), retainer (13), solenoid B (12), and spring pin (11). 5. Install spring (10), 12/34 shift valve (9), retainer (8), solenoid A (7), and spring pin (6). 6. Install waved washer (5), band control solenoid (3), and pin (4). 7. Install manual valve (2). 8. Install check ball (27) to valve body (28). 9. Install gasket (valve body/transfer plate) and transfer plate using two J33872 guide pins. D Install two 11mm bolts. Torque: 13 Nm (113 lb in)

Inspect for the following, and replace any damaged or worn parts: 1. Damage or wear to each valve. 2. Damage in oil passeges. 3. Cracks or damage to valve body. 4. Valve operations. 5. Spring fatigue.
244RS004
D Install gasket (transfer plate/main case).
Adapter Case Valve Body

Disassembled View
243RW001
Legend (1) Converter Clutch Solenoid Assembly (2) Retainer (3) Force Motor Solenoid (4) Retainer (5) Plug (6) 3/4 Accumulator Valve (7) 3/4 Accumulator Control Valve
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Spring Retaining Ring Feed Iimit Valve Plug Retainer O-ring Plug Force Motor Screen Assembly Adapter Case Valve Body
Disassembly
1. Remove 11mm bolt from valve body. D Remove converter control solenoid assembly (1). 2. Remove 11mm bolt and retainer (2) from valve body. D Remove force motor solenoid (3). 3. Remove retainer (4), plug (5), 3/4 accumulator valve (6), and 3/4 accumulator control valve (7) 4. Remove spring (8), retaining ring (9), and feed limit valve (10). 5. Remove plug retainer (11), O-ring (12), plug (13), and force motor screen assembly (14). D Use 5 mm bolt to pull plug.

Inspect for the following, and replace any damaged or worn parts: 1. Damage or wear to each valve. 2. Damage in oil passeges. 3. Cracks or damage to valve body. 4. Valve operations. 5. Spring fatigue.
Reassembly
1. Install force motor screen assembly (14), plug (13), O-ring (12), and plug retainer (11). 2. Install feed limit valve (10), retaining ring (9), and spring (8).

3. Install 3/4 accumulator control valve (7), 3/4 accumulator valve (6), plug (5), and retainer (4). 4. Install force motor solenoid (3). D Place solenoid terminals pointing towards mating face. D Install retainer (2) and bolt. Torque: 10 Nm (87 lb in)
7A87
5. Install converter clutch solenoid assembly with two O-rings (1) to valve body. D Install bolt. Torque: 10 Nm (87 lb in)
Third Clutch and Sprag Unit

Disassembled View
248RW001
Legend (1) Retaining Ring (2) Input Sun Gear and Sprag Unit Assembly (3) Retaining Washer (4) Bearing (5) Thrust Washer
(6) Clutch Plates V6: 6 Discs, 6 Plates HEC: 4 Discs, 4 Plate (7) Third Clutch Spring Cushion Plate (8) Third Clutch Drum Assembly
Disassembly
1. Place the third clutch drum and intermediate shaft assembly upright, using the overdrive internal gear as a support. 2. Locate the ends of the retaining ring. Depress one end of the ring using a small screwdriver instead of the depressor handle provided with the tool J-38450-A. Slide one blade down between the third clutch drum and the retaining ring. 3. Remove a screwdriver and repeat this step for the other end of retaining ring. 4. Install the remaining four blades approximately (five) notches apart using a screwdriver to depress the retaining ring. 5. Pull up on input sun gear and sprag unit assembly (1 and 2) to release the retaining ring from third clutch drum assembly (8). 6. Remove the tool blades.
248RX001

7. Remove retaining washer (3), bearing (4), thrust washer (5), and clutch plates (6 and 7) from the third clutch drum assembly (8). 6. Place J-38450-A blades between the retaining ring and the third clutch drum apporximately (five) notches apart, and one blade at each end of the retaining ring (1). Push down on sprag assembly until the assembly is seated into the third clutch drum assembly (8). 7. Remove the tool blades and engage retaining ring into groove of third clutch drum.

Visual Check:
Reassembly
1. Place third clutch drum and intermediate shaft assembly upright, using the overdrive internal gear as a support. 2. Install third clutch spring cushion plate (7), bevel face down. 3. Install third clutch plates (6) into third clutch drum assembly (8). Start with the steel clutch plate and alternate with lined plates. 4. Install thrust washer (5), bearing (4) and retaining washer (3). 5. Fully engage the hub spline of the input sun gear and sprag unit assembly (2) into the third clutch inner tangs. D Simultaneously rotate the outer sprag race to engage into the third clutch drum assembly (8).
248RX002
Third Clutch
Disassembled View
248RS006
Legend (1) Retaining Ring (2) Spring Seat
(3) Springs (4) Piston Assembly (5) Third Clutch Drum
7A89
Disassemble
1. Compress spring seat using the J23075 spring compressor and J2307512 adapter tool. NOTE: Do not overstress the springs and seat. This will cause damage to the spring seat. D Remove the tool. D Remove retaining ring (1).
Reassembly
1. The lip of the piston seal must point toward the front of the transmission. Lubricate the seal lip with transmission fluid. D Install piston assembly (4) into the third clutch drum (5). Use the J23084 third clutch piston installer to protect the outer seal during installation. D Remove the seal installer.
248RS007
2. Release the spring seat (2). NOTE: Do not let the spring seat catch in the ring groove. D Remove spring seat (2) and springs (3). 3. Remove piston assembly (4) from third clutch drum (5).
248RS008
2. Install twelve springs (3) and spring seat (2). 3. Place retaining ring (1) onto spring seat. D Compress the piston springs, using the J23075 piston spring compressor and J2307512 adapter. CAUTION: Do not overstress the springs and seat. Do not let the spring seat catch in the ring groove. This may cause damage to the spring seat. D Install spring seat retaining ring (1). D Remove the piston spring compressor and adapter.

Visual check:
Operation check:
Shake the piston and listen for check ball movement. Movement indicates proper check ball operation. Replace the piston if the check ball is missing or falls out.
Sprag Unit
Disassembled View
248RS009
Legend (1) Retaining Ring (2) Sprag Outer Race (3) Ring
(4) Sprag Assembly (5) Ring (6) Third Clutch Hub and Sun Gear Assembly
Disassembly
1. Remove the sprag outer race, retaining ring, and sprag assembly from the third clutch hub and sun gear assembly. 2. Remove the rings and sprag assembly from the sprag outer race.
NOTE: Check correct rotation by holding the sun gear in your left hand and turning the outer race. The outer sprag race should turn freely towards you and should lock turning away from you.

Visual Check:
If any damage, deformation or local wear is found, replace the damaged part.
Reassembly
NOTE: Flared shoulder of the sprag cage faces the sun gear. This procedure must be followed exactly to be sure that the sprag assembly is installed properly. 1. Install rings and sprag assembly onto the third clutch hub and sun gear. 2. Install sprag outer race and retaining ring assembly over the sprag cage assembly. D Place third clutch hub and sun gear assembly on a flat surface, sun gear facing up. Place sprag outer race and sprag assembly over the sun gear assembly, push down and turn the input sun counterclockwise at the same time.
248RS010
7A91
Second Clutch
Disassembled View
247RW001
Legend (1) Retaining Ring (2) Ring Gear (3) Retaining Ring (4) Spacer (5) Clutch Plates V6: 6 Discs, 6 Plates HEC: 5 Discs, 5 Plates
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
Waved Washer Retaining Ring Spring Seat Springs Piston Assembly Second Clutch Drum
Disassembly
1. Remove retaining ring (1) from second clutch drum (11). 2. Remove ring gear (2), retaining ring (3), and spacer (4). 3. Remove clutch plates (5) and waved washer (6). 4. Remove retaining ring (7) using J23327 compressor to compress the spring seat (8).

5. Remove spring seat (8), springs (9) and piston assembly (10) from second clutch drum (11). D Remove the installer.
247RS006

Visual Check:
Operation Check:
Shake the piston and listen for check ball movement. Movement indicates proper check ball operation. Replace the piston if the check ball is missing or falls out.
247RS007
Reassembly
1. Install piston assembly (10) into the second clutch drum (11). D Lubricate the lip seal with transmission fluid. Use the J23080A second clutch piston installer to protect the outer piston lip seal. NOTE: Lip of the seal should point toward front of transmission.
2. Install twenty-two piston springs (9) and spring seat (8) on the second clutch piston (10). Place retaining ring (7) onto spring seat. D Use the J23327 compressor to compress the piston springs. NOTE: Do not let spring seat catch in ring groove. D Remove the compressor. 3. Install waved plate (6) and clutch plates (5). Start with a steel plate and alternate with lined plates. D Align second clutch inner tangs. 4. Install spacer (4), with the fluted end toward clutch plates. 5. Install retaining ring (3), ring gear (2) and retaining ring (1).
7A93
34 Accumulator Piston
Disassembled View
244RS005
Legend (1) Snap Ring (2) Cover
(3) Spring (4) Piston Assembly
Disassembly
1. Install the J38559A cover compressor on adapter case. D Compress piston cover then remove snap ring.
2. Install the J41096 cover remover and J38584 adapter to center hole of cover. D Use the J23907 slide hammer to remove cover. 3. Remove spring and piston assembly.
242RW001 242RS007

Visual Check:
Reassembly
1. Place the J38553 piston fitter into adaptor case and push the piston into position, using suitable diameter tube. D Remove the piston fitter.
244RS006
2. Install spring and cover. 3. Install snap ring, using the J38559A compressor tool. D Install snap ring in groove. D Remove the compressor tool.
242RS007
7A95
Reverse Clutch Piston and Center Support

Disassembled View
242RY001
Legend (1) Retaining Ring (2) Spring Seat (3) Springs (4) Piston Assembly (5) Center Support (6) Gasket (7) Transfer Plate (8) Gasket
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
Restrictor Retainer Plate Plug Spring Overrun Lock Out Valve Retainer Plate (V6) Plug (V6) Spring (V6) Reverse Lock Out Control Valve (V6)
Disassembly
1. Install the J23327 compressor tool on spring seat, then compress the spring seat. D Remove retaining ring (1). NOTE: Do not over-stress the springs and seat, as this will cause damage to the spring seat. D Remove the compressor tool.
Reassembly
1. Install reverse lock out valve (17) and spring (16) to center support. NOTE: Ensure correct assembly of valve. The spring should be located over the long small diameter end. 2. Install plug (15) and retainer plate (14). 3. Install overrun lock out valve (13) and spring (12) to center support. NOTE: Ensure correct assembly of valve. The spring should be located over the long small diameter end. 4. Install plug (11) and retainer plate (10). 5. Place restrictor (9) in the lube overdrive channel in the adapter case housing.
247RS008
2. Remove spring seat (2) and springs (3). 3. Remove piston assembly (4). 4. Remove 8 bolts from center support (5), then remove center support (5) from adapter case. 5. Remove gasket transfer plate/outer support (6), center support transfer plate (7), and gasket transfer plate/adapter case (8). 6. Remove restrictor (9) from adapter case housing. 7. Remove retainer plate (10), plug (11), spring (12), and overrun lock out valve (13) from center support (5). 8. Remove retainer plate (14), plug (15), spring (16) and reverse lock out valve (17) from center support (5).
242RS005
6. Install gasket transfer plate/adapter case (8), center support transfer plate (7), and gasket transfer plate/center support (6). 7. Install center support (5) with 8 bolts. Torque : 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 8. Install piston assembly (4) into center support (5). 9. Install twenty four springs (3), spring seat (2), and retaining ring (1). D Install the J23327 compressor and compress spring seat (2) and springs (3), then seat snap ring (1) in groove. D Remove the tool.

Visual Check:
7A97
Overrun Clutch and Turbine Shaft

Disassembled View
252RW005
Legend (1) Snap Ring (2) Overdrive Carrier Assembly (3) Sun Gear (4) Turbine Shaft (5) Snap Ring (6) Backing Plate (7) Clutch Plates
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Snap Ring Overrun Roller Clutch Cam Roller Clutch Assembly Overrun Clutch Release Spring Retainer Diaphragm Spring Piston Assembly Overrun Clutch Drum Turbine Shaft Seal Rings
Disassembly
1. Position overrun clutch assembly upright, using the overdrive internal gear as a support. D Remove snap ring (1).

Overdrive Carrier Check
D Check pinion end play with a feeler gauge. Clearance: 0.24mm0.64mm (0.0094in0.025in) If clearance is outside specified value, replace overdrive carrier assembly.
252RS009
2. Remove overdrive carrier assembly (2), sun gear (3) and turbine shaft (4). 3. Remove snap ring (5), backing plate (6), and clutch plates (7). 4. Compress diaphragm spring with the J2332791 compressor then remove snap ring (8).
252RS011
Visual Check:
Reassembly
1. Install turbine shaft seal rings (15) with grease (petroleum jelly).
252RS010
5. Remove overrun roller clutch cam (9) and roller clutch assembly (10). 6. Remove overrun clutch release spring retainer (11) and diaphragm spring (12). 7. Remove piston assembly (13) from overrun clutch drum (14). 8. Remove turbine shaft seal rings (15).
241RS008
2. Install the J38555 inner installer on the drum (14). D Pre-install piston assembly into J38555 outer installer. D Install overrun clutch piston assembly (13). Use the outer installer while pushing piston into drum (14).

D Remove the installer.
7A99
NOTE: Turn the assembly in a counter-clockwise direction only until roller clutch enters the outer race. After Installation, rotate the assembly and listen for loose rollers. 11. Install turbine shaft (4) and snap ring (1).
252RS012
252RS013
3. Install diaphragm spring (12). 4. Install overrun clutch release spring retainer (11) (lip faces upwards), overrun roller clutch assembly (10) and cam (9). 5. Place snap ring loosely on spring retainer. D Hold the J2332791 compressor in a vise and compress piston return spring with compressor. D Set snap ring (8) in ring groove. D Remove the compressor. 6. Install clutch plates (7), start with steel plate and alternate with lined plates. 7. Install backing plate (6). 8. Install snap ring (5). 9. Install overdrive sun gear with countersink pointing downwards. 10. Install the overdrive carrier assembly (2).

Remarks Model Engine Type THM 4L30E V6 3.2L 6VD1 Automatic four speed overdrive in 4th gear lock-up clutch torque converter Shift control Shift pattern Control systems Shift quality Lock-up clutch 1st 2nd Gear ratio 3rd 4th (O/D) Reverse Gear set Name Oil used Torque converter Reverse clutch Second clutch Third clutch Brake band Fourth clutch Overrun clutch Overdrive roller clutch Principle sprag C4 OC OFW PFW Input sun gear Ravigneaux type y g gear train (planetary gear set) Pinion gear Long pinion Ring gear Long pinion Output sun gear Overdrive carrier (planetary ( lanetary gear set) Sun gear Pinion gear Ring gear RC C2 C3 Qty liter (qt) Hydraulic Electronic Electronic Electronic 2.856 1.618 1.000 0.723 2.000 Noiseless, high torque capability ATF DEXRONIII 8.6 (9.1) 2,100150 5 6 6 Double wrap 2 1 10 26 30 19 23 90 19 46 31 24 81 HEC (2.2L)
2,200150 4 5 4 Number of teeth Number of discs Number of rollers Number of sprags Number of discs Stall speed (rpm)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (4L30E) 7A101
(V6)
E07RY00014

(HEC)
E07R100003

(V6)
E07RY003

(HEC)
E07R100002
E07RW014
Special Tools
J23075 Spring compressor (For servo piston)
J23085A Selective washer gaging tool
J38450A Third clutch snap ring compressor
J2332790 Fourth clutch spring compressor (Use with J23327)
J2307512 Third clutch spring compressor adapter (Use with J23075)
J38553 3/4 accumulator piston fitter
J23084 Third clutch piston installer
J41096 Cover remover (Use with J38584)
J23327 Third clutch spring compressor
J38584 Slide hammer adapter (Use with J23907)
J23080A Second clutch piston installer
J38554 Fourth clutch piston fitter

J38588 Guide pins; adapter case to main case
J2308201 Oil pump rotation tool
J38555 Overrun clutch piston seal installer set
J25025B Guide pins; valve body to main case
J33872 Guide pins; gasket and transfer plate to valve body
J38428 Servo piston fitter
J25022 Turbine shaft puller (Use with J247731)
J2332791 Overrun clutch spring compressor
J23129 Oil seal remover (Use with J23907 and J38584)
J38559A 3/4 accumulator piston cover compressor
J38557 Oil pump centering tool
J876302 Holding fixture

J36797 A/T extension assembly oil seal installer (Inside)
J29770A Pressure gauge
J247731 End play fixture (Use with J25022)
J23907 Slide hammer
4L30E Parts List

Case and Associated Parts
241RY00021
Legend (1) Torque Converter (2) Screw, Seal Ring Assembly (3) Seal Ring Assembly, Converter Housing (4) Screw, Converter Housing/Main Case (5) Screw, Converter Housing/Oil Pump (6) Housing, Converter (7) Plug, Converter Housing (8) Seal, O-ring (9) Wear Plate, Oil Pump Body (10) Pump Assembly, Oil (11) Gasket (12) Washer, Thrust Selective (13) Ring, Snap (14) Cover, 34 Accumulator Piston (15) Seal, O-ring, 34 Accumulator (16) Spring, 34 Accumulator Piston
(17) (18) (19) (20) (22) (23) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35) (36) (37)
Pin, 34 Accumulator Piston Piston, 34 Accumulator Ring, 34, Accumulator Piston Case, Adapter Connector, Electrical/Adapter Case Screw, Pan Restrictor, Oil Gasket, Transfer Plate/Adapter Plate, Transfer Adapter/Center Support Support Assembly, Center Screw, Center Support Ring, Oil Seal Seal, O-ring Main Case Fitting, Cooler Fitting Assembly, Cooler Case, Main Breather, Pipe

(38) (39) (42) (43) (44) (45) (46) (47) (48) (49) (50) (51) (52) (53) (54) (55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64) (65) (67) (68) (69) (70) (71) (72) Seal, O-ring Reservoir Gasket, Extension Case Extension Assembly Seal, O-ring/Speed Sensor Sensor Assembly, Speed Screw, Speed Sensor Nut, Output Shaft/Drive Flange Seal, Oring/Drive Flange Flange, Drive Seal, Extension Assembly Bearing, Needle/Extension Screw, Extension/Main Case Spring, Parking Pawl Lock Pawl, Parking Lock Connector, Electrical/Main Case Actuator Assembly, Parking Lock Nut, Parking Lock Lever Link, Manual Valve Pin, Spring Lever, Parking Lock and Range Selector Shaft, Selector Seal, Selector Shaft Mode Switch Assembly Screw & Conical Washer Assembly Shield, Mode Switch (V6) Pan, Bottom/Adapter Case Gasket, Bottom Pan/Adapter Case Harness Assembly, Adapter Case Screw, Valve Body Valve Body Assembly, Adapter Case Gasket, Adapter Valve Body (73) (74) (75) (76) (77) (78) (79) (80) (82) (84) (85) (86) (87) (88) (89) (90) (91) (92) (93) (94) (95) (96) (97) (98) (99) (100) (101) (102) (103) (104) (105) (106) Plate, Adapter Valve Body/Transfer Pan, Bottom/Main Case Gasket, Bottom Pan/Main Case Gasket, Oil Drain or Overfill Screw Screw, Oil Drain or Overfill Magnet, Chip Collector Filter Oil Harness Assembly, Main Case Roller and Spring Assembly, Manual Detent Valve Body Assembly, Main Case Ball, Check Gasket, Main V.B./Transfer Plate Plate, Main V.B./Transfer Gasket, Transfer/Main Case Screw, Transfer Plate on V.B. Screw, Servo Cover Cover, Servo Piston Gasket, Cover/Servo Piston Ring, Retaining Servo Piston Clip, Servo Piston Nut, Servo Screw Screw, Servo Piston Piston, Servo Seal, Ring/Servo Piston Spring, Cushion/Servo Piston Seat, Cushion Spring Sleeve, Servo Piston Adjust Rod, Apply/Servo Piston Spring, Return/Servo Piston Gasket, Adapter Case/Transfer Plate Powertrain Control Module Servo Piston Assembly
Pump Assembly
241RS019
Legend (201) Gear, Oil Pump Drive (202) Gear, Oil Pump Driven
(203) Pin, Boost Valve Sleeve (204) Sleeve, Boost Valve (205) Valve, Boost

(206) (207) (208) (209) (210) (211) Seat, Spring/Pressure Regulator Valve Spring, Pressure Regulator Valve Valve, Pressure Regulator Pump Assembly, Oil Valve, Converter Clutch Control Spring, Converter Clutch Control Valve (212) (213) (214) (215) (216) (217) Plug, Converter Clutch Control Valve Pin, Spring Piston, Throttle Signal Accumulator Spring, Throttle Signal Accumulator Seat, Spring/Throttle Signal Accumulator Ring, Snap/Throttle Signal Accumulator
Valve Body Assemblies
244RS009
Legend (301) Body, Valve Main Case (302) Pin, Spring (303) Solenoid Assembly, ON/OFF N.C. (304) Valve, 12 & 34 Shift (305) Spring, 12 & 34 (23) Shift (306) Retainer, Valve (307) Solenoid Assembly, ON/OFF N.O. (308) Valve, 23 Shift (309) Pin, Spring (310) Plug, Valve Bore
(311) (312) (317) (318) (320) (321) (322) (323) (324) (325) (326)
Spring, Valve Low Pressure Control Valve, Low Pressure Control Ball, Check Valve, 12 Accumulator Control Valve, 12 Accumulator Washer, Waved PWM Solenoid Pin, Solenoid PWM Solenoid Assembly, Band Control PWM Screen Assembly, PWM Solenoid Plug, Screen Valve, Manual
243RW003
Legend (401) Body, Valve/Adapter Case (402) Screw, Solenoid Force Motor (403) Retainer, Force Motor (404) Solenoid, Force Motor (405) Plug, 34 Accumulator (406) Plug and Spring Retainer (407) Valve, 34 Accumulator (409) Valve, 34 Accumulator Control
(410) (411) (412) (413) (414) (415) (416) (417)
Spring, Feed Limit Valve Ring, Retainer Valve, Feed Limit Seal, O-ring Plug Filter Plug, Screen Screen Assembly, Force Motor Solenoid, Torque Conv. Clutch ON/OFF N.C. Plug Retainer
Overdrive Internal Components
252RW003
Legend (501) Retainer, 4th Clutch (502) Plate, 4th Clutch (Steel) (503) Plate Assembly, 4th Clutch (Lined) (504) Retainer and Ball Assembly, Check Valve (505) Seal, O-ring/Turbine Shaft (506) Shaft, Turbine (508) Ring, Oil Seal/Turbine Shaft (510) Housing, Overrun Clutch (513) Piston, Overrun Clutch (514) Spring, Overrun Clutch Release (515) Retainer, Release Spring/Overrun Clutch (516) Roller Assembly, Overdrive Clutch (517) Cam, Overdrive Roller Clutch (518) Ring, Snap/Overrun Clutch Hub (519) Gear, Overdrive Sun
(520) (521) (522) (523) (524) (525) (526) (527) (528) (529) (530) (531) (532) (533) (534)
Plate, Waved/Overrun Clutch Plate, Overrun Clutch (Steel) Plate Assembly, Overrun Clutch (Lined) Plate, Backing/Overrun Clutch Ring, Snap/Overrun Clutch Housing Carrier Assembly, Overdrive Complete Ring, Snap/Turbine Shaft/Carrier Bearing Assembly, Thrust Gear, Overdrive Internal Washer, Thrust/Internal Gear/Support Ring, Snap/Adapter/4th Clutch Spring Retainer and spring assembly, 4th clutch Piston, 4th Clutch Seal, 4th Clutch Piston (Inner) Seal, 4th Clutch Piston (outer)
Internal Components
247RW002
Legend (608) Seal, Reverse Clutch Piston (Inner) (609) Seal, Reverse Clutch Piston (Outer) (610) Piston, Reverse Clutch (611) Spring, Piston Clutch (612) Seat, Spring/Reverse Clutch (613) Ring, Retaining (614) Plate, Waved/Reverse Clutch (615) Plate, Reverse Clutch (Steel) (616) Plate Assembly, Reverse Clutch (Lined) (617) Plate, Reverse Clutch Pressure/Selective (618) Drum Assembly, 2nd Clutch (620) Seal, 2nd Clutch Piston (Inner) (621) Seal, 2nd Clutch Piston (Outer) (622) Piston, 2nd Clutch (623) Seat, Spring/2nd Clutch (625) Plate, Waved/2nd Clutch (626) Plate, 2nd Clutch (Steel)
(627) (628) (629) (630) (631) (632) (634) (635) (636) (637) (638) (639) (640) (641) (642) (643) (644) (645)
Plate Assembly, 2nd Clutch (Lined) Spacer, 2nd Clutch Ring, Retaining Gear, Ring Washer, Thrust/2nd Clutch/3rd Clutch Thrust Washer, Clutch Hub Drum Assembly, 3rd Clutch Seal, 3rd clutch piston (Inner) Washer, Retaining Seal, 3rd Clutch Piston (Outer) Piston 3rd Clutch Seat, Spring/3rd Clutch Ring, Retaining Plate, Spring Cushion/3rd Clutch Plate, 3rd Clutch (Steel) Plate Assembly, 3rd Clutch (Lined) Washer, Thrust/Input Sun Bearing, Input Shaft/Gear Assembly

(646) (647) (648) (649) (650) (651) (652) (653) Gear Assembly, Input Sun Race Assembly, Sprag Ring, Retaining/Sprag Ring, Retaining Cage Assembly, Sprag Bearing, Output Shaft/Input Sun Washer, Output Shaft/Input Sun Carrier Assembly, Planetary (658) (659) (664) (667) (668) (672) (673) (675) Gear, Reaction Sun Drum, Reaction Sun Band Assembly, Brake Seal, Ring/Wheel Parking Lock Wheel, Parking Lock Wheel, Speed Ring, Retaining Bearing, Thrust Assembly
Center Support Assembly
242RY002
Legend (701) Center Support (702) Retainer Plate (703) Plug, Lockout
(704) Spring, Lockout (705) Valve, Overrun Lockout (706) Valve, Reverse Lockout Control (V6)
SECTION
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (4L30E)
RODEO
7A11
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (4L30E) (V6 3.2L)
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Control Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powertrain Control Module (PCM) . . . . . . . Control System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Band Apply Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Converter Clutch Control . . . . . . . . . Line Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OnBoard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . FailSafe Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Management Control . . . . . . . . . . . . ATF Warning Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse Lock Out Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downhill Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uphill Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Shift Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions of Input / Output Components . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Trans Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Trans Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech 2 OBD II Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OBD II Diagnostic Management System . . 16 Terminal Data Link Connector (DLC) . Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) . . . . . . . . DTC Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear DTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information On PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittent Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission and PCM Identification . . . . . Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0218 Transmission Fluid Over Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A12 7A12 7A13 7A14 7A15 7A16 7A16 7A16 7A16 7A16 7A16 7A16 7A16 7A16 7A16 7A16 7A17 7A18 7A19 7A19 7A110 7A111 7A111 7A111 7A111 7A112 7A113 7A118 7A119 7A120 7A121 7A121 7A122 7A122 7A122 7A122 7A123 7A124 7A125 7A126 DTC P0705 Transmission Range Switch (Mode Switch) Illegal Position . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0706 Transmission Range Switch (Mode Switch) Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0711 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0712 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit Low Input . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0713 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit High Input . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0719 Brake Switch Circuit Low (Stuck On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0722 Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor (OSS) Low Input . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0723 Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor (OSS) Intermittent . . . . . . . . . DTC P0724 Brake Switch Circuit High (Stuck Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0730 Gear Error Without Input Speed DTC P0742 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) System Stuck On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0748 Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) (Force Motor) Circuit Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0751 Shift Solenoid A Performance (Stuck Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0752 Shift Solenoid A Performance (Stuck On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0753 Shift Solenoid A Electrical . . . . . DTC P0756 Shift Solenoid B Performance (Stuck Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0757 Shift Solenoid B Performance (Stuck On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P0758 Shift Solenoid B Electrical . . . . . DTC P1850 Brake Band Apply Solenoid Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC P1860 TCC Solenoid Electrical . . . . . . . DTC P1870 Transmission Component Slipping (TCC Stuck Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Harness Connector Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A128 7A131 7A134 7A137 7A140 7A143 7A146 7A149 7A152 7A154 7A157 7A159 7A161 7A163 7A165 7A168 7A170 7A172 7A176 7A180 7A183 7A185 7A187 7A188
7A12
Service Precaution
General Description
The 4L30E is a 4speed fully automatic transmission. It uses a microcomputer as a control unit to judge running conditions including throttle opening rate and vehicle speed, then it sets the shifting point in the optimum timing so that best driving performance can be achieved. In addition, the builtin shift mode select function can select three shift modes according to the drivers preference: D Normal mode Normal shift pattern. D Winter mode Starts in 3rd gear to reduce slippage on ice or snow. D Power mode has a delayed upshift when more powerful acceleration is required. Also, the builtin failsafe function (backup mode) assures driving performance even if the vehicle speed sensor, throttle signal or any solenoid fails. Further, the selfdiagnostic function conducts diagnosis in a short time when the control system fails, thus improving serviceability. The major features of 4L30E are as follows: D A compact structure consisting of 2 sets of planetary gears and flat torque converter. D Electronic control selects the optimum shift mode according to the driving conditions. D Electronic control maintains the optimum hydraulic pressure for clutch, band brake as well as transmission so that shift feeling is improved. D Two sets of planetary gears reduce friction of power train. Also, a lockup mechanism in the torque converter reduces fuel consumption. D Wide gear ratio and high torque rate of torque converter provide excellent starting performance.
7A13
Electronic Control Diagram
C07RY00035
7A14
C07R100004
7A15
Control System Diagram
C07R100005
7A16
Shift Control
The transmission gear is shifted according to the shift pattern selected by the driver. In shifting gears, the gear ratio is controlled by the ON/ OFF signal using the shift solenoid A and the shift solenoid B.
FailSafe Mechanism
If there is a problem in the transmission system, the PCM will go into a backup mode. The vehicle can still be driven, but the driver must use the select lever to shift gears.
Band Apply Control

The band apply is controlled when in the 32 downshift (engine overrun prevention) and the garage shift (shock control). The band apply solenoid is controlled by the signal from the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) to regulate the flow of the oil.
Torque Management Control

The transmission control side sends the absolute spark advance signal to the engine control side while the transmission is being shifted. This controls the engine spark timing in compliance with the vehicle running condition to reduce the shocks caused by the change of speed.
Torque Converter Clutch Control

The clutch ON/OFF is controlled by moving the converter clutch valve through shifting Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) solenoid using the ON/OFF signal.
ATF Warning Control

The oil temperature sensor detects the ATF oil temperature to control the oil temperature warning, TCC, and the winter mode.
Line Pressure Control

The throttle signal allows the current signal to be sent to the force motor. After receiving the current signal, the force motor activates the pressure regulator valve to regulate the line pressure.
Reverse Lock Out Control

With the selector lever in reverse position, the PCM will not close the PWM solenoid until the vehicle is below 15 km/h (9.3 mph), thus preventing reverse engagement above this speed.
OnBoard Diagnostic System

Several malfunction displays can be stored in the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) memory, and read out of it afterward. The serial data lines, which are required for the testing of the final assembly and the coupling to other electronic modules, can be regulated by this function.
Downhill Control
This mode is automatically activated from NORMAL mode only when downhill conditions are recognized. The shift pattern is identical to NORMAL mode except 3-4 and 4-3 shift lines at low throttle modified to get engine braking on a larger speed range.
Uphill Control
When uphill condition are recognized the 2-3 and 3-4 shift and TCC apply are down only when the engine torque is sufficient in order to avoid shift hunting.
7A17
Shift Mode Control
F07RX001
7A18
Gear Shift Control
F07RT034
7A19
Winter Drive Mode

1. The winter switch will operate when switched on after all of the following conditions are present: a. The gear select position is D range only. b. Vehicle speed is 7 mph (11 km/h) or less. c. Transmission oil temperature is 130C (266F) or less. d. Accelerator opening is at 8% or less. 2. Cancel Release 1. Cancellation by driver a. Turning off the winter drive mode switch b. Shifting select position to 3, 2, or L (Winter drive mode is not canceled by selecting N, R, or P) c. Ignition key is turned off. 2. Automatic cancellation a. When vehicle runs at 21mph (34 km/h) or more for 1 second or more b. When transmission oil temperature reaches 130C (266F) or above NOTE: The mode returns to normal drive mode or power drive mode after the winter drive mode is canceled.
Backup Mode
If a major system failure occurs which could affect safety or damage the transmission under normal vehicle operation, the diagnostic system detects the fault and overrides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The CHECK TRANS light flashes to alert the driver, and the transmission must be manually shifted as follows: Select lever position D Manual 3 Manual 2 Manual L R Gear Ratio Selected 4 (Fourth) 4 (Fourth) 3 (Third) 1 (First) Reverse
Shifts are firmer to prevent clutch slip and consequent wear. The fault should be corrected as soon as possible.
7A110 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (4L30E)
Functions of Input / Output Components

Components Speed sensor (fixed to transmission) Throttle position sensor (TPS) (fixed to engine) Brake switch I (fixed to brake pedal) N P Mode switch U (Fixed to transmission) T Power drive switch (fixed to front console) S T/M oil temperature sensor I G Engine coolant N temperature sensor A Engine speed signal L Air conditioning information Winter switch (fixed to front console) Cruise controller (Overdrive OFF signal) O U T P U T S I G N A L Shift solenoid A, B S O Band apply solenoid L E N Torque Converter O Clutch solenoid I Force motor D (Pressure control solenoid) Power drive mode lamp Winter drive mode lamp CHECK TRANS lamp ATF warning lamp Function Senses rotation of output shaft and feeds the data to Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Senses the extent of throttle valve opening and the speed of the throttle valve lever motion to open the valve and feeds the data to PCM. Senses whether the driver has pressed the brake pedal or not and feeds the information to PCM. Senses the select lever position, and feeds the information to PCM. Senses whether the driver has selected the power mode, and feeds the information to PCM. Senses the T/M oil temperature and feeds the data to PCM. Senses the engine coolant temperature, and feeds the data to PCM. Feeds the signals monitoring engine speed to PCM from crank angle sensor. Senses whether the air conditioner has been switched on or not, and feeds the information to PCM. Senses whether the driver has selected the winter mode, and feeds the information to PCM. Downshift takes place when overdrive OFF signal is received from auto cruise controller integrated in PCM. Selects shift point and gear position suited to the vehicle running condition on the basis of PCM output. Controls oil flow suited to the vehicle running condition on the basis of PCM output. Controls clutch engagement/disengagement suited to the vehicle running condition on the basis of PCM output. Adjusts the oil pump delivery pressure to line pressure suited to the vehicle running condition on the basis of PCM output. Informs the driver whether the vehicle is in power mode or not. Informs the driver whether the vehicle is in winter mode or not. Informs the driver of failure in the system. Lights when ATF oil temperature rises. (only 44)
7A111
Diagnosis
Electronic Diagnosis How To Diagnose The Problem
1. To avoid incorrect diagnostics, this book needs to be followed accurately. Unless stated, do not jump directly to a section that could contain the solution. Some important information may be missed. 2. The sections in CAPITALS and bold are the main sections that can be found in the contents. 3. The go to SECTION means to continue to check going to the section. 4. The go through SECTION means to go through the section and then to go back to the place the go through was written. 5. BASIC ELECTRIC CIRCUITS: You should understand the basic theory of electricity. This includes the meaning of voltage, amps, ohms, and what happens in a circuit with an open or shorted wire. You should also be able to read and understand wiring diagrams.
Diagnostic Check
This test determines if the transmission or its input or output connections or sensors are failing. 1. Connect the Tech 2: Go through Tech 2 OBD II CONNECTION. 2. Turn on the ignition but not the engine. 3. Push F0 on Tech 2 to see the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC): 4. Do you have a DTC? YES: write down all code numbers and do the DTC CHECK NO: the DTC can not help you find the problem. 1. Go through CHECK TRANS CHECK 2. IF it is flashing and the flash is 0.5 seconds ON and 0.5 seconds OFF, this means that you should have a DTC stored. Please recheck go to DIAGNOSTIC CHECK and if you find the same problem, replace the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Normal
Check Trans Indicator

Find CHECK TRANS indicator and verify if it is A. Flashing: Go to DIAGNOSTIC CHECK. B. Staying on: Go through CHECK TRANS CHECK. C. Is never ON when the ignition key is turned on: Go through CHECK TRANS CHECK D. Is ON during 2 seconds at ignition but OFF after: Normal operation. No DTC or malfunction.
C07RY005
Abnormal
821RY00067
C07RY00042
Check Trans Check

1. Indicator is ON during 2 seconds at ignition (or when the engine is cranked) but it is OFF after the engine starts. The indicator is working normally go to DIAGNOSTIC CHECK.
2. Indicator is flashing and the flash is 0.5 seconds ON and 0.5 seconds OFF always when ignition is on (engine cranked or not). This means that there is a malfunction. Go to DIAGNOSTIC CHECK. Abnormal
C07RY00042 821RY00067
Normal
3. Indicator is staying ON always when Ignition is ON. 1. This means that connection between the lamp and the indicator control unit is shorted to ground. 2. Verify if instrument panel terminal 27 of connector I1 is shorted to ground. 3. Verify if the indicator control unit connector B26 terminal 20 is shorted to ground. 4. Verify that the instrument panel terminal 14 of connector I1 is connected to battery. 5. If problem solved: Go to CHECK TRANS INDICATOR. NO:Replace Powertrain Control Module (PCM). 4. Indicator is staying OFF with the ignition ON (engine OFF). 1. This means that connection between the lamp and the indicator control unit is shorted to battery or opened.
C07RY005
2. Verify if instrument panel terminal 27 of connector I1 is shorted to battery or open. 3. Verify if the indicator control unit connector B26 terminal 20 is shorted to battery or open. 4. Verify that the instrument panel terminal 14 of connector I1 is connected to battery. If not, check the fuses and the connections (terminal 3 of connector H18) voltage.

5. If problem solved: Go to CHECK TRANS INDICATOR. NO: Replace Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
7A113
D07RY00028
Tech 2 OBD II Connection

In order to access OBD II Powertrain Control Module (PCM) data, use of the Tech 2 scan tool kit (7000086) is required. 1. The electronic diagnosis equipment is composed of: 1. Tech 2 hand held scan tool unit (7000057) and DLC cable (3000095).
2. SAE 16/19 Pin Adapter (3000098)(1), RS232 Loop Back Connector (3000112)(2), and PCMCIA Card (3000117)(3).
F07RW033
901RW176

2. Connecting the Tech 2
901RW180
Legend (1) PCMCIA Card (2) RS 232 Loop Back Connector D Before operating the Isuzu PCMCIA card with the Tech 2, the following steps must be performed: 1. The Isuzu 2001 System PCMCIA card (1) inserts into the Tech 2 (5). 2. Connect the SAE 16/19 adapter (3) to the DLC cable (4). 3. Connect the DLC cable to the Tech 2 (5) 4. Mark sure the vehicle ignition is off.
(3) SAE 16/19 Adapter (4) DLC Cable (5) Tech 2

5. Connect the Tech 2 SAE 16/19 adapter to the vehicle DLC.
7A115
8. The power up screen is displayed when you power up the tester with the Isuzu systems PCMCIA card. Follow the operating procedure below.
740RW060
6. The vehicle ignition turns on. 7. Verify the Tech 2 power up display.
060RW009
060R100074
NOTE: The RS232 Loop back connector is only to use for diagnosis of Tech 2 and refer to user guide of the Tech 2.

Once the test vehicle has been identified an Application (Powertrain) Menu screen appears. Please select the appropriate application. The following table shows, which functions are used for the available equipment versions. F0: Diagnostic Trouble Codes F0: Read DTC Info Ordered By Priority F1: Clear DTC Information F2: DTC Information F1: Data Display F0: Transmission Data F2: Snap Shot F3: Actuator Tests F0: Lamps F0: Check Light F1: Winter Drive Lamp F2: Power Drive Lamp F3: AT Oil Temperature Lamp F1: Solenoids F0: Solenoid 1-2/3-4 Test F1: Solenoid 2-3 Test F2: TCC Solenoid F3: Band Apply Solenoid F4: Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) F4: Function Tests F0: Reset Oil Life Monitor
060R100075

Diagnostic Trouble Codes The purpose of the Diagnostic Trouble Codes mode is to display stored PCM trouble codes. When Diagnostic Trouble Codes is selected an Application Menu screen appears. Clear DTC Information The purpose of the Clear DTC Information mode is to command the clearing of stored PCM trouble codes. When Clear DTC Information is selected, a Clear DTC Information, warning screen appears. This screen informs you that by cleaning DTCs, all stored DTC information in controller will be erased. Do you want to clear DTCs (Yes/No). Press either the Yes or No key when answering. After clearing codes, confirm system operation by test driving the vehicle. Allow the vehicle to shift through all four forward gears in a manner which attempts to repeat the failure condition. NOTE: When the trouble has not been repaired and the trouble code cannot be erased, check the vehicle again. DTC Information When DTC Information is selected, an Application Menu appears with a list of DTC information function keys addressing DTC specifics and their origins. Function key selections may vary for particular vehicle and/or system. Data Display The purpose of the Data Display mode is to continuously monitor data parameters. The current actual values of all important sensors and signals in the system are display through F1 mode. When Data Display is selected an Application Menu appears. Please select either Engine or Transmission Data Display. See Transmission Data on next page. Snapshot When Snapshot is selected an Application Menu appears. When Transmission Snapshot application is selected from the Application Menu, a Snapshot Menu appears, displaying several options. Snapshot options may vary from one system to another. Snapshot allows a recording of all vehicle parameters. There parameters may then be replayed at a future point in time. This action allows you to focus on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all of the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot will collect parameter information around a trigger point that you select. When a snapshot is taken. It is recorded onto the PCMCIA memory card. When the Tech 2 is powered down. Snapshots are not lost. Actuator Tests The purpose of Actuator Tests mode is to check for correct operation of electronic system actuators.
7A117
Lamps You can operate the lamps by pressing the ON and OFF buttons. Preconditions: none Solenoid Solenoid 1-2/3-4, Solenoid 2-3, TCC Solenoid You can operate the solenoids by pressing the ON and OFF buttons. Preconditions: PN position, no vehicle speed, no engine speed Band Apply Solenoid You can operate the solenoid by pressing the ON and OFF buttons. Preconditions: P-N position, idle engine speed, no vehicle speed. Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) You can set desired PCS Current using the Increment (+20) and Decrement (20) button. The PC Solenoid Data informs about PCS Current, Pressure and Duty Cycle. Preconditions: PN position, no engine speed, no vehicle speed Reset Oil Life Monitor Displays parameter Oil Life Monitor and resets to 100% if Yes-button is pressed on Reset-question. No leaves test. NOTE: Freeze Frame (Powertrain DTC A/B Type) Freeze Frame is an element of the Diagnostic Management System which stores various vehicle information at the moment an emission-related fault is stored in memory and when the MIL is commanded on. These data can help to identity the cause of a fault. Refer to Storing And Erasing Freeze Frame Data for more detailed information. Failure Records (Powertrain DTC C/D Type) Failure Records data is an enhancement of the OBD II Freeze Frame feature. Failure Records store the same vehicle information as does Freeze Frame, but it will store that information for any fault which is stored in onboard memory, while Freeze Frame sotres information only for emission-related faults that commands the MIL on.
Transmission Data
Item Ignition Voltage Engine Speed Vehicle Speed AT Output Speed (Automatic Transmission) AT Input Speed Ratio (Automatic Transmission) Throttle Position AT Oil Temperature (Automatic Transmission) Transmission Temperature AT Oil Temperature Lamp (Automatic Transmission) AT Oil Life Monitor (Automatic Transmission) AT Oil Life Lamp (Automatic Transmission) Commanded Gear Current Gear Mode Switch A Mode Switch B Mode Switch C Mode Switch G Selector Position 12 Shift Solenoid A 23 Shift Solenoid B Solenoid Brake Band TCC Slip Speed TCC Solenoid TCC Duty Cycle PCS Current (Pressure Control Solenoid) PCS Duty Cycle (Pressure Control Solenoid) Desired PCS Pressure (Pressure Control Solenoid) Shift Pressure Brake Switch Winter Switch Winter Drive Lamp Power Switch Power Drive Lamp Emergency Mode ABS Status On/Off On/Off On/Off RPM On/Off % A % kPa kPa On/Off On/Off On/Off Normal On/Off Inactive, Active On/Off Inactive/Active Inactive/Active Inactive/Active Inactive/Active % C, F C, F On/Off % On/Off Unit V RPM km/h, MPH RPM Engine running at idle 12.8 14.1 V 750 900 RPM 0 MPH 0 RPM 0 0% 70 80C (158 176F) 75 110C (167 230F) Off 100 % Not used 1 1 Active Inactive Inactive Active Park Off On Off 750 900 RPM Off 0% approx. 1.0 A approx. 45 60 % 43 52 kPa 43 52 kPa On Off Off Normal Off Inactive (Not used)
7A119
OBD II Diagnostic Management System

Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Location
825R100018
826RY002
Class 2 Serial Data Bus OBD II technology requires a much more sophisticated PCM than does OBD I technology. The OBD II PCM diagnostic management system not only monitors systems and components that can impact emissions, but they also run active tests on these systems and components. The decision making functions of OBD II PCM have also greatly increased. To accommodate this expansion in diagnostic complexity, Isuzu engineers have designed the Class 2 serial data bus, which meets SAE J1850 recommended practice for serial data. Serial Data refers to information which is transferred in a linear fashion over a single line, one bit at a time. A Data Bus is an electronic pathway through which serial data travels.
RODEO previously used a 5 volt data bus called UART, which is an acronym for Universal Asynchronous Receive and Transmit. When neither the vehicles control module nor the diagnostic tool, such as a Tech 2, are talking, the voltage level of the bus at rest is 5 volts. The two computers talk to each other at a rate of 8,192 bits per second, by toggling or switching the voltage on the data bus from 5 volts to ground. Class 2 data, which is used on OBD II vehicles, is quite different. Data is transferred at a rate of 10.4 kilobits per second, and the voltage is toggled between zero and 7 volts.
C07RT006
Class 2 data is also pulse width modulated. Each bit of information can have one of two lengths: long or short. On the other hand, UART data bits come in only one length (short). The pulse width modulation of Class 2 data allows better utilization of the data line. The message carried on Class 2 data streams are also prioritized. This means that if two devices try to communicate on the data line at the same time, only the higher priority message will continue. The device with the lower priority message must wait. NOTE: The Class 2 data wire is always terminal 2 of the new 16terminal Data Link Connector (DLC).
16 Terminal Data Link Connector (DLC)

OBD II standardizes Data Link Connector (DLC) configurations. The DLC, formerly referred to as the ALDL, will be a 16terminal connector found on the lower left side of the drivers side instrument panel. All manufacturers must conform to this 16terminal standard.
826RW002
7A121
810RT022
PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 9 PIN 10 PIN 11 PIN 12 PIN 13 PIN 14 PIN 15 PIN 16
(Not used) J1850 Bus + L line on 2wire systems, or single wire (Class 2) (Not used) Chassis ground pin Signal ground pin (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) Primary UART (Not used) (Not used) ABS diagnostic or CCM diagnostic enable SIR diagnostic enable (Not used) (Not used) Battery power from vehicle unswitched (4 AMP MAX.)

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) looks the same as the MIL you are already familiar with (CHECK ENGINE lamp). However, OBD II requires for it illuminate under a strict set of guidelines. Basically, the MIL is turned on when the PCM detects a DTC that will impact the vehicles emissions. The MIL is under the control of the Diagnostic Executive. The MIL will be turned on if a component or system which has an impact on vehicle emissions indicates a malfunction or fails to pass an emissionsrelated diagnostic test. It will stay on until the system or component passes the same test, for three consecutive trips, with no emissionsrelated faults.
following are the four (4) types of DTCs and the characteristics of those codes: D Type A D Emissions related D Requests illumination of the MIL of the first trip with a fail D Stores a History DTC on the first trip with a fail D Stores a Freeze Frame (if empty) (DTC Information for 6VD1 engine) D Stores a Fail Record D Updates the Fail Record each time the diagnostic test fails D Type B D Emissions related D Armed after one (1) trip with a fail D Disarmed after one (1) trip with a pass D Requests illumination of the MIL on the second consecutive trip with a fail D Stores a History DTC on the second consecutive trip with a fail (The DTC will be armed after the first fail) D Stores a Freeze Frame on the second consecutive trip with a fail (if empty) (DTC Information for 6VD1 engine) D Stores a Fail Record when the first test fails (not dependent on consecutive trip fails) D Updates the Fail Record each time the diagnostic test fails (Some special conditions apply to misfire and fuel trim DTCs) D Type C (if the vehicle is so equipped) D Non-Emissions related D Requests illumination of the Service Lamp or the service message on the Drive Information Center (DIC) on the first trip with a fail D Stores a History DTC on the first trip with a fail D Does not store a Freeze Frame D Stores Fail Record when test fails D Updates the Fail Record each time the diagnostic test fails D Type D D Non-Emissions related D Not request illumination of any lamp D Stores a History DTC on the first trip with a fail D Does not store a Freeze Frame D Stores Fail Record when test fails D Updates the Fail Record each time the diagnostic test fails IMPORTANT: Only four Fail Records can be stored. Each Fail Record is for a different DTC. It is possible that there will not be Fail Records for every DTC if multiple DTCs are set.
DTC Types
Each DTC is directly related to a diagnostic test. The Diagnostic Management System sets DTC based on the failure of the tests during a trip or trips. Certain tests must fail two (2) consecutive trips before the DTC is set. The
Clear DTC
NOTE: If you clear the DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Codes) you will not be able to read any codes recorded during the last occurrence. NOTE: To use the DTC again to identify a problem, you will need to reproduce the fault or the problem. This may require a new test drive or just turning the ignition on (this depends on the nature of the fault). 1. IF you have a Tech 2: 1. Connect the Tech 2 if it is still not connected go through Tech 2 OBD II CONNECTION. 2. Push F1: Clear DTC Information in the Application Menu and answer Yes to the question Do you want to clear DTCs? a. When a malfunction still exists and the Tech 2 displays 4L30E CODES NOT CLEARED. This means that the problem is still there or that the recovery was not done. Please go to DTC CHECK. b. When a malfunction has been repaired and the recovery is done the Tech 2 displays 4L30E CODES CLEARED. 2. IF you have no Tech 2, disconnect the PCM battery feed as necessary.
2. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat, in which a charge of as much as 25,000 volts can build up. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges for the same polarity are drained off, leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges of either type can cause damage, therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. NOTICE: To discharge damage: prevent possible electrostatic
DTC Check
1. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) have been identified by Tech 2. 2. You have written the list of the DTCs. The order of the malfunctions has no meanings for this PCM. Usually only one or two malfunctions should be set for a given problem. 3. Check directly the DTCs you identified. The DTCs are sorted by number. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Identification in this section.
1. Do not touch the PCM connector pins or soldered components on the PCM circuit board. 2. Be sure to follow the guidelines listed below if servicing any of these electronic components: 3. Do not open the replacement part package until it is time to install the part. 4. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part. 5. Before removing the part from its package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. 6. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This step should be repeated before installing the part if the part has been handled while sliding across the seat, while sitting down from a standing position or while walking some distance.
Information On PCM
1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located in the engine room and is the control center of the electronic transmission control system. 2. The PCM must be maintained at a temperature below 85C (185F) at all times. This is most essential if the vehicle is put through a paint baking process. The PCM will become inoperative if its temperature exceeds 85C (185F). Therefore, it is recommended that the PCM be removed or that temporary insulation be placed around the PCM during the time the vehicle is in a paint oven or other high temperature process. 3. The PCM is designed to process the various inputs and then respond by sending the appropriate electrical signals to control transmission upshift, downshift, shift feel and torque converter clutch engagement. 4. The PCM constantly interprets information from the various sensors, and controls the systems that affect transmission and vehicle performance. By analyzing operational problems, the PCM is able to perform a diagnostic function by displaying DTC(s) and aid the technician in making repairs.
PCM Precaution
The PCM can be damaged by: 1. The electrostatic discharge 2. The short circuit of some terminals to voltage or to ground. Electrostatic Discharge Damage Description: 1. Electronic components used to control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage, and are very susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. It is possible for less than 100 volts of static electricity to cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4,000 volts for a person to even feel the zap of a static discharge.
7A123
Intermittent Conditions
If the Tech 2 displays a diagnostic trouble code as intermittent, or if after a test drive a DTC does not reappear though the detection conditions for this DTC are present, the problem is most likely a faulty electrical connection or loose wiring. Terminals and grounds should always be the prime suspect. Intermittents rarely occur inside sophisticated electronic components such as the PCM. Use the DTC information to understand which wires and sensors are involved. When an intermittent problem is encountered, check suspect circuits for: 1. Poor terminal to wire connection. 2. Terminals not fully seated in the connector body (backed out). 3. Improperly formed or damaged terminals. 4. Loose, dirty, or corroded ground connections: HINT: Any time you have an intermittent in more than one circuit, check whether the circuits share a common ground connection. 5. Pinched or damaged wires. 6. Electromagnetic Interference (EMI): HINT: Check that all wires are properly routed away from coil, and generator. Also check for improperly installed electrical options, such as lights, 2way radios, etc. Use the F2: SNAPSHOT mode of the Tech 2 to help isolate the cause of an intermittent fault. The snapshot mode will record information before and after the problem occurs. Set the snapshot to trigger on the suspect DTC or, if you notice the reported symptom during the test drive, trigger the snapshot manually. After the snapshot has been triggered, command the Tech 2 to play back the flow of data recorded from each of the various sensors. Sign of an intermittent fault in a sensor circuit is a sudden unexplainable jump in data values out of the normal range.
Transmission and PCM Identification

The chart below contains a list of all important information concerning rear axle ratio, Powertrain Control Module (PCM), and transmission identification. VEHICLE Type Isuzu / Rodeo Engine Rr axle Ratio PCM ISUZU Parts No. 8122063690 8122063590 Calibration Code I36 I36 TRANSMISSION Isuzu Part No. 8960185550 8960228380 Model Code FT (44) FU (42)
3 2L V6 3.2L
4 100 4.100
240RY00040
7A125
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Identification

DTC NUMBER P0218 P0705 P0706 P0711 P0712 P0713 P0719 P0722 P0723 P0724 P0730 P0742 P0748 P0751 P0752 P0753 P0756 P0757 P0758 P1850 P1860 P1870 DTC NAME Transmission Fluid Over Temperature Transmission Range Switch (Mode Switch) Illegal Position Transmission Range Switch (Mode Switch) Performance Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Performance Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit Low Input Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit High Input Brake Switch Circuit Low (Stuck On) Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor (OSS) Low Input Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor (OSS) Intermittent Brake Switch Circuit High (Stuck Off) Gear Error Without Input Speed Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) System Stuck On Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) (Force Motor) Circuit Electrical Shift Solenoid A Performance (Stuck Off) Shift Solenoid A Performance (Stuck On) Shift Solenoid A Electrical Shift Solenoid B Performance (Stuck Off) Shift Solenoid B Performance (Stuck On) Shift Solenoid B Electrical Brake Band Apply Solenoid Malfunction TCC Solenoid Electrical Transmission Component Slipping (TCC Stuck Off) DTC TYPE D D D D D D D B B D C B C B B B B B B D B B ON ON Flash Flash ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash ON ON Flash Flash MIL CHECK ENGINE CHECK TRANS
DTC TYPE B C D
DEFINITION Emission related, turn on MIL (Check Engine) and flashing Check Trans after 2 consecutive trips (Removal to confirmed) Nonemission related, flashing Check Trans on 1st failure Nonemission related, no lamps
NOTE: On the following charts, refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) section for Wiring System and the Body and Accessories section for circuit diagram details, parts location, and connector configuration.
DTC P0218 Transmission Fluid Over Temperature
D07RY00029
Circuit Description
The Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) sensor is a thermister that controls the signal voltage to the PCM. The PCM supplies a 5volt reference to the sensor on circuit RED/BLK. When the transmission fluid is cold, the sensor resistance is high and the PCM will sense high signal voltage. As the fluid temperature warms to a normal transmission operating temperature of 100C (212F), the sensor resistance becomes less and the voltage decreases to 1.5 to 2.0 volts. This DTC detects a high transmission temperature for a long period of time. This is a type D DTC.
D The PCM will cancel the DTC default actions when the fault no longer exists and the ignition is cycled off long enough to power down the PCM.
Diagnostic Aids
D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections at the PCM and transmission 7-way connector. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change. D Check harness routing for a potential short to ground in circuit RED/BLK. D Scan tool TFT sensor temperature should rise steadily to about 100C (212F), then stabilize. D Check for a skewed (misscaled) sensor by comparing the TFT sensor temperature to the ambient temperature after a vehicle cold soak. A skewed sensor can cause delayed garage shifts or TCC complaints. D Check for a possible torque converter stator problem. D Verify customer driving habits, trailer towing, etc.
Conditions For Setting The DTC

D No TFT DTCs P0712 or P0713. D TFT is greater than 135C (275F). D All conditions met for 21 seconds.
Action Taken When The DTC Sets

D Hot mode TCC Shift Pattern. D The PCM will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). D ATF Lamp ON. (TFT is greater than 145C (293F)) D Disable Eside TCC OFF request.
Conditions For Clearing The DTC

D The DTC can be cleared from the PCM history by using a scan tool. D The DTC will be cleared from history when the vehicle has achieved 40 warmup cycles without a failure reported.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart. 3. This test checks for a skewed sensor or shorted circuit. 4. This test simulates a TFT DTC P0713.
7A127
DTC P0218 Transmission Fluid Over Temperature

Step 1 Action Were you sent here from the Powertrain OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check? Yes No Go to OBD System Check Refer to Driveability and Emissions in Engine section
Go to Step 2 2 Perform the following checks: D Check for possible engine system problems. D Transmission fluid checking procedure. Refer to Checking Transmission Fluid Level and Condition in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) Section. Were the checks performed? 3 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Failure Records. Is the TFT sensor signal voltage less than 0.33 volts? 4 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the transmission 7way connector (additional DTCs may set). 3. With the engine Off, turn the ignition switch On. Is the TFT sensor signal voltage greater than 4.92 volts? 5 6 Inspect/repair circuit RED/BLK for a short to ground. Was a problem found? 1. Inspect the PCM for poor connections. 2. Replace the PCM if no poor connections were found. Is the replacement complete? 7 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and ensure the following conditions are met: TFT is less than 125C (257F) for at least 10 seconds. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 E54 Go to Internal Wiring Harness Check Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 1
Repair verified Exit DTC table
DTC P0705 Transmission Range Switch (Mode Switch) Illegal Position
D07R100017
Circuit Description
D The range switch supplies the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information regarding the selector lever position: P, R, N, D, 3, 2 or L. The selector lever position is indicated by the state of four ON/OFF contacts. The range switch is located on one side of the transmission. It is on the transmission manual shaft and is fixed to the main case. D The range switch is also used to provide the information P or N to the engine crank wiring. The engine can be cranked only if connector E53 terminal 4(H) is connected to terminal 1(E) which is connected to ground. D The range switch is also used to provide the backup lamp power in reverse. This is the reason why the range switch is supplied through a 15A fuse (TURN, BACK UP). This fuse can burn due to a short circuit in the back up lamp. This DTC detects when a fuse is open or the range switch circuit does not work. This is a type D DTC.
D Turn Force Motor OFF. D The PCM will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).

D The DTC can be cleared from the PCM history by using a scan tool. D The DTC will be cleared from history when the vehicle has achieved 40 warmup cycles without a failure reported. D The PCM will cancel the DTC default actions when the fault no longer exists and the ignition is cycled off long enough to power down the PCM.
Diagnostic Aids
D Refer to accompanying chart for the normal range signals and the illegal combinations. D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections at the PCM and at the transmission 8way connector. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change. D Refer to the Range Switch Logic Table for further information.

D Range switch illegal positions met for 5 seconds.

D Default to D position. D Inhibit torque management. D Maximum line pressure.
7A129
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 3. This test checks the indicated range signal to the manual valve actually selected. 6. This test checks for continuity between each selected range switch connector terminals. Range Switch Logic Table Range g Position Park Reverse Neutral D4 D3 2 L Illegal Illegal Range Switch Pin A ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF B OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF C OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF P(G) ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
DTC P0705 Transmission Range Switch (Mode Switch) Illegal Position

Go to Step 2 2 Perform the following checks: D The transmission linkage from the select lever to the manual valve is adjusted properly. D Diagnostic circuit check. Were the checks performed? 3 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. 4. Select each transmission range: DL, D2, D3, D4, N, R, and P. Does each selected transmission range match the scan tool Range Switch display? 4 5 Are all range switch pin displays incorrect? Check fuse and wiring to the 8way connector terminal 5(D) for opens. Refer to Mode Switch in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. If no problem was found, replace the range switch. Is the replacement complete? 6 1. Disconnect the 8way range switch connector. 2. Using ohmmeter, check continuity between terminal 5(D) and respectively terminals 3(G), 6(C), 7(B) and 8(A) of the 8way range switch connector. 3. Move shift selector lever through all positions and compare results with Range Switch Logic Table. Is one range switch pin display incorrect? 7 8 Check the affected wiring and connector, and repair. Is the repair complete? Check the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) connectors for poor connection. If no problem was found, replace the PCM. Is the replacement complete? 9 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and road test the vehicle. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 9 Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 1 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 9 Go to Diagnostic Aids Go to Step 5 Go to Step 3
Go to Step 8
7A131
DTC P0706 Transmission Range Switch (Mode Switch) Performance
D07R100017
Circuit Description
D The range switch supplies the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information regarding the selector lever position: P, R, N, D, 3, 2 or L. The selector lever position is indicated by the state of four ON/OFF contacts. The range switch is located on one side of the transmission. It is on the transmission manual shaft and is fixed to the main case. D The range switch is also used to provide the information P or N to the engine crank wiring. The engine can be cranked only if connector E53 terminal 4(H) is connected to terminal 1(E) which is connected to ground. D The range switch is also used to provide the back up lamp power in reverse. This is the reason why the mode switch is supplied through a 15A fuse (TURN, BACK UP). This fuse can burn due to a short circuit in the back up lamp. D This DTC detects an invalid state of the range switch or the range switch circuit by deciphering the range switch inputs. This is a type D DTC.
D Output speed greater than 3,200 RPM. D Range switch indicates R. D All conditions met for 4 seconds.
Condition 2 (P or N bad position):

D D D D D D Engine is running. No TPS codes. Engine speed is less than 3,000 RPM. TP angle is greater than 20%. Range switch indicates P or N. All conditions met for 4 seconds.

D Default to D position. D The PCM will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).


This DTC will set if any of the following conditions occurs:
Condition 1 (R bad position):

D Engine is running. D No output speed DTCP0722, P0723.
Diagnostic Aids
D Refer to the accompanying chart for the normal range signals and the illegal combinations. D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections at the PCM and at the transmission 8way connector. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change. D Refer to the Range Switch Logic Table for further information.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 3. This test checks the indicated range signal to the manual valve actually selected. 6. This test checks for continuity between each selected range switch connector terminals. Range Switch Logic Table Range g Position Park Reverse Neutral D4 D3 2 L Illegal Illegal Range Switch Pin A ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF B OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF C OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF P(G) ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
7A133
DTC P0706 Transmission Range Switch (Mode Switch) Performance

Go to Step 2 2 Perform the following checks: D The transmission linkage from the select lever to the manual valve is adjusted properly. D Diagnostic circuit check. Were the checks performed? 3 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. 4. Select each transmission range: DL, D2, D3, D4, N, R, and P. Does each selected transmission range match the scan tool Range Switch display? 4 5 Are all range switch pin displays incorrect? Check fuse and wiring to the 8way connector terminal 5(D) for opens. Refer to Mode Switch in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. If no problem was found, replace the range switch. Is the replacement complete? 6 1. Disconnect the 8way range switch connector. 2. Using ohmmeter, check continuity between terminal 5(D) and respectively terminals 3(G), 6(C), 7(B) and 8(A) of the 8way range switch connector. 3. Move shift selector lever through all positions and compare results with Range Switch Logic Table. Is one range switch pin display incorrect? 7 8 Check the affected wiring and connector, and repair. Is the repair complete? Check the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) connectors for poor connection. If no problem was found, replace the PCM. Is the replacement complete? 9 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and road test the vehicle. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 9 Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 1 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 9 Go to Diagnostic Aids Go to Step 5 Go to Step 3
Go to Step 8
DTC P0711 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Performance
D07RY00029
Circuit Description
The TFT sensor is a thermister that controls the signal voltage to the PCM. The PCM supplies a 5 volt reference signal to the sensor on circuit RED/BLK. When the transmission fluid is cold, the sensor resistance is high and the PCM detects high signal voltage. As the transmission fluid temperature increases to normal operating temperature of 100C (212F), the sensor resistance becomes less and the voltage decreases to 1.5 to 2 volts. When the PCM detects a TFT sensor that remains at the startup value, or a sensor that has a change delta of greater than 20C (36F) less than 1 second, DTC P0711 sets. DTC P0711 is a type D.
D If the sensor shows an unrealistic change, the TFT exhibits a change delta of greater than 20C (36F), greater than 14 times in 7 seconds.

D Transmission default temperature will be: 80C (176F) if engine temperature code is set. 100C (212F) if engine temperature is warm. 80C (176F) if engine run time is greater than 5 minutes. 21C (69.8F) if engine run time is less than 5 minutes. D The PCM will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).

D D D D D D D D D D No VSS DTCs P0722 or P0723. No Transmission Component Slipping DTC P1870. Engine is running. TFT is between 20 A/D (Analog/Digital) counts and 248 A/D counts. TFT is between 40C (40F) and +21C (69.8F) at engine startup. Engine coolant temperature is greater than 70C (150F). Engine coolant temperature has changed by greater than 50C (90F) since engine startup. Vehicle speed has been greater than 5 mph for greater than 410 seconds since engine startup (cumulative timer). TCC slip speed has been greater than 120 rpm for greater than 410 seconds since engine startup (cumulative timer). Battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts.

Diagnostic Aids
D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connection at the PCM. Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections at the transmission 7-way connector. Look for the following conditions: a. A bent terminal b. A backed out terminal c. A damaged terminal d. Poor terminal tension e. A chafed wire f. A broken wire inside the insulation
All of the above is true and either of the following occurs: D If the sensor is stuck, the TFT has not changed for greater than 2 counts (from startup temperature) for greater than 410 seconds.

D When diagnosing for an intermittent short or open connection, move the wiring harness while watching the test equipment for a change. D First diagnose and clear any engine DTCs or TP Sensor codes. Then inspect for any transmission DTCs that may have reset. Resistance Chart C 40 0 20 80 120 150 F 40 32 68 176 248 304
7A135
Resistance (kW) 672 65 25 2.5 0.78 0.37
Test Description
The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic chart: 3. This test checks PCM and associated wiring up to the 7way connector E54. If the voltage increases to match chart the problem is isolated to the transmission wiring.
DTC P0711 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Performance

Step 1 Action Was the Powertrain OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Yes No Go to OBD System Check Refer to Driveability and Emissions in Engine section Go to Checking Transmission Fluid Level and Condition in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section
Go to Step 2 2 Perform the transmission fluid checking procedure. Refer to Checking Transmission Fluid Level and Condition in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Did you perform the fluid checking procedure? Go to Step 3 3 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch to the on position. NOTE: Before clearing DTCs, use the scan tool in order to record the Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference. The Clear Info function will erase the data. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. 4. Select TFT on the scan tool. 5. While observing the scan tool display, move or massage the engine wiring harness from PCM connectors J266 and J220 to the transmission 7way connector E54. Does the TFT change by more than 20C (36F)? 4 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the transmission 7way connector E54. 3. Install Jumper Harness on the transmission side of the 7way connector E54. 4. Using the J39200 DVOM and J35616 Connector Test Adapter Kit, connect the DVOM leads from terminal E544(F) to terminal E541(E). 5. Set the DVOM on MIN/MAX to measure resistance. 6. Record the TFT sensor resistance. 7. Move or massage the automatic transmission wiring harness assembly from the PCM to the TFT sensor connector. Does the DVOM MAX display a resistance greater than the value recorded in Action item 6 of this step? 5 Does the DVOM MIN display a resistance less than the value recorded in Action item 6 of step 4? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8 Go to Step 6
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 5
DTC P0711 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Performance (Contd)

Step 6 Action Inspect circuit RED/BLK and RED/WHT of the engine wiring harness for an intermittent open or short condition. Repair the circuits if necessary. Did you find a problem? 7 Inspect the automatic transmission wiring harness assembly for an intermittent open in circuits RED/BLK and RED/WHT. Did you find a problem? 8 Inspect the automatic transmission wiring harness assembly for an intermittent shorted condition in circuits RED/BLK and RED/WHT. Did you find a problem? 9 10 Replace the automatic transmission wiring harness assembly. Is the replacement complete? Replace TFT Sensor. Refer to Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor (Main Case) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 11 Replace the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 12 In order to verify your repair, perform the following procedure. 1. Select DTC. 2. Select Clear Info. 3. Drive the vehicle and ensure the following conditions are met: D The TFT changes by more than 2.25C (4.05F) for 11 seconds since startup. D The TFT does not change by more than 20C (36F) within 0.200 second for a period of at least 11 seconds. 4. Select Specific DTC. 5. Enter DTC P0711. Has the test run and passed? System OK Go to Step 12 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 11 Yes No
Begin the diagnosis again Go to Step 1
7A137
DTC P0712 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit Low Input
D07RY00029
Circuit Description
The TFT sensor is a thermister that controls the signal voltage to the PCM. The PCM supplies a 5volt reference signal to the sensor on circuit RED/BLK. When the transmission fluid is cold, the sensor resistance is high. The PCM detects high signal voltage. As the transmission fluid temperature increases to the normal operating temperature of 100C (212F), the sensor resistance becomes less and the voltage decreases to 1.5 to 2 volts. With transmission fluid over temperature and DTC P0218 also set, check the transmission cooling system. This DTC detects a continuous short to ground in the TFT signal circuit or the TFT sensor. This is a type D DTC.
D The DTC will be cleared from history when the vehicle has achieved 40 warmup cycles without a failure reported. D The PCM will cancel the DTC default actions when the fault no longer exists and the ignition is cycled off long enough to power down the PCM.
Diagnostic Aids
D Check harness routing for a potential short to ground in circuit RED/BLK. Scan tool TFT display should rise steadily to about 100C (212F), then stabilize. D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connection at the PCM and transmission 7-way connector. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change. D The temperature to resistance value scale may be used to test the TFT sensor at the various temperature levels to evaluate the possibility of a skewed (misscaled) sensor. A skewed sensor could result in delayed garage shifts or TCC complaints. D Verify customer driving habits, trailer towing, etc.

D D D D Battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition is on. TFT sensor indicating a voltage less than 0.4 volts. All conditions met for 20 seconds.

Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 3. This test checks for a short to ground or a skewed sensor. 4. This test checks for an internal fault within the transmission by creating an open.

D The DTC can be cleared from the PCM history by using a scan tool.

Resistance Chart C 40 0 20 80 120 150 F 40 32 68 176 248 304 Resistance (kW) 672 65 25 2.5 0.78 0.37
DTC P0712 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit Low Input
Step 1 Action Were you sent here from the Powertrain OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check? Yes No Go to OBD System Check Refer to Driveability and Emissions in Engine section Refer to Checking Transmission Fluid Level and Condition in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section
Go to Step 2 2 Perform the transmission fluid checking procedure. Refer to Checking Transmission Fluid Level and Condition in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section Was the fluid checking procedure performed?
Go to Step 3 3 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. Does the scan tool display a TFT sensor signal voltage less than 0.4 volts? 4 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the transmission 7way connector E54. 3. Turn the ignition on. Does the TFT signal voltage change to match the voltage 4.92 volts? 5 Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between terminals E544(F) and E541(E). Is the resistance within specifications? (See Resistance Chart.) 6 1. Disconnect the transmission 7way connector E54. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between terminals E544(F) and E541(E). Is the resistance within specifications? (See Resistance Chart.) 7 1. Remove the transmission oil pan. Refer to Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor (Main Case) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. 2. Check the internal wiring harness for a short to ground. Was a problem found? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 5 Go to Diagnostic Aids Go to Step 4
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 8
7A139
DTC P0712 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit Low Input (Contd)
Step 8 Action 1. Disconnect the internal wiring harness at the TFT sensor. 2. Measure the resistance of the TFT sensor. Is the resistance within specifications? (See Resistance Chart.) 9 10 11 12 Replace the TFT Sensor. Is the replacement complete? Check circuit RED/BLK for a short to ground. Was a problem found? Check the PCM for faulty connections. Was a problem found? Replace the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 13 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and ensure the following conditions are met: TFT sensor indicates a voltage greater than 0.33 volts for 2 seconds. 2. Review the scan tool DTC info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 13 Yes Go to Diagnostic Aids No
Go to Step 9
DTC P0713 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit High Input
D07RY00029
Circuit Description
The TFT sensor is a thermistor that controls the signal voltage to the PCM. The PCM supplies a 5volt reference signal to the sensor on circuit RED/BLK. When the transmission fluid is cold, the sensor resistance is high and the PCM will sense high signal voltage. As the transmission fluid temperature warms to the normal operating temperature of 100C (212F), the sensor resistance becomes less and the voltage decreases to about 1.5 to 2 volts. This DTC detects a continuous open or short to power in the TFT signal circuit or the TFT sensor. This is a type D DTC.
D The DTC will be cleared from history when the vehicle has achieved 40 warmup cycles without a failure reported. D The PCM will cancel the DTC default actions when the fault no longer exists and the ignition is cycled off long enough to power down the PCM.
Diagnostic Aids
D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connection at the PCM and transmission 7-way connector. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change. D Scan tool displays transmission fluid temperature in degrees. After transmission is operating, the temperature should rise steadily to about 100C (212F), then stabilize. D The temperature to resistance value scale may be used to check the TFT sensor at the various temperature levels to evaluate the possibility of a skewed (misscaled) sensor. A skewed sensor could result in hard shifts or TCC complaints.

D Battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts. D Ignition is on. D TFT sensor indicating a voltage greater than 4.86 volts. D All conditions met for 20 seconds.

Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 3. This check verifies problem in the TFT sensor circuit. 4. This test simulates a TFT sensor DTC P0712. If the PCM recognizes the low signal voltage (high temperature), and the scan tool displays 146C (295F) or greater, the PCM and wiring are OK.

D The DTC can be cleared from the PCM history by using a scan tool.

5. This test checks the TFT sensor and internal wiring harness. Resistance Chart C 40 0 20 80 120 150 F 40 32 68 176 248 304 Resistance (kW) 672 65 25 2.5 0.78 0.37
7A141
DTC P0713 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit High Input
Step 1 Action Were you sent here from the Powertrain OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check? Yes No Go to OBD System Check Refer to Driveability and Emission in Engine section Refer to Checking Transmission Fluid Level and Condition in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section
Go to Step 2 2 Perform the transmission fluid checking procedure. Refer to Checking Transmission Fluid Level and Condition in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Was the fluid checking procedure performed?
Go to Step 3 3 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. Does the scan tool display a TFT sensor signal voltage greater than 4.86 volts? 4 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the transmission 7way connector E54. 3. Install a fused jumper wire from terminal E544(F) to E541(E) on the engine harness. 4. Turn the ignition on. Does the TFT signal voltage drop to less than 0.4 volts? 5 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between terminals E544(F) and E541(E). Is the resistance within specifications? (See Resistance Chart.) 6 1. Disconnect the transmission 7way connector E54. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between terminals E544(F) and E541(E). Is the resistance within specifications? (See Resistance Chart.) Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 7
DTC P0713 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit High Input (Contd)
Step 7 Action 1. Remove the transmission oil pan. 2. Check the internal wiring harness for an open. Refer to Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor (Main Case) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Was a problem found and corrected? 8 1. Disconnect the internal wiring harness at the TFT sensor. 2. Measure the resistance of the TFT sensor. Is the resistance within specifications? (See Resistance Chart.) 9 Replace TFT sensor. Refer to Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor (Main Case) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 10 11 12 13 Check circuit RED/BLK for an open or short to B+. Was a problem found? Check circuit RED/WHT for an open. Was a problem found? Check the PCM for faulty or intermittent connections. Was a problem found? Replace the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 14 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and ensure the following conditions are met: 2. TFT sensor indicates a voltage less than 4.92 volts for 2 seconds. 3. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 14 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 14 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 14 Go to Step 14 Go to Diagnostic Aids Go to Step 8 Yes No
Go to Step 9
7A143
DTC P0719 Brake Switch Circuit Low (Stuck On)
D07R100018
Circuit Description:
The brake switch indicates brake pedal status to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The brake switch is a normallyclosed switch that supplies battery voltage on circuit GRY/REDBRN/RED to the PCM. Applying the brake pedal opens the switch, interrupting voltage to the PCM. When the brake pedal is released, the PCM receives a constant voltage signal. If the PCM receives a zero voltage signal at the brake switch input, and the Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) is engaged, the PCM deenergizes the Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (TCC Sol. Valve). The PCM disregards the brake switch input for TCC scheduling if there is a brake switch circuit fault (Refer to Diagnostic Aids). When the PCM detects an open brake switch circuit (0 volts, low input) during accelerations, then DTC P0719 sets. DTC P0719 is a type D DTC.

D The PCM does not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). D DTC P0719 stores in PCM history.

D A scan tool can clear the DTC from the PCM history. The PCM clears the DTC from the PCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warmup cycles without a failure reported. D The PCM cancels the DTC default actions when the fault no longer exists and the ignition is OFF long enough in order to power down the PCM.
Diagnostic Aids
D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections at the PCM and brake switch. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change. D Check customer driving habits and/or unusual driving conditions (i.e. stop and go, highway). D Check brake switch for proper mounting and adjustment.

D No OSS Assy. DTCs P0722 or P0723. D The PCM detects an open brake switch or circuit (0 volts) for 15 minutes without changing for 2 seconds, and the following events occur seven consecutive times. D The vehicle speed is less than 8 km/h (5 mph). D then the vehicle speed is 832 km/h (520 mph) for 4 seconds. D then the vehicle speed is greater than 32 km/h (20 mph) for 4 seconds.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart. 3. This step isolates the brake switch as a source for setting the DTC.
7A145
DTC P0719 Brake Switch Circuit Low (Stuck On)

Step 1 Action Was the Powertrain OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch to the on position. NOTE: Before clearing the DTC(s), use the scan tool in order to record the Failure Records for reference. Using the Clear Info function will erase the stored Failure Records from the PCM. 3. Record the DTC Failure Records, then clear the DTC(s). 4. Select TCC Brake Switch on the scan tool. 5. Disconnect the brake switch connector from the brake switch. 6. Connect a test lamp from cavity I183 of the brake switch connector to a known good ground. Is the test lamp ON? 3 Install a J 36169A Fused Jumper Wire from terminal I182 to terminal I183 of the brake switch connector. Did the TCC Brake Switch status change from Open to Closed? 4 1. Remove the fuse ECM (15A). 2. Inspect the fuse for an open. Is the fuse open? 5 Inspect circuit WHT/GRN for a short to ground condition. Repair the circuit if necessary. Did you find a short to ground condition? 6 Inspect circuit GRY/REDBRN/RED for a short to ground condition. Repair the circuit if necessary. Did you find a short to ground condition? 7 8 Replace the brake switch. Is the replacement complete? Inspect circuit WHT/GRN for an open condition. Repair the circuit if necessary. Did you find and correct an open condition? 9 10 11 Inspect circuit GRY/REDBRN/RED for an open. Did you find an open condition? Replace the PCM. Is the replacement complete? In order to verify your repair, perform the following procedure: 1. Select DTC. 2. Select Clear Info. 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch to the on position. 4. Do not depress the brake pedal. 5. Verify that the TCC Brake Switch status indicates Closed (12 volts) for 2 seconds. 6. Select Specific DTC. Enter DTC P0719. Has the test run and passed? System OK Go to Step 11 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4 Yes No Go to Powertrain OBD System Check
Begin the diagnosis again. Go to Step 1
DTC P0722 Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor (OSS) Low Input
D07RY00032
Circuit Description
Output speed information is provided to the PCM by the OSS, which is a permanent magnet (PM) generator. The PM generator produces a pulsing AC voltage. The AC voltage level and number of pulses increases as the speed of the vehicle increases. The PCM then converts the pulsing voltage to output speed, which is used for calculations. The vehicle speed can be displayed with a scan tool. This DTC detects a low output speed when there is a high engine speed in a drive gear range. This is a type B DTC.
Conditions For Clearing The MIL/DTC

D The PCM will turn off the MIL and CHECK TRANS Lamp after three consecutive ignition cycles without a failure reported. D The DTC can be cleared from the PCM history by using a scan tool. The DTC will be cleared from history when the vehicle has achieved 40 warmup cycles without a failure reported. D The PCM will cancel the DTC default actions when the fault no longer exists and the ignition is cycled off long enough to power down the PCM.

D No MAP DTCs P0107 or P0108, P0106, P1106, P1107. D No TPS DTCs P0122 or P0123. D Not in Park or Neutral. D TP angle is greater than 10%. D Engine vacuum is between 0 and 70kPa. D Engine speed is between 3000 and 7000 rpm. D Transmission output speed is less than 0 rpm. D All conditions met for 5 seconds.
Diagnostic Aids
D An OSS DTC P0722 will set when no output speed is at detected at start off. D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connection at the PCM. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move or massage the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change.

D D D D Fixed to 4th gear. Maximum line pressure. Inhibit TCC engagement. For lamp illuminate refer to DTC type definition (type B).
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 4. This test checks the OSS circuit. 5. This test checks the integrity of the OSS. 7. This test checks the 5volt and ground circuit of the PCM.
7A147
DTC P0722 Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor (OSS) Low Input
Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. 4. Raise the drive wheels. 5. Start the engine. 6. Place the transmission in any drive range. With the drive wheels rotating, does the Trans Output Speed increase with the drive wheel speed? 3 4 Check for the most current and/or incorrect calibration. Is the calibration current? 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the J2 (RED) PCM connector. 3. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between harness connector terminals J222 and J255. Is the reading 3000 ohms? 5 1. Select AC volts. 2. Rotate the rear wheels, ensuring the driveshaft is turning. Is the voltage greater than 0.5 volts? 6 Inspect circuits BLU/YEL and BLU/GRN for a poor connection or an open circuit. Was a problem found? 7 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect the J2 (RED) PCM connector. Disconnect the OSS harness from the OSS. With the engine off, turn the ignition on. Using the J 39200 DVOM, measure the voltage at the OSS harness connector terminals E551 and E552. Go to Step 16 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 16 Go to Diagnostic Aids
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 8
Is the reading between 4.0 to 5.1 volts? 8 1. Remove the OSS. 2. Check the output shaft speed sensor rotor for damage or misalignment. Refer to Speed Sensor (Extension Housing) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Was a problem found? 9 10 11 12 Replace the OSS. Is the replacement complete? Was the reading in step 7 less than 4.0 volts? Was the reading in Step 7 greater than 5.1 volts? Using the J 39200 DVOM to chassis ground, measure the voltage on circuit BLU/YEL. Is the reading between 4.0 to 5.1 volts?
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 14
DTC P0722 Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor (OSS) Low Input (Contd)
Step 13 14 15 16 Is the repair complete? Check circuit BLU/YEL for a short to ground or open. Was a problem found and corrected? Repair the short to B+ in circuit BLU/YEL. Is the repair complete? Replace the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 17 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and operate the vehicle under the following conditions: Transmission output speed is greater than 101 rpm for 3 seconds. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 16 Action Repair the open in circuit BLU/GRN. Go to Step 17 Yes No
7A149
DTC P0723 Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor (OSS) Intermittent
D07RY00032
Circuit Description
Output speed information is provided to the PCM by the OSS, which is a permanent magnet (PM) generator. The PM generator produces a pulsing AC voltage. The AC voltage level and number of pulses increases as the speed of the vehicle increases. The PCM then converts the pulsing voltage to output speed, which is used for calculations. The vehicle speed can be displayed with a scan tool. This DTC detects a fast decrease of output speed when engine running in a drive gear range. This is a type B DTC.

D The PCM will turn off the MIL and CHECK TRANS Lamp after three consecutive ignition cycles without a failure reported. D The DTC can be cleared from the PCM history by using a scan tool. D The DTC will be cleared from history when the vehicle has achieved 40 warmup cycles without a failure reported. D The PCM will cancel the DTC default actions when the fault no longer exists and the ignition is cycled off long enough to power down the PCM.

Drive range D Engine running time is greater than 5 seconds. D Output speed is greater than 1300 rpm for 2 second. D NORAWNOLAST < 200 rpm for 2 seconds. D NORAW: Latest raw data of output shaft speed. D NOLAST: Fitered previous data of output speed. D Transmission negative output speed change is greater than 1300 rpm. D Conditions met for 3 seconds. Action During Detection Time D Output speed value is frozen
Diagnostic Aids
D A OSS DTC P0723 will set when output speed has been detected and is lost. D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connection at the PCM. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change.

Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 4. This test checks the OSS circuit. 5. This test checks the integrity of the OSS. 7. This test checks the 5volt and ground circuit of the PCM.
DTC P0723 Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor (OSS) Intermittent

Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. 4. Raise the drive wheels. 5. Start the engine. 6. Place the transmission in any drive range. With the drive wheels rotating, does the Trans Output Speed increase with the drive wheel speed? 3 4 Check for the most current and/or incorrect calibration. Is the calibration current? 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the J2 (RED) PCM connector. 3. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between harness connector terminals J222 and J255. Is the reading 3,000 ohms? 5 1. Select AC volts. 2. Rotate the rear wheels, ensuring the driveshaft is turning. Is the voltage greater than 0.5 volts? 6 Inspect circuits BLU/YEL and BLU/GRN for a poor connection or an open circuit. Was a problem found? 7 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect the J2 (RED) PCM connector. Disconnect the OSS harness from the OSS. With the engine off, turn the ignition on. Using the J 39200 DVOM, measure the voltage at the OSS harness connector terminals E551 and E552. Go to Step 16 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 16 Go to Diagnostic Aids
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 8
Is the reading between 4.0 to 5.1 volts? 8 1. Remove the OSS. 2. Check the output shaft speed sensor rotor for damage or misalignment. Refer to Speed Sensor (Extension Housing) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Was a problem found? 9 10 11 12 Replace the OSS. Is the replacement complete? Was the reading in step 7 less than 4.0 volts? Was the reading in Step 7 greater than 5.1 volts? Using the J 39200 DVOM to chassis ground, measure the voltage on circuit BLU/YEL. Is the reading between 4.0 to 5.1 volts?
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 13
Go to Step 14
7A151
DTC P0723 Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor (OSS) Intermittent (Contd)
Step 13 14 15 16 Is the repair complete? Check circuit BLU/YEL for a short to ground or open. Was a problem found and corrected? Repair the short to B+ in circuit BLU/YEL. Is the repair complete? Replace the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 17 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and operate the vehicle under the following conditions: Transmission output speed is greater than 101 rpm for 3 seconds. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 16 Action Repair the open in circuit BLU/GRN. Go to Step 17 Yes No
DTC P0724 Brake Switch Circuit High (Stuck Off)
D07R100018
The brake switch indicates brake pedal status to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The brake switch is a normallyclosed switch that supplies battery voltage on circuit GRY/REDBRN/RED to the PCM. Applying the brake pedal opens the switch, interrupting voltage to the PCM. When the brake pedal is released, the PCM receives a constant voltage signal. If the PCM receives a zero voltage signal at the brake switch input, and the Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) is engaged, the PCM deenergizes the Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (TCC Sol. Valve). The PCM disregards the brake switch input for TCC scheduling if there is a brake switch circuit fault (Refer to Diagnostic Aids). When the PCM detects a closed brake switch circuit (12 volts, high input) during decelerations, then DTC P0724 sets. DTC P0724 is a type D DTC.

D The PCM does not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). D DTC P0724 stores in PCM history.

D A scan tool can clear the DTC from the PCM history. The PCM clears the DTC from the PCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warmup cycles without a failure reported. D The PCM cancels the DTC default actions when the fault no longer exists and the ignition is OFF long enough in order to power down the PCM.
Diagnostic Aids
D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connection at the PCM. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change. D Check customer driving habits and/or unusual traffic conditions (i.e. stop and go, expressway). D Check brake switch for proper mounting and adjustment.

D No OSS Assy. DTCs P0722 or P0723. D The PCM detects a closed brake switch circuit (12 volts) without changing and the following events occur seven consecutive times. D The vehicle speed is greater than 32 km/h (20 mph) for 4 seconds. D then the vehicle speed is between 832 km/h (520 mph) for 4 seconds. D then the vehicle speed is less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
7A153
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart. 2. This step isolates the brake switch as a source for setting the DTC.
DTC P0724 Brake Switch Circuit High (Stuck Off)

Step 1 Action Was the Powertrain OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch to the on position. NOTE: Before clearing the DTC(s), use the scan tool in order to record the Failure Records for reference. Using the Clear Info function will erase the stored Failure Records from the PCM. 3. Record the DTC Failure Records, then clear the DTC(s). 4. Select TCC Brake Switch on the scan tool. 5. Disconnect the brake switch connector from the brake switch. Did the TCC brake switch status change from Closed to Open? 3 4 Replace the brake switch. Is the replacement complete? Inspect circuit GRY/REDBRN/RED for a short to B+ condition. Repair the circuit if necessary. Did you find a short to B+ condition? 5 6 Replace the PCM. Is the replacement complete? In order to verify your repair, perform the following procedure: 1. Select DTC. 2. Select Clear Info. 3. With the engine off turn the ignition switch to the on position. 4. Apply the brake pedal. 5. Verify that the TCC brake switch status indicates Open (0 volts) for 2 seconds. 6. Select Specific DTC. Enter DTC P0724. Has the test run and passed? System OK Go to Step 6 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4 Yes No Go to Powertrain OBD System Check
Begin the diagnosis again. Go to Step 1
DTC P0730 Gear Error Without Input Speed
D07RT015
Circuit Description
D The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calculates the slippage of the converter and transmission based upon the engine speed, the output speed, and the current gear ratio. D The slippage of the converter at a high enough engine speed is low. The transmission should not slip more than a given value when there is no shift. D This DTC detects a slip at each gear. This is a type C DTC.
D D D D
3 seconds since upshift. 3 seconds since downshift. 3 seconds since garage shift (ND). And one of the following conditions occur: Slip is greater than 720 rpm in 1st gear. Slip is greater than 680 rpm in 2nd gear. Slip is greater than 660 rpm on 3rd gear. Slip is greater than 650 rpm on 4th gear.

D No Output Speed Sensor DTC(s) P0722, P0723. D No Transmission Range Switch DTC(s) P0705, P0706. D Not in Park, Neutral or Reverse. D Engine speed is greater than 3500 rpm.
D All conditions met for 5.5 seconds.

D Maximum line pressure. D The PCM will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). D The PCM will illuminate the CHECK TRANS Lamp.

D Turn Force Motor OFF.
7A155
Diagnostic Aids
D Check for intermittent output speed sensor circuit problems. D Check for possible incorrect calibration. (PCM part No., tire specifications, and rear axle ratio)
Conditions For Clearing The DTC/CHECK TRANS Lamp

D The PCM will turn off the CHECK TRANS Lamp after three consecutive ignition cycles without a failure reported. D The DTC can be cleared from PCM memory by using a scan tool. The DTC can also be cleared from memory when the vehicle has made 40 warmup cycles without a failure reported. D The PCM will cancel the DTC Actions Taken items when the fault conditions no longer exist and the ignition is cycles off long enough to power down the PCM.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 3. This step checks for possible low fluid level causing slipping resulting in an undefined gear ratio. 4. This step checks for correct gear ratios for commanded gears. 5. This step checks for low line pressure.
DTC P0730 Gear Error Without Input Speed

Step 1 Action Were you sent here from the OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check? Yes No Go to OBD System Check Refer to Driveability and Emission in Engine section
Go to Step 2 2 Visually inspect the transmission cooling system for fluid leaks. D Refer to Chart 16: Possible Causes of Transmission Fluid Leaks of Mechanical/Hydraulic Diagnosis Symptoms Index in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Was condition found and corrected? 3 Inspect the transmission fluid level and condition. Refer to Checking Transmission Fluid Level and Condition in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Has transmission fluid checking procedure been performed? Go to Step 4 4 1. Install the scan tool. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. 3. Engine not running. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s) use the scan tool to record the Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 4. Record the Failure Record data. 5. Use the scan tool snapshot mode to record transmission gear ratios. 6. Drive vehicle in transmission gear ranges L, 2, 3, and D with the engine speed is greater than 3,500 rpm for 5.5 seconds. 7. Record each transmission gear. 1st:2.73 2.99 2nd:1.54 1.71 3rd:0.93 1.05 4th:0.66 0.78 Does commanded gear ratio match ranges as shown? Go to Step 7
Go to Step 3 Go to Checking Transmission Fluid Level and Condition in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section
Go to Step 5
DTC P0730 Gear Error Without Input Speed (Contd)

Step 5 Action Perform line pressure check. D Refer to Line Pressure Test in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Was condition found and corrected? 6 Check for possible clutch slippage. D Refer to Chart 6: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0730 of Mechanical/Hydraulic Diagnosis Symptoms Index in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Was condition found and corrected? 7 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear info function. 2. Operate the vehicle under the following conditions: D Drive the vehicle in D4 with the engine speed greater than 3,500 rpm to obtain any one of the following gear ratios for seven seconds. 1st 1:2.73 1:2.99 2nd 1:1.54 1:1.71 3rd 1:0.93 1:1.05 4th 1:0.66 1:0.78 Has the last test failed? Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 1 Repair verified Exit DTC table Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6 Yes No
7A157
DTC P0742 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) System Stuck On
D07RY00033
Circuit Description
The PCM energizes the TCC solenoid by creating a ignition voltage on circuit BRN/BLU. When ignition voltage is energized by the PCM, the TCC solenoid stops converter signal oil from exhausting. This causes converter signal oil pressure to increase and move the TCC valve. The TCC solenoid will deenergize when the PCM no longer provides an ignition voltage. When the TCC solenoid is deenergized, it will exhaust fluid and release the TCC. This DTC detects low torque converter slip when the TCC is commanded off. This is a type B DTC.
D TCC slip speed is between 20 and 40 rpm for 2 seconds. D Vehicle speed is greater than 25 km/h (15 mph) and less than 120 km/h (75 mph). D Speed ratio is greater than 0.9 and less than 2.0.

D For lamp illuminate refer to DTC type definition (type B). D Inhibit TCC engagement.


The following conditions occur once per TCC cycle, three consecutive times: D No TPS DTCs P0122 or P0123. D No OSS DTCs P0722 or P0723. D No TCC solenoid DTC P1860. D TP angle is greater than 20%. D Engine speed is greater than 500 rpm and less than 3000 rpm. D Engine vacuum is between 0 and 70 kPa. D Commanded gear is not 1st. D Gear range is D4. D TCC is commanded off. D No TCC stuck off DTC P1870
Diagnostic Aids
D If the TCC is mechanically stuck on with the parking brake applied and any gear range selected, the TCC fluid will mechanically apply the TCC, possibly causing an engine stall.
Test Description
The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic chart: 3. This test checks the mechanical state of the TCC. (When the PCM commands the TCC solenoid off, the slip speed should increase).
DTC P0742 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) System Stuck On

Step 1 Action Were you sent here from the Powertrain OnBoard Diagnostic (OBD) System Check? Yes No Go to OBD System Check Refer to Driveability and Emission in Engine section
Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. 4. Using the scan tool, verify the TP Sensor operation. Are the TP Sensor values within 0.6 5.0 volts? 3 Drive the vehicle in the D4 drive range in fourth gear under steady acceleration, with a TP angle greater than 20%. Does the scan tool display TCC Slip Speed between 30 and +30 rpm, while the displayed TCC solenoid state is off? 4 The TCC is mechanically stuck on. Check the following items: D Clogged exhaust orifice in the TCC solenoid. D Converter clutch apply valve stuck in the apply position. D Misaligned or damaged valve body gasket. D Restricted release passage. Was a problem found and corrected? 5 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and ensure the following conditions are met: TCC slip speed must be between 200 and 2,500 rpm for 4 seconds. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
7A159
DTC P0748 Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) (Force Motor) Circuit Electrical
D07RY00034
Circuit Description
The PCS is a PCMcontrolled device used to regulate transmission line pressure. The PCM compares TPS voltage, engine rpm, and other inputs to determine the line pressure appropriate for a given load. The PCM will regulate the pressure by applying a varying amperage to the PCS. The applied amperage can vary from 70 to 1060 milliampere (mA), and is monitored by the PCM. This DTC detects a continuous open or short to ground in the PCS circuit or the PCS. This is a type C DTC.
D The DTC can be cleared from PCM history by using a scan tool. D The DTC will be cleared from memory when the vehicle has achieved 40 warmup cycles without a failure reported. D The PCM will cancel the DTC default actions when the fault no longer exists and the ignition is cycled off long enough to power down the PCM.
Diagnostic Aids
D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connection at the PCM and at the transmission 4way connector. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change.

D Battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts. D The PCM detects that the different between commanded and actual current is 200 milliampere (mA) for over 1 second. D Engine speed is greater than 300 rpm.

D The PCM will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). D Maximum line pressure. D The PCM will illuminate the CHECK TRANS Lamp. D Turn Force Motor OFF.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test checks the ability of the PCM to command the PCS. 3. This test checks the PCS and internal wiring harness for incorrect resistance.
Conditions For Clearing The DTC/CHECK TRANS Lamp

D The PCM will turn off the CHECK TRANS Lamp after three consecutive ignition cycles without a failure reported.
DTC P0748 Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) (Force Motor) Circuit Electrical
Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Failure Records. 4. While the engine is operating, put the transmission in Park. 5. Using the scan tool, apply 70 through 1060 milliampere (mA) while observing PC Ref. Current and PC Act. Current. Is the PC Act. Current reading always within 160 mA? 3 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the transmission 4way connector E52. 3. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between terminals E522(B) and E524(C). Is the resistance within 37 ohms? 4 1. Remove the transmission oil pan. Refer to Solenoid (Adapter Case Valve Body) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. 2. Disconnect the internal wiring harness at the PCS. 3. Measure the resistance of the PCS. Is the resistance within 37 ohms? 5 6 7 8 Replace the PCS. Is the replacement complete? Repair the internal wiring harness for an open. Is the repair complete? Inspect/repair circuits VIO/WHT and VIO/RED. Was a problem found? Inspect/repair circuits VIO/WHT and VIO/RED for a short to ground or poor connections. Was a problem found? 9 Replace the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 10 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and ensure the following conditions are met: The PCS duty cycle is not at its electrical high or low limit. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 9
7A161
DTC P0751 Shift Solenoid A Performance (Stuck Off)
D07RT011
Circuit Description
The shift solenoid A is used to control fluid flow acting on the 12 and 34 shift valves. The solenoid is a normally close exhaust valve that is used with the shift solenoid B to allow four different shifting combinations. The DTC detects when there is only a 1144 shift pattern depending on the state of the mechanical failure instead of a 1234 shift pattern. This is a type B DTC.
Condition 2:
D D D D D D 3rd gear is commanded for 1 second. 40 Engine Torque 400 Nm Throttle position 10 % 8000 TCC Slip 8000 rpm Speed ratio 0.45 0.62 Modeled Ratio 0.92 for 3 second.

No ETC DTCs. No OSS DTCs P0722 or P0723. No TCC solenoid DTCs P0742, P1860, P1870. No shift solenoid A DTC P0753. No shift solenoid B DTC P0758. Gear range is D4. Transmission temperature is between 20 and 130C (68 and 266F). D Output speed is greater than 375 rpm. D No range code P0705, P0706. D No torque code (to be confirmed). D Engine run for more 0 seconds and not influed cut-off (to be confirmed). All the above conditions have been met and the combination of conditions 1, 2 occur two consecutive times. D D D D D D D

D Maximum line pressure. D For lamp illuminate refer to DTC type definition (type B). D Turn Force Motor OFF.
Conditions For Clearing The The MIL/DTC

Condition 1:
D D D D D D 2nd gear is commanded for 1 second. 40 Engine Torque 400 Nm Speed ratio 0.6 Throttle position 10 % 800 TCC Slip 4000 rpm 2.75 Modeled Ratio 3.2 for 1 second.
Diagnostic Aids
D Verify that the transmission meets the specifications in the 4L30E shift speed chart. D Other internal transmission failures may cause more than one shift to occur.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test checks the function of the range switch (mode switch). 3. This test checks that the scan tool commanded all shifts, all shifts solenoids responded correctly, but all the shifts did not occur.
DTC P0751 Shift Solenoid A Performance (Stuck Off)

Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. 4. With the engine operating, apply the brake pedal and select each transmission range DL, D2, D3, D4, N, R, and P. Does each selected transmission range match the TR Switch on the scan tool? 3 1. While the engine is operating, raise the drive wheels. 2. With the transmission in D4 range, use the scan tool to command 1st, 2nd and 3rd, and 4th gears while accelerating the vehicle. Was a 1144 only shift pattern detected? (Road testing the vehicle may be necessary). 4 Check the shift solenoid/hydraulic circuit for: D One or both of the shift solenoids for an internal malfunction. D Contamination or sediment in one or both of the shift solenoids. D Damaged seals on one or both of the shift solenoids. Refer to Solenoid (Main Case Valve Body) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Was a problem found and corrected? 5 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and road test the vehicle. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 5 Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 1 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Go toRange Switch Logic Table
7A163
DTC P0752 Shift Solenoid A Performance (Stuck On)
D07RT011
Circuit Description
The shift solenoid A is used to control fluid flow acting on the 12 and 34 shift valves. The solenoid is a normally close exhaust valve that is used with the shift solenoid B to allow four different shifting combinations. The DTC detects when there is only a 2233 shift pattern depending on the state of the mechanical failure instead of a 1234 shift pattern. This is a type B DTC.
Condition 2:
D D D D D D 4th Gear is commanded for 1 sec. 40 Engine Torque 400 Nm Trottle position 10% 8000 TCC slip 8000 rpm Speed ratio 0.6 0.92 Modeled Ratio 1.5 for 7 seconds

No ETC DTCs. No OSS DTCs P0722 or P0723. No TCC solenoid DTC P0742, P1860, P1870. No shift solenoid A DTC P0753. No shift solenoid B DTC P0758. Gear range is D4. Output speed is greater than 375 rpm. Transmission temperature is between 20 and 130C (68 and 266F). D No range code P0705, P0706. D No torque code (to be confirmed). D Engine run for more 0 seconds and not influed cut-off (to be confirmed). All the above conditions have been met and the combination of condition 1, 2 occur two consecutive times. D D D D D D D D

Conditions For Clearing The The MIL/DTC

Condition 1:
D D D D D D D 1st gear is commanded for 1 sec 40 Engine Torque 400 Nm Throttle positon 10% 8000 TCC slip 8000 rpm Transmission out speed 375 rpm Speed ratio 0.3 1.5 Modeled Ratio 2.4 for 0.687 seconds
Diagnostic Aids
D Verify that the transmission meets the specifications in the 4L30E shift speed chart. D Other internal transmission failures may cause more than one shift to occur.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test checks the function of the range switch (mode switch). 3. This test checks that the scan tool commanded all shifts, all shifts solenoids responded correctly, but all the shifts did not occur.
DTC P0752 Shift Solenoid A Performance (Stuck On)

Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. 4. With the engine operating, apply the brake pedal and select each transmission range DL, D2, D3, D4, N, R, and P. Does each selected transmission range match the TR Switch on the scan tool? 3 1. While the engine is operating, raise the drive wheels. 2. With the transmission in D4 range, use the scan tool to command 1st, 2nd and 3rd, and 4th gears while accelerating the vehicle. Was a 2233 only shift pattern detected? (Road testing the vehicle may be necessary). 4 Check the shift solenoid/hydraulic circuit for: D One or both of the shift solenoids for an internal malfunction. D Contamination or sediment in one or both of the shift solenoids. D Damaged seals on one or both of the shift solenoids. Refer to Solenoid (Main Case Valve Body) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Was a problem found and corrected? 5 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and road test the vehicle. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 5 Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 1 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Go toRange Switch Logic Table
7A165
DTC P0753 Shift Solenoid A Electrical
D07RY00035
Circuit Description
D The shift solenoid A is a simple on/off solenoid located in the main case valve body. The solenoid is the normally closed type. In second or third gear the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the solenoid to open a fluid inlet port. When the port is open, fluid pressure actuates the shift valve. D The solenoid is activated by a current. This current is produced by applying a voltage to one side (the High side) and a ground to the other side (Low side). D The High Side Driver (HSD) is a circuit of the PCM that acts as a switch between the solenoids and the supply voltage. The High side of the solenoid is permanently supplied with voltage, except in BACKUP MODE or when ignition is off the HSD is turned off. This DTC detects a continuous open or short to ground in the shift solenoid A circuit or the shift solenoid A. This is a type B DTC.

D D D D Maximum line pressure. Immediate landing to 4th gear. Inhibit TCC engagement. For lamp illuminate refer to DTC type definition (type B).


D Ignition is on, Engine run. D Battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts. D The PCM commands the solenoid on and the voltage remains high (B+), or the PCM commands the solenoid off and the voltage remains low (zero volts). D All conditions met for 0.84 1.0 seconds.
Diagnostic Aids
D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connection at the PCM and at the transmission 7-way connector. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation.

D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change. D An open ignition feed circuit can cause multiple DTCs to set. D A shift solenoid B DTC P0758 could also set with a shift solenoid A electrical failure. 5. This test measures the resistance of the component. 8. This test checks the function of the shift solenoid A and the transmission internal wiring harness. Shift Solenoid Status Chart Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Shift solenoid A OFF ON ON OFF Shift solenoid B ON ON OFF OFF
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 3. This test checks for power to the shift solenoid A from the ignition through the PCM.
DTC P0753 Shift Solenoid A Electrical

Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine on, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. Were DTCs P0753, P0758, P1860 set? 3 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals J243 and J11 (GND). Is the voltage within 1012 volts? 4 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the J1 (BLUE) and J2 (RED) PCM connector. Turn the ignition on. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals J15 and ground. Go to Step 10 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Go to Step 5
Is the voltage within 10 12 volts? 5 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the J1 (BLUE) and J2 (RED) PCM connector. 3. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between PCM connector terminals J243 and J15. Is the resistance within 18 20 ohms? 6 1. Disconnect the J1 (BLUE) and J2 (RED) PCM connectors. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, check a continuity between PCM terminals J15 and ground. Is there a continuity? 7 Using the J39200 DVOM, check a continuity between J2 (RED) PCM terminal 43 and ground. Is there a continuity?
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 7
Go to Step 12
Go to Step 9
7A167
DTC P0753 Shift Solenoid A Electrical (Contd)

Step 8 Action 1. Disconnect the transmission main case 7way connector E54. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between terminals E542(D) and E543(C). Is the resistance within 1820 ohms? 9 10 Check every connection at the PCM connector. Was a problem found? The wiring harness between PCM connector terminals J15 and transmission harness terminal E543(C) is shorted to voltage. Was a problem found and corrected? 11 The wiring harness between PCM connector terminal J15 and transmission harness terminal E543(C) is shorted to ground. Was a problem found and corrected? 12 The wiring harness between PCM connector terminals J243 and transmission harness terminal E542(D) is shorted to ground. Was a problem found and corrected? 13 The wiring harness between PCM connector J1 or J2 and transmission 7way connector E54 is open or poor connection. Was a problem found and corrected? 14 The shift solenoid A is faulty. Replace the shift solenoid A. Refer to Solenoid (Main Case Valve Body) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 15 The PCM may be faulty. Replace the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 16 17 Repair the PCM connector connection. Was a problem found and corrected? 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and operate the vehicle under the following conditions: D The shift solenoid A is commanded on and the voltage drops to zero. D The shift solenoid A is commanded off and the voltage increases to B+. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 16 Go to Step 15 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14 Yes No
DTC P0756 Shift Solenoid B Performance (Stuck Off)
D07RT011
Circuit Description
The shift solenoid B is used to control fluid flow acting on the 23 shift valves. The solenoid is a normally open exhaust valve that is used with the shift solenoid A to allow four different shift combinations. This DTC detects when there is only a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern depending on the state of the mechanical failure instead of a 1-2-3-4 shift pattern. This is a type B DTC.
Condition 2:
D D D D D D 2nd gear is commanded for 1 second 40 Engine Torque 400 Nm Throttle position 10 % 8000 TCC Slip 8000 rpm. Speed ratio 0.6 0.92 Modeled Ratio 1.5 for 0.687 second.

D D D D D D D No ETC DTCs. No OSS DTCs P0722 or P0723. No TCC solenoid DTCs P0742, P1860, P1870. No shift solenoid DTCs P0753, P0758. Gear range is D4. Output speed is greater than 375 rpm. Transmission fluid temperature is between 20 and 130C (68 and 266F). D No range code P0705, P0706. D No torque code (to be confirmed). D Engine run for more 0 seconds and influed cut-off (to be confirmed). All the above conditions have been met and the combination of condition 1, 2 occur two consecutive times.


Condition 1:
D D D D D D D 1st gear is commanded for 1 second 40 Engine Torque 400 Nm Throttle position 10 % 2300 TCC Slip 200 rpm. Transmission output speed 400 rpm Speed ratio 0.3 0.60 Modeled Ratio 1.49 for 1 second.
Diagnostic Aids
D Verify that the transmission meets the specifications in the 4L30-E shift speed chart. D Other internal transmission failures may allow more than one shift to occur.
7A169
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test checks the function of the range switch (mode switch). 3. This test checks for selected gear ratio vs. a ratio not obtainable under normal driving conditions.
DTC P0756 Shift Solenoid B Performance (Stuck Off)

Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. 4. With the engine operating, apply the brake pedal and select each transmission range DL, D2, D3, D4, N, R, and P. Does each selected transmission range match the TR Switch on the scan tool? 3 1. While the engine is operating, raise the drive wheels. 2. With the transmission in D4 range, use the scan tool to command 1st, 2nd, and 3rd, and 4th gears while accelerating the vehicle. Was a 4334 shift pattern detected? (Road testing the vehicle may be necessary.) 4 Check the shift solenoid/hydraulic circuit for: D One or both of the shift solenoids for an internal malfunction. D Contamination or sediment in one or both of the shift solenoids. D Damaged seals on the one or both of the shift solenoids. Refer to Solenoid (Main Case Valve Body) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Was a problem found and corrected? 5 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and road test the vehicle. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 5 Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 1 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Go to Range Switch Logic Table
DTC P0757 Shift Solenoid B Performance (Stuck On)
D07RT011
Circuit Description
The shift solenoid B is used to control fluid flow acting on the 23 shift valves. The solenoid is a normally open exhaust valve that is used with the shift solenoid A to allow four different shift combinations. This DTC detects when there is only a 1221 shift pattern depending on the state of the mechanical failure instead of a 1234 shift pattern. This is a type B DTC.
Condition 2:
D D D D D D 4th Gear is commanded for 1 second 15 Engine Torque 400 Nm Trottle position 10% 8000 TCC slip 8000 rpm Speed ratio 0.6 2.75 Modeled Ratio 3.2 for 2 seconds

No ETC DTCs. No OSS DTCs P0722 or P0723. No TCC solenoid DTC P0742, P1860, P1870. No shift solenoid A DTCs P0753. No shift solenoid B DTC P0758. Gear range is D4. Output speed is greater than 375 rpm. Transmission fluid temperature is between 20 and 130C (68 and 266F). D No range code P0705, P0706. D No torque code (to be confirmed). D Engine run for more 0 seconds and not influed cut-off (to be confirmed). All of the above conditions have been met and the combination of condition 1,2 occur two consecutive times. D D D D D D D D


Condition 1:
D D D D D D D 3rd gear is commanded for 1 second 40 Engine Torque 400 Nm Throttle positon 10% 8000 TCC slip 8000 rpm Transmission out speed 375 rpm Speed ratio 0.6 1.44 Modeled Ratio 2.4 for 4 seconds
Diagnostic Aids
D Verify that the transmission meets the specifications in the 4L30-E shift speed chart. D Other internal transmission failures may cause more than one shift to occur.
7A171
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test checks the function of the range switch (mode switch). 3. This test checks for selected gear ratio vs. a ratio not obtainable under normal driving conditions.
DTC P0757 Shift Solenoid B Performance (Stuck On)

Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. 4. With the engine operating, apply the brake pedal and select each transmission range DL, D2, D3, D4, N, R, and P. Does each selected transmission range match the TR Switch on the scan tool? 3 1. While the engine is operating, raise the drive wheels. 2. With the transmission in D4 range, use the scan tool to command 1st, 2nd, and 3rd, and 4th gears while accelerating the vehicle. Was a 1-2-2-1 shift pattern detected? (Road testing the vehicle may be necessary.) 4 Check the shift solenoid/hydraulic circuit for: D One or both of the shift solenoids for an internal malfunction. D Contamination or sediment in one or both of the shift solenoids. D Damaged seals on the one or both of the shift solenoids. Refer to Solenoid (Main Case Valve Body) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Was a problem found and corrected? 5 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and road test the vehicle. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 5 Begin diagnosis again Go to Step 1 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Go to Range Switch Logic Table
DTC P0758 Shift Solenoid B Electrical
D07RY00035
Circuit Description
D The shift solenoid B is a simple on/off solenoid located in the main case valve body. It is normally open. When the port is open, fluid pressure actuates the shift valve. In first or second gear, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the solenoid to close a fluid inlet port. D The solenoid is activated by current. This current is produced by applying a voltage to one side (the High side) and a ground to the other side (Low side). D The High Side Driver (HSD) is a circuit of the PCM that acts as a switch between the solenoids and the supply voltage. The High side of the solenoid is permanently supplied with voltage. In BACKUP MODE or when the ignition is off, the HSD is turned off. This DTC detects a continuous open or short to ground in the shift solenoid B circuit or shift solenoid B. This is a type B DTC.



D Ignition is on, Engine run. D Battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts. D The PCM commands the solenoid on and the voltage remains high (B+), or the PCM commands the solenoid off and the voltage remains low (zero volts). D All conditions met for 0.84 1.0 seconds.
Diagnostic Aids
D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections at the PCM and transmission 7-way connector. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation.

D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change.
7A173
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 5. This test measures the resistance of the component. 6. This test checks the function of the shift solenoid B and the transmission internal wiring harness. 9.This test checks for power to the shift solenoid B from the ignition through the PCM. Shift Solenoid Status Chart Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Shift solenoid A OFF ON ON OFF Shift solenoid B ON ON OFF OFF
DTC P0758 Shift Solenoid B Electrical

Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine on, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. Were DTCs P0753, P0758, P1860 set? 3 1. The engine on. 2. Apply brake pedal and select transmission range D. 3. Press and hold down the winter switch and select transmission mode winter. Does the scan tool display DTC P0758 at 3rd gear? 4 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the J1 (BLUE) and J2 (RED) PCM connectors. Turn the ignition on. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals J231 and J21. Go to Step 13 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 4
Go to Step 3
Is the voltage within 10 12 volts? 5 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between PCM connector terminals J231 and J243. Is the resistance within 18 20 ohms? 6 1. Disconnect the transmission main case connector E54. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between terminals E546(A) and E542(D). Is the resistance within 18 20 ohms? 7 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the J1 (BLUE) and J2 (RED) PCM connectors. 3. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between PCM connector terminals J231 and J243. Is the resistance within 18 20 ohms? 8 Using the J39200 DVOM, check a continuity between PCM connector terminal J231 and ground. Is there a continuity? 9 Using the J39200 DVOM, check a continuity between PCM connector terminal J243 and ground. Is there a continuity? 10 1. Disconnect the transmission main case connector E54. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between terminals E546(A) and E542(D). Is the resistance within 18 20 ohms? 11 Check every connection of the PCM. Was a problem found and corrected?
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 14
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 15
Go to Step 16
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 17
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 18
Go to Step 11
7A175
DTC P0758 Shift Solenoid B Electrical (Contd)

Step 12 Action 1. Connect the J1 (BLUE) and J2 (RED) PCM connectors to the PCM. 2. Turn the ignition on, the engine on. 3. Repeat Step 3. Does the scan tool display DTC P0758 at 3rd gear? 13 The wiring harness between PCM connector terminal J231 and transmission main case terminal E546(A) is shorted to voltage. Was a problem found and corrected? 14 The PCM internal terminal J231 is shorted to voltage. Replace the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 15 The wiring harness between PCM connector and transmission main case connector is shorted. Was a problem found and corrected? 16 The shift solenoid B is faulty, or the internal wiring harness from the shift solenoid B is shorted. Was a problem found and corrected? 17 The wiring harness between PCM connector terminal J231 and transmission main case connector terminal E546(A) is shorted to ground. Was a problem found and corrected? 18 The wiring harness between PCM connector terminal J243 and transmission main case connector terminal E542(D) is shorted to ground. Was a problem found and corrected? 19 The wiring harness between PCM connector terminal J231 and transmission main case connector terminal E546(A), or between PCM connector terminal J243 and main case connector terminal E542(D) is open. Was a problem found and corrected? 20 The internal wiring harness from the shift solenoid B is open, or the shift solenoid B is faulty. Was a problem found and corrected? 21 22 Replace the PCM. Is the replacement complete? 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and operate the vehicle under the following conditions: D The shift solenoid B is commanded on and voltage drops to zero. D The shift solenoid B is commanded off and voltage increases to B+. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 22 Go to Step 22 Go to Step 22 Go to Step 22 Go to Step 22 Go to Step 22 Go to Step 22 Go to Step 22 Go to Step 22 Go to Step 21 Yes No
DTC P1850 Brake Band Apply Solenoid Malfunction
D07RY00035
Circuit Description
D The brake band apply solenoid is a normally open solenoid which controls the flow of fluid for brake band application. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) uses Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and changes the duty cycle to control the solenoid. The PCM turns the solenoid on (energized) and off (deenergized) at a constant frequency. The length of time the solenoid is energized during each on/off cycle is called the pulse width. By varying or modulating the pulse width, the solenoid output pressure is changed. Since the solenoid is normally open, increasing the pulse width increases the duty cycle and decreases the output pressure. PWM control provides smooth band application without an accumulator. The band is only applied in first and second gears. D In the event of an electrical failure (open), the solenoid regulates at the maximum oil flow (0% duty cycle). D The solenoid is activated by a current. This current is produced by applying a voltage to one side (the High side) and a ground to the other side (Low side). D The High Side Driver (HSD) is a circuit of the PCM that acts as a switch between the solenoids and the supply voltage. The High side of the solenoid is permanently supplied with voltage. When the ignition is off, the HSD is turned off.
This DTC detects a continuous open or short to ground in the brake band apply solenoid circuit or the brake band apply solenoid. This is a type D DTC.

D Battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts. D Ignition is on, Engine run. D The PCM commands the solenoid on and the voltage remains high (B+), or the PCM commands the solenoid off and the voltage remains low (zero volts). D All conditions met in 1.34 1.56 seconds.

D Inhibit brake band apply solenoid. D The PCM will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).

7A177
Diagnostic Aids
D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connection at the PCM and at the transmission 7way connector. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 3. This test checks for power to the brake band apply solenoid from the ignition through the PCM. 4. This test checks the resistance of the transmission internal wiring harness and brake band apply solenoid. 5. This test checks the ability of the PCM and wiring to control the ground circuit.
DTC P1850 Brake Band Apply Solenoid Malfunction

Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine on, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. Were DTCs P0753, P0758 set? 3 Using the J39200 DVOM, back probe between PCM connector terminals J243 and J21. Is the voltage between 10 to 12 volts? 4 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the J1 (BLUE) and J2 (RED) PCM connector. 3. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between PCM connector terminals J243 and J210. Is the resistance within 1012 ohms? 5 Using the J39200 DVOM, back probe between PCM connector terminals J210 and J21. Is the voltage between 10 to 12 volts? 6 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the J1 (BLUE) and J2 (RED) PCM connector. 3. Using the J39200 DVOM, check continuity between PCM terminal J243 and ground. Is there a continuity? 7 1. Disconnect the transmission main case connector E54. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, check continuity between the terminal E547(B) and ground. Is there continuity? 8 1. Disconnect the J1 (BLUE) and J2 (RED) PCM Connector. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between the PCM connector terminals J243 and J210. Is the resistance within 1012 ohms? 9 1. Disconnect the transmission main case connector E54. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between the terminals E547(B) and E542(D). Is the resistance within 1012 ohms? 10 Using the J39200 DVOM, check continuity between PCM terminal J210 and ground. Is there continuity? 11 1. Disconnect the transmission main case connector E54. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between the terminals E547(B) and E542(D). Is the resistance within 1012 ohms? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 12 Go to Step 15 Go to Step 19 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 19 Go to Step 10 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 11
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 14
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 16
Go to Step 19
Go to Step 16
7A179
DTC P1850 Brake Band Apply Solenoid Malfunction (Contd)

Step 12 Action 1. Disconnect the transmission main case connector E54. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, check continuity between the terminals E547(B) and ground. Is there a continuity? 13 The brake band apply solenoid is faulty, or the internal wiring harness from the brake band apply solenoid is shorted to ground. Was a problem found and corrected? 14 The wiring harness between the PCM connector terminal J243 and the transmission main case connector terminal E542(D) is shorted to ground. Was a problem found and corrected? 15 The wiring harness between the PCM connector terminal J243 and the transmission main case connector terminal E542(D) is open. Was a problem found and corrected? 16 The brake band apply solenoid is faulty, or the internal wiring harness from the brake band apply solenoid is open. Was a problem found and corrected? 17 The wiring harness between the PCM connector terminal J210 and the transmission main case connector terminal E547(B) is shorted ground. Was a problem found and corrected? 18 The wiring harness between the PCM connector terminal J210 and the transmission main case connector terminal E547(B) is open. Was a problem found and corrected? 19 Check every connection at the PCM. If OK, replace the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 20 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and ensure the following conditions are met: D The brake band apply solenoid is commanded on and the volts drop to zero. D The brake band apply solenoid is commanded off and the volts increase to B+. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 20 Go to Step 20 Go to Step 20 Go to Step 20 Go to Step 20 Go to Step 20 Go to Step 20 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 17 Yes No
DTC P1860 TCC Solenoid Electrical
D07RY00036
Circuit Description
The PCM allows current to flow through the solenoid (0 or 12 volts). This current flow through the solenoid coil creates a magnetic field that magnetizes the solid core. The magnetized core attracts the check ball to seat against spring pressure. This blocks the exhaust for the TCC signal fluid and allows solenoid feed drive fluid to feed to TCC signal circuit. The TCC signal fluid pressure acts on the torque converter clutch control valve. When the TCC control valve is in the apply position, line pressure is directed through the TCC valve to apply the torque converter clutch. The TCC solenoid is attached to the valve body within the transmission. This DTC detects a continuous open or short to ground or ignition in the TCC circuit or the TCC solenoid. This is a type B DTC.

Diagnostic Aids
D Inspect the wiring for poor electrical connections at the PCM and at the transmission 4way connector. Look for possible bent, backed out, deformed or damaged terminals. Check for weak terminal tension as well. Also check for a chafed wire that could short to bare metal or other wiring. Inspect for a broken wire inside the insulation. D When diagnosing for a possible intermittent short or open condition, move the wiring harness while observing test equipment for a change.

D D D D D Battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts. No shift solenoid A DTCs P0751 or P0752 or P0753. No shift solenoid B DTCs P0756 or P0757 or P0758. Ignition on. Engine run. The PCM commands the solenoid on and the voltage remains low (zero volts). D The PCM commands the solenoid off and the voltage remains high (B+). D All conditions met for 0.875 1.25 seconds.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 3. This test checks for voltage to the solenoid. 4. This test checks the ability of the PCM and wiring to control the ignition circuit. 8. This test checks the resistance of the TCC solenoid and the internal wiring harness.

D Inhibit TCC engagement. D For lamp illuminate refer to DTC type definition (TYPE B).
7A181
DTC P1860 TCC Solenoid Electrical

Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine on, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when theClear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. Was DTC P1860 set? 3 Using the J39200 DVOM, back probe between PCM connector terminals J251 and J233. Is the voltage 0? 4 1. Apply brake pedal and select transmission range D. 2. Do a test drive, and increase the vehicle speed to TCC on at 4th. Does the scan tool display DTC P1860 at TCC ON? 5 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the J2 (RED) PCM connector. 3. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between PCM connector terminals J251 and J233. Is the resistance within 18 20 ohms? 6 The wiring harness between PCM connector terminal J251 and transmission adapter case connector terminal E521(A) is shorted to voltage. Was a problem found and corrected? 7 Intermittent condition. Check the wiring harness and terminals between PCM connector J2 and transmission adapter case connector E52. Was a problem found and corrected? 8 1. Disconnect the transmission adapter case connector E52. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between terminal E521(A) and ground. Is the resistance within 18 20 ohms? 9 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the J2 (RED) PCM connector. 3. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between terminals J251 and J233. Is the resistance within 18 20 ohms? 10 1. Disconnect the transmission adapter case connector E52. 2. Using the J39200 DVOM, measure the resistance between terminal E521(A) and ground. Is the resistance within 1820 ohms? 11 The wiring harness between PCM connector J2 and adapter case connector E52 is shorted to ground. Was a problem found and corrected? Go to Step 17 Go to Step 11 Go to Step 15 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 15 Go to Step 15 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 9 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 3
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 6
Go to Step 8
Go to Step 16
Go to Step 16
Go to Step 14
Go to Step 10
Go to Step 12
DTC P1860 TCC Solenoid Electrical (Contd)

Step 12 Action The TCC solenoid is faulty, or the internal wiring harness from the TCC solenoid is shorted to ground. Was a problem found and corrected? 13 The wiring harness between PCM connector terminal J251 and adapter case terminal E521(A) is open. Was a problem found and corrected? 14 The TCC solenoid is faulty, or the internal wiring harness from the TCC solenoid is open. Was a problem found and corrected? 15 Check every connection at the PCM. If OK, replace the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in Automatic Transmission (4L30E) section. Is the replacement complete? 16 Check the PCM connector terminal J251, and transmission adapter case connector terminal E521(A). Was a problem found and corrected? 17 1. After the repair is complete, use the scan tool to select DTC, then Clear Info function and ensure the following conditions are met: D The TCC solenoid is commanded on and the volts increase to B+. D The TCC solenoid is commanded off and the volts drop to zero. 2. Review the scan tool DTC Info. Has the last test failed or is the current DTC displayed? Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Go to Step 17 Yes No
7A183
DTC P1870 Transmission Component Slipping (TCC Stuck Off)
D07RY00033
Circuit Description
The PCM monitors the difference in engine speed and transmission output speed. In D3 drive range with the TCC engaged, the engine speed should closely match transmission output speed. This DTC detects excessive TCC slip when the TCC is engaged. This is a type B DTC.
D 13% < TPS < 99% D 50 < Engine Torque < 300 Nm D Low (0.8) < TCC capacity < hi (0.99) for 5 seconds.

D Only stored in memory. D For lamp illuminate refer to DTC type definition (TYPE B).

The following conditions are met for three TCC cycles with reported excessive TCC slip conditions. D No OSS DTCs P0722 or P0723. D No shift solenoid A DTCs P0751 or P0752 or P0753. D No shift solenoid B DTCs P0756 or P0757 or P0758. D No TCC solenoid DTCs P0742 or P1860 or P1870. D Engine speed is between 1000 and 3500 rpm for 0.5 seconds. D Engine vacuum is between 0 and 70 kPa. D Gear range is D4. D TP angle is greater than 10%. D TFT is between 20 and 150C (68 and 302F). D TCC slip speed is between 250 rpm and 800 rpm for 3 times 7 seconds. D Vehicle speed is between 25 km/h (15 mph) and 255 km/h (158 mph). D Speed ratio is between 0.6 and 0.95.

Diagnostic Aids
D Range switch malfunction could set a DTC P1870. D A mechanical failure of the shift solenoids, TCC solenoid, or TCC PWM solenoid could set a DTC P1870.

D Internal transmission failures may set a DTC P1870. D An intermittent or incorrect engine speed signal may set a DTC P1870. Range g Position Park Range Switch Pin A ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF B OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF C OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF P(G) ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test checks the indicated range signal to the actual selected range. A faulty switch could set a DTC P1870. 3. This test checks the torque converter for slippage while in a commanded lockup state. Range Switch Logic Table
Reverse Neutral D4 D3 2 L Illegal Illegal
DTC P1870 Transmission Component Slipping (TCC Stuck Off)

Go to Step 2 2 1. Install the scan tool. 2. With the engine off, turn the ignition switch on. NOTE: Before clearing DTC(s), use the scan tool to record Freeze Frame and Failure Records for reference, as data will be lost when the Clear Info function is used. 3. Record the DTC Freeze Frame and Failure Records. 4. Apply the brake pedal. 5. Select each transmission range: DL, D2, D3, D4, N, R, and P. Does each selected transmission range match the scan tool TR Switch display? 3 Drive the vehicle in 4th gear while the TCC is engaged. At any time is the TCC Slip Speed greater than 130 rpm for 8 seconds while the TCC is engaged? Go to System Diagnosis Charts Go to Step 3
Go to Range Switch Logic Table Go to Diagnostic Aids
7A185
Circuit Diagram
D07R100024
D07R100025
7A187
Parts Location
D07R100019
Legend (1) Connector X-3 (2) Connector H-14 (3) Connector H-19 (4) Connector H-18 (5) Connector H-12 (6) Connector B-24 (7) Connector I-9 (8) Connector I-1 (9) Connector B-26 (10) Connector I-46 (11) Connector H-18 (12) Connector H-15
(13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25)
Data Link Connector C-34 Connector H-17 PCM Connector E-21, E-22 Connector H-6 Connector H-5 Connector H-7 Connector E-55 Connector E-54 Connector E-53 Connector E-52 Connector E-27 Connector E-5 Connector E-20
Harness Connector Faces

No. B-24 Connector face No. E-53 Connector face
B-26
E-54
C-34
E-55
E-5
H-5
E-20
H-6
E-21 (J1)
H-7
E-22 (J2)
H-12
E-27
H-14
E-52
H-15

No. H-17 Connector face
7A189
H-18
H-19
I-1
I-9
I-18
I-46
X-3
X-10
SECTION
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
RODEO
7B1
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL TRANSMISSION MUA 5C
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Oil Seal (4X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Major Component (4X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Case and Transfer Case . . . . . Major Component (4X4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B1 7B2 7B4 7B5 7B5 7B5 7B5 7B6 7B6 7B7 7B11 7B16 7B16 7B17 7B18 7B21 7B21 7B22 7B25 Intermediate Plate with Gear Assembly, Detent, Shift Arm, and Interlock Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse Gear and 5th Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Gear Shaft, Main Gear Shaft, and Counter Gear Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassmebled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools (MUA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7B31 7B31 7B32 7B33 7B34 7B35 7B35 7B36 7B38 7B38 7B44 7B44 7B45 7B46 7B49 7B55 7B59
Service Precaution
7B2
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
General Description
A07RW039
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B3
A07RW040
The MUA5C is a constant mesh transmission, synchronized in all speeds. The transmission is designed for a great reduction of the shift effort and the quietest possible operation.
Principle parts of the transmission are the integral clutch housing, intermediate plate, the transfer case, the rear cover, and the gears. The transmission control box and transfer control box are built into the transmission and transfer case.
7B4
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Diagnosis
Condition Abnormal noise Possible cause Flywheel pilot bearing worn Bearings worn or broken (Mainshaft, counter shaft, and transfer shaft) Gear tooth contact surfaces worn or scuffed (Mainshaft, counter shaft, reverse idler gear and transfer gears) Splines worn (Mainshaft, synchronizer clutch hub) Gear or bearing thrust face seized Lack of backlash between meshing gears Hard Shifting Improper clutch pedal free play Change lever sliding portions worn Shift block, shift rod and/or control box sliding faces worn Shift arm and synchronizer sleeve groove worn Thrust washer, collar, and/or gear thrust faces worn (Mainshaft and counter shaft thrust play) Synchronizer parts worn Walking or Jumping out of gear Detent ball worn Detent spring weakened or broken Shift rod and/or control box sliding faces worn Shift arm and synchronizer sleeve groove worn Thrust washer, collar, and/or gear thrust faces worn (Mainshaft and counter shaft thrust play) Bearings worn or broken Splines worn synchronizer hub) (Mainshaft, Replace Replace Replace Correction
Replace Replace Replace Readjust Repair or replace Regrease Replace Replace worn parts Replace worn parts
Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace worn parts Replace worn parts
Replace Replace Replace Tighten Replenish oil Replace Replace
Synchronizer spring weakened or broken Oil leakage Loose drain plug(s) and/or filler plug(s) Defective or improperly installed gasket(s) Oil seal worn or scratched
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B5
Rear Oil Seal (4X2)

Disassembled View
220RY00016
Legend (1) Rear Propeller Shaft (2) Rear Oil Seal
Removal
1. Raise and support vehicle with suitable jack stands. 2. Remove propeller shaft flange yoke bolts and nuts at the differential side. Remove propeller shaft from the transmission main shaft spline. 3. Use a screwdriver to pry the rear oil seal from the rear cover.
Installation
1. Install a new oil seal(2) or (3) using the installer J29769.
220RS044
2. Insert the splined yoke into the transmission mainshaft spline. 3. Install the propeller shaft flange yoke to the drive pinion flange. Torque: 63 Nm (46 lb ft) 4. Check transmission fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle.
7B6
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Transmission
Disassembled View
220RW040
Legend (1) Gear Control Lever Knob (2) Transfer Control Lever Knob (3) Center Console (4) Grommet Assembly (5) Gear Control Lever and Transfer Control Lever (6) Transfer Protector (7) Fairing Plate (8) Rear Propeller Shaft (9) Front Propeller Shaft (10) Center Exhaust Pipe
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21)
Fuel Pipe Heat Protector Harness Clamp Harness Heat Protector Slave Cylinder Dust Cover Rear Mount Nut Third Crossmember Starter Flywheel Undercover Transmission Retaining Nut and Bolt Transmission
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B7
Removal
NOTE: Befor removing transmission assembly(4X4) from vehicle, change the transfar mode to 2WD using the 4WD push button on dash panel. 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove gear control lever knob(1). 3. Remove transfer control lever knob(2) (4X4). 4. Remove lower cluster assembly.
6. Remove center console(3).
F07RW023
7. Remove grommet assembly(4).
740RW021
5. Remove rear console.
262RW027
256RW005
7B8
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
11. Remove front propeller shaft(9) (4X4). NOTE: Apply alignment marks on the flange at both front and rear sides.
8. Remove gear control lever(5) and transfer control lever(5) (4X4). 9. Raise and support vehicle with suitable stands. Remove transfer protector(6) (4X4) and fairing plate(7).
401RW007
12. Remove center exhaust pipe(10) (6VD1 engine).

150RW006
10. Remove rear propeller shaft(8). NOTE: Apply alignment marks on the flange at both front and rear sides.
150RW008
401RW008
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
13. Remove fuel pipe heat protector(11) and clip.
7B9
16. Remove harness heat protector(13) (6VD1 engine). 17. Remove slave cylinder(14) and flexible hose fixing bracket (Y22SE engine).
141RW004
14. Disconnect transmission harness connectors and clip. Connector: Transfer switch (4X4), 24 actuator (4X4), speed sensor, back up switch 12 and 34 indicator switch. 15. Remove transmission harness clamps(12) from the transmission case and bracket.
205RW001
18. Remove dust covers(15) (6VD1 engine). 19. Support transmission with a transmission jack.
220RS001
220RS028
7B10
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
21. Remove third crossmember(17) by removing six fixing bolts. 22. Remove starter(18) (6VD1 engine). 23. Remove flywheel under cover(19). 6VD1 engine:3 pieces, Y22SE engine:1 piece. 24. Use clutch release bearing remover J39207 to disconnect the clutch release bearing from the clutch pressure plate (6VD1 engine).
20. Remove engine rear mount nuts(16) from third crossmember.
F07RW008
220RS002
25. Pull the shift fork toward the transmission to press the clutch release bearing against the clutch (6VD1 engine). 26. Insert the clutch release bearing remover between the wedge collar and the release bearing (6VD1 engine). NOTE: Be sure not to insert the remover between the wedge collar and the clutch.
022RW001
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B11
27. Turn the remover to separate the release bearing (6VD1 engine).
220RS004
28. Remove transmission retaining nuts and bolts(20). Remove transmission(21) from the vehicle.
Installation
1. Apply a thin coat of molybdenum disulfide grease to the top gear shaft spline. 2. Slowly operate the transmission jack until the front of transmission is aligned with the rear of the engine. The slope of the engine and the transmission must be the same. 3. Align the top gear shaft spline with the clutch driven plate spline.
220RS003
220RS007
7B12
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
4. Install the transmission to the engine. Tighten the transmission nuts and bolts as shown in the figure.
225RY00006
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B13
225R100001
5. Apply a force of 59 78 N (13.2 17.6 lb) to the tip of the shift fork in the direction of the transmission to engage the clutch pressure plate and release bearing. NOTE: A click sound is heard when the release bearing and the tip of the diaphragm spring engage each other. Check to see if they are securely engaged by pushing the tip of the shift fork toward the engine side while applying a force of about 25 N (5.5 lb). If the shift fork will not move, then they are securely engaged.
220RS006
7B14
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
6VD1 engine 3 11. Install clutch dust covers(15) to clutch housing (6VD1 engine). Torque: 6 Nm (52 lb in) 12. Connect transmission harness connectors and clip. Connector: transfer switch (4X4), 24 actuator (4X4), car speed sensor, 12 and 34 indicator switch. 13. Install bracket and transmission harness clamps(12) to the transmission case. 14. Install harness heat protector(13) (6VD1 engine). 15. Connect fuel pipe to transmission side.
6. Install flywheel under cover(19). pieces, HEC engine 1 piece. Torque: 8 Nm (69 lb in) 7. Install starter(18). Torque: 40 Nm (30 lb ft) 8. Install third crossmember(17). Torque: 50 Nm (37 lb ft) 9. Install engine rear mount nuts(16).
Torque: 40 Nm (30 lb ft) Remove the transmission jack from transmission side. 10. Apply grease to top hole portion of the shift fork. Install slave cylinder(14) and flexible hose fixing bracket (Y22SE engine). Torque: 43 Nm (32 lb ft)
220RW046
220RS007
Legend (1) Apply Grease
220RW047
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
16. Install fuel pipe heat protector(11) and clip. Torque: 63 Nm (46 lb ft)
7B15
18. Install front(9) (4X4) and rear propeller shaft(8). 19. Install transfer protector(6) (4X4) and fairing plate(7). Lower the vehicle.
141RW004
17. Install center exhaust pipe(10) (6VD1 engine). Torque: 43 Nm (32 lb ft)
150RW006
20. Install gear control lever(5) and transfer control lever(5) (4X4). 21. Install grommet assembly(4). 22. Install center console(3), rear console and lower cluster assembly. 23. Install transfer control lever knob(2) (4X4) and gear control lever knob(1). 24. Connect battery ground cable.
150RW008
7B16
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Transmission Case
Major Component (4X2)
220RW050
Legend (1) Clutch Release Bearing (2) Shift Fork (3) Fulcrum Bridge (4) Front Cover (with Oil Seal) (5) Counter Front Bearing Snap Ring (6) Top Gear Bearing Snap Rring
(7) Speedometer Sensor and Speedometer Driven Gear (8) Gear Control Box Assembly (9) Rear Cover with Oil Seal (10) 12 and 34 Indicator Switch, Pin, and Ball (11) Intermediate Plate with Gear Assembly (12) Transmission Case
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B17
Disassembly
1. Clean the exterior of the unit with solvent. 2. Remove the drain plug from the transmission case and drain the lubricant. 3. Remove the clutch release bearing(1) from the transmission case.
201RS022
6. Remove snap ring(5) fixing counter front bearing. 7. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the snap ring(6) fixing top gear bearing.
201RS020
4. Remove the snap pin. Remove the shift fork pin and shift fork(2) from the fulcrum bridge.
226RS001
8. Remove the speedometer sensor(7). Remove the plate(7). Remove the driven gear bushing and driven gear(7). NOTE: Apply a reference mark to the driven gear bushing before removal.
201RS021
5. Remove the fulcrum bridge bolts. Remove the fulcrum bridge(3) from the transmission case. Remove the front cover(4) and gasket from the transmission case.
9. Remove gear control box assembly(8). 10. Remove the rear cover assembly from the transmission case. 11. Remove 12 and 34 indicator switch(10), pin(10) and ball(10). Remove intermediate plate with gear assembly(11) from transmission case(12).
7B18
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
5. Install the O-ring(4) to the speedometer driven gear bushing(3). Install the driven gear to the speedometer driven gear bushing(3). 6. Install the speedometer driven gear assembly(7) to the transmission rear cover(9). Install the plate(1) to the transmission rear cover(9). Torque: 15 Nm (11 lb ft) 7. Install the speedometer sensor(7). Torque: 27 Nm (20 lb ft)
Reassembly
1. Apply recommended liquid gasket (LOCTITE 17430) or its equivalent to the transmission case(12), intermediate plate(11) and rear cover(9) fitting surfaces. 2. Install the intermediate plate with gear assembly(11) to the transmission case(12). Pull out the top gear shaft until the ball bearing snap ring groove protrudes from the transmission case front cover fitting face. Avoid subjecting the mainshaft to sudden shock or stress. 3. Tighten the transmission rear cover bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 37 Nm (27 lb ft) NOTE: Notes When Tightening the Bolt: D After cleaning the bolt hole, dry it thoroughly with air. D After cleaning the screw face of a removed bolt or new one, dry it thoroughly. Apply recommended liquid gasket (LOCTITE 242) or its equivalent before tightening it. 4. Install a new gasket and gear control box assembly(8). Install the harness clips and brackets and then tighten four new gear control box bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (14 lb ft)
225RW008
261RW043
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
8. Install top gear bearing snap ring(6) and counter front bearing snap ring(5). D Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the snap rings to the mainshaft and countershaft. D The snap rings must be fully inserted into the bearing snap ring groove. 9. Install front cover (with oil seal) (4). Front Cover Oil Seal Replacement D Remove the oil seal from the front cover. D Apply engine oil to a new oil seal outer circumference. D Apply recommended grease to the oil seal lip. D Use the oil seal installer J26540 to install the oil seal to the front cover.
7B19
11. Install the fulcrum bridge(3) to the transmission case. Tighten three fulcrum bridge bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 38 Nm (28 lb ft)
220RS009
12. Apply grease to the pin hole inner circumferences and thrust surfaces. Attach the shift fork(2) to the fulcrum bridge(3) by inserting the shift fork pin from the bottom side of the fulcrum bridge. Install the washer and snap pin.
220RS008
10. Install a new packing and front cover(4) to the transmission case. NOTE: Take care not to damage the oil seal. Notes When Tightening the Bolt: D After cleaning the bolt hole, dry it thoroughly with air. D After cleaning the screw face of a removed bolt or new one, dry it thoroughly. Apply recommended liquid gasket (LOCTITE 242) or its equivalent before tightening it. Tighten six new front cover bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft)
201RS018
7B20
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
13. Apply grease to the areas as shown in the figure.
201RW017
D Install the release bearing(1) to the shift fork(2) in the proper direction. NOTE: Ensure release bearing is properly positioned during installation, as shown in the figure.
201RS019
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B21
Transmission Case and Transfer Case

Major Component (4X4)
220RW041
Legend (1) Clutch Release Bearing (2) Shift Fork (3) Fulcrum Bridge (4) Front Cover (with Oil Seal) (5) Counter Front Bearing Snap Ring (6) Top Gear Bearing Snap Ring (7) Speedometer Sensor and Speedometer Driven Gear (8) Front Companion Flange (9) Rear Companion Flange (10) Gear Control Box Assembly (11) 2WD4WD Actuator Assembly (12) Transfer Rear Case Assembly (13) Detent, Shift Arm, and Interlock Pin (14) Bearing Snap Ring
(15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30)
Ball Bearing Lock Nut High-Low Clutch Hub and Sleeve Transfer Input Gear Needle Bearing Bearing Collar Ball Plate Bearing Snap Ring Front Output Gear Assembly Bearing Snap Ring Counter Gear Assembly 12 and 34 Indicator Switch, Pin, and Ball Transfer Case Assembly Intermediate Plate with Gear Assembly Transmission Case
7B22
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
5. Remove the fulcrum bridge bolts. D Remove the fulcrum bridge(3) from the transmission case. Remove the front cover(4) and gasket from the transmission case.
Disassembly
1. Clean the exterior of the unit with solvent. 2. Remove the drain plug from the transmission case and transfer case and drain the lubricant. 3. Remove the clutch release bearing(1) from the transmission case.
201RS022
201RS020
4. Remove the snap pin. Remove the shift fork pin and shift fork(2) from the fulcrum bridge(3).
6. Remove counter front bearing snap ring(5) and top gear bearing snap ring(6). Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the snap ring.
226RS001
201RS021
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7. Remove the speedometer sensor(7). Remove the plate(7). Remove the driven gear bushing and driven gear(7). NOTE: Apply a reference mark to the driven gear bushing before removal. 8. Remove front companion flange(8) and rear companion flange(9) using the flange holder J861411 to remove the end nut.
7B23
2. Remove the 2WD4WD actuator assembly bolts. 3. Pull the 2WD4WD actuator assembly with 2WD4WD shift rod.
220RW027
266RW001
9. Disconnect breather hose from transmission and remove gear control box assembly(10). 10. Remove 2WD4WD actuator assembly(11) by performing the following steps: 1. Disconnect the actuator breather hose from 2WD4WD actuator assembly(11).
Legend (1) Shift Rod: 2WD4WD (Position: 2WD) (2) 2WD4WD Actuator Assembly (3) Pull (4) Rear Case Assembly (5) Position: 4WD (6) Position: 2WD 4. Offset the actuator assembly.
220RW028
220RW002
7B24
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
14. Use a bearing remover J37217 and puller J37487 to remove the ball bearing(15).
5. Remove the actuator assembly.
220RW029
Legend (7) Position: 4WD (8) Mode: 2WD NOTE: Before removing the transmission and transfer assembly from vehicle, change the transfer mode to 2WD using the 4WD push button switch on dash panel. 11. Remove the transfer rear cover assembly(12) from the transfer case(28). 12. Regarding detent, shift arm, and interlock pin(13) disassembly, refer to Detent, Shift Arm, and Interlock Pin in Drive Line/Axle section. 13. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the bearing snap ring(14).
262RW032
15. Install the front companion flange temporarily. Use the flange holder J861411 and lock nut wrench J37219 to remove the lock nut(16). Remove the front companion flange.
226RW137
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
16. Remove high-low clutch sleeve(17). Use the universal puller to remove the high-low clutch hub(17) and transfer input gear(18).
7B25
262RS009
226RS070
17. Remove needle bearing(19), bearing collar(20), ball(21), and plate(22).
20. Remove bearing snap ring(25) by using a pair of snap ring pliers. 21. Remove the counter gear assembly(26) from the transfer case(28). 22. Remove 12 and 34 indicator switch, pin and ball(27). 23. Remove the transfer case assembly(28) from the transmission case. D Refer to Transfer Case Assembly in Drive Line/Axle section for repair of transfer case assembly. 24. Pull out intermediate plate with gear assembly(29) from transmission case.
Reassembly
1. Apply recommended liquid gasket (LOCTITE 17430) or its equivalent to the transmission case(30), intermediate plate(29) and transfer case(28) fitting surfaces. 2. Install the intermediate plate with gear assembly(29) to the transmission case(30). Pull out the top gear shaft until the ball bearing snap ring groove protrudes from the transmission case front cover fitting face. Avoid subjecting the mainshaft to sudden shock or stress. 3. Install the transfer case assembly(28) to the intermediate plate with gear assembly. Tighten the eight transmission-transfer case bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 37 Nm (27 lb ft) Refer to Transfer Rear Case Assembly in Drive Line/Axle section for oil seal replacement. 4. Install 12 and 34 indicator switch, pin and ball(27). 5. Install the counter gear assembly(26) to the transfer case(28). 6. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the snap ring(25) to the transfer case(28).
226RS071
18. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the bearing snap ring(23). 19. Use a plastic hammer to tap the front output gear assembly(24) free.
7B26
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NOTE: The snap ring must be fully inserted into the transfer case snap ring groove. 7. Install front output gear assembly(24). 8. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the snap ring (23) to the transfer case(28). NOTE: The snap ring must be fully inserted into the transfer case snap ring groove. 9. Install plate(22), ball(21), bearing collar(20), needle bearing(19), and transfer input gear(18). 10. Install High-low clutch hub and sleeve(17). The clutch hub face (with the heavy boss) must be facing the transfer input gear side.
226RS068
12. Use the punch to stake the lock nut at one spot. 13. Use a suitable drift and hammer to install the ball bearing(15).
226RW152
11. Install the front companion flange temporarily. D Use the flange holder J861411 and lock nut wrench J37219 to install the lock nut(16). Torque: 137 Nm (101 lb ft)
226RS079
14. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the bearing snap ring(14). 15. Regarding detent, shift arm, and interlock pin(13) assembly, refer to Detent, Shift Arm, and Interlock Pin in Drive Line/Axle section.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
16. Apply recommended liquid gasket (LOCTITE 17430) or its equivalent to the transfer rear case fitting faces.
7B27
2. Join the rod grooves of 2WD4WD actuator assembly and shift rod.
220RS017
220RW030
17. Perform the following steps before fitting the transfer rear case(12): 1. Shift the High-Low shift rod to the 4H side. 2. The cut-away portion of select rod head should align with the rear case holes stopper.
Legend (11) Shift Rod: 2WD4WD (Position: 4WD) (12) 2WD4WD Actuator Assembly (Mode: 2WD) (13) Rear Case Assembly 3. Push the 2WD4WD actuator assembly with 2WD4WD shift rod till the shift rod reaches the 2WD position.
230RS002
18. Tighten the eleven transfer rear case bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 37 Nm (27 lb ft) 19. Install 2WD4WD actuator assembly(11) by performing the following steps. 1. Shift the 2WD4WD shift rod to the 4WD side. Legend (14) Position: 2WD (15) Mode: 2WD 4. Tighten the 2WD4WD actuator bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 19 Nm (14 lb ft) 5. Connect the actuator breather hose to actuator.
220RW031
7B28
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
20. Install a new packing and gear control box assembly(10). Install the harness clips and brackets and then tighten four new gear control box bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (14 lb ft)
266RW001
22. Use the punch J39209 to stake the rear companion flange nut at two spots. Punch: J39209 D Stake the front companion flange nut at one spot.
261RW043
NOTE: Be sure to confirm that there is no crack at the staked portion of the flange nut after staking.
21. Install the rear and front companion flange(9) (8). Install the O-ring(9). Use the flange holder J861411 to tighten the flange nuts(9) (8) to the transfer case. Tighten new transfer flange nuts(9) (8) to the specified torque. Rear Companion Flange Torque: 167 Nm (123 lb ft) Front Companion Flange Torque: 137 Nm (101 lb ft)
266RS001
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
24. Install the plate to the transfer rear cover. Torque: 15 Nm (11 lb ft) 25. Install the speedometer sensor. Torque: 27 Nm (20 lb ft)
7B29
26. Install top gear bearing snap ring(6) and counter front bearing snap ring(5). Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the snap rings to the mainshaft and countershaft. The snap rings must be fully inserted into the bearing snap ring groove. 27. Install a new packing and front cover (with oil seal) (4) to the transmission case. NOTE: Take care not to damage the oil seal. Notes When Tightening the Bolt: D After cleaning the bolt hole, dry it thoroughly with air. D After cleaning the screw face of a removed bolt or new one, dry it thoroughly. Apply recommended liquid gasket (LOCTITE 242) or its equivalent before tightening it. Tighten six new front cover bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (18 lb ft) 28. Install the fulcrum bridge(3) to the transmission case. Tighten three fulcrum bridge bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 38 Nm (28 lb ft)
266RS003
23. Install the O-ring (4) to the speedometer driven gear bushing(3). Install the driven gear to the speedometer driven gear bushing(3). Install the speedometer driven gear assembly(7) to the transfer rear cover.
220RS009
225RW008
7B30
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Install the release bearing(1) to the shift fork(2) in the proper direction. NOTE: Ensure release bearing is properly positioned during installation, as shown in the figure.
29. Apply grease to the pin hole inner circumferences and thrust surfaces. Attach the shift fork(2) to the fulcrum bridge(3) by inserting the shift fork pin from the bottom side of the fulcrum bridge. Install the washer and snap pin.
201RS019
201RS018
30. Apply grease to the areas shown in the figure.
201RW017
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B31
Intermediate Plate with Gear Assembly, Detent, Shift Arm, and Interlock Pin
Disassembled View
220RS010
Legend (1) Detent Spring Plate and Gasket (2) Detent Spring (3) Detent Ball (4) Spring (5) Rev5th Shift Rod (6) Rev5th Shift Arm and Reverse Inhibitor
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
1st2nd Shift Rod 3rd4th Shift Rod 3rd4th Shift Arm 1st2nd Shift Arm Interlock Pin Intermediate Plate and Gear Assembly
7B32
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
D Use a spring pin remover to remove the shift arm spring pins from the shift arms and the shift rods.
Disassembly
1. Remove detent spring plate and gasket(1), detent spring(2) and detent ball(3). Use a magnetic hand to remove the detent balls from the intermediate plate.
230RS004
D Move the 3rd4th shift rod forward.
220RS011
2. Remove spring(4). 3. Remove rev5th shift rod(5), and rev5th shift arm and reverse inhibitor(6). Remove 1st2nd shift rod(7), 3rd4th shift rod(8), 3rd4th shift arm(9), and 1st2nd shift arm (10). D Hold a round bar against the shift rod end.
230RS005
D Remove the rev5th, 1st2nd and 3rd4th shifter rods carefully. Interlock pins are located between the shifter rods in the intermediate plate. 4. Remove interlock pin(11) from intermediate plate and gear assembly(12).
230RS003
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B33

Make the necessary adjustments, and part replacements if excessive wear or damage is discovered during inspection.
Shift Arm Thickness

D Use a micrometer to measure the shift arm thickness. If the measured value is less than the specified limit, the shift arm must be replaced. Shift Arm Thickness Standard 1st2nd 3rd4th Rev.5th 9.609.85 mm (0.3780.388 in) 9.609.80 mm (0.3780.386 in) Limit 9.0 mm (0.354 in)
220RS012
Detent Spring Tension

D Use a spring tester to measure the valve spring tension. If the measured value is less than the specified limit, the detent spring must be replaced. Detent Spring Tension Compressed height 20 mm (0.787 in) Standard 87.2 97.1 N (19.6 21.8 lb)
230RS006
Detent Spring Free Length

D Use a vernier caliper to measure the detent spring free length. If the measured value is less than the specified limit, the detent spring must be replaced. Detent Spring Free Length Standard 26.8 mm (1.06 in) Limit 26.2 mm (1.03 in)
220RS013
7B34
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
4. Install spring(4). 5. Put detent balls(3) in the intermediate plate holes. D Apply oil to the detent balls. 6. Install detent springs(2) and detent spring plate and gasket(1). D Install a new gasket and the detent spring plate. D Tighten the detent spring plate bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (14 lb ft)
Reassembly
1. Install 1st2nd shift arm(10) and 3rd4th shift arm(9) to intermediate plate and gear assembly(12). 2. Install 3rd4th shift rod(8) and 1st2nd shift rod(7). D Install the interlock pin(11) to the shift rod. D Install the shift rod together with the interlock pin to the intermediate plate. Do not allow the interlock pin to fall from the shift rod. D Hold a round bar against the shift rod end lower face to protect it against damage. D Install a new spring pin. Never reinstall the used spring pin.
220RS030
Legend (1) Warped
230RS007
3. Install rev5th shift arm and reverse inhibitor(6) and rev5th shift rod(5). D Apply oil to the reverse inhibitor inner surface. D Install the interlock pin(11) to the shift rod. D Install the shift rod together with the interlock pin to the intermediate plate. Do not allow the interlock pin to fall from the shift rod. D Hold a round bar against the shift rod end lower face to protect it against damage. D Install a new spring pin. Never reinstall the used spring pin.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B35
Reverse Gear and 5th Gear

Disassembled View
226RS094
Legend (1) Oil Seal Collar (4X4) (2) Ball Bearing (4X4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) Bearing Snap Ring (4X2) Ball Bearing (4X2) Bearing Snap Ring (4X2) Speedometer Drive Gear (4X2) Clip (4X2) Retainer Snap Ring (4X2) Retainer Thrust Plate Thrust Washer and Lock Ball Reverse Idler Gear Snap Ring Reverse Idler Gear Assembly Idle Shaft Pin Thrust Washer
(14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30)
Reverse Idler Gear Reverse Idler Shaft Bearing Snap Ring Ball Bearing Counter 5th Gear Counter Reverse Gear 5th Gear 5th Block Ring Needle Bearing Mainshaft Nut Rev5th Synchronizer Assembly Reverse Block Ring Reverse Gear Needle Baring Bearing Plate and Screw Bearing Snap Ring Intermediate Plate
7B36
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
5. Remove the retainer(7) together with the bearing(2) and the oil seal collar(1). (4X4) The universal puller may be used in place of the retaining ring remover. 6. Remove thrust plate(8) and thrust washer and lock ball(9). 7. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove reverse idler gear snap ring(10).
Disassembly
1. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the bearing snap ring(1). (4X2) 2. Set the bearing remover J37217 and puller J37487 to the bearing and the mainshaft end to remove ball bearing(2). (4X2)
262RW033
3. Remove bearing snap ring(3), speedometer drive gear(4), clip(5), retainer snap ring(6) and retainer(7). (4X2) 4. Set the retaining ring remover J37222 and puller J37487 to the retainer(7) and the mainshaft end. (4X4)
226RS004
8. Remove the reverse idler gear assembly(11) from the intermediate plate(30).
226RS005
262RW031
9. Remove idle shaft pin(12), thrust washer(13), reverse idler gear(14), and reverse idler shaft(15). 10. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the snap ring(16).
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
11. Attach the bearing remover to the counter gear shaft. Use the bearing remover to remove the ball bearing(17) and the counter 5th gear(18).
7B37
14. Engage the 3rd4th synchronizer with the 3rd gear. Engage the 1st2nd synchronizer with the 1st gear. Attach the holding fixture J37224 and base J328920 to the mainshaft and the counter gear.
226RS006
12. Remove counter reverse gear(19). 13. Remove 5th gear(20), 5th block ring(21), and needle bearing (2 piece type) (22).
226RS008
Use the mainshaft nut wrench J37219 to remove the mainshaft nut(23).
226RS007
226RS009
7B38
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
18. Use the snap ring pliers(2) to remove the mainshaft bearing snap ring(1) (29).
15. Use pry bars between the reverse gear(26) and bearing plate(28) to remove the Rev5th synchronizer assembly(24) together with reverse block ring(25) and reverse gear(26).
226RS011
226RS010
16. Remove needle bearing(27). 17. Use the torx bit wrench J37225(T45) to remove the bearing plate and screw(28) from the intermediate plate.
19. Hold the snap ring open with the pliers. Push the intermediate plate(30) toward the rear of the transmission to remove it. The bearing snap ring will come free.

Refer to Top Gear Shaft, Main Gear Shaft, and Counter Gear in this section for inspection and repair.
Reassembly
1. Mesh the counter gear with the mainshaft assembly. Install the holding fixture J37224 and base J328920 to the mainshaft and the counter gear.
220RS014
226RS012
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
2. Place the holding fixture (with the mainshaft and the counter shaft) in a vise. Install the intermediate plate(30). 3. Install bearing snap ring(29). 4. Apply recommended thread locking agents (LOCTITE 242) or its equivalent to each of the bearing plate screw threads. Install bearing plate and screw(28). Tighten the screws to the specified torque by using torx bit wrench J37225. Torque: 15 Nm (11 lb ft)
7B39
5. Install the synchronizer assembly to the mainshaft. The clutch hub face (with the heavy boss) must be facing the reverse gear side.
226RS013
220RS014
5. Install needle bearing(27), reverse gear(26), and reverse block ring(25). 6. Assemble rev5th synchronizer assembly(24) by performing the following steps. 1. Turn the clutch hub face(1) toward the sleeve groove(2) (rear side) on the outer circumference. 2. Check that the inserts(3) fit snugly into the block ring insert grooves. 3. Check that the inserts springs(4) are fitted to the inserts as shown in the illustration. 4. Check that the clutch hub(5) and the sleeve(6) slide smoothly.
226RS049
7B40
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
9. Use a punch to stake the mainshaft nut.
7. Mesh the 1st2nd and 3rd4th synchronizers with both the 1st and 3rd gears (double engagement).
226RW153 226RS015
This will prevent the mainshaft from turning. 8. Install the new mainshaft hub nut. Use the mainshaft nut wrench J37219 to tighten the mainshaft nut(23) to the specified torque. Torque: 137 Nm (101 lb ft)
10. Install needle bearing(22), 5th block ring(21), and 5th gear(20). 11. Apply engine oil to the counter reverse gear(19) and the reverse gear(26). Install the counter reverse gear(19) to the counter shaft. The reverse gear projection must be facing the intermediate plate.
226RS016
226RW151
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
12. Install the counter 5th gear(18) to the transmission.
7B41
D There are six snap ring sizes available. The snap rings are color-coded to indicate their thickness.
226RS019
13. Install ball bearing(17) and bearing snap ring by performing the following steps: D Select the snap ring which will provide the minimum clearance between the ball bearing and the snap ring.
226RS021
Ball Bearing and Snap Ring Clearance Standard: 00.15 mm (00.0059 in) Snap Ring Availability Thickness 1.1 mm (0.043 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in) 1.3 mm (0.051 in) 1.4 mm (0.055 in) 1.5 mm (0.059 in) 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Color Coding White Yellow Blue Pink Green Brown
D Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the snap ring(16) to the counter gear shaft. The snap ring must be fully inserted into the counter gear shaft snap ring groove. 14. Assemble reverse idler shaft(15), reverse idler gear(14), thrust washer(13), and idle shaft pin(12) into reverse idler gear assembly(11).
226RS020
7B42
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
D Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the snap ring to the reverse idler shaft. The snap ring must be fully inserted into the reverse idler shaft snap ring groove. 16. Install thrust washer and lock ball(9) by performing the following steps: D Use a thickness gauge to measure the clearance between the 5th gear and the thrust washer. 5th Gear and Thrust Washer Clearance Standard: 0.10 0.25 mm (0.004 0.010 in) D Measure clearance A as shown in the figure.
15. Select reverse idler gear snap ring(10) which will provide the minimum clearance between the intermediate plate(30) and the snap ring(10).
226RS022
D There are three snap ring sizes available. The snap rings are color-coded to indicate their thickness. Intermediate Plate and Snap Ring Clearance Standard: 0 0.15 mm (0 0.0059 in) Snap Ring Availability Thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) 1.3 mm (0.051 in) 1.4 mm (0.055 in) Color Coding
226RS023
White Yellow Blue
D Select appropriate thrust washer from chart. D There are four thrust washer sizes available. D The thrust washers are color coded to indicate their thickness.
226RS021
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Thrust Washer Availability Thickness mm (in) 7.9 (0.311) 8.0 (0.315) 8.1 (0.319) 8.2 (0.323) Color Coding White Yellow Green Blue A mm (in) Clearance mm (in)
7B43
19. Use the installer J37223 to install the ball bearing(2) to the mainshaft. (4X2)
8.058.1 0.150.25 (0.3170.319) (0.0060.010) 8.18.2 0.10.25 (0.3190.323) (0.0040.010) 8.28.3 0.10.25 (0.3230.327) (0.0040.010) 8.38.36 0.10.21 (0.3270.329) (0.0040.008)
226RS096
20. Install bearing snap ring(1). (4X2) 21. Apply engine oil to the bearing inner and outer circumference. (4X4) Use the installer J37223 to install the ball bearing(2) to the mainshaft in proper direction. (4X4)
226RS024
D Apply grease to the thrust washer and the lock ball. D Install the thrust washer and the lock ball. 17. Install thrust plate(8) and retainer(7). 18. Install retaining snap ring(6), clip(5), speedometer drive gear(4), and bearing snap ring(3). (4X2)
226RS025
22. Install oil seal collar(1). (4X4)
7B44
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Top Gear Shaft, Main Gear Shaft, and Counter Gear Shaft
Disassmebled View
226RS026
Legend (1) Top Gear Shaft Snap Ring (2) Top Gear Shaft (3) Ball Bearing (4) Needle Bearing (5) Top Block Ring (6) Mainshaft Snap Ring (7) 3rd4th Synchronizer Assembly (8) 3rd Block Ring (9) 3rd Gear (10) Needle Bearing (11) Needle Bearing Collar (12) Mainshaft Ball Bearing (13) 1st Gear Thrust Bearing (14) 1st Gear (15) 1st Inside Ring
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30)
1st Outside Ring 1st Block Ring Needle Bearing Clutch Hub Snap Ring 1st2nd Synchronizer Assembly 2nd Block Ring 2nd Outside Ring 2nd Inside Ring 2nd Gear Needle Bearing Mainshaft Bearing Snap Ring Front Rollar Bearing Center Roller Bearing Counter Gear Shaft
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B45
Disassembly
1. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the top gear shaft snap ring(1). 2. Remove top gear shaft(2) with ball bearing(3). 3. Use a bench press and the bearing remover J2291201 to remove the ball bearing(3).
6. Use a bench press and the bearing remover J2291201 to remove the 3rd4th synchronizer assembly(7) as a set. Disassemble the synchronizer assembly.
226RS029
226RS027
4. Remove needle bearing(4) and top block ring(5), mainshaft snap ring. 5. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the mainshaft snap ring(6).
Legend (1) Springs (2) Sleeve (3) Clutch Hub (4) Inserts 7. Remove 3rd block ring(8), 3rd gear(9), and needle bearing(10). 8. Remove needle bearing collar(11). 9. Use a bench press and the bearing remover J2291201 to remove the 1st gear(14) together with the mainshaft ball bearing(12) and 1st gear thrust bearing(13).
226RS028
226RS030
7B46
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
16. Use a bench press and the bearing remover J2291201 to remove the front roller bearing(28).
10. Disassemble 1st inside ring(15), 1st outside ring(16), and 1st block ring(17). 11. Remove needle bearing(18). 12. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to remove the clutch hub snap ring(19).
226RS034
17. Remove center roller bearing(29) from counter gear shaft(30).

226RS031
13. Use a bench press and the bearing remover J2291201 to remove the 2nd gear(24) together with 1st2nd synchronizer assembly(20), 2nd block ring(21), 2nd outside ring(22), and 2nd inside ring(23). Disassemble the synchronizer assembly.

Make the necessary adjustments, repairs, and part replacements if excessive wear or damage is discovered during inspection.
Block Ring and Dog Teeth Clearance

D Use a thickness gauge to measure the clearance between the block ring and the dog teeth.
226RW147
Legend (1) Springs (2) Sleeve (3) Clutch Hub (4) Inserts 14. Remove needle bearing(25) from mainshaft(26). 15. Remove bearing snap ring(27)
226RS035
If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the block ring must be replaced. Block Ring and Dog Teeth Clearance Standard 1.5 mm (0.059 in) Limit 0.8 mm (0.032 in)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B47
1st2nd Synchronizer (3CONE)

D Use a thickness gauge to measure the clearance between the block ring and the dog teeth.
Block and Insert Clearance Standard 3rd4th 1st2nd Rev5th 3.46 3.74 mm (0.136 0.147 in) 4.34 4.66 mm (0.171 0.183 in) 3.59 3.91 mm (0.141 0.154 in) Limit 4.0 mm (0.158 in) 4.9 mm (0.193 in) 4.1 mm (0.161 in)
Clutch Hub and Insert Clearance

D Use a thickness gauge to measure the clearance between the clutch hub and the insert.
226RS036
If the measured value exceeds the specified limit,the 1st2nd synchronizer assembly must be replaced. Block Ring and Dog Teeth Clearance Standard 1.5 mm (0.059 in) Limit 0.8 mm (0.032 in)
Block Ring and Insert Clearance

D Use a vernier caliper or thickness gauge to measure the clearance between the block ring and the insert.
226RS038
If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the clutch hub and the insert must be replaced. Clutch Hub and Insert Clearance Standard 3rd4th 1st2nd Rev5th 0.01 0.19 mm (0.0004 0.0075 in) 0.09 0.31 mm (0.0035 0.0122 in) Limit 0.3 mm (0.012 in) 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
226RS037
If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the block ring and the insert must be replaced.
7B48
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Gear Inside Diameter Standard 1st 3rd 2nd Rev. 5th 45.000 45.013 mm (1.771 1.772 in) 52.000 52.013 mm (2.047 2.048 in) 48.000 48.013 mm (1.889 1.890 in) 32.000 32.013 mm (1.259 1.260 in) Limit 45.100 mm (1.776 in) 52.100 mm (2.051 in) 48.100 mm (1.894 in) 32.100 mm (1.246 in)
Mainshaft Run-out
D Install the mainshaft to V-blocks. D Use a dial indicator to measure the mainshaft central portion run-out.
Reverse Idler Gear and Idler Gear Shaft Clearance

D Use a micrometer to measure the idler gear shaft diameter. D Use an inside dial indicator to measure the idler gear inside diameter.
226RS039
If the measured mainshaft run-out exceeds the specified limit, the mainshaft must be replaced. Mainshaft Runout Limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
Gear Inside Diameter

D Use an inside dial indicator to measure the gear inside diameter.
226RS041
D Calculate the idler gear and idler gear shaft clearance. Idler gear inside diameter-idler gear shaft diameter = idle gear and idler gear shaft clearance. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the idle gear and/or the idler gear shaft must be replaced. Idler Gear and Idler Gear Shaft Clearance Standard: 0.0410.074 mm (0.0160.0029 in) Limit: 0.150 mm (0.0059 in)
226RS040
If the measured value is less than the specified limit, the gear must be replace.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B49
Clutch Hub Spline Play

D Set a dial indicator to the clutch hub to be measured.
226RS043
226RS042
Reassembly
1. Install center roller bearing(29) to counter gear shaft(30). D Apply engine oil to the bearing inner and outer circumferences. D Install the roller bearing in the proper direction. NOTE: Check that outer race moves only in the direction of arrow.
D Move the clutch hub as far as possible to both the right and the left. Note the dial indicator reading. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the clutch hub must be replaced. Clutch Hub Spline Play Standard 1st2nd 3rd4th Rev. 5th 0 0.1 mm (0 0.004 in) 0 0.2 mm (0 0.008 in) Limit 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
Ball Bearing Play

D Use a dial indicator to measure the ball bearing play. Ball Bearing Play Limit: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
226RS044
2. Install front roller bearing(28) by performing the following steps. D Use bearing installer to install the front roller bearing inner race to the counter gear shaft. D Install the outer race and roller assembly. The snap ring groove must be facing the transmission front side.
7B50
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
5. Assemble 2nd inside ring(23), 2nd outside ring(22), and 2nd block ring(21). D Apply engine oil to the synchronizer ring friction surfaces.
D Use bearing installer J35283 to install the ring.
226RS045
Legend (1) Ring (2) Outer Race and Roller Assembly (3) Inner Race 3. Install bearing snap ring(27) to mainshaft(26). 4. Apply engine oil to the needle bearing(25) and the 2nd gear thrust surfaces. Install the needle bearing(25) and the 2nd gear(24) to the mainshaft. The 2nd gear dog teeth must be facing the transmission rear side.
226RS047
Legend (1) Block Ring (2) Outside Ring (3) Inside Ring (4) 2nd Gear (5) Needle Bearing 6. Assemble 1st2nd synchronizer assembly by performing the following steps: 1. Check that the inserts(3) fit snugly into the block ring insert grooves. 2. Check that the inserts springs(4) are fitted to the inserts as shown in the illustration. 3. Check that the clutch hub(5) and the sleeve(6) slide smoothly. 4. Install the synchronizer assembly to the mainshaft. The clutch hub face (with the heavy boss) must be facing the 2nd gear side.
226RS046
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B51
226RS048
226RS050
There are three snap ring sizes available. The snap rings are color coded to indicate their thickness.
226RS049
7. Install clutch hub snap ring(19) by performing the following steps: D Select the snap ring which will provide the minimum clearance between the 1st2nd clutch hub and the snap ring.
226RS021
Clutch Hub and Snap Ring Clearance Standard: 0 0.1 mm (0 0.004 in) Snap Ring Availability Thickness 1.80 mm (0.071 in) 1.85 mm (0.073 in) 1.90 mm (0.075 in) Color Coding White Yellow Blue
D Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the snap ring to the mainshaft. The snap ring must be fully inserted into the mainshaft snap ring groove.
7B52
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
9. Install the 1st gear thrust bearing and the race(13) to the main shaft. The thrust bearing side must be facing the transmission front side.
226RS031
8. Install needle bearing(18), 1st block ring(17), 1st outside ring(16), 1st inside ring(15), and 1st gear(14). D Apply engine oil to the needle bearing, 1st gear thrust surfaces and synchronizer ring friction surfaces. D Install the needle bearing and the 1st gear to the mainshaft. The 1st gear dog teeth must be facing the transmission front side.
226RS054
10. Apply engine oil to the mainshaft ball bearing(12) and the mainshaft(26). Install the ball bearing(12) and needle bearing collar(11) to the mainshaft(26). The ball bearing snap ring groove must be facing the transmission rear side. Use a bench press and installer J613301 to slowly force the collar into place.
226RS053
Legend (1) 1st Gear (2) Needle Bearing (3) Inside Ring (4) Outside Ring (5) Block Ring
226RS055
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
11. Apply engine oil to the needle bearing and the 3rd gear thrust surfaces. Install the needle bearing(10) and the 3rd gear(9) to the mainshaft. The 3rd gear dog teeth must be facing the transmission front side.
7B53
226RS049
14. Select and install mainshaft snap ring(6) in the following way: D Select the snap ring which will provide the minimum clearance between the 3rd4th clutch hub and the snap ring.
226RS056
12. Install 3rd block ring(8). 13. Check and install 3rd4th synchronizer assembly(7) by the following steps: 1. Check that the inserts(3) fit snugly into the block ring insert grooves. 2. Check that the insert springs(4) are fitted to the inserts as shown in the illustration. 3. Check that the clutch hub(5) and the sleeve(6) slide smoothly. 4. Install the synchronizer assembly to the mainshaft. The clutch hub face (with the heavy boss) must be facing the 3rd gear side.
226RS058
226RW221
7B54
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
17. Use a bench press to install the top gear shaft ball bearing(3) to the top gear shaft(2).
There are three snap ring sizes available. The snap rings are color coded to indicate their thickness.
226RS059
226RS021
Clutch Hub and Snap Ring Clearance Standard: 0 0.1 mm (0 0.004 in) Snap Ring Availability Thickness 1.80 mm (0.071 in) 1.85 mm (0.073 in) 1.90 mm (0.075 in) Color Coding White Yellow Blue
The snap ring groove must be facing the transmission front side. 18. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the top gear shaft snap ring(1) to the bearing.
D Use a pair of snap ring pliers to install the snap ring to the mainshaft. The snap ring must be fully inserted into the mainshaft snap ring groove. 15. Install top block ring(5). 16. Apply grease to the bearing inner and outer circumferences and install needle bearing(4).
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B55

4X2 Transmission type Transfer case 4X4 Synchronized type gears shifting between the 2 and 4wheel drive mode. Constant mesh type gears between low and high 3.767 2.248 1.404 1.000 0.809 3.873 2.95 lit. (3.12 US qt) 1.45 lit. (1.53 US qt) Engine oil: Refer to the chart in SECTION 0 1.000 2.050 Fully synchronized forward and reverse gears
Control method Gear ratio: Transmission 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th Rev. Gear ratio: Transfer Transmission oil capacity Transfer oil capacity Type of lubricant High Low
Remote control with the gear shift lever on the floor.
7B56
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
225RY00004
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B57
Torque Specifications (Contd)
E07RW017
7B58
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Torque Specifications (Contd)
E07RW019
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
7B59
Special Tools (MUA)

J37222 Mainshaft collar remover
J37223 Mainshaft end bearing installer
J37487 Puller
J2291201 Bearing remover/installer
J37224 Holding fixture
J29769 Rear cover oil seal installer
J26540 Front cover oil seal installer
J37219 Wrench
J39207 Remover; Clutch release bearing
J37225 Tork bit wrench (T45)
J861411 Flange holder
7B60
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
TOOL NO. TOOL NAME
ILLUSTRATION
J39209 Punch; end nut
J35283 Counter shaft bearing installer
J37217 Bearing remover
SECTION
CLUTCH
RODEO
7C1
TRANSMISSION
CLUTCH
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch Assembly (Y22SE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch Assembly (Y22SE) and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch Assembly (6VD1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch Assembly (6VD1) and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7C1 7C2 7C7 7C8 7C8 7C8 7C9 7C13 7C15 7C15 7C15 7C17 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slave Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7C21 7C23 7C23 7C24 7C24 7C24 7C27 7C28 7C28 7C28 7C28 7C29 7C30 7C33
Service Precaution
7C2
CLUTCH
6VD1
General Description
Clutch
Y22SE
A07RW031
A07RW035
The clutch assembly consists of the pressure plate assembly and the driven plate assembly. The clutch pedal is connected to the release bearing through the shift fork. The driven plate assembly is installed between the flywheel and the pressure plate. Diaphragm spring pressure holds the driven plate against the flywheel and the pressure plate to provide the friction necessary to engage the clutch. Depressing the clutch pedal moves the shift fork against the release bearing. The release bearing force overcomes the force of the diaphragm spring and separates the driven plate from the flywheel and pressure plate to disengage the clutch. For 6VD1 (3.2L) engine model, the pulltype clutch is employed.
CLUTCH
7C3
Master Cylinder
A07RW007
The master cylinder converts mechanical energy into hydraulic energy. Depressing the clutch pedal causes the push rod to move against the piston to close the return port.
Clutch fluid is forced out of the master cylinder. Releasing the clutch pedal causes the return spring to force the piston back to its original position.
7C4
CLUTCH
Slave Cylinder
Y22SE
A07RW028
6VD1
A07RW037
The slave cylinder converts hydraulic energy into mechanical energy. Hydraulic fluid supplied by the master cylinder moves the slave cylinder piston to
actuate the shift fork. The mechanical energy produced by the slave cylinder is directly proportional to the diameters of the master cylinder and the slave cylinder.
CLUTCH
7C5
Pressure Plate Assembly

Y22SE
A07RW024
6VD1
A07RW025
The pressure plate assembly consists of the clutch cover, the pressure plate with diaphragm spring.
Operating the clutch pedal causes the pressure plate to move in an axial direction to engage and disengage the clutch.
7C6
CLUTCH
Driven Plate Assembly

Y22SE
A07RW026
6VD1
A07RW027
The driven plate assembly consists of the plate and the facing. The plate consists of the clutch center, the cushioning plate, and the torsion springs.
The facing is riveted to both sides of the cushioning plate. The cushioning plate provides a longer service life by minimizing wear and vibration at the clutch contact surfaces.
CLUTCH
7C7
Diagnosis
Condition Dragging Possible cause Air in circuit. Driven plate worn or warped. Clutch fork off the ball stud. Diaphragm spring weak or tip of fingers worn. Driven plate sticking on splines. Pilot bearing worn or damaged. Master cylinder and slave cylinder seals worn. Slipping Clutch facing worn. Driven plate friction pads worn or oilsoaked. Diaphragm spring weak. Pressure plate or flywheel warped. Master cylinder and slave cylinder seals worn. Chattering Clutch facing in poor contact or facing warped. Surface of facing hardened. Driven plate friction pads oil soaked. Damper broken. springs weakened or Replace. Install correctly and lubricate. Replace. Clean and free splines and lubricate with grease. Replace. Replace. Replace. Replace and check for leaks as needed. Replace pressure plate. Replace. Replace as needed. Replace. Replace. Replace and check for leaks. Replace. Replace. Replace as needed. Replace the pressure plate. Replace the retaining spring or install the fork correctly. Replace and check for leaks as needed. Clean, or replace if damaged, and lubricate. Install correctly, and lubricate. Replace. Replace. Install correctly and lubricate. Replace. Free up, or replace, and lubricate. Replace the pressure plate. Clean out or replace. Repair or replace as needed. Replace. Lubricate with high temperature grease. Correction Bleed and check for damage.
Rivets on clutch plate loosened. Pressure plate or flywheel warped. Rattling Diaphragm spring weak. Clutch fork loose or off the ball stud. Driven plate springs weak or oil in the damper. Release bearing noisy with the clutch engaged Release bearing binding. Clutch fork off the ball stud or loose spring tension. Linkage return springs weak. Noisy Release bearing worn or damaged. Clutch fork off the ball stud. Pilot bearing loose. Pedal stays on the floor when disengaged Pedal is hard to push Replace bearing binding. Diaphragm spring weak. Hydraulic line blocked or crimped. Master or slave cylinders bindinig. Driven plate worn. Squeaking Ball stud not lubricated or incorrectly lubricated.
7C8
CLUTCH
Clutch Assembly (Y22SE)

Clutch Assembly (Y22SE) and Associated Parts
201RX003
Legend (1) Transmission Assembly (2) Pressure Plate Assembly (3) Driven Plate Assembly
(4) Release Bearing (5) Shift Fork (6) Crank Shaft Bearing
Removal
1. Remove transmission assembly, refer to MANUAL TRANSMISSION of Section 7B for REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION procedure.
CLUTCH
2. Use the clutch pilot aligner (7) J42877 to prevent the driven plate assembly from falling free.
7C9
5. Remove pressure plate assembly (2) and driven plate assembly (3). 6. Remove release bearing (4). NOTE: The release bearing is permanently packed with lubricant and should not be soaked in cleaning solvent, as this will dissolve the lubricant. 7. Remove shift fork. D Do not remove crank shaft bearing (6) except for replacement. Remove the crank shaft bearing (6) using remover J5822 and sliding hammer J23907.
201RX002
Legend (3) Driven Plate Assembly (2) Pressure Plate Assembly (7) Pilot Aligner 3. Mark the flywheel, clutch cover and pressure plate (2) lug for alignment when installing. 4. Loosen the clutch cover bolts in the numerical order shown in the illustration.
015RS077

Make necessary adjustments, repairs, and part replacements if wear, damage, or other problems are discovered during inspection.

Visually inspect the pressure plate friction surface for excessive wear and heat cracks. If excessive wear or deep heat cracks are present, the pressure plate must be replaced.
201RS036
7C10
CLUTCH
Pressure Plate Warpage

Use a straight edge and a feeler gauge to measure the pressure plate friction surface flatness in four directions.
Clutch Set Force

1. Invert the pressure plate assembly. 2. Place a new driven plate over the pressure plate. A metal sheet with thickness of 7.0mm (0.276in) may be used in place of the driven plate. 3. Compress the pressure plate assembly until the distance becomes 4mm (0.157in). 4. Note the pressure gauge reading. Clutch Set Force Standard: 5488N (1235lb)
201RS038
If any of the measured values exceed the specified limit, the pressure plate must be replaced. Pressure Plate Warpage Limit: 0.3mm (0.012in)
Clutch Cover
Visually inspect the entire clutch cover for excessive wear, cracking, and other damage. The clutch cover must be replaced if any of these conditions are present.
201RY00003
Diaphragm Spring Finger Height

1. Place a 7.0mm (0.276in) spacer beneath the pressure plate. 2. Fully compress the pressure plate and diaphragm spring. There are two ways to do this: a. Use a bench press to press down on the assembly from the top. b. Tighten the fixing bolts.
201RS039
CLUTCH
3. Measure the spring finger height from base to spring tip. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the pressure plate assembly must be replaced. Spring Finger Height Standard: 37.5 mm 39.5 mm (1.48 in 1.56 in)
7C11
2. Visually inspect the facing surfaces for cracking and excessive scorching. Visually inspect the facing surfaces for the presence of oil or grease. If any of these conditions are discovered, the facing must be cleaned or replaced.
201RS007
201RY00001
Shift Fork
1. Visually inspect the surfaces of the shift fork making contact with the shift block. 2. Remove any minor stepping or abrasion from the shift block with an oil stone. 3. Apply molybdenum disulfide type grease to the areas as shown in the figure.
3. Check that the driven plate moves smoothly on the transmission top gear shaft spline. Minor ridges on the top gear shaft spline may be removed with an oil stone.
Driven Plate Warpage

1. Insert the clutch pilot aligner J42877 into the driven plate splined hub. The clutch pilot aligner must be held perfectly horizontal. 2. Set a dial indicator to the driven plate outside circumference.
F07RW030

201RS008
1. Visually inspect the torsion spring for looseness, breakage, and weakening. If any of these conditions are discovered, the driven plate assembly must be replaced.
7C12
CLUTCH
3. Slowly turn the driven plate. Read the dial indicator as you turn the driven plate. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the driven plate assembly must be replaced. Driven Plate Warpage Standard: 0.7 mm (0.028 in) Limit: 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Rivet Head Depression

Use a depth gauge or a straight edge with steel rule to measure the rivet head depression (1) from the facing surface (2). Be sure to measure the rivet head depression on both sides of the driven plate. If the measured value is less than the specified limit, the facing must be replaced. Rivet Head Depression Standard: MIN 1.3 mm (0.051 in) Limit: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
Driven Plate Splined Hub Spline Wear

1. Clean the driven plate splined hub. 2. Install the driven plate to the transmission top gear shaft spline. 3. Set a surface gauge to the driven plate outside circumference. 4. Slowly turn the driven plate counterclockwise. Measure the spline rotation play as you turn the driven plate. Driven Plate Splined Hub Spline Wear Standard: 0.5 mm (0.020 in) Limit: 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
201RS010

Check the cover for cracks and distortion, and the diaphragm spring for heat distortion, loosened rivets. Check the diaphragm spring for wear.
201RS009
201RS047
CLUTCH
7C13
Installation
1. Clean and lubricate with grease. 2. Use installer J1522 to install crankshaft bearing (6). X22SE
4. Pack the inside recess (A) of the release bearing with grease as shown in the figure.
201RY00004
5. Install driven plate assembly by using aligner J42877.

015RS078
3. Apply molybdenum disulfide type grease to the areas as shown in the figure and install shift fork (5).
201RS049
F07RW030
7C14
CLUTCH
6. Tighten the bolts holding the pressure plate assembly (2) in the order shown in the figure. Torque: 18Nm (13 lb ft)
201RS050
7. Remove the aligner. NOTE: Do not strike the aligner with a hammer to remove it. 8. Install transmission assembly (1) to the engine. Refer to Transmission Installation in Manual Transmission section.
CLUTCH
7C15
Clutch Assembly (6VD1)

Clutch Assembly (6VD1) and Associated Parts
201RS023
Legend (1) Transmission Assembly (2) Pressure Plate Assembly (3) Driven Plate Assembly
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Release Bearing Shift Fork Fulcrum Bridge Flywheel Assembly and Crankshaft Bearing
Removal
1. Refer to MANUAL TRANSMISSION of Section 7B for REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION procedure of transmission assembly (1).
7C16
CLUTCH
5. Remove the snap pin. Remove the shift fork pin and shift fork from the fulcrum bridge.
2. Use the pilot aligner J24547 to prevent the driven plate assembly (3) from falling free.
201RS001
201RS025
Legend (2) Pressure Plate Assembly (3) Driven Plate Assembly (8) Pilot Aligner 3. Mark the flywheel, clutch cover and pressure plate lug for alignment when installing. 4. Remove the release bearing (4) from the transmission case.
6. Remove the fulcrum bridge bolts. Remove the fulcrum bridge (6) from the transmission case.
201RS026
201RS024
CLUTCH
D Do not remove crankshaft bearing (7) except for replacement. D Use the remover J5822 and sliding hammer J23907 to remove the crankshaft bearing.
7C17
Pressure Plate Warpage

D Use a straight edge and a feeler gauge to measure the pressure plate friction surface flatness in four directions. If any of the measured values exceed the specified limit, the pressure plate must be replaced. Pressure Plate Warpage Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
015RS045

Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage, or any other abnormal condition are found through inspection.
201RS003
Clutch Cover
D Visually check the entire clutch cover for excessive wear, cracking, and other damage. The clutch cover must be replaced if any of these conditions are present.

D Visually check the pressure plate friction surface for excessive wear and heat cracks. If excessive wear or deep heat cracks are present, the pressure plate must be replaced.
201RS004
201RS002
7C18
CLUTCH
Clutch Set Force

1. Invert the pressure plate assembly. 2. Place a new driven plate over the pressure plate. A metal sheet with thickness of 8.0mm (0.315in) may be used in place of the driven plate. 3. Compress the pressure plate assembly until the distance becomes 12mm (0.472in). 4. Note the pressure gauge reading. If the measured value is less than the specified limit, the pressure plate assembly must be replaced. Clutch Set Force Standard: 7208N (1621lb) Limit: 6669N (1499lb)
201RW016

D Visually check the torsion spring for looseness, breakage, and weakening. If any of these conditions are discovered, the driven plate assembly must be replaced. D Visually check the facing surfaces for cracking and excessive scorching. Visually inspect the facing surfaces for the presence of oil or grease. If any of these conditions are discovered, the facing must be cleaned or replaced. D Check that the driven plate moves smoothly on the transmission top gear shaft spline. Minor ridges on the top gear shaft spline may be removed with an oil stone.
201RW014
Diaphragm Spring Finger Height

1. Place a new driven plate or a 8.0mm (0.315in) spacer beneath the pressure plate. 2. Fully compress the pressure plate and diaphragm spring. There are two ways to do this: a. Use a bench press to press down on the assembly from the top. b. Tighten the fixing bolts. NOTE: Preload on diaphragm spring finger must be 4998N (11-22lb) in direction of release, when clutch cover assembly is bolted to the flywheel. 3. Measure the spring height from base to spring tip. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the pressure plate assembly must be replaced. Spring Finger Height Standard: 49.9 51.9 mm (1.965 2.043 in)
201RS007
CLUTCH
7C19
Driven Plate Warpage

1. Insert the clutch pilot aligner J24547 into the driven plate splined hub. The clutch pilot aligner must be held perfectly horizontal. 2. Set a dial indicator to the driven plate outside circumference. 3. Slowly turn the driven plate. Read the dial indicator as you turn the driven plate. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the driven plate assembly must be replaced. Driven Plate Warpage Standard: 0.7mm (0.028in) Limit: 1.0mm (0.039in)
201RS009
Rivet Head Depression

D Use a depth gauge or a straight edge with steel rule to measure the rivet head depression (1) from the facing surface (2). D Be sure to measure the rivet head depression on both sides of the driven plate. If the measured value is less than the specified limit, the driven plate assembly must be replaced. Rivet Head Depression Standard Fly wheel side
201RS008
Limit 0.2mm (0.008in)
1.21.8mm (0.0470.071in) 1.62.2mm (0.0620.087in)
Driven Plate Splined Hub Spline Wear

1. Clean the driven plate splined hub. 2. Install the driven plate to the transmission top gear shaft spline. 3. Set a surface gauge to the driven plate outside circumference. 4. Slowly turn the driven plate counterclockwise. Measure the spline rotation play as you turn the driven plate. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the driven plate assembly must be replaced. Driven Plate Warpage Standard: 0.5mm (0.020in) Limit: 1.0mm (0.039in)
Pressure plate side
201RS010
7C20
CLUTCH
Release Bearing
D Visually check the release bearing for excessive play, noise and breakage. If any of these conditions are discovered, the release bearing must be replaced.
Wedge Collar (10)

D Visually check the surfaces of the wedge collar making contact with the release bearing for excessive wear and damage. D Replace exhibiting excessive wear or damage.
201RS011
D When replacing the release bearing (4), replace both the wedge collar (10) and wire ring (11) at the same time.
201RS013
Shift Fork
D Visually check the surfaces of the shift fork making contact with the release bearing for excessive wear and damage. D Remove any minor stepping or abrasion from shift fork with an oil stone. Replace exhibiting excessive wear or damage.
201RS012
Legend (2) Pressure Plate Assembly (4) Release Bearing (10) Wedge collar (11) Wire Ring
201RS014
CLUTCH
7C21
Installation
1. Clean and lubricate with grease. 2. Use the installer J26516A and driver handle J8092 to install the crankshaft bearing (7).
4. Apply molybdenum disulfide type grease to the pin hole inner circumferences and thrust surfaces. Attach the shift fork (5) to the fulcrum bridge (6) and insert the pin from below of the fulcrum bridge. Install the washer and snap pin.
015RS046
201RS018
3. Install the fulcrum bridge (6) to the transmission case. Tighten three fulcrum bridge bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 38 Nm (28 lb ft)
5. Apply molybdenum disulfide type grease to the areas shown in the figure.
201RS015
Install the release bearing (4) in the proper direction.

201RS026
7C22
CLUTCH
7. Tighten the bolts holding the pressure plate assembly (2) in the order shown in the figure.
NOTE: Ensure release bearing is properly positioned during installation, as shown in the figure.
201RS019
201RS017
6. Use the pilot aligner J24547 to install the driven plate assembly (3).
Torque: 18 Nm (13 lb ft) 8. Remove the aligner. NOTE: Do not strike the aligner with a hammer to remove it. 9. Install transmission assembly to the engine.
201RS016
CLUTCH
7C23
Clutch Control
Parts Location View
205R100002
Legend (1) Pin and Jaw Joint Pin (2) Pedal Assembly and Switch (3) Oil Line Pipe
(4) Slave Cylinder Assembly (5) Master Cylinder Assembly (6) Oil Line Hose
7C24
CLUTCH
Removal
1. Disconnect the ground battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel lower cover (7) and driver knee bolster panel assembly (8).

Make necessary adjustments, repairs, and part replacements if wear, damage or other problems are discovered during inspection.
Installation
Clutch Pedal Adjustment
1. With clutch switch. 1. Disconnect clutch switch connector. 2. Loosen lock nut, then turn switch out until there is a gap between the switch plunger and clutch pedal.
740RW023
Legend (7) Driver Lower Cover (8) Driver Knee Bolster Panel 3. Remove pin and jaw joint pin (1). 4. Remove pedal assembly and switch (2). 5. Remove oil line pipe (3). 6. Remove slave cylinder assembly (4).
208RW006
Y22SE MUA
Legend (7) Push Rod (8) Clutch Switch
205RW001
7. Remove master cylinder assembly (5). 8. Remove oil line hose (6).
CLUTCH
2. Loosen clutch master cylinder push rod lock nut. Turn push rod by hand to set clutch pedal height to within specification. Tighten push rod lock nut. Clutch Pedal Height 178 188 mm (7.01 7.40 in) 3. Lock the lock nut. 4. Connect clutch switch connector.
7C25
Clutch Switch and Clutch Pedal Clearance 0.5 1.5 mm (0.020 0.059 in) 4. After adjusting the clutch pedal height, push the clutch pedal by hand to ensure the clutch pedal free play is within specification. Pedal Free Play 5 15 mm (0.20 0.59 in) 5. Perform clutch pedal engagement height inspection: 1. Operate the parking brake lever and block the wheels. 2. Start the engine, fully step on the clutch pedal slowly and move the shift lever 1st position. 3. With the engine idling, release the clutch pedal slowly and measure its stroke just prior to its clutching position. Clutch Pedal Engagement Height (H3) MIN. 30 mm (1.18 in)
F07RW026
3. With clutch switch. 1. Turn the clutch switch until the switch bolt just touches the clutch pedal arm. 2. Adjust clutch switch by backing it out half a turn, and measure the clearance between the clutch pedal arm and the clutch switch bolt end.
F07RW028
6. If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, check the following points and repair if necessary: D Hydraulic circuit for fluid leakage or air in circuit. D Clutch disc warped. D Diaphragm spring weakened or tip of fingers worn. D Driven plate sticking on sprines.
F07RW027
D Release bearing worn or damaged. D Master cylinder and slave cylinder worn.
Legend (8) Clutch Switch (10) Clutch Pedal Arm (11) Lock Nut (12) Bracket (13) Back Out Switch 1/2 Turn
7C26
CLUTCH
2. Pump the clutch pedal repeatedly and hold it depressed.
Torque
D Master cylinder to dash panel 16 Nm (12 lb ft) D Clutch pedal to dash panel 15 Nm (11 lb ft) D Master cylinder push rod to yoke 17 Nm (12 lb ft) D Clutch pipe to master cylinder 16 Nm (12 lb ft) D Clutch pipe to flex, hose 20 Nm (14 lb ft) D Slave cylinder to case 43 Nm (32 lb ft) D Slave cylinder bleeder screw 8 Nm (69 lb in) D Clutch pipe to slave cylinder 20 Nm (14 lb ft)
Bleeding
1. Check the level of clutch fluid in the reservoir and replenish if necessary.
203RS005
3. Loosen the bleeder screw to release clutch fluid with air bubbles into the container, then tighten the bleeder screw immediately. 4. Release the clutch pedal carefully. Repeat the above operation until air bubbles disappear from the clutch fluid being pumped out into the container. During the bleeding operation, keep the clutch fluid reservoir filled to the specified level. Reinstall the rubber cap.
A07RW021
2. Bleeding the slave cylinder. 1. Remove the rubber cap from the bleeder screw and wipe clean. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder screw and insert the other end of the vinyl tube into a transparent container.
CLUTCH
7C27
Master Cylinder
208RX001
NOTE: Disassembling and assembling the master cylinder is not approved.
7C28
CLUTCH
Slave Cylinder
Disassembled View
206RS002
Legend (1) Push Rod (2) Boot
(3) Piston and Piston Cup (4) Spring (5) Cylinder Body
Disassembly
1. Disassemble boot (1), push rod (2), piston and piston cup (3), and spring (4) from cylinder body (5).

Make the necessary adjustments, repairs, and part replacements if excessive wear or damage is discovered during inspection.
Cylinder Body
1. Clean the cylinder body. 2. Check the fluid return port for restrictions and clean it if necessary.
206RS003
CLUTCH
7C29
Piston and Piston Cup

1. Visually inspect the disassembled piston and piston cup for excessive wear and damage.
Reassembly
To reassemble, follow the disassembly steps in the reverse order, noting the following points:
Piston Assembly
1. Before installing the parts, apply a thin coat of rubber grease. 2. Install cup in groove in piston with the lip turned to the front of cylinder. Use care so as not to scratch the cylinder.
206RS004
Replace the inner parts with new parts if necessary. 2. Measure the clearance between slave cylinder wall and piston.
206RS006
206RS005
If the measured value exceeds the specified limit, the slave cylinder assembly must be replaced. Standard: 0.07 mm (0.0028 in) Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
7C30
CLUTCH

Engine Type Size Pressure plate Outside diameter Clamping force Spring finger height Driven plate Outside diameter inside diameter Thickness Clutch disengaged Clutch engaged Total friction area Clutch control type Clutch pedal free play Clutch pedal stroke Clutch pedal height 7.3 mm (0.287 in) 7.0 mm (0.276 in) 251 2 cm@ (39 2 in@) Hydraulic 5 15 mm (0.20 0.59 in) 165.5 175.5 mm (6.52 6.91 in) 178 188 mm (7.01 7.40 in) 8.6 mm (0.339 in) 8.0 mm (0.315 in) 304 2 cm@ (47 2 in@) 240 160 mm (9.45 6.30 in) 260 170 mm (10.24 6.70 in) 299 mm (11.77 in) 5488 N (1235 lb) 37.5 39.5 mm (1.476 1.555 in) 332 mm (13.07 in) 7208 N (1621 lb) 49.9 51.9 mm (1.965 2.043 in) Y22SE 240 mm (9.45 in) 6VD1 260 mm (10.24 in) Dry single plate type with diaphragm spring
CLUTCH
7C31
Y22SE
E07RX007
6VD1
E07RW006
7C32
CLUTCH
205R100001
CLUTCH
7C33
Special Tools
ILLUSTRATION PART NO. PART NAME ILLUSTRATION PART NO. PART NAME
J24547 Driven plate aligner (6VD1)
J1522 Crankshaft pilot bearing installer (X22SE)
J42877 Driven plate aligner (X22SE)
J8092 Driver handle
J5822 and J23907 Pilot bearing remover and Sliding hammer
J22888 Bearing puller
J224111 Adapter
J26516A Crankshaft pilot bearing installer (6VD1)
SECTION
LIGHTING SYSTEM
RODEO / RODEO SPORT
8A1
BODY AND ACCESSORIES

CONTENTS
Lighting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiper / Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entertainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meter and Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E Body Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof / Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior / Interior Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8F 8G 8H 8I 8J
LIGHTING SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fog Light Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fog Light Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fog Light Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Marker Light Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taillight Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . License Plate Light Bulb (Bumper Type) . . . . License Plate Light Bulb (Tailgate Type) . . . . Stoplight Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Mounted Stoplight Assembly . . . . . . . . . High Mounted Stoplight Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Mounted Stoplight Assembly (Soft Top Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Mounted Stoplight Bulb (Soft Top Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Mounted Stoplight Assembly (Resin Top Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Mounted Stoplight Bulb (Resin Top Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Light Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Turn Signal Light Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Turn Signal Light Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8A2 8A3 8A3 8A4 8A6 8A7 8A7 8A7 8A8 8A8 8A9 8A9 8A10 8A10 8A11 8A11 8A12 8A12 8A13 8A13 8A14 Dome Light Bulb (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dome Light Bulb (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Courtesy Light Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spotlight Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage Room Light Bulb (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . Luggage Room Light Bulb (Resin Top Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HVAC Bezel Illumination Light Bulb . . . . . . . . Shift Lever Illumination Light Bulb (A/T) . . . . Vanity Mirror Illumination Light Bulb . . . . . . . . Starter Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Switch (Combination Switch) . . . . . . DimmerPassing Switch (Combination Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Defogger Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Remind Switch (Starter Switch) . . . . . . . Hazard Warning Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stoplight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Light Switch (M/T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn Signal Light Switch (Combination Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illumination Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light and Bulb Specifications (LWB) . . . . . . . Light and Bulb Specifications (SWB) . . . . . . . 8A14 8A15 8A15 8A16 8A16 8A17 8A17 8A18 8A18 8A19 8A19 8A19 8A19 8A20 8A20 8A21 8A21 8A22 8A22 8A23 8A24 8A25
8A2
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Service Precaution
LIGHTING SYSTEM
8A3
Headlight Bulb
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the headlight bulb (3). D Disconnect the connector. D Remove the bulb cover (1). D Release the retaining ring (2). CAUTION: Don not touch the headlight bulb with your fingers. The oil on your fingers will leave a residue which will shorten the life of the halogen bulb. In order to prevent this problem, clean the bulb lens before installing the headlight bulb.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order. noting the following point: 1. Make sure to set the retaining ring and the bulb cover. If the set is incomplete, there is a possibility that the water comes in the light.
821RY00063
Headlight Assembly
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the radiator grille (1). D Remove eight clips and a screw. 3. Remove the front combination light (3). D Remove three screws. D Disconnect the connector. 4. Remove the headlight assembly (2). D Disconnect the connector. D Remove four screws.
801RY00017
8A4
LIGHTING SYSTEM
5. Draw a horizontal line through point (A) and (B) on the screen (1).
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order. noting the following point: 1. After installing the headlight, be sure to adjust the headlight aim.
Headlight Adjustment
Preparation
Place the vehicle with 1 person in driver seat on a level surface and check to see if the inflation pressure of the tires is correct, the lenses are clean, the battery is sufficiently charged, and adjust to place vehicle by using the screen. 1. Set a vertical screen on a level surface. 2. Toward the screen (1) from the bulb center mark of the headlight, extend parallel lines to the floor. Mark point (A) and (B) on the screen at the intersection of parallel line and the screen. 3. Draw vertical lines through point (A) and (B) on the screen.
801RY00022
6. Turn the headlight low beam on. 7. Adjust the CUTLINE 30 mm (1.18 in) below the horizontal line (H). 8. Adjust the BENDING POINT to the vertical line (V). NOTE: Always adjust vertical adjustment first.
801RY00021
4. Keep the vehicle (2) 3m (9.8 ft) apart from the screen (1).
801RY00023
LIGHTING SYSTEM
8A5
Vertical Adjustment
Use a screwdriver for vertical adjustment.
801RY00019
Horizontal Adjustment
Use a screwdriver for horizontal adjustment.
801RY00018
8A6
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Fog Light Bulb

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the fog light bulb (2). D Disconnect the connector (5). D Remove the cap (4). D Loosen the retaining clip (1). D Pull out the bulb (2). D Disconnect the terminal (3).
825RY00068
Installation
LIGHTING SYSTEM
8A7
Fog Light Assembly

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the fog light assembly (1). D Disconnect the connector. D Remove two nuts from the bracket.
Fog Light Adjustment

Vertical Adjustment
Turn the adjusting screw (1) with a screwdriver to adjust the aim of the fog light vertically.
825RY00067
825RY00065
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order. CAUTION: After installing the fog light, be sure to adjust the fog light aim.
Side Marker Light Bulb

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the radiator grille. D Refer to Engine Hood and Fender in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the front combination light (2). D Remove three screws. 4. Remove the bulb (1). D Remove the side marker light socket by turning it counterclockwise. D Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise while pushing it at the same time.
825RW067
Installation
8A8
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Taillight Bulb
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear combination light assembly (1). D Remove three screws. D Pull out the rear combination light assembly toward you. 3. Remove the bulb (1). D Remove the taillight counterclockwise. socket by turning it
D Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise while pushing it at the same time.
825RW069
803RY00005
Installation
License Plate Light Bulb (Bumper Type)

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the lens cover (3). D Remove two screws. 3. Remove the lens (2). 4. Remove the bulb (1). D Pull out the bulb from the socket.
825RW070
Installation
LIGHTING SYSTEM
8A9
License Plate Light Bulb (Tailgate Type)

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the lens cover (3). D Remove two screws. 3. Remove the bulb (2). D Pull out the bulb from the socket (1).
Installation
803RW014
Stoplight Bulb
Refer to Taillight Bulb in this section.
8A10 LIGHTING SYSTEM
High Mounted Stoplight Assembly

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the high mounted stoplight assembly (2). D Remove the cover (3). D Disconnect the connectors (1). D Remove two screws.
Installation
803RX001
High Mounted Stoplight Bulb

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the cover. 3. Remove the bulb (1). D Remove the socket by turning it counterclockwise.
Installation
825R100022
LIGHTING SYSTEM
8A11
High Mounted Stoplight Assembly (Soft Top Model)

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the high mounted stoplight assembly (2). D Remove the cover (3). D Disconnect the connector (1). D Remove two screws.
Installation
803RW0011
High Mounted Stoplight Bulb (Soft Top Model)

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the cover (1). 3. Remove the bulb (2). D Pull out the bulb from the socket (3).
Installation
803RW0021
High Mounted Stoplight Assembly (Resin Top Model)

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the high mounted stoplight assembly (1). D Remove the two screws. D Pull out the high mounted stoplight assembly (1). D Disconnect the connector.
Installation
803RW012
High Mounted Stoplight Bulb (Resin Top Model)

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the cover (3). 3. Disconnect the connector (1). 4. Remove the bulb (2).
Installation
803RX002
LIGHTING SYSTEM
8A13
Backup Light Bulb

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear combination light assembly. D Refer to the Taillight Bulb removal step 2 in this section. 3. Remove the bulb (1). D Remove the backup light socket by turning it counterclockwise. D Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise while pushing it at the same time.
Installation
825RW073
Front Turn Signal Light Bulb

Refer to Side Marker Light Bulb in this section.
Rear Turn Signal Light Bulb

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear combination light assembly. D Refer to the Taillight Bulb removal step in this section. 3. Remove the bulb (1). D Remove the rear turn signal light socket by turning it counterclockwise. D Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise while pushing it at the same time.
Installation
825RW074
Dome Light Bulb (LWB)

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the lens (2). 3. Remove the bulb (1). D Pull out the bulb.
825RW075
Installation
LIGHTING SYSTEM
8A15
Dome Light Bulb (SWB)

Removal
Installation
805RX001
Courtesy Light Bulb

Removal
Installation
825RW076
Spotlight Bulb
Removal
Installation
825RW105
Luggage Room Light Bulb (LWB)

Removal
Installation
825RW077
LIGHTING SYSTEM
8A17
Luggage Room Light Bulb (Resin Top Model)

Removal
Installation
805RX002
HVAC Bezel Illumination Light Bulb

Refer to Control Panel Illumination bulb in Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) section.
Shift Lever Illumination Light Bulb (A/T)

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the console assembly. D Remove four screws. 3. Remove the bulb (1). D Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise. D Pull out the bulb from the socket.
Installation
825RW078
Vanity Mirror Illumination Light Bulb

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the lens (1). 3. Remove the bulb (2). D Attach some scotch tape to the bulb and pull it out.
Installation
743RW005
LIGHTING SYSTEM
8A19
Starter Switch
Refer to Lock cylinder in steering section.
Lighting Switch (Combination Switch)

Refer to Combination Switch in Steering section.
DimmerPassing Switch (Combination Switch)

Door Switch
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the door switch (2). D Remove the screw (1). D Disconnect the connector (3).
Installation
825RW289
Rear Defogger Switch

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the meter cluster assembly (1). D Refer to Instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the rear defogger switch (2). D Disconnect the switch connector. D To remove the switch, push the lock from the back side of the meter cluster assembly.
Installation
825RW085
Key Remind Switch (Starter Switch)

Refer to Lock Cylinder in Steering section.
LIGHTING SYSTEM
8A21
Hazard Warning Light Switch

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the meter cluster assembly (1). D Refer to Instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the hazard warning switch (2). D Disconnect the switch connector. D To remove the switch, push the lock from the back side of the meter cluster assembly.
Installation
825RW084
Stoplight Switch
Refer to Stoplight Switch in Brake section.
Backup Light Switch (M/T)

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the backup light switch (1). D Disconnect the connector (2).
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point. 1. Apply liquid gasket to the screw portion of the switch to prevent oil leak.
230RW010
Turn Signal Light Switch (Combination Switch)

LIGHTING SYSTEM
8A23
Illumination Controller
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel driver lower cover assembly (3). D Refer to Instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the illumination controller (2). D Disconnect the controller connector. D Remove the controller knob (1). D Remove the nut. D Remove the controller from the back side of the instrument panel driver lower cover assembly.
Installation
826RW005
Light and Bulb Specifications (LWB)

Light and Bulb Specifications
801R100001
Legend (1) Map Light (2) Meter (3) Fog Light (4) Headlight (5) Front Turn Signal Light/Front Side Marker Light/Parking Light (6) High Mounted Stoplight
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
Luggage Room Light Dome Light Courtesy Light Rear Turn Signal Light Taillight/Stoplight Backup Light License Plate Light (Bumper Type) License Plate Light (Tailgate Type)
LIGHTING SYSTEM
8A25
Light and Bulb Specifications (SWB)
801R100003
Legend (1) Map Light (2) Meter (3) Fog Light (4) Headlight (5) Front Turn Signal Light/Front Side Marker Light/Parking Light (6) High Mounted Stoplight (Soft Top Model)
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
Dome Light Courtesy Light Rear Turn Signal Light Taillight/Stoplight Backup Light License Plate Light Luggage Room Light (Resin Top Model) High Mounted Stoplight (Resin Top Model)

Light Name Headlight Front Turn signal Light/ Front Side Marker Light/Parking Light Fog Light Rear Turn Signal Light Backup Light Taillight/Stoplight High Mount Stoplight (Soft Top Model) License Plate Light (Tailgate type) Map Light Dome Light Luggage Room Light Courtesy Light Check Trans A/T Oil Temp Cruise Set Power Drive Winter Drive Turn Signal Upshift High Beam ABS Indicator/Warning g Light Seat Belt Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) Low Fuel 4WD Oil Pressure Brake System Charge A/T Shift Position Bulb No. Rated Power 65w/45w 21w/5w 55w 21w 21w 21w/5w 5w (18W) 5w (5W) 5w 7w 5w 3.4w 1.4w 3w 1.4w 1.4w 1.4w 1.4w 1.4w 1.4w 1.4w 2w 1.4w 1.4w 1.4w 1.4w 1.4w 1.4w 1.4w Number of Bulbs 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 (1) 1 (2) 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 Lens Color White Amber White Amber White Red Red White White White White White Red Red Green Amber Green Green Amber Blue Amber Red Amber Amber Green Red Red Red P,N,D,3,2,L :Green R: Amber Red White Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Halogen Remarks Halogen
Air Bag Illumination Light Meter Shift lever
2w 3.4w 1.4w
1 4 1
Meter Meter Shift lever
SECTION
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
RODEO
8B1

WIPER / WASHER SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Wiper/Washer System . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Wiper And Washer Switch . . . . . Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Wiper Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Washer Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Washer Spray Pattern. . . . . . . . . .................................. Windshield Wiper Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Wiper Linkage and Associated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Wiper Arm/Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Wiper Blade Rubber . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Wiper/Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Wiper and Washer Switch. . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Wiper Motor (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B1 8B2 8B2 8B2 8B2 8B2 8B2 8B2 8B3 8B3 8B3 8B4 8B4 8B5 8B5 8B5 8B5 8B6 8B6 8B6 8B7 8B7 8B7 8B8 8B8 8B8 8B8 8B8 8B9 8B9 8B9 Rear Wiper Motor (Resin Top Model) . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Washer Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm and Relay Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Wiper Arm/Blade (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Wiper Arm/Blade (Resin Top Model) . . Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Washer Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Washer Spray Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Washer Nozzle (Resin Top Model) . . . . Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Washer Spray Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Wiper Blade Rubber (Spare Tire Storage-Tailgate Mouted) . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Wiper Blade Rubber (Speir Tire Storage-Under Floor) . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B10 8B10 8B10 8B11 8B11 8B11 8B12 8B12 8B12 8B12 8B12 8B12 8B13 8B13 8B13 8B13 8B13 8B13 8B13 8B14 8B14 8B14 8B14 8B15 8B15 8B15 8B16 8B16 8B16 8B17
Service Precaution
8B2
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Windshield Wiper/Washer System

General Description
The circuit consists of the starter switch, windshield wiper & washer switch, windshield wiper motor, windshield washer motor and alarm & relay control unit. When the windshield wiper & washer switch is turned on with the starter switch on, the battery voltage is applied to the wiper motor to activate the wiper. The washer motor squirts glass cleaning fluid while the washer switch is being pushed. The alarm & relay control unit relay is used to control motion of the wiper.
Windshield Wiper And Washer Switch

Windshield Wiper Motor

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the connector(2). 3. Remove 4 mounting bolts. 4. Remove the nut of the wiper motor shaft, and disconnect the linkage. 5. Remove the windshield wiper motor(1). CAUTION: To facilitate the removal of the nuts, be sure to put out the tip portion of the linkage sufficiently through the mounting hole of the motor by sliding the wiper blade slowly.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Tighten the wiper motor shaft nut to the specified torque. Torque: 14Nm (122lbin) 2. Remove the wiper arms on both sides, and rotate the wiper motor until it gets to the autostop position to reinstall the wiper blade.
880RW002
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
8B3
Windshield Washer Motor

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the fender inner liner (right side). 3. Disconnect the windshield washer motor connector and the rear washer motor connector. 4. Disconnect the windshield washer hose connector and the rear washer hose connector. 5. Remove the filler neck (2). Remove the bolt. 6. Remove the washer tank (1). Remove the three nuts. 7. Pull the windshield washer motor (4) from the washer tank.
Installation
880RW028
8B4
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Windshield Washer Spray Pattern
880R200007
Legend (1) Spray Target EndOFCallout
(2) Washer Nozzle
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
8B5
Windshield Wiper Linkage

Windshield Wiper Linkage and Associated Parts
880RW004
Legend (1) Windshield Wiper Arm/Blade (2) Vent Cowl Cover EndOFCallout
(3) Windshield Wiper Linkage Assembly (4) Windshield Wiper Motor
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the windshield wiper arm/blade. 3. Remove the vent cowl cover. 4. Remove the windshield wiper motor. 5. Remove the pivot assembly mounting nuts, fixing screws. 6. Take out the windshield wiper linkage assembly from the opening of the cowl.
Installation
8B6
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Windshield Wiper Arm/Blade

Removal
1. Dry the cap(2) off with the tip of a screwdriver. 2. Remove the nut. 3. Remove the wiper arm/blade(1).
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points:
880RW006
880RW003
1. Before installing the wiper arm/blade to the shaft, confirm that the motor stops at the autostop position. 2. Set the wiper arm/blade so that the tips of both blades are positioned about 40mm (1.57in) from the upper edge of the cowl cover as shown in the figure. 3. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque. Torque: 23Nm (17lbft)
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
8B7
Windshield Wiper Blade Rubber

Removal
1. Push the wiper blade lock(1) while pulling the wiper blade in the arrow direction as shown in the figure. CAUTION: When the wiper blade has been removed, wrap the tip of the wiper arm with cloth, to avoid damaging the glass. CAUTION:
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Install the click of the blade stay in the groove of the new rubber and slide it in. Complete wiper blade installation by pushing the click.
885RS002
880RS011
2. Pull the end of rubber and remove the projection(3) from the click of the blade stay (2).
2. Finally, check that the click of the stay has caught in the hole of the rubber.
885RS001
880RS010
3. Pull the rubber out in the same direction.
8B8
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Rear Wiper/Washer System

General Description
The circuit consists of the starter switch, rear wiper & washer switch, rear wiper motor, rear washer motor and Alarm & relay control unit. When the rear wiper & washer switch is turned on with the starter switch on, the battery voltage is applied to the wiper motor to activate the wiper. The washer motor squirts glass cleaning fluid while the washer switch is being pushed. The alarm & relay control unit is used to control motion of the wiper.
Rear Wiper and Washer Switch

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the dash side trim panel(1). 3. Remove the lower cover assembly(2). Refer to Instrument panel Assembly in Body Structure section.
825RW090
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point: 1. Push the switch with your fingers until it locks securely.
821RW254-1
4. Remove the meter cluster assembly(4). 5. Remove the rear wiper & washer switch (5). Disconnect the connector. Push the lock from the back side of the meter cluster assembly.
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
8B9
Rear Wiper Motor (LWB)

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the tailgate trim pad. 3. Remove the wiper arm/blade. Refer to Rear Wiper Arm/Blade in section. 4. Remove the rear wiper motor (1). Disconnect the connector. Remove the rear wiper motor fixing screws.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Before installing the wiper arm/blade to the motor shaft, confirm that the motor stops at the autostop position. 2. Install the wiper arm/blade so that the wiper arm (2) contact with the stopper portion (3) on the hatch gate cover (1) as shown in the figure.
885RW001
885RW005
3. Tighten the motor shaft nut to the specified torque. Torque: 12Nm (104lbin) 4. Tighten the wiper arm nut to the specified torque. Torque: 16Nm (12lbin)
8B10
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Rear Wiper Motor (Resin Top Model)

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the tailgate trim pad. 3. Remove the wiper arm/blade. Refer to Rear Wiper Arm/Blade in this section. 4. Remove the rear wiper motor (1). Disconnect the connector. Remove the rear wiper shaft nut and the rear wiper moter fixing screws.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Before installing the wiper arm/blade to the motor shaft, confirm that the motor steps at the autostop position. 2. Install the wiper arm/blade (1) on the hatch gate as shown in the figure.
885RX004
3. Tighten the motor shaft nut to the specified torque.

885RW001
Torque: 7Nm (61lbin) 4. Tighten the wiper arm nut (2) to the specified torque. Torque: 11Nm (95lbin)
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
8B11
Rear Washer Motor

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the fender inner liner (right side). 3. Disconnect the windshield washer motor connector and the rear washer motor connector. 4. Disconnect the windshield washer hose connector and the rear washer hose connector. 5. Remove the filler neck (2). Remove the bolt. 6. Remove the washer tank (1). Remove the three nuts. 7. Pull out the rear washer motor (3) from the washer tank.
Installation
880RW028
8B12
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Alarm and Relay Control Unit

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the grove box (1). 3. Remove the alarm and relay control unit (2). Disconnect the connector.
Installation
826R200025
Rear Wiper Arm/Blade (LWB)

Removal
1. Remove the arm nut(2). 2. Remove the wiper arm/blade(1).
Installation
Refer to Rear Wiper Motor in section.
885RW007
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
8B13
Rear Wiper Arm/Blade (Resin Top Model)

Removal
1. Remove the arm nut (2). 2. Remove the wiper arm/blade (1).
Installation
Refer to Rear Wiper Motor in this section.
885RX003
Rear Washer Nozzle

Removal
1. Remove the washer nozzle(1). Pull out the washer nozzle from the washer hose (2).
Rear Washer Spray Pattern
885R100002
885R100003
Legend (1) Washer Nozzle (2) Spray Target EndOFCallout
Installation
8B14
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Rear Washer Nozzle (Resin Top Model)

Removal
1. Remove the washer nozzle (1). Pull out the washer nozzle and disconnect the washer hose.
Rear Washer Spray Pattern

885R100005
885RX001
Legend (1) Washer Nozzle (2) Spray Target EndOFCallout
Installation
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
8B15
Rear Wiper Blade Rubber (Spare Tire Storage-Tailgate Mounted)

Removal
1. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm. 2. Push out the wiper rubber from the wiper blade by sliding it horizontally while holding down the rubber on the wiper blade convex (1) side. CAUTION: When the wiper blade has been removed, wrap the tip of the wiper arm with cloth, to avoid damaging the glass.
Installation
1. Install the wiper blade rubber. Insert the tip of wiper rubber (2) from the opposite side of removal in the arrow direction.
880RX001
Check if the convex part (3) of wiper blade is installed in the groove of the wiper rubber.
880RW022
880RX002
8B16
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Rear Wiper Blade Rubber (Spare Tire Storage-Under Floor)

Removal
1. Push the wiper blade lock(1) while pulling the wiper blade in the arrow direction as shown in the figure. CAUTION: When the wiper blade has been removed, wrap the tip of the wiper arm with cloth, to avoid damaging the glass.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Install the click of the blade stay in the groove of the new rubber and slide it in. Complete wiper blade installation by pushing the click.
880RS011
885RS002
2. Pull the end of rubber and remove the projection(3) from the click of the blade stay (2).
2. Finally, check that the click of the stay has caught in the hole of the rubber.
880RS010
885RS001
3. Pull the rubber out in the same direction.
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
8B17

Application Windshield Wiper Motor Shaft Nut Windshield Wiper Arm Nuts Rear Wiper Motor Shaft Nut (Resin Top Model) Rear Wiper Arm Nut (Resin Top Model) Rear Wiper Motor Shaft Nut (LWB) Rear Wiper Arm Nut (LWB) Nm 14 23 7 11 12 16 LbFt 17 12 LbIn 122 61 95 104
SECTION
ENTERTAINMENT
RODEO
8C1

ENTERTAINMENT
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rod Type Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessory Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Accessory Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Accessory Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C1 8C2 8C2 8C2 8C2 8C2 8C2 8C2 8C3 8C3 8C3 8C4 8C4 8C4 8C5 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amplifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tweeter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Door Speaker (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Speaker (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Speaker (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C5 8C5 8C6 8C6 8C6 8C7 8C7 8C7 8C7 8C8 8C8 8C9 8C9 8C9
Service Precaution
8C2
ENTERTAINMENT
Cigarette Lighter
General Description
When the cigarette lighter is pushed in with the starter switch at either ACC" or ON" position, a circuit is formed in the cigarette lighter case to heat the lighter coil. The cigarette lighter springs back to its original position after the lighter coil is heated.
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the lower cluster assembly (1). Refer to the Instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the cigarette lighter assembly (2). Disconnect the connectors. Remove the socket (3).
826RW004-1
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point: 1. When installing the bezel, align the projected portion of the socket with the notch of the bezel.
Digital Clock
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the dash side trim panel-LH (1). Refer to Instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the lower cover assembly (2). Refer to instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section. 4. Remove the meter cluster assembly (4). Refer to Instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section. 5. Remove the digital clock (3). Remove the fixing screw. Disconnect the connector.
821RW092-1
821RW254-1
Installation
ENTERTAINMENT
8C3
Rod Type Antenna

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the antenna rod (1) counterclockwise to remove it. 3. Remove three screws and nine clips to remove the fender inner liner (2). 4. Disconnect the feeder cable connector (3) at the inside of the vehicle, remove the housing bracket screw, turn the lock nut counterclockwise to remove it together with the base mold and then remove the housing.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point:
890RW020
8C4
ENTERTAINMENT
Accessory Socket
Front Accessory Socket
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the front console assembly. 3. Remove the front accessory socket (2). Disconnect the connectors (1). Pull out the front accessory socket from the soket cover (3).
Rear Accessory Socket

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the quarter trim lower cover. 3. Remove the rear accessory socket (2). Disconnect the connectors (1). Pull out the front accessory socket from the soket cover (3).
810RW005
810RW004
Installation
Installation
ENTERTAINMENT
8C5
Radio
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the lower cluster assembly (1). Refer to Instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section.
Installation
890RW022
3. Remove the radio (2). Remove the two fixing screws. Disconnect the connector (4) and the antenna cable (3).
890R100017
8C6
ENTERTAINMENT
Amplifier
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the amplifier (2) from the dash panel (4). Remove the two fixing nuts (3). Disconnect the connector (6). 3. Remove the Amplifier (2) from the BRKT (5). Remove the four fixing screws (1).
Installation
890R200044
ENTERTAINMENT
8C7
Speaker
Front Speaker
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Pull the grille (1) to release the locks and then remove it. 3. Remove four screws and disconnect the connector (3) to remove the speaker (2).
635R100004
Installation
Rear Door Speaker (LWB)

Removal
890RX012
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the inside handle (3). 3. Remove the rear door trim pad (2). Refer to Rear Window Regulator, Glass And Glass Run in Body Structure Section: 4. Remove the rear speaker (1). Disconnect the connector.
Installation
Tweeter Assembly
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the front door trim pad (2). Refer to Front Window Regulator, Glass And Glass Run in Body Structure section: 3. Remove the tweeter (1). Disconnect the connector.
890R100015
Installation
8C8 Removal
ENTERTAINMENT
Rear Speaker (LWB)

1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the roof rear lining (1). Release the locks and clips. 3. Remove the speaker (2). Remove the four screws. Disconnect the connector (3).
Rear Speaker (SWB)

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Pull the grille (1) to release the locks clips and then remove it. 3. Remove four screws and disconnect the connector (3) to remove the speaker (2).
890RW048-1
890RW019-1
Installation
Installation
ENTERTAINMENT
8C9
Horn
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the radiator grille. Refer to Engine Hood and Fender in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the horn (1). Disconnect the connector. Remove the horn mounting bolt.
Installation
828R100001
SECTION
WIRING SYSTEM
RODEO
8D1

WIRING SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Fuse, Relay and Diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay / Fuse Box Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay / Fuse Box (Instrument Panel) . . . . . Relay / Fuse Box (L4 Engine Room) . . . . . Relay / Fuse Box (V6 Engine Room) . . . . . Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Block Circuit1 (L4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Block Circuit2 (V6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth Location (Engine Room) . . . . . . . . . . Earth Location (Cabin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter and Generator (L4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter and Generator (V6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECM (L4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM (V6)1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM (V6)2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight and Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TURN, HAZARD, STOP, Back Up, Horn and A/T Shift Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Room, Luggage, Courtesy, Spot, Warning Buzzer (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Room, Luggage, Courtesy, Spot, Warning Buzzer (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Window and Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . 8D2 8D2 8D3 8D4 8D5 8D6 8D6 8D7 8D8 8D9 8D10 8D11 8D12 8D13 8D14 8D15 8D16 8D17 8D18 8D19 Alarmer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Wiper/Washer, Rear Defogger and Mirror Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio, Clock, Cigarette Lighter and ACC Socket (W/O AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio, Clock, Cigarette Lighter and ACC Socket (W/AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meter (L4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meter (V6)1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meter (V6)2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-theft with Keyless Entry (LWB) . . . . . . Anti-theft with Keyless Entry (L4 SWB) . . . Anti-theft with Keyless Entry (V6 SWB) . . . Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRSAir Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intelligent Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift on the Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illumination Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRT Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D20 8D21 8D22 8D23 8D24 8D25 8D26 8D27 8D28 8D29 8D30 8D31 8D32 8D33 8D34 8D35 8D36 8D37 8D38 8D39
8D2
WIRING SYSTEM
Fuse, Relay and Diode

Relay / Fuse Box Location
810R200004
Legend (1) Relay/Fuse Box (Engine Room) (2) Relay/Fuse Box (Instrument Panel)
WIRING SYSTEM
8D3
Relay / Fuse Box (Instrument Panel)
D08RY00529
Legend (1) Fuse/Relay Box (2) Diode (3) Diode (4) Tail Relay (5) Not Used (6) ACC Socket Relay (7) Power Window Relay (8) Not Used (9) Rear Defogger Relay (10) Fuse ACC Socket (20A) (11) Fuse Audio (ACC) (15A) (12) Fuse Starter (10A) (13) Fuse Tail (15A) (14) Fuse Room Lamp (10A) (15) Fuse Stop Lamp (15A) (16) Fuse Door Lock (20A) (17) Fuse Mirror Defogger (10A)
(18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35)
Fuse Rear Defogger (15A) Fuse Rear Defogger (15A) Fuse Meter (15A) Fuse ENG. (15A) Fuse IG. Coil (15A) Fuse Back Up (15A) Fuse ELEC. IG. (15A) Fuse RR Wiper (10A) Fuse FRT Wiper (20A) Fuse Audio (10A) Fuse Cigar Lighter (15A) Fuse Anti-theft (10A) Fuse SRS (10A) Fuse (Not Used) Circuit Breaker Power Window (30A) Spare Fuse (20A) Spare Fuse (15A) Spare Fuse (10A)
8D4
WIRING SYSTEM
Relay / Fuse Box (L4 Engine Room)
D08R100034
Legend (1) Fuse/Relay Box (2) Option Box (3) Diode (4) Diode (5) Heater Relay (6) A/C Compressor Relay (7) ECM Main Relay (8) Not Used (9) Fog Lamp Relay (10) Not Used (11) Not Used (12) Thermo Relay (13) Headlamp Relay (14) Starter Relay (15) Not Used (16) Fuel Pump Relay (17) Electric Fan (LO) Relay (18) IG.1 (+B.1 60A) (19) Main (100A)
(20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35) (36) (37) (38)
ABS (50A) IG.2 (+B.2 50A) Electric Fan (40A) Hazard (15A) Horn (10A) ACGS (10A) Not Used Blower (15A) Blower (15A) A/C (10A) HeadlampLH (10A) HeadlampRH (10A) Fog Lamp (15A) O2 Sensor (10A) Fuel Pump (20A) ECM (15A) Not Used Electric Fan (H1) Relay Electric Fan (H1) Relay (A/T Only)
WIRING SYSTEM
8D5
Relay / Fuse Box (V6 Engine Room)
D08RY00531
Legend (1) Fuse/Relay Box (2) Option Box (3) Diode (4) Diode (5) Heater Relay (6) A/C Compressor Relay (7) ECM Main Relay (8) Not Used (9) Fog Lamp Relay (10) Not Used (11) Not Used (12) Thermo Relay (13) Headlamp Relay (14) Starter Relay (15) Condenser Fan Relay (A/T Only) (16) Fuel Pump Relay (17) Not Used (18) IG.1 (+B.1 60A) (19) Main (100A)
(20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35) (36) (37) (38)
ECM (30A) ABS (50A) IG.2 (+B.2 50A) Condenser Fan (A/T Only) (30A) Hazard (15A) Horn (10A) ACG (S) (10A) Not Used Blower (15A) Blower (15A) A/C (10A) HeadlampLH (10A) HeadlampRH (10A) Fog Lamp (15A) O2 Sensor (20A) Fuel Pump (20A) ECM (15A) Not Used (10A) Intelligent Suspension (30A)
8D6
WIRING SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
Fuse Block Circuit1 (L4)
D08R200061
WIRING SYSTEM
8D7
Fuse Block Circuit2 (V6)
D08R200062
8D8
WIRING SYSTEM
Earth Location (Engine Room)
D08R200063
WIRING SYSTEM
8D9
Earth Location (Cabin)
D08R200064
8D10
WIRING SYSTEM
Starter and Generator (L4)
D08R200065
WIRING SYSTEM
8D11
Starter and Generator (V6)
D08R200066
8D12
WIRING SYSTEM
ECM (L4)
D08R200067
WIRING SYSTEM
8D13
PCM (V6)1
D08R200068
8D14
WIRING SYSTEM
PCM (V6)2
D08R200069
WIRING SYSTEM
8D15
Headlight and Fog Light
D08R200070
8D16
WIRING SYSTEM
TURN, HAZARD, STOP, Back Up, Horn and A/T Shift Lock
D08R200071
WIRING SYSTEM
8D17
Room, Luggage, Courtesy, Spot, Warning Buzzer (LWB)
D08R200072
8D18
WIRING SYSTEM
Room, Luggage, Courtesy, Spot, Warning Buzzer (SWB)
D08R200073
WIRING SYSTEM
8D19
Power Window and Door Lock
D08R200074
8D20
WIRING SYSTEM
Alarmer Unit
D08R200075
WIRING SYSTEM
8D21
Rear Wiper/Washer, Rear Defogger and Mirror Defogger
D08R200076
8D22
WIRING SYSTEM
Audio, Clock, Cigarette Lighter and ACC Socket (W/O AMP)
D08R200077
WIRING SYSTEM
8D23
Audio, Clock, Cigarette Lighter and ACC Socket (W/AMP)
D08R200078
8D24
WIRING SYSTEM
Door Mirror
D08R200079
WIRING SYSTEM
8D25
Meter (L4)
D08R200080
8D26
WIRING SYSTEM
Meter (V6)1
D08R200081
WIRING SYSTEM
8D27
Meter (V6)2
D08R200082
8D28
WIRING SYSTEM
Anti-theft with Keyless Entry (LWB)
D08R200083
WIRING SYSTEM
8D29
Anti-theft with Keyless Entry (L4 SWB)
D08R200084
8D30
WIRING SYSTEM
Anti-theft with Keyless Entry (V6 SWB)
D08R200085
WIRING SYSTEM
8D31
Air Conditioning
D08R200086
8D32
WIRING SYSTEM
ABS
D08R200087
WIRING SYSTEM
8D33
SRSAir Bag
D08R200088
8D34
WIRING SYSTEM
Intelligent Suspension
D08R200089
WIRING SYSTEM
8D35
Shift on the Fly
D08R200090
8D36
WIRING SYSTEM
Sunroof
D08R200091
WIRING SYSTEM
8D37
Illumination Light
D08R200092
8D38
WIRING SYSTEM
FRT Wiper
D08R200093
WIRING SYSTEM
8D39
Power Seat
D08R200094
SECTION
METER AND GAUGE
RODEO
8E1

METER AND GAUGE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout for Meters/Gauges, Warning Lights, Indicator Lights and Illumination Lights. . . . Table for Meter/Gauge Connector Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning Light Bulb and Indicator Light Bulb . 8E1 8E1 8E2 8E2 8E2 8E4 8E6 8E6 8E6 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/T Shift Indicator Light Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tank Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................................. Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E6 8E6 8E7 8E7 8E8 8E8 8E8 8E8 8E9 8E9 8E10
Service Precaution
General Description
The circuit consists of the starter switch, meter assembly, Vehicle speed sensor, transmission switch, lighting switch, turn signal switch, thermo unit, oil pressure unit, Powertrain Control Module (PCM), fuel tank unit, 4WD switch, oil pressure switch, parking brake switch, brake fluid switch, seat belt switch, illumination controller, multi meter and ambient sensor.
8E2
METER AND GAUGE
Meter Assembly
General Description
The meter assembly has the speedometer, tachometer, engine coolant temperature gauge, fuel gauge and warning/indicator lights. In addition, the meter assembly.
Layout for Meters/Gauges, Warning Lights, Indicator Lights and Illumination Lights
Front View
821RY00052
Legend (1) Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge (2) Tachometer (3) Warning Light Lens (4) Speedometer EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Fuel Gauge Reset Button Warning Light Lens A/T Shift Indicator
METER AND GAUGE Rear View
8E3
821RY00054
Legend (1) Illumination Light Bulb (2) Illumination Light Bulb EndOFCallout
(3) (4)
Illumination Light Bulb Illumination Light Bulb
8E4
METER AND GAUGE
Table for Meter/Gauge Connector Terminal Connections
821RY00053
Legend (1) Connector A EndOFCallout
(2) (3)
Connector B Connector C
METER AND GAUGE

Connector A Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ABS warning light 4WD indicator light Reduced power warning light Oil pressure warning light Check trans warning light MIL(check engine) warning light Engine coolant temperature gauge Function Intelligent suspension indicator light A/T shift indicator light 3" A/T shift indicator light D" A/T shift indicator light 2" SRS air bag warning light Ground Battery Stater switch A/T oil temperature warning light Seat belt indicator light Charge warning light A/T shift indicator light L" Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Starter switch Upshift indicator light Fuel gauge Low fuel warning light Cruise set indicator light Upshift indicator light Sport mode indicator light Winter drive indicator light Power drive indicator light Connector C Function Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Illumination light Ground Connector B Function A/T shift indicator light R" A/T shift indicator light A/T shift indicator light N" A/T shift indicator light P" Illumination light Engine revolution pulse Speed sensor pulse Turn signal indicator light (LH) Brake warning light High beam indicator light (+) High beam indicator light () Turn signal indicator light (RH) Turn signal indicator light
8E5
8E6
METER AND GAUGE

5. Remove the meter assembly(3). Remove four fixing screws. Disconnect the meter connector.
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the Dash Side Trim Panel LH. 3. Remove the lower cover Assembly(1). Refer to the Instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section. 4. Remove the meter cluster Assembly(2). Refer to the Instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section.
825RW197
CAUTION: The removed meter assembly should be placed upright or with its face side up.
Installation
821RW253
Warning Light Bulb and Indicator Light Bulb

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the meter assembly. Refer to the Meter Assembly removal steps in Meter and Gauge section. 3. Remove the bulb. Hold the bulb socket by hand, counterclockwise and pull it out. rotate it
Installation
METER AND GAUGE
8E7
A/T Shift Indicator Light Bulb

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Pry up the bended portions(2) of the metal cover(1).
821RY00060
8E8
METER AND GAUGE

5. Remove the meter assembly. Push the metal cover(6) with the screw driver(7).
3. Remove the meter lense(3) from the meter visor(4). 4. Remove the meter visor from the meter case(5).
821RY00061
821RY00062
6. Remove the meter rear cover. 7. Remove the meter circuit board. 8. Remove the A/T shift indicator bulb.
Installation
Vehicle Speed Sensor

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the vehicle speed sensor(1). Disconnect the connector. Rotate the sensor counterclockwise.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point. 1. Tighten the vehicle speed sensor to the specified torque. Torque: 27Nm (20lbft)
220RX003
METER AND GAUGE
8E9
Fuel Tank Unit

For removal and instrallation procedures, refer to Fuel Tank in Engine section.
8E10
METER AND GAUGE

Application Vehicle Speed Sensor Fixing Nm 27 LbFt 20 LbIn
SECTION
BODY STRUCTURE
RODEO
8F1

BODY STRUCTURE
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Dimensions (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Dimensions (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description (Bumper) . . . . . . . . . . Front Bumper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Bumper Slider Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location (Spare tire mounted tailgate model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location (Spare tire mounted under floor model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Bumper Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description (Sheet Metal) . . . . . . . Engine Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Hood Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Fender Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Body Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tightening Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Body Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Room Section (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Room Section (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8F2 8F2 8F2 8F3 8F4 8F5 8F5 8F5 8F6 8F6 8F7 8F7 8F7 8F8 8F8 8F9 8F9 8F11 8F12 8F12 8F13 8F13 8F13 8F14 8F14 8F14 8F15 8F15 8F17 8F17 8F17 8F18 8F19 8F19 8F19 8F20 8F21 8F21 8F21 8F22 8F24 8F24 8F24 8F25 8F25 8F28 8F30 Rear Section (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Section (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Body Section (Front side) . . . . . . . . . . Side Body Section (Rear side) . . . . . . . . . . General Description (Body) . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Door Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Door Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Window Regulator, Glass and Glass Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Window Regulator, Glass and Glass Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailgate (LWB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailgate (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Hatchgate (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailgate Glass (Resin Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare Tire Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare Tire Hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8F32 8F34 8F36 8F38 8F40 8F40 8F40 8F41 8F42 8F43 8F43 8F43 8F44 8F45 8F45 8F45 8F46 8F47 8F47 8F48 8F50 8F51 8F51 8F52 8F54 8F55 8F55 8F56 8F57 8F58 8F58 8F59 8F59 8F60 8F60 8F61 8F61 8F63 8F64 8F64 8F65 8F65 8F66 8F66 8F66 8F66 8F67
8F2
BODY STRUCTURE
8F67 8F68 8F68 8F69 8F69 8F70 8F70 8F73 8F73 8F73 8F74 Rear Quarter Glass (Resin Top) . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Window Glass (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8F75 8F75 8F75 8F75 8F77 8F77 8F77 8F77 8F78 8F81
Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Quarter Glass (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Precaution
Frame
General Description
Proper frame alignment is important to assure normal vehicle life and performance of many other parts of the vehicle. If the vehicle has been involved in a fire, collision or has been overloaded, it is necessary to check the frame alignment.
BODY STRUCTURE
8F3
Frame Dimensions (LWB)
501R200006
8F4
BODY STRUCTURE
Frame Dimensions (SWB)
501R200005
BODY STRUCTURE
8F5
General Description (Bumper)

Front and rear bumpers consist of bumper fascia, support, and reinforcement. The absorbing capability for both front and rear bumper systems are achieved through reinforcements in each bumper.
Front Bumper
Parts Location
601RY00008
Legend (1) Inner Liner (2) Backbar (3) Support Assembly (4) Front Bumper Reinforcement Assembly EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Bumper Support Front Bumper Fascia Front Bumper Extension (SWB only) Front Bumper Assembly
8F6
BODY STRUCTURE
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect front fog light connector (With fog light). 3. Remove each clip on the right and left side of the inner liner. 4. Remove the front bumper fixing bolts. Remove the two bolts from both sides of the front bumper.
601RY00004
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in reverse order noting the following points: 1. Tighten the front bumper assembly fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 147 Nm (108 lb ft)
601RW004
2. Front bumper adjustment When the bolts fixing front bumper assembly are tightened, adjustment should be made between the backbar and front side bumper so that a clearance of 14.5 mm (0.57 in) is provided between the lower side of the fender and the upper side of the front bumper.
5. Remove the front bumper assembly. 6. Remove the support assembly. Remove the three fixing bolts. 7. Remove the front bumper reinforcement assembly. Remove the eleven fixing bolts. 8. Remove the front bumper extension (SWB only). Remove the three nuts and nine bolts. 9. Remove the three bolts at each backbar and remove backbars. 10. Remove the front fog light assembly (With fog light). 11. Remove the front bumper slider(1). Remove the two screws(4) and the two nuts(3), and release the claw from the washer(2).
601R100001
BODY STRUCTURE
8F7
Front Bumper Slider Bracket

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the front bumper. Refer to Front Bumper in this section. 3. Remove the three nuts(1) and draw out the slider bracket(2).
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in reverse order.
601RW017
8F8
BODY STRUCTURE
Rear Bumper
Parts Location (Spare tire mounted tailgate model)
690R100003
Legend (1) Protector (2) Rear Mud Flap (3) Bumper Bracket (4) Rear Bumper Support (5) Rear Bumper Slider Bracket (6) Rear Corner Bumper (7) Backber EndOFCallout
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Rear Bumper Retainer Rear Bumper Reinforcement Assembly Rear License Plate Bracket License Plate Light Assembly Rear Bumper Assembly Rear Center Bumper Rear Bumper Fixing Bolt License Plate Light Harness
BODY STRUCTURE
8F9
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear mud flaps. Remove the four bolts. 3. Remove the protectors. Remove the three clips on the right side and five clips on the left side. 4. Remove the bumper brackets. Remove the two nuts. 5. Remove the rear bumper supports. Remove the nut and bolt. 6. Remove the rear bumper assembly(1). Remove the two bolts(2) from each side. Disconnect the license plate light harness connector. Open the tailgate in an angle of 60 to avoid the interference with the spare tire.
12. Remove the rear bumper slider brackets(1). Remove the two screws(4) and two nuts(3), and then remove claw caught in the washer(2).
690RY00010
13. Remove the backbers from the rear bumper reinforcement assembly. Remove the three bolts at each backber.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Partially tighten the rear bumper bolts(2) (3) and adjust the clearance between the body (tailgate) and the rear bumper(1). Then fully tighten the rear bumper bolts(2) (3). Torque : 147 Nm (108 lb ft)
690RY00002
7. Remove the license plate light assembly and license plate harness. 8. Remove the rear license plate bracket. 9. Remove the rear center bumper. Remove the eight clips from the step part and three bolts from each upper and lower sides. 10. Remove the rear bumper retainers. Remove the two nuts from each rear bumper retainer. 11. Remove the rear corner bumpers. Remove the three bolts from each rear corner bumper.
690RY00003
8F10
BODY STRUCTURE
2. Rear bumper adjustment. When the bolts fixing rear bumper assembly are tightened, adjustment should be made with shims so that clearances shown in the figure below are provided between the body (tailgate) (4) and the rear bumper(5).
690RY00014
BODY STRUCTURE
8F11
Parts Location (Spare tire mounted under floor model)
690R100002
Legend (1) Protector (2) Rear Mud Flap (3) Bumper Bracket (4) Rear Bumper Support (5) Rear Bumper Slider Bracket (6) Rear Corner Bumper EndOFCallout
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Backber Rear Bumper Retainer Rear Bumper Reinforcement Assembly Rear Center Bumper Rear Bumper Assembly Rear Bumper Fixing Bolt
8F12
BODY STRUCTURE
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear mud flaps. Remove the four bolts. 3. Remove the protectors. Remove the three clips on the right side and five clips on the left side. 4. Remove the bumper brackets. Remove the two nuts. 5. Remove the rear bumper supports. Remove the nut and bolt. 6. Remove the rear bumper assembly(1). Remove the two bolts(2) from each side.
690RY00010
11. Remove the backbers from the rear bumper reinforcement assembly. Remove the three bolts at each backber.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Partially tighten the rear bumper bolts(2) (3) and adjust the clearance between the body (tailgate) and the rear bumper(1). Then fully tighten the rear bumper bolts(2) (3). Torque : 147 Nm (108 lb ft)
690RY00002
7. Remove the rear center bumper. Remove the ten clips from the step part and three bolts from each upper and lower sides. 8. Remove the rear bumper retainers. Remove the two nuts from each rear bumper retainer. 9. Remove the rear corner bumpers. Remove the three bolts from each rear corner bumper. 10. Remove the rear bumper slider brackets(1). Remove the two screws(4) and two nuts(3), and then remove claw caught in the washer(2).
690RY00003
BODY STRUCTURE
2. Rear bumper adjustment. When the bolts fixing rear bumper assembly are tightened, adjustment should be made with shims so that clearances shown in the figure below are provided between the body (tailgate) (4) and the rear bumper(5).
8F13
3. Tighten the spare tire fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 118 Nm (87 lb ft)
690R100001
Rear Bumper Slider

Removal
1. Remove the rear bumper. Refer to Rear Bumper in this section. 2. Remove the rear bumper slider(1). Remove the three bolts(2).
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in reverse order, noting the following point. 1. Apply chassis grease to the slider and the slider bracket moving surface.
690RW016
8F14
BODY STRUCTURE
General Description (Sheet Metal)

This section includes items of front end sheet metal that are attached by bolts, screws or clips and related accessory components. Anticorrosion materials have been applied to the interior surfaces of some metal panels to provide rust resistance. When servicing these panels, areas on which this material has been disturbed, should be properly recoated with servicetype anticorrosion material.
Engine Hood
Parts Location
610RY00004
Legend (1) Engine Hood Assembly EndOFCallout
(2) Windowshield Washer Nozzle Tube (3) Hood Hinge Bolt
BODY STRUCTURE
8F15
Removal
1. Open the hood. 2. Support the hood. 3. Remove the windshield washer nozzle tube.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Tighten the engine hood hinge fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in) 2. Check the engine hood and fender(1). Clearance: 4.5 mm (0.18 in) Height (step): 0.5 mm (0.02 in) Adjust clearance with the hinges on the engine hood. Adjust height (step) with the hood rests(2).
880RS001
4. Remove the hood hinge bolts. Before removing the hinges from the engine hood, scribe a mark showing location of the hinges to facilitate installation in the original position.
610RY00007
610RS006
5. Remove the engine hood.
610RX001
8F16
BODY STRUCTURE
610RY00008
BODY STRUCTURE
8F17
Engine Hood Lock

Parts Location
610R100001
Legend (1) Engine Hood Lock Assembly (2) Control Cable EndOFCallout
(3) Hood Lock Control Lever (4) Inner Liner (5) Radiator Grille
Removal
1. Remove the hood lock control lever. 2. Remove the inner liner. 3. Remove the radiator grille. Refer to Radiator Grille in this section. 4. Remove the engine hood lock assembly. Apply setting marks(1) to the hood lock assembly and the body prior to removal.
610RY00006
5. Remove the control cable. Remove the cable fixing clips from the engine hood lock.
8F18
BODY STRUCTURE
3. Adjust the appearance quality. (Engine hood and fender panel) By buffers, adjust the difference of the height of engine hood is 0 0.5mm (0 0.02in) to the fender. (Turn the buffers approx. one revolution and move the position of buffers upward.)
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order noting the following points: 1. Set the position of installing the engine hood lock assembly(4). Install the buffers (3) to the body. Adjust the buffers as the position of the engine hood (1) is 2mm (0.08in) to the fender panel (2). 2. Fix the engine hood lock assembly. Tighten the hood lock assembly fixing bolts under condition 1 to the specified torque. Torque : 10 Nm (87 lb in)
610R200015
4. Reroute the control cable to its original position, and check and see if the lock assembly and control lever work normally.
610R200014
BODY STRUCTURE
8F19
Radiator Grille
Parts Location
603RY00004
Legend (1) Radiator Grille Rubber (2) Screw EndOFCallout
(3) Radiator Grille Assembly (LWB) (4) Clip (5) Radiator Grille Assembly (SWB)
Removal
1. Open the hood. 2. Support the hood. 3. Remove radiator grille. Raise the clips on the radiator grille and remove screw.
603RY00011
4. Pull out the radiator grille rubber from fender panel front lower side.
8F20
BODY STRUCTURE
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Install the radiator grille clips remaining on the body side in the radiator grille, and then install the radiator grille on the body.
BODY STRUCTURE
8F21
Front Fender Panel

Parts Location
605RY00002
Legend (1) Antenna Assembly (2) Front Fender Panel (3) Front Turn Signal Light Assembly EndOFCallout
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Radiator Grille Inner Liner Front Mud Flap Front Wheel Arch Moulding (if so equipped)
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the radiator grille assembly. Refer to Radiator Grille in this section.
8F22
BODY STRUCTURE
7. Remove the front fender panel. Remove the eight fixing bolts.
3. Remove the front turn signal light assembly. Remove the fixing screw and disconnect the connector.
614RX001 801RY00005
4. Remove the front mud flap. 5. Remove the inner liner.
8. Remove the front wheel arch moulding (If so equipped). Refer to Wheel Arch Moulding in Exterior/Interior Trim section.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Tighten the front fender panel fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 7 Nm (61 lb in) 2. Check the fender and front door(1). Clearance: 5.0 mm (0.196 in) Height (step): Flush
647RY00003
6. Remove the antenna assembly. Refer to Rod Type Antenna in Entertainment section.
610RY00002
BODY STRUCTURE
8F23
610RW001
8F24
BODY STRUCTURE
Body Mounting
Parts Location
501R200007
Legend (1) No.1 Body (2) No.1 Body (3) No.2 Body (4) No.3 Body EndOFCallout
Mounting (LWB) Mounting (SWB) Mounting Mounting
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
No.4 Body Mounting (LWB only) No.5 Body Mounting (LWB) No.5 Body Mounting (SWB) Body Side Mounting Bracket Frame Side Mounting Bracket
Tightening Torque
1. Tighten the body mounting bolts to specified torque. Torque : 50 Nm (41 lb ft) * mark position (LWB) Torque : 50 Nm (41 lb ft) (SWB) Torque : 103 Nm (76 lb ft)
BODY STRUCTURE
8F25
Body Dimension
Front Section
A10RW034
8F26
BODY STRUCTURE
A10RW035
BODY STRUCTURE
8F27
A10RW036
8F28
BODY STRUCTURE
Room Section (SWB)
A10RW037
BODY STRUCTURE
8F29
A10RW038
8F30
BODY STRUCTURE
Room Section (LWB)

Refer to SWB for front side of room section.
A10RW039
BODY STRUCTURE
8F31
A10RW040
8F32
BODY STRUCTURE
Rear Section (SWB)
A10RW041
BODY STRUCTURE
8F33
A10RW042
8F34
BODY STRUCTURE
Rear Section (LWB)
A10RW043
BODY STRUCTURE
8F35
A10RW044
8F36
BODY STRUCTURE
Side Body Section (Front side)
A10RW045
BODY STRUCTURE
8F37
A10RW046
8F38
BODY STRUCTURE
Side Body Section (Rear side)
A10RW047
BODY STRUCTURE
8F39
A10RW048
8F40
BODY STRUCTURE
General Description (Body)

This publication contains essential removal, installation, adjustment and maintenance procedures.
Instrument Panel Assembly

Parts Location
740R200042
Legend (1) Cross Beam (2) Vent Duct Assembly (3) Instrument Panel Stay (4) Passenger Air Bag (5) Passenger Air Bag Cover (6) Dash Side Trim Panel (7) Instrument Upper Reinforcement (8) Glove Box Side Reinforcement (9) Passenger Lower Bracket (10) Glove Box (11) Audio Sub Box EndOFCallout
(12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22)
Radio Assembly Control Lever Assembly Front Console Assembly Lower Cluster Assembly Instrument Panel Driver Lower Cover Assembly Driver Knee Bolster Assembly Meter Cluster Assembly Instrument Panel Center Reinforcement Meter Assembly Instrument Panel Assembly Instrument Harness Assembly
BODY STRUCTURE
8F41
Removal
CAUTION: For precautions on installation or removal of SRS air bag system, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) AIR BAG in Restraint section. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the lower cluster assembly. Remove screw (2) and pull out the cluster at the clip positions (1). Disconnect the cigarette lighter connectors (3).
7. Remove the instrument panel driver lower cover assembly. Remove the engine hood opener two fixing screws and another one fixing screw. After four clips are pried, disconnect switch connector and duct.
610R200007
8. Remove the meter cluster assembly. Remove the five fixing screws, two clips and switch connectors.
740R200035
3. Remove the radio assembly and audio sub box. Refer to Radio in Entertainment section. 4. Remove the front and rear consoles. Refer to Consoles in Exterior/Interior Trim section. 5. Remove the dash side trim panels. Remove the sill plates, then remove the trim panels. 6. Remove the glove box. Remove the two fixing screws.
9. Remove the meter assembly. Remove the four fixing screws and disconnect the connectors. 10. Remove the driver knee bolster assembly. Remove the six fixing bolts and screw. 11. Remove the control lever assembly. Refer to Control Lever Assembly and/or Control Cable in Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) section. 12. Remove the Instrument panel assembly. CAUTION: For precautions on installation or removal of SRS air bag system, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) AIR BAG in Restraint section. Disconnect the instrument harness connectors (six connectors on the driver's side, three connectors on the passenger side and two connectors on the center side). Disconnect radio antenna cable plug and the ground cable fixing bolts from dash side panel. Remove the two fixing bolts of passenger air bag assembly and disconnect the connector. Remove the two fixing screws from fuse box. After pry the three hole cover from the surface of instrument panel, remove the three nuts. Remove the six bolts and one screw.
470RW002
8F42
BODY STRUCTURE
740RW038
740RW031
13. Remove the passenger air bag (1). Remove the four fixing nuts. CAUTION: For precautions on installation or removal of SRS air bag system, refer to Supplemental Restraint System in Restraint section.
20. Remove the instrument panel stays. Remove the two fixing nuts and two fixing bolts for each bracket. 21. Remove the cross beam. Remove the five fixing nuts, two fixing bolts (upper) and six fixing bolts (lower).
827RY00004
14. Remove the vent duct assembly. Remove the five fixing screws. 15. Remove the passenger lower bracket. Remove the three screws. 16. Remove the glove box side reinforcement. 17. Remove the instrument upper reinforcement. Remove the nine screws. 18. Remove the instrument panel center reinforcement. Remove the six screws. 19. Remove the instrument panel harness assembly (1). Remove the clips.
740R200043
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point. 1. Adjust the control cable. Refer to Control Lever Assembly in Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) section.
BODY STRUCTURE
8F43
Front Door Assembly

Parts Location
630RW002
Legend (1) Front Door Assembly (2) Lower Hinge Bolt EndOFCallout
(3) Door Harness Connection (4) Door Check Arm Pin (5) Upper Hinge Bolt
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Apply a setting mark on the body side hinge. 3. Remove the door check arm pin.
630RW001
8F44
BODY STRUCTURE
4. Remove the upper and lower hinge bolts. Position a wood block under the door for protection and support the door assembly with hands during removal or installation.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Align the door fitting to the body. Check the fender and front door (3). Clearance: 5.0 mm (0.196 in) Height (step): Flush Check the front door and rear door (2). Clearance: 6.0 mm (0.23 in) Height (step): Flush Check the rear door and body (1) (4). Clearance: 5.0 mm (0.196 in) Height (step): Flush Adjust clearance with door hinges. Adjust height (step) by tapping on the fender lightly with a rubber hammer.
635RW003
5. Remove the door harness connection. Pull the door harness grommet out in order to disconnect the harness connection.
610RY00003
2. Tighten the door hinge bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 34 Nm (25 lb ft) 3. Apply chassis grease to the door check arm pin and the door hinge moving surface.
630RW004
6. Remove the front door assembly.
BODY STRUCTURE
8F45
Rear Door Assembly

Parts Location
650R100001
Legend (1) Rear Door Assembly (2) Lower Hinge Bolt EndOFCallout
(3) Door Harness Connection (4) Door Check Arm Pin (5) Upper Hinge Bolt
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Apply a setting mark on the body side hinge. 3. Remove the door check arm pin.
4. Remove the upper and lower hinge bolts. Position a wood block under the door for protection and support the door assembly with hands during removal or installation.
650R100002
630RW003
8F46
BODY STRUCTURE
5. Remove the door harness connection. Pull the door harness grommet out in order to disconnect the door harness connection.
630RW004
6. Remove the rear door assembly.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Align the door fitting to the body by referring to Front Door Assembly in this section. 2. Tighten the door hinge bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 34 Nm (25 lb ft) 3. Apply chassis grease to the check arm pin and the door hinge moving surface.
BODY STRUCTURE
8F47
Front Window Regulator, Glass and Glass Run

Parts Location
635R100001
Legend (1) Glass Run (2) Glass (3) Window Regulator (4) Waist Seal (5) Outside Handle (6) Locking Link (7) Door Lock Assembly (8) Waterproof Sheet (9) Door Trim Panel EndOFCallout
(10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18)
Courtesy Light Lens Speaker Grille Grip Cover Inside Handle Power Window Switch/Window Regulator Handle Speaker Assembly Tweeter Door Mirror Cover Door Mirror Assembly
8F48
BODY STRUCTURE
3. Remove the screw while pulling the inside lever toward you and then remove the inside handle.
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the power window switch/regulator handle. Pry out the power window switch and remove the connectors.
632RW003
4. Remove the speaker grille (3). Pull out the front side of the grille. 5. Remove the speaker assembly (2).
635RW004
To remove the regulator handle (1), remove the clip (2) at the root of the handle by using wire with hook.
Remove the 4 screws and disconnect the speaker harness connector (1).
635RW002
631RW004
BODY STRUCTURE
6. Remove the door mirror cover. 7. Remove the grip cover. 8. Remove the 5 screws (1), (3) and pull out the trim panel at the 6 clip positions (2).
8F49
631RW007
11. Remove the window regulator. Disconnect the window regulator motor harness connector, if equipped with power windows. 12. Remove the glass run.
635RW007
9. Remove the waterproof sheet. 10. Remove the 2 screws through the access hole and pull out the glass upward.
Pull the glass run (6) out from the door frame groove.
631RS007
631RW006
8F50
BODY STRUCTURE
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Install the regulator handle as shown in the figure, if equipped without power windows.
631RW005
2. Check to see that the window regulator operates smoothly and the glass opens and closes properly. 3. Install the waterproof sheet tightly against the door panel.
BODY STRUCTURE
8F51
Rear Window Regulator, Glass and Glass Run

Parts Location
655R100001
Legend (1) Glass Run (2) Glass (3) Fixed Glass (4) Window Regulator (5) Outside Handle (6) Door Lock Assembly (7) Speaker Bracket (8) Speaker EndOFCallout
Bracket Rear Corner Garnish Door Trim Panel Power Window Switch and Pull Case/Window Regulator Handle (13) Inside Handle (14) Waterproof Sheet (15) Waist Seal
(9) (10) (11) (12)
8F52
BODY STRUCTURE
6. Pull out the trim panel at the 8 clip positions. Disconnect the power window switch connector.
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear corner garnish. Pull the garnish to disconnect the retaining clip. 3. Remove the window regulator handle. Remove the clip on the rear side of the regulator handle using a wire.
655R100003
7. Remove the power window switch and pull case, if equipped. Remove the fixing screws from back side of the rear door trim panel. 8. Remove the bracket.
651RW003
9. Disconnect the speaker harness connector. 10. Remove the speaker with the speaker harness connector from the door inner panel. 11. Remove the waterproof sheet (1). Taking notice of the door harness, peel the waterproof sheet off the door panel carefully.
4. Remove the screw while pulling the inside lever toward you and then remove the inside handle. 5. Remove the 1 screw at the pull case.
655R100002
651RS002
BODY STRUCTURE
12. Remove the speaker bracket. Remove the six fixing screws. 13. Remove the fixied glass. Remove one bolt and screw as shown in the figure, then pull it upward.
8F53
Remove the window glass by tilting it as necessary.
651RW007
651RW002
14. Remove the glass. First, align the height of regulator to the access hole. Remove 2 screws attaching bottom channel and regulator, then remove the glass.
15. Remove the window regulator. Remove the window regulator fixing bolts and pull the regulator out from the lower hole of the door panel.
651RW005
16. Remove the glass run. Pull the glass run out from the door frame.
651RW006
8F54
BODY STRUCTURE
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Install the regulator handle as shown in the figure, if equipped without power windows.
631RW005
2. Check to see that the window regulator operates smoothly and the glass opens and closes properly. 3. Install the waterproof sheet tightly against the door panel.
BODY STRUCTURE
8F55
Tailgate (LWB)
Parts Location
681RW001
Legend (1) Hatchgate Lock Assembly (2) Tailgate Assembly (3) Tailgate Bell Crank (4) Hinges (5) Plug (6) Tailgate Stopper Link (7) Waterproof Sheet EndOFCallout
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Trim Cover Assembly Rear Wiper Motor Dove Tail Key Cylinder Tailgate Lock Assembly Hatchgate Lock Actuator Assembly Outside Handle Tailgate Waist Seal
8F56
BODY STRUCTURE
6. Remove the hatchgate lock actuator assembly. Disconnect the actuator harness connector. Remove the two nuts holding hatchgate lock actuator assembly from inside. 7. Remove the outside handle. Remove the two bolts holding the outside handle from inside. 8. Remove the tailgate lock assembly. Remove the three screws holding the lock assembly. 9. Remove the dove tail. 10. Remove the tailgate locking links. 11. Remove the rear wiper arm. Refer to Rear Wiper Arm/Blade in Wiper/Washer System section. 12. Remove the rear wiper motor. 13. Remove the tailgate harness cable. 14. Remove the spare tire carrier. Refer to Spare Tire Carrier in this section. 15. Remove the tailgate stopper link. 16. Remove the tailgate assembly. Removing the tailgate assembly may require two people.
683RW001
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the tailgate trim cover assembly (3). Remove the two screws (2) holding the hatchgate lock assembly (1) first and the two screws fixing the trim cover assembly. Pull up the trim cover while detaching the clips from tailgate panel.
3. Remove the waterproof sheet. Carefully remove the waterproof sheet not to break it. 4. Remove the hatchgate lock. Disconnect the lock link and connector and remove the three fixing bolts. 5. Remove the key cylinder. Disconnect the locking links. Remove the key cylinder retaining clip with screwdriver to remove the key cylinder.
Carefully remove the tailgate assembly not to damage the hinge. 17. Remove the tailgate waist seal.
683RW025
BODY STRUCTURE
8F57
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. When setting up links, pay attention to the position and direction of the links.
683RW003
Legend (1) Tailgate Lock Link (2) Outside Handle (3) Key Cylinder Lock Link (4) Cancel Mechanism EndOFCallout 2. Tighten the tailgate hinge fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 34 Nm (25 Ib ft) 3. Tighten the tailgate stopper link fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 34 Nm (25 Ib ft) 4. Tighten the dove tail fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (19 Ib ft)
8F58
BODY STRUCTURE
Tailgate (SWB)
Parts Location
681RX001
Legend (1) Tailgate Assembly (2) Hinges (3) Tailgate Stopper Link (4) Waterproof Sheet (5) Tailgate Trim Cover Assembly (6) Rear Wiper Motor EndOFCallout
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Dove Tail Key Cylinder Tailgate Lock Assembly Outside Handle Hatchgate Lock Actuator Assembly Tailgate Waist Seal
BODY STRUCTURE
8F59
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the spare tire carrier. Refer to Spare Tire Carrier in this section. 3. Remove the rear wiper arm. Refer to Rear Wiper Arm/Blade in Wiper/Washer System section. 4. Remove the tailgate glass stay and tailgate glass. Refer to Tailgate Glass (SWB) in this section. 5. Remove the tailgate trim cover assembly. Remove the two screws fixing the trim cover assembly and pull up the trim cover after detaching the clips from tailgate panel. 6. Remove the waterproof sheet. Remove the waterproof sheet, taking special care so as not to break it. 7. Remove the rear wiper motor. Disconnect the motor connector and remove the two fixing bolts. 8. Remove the key cylinder. Disconnect the locking links. Remove the key cylinder retaining clip with screwdriver to remove the key cylinder. 9. Remove the hatchgate lock actuator assembly. Disconnect the actuator harness connector. Remove the two nuts holding hatchgate lock actuator assembly from inside. 10. Remove the outside handle. Remove the two bolts holding the outside handle from inside. Disconnect the locking link. 11. Remove the tailgate lock assembly. Remove the three screws holding the lock assembly. 12. Remove the dove tail. 13. Remove the tailgate harness cable. 14. Remove the tailgate stopper link. 15. Remove the tailgate assembly. Removing the tailgate assembly may require two people. Carefully remove the tailgate assembly not to damage the hinge. 16. Remove the tailgate waist seal.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Tighten the tailgate hinge fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 34 Nm (25 Ib ft) 2. Tighten the tailgate stopper link fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 34 Nm (25 Ib ft) 3. Tighten the dove tail fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 25 Nm (19 Ib ft)
8F60
BODY STRUCTURE
Rear Hatchgate (LWB)

Parts Location
682RY00002
Legend (1) High Mount Stoplight (2) Hatchgate Hinge (3) Hinge Collar (4) Hatchgate Glass Seal (5) Hatchgate Gas Stay (6) Hatchgate Ball Stud (7) Ball Stud Spacer EndOFCallout
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Ball Stud Fastener Hatchgate Glass Hatchgate Striker Striker Fastener High Mount Stoplight Fastener Outside Handle Collar Outside Handle High Mount Stoplight Spacer
BODY STRUCTURE
8F61
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the high mount stoplight and rear defogger harness connectors. 3. Remove the hatchgate ball stud (LH and RH). Remove gas stay fixing screw and pull up the gas stay assembly (3) from the ball stud by spreading the retainer (2) holding the ball stud at the end of the gas stay with screwdriver (1), etc.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Attach the upper seal (1) to the hatchgate glass (2) indicated portion (3) so that the end of the glass contacts the bottom of the upper seal.
682RW003
683RW004
4. Remove the hatchgate hinge nuts from body side. 5. Remove the hatchgate glass. When pulling down the hatchgate glass, exercise special care so as not to damage it. Hatchgate glass assembly is heavy and removal operation requires two people. 6. Remove the two screws to remove hatchgate striker and fastener. 7. Remove the outside handle. 8. Remove the hinges. 9. Remove the high mount stoplight. 10. Remove the hatchgate finisher.
2. When installing the hatchgate glass, first attach the hinge to the hatchgate glass. Align the stud of the hinge to the hole at body while supporting the hatchgate glass with two people at indicated positions (1), and then partially tighten the hinge to body nut (2). After adjustment (refer to Adjustment in this section) is completed, fully tighten the nut, hinge to body nut. Hatchgate hinge assembly for left and right sides from each other.
682RW005
8F62
BODY STRUCTURE
3. When installing gas stay assembly (1), first install the gas stay onto the rear quarter panel with fixing screw (2) and fastener (3) and then attach the gas stay upper end to the ball stud by spreading the retainer with screwdriver, etc. Gas stay assemblies for left and right sides differ from each other (The letter (4) L(LH) or R(RH) is embossed on the gas stay assembly.)
683RW005
4. When installing hatchgate striker assembly, first partially tighten the fixing screw and close the hatchgate and tailgate. Then fully tighten the fixing screw with the condition that the striker fits the hatchgate lock assembly at the tailgate. Make sure that clearance exists between hatchgate striker and lock assembly. After installation, again make sure that the striker fits the lock assembly properly. 5. Tighten the nuts; hinge to body (LH and RH) Torque : 6 Nm (52 lb in) 6. Tighten the screws; glass and hinge fix (LH and RH) Torque : 6 Nm (52 lb in) NOTE: When installing the hinge to the body, exercise special care not to damage the body paint surface. 7. Tighten the hatchgate striker fixing screws. Torque : 6 Nm (52 lb in)
BODY STRUCTURE
8F63
Adjustment
Hatchgate alignment hatchgate hinges. is obtained by moving
682RY00003
Legend (1) Hatchgate Striker (2) Hatchgate Glass (3) Tailgate Outer Panel (4) Tailgate Inner Panel EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Trim Cover Hatchgate Lock Assembly Quarter Trim Hatchgate Glass Seal Quarter Outer Panel
8F64
BODY STRUCTURE
Tailgate Glass (Resin Top)

Parts Location
682RW011
Legend (1) Tailgate Trim Cover (2) Tailgate Seal (3) Tailgate Glass Assembly (4) Tailgate Moulding (5) Tailgate Glass Stay (6) Bolt EndOFCallout
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
Cap Screw Collar Gasket Clip Grommet Nut
BODY STRUCTURE
8F65
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the spare tire. 3. Remove the rear wiper. Refer to Rear Wiper Arm/Blade in Wiper/Washer System section. 4. Disconnect the rear defogger connectors (LH & RH). 5. Remove the tailgate glass stays. Remove the two seats of two tailgate trim cover fixing bolts. 6. Remove the tailgate glass assembly. Remove the two caps on the left and right sides, then remove the screws. Remove the two clips from the two ends of the tailgate moulding, then lift the glass assembly up and out. Removing and installing the glass assembly require two persons. 7. Remove the tailgate seal.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Tighten the tailgate glass stay fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 19 Nm (14 lb ft) 2. Make sure the lip is properly oriented when installing the tailgate seal.
8F66
BODY STRUCTURE
Spare Tire Carrier

Parts Location
530RX005
Legend (1) Spare Tire (2) Spare Tire Carrier EndOFCallout
Removal
1. Remove the spare tire. 2. Remove the spare tire carrier by using spare tire carrier nut wrench J34355.
Installation
1. Spare tire carrier. Tighten the carrier fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 31 Nm (23 lb ft) 2. Spare tire Tighten the spare tire fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 118 Nm (87 lb ft)
BODY STRUCTURE
8F67
Spare Tire Hanger

Parts Location
530RY00005
Legend (1) Spare Tire Hanger Assembly Fixing Bolt (2) End Cross Member (3) Rear Suspension Cross Member (4) Spare Tire Support (5) Spare Tire Support Fixing Bolt EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
Spare Tire Stopper Rubber (RH) Spare Tire Stopper Rubber (Front) Stopper Rubber Fixing Clip Spare Tire Spare Tire Stopper Rubber (LH) Spare Tire Hanger Assembly
8F68
BODY STRUCTURE
Removal
1. Open the hatch gate and tail gate. 2. Remove the spare tire (3). Put the spare tire handle (1) to the center of upper side of rear bumper (2) and turn counterclockwise. Put spare tire down.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Install the spare tire firmly. 2. Tighten the spare tire support fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 40 Nm (30 lb ft) 3. Tighten the spare tire hanger fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque : 19 Nm (14 lb ft)
530RW005
3. Remove the spare tire support. Remove the four bolts that are fixed to frame cross member. 4. Remove the spare tire hanger assembly. Remove the two fixing bolts.
BODY STRUCTURE
8F69
Windshield
Parts Location
607R100001
Legend (1) Windshield Wiper Arm (2) Windshield Upper Molding (3) Windshield EndOFCallout
(4) Windshield Side Molding (5) Windshield Support (6) Front Cowl Cover
8F70
BODY STRUCTURE
circumference of the windshield glass. Attach some cloth tape (1) on the body for protecting the painting surface.
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the front pillar trim cover. Turn up the finisher and pry the trim cover clips free from the body panel. 3. Remove the sunvisors and sunvisor holders. Refer to Headlining in Exterior/Interior Trim section. 4. Remove the rear view mirror. Remove the clip (1) and disconnect the connector (2). Turn the channel mount (3) 90 degrees clockwise and pull down.
607RS014
Clean the remaining adhesive caulking material from the area of the body which holds the windshield.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Clean the bonding surfaces of both the windshield and body panel with a soft rag and white gasoline.
825R200087
5. Remove the windshield wiper arm. Refer to Windshield Wiper Arm/Blade in Wiper/ Washer System section. 6. Remove the windshield side molding. Pull the molding out from drip rail. 7. Remove the front cowl cover. 8. Remove the windshield support. 9. Remove the upper moulding. 10. Remove the windshield. Use a knife to cut through part of the adhesive caulking material. Secure one end of a piece of steel piano wire (0.02 inches in diameter) to a piece of wood that can serve as a handle. Use a pair of needle nose pliers to insert the other end of the piano wire through the adhesive caulking material at the edge of the windshield glass. Secure the other end of the piano wire to another piece of wood. With the aid of an assistant, carefully move the piano wire with a sawing motion to cut through the adhesive caulking material around the entire
2. Install the spacer. Attach spacers in ten locations as shown in the figure. Always use new spacer.
607RW004
BODY STRUCTURE
3. Install the windshield upper molding. Peel off the tear-away paper from the windshield upper molding, and start applying it with one end of the glass and cut away the surplus at the other end of the glass for length adjustment. Always use new upper molding. 4. Temporary install the windshield support. 5. Apply the primer to the windshield and body panel. Apply the primer (3) (Sun star # 435-40 or equivalent) to the windshield side bonding surface as shown in the figure.
8F71
Apply the primer (Sun star # 435-95 or equivalent) to the body side bonding surface. NOTE: Apply an adhesive 3 minutes or more but within 24 hours after the application of primer. If more than 24 hours have passed, reapply primer. Primer should be handled as following: 1. Use the primer manufactured 3 months or less ago and having been kept in an refrigerator. 2. Wipe off primer-stains on positions other than requires application. 3. Stir the primer for a minute or more before use.
607RW003
Legend (1) Adhesive (2) Sealing Dam EndOFCallout
(3) Primer Coating Area (4) Windshield (5) Upper Molding
8F72
BODY STRUCTURE
8. Install the front cowl cover. 9. Install side molding. Use alcohol wipe or equivalent cleaner with soft cloth to wipe away any excess adhesive. Cure the bonding at a temperature of 20 C 30 C (68 F 86 F) for 24 hours. Check the windshield for any signs of water leak.
6. Apply the adhesive (1) to the windshield. After drying primer completely, apply a sealing adhesive (Sun star # 555 or equivalent) along the edge of the glass so that the sealing adhesive has a 20 mm (0.79 in) junction at middle of the base of the glass.
607RW015
NOTE: Apply an adhesive 3 minutes or more but within 24 hours after the application of primer. If more than 24 hours have passed, reapply primer. Adhesive should be handled as follows: 1. Use the adhesive manufactured 3 months or less ago. 2. Wipe off adhesive-stains on positions other than requires application. 7. Install the windshield. Set the windshield with sealing adhesive applied to entire circumference in the body panel. Specifically, adjust windshield support with the upper molding making contact with the body panel, press the glass, and tighten the windshield support. NOTE: Affix the glass within 5 minutes of application.
607RX010
10. Install windshield wiper arm.
607RS017
BODY STRUCTURE
8F73
Rear Quarter Glass (LWB)

Parts Location
641R100001
Legend (1) Quarter Trim Panel (2) Rear Quarter Glass Molding (3) Rear Quarter Glass (4) Clip EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Body Panel Clip Fastener Tape Primer Coating Area (Glass side & Body side) Sealant
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. Refer to Interior Trim Panels (LWB) in Exterior/ Interior Trim section. 3. Remove the rear quarter glass. Refer to Windshield in this section.
8F74
BODY STRUCTURE
Installation
1. Rear quarter glass. Clean the bonding surfaces of both the glass and the body panel. Be absolutely sure to apply glass primer to the side glass. Be absolutely sure to apply body primer fully to the body. NOTE: Immediately wipe off the primer left on the body or extruded sealant. Attach the fastener to the indicated position of body with sealant as shown in the figure. Apply the sealant to the circumference of glass as shown in the figure. Insert the location pins on glass into the panel, push the glass against the panel, and bond them. Attach the molding to the body with sealant. Cure the bonding at a temperature of 20 C 30 C (68 F 86 F) for 24 hours. Check the rear quarter glass for any signs of water leak. 2. Install the rear quarter trim panel.
BODY STRUCTURE
8F75
Rear Quarter Glass (Resin Top)

Parts Location
641RW011
Legend (1) Resin Top (2) Fastener Tape (3) Rear Quarter Glass Assembly (4) Dam Seal EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Adhesive Body Panel Weather Strip Clip
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear quarter glass assembly. Refer to Windshield in this section.
Installation
1. Use alcohol or the like to wipe clean the areas of the resin top and glass assembly that are to be affixed to each other. 2. Apply the primer (2) to the area of the resin top to which the glass is to be affixed. Top edge (1) and bottom edge (3) primer coat areas.
641RX002
8F76
BODY STRUCTURE
3. Stick the fasteners tape to the body in the specified locations. 4. Install the rear quarter glass assembly (1). Apply the primer (4) to the rear quarter glass as shown in the figure. Stick the dam seal (2) in place and then apply adhesive (3), as shown in the figure. Allow a 20mm (0.79 in) overlap at the ends of the adhesive. Insert the glass clips into the hole in the panel and then push the glass against the panel to affix it in place.
641RX001
BODY STRUCTURE
8F77
Side Window Glass (SWB)

Parts Location
641RX003
Legend (1) Spacer (2) Primer Coating Area on Glass Side (3) Side Window Molding (4) Adhesive (5) Clip EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Side Window Glass Fastener Tape Side Window Garnish Assembly Body Panel Primer Coating Area on Body Side
Removal
1. Remove the quarter trim cover. Refer to Interior Trim Panels (SWB) in Exterior/ Interior Trim section. 2. Remove the side window garnish assembly. Pull out the three clips to disengage them. 3. Remove the side window molding. 4. Remove the side window glass. Refer to Windshield in this section.
Stick the spacer and fastener tape in place in the specified locations. Apply the adhesive to the entire circumference of the glass, as shown in the figure. Insert the glass clips into the panel and then push the glass against the panel to affix it in place. Wipe away any adhesive that oozes out around the edges. 2. Install the side window garnish assembly. Install it securely and inspect for snug fit. 3. Install the side window molding. Insert it securely and inspect for snug fit. Make sure that there is no water leakage from the side window glass. 4. Install the quarter trim cover.
Installation
1. Install the side window glass. Clean the areas of the glass and body panel that are to be affixed to each other. Apply the primer to the specified areas of the glass and body panel.
8F78
BODY STRUCTURE

501R200008
BODY STRUCTURE
8F79
630RW013
681RW004
601RY00003
8F80
BODY STRUCTURE
650R100003
682RY00004
BODY STRUCTURE
8F81
530RY00004
Special Tools
J34355 Spare Tire Carrier Nut Wrench
SECTION
SEATS
RODEO
8G1

SEATS
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Seat Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Seat Assembly and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Seat Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Seat Assembly and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat Assembly (LWB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat Cushion Assembly and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8G1 8G2 8G2 8G2 8G3 8G5 8G5 8G6 8G7 8G8 8G8 CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. ISUZU will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. ISUZU will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fastener joint interfaces. Generally, such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fastener. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specifications. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems. Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat Back Assembly and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat Assembly (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat Assembly and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 8G9 8G9 8G10 8G10 8G11 8G12 8G12 8G13 8G13 8G14
Service Precaution
8G2
SEATS
Front Seat Assembly

Front Seat Assembly and Associated Parts
750R200018
Legend (1) Headrest (2) Connecting Pipe (3) Reclining Device Cover (4) Reclining Device (5) Outer Side Cover (6) Reclining Knob (7) Rear Cover EndOFCallout
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Seat Adjuster Front cover Front Seat Belt Buckle Assembly Seat Cushion Assembly Inner Side Cover Seat Back Assembly Guide Holder Front Seat Assembly
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the fornt and rear covers. 3. Remove the front seat assembly. Remove the four fixing bolts.
Disconnect the seat belt warning connector (Driver's side only). 4. Remove the reclining knob. Pry open the fixed portion of the reclining knob and lever with the tip of a screwdriver.
SEATS
5. Remove the outer side cover. Remove the two screws. 6. Remove the headrest. 7. Remove the reclining device. Pull up on the seat back trim cover in order to remove the reclining device fixing bolts (LWB). 16. Remove the guide holder.
8G3
Pull the guide holder out by holding the bottom end of it from the seat back assembly. 17. Remove the seat adjuster. Disconnect the release wire (4) and remove the fixing bolts.
750R200015
750RW006
Remove the device (1) and disconnect the walkin cable (2) (SWB).
18. Remove the trim cover (Seat cushion side).
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Bolt-tightening order is very important. Carefully follow the installation procedure outlined below. Install the inner and outer reclining device to the seat cushion and seat back. Tighten the bolts just enough to hold the reclining device in position. Do not final-tighten the bolts. Final-tighten the inner reclining device bolts (1),(2) in that order to the seat back. Final-tighten the outer reclining device bolts (3),(4) in that order to the seat back. Final-tighten the inner reclining device bolts (3),(4) in that order to the seat cushion. Final-tighten the outer reclining device bolts (3),(4) in that order to the seat cushion. Do not allow the reclining lever to move.
750RY00276
8. Remove the rear cover. Remove the two fixing screws. 9. Remove the front seat belt buckle assmbly. 10. Remove the inner side cover. 11. Remove the reclining device. 12. Remove the rear cover. 13. Remove the connecting pipe. 14. Remove the seat back assembly. 15. Remove the trim cover (Seat back side).
8G4
SEATS
NOTE: To separate the seat back from the seat cushion, remove the seat cushion bolts (3),(4). Do not remove the seat back bolts (1),(2).
750R200019
2. Tighten the reclining device fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 46Nm (34lbft) 3. Tighten the front seat assembly fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29lbft) 4. Tighten the front seat bolt buckle assembly fixing bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 29Nm (22lbft)
SEATS
8G5
Power Seat Assembly

Power Seat Assembly and Associated Parts
750R200017
Legend (1) Headrest (2) Guide Holder (3) Seat Back Frame Assembly (4) Connecting Pipe (5) Seat Back Pad (6) Power Lumbar Support Assembly (Driver's side) (7) Reclining Device Cover (8) Reclining Device (9) Outer Side Cover (10) Reclining Switch Knob (11) Slide Switch Knob (12) Power Seat Switch (13) Power Lumbar Switch (Driber's Side)
E nd O FCallo ut
(14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)
Seat Cushion Frame Assembly Power Seat Harness Adjuster Bracket Rear Cover Outer Seat Adjuster Assembly Adjuster Bracket Front Cover Front Cover Sliding Motor Cable Inner Seat Adjuster Assembly Seat Cushion Pad Seat Cushion Assembly/Seat Cushion Trim Cover (24) Seat Belt Buckle Assembly (25) Inner Side Cover (26) Seat Back Assembly/Seat Back Trim Cover
8G6
SEATS
Disconnect the reclining motor harness connector (3).
Removal
1. Remove the adjuster bracket rear cover and the fixing bolts on the rear side of the seat adjuster assembly. Before removal, slide the power seat assembly forward. 2. Remove the adjuster bracket front cover and the fixing bolts on the front side of the seat adjuster assembly. Before removal, slide the power seat assembly backward. 3. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 4. Remove the power seat assembly. Disconnect the power seat harness connectors and the seat belt warning connector of the driver side. CAUTION: When raising power seat assembly (1), use the handle (2) not the cable (3). A bent cable causes noise to occur during power seat operation. Please grip the handle (4). Don't grip the cable (5).
760R100037
12. Remove the reclining device covers. 13. Remove the trim cover and pad (Seat back side). 14. Remove the power lumbar support assembly. 15. Remove the guide holder. Pull the guide holder out by holding the bottom end of it from the seat back assembly. 16. Remove the seat adjuster assembly. Remove the four fixing bolts and disconnect the sliding motor connector. 17. Remove the sliding motor cable (2). Remove the nuts of each side. CAUTION: Be sure to maintain the same position for both outer and inner seat adjust assembly (1).
760R100036
5. Pull the switch knobs out. 6. Remove the outer side cover. Remove the two fixing screws and disconnect the power seat switch connector. 7. Remove the power seat switch. Remove the two fixing screws. 8. Remove the power lumbar switch. Remove the two fixing screws and conectors. 9. Remove the inner side cover. 10. Remove the headrest. 11. Remove the reclining device (2). Flip up the seat back trim cover (1) in order to remove the reclining device fixing bolts. 18. Remove the seat belt buckle assembly. 19. Remove the trim cover and pad (Seat cushion side) 20. Remove the power seat harness.
760R100038
SEATS
8G7
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Tighten the reclining device fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 46Nm (34lbft) 2. Tighten the seat adjuster fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 21Nm (15lbft) to seat cushion Torque: 39Nm (29lbft) to body 3. Tighten the seat belt buckle assembly fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 29 Nm (22lbft) NOTE: The performance of the reclining device and the seat adjuster of a power seat are guaranteed by the set of the outer and inner. Because of this, make sure to replace the reclining device and seat adjuster by the set.
8G8
SEATS
Rear Seat Assembly (LWB)

Rear Seat Cushion Assembly and Associated Parts
755RY00009
Legend (1) Rear Seat Lock Striker (2) Rear Seat Lock Assembly (3) Rear Seat Belt Buckle Assembly EndOFCallout
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Seat Cushion Hinge Hinge Cover Seat Cushion Fixing Bolt Rear Seat Cushion Assembly
SEATS
8G9
Removal
1. Remove the hinge covers. 2. Remove the seat cushion fixing bolts. 3. Remove the seat cushion assembly (2). Pull the strap (1) of the rear seat lock assembly to release the seat lock.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Tighten the rear seat lock assembly and rear seat belt buckle assembly fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29lbft) 2. Tighten the rear seat lock striker fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29lbft) 3. Tighten the seat cushion hinge fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29lbft)
755R100006
4. Remove the seat cushion hinges. 5. Remove the rear cushion trim cover (1) and rear seat cushion pad (2). Remove cushion trim cover from the rear cushion frame (3) by prying on the plastic retainers (4).
755RX028
6. Remove the rear seat lock assembly and rear seat belt buckle assembly. 7. Remove the rear seat lock strikers. Remove the four bolts at each striker.
8G10
SEATS
Rear Seat Back Assembly and Associated Parts
755R100005
Legend (1) Headrest (2) Seat Back Assembly (3) Guide Holder (4) Release Knob EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Seat Lock Cover Seat Lock Striker Side Hinge Body Floor Panel Center Hinge
Removal
1. Pull the release knob and pull the seat back assembly forward. 2. Remove the luggage floor carpets. Pull the nine carpet fixing clips from the backside of the seat back assembly. 3. Remove the seat back assembly. Remove the four fixing bolts at each seat back. 4. Remove the seat lock covers. 5. Remove the headrests.
6. Remove the release knobs. Turn the knob counterclockwise to remove it. 7. Remove the trim covers. 8. Remove the guide holders. 9. Remove the side hinges. Remove the one fixing nut at each side hinge. 10. Remove the center hinge. Remove the two fixing bolts.
SEATS
8G11
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Tighten the center hinge fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29lbft) 2. Tighten the side hinge fixing nuts to the specified torque. Torque: 29Nm (22lbft) 3. Tighten the side lock striker fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 19Nm (14lbft)
8G12
SEATS
Rear Seat Assembly (SWB)

Rear Seat Assembly and Associated Parts
755R200014
Legend (1) Headrest (2) Guide Holder (3) Rear Seat Back Assembly (4) Release Knob (5) Seat Lock Cover (6) Seat Lock Assembly (7) Rear Seat Belt Buckle Assembly (8) Reclining Device (9) Device Cover EndOFCallout
(10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18)
Rear Seat Cushion Assembly Support Cover Rear Seat Leg Spiral Spring Rear Cushion Damper Push Nut Rear Seat Leg Cover Rear Floor Lock Striker Free Hinge Cover
SEATS
8G13
Removal
1. Fold the rear seat backs forward. Pull up on the left and right release knobs. 2. Remove the rear seat leg covers. Remove the screw and clip from each. 3. Remove the rear seat assembly. Remove both left and right seat assembly fixing screws, and pull the seat lock strap to release the seat lock. 4. Remove the device covers (left and right). Remove the three screws from each. 5. Remove the release knobs (left and right). 6. Remove the rear seat back assemblies (left and right). Remove both reclining device fixing bolts from the sides of the seat backs. 7. Remove the headrests. 8. Remove the trim covers. 9. Remove the guide holders. 10. Remove the reclining devices. Remove the both reclining device fixing bolts from the sides of the seat cushions. 11. Remove the rear seat legs (left and right). Remove the rear cushion dampers and spiral springs, after removing the push nuts. 12. Remove the support covers (left and right). Remove the three screws from each support cover. 13. Remove the seat lock covers (left and right). 14. Remove the seat lock assemblies and the rear seat belt buckle assemblies (left and right). Remove the fixing bolts. 15. Remove the free hinge cover.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Tighten the seat lock assemblies and the rear seat belt buckle assemblies to the specified torque. Torque: 39 Nm (29 lbft) 2. Tighten the reclining devices to the specified torque. Torque: 46 Nm (34 lbft) 3. Tighten the rear seat assembly fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39 Nm (29 lbft)
8G14
SEATS

750R200020
SEATS
8G15
755R200015
SECTION
SECURITY AND LOCKS
RODEO
8H1

SECURITY AND LOCKS
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Door Lock Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Door Lock Assembly and Associated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Outside Handle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Outside Handle and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Door Lock Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Door Lock Assembly and Associated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Outside Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Outside Handle and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailgate Lock and Hatchgate Lock (LWB) . . . Tailgate Lock, Hatchgate Lock and Associated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8H1 8H2 8H2 8H3 8H4 8H5 8H5 8H5 8H5 8H6 8H6 8H6 8H7 8H8 8H8 8H8 8H8 8H9 8H9 8H9 8H10 Tailgate Lock (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailgate Lock and Associated Parts . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Door Lock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Lock Key Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Door Lock Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Door Lock Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailgate Lock Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AntiTheft & Keyless Entry Controller . . . . AntiTheft Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AntiTheft Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Hood Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antitheft & Keyless Entry Control Unit/Transmitter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID Code Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 8H11 8H11 8H11 8H12 8H13 8H13 8H13 8H14 8H14 8H14 8H14 8H14 8H14 8H14 8H14 8H14 8H15 8H15 8H16 8H16 8H17 8H17 8H21
Service Precaution
CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. ISUZU will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. ISUZU will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fasteners joint interfaces. Generally, such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fasteners. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specifications. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems.
8H2
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Front Door Lock Assembly

Front Door Lock Assembly and Associated Parts
635RY00003
Legend (1) Outside Handle (2) Door Locking Link (3) Door Lock Assembly (4) Waterproof Sheet (5) Door Trim Panel (6) Courtesy Light Lens EndOFCallout
(7) (8) (9) (10)
Speaker Grille Grip Cover Inside Handle Power Window Switch/Window Regulator Handle (11) Speaker Assembly
SECURITY AND LOCKS
8H3
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the power window switch (1)/regulator handle. Pry out the power window switch and remove the connectors.
3. Remove the screw while pulling the inside lever toward you and then remove the inside handle.
632RW003
4. Remove the speaker grille (1). Pull out the front side of the grille. 5. Remove the speaker assembly (2).
635RW004
To remove the regulator handle (1), remove the clip (2), at the root of the handle by using wire with hook.
Remove 4 screws and disconnect the speaker harness connector (3).
890RX012
631RW004
8H4
SECURITY AND LOCKS
6. Remove the courtesy light lens. 7. Remove the 5 screws (1), (3) and pull out the door trim panel at the 6 clip (2) positions.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Apply chassis grease to the lock assembly and striker moving surface. 2. Install the regulator handle as shown in the illustration, if equipped without power windows.
635RW007
8. Remove the waterproof sheet. Taking notice of the door harness, peel the waterproof sheet off the door panel carefully. 9. Raise the glass up to the uppermost position, and then remove the rear guide rail. 10. Disconnect the locking links then remove the door lock assembly fixing screws and door lock assembly.
631RW005
3. Tighten the door lock assembly fixing screws to the specified torque. Torque 7 Nm (61 Ib in) 4. Check that the door lock operates smoothly.
632RY00005
SECURITY AND LOCKS
8H5
Front Outside Handle

Front Outside Handle and Associated Parts
635RY00003
Legend (1) Outside Handle (2) Door Locking Link (3) Door Lock Assembly (4) Waterproof Sheet (5) Door Trim Panel (6) Courtesy Light Lens EndOFCallout
(7) (8) (9) (10)
Speaker Grille Grip Cover Inside Handle Power Window Switch/Window Regulator Handle (11) Speaker Assembly
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. Refer to Front Door Lock Assembly in this section. 3. Remove the waterproof sheet. Taking notice of the door harness, peel the waterproof sheet off the door panel carefully. 4. Disconnect the locking links and remove the outside handle. 5. Remove the fixing clip to remove the door lock cylinder.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Be sure to install the door lock cylinder at a right angle to the outside handle. 2. Check for smooth outside handle and lock cylinder operation. 3. Tighten the outside handle fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque 9 Nm (78 Ib in)
8H6
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Rear Door Lock Assembly

Rear Door Lock Assembly and Associated Parts
655R100004
Legend (1) Outside Handle (2) Door Lock Assembly (3) Bracket (4) Rear Corner Garnish EndOFCallout
(5) Door Trim Panel (6) Power Window Switch and Pull Case/Window Regulator Handle (7) Inside Handle (8) Waterproof Sheet
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear corner garnish. Pull the corner garnish to disconnect the retaining clip. 3. Remove the window regulator handle. Remove the clip on the rear side of the regulator handle using a wire.
651RW003
SECURITY AND LOCKS

4. Remove the screw while pulling the inside lever toward you and then remove the inside handle. 5. Remove the screw at the pull case.
8H7
9. Disconnect the locking links and remove the door lock assembly fixing screws to remove the door lock assembly.
655R100002
652RW002
6. Pull out the trim panel at the 8 clip positions. Disconnect the power window switch connector.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Apply chassis grease to the lock assembly and striker moving surface. 2. Install the regulator handle as shown in the illustration, if equipped without power windows.
655R100003
7. Remove the bracket. 8. Peel the upper half of the waterproof sheet. Taking notice of the door harness, peel the waterproof sheet off the door panel carefully.
631RW005
3. Tighten the door lock assembly fixing screws to the specified torque. Torque 7 Nm (61 Ib in) 4. Check that the door lock operates smoothly.
8H8
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Rear Outside Handle

Rear Outside Handle and Associated Parts
655R100004
Legend (1) Outside Handle (2) Door Lock Assembly (3) Bracket (4) Rear Corner Garnish EndOFCallout
(5) Door Trim Panel (6) Power Window Switch and Pull Case/Window Regulator Handle (7) Inside Handle (8) Waterproof Sheet
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. Refer to Rear Door Lock Assembly in this section. 3. Peel the upper half of the waterproof sheet. Taking notice of the door harness, peel the waterproof sheet off the door panel carefully. 4. Disconnect the locking link and remove fixing bolts to remove the outside handle.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Check that the outside handle operates smoothly. 2. Tighten the outside handle fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque 9 Nm (78 Ib in)
SECURITY AND LOCKS
8H9
Tailgate Lock and Hatchgate Lock (LWB)

Tailgate Lock, Hatchgate Lock and Associated Parts
681RW005
Legend (1) Hatchgate Lock Assembly (2) Tailgate Assembly (3) Tailgate Lock Relay Lever (4) Waterproof sheet EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Trim Cover Assembly Key Cylinder Tailgate Lock Assembly Ouside Handle Hatchgate Lock Actuator Assembly
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the tailgate trim cover assembly (3). Remove the 2 screws (2) holding the hatchgate lock assembly (1) first, and pull up the trim cover while detaching the clips from tailgate panel.
683RW001
8H10
SECURITY AND LOCKS
3. Remove the waterproof sheet. Remove the waterproof sheet, taking special care so as not to break it. 4. Remove the hatchgate lock. Disconnect the lock link and connector and remove the 3 fixing bolts. 5. Remove the key cylinder. Disconnect the lock links. Remove the key cylinder retaining clip with screw driver to remove the key cylinder.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. When setting up links, pay attention to the position and direction of the links.
683RW003
683RW002
Legend (1) Tailgate Lock Link (2) Outside Handle (3) Key Cylinder Link (4) Cancel Mechanism EndOFCallout 2. Apply chassis grease to the lock assembly and striker moving surface. 3. Check that the tailgate lock operates correctly after installing it. 4. Tighten the tailgate lock assembly fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque 7 Nm (61 Ib in) 5. Tighten the hatchgate lock assembly fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque 9 Nm (78 Ib in)
6. Remove the hatchgate lock actuator assembly. Disconnect the actuator harness connector. Remove the 2 bolts holding hatchgate lock actuator assembly from inside. 7. Remove the outside handle. Remove the 2 bolts holding the outside handle from inside. 8. Remove the tailgate lock assembly. Remove the 3 screws holding the lock assembly.
SECURITY AND LOCKS
8H11
Tailgate Lock (SWB)

Tailgate Lock and Associated Parts
681RY00001
Legend (1) Tailgate Assembly (2) Waterproof sheet (3) Trim Cover Assembly EndOFCallout
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Key Cylinder Tailgate Lock Assembly Outside Handle Hatchgate Lock Actuator Assembly
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the tailgate glass assembly and tailgate glass stay. Refer to Tailgate Glass (SWB) in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the tailgate trim cover assembly. Remove the two screws fixing the trim cover assembly and pull up the trim cover after detaching the clips from tailgate panel. 4. Remove the waterproof sheet. Remove the waterproof sheet, taking special care so as not to break it. 5. Remove the key cylinder. Disconnect the lock links. Remove the key cylinder retaining clip with screw driver to remove the key cylinder.
6. Remove the hatchgate lock actuator assembly. Disconnect the actuator harness connector. Remove the two nuts holding hatchgate lock actuator assembly from inside. 7. Remove the outside handle. Disconnect the lock link. Remove the two bolts holding the outside handle from inside. 8. Remove the tailgate lock assembly. Remove the three screws holding the lock assembly.
8H12
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points: 1. Apply chassis grease to the lock assembly and striker moving surface. 2. Tighten the tailgate lock assembly fixing screws to the specified torque. Torque 7Nm (61 lb in) 3. Check that the tailgate lock operates correctly after installing it.
SECURITY AND LOCKS
8H13
Key
Key Coding
730RX001
Legend (1) Key (Actual size) (2) Key Code Tag EndOFCallout One key is used for the ignition, door, and tailgate lock cylinders. The keys are cut on both edges to make them reversible. Key identification is obtained from the five character key code stamped on the key code tag. From this key code, the key code cutting combination can be determined from a code list (available to owners of key cutting equipment from suppliers). If key codes are not available from records or tags, the key code can be obtained from the right hand door lock cylinder (if lock has not been replaced). Lock cylinders supplied by the factory as service parts are unmarked. If the original key is available, the key code cutting combination can be determined by laying the key on the diagram shown in the figure.
(3) Position (4) Level
Key Styles
730RX002
Legend (1) Blank Key Style A" (2) Blank Key Style B" EndOFCallout The keys come in styles A or B depending on the key code cutting combination. When the first position in the combination is a 1, 2 or 3, Style A is used. When the first position is a 4, Style B (factory pre-cut key) is used.
8H14
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Power Door Lock System

General Description
The circuit consists of the door lock (& power window) switch, door lock actuator for the front and rear door, tailgate lock actuator and the door lock key switch. The front door lock switchLH is always provided with the battery voltage. The key or the inside lock button on both driver's and front passenger's door can activate the lock mechanism of all the doors (including the tailgate). When the driver's door lock switch or the front passenger's door lock switch is turned on, current flows for about one second to the door lock actuator of each door connected in parallel with the front door lock (& power window) switchLH to activate the actuator to lock and unlock the doors.
Front Door Lock Actuator

Refer to the Front Door Lock Assembly removal and installation steps in this section.
Rear Door Lock Actuator

Refer to the Rear Door Lock Assembly removal and installation steps in this section.
Tailgate Lock Actuator

Refer to the Tailgate Lock Assembly removal and installation steps in this section.
Door Lock Key Switch

Refer to the Front Door Lock Assembly removal and installation steps in this section.
Anti-Theft System
General Description
The circuit consists of the starter switch, anti theft & keyless entry controller, antitheft horn, front door and tailgate key switch (detect and tamper) switch, door lock actuator for each door, engine hood switch, clutch start switch (M/T), ANTI THEFT indicator light and mode switch (A/T). The system operates as follows: After locking the starter switch and removing the starter key (this sets the alarm), if the door is unlocked in any way other than with the proper key, the headlights will start flashing, the horn sounds, and the starter circuit is disabled. (However, the engine hood and all the doors must be locked and closed.) Once the system has been placed in the warning or alarm condition, it can be released only when the starter switch is shifted from OFF" to ACC" by the starter key, or when the lock of the front door or the tailgate is released (to activate the detect switch) by the starter key. 3. Remove the antitheft & keyless entry controller (2). Disconnect the connector. Remove two fixing screws.
AntiTheft Controller
Removal
&
Keyless
Entry
Installation
826R200024
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the glove box fram the instrument panel assembly (1). Refer to the Instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section.
SECURITY AND LOCKS
8H15
AntiTheft Indicator
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel driver lower cover assembly (1). Refer to the Instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the antitheft indicator (2). To remove the indicator, push the lock from the back side of the instrument panel driver lower cover assembly.
AntiTheft Horn
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the antitheft horn (1). Disconnect the connector. Remove a fixing bolt.
828RW001
Installation
826RW008
Installation
8H16
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Engine Hood Switch

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the engine hood switch (1).
Antitheft & Keyless Entry Control Unit/Transmitter Replacement

Antitheft & Keyless Entry Control Unit Replacement
1. Remove and install the control unit. Refer to Antitheft & Keyless Entry Control Unit Removal and Installation in this section. 2. Register ID code. Refer to ID Code Registration in this section. 3. Check that the keyless entry system works normally.
Transmitter Replacement
1. Prepare a new transmitter. 2. Register ID code. Refer to ID Code Registration in this section. 3. Check that the keyless entry system works normally.
Transmitter Battery Replacement

1. Remove a screw to remove the cover. 2. Remove the batteries.
828RW002
3. Set the new batteries into the transmitter. 4. Install the cover to the transmitter. 5. Check that the keyless entry system works normally.
Installation
SECURITY AND LOCKS
8H17
Keyless Entry System

ID Code Registration
The following procedures are available to register keyless entry ID codes. There are four different ID codes which can be registered for each vehicle.
ID Code New Registration

This procedure erases all registered ID codes and registers a new ID code instead. Step 1 Action 1. Make sure that the all the doors are closed and unlocked. 2. Open the driver's side door. 3. Insert the starter key into the starter switch. Is the action complete? 2 Turn the starter switch to ACC position and return it to OFF position quickly three times. NOTE: This step must be carried out within five seconds after step 1 is finished. Is the action complete? 3 Close and open the drive's side door quickly two times. NOTE: This step must be carried out within ten seconds after step 2 is finished. Is the action complete? 4 1. Turn the starter switch to ACC position and return it to OFF position quickly five times. 2. Close and open the driver's side door quickly one time. NOTE: This step must be carried out within ten seconds after step 3 is finished. Is the action complete? 5 6 The control unit locks and unlocks the doors one time. Does the control unit work normally? Operate the lock or unlock button of the transmitter. NOTE: This step must be carried out within twenty seconds after step 5 is finished. Is the action complete? 7 8 The control unit locks and unlocks the doors one time. Does the control unit work normally? Operate the lock or unlock button of the transmitter. NOTE: This step must be carried out within twenty seconds after step 7 is finished. Is the action complete? 9 If registration succeeds, the control unit locks and unlocks the doors one time. If registration fails, the control unit locks and unlocks the doors three times. Go to Step 1 Go to Step 1 Yes No
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 1
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 1
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 1
8H18
SECURITY AND LOCKS
ID Code Additional Registration

This procedure additionally registers a new ID code with holding registered ID codes. If total number of registered ID codes and newly registered ID code exceed four, the oldest one is erased. Step 1 Action 1. Make sure that the all the doors are closed and unlocked. 2. Open the driver's side door. 3. Insert the starter key into the starter switch. Is the action complete? 2 Turn the starter switch to ACC position and return it to OFF position quickly three times. NOTE: This step must be carried out within five seconds after step 1 is finished. Is the action complete? 3 Close and open the driver's side door quickly two times. NOTE: This step must be carried out within ten seconds after step 2 is finished. Is the action complete? 4 1. Turn the starter switch to ACC position and return it to OFF position quickly three times. 2. Close and open the driver's side door quickly one time. NOTE: This step must be carried out within ten seconds after step 3 is finished. Is the action complete? 5 6 The control unit locks and unlocks the doors two times. Does the control unit work normally? Operate the lock or unlock button of the transmitter. NOTE: This step must be carried out within twenty seconds after step 5 is finished. Is the action complete? 7 8 The control unit locks and unlocks the doors one time. Does the control unit work normally? Operate the lock or unlock button of the transmitter. NOTE: This step must be carried out within twenty seconds after step 7 is finished. Is the action complete? 9 If registration succeeds, the control unit locks and unlocks the doors one time. If registration fails, the control unit locks and unlocks the doors three times. Go to Step 1 Go to Step 1 Yes No
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 1
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 1
Go to Step 9
Go to Step 1
SECURITY AND LOCKS ID Code Check

This procedure checks how many ID codes are registered. Step 1 Action 1. Make sure that the all the doors are closed and unlocked. 2. Open the driver's side door. 3. Insert the starter key into the starter switch. Is the action complete? 2 Turn the starter switch to ACC position and return it to OFF position quickly three times. NOTE: This step must be carried out within five seconds after step 1 is finished. Is the action complete? 3 Close and open the drive's side door quickly two times. NOTE: This step must be carried out within ten seconds after step 2 is finished. Is the action complete? 4 1. Turn the starter switch to ACC position and return it to OFF position quickly one time. 2. Close and open the drive's side door quickly one time. NOTE: This step must be carried out within ten seconds after step 3 is finished. Is the action complete? 5 The control unit locks and unlocks the doors twice as many registered ID codes. Go to Step 1 Yes No
8H19
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 1
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 1
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 1
Go to Step 1
8H20
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Answer Back (Anti-theft Horn Operation) Change Mode

The anti-theft horn sounds when the doors are locked or unlocked by the keyless entry transmitter operation when the answer back function is ON, and the horn does not sound when the function is OFF. Step 1 Action 1. Make sure that the all the doors are closed and unlocked. 2. Open the driver's side door. Is the action complete? 2 Lock and unlock the driver's side door quickly three times. NOTE: This step must be carried out within five seconds after step 1 is finished. Is the action complete? 3 Close and open the drive's side door quickly two times. NOTE: This step must be carried out within ten seconds after step 2 is finished. Is the action complete? 4 1. Lock and unlock the driver's side door quickly three times. 2. Close and open the driver's side door quickly one time. NOTE: This step must be carried out within ten seconds after step 3 is finished. Is the action complete? 5 If the procedure succeeds, the control unit locks and unlocks the doors one time. If the procedure fails, the control unit locks and unlocks the doors three times. Go to Step 1 Go to Step 1 Go to Step 2 Yes No
Go to Step 3
Go to Step 1
Go to Step 4
Go to Step 1
Go to Step 5
Go to Step 1
SECURITY AND LOCKS
8H21

635RY00001
SECTION
SUN ROOF/CONVERTIBLE TOP
RODEO
8I1

SUNROOF/CONVERTIBLE TOP
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof Glass (LWB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof Glass and Associated Parts . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof Glass (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof Glass and Associated Parts . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof Deflector (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof Deflector (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunshade (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof Frame Complete Assembly (LWB). . Sunroof Frame Complete Assembly and Associated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8I1 8I2 8I2 8I2 8I3 8I3 8I3 8I4 8I4 8I5 8I5 8I5 8I6 8I6 8I6 8I6 8I7 8I7 8I7 8I8 8I9 8I9 8I9 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Top Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Top Assembly and Associated Parts. . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resin Top Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resin Top Assembly and Associated Parts Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat Belt Cross Bar Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . Seat Belt Cross Bar Assembly and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 8I10 8I10 8I10 8I10 8I11 8I11 8I11 8I11 8I11 8I11 8I12 8I12 8I13 8I13 8I14 8I14 8I14 8I15 8I16 8I16 8I16 8I17 8I18
Service Precaution
8I2
Sunroof Glass (LWB)

Sunroof Glass and Associated Parts
665RW004
Legend (1) Sunroof Weatherstrip (2) Sunroof Glass EndOFCallout
Removal
1. Tilt the sunroof and open the sunshade. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Pull out the front of sight shield (2). 4. Remove four sunroof glass fixing Torx screws (3) to remove the sunroof glass (1).
665RW011
8I3
Installation
1. Be sure to install the sunroof weatherstrip so that the joint of the weatherstrip is on the rear side of the vehicle. 2. Temporary install the glass to the sunroof frame. 3. Open and shut the sunroof four to five times to position correctly the sunroof weatherstrip and the glass in the longitudinal and latitudinal setting positions.
4. Adjust the setting position to flush the surface between the roof panel and weatherstrip of sunroof glass. 5. Tighten the sunroof glass fixing screws to the specified torque. Torque: 4Nm (35lbin) 6. Inspect the sunroof alignment after installing the sunroof glass. Use the fixing screws to adjust the sunroof if not aligned.
Sunroof Glass (SWB)

Sunroof Glass and Associated Parts
665RW028
Legend (1) Sunroof Weather Strip EndOFCallout
(2) Sunroof Glass Assembly (3) Sunshade Assembly
8I4
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the sunshade assembly. Turn the knobs (1) 90 degrees and pull it out at an angle. Then pull the sunroof handle (2) to disengage the lock.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. When attaching the sunroof weather strip (1), make sure that the lip (2) securely overlaps the headlining (3). Assemble with the positioning marks centered toward the rear of the vehicle.
665R200006
3. Remove the sunroof glass assembly. Push the safety lever (2) behind the handle and push in on the hinge pins (1) on the left and right to disengage them. Raise the rear end of the sunroof glass assembly at an angle to pull it free.
666RW007
2. Tighten the sunroof handle plate fixing nuts to the specified torque. Torque: 8 Nm (69 Ib in)
665RW026
4. Remove the sunroof handle cover and sunroof handle plate. Remove the screw from the cover and the three fixing nuts form the plate. 5. Remove the weather strip.
8I5
Sunroof Deflector (LWB)

Removal
1. Open the sunroof. Let a 5 mm drill go through two blind rivets (2) to disengage riveted portions. 2. Remove the sunroof deflector (1).
Installation
665RW008
8I6
Sunroof Deflector (SWB)

Parts Location
665RY00002
Legend (1) Sunroof Deflector Assembly (Soft Top) EndOFCallout
(2) Front Sunroof Deflector Assembly (Resin Top) (3) Rear Sunroof Deflector Assembly (Resin Top)
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the sunroof glass. Refer to Sunroof Glass in this section. 3. Remove the headlining (Front roof side). Refer to Headlining in Exterior/Interior Trim section. 4. Remove the sunroof deflector. Remove the fixing screws.
Installation
8I7
Sunshade (LWB)
Disassembled View
665RW012
Legend (1) Sunroof Glass (2) Sight Shield EndOFCallout
(3) Sunshade Stopper (4) Sunshade
Removal
1. Tilt the sunroof. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the sunroof glass. Refer to Sunroof Glass in this section. 4. Pull the sight shield upward using screwdriver.
665RW006
8I8
5. Remove 2 sunshade stopper fixing screws and remove sunshade stopper (1).
665RW007
6. Pull out the sunshade (4) up to the guide rail edge. Lift the front of sunshade and clear the projection (3) of sunshade through the notch (2) of guide rail edge, then draw the sunshade out of the roof.
665RW009
Installation
8I9
Sunroof Frame Complete Assembly (LWB)

Sunroof Frame Complete Assembly and Associated Parts
665RW005
Legend (1) Sunroof Drain Hose EndOFCallout
(2) Sunroof Frame Complete Assembly (3) Headlining
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the headlining. Refer to Headlining in Exterior/Interior Trim section.
8I10

4. Disconnect the sunroof harness connection. 5. Remove two sunroof frame assembly fixing nuts (front side) and six fixing bolts from the frame complete assembly, and then remove the sunroof frame complete assembly. NOTE: Be sure to remove the frame assembly while supporting it.
3. Disconnect the sunroof drain hose at the sunroof frame side as shown in the figure.
Installation
1. Install the sunroof frame assembly. 2. After installing the frame assembly, loosen the sunroof glass fixing nuts and adjust the sunroof glass setting position. Refer to Sunroof Glass in this section. 3. Install the sunroof drain hose. 4. Install the headlining. Refer to Headlining in Exterior/Interior Trim section.
665RW010
Sunroof Switch
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the sunroof switch (3). Pull out the cover (2) at the three clpe positions (1) and push out the switch from the back side of the cover. Disconnect the switch connector (4).
Installation
825R200073
8I11
Sunroof Control Unit

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the headlining (2). Refer to Headlining in Exterior/Interior Trim section. 3. Remove the sunroof control unit (1). Disconnectors two connectors. Remove the control unit after making it slide in the direction of an arrow.
Installation
665RW013
Sunroof Motor
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the headlining (2). Refer to Headlining in Exterior/Interior Trim section. 3. Remove the sunroof motor (1). Disconnect the connector. Remove the three screws.
Installation
665R200007
8I12
Soft Top Assembly

Soft Top Assembly and Associated Parts
688RY00003
Legend (1) Tarpaulin Assembly (2) Quarter Window Assembly (3) Tarpaulin Frame Assembly EndOFCallout
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Soft Top Latch Assembly Quarter Moulding Assembly Support Bar Assembly Back Window Assembly
8I13
Removal
1. Remove the quarter window assembly (LH & RH). Peel off the velcro fasteners and unzip the zippers. 2. Remove the back window assembly (2). Peel off the velcro fasteners (3), unzip the zipper (1) and pull the back window assembly toward the rear together with the support bar assembly (4). Then slide the back window out to the side. NOTE: After removing the side windows and back window, be careful not to bend or place other objects on top of them as this could scratch or crack them. Exercise caution when handling and storing the windows.
4. Remove the tarpautin assembly. Disengage the 14 hocks. 5. Remove the tarpautin frame assembly. Remove the four fixing bolts.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point. 1. After securely covering the zippers (3) with the flaps (1), smooth out the fastener tape (2) with your hands so that there are no folds or turned up portions of the flaps.
682RW014
682RY00007
3. Press the lock botton (2) of the soft top latch assembly (1) and lower the lock knob to disengage the lock. Then remove the hooks of the tarpaulin frame assembly (LH & RH).
688RW005
8I14
Resin Top Assembly

Resin Top Assembly and Associated Parts
688RW006
Legend (1) Rear Sun Roof Assembly (2) Resin Top Assembly EndOFCallout
(3) High Mount Stoplight (4) Air Outlet Grille Assembly (5) Rear Quarter Glass
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear sun roof glass. Refer to Sun Roof Glass in this section. 3. Remove the sun roof deflector. Remove the four fixing screws. 4. Remove the rear roof bracket covers (4) and remove both sets of two bolts (3) on the resin top sides of the rear roof brackets (2).
666RW010

5. Remove the air outlet grille assembly (LH & RH). Remove the two screws and pull the grille assemblies off toward the rear. 6. Remove the luggage light assembly and disconnect the connector. 7. Remove the high mount stoplight assembly and disconnect the connector. 8. Disconnect the rear washer hose (Right side, inside air outlet grille assembly).
8I15
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Removing and mounting the resin top should always be performed by two persons. 2. Tighten the resin top fixing bolts and nuts to the specified torque. Torque: 15 Nm (11 Ib ft)
688RW007
9. Disconnect the harness connector for the resin top (Left side, behind the luggage side trim). Remove the canopy cover (1), the luggage side lid (2) and luggage side upper cover (3). Then pull out the harness and disconnect the connector.
686RX001
10. Remove the resin top assembly. Remove the two fixing bolts and nut from the left and right sides. Lift the resin top and remove.
8I16
Seat Belt Cross Bar Assembly

Seat Belt Cross Bar Assembly and Associated Parts
688RY00001
Legend (1) Seat Belt Cross Bar Assembly (2) Rear Seat Belt Assembly EndOFCallout
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the soft top assembly or resin top Assembly. Refer to Soft Top assembly or Resin Top Assembly in this section. 3. Remove the luggage side lid (2). 4. Remove the luggage side upper cover (3). 5. Remove the luggage side front cover (4). 6. Remove the canopy cover (1) (Resin top model). Remove the two fixing clips.
686RX001

7. Remove the left and right quarter side moldings (Soft top model). Remove the six bolts and six screws. 12. Remove the seat belt cross bar assembly.
8I17
Remove the two sets of seven fixing bolts on the left and right sides. Note that on the soft top model, two sets of the fixing bolts are also used to secure the tarpaulin frame assembly in place, and that on the resin top model, one set of the fixing bolts are also used to secure the resin top in place.
687RW002
8. Remove the weather strip. 9. Remove the rear end floor trim cover. Remove the five fixing screws. 10. Remove the right luggage side trim cover. Remove the jack & tool lid and the tools. Then remove the fixing screw and pull the clips out from the body panel.
688RW009
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Tighten the rear seat belt anchor bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39 Nm (29 Ib ft) 2. Tighten the seat belt cross bar assembly fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 19 Nm (14 Ib ft)
687RW005
To remove the left luggage side trim cover, disconnect the accessory socket connector. 11. Remove the rear seat belt assembly. Refer to Rear Seat Belt in Restraints section.
8I18

Application Sunroof Glass Fixing Screws (LWB) Sunroof Handle Plate Fixing Nuts (SWB) Resin Top Assembly Fixing Bolts and Nuts Rear Seat Belt Anchor Bolts Seat Belt Cross Bar Assembly Fixing Bolts Nm 4 8 15 39 19 lb ft 11 29 14 lb in 35 69
SECTION
EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM
RODEO
8J1

EXTERIOR / INTERIOR TRIM
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consoles and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Door Trim Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Door Trim Panel and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Door Trim Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Door Trim Panel and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Mirror Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Trim Panels (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Trim Panels and Associated Parts . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Trim Panels (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Trim Panels and Associated Parts . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlining (LWB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlining (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Arch Protector (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Arch Protector and Associated Parts 8J2 8J3 8J3 8J3 8J3 8J4 8J4 8J5 8J5 8J6 8J6 8J7 8J7 8J8 8J8 8J8 8J9 8J9 8J9 8J11 8J12 8J12 8J12 8J13 8J14 8J14 8J14 8J15 8J16 8J16 8J17 8J18 8J19 8J19 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Arch Protector (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Arch Protector and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Arch Molding (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Arch Molding and Associated Parts. Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Arch Molding (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Arch Molding and Associated Parts. Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Filler Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . License Plate Garnish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Door Mirror System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Mirror Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Window System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Window Switch Driver Seat Side . . . Power Window Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 8J19 8J19 8J20 8J20 8J20 8J20 8J21 8J21 8J21 8J22 8J23 8J23 8J23 8J24 8J24 8J24 8J24 8J24 8J25 8J25 8J25 8J25 8J26 8J26 8J26 8J27 8J27 8J27 8J27 8J28 8J28 8J28 8J29 8J30
8J2
Service Precaution
8J3
Consoles
Consoles and Associated Parts
745R200007
Legend (1) Front Console EndOFCallout
(2) Console Brackets (3) Rear Console Assembly
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the shift knob (M/T) / transfer knob (4 4). 3. Remove the rear console assembly. Open the rear console lid and remove two screws. Disconnect the switch connector. 4. Remove the front console assembly. Remove six fixing screws and disconnect the accessory socket connectors.
Installation
8J4
Front Door Trim Panel

Front Door Trim Panel and Associated Parts
635R100001
Legend (1) Glass Run (2) Glass (3) Window Regulator/Power Window Regulator (4) Outer Waste Seal (5) Outside Handle (6) Door Lock Cylinder (7) Door Lock Assembly/Door Lock Actuator (8) Waterproof Sheet (9) Door Trim Panel EndOFCallout
(10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18)
Courtesy Light Lens Speaker Grill Grip Cover Inside Handle Power Window Switch/Window Regulator Handle Speaker Assembly Tweeter Door Mirror Cover Door Mirror Assembly
8J5
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the door mirror assembly. Refer to Door Mirror Assembly in this section. 3. Remove the regulator handle (1). Pull the hook (2) out and remove the regulator handle.
CAUTION: Do not apply excessive force on the inside handle link or damage may occur, which could make the inside handle difficult to operate.
632RW003
8. Remove the door trim panel. Remove 5 fixing screws (1), (3) in order to take off 6 clips (2) from the door panel.
631RW004
4. Remove the power window switch (1). Pry the power window switch out and disconnect the switch connector.
635RW007
825RW097
5. Remove the speaker cover. 6. Remove the front speaker. Remove the front speaker fixing screws in order to disconnect the speaker connector. 7. Remove the inside handle fixing screw.
Disconnect the tweeter and courtesy light connectors to lift the door trim panel and unlock the engagement of the waist seal section. Then, pass the inside handle through the mounting hole of the trim panel, and detach the trim panel. 9. Remove the inside handle. 10. Remove the tweeter.
Installation
8J6
Rear Door Trim Panel

Rear Door Trim Panel and Associated Parts
655R100001
Legend (1) Glass Run (2) Glass (3) Fix Window Glass (4) Window Regulator/Power Window Regulator (5) Outside Handle (6) Door Lock Assembly (7) Speaker Bracket (8) Speaker EndOFCallout
Bracket Rear Door Corner Garnish Door Trim Panel Power Window Switch and Pull Case/Window Regulator Handle (13) Inside Handle (14) Waterproof Sheet (15) Outer Waste Seal
(9) (10) (11) (12)
8J7
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the regulator handle(1). Pull the hook(2) out and remove the regulator handle.
5. Remove the rear door corner garnish. Pull the garnish to disconnect the retaining clip. 6. Remove the door trim panel. Pull out the eight clip positions from the door panel.
655R100003 631RW002
3. Remove the one screw from the pullcase.
Disconnect the power window switch connector to lift the trim panel and unlock the engagement of the waist seal section, then pass the inside lever through the mounting hole of the trim panel, and detach the trim panel. 7. Remove the inside handle. 8. Remove the power window switch and pull case. Remove the fixing screws from back side of the rear door trim.
Installation
655R100002
4. Remove the inside handle fixing screw. CAUTION: Do not apply excessive force on the inside handle link or damage may occur, which could make the inside handle difficult to operate.
8J8
Door Mirror Assembly

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the door mirror cover (3). 3. Remove the door mirror assembly (1). Remove the three bolts and disconnect the connector (2).
Installation
635RX011
8J9
Interior Trim Panels (LWB)

Interior Trim Panels and Associated Parts
643RY00001
Legend (1) Assist Grip (Front & Rear) (2) Door Finisher (Front & Rear) (3) Upper Quarter Trim Cover (4) Rear Roof Trim Cover (5) Tailgate Weather Strip EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
Rear End Floor Trim Cover Lower Quarter Trim Cover Sill Plate (Front & Rear) Lower Center Pillar Trim Cover Upper Center Pillar Trim Cover Front Pillar Trim Cover
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the sill plates (Front & Rear). 3. Remove the dash side trim cover. 4. Remove the lower center pillar trim cover. Remove the lower anchor bolt cover and lower anchor bolt from the front seat belt. Pry the trim cover clips free from the body panel.
5. Remove the door finishers (Front & Rear). 6. Remove the upper center pillar trim cover. Pry the trim cover clips free from the body panel. 7. Remove the front pillar trim cover. Ply the trim cover clips free from the body panel. 8. Remove the tailgate weather strip. 9. Remove the rear end floor trim cover. Remove the five fixing screws.
8J10
14. Remove the lower quarter trim cover (1). Remove the tool box lid (3) and fixing screw (4). Pry the five clip positions (2) free from the body panel. Disconnect the accessory socket connector (LH side).
10. Remove the luggage room light. Remove the luggage room light lens (1) and the fixing screw. Disconnect the luggage room light connector.
825RW100
11. Remove the rear roof trim cover. Pry the trim cover clips free from the body panel. 12. Remove the tonneau cover assembly (1). 15. Remove the upper quarter trim cover (1). Pry the twelve clip positions (2) free from the body panel.
643R100001
643RY00002
13. Remove the lower anchor bolt cover (6) and the lower anchor bolt (5) from the rear seat belt.
643RY00004
16. Remove the front pillar assist grip (1) (Front & Rear). Open the both sides of the assist grip cover (2) and remove the fixing screws and the front pillar assist grip.
8J11
743RW003
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point: 1. Tighten the seat belt anchor bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29 lb ft)
8J12
Interior Trim Panels (SWB)

Interior Trim Panels and Associated Parts
643RW010
Legend (1) Assist Grip (Front & Rear) (2) Upper Quarter Trim Cover (3) Weather Strip (4) Rear Roof Trim Cover (5) Rear End Floor Trim Cover EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Luggage Side Trim Cover Lower Quarter Trim Cover Sill Plate Door Finisher Front Pillar Trim Cover
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the soft top assembly or resin top assembly. Refer to Soft Top Assembly or Resin Top Assembly in Sun Roof/Convertible Top section. 3. Remove the rear seat assembly. Refer to Rear Seat Assembly (SWB) in Seats section. 4. Remove the weather strip. 5. Remove the rear end floor trim cover. 6. Remove the luggage sid trim cover. Refer to Seat Belt Cross Bar Assembly in Sun Roof/Convertible Top section. 7. Remove the sill plate. 8. Remove the dash side trim cover.
9. Remove the rear speaker assembly. Disengage the front portion of the speaker grille (1) and pull it forward and off.
Remove the three fixing screws securing the speaker (2) in place and disconnect the connector (3). 14. Remove the dome light.
8J13
Remove the dome light lens (2) and the fixing screws. Disconnect the dome light connector.
890RW048-1
10. Remove the front and rear seat belt lower anchor bolts. 11. Remove the lower quarter trim cover. Disengage the clips from the body panel by twisting them free. 12. Remove the assist grips (1) (Front & Rear). Open the both sides of the assist grip cover (2) and remove the fixing screws.
805RX001
15. Remove the rear roof bracket (Resin top model) or the soft top latch (Soft top model). 16. Remove the rear roof trim cover. 17. Remove the upper quarter trim cover. 18. Remove the front pillar trim cover.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point. 1. Tighten the front and rear seat belt anchor bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29 lb ft)
743RW003
13. Remove the door finisher.
8J14
Headlining (LWB)
Parts Location
666RY00002
Legend (1) Interior Trim Panels (2) Clip (3) Headlining (Without Sunroof) (4) Assist Grip (5) Dome Light EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Headlinng (With Sun Roof) Sunroof Finisher (With Sunroof) Sunroof Switch (With Sunroof) Sunvisors Sunvisor Holder
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the interior trim panels. Refer to Interior Trim Panels (LWB) in this section. 3. Remove the dome light. Remove the dome light lens and the fixing screws. Disconnect the dome light connectors.
4. Remove the sunroof switch (With sunroof). Pry the clip positions free from the sunroof switch bracket and disconnect the connector.
8J15
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Install the headlining so that the fixing clips will not come off. 2. To install the sunroof finisher (1), first fit it in at one place with the headlining (3) close to the sunroof frame (2), then install the entire finisher tightly by hitting it with a plastic hammer, not allowing it to move up.
665RW002
5. Remove the sunvisors. Remove the fixing screws and pull out the sunvisor holder (1) to remove it. Disconnect the vanity connector. (if so equipped) mirror illumination
665RW003
743RS006
6. Remove the sunroof finisher (With sunroof). 7. Remove the headlining. Remove the headlining fixing clips.
8J16
Headlining (SWB)
Parts Location
This illustration is based on the Soft top model.
666RY00001
Legend (1) Interior Trim Panels (2) Soft Top Latch (3) Rear Roof Trim Cover (4) Assist Grip EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Dome Light Sunroof Finisher Sunvisors Headlining
8J17
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the soft top latch (Soft top model). Remove two bolts.
3. Remove the dome light lens. 4. Remove the dome light. Remove the fixing screws. Disconnect the dome light connector. 5. Remove the rear roof trim cover.
665RW023
Remove the rear roof bracket cover (4), rear roof bracket (2) connecting with resin top (1) and rear roof trim cover (3) by removing four fixing bolts (Resin top model).
666RW004
6. Remove the interior trim panels. Refer to Interior Trim Panels (SWB) in Exterior/ Interior Trim section. 7. Remove the sunroof glass assembly. Refer to Sunroof Glass in Sunroof/Convertible Top section. 8. Remove the sun roof handle cover and sunroof handle plate. Remove the screw from the cover and the three fixing nuts from the plate. 9. Remove the sunvisor. Remove the sunvisor fixing screws and the sunvisor holder. 10. Remove the sunroof finisher. 11. Remove the headlining.
666RW006
8J18
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point. 1. In case of installing sunroof finisher (1), fit the lip (2) to the headlining surely.
666RW007
8J19
Wheel Arch Protector (LWB)

Wheel Arch Protector and Associated Parts
620RW019
Legend (1) Wheel Arch Protector (2) Rear Door Panel (3) Rear Door Wheel Arch Seal (4) Wheel Arch Cover EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Body Panel Double Sided Adhesive Tape Clip Screw Grommet Clip
Removal
1. Remove the wheel arch cover. Remove the four fixing screws. 2. Remove the wheel arch protector. Remove the two fixing screws from the back side of the rear door panel and pull out the clips at three positions. 3. Remove the rear door wheel arch seal. After disengaging five clips, peel off the double sided adhesive tape.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point. 1. Use a new double sided adhesive tape whenever installing the rear door wheel arch seal. Use rubbing alcohol to clean the area where the double sided adhesive is to be attached.
8J20
Wheel Arch Protector (SWB)

Wheel Arch Protector and Associated Parts
620RW018
Legend (1) Wheel Arch Protector (2) Spire Nut (3) Quarter Outer Panel EndOFCallout
(4) Screw Grommet (5) Screw (6) Clip
Removal
1. Remove the wheel arch protecter. Remove the four fixing screws and pull out the clips at two positions.
Installation
8J21
Wheel Arch Molding (SWB)

Wheel Arch Molding and Associated Parts
620RY00006
Legend (1) Front Wheel Arch Molding EndOFCallout
(2) Front Mud Flap (3) Rear Wheel Arch Molding
Removal
1. Remove the front mud flap (2). Remove the four fixing screws (1). (Three of four screws are fixed together with molding.)
647RW002
8J22
3. Install the six fixing screws (6). (Three of six screws are fixed together with the front mud flap.)
2. Remove the front wheel arch molding. Remove the three fixing screws and pull out the clips at three positions from the fender panel. 3. Remove the rear wheel arch molding. Remove the seven fixing screws and pull out the clips at three positions from the outer quarter panel.
Installation
1. Install the rear wheel arch molding (2). Install the six nuts (1) and one screw grommet (4) to the body panel (5). Put the three clips of the rear wheel arch molding into the body panel in order of A, B and C. Install the seven fixing screws (3).
620RW015
4. Install the front mud flap.
620RW016
2. Install the front wheel arch molding (2). Install the six nuts (1) to the body panel (4). Put the four clips (3) of the front wheel arch molding into the body in order of A, B, C and D.
8J23
Wheel Arch Molding (LWB)

Wheel Arch Molding and Associated Parts
620RY00005
Legend (1) Front Wheel Arch Molding (2) Front Mud Flap EndOFCallout
(3) Rocker Wheel Arch Extension (4) Rear Wheel Arch Molding (5) Quarter Panel Wheel Arch Molding
Removal
1. Remove the front mud flap and front wheel arch molding. Refer to Wheel Arch Molding (SWB) in this section. 2. Remove the rocker wheel arch extension. Remove the fixing bolt (4) and screw (3). Pull out the extension with the two clips (1) from the rocker outer panel. 3. Remove the quarter panel wheel arch molding. Remove the three fixing screws (2) and pull out the molding with the three clips (1) from the quarter outer panel. 4. Remove the rear wheel arch molding. Remove the three fixing screws (5) of the back of the door panel and pull out the molding with the three clips (1) from the door outer panel.
620RY00003
8J24
Installation
Fuel Filler Door

Parts Location Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Install the fuel filler door to match the basic hole. 2. Adjust the clearance between outer quarter panel (1) and fuel filler door (2).
686RX003
686RW010
Legend (1) Fuel Filler Door Fixing Screw (2) Basic Hole (3) Fuel Filler Door Buffer (4) Fuel Filler Door (5) Fuel Filler Door Hinge Buffer EndOFCallout
Removal
1. Open the fuel filler door. 2. Remove the fuel filler door. Remove the two fixing screws. 3. Pull out the fuel filler door buffer. 4. Pull out the fuel filler hinge buffer.
8J25
Roof Rail
Parts Location
660R100001
Legend (1) Roof Rail Fixing Bolt (2) Rear Roof Rail Cover EndOFCallout
(3) Roof Rail Sub Assembly (4) Front Roof Rail Cover
Removal
1. Remove the front and rear roof rail cover. Pry the roof rail covers. 2. Remove the roof rail sub assembly. Remove the four fixing bolts at each roof rail.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Tighten the roof rail sub assembly fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque 8Nm (69 lb in)
8J26
License Plate Garnish

Parts Location
803RY00004
Legend (1) Tailgate Trim Cover Assembly (2) Tailgate Assembly (3) Clip EndOFCallout
(4) License Plate Garnish Assembly (5) License Plate Light Assembly (6) License Plate Light Harness Connector
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the license plate light. Remove the left and right license plate light fixing screws. Disconnect the harness connectors. 3. Remove the tailgate trim cover assembly (3). Remove the two screws (2) holding the hatchgate lock assembly (1) first and the two screws fixing the trim cover assembly. Pull up the trim cover while detaching the clips from tailgate panel.
683RW001
4. Remove the waterproof sheet (1). Carefully remove the waterproof sheet not to brake it. 5. Remove the license plate garnish asm. Remove the a screw on the upper side.
8J27
Remove the two fixed nuts from the inside of the tailgate and remove the three clips by pushing the tip of the clips with a screwdriver.
Installation
681R100001
Power Door Mirror System

General Description
The system consists of the starter switch, door mirror switch, rear defogger/mirror defogger switch and door mirrors on both sides. When the door mirror switch is operated with the starter switch at either ACC" or ON" position, the motor in the door mirror (on either side) rotates to allow the horizontal and vertical adjustment of mirror angles. When the rear defogger/mirror defogger switch is turned ON" with the starter switch ON", the heater of the left and right mirrors and the tailgate glass are activated.
Door Mirror Switch

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel lower cover (2). Refer to the instrument panel assembly in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the door mirror switch (1).
825RW094
Rear Defogger/Mirror Defogger Switch

Refer to the Rear Defogger/Mirror switch removal and installation steps in Lighting System section.
Door Mirrors
Refer to Door Mirror Assembly in this section.
8J28
Power Window System

General Description
The power window system consists of power window switches and power window motors on driver and passenger sides and power window relay. With the starter switch in ON" position, the battery voltage is supplied through power window relay to the power window switches on driver and passenger sides. Selection of up or down switch changes the motor rotating direction to open or close the window. When the power window LOCK" switch on the driver side is pressed, the power source for the other switches are disconnected causing the power window operation to seize.
Power Window Switch Driver Seat Side

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the switch (1). Pull out the switch by pushing the spring with the tip of a screwdriver. Disconnect the connector. Installation To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order.
825RW097
Rear-Left and Right Sides

Removal 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear door trim pad (2). Refer to the Rear Door Trim Pad removal steps in Exterior/Interior Trim section. Disconnect the rear power window switch (1) connector. 3. Remove the rear power window switch (1). Remove the switch fixing screw from the back side of the rear door trim (2).
825RW080
Installation To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order.
Front Passenger Seat Side

Removal 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the switch (1). Pull out the switch by pushing the spring with the tip of a screwdriver. Disconnect the connector.
825RW081
EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM Front Passenger Seat Side

8J29
Refer to the Front Window Motor Driver Seat side removal and installation steps in this section.
Rear-Left Side
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear window regulator assembly (2). Refer to the Rear Window Regulator and Glass removal steps in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the power window motor (1). Remove three screws.
825RW079
Power Window Motor

Driver Seat Side
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the window regulator assembly (2). Refer to the Window Regulator and Glass removal steps in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the power window motor (1). Remove three screws.
825RW095
Rear-Right Side
Removal and Installation Refer to the Rear Power Window Motor Left Side removal and installation steps in this section.
825RW096
8J30

Application Front & Rear Seat Belt Anchor Bolts Roof Rail Fixing Bolts Nm 39 8 lb ft 29 lb in 69
SECTION
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
RODEO
9A1
RESTRAINTS
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Service Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Seat Belt (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Seat Belt and Associated Parts. . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Seat Belt (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Seat Belt and Associated Parts. . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat Belt (LWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat Belt and Associated Parts . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat Belt (SWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat Belt and Associated Parts . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A1 9A2 9A2 9A2 9A3 9A3 9A4 9A4 9A4 9A6 9A6 9A7 9A7 9A7 9A8 9A9 9A10 9A10 9A10 9A12 9A12 Front Seat Buckle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Center Seat Belt / Buckle Assembly . . . Rear Center Seat Belt / Buckle Assembly and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child Seat Tether Anchorage Bracket (Child Restraint) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child Seat Tether Anchorage Bracket and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child Seat Lower Anchorage Striker (LWB) . Child Seat Lower Anchorage Striker and Associated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A13 9A13 9A13 9A14 9A14 9A14 9A14 9A15 9A15 9A15 9A15 9A16 9A16 9A16 9A17 9A18
Service Precaution
9A2
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
Front Seat Belt (LWB)

Front Seat Belt and Associated Parts
760R100045
Legend (1) Door Seal Finisher (Front & Rear) (2) Adjustable Shoulder Anchor Assembly (3) Seat Belt Upper Anchor Bolt (4) Upper Center Pillar Trim Cover (5) Front Seat Belt Assembly EndOFCallout
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
Anchor Cover Seat Belt Lower Anchor Bolt Lower Center Pillar Trim Cover Retractor Rear Sill Plate Front Sill Plate
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the sill plate (Front & Rear). 3. Remove the anchor cover and seat belt lower anchor bolt. 4. Remove the lower center pillar trim cover. 5. Remove the door seal finisher (Front & Rear). 6. Remove the upper center pillar trim cover. 7. Remove the seat belt upper anchor bolt. 8. Remove the retractor fixing bolt. 9. Remove the seat belt assembly. 10. Remove the adjustable shoulder anchor assembly. Remove the two fixing bolts.
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
9A3
Inspection
If any of the following abnormalities is found, replace on an assembly basis. Deformed and malfunctioning adjustable shoulder anchor (1). Uneven movement of upper/lower anchors (2) in the circumferential direction. Damaged and/or deformed through ring (3). Damaged and/or deformed tongue (4). Damaged and/or frayed webbing (5). Deformed retractor bracket (6). Seat belt does not retract (7). Resistance or abnormal sound when seat belt is pulled out or retracted (7). Retractor (7) abnormality.
Inspection of retractor
1. ELR (Emergency Locking Retractor) lock inclining angle check. The seat belt should not lock when pulled gently at a 15 degree angle. Also, the seat belt should lock when pulled at a 45 degree angle or higher. 2. ELR lock check. The seat belt should not lock when pulled slowly, however, the seat belt should lock when pulled quickly. 3. ALR (Automatic Locking Retractor)/ELR check (Except for driver's seat). Make sure the seat belt is locked when pulled out fully. Make sure the seat belt can be pulled out and retracts after when rewound fully. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the retractor.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. CAUTION: When replacing the front seat belt, always replace the seat belt with the same parts/part number. 1. Tighten the adjustable shoulder anchor assembly fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29 lb ft) 2. Tighten the seat belt anchor bolts (Upper & Lower) and the retractor fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29 lb ft)
760R100032
9A4
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
Front Seat Belt (SWB)

Front Seat Belt and Associated Parts
760R200021
Legend (1) Adjustable Shoulder Anchor Assembly (2) Seat Belt Upper Anchor Bolt (3) Upper Quarter Trim Cover (4) Assist Grip (5) Rear Roof Trim Cover (6) Lower Quarter Trim Cover EndOFCallout
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Front Seat Belt Assembly Anchor Cover Seat Belt Lower Anchor Belt Retractor Sill Plate Door Seal Finisher
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear seat assembly. Refer to Rear Seat Assembly in Seats section. 3. Remove the soft top assembly or resin top assembly. Refer to Soft Top Assembly or Resin Top Assembly in Sunroof/Convertible Top section. 4. Remove the luggage side trim cover. Refer to Rear Seat Belt (SWB) in this section. 5. Remove the sill plate. 6. Remove the anchor covers and seat belt lower anchor bolts (Front & Rear).
SEAT BELT SYSTEM

7. Remove the rear speaker (2). Remove the speaker grille (1) and remove the speaker fixing screws. Disconnect the connector (3).
9A5
11. Remove the rear roof bracket (2) (Resin top model). Remove the rear roof bracket cover (4) and remove rear roof bracket connecting with resin top (1) and rear roof trim cover (3) by removing four fixing bolts.
890RW048-1
8. Remove the lower quarter trim cover. Pry the trim cover retainers free from the body panel. 9. Remove the dome light. Remove the dome light lens and the fixing screws. Disconnect the dome light connector. 10. Remove the soft top latch (Soft top model). Remove two bolts. 12. Remove the rear roof trim cover. 13. Remove the assist grip. 14. Remove the door seal finisher. 15. Remove the upper quarter trim cover. 16. Remove the seat belt upper anchor bolt. 17. Remove the retractor fixing bolt. 18. Remove the seat belt assembly.
666RW006
19. Remove the adjustable shoulder anchor assembly. Remove two bolts.
665RW023
9A6
SEAT BELT SYSTEM Inspection of retractor

Inspection
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. CAUTION: When replacing the front seat belt, always replace the seat belt with the same parts/part number. 1. Tighten the adjustable shoulder anchor assembly and retractor fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29 lb ft) 2. Tighten the seat belt anchor bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29 lb ft)
760R100032
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
9A7
Rear Seat Belt (LWB)

Rear Seat Belt and Associated Parts
760R100049
Legend (1) Adjustable Shoulder Anchor Assembly (2) Seat Belt Upper Anchor Bolt (3) Slider Plate Trim Assembly (4) Upper Quarter Trim Cover (5) Rear Roof Trim Cover (6) Tailgate Weather Strip (7) Rear End Floor Trim Cover EndOFCallout
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Lower Quarter Trim Cover Seat Belt Lower Anchor Bolt Anchor Cover Rear Seat Belt Assembly Screw Retractor Rear Sill Plate Rear Door Seal Finisher
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the tailgate weather strip. 3. Remove the rear end floor trim cover.
9A8
SEAT BELT SYSTEM

10. Remove the seat belt upper anchor bolt. 11. Remove the retractor. 12. Remove the rear seat belt assembly. 13. Remove the adjustable shoulder anchor assembly. Remove the two fixing bolts.
4. Remove the luggage room light. Remove the luggage room light lens (1) and the fixing screw. Disconnect the luggage room light connector.
Inspection
825RW100
5. Remove the rear roof trim cover. Pry the trim cover clips free from the body panel. 6. Remove the rear sill plate. 7. Remove the anchor cover and the lower anchor bolt. 8. Remove the upper and lower quarter trim cover. Refer to Interior Trim Panel (LWB) in Exterior/ Interior Trim section. 9. Remove the slider plate trim assembly (2). Remove the two fixing screws from the adjustable shoulder anchor (1). Pull out the seat belt through the hole (3) on the slider plate trim.
760R200022
755RW069
SEAT BELT SYSTEM Inspection of retractor

9A9
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point. 1. Tighten the adjustable shoulder anchor assembly fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29 lb ft) 2. Tighten the seat belt anchor bolts (Upper & Lower) and the retractor fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29 lb ft)
9A10
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
Rear Seat Belt (SWB)

Rear Seat Belt and Associated Parts
760R200023
Legend (1) Seat Belt Cross Bar Assembly (2) Seat Belt Upper Anchor Bolt (3) Shoulder Anchor Cover (4) Rear Seat Belt Assembly EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Retractor Anchor Cover Seat Belt Lower Anchor Bolt Lower Quarter Trim Cover
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the luggage side lid (2). 3. Remove the luggage side front cover (4). 4. Remove the luggage side upper cover (3).
SEAT BELT SYSTEM

5. Remove the canopy cover (1) (Resin top model). Remove two fixing clips. 8. Remove the luggage side trim cover (RH).
9A11
Remove the jack & tool lid and remove the tool. Remove fixing screw and pry the trim cover retainers free from the body panel.
686RX001
Remove the three bolts and three screws, and then remove quarter side molding (Soft top model).
687RW005
9. Remove the luggage side trim cover (LH). Remove fixing screw and pry the trim cover retainers free from the body panel. Disconnect the accessory socket connectors. 10. Remove the anchor cover and seat belt lower anchor bolt. 11. Remove the shoulder anchor cover (2). Release the hooked portion of cover from the shoulder anchor (1).
687RW002
6. Remove the tailgate weather strip. 7. Remove the rear end floor trim cover.
755RW070
12. Remove the seat belt upper anchor bolt. 13. Remove the retractor. 14. Remove the rear seat belt assembly.
9A12
SEAT BELT SYSTEM

3. ALR (Automatic Locking Retractor)/ELR check (Except for driver's seat). Make sure the seat belt is locked when pulled out fully. Make sure the seat belt can be pulled out and retracts after when rewound fully. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the retractor.
Inspection
If any of the following abnormalities is found, replace on an assembly basis. Uneven movement of upper/lower anchors (1) in the circumferential direction. Damaged and/or deformed through ring (2). Damaged and/or deformed tongue (4). Damaged and/or frayed webbing (3). Deformed retractor bracket (5). Seat belt does not retract (6). Resistance or abnormal sound when seat belt is pulled out or retracted (6). Retractor (6) abnormality.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Align the projection of the retractor to the square hole of the seat belt cross bar assembly bracket. 2. Tighten the retractor fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29 lb ft) 3. Tighten the seat belt anchor bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29 lb ft)
755R100004
Inspection of retractor
1. ELR (Emergency Locking Retractor) lock inclining angle check. The seat belt should not lock when pulled gently at a 15 degree angle. Also, the seat belt should lock when pulled at a 45 degree angle or higher. 2. ELR lock check. The seat belt should not lock when pulled slowly, however, the seat belt should lock when pulled quickly.
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
9A13
Front Seat Buckle Assembly

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the seat belt warning connector (driver's side) and remove a clip. 3. Remove the front seat buckle assembly (1).
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point. 1. Tighten the buckle anchor bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 29Nm (22 lb ft)
760RY00016
9A14
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
Rear Center Seat Belt / Buckle Assembly

Rear Center Seat Belt / Buckle Assembly and Associated Parts
755RX029
Legend (1) SWB (2) Rear Seat Lock Assembly (3) Rear Seat Belt Buckle Assembly EndOFCallout
(4) Seat Lock Cover (5) LWB (6) Rear Cushion Frame Assembly
Removal
1. Remove the seat lock cover (SWB). 2. Remove the rear cushion frame assembly (LWB). Refer to Rear Seat Assembly in Seats section. 3. Remove the rear seat lock assembly and rear seat belt buckle assembly.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following point. 1. Tighten the rear seat lock assembly and rear seat belt buckle assembly fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 39Nm (29 lb ft) NOTE: Removal and installation procedure of rear center seat belt assembly same as rear seat belt buckle assembly procedures.
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
9A15
Child Seat Tether Anchorage Bracket (Child Restraint)

Child Seat Tether Anchorage Bracket and Associated Parts
760R100033
Legend (1) Rear Seat (LWB) (2) Rear Seat (SWB) (3) Luggage Floor Carpet EndOFCallout
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Tether Anchorage Bracket Cover Child Seat Tether Anchorage Bracket Luggage Floor Panel Insulation
Removal
1. Open the tether anchorage bracket cover. 2. Remove the fixing bolt and child seat tether anchorage bracket.
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Install the bracket such that its tether belt hook hole is facing toward the front of the vehicle. 2. Tighten the fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 19Nm (14 lb ft)
9A16
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
Child Seat Lower Anchorage Striker (LWB)

Child Seat Lower Anchorage Striker and Associated Parts
755R100007
Legend (1) Rear Seat Back Assembly (2) Release Knob (3) Headrest (4) Front Luggage Floor Carpet EndOFCallout
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Lower Anchorage Striker (LH) Lower Anchorage Striker (RH) Body Floor Panel Rear Seat Cushion Assembly
Removal
1. Raise the seat cushion assembly (2). Pull the strap (1) of the rear seat lock assembly to release the seat lock.
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
9A17
755R100006
2. Remove the headrests. 3. Pull the release knobs and fall down the seat back assembly forward. 4. Remove the front luggage floor carpets. Pull the nine carpet fixing clips at each from the backside of the seat back assembly. 5. Remove the four lower anchorage strikers. Remove the two fixing bolts of each lower anchorage striker.
755R100008
Installation
To install, follow the removal steps in the reverse order, noting the following points. 1. Install the lower anchorage strikers with matching the inside of the tab and the trim edge of the body floor panel.
2. Tighten the lower anchorage striker fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 25Nm (18 lb ft)
9A18
SEAT BELT SYSTEM

760R200024
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
9A19
760R200025
9A20
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
760R100035
SECTION
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
RODEO
9J1
RESTRAINTS
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS Component and Wiring Location View Component Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS Connector Body Face Views . . . . . . . . . Repairs and Inspections Required After an Accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OnVehicle Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Bag Assembly Handling / Shipping / Scrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) . . . . Service Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driver Air Bag Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9J1 9J2 9J4 9J4 9J7 9J8 9J9 9J9 9J10 9J11 9J26 9J28 9J30 9J30 9J30 9J31 9J32 9J32 9J32 9J32 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS Coil Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Disconnect the horn terminal . . . . . How to Connect Horn Terminal . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passenger Air Bag Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS Air Bag System Inspection Standards For Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9J33 9J33 9J33 9J34 9J35 9J35 9J35 9J37 9J37 9J38 9J40 9J40 9J40 9J42 9J44 9J44 9J44 9J44 9J45 9J46
Service Precaution
9J2
General Description
CAUTION: When fasteners are removed, always reinstall them at the same location from which they were removed. If a fastener needs to be replaced, use the correct part number fastener for that application. If the correct part number fastener is not available, a fastener of equal size and strength (or stronger) may be used. fasteners that are not reused, and those requiring thread locking compound will be called out. The correct torque value must be used when installing fasteners that require it. If the above conditions are not followed, parts or system damage could result.
Restraint Devices
827RX050
827RS035
Legend (1) Deployed Air Bag (2) Knee Bolster (3) Seat Belt The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) helps supplement the protection offered by the driver and front passenger seat belts by deploying an air bag from the center of the steering wheel and from the top of the right side of the instrument panel. The air bag deploys when the vehicle is involved in a frontal crash of sufficient force up to 30 degrees off the centerline of the vehicle. To further absorb the crash energy there is a knee bolster located beneath the instrument panel for both the driver and passenger, and the steering column is collapsible.
9J3
System Description
The SRS consists of the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM), the driver air bag assembly, the SRS coil assembly, the passenger air bag assembly, and the AIR BAG warning lamp in the instrument cluster. The SDM, SRS coil assembly (driver side only), driver air bag assembly, passenger air bag assembly and connector wire make up the deployment loops. The function of the deployment loops is to supply current through air bag assembly, which will cause deployment of the air bags in the event of a frontal crash of sufficient force, up to 30
degrees off the centerline of the vehicle. The air bag assemblies are only supplied enough current to deploy when the SDM detects vehicle velocity changes severe enough to warrant deployment. The SDM contains a sensing device which converts vehicle velocity change to an electrical signal. The electrical signal generated is processed by the SDM and then compared to a value stored in memory. When the generated signal exceeds the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the air bag assembly deploying the air bags.
D09R100002
9J4
SRS Component and Wiring Location View
Component Description
SDM (Sensing and Diagnostic Module)
WARNING: DURING SERVICE PROCEDURES, BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN HANDLING A SDM. NEVER STRIKE OR JAR THE SDM. NEVER POWER UP THE SRS WHEN THE SDM IS NOT RIGIDLY ATTACHED TO THE VEHICLE. ALL SDM AND MOUNTING BRACKET FASTENERS MUST BE CAREFULLY TORQUED AND THE ARROW MUST BE POINTED TOWARD THE FRONT OF THE VEHICLE TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OF THE SRS. THE SDM COULD BE ACTIVATED WHEN POWERED WHILE NOT RIGIDLY ATTACHED TO THE VEHICLE WHICH COULD CAUSE DEPLOYMENT AND RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. The SDM is designed to perform the following functions in the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS): 1. Energy Reserve The SDM maintains 24Volt Loop Reserve (24VLR) energy supply to provide deployment energy when ignition voltage is lost in a frontal crash. 2. Frontal Crash Detection The SDM monitors vehicle velocity changes to detect frontal crashes which are severe enough to warrant deployment. 3. Air Bag Deployment When a frontal crash of sufficient force is detected, the SDM will cause enough current to flow through the air bag assembly to deploy the air bag. 4. Malfunction Detection The SDM performs diagnostic monitoring of SRS electrical components and sets a diagnostic trouble code when a malfunction is detected. 5. Frontal Crash Recording The SDM records information regarding SRS status during frontal crash. 6. Malfunction Diagnosis The SDM displays SRS diagnostic trouble codes and system status information through the use of a scan tool. 7. Driver Notification The SDM warns the vehicle driver of SRS malfunctions by controlling the Air Bag warning lamp.
810RW003
Legend (1) Battery (2) Relay & Fuse Box (3) Passenger Air Bag Assembly (4) SDM (5) Meter Assembly (6) SRS Coil Assembly (7) Driver Air Bag Assembly (8) Starter Switch (9) Fuse Box, SRS, METER

The SDM is connected to the SRS wiring harness by a 24pin connector. This harness connector uses a shorting clip across certain terminals in the contact area. This shorting clip connects the AIR BAG warning lamp to ground when the SDM harness connector is disconnected or Connector Position Assurance (CPA) is not inserted even if completely connected. This will cause the AIR BAG warning lamp to come ON steady whenever the ignition switch is at the ON or START positions with the SDM disconnected.
9J5
821RY00008
SRS Coil Assembly

The SRS coil assembly consists of two current carrying coils. This is attached to the steering column and allow rotation of the steering wheel while maintaining continuous contact of the driver deployment loop to the driver air bag assembly. There is a shorting clip on the yellow 2pin connector near the base of steering column which connects the SRS coil to the SRS wiring harness. The shorting clip shorts to the SRS coil and driver air bag assembly when the yellow 2pin connector is disconnected. The circuit to the driver air bag assembly is shorted in this way to help prevent unwanted deployment of the air bag when servicing the steering column or other SRS components. Refer to the STEERING in this the manual 2A section.
827RW067
Legend (1) Connector Position Assurance (CPA) (2) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Harness (3) Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
Air Bag Warning Lamp

Ignition voltage is applied to the AIR BAG warning lamp when the ignition switch is at the ON or START positions. The SDM controls the lamp by providing ground with a lamp driver. The AIR BAG warning lamp is used in the SRS to do the following: 1. Verify lamp and SDM operation by flashing SEVEN (7) times when the ignition switch is first turned ON. 2. Warn the vehicle driver of SRS electrical system malfunctions which could potentially affect the operation of the SRS. These malfunctions could result in nondeployment in case of a frontal crash or deployment for conditions less severe than intended. The AIR BAG warning lamp is the key to driver notification of SRS malfunctions. For proper lamp operation, refer to the SRS Diagnostic System Check in this section.
825RS071
9J6
Air Bag Assemblies

The air bag assembly consist of an inflatable air bag assembly and an inflator (a canister of gasgenerating material and an initiating device). When the vehicle is in a frontal crash of sufficient force. The SDM causes current flow through the deployment loops. Current passing through the inflator ignites the material in the air bag assembly. The gas produced from this reaction rapidly inflates the air bag assembly. There is a shorting clip on the driver air bag assembly connector which connects the SRS coil assembly. The shorting clip shorts across the driver air bag assembly circuits when driver air bag assembly connector is disconnected. The circuit to the driver air bag assembly is shorted in this way to help prevent unwanted deployment of the air bag when servicing the driver air bag assembly, the steering column or other Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components.
827RX005
Steering Column
The steering column absorbs energy and is designed to compress in a frontal crash to decrease the chance of injury to the driver. Refer to the STEERING in this the manual 2A Section.
827RX001
There is a shorting clip on the passenger air bag assembly connector which connects to the SRS harness. The shorting clip shorts across the passenger air bag assembly circuit when the passenger air bag assembly connector is disconnected. The circuit to the passenger air bag assembly is shorted in this way to help prevent unwanted deployment of the air bag when servicing the passenger air bag assembly, the instrument panel or other SRS components.
431RX014
9J7
Knee Bolster
The knee bolsters are used to absorb energy to protec knees and control the forward movement of the vehicles front seat occupants during a frontal crash, by limiting leg movement.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Formerly Code, a numerical designator used by the SDM to indicate specific SRS malfunctions. Driver Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the driver air bag assembly circuit during the Initiator Assembly Resistance Test. Driver Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the steering wheel hub consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Memory which retains its contents when power is removed from the SDM. Ignition Cycle The voltage at the SDM Ignition 1 inputs, with ignition switch ON, is within the normal operating voltage range for at least ten seconds before turning ignition switch OFF. Ignition 1 A battery voltage (B+) circuit which is only powered with the ignition switch in the ON, or START positions.
740RS021
Definition
Air Bag An inflatable cloth cushion designed to deploy in certain frontal crashes. It supplements the protection offered by the seat belts by distributing the impact load more evenly over the vehicle occupants head and torso. (B+) Battery voltage, (B+) The voltage available at the battery at the time of the indicated measurement. With the key ON and the engine not running, the system voltage will likely be between 12 and 12.5 volts. At idle the voltage may be 14 to 16 volts. The voltage could be as low as 10 volts during engine cranking. Bulb Check The Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will cause the AIR BAG warning lamp to flash seven times and then go OFF whenever the ignition switch transitions to the ON position from any other ignition switch position and no malfunctions are detected. CONTINUOUS MONITORING Tests performed by the SDM on the SRS every 100 milliseconds while Ignition 1 voltage is in the normal operating voltage range at the SDM. Data Link Connector (DLC) Formerly DLC a connector which allows communication with an external computer, such as a scan tool. Deploy To inflate the air bag. Deployment Loops The circuits which supply current to the air bag assemblies to deploy the air bag.
Initiator The electrical component inside the air bag assembly which, when sufficient current flows, sets off the chemical reaction that inflates the air bag. Initiator Assembly Resistance Test Tests performed once each ignition cycle when no malfunctions are detected during TurnON or Continuous Monitoring. This test checks for the correct SDM configuration for the vehicle, shorts to Ignition 1 in the deployment loops, high resistance or opens in the Driver Side High, Driver Side Low, Passenger Side High and Passenger Side Low circuits and measures the resistance of the inflator assembly consisting of: 1) Initiators, 2) SRS coil assembly (driver side only), 3) Connectors and associated wiring. Normal Operating Voltage Range The voltage measured between the SDM Ignition 1 terminals and Ground terminals is between 9 and 16 volts. Passenger Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the passenger air bag assembly circuit during the Initiator Assembly Resistance Test. Passenger Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the left side of the instrument panel consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. Scan Tool An external computer used to read diagnostic information from onboard computers via the data link connector. SDM Sensing and Diagnostic Module which provides reserve energy to the deployment loops, deploys the air bags when required and performs diagnostic monitoring of all SRS components.
9J8
Serial Data Information representing the status of the SRS. SRS Supplemental Restraint System. SRS Coil Assembly An assembly of two currentcarrying coils in the driver deployment loop that allows the rotation of the steering wheel while maintaining the continuous contact of the driver deployment loop to the driver air bag assembly. SRS Wiring Harness The wires and connectors that electrically connect the components in the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). TurnON Test which the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) performs on the SRS once during each ignition cycle immediately after Ignition 1 voltage is applied to the SDM and before Continuous Monitoring.
Use of Special Tools

WARNING: TO AVOID DEPLOYMENT WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING THE SRS, DO NOT USE ELECTRICAL TEST EQUIPMENT SUCH AS A BATTERYPOWERED OR ACPOWERED VOLTMETER, OHMMETER, ETC, OR ANY TYPE OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN THAT SPECIFIED IN THIS MANUAL. DO NOT USE A NON POWERED PROVETYPE TESTER. INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL MUST BE FOLLOWED CAREFULLY, OTHERWISE PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT. YOU SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE TOOLS LISTED IN THIS SECTION UNDER THE HANDLING SRS SPECIAL TOOLS. You should be able to measure voltage and resistance. You should be familiar with proper use of a scan tool such as the Tech 2 Diagnostic Computer, SRS Driver/Passenger Load Tool J41433, Connector Test Adapter Kit J35616A, and the DVM (Digital Multimeter) J39200.
Diagnosis
WARNING: TO AVOID DEPLOYMENT WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING THE SRS, DO NOT USE ELECTRICAL TEST EQUIPMENT SUCH AS A BATTERYPOWERED OR ACPOWERED VOLTMETER, OHMMETER, ETC., OR ANY TYPE OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN THAT SPECIFIED IN THIS MANUAL. DO NOT USE A NONPOWERED PROVETYPE TESTER. INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL MUST BE FOLLOWED CAREFULLY, OTHERWISE PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT.
Diagnostic Trouble Codes

The SRS Diagnostic System Check must always be the starting point of any SRS diagnosis. The SRS Diagnostic System Check checks for proper AIR BAG warning lamp operation and checks for SRS diagnostic trouble codes using the scan tool. 1. Current diagnostic trouble codes Malfunctions that are presently being detected. Current diagnostic trouble codes are stored in Random Access Memory (RAM). 2. History diagnostic trouble codes All malfunctions detected since the last time the history memory was cleared. History diagnostic trouble codes are stored in Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM).
Scan Tool Diagnostics

A scan tool is used to read current and history diagnostic trouble codes and to clear all diagnostic trouble codes after a repair is completed. The scan tool must be updated to communicate with the SRS through a replaceable cartridge before it can be used for SRS diagnostics. To use the scan tool, connect it to the data link connector and turn the ignition switch ON. The scan tool reads serial data from the SDM Serial Data line terminal 24 to the data link connector terminal 9.
9J9
SRS Connector Body Face Views
D09RW003
Legend (1) Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) (2) Driver Air Bag Assembly (3) Passenger Air Bag Assembly
(4) Air Bag Warning Lamp (5) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Coil Assembly (6) Data Link Connector (DLC)
Repairs and Inspections Required After an Accident

NOTE: If any SRS components are damaged, they must be replaced. If SRS component mounting points are damaged, they must be replaced. D Never use SRS parts from another vehicle. This does not include remanufactured parts purchased from an authorized dealer; they may be used for SRS repairs. D Do not attempt to service the SDM, the SRS coil assembly, or the air bag assembly. Service of these items is by replacement only. D Verify the part number of replacement air bag assembly. CAUTION: Never use the air bag assembly from another vehicle. Use only the air bag assembly for UE models. CAUTION: Proper operation of the sensors and Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires that any repairs to the vehicle structure return it to the original production configuration. Deployment
requires, at a minimum, replacement of the SDM, air bag assembly and dimensional inspection of the steering column. Any visible damage to the SDM mounting bracket (s) requires replacement, and the steering column must be dimensionally inspected, whether deployment occurred or not.
Accident With Deployment Component Replacement and Inspections

Certain SRS components must be replaced or inspected for damage after a frontal crash involving air bag deployment. Those components are: D Air bag assembly D SDM CAUTION: Refer to SDM Replacement Guidelines below for important information on Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) replacement in both deployment and non deployment crashes.
9J10

The SDM in DriverPassenger SRS can maintain sufficient voltage to cause a deployment for up to 15 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF, the battery is disconnected, or the fuse powering the SDM is removed. Many of the service procedures require removal of the SRS fuse, and disconnection of the air bag assembly from the deployment loop to avoid an accidental deployment. If the air bag assembly is disconnected from the deployment loop as noted in the Disabling the SRS procedure that follows, service can begin immediately without waiting for the 15 second time period to expire.
D Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) coil assemblyInspect wiring and connector for any signs of scorching, melting, or damage due to excessive heat. Replace if damaged. Refer to SRS coil assembly in this section.
Accident With or Without DeploymentComponent Inspection

Certain SRS and restraint system components must be inspected after any crash, whether the air bag deployed or not. Those components are: D Steering columnDimensionally inspect per Checking Steering Column for Accident Damage in 2A section of this workshop manual. D Knee bolsters and mounting points Inspect for any distortion, bending, cracking, or other damage. D Instrument panel steering column reinforcement plate Inspect for any distortion, bending, cracking, or other damage. D Instrument panel bracesInspect for any distortion, bending, cracking, or other damage. D Seat belts and mounting pointsRefer to Seat Belts in 9 section of this workshop manual.
Disabling The SRS Removal

Turn the ignition switch to lock and remove key. 1. Remove SRS fuse METER and SRS, from left dash side lower fuse block or disconnect battery. 2. Disconnect yellow 2pin connector at the base of steering column. 3. Remove glove box assembly, Refer to Passenger Air Bag Assembly Replacement in section. 4. Disconnect yellow 2pin connector behind the glove box assembly. CAUTION: With the SRS fuse removed and ignition switch ON, AIR BAG warning lamp will be ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SRS malfunction.
SDM Replacement Guidelines

SDM replacement policy requires replacement of SDM, after crash involving air bag deployment when SRS Warning Lamp turn ON, SRS Diagnosis should be done according to 9J1 section.
Wiring Damage
If any SRS wire harness is damaged, it should be replaced. Dont repair SRS.
Enabling The SRS Installation

CAUTION: Never use the air bag assembly from another vehicle. Use only the air bag assembly. Turn ignition switch to LOCK and remove key. 1. Connect yellow 2pin connector passenger air bag assembly. 2. Install glove box assembly, refer to Passenger Air Bag Assembly Replacement in section. 3. Connect yellow 2pin connector at the base of steering column. 4. Install AIR BAG fuse METER and SRS to left dash side lower fuse block or connect battery. Turn ignition switch to ON and verify that the AIR BAG warning lamp flashes seven times and then turns OFF If it does not operate as described, perform the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Diagnostic System Check in section.
SRS Connector (Plastic Body And Terminal Metal Pin) Damage

If any connector or terminal in the SRS wire harness (except pigtails) is damaged, it should be replaced.
SRS Wire Pigtail Damage

If the wiring pigtail (a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector) is damaged, the entire component (with pigtail) must be replaced. Examples of pigtail components are the driver air bag assembly, the passenger air bag assembly, and the SRS coil assembly.
OnVehicle Service
Service Precautions
WARNING: WHEN PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR AROUND SRS COMPONENTS OR SRS WIRING, FOLLOW THE PROCEDURES LISTED BELOW TO TEMPORARILY DISABLE THE SRS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES COULD RESULT IN POSSIBLE AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, PERSONAL INJURY OR OTHERWISE UNNEEDED SRS REPAIRS.
Handling / Installation / Diagnosis

1. Air bag assembly should not be subjected to temperatures above 93C (200C). 2. Air bag assembly, and Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) should not be used if they have been dropped from a height of 100 centimeters (3.28 feet).

3. When a SDM is replaced, it must be oriented with the arrow on the sensor pointing toward the front of the vehicle. It is very important for the SDM to be located flat on the mounting surface, parallel to the vehicle datum line. It is important that the SDM mounting surface is free of any dirt or other foreign material. 4. Do not apply power to the SRS unless all components are connected or a diagnostic chart requests it, as this will set a diagnostic trouble code. 5. The SRS Diagnostic System Check must be the starting point of any SRS diagnostics. The SRS Diagnostic System Check will verify proper AIR BAG warning lamp operation and will lead you to the correct chart to diagnose any SRS malfunctions. Bypassing these procedures may result in extended diagnostic time, incorrect diagnosis, and incorrect parts replacement.
9J11
Air Bag Assembly Handling / Shipping / Scrapping

Live (Undeployed) Air Bag Assembly
Special care is necessary when handling and storing a live (undeployed) air bag assembly. The rapid gas generation produced during deployment of the air bag could cause the air bag assembly, or an object in front of the air bag assembly, to be thrown through the air in the unlikely event of an accidental deployment.
827RS044
Air Bag Assembly Shipping Procedure For Live (Undeployed) Air Bag Assemblies
Service personnel should refer to the latest Service Bulletins for proper Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) air bag assembly shipping procedures.
Deployed Air Bag Assembly

You should wear gloves and glasses. After the air bag assembly has been deployed, the surface of the air bag may contain solid particulate. This solid particulate consists primarily of by products of the chemical reaction, Potassium Chloride and copper metal dust. Compounds of Potassium Borate, Strontium Chloride, Copper Chloride, and Ammounium Chloride may be found in amounts of about 1% (each) of the total particulate.
827RW009
Air Bag Assembly Scrapping Procedure

During the course of a vehicles useful life, certain situations may arise which will necessitate the disposal of a live (undeployed) air bag assembly. This information covers proper procedures for disposing of a live air bag assembly. Before a live air bag assembly can be disposed of, it must be deployed. Alive air bag assembly must not be disposed of through normal refuse channels.
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY, MAKE SURE THE BAG OPENING IS POINTED AWAY FROM YOU. IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. NEVER CARRY THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY BY THE WIRES OR CONNECTOR ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE MODULE.
9J12

13. Install a car cover on vehicles with damaged or broken glass, a sudden airbag deployment may scatter broken glass, which may cause injury. 14. Do not handle the airbag after deployment for the next 30 minutes, it may still be too hot to touch. 15. Do not spray water on the airbag, immediately after deployment. 16. Always wear safety goggles and gloves when handling the airbag and wash immediately after use. 17. Do not reuse the removed air bag for another vehicle. (Deployment characteristic is different with vehicle types).
WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER SRS AIR BAG ASSEMBLY DISPOSAL PROCEDURES CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT WHICH MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. AN UNDPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY MUST NOT BE DISPOSED OF THROUGH NORMAL REFUSE CHANNELS. THE UNDEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY CONTAINS SUBSTANCES THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE ILLNESS OR PERSONAL INJURY IF THE SEALED CONTAINER IS DAMAGED DURING DISPOSAL. DISPOSAL IN ANY MANNER INCONSISTENT WITH PROPER PROCEDURES MAY BE A VIOLATION OF FEDERAL, STATE, AND / OR LOCAL LAW. In situations which require deployment of a live air bag assembly module, deployment may be accomplished inside or outside the vehicle. The method employed depends upon the final disposition of the particular vehicle, as noted in Deployment Outside Vehicle and Deployment Inside Vehicle in this section.
Deployment Outside Vehicle (Driver Air Bag Assembly)

Deployment of a live (undeployed) airbag assembly for disposal should not take place in the vehicle. This includes vehicles that needs replacement airbag assembly. Disposal of a malfunctioning air bag assembly is subjected to a retention period. Proper service procedures must be followed when performing live (undeployed) airbag deployment in the shop floor or open area live (undeployed) airbag deployment. Safety glasses and gloves must always be worn during live (undeployed) airbag deployment until the deployed airbag assembly has been properly disposed of or an undeployed airbag assembly is shipped. Before performing the procedures you should be familiar with servicing the SRS and with proper handling of the air bag assembly. Procedures should be read fully before they are performed. The following procedure requires use of J42986 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Harness with the appropriate pigtail adapter. The procedure also requires the use of J41497 Driver Side SRS Deployment Fixture. Do not attempt this procedure without J42986 and fixture J41497.
Cautions About Air Bag Deployment And Disposal

Failure to follow proper procedures could result in erroneous air bag deployment which may cause personal injury be sure to follow proper procedures. 1. Turn the ignition switch off (Lock) and disconnect the ground (minus) terminal of the battery, and wait 15 seconds prior to performing air bag removal procedures. 2. Do not disassemble the air bag. 3. Avoid sudden impacts on or near the airbag assembly, and avoid placing magnets in close proximity from the airbag assembly (The airbag may deploy unexpectedly). 4. Place the air bag with its trim cover up. 5. Do not let the air bag deploy directly on the floor. (The air bag may be blown off 20 30 cm (6.5 or 10 feet)). 6. Be sure to install the air bag firmly to a deployment tool (fixing tool). 7. Set a battery 10 m (33 feet) or more away from the air bag. 8. Before disconnecting air bag harness, ground the worker by touching the vehicle outer panel with bare hand. 9. Do not place the airbag assembly in front of you when connecting or disconnecting the harness. 10. Avoid loud outbursts as it may trigger the airbag to deploy. 11. As deployment generates smoke, select a well ventilated place. (In case of deployment indoors, avoid deployment just under a fire alarm, smoke sensor, and fluorescent lamps). 12. Be careful not to inhale the smoke after deployment.
901RX046
9J13
901RX062
827RS003
WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES IN THE ORDER LISTED MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NEVER CONNECT DEPLOYMENT HARNESS TO ANY POWER SOURCE BEFORE CONNECTING DEPLOYMENT HARNESS TO THE DRIVER AIR BAG ASSEMBLY. DEPLOYMENT HARNESS SHALL REMAIN SHORTED AND NOT BE CONNECTED TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL THE AIR BAG IS TO BE DEPLOYED. THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL IMMEDIATELY DEPLOY THE AIR BAG WHEN A POWER SOURCE IS CONNECTED TO IT. WEAR SAFETY GLASSES THROUGHOUT THIS ENTIRE DEPLOYMENT AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURE. NOTE: This information applies only to driver air bag assembly . Refer to Deployment Outside Vehicle (Passenger Air Bag Assembly) in this section for information on passenger air bag assembly scrapping. 1. Turn ignition switch to LOCK, remove key and put on safety glasses. 2. Inspect J41434 SRS Deployment Harness and appropriate pigtail adapter for damage. If harness or pigtail adapter is damaged, discard and obtain a replacement. 3. Short the two SRS deployment harness leads together by fully seating one banana plug into the other. SRS deployment harness shall remain shorted and not be connected to a power source until the air bag is to be deployed.
4. Connect the appropriate pigtail adapter to the SRS deployment harness.
827RS004
5. Remove the driver air bag assembly from vehicle. Refer to driver air bag assembly Removal in this Section. WARNING: WHEN STORING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY OR WHEN LEAVING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY UNATTENDED ON A BENCH OR OTHER SURFACE, ALWAYS FACE THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER UP AND AWAY FROM THE SURFACE. THIS IS NECESSARY SO THAT A FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR BAG TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
9J14
6. Clear a space on the ground about 183 cm (6 feet) in clearance where the driver air bag assembly is to be deployed. A paved, outdoor location where there is no activity is preferred. If an outdoor location is not available, a space on the shop floor where there is no activity and sufficient ventilation is recommended. Ensure no loose or flammable objects are within the deployment area.
827RX039
7. Place the J41497 on the bench vice. This is necessary to provide sufficient stabilization of the fixture during deployment. 8. Attach the driver airbag assembly in the J41497. Airbag assembly must be mounted facing upward on J41497. SECURELY HAND-TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PRIOR TO DEPLOYMENT. 9. The double pole extension cord must be atleast 10m (33 feet) away from the airbag assembly. 10. Place a power source near the shorted end of the SRS deployment harness. Recommended application: 12 volts minimum, 2 amps minimum. A vehicle battery is suggested.
827RX042
11. Connect the driver air bag assembly to the pigtail adapter on the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) deployment harness. Deployment harness shall remain shorted and not be connected to a power source until the air bag is to be deployed. The driver air bag assembly will immediately deploy the air bag when a power source is connected to it. NOTE: Ensure that the pigtail adapter is firmly seated into the driver air bag assembly connector. Failure to fully seat the connectors may leave the shorting bar located in the driver air bag assembly connector functioning (shorted) and may result in non deployment of the driver air bag assembly. 12. Verify that the area around the driver air bag assembly is clear of all people and loose or flammable objects. 13. Verify that the driver air bag assembly is firmly and properly in J41434. 14. Notify all people in the immediate area that you intend to deploy the driver air bag. The deployment will be accompanied by a substantial noise which may startle the uninformed. 15. Separate the two banana plugs on the SRS deployment harness. NOTE: When the air bag deploys, the rapid gas expansion will create a substantial noise. Notify all people in the immediate area that you intend to deploy the driver air bag.

WARNING: DEPLOYMENT HARNESS SHALL REMAIN SHORTED AND NOT BE CONNECTED TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL THE AIR BAG IS TO BE DEPLOYED. THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL IMMEDIATELY DEPLOY THE AIR BAG WHEN A POWER SOURCE IS CONNECTED TO IT. CONNECTING THE DEPLOYMENT HARNESS TO THE POWER SOURCE SHOULD ALWAYS BE THE LAST STEP IN THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES IN THE ORDER LISTED MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 16. Connect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) deployment harness wires to the power source to immediately deploy the driver air bag. Recommended application: 12 volts minimum, 2 amps minimum. A vehicle battery is suggested. 17. Disconnect the SRS deployment harness from the power source. 18. Short the two SRS deployment harness leads together by fully seating one banana plug into the other. 19. In the unlikely event that the driver air bag assembly did not deploy after following these procedures, proceed immediately with Steps 24 through 26. If the driver air bag assembly did deploy, proceed with Steps 20 through 23. 20. Put on a pair of shop gloves and safety glasses to protect your hands and eyes from possible irritation and heat when handling the deployed driver air bag assembly. After the air bag assembly has been deployed, the surface of the air bag may contain solid particulate. This solid particulate consists primarily of by products of the chemical reaction, Potassium Chloride and copper metal dust. Compounds of Potassium Borate, Strontium Chloride, Copper Chloride, and Ammonium Chloride may be found in amounts of about 1% (each) of the total particulate. WARNING: SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED WHEN HANDING A DEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY. AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE METAL SURFACES OF THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL BE VERY HOT. ALLOW THE INFLATOR MODULE TO COOL BEFORE HANDLING ANY METAL PORTION OF IT. DO NOT PLACE THE DEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY NEAR ANY FLAMMABLE OBJECTS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN FIRE OR PERSONAL INJURY. AFTER A DRIVER AIR BAG ASSEMBLY HAS BEEN DEPLOYED, THE METAL CANISTER AND SURROUNDING AREAS OF THE DRIVER AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL BE VERY HOT. DO NOT TOUCH THE METAL AREAS OF THE DRIVER AIR BAG ASSEMBLY FOR ABOUT TEN MINUTES AFTER DEPLOYMENT. IF THE DEPLOYED DRIVER AIR BAG ASSEMBLY MUST BE MOVED BEFORE IT IS COOL, WEAR GLOVES AND HANDLE BY THE AIR BAG OR TRIM COVER.
9J15
21. Disconnect the pigtail adapter from the driver airbag assembly immediately after deployment. This will prevent damage to the pigtail adapter or SRS deployment harness due to possible contact with the hot driver air bag assembly canister. The pigtail adapter can be reused. They should, however, be inspected for damage after each deployment and replaced if necessary. 22. Dispose of the deployed driver air bag assembly through normal refuse channels after it has cooled for at least 30 minutes. 23. Wash your hands with mild soap and water afterward. NOTE: The remaining steps are to be followed in the unlikely event that the driver air bag assembly did not deploy after following these procedures. 24. Ensure that the SRS deployment harness has been disconnected from the power source and that its two banana plugs have been shorted together by fully seating one banana plug into the other.
827RW055
25. Disconnect the pigtail adapter from the driver air bag assembly. WARNING: WHEN STORING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY OR WHEN LEAVING A LIVE INFLATOR MODULE UNATTENDED ON A BENCH OR OTHER SURFACE, ALWAYS FACE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER UP AND AWAY FROM THE SURFACE. THIS IS NECESSARY SO THAT A FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR BAG TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 26. Temporarily store the driver air bag assembly with its trim cover facing up.
9J16
Deployment Outside Vehicle (Passenger Air Bag Assembly)

WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER SRS AIR BAG ASSEMBLY DISPOSAL PROCEDURES CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT WHICH MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. UNDEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLIES MUST NOT BE DISPOSED OF THROUGH NORMAL REFUSE CHANNELS. THE UNDEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY CONTAINS SUBSTANCES THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE ILLNESS OR PERSONAL INJURY IF THE SEALED CONTAINER IS DAMAGED DURING DISPOSAL. DISPOSAL IN ANY MANNER INCONSISTENT WITH PROPER PROCEDURES MAY BE A VIOLATION OF FEDERAL, STATE AND/OR LOCAL LAWS. Deployment of a live (undeployed) airbag assembly for disposal should not take place in the vehicle. This includes vehicles that needs replacement airbag assembly. Disposal of a malfunctioning air bag assembly is subject to a retention period. Proper service procedures must be followed when performing live (undeployed) airbag deployment in the shop floor or open area live (undeployed) airbag deployment. Safety glasses and gloves must always be worn during live (undeployed) airbag deployment until the deployed airbag assembly has been properly disposed. Before performing the procedures, you should be familiar with servicing the SRS system and with proper handling of the air bag assembly. Procedures should be read fully before they are performed. The following procedure requires use of J42986 SRS Deployment Harness with the appropriate pigtail adapter. The procedure also requires the use of J41497 Passenger Side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Fixture. Do not attempt this procedure without J42986 and fixture J41497.
901RW088
WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES IN THE ORDER LISTED MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NEVER CONNECT DEPLOYMENT HARNESS TO ANY POWER SOURCE BEFORE CONNECTING DEPLOYMENT HARNESS TO THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY. DEPLOYMENT HARNESS SHALL REMAIN SHORTED AND NOT BE CONNECTED TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL THE AIR BAG IS TO BE DEPLOYED. THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL IMMEDIATELY DEPLOY THE AIR BAG WHEN A POWER SOURCE IS CONNECTED TO IT. WEAR SAFETY GLASSES THROUGHOUT THIS ENTIRE DEPLOYMENT AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURE. NOTE: This information applies only to passenger air bag assembly. Information for disposing of a live driver air bag assembly can be found in Deployment Outside Vehicle (Driver Air Bag Assembly) in this section. 1. Turn ignition switch to LOCK remove key, and put on safety glasses. 2. Inspect J41434 SRS Deployment Harness and appropriate pigtail adapter for damage. If harness or pigtail is damaged, discard and obtain a replacement. 3. Short the two SRS Deployment Harness leads together by fully seating one banana plug into the other. The SRS Deployment Harness shall remain shorted and not be connected to a power source until the air bag is to be deployed.
901RX046
9J17
8. Attach the passenger air bag assembly in the J41497. Air bag assembly must be mounted such that the bag will deploy upward. SECURELY HANDTIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PRIOR TO DEPLOYMENT. 9. The double pole extension cord must be atleast 10m (33 feet) away from the airbag assembly. 10. Place a power source near the shorted end of the SRS deployment harness. (Recommended application: 12 volts minimum, 2 amps minimum. A vehicle battery is suggested.)
827RS003
4. Connect the appropriate pigtail adapter to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Harness
827RX043 827RS004
5. Remove passenger air bag assembly from vehicle. Refer to Passenger Air Bag Assembly Removal in this Section. 6. Deploy a live (undeployed) airbag assembly in an open shop area allowing a radius of atleast 183 cm (6 feet) attached to the J41497 on the bench vise. Also make sure there is sufficient ventilation and no loose or flammable objects are within the area of deployment. 7. Attach the J41497 securely on the bench vise to prevent injury during airbag deployment.
11. Connect the air bag assembly to the pigtail adapter on the SRS deployment harness. The SRS Deployment Harness shall remain shorted and not be connected to a power source until the air bag is to be deployed. The air bag assembly will immediately deploy the air bag when a power source is connected to it. NOTE: Ensure that the pigtail adapter is firmly seated into the air bag assembly connector. Failure to fully seat the connectors may leave the shorting bar located in the air bag assembly connector functioning (shorting the deployment circuit) and may result in non deployment of the air bag assembly. 12. Keep the area clear of people and loose or flammable objects when deploying the passenger airbag to prevent injury. 13. Verify that the passenger air bag assembly is firmly and properly in J41497.
9J18

IN FIRE OR PERSONAL INJURY. AFTER AN AIR BAG ASSEMBLY HAS BEEN DEPLOYED, THE METAL CANISTER AND SURROUNDING AREAS OF THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL BE HOT. DO NOT TOUCH THE METAL AREAS OF THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY FOR ABOUT THIRTY MINUTES AFTER DEPLOYMENT. IF THE DEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY MUST BE MOVED BEFORE IT IS COOL, WEAR GLOVES AND HANDLE BY THE AIR BAG. 21. Disconnect the pigtail adapter from the airbag assembly immediately after deployment to avoid damage to the pigtail adapter or SRS deployment harness from contacting the hot airbag assembly cannister. The pigtail adapter and SRS deployment harness are designed to be reused. They should, however, be inspected for damage after each deployment and replaced if necessary. 22. Dispose of the deployed air bag assembly through normal refuse channels after it has cooled for at least 30 minutes. 23. Wash your hands with mild soap and water afterward. NOTE: The remaining steps are to be followed in the unlikely event that the air bag assembly did not deploy after following the above procedures. 24. Ensure that the SRS deployment harness has been disconnected from the the power source and that its two banana plugs have been shorted together by fully seating one banana plug into the other.
14. Notify all people in the immediate area of your intention to deploy the passenger air bag assembly. The deployment will be accompanied by a substantial noise which may startle the uninformed. 15. Separate the two banana plugs on the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) deployment harness. NOTE: When air bag deploys, the rapid gas expansion will create a substantial noise. Notify all people in the immediate area that you intend to deploy the air bag assembly. WARNING: DEPLOYMENT HARNESS SHALL REMAIN SHORTED AND DISCONNECTED FROM A POWER SOURCE UNTIL THE AIR BAG IS TO BE DEPLOYED. THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL IMMEDIATELY DEPLOY THE AIR BAG WHEN A POWER SOURCE IS CONNECTED TO IT. CONNECTING THE DEPLOYMENT HARNESS TO THE POWER SOURCE SHOULD ALWAYS BE THE LAST STEP IN THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES IN THE ORDER LISTED MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 16. Connect the SRS deployment harness wires to the power source to immediately deploy the air bag assembly. Recommended application : 12 volts minimum, 2 amps minimum. A vehicle battery is suggested. 17. Disconnect the SRS deployment harness from the power source. 18. Short the two SRS deployment harness leads together by fully seating one banana plug into the other. 19. In the unlikely event that the passenger air bag assembly did not deploy after following these procedures, proceed immediately with Steps 24 through 26. If the passenger air bag assembly deployed as intended, proceed with Steps 20 through 23. 20. Put on a pair of shop gloves and safety glasses to protect your hands and eyes from possible irritation and heat when handling the deployed air bag assembly. After the air bag assembly has been deployed, the surface of the air bag may contain a powdery residue. This powder consists primarily of cornstarch (used to lubricate the bag as it inflates) and by products of the chemical reaction. Sodium hydroxide dust (similar to lye soap) is produced as a by product of the deployment reaction. The sodium hydroxide quickly reacts with the atmospheric moisture and is converted to sodium carbonate and sodium bicarbonate (baking soda). Therefore, it is unlikely that sodium hydroxide will be present for very long after deployment. WARNING: SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED WHEN HANDLING A DEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY. AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE METAL SURFACES OF THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL BE HOT. ALLOW THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY TO COOL BEFORE HANDLING ANY METAL PORTION OF IT. DO NOT PLACE THE DEPLOYED INFLATOR MODULE NEAR ANY FLAMMABLE OBJECTS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES MAY RESULT
827RW055
25. Disconnect the pigtail adapter from the air bag assembly. WARNING: WHEN STORING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY OR WHEN LEAVING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY UNATTENDED ON A BENCH OR OTHER SURFACE, ALWAYS FACE THE BAG UP AND AWAY FROM THE SURFACE. THIS IS NECESSARY SO THAT A FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR BAG TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 26. Temporarily store the air bag assembly with the bag facing up.
9J19
Deployment Outside Vehicle (Fixing Air Bag on Tire)

Read and understand the items of CAUTIONS ABOUT AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURES and Usage of Deployment Tool for safe deployment of air bag. 1. Remove air bag assembly from vehicle. Refer to air bag assembly Removal in this section. 2. Inspect J41434 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Harness and appropriate pigtail adapter for damage. If harness or pigtail is damaged, discard and obtain a replacement. 3. The double pole extension cord must be atleast 10m (33 feet) away from the airbag assembly. 4. Place a power source near the extended end of SRS air bag deployment harness. (Use of 12V battery is recommended).
827RW055
6. Prepare four 15 inch or larger tires without wheel and two same size tires with wheels.
827RX040
Legend (A) 10 m (33 feet) or more

827RX041
5. Insert one of the banana plugs into the other banana plug to short the two SRS airbag deployment harness. Do not connect the harness to a power source until deployment.
7. How to fix Driver air bag. 1. Attach the airbag securely, facing up on a tire/wheel assembly. Use a wire size of atleast 1.3 mm (0.05 inch) and attach to atleast two or more points on the airbag assembly. 2. Connect SRS air bag assembly to the double pole extension cord of the air bag deployment harness. Do not connect the deployment harness to a power source until air bag deployment. (If connected the SRS air bag assembly deploys immediately)
9J20

8. How to fix Passenger air bag. 1. Follow the diagram below and position the airbag with its trim cover side facing the center of the tire. Attach the airbag assembly to atleast two or more points using a wire core size of atleast 1.3 mm (0.05 inch).
NOTE: Ensure that the pigtail adapter is firmly seated into the air bag assembly connector. Failure to fully seat the connectors may leave the shorting bar located in the air bag assembly connector functioning (shorting the deployment circuit) and may result in non deployment of the air bag assembly.
827RW054
827RW058
3. Follow the illustration below and place the wheel with the airbag on the bottom facing up, then three tires and a tire with a rim on top. Bind the five tires with a rope so that the tires may not collapse.
2. Connect Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) air bag assembly to the deployment harness double pole extension cord end. Be sure not to connect the deployment harness to a power source. (If connected the SRS air bag assembly deploys immediately). NOTE: Ensure that the pigtail adapter is firmly seated into the air bag assembly connector. Failure to fully seat the connectors may leave the shorting bar located in the air bag assembly connector functioning (shorting the deployment circuit) and may result in non deployment of the air bag assembly.
827RW053
Legend (A) 10 m (33 feet) or more
827RW054

3. Follow the diagram below by positioning two tires stacked on top of each other then the tire with the airbag assembly, another tire then a tire with a wheel on top and tie the tires securely with a rope to prevent the tires from collapsing.
9J21
827LW011
827RW050
Legend (A) 10 m (33 feet) or more 9. Notify all people in the immediate area of your intention to deploy the passenger air bag assembly. The deployment will be accompanied by a substantial noise which may startle the uninformed. WARNING: DEPLOYED HARNESS SHALL REMAIN SHORTED AND NOT BE CONNECTED TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL THE AIR BAG IS TO BE DEPLOYED. THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL IMMEDIATELY DEPLOY THE AIR BAG WHEN THE DEPLOYMENT HARNESS IS CONNECTED TO A POWER SOURCE (THIS IS THE LAST STEP WHEN DEPLOYING AN AIRBAG ASSEMBLY). FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES IN THE ORDER LISTED MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 10. Connect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) deployment harness wires to the power source to immediately deploy the air bag assembly. Recommended application : 12 volts minimum, 2 amps minimum. A vehicle battery is suggested.
WARNING: SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED WHEN HANDLING A DEPLOYED AIRBAG ASSEMBLY. AFTER AN AIRBAG ASSEMBLY HAS BEEN DEPOLOYED, THE METAL CANISTER AND SURROUNDING AREAS OF THE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY WILL BE HOT. DO NOT TOUCH THE METAL AREAS OF THE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY FOR ABOUT THIRTY MINUTES AFTER DEPLOYMENT. IF THE DEPLOYED AIRBAG ASSEMBLY MUST BE MOVED BEFORE IT IS COOL, WEAR GLOVES AND HANDLE BY THE AIRBAG. DO NOT PLACE THE DEPLOYED INFLATOR MODULE NEAR ANY FLAMMABLE OBJECTS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN FIRE OR PERSONAL INJURY. 11. Disconnect the pigtail adapter from the airbag assembly immediately after deployment to avoid damage to the pigtail adapter or SRS deployment harness from contacting the hot airbag assembly cannister. The pigtail adapter and SRS deployment harness are designed to be reused. They should, however, be inspected for damage after each deployment and replaced if necessary. 12. Dispose of the deployed air bag assembly through normal refuse channels after it has cooled for at least 30 minutes. 13. Wash your hands with mild soap and water afterward. NOTE: The remaining steps are to be followed in the unlikely event that the air bag assembly did not deploy after following the above procedures.
9J22
14. Ensure that the SRS deployment harness has been disconnected from the power source and that its two banana plugs have been shorted together by fully seating one banana plug into the other.
Deployment Inside Vehicle (Vehicle Scrapping Procedure)

Only deploy the airbag inside the vehicle if the vehicle is to be destroyed or salvaged for component parts. This includes, but is not limited to, the following situations: 1. The vehicle has completed its useful life. 2. The vehicle has been damaged beyond repair in a non deployment type accident. 3. The vehicle has been stripped or damaged beyond repair in a theft. 4. The vehicle will be salvaged for component parts to be used on a vehicle with a different Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) as opposed to being rebuilt as same VIN. Never use SRS components from another vehicle. WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER SRS AIR BAG ASSEMBLY DISPOSAL PROCEDURES CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT WHICH MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. UNDEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLIES MUST NOT BE DISPOSED OF THROUGH NORMAL REFUSE CHANNELS. THE UNDEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY CONTAINS SUBSTANCES THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE ILLNESS OR PERSONAL INJURY IF THE SEALED CONTAINER IS DAMAGED DURING DISPOSAL. DISPOSAL IN ANY MANNER INCONSISTENT WITH PROPER PROCEDURES MAY BE A VIOLATION OF FEDERAL, STATE AND/OR LOCAL LAWS. 1. Turn ignition switch to LOCK, remove key and put on safety glasses. 2. Remove all loose objects from front seats. 3. Disconnect Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) coil assembly, yellow 2pin connector located at the base of the steering column. 4. Cut the SRS coil assembly yellow 2pin harness connector from the vehicle leaving at least 16 cm (six inches) of wire at the connector. 5. Strip 13 mm (1/2 inch) of insulation from yellowgreen and yellowblack wire lead of the connector. 6. Cut two 900 cm (30 feet) deployment wires from 0.8 mm@ (18 gauge) or thicker multistrand wire. These wires will be used to fabricate the driver deployment harness. 7. Strip 13 mm (1/2 inch) of insulation from both ends of the wires cut in the previous step. 8. Short the wires by twisting together one end from each. Deployment wires shall remain shorted and not be connected to a power source until the air bag is to be deployed.
827RW055
15. Disconnect the pigtail adapter from the air bag assembly. WARNING: WHEN STORING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY OR WHEN LEAVING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY UNATTENDED ON A BENCH OR OTHER SURFACE, ALWAYS FACE THE BAG UP AND AWAY FROM THE SURFACE. THIS IS NECESSARY SO THAT A FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR BAG TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 16. Temporarily store the air bag assembly with the bag facing up, away from the surface upon which it rests.
066RW030
9J23
12. Connect the deployment harness to the driver air bag assembly, yellow 2pin connector at the base of the steering column. Route deployment harness out the driver side of the vehicle. WARNING: DEPLOYMENT WIRES SHALL REMAIN SHORTED AND NOT BE CONNECTED TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL THE AIR BAG IS TO BE DEPLOYED. THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL IMMEDIATELY DEPLOY THE AIR BAG WHEN A POWER SOURCE IS CONNECTED TO IT. CONNECTING THE DEPLOYMENT WIRES TO THE POWER SOURCE SHOULD ALWAYS BE THE FINAL STEP IN THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES IN THE ORDER LISTED COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 13. Disconnect passenger air bag assembly, yellow 2pin connector located behind glove box assembly. 14. Cut the passenger air bag assembly harness connector from the vehicle leaving at least 16 cm (six inches) of wire at the connector. 15. Strip 13 mm (1/2 inch) of insulation from yellowgreen and yellowred wire lead of the connector. 16. Cut two 900 cm (30 feet) deployment wires from 0.8 mm@ (18 gauge) or thicker multistrand wire. These wires will be used to fabricate the passenger deployment harness. 17. Strip 13 mm (1/2 inch) of insulation from both ends of the wires cut in the previous step. 18. Short the wires by twisting together one end from each. Deployment wires shall remain shorted and not be connected to a power source until the air bag is to be deployed.
F09RX001
WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES IN THE ORDER LISTED COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NEVER CONNECT DEPLOYMENT WIRES TO ANY POWER SOURCE BEFORE CONNECTING DEPLOYMENT WIRES TO THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY LEADS. DEPLOYMENT WIRES SHALL REMAIN SHORTED AND NOT BE CONNECTED TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL THE AIR BAG IS TO BE DEPLOYED. THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL IMMEDIATELY DEPLOY THE AIR BAG WHEN A POWER SOURCE IS CONNECTED TO IT. WEAR SAFETY GLASSES THROUGHOUT THIS ENTIRE DEPLOYMENT AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURE. 9. Twist together one connector wire lead to one deployment wire. The connection should be mechanically secure. 10. Bend twisted connection made in the previous step flat and wrap tightly with electrical tape to insulate and secure.
F09RX001
F09HV009
11. Twist together, bend and tape the remaining connector wire lead to the remaining deployment wire.
WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES IN THE ORDER LISTED COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NEVER CONNECT DEPLOYMENT WIRES TO ANY POWER SOURCE BEFORE CONNECTING DEPLOYMENT WIRES TO THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY LEADS. DEPLOYMENT WIRES SHALL REMAIN SHORTED AND DISCONNECTED FROM ANY
9J24

26. Notify all people in the immediate area that you intend to deploy the air bags. The deployment will be accompanied by a substantial noise which may startle the uninformed. 27. Separate the two ends of the driver deployment harness wires. WARNING: DEPLOYMENT WIRES SHALL REMAIN SHORTED AND DISCONNECTED FROM ANY POWER SOURCE UNTIL THE AIRBAG IS TO BE DEPLOYED OR ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT WILL IMMEDIATELY OCCUR. THIS MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES DURING AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AND DISPOSAL. CONNECTING THE DEPLOYMENT WIRES TO THE POWER SOURCE SHOULD ALWAYS BE THE FINAL STEP IN THE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEFURES IN THE ORDER LISTED COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NOTE: When the air bag deploys, the rapid gas expansion will create a substantial noise. Notify all people in the immediate area that you intend to deploy the air bags. 28. Connect the driver deployment harness wires to a power source to immediately deploy the driver air bag assembly. Recommended application: 12 volts minimum, 2 amps minimum. A vehicle battery is suggested. 29. Separate the two ends of the passenger deployment harness wires.
F09HV009
POWER SOURCE UNTIL THE AIRBAG IS TO BE DEPLOYED OR ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT WILL IMMEDIATELY OCCUR. THIS MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES DURING AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AND DISPOSAL. 19. Twist together one connector wire lead to one deployment wire. The connection should be mechanically secure. 20. Bend twisted connection made in the previous step flat and wrap tightly with electrical tape to insulate and secure.
21. Twist together, bend and tape the remaining connector wire lead to the remaining deployment wire. 22. Connect the deployment harness to the passenger air bag assembly, yellow 2pin connector located behind the glove box assembly. Route deployment harness out the passenger side of the vehicle. WARNING: DEPLOYMENT WIRES SHALL REMAIN SHORTED AND NOT BE CONNECTED TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL THE AIR BAG IS TO BE DEPLOYED. THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL IMMEDIATELY DEPLOY THE AIR BAG WHEN A POWER SOURCE IS CONNECTED TO IT. CONNECTING THE DEPLOYMENT WIRES SHOULD ALWAYS BE THE FINAL STEP IN THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES IN THE ORDER LISTED COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 23. Verify that the inside of the vehicle and the area surrounding the vehicle are clear of all people and loose or flammable objects. 24. Stretch the driver and passenger deployment harness to their full length. 25. Completely cover windshield area and front door window openings with a drop cloth, blanket or similar item. This reduces the possibility of injury due to possible fragmentation of the vehicles glass or interior.
WARNING: DEPLOYMENT WIRES SHALL REMAIN SHORTED AND DISCONNECTED FROM ANY POWER SOURCE UNTIL THE AIRBAG IS TO BE DEPLOYED OR ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT WILL IMMEDIATELY OCCUR. THIS MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES DURING AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AND DISPOSAL. CONNECTING THE DEPLOYMENT WIRES TO THE POWER SOURCE SHOULD ALWAYS BE THE FINAL STEP IN THE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEFURES IN THE ORDER LISTED COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.

30. Connect the passenger deployment harness wires to a power source to immediately deploy the passenger air bag assembly. Recommended application: 12 volts minimum, 2 amps minimum. A vehicle battery is suggested. (Driver air bag assembly) Put on a pair of shop gloves and safety gasses to protect your hands and eyes from possible irritation and heat when handling the deployed air bag assembly. After the air bag assembly has been deployed, the surface of the air bag may contain solid particulate. This solid particulate consists primarily of by products of the chemical reaction, Potassium Chloride and copper metal dust. Compounds of Potassium Borate, Strontium Chloride, Copper Chloride, and Ammonium Chloride may be found in amounts of about 1% (each) of the total particulate. (Passenger air bag assembly) Put on a pair of shop gloves and safety glasses to protect your hands and eyes from possible irritation and heat when handling the deployed air bag assembly. After the air bag assembly has been deployed, the surface of the air bag may contain a powdery residue. This powder consists primarily of cornstarch (used to lubricate the bag as it inflates) and by products of the chemical reaction. Sodium hydroxide dust (similar to lye soap) is produced as a by product of the deployment reaction. The sodium hydroxide then quickly reacts with atmospheric moisture and is converted to sodium carbonate and sodium bicarbonate (baking soda). Therefore, it is unlikely that sodium hydroxide will be present after deployment. WARNING: SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED WHEN HANDLING A DEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY. AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE METAL SURFACES OF THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY WILL BE VERY HOT. ALLOW THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY TO COOL BEFORE HANDLING ANY METAL PORTION OF IT. DO NOT PLACE THE HOT DEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY NEAR ANY FLAMMABLE OBJECTS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES COULD RESULT IN FIRE OR PERSONAL INJURY. After an air bag assembly has been deployed, the metal canister and surrounding areas of the air bag assembly will be very hot. Do not touch the metal areas of the air bag assembly for about 30 minutes after deployment. If the deployed air bag assembly must be moved before it is cool, wear gloves and handle by the air bag or trim cover. 31. Short the driver deployment harness wires by twisting together one end from each. Repeat this procedure for the passenger deployment harness. 32. Carefully remove drop cloth from vehicle and clean off any fragments or discard drop cloth entirely. 33. Disconnect driver deployment harness and passenger deployment harness from vehicle and discard.
9J25
34. In the unlikely event that either or both of the air bag assemblies did not deploy after following these procedures, proceed immediately with Steps 36 through 37. If the air bag assembly deployed, proceed to step 35. 35. With both air bags deployed, the vehicle may be scrapped in the same manner as a nonSRS equipped vehicle. NOTE: The remaining steps are to be followed in the unlikely event that the air bag assembly did not deploy after following these procedures. 36. Remove the undeployed air bag assembly (s) from the vehicle. For driver air bag assembly refer to in the Passenger Air Bag Assembly Removal in this section. WARNING: WHEN STORING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY OR WHEN LEAVING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY UNATTENDED ON A BENCH OR OTHER SURFACE, ALWAYS FACE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER UP, AWAY FROM THE SURFACE. THIS IS NECESSARY SO THAT A FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR BAG TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 37. Temporarily store the air bag assembly with the air bag opening facing up, away from the surface upon which it rests.
Deployed Air Bag Assembly Handling

Put on a pair of shop gloves and safety glasses to protect your hands and eyes from possible irritation and heat when handling the deployed air bag assembly. After the air bag assembly has been deployed, the surface of the air bag may contain solid particulate. This solid particulate consists primarily of by products of the chemical reaction, Potassium Chloride and copper metal dust. Compounds of Potassium Borate, Strontium Chloride, Copper Chloride, and Ammonium Chloride may be found in amounts of about 1% (each) of the total particulate. (Passenger air bag assembly) Put on a pair of shop gloves and safety glasses to protect your hands and eyes from possible irritation and heat when handling the deployed air bag assembly. After the air bag assembly has been deployed, the surface of the air bag may contain a powdery residue. This powder consists primarily of cornstarch (used to lubricate the bag as it inflates) and by products of the chemical reaction. Sodium hydroxide dust (similar to lye soap) is produced as a by product of the deployment reaction. The sodium hydroxide then quickly reacts with atmospheric moisture and is converted to sodium carbonate and sodium bicarbonate (baking soda). Therefore, it is unlikely that sodium hydroxide will be present after deployment.
9J26
Special Tools
WARNING: TO AVOID DEPLOYMENT WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING THE SRS, DO NOT USE ELECTRICAL TEST EQUIPMENT SUCH AS A BATTERYPOWERED OR ACPOWERED VOLTMETER, OHMMETER, ETC., OR ANY TYPE OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN THAT SPECIFIED IN THIS MANUAL. DO NOT USE A NON POWERED PROBETYPE TESTER. INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL MUST BE FOLLOWED CAREFULLY, OTHERWISE PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT.
J39200 DVM
The J39200 Digital Multimeter (DVM) is the preferred DVM for use in SRS diagnosis and repair. However, J34029A may be used if J39200 is not available. No other DVMs are approved for SRS diagnosis and repair.
J41433 SRS Driver/Passenger Load Tool

The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Driver/Passenger Load Tool J41433 is used only when called for in this section. It is used as a diagnostic aid and safety device to prevent inadvertent air bag assembly deployment. The load tool has four yellow connectors attached to its case. The three small connectors are electrically functional and serve as resistive load substitutions. No more than two connectors are used at any time. One of the small connectors is used to substitute for the load of the driver air bag assembly when it is connected at the top of the column to the SRS coil assembly. Another small connector is used to substitute for the load of the driver air bag assembly and the SRS coil assembly when it is connected at the base of the column to the SRS wiring harness. The third small connector is used to substitute for the load of the passenger air bag assembly when connected to the passenger air bag assembly harness connector. By substituting the resistance of the load tool when called for, a determination can be made as to whether an inflator circuit component is causing system malfunction and which component is causing the malfunction. The load tool should be used only when specifically called for in the diagnostic procedures.
901RS153
Scan Tool
The Tech 2 is used to read and clear SRS Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Refer to the Tech 2 Operators Manual for specific information on how to use the Tech 2.
901RW176
901RS146
9J27
J35616A Connector Test Adapter Kit

The J35616A Connector Test Adapter Kit must be used whenever a diagnostic procedure requests checking or probing a terminal. Using the appropriate adapter will ensure that no damage to the terminal will occur from the Digital Multimeter (DVM) with probe, such as spreading or bending. The adapter will also give an idea of whether contact tension is sufficient, helping to find an open or intermittent open due to poor terminal contact.
J42987 SRS Adapter For Load Tool

J42987 SRS adapter is used to connect the previous load tool to the new SRS system (if needed).
901RW107
J41497 SRS Deployment Fixture

The J41497 SRS Deployment Fixture must be used for deployment of the undeployed passenger side air bag.
901RS151
J42986 SRS Deployment Tool

The J42986 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Tool must be used for deployment of the undeployed air bag.
901RW088
901RX046
9J28

3. Connect yellow 2pin connector at the base of the steering column. 4. Install AIR BAG fuse METER and SRS to left dash side lower fuse block or connect battery. Turn ignition switch to ON and verify that the AIR BAG warning lamp flashes seven times and then turns OFF If it does not operate as described, perform the SRS Diagnostic System Check in section.
Service Precaution
CAUTION: When fasteners are removed, always reinstall them at the same location from which they were removed. If a fastener needs to be replaced, use the correct part number fastener for that application. If the correct part number fastener is not available, a fastener of equal size and strength (or stronger) may be used. Fasteners that are not reused, and those requiring thread locking compound will be called out. The correct torque value must be used when installing fasteners that require it. if the above conditions are not followed, parts or system damage could result. WARNING: WHEN PERFORMING SERVICE ON OR AROUND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS OR SRS WIRING, FOLLOW THE PROCEDURES LISTED BELOW TO TEMPORARILY DISABLE THE SRS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURES COULD RESULT IN POSSIBLE AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, PERSONAL INJURY OR OTHERWISE UNNEEDED SRS REPAIRS. The Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in DriverPassenger SRS can maintain sufficient voltage to cause a deployment for up to 15 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF, the battery is disconnected, or the fuse powering the SDM is removed. Many of the service procedures require removal of the SRS fuse, and disconnection of the air bag assembly from the deployment loop to avoid an accidental deployment. If the air bag assembly is disconnected from the deployment loop as noted in the Disabling the SRS procedure that follows, service can begin immediately without waiting for the 15 second time period to expire.
Handling / Installation / Diagnosis

1. Air bag assembly should not be subjected to temperatures above 93C (200C). 2. Air bag assembly, and SDM should not be used if they have been dropped from a height of 100 cm (3.3 feet) or more. 3. When a SDM is replaced, it must be oriented with the arrow on the SDM pointing toward the front of the vehicle. It is very important for the SDM to be located flat on the mounting surface, parallel to the vehicle datum line. It is important that the SDM mounting surface is free of any dirt or other foreign material. 4. Do not apply power to the SRS unless all components are connected or a diagnostic chart requests it, as this will set a diagnostic trouble code. 5. The SRS Diagnostic System Check must be the starting point of any SRS diagnostics. The SRS Diagnostic System Check will verify proper AIR BAG warning lamp operation and will lead you to the correct chart to diagnose any SRS malfunctions. Bypassing these procedures may result in extended diagnostic time, incorrect diagnosis, and incorrect parts replacements.
Disabling The SRS Removal

Turn the ignition switch to OFF and turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 1. Remove SRS fuse METER and SRS, from left dash side lower fuse block or disconnect battery. 2. Disconnect yellow 2pin connector at the base of steering column. 3. Remove glove box assembly; Refer to Passenger Air Bag Assembly Replacement in this section. 4. Disconnect passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector behind the glove box assembly. CAUTION: With the SRS fuse removed and ignition switch ON, the AIR BAG warning lamp will be ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SRS malfunction.
Inspections Required After An Accident

CAUTION: Certain SRS components must be replaced after a frontal crash involving air bag deployment. In all types of accidents regardless of Air Bag deployment, visually inspect all of the following components and replace as required: Driver air bag assembly Passenger air bag assembly Steering wheel SRS coil assembly Steering column Knee bolster and instrument panel mounting attachments Driver seat and belt Passenger seat and belt SDM Be sure to replace Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in accordance with SDM Replacement Guidelines. The SDM can be reused if the airbag did not deploy and it falls in the criteria described in this workshop manual. CAUTION: Refer to SDM replacement Guidelines below for important information on SDM replacement in both deployment and nondeployment crashes.
Enabling The SRS Installation

Turn ignition switch to LOCK and remove key. 1. Connect yellow 2pin connector passenger air bag assembly. 2. Install glove box assembly, Refer to Passenger Air Bag Assembly Replacement in this section.

SDM Replacement Guidelines 1. In case that the air bag has been deployed, replace the SDM. 2. When DTC 51, 53 and 71 are set. 3. When SDM fell down from a 100 cm (3.3 feet) height. All the above information are SDM replacement Guidelines. Inspection is needed also on the following. Inspect Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) coil assembly wiring and steering wheel for any signs of scorching meting or damage due to excessive heat. If coil assembly wire or steering wheel is damaged replace them. The steering column and wheel must be dimensionally checked to determine if they are damaged. Never use SRS parts from another vehicle. This does not include remanufactured parts purchased from an authorized Retailer they may be used for SRS repairs. Do not attempt to repair the SDM, the SRS harness, the SRS coil assembly, the air bag assembly, the steering wheel, or the steering column. Service of these items is replacement only. Verify replacement part numbers. CAUTION: Proper operation of the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) and Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requiring that any repairs made relating to the vehicle structure must be done according to the original production configuration.
9J29
9J30
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)

Service Precautions
WARNING: DURING SERVICE PROCEDURES, BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN HANDLING SDM. NEVER STRIKE OR JAR SDM. UNDER SOME CIRCUMSTANCES, IT COULD CAUSE DEPLOYMENT AND RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR IMPROPER OPERATION OF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS). SDM MOUNTING BRACKET BOLTS MUST BE CAREFULLY TORQUED TO ASSURE PROPER OPERATION. THE SRS SHOULD ONLY BE CONNECTED TO A POWER SOURCE WHEN IT IS INSTALLED SECURELY IN THE VEHICLE. THE SDM MAY SUDDENLY DEPLOY THE AIRBAGS CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY WARNING: PROPER OPERATION OF THE SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM) REQUIRES THE SDM TO BE SECURELY INSTALLED ON THE VEHICLE AND THE ARROW ON THE SENSOR MUST BE POINTING TOWARD THE FRONT OF THE VEHICLE. SDM is specifically calibrated and is keyed to the SDM location SRS wiring harness. Caution should be used to ensure proper location of the SDM. The keying of the SDM to its location and wiring harness connectors should never be modified in the field.
014RX002
Removal
1. Disable the SRS. (Refer to Disable the SRS in this manual) 2. Remove dressing panel around the radio and disconnect cigar lighter harness. 3. Remove the transfer sift lever knob. 4. Remove the center console. 5. Remove three connector from Powertrain Control Module (PCM). (Y22SE 2.2L Engine only) 6. Remove PCM with bracket.(Fixed four bolts) (Y22SE 2.2L Engine only)
7. Remove right side stay between instrument panel and floor. 8. Remove driver and passenger seat. 9. Turn over carpet to rear side. 10. Remove air conditioning duct for rear seat. (Transform the duct during removing it) 11. Pull CPA (2) (Connector Position Assurancered color) out and push connector lock down to disconnect the SDM harness connector (3).

12. Remove the three SDM fixing bolts (4) and remove SDM (3). Legend (1) Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) (2) Connector Position Assurance (CPA) (3) SDM Harness Connector (4) SDM Fixing Bolts
9J31
3. Install air conditioning duct for rear seat to normal position. 4. Return carpet normal position. 5. Install right side stay between instrument panel and floor, tighten to the specified torque. Torque: 10 3 Nm (1.0 0.3 kgm/87 26 lb in) 6. Install PCM with bracket and tighten to the specified torque. (Y22SE 2.2L Engine only) Torque: 10 3 Nm (1.0 0.3 kgm/87 26 lb in) 7. Reconnect three connector to Powertrain Control Module (PCM). (Y22SE 2.2L Engine only)
827R100001
Legend (1) Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) (2) Connector Position Assurance (CPA) (3) SDM Harness Connector (4) SDM Fixing Bolts
Installation
1. Install the SDM (1) on bracket and fixing bolts (4) and tighten the fixing bolts to the specified torque. Torque: 10 3 Nm (1.0 0.3 kgm/87 26 lb in) 2. Connect the SDM harness connector (3) and after that, put CPA into connector (2).
014RX017
8. Install the center console. 9. Install the transfer shift lever knob. 10. Install the dressing panel around the radio and reconnect cigar lighter harness. 11. Enable the SRS. (Refer to Enabling the SRS in this manual)
827R100001
9J32
Driver Air Bag Assembly

Service Precautions
WARNING: SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED WHEN HANDLING A DEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY. AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY SURFACE MAY CONTAIN A SMALL AMOUNT OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A BYPRODUCT OF THE DEPLOYMENT REACTION, THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN AND EYES. MOST OF THE POWDER ON THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY IS HARMLESS. AS A PRECAUTION, WEAR GLOVES AND SAFETY GLASSES WHEN HANDLING A DEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY, AND WASH YOUR HANDS WITH MILD SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOU. NEVER CARRY AIR BAG ASSEMBLY BY THE WIRES OR CONNECTOR ON THE UNDERSIDE OF MODULE. IN THE CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. WHEN PLACING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY ON A BENCH OR OTHER SURFACE, ALWAYS FACE BAG AND TRIM COVER UP, AWAY FROM THE SURFACE. NEVER REST A STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY ON THE STEERING WHEEL WITH THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY FACE DOWN AND COLUMN VERTICAL. THIS IS NECESSARY SO THAT A FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. OTHERWISE, PERSONAL INJURY COULD RESULT. NOTE: In the event deployment has occurred, inspect coil assembly wire for any signs of scorching, melting or any other damage due to excessive heat. If the coil has been damaged, replace it.
827RW040
3. Disconnect connector and remove air bag assembly. 4. Disconnect horn lead.
Removal
1. Disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). (Refer to Disabling the SRS in this section.) 2. Remove air bag assembly from steering wheel by removing two bolts. Lift air bag assembly out of steering wheel.
827RS015
Installation
1. Connect air bag to wiring harness connector. NOTE: Pass the lead wire through the tabs on the plastic cover (wire protector) of air bag to prevent lead wire from being pinched. 2. Connect horn lead. 3. Install air bag into steering wheel and tighten bolts to specified sequence as shown in figure. Torque: 8.8 Nm (0.9 kgm/78 lb in) CAUTION: Never use the air bag assembly from another vehicle. Use only the air bag assembly for UE. 4. Enable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). (Refer to Enabling the SRS in this section.)
9J33
Steering Wheel
Service Precautions
Removal
1. Disable the SRS. (Refer to Disabling the SRS in this section.)
827RX034
Legend (1) Horn Lead Connector (2) Air Bag Harness Connector (3) Setting Mark (4) Steering Fixing Nut (5) Driver Air Bag Assembly (6) Steering Wheel (7) Driver Air Bag Fixing Bolts 2. Remove the air bag assembly (5) from steering wheel (6) by removing two bolts (7). Lift air bag assembly out of steering wheel.
827RW040
9J34
3. Disconnect connector (2) and remove air bag assembly.
Installation
1. Install the steering wheel and align the setting marks (3). 2. Tighten the steering wheel fixing nut (4) to the specified torque. Torque: 34 Nm (3.5 kgm/25 lb ft) 3. Connect horn lead (1). 4. Connect air bag to wiring harness connector (2). NOTE: Pass the lead wire through the tabs on the plastic cover (wire protector) of air bag to prevent lead wire from being pinched. 5. Install air bag into steering wheel and tighten bolts (7) to specified sequence as show in figure. Torque: 8.8 Nm (0.9 kgm/78 lb in) CAUTION: Never use the air bag assembly from another vehicle. Use only the air bag assembly for UE.
827RS015
4. Disconnect horn lead (1) 5. Remove steering wheel attachment nut (4). 6. Move the tires to the straight ahead position before removing the steering wheel. Install steering wheel puller onto steering wheel and remove steering wheel with J29752. 7. Apply a setting mark (3) across the steering wheel and shaft so parts can be reassembled in their original position.
827RX034
Legend (1) Horn Lead Connector (2) Air Bag Harness Connector (3) Setting Mark (4) Steering Fixing Nut (5) Driver Air Bag Assembly (6) Steering Wheel (7) Driver Air Bag Fixing Bolts
827RW063
8. Feed wiring through the wheel and remove wheel. CAUTION: Never apply force to the steering wheel in direction of the shaft by using a hammer or other impact tools in an attempt to remove the steering wheel. The steering shaft is designed as an energy absorbing unit.
6. Enable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). (Refer to Enabling The SRS in this section.)
9J35
SRS Coil Assembly

Service Precaution
825RX047
Legend (1) Horn Lead Connector (2) Air Bag Harness Connector (3) Steering Column Cover (4) Setting Mark (5) Steering Fixing Nut (6) Driver Air Bag Assembly (7) Steering Wheel (8) Driver Air Bag Fixing Bolts (9) Combination Switch Assembly (10) Wiring Harness Connectors 2. Remove the air bag assembly (6) from steering wheel (7) by removing two bolts (8). Lift air bag assembly out of steering wheel.
Removal
1. Disable the SRS. (Refer to Disabling the SRS in this section.)
827RW040
9J36

13. Disconnect the horn terminal NO.2 from connector and remove the tape binding harness. (Refer to How to Disconnect the horn terminal in this section.)
3. Disconnect the 2pin yellow connector (2) and remove air bag assembly.
827RS015
4. Disconnect horn lead connector (1). 5. Remove the steering wheel attachment nut (5). 6. Move the tires to the straight ahead position before removing the steering wheel and remove wheel with J29752. 7. Apply a setting mark (4) across the steering wheel and shaft so parts can be reassembled in their original position.
827RX029
14. Remove four bolts of combination switch assembly (9) attached to steering lock and remove the combination switch assembly (with SRS coil) from steering shaft.
825RX047
827RW063
8. Feed wiring though the wheel and remove wheel. CAUTION: Never apply force to the steering wheel in the direction of the shaft by using a hammer or other impact tools in an attempt to remove the steering wheel. The steering shaft is designed as an energy absorbing unit. 9. Remove the steering lower cover. 10. Remove the driver knee bolster assembly. 11. Remove the steering column cover (3). 12. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors (10) located at the base of steering column.
Legend (1) Horn Lead Connector (2) Air Bag Harness Connector (3) Steering Column Cover (4) Setting Mark (5) Steering Fixing Nut (6) Driver Air Bag Assembly (7) Steering Wheel (8) Driver Air Bag Fixing Bolts (9) Combination Switch Assembly (10) Wiring Harness Connectors

15. Remove four bolts of SRS coil assembly and remove the SRS coil assembly from the combination switch.
9J37
2. Pull out the terminal of lead wire coming to black connector NO.12 while lifting the lock part with a screw driver ().
825RX033 827100003
How to Disconnect the horn terminal

1. Lift the white part of black connector with a screw driver () and release connector terminal lock.
Legend (1) Lock (2) Screw driver () (3) Terminal
How to Connect Horn Terminal

1. Insert horn terminal from behind black connector NO.12 until connector lock works.
827R100002
Legend (1) Screw driver () (2) Connector lock knob
827RX047
Legend (1) Terminal (2) Connector lock knob
9J38

3. Install the combination switch assembly (with SRS coil) to steering lock of steering shaft and tighten the four bolts to a specified tightening torque.
2. Push white connector into the black connector for a double lock.
827RX048 825RX047
Installation
1. Set cancel cam and SRS coil in position and install the SRS coil to combination switch by tightening the four bolts to a specified tightening torque with four bolts. Torque: 0.5 Nm (0.05 kgm/0.4 lb ft)
Legend (1) Horn Lead Connector (2) Air Bag Harness Connector (3) Steering Column Cover (4) Setting Mark (5) Steering Fixing Nut (6) Driver Air Bag Assembly (7) Steering Wheel (8) Driver Air Bag Fixing Bolts (9) Combination Switch Assembly (10) Wiring Harness Connectors 4. Connect the wiring harness connectors (10) located at the base of steering column. 5. Turn the SRS coil clockwise to full, return about 3 turns and align the neutral mark.
825RX033
2. Insert the horn terminal into the connector NO.12 and bind the combination switch harness and SRS coil harness with a tape.(Refer to How to Connect the horn terminal in this section.)

NOTE: Whenever installing the new combination switch with SRS coil, be sure to tear off the lock pin for aligning the neutral position before it is installed to the base of steering column.
9J39
12. Connect air bag to wiring harness connector (2). NOTE: Pass the lead wire through the tabs on the plastic cover (wire protector) of air bag to prevent lead wire from being pinched. 13. Install Air Bag (6) into steering wheel and tighten bolts (8) to specified sequence as figure. Torque: 8.8 Nm (0.9 kgm/78 lb in) CAUTION: Never use the air bag assembly from another vehicle. Use only the air bag assembly for Rodeo Models Only.
825RX032
CAUTION: Turn the SRS coil clockwise until a resistance is felt, do not over turn or SRS coil breakage may occur. 6. Install the steering column cover (3). CAUTION: When installing the steering column cover, be sure that all harnesses (i.e., starter switch, combination switch, and SRS coil) are not pinched and installed according to the diagram below.
825RX047
Legend (1) Horn Lead Connector (2) Air Bag Harness Connector (3) Steering Column Cover (4) Setting Mark (5) Steering Fixing Nut (6) Driver Air Bag Assembly (7) Steering Wheel (8) Driver Air Bag Fixing Bolts (9) Combination Switch Assembly (10) Wiring Harness Connectors 14. Enable the SRS. (Refer to Enabling The SRS in this section.)
825RS048
7. Install the driver knee bloster assembly. 8. Install the steering lower cover. 9. Install the steering wheel and align the setting marks (4). 10. Tighten the steering wheel fixing nut (5) to the specified torque. Torque: 34 Nm (3.5 kgm/25 lb ft) 11. Connect horn lead (1).
9J40
Steering Column
Service Precaution
431RX012
Removal
1. Disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). (Refer to Disabling The SRS in this section.)
Legend (1) Steering Column Cover (2) Steering Wheel (3) Steering Fixing Nut (4) Driver Air Bag Assembly (5) Driver Air Bag Fixing Bolts (6) Setting Mark (7) Air Bag Harness Connector (8) Horn Lead Connector (9) Combination Switch Assembly (10) Wiring Harness Connectors (11) Steering Lock Cylinder Assembly (12) Starter Switch Harness Connector (13) Steering Column Assembly (14) 2nd Column Shaft (15) Column Shaft Fixing Bolt

2. Remove the air bag assembly (4) from steering wheel (2) by removing two bolts (5). Lift air bag assembly out of steering wheel.
9J41
7. Apply a setting mark (6) across the steering wheel and shaft so parts can be reassembled in their original position.
827RW040
827RW063
3. Disconnect the 2pin yellow connector (7) and remove air bag assembly.
8. Feed wiring though the wheel and remove wheel. 9. Remove the steering lower cover. 10. Remove the driver knee bolster assembly. 11. Remove the steering column cover (1). 12. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors (10) located at the base of steering column. CAUTION: Never apply force to the steering wheel in direction of the shaft by using a hammer or other impact tools in an attempt to remove the steering wheel. The steering shaft is designed as an energy absorbing unit. 13. Remove the combination switch assembly with Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) coil (9). NOTE: SRS coil is a part of combination switch assembly, which cannot be replaced separately. Therefore, be sure not to remove the SRS coil from the combination switch assembly. 14. Remove the snap ring. 15. Remove the cushion rubber. 16. Disconnect shift lock cable. 17. Disconnect the starter switch harness connector (12) located base of steering column. 18. Remove steering lock cylinder assembly (11). 19. Remove the 2nd shaft (14) from the column shaft assembly (13) by removing bolt (15).
827RS015
4. Disconnect horn lead connector (8). 5. Remove the steering wheel attachment nut (3). 6. Move the tires to the straight ahead position before removing the steering wheel and removing wheel with J29752.
9J42

4. Tighten the steering column fixing nuts (Cross beam) to the specified torque. Torque: 17 Nm (1.7 kgm/13 lb ft) 5. Tighten the universal joint to the specified torque. Torque: 31 Nm (3.2 kgm/23 lb ft) 6. Install steering lock cylinder assembly (11). 7. Connect shift lock cable. 8. Install cushion rubber. 9. Install snap ring. 10. Install the combination switch assembly with Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) coil (9). 11. Connect the wiring harness connector (10) located on the base of steering column. 12. Turn the SRS coil clockwise to full, return about 3 turns and align the neutral mark.
20. Remove steering column assembly (13).
431RX012
Legend (1) Steering Column Cover (2) Steering Wheel (3) Steering Fixing Nut (4) Driver Air Bag Assembly (5) Driver Air Bag Fixing Bolts (6) Setting Mark (7) Air Bag Harness Connector (8) Horn Lead Connector (9) Combination Switch Assembly (10) Wiring Harness Connectors (11) Steering Lock Cylinder Assembly (12) Starter Switch Harness Connector (13) Steering Column Assembly (14) 2nd Column Shaft (15) Column Shaft Fixing Bolt
825RX032
CAUTION: Turn the SRS coil clockwise until a resistance is felt, do not over turn or SRS coil breakage may occur. 13. Install steering column cover (1).
Installation
1. Install the 2nd shaft (14) to the column shaft assembly (13). 2. Install the steering column assembly (13). 3. Tighten the steering column fixing bolts (dash panel side) to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (2.0 kgm/15 lb ft)
825RS048

CAUTION: When installing the steering column cover, be sure that all harnesses (i.e., starter switch, combination switch, and SRS coil) are not pinched and installed according to the diagram below. 14. Install the steering wheel (2) and align the setting marks (6). 15. Tighten the steering wheel fixing nut (3) to the specified torque. Torque: 34 Nm (3.5 kgm/25 lb ft) 16. Connect horn lead (8). 17. Connect air Bag wiring harness connector (7). NOTE: Pass the lead wire through the tabs on the plastic cover (wire protector) of air bag to prevent lead wire from being pinched. 18. Install air bag into steering wheel and tighten bolts (5) to specified sequence as shown in figure. Torque: 8.8 Nm (9.0 kgm/78 lb in) CAUTION: Never use the air bag assembly from another vehicle. Use only the air bag assembly for UE. Legend (1) Steering Column Cover (2) Steering Wheel (3) Steering Fixing Nut (4) Driver Air Bag Assembly (5) Driver Air Bag Fixing Bolts (6) Setting Mark (7) Air Bag Harness Connector (8) Horn Lead Connector (9) Combination Switch Assembly (10) Wiring Harness Connectors (11) Steering Lock Cylinder Assembly (12) Starter Switch Harness Connector (13) Steering Column Assembly (14) 2nd Column Shaft (15) Column Shaft Fixing Bolt
9J43
19. Enable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (Refer to Enabling The SRS in this section.)
431RX012
9J44
Passenger Air Bag Assembly

Service Precaution
WARNING: SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED WHEN HANDLING A DEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY. AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY SURFACE MAY CONTAIN A SMALL AMOUNT OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A BYPRODUCT OF THE DEPLOYMENT REACTION, THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN AND EYES. MOST OF THE POWDER ON THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY IS HARMLESS. AS A PRECAUTION, WEAR GLOVES AND SAFETY GLASSES WHEN HANDLING A DEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY, AND WASH YOUR HANDS WITH MILD SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOU. NEVER CARRY AIR BAG ASSEMBLY BY THE WIRES OR CONNECTOR ON THE UNDERSIDE OF MODULE. IN THE CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. WHEN PLACING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY ON A BENCH OR OTHER SURFACE, ALWAYS FACE BAG AND TRIM COVER UP, AWAY FROM THE SURFACE. NEVER REST A STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY ON THE STEERING WHEEL WITH THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY FACE DOWN AND COLUMN VERTICAL. THIS IS NECESSARY SO THAT A FREE SPACE IS PROVIDED TO ALLOW THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY TO EXPAND IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. OTHERWISE, PERSONAL INJURY COULD RESULT. NOTE: In the event deployment has occurred, inspect coil assembly wire for any signs of scorching, melting or any other damage due to excessive heat. If the coil has been damaged, replace it. 6. Remove passenger air bag assembly from glove box opening of instrument panel.
827RX005
Installation
1. Install passenger air bag assembly from glove box opening of instrument panel. 2. Install reinforcement from glove box opening of instrument panel. 3. Install air bag assembly fixing nuts and bolts, and tighten to specified torque. Torque: 7.8 Nm (69 lb in) 4. Connect air bag assembly harness connector. 5. Install glove box assembly. 6. Enable the SRS (Refer to Enabling the SRS in this section.)
Removal
1. Disable the SRS. (Refer to Disabling the SRS in this section.) 2. Remove glove box assembly. 3. Disconnect passenger air bag assembly harness connector. 4. Remove air bag assembly fixing bolts and nuts. 5. Remove reinforcement.
9J45

Fastener Tightening Specification
Application SDM Driver air bag fixing bolt Steering wheel fixing bolt Steering column (dash panel side fixing bolts) Steering column (Cross beam side fixing nuts) Steering column (Universal joint fixing bolt) Passenger Air Bag fixing bolts and nuts Nm 10 8.8 34 20 17 31 6 kgm 1.0 0.9 3.5 2.0 1.7 3.2 0.6 Ib Ft 25 15 13 23 Ib In 87 78 52
9J46
SRS Air Bag System Inspection Standards For Repair

Parts Name Inspection Part Standard Replacem ent Collision Standard f f 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Trouble Air bag has deployed due to collision. Pad surface has crack or scratch. Connector has cracks. Harness is disconnected or scratched. Air bag is soaked in water, oil etc. Air bag has fallen from a height of about 10 cm (3.3) feet. Trouble diagnosis in Workshop Manual resulted in part replacement. Air bag has deployed due to collision. SDM is crack or deformed. Connector has cracks. SDM has fallen from a height of about 100 cm (3.3 feet). Trouble diagnosis in Workshop Manual resulted in part replacement.
Driver Air bag Assembly
Passenger Air bag Assembly
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
SRS Coil Assembly
1. Burn or melt due to overheat. 2. Case is cracked or deformed. 3. Trouble diagnosis in Workshop Manual resulted in part replacement. 1. Air bag circuit wire harness is disconnected or damaged. 2. Connector has cracks. 3. Trouble diagnosis in Workshop Manual resulted in part replacement. 1. Bracket is deformed. 2. A new air bag cannot be installed with ease. 3. When a new air bag is installed, pad interferes with the steering wheel, and clearance is uneven. 1. Capsule is broken. 2. The fitting of column collapses. 3. Bellows pipe is deformed. 1. Dent, bend, cracks, and deform.
SRS Harness
Steering Wheel
Steering Column Instrument Panel & Knee bolster & Cover Glove box. Seat Seat Belt Wood shield Glass Mounts
1. Repair or replace if dent, bend, cracks, and deform are found. 2. Retighten to specified torque if loose.
Inspection Standards In cases of collision: When any type of collision has occurred regardless of air bag deployment. In cases of trouble code: When trouble code has been detected by TECH 2 in case of the AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT failing to work or remaining lighted.
SECTION
RESTRAINT CONTROL SYSTEM
RODEO
9J11
RESTRAINTS
SRS CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotting Snapshot Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts For Electrical Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS Diagnostic System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . Chart A SDM Integrity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chart B AIR BAG Warning Lamp Comes ON Steady . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chart C AIR BAG Warning Lamp Does Not Comes ON Steady . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC 15 Passenger Deployment Loop Resistance High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC 16 Passenger Deployment Loop Resistance Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC 17 Passenger Deployment Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC 18 Passenger Deployment Loop Short To Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9J11 9J12 9J17 9J110 9J111 9J111 9J114 9J116 9J118 9J121 9J124 9J127 9J129 CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. ISUZU will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. ISUZU will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fastener joint interfaces. Generally, such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fastener. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specifications. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems. DTC 19 Passenger Deployment Loop Short To Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC 21 Driver Deployment Loop Resistance High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC 22 Driver Deployment Loop Resistance Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC 24 Driver Deployment Loop Short To Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC 25 Driver Deployment Loop Short To Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC 26 Driver Deployment Loop Open . . . . DTC 51 Deployment Event Commanded . . . DTC 53 Deployment Commanded With Deployment Loop Fault Or Energy Reserves Out Of Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTC 61 Warning Lamp Circuit Failure . . . . . DTC 71 Internal SDM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9J131 9J133 9J136 9J139 9J141 9J144 9J147
9J149 9J151 9J153
Service Precaution
9J12
Diagnostic Information
Diagnostic Procedures
WARNING: WHEN FASTENERS ARE REMOVED, ALWAYS REINSTALL THEN AT THE SAME LOCATION FROM WHICH THEY WERE REMOVED. IF A FASTENER NEEDS TO BE REPLACED, USE THE CORRECT PART NUMBER FASTENER FOR THAT APPLICATION. IF THE CORRECT PART NUMBER FASTENER IS NOT AVAILABLE, A FASTENER OF EQUAL SIZE AND STRENGTH (OR STRONGER) MAY BE USED. FASTENERS THAT ARE NOT REUSED, AND THOSE REQUIRING THREAD LOCKING COMPOUND WILL BE CALLED OUT. THE CORRECT TORQUE VALUE MUST BE USED WHEN INSTALLING FASTENERS THAT REQUIRE IT. IF THE ABOVE CONDITIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED, PARTS OR SYSTEM DAMAGE COULD RESULT. WARNING: TO AVOID DEPLOYMENT WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING THE SRS, DO NOT USE ELECTRICAL TEST EQUIPMENT SUCH AS A BATTERYPOWERED OR ACPOWERED VOLTMETER, OHMMETER, ETC., OR ANY TYPE OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN THAT SPECIFIED IN THIS MANUAL. DO NOT USE A NONPOWERED, PROBETYPE TESTER. INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL MUST BE FOLLOWED CAREFULLY, OTHERWISE PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT. The diagnostic procedures used in this section are designed to aid in finding and repairing SRS problems. Outlined below are the steps to find and repair SRS problems quickly and effectively. Failure to carefully follow these procedures may result in extended diagnostic time, incorrect diagnosis and incorrect parts Replacement. 1. Perform The SRS Diagnostic System Check. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Diagnostic System Check should always be the starting point of any SRS diagnostics. The SRS Diagnostic System Check checks for proper AIR BAG warning lamp operation and checks for SRS trouble codes using both Flash Code and Scan Tool Methods. 2. Refer To The Proper Diagnostic Chart As Directed By The SRS Diagnostic System Check. The SRS Diagnostic System Check will lead you to the correct chart to diagnose any SRS problems. Bypassing these procedures may result in extended diagnostic time, incorrect diagnosis and incorrect parts Replacement. 3. Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check After Any Repair Or Diagnostic Procedures Have Been Performed. Performing the SRS Diagnostic System Check after all repair or diagnostic procedures will assure that the repair has been made correctly and that no other conditions exist.
Diagnostic Codes
The Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) maintains a history record of all diagnostic codes that have been detected since the SRS codes were last cleared during service. 1. Active CodesFaults that are presently detected this ignition cycle. Active codes are stored in Random Access Memory (RAM). 2. History CodesAll faults detected since the last time the history fault memory was cleared. History codes are stored in Electronically Erasable Programmable Read only Memory (EEPROM).
How To Read Trouble Codes

All codes (Active and history) can be read (or cleared) by using a scan tool or equivalent. If a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is not available, have the vehicle serviced by dealer.
How To Clear Trouble Codes

Trouble codes can only be cleared by using a scan tool. If a scan tool is not available then inform the owner of the stored codes and suggest that the codes are cleared upon the next visit to a dealership.
Scan Tool Diagnostics

A scan tool can be used to read current and history codes and to clear all history codes after a repair is complete. The scan tool must be updated to communicate with the SRS through a replaceable cartridge for SRS diagnostics. To use the scan tool, connect it to the Data Link Connector (DLC) and turn the ignition switch ON. Then follow the manufacturers directions for communication with the SRS. The scan tool reads serial data from the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) Serial Data output (terminal 24) to the DLC.
Basic Knowledge Required

Before using this section of the Service Manual, there is some basic knowledge which will be required. Without this knowledge, you will have trouble using the diagnostic procedures in this section. Use care to prevent harm or unwanted deployment. Read all cautions in the service manual and on warning labels attached to SRS components.
Basic Electrical Circuits

You should understand the basic theory of electricity including series and parallel circuits, and understand the voltage drops across series resistors. You should know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. You should be able to read and understand a wiring diagram.
9J13
Flash Code Diagnostics

Flash code diagnostics can be used to read current codes and to determine if history codes are present but cannot be used to clear codes or read history codes. Flash code diagnostics is enabled by grounding by terminal 13 shorting to terminal 4 of the DLC with the ignition switch ON. Grounding terminal 13 of the DLC pulls the Diagnostics Request input (Terminal 1) of the SDM low and signals the SDM to enter the flash code diagnostic display mode. The SDM displays the trouble codes by flashing the warning lamp. Each code that is displayed will consist of a number of flashes which represents the tens digit, a 1.2 second pause, following by a number of flashes which represents the ones digit of the code. Each code is displayed one time before moving on to the next code. After all of the codes have been displayed, the entire code sequence will continually by repeated until ground is removed from terminal 13 of the DLC. Two special codes exist when reading in the flash code mode (Flash Code 12 and Flash Code 13). Flash Code 12 will always be the first code displayed when the flash code mode is enabled Code 12 is not an indication of a SRS problem but an indication that the flash code mode has been enabled. If there are no current or history codes present, the SDM will display code 12 until ground is removed from the DLC at terminal 13. Flash Code 13 will be displayed if there are history codes. To read the history codes, a scan tool must be used.
9J14
Tech 2 Scan Tool

From 2001 RODEO (UE), dealer service departments are recommended to use Tech 2. Please refer to Tech 2 scan tool user guide.
901RW180
Legend (1) PCMCIA Card (2) RS 232 Loop Back Connector
(3) SAE 16/19 Adaptor (4) Data Link Connector (DLC) Cable (5) Tech2
Getting Started D Before operating the Isuzu PCMCIA card with the Tech 2, the following steps must be performed: 1. The Isuzu 2001 MY System PCMCIA card (1) inserts into the Tech 2 (5).
2. Connect the SAE 16/19 adapter (3) to the DLC cable (4). 3. Connect the DLC cable to the Tech 2 (5) 4. Mark sure the vehicle ignition is off.

5. Connect the Tech 2 SAE 16/19 adapter to the vehicle Data Link Connector (DLC).
9J15
Operating Procedure The power up screen is displayed when you power up the tester with the Isuzu systems PCMCIA card. Follow the operating procedure below.
740RW060
6. The vehicle ignition turns on. 7. Verify the Tech 2 power up display.
060RW009 060R100049
NOTE: The RS232 loop back connector is only to use for diagnosis of Tech 2 and refer to user guide of the Tech 2.
9J16
060R100050

Menu D The following table shows which functions are used for the available equipment versions. D Read DTC info by Priority D Clear Info
9J17
060RY00115 060RY00113
Data Display
DTC Modes
060R100083 060RY00114

This test selects several necessary items from the data list to plot graphs and makes data comparison on a long term basis. It is an effective test particularly in emission related evaluations. For trouble diagnosis, you can collect graphic data (snap shot) directly from the vehicle. You can replay the snapshot data as needed. Therefore, accurate diagnosis is possible, even though the vehicle is not available.
9J18
060RX041
9J19
060RX040
9J110 RESTRAINT CONTROL SYSTEM
Parts For Electrical Circuit

Wiring
Wire Color
All wires have colorcoded insulation. Wires belonging to a systems main harness wil have a single color. Wires belonging to a systems subcircuits will have a colored stripe. Striped wires use the following code to show wire size and colors.
D08RX174
D08RX175
Legend (1) Colored Stripe (2) Single Color Wire Color Coding Colorcoding B W R G Y L O Meaning Black White Red Green Yellow Blue Orange
Abbreviations are used to indicate wire color within a circuit diagram. Refer to the following table.
Colorcoding BR LG GR P LB V
Meaning Brown Light green Grey Pink Light blue Violet
Distinction of Circuit by Wire Base Color Base color B W R G Charging circuit Lighting circuit Signal circuits Circuits Starter circuit and grounding circuit Base color Y L, O, BR, LG, GR, P, SB V SB, Instrument circuit Other circuit Circuits
9J111
System Schematic
D09R100002
SRS Diagnostic System Check

The diagnostic procedures used in this section are designed to find and repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) malfunctions. To get the best results, it is important to use the diagnostic charts and follow the sequence listed below: A. Perform the SRS Diagnostic System Check. The SRS Diagnostic System Check must be the starting point of any SRS diagnostics. The SRS Diagnostic System Check checks for proper AIR BAG warning lamp operation, the ability of the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) to communicate through the Serial Data line and whether SRS diagnostic trouble codes exist. B. Refer to the proper diagnostic chart as directed by the SRS Diagnostic System Check. The SRS Diagnostic System Check will lead you to the correct chart to diagnose any SRS malfunctions. Bypassing these procedures may result in extended
diagnostic time, incorrect diagnosis and incorrect parts replacement. C. Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check after any repair or diagnostic procedures have been performed. Performing the SRS Diagnostic System Check after all repair or diagnostic procedures will ensure that the repair has been made correctly and that no other malfunctions exist
Circuit Description
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, ignition 1 voltage is applied from the SRS fuse to the SDM at the ignition 1 input terminals 12. The SDM responds by flashing the AIR BAG warning lamp seven times while performing tests on the SRS.
Notes On System Check Chart:

Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the Supplemental Restraint System Diagnostic System Check chart. 1. The AIR BAG warning lamp should flash seven times after ignition is first turned ON. 2. After the AIR BAG warning lamp flashes seven times, it should turn OFF. 3. Improper operation of the AIR BAG warning lamp is indicated. This test differentiates a warning lamp stays ON condition from a warning lamp does not come ON condition. 4. This test checks for the proper operation of the Serial Data line. This test will also determine whether history diagnostic trouble codes are stored and, if so, identify them. 5. This test checks for proper operation of the Serial Data line. This test will also identify the stored diagnostic trouble codes and whether they are current or history.
Diagnostic Aids:
The order in which diagnostic trouble codes are diagnosed is very important. Failure to diagnose the diagnostic trouble codes in the order specified may result in extended diagnostic time, incorrect diagnosis and incorrect parts Replacement.
9J113
SRS Diagnostic System Check

Step 1 Action Note the AIR BAG warning lamp when ignition switch is turned ON. Does the AIR BAG warning lamp flash seven (7) times? 2 3 Note the AIR BAG warning lamp after it flashed 7 times. Does the AIR BAG warning lamp go OFF? Note the AIR BAG warning lamp when ignition switch is turned ON. Does the AIR BAG warning lamp come ON steady? 4 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ignition switch OFF. Connect a scan tool to data link connector. Follow direction given in the scan tool instruction manual. Ignition switch ON. Request the SRS diagnostic trouble code display recode all history diagnostic trouble code(s) specify as such, on repair order. Go to Chart B Ignition switch OFF. When DTC 71 is set, go to DTC 71 chart. For all other history codes refer to Diagnostics Aids for that specific DTC. A history DTC indicates the malfunction has been repaired or is intermittent. Ignition switch OFF. When DTC 53 is set, go to DTC 53 chart. When DTC 51 is set, go to DTC 51 chart. When DTC 19 is set, go to DTC 19 chart. When DTC 25 is set, go to DTC 25 chart. Diagnose remaining current DTCs from lowest to highest.When only history DTCs exist, Refer to Diagnostics Aids for that specific DTC. A history DTC indicates the malfunction has been repaired or is intermittent. Go to Chart C. Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 Yes No
Is diagnostic trouble code(s) displayed?
SRS is functional and free of malfunctions, no further diagnosis is required. If scan tool indicates No Data Received, refer to chassis electrical section.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Ignition switch OFF. Connect a scan tool to data link connector. Follow directions as given in the scan tool instruction manual. Ignition switch ON. Request the SRS diagnostic trouble code display, recode all diagnostic trouble code(s), specifying as current or history on repair order.
Is diagnostic trouble code(s) displayed?
If scan tool indicates No Data Received, refer to chassis electrical section.
Chart A SDM Integrity Check
D09R100002
When the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) recognizes ignition 1 voltage, applied to terminals 12, is greater than 9 volts, the AIR BAG warning lamp is flashed 7 times to verify operation. At this time the SDM performs TurnON tests followed by Continuous Monitoring tests. When a malfunction is detected, the SDM sets a current diagnostic trouble code and illuminates the AIR BAG warning lamp. The SDM will clear current diagnostic trouble codes and move them to a history file when the malfunction is no longer detected and/or the ignition switch is cycled, except for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) 51, 53 and 71. DTC 71 can only be cleared using a scan tool Clear Codes command in case that the malfunction on DTC 71 has been solved and no DTCs 51 and 53 were remained. DTCs 51, 53 and 71 can not be cleared after a Clear Codes command is issued.
Chart Test Description:

Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 1. This test confirms a current malfunction. If no current malfunction is occurring (history DTC set) the Diagnostic Aids for the appropriate diagnostic trouble code should be referenced. The SDM should not be replaced for a history diagnostic trouble code. 2. This test checks for a malfunction introduced into the SRS during the diagnostic process. It is extremely unlikely that a malfunctioning SDM would cause a new malfunction to occur during the diagnostic process. 3. When all circuitry outside the SDM has been found to operate properly, as indicated by the appropriate diagnostic chart, then and only then should the SDM be replaced.
9J115
Chart A SDM Integrity Check

WARNING: DURING SERVICE PROCEDURES. BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN HANDLING A SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM). NEVER STRIKE OR JAR THE SDM. THE SDM IF NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED ON THE VEHICLE MAY DEPLOY THE AIRBAG (WHICH MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY) IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL POWER UP TO THE SRS. ALL SDM AND MOUNTING BRACKET Step 1 Action 1. This chart assumes that the SRS Diagnostic System Check and either a symptom chart or a diagnostic trouble code chart diagnosis have been performed When all circuitry outside the SDM has been found to operate properly, as indicated by the appropriate diagnostic chart, and the symptom or DTC remains current, the following diagnostic procedures must be performed to verify the need for SDM Replacement. 2. Ignition switch OFF. 3. Reconnect all SRS components, ensure all components are properly mounted. 4. Ensure the ignition switch has been OFF for at least 15 seconds. 5. Note AIR BAG warning lamp as ignition switch is turned ON. Does warning lamp flash 7 times then go OFF? 2 Using a scan tool, request diagnostic trouble code display. Is the same symptom or DTC occurring as was when the SRS Diagnostic System Check was first performed? FASTENERS MUST BE CAREFULLY TORQUED AND THE ARROW MUST BE POINTING TOWARD THE FRONT OF THE VEHICLE TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OF THE SRS. THE SDM IF NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED ON THE VEHICLE MAY DEPLOY THE AIRBAG (WHICH MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY) IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL POWER UP TO THE SRS. Yes No
The symptom or DTC is no longer occurring. Clear SRS diagnostic trouble codes. Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check. Ignition switch OFF. Go to the appropriate chart for the indicated malfunction. SRS is functional and free of malfunctions. No further diagnosis is required. Go to Step 4 Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Step 2
Go to Step 3
1. Clear SRS Diagnostic Trouble Codes. 2. Ignition switch OFF for at least two minutes. 3. Note AIR BAG warning lamp as ignition switch is turned ON. Does warning lamp flash 7 times then go OFF?
Ignition switch OFF. Replace SDM. Go to Step 4
Reconnect all SRS components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished?
Go to Step 4
Chart B AIR BAG Warning Lamp Comes ON Steady
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, ignition 1 voltage is applied from the METER fuse to AIR BAG, warning lamp which is connected to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning lamp, terminal 7. The SRS fuses apply system voltage to the ignition 1 inputs, terminals 12. The Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) responds by flashing the AIR BAG warning lamp 7 times. If ignition 1 voltage is less than 9 volts, the AIR BAG warning lamp will come ON solid with no DTCs set.

Number (s) below refer to step number (s) on the diagnostic chart. 2. This test checks for an open in the ignition 1 circuit to the SDM. 3. This test checks for the voltage of ignition 1. 4. This test determines whether the malfunction is a short to ground in Circuit IB04 GREEN.
9J117
Chart B AIR BAG Warning Lamp Comes ON Steady

Step 1 Action 1. When measurements are requested in this chart use J39200 DVM with correct terminal adapter from J35616A. 2. Ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect scan tool to data link connector, Follow directions as given in the scan tool instruction manual. 4. Ignition switch ON. 5. Request SRS diagnostic trouble code display. Does scan tool indicate No Data Received? 2 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Inspect SDM harness connector connection to SDM. Is it securely connected to the SDM? Ignition switch OFF. Replace SDM. Go to Step 5 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3 Connect SDM securely to deactivate shorting clip in SDM harness connector. Go to Step 5 Ignition switch OFF. Replace SDM. Go to Step 5 Yes No
Using scan tool, request SRS data list. Is ignition more than 9 volts? Go to Step 4
1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS coil and passenger air bag assemblies. Yellow 2pin connectors located at base of steering column and behind the glove box assembly. 3. Disconnect SDM. 4. Measure resistance from SDM harness connector terminal 6 to ground. Does DVM display 0L (infinite)? Go to Chart A Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check. Reconnect all SRS components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished?
Replace SRS harness. Go to Step 5
Go to Step 5
Chart C AIR BAG Warning Lamp Does Not Comes ON Steady
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, ignition 1 voltage is applied from the METER fuse to the AIR BAG warning lamp which is connected to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning lamp, terminal 7. The SRS fuse apply system voltage to the ignition 1 inputs, terminals 12. The Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) responds by flashing the AIR BAG warning lamp seven times. If ignition 1 voltage is more than 16 volts, the AIR BAG warning lamp will be still OFF solid with no DTCs set.

Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the diagnostic chart:
1. This test decides whether power is available to SDM warning lamp power feed circuit. 2. This test determines whether the voltage is present in the warning lamp circuit. 3. This test determines if the malfunction is in the instrument cluster. 4. This test checks for open in the warning lamp circuitry. 5. This test isolates the IB04GREEN circuit and checks for a short in the IB04GREEN circuit to B+. 8. This test checks for a short from the SDM warning lamp power feed circuit to ground. 9. This test determines whether the short to ground is due to a short in the wiring.
9J119
Chart C AIR BAG Warning Lamp Does Not Comes ON Steady

Step 1 Action 1. When measurements are requested in this chart use J39200 DVM with correct terminal adapter from J35616A. 2. Ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove and inspect METER fuse to the AIR BAG warning lamp. Is fuse good? 2 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS coil and passenger air bag assemblies. Yellow 2pin connectors located at base of steering column and behind the glove box assembly. 3. Disconnect SDM. 4. Ignition switch ON. 5. Measure voltage on SDM harness connector from terminal 7 to terminal 6 (ground). Is system voltage present on terminal 7? 3 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove instrument meter cluster. 3. Check for proper connection to instrument cluster at IB04GRN terminal. 4. If OK, then remove and inspect AIR BAG bulb. Is bulb good? 4 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition switch OFF. Disconnect instrument meter cluster harness connector. Ignition switch ON. Measure voltage on SDM harness connector from terminal 7 to terminal 6 (ground). Go to Chart A Service instrument meter cluster. Go to Step 6 Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check. Go to Step 8 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Go to Step 2 Go to Step 7 Yes No
Replace bulb. Go to Step 6
Is voltage 1 volt or less? 5 1. Install bulb. 2. Measure resistance from instrument meter cluster harness connector IB04GRN terminal to SDM harness connector terminal 7. Is resistance 5.0 ohms or less? 6 Reconnect all SRS components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? 7 8 Were you sent here from chart C? 1. Replace METER fuse. 2. Ignition switch ON wait 10 seconds then ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove and inspect METER fuse. Is fuse good?
Install METER fuse. Go to Step 10
Go to Step 9

Step 9 Action 1. Disconnect SRS coil and passenger air bag assemblies. Yellow 2pin connectors located at base of steering column and behind the glove box assembly. 2. Disconnect SDM. 3. Replace METER fuse. 4. Ignition switch ON wait to 10 seconds. 5. Ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove and inspection METER fuse. Is fuse good? 10 Reconnect all SRS components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Was this step finished? Yes No
Install METER fuse. Go to Chart A. Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Replace SRS harness. Replace METER fuse. Go to Step 10
Go to Step 10
9J121
DTC 15 Passenger Deployment Loop Resistance High
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will perform tests to diagnose critical malfunctions within itself. Upon passing these tests ignition 1, and deployment loop voltages are measured to ensure they are within their respective normal voltage ranges. The SDM then proceeds with the Resistance Measurement Test. Passenger Bag Low terminal 16 is grounded through a resister and the passenger current source connected to Passenger Bag High terminal 15 allows a known amount of current to flow. By monitoring the voltage difference between Passenger Bag High and Passenger Bag Low the SDM calculates the combined resistance of the passenger air bag assembly, harness wiring Circuits(CKTs) IB07YELLOW/GREEN and IB08YELLOW/RED connector terminal contact.
DTC Will Set When:

The combined resistance of the passenger air bag assembly, harness wiring CKTs IB07YELLOW/GREEN and IB08YELLOW/RED, and connector terminal contact is above a specified value. This test is run once each ignition cycle during the Resistance Measurement Test when: 1. No higher priority faults are detected during TurnON. 2. Ignition 1 voltage is in the specified value.
Action Taken:
SDM turns ON the AIR BAG warning lamp and sets a diagnostic trouble code.
DTC Will Clear When:

The ignition switch is turned OFF.
DTC Chart Test Description:

Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test determines whether the malfunction is in the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM). 3. This test verifies proper connection of the yellow 2pin connector. 4. This test checks for proper contact and/or corrosion of the yellow 2pin connector terminals. 5. The test checks for a malfunctioning passenger air bag assembly. 6. This test determines whether the malfunction is due to high resistance in the wiring.
Diagnostic Aids:
An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a poor connection at the passenger air bag assembly harness connector terminals 1 and 2, SDM terminal 15 and 16, or a poor wire to terminal connection in Circuits(CKTs) IB07YELLOW/GREEN and IB08YELLOW/RED. This test for this diagnostic trouble code is only run while the AIR BAG warning lamp is performing the bulb check, unless Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 17 or DTC 26 is detected. When a scan tool Clear Codes command is issued and the malfunction is still present, the DTC will not reappear until the next ignition cycle.
9J123
DTC 15 Passenger Deployment Loop Resistance High

Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. When measurements are requested in this chart use J39200 DVM with correct terminal adapter from J35616A. 2. Use scan tool data list function, read and record the passenger deployment loop resistance. Is passenger resist more than 2.9 ohms? 3 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Make sure the passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector located behind the glove box assembly is seated properly. Is the yellow 2pin connector connected properly? 4 1. Disconnect and inspect the passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector located behind the glove box assembly. 2. If OK, reconnect the passenger air bag assembly 2pin connector. 3. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 15 current? 5 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS coil and passenger air bag 2pin connectors located at the base of the steering column and behind the glove box assembly. 3. Connect J41433 SRS driver / passenger load tool and appropriate adapters to SRS coil and passenger air bag assembly harness connectors. 4. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 15 current? 6 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. There has been an increase in the total circuit resistance of the passenger inflator deployment loop. 3. Use the high resolution ohmmeter mode of the DVM while checking CKTs IB07YEL/GRN and IB08YEL/RED, and SDM connector terminal 15 and 16 to locate the root cause. Was a fault found? 7 1. Reconnect all components ensure all component are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Was this step finished? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Go to Chart A Seat passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector properly. Go to Step 7 Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 7
Ignition switch OFF. Replace the passenger air bag assembly. Go to Step 7
Replace SRS harness. Go to Step 7 Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Chart A
Go to Step 7
DTC 16 Passenger Deployment Loop Resistance Low
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will perform tests to diagnose critical malfunctions within itself. Upon passing these tests ignition 1, and deployment loop voltages are measured to ensure they are within their respective normal voltage ranges. The SDM then proceeds with the Resistance Measurement Test. Passenger Bag Low terminal 16 is grounded through a resistor and the passenger current source connected to Passenger Bag High terminal 15 allows a known amount of current to flow. By monitoring the voltage difference between Passenger Bag High and Passenger Bag Low, the SDM calculates the combined resistance of the passenger air bag assembly, harness wiring Circuits(CKTs) IB07YELLOW/GREEN and IB08YELLOW/RED connector terminal contact.
DTC Will Set When:

The combined resistance of the passenger air bag assembly, harness wiring CKTs IB07YELLOW/GREEN and IB08YELLOW/RED, and connector terminal contact is above a specified value. This test is run once each ignition cycle during the Resistance Measurement Test when: 1. No higher priority faults are detected during TurnON, 2. Ignition 1 voltage is in the specified value.
Action Taken:

9J125

Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test determines whether the malfunction is in the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM). 3. This test verifies connection of the yellow 2pin connector. 4. This test cheeks for proper operation of the shorting clip in the yellow 2pin connector. 5. The test checks for a malfunction passenger air bag assembly. 6. This test determines whether the malfunctioning is due to shorting in the wiring.
Diagnostic Aids:
An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short between Circuits(CKTs) IB07YELLOW/GREEN and IB08YELLOW/RED, or a malfunctioning shorting clip on the passenger air bag assembly which would require replacement of the air bag assembly. The test for this diagnostic trouble code is only run while AIR BAG warning lamp is performing the bulb check, unless Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 17 or DTC 26 is detected. When a scan tool Clear Codes command is issued and the malfunction is still present, the DTC will not reappear until the next ignition cycle.
DTC 16 Passenger Deployment Loop Resistance Low

Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. When measurements are requested in this chart use J39200 DVM with correct terminal adapter from J35616A. 2. Using scan tool data list function, read and record the passenger deployment loop resistance. Is passenger resist. less than 1.4 ohms? 3 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Make sure the passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector located behind the glove box assembly is seated properly. Is the yellow 2pin connector connected properly? 4 1. Disconnect and inspect the passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector located behind the glove box assembly. 2. If OK, reconnect the passenger air bag assembly 2pin connector. 3. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 16 current? 5 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS coil and passenger air bag 2pin connectors located at the base of the steering column and behind the glove box assembly. 3. Connect J41433 SRS driver / passenger load tool and appropriate adapters to SRS coil and passenger air bag assembly harness connectors. 4. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 16 current? 6 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. There has been a decrease in the total circuit resistance of the passenger inflator deployment loop. 3. Use the high resolution ohmmeter mode of the DVM while checking CKTs IB07YEL/GRN and IB08YEL/RED, and SDM connector terminal 15 and 16 to locate the root cause. Was a fault found? 7 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all component are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Was this step finished? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Go to Chart A Seat passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector properly. Go to Step 7 Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Ignition switch OFF.Go to Step 7
Go to Chart A
Go to Step 7
9J127
DTC 17 Passenger Deployment Loop Open
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will perform tests to diagnose critical malfunctions within itself. Upon passing these tests, ignition 1, and deployment loop voltages are measured to ensure they are within their respective normal voltage ranges. During Continuous Monitoring diagnostics, a fixed amount of current is flowing in the deployment loop. This produces proportional voltage drops in the loop. By monitoring the voltage difference between Passenger Bag High and Passenger Bag Low, the SDM calculates the combined resistance of the passenger air bag assembly, harness wiring Circuits(CKTs) IB07YELLOW/GREEN and IB08 YELLOW/RED, and connector terminal contact.
above or equal to a specified value for 500 milliseconds during Continuous Monitoring.
Action Taken:

The voltage difference between Passenger Bag High terminal 15 and Passenger Bag Low terminal 16 is below a specified value for 500 milliseconds during Continuous Monitoring.

Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test determines whether the malfunction is in the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM).
DTC Will Set When:

The voltage difference between Passenger Bag High terminal 15 and Passenger Bag Low terminal 16 is

3. This test verifies proper connection of the yellow 2pin connector. 4. This test cheeks for proper contact and/or corrosion of the shorting clip in the yellow 2pin connector terminals. 5. The test checks for a malfunctioning passenger air bag assembly. 6. This test determines whether there is an open in the wiring.
Diagnostic Aids:
An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a poor connection at the passenger air bag assembly harness connector terminals 1 and 2, SDM terminals 15 and 16, or an open in Circuits IB07YELLOW/GREEN and IB08YELLOW/RED.
DTC 17 Passenger Deployment Loop Open

Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. When measurements are requested in this chart use J39200 DVM with correct terminal adapter from J35616A. 2. Using scan tool data list function, read and record the passenger differential voltage. Is passenger differential voltage. more than 4.25 volts? 3 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Make sure the passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector located behind the glove box assembly is seated properly. Is the yellow 2pin connector connected properly? 4 1. Disconnect and inspect the passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector located behind the glove box assembly. 2. If OK, reconnected the passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector. 3. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 17 current? 5 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS coil and passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connectors located at the base of the steering column and behind the glove box assembly. 3. Connect J41433 SRS driver / passenger load tool and appropriate adapters to SRS coil and passenger air bag assembly harness connectors. 4. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 17 current? 6 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. There has been an open circuit in the passenger inflator deployment loop. 3. Use the high resolution ohmmeter mode of the DVM while checking CKTs IB07YEL/GRN and IB08YEL/RED, and SDM connector terminal 15 and 16 to locate the root cause. Was a fault found? 7 1. Reconnect all components ensure all component are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Was this step finished? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Go to Chart A Seat passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector properly. Go to Step 7 Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Chart A
Go to Step 7
9J129
DTC 18 Passenger Deployment Loop Short To Ground
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will perform tests to diagnose critical malfunctions within itself. Upon passing these tests, ignition 1, and deployment loop voltages are measured to ensure they are within their respective normal voltage ranges. The SDM monitors the voltages at Driver Bag Low terminal 4 and Passenger Bag Low terminal 16 to detect short to ground in the air bag assembly circuits.
Action Taken:

This malfunction is no longer occurring and the ignition switch is turned OFF.

Number(s) below refer to circled number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test determines whether the SDM is malfunctioning. 3. This test isolates the malfunction to one side of the passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector behind glove box compartment. 4. This test determines whether the malfunction is in Circuit(CKT) IB07YELLOW/GREEN.
DTC Will Set When:

Neither of the two air bag assemblies is open. Ignition 1 is within the normal operating voltage range. Once these conditions are met and the voltage at Passenger Bag Low is below a specified value, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 18 will set. This test is run once each ignition cycle and Continuous Monitoring.

5. This test determines whether the malfunction is in CKT IB08YELLOW/RED. Inspect CKTs IB07YELLOW/GREEN and IB08YELLOW/RED carefully for cutting or chafing. If the wiring pigtail of the passenger air bag assembly is damaged, the component must be replaced.
Diagnostic Aids:
An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short to ground in the passenger air bag assembly circuit.
DTC 18 Passenger Deployment Loop Short To Ground

Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. When measurements are requested in this chart use J39200 DVM with correct terminal adapter from J35616A. 2. Ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect scan tool data link connector. Follow directions as given in the scan tool operators manual. 4. Ignition switch ON. 5. Read passenger sense low. Is passenger sense low less than 1.5 volts? 3 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector behind the glove box assembly.. 3. Leave driver air bag assembly connected. Connect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 and appropriate adapter to passenger air bag assembly harness connector. 4. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 18 current? 4 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS driver / passenger load tool. 3. Measure resistance on SDM harness connector from terminal 15 to terminal 6 (ground). Does DVM display 0L (infinite)? 5 Measure resistance on SDM harness connector from terminal 6 16 to terminal (ground). Does DVM display 0L (infinite)? 6 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all component are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Was this step finished? Go to Chart A Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check. Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Go to Chart A Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Ignition switch OFF. Replace passenger air bag assembly. Go to Step 6
Replace SRS harness. Go to Step 6 Replace SRS harness. Go to Step 6
Go to Step 6
9J131
DTC 19 Passenger Deployment Loop Short To Voltage
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will perform tests to diagnose critical malfunctions within itself. Upon passing these tests, ignition 1, and deployment loop voltages are measured to ensure they are within their respective normal voltage ranges. The SDM monitors the voltages at Driver Bag Low terminal 4 and Passenger Bag Low terminal 16 to detect short to B+ in the air bag assembly circuits.
Action Taken:
SDM turns ON the AIR BAG warning lamp and sets DTC 19 and also DTC 71.

The SDM is replaced.

Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test determines whether the malfunction is in the SDM. 3. This test isolates the malfunction to one side of the passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector behind glove box compartment. 4. This test determines whether the malfunction is in Circuit(CKT) IB07YELLOW/GREEN.
DTC Will Set When:

Ignition 1 is within the normal operating voltage range. Once these conditions are met and the voltage at Passenger Bag Low is above a specified value, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 19 will set. This test is run once each ignition cycle and Continuous Monitoring.

5. This test determines whether the malfunction is in CKT IB08YELLOW/RED. carefully for cutting or chafing. If the wiring pigtail of the passenger air bag assembly is damaged, the component must be replaced. A careful inspection of CKT IB07YELLOW/GREEN and IB08YELLOW/RED, including the passenger air bag assembly pigtail is essential to ensure that the replacement Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will not be damaged.
Diagnostic Aids:
An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short to B+ in the passenger air bag assembly circuit. Inspect CKTs IB07YELLOW/GREEN and IB08YELLOW/RED
DTC 19 Passenger Deployment Loop Short To Voltage

CAUTION: When DTC 19 has been set, it is necessary to replace the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM). Setting Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 19 and 25 or 51 or 53 will also cause DTC 71 to set. When a scan tool CLEAR CODES command Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. When measurements are requested in this chart use J39200 DVM with correct terminal adapter from J35616A. 2. Ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect scan tool data link connector. Follow directions as given in the scan tool operators manual. 4. Ignition switch ON. 5. Read passenger sense low. Is passenger sense low more than 3.5 volts? 3 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector behind the glove box assembly. 3. Leave driver air bag assembly connected. 4. Connect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 and appropriate adapter to passenger air bag assembly harness connector. 5. Ignition switch ON. Is passenger sense low more than 3.5 volts? 4 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition switch OFF. Disconnect SDM. Disconnect SRS driver / passenger load tool. Measure resistance on SDM harness connector from terminal 15 to terminal 12 (IGNITION 1). Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Go to Chart A is issued and the malfunction is no longer present, DTC 71 will remain current. Ensure that the short to voltage condition is repaired prior to installing a replacement SDM to avoid damaging the SDM. Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Ignition switch OFF. Replace passenger air bag assembly. Go to Step 6
Does DVM display 0L (infinite)? 5 Measure resistance on SDM harness connector from terminal 16 to terminal 12 (IGNITION 1). Does DVM display 0L (infinite)? 6 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all component are properly mounted. 2. Ignition switch ON. Is passenger sense low less than 3.5 volts? 7 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all component are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Was this step finished?
Go to Chart A Ignition switch OFF.Replace SDM.Go to Step 7 Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Chart A
Go to Step 7
9J133
DTC 21 Driver Deployment Loop Resistance High
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will perform tests to diagnose critical malfunctions within itself. Upon passing these tests, ignition 1, and deployment loop voltages are measured to ensure they are within their respective normal voltage ranges. The SDM then proceeds with the Resistance Measurement Test Driver Bag Low terminal 4 is grounded through a current sink and the driver current source connected to Driver Bag High terminal 3 allows a known amount of current to flow. By monitoring the voltage difference between Driver Bag High and Driver Bag Low, the SDM calculates the combined resistance of the driver air bag assembly, SRS coil assembly, harness wiring Circuits(CKTs) IB05YELLOW and IB06YELLOW/BLACK, and connector terminal contact.
DTC Will Set When:

The combined resistance of the driver air bag assembly, SRS Coil assembly, harness wiring CKTs IB05YELLOW and IB06YELLOW/BLACK, and connector terminal contact is above a specified value. This test run once each ignition cycle during the Resistance Measurement Test when: No higher priority faults are detected during TurnON Ignition 1 voltage is in the specified value.
Action Taken:
SDM turns ON the AIR BAG warning lamp and sets DTC 21.


Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test determines whether the malfunction is in the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM). 3. This test verifies proper connection of the yellow 2pin connector at the base of the steering column. 4. This test checks for proper contact and/or corrosion of the 2pin connector terminals at the base of steering column. 5. This test isolate the malfunction to one side of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) coil assembly yellow 2 pin connector located at the base of the steering column. 6. This test determines whether the malfunction is due to high resistance in the wiring. 7. This test determines whether the malfunction is in the SRS coil assembly or the driver air bag assembly.
Diagnostic Aids:
An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a poor connection at terminals 1 and 2 of the SRS coil 2pin connector at the base of the steering column, terminal 1 and 2 of the driver air bag assembly 2pin connector at the top of the steering column, SDM terminals 3 and 4 or a poor wire to terminal connection in Circuit IB05YELLOW or IB06YELLOW/BLACK. The test for this diagnostic trouble code is only run while the AIR BAG warning lamp is performing the bulb check, unless Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 17 or DTC 26 is detected. When a scan tool Clear Codes command is issued and the malfunction is still present, the DTC will not reappear until the next ignition cycle.
9J135
DTC 21 Driver Deployment Loop Resistance High

Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. When measurements are requested in this chart use J39200 DVM with correct terminal adapter from J35616A. 2. Use scan tool data list function, read and record the driver deployment loop resistance. Is driver deployment loop resistance more than 4.4 ohms? 3 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect driver air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector located at base of steering column is seated properly. Is the 2pin connector connected properly? 4 1. Disconnect and inspect the SRS coil assembly yellow 2pin connector located base of steering column. 2. If OK, reconnect the SRS coil assembly yellow 2pin connector. 3. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 21 current? 5 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS coil and passenger air bag assembly yellow 2pin connectors located at the base of steering column and behind the glove box assembly. 3. Connect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 and appropriate adapter to SRS coil and passenger air bag assembly harness connectors. 4. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 21 current? 6 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. There has been a increase in the total circuit resistance of the driver deployment loop. 3. Use the high resolution ohmmeter mode of the DVM while checking CKTs IB05YEL/IB06YEL/BLK, and SDM connector terminal 3 and 4 to locate the root cause. Was a fault found? 7 1. Ignition switch OFF. Disconnect SRS driver / passenger load tool from SRS coil assembly harness connector. Connect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 on the top of steering column. Reconnect SRS coil assembly harness connector as the base of steering column. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 21 current? 8 Reconnect all components, ensure all component are properly mounted. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Was this step finished? Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check. Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Go to Chart A Seat SRS coil assembly 2pin connector properly.Go to Step 8 Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Chart A
Ignition switch OFF. Replace SRS COIL ASSEMBLY. Refer to in this section. Go to Step 8
Ignition switch OFF. Replace driver air bag assembly. Go to Step 8
Go to Step 8
DTC 22 Driver Deployment Loop Resistance Low
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will perform tests to diagnose critical malfunctions within itself. Upon passing these tests ignition 1, and deployment loop voltages are measured to ensure they are within their respective normal voltage ranges. The SDM then proceeds with the Resistance Measurement Test Driver Bag Low terminal 4 is grounded through a current sink and the driver current source connected to Driver Bag High terminal 3 allows a known amount of current to flow. By monitoring the voltage difference between Driver Bag High and Driver Bag Low the SDM calculates the combined resistance of the driver air bag assembly, Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) coil assembly, harness wiring Circuits(CKTs) IB05YELLOW and IB06YELLOW/BLACK and connector terminal contact.
DTC Will Set When:

The combined resistance of the driver air bag assembly, SRS coil assembly, harness wiring CKTs IB05YELLOW and IB06YELLOW/BLACK and connector terminal contact is above a specified value. This test is run once each ignition cycle during the Resistance Measurement Test when: 1. No higher priority faults are detected during TurnON 2. Ignition 1 voltage is in the specified value.
Action Taken:
SDM turns ON the AIR BAG warning lamp and sets DTC 22.

9J137

Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test determines whether the malfunction is in the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM). 3. This test verifies proper connection of the yellow 2pin connector at the base of the steering column. 4. This test checks for proper operation of the shorting clip in the yellow 2pin connector. 5. This test isolate the malfunction to one side of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) coil assembly yellow 2pin connector located at the base of steering column. 6. This test determines whether the malfunction is due to shorting in the wiring. 7. This test determines whether the malfunction is in the SRS coil assembly or the driver air bag assembly.
Diagnostic Aids:
An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short between Circuits IB05YELLOW or IB06YELLOW/BLACK or a malfunctioning shorting clip on the driver air bag assembly or SRS coil assembly which would require replacement of the component. The test for this diagnostic trouble code is only run while the AIR BAG warning lamp is performing the bulb check, unless Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 17 or DTC 26 is detected. When a scan tool Clear Codes command is issued and the malfunction is still present, the DTC will not reappear until the next ignition cycle.
DTC 22 Driver Deployment Loop Resistance Low

Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. When measurements are requested in this chart use J39200 DVM with correct terminal adapter from J35616A. 2. Use scan tool data list function, read and record the driver deployment loop resistance. Is driver resist. less than 1.9 ohms? 3 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Make sure the SRS coil assembly yellow 2pin connector located at the base of steering column is seated properly. Is the 2pin connector connected properly? 4 1. Disconnect and inspect the SRS coil assembly yellow 2pin connector located base of steering column. 2. If OK, reconnect the driver air bag assembly yellow 2pin connector. 3. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 22 current? 5 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS coil and passenger air bag 2pin connectors located at the base of steering column and behind the glove box assembly. 3. Connect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 and appropriate adapter to SRS coil and passenger air bag assembly harness connectors. 4. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 22 current? 6 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. There has been a decrease in the total circuit resistance of the driver deployment loop. 3. Use the high resolution ohmmeter mode of the DVM while checking CKTs IB05YEL and IB06YEL/BLK, and SDM connector terminal 3 and 4 to locate the root cause. Was a fault found? 7 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS driver / passenger load tool from SRS coil assembly harness connector. 3. Connect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 to the top of the steering column. 4. Reconnect SRS coil assembly harness connector as the base of the steering column. 5. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 22 current? 8 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Was this step finished? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Go to Chart A Seat driver air bag assembly 2pin connector properly. Go to Step 8 Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Chart A
Ignition switch OFF. Replace SRS coil assembly. Refer to in this section. Go to Step 8 Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Step 8
9J139
DTC 24 Driver Deployment Loop Short To Ground
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will perform tests to diagnose critical malfunctions within itself. Upon passing these tests, ignition 1, and deployment loop voltages are measured to ensure they are within their respective normal voltage ranges. The SDM monitors the voltage at Driver Bag Low terminal 4 and Passenger Bag Low terminal 16 to detect short to ground in the air bag assembly circuits.
Action Taken:

The malfunction is no longer occurring and the ignition is turned OFF.

Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test determines whether the SDM is malfunctioning 3. This test isolates the malfunction to one side of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) coil assembly yellow 2pin connector at the base of the steering column. 4. This test determines whether the malfunction is in Circuit(CKT) IB05YELLOW.
DTC Will Set When:

Neither of the two air bag assemblies is open. Ignition 1 is within the normal operating voltage range. This test is run once each ignition cycle and Continuous Monitoring. Once these conditions are met and the voltage at Driver Bag Low is below a specified value, DTC 24 will set.

5. This test determines whether the malfunction is in CKT IB06YELLOW/BLACK. 6. This test determines whether the malfunction is in the SRS coil assembly or the driver air bag assembly.
Diagnostic Aids:
An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short to ground in the driver air bag assembly circuit. Inspect CKTs IB05YELLOW and IB06YELLOW/BLACK carefully for cutting or chafing.
DTC 24 Driver Deployment Loop Short To Ground

Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. When measurements are requested in this chart use J39200 DVM with correct terminal adapter from J35616A. 2. Ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect scan tool data link connector. Follow directions as given in the scan tool operators manual. Ignition switch ON. 4. Read driver sense low. Is driver sense low less than 1.5 volts? 3 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS coil assembly yellow 2pin connector located at base of the steering column. Leave passenger air bag assembly connected. 3. Connect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 and appropriate adapter to SRS coil assembly harness connector. 4. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 24 current? 4 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition switch OFF. Disconnect SDM. Disconnect SRS driver / passenger load tool. Measure resistance on SDM harness connector 3 to terminal 6 (ground). Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 3 Go to Chart A Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Does DVM display 0L (infinite)? 5 Measure resistance on SDM harness connector from terminal 4 to terminal 6 (ground). Does DVM display 0L (infinite)? 6 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 from SRS coil assembly harness connector. 3. Connect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 and appropriate adapter J35616A to driver air bag assembly harness connector. Located on top of the steering column. 4. Reconnect SRS coil assembly harness connector as the base of the steering column. 5. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 24 current? 7 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Was this step finished?
Go to Chart A
Ignition switch OFF. Replace SRS coil assembly. Refer to in this section. Go to Step 7 Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Step 7
9J141
DTC 25 Driver Deployment Loop Short To Voltage
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will perform tests to diagnose critical malfunctions within itself. Upon passing these tests, ignition 1, and deployment loop voltages are measured to ensure they are within their respective normal voltage ranges. The SDM monitors the voltage at Driver Bag Low terminal 4 and Passenger Bag Low terminal 16 to detect shorts to B+ in the air bag assembly circuits.
Action Taken:
SDM turns ON the AIR BAG warning lamp and sets DTC 25 and also DTC 71


Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 2. This test determines whether the SDM is malfunctioning. 3. This test isolates the malfunction to one side of the Supplemental Restraint System coil assembly yellow 2pin connector at the base of steering column. 4. This test determines whether the malfunction is in Circuit(CKT) IB05YELLOW.
DTC Will Set When:

Ignition 1 is in the normal operating voltage range. This test is run once each ignition cycle and Continuous Monitoring. Once these conditions are met and the voltage at Driver Bag Low is above a specified value, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 25 will set.

5. This test determines whether the malfunction is in CKT IB06YELLOW/BLACK. 6. This test determines whether the malfunction is in the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) coil assembly or the driver air bag assembly.
Diagnostic Aids:
An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short to B+ in the driver air bag assembly circuit. Inspect CKTs IB05YELLOW and IB06YELLOW/BLACK carefully for cutting or chafing. If the wiring pigtail of the driver air bag assembly and SRS coil assembly is damaged, the components must be replaced. A careful inspection of CKT IB05YELLOW and IB06YELLOW/BLACK, including the SRS coil assembly and driver air bag assembly is essential to ensure that the replacement Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will not be damaged.
9J143
DTC 25 Driver Deployment Loop Short To Ignition

CAUTION: When Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 25 has been set, it is necessary to replace the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM). Setting DTC 25 will also cause DTC 71 to set. When a scan tool CLEAR CODES command is issued and the malfunction is Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. When measurements are requested in this chart use J39200 DVM with correct terminal adapter from J35616A. 2. Ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect scan tool data link connector. Follow directions given in the scan tool operators manual. 4. Ignition switch ON. 5. Read driver sense low. Is driver sense low more than 3.5 volts? 3 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS coil assembly yellow 2pin connector at the base of the steering column. Leave passenger air bag assembly connected. Connect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 and appropriate adapter to SRS coil assembly harness connector. 3. Ignition switch ON. Is driver sense low more than 3.5 volts? 4 1. 2. 3. 4. Ignition switch OFF. Disconnect SDM. Disconnect SRS drive / passenger load tool. Measure resistance on SDM harness connector from terminal 3 to terminal 12 (Ignition 1). Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 3 Go to Chart A no longer present, DTC 71 will remain current. Ensure that the short to voltage condition is repaired prior to installing a replacement SDM to avoid damaging the SDM. Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Does DVM display 0L (infinite)? 5 Measure resistance on SDM harness connector from terminal 4 to terminal 12 (Ignition 1). Does DVM display 0L (infinite)? 6 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 and appropriate adapter J35616A to driver air bag assembly harness connector located of top of the steering column. 3. Reconnect SRS coil assembly harness connector at the base of the steering column. 4. Ignition switch ON. Is driver sense low more than 3.5 volts? 7 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. 2. Ignition switch ON. Is passenger sense low less than 3.5 volts? 8 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all components are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Was this step finished?
Go to Chart A
Ignition switch OFF. Replace SRS coil assembly. Go to Step 7
Replace SDM. Go to Step 8 Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Chart A
Go to Step 8
DTC 26 Driver Deployment Loop Open
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) will perform tests to diagnose critical malfunctions within itself. Upon passing these tests, ignition 1, and deployment loop voltages are measured to ensure they are within their respective normal voltage ranges. During Continuous Monitoring diagnostics, a fixed amount of current is flowing in the deployment loop. This produces proportional voltage drops in the loop. By monitoring the voltage difference between Driver Bag High and Driver Bag Low, the SDM calculates the combined resistance of the driver air bag assembly, SRS coil assembly, harness wiring Circuits(CKTs) IB05YELLOW and IB06YELLOW/BLACK, and connector terminal contact.
DTC Will Set When:

The voltage difference between Driver Bag High terminal 3 and Driver Bag Low terminal 4 is above or equal to a specified value for 500 milliseconds during Continuous Monitoring.
Action Taken:

The voltage difference between Driver Bag High terminal 3 and Driver Bag Low terminal 4 is below a specified value for 500 milliseconds during Continuous Monitoring.
9J145

Number(s) below refer to circled number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 1. This test determines whether the malfunction is in the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM). 2. This test verifies proper connection of the yellow 2pin connector at the base of the steering column. 3. This test checks for proper contact and/or corrosion of the yellow 2pin connector at the base of the steering column. 4. This test isolates the malfunction to one side of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) coil assembly yellow 2pin connector located at the base of steering column. 5. This test determines whether the open is in the wiring. 6. This test determines whether the malfunction is in the SRS coil assembly or the driver air bag assembly.
Diagnostic Aids:
An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a poor connection at the driver air bag assembly harness 2pin connector terminals 1 and 2 at the top of the steering column, SRS coil assembly harness 2pin connection terminals 1 and 2, SDM terminals 3 and 4, or an open in Circuits(CKTs) IB05YELLOW and IB06YELLOW/BLACK.
DTC 26 Driver Deployment Loop Open

Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. When measurements are requested in this chart use J39200 DVM with correct terminal adapter from J35616A. 2. Use scan tool data list function, read and record the driver differential voltage. Is driver differential voltage more than 4.25 volts? 3 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Make sure the SRS coil assembly yellow 2pin connector located at the base of steering column is seated properly. Is the yellow 2pin connector connected properly? 4 1. Disconnect and inspect the SRS coil assembly yellow 2pin connector located base of steering column. 2. If OK, reconnect the SRS coil assembly yellow 2pin connector. 3. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 26 current? 5 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS coil and passenger air bag assembly, yellow 2pin connectors located at the base of steering column and behind the glove box assembly. 3. Connect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 and appropriate adapter to SRS coil and passenger air bag assembly harness connectors. 4. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 26 current? 6 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. There has been an open circuit in the driver deployment loop. Use the high resolution ohmmeter mode of the DVM while checking CKTs IB05 YEL and IB06 YEL/BLK, and SDM connector terminal 3 AND 4 to locate the root cause. Was a fault found? 7 1. Ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect SRS driver / passenger load tool from SRS coil assembly harness connector. 3. Connect SRS driver / passenger load tool J41433 on steering column. 4. Reconnect SRS coil assembly harness connector as the base of steering column. 5. Ignition switch ON. Is DTC 26 current? 8 1. Reconnect all components, ensure all component are properly mounted. 2. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Was this step finished? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3 Go to Chart A Seat driver air bag assembly 2pin connector. Go to Step 8 Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Chart A
Ignition switch OFF. Replace SRS coil assembly, refer to in this section. Go to Step 8 Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Step 8
9J147
DTC 51 Deployment Event Commanded
D09R100002
The Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) contains a sensing device which converts vehicle velocity changes to an electrical signal. The electrical signal generated is processed by the SDM and then compared to a value stored in memory. When the generated signal exceeds the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the air bag assembly deploying the air bags and causing Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 51 to set.
Action Taken:
SDM turns ON the AIR BAG warning lamp records Crash Data, and sets a diagnostic trouble code.


Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 2. If air bag assembly (s) has not deployed, DTC 51 may have falsely set. 3. If DTC 51 has set with no signs of frontal impact, the diagnostic trouble code has falsely set.
DTC Will Set When:

The SDM detects a frontal crash, up to 30 degrees off the centerline of the vehicle, of sufficient force to warrant deployment of the air bags.
DTC 51 Deployment Event Commanded

WARNING: DURING SERVICE PROCEDURES. BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN HANDLING A SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM). NEVER STRIKE OR JAR THE SDM. NEVER POWER UP THE SRS IF THE SDM IS NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED ON THE VEHICLE. ALL SDM AND MOUNTING BRACKET FASTENERS MUST BE CAREFULLY TORQUED AND THE ARROW MUST BE POINTING TOWARD THE Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 Ignition switch OFF. Have air bag assemblies deployed? Replace components and perform inspections as directed in repairs and inspections required after an accident in this section. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check. Replace components and perform inspections as directed in repairs and inspections required after an accident in this section. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check. FRONT OF THE VEHICLE TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS). THE SDM IF NOT PROPERLY ATTACHED TO THE VEHICLE MAY DEPLOY THE AIRBAG (WHICH MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY) IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL POWER UP TO THE SRS. Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Step 3
Inspect front of vehicle and undercarriage for signs of impact. Were signs of impact found?
Ignition switch OFF. Replace SDM. Reconnect all SRS system components, ensure all components are properly mounted.Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check.
9J149
DTC 53 Deployment Commanded With Deployment Loop Fault Or Energy Reserves Out Of Range
D09R100002
The Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) contains a sensing drive which converts vehicle velocity to an electrical signal. The electrical signal generated is processed by the SDM and then compared to a value stored in memory. When the generated signal exceeds the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the air bag assembly deploying the air bags. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 53 is set accompanying with DTC 51 when a deployment occurs while an air bag assembly circuit fault is present that could possibly result in a no deployment situation in one or both air bag assemblies.
deployment of the air bags and an inflator circuit fault is present.
Action Taken:
SDM turns ON the AIR BAG warning lamp records Crash Data, and sets a diagnostic trouble code.

The SDM is replaced. If DTC 53 is set, one or more DTCs will be set in addition to DTC 53. Malfunction(s) setting DTC(s) (other than DTC 71) must be repaired so that DTC(s) will not be set when a new SDM is installed.

Number(s) below refer to step number(s) on the diagnostic chart: 2. If air bag assembly has not deployed, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 53 may have falsely set.
DTC Will Set When:

The SDM detects a frontal crash, up to 30 degrees off the centerline of the vehicle, of sufficient force to warrant

3. If DTC 53 has set with no signs of frontal impact, the diagnostic trouble code has falsely set.
DTC 53 Deployment Commanded With Deployment Loop Fault Or Energy Reserves Out Of Range
WARNING: DURING SERVICE PROCEDURES. BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN HANDLING A SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM). NEVER STRIKE OR JAR THE SDM. NEVER POWER UP THE SRS IF THE SDM IS NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED ON THE VEHICLE. ALL SDM AND MOUNTING BRACKET FASTENERS MUST BE CAREFULLY TORQUED AND Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 Ignition switch OFF. Have air bag assemblies deployed? Replace components and perform inspections as directed in repairs and inspections required after an accident in this section. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check. Replace components and perform inspections as directed in repairs and inspections required after an accident in this section. Clear diagnostic trouble codes. Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check. THE ARROW MUST BE POINTING TOWARD THE FRONT OF THE VEHICLE TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OF THE SRS. THE SDM IF NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED TO THE VEHICLE MAY DEPLOY THE AIRBAG (WHICH MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY) IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL POWER UP TO THE SRS. Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Go to Step 3
Inspect front of vehicle and undercarriage for signs of impact. Were signs of impact found?
Ignition switch OFF. Replace SDM. Reconnect all SRS system components, ensure all components are properly mounted. Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check.
9J151
DTC 61 Warning Lamp Circuit Failure
D09R100002
When the ignition switch is turned ON, battery voltage is applied to the AIR BAG warning lamp and to the ignition 1 input terminal 12. The Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) responds by flashing the AIR BAG warning lamp seven times. The SDM monitors the lamp driver output by comparing the output state at Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning lamp terminal 7 to the microprocessor commanded state. When ignition 1 is in the specified value, and the output state Does not match the commanded state of the lamp driver for 500 milliseconds, DTC 61 is set.
the commanded state of the lamp driver for 500 milliseconds. This test is run every 100 milliseconds during Continuous Monitoring tests and once per each ignition cycle at the beginning.
Action Taken:
SDM attempts to turn ON the AIR BAG warning lamp and sets a diagnostic trouble code.

Diagnostic Aids:
Refer to Charts B and C to diagnose warning lamp circuit malfunctions.
DTC Will Set When:

Ignition 1 voltage is in the specified value and the output state at the SRS warning lamp terminal does not match
DTC 61 Warning Lamp Circuit Failure

Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 1. Malfunctions within the AIR BAG warning lamp circuitry will set this diagnostic trouble code. 2. These malfunctions are addressed in the SRS Diagnostic System Check via Chart B and Chart C. 3. Failure to properly perform the SRS Diagnostic System Check may result in misdiagnosis. 4. Ignition switch ON. 5. Clear SRS diagnostic trouble codes. Is DTC 61 SET? Yes No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Ignition switch OFF. Go to Chart A
Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check.
9J153
DTC 71 Internal SDM Fault
D09R100002
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 71 is an indication of a potential internal Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) malfunction and will set if any of the following conditions are detected: 1) Deployment or microprocessor energy reserve failure. 2) Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory failure. (EEPROM). 3) Random Only Memory failure. (ROM). 4) Random Access Memory failure. (RAM). 5) Calibration check sum failure. 6) Deployment switch faults. 7) Accelerometer fault. 8) Arming sensor fault. 9) Diagnostic current faults. 10) DTC 19 11) DTC 25 12) DTC 51
13) DTC 53
DTC Will Set When:

Any of the above indicated malfunctions are detected by the SDM. The malfunctions described above are tested mainly during Continuous Monitoring and the remaining at every ignition cycle.
Action Taken:

A scan tool Clear Codes commanded is received by the SDM. Some of the indicated malfunctions will only allow the AIR BAG warning lamp to go out. But when DTC 19, 25, 51, 53 are also set, SDM is Replaced.
DTC 71 Internal SDM Fault

WARNING: DURING SERVICE PROCEDURES. BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN HANDLING A SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM). NEVER STRIKE OR JAR THE SDM. NEVER POWER UP THE SRS IF THE SDM IS NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED ON THE VEHICLE. ALL SDM AND MOUNTING BRACKET FASTENERS MUST BE CAREFULLY TORQUED AND THE ARROW MUST BE POINTING TOWARD THE FRONT OF THE VEHICLE TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OF THE SRS. THE SDM IF NOT PROPERLY INSTALLED ON THE VEHICLE MAY DEPLOY THE AIRBAG (WHICH MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY) IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL POWER UP TO THE SRS. Step 1 Action Was the SRS Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to Step 2 2 Note SRS Diagnostic System Check. Is DTC 19 or 25 or 51 or 53 also set (current or history)? (Refer to notice above). Go to DTC 19 if DTC 19 is set Go to DTC 25 if DTC 25 is set Go to DTC 51 if DTC 51 is set Go to DTC 53 if DTC 53 is set CAUTION: When Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 19 or 25 or 51 or 53 has been set it is necessary to Replace the SDM. Setting DTC 19 and 25 or 51 or 53 will also cause DTC 71 to set. When a scan tool CLEAR CODES command is issued and the malfunction is no longer present, DTC 51 or 53 and DTC 71 will remain current. Ensure that the short to voltage condition DTC 19, 25 is repaired prior to installing a Replacement SDM to avoid damaging the SDM.
Yes
No Go to SRS Diagnostic System Check.
Ignition switch OFF. Replace SDM. Repeat the SRS Diagnostic System Check.
SECTION
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
RODEO
10A1
CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Service Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powertrain Control Module (PCM) . . . . . . . . . 10A1 10A1 10A2 10A2 10A2 10A3 10A3 10A3 10A3 Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control Main Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control Switch (Combination Switch) Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10A3 10A3 10A3 10A4 10A4 10A4 10A4 10A4 10A5
Service Precaution
General Description
The cruise control keeps the vehicle running at a fixed speed until a signal canceling this fixed speed is received. When the main switch AUTO CRUISE is turned on with the vehicle in the running mode, the battery voltage is applied to the PCM. When a signal from the control switch is input to the PCM while the vehicle is in this state, the cruise control system is activated. Also, while the system is operating, the AUTO CRUISE indicator light in the meter assembly lights up.
1 . SET/COAST Switch Function

1. Set Function: When the SET/COAST switch is pressed and released with the main switch on, the speed at which the vehicle is running at that moment is stored in the memory, and the vehicle automatically runs at the speed stored. 2. CoastDown Function: When the SET/COAST switch is kept on while the vehicle is running, the vehicle decelerates during that time. The speed at which vehicle is running when the control switch is turned off is stored in the memory, and the vehicle automatically returns to the stored speed. 3. TapDown Function: When the SET/COAST switch is turned on and off instantaneously while the vehicle is running, the vehicle decelerates a mile for each on/off operation. The vehicle speed at which the vehicle was running when the SET/COAST was turned off last is stored in the memory, and the vehicle automatically returns to this stored speed.
10A2 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
2 . RESUME/ACCEL Switch Function

1. Resume Function: When the RESUME, ACCEL switch is turned on/off after the system is temporarily deactivated by pressing the brake or clutch pedal while the vehicle is running, the vehicle resumes, the speed stored before the system was released. 2. Accelerate Function: When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is kept on after the system is released completely, the vehicle accelerates its speed during that time. The vehicle speed at which the vehicle was running when the switch was turned off is stored in the memory, and the vehicle automatically returns to this speed. 3. TapUp Function: When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is turned on and off instantaneously while the vehicle is running, the vehicle accelerates a mile for each on/off operation. The vehicle speed at which the vehicle was running when the switch was turned off last is stored in the memory, and the vehicle automatically returns to this stored speed.
3 . CANCEL Function
1. Temporary Cancellation: D When the cancel switch is turned on. D When the brake pedal is pressed. D When the clutch pedal is pressed. (M/T) D When the select lever is shifted to any position other than D, 3, 2 or L. (A/T) D When the vehicle speed has decreased about 12.5 mph (20 km/h) or more than the stored speed. D When the vehicle speed gets lower than 20 mph (32 km/h). 2. Complete Cancellation: D When the starter switch or the main switch is turned off. D When the failsafe function is activated.
Brake Switch
Refer to the Brake Pedal Replacement in Brake section.
Adjustment
1. Check that the brake pedal (3) is fully returned by pedal return spring. 2. Disconnect the switch connector. 3. Loosen the lock nut (2). 4. Rotate the brake switch (1) by hand until push rod disappears from brake switch tip (4). 5. Return the brake switch by a half turn. 6. Tighten the lock nut. 7. Connect the switch connector.
310RS028
10A3
Clutch Switch
Refer to the Clutch Control removal and installation steps in Clutch section.
Adjustment
1. Turn the clutch switch (1) until the switch plunger is fully retracted against the clutch pedal arm. 2. Adjust clutch switch by backing it out half a turn and measure the clearance (4) between the clutch pedal arm (3) and the clutch switch. 3. Lock the lock nut(2). 4. Connect clutch switch connector. Clutch Switch (bolt) and Clutch Pedal Clearance 0.5 1.5 mm (0.020 0.059 in)
203RS0161

Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in Engine section.
Mode Switch
Refer to the Mode Switch removal and installation steps in Automatic Transmission section.
10A4 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Cruise Control Main Switch

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the meter cluster assembly (1). D Refer to the Instrument Panel Assembly in Body Structure section. 3. Remove the cruise control main switch (2). D Disconnect the switch connector. D To remove the switch, push the lock from the back side of the instrument panel cluster assembly.
Installation
825R100019
Cruise Control Switch (Combination Switch)

Refer to the Lighting Switch (Combination Switch) removal and installation steps in Lighting System section.
10A5
Diagnosis
Cruise control system is controlled by the PCM as well as 6VE1 engine and automatic transmission. DTC codes are stored in the PCM if troubles occur in the circuit. DTC codes categorized type D are shown only by the Tech 2 scan tool. The following chart only shows some typical DTCs for cruise control system. Refer to PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes in Driveability and Emissions for entire DTC diagnosis. DTC P0565 TROUBLE PART CRUISE MAIN CIRCUIT DTC TYPE D MAJOR CONDITION OF TROUBLE D THE SWITCH CONTACT REMAINS ON FOR 15 SECONDS OR MORE. D NOISES ARE GENERATED BY THE POOR SWITCH CONTACT 60 TIMES WITHIN 1 SECOND. D THE SWITCH CONTACT REMAINS ON FOR 40 SECONDS OR MORE. D NOISES ARE GENERATED BY THE POOR SWITCH CONTACT 100 TIMES WITHIN 1.6 SECONDS. D THE SWITCH CONTACT REMAINS ON FOR 50 SECONDS OR MORE. D NOISES ARE GENERATED BY THE POOR SWITCH CONTACT 100 TIMES WITHIN 1.6 SECONDS. D THE SWITCH CONTACT REMAINS ON FOR 120 SECONDS OR MORE. D NOISES ARE GENERATED BY THE POOR SWITCH CONTACT 100 TIMES WITHIN 1.6 SECONDS. DIAGNOSIS PERIOD DIAGNOSIS IS ENABLED IN 130 SECONDS AFTER THE SWITCH OPERATED.
P0566
CRUISE CANCEL CIRCUIT
DIAGNOSIS IS ENABLED IN 120 SECONDS AFTER THE SWITCH OPERATED.
P0567
CRUISE RESUME CIRCUIT
P0568
CRUISE SET CIRCUIT
DTC: Diagnostic Trouble Code NOTE: The DTCs are detected while the engine is running

Rodeo (2003) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rodeo (2003) PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rodeo (2003) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HOME

WORKSHOP MANUAL RODEO (UE)

This manual applies to 2002 models.

General Repair Instruction

Ambient/Clean air flow Up Side Cool air flow

Gas other than ambient air Hot air flow

Lubrication point oil or fluid

Lubrication point grease

Lubrication point jelly

GENERAL INFORMATION Engine Serial Number

Transmission Serial Number

Theft Prevention Standard

Anti Theft Stamping/Plate/Label

Anti Theft Stamping/Label/Plate Location

Automatic Transmission (THM)

GENERAL INFORMATION Body Label Instructions

Lifting Points and Supportable Point Locations

Standard Bolts Torque Specifications

Bolt Diameter Pitch (mm)

Service Parts Identification Plate

Maintenance Schedule List

Severe Driving Conditions

MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION

Mileage Only Items

MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION Mileage/Months

MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION

MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION

Explanation of Complete Maintenance Schedule

Valve Clearance Adjustment (V6, 3.2L ENG)

Front and Rear Axle Lubricant Replacement

Manual Transmission Lubricant Replacement

Spark Plug Wire Inspection

Front Wheel Bearings Lubricant Replacement

Transfer Case Lubricant Replacement

Radiator Core and Condenser Cleaning

Fluid Level Check

Air Cleaner Element Replacement

Spark Plug Replacement

Cooling System Service

Timing Belt Replacement

Drive Belt Inspection

Fluid Leak Check

Wheel Alignment, Operation

Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement

Steering System Operation

Engine Cooling System Inspection

Brake Systems Operation

Exhaust System Inspection

Parking Brake and Transmission Park Mechanism Operation

MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION

heat history. When it is close to 0%, ATF replacement is recommended.

Auto Cruise Control Inspection

Brake Pedal Free Play Inspection

Starter Safety Switch Operation (Automatic Transmission)

Clutch Lines and Hoses Inspection

Starter Safety Switch Operation (Manual Transmission)

Clutch Control Lubrication

Accelerator Linkage Lubrication

Steering and Suspension Inspection